JP7738973B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pinball gaming machines (commonly referred to as "pachinko machines") and slot machine gaming machines (commonly referred to as "pachislot machines").

Gaming machines capable of executing effects are known (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-137471

However, there is still room for further improvement in the production.

In light of this situation, the present invention aims to provide a gaming machine that can execute ingenious effects.

The gaming machine according to [Means 1] is
a determining means for determining whether a player will generate an advantageous winning state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
a performance control means for controlling the performance;
A performance display means capable of displaying the performance,
As the effect, a plurality of reach effects using a plurality of effect displays can be executed,
As dynamic modes of the plurality of effect displays in the reach effect, there are a plurality of dynamic modes including a first dynamic mode and a second dynamic mode,
The plurality of effect displays in the first reach effect in which the plurality of effect displays are dynamically displayed in the first dynamic mode are dynamically displayed in the same dynamic mode,
In the second reach effect in which the dynamic display of the plurality of effect displays is performed in the second dynamic mode, the plurality of effect displays are dynamically displayed in the same dynamic mode,
The plurality of effect displays that are dynamically displayed in the first dynamic manner in the first reach effect have a larger movement range than the plurality of effect displays that are dynamically displayed in the second dynamic manner in the second reach effect,
The first reach performance has a higher probability of generating the winning state than the second reach performance,
The first reach effect has only one effect pattern, and the second reach effect has a plurality of effect patterns,
The plurality of effect patterns includes a specific effect pattern that suggests that a result that does not cause the winning state has been determined,
The specific presentation pattern is not prepared in the first reach presentation, but the specific presentation pattern is prepared in the second reach presentation, and the specific presentation pattern can be executed even when it is determined that the result will cause the winning state to occur,
In the first reach effect in which the plurality of effect displays are dynamically displayed in the first dynamic manner, a change icon corresponding to the ongoing pattern change is not displayed, and in the second reach effect in which the plurality of effect displays are dynamically displayed in the second dynamic manner, a change icon corresponding to the ongoing pattern change is displayed.
This is a gaming machine characterized by the above.

This invention makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can execute ingenious effects.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a left side view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. This is an oblique view of a pachinko machine seen from the front right. This is an oblique view of a pachinko machine seen from the front left. This is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from behind. This is an oblique view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame open from the main frame and the main frame open from the outer frame. This is an exploded oblique view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, as seen from the front. This is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, viewed from the rear. FIG. 2 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. This is a perspective view of the outer frame from the front. This is a perspective view of the outer frame from behind. This is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front. 1A is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 1A. (a) is an enlarged oblique view showing the state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame has been removed from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an enlarged oblique view showing the state in which the main body side upper hinge member has been attached to the outer upper hinge member. 10A and 10B are explanatory diagrams showing the action of the locking member on the outer frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine. FIG. 10 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 10 is a left side view of the door frame. FIG. This is an oblique view of the door frame from the front right. This is an oblique view of the door frame from the front left. This is a perspective view of the door frame from behind. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 19. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame, broken down into its main components, viewed from the front. This is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. FIG. 1A is a perspective view of a door frame base unit in a door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame base unit, broken down into its main components, viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. (a) is a front view of the production operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the production operation unit. (a) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the back. This is an explanatory diagram showing the performance operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 34(a). This is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 34(b). 34(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 34(b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). This is an exploded oblique view of the performance operation unit, broken down into its main components, viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the performance operation unit, broken down into its main components, viewed from behind. 1A is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the decorative board unit of the performance operation unit, viewed from the front. An explanatory diagram showing the state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit of Figure 37. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the operation button cut out and the area to be hidden by the first button decorative part, button frame, etc. in a view of the performance operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the area to be hidden by the first button decorative part, button frame, etc. in a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the performance operation unit as seen from the front in an oblique view, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the performance operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit from the back. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame left side unit as seen from behind. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL in Figure 47(a). (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is an oblique view of the door frame right side unit from the front, and (c) is an oblique view of the door frame right side unit from the back. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame right side unit as seen from behind. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in Figure 51(a). 51(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51(a), and FIG. 51(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 51(a). (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is an oblique view of the door frame top unit from the front, and (c) is an oblique view of the door frame top unit from the back. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame top unit from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame top unit from the rear. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line PP in Figure 56. FIG. This is an exploded perspective view of the game board, broken down into its main components, viewed from the front. This is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. This is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and back unit. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as seen from the front. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as seen from the rear. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged front view of the function display unit with the game board attached to the pachinko machine. This is an exploded oblique view of a game panel of a different configuration from that shown in Figure 63, seen from the front, along with its front components, board holder, and main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 seen from behind. This is a block diagram of the main control board, dispensing control board, and peripheral control board. This is a block diagram showing the continuation of Figure 69. This is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input and output to the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board, which relays the electrical connection between the payout control board that constitutes the main board and the CR unit and degree display board. This is a block diagram showing the continuation of Figure 69. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU; This is a block diagram of the liquid crystal and sound control unit and the surroundings of the VDP with built-in sound source. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine. This is a block diagram showing the continuation of Figure 75. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing a power outage monitoring circuit. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing an interface circuit for communication between a main control board and a peripheral control board. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing the circuitry of a dispensing control unit. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing a dispensing control input circuit. This is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of Figure 81. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing a dispensing motor drive circuit. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input/output circuit. 10 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to and from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the arrangement of output terminals on an external terminal board. 10 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit that draws in the display area of the door frame side liquid crystal display device. FIG. This is a table showing examples of various commands sent from the main control board to the dispensing control board. 10 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from a main control board to a peripheral control board. This is a table showing the continuation of various commands sent from the main control board in Figure 89 to the peripheral control board. This is a table showing examples of various commands received by the main control board from the dispensing control board. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a process when the main control side power is turned on. This is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control side power-on processing in Figure 92. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit power-on process; 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a LOCKN signal history creation process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a connection malfunction determination process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a connection recovery process. 10 is a timing chart illustrating the timing at which a connection confirmation signal is output to the INIT terminal of the upper tray side liquid crystal transmitter IC. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric device control processing (step S114). A flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S5232). A flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S5234). A flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern process processing (step S5238). This is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern normal processing (step S5280). This is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S5305). (A) is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table, and (B) and (C) are diagrams showing a pattern determination table. This is a flowchart showing the steps for the first special pattern stop pattern setting process (step S5281). A flowchart showing the steps of the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282). A flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern change processing (step S5283). A flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern stop processing (step S5284). 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for normal symbol and normal electric device control processing (step S116). 5 is a flowchart showing the procedure for gate section passing processing (step S5402). 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for normal processing of normal symbols (step S5403). 1A and 1B are front views, FIG. 1C is a plan view, and FIG. 1D and FIG. 1E are right side views of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 10 is a time chart showing the operation mode, display state, and light emission performance state in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing the operation mode, display state, and light emission performance state in this embodiment. This is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in this embodiment, and the changes in the movement state of the frame movable body and the light-emitting performance state over time. This is a diagram showing the display mode of the game board side performance display device in this embodiment, and the changes in the movement state of the frame movable body and the light-emitting performance state over time. 3A and 3B are diagrams showing display modes of a display area in the present embodiment. 5 is a time chart showing a display mode of a display area in the present embodiment. 3A and 3B are diagrams showing display modes of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a diagram showing a blocking nail and a panel board in this embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing obstacle nails, a panel board, and a game ball in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing panel boards and obstacle nails in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing panel boards and obstacle nails in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing panel boards and obstacle nails in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing panel boards and obstacle nails in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing panel boards and obstacle nails in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing panel boards and obstacle nails in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing panel boards and obstacle nails in this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a game board according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a game board according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a housing according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a housing according to the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating examples of display in a display area according to the present embodiment. 10 is a conceptual diagram of the movement of the player's tank displayed in the display area in this embodiment. FIG. 10 is a conceptual diagram of the movement of the player's tank displayed in the display area in this embodiment. FIG. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating the game state in this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a transition diagram of the game state in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a table of effect patterns in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a table of effect patterns in the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a table of effect patterns in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a table of effect patterns in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing images displayed in a display area in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing images displayed in a display area in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing images displayed in a display area in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing moving images displayed in a display area in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing images displayed in a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the display priority of a display image in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing images displayed in a display area in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing images displayed in a display area in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing images displayed in a display area in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a table showing the presentation modes in this embodiment. 10 is a table showing the rendering modes in this embodiment. 10 is a table showing the rendering modes in this embodiment. 10 is a table showing the rendering modes in this embodiment. 10 is a table showing the presentation modes in this embodiment. 10 is a table showing the rendering modes in this embodiment. 10 is a table showing the presentation modes in this embodiment. 10 is a table showing the rendering modes in this embodiment. 10 is a table showing the presentation modes in this embodiment. 10 is a table showing the presentation modes in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a table showing the rendering modes in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 3A to 3C are diagrams showing images and the like displayed in a display area in this embodiment. 3A to 3C are diagrams showing images and the like displayed in a display area in this embodiment. 3A to 3C are diagrams showing images and the like displayed in a display area in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a table showing the presentation modes in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 3A to 3C are diagrams showing images and the like displayed in a display area in this embodiment. 3A to 3C are diagrams showing images and the like displayed in a display area in this embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a flowchart according to the present embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a flowchart according to the present embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a flowchart according to the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a table showing the presentation modes in this embodiment. 10 is a table showing the rendering modes in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 2A to 2C are diagrams illustrating a light guide plate and the like in the present embodiment. 2A to 2C are diagrams illustrating a light guide plate and the like in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a table showing the rendering modes in this embodiment. 3A to 3C are diagrams showing images and the like displayed in a display area in this embodiment. 10 is a table showing the rendering modes in this embodiment. 10 is a table showing the presentation modes in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 3A to 3C are diagrams showing images and the like displayed in a display area in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a table showing the rendering modes in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a table showing the rendering modes in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display example of a display area in the present embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a performance in this embodiment.

[1. Overall structure of a pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the rear. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front, with the door frame, game board, main frame, and outer frame disassembled. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the rear, with the door frame, game board, main frame, and outer frame disassembled.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 that is installed in an island facility (not shown) of an amusement parlor; a door frame 3 that opens and closes the front of the outer frame 2; a main frame 4 that supports the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed and is attached to the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed; and a game board 5 that is detachably attached to the main frame 4 from the front, is visible to the player through the door frame 3, and has a game area 5a into which the player shoots game balls.

As shown in Figures 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 comprises an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are spaced apart vertically and extend horizontally, and a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed with the same front-to-back width. Furthermore, the vertical length of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 is longer than the horizontal length of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

The outer frame 2 also includes a panel member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left and right frame members 30 and 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, an upper hinge member 60 that is attached to the left end of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front, and a lower hinge member 70 that is attached to the upper left end of the panel member 50 when viewed from the front and to the left frame member 30. The upper hinge member 60 and lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 attach the main frame 4 and door frame 3 so that they can be opened and closed.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 with a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and a through hole 111 that penetrates from front to back; a handle unit 300 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front face below the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 and can be operated by the player to shoot game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5; a tray unit 320 that is attached to the lower front face below the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100; and a participation type control unit 300 that is attached to the center of the tray unit 320 and allows the player to control the game status according to the game state that changes as game balls are shot into the game area 5a. the door frame base unit 100。 It is equipped with a door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left side of the tray unit 320 and to the left of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right side of the tray unit 320 and to the right of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, and a door frame top unit 570 attached to the front upper part of the door frame left side unit 530 and door frame right side unit 550 and to the door frame base unit 100, above the through hole 111.

The main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 comprises a frame-shaped main frame base 600, a portion of which can be inserted into the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5; a main frame upper hinge member 620 and a main frame lower hinge member 640 attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side of the main frame base 600 when viewed from the front, which are rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, respectively, and to which the door frame upper hinge member 140 and the door frame lower hinge member 150 of the door frame 3 are rotatably attached; a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side of the main frame base 600 when viewed from the front; and a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the lower front of the main frame base 600. the ball launcher 680, which is attached to the right side of the main frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and which locks the gap between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and between the door frame 3 and the main frame 4; an inverted L-shaped payout unit 800, which is attached to the rear side along the top and left sides of the main frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and which pays out game balls to the player; a base unit 900 attached to the lower rear surface of the main frame base 600; and a back cover 980, which is attached to the rear side of the main frame base 600 in an openable and closable manner, and which covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main frame base 600.

The payout unit 800 of the main frame 4 comprises an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear of the main frame base 600; a ball tank 802 attached to the top of the payout unit base 801, open upward, and extending to the left and right, which stores game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown); a tank rail 803 attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 and extending to the left and right, which guides the game balls in the ball tank 802 to the left as viewed from the front; a ball guide unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 as viewed from the front, which guides the game balls from the tank rail 803 downward in a serpentine manner; and a ball guide unit 820 detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball guide unit 820, which stores the game balls guided by the ball guide unit 820 in a payout control board box 950. the payout device 830, which pays out balls one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 951; an upper full ball path unit 850, which is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guides game balls paid out by the payout device 830 downward, and releases the game balls from either the normal release port 850d or the full release port 850e depending on the storage status of game balls in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320; and a lower full ball path unit 860, which is attached to the bottom end of the payout unit base 801 and has a normal guide path 861 that guides game balls released from the normal release port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward and from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3, and a full guide path 862 that guides game balls released from the full release port 850e forward and from the front end to the full ball receiving port 274 of the door frame 3.

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 comprises a board unit base 910 attached to the rear of the main body frame base 600; a speaker unit 920 attached to the rear of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 when viewed from the front, and having a lower bass speaker 921 inside; a power supply board box 930 attached to the rear of the board unit base 910 on the right side when viewed from the front, and housing a power supply board inside; an interface control board box 940 attached to the rear of the speaker unit 920 and housing an interface control board inside; and a payout control board box 950 attached across the power supply board box 930 and interface control board box 940, and housing a payout control board 951 that controls the payout of game balls inside.

As shown in Figures 9 and 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 comprises a front component 1000 having outer rails 1001 and inner rails 1002 that define the outer periphery of the play area 5a into which game balls are shot and guide game balls launched from the ball launcher 680 to the top of the play area 5a, and a flat game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defines the rear end of the play area 5a.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when game balls are stored in the upper tray 321 and the player rotates the handle 302, the ball launcher 680 launches the game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a force that corresponds to the rotation angle of the handle 302. When the game balls that have been launched into the game area 5a are received by a winning slot, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 by the payout device 830 according to the winning slot into which the game balls were received. This payout of game balls can increase the player's interest, allowing the game balls in the upper tray 321 to be shot into the game area 5a, allowing the player to enjoy the game.

[2. Overall structure of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 11 to 16. Figure 11 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and Figure 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Also, Figure 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and Figure 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. Figure 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front. Figure 16(a) is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame upper hinge member in the outer frame as seen from below with the left frame member omitted, and Figure 16(b) is an exploded perspective view of Figure 16(a). The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in an amusement parlor or the like on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 comprises an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are spaced apart vertically and extend laterally, and a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect the ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed with the same front-to-back width. Furthermore, the vertical length of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 is longer than the left-to-right length of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Furthermore, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 are flush with the outward-facing side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40.

The outer frame 2 also includes an outer frame upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front, a locking member 66 attached to the underside of the outer frame upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end of the front panel member 50 and to the left frame member 30 when viewed from the front. The outer frame upper hinge member 60 and outer frame lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 allow the main frame 4 and door frame 3 to be attached so that they can be opened and closed.

The outer frame 2 also includes a header member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left and right frame members 30 and 40 and is attached to the front of the lower frame member 20; a header reinforcement member 80 that is attached to the rear of the header member 50 and has both ends attached to the left and right frame members 30 and 40, respectively; a flat left sliding member 81 that is attached to the top surface of the header member 50 in a position to the left of the center; and a flat right sliding member 82 that is attached to the top surface of the header member 50 near the right end. The header reinforcement member 80 is made of a solid material (e.g., wood, plywood, etc.) and is attached to the lower frame member 20, left frame member 30, and right frame member 40.

Furthermore, the outer frame 2 is equipped with connecting members 85 that respectively connect the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40. The outer frame 2 is also equipped with an upper hook member 90 and a lower hook member 91 that are attached to the inside (left side) of the right frame member 40 and engage with the outer frame hook 703 of the locking unit 700, which will be described later.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed from a solid material (e.g., wood, plywood, etc.) of a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 has engagement notches 11 at the center of the front-rear direction on both the left and right ends, penetrating vertically and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. Upper horizontal fixing portions 87 of the upper-left connecting member 85A and the upper-right connecting member 85B (described later) of the connecting member 85 are attached within these engagement notches 11. The upper frame member 10 also has mounting steps 12 on the top surface and front surface of the left end (when viewed from the front) that are recessed from the general surface. The upper outer frame hinge member 60 is attached to these mounting steps 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed from a solid material (e.g., wood, plywood, etc.) of a predetermined thickness. The left-right length and top-bottom thickness of this lower frame member 20 are the same as those of the upper frame member 10, and its front-to-back width is greater than that of the upper frame member 10. The lower frame member 20 has engagement notches 21 at both left and right ends, located rearward of the center in the front-to-back direction, that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-to-right direction. The lower lateral fixing portions 88 of the left lower connecting member 85C and the right lower connecting member 85D (described later) of the connecting member 85 are attached within these engagement notches 21.

The lower frame member 20 also has front-end cutouts 22 recessed rearward from the front surface on both the left and right ends. The front-to-rear width of the lower frame member 20, from the rear end of the front-end cutouts 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20, is formed to be the same dimension as the front-to-rear width of the upper frame member 10. When this lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the portion between the left and right front-end cutouts 22 is inserted into the header panel member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left and right frame members 30 and 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a uniform cross-sectional shape and are formed from extruded metal such as aluminum alloy. The left and right frame members 30 and 40 are symmetrical to each other in a plan view. When assembled into the outer frame 2, the left and right frame members 30 and 40 have, on their outer lateral sides in the left-right direction, recesses 31 and 41 recessed inward, extending from a position rearward relative to the center in the front-to-rear direction to near the rear end, and protrusions 32 and 42 bulging from the side opposite the recesses 31 and 41 and forming a hollow interior. The protrusions 32 and 42 enhance the strength and rigidity of the left and right frame members 30 and 40. Furthermore, rear lower lateral fixing portions 88 of the upper-left connecting member 85A and the upper-right connecting member 85B (described later) of the connecting member 85 are inserted into the protrusions 32 and 42 for attachment.

Furthermore, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have multiple grooves formed on their surfaces that extend vertically. These grooves provide fingerholds for workers to easily hold the pachinko machine 1 when installing or transporting it in an island facility at an amusement parlor or the like, and also enhance the aesthetic appeal of the pachinko machine 1's exterior.

[2-4. Back panel components]
The header panel member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with an open rear side. The header panel member 50 includes a rearward extending portion 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end of the top surface when viewed from the front, a left discharge hole 52 cut out in a U-shape from the left end of the rearward extending portion 51 and penetrating vertically so that a gaming ball can pass through, a right discharge hole 53 penetrating vertically to the right of the left discharge hole 52 in the rearward extending portion 51 and penetrating vertically so that a gaming ball can pass through, a standing wall portion 54 extending upward in a flat plate shape from the rear end of the top surface of the header panel member 50 including the rear end of the rearward extending portion 51, and a return portion 55 bulging forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 and sloping rearward as its front surface extends upward.

The horizontal portion 71 (described later) of the outer frame lower hinge member 70 is attached to the front upper surface of the rear extension portion 51 of the header panel member 50 so that the outer frame lower hinge member 70 rests on the front upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. The left discharge hole 52 of the header panel member 50 is formed in a position that coincides with the discharge hole 74 (described later) of the outer frame lower hinge member 70 when assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed in a position that is to the right of the outer frame lower hinge member 70 when assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

The top surface of the header board member 50 to the right of the rear extension 51 is inclined so that the front end is lower. The header board member 50 also has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 to the right of the rear extension 51 on the top surface, and a right mounting portion 57 for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end of the top surface. The bottom surface of the main frame 4 rests on the top surface of the header board member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and right sliding member 82.

As shown in the figure, this header board member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Furthermore, although not shown, the box-shaped interior of the header board member 50 is divided into a grid pattern by multiple ribs, increasing its strength and rigidity. Furthermore, the header board member 50 is formed so that the front half of the header board reinforcing member 80 can be housed within it.

[2-5. Upper hinge member on outer frame side]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 comprises a horizontally extending, flat, rectangular upper fixing portion 61, a flat forward extension portion 62 extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61, a bearing groove 63 extending forward from the right end of the forward extension portion 62 to the center of the left and right sides of the forward extension portion 62 and penetrating it vertically, a flat lateral fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left edge of the upper fixing portion 61 when viewed from above, and a flat hanging portion 65 extending downward from the edge from the left end of the forward extension portion 62 around the front end to the point where the bearing groove 63 opens and continuing with the lateral fixing portion 64 (see Figure 16 (b) etc.).

When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 has its upper fixing portion 61 placed on the upper surface of the mounting step 12 of the upper frame member 10 and secured with screws (not shown). The forward extension portion 62 extends forward beyond the front end of the upper frame member 10. The lateral fixing portion 64 is inserted from above into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 and secured to the left frame member 30 with screws.

By inserting the upper hinge pin 622 of the upper hinge member 620 of the outer frame into the bearing groove 63, the upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame cooperates with the lower hinge member 70 to support the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed. The upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame is formed by bending a metal plate using press molding.

[2-6. Locking member]
As shown in Figure 16, the locking member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a band-shaped locking body 66a extending front to back with a predetermined width on both sides, an operating portion 66b protruding to the right from the rear end of the locking body 66a, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending left from the rear end of the locking body 66a and then diagonally forward and left, and a mounting hole 66d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the locking body 66a. The locking member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 66 is rotatably attached to the underside of the forward extension portion 62 of the outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 by mounting screws 67.

The rear end of the locking body 66a of this locking member 66 is attached through the mounting hole 66d at a position rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the forward extension 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. Furthermore, when the locking member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the locking body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end extends forward so that it can abut against the portion of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see Figure 18).

The tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the locking body 66a abuts against the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer-frame-side upper hinge member 60. The locking member 66 is biased by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction that causes its front end to rotate leftward around the mounting hole 66d. Therefore, in the normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the locking body 66a of the locking member 66 abuts against the hanging portion 65 (see Figure 18). In this state, a space is formed in the bearing groove 63 forward of the locking body 66a that can accommodate the main-frame upper hinge pin 622 (described later) of the main-frame-side upper hinge member 620.

By operating the operating portion 66b of this locking member 66, the locking body 66a can be rotated against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. By operating the operating portion 66b, the locking body 66a can be rotated in a direction that moves its front end to the left, thereby retracting the locking body 66a from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, thereby fully opening the bearing groove 63. This allows the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 to be inserted into or removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Lower outer frame hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 comprises a flat horizontal portion 71 extending horizontally, a flat rising portion 72 rising upward from a position on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 rearward of the center in the front-to-rear direction, a lower outer frame hinge pin 73 protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a discharge hole 74 that penetrates the horizontal portion 71 from top to bottom and is large enough to allow only one game ball to pass through. This lower outer frame side hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

In plan view, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is trapezoidal, with the left edge as the base. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is cylindrical and has a truncated cone shape with a narrowed upper end above the vertical center. This outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to the left near the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to contact the center of the rising portion 72 in the front-to-rear direction and extend in an inverted U shape from the left edge of the horizontal portion 71 to the right. This discharge hole 74 is formed to be approximately the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the header panel member 50.

When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 rests on the upper surface of the header panel member 50 near its left end and on the rearward extending portion 51. The horizontal portion 71 is fixed to the header panel reinforcement member 80 with screws (not shown) that penetrate the upper surface of the header panel member 50. When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached with screws (not shown) to a location on the inner side of the left frame member 30 that is forward of the protruding portion 32. By inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into the main frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main frame-side lower hinge member 640 of the main frame 4, the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 can cooperate with the outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 to mount the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

Furthermore, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 is aligned with the left discharge hole 52 of the header panel member 50. This allows game balls on the horizontal portion 71 to fall (discharge) to the rear side of the header panel member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. In more detail, when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, game balls that fall between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 roll toward the rear side where the gap is wider, and can be discharged through the discharge hole 74, as the gap between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 gradually narrows as the main frame 4 is closed. In this case, the discharge hole 74 is formed in a position that is approximately flush with the rear end of the main frame 4 when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 while assembled into the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, game balls that fall between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling rearward beyond the main frame 4 by being discharged through the discharge hole 74, making it less likely that game balls will become trapped in the area of the outer frame lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting members 85 of the outer frame 2 include an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, a lower left connecting member 85C that connects the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

The connecting member 85 comprises a horizontally extending, flat, horizontal fixing portion 86, a flat, upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either the left or right side of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a flat, lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side of the horizontal fixing portion 86 as the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. This connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper-left connecting member 85A and the upper-right connecting member 85B, an upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the fore-and-aft direction, and lower horizontal fixing portions 88 extend downward from both the front and rear of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. In other words, the upper-left connecting member 85A and the upper-right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 spaced apart in the fore-and-aft direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper-left connecting member 85A and the upper-right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 while abutting against the underside of the upper frame member 10. Furthermore, the upper horizontal fixing portions 87 of the upper-left connecting member 85A and the upper-right connecting member 85B are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10. Additionally, the front lower horizontal fixing portions 88 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces forward of the protrusions 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Furthermore, the rear lower horizontal fixing portions 88 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively, with screws inserted into the protrusions 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed in from the outer side surfaces.

In the lower-left connecting member 85C and the lower-right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes further rearward than the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends downward from the lower end of the portion of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 that protrudes further rearward than the horizontal fixing portion 86. The lower-left connecting member 85C and the lower-right connecting member 85D also include a bent portion 89 that protrudes from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portion 86 of the lower-left connecting member 85C and the lower-right connecting member 85D is fixed in abutment against the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. The upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the lower-left connecting member 85C and the lower-right connecting member 85D is fixed to the inner side surface forward of the protrusions 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Furthermore, the lower horizontal fixing portions 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the left and right end faces of the lower frame member 20, respectively.

[2-9. Locking mechanism for outer frame upper hinge member]
Next, the locking mechanism for the main body frame upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 by the locking member 66 of the outer frame upper hinge member 60 in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 17 and 18. Figure 17(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the main body frame upper hinge member of the main body frame 4 detached from the outer frame upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the main body upper hinge member attached to the outer upper hinge member. Figure 18 is an explanatory diagram showing the action of the locking member in the outer frame.

When the locking member 66 on the outer frame 2 is attached to the forward extension 62 of the outer frame upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c abuts the inner surface of the hanging portion 65, and the locking body 66a closes part of the L-shaped bearing groove 63. However, the tip of the locking body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, and a space is formed in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 into which the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame upper hinge member 620 of the main frame 4 can be inserted.

In this embodiment, the support mechanism for the main frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame upper hinge member 60 and lock member 66 is in a normal support state in which the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a is close to the right-side hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a small gap between the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right-side hanging portion 65, so they are not in contact). In this state, the centers of the main frame upper hinge pin 622, which is located in the deepest part of the curved bearing groove 63, and the front end face of the lock body 66a are diagonally offset and face each other.

In this normal support state, the main frame hinge pin 622, which supports the heavy main frame 4, abuts the front end portion of the bearing groove 63, so there is almost no load from the main frame hinge pin 622 to the front end face of the locking body 66a. In other words, there is no load on the elastic portion 66c of the locking member 66. Furthermore, because the front end face of the locking body 66a is arc-shaped, the locking member 66 rotates smoothly when the operating portion 66b is rotated to rotate the locking member 66. In the illustration, the center of the arc on the front end face of the locking body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the locking member 66).

Therefore, when force F acts on the main frame hinge pin 622 in a direction that pulls it out along the slope of the V-shaped bearing groove 63 and abuts against the arcuate front end surface of the locking body 66a, this force F can be divided into a component force F1 (normal to the arc of the front end surface of the locking body 66a) that acts on the contact point between the main frame hinge pin 622 and the arcuate front end surface, and a component force F2 that acts on the contact point between the main frame hinge pin 622 and the inner surface of one side of the bearing groove 63. Because the direction of component force F1 is toward the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the locking member 66), no moment acts that rotates the front end of the locking body 66a of the locking member 66 away from the right-side hanging portion 65, and the main frame hinge pin 622 remains sandwiched between the front end of the locking body 66a of the locking member 66 and the inner surface of one side of the bearing groove 63.

As a result, even in the normal pivotal support state or when the force of the main frame hinge pin 622 is applied to the locking member 66, no load is constantly placed on the elastic portion 66c of the locking member 66, preventing plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic portion 66c, which is integrally formed from synthetic resin, and preventing the main frame hinge pin 622 from falling out of the bearing groove 63 over an extended period of time. Furthermore, even if excessive force is applied and the front end of the locking body 66a of the locking member 66 is rotated in a direction moving to the right, the right side of the front end of the locking body 66a abuts against the hanging portion 65, preventing further rotation, and preventing the locking member 66 from protruding outside the forward extension 62.

Even if the front end surface of the locking body 66a is not arc-shaped, by positioning the center of rotation of the locking member 66 (the axis fixed by the mounting screw 67) in a position where no rotational moment is generated by the action of the component force F1 described above, or where a rotational moment is generated that rotates the front end of the locking member 66 toward the outside of the forward extension 62, no load is constantly applied to the elastic portion 66c of the locking member 66. Furthermore, even when the locking member 66 rotates, the right side of the front end of the locking body 66a simply abuts against the hanging portion 65, so the locking member 66 does not protrude outside the forward extension 62.

When the upper main frame hinge pin 622 of the upper main frame hinge member 620 is supported in the bearing groove 63 of the upper outer frame hinge member 60, the upper main frame hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side. When the upper main frame hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the upper main frame hinge pin 622 abuts against the right side of the locking body 66a of the locking member 66, and the locking member 66 rotates around the mounting screw 67 so that the front end of the locking body 66a moves leftward against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. As a result, the locking body 66a, which had been closing the bearing groove 63, retracts, opening the bearing groove 63 and allowing the upper main frame hinge pin 622 to move to the deepest part (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 and the locking body 66a of the locking member 66 are released from contact, and the locking member 66 rotates so that the front end of the locking body 66a moves to the right due to the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c, returning the locking member 66 to its normal state. As a result, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is housed in the space in front of the front end of the locking body 66a within the bearing groove 63, and the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is held (locked) in a rotatable state in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63.

To remove the main frame upper hinge pin 622 from the bearing groove 63, operate the operating portion 66b of the locking member 66 to rotate the locking member 66 so that the front end of the locking body 66a moves to the left, and retract the locking body 66a from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. This places the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 in communication with the opening, allowing the main frame upper hinge pin 622 to be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Anti-theft mechanism and ball jamming prevention mechanism at the outer frame lower hinge member]
We will explain the security mechanism at the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, and the ball trap prevention mechanism for preventing game balls from getting caught between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4.

When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the outer frame lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end of the top surface of the header panel member 50 as viewed from the front. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame lower hinge member 70 is attached so that it rests near the left edge of the top surface of the header panel member 50 and on the top surface of the rearward extending portion 51. This header panel member 50 has a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the top surface. As a result, even if an attempt is made to insert an illegal tool such as piano wire into the rear of the main frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 70 and the main frame lower hinge member 640, the tip of the illegal tool will abut against the standing wall portion 54 that extends upward from the rear end of the top surface of the header panel member 50, preventing the illegal tool from being inserted any further rearward, and thus preventing illegal acts from being committed through the outer frame lower hinge member 70.

In addition, the upper end of the vertical wall portion 54 is provided with a return portion 55 that extends forward. If an unauthorized tool comes into contact with the vertical wall portion 54 and bends upward, the return portion 55 can bend the tip of the unauthorized tool further forward, preventing the unauthorized tool from entering the rear side of the main frame 4 and reliably preventing unauthorized acts from being committed through the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

However, if the rear end of the top surface of the header panel member 50 is provided with a vertical wall portion 54 extending upward, when a game ball falls onto the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71) while the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is prevented from being ejected rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the vertical wall portion 54, and there is a risk of the game ball becoming trapped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4. In contrast, in this embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rearward extending portion 51 of the header panel member 50 are provided with an ejection hole 74, left ejection hole 52, and right ejection hole 53 through which game balls can pass. Therefore, game balls on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be ejected downward through the ejection holes 74, etc., reducing the risk of game balls becoming trapped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4.

This prevents a game ball from getting caught between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, which could cause damage around the outer frame lower hinge member 70, or the main frame 4 not closing properly, creating a gap between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, which could then be used to commit fraud.

[3. Overall structure of the door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 19 to 30. Figure 19 is a front view of the door frame of the pachinko machine, Figure 20 is a right side view of the door frame, Figure 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and Figure 22 is a rear view of the door frame. Figure 23 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front right, Figure 24 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front left, and Figure 25 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the rear. Figure 26 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in Figure 19, Figure 27 is a cross-sectional view taken along line B-B in Figure 19, and Figure 28 is a cross-sectional view taken along line C-C in Figure 19. Figure 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main components as seen from the front, and Figure 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main components as seen from the rear.

As shown in Figures 29 and 30, the door frame 3 comprises a door frame base unit 100, which has a rectangular, frame-like shape extending vertically when viewed from the front; a handle unit 300 attached to the lower right corner of the front of the door frame base unit 100; a tray unit 320 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100; a performance operation unit 400 attached to the center of the tray unit 320; a door frame left side unit 530 attached to the left front of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit 320; a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the right front of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit 320; and a door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper front of the door frame base unit 100 above the left side unit 530 and the right side unit 550.

The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, as will be described in detail later, comprises a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a rectangular (quadrilateral) outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and a through-hole 111 penetrating from front to back, a frame-shaped reinforcement unit 130 attached to the rear of the door frame base 110, an upper door frame hinge member 140 and a lower door frame hinge member 150 attached to the upper and lower ends of the left end of the reinforcement unit 130 when viewed from the front and rotatably attached to the main frame 4, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closing the through-hole 111, and a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the glass unit 190. the door frame 3 and main frame 4, which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward, and which can be opened and closed; an opening/closing cylinder unit 210 for locking the gap between the main frame 4 and the outer frame 2; a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 for sending game balls to the ball launcher 680; and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 for receiving game balls that have been launched by the ball launcher 680 but have not reached the play area 5a and discharging them into the lower tray 322.

The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, allows the player to rotate the rotatable handle 302, which allows game balls stored in the upper tray 321 to be shot into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a force that corresponds to the rotation angle of the handle 302.

The tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the front of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, below the through-hole 111, with its front surface bulging forward and a performance operation unit 400 attached to its front end in the center in the left-right direction. The tray unit 320 comprises an upper tray 321 for storing game balls to be shot into the game area 5a, a lower tray 322 located below the upper tray 321 and capable of storing game balls supplied from the upper tray 321 and the foul cover unit 270, an upper tray ball removal button 327 for removing game balls stored in the upper tray 321 to the lower tray 322, and a ball lending button 328 for lending game balls to players within the amount of cash inserted into the ball lending machine or the remaining balance on a prepaid card. It is equipped with a return button 329 for returning cash or prepaid cards minus the amount of gaming balls loaned from the ball loan machine, a ball loan return display unit 330 for displaying the remaining amount of cash or prepaid cards inserted into the ball loan machine, a left effect selection button 331 and a right effect selection button 332 which can be operated by the player when an effect is presented, and a lower tray ball removal button 333 for ejecting gaming balls in the lower tray 322 below the tray unit 320.

The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front of the tray unit 320, in the center left-right when viewed from the front. It can be pressed by the player and can display effect images to the player. This effect operation unit 400, details of which will be described later, is equipped with a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame-side effect display device 460 that is positioned within the operation button 410 so that it can be seen from the player's side and can display effect images.

The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3, details of which will be described later, is attached to the upper side of the tray unit 320, on the left side of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, to the left of the through-hole 111, and decorates the left outer side of the through-hole 111 (play area 5a). The door frame left side unit 530 is equipped with a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) that can emit light for decoration.

The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3, details of which will be described later, is attached to the upper right side of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, above the tray unit 320, to the right of the through-hole 111, and decorates the right outer side of the through-hole 111 (play area 5a). This door frame right side unit 550 protrudes further forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and is equipped with a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides, and a right unit decorative lens member 561 at the front end. The door frame right side unit 550 can illuminate and decorate the right unit left decorative member 554, right unit right decorative member 557, and right unit decorative lens member 561.

The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached above the left door frame side unit 530 and the right door frame side unit 550, above the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and decorates the upper part of the door frame 3. The door frame top unit 570, details of which will be described later, is equipped with a pair of upper speakers 573 spaced apart on the left and right, a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward from the center of the front surface, and a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. The door frame top unit 570 can illuminate and decorate the top middle decorative member 576, top left decorative lens member 579, and top right decorative lens member 580.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 31 to 33. Figure 31(a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and Figure 31(b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. Figure 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the front, and Figure 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the rear.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed (hinged) with its left edge closed off against the front of the main frame 4 when viewed from the front. The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 attached to the lower front corner of the front face, a tray unit 320 to which the performance operation unit 400 is attached attached to the lower front face of the through opening 111, a door frame left side unit 530 attached to the left outer front face of the through opening 111, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the right outer front face of the through opening 111, and a door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper outer front face of the through opening 111.

As shown in Figures 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 comprises a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a rectangular shape extending vertically in front view and a through-hole 111 penetrating from front to back; a frame-shaped reinforcement unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110; upper and lower door frame hinge members 140 and 150 attached to the upper and lower ends of the left end of the reinforcement unit 130 as viewed from the front, protruding forward from the door frame base 110 and rotatably attached to the upper and lower main frame hinge members 620 and lower main frame hinge members 640 of the main frame 4; a left-side door frame decorative board 160 attached to the front of the door frame base 110, to the left of the through-hole 111 as viewed from the front, and having multiple LEDs mounted on its front surface; and a glass unit mounting member 170 rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 for detachably mounting a glass unit 190.

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a cylindrical handle mounting member 180 for mounting the handle unit 300, which is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front; a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closing the through hole 111; a security cover 200 that covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190; an opening/closing cylinder unit 210 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward; a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110; and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

Furthermore, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 is equipped with various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, a ball delivery solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a single button operation sensor 312, a ball lending button 328, a return button 329, a ball lending/returning display unit 330, a left effect selection button 331, a right effect selection button 332, a vibration motor 424, a pressure detection sensor 440, a door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461), an upper speaker 573, etc., and a door main body relay board for relaying the connection between the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900 in the main body frame 4.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 has an outer shape that is a square (rectangle) extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 110 has a through-hole 111 that penetrates from front to back and has an inner periphery that is a substantially square extending vertically when viewed from the front. The upper and left and right sides of the through-hole 111 that form the inner periphery are respectively close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, and the lower side that forms the inner periphery is located approximately one-third of the height in the vertical direction from the bottom end of the door frame base 110. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is formed into a frame shape as a whole by the through-hole 111 that penetrates from front to back. The door frame base 110 is integrally molded from synthetic resin.

The door frame base 110 is equipped with a handle mounting surface 112 formed in the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front, and inclined so that the left end protrudes slightly forward more than the right end; a cylinder mounting section 113 recessed from the rear toward the front near the right end when viewed from the front, between the handle mounting surface 112 and the through-hole 111, to which the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is attached; a cylinder insertion hole 114 that penetrates from the front to the rear of the cylinder mounting section 113 and through which the cylinder lock 211 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is inserted; and a ball feed opening 115 that penetrates from the front to the left of the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting surface 112 when viewed from the front, allowing the entrance opening 251a and ball extraction opening 251b of the ball feed unit 250 to be seen forward.

The door frame base 110 also has a lower tray passage opening 116 that penetrates front to back, toward the left of the center of the door frame base 110 and at approximately the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, allowing the ball discharge opening 276 of the foul cover unit 270 to face forward; an upper tray passage opening 117 that penetrates front to back near the left end of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front, adjacent to the lower edge of the through opening 111, allowing the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 to face forward; a glass unit mounting section 118 that is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner periphery of the through opening 111, and into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted; and speaker insertion openings 119 that penetrate front to back at both upper left and right corners of the door frame base 110, allowing the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 to be inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 31 and 33. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcement unit 130 comprises an upper reinforcing metal plate 131 extending left and right and attached along the upper edge of the rear surface of the door frame base 110, a middle reinforcing metal plate 132 extending left and right and attached below the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, a left reinforcing metal plate 133 extending up and down and attached along the left edge of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front, a right reinforcing metal plate 134 extending up and down and attached along the right edge of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front, and a locking engagement portion 135 attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing metal plate 134 and with which the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700 engages.

The reinforcement unit 130 is configured such that the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing metal plate 131 are connected and fixed with screws to the upper ends of the left reinforcing metal plate 133 and the right reinforcing metal plate 134, respectively, and the left end of the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 is connected and fixed to the left reinforcing metal plate 133 with a screw. The right end of the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing metal plate 134 via the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210, which will be described later. Therefore, the reinforcement unit 130 is formed into a frame shape by the upper reinforcing metal plate 131, middle reinforcing metal plate 132, left reinforcing metal plate 133, right reinforcing metal plate 134, etc.

The upper reinforcing metal plate 131, middle reinforcing metal plate 132, left reinforcing metal plate 133, right reinforcing metal plate 134, and locking engagement portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending metal plates. The middle reinforcing metal plate 132 has a notch 132a that penetrates from front to back at a position corresponding to the upper tray passage opening 117 of the door frame base 110.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the reinforcing unit 130 has sections that are bent in the front-to-rear direction in each of the upper reinforcing metal plate 131, middle reinforcing metal plate 132, left reinforcing metal plate 133, and right reinforcing metal plate 134. These sections increase strength and rigidity and also prevent the entry of unauthorized tools such as piano wire or flathead screwdrivers from outside.

[3-1c. Door frame upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33, etc. The door-frame-side upper hinge member 140 comprises: a door-frame-upper hinge axis bracket 141 attached to the door-frame base 110 and having a pair of protruding pieces 141 a spaced apart vertically; a cylindrical door-frame-upper hinge pin 142 that passes through the pair of protruding pieces 141 a of the door-frame-upper hinge axis bracket 141 and has its upper end inserted into the door-frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main-frame-side upper hinge member 620; a disk-shaped flange member 143 attached to the door-frame-upper hinge pin 142 at a position between the pair of protruding pieces 141 a; and a lock spring 144 that is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141 a of the pair of protruding pieces 141 a, through which the door-frame-upper hinge pin 142 is inserted, and that urges the door-frame-upper hinge pin 142 upward.

The door frame upper hinge axis bracket 141 has a flat mounting piece (not shown) that connects the rear ends of a pair of protruding pieces 141a, and is U-shaped in side view with an open front. The mounting piece that connects the pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge axis bracket 141 is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

The portion (upper end) of the upper door frame hinge pin 142 that protrudes above the upper protruding piece 141a is rotatably inserted into the upper door frame hinge hole 623 of the main body frame upper hinge member 620. Furthermore, although not shown, the portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 142 that protrudes below the lower protruding piece 141a is bent horizontally. This bent portion abuts against the underside of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the upper door frame hinge pin 142.

The flange member 143 is an E-ring that is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the upper door frame hinge pin 142. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring that can be inserted through the upper door frame hinge pin 142, with its upper end abutting the flange member 143 and its lower end abutting the lower protrusion 141a. This lock spring 144 is interposed in a compressed state between the flange member 143 and the lower protrusion 141a, and urges the upper door frame hinge pin 142 upward via the flange member 143.

The door frame upper hinge member 140 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is biased upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 abuts against the underside of the lower protruding piece 141a, restricting further upward movement. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes a predetermined amount above the top surface of the upper protruding piece 141a.

When an operator grasps the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the upper door frame hinge pin 142 of the door frame-side upper hinge member 140 and pulls that portion downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 144, the entire door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward, and the upper end of the upper door frame hinge pin 142 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a. Therefore, the upper end of the upper door frame hinge pin 142 of the door frame-side upper hinge member 140 can be inserted from below into the upper door frame hinge hole 623 of the main body frame-side upper hinge member 620, or removed downward. As a result, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame upper hinge member 140 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame upper hinge member 620, the upper left end of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front can be supported so that it can rotate on a hinge relative to the main body frame 4.

In addition, the portion of the upper door frame hinge member 140 that is supported by a pair of protruding pieces 141a of the upper door frame hinge axis bracket 141 on the upper door frame hinge pin 142 is supported coaxially with the lower door frame hinge pin 152 of the lower door frame hinge member 150 (described below). This allows the upper door frame hinge member 140 and the lower door frame hinge member 150 to hinge rotate the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 in a favorable condition.

[3-1d. Door frame bottom hinge member]
The door-frame-side lower hinge member 150 of the door-frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 and 32. The door-frame-side lower hinge member 150 includes a door-frame-side lower hinge axis bracket 151 having a flat extension piece 151a attached to the door-frame base 110 and extending forward, and a cylindrical door-frame-side lower hinge pin 152 (see Figures 21 and 22) protruding downward from near the front end of the extension piece 151a of the door-frame-side lower hinge axis bracket.

The door frame lower hinge axis bracket 151 has a flat mounting piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of a horizontally extending flat extension piece 151a, and its overall shape in a side view is roughly L-shaped. This door frame lower hinge axis bracket 151 has a mounting piece (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

The lower end of the door frame lower hinge pin 152 is formed in a truncated cone shape that narrows downward. This door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main frame 4 (described below). The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

This door frame-side lower hinge member 150 can support the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 so that the door frame can rotate along the hinge when the door frame-side lower hinge pin 152 is inserted into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main frame-side lower hinge member 640.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The left-side door frame decorative board 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 and 32. The left-side door frame decorative board 160 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, on the left side of the through-hole 111 as viewed from the front. The left-side door frame decorative board 160 includes an upper left-side door frame decorative board 161 that extends vertically from a height below the speaker insertion opening 119 on the left side of the door frame base 110 as viewed from the front, to a height near the vertical center of the through-hole 111, and a lower left-side door frame decorative board 162 that extends vertically from a height below the lower left-side door frame upper decorative board 161 to approximately the same height as the lower end of the upper tray passage opening 117.

The upper left-side decorative board 161 and the lower left-side decorative board 162 of the door frame left side decorative board 160 each have multiple LEDs 161a, 162a on their front surfaces that can emit light forward. These LEDs 161a, 162a are full-color LEDs.

When the door frame 3 is assembled, the door frame left side decorative board 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 530 (described below), and by appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs 161a, 162a provided (mounted) on the front surface, the left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be illuminated and decorated.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 31(b) etc. The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 for detachably mounting the glass unit 190. The glass unit mounting member 170 has a disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably attached around an axis extending forward and backward on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a rod-shaped protrusion 172 that protrudes from the base 171 in a direction perpendicular to the axis of rotation.

The glass unit mounting members 170 are rotatably attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 below a pair of speaker insertion holes 119, at positions outside the glass unit mounting portions 118.

By rotating the glass unit mounting member 170 so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, the protrusion 172 is positioned outward from the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from behind, allowing the glass unit 190 to be inserted into or removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110.

When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protrusion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171 while the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the protrusion 172 abuts against the rear side of the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190, restricting the rearward movement of the upper part of the glass unit 190, allowing the glass unit 190 to be mounted to the door frame base 110.

The glass unit mounting member 170 has a protrusion 172 protruding from a disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably attached to the door frame base 110. Therefore, the center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located within the protrusion 172. Therefore, when the glass unit mounting member 170 is free to rotate, the protrusion 172 is stable protruding downward from the base 171. Furthermore, when the glass unit mounting member 170 is in a rotated position where the protrusion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171, the protrusion 172 restricts the rearward movement of the glass unit 190. Therefore, even if vibrations or other factors act on the glass unit mounting member 170, the entire member will not rotate such that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, and the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 will not be released naturally.

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, and the protrusion 172 is moved outward beyond the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190, allowing the upper side of the glass unit 190 to be moved rearward, allowing the glass unit 190 to be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33, etc. The handle mounting member 180 is for mounting the handle unit 300 to the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in Figures 32 and 33, etc., the handle mounting member 180 includes a cylindrical tube portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 182 extending outward from the rear end of the tube portion 181 in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 181, a plurality of (three in this example) protrusions 183 that protrude into the tube portion 181, extend the entire axial length of the tube portion 181, and are arranged at uneven intervals in the circumferential direction of the tube portion 181, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 that connect the outer circumferential surface of the tube portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the tube portion 181.

The handle mounting member 180 is attached to the handle mounting surface 112 with screws, with the rear surface of the flange portion 182 abutting against the front surface of the handle mounting surface 112 on the door frame base 110.

The inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 181 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base 301a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side of the cylindrical portion 181, and the remaining two are provided on the lower side. These three protrusions 183 are formed in positions corresponding to the three grooves 301c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle mounting member 180 can insert the base 301a of the handle base 301 into the cylindrical portion 181 only when the three protrusions 183 are aligned with the three grooves 301c in the handle base 301, thereby restricting the rotational position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) relative to the door frame base 110.

In addition, because the axis of the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 extends perpendicular to the rear surface of the flange portion 182, when it is mounted on the inclined handle mounting seat 112 of the door frame base 110, the axis of the tubular portion 181 is tilted so that it extends forward and to the right, allowing the handle unit 300 to be mounted to the door frame base 110 in a similarly tilted state.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33, etc. The glass unit 190 closes the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be seen from the front. The glass unit 190 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner periphery of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 118, and two transparent glass plates 192 that close the interior of the glass frame 191 and have their outer peripheries attached to the glass frame 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front and rear ends of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are spaced apart from each other in the front and rear directions so that a space is formed between them (see Figure 26, etc.).

The glass frame 191 has a pair of mounting pieces 191a that extend outward in a flat plate shape from positions below the upper left and right corners when viewed from the front, and a strip-shaped locking piece 191b that protrudes downward from the bottom end and extends along the bottom edge. The mounting pieces 191a of the glass frame 191 are capable of abutting against the protrusions 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b is capable of being inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see Figure 26).

This glass unit 190 is attached to the door frame base 110 by inserting the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 from above into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from the rear side of the door frame base 110, abutting the front end of the glass frame 191 against the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, and rotating the glass unit mounting member 170 so that the protrusion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 abuts against the rear surface of the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191.

To remove the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, follow the steps above in reverse. This allows the glass unit 190 to be attached and detached to the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33, etc. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 includes a flat main body 201 having a predetermined outer periphery, a flat rear projection 202 that protrudes rearward slightly along the outer periphery of the main body 201, and a pair of locking projections 203 that are spaced apart on the left and right, protrude forward beyond the main body 201, and are capable of being locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110.

The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed so that its lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110. Furthermore, the upper end of the main body 201 is shaped to fit the lower edge of the playing area 5a of the playing board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is shaped to fit a portion of the inner rail 1002, the out guide portion 1003, a portion of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 of the component 1000 described below, and is formed so as not to protrude into the playing area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.

The rear protrusion 202 is formed around almost the entire outer periphery of the main body 201. Therefore, the security cover 200 is formed by the main body 201 and the rear protrusion 202 into a shallow box shape that is open to the rear, giving it high strength and rigidity. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 33, the rear protrusion 202 also protrudes rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body 201 that is different from the outer periphery of the main body 201. This rear protrusion 202 that protrudes rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed so as to align with a portion of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 when assembled into the pachinko machine 1.

When assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the rear protrusion 202 is not formed in the area of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002. As a result, game balls (game balls launched by the ball launcher 680) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 do not come into contact with the rear protrusion 202 of the security cover 200, and do not hinder the game balls from being shot into the game area 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. This allows the security cover 200 to be easily attached and detached to the door frame base 110.

When the security cover 200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 abuts against the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191), and the rear projection 202, excluding the portion that protrudes rearward from the bottom edge of the main body 201, is inserted into the security recess 1008 of the component 1000, which will be described later. Furthermore, the security cover 200 is in a state where the rear projection 202 that protrudes rearward from the bottom edge of the main body 201 protrudes rearward beyond the front surface of the component 1000, so as to abut against the underside of the component 1000. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is bent in a complex manner by the rear projection 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to insert an illegal tool such as piano wire into the game area 5a between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from below the front of the game board 5, the attempt will be blocked by the rear projection 202 and the security recess 1008, preventing the illegal tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Opening and closing cylinder unit]
The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear to a cylinder attachment part 113 located near the right end of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front, between the through hole 111 and the handle attachment seat surface 112, and is used to open and close the door frame 3 and main frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and main frame 4, in cooperation with a locking unit 700 (described later).

The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 comprises a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 that extends forward and backward and has a keyhole 211a on the front, a rotation transmission member 212 that is attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and transmits the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 211a to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700, and a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 that attaches the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcement unit 130).

The cylinder lock 211 can be rotated by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a. With the corresponding key, the lock can be rotated a specified angle in either a clockwise or counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front.

The rotation transmission member 212 is cylindrical (more specifically, conical, with a diameter that increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and has a pair of notches 212a cut from the rear end toward the front at opposing positions across the central axis. This rotation transmission member 212 is formed so that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main frame 4 can be inserted from the rear; by inserting the protrusions of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 into the pair of notches 212a, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 212 (the key inserted in the keyhole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700, causing the key cylinder 710 to rotate.

The cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate and has a convex shape that protrudes forward in a plan view. Specifically, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 comprises a rectangular, flat front plate 213a that extends vertically in a front view, a pair of side plate portions 213b that extend rearward in a flat plate shape from both left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a, and a pair of mounting plate portions 213c that extend flatly away from each rear edge of the pair of side plate portions 213b. The cylinder lock 211 penetrates the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 from the rear at approximately the center in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. Of the pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting metal sheet 213, the left mounting plate portion 213c in front view is attached to the right end of the middle reinforcing metal sheet 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and the right mounting plate portion 213c in front view is attached to the right reinforcing metal sheet 134 of the reinforcing unit 130. In this way, the cylinder mounting metal sheet 213 connects the middle reinforcing metal sheet 132 and right reinforcing metal sheet 134 of the reinforcing unit 130.

When the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211, which protrudes forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213, is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole 114 from the rear side of the door frame base 110 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110, and the front plate portion 213a and a pair of side plate portions 213b of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 are housed within the box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113, which is open to the rear.

[3-4. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the performance operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 34 to 41. Figure 34(a) is a front view of the performance operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the performance operation unit. Also, Figure 35(a) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit from the rear. Figure 36 is an explanatory diagram of the performance operation unit as viewed from the direction of the central axis of the operation button. Figure 37 is a cross-sectional view taken along line D-D in Figure 34(a), and Figure 38 is a cross-sectional view taken along line E-E in Figure 34(b). Figure 39(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line F-F in Figure 34(b), and (b) is an enlarged view of section A in (a). Figure 40 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into its main components as viewed from the front, and Figure 41 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into its main components as viewed from the rear. The presentation operation unit 400 is attached to the front of the tray unit 320 in the center of the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed by the player and can present presentation images to the player.

The effect operation unit 400 comprises an operation button 410 that has a circular outer shape and is transparent at the center except for the outer edge, and can be pressed by the player; a frame-shaped frame unit 415 that surrounds the outer edge of the operation button 410 and is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the tray unit cover 326; a decorative board unit 420 that is positioned behind the operation button 410 and is capable of illuminating and decorating the outer edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415; a base unit 430 that is attached to the rear of the frame unit 415 and has the operation button 410 and decorative board unit 420 attached to its front; and a door frame-side effect display device 460 that is attached to the base unit 430 so that it can be seen by the player through the operation button 410 and is capable of displaying effect images.

[3-4a. Operation buttons]
The operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 39 to 42. Figure 42(a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled from the front, and Figure 42(b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled from the rear. The operation button 410 has a circular outer shape with a diameter slightly smaller than the vertical height of the tray unit 320, and the center, excluding the outer periphery, is transparent. The operation button 410 includes a transparent button lens 411 having a circular outer periphery and a curved surface (partial spherical shape) that bulges forward toward the center, an annular button frame 412 attached to the front of the outer periphery of the button lens 411, and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and button base 413 are formed from materials that are difficult for light to pass through.

The button lens 411 is formed with a substantially uniform thickness throughout. The front side of the button lens 411 is formed with a smooth, curved surface with no irregularities. The button lens 411 includes a first button decorative portion 411a, which extends a predetermined length toward the center (inside) of the button frame 412 from the back surface while being recessed in a W-shape in cross section from the back surface at a position on the inner periphery of the button frame 412 and is arranged in a row circumferentially; and multiple (six) second button decorative portions 411b, which extend on an axis toward the center from the back surface while being recessed in an arc-shaped cross section from the back surface at a position further outward than the first button decorative portion 411a and are arranged in a row circumferentially within a predetermined angular range.

As shown in the figure, when assembled to the operating button 410, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 toward the center, with the groups on the left and right sides extending further toward the center than the groups on the top and bottom.

The multiple second button decorative portions 411b of the button lens 411 each extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, with three formed on each side. These second button decorative portions 411b are formed to face the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and protrude forward so that their front sides are approximately flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

The button lens 411 has a W-shaped or arc-shaped cross-section formed on the back surface of the first button decorative part 411a and the second button decorative part 411b, which creates a lens effect that refracts light, making it difficult to see clearly from behind.

The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape and has multiple (six) frame openings 412a that penetrate in the front-to-rear direction and extend in an arc shape in the circumferential direction for a predetermined length. The six frame openings 412a are provided, three on each side, and correspond to the six second button decorative parts 411b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 has a plated layer on its surface that gives it a metallic luster.

The button base 413 comprises a generally cylindrical main body 413a extending slightly in the front-to-rear direction; an annular flange 413b protruding outward from the front end of the main body 413a; four guide bosses 413c protruding cylindrically from the rear side of the flange 413b along the outer periphery of the main body 413a and arranged at approximately equal intervals around the circumference; three detection pieces 413d protruding strip-like from the rear side of the flange 413b along the outer periphery of the main body 413a and arranged at approximately equal intervals around the circumference; six base openings 413e that penetrate the flange 413b from front to rear outside the main body 413a and extend a predetermined length around the outer periphery around the circumference; and an inner extension 413f that extends cylindrically forward from the front end of the main body 413a and narrows inward (towards the center) so that its front end fits snugly against the inner surface of the button lens 411.

The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extension 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange 413b. The four guide bosses 413c are respectively arranged at positions corresponding to the four corners, top, bottom, left, and right, in the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. These four guide bosses 413c are each slidably inserted into the retaining holes 431b of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at approximately equal intervals around the circumferential direction of the main body 413a, with two on the upper side and one on the lower side. When the operation button 410 is pressed, these three detection pieces 413d are detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430.

The six base openings 413e, three on each side, correspond to the second button decorative portion 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. At the base opening 413e of the button base 413, the main body 413a and part of the inner extension 413f are recessed inward from the outer periphery. The inner diameter of the inward-tapered front end of the inner extension 413f roughly matches the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

The front surface of this operation button 410 bulges forward in a curved surface (the shape of a portion of an approximately spherical surface) and is transparent, allowing the display screen of the door frame-side performance display device 460 located at the rear to be viewed from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide boss portions 413c slidably inserted into retaining holes 431b of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, and is biased forward by an operation button spring 438 inserted into the retaining hole 431b of the unit base 431. The biasing force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430 causes the front side of the outer periphery to abut against the frame unit 415, restricting further forward movement of the operation button 410. By pressing the operation button 410 against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438, the button moves rearward until its rear end abuts the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. When this detection piece 413d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440, it indicates that the operation button 410 has been operated.

In addition, when the performance operation unit 400 is assembled, the operation button 410 has a first button decorative portion 411a formed around the entire circumference, extending from the inner edge of the button frame 412 of the transparent button lens 411 toward the center, making it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner surface of the button base 413 and the operation button internal decorative member 432 of the base unit 430.

Furthermore, the front opening of the cylindrical button base 413 of the operation button 410 is closed by the button lens 411 and button frame 412. The button frame 412, which is attached to the outer edge of the button lens 411, forms a transparent section that allows visibility to the rear, tapering inward from the outer periphery relative to the outer diameter of the operation button 410. The presence of this button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner surface of the button base 413 and the operation button internal decorative member 432 of the base unit 430.

When the operation button 410 is assembled to the performance operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body 413a) passes through the inner periphery of the decorative board unit 420 and protrudes rearward beyond the front surface of the decorative board unit 420. This prevents light emitted forward from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and second LEDs 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and operation button right outer decorative board 423, respectively, of the decorative board unit 420 from leaking from the outside to the inside of the button base 413, and also prevents light emitted forward from the LEDs mounted on the operation button left inner decorative board 433, operation button right inner decorative board 434, operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and operation button lower inner decorative board 436 of the base unit 430 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Therefore, the LEDs mounted on the first LEDs 422a, 423a and second LEDs 422b, 423b of the decorative board unit 420 and the left operation button interior decorative board 433, right operation button interior decorative board 434, above operation button interior decorative board 435, and below operation button interior decorative board 436 of the base unit 430 can prevent areas other than those intended for illumination decoration from being illuminated, allowing for attractive illumination decoration.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the performance operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 39 to 41. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front to the performance operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery of the operation button 410 from the front side, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The outer shape of the frame unit 415 is formed in a shape that matches the front end side of the performance operation unit attachment portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 comprises a frame-shaped frame body 416 having a circular central opening 416a and attached to the performance operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320; a pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached to the rear of the frame body 416 on both sides of the central opening 416a; and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached to the front of the frame body 416 above the central opening 416a.

The frame body 416 has a circular central opening 416a that penetrates from front to back and has a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the operation button 410; multiple (six) peripheral openings 416b that penetrate from front to back on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a and extend in an arc shape along the periphery of the central opening 416a and are arranged in a circumferential row; and a notch 416c cut out to a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. The central opening 416a is formed to be approximately the same size as the diameter of the outer periphery of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. This allows the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to abut against the rear outer periphery of the frame opening 412a.

The six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a, three on each side, and are closed from the rear by frame side lenses 417. The cutouts 416c also extend through in the front-to-rear direction, and a frame top lens 418 is fitted into them from the front.

The frame body 416 also has a generally cylindrical inner tube portion 416d that extends rearward from a position slightly outside the periphery of the central opening 416a. The inner tube portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and is cut out at a location corresponding to the cutout portion 416c. When the performance operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner tube portion 416d is located between the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively, and separates the first LEDs 422a, 423a from the second LEDs 422b, 423b (see Figure 38).

Furthermore, the frame main body 416 has a pair of mounting portions 416e that extend outward from the upper left and right sides of the outer periphery and are attached to the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. The frame main body 416 (performance operation unit 400) is attached to the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 at the left and right sides of the pair of mounting portions 416e and the cutout portion 416c.

The frame body 416 has a plated layer with a metallic luster formed on almost the entire surface, except for a section the same width as the notch 416c on the side opposite the central opening 416a from the notch 416c (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached).

The frame side lenses 417 close the peripheral openings 416b, three of which are formed on each side of the frame body 416, from the rear. The front side of the frame side lenses 417 is formed as a smooth surface with no irregularities, and the rear side has multiple irregularities formed along the periphery of the central opening 416a (see Figures 39 and 46). These multiple irregularities refract light, making it impossible to see behind the frame side lenses 417.

The frame top lens 418 has a roughly rectangular outer shape so that it fits into the cutout 416c of the frame body 416 from the front. The frame top lens 418 has a smooth front surface. In addition, the rear surface of the frame top lens 418 has multiple rows of irregularities that extend in a zigzag pattern along the periphery of the central opening 416a in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see Figures 37 and 46). Light is refracted by these multiple irregularities, making it impossible to see behind the frame top lens 418.

When the frame unit 415 is assembled into the performance operation unit 400, the pair of frame side lenses 417 are located in front of the second LEDs 422b, 423b on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, and the frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decorative board 437 of the base unit 430, and each can be illuminated and decorated by the second LEDs 422b, 423b, etc., mounted on them.

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative board unit 420 of the performance operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 39 to 43. Figure 43 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the performance operation unit as seen from the front. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can illuminate and decorate the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415, as well as impart vibrations to the performance operation unit 400.

The decorative board unit 420 comprises a C-shaped board base 421 that is open at the top, a left outer decorative board for operation buttons 422 and a right outer decorative board for operation buttons 423 that are attached to the front of both the left and right sides of the board base 421, a vibration motor 424 that is attached to the lower front of the board base 421, and a motor cover 425 that is attached to the front of the board base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

The inner periphery of the substrate base 421 is formed slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer periphery is formed larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 and smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

The operation button left outer decorative board 422 extends in an arc along the front surface of the board base 421. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 is equipped with a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted on the front surface along the inner periphery of the board base 421, and a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted on the front surface along the inner periphery of the board base 421, radially outward from the plurality of first LEDs 422a. The operation button right outer decorative board 423 extends in an arc along the front surface of the board base 421. The operation button right outer decorative board 423 is equipped with a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted on the front surface along the inner periphery of the board base 421, and a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted on the front surface along the inner periphery of the board base 421, radially outward from the plurality of first LEDs 423a. Both the front and rear surfaces of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are white.

The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to the rotation shaft, and vibrations can be generated by rotating this weight 424a.

When the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the performance operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. Furthermore, in the decorative board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a, 423a on the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and the right operation button outer decorative board 423 are located behind the second button decorative part 411b of the operation button 410, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b are located behind the frame side lenses 417 of the frame unit 415. When assembled to the performance operation unit 400, the inner cylindrical part 416d of the frame unit 415 is located between the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b on the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and the right operation button outer decorative board 423 (see Figure 38).

Therefore, the decorative board unit 420 can illuminate and decorate only the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 using light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a on the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and the right operation button outer decorative board 423, and can illuminate and decorate only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 using light from the second LEDs 422b, 423b.

In addition, the decorative board unit 420 can generate vibrations by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424, causing the entire performance operation unit 400 to vibrate.

[3-4d. Effects of the Production Operation Unit]
The effects of the performance operation unit 400 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 44 to 46. Figure 44 is an explanatory diagram showing the state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit in Figure 37. Figure 45(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the portion of the operation button that is intended to be hidden by the first button decorative portion, button frame, etc. of the operation button, with a portion of the operation button cut out in a view of the performance operation unit seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the portion of the operation button that is intended to be hidden by the first button decorative portion, button frame, etc. in a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit. Figure 46(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the performance operation unit in a perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the performance operation unit seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends.

The effect operation unit 400 of this embodiment can show the player effect images according to the game state that changes as the game ball is shot into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and can also allow the player to operate the operation button 410 to participate in the presented effect, allowing the player to enjoy it.

The overall height of the performance operation unit 400 is approximately the same as the height of the lower portion of the through-hole 111 in the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. The overall width of the performance operation unit 400 is also slightly larger than one-third of the overall width of the door frame 3. When viewed from the front, the performance operation unit 400 is positioned below the play area 5a (through-hole 111 in the door frame base 110), centered in the left-right direction.

The performance operation unit 400 is attached to the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 by the upper portion of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. When the performance operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit 320, a gap is formed between the underside of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442, which forms the bottom surface, and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. In other words, only the upper portion of the performance operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit 320, and it is attached in a suspended state.

The effect operation unit 400 is mounted so that the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. As a result, the effect operation unit 400 is inclined so that the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410, which bulges forward in a curved surface shape (the shape of a portion of an approximately spherical surface), moves upward as it moves forward at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical. As a result, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play with the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is positioned in front of the center of the play area 5a on the game board 5, which is located above the spinner unit 320 (effect operation unit 400), and the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the player's head. Therefore, when a player looks down from the play area 5a at the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 will appear as close as possible to its front view (projected view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL), allowing the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 inside the operation button 410 to be clearly visible.

The performance operation unit 400 has four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 slidably inserted into four retaining holes 431b of the base unit 430, and is biased forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal state (when the operation button 410 is not being pressed), the biasing force of the operation button spring 438 causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to abut against a portion near the central opening 416a on the rear surface of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415.

In the normal state of the performance operation unit 400, the center side (toward the central axis CL) of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 from near the inner periphery. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, which bulges forward in a curved surface shape (the shape of a portion of a roughly spherical surface), the portion that protrudes forward from the inner periphery (inside) of the button frame 412 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see Figure 37, etc.).

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is approximately 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (front end) protrudes approximately 4 cm forward from the front surface of the frame unit 415 in the direction of the central axis CL of the operation button 410.

Under normal conditions, when a player presses the operation button 410 on the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the central axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. When the rear end of the operation button 410 abuts against the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 stops. When a player presses the operation button 410, they press the button lens 411, which bulges forward in a curved surface shape (the shape of a portion of an approximately spherical surface).

This operation button 410 has a much larger outer diameter than the effect operation buttons found on conventional pachinko machines, so there is a high possibility that the peripheral area away from the center of the button lens 411 will be pressed. Specifically, effect operation buttons on conventional pachinko machines are attached so that their central axis extends approximately parallel to the vertical, whereas the operation button 410 on the effect operation unit 400 of this embodiment is attached so that its central axis CL is inclined relative to the vertical. Therefore, when a player presses the operation button 410 from above, as with conventional pachinko machines, the player will press a portion of the operation button 410 that is away from the central axis CL, as shown by the hollow arrow in Figure 44.

However, in conventional pachinko machines, the operation buttons used for effects are formed with a flat surface that is pressed by the player. If the operation button were made larger while keeping the area that is pressed flat, pressing an area that is off-center on the operation button would tilt the surface that is pressed so that the pressed area would retract first, preventing the operation button from retracting in a straight line, and there is a risk that the operation button would not be able to be pressed.

In contrast, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of this embodiment has a curved surface (the shape of a portion of a roughly spherical surface) that bulges forward at the part (button lens 411) that the player presses. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410, making it less likely for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 can move straight backward. Therefore, no matter where on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can move back smoothly without tilting, so the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the effect of pressing the operation button 410 can be fully enjoyed.

In addition, the performance operation unit 400 has a vibration motor 424 attached to the lower front part of the board base 421 of the decorative board unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is attached to the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 so that the performance operation unit 400 can be suspended. Therefore, when the vibration motor 424 rotates the weight 424a to generate vibration, the vibration occurs at the part farthest from the mounting part, so the entire performance operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly) and the vibration can be transmitted to a player who is touching the performance operation unit 400. Furthermore, because the vibration motor 424 is located directly below a position that is relatively easy for a player to press (the position of the white arrow in Figure 44), strong vibrations can be transmitted to a player who is pressing the operation button 410, surprising the player and allowing them to enjoy the performance.

Furthermore, the performance operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and a gap is formed between the underside of the leg 442a of the relay board cover 442, which forms the underside, and the upper surface of the bottom plate 326i of the dish unit cover 326. Therefore, when the operation button 410 is pressed or struck strongly downward, the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc., bend downward to absorb the impact until the underside of the leg 442a abuts against the upper surface of the bottom plate 326i. Furthermore, after the underside of the leg 442a abuts against the upper surface of the bottom plate 326i, downward movement of the performance operation unit 400 is restricted, preventing excessive force from being applied to the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc., thereby preventing damage to the performance operation unit 400, etc. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with great force when an effect requiring pressing of the operation button 410 on the effect operation unit 400 is presented to the player, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit 400 will not be damaged, which prevents interruptions to play due to damage and prevents a decline in the player's interest, while also preventing an increase in the burden on the gaming facility by making it less susceptible to damage.

As mentioned above, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that the player presses is formed into a curved surface (the shape of a portion of a roughly spherical surface) that protrudes forward, making it stronger and more rigid than if it were flat. Even if it is hit hard, the impact can be dispersed throughout the entire button lens 411, making it less likely to break.

In addition, as shown in Figure 46, the button lens 411, frame side lens 417, frame top lens 418, and operation button inner decorative member 432 of the performance operation unit 400 are made of transparent materials, so the uneven decorations formed on the backside of these, such as the first button decoration portion 411a, second button decoration portion 411b, first button inner decoration portion 432f, and second button inner decoration portion 432g, can be seen from the front (player's side). Furthermore, in the areas where these uneven decorations are formed, the thickness of the plate varies, causing light to refract in complex ways, making it difficult to see the back side through the areas where the uneven decorations are formed.

The effect operation unit 400 is equipped with a first button decoration 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center, and the uneven decoration of this first button decoration 411a makes it difficult to see behind the outer edge of the part inside the button lens 411. Behind the part where the first button decoration 411a is formed (behind the direction of the central axis CL), there is a gap between the inner periphery of the main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the outer periphery of the peripheral wall 432a of the operation button internal decoration member 432, but the first button decoration 411a located in front of that gap makes it difficult to see the gap on the outer periphery of the operation button internal decoration member 432 from the front side (player side). This prevents the appearance of the operation button 410 from being deteriorated even when the operation button 410 is equipped with an internal decorative element 432 that is fixed in position, preventing players from feeling uncomfortable when looking at the operation button 410. It also allows the internal decorative element 432 to be positioned without any problems inside the transparent operation button 410, improving the appearance of the operation button 410.

More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 is configured so that the first button decoration 411a, second button decoration 411b, and button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 prevent the player from seeing the unit base 431 and decorative board unit 420, which are located outside the outer periphery of the operation button interior decorative member 432 of the base unit 430 and to the rear (back) through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in Figure 45, the cross-hatched area surrounded by a dashed dotted line is hidden from the player. In this way, because the operation button 410 is equipped with the first button decoration 411a, second button decoration 411b, and button frame 412, the outside and back of the operation button interior decorative member 432 can be hidden and made less visible, improving the appearance of the operation button 410 and, ultimately, the entire effect operation unit 400.

In addition, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 on the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in a circumferential direction, while the second button interior decorative portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button interior decorative member 432 located on the inside rear of the operation button 410 extends in a modified octagonal shape centered on the central axis CL and is arranged in a concentric circle. Therefore, as shown in Figure 46, the concave and convex lines of the first button decorative portion 411a and the convex and convex lines of the second button interior decorative portion 432g intersect, allowing the player to see geometric decoration.

In addition, because the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button interior decorative portion 432g of the effect operation unit 400 are separated in the front-to-back direction (the direction in which the central axis CL extends), the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button interior decorative portion 432g can present the player with a geometric pattern that gives a sense of depth and three-dimensionality, allowing the player to enjoy the decoration, including the interior of the operation button 410.

Furthermore, in the performance operation unit 400, the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432g are spaced apart in the front-to-back direction. Therefore, when the player's eye position moves, the overlap between the embossed lines of the first button decorative portion 411a and the embossed lines of the second button inner decorative portion 432g changes, allowing the player to see a dynamic decoration and enjoy it.

In this way, the performance operation unit 400 can present a dynamic, three-dimensional decoration to the player using the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432, thereby strongly attracting the player's attention and making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing.

In addition, the performance operation unit 400 has a left operation button interior decorative board 433, a right operation button interior decorative board 434, an upper operation button interior decorative board 435, and a lower operation button interior decorative board 436 arranged behind the operation button interior decorative member 432 within the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), and by illuminating the multiple LEDs mounted on the front of these, the operation button interior decorative member 432 within the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated. In other words, the left operation button interior decorative board 433, the right operation button interior decorative board 434, the upper operation button interior decorative board 435, and the lower operation button interior decorative board 436 can illuminate and decorate the inside of the operation button 410. The LEDs mounted on the front of the left operation button interior decorative board 433, right operation button interior decorative board 434, upper operation button interior decorative board 435, and lower operation button interior decorative board 436 are positioned inside the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 when viewed in the direction of the central axis CL, as shown in Figure 38. Therefore, light from these LEDs does not leak outside the main body 413a, allowing only the inside of the operation button 410 to be beautifully illuminated and decorated.

In addition, the performance operation unit 400 has a first LED 422a on the left outer decorative board 422 of the operation button and a first LED 423a on the right outer decorative board 423 of the operation button in the decorative board unit 420 arranged behind the second button decorative part 411b that is visible from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and by illuminating these first LEDs 422a, 423a, the six second button decorative parts 411b of the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated. As shown in Figure 38, the first LED 422a on the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a on the right operation button outer decorative board 423 are located between the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the cylindrical inner tube 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415, so that light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a does not leak inside the main body 413a or outside the inner tube 416d, allowing only the second button decorative part 411b of the operation button 410 to be well illuminated and decorated.

Furthermore, the performance operation unit 400 has a second LED 422b on the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and a second LED 423b on the right operation button outer decorative board 423 located behind the frame side lenses 417 visible through the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415. The frame side lenses 417 can be illuminated and decorated by illuminating these second LEDs 422b, 423b. The second LED 422b on the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b on the right operation button outer decorative board 423 are located between the cylindrical inner tube portion 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. Light from the second LEDs 422b, 423b does not leak into the inside of the inner tube portion 416d or outside the frame main body 416, allowing only the frame side lenses 417 of the frame unit 415 to be illuminated and decorated well.

In addition, the performance operation unit 400 has a frame top lens decorative board 437 in the base unit 430 positioned behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and the frame top lens 418 can be illuminated and decorated by illuminating multiple LEDs mounted on the front of the frame top lens decorative board 437. A flat light-shielding wall portion 431c protrudes forward from below the portion of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430 where the frame top lens decorative board 437 is attached, to near the rear bottom end of the frame top lens 418. This prevents light from the LEDs on the frame top lens decorative board 437 from leaking toward the operation button 410 or frame side lens 417, allowing only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 to be illuminated and decorated well.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The left-side door frame unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail, primarily with reference to Figures 47 to 50. Figure 47(a) is a front view of the left-side door frame unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the left-side door frame unit from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the left-side door frame unit from the rear. Figure 48 is an exploded perspective view of the left-side door frame unit from the front, and Figure 49 is an exploded perspective view of the left-side door frame unit from the rear. Figure 50 is a cross-sectional view taken along line L-L in Figure 47(a). The left-side door frame unit 530 is attached to the left side of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, to the left of the through-hole 111, above the tray unit 320, so as to cover the front sides of the upper left-side decorative board 161 and the lower left-side decorative board 162 (left-side decorative board 160). The door frame left side unit 530 is intended to decorate the left side of the through opening 111 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front.

The door frame left side unit 530 consists of a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 531 attached to the front of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, on the left side of the through hole 111 when viewed from the front; a transparent strip-shaped left unit diffusion lens member 532 attached to the front of the left unit base 531; a translucent left unit decorative lens member (not shown) located in front of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and having a polyhedron-shaped decoration at its front end; and a cylindrical frame-shaped lens member attached to the upper front of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member. a left unit upper decorative base 534 extending vertically together with the left unit upper decorative base 531; a left unit lower decorative base 535 attached to the lower front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member and projecting forward in a frame shape that is shorter than the left unit upper decorative base 534; a transparent left unit decorative cover 536 attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 so as to cover the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front sides of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and left unit lower decorative base 535; and a plurality of decorative members 537 attached to the front side of the left unit decorative cover 536.

The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is shaped like a shallow box with an open rear, and has multiple openings 531a penetrating the front from front to back. As shown in the figure, the multiple openings 531a include circular holes and rectangular holes extending vertically. The left unit base 531 is attached to the left side of the front of the door frame base 110 so that the LEDs 161a, 162a mounted on the front of the door frame left side decorative board 160 (door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and door frame left side lower decorative board 162) face forward through the multiple openings 531a. Each opening 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed so that, when assembled to the door frame 3, each LED 161a, 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 is positioned approximately in the vertical center. The left unit base 531 is made of an opaque material.

The left unit base 531 also has a left-side reflective upright wall 538 (see Figures 5 and 23) that stands toward the front from the glass plate 192 that is arranged to cover the through-hole 111. The left-side reflective upright wall 538 has a flat inner surface that faces the through-hole 111 and is provided as a reflective surface that can reflect light. This reflective surface can be provided by forming the inner surface of the left-side reflective upright wall 538 itself from a reflective material such as metal or resin, or by attaching a reflective sticker to the inner surface. As will be described later, the left-side reflective upright wall 538 is formed by the left unit base 531 and serves as part (the left side) of the reflective upright wall 33 described above.

The left unit diffusion lens element 532 is made of a transparent element and is divided into an upper diffusion lens element 532A and a lower diffusion lens element 532B. The left unit diffusion lens element 532 has a circular lens portion 532a that is circular in front view and corresponds to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531, and a rectangular lens portion 532b that is rectangular in front view and corresponds to the rectangular opening 531a. The door frame left side unit 530 is configured so that, when assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a, 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are positioned immediately behind the centers of the circular lens portion 532a and the rectangular lens portion 532b.

The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed like a convex lens with smooth front and rear surfaces. This circular lens portion 532a allows light from the LEDs 161a and 162a located at the rear to be emitted forward as a point. The light emitted forward from this circular lens portion 532a causes the circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member to glow and decorate.

The rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 comprises a central diffuse reflection portion 532c that is conically recessed backward at the center of the front surface, a front diffuse reflection lens portion 532d that is formed outside the central diffuse reflection portion 532c on the front surface, an input lens portion 532e that bulges backward in a curved shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 532c), and a front reflection portion 532f that is outside the input lens portion 532e on the rear surface and is inclined overall to move forward as it moves away from the input lens portion 532e.

The front diffuser lens portion 532d of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by multiple concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided circumferentially by lines extending radially from the central diffuse reflector portion 532c. More specifically, when the front diffuser lens portion 532d is cut along the radial direction, the cross-section has grooves that are recessed in an arc-like shape toward the rear, and the peaks between the grooves that bulge out in an arc-like shape toward the front, forming a smooth wavy front surface. Furthermore, the front diffuser lens portion 532d is formed so that the grooves and peaks alternate circumferentially, separated by the radially extending lines that divide it circumferentially.

The front reflecting portion 532f of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by multiple concentric arc-shaped grooves divided circumferentially by lines extending radially from the input lens portion 532e. These multiple grooves are V-shaped recessed from rear to front, with their deepest portions formed in an arc shape. When cut radially, the cross section of the front reflecting portion 532f is saw-like, with the peaks between the grooves forming triangular shapes that point backward. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the grooves and peaks move forward as they move away from the center. Furthermore, the front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the grooves and peaks alternate circumferentially, separated by radially extending lines. These radially extending lines that divide the front reflecting portion 532f circumferentially coincide with the radially extending dividing lines in the front diffusion lens portion 532d.

When this rectangular lens portion 532b is assembled to the door frame 3, the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a on the door frame left side decorative board 160 are located immediately after the input lens portion 532e.

Light emitted forward from LEDs 161a and 162a enters rectangular lens portion 532b through input lens portion 532e. Because input lens portion 532e bulges backward in a curved (convex) shape, it refracts the light radiating forward from LEDs 161a and 162a so that it travels parallel to the front, directing almost all of the input light to conical central diffuse reflector 532c. The light guided to central diffuse reflector 532c is then diffusely reflected by the inclined conical surface of central diffuse reflector 532c in a direction perpendicular to the axis extending forward (a direction parallel to the front surface of left-side door frame decorative board 160), and travels within rectangular lens portion 532b along its front surface from the center toward the outside. Furthermore, light reflected by the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c travels from the center to the outside (away from the center line of the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c) across the entire thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-to-rear direction.

When light reflected from the center toward the outside within the rectangular lens portion 532b, approximately parallel to the front surface of the door frame left-side decorative board 160, reaches the sawtooth-shaped forward reflecting portion 532f, it is reflected forward by the surface of the forward reflecting portion 532f. Because the rear surface of the forward reflecting portion 532f is inclined so that it moves forward as it moves away from the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c, the thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-to-back direction becomes thinner as it moves away from the center (see Figure 50). This allows light reflected outward by the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c across the entire thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-to-back direction to be sequentially reflected forward by the forward reflecting portion 532f as it moves from the center toward the outside.

The light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f passes through the front diffusing lens portion 532d and is emitted forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b. Because the cross section of the front diffusing lens portion 532d is shaped like a wave, it can diffuse the light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f in various directions, allowing light to be emitted substantially uniformly forward (to the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) from the front surface of the rectangular lens portion 532b.

In the front diffusion lens portion 532d and the front reflection portion 532f of this rectangular lens portion 532b, multiple concentric grooves are divided by multiple radially extending lines, and the multiple concentric arc grooves are radially shifted along the dividing lines, so that the concentric arc grooves are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction. This prevents the light irradiated forward from the front of the rectangular lens portion 532b from becoming a concentric striped pattern of light and shade, and allows light of a more uniform shade to be irradiated forward. This allows the multifaceted decorative portion in front of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the left unit decorative lens member to be illuminated and decorated in a substantially uniform manner.

The left unit decorative lens element (not shown) is formed to fit along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens element includes a circular decorative element formed in front of the circular lens element 532a of the left unit diffusing lens element 532, and a polyhedral decorative element formed in front of the rectangular lens element 532b of the left unit diffusing lens element 532. The circular decorative element has a cylindrical shape with a recessed front surface and a short, elongated cylindrical portion with multiple triangular ribs circumferentially arranged around the periphery. The polyhedral decorative element is shaped like a rectangular parallelepiped, with multiple rows of square pyramidal elements arranged vertically on the front surface and multiple rows of triangular polyhedrons arranged vertically on both sides of the rectangular parallelepiped. The circular decorative element and polyhedral decorative element are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative element 561a and polyhedral decorative element 561b of the right unit decorative lens element 561 in the door frame right side element 550.

The left unit decorative lens member can be seen from the front (player's side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. Furthermore, the circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member is illuminated by light irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532, and the multifaceted decorative portion is illuminated by light irradiated forward from the angular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532.

The left unit upper decorative base 534 has a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and is formed as a rectangular tube extending front to back. The portion of the left unit upper decorative base 534 that forms the lower surface of the outer periphery is inclined so that it protrudes downward as it moves from the front end to the rear end, and the lower part of this portion is open from front to back. This left unit upper decorative base 534 is formed from an opaque material.

When viewed from the front, the left unit lower decorative base 535 is U-shaped and open at the top. The left unit lower decorative base 535 is inclined from approximately the center in the vertical direction at the front end to the rear end, with the upper side moving rearward as it goes upward. This left unit lower decorative base 535 is made of an opaque material.

The left unit decorative cover 536 extends vertically across the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decorative cover 536 is bent so that the middle section in the vertical direction is concave rearward, and is composed of a L-shaped section whose lower section is bent rearward to fit along the front end of the left unit upper decorative base 534, a L-shaped section whose upper section is bent rearward to fit along the front end of the left unit lower decorative base 535, and a straight section connecting the lower end of the upper L-shaped section with the upper end of the lower L-shaped section.

The left unit decorative cover 536 is attached at its upper and lower ends to the front of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front of the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. This left unit decorative cover 536 is made of a transparent material, allowing the left unit decorative lens component located at the rear to be seen from the front.

The decorative members 537 extend vertically in short lengths and are attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative members 537 are made of an opaque material.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The right-side door frame unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 51 to 55. Figure 51(a) is a front view of the right-side door frame unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the right-side door frame unit seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the right-side door frame unit seen from the rear. Figure 52 is an exploded perspective view of the right-side door frame unit seen from the front, and Figure 53 is an exploded perspective view of the right-side door frame unit seen from the rear. Figure 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along line M-M in Figure 51(a). Figure 55(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line N-N in Figure 51(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line O-O in Figure 51(a). The right-side door frame unit 550 is attached above the tray unit 320 to the right of the through-hole 111 in the front of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame right-side unit 550 comprises a box-shaped right unit base 551 that extends vertically and is attached to the front of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, to the right of the through hole 111 when viewed from the front; a door frame right-side decorative board 552 that is attached to the front of the right unit base 551; a transparent, flat, right unit left diffusion lens element 553 that is attached to the front of the right unit base 551, to the left of the center when viewed from the front, in front of the door frame right-side decorative board 552, and extends vertically and front-to-back; a decorative, sheet-shaped right unit left decorative element 554 that is attached to the left side of the right unit left diffusion lens element 553; and a transparent, flat, right unit left cover 555 that is attached to the right unit left diffusion lens element 553 so as to cover the left side of the right unit left decorative element 554.

The door frame right side unit 550 also includes a transparent, flat right unit right diffusion lens element 556 that extends vertically and longitudinally and is attached to the front side of the door frame right side decorative base plate 552 and to the right of the right unit left diffusion lens element 553 as viewed from the front, to the right of the center as viewed from the front on the front surface of the right unit base 551 and to the right of the right unit left diffusion lens element 553; a decorative, sheet-like right unit right decorative element 557 that is attached to the right side of the right unit right diffusion lens element 556; and a transparent, flat right unit right cover 558 that is attached to the right side of the right unit right decorative element 557.

Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 550 is equipped with a shallow, box-shaped, opaque right unit left shading member 559 that is positioned between the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and extends vertically and longitudinally with the front and right sides open, and a flat, opaque right unit right shading member 560 that is attached to the left of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to close the open right side of the right unit left shading member 559.

The door frame right side unit 550 also includes a translucent right unit decorative lens element 561 attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens element 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens element 556 and having a polyhedral decoration at its front end, a frame-shaped right unit decorative base 562 that is attached to the front of the right unit base 551 so as to cover both the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens element 561 and the front end sides of the right unit left diffusion lens element 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens element 556, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decorative base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562, and a plurality of decorative elements 564 attached to the front side of the right unit cover 563. Although not shown in the figure, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so that it passes vertically through the right unit base 551, and is equipped with a connection cable for connecting the door main body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 to the door frame top unit relay board 589 of the door frame top unit 570.

The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, extending vertically and horizontally, and a short, rectangular cylindrical shape extending front to back, with a closed box-like shape near the center in the front to back direction. This right unit base 551 is made of an opaque material.

The right unit base 551 also has a right-side reflective upright wall 568 (see Figures 6 and 24) that stands toward the front from the glass plate 192 that is disposed so as to cover the through-hole 111. The right-side reflective upright wall 568 has a flat inner surface that faces the through-hole 111 and is provided as a reflective surface capable of reflecting light. Similar to the inner surface of the left-side reflective upright wall 538, this reflective surface can be formed by forming the inner surface of the right-side reflective upright wall 568 itself out of a reflective material such as metal or resin, or by attaching a reflective sticker to the inner surface. As will be described later, the right-side reflective upright wall 568 is formed by the right unit base 551 and serves as part (the right portion) of the reflective upright wall 33 described above.

The door frame right side decorative board 552 is shaped like a vertically extending strip. It includes multiple left LEDs 552a mounted to the left of the center on the front surface, a right LED 552b mounted to the right of the center on the front surface, and multiple middle LEDs 552c mounted in the center on the front surface. The left LEDs 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 are used to illuminate and decorate the right unit left decorative member 554 via the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. The right LEDs 552b are used to illuminate and decorate the right unit right decorative member 557 via the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The middle LEDs 552c are used to illuminate and decorate the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The door frame right side decorative board 552 is white on both the front and back. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative board 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. Although not shown in the figure, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door main body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is connected to the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B.

The right unit left diffusion lens member 553 comprises a flat main body portion 553a extending in the vertical and front-to-rear directions; a rear wall portion 553b that protrudes in a short, flat shape from the rear edge of the main body portion 553a to the right as viewed from the front; multiple notches 553c that are cut out in a rectangular shape from the right end of the rear wall portion 553b to the left as viewed from the front and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction; a shallow storage recess 553d on the left surface of the main body portion 553a as viewed from the front that can store the right unit left decorative member 554; multiple input lens portions 553e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a and are provided in the vertical direction; and multiple side reflectors 553f that are arranged in the vertical direction on the right surface of the main body portion 553a as viewed from the front so that each input lens portion 553e is centered in the vertical direction.

The main body 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens element 553 has a vertically extending rectangular shape in side view, with the upper corner of the front end notched at an angle in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower edge is slanted so that it slopes upward as it moves forward. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 55, the main body 553a as a whole is slightly slanted relative to the vertical line of the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552, so that it slopes to the right as viewed from the front as it moves forward from the rear end. When assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the main body 553a protrudes further forward than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530.

When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the right end of the rear wall portion 553b extends to approximately the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The right end of this rear wall portion 553b abuts against the left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

The multiple cutouts 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some correspond to the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 face forward through the multiple cutouts 553c, allowing the right unit decorative lens member 561 to be effectively illuminated and decorated.

The storage recess 553d has a flat bottom surface, and its outer periphery roughly matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. This allows the right unit left decorative member 554 to be stored therein.

The multiple input lens portions 553e protrude rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a. Specifically, they are formed approximately in the vertical center of each of the six equal vertical divisions of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. While not shown in detail, the input lens portions 553e have a rectangular section with a vertically extending square protruding rearward, and a section recessed forward from the rear surface of the rectangular section to form a spherical curve. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, these input lens portions 553e are each positioned immediately in front of the left LED 552a on the door frame right side decorative board 552. This allows light from the left LED 552a to be input so that it is widely diffused within the main body portion 553a.

Six side reflectors 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflector 553f is formed by multiple concentric arc-shaped grooves divided circumferentially by lines extending radially from the input lens 553e. The surface of each of these concentric arc-shaped grooves closer to the input lens 553e is inclined relative to the surface of the main body 553a, while the surface farther from the input lens 553e extends perpendicular to the surface of the main body 553a, with the deepest portion formed in an arc shape. When cut radially from the input lens 553e, the side reflector 553f has a cross-sectional shape that is sharp and triangular, with the peaks between the grooves pointing toward the center, forming a sawtooth shape overall. Furthermore, the side reflector 553f is formed so that the grooves and peaks are alternately arranged circumferentially, with the peaks separated by the radial lines that divide the multiple concentric arc-shaped grooves circumferentially.

In this right unit left diffusion lens element 553, light emitted forward from the left LED 552a on the door frame right side decorative board 552 is incident from the rear surface of the input lens element 553e into the main body 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens element 553. The rear end of this input lens element 553e is concave and curved forward, so that the curved surface refracts the light from the left LED 552a so that it spreads out, and within the main body 553a, the light is diffused radially forward from each input lens element 553e as the center.

The main body 553a is slightly tilted with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that it moves to the right when viewed from the front as it moves forward. Therefore, light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and entering the main body 553a through the input lens 553e hits the flat left surface inside the main body 553a. However, due to the angle of incidence with respect to the left surface of the main body 553a, direct light from the left LED 552a is not emitted externally from the left surface of the main body 553a, but is instead reflected by the inner surface of the left surface toward the side reflector 553f.

Light incident forward from input lens portion 553e into main body portion 553a hits sawtooth-shaped side reflector 553f, reflects to the left as viewed from the front, and is emitted outward from the left surface of main body portion 553a. Light is also emitted outward (to the right as viewed from the front) from the right surface of main body portion 553a (side reflector 553f). However, because right-unit left light-shielding member 559, located on the right side of main body portion 553a, is a white material, the left surface of right-unit left light-shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and indirect light reflected by right-unit left light-shielding member 559 passes through main body portion 553a and is emitted to the left. Therefore, light reflected to the left by the side reflector 553f within the main body 553a and light emitted to the right from the side reflector 553f, reflected to the left by the left surface of the right unit left light-shielding member 559, and passed through the main body 553a are emitted to the left from the left surface of the main body 553a, allowing the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body 553a to be illuminated and decorated with good brightness.

Furthermore, in the side reflector 553f, the multiple concentric grooves are divided by multiple radially extending lines, and the multiple concentric arc grooves are radially shifted along the dividing lines, so that the concentric arc grooves are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction. This prevents the light irradiated outward (leftward) from the left surface of the main body 553a from becoming a concentric striped pattern of light and shade, and allows light of a more uniform shade to be irradiated to the left. This allows the right unit left decorative member 554, which is housed in the housing recess 553d on the left surface of the main body 553a, to be illuminated and decorated in a substantially uniform manner.

In addition, because the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is made of a transparent member, the pattern consisting of multiple concentric arc grooves and radially extending lines on the side reflector 553f formed on the opposite side can be seen from the left side of the main body 553a when viewed from the front (the side where the storage recess 553d is formed). Therefore, if a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern on the side reflector 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be seen through that transparent portion, and the transparent portion of the right unit left decorative member 554 can be decorated with the side reflector 553f.

The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape and is translucent and decorated with decorations such as the pachinko machine 1 manufacturer's logo and a logo that matches the concept of the presentation presented to the player on the game board 5. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed approximately symmetrically to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and has a similar configuration. Specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 comprises a flat main body portion 556a extending in the vertical and front-to-rear directions; a rear wall portion 556b that protrudes in a short, flat shape from the rear edge of the main body portion 556a to the left in a front view; multiple notches 556c that are rectangularly cut out from the left end of the rear wall portion 556b to the right in a front view and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction; a shallow storage recess 556d on the right surface of the main body portion 556a in a front view that can store the right unit right decorative member 557; multiple input lens portions 556e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a and are provided in the vertical direction; and multiple side reflectors 556f that are arranged in the vertical direction on the left surface of the main body portion 556a in a front view so that each input lens portion 556e is centered in the vertical direction.

The main body 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens element 556 has a rectangular shape in side view, with the upper front corner of the rectangular shape extending vertically and cut out at an angle to form a C-chamfer, and the lower edge is slanted upward as it moves forward. It has approximately the same external shape as the main body 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens element 553. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 55, the main body 556a as a whole is slightly inclined relative to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552, so that it moves to the left as viewed from the front as it moves forward from the rear end. When assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the main body 556a protrudes further forward than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530.

When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the left end of the rear wall 556b extends to approximately the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The left end of this rear wall 556b abuts against the right end of the rear wall 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553.

The multiple cutouts 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some correspond to the middle LEDs 552c on the door frame right side decorative board 552. These multiple cutouts 556c are formed in positions corresponding to the multiple cutouts 553c on the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the cutouts 553c on the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the cutouts 556c on the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 form a square opening that penetrates from front to back. The middle LEDs 552c on the door frame right side decorative board 552 face forward from this opening, allowing the multiple middle LEDs 552c to effectively illuminate and decorate the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The storage recess 556d has a flat bottom surface, and its outer periphery roughly matches the outer shape of the right unit right decorative member 557. This allows the right unit right decorative member 557 to be stored therein.

The multiple input lens portions 556e protrude rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a. Specifically, they are formed approximately in the vertical center of each of the six equal vertical divisions of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. While not shown in detail, the input lens portions 556e have a rectangular section with a vertically extending square protruding rearward, and a section recessed forward from the rear surface of the rectangular section to form a spherical curve. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, these input lens portions 556e are each positioned immediately in front of the right LED 552b on the door frame right side decorative board 552. This allows light from the right LED 552b to be input so that it is widely diffused within the main body portion 556a.

Six (multiple) side reflectors 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflector 556f is formed by multiple concentric arc-shaped grooves divided circumferentially by lines extending radially from the input lens 556e. The surface of each of these concentric arc-shaped grooves closer to the input lens 556e is inclined relative to the surface of the main body 556a, while the surface farther from the input lens 556e extends perpendicular to the surface of the main body 556a, with the deepest portion formed in an arc shape. When cut radially from the input lens 556e, the side reflector 556f has a cross-sectional shape that is sharp and triangular, with the peaks between the grooves pointing toward the center, forming a sawtooth shape overall. Furthermore, the side reflector 556f is formed so that the grooves and peaks alternate circumferentially, with the peaks dividing the multiple concentric arc-shaped grooves along the radial lines.

In this right unit right diffusion lens element 556, light emitted forward from the right LED 552b on the door frame right side decorative board 552 is incident from the rear surface of the input lens element 556e into the main body 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens element 556. The rear end of this input lens element 556e is concave and curved forward, so that the light from the right LED 552b is refracted by this curved surface so that it spreads out and is diffused radially forward within the main body 556a, centered on each input lens element 556e.

The main body 556a is slightly tilted with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that it moves to the left as seen from the front as it moves forward. Therefore, light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and incident on the main body 556a through the input lens 556e hits the flat right surface inside the main body 556a. However, due to the angle of incidence with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, direct light from the right LED 552b is not emitted externally from the left surface of the main body 556a, but is instead reflected by the inner surface of the right surface towards the side reflector 556f.

Light incident forward from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a hits the sawtooth-shaped side reflecting portion 556f, reflects to the right as viewed from the front, and is emitted outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a. Light is also emitted outward (to the left as viewed from the front) from the right surface of the main body portion 556a (side reflecting portion 556f). However, because the right-unit right light-shielding member 560 located on the left side of the main body portion 556a is a white member, the right surface of the right-unit right light-shielding member 560 is brightly illuminated, and indirect light reflected by the right-unit right light-shielding member 560 passes through the main body portion 556a and is emitted to the right. Therefore, light reflected to the right by the side reflector 556f within the main body 556a and light emitted to the left from the side reflector 556f, reflected to the right by the right surface of the right unit right light-shielding member 560, and passed through the main body 556a are emitted to the right from the right surface of the main body 556a, allowing the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body 556a to be illuminated and decorated with good brightness.

Furthermore, in the side reflector 556f, the multiple concentric grooves are divided by multiple radially extending lines, and the multiple concentric arc grooves are radially shifted along the dividing lines, so that the concentric arc grooves are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction. This prevents the light irradiated outward (to the right) from the right surface of the main body 556a from becoming a concentric striped pattern of light and shade, and allows light of a more uniform shade to be irradiated to the right. This allows the right unit right decorative member 557, which is housed in the housing recess 556d on the right surface of the main body 556a, to be illuminated and decorated in a substantially uniform manner.

In addition, because the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is made of a transparent member, the pattern consisting of multiple concentric arc grooves and radially extending lines on the side reflector 556f formed on the opposite side can be seen from the right side of the main body 556a when viewed from the front (the side where the storage recess 556d is formed). Therefore, if a transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decorative member 557, the pattern on the side reflector 556f of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 can be seen through that transparent portion, and the transparent portion of the right unit right decorative member 557 can be decorated with the side reflector 556f.

The right unit right decorative member 557 is formed in a thin sheet shape and is decorated with translucent decorations such as the manufacturer logo of the pachinko machine 1 and a logo that matches the concept of the presentation presented to the player on the game board 5. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed approximately bilaterally symmetrical with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. Furthermore, the decorations on the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same or different.

The right unit left light shielding member 559 has a shape in side view that is substantially the same as the shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape that is open to the front and right. The right unit left light shielding member 559 includes a flat main body portion 559a extending in the vertical and front-to-rear directions, a rear wall portion 559b that protrudes in a short, flat shape from the rear edge of the main body portion 559a to the right in a front view, multiple notches 559c that are rectangularly cut out to the left from the right end side of the rear wall portion 559b in a front view and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and multiple flat reinforcing portions 559d that extend rightward from the right surface of the main body portion 559a and extend from the rear wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a.

The main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 has a shape in side view that is rectangular and extends vertically, with the upper front corner cut out at an angle to form a C-chamfer, and the bottom edge slopes upward as it moves forward. It has approximately the same external shape as the main body 553a, 556a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the left end of the rear wall portion 559b extends to the right of approximately the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The right end of this rear wall portion 559b abuts against the left surface of the right unit right light blocking member 560.

The multiple cutouts 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some correspond to the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. These multiple cutouts 559c are formed in positions corresponding to the multiple cutouts 553c, 556c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 face forward through the multiple cutouts 559c, allowing the right unit decorative lens member 561 to be well illuminated and decorated.

The multiple reinforcing portions 559d are provided in three sets, spaced a predetermined distance apart in the vertical direction, with each set consisting of a pair of reinforcing portions 559d spaced apart vertically at approximately the same height as the left-right width. Each set of reinforcing portions 559d is formed behind a decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563. These multiple reinforcing portions 559d increase the overall strength and rigidity of the door frame right side unit 550.

When viewed from the side, the right unit right light shielding member 560 has a rectangular shape that extends vertically, with the upper front corner notched at an angle in a C-chamfered shape and the lower edge sloping upward as it moves forward, and is formed in approximately the same shape as the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the right unit right light shielding member 560 closes the right-side opening that opens to the right of the shallow box-shaped right unit left light shielding member 559.

The right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are each formed from a white material. As shown in Figure 55, when the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, their respective main bodies 559a and right unit right light-shielding member 560 are positioned in close proximity to the main bodies 553a, 556a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. As a result, the main bodies 559a of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are spaced apart in the left-right direction, forming a space that extends up-down and front-to-back by a predetermined width in the left-right direction. Light emitted forward from the middle LED 552c on the door frame right side decorative board 552 is irradiated to the rear side of the right unit decorative lens member 561 through the space formed between the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560.

In addition, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are made of opaque material, preventing the light emitted forward from the left LED 552a, middle LED 552c, and right LED 552b on the door frame right side decorative board 552 from interfering with each other. This allows the right unit left decorative member 554, right unit right decorative member 557, and right unit decorative lens member 561 to be illuminated and decorated only by the corresponding left LED 552a, right LED 552b, and middle LED 552c, respectively.

Furthermore, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 have their internal spaces vertically divided into four by three sets of reinforcing parts 559d. This means that the LEDs 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552, which are located at the rear of each divided space, can prevent light from interfering between the spaces, and the parts of the right unit decorative lens member 561 located in front of each space can be illuminated and decorated independently. In other words, the front end of the door frame right side unit 550 can be divided into multiple (four) areas vertically, and each can be illuminated and decorated independently.

The right unit decorative lens element 561 is formed in a shape that follows the front end shapes of the right unit left diffusion lens element 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens element 556. The right unit decorative lens element 561 comprises a circular decorative portion 561a that is circular in front view, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b that extends vertically and has multiple polyhedrons formed on it. The circular decorative portion 561a has a concave front surface and a cylindrical portion that extends shortly in the front and rear, with multiple triangular ribs circumferentially formed on the outer periphery. The polyhedral decorative portion 561b has a shape like a vertically extending rectangular parallelepiped with multiple rows of quadrangular pyramid-shaped portions on the front surface, and multiple rows of polyhedrons made up of multiple triangles arranged vertically on both the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion.

More specifically, the right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed so that, in the areas located in front of each of the four spaces divided by the three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light-shielding member 559, multiple circular decorative portions 561a and multifaceted decorative portions 561b are arranged, one on each side of the circular decorative portion 561a located in the vertical center, in the top three areas, and only the multifaceted decorative portion 561b is arranged in the lowest area.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be seen from the front (player's side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. This right unit decorative lens member 561 is illuminated and decorated by the LED 552c inside the door frame right side decorative board 552 located at the rear.

The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in the shape of a cylindrical frame that penetrates in the front-to-rear direction. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a shape that follows the shapes of the front and top ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed so that it can cover both the left and right outer sides near the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, as well as both the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 protrudes slightly forward beyond the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed from an opaque material.

The right unit cover 563 is formed so that it can close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562. This right unit cover 563 is made of a transparent material, allowing the right unit decorative lens member 561 located on the rear side to be viewed from the front.

The decorative members 564 extend vertically in short lengths and are attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative members 564 are made of an opaque material. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decorative lens member 561) into four vertical sections.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes forward in a plate-like shape farther than the door frame left side unit 530, and protrudes slightly forward than the front end of the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320. The door frame right side unit 550 can be independently illuminated and decorated using the right unit left decorative member 554 and right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both the protruding left and right sides, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at the front end.

The door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and protrudes significantly forward, so when this pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility in an amusement parlor, the door frame right side unit 550 can act as a partition between it and the adjacent pachinko machine on the right. This gives players playing with this pachinko machine 1 the illusion that they are playing in a private room, allowing them to play in a relaxed atmosphere without having to worry about other players around them.

In addition, because the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes significantly forward, in amusement parlors where pachinko machines 1 are installed in a row, it can be seen from the side along the island equipment even if it is not positioned in front of the pachinko machine 1, making the pachinko machine 1 stand out in amusement parlors where many pachinko machines are lined up. Therefore, if the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are illuminated, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be made known from a distance even if it is not positioned near the front of the pachinko machine 1, making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, when a malfunction such as a ball jam or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the door frame right side unit 550 causes the right unit left decorative member 554, right unit right decorative member 557, and right unit decorative lens member 561 on both the left and right sides to light up and be decorated in a unique manner. This allows the arcade staff to be immediately notified of the malfunction and to respond quickly to the malfunction, thereby quickly resolving the player's interruption to play and preventing the player from becoming frustrated and losing interest in the game.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 56 to 59. Figure 56(a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the rear. Figure 57 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the front, and Figure 58 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the rear. Figure 59 is a cross-sectional view taken along line P-P in Figure 56. The door frame top unit 570 is attached above the left door frame side unit 530 and the right door frame side unit 550, above the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 570 comprises a central base 571 attached to the front of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the center in the left-right direction above the through-hole 111; a pair of side bases 572 attached to both the left and right sides of the central base 571 and attached to the front of the door frame base 110; a pair of upper speakers 573 attached to the front of each of the pair of side bases 572; and a box-shaped base 571 extending left and right, with the center protruding forward in the left-right direction and open at the rear, which is penetrated front and rear at a position forward of the pair of upper speakers 573. The unit body 271 has a pair of openings 574a and multiple slits 574b (three on each side) that extend from positions closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a to near the center, penetrate in the front-to-rear direction, and are spaced apart vertically. The unit body 271 is attached to the front of the central base 571 and the pair of side bases 572, and speaker covers 575 made of punched metal are arranged in front of the pair of upper speakers 573 and attached to the rear of the unit body 271 so as to close the pair of openings 574a.

The door frame top unit 570 also includes a translucent top middle decorative member 576 attached to the front of the unit body 271 in the center of the left-right direction; a door frame top middle decorative board 577 attached to the rear of the top middle decorative member 576 and having multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface; and multiple (three on each side) transparent flat light guides attached to the front surface of the unit body 271, closing the multiple slits 574b and extending from near the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576 across the opening 574a to near the left and right ends of the unit body 271. top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decorative lens member 580 are attached to the front of unit body 271 on the left and right sides of top middle decorative member 576 and cover the front of the plurality (three) of light-guiding members 578, and top middle left decorative member 581 and top middle right decorative member 582 are attached to the front of unit body 271 from the front side of top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decorative lens member 580 and extend from the left and right sides of top middle decorative member 576 to near the central end of opening 574a.

The door frame top unit 570 further comprises a top-left door frame decorative board 583 and a top-right door frame decorative board 584, which are attached to the inside of the left and right sides of the unit body 271 and have LEDs mounted on them at locations facing the outer left and right ends of the multiple (three) light-guiding members 578; a pair of board bases 585 attached to the rear of the unit body 271 at locations penetrated by multiple (three) slits 574b formed on both the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction; a top-middle-left door frame decorative board 586 and a top-middle-right door frame decorative board 587 attached to the front of the pair of board bases 585 and have multiple LEDs 586a, 587a mounted behind the slits 574b of the unit body 271; and a pair of light-blocking members 588 attached to the rear of the unit body 271 in front of the top-middle-left door frame decorative board 586 and the top-middle-right door frame decorative board 587.

The door frame top unit 570 also includes a door frame top unit relay board 589 attached to the front of the central base 571 within the unit body 271, a relay board cover 590 attached to the central base 571 so as to cover the front of the door frame top unit relay board 589, an upper cover 591 attached to the unit body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit body 271, and a lower cover 592 attached to the unit body 271 so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit body 271.

The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 has a rectangular shape that extends left and right when viewed from the front. The central base 571 is box-shaped and open to the rear, with multiple protrusions and recesses on its front surface. A pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the central base 571, respectively. A pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front of each side base 572, respectively. When assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the pair of upper speakers 573 are attached at an angle so that the front of each speaker moves toward the rear on the side closest to the center of the door frame top unit 570 in the left-right direction. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-type speakers that can output sound over a wide frequency band.

When viewed from the front, the unit body 271 has a shape resembling a rectangle extending from side to side with the lower portions bulging downward near both ends. In other words, when viewed from the front, the unit body 271 has a shape resembling a rectangle extending from side to side with a trapezoidal notch tapering upward from the bottom edge. When viewed from the top, the unit body 271 has a shape combining a rectangle extending from side to side, a trapezoid that protrudes forward with its base centered at the left-right center of the front edge of the rectangle and extending forward approximately half the total width (left-right length), and another rectangle that protrudes forward slightly with the front edge of the trapezoid as its long side. Therefore, both sides of the portion of the unit body 271 that protrudes forward at the left-right center on the front surface are located (recessed) behind a line connecting the left-right ends of the unit body 271 and the left-right ends of the front end of the forward-protruding portion.

Openings 574a are formed on the front surface of the unit body 271, penetrating from both left and right ends to a position outside the portion that protrudes forward. Furthermore, multiple slits 574b are formed on the front surface of the unit body 271, extending diagonally from the trapezoidally protruding forward portion of the front surface. The slits 574b extend left and right at a predetermined height and penetrate the front and rear direction. The slits 574b extend left and right from near the front end of the portion that extends diagonally forward on the front surface of the unit body 271 to near the openings 574a. The slits 574b are formed in groups of three on each side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction, spaced apart vertically.

The unit body 271 also has an upper opening 574c, which is a square notch cut out from the rear end to the front in the center of the left-right direction on the top surface, and a lower opening 574d, which is cut out from the rear end to the front in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The upper opening 574c of the unit body 271 is closed by an upper cover 591. The lower opening 574d is closed by a lower cover 592.

The unit main body 271 also has a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f that extend vertically on both the left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at approximately the same position in the front-to-back direction as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed so that its front surface is located further forward than the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit main body 271 is formed from an opaque material.

The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion that protrudes forward from the left-right center on the front surface of the unit body 271. When viewed from the front, the top middle decorative member 576 has a shape that combines an irregular pentagon bent so that the left-right center of the bottom side of a roughly square is positioned downward, and a roughly right-angled triangle formed by connecting the tips of the sides extending outward in the left-right direction from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the irregular pentagon to the lower ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined so that the irregular pentagonal portion on the front surface moves backward as it moves downward. The entire top middle decorative member 576 is formed into a three-dimensional shape and is translucent.

The door frame top middle decorative board 577 is attached to the rear of the top middle decorative member 576 in a tilted position, with its front surface aligned with the front surface of the irregular pentagonal portion of the top middle decorative member 576, and moving rearward as it extends downward. The door frame top middle decorative board 577 has multiple LEDs mounted on its front surface, and illuminating these LEDs allows the top middle decorative member 576 to be illuminated and decorated.

The light-guiding member 578 is made of a transparent material. The light-guiding member 578 is formed in a shape that conforms to the shape of the left and right outer edges of the front end of the portion of the front surface of the unit body 271 that protrudes forward. Referring to the end sides of the unit body 271 as the sides closest to the left and right ends and the center side as the center side, the light-guiding member 578 is composed of a straight portion 578a that extends straight from the end sides toward the center, and an arc portion 578b that extends in an arc shape with a larger radius so as to move forward from the end side toward the center of the straight portion 578a. The light-guiding member 578 is formed so that the front-to-back depth of the straight portion 578a is smaller than the vertical height, and the front-to-back depth of the arc portion 578b is greater than the vertical height. Furthermore, the light-guiding member 578 has a straight portion 578a that has a constant vertical height, and an arc portion 578b that has a vertical height that decreases toward the center. When the light-guiding member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is located immediately before the opening 574a of the unit main body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 271 from the front.

The light-guiding member 578 includes a diffuse reflection section 578c consisting of sawtooth irregularities formed on the rear surface of the straight section 578a, and a diffuse input section 578d consisting of multiple irregularities formed on the rear surface of the arc section 578b.

When assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the light-guiding member 578 has its outer left and right ends facing the LEDs 583a and 584a on the left top door frame decorative board 583 or the right top door frame decorative board 584, while its diffusion input portion 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a on the middle-left top door frame decorative board 586 or the middle-right top door frame decorative board 587. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a on the left top door frame decorative board 583 or the right top door frame decorative board 584 is incident on both outer left and right ends of the light-guiding member 578, the light travels toward the center within the straight portion 578a and is sequentially reflected forward from the ends by the diffusion reflector 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, causing light to be emitted forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is disposed in front of the light-guiding member 578, and the portion of each of these in front of the straight portion 578a is illuminated for decoration.

In addition, when light from the LEDs 586a, 587a on the door frame top middle-left decorative board 586 or door frame top middle-right decorative board 587 enters the light-guiding member 578 through the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b, the light is widely diffused into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. This allows the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the arc portion 578b to be illuminated and decorated.

In this way, the light-guiding member 578 guides light from the LEDs 583a, 586a on the top-left door frame decorative board 583 and the top-middle-left door frame decorative board 586, or from the LEDs 584a, 587a on the top-right door frame decorative board 584 and the top-middle-right door frame decorative board 587, allowing the entire top-left decorative lens member 579 or top-right decorative lens member 580 located in front to be illuminated and decorated in a good (uniform) state.

The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light-guiding members 578 located to the left of the center in the left-right direction on the front of the unit body 271. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that independently accommodate the three light-guiding members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 are formed in a shape that imitates the light-guiding members 578, covering the front and both the top and bottom surfaces of the light-guiding members 578. The front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a has a row of rectangular truncated pyramidal projections that protrude forward, arranged on the left and right.

The top left decorative lens element 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative element 576 of the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit body 271. In other words, the top left decorative lens element 579 decorates almost the entire area to the left of the top middle decorative element 576 of the door frame top unit 570. This top left decorative lens element 579 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 583a, 586a on the door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 via three light-guiding elements 578.

The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light-guiding members 578 located to the right of the center in the left-right direction on the front of the unit body 271. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a that independently accommodate the three light-guiding members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 are formed in a shape that imitates the light-guiding members 578, covering the front and both the top and bottom surfaces of the light-guiding members 578. The front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a has a row of rectangular truncated pyramidal projections that protrude forward, arranged on the left and right.

The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574f of the unit body 271. In other words, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates almost the entire area to the right of the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570. This top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 584a, 587a on the door frame top right decorative board 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 via three light-guiding members 578.

The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front of the unit body 271, between the left-side opening 574a on the front of the unit body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576, from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579. When assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the top middle left decorative member 581 is attached so as to fill the gap between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579, with the center of its front surface protruding further forward than the front surface of the top left decorative lens member 579. This top middle left decorative member 581 is made of an opaque material.

The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front of the unit body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580, between the right-side opening 574a on the front of the unit body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. When assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the top middle right decorative member 582 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580, with the center of its front surface protruding further forward than the front surface of the top right decorative lens member 580. This top middle right decorative member 582 is made of an opaque material.

The door frame top-left decorative board 583 is attached to the inside of the left side (top-left decorative part 574e) inside the unit body 271, with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing rightward. The door frame top-left decorative board 583 has the LED 583a mounted in a position facing the left end face of three light-guiding members 578 attached to the front side to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 (see Figure 59). Each of the three LEDs 583a can emit light independently. The LED 583a on the door frame top-left decorative board 583 illuminates and decorates the portion of the top-left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the opening 574a on the left side of the unit body 271, via the straight parts 578a of the three light-guiding members 578.

The door frame top right decorative board 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative part 574f) of the unit body 271, with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing left. The door frame top right decorative board 584 has the LED 584a mounted in a position facing the right end face of three light-guiding members 578 attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 to the right of the center in the left-right direction (see Figure 59). Each of the three LEDs 584a can emit light independently. The LED 584a on the door frame top right decorative board 584 illuminates and decorates the portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the opening 574a on the right side of the unit body 271, via the straight portions 578a of the three light-guiding members 578.

The pair of board bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the portion of the unit main body 271 where the multiple slits 574b are formed. The pair of board bases 585 are formed approximately bilaterally symmetrical to each other. The board base 585 includes side walls that are approximately square in side view with sides extending up and down and front and rear, a rear wall that is rectangular in front view and extends outward in the left-right direction at a right angle from the rear edges of the side walls, an upper wall that is approximately right-angled triangular in shape, connecting the upper edges of the side walls and rear walls with the line connecting the front ends of the upper edges of the side walls to halfway up the upper edges of the side walls as the hypotenuse, and a lower wall that is approximately right-angled triangular in shape, connecting the lower edges of the side walls and rear walls on the opposite side from the upper wall. The board base 585 is formed in a triangular box shape with the upper and lower hypotenuses open. The board base 585 is attached to the unit main body 271 so that the open portion is closed by the unit main body 271. This board base 585 is fitted with a door frame top middle-left decorative board 586 or a door frame top middle-right decorative board 587 so that the open section is closed.

The door frame top middle-left decorative board 586 is attached to the board base 585, which is attached to the rear side of the unit body 271, to the left of the center in the left-right direction, so as to close the open box-shaped area from the front. By attaching the door frame top middle-left decorative board 586 to the front of the board base 585, the front surface is inclined relative to the plane extending left and right, so that it moves forward as it approaches the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 271. As a result, when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface of the door frame top middle-left decorative board 586 is approximately parallel to the surface of the area where the three slits 574b are formed, to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 271.

The door frame top middle-left decorative board 586 has multiple LEDs 586a mounted in positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit body 271. As a result, when the door frame top middle-left decorative board 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the multiple LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b to the left of the center of the unit body 271. By illuminating the multiple LEDs 586a, the door frame top middle-left decorative board 586 can illuminate and decorate the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 close to the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light-guiding member 578.

The door frame top middle-right decorative board 587 is attached to the board base 585, which is attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 to the right of the left-right center, so as to close the box-shaped open area from the front. By attaching the door frame top middle-right decorative board 587 to the front of the board base 585, the front surface is inclined relative to the plane extending left and right, moving forward as it approaches the left-right center of the unit body 271. As a result, when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface of the door frame top middle-right decorative board 587 is approximately parallel to the surface of the area where the three slits 574b are formed, to the right of the left-right center of the unit body 271.

The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 has multiple LEDs 587a mounted in positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit body 271. As a result, when the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the multiple LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b to the right of the center of the unit body 271. By illuminating the multiple LEDs 587a, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 can illuminate and decorate the area of the top right decorative lens member 580 close to the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light-guiding member 578.

A pair of light-blocking members 588 are attached to the front rear of the unit body 271, between the top middle-left door frame decorative board 586 and the top middle-right door frame decorative board 587 and the unit body 271. The pair of light-blocking members 588 are made of opaque material and are formed approximately symmetrically with each other. The light-blocking members 588 separate the upper and lower LEDs 586a, 587a on the top middle-left door frame decorative board 586 and the top middle-right door frame decorative board 587, which are aligned in a row corresponding to the three slits 574b in the unit body 271. These light-blocking members 588 allow light to be guided forward only by the LEDs 586a, 587a located immediately behind each light-guiding member 578, allowing the decorative lens portions 579a, 580a of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 to emit light and be beautifully decorated independently.

The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay board 589 relays the connections between the pair of upper speakers 573, door frame top middle decorative board 577, door frame top left decorative board 583, door frame top right decorative board 584, door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the door main body relay board of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door main body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front of this door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered by a relay board cover 590.

This door frame top unit 570 is equipped with a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward from the center in the left-right direction, and the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are curved as if carved out toward the rear, giving the player the illusion that only the top middle decorative member 576 protrudes significantly forward, strongly drawing the player's attention to this pachinko machine 1.

The door frame top unit 570 also features a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate both the left and right sides of the centrally located top middle decorative member 576, extending from both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 to the top left decorative portion 574e and the top right decorative portion 574f formed on both the left and right ends of the unit body 271. This allows the door frame top unit 570 to decorate the entire upper front surface of the door frame 3.

In this case, the door frame top unit 570 is equipped with upper speakers 573 whose front faces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punched metal, located behind each of the left and right ends of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580.The speaker covers 575 face forward from between the three decorative lens sections 579a, 580a spaced apart above and below the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, allowing players to hear the sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 in good quality and enjoy high-quality stereo sound.

In addition, the door frame top unit 570 can guide light from the door frame top left decorative board 583, door frame top right decorative board 584, door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and door frame top middle right decorative board 587 to the top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decorative lens member 580 through multiple light-guiding members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decorative lens member 580, allowing the entire front of the top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decorative lens member 580 to be illuminated and decorated well. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can illuminate and decorate the entire front of the upper part of the door frame 3, including the area in front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Action and effect of door frame]
The effect of the door frame 3 will now be described. In the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the through-hole 111 penetrating the front and rear of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 is larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than in conventional pachinko machines. To accommodate the enlargement of the through-hole 111, the vertical height of the tray unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 is reduced, and the horizontal width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 is reduced. This allows the player (from the front) to see as much of the front of the game board 5 (playing area 5a) attached to the main frame 4 as possible through the through-hole 111 (glass unit 190), accommodating a game board 5 with a wide playing area 5a.

The door frame 3 is provided with a performance operation unit 400 below the through-hole 111, which has a large hemispherical operation button 410 in the left-right center of the tray unit 320 that bulges forward. The front surfaces (front surfaces of the tray lower decorative portion 326c) of the lower halves (portions below the upper tray 321) on both the left and right sides of the performance operation unit 400 are recessed rearward (a concave curved shape so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the performance operation unit 400 are positioned further rearward than the line connecting the front ends of both the left and right ends of the tray unit 320 and the front ends of both the left and right ends of the performance operation unit 400). This makes the performance operation unit 400, which is attached to the front surface in the left-right center of the tray unit 320, appear to protrude significantly forward, highlighting and emphasizing the performance operation unit 400 to the player and drawing their attention to the performance operation unit 400.

The door frame 3 is attached with the effect operation unit 400, which is located on the front of the tray unit 320 below the through-hole 111, tilted so that the large, hemispherical, transparent operation button 410 faces diagonally upward. Therefore, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 faces the player's head (face). When the player lowers their eyes to look at the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 appears nearly directly ahead, providing a strong visual impression of the large, round operation button 410, heightening anticipation for the effects using the operation button 410. The effect images displayed on the door frame-side effect display device 460, located within the transparent operation button 410, can also be clearly seen, allowing the player to fully enjoy the effect images.

In addition, the door frame 3 is equipped with a large, rounded, forward-bulging operation button 410 with a diameter roughly the same as the overall height of the tray unit 320. This means that when operating the operation button 410, any part of the operation button 410 can be touched with a short hand movement, making it relatively easy to "quickly press" the operation button 410. Furthermore, because the large, rounded, forward-bulging operation button 410 is installed at an angle, it can not only be pressed from above like the operation buttons on conventional pachinko machines, but can also be easily operated from the left, right, or front. This easy-to-operate operation button 410 makes the effects using the operation button 410 even more enjoyable.

The door frame 3 also has the effect operation unit 400 attached in a suspended state by the tray unit 320, and is equipped with a vibration motor 424 that generates vibrations at the bottom of the effect operation unit 400.When the vibration motor 424 is rotated to generate vibrations depending on the game status, strong vibrations can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the top of the operation button 410, surprising the player and making the effect using the operation button 410 even more enjoyable.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 is equipped with a large operation button 410 (effect operation unit 400) that spans the entire height of the tray unit 320, located in the center of the front of the tray unit 320. This makes the lower tray 322 located below the upper tray 321 less noticeable compared to conventional pachinko machines, making it easier for players accustomed to conventional pachinko machines to recognize that it is clearly different, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing and strongly attracts the attention of players.

In addition, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower tray 322 wraps around to the rear of the lower tray opening 326d, which opens to the left of the performance operation unit 400 on the front of the tray unit 320. This allows the volume of the lower tray 322 to be larger than the size of the lower tray opening 326d, ensuring a sufficient number of game balls can be stored in the lower tray 322. Also, because the rear of the lower tray 322 wraps around to the rear of the performance operation unit 400, when a player places their left hand inside the lower tray 322 or places their fingers in the lower tray opening 326d, their fingertips are less likely to touch the rear wall of the lower tray 322. This reduces the player's discomfort and prevents a decline in their interest in the game. It also allows the player to recognize through touch that the volume of the lower tray 322 is larger than the size of the lower tray opening 326d.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 has a lower tray ball supply port 323c, through which game balls from the upper tray 321 are released into the lower tray 322, and a lower tray ball removal hole 322a, through which game balls from the lower tray 322 are removed into a box or the like below the tray unit 320, arranged in a straight line from front to back, and is located to the right outside the lower tray opening 326d when viewed from the front (to the right of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the performance operation unit 400). In other words, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are located behind the performance operation unit 400, the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a (outside the right side of the lower tray opening 326d) on the tray unit cover 326, the front end side of the lower tray cover 340, etc., so the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are not visible from the player's side, which gives the tray unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) a neater appearance and improves the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the door frame 3 has the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a located below (directly in front of) the lower tray ball supply port 323c on the lower tray 322. Therefore, when the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a is opened, game balls released from the upper tray 321, etc. to the lower tray 322 will enter the lower tray 322 and immediately be ejected from the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a into the dollar box, etc. below. At this time, the player cannot see the lower tray ball supply port 323c or the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a, and therefore cannot see the flow of game balls ejected from the upper tray 321, etc. through the lower tray 322 into the dollar box. This gives the player the illusion that the game balls in the upper tray 321, or the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 when the upper tray 321 is full, are being discharged directly into the money box, making it less likely that the game balls will feel annoyed as they pass through the lower tray 322, allowing the player to concentrate on the game (such as the operation of shooting the game balls and the visual effects), preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the door frame 3 has a lower tray ball removal hole 322a located in the lower tray 322, to the front and left of the lower tray ball supply port 323c, and the raised wall portion of the lower tray 322 to the right of the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is curved diagonally so as to face the direction of the lower tray ball removal hole 322a.Therefore, game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can be guided directly to the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, or reflected off the right wall portion and indirectly guided to the lower tray ball removal hole 322a. As a result, when the lower tray ball removal hole 322a remains open, game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can be discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a without entering the area to the left of the lower tray ball removal hole 322a on the lower tray 322 (lower tray first area A1).This means that game balls can be discharged below the lower tray 322 (dollar box) without the player being able to see the game balls circulating within the lower tray 322, achieving the same effect as described above.

In addition, the door frame 3 has the lower tray opening 326d of the tray unit cover 326, through which the lower tray 322 faces forward, located between the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker opening 326e. Therefore, even if a player places their hand on the lower tray opening 326d or puts their hand into the lower tray 322, the front of the lower speaker opening 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. This allows the sound from the lower speaker 921 in the board unit 900 of the main frame 4 to be output forward effectively, allowing the player to enjoy the sound from this pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, when a player puts their hand into or approaches the lower tray 322, the player can tactilely feel the vibrations caused by the deep bass from the lower speaker 921 output forward from the lower speaker opening 326e, which entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 is equipped with a plate-shaped door frame right side unit 550 that protrudes significantly forward from the right side of the through opening 111. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility in an amusement parlor, the door frame right side unit 550 can act as a partition between the pachinko machine 1 and the adjacent pachinko machine on the right side, giving players playing with the pachinko machine 1 the illusion that they are playing in a private room, allowing them to play in a relaxed atmosphere without having to worry about other players around them.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 can be decorated with illuminating lights on the front end and both left and right sides of the plate-shaped door frame right side unit 550, which protrudes significantly forward. Therefore, even in an amusement parlor where pachinko machines 1 are installed in a row, the presence of this pachinko machine 1 can be made known from a distance, such as from the side along the island equipment, even if it is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, making it a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

The door frame 3 also includes a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward from the center in the left-right direction in the door frame top unit 570 above the through opening 111, and the front faces on both sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are recessed so that they are carved out toward the rear (a concave curved shape so that the front faces on both sides of the top middle decorative member 576 on the door frame top unit 570 are positioned further rearward than the line connecting the front ends of both the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of both the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576). This makes it appear as if only the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 protrudes significantly forward, making the top middle decorative member 576 stand out and emphasized to the player, drawing strong attention to the top middle decorative member 576.

In conventional pachinko machines, the top of the door frame is equipped with a pair of upper speakers spaced apart on the left and right, making the two upper speakers conspicuous. In contrast, the door frame 3 of this embodiment has a door frame top unit 570 attached above the through-hole 111, which is equipped with a pair of upper speakers 573 whose front faces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punched metal on both left and right ends. It also has top left decorative lens members 579 and top right decorative lens members 580 that extend from both left and right sides of the central top middle decorative member 576, passing in front of the speaker covers 575, to both left and right ends, allowing the entire front faces of the top left decorative lens members 579 and top right decorative lens members 580 to be illuminated and decorated. This allows the entire upper front surface of the door frame 3 to be decorated, making the pair of upper speakers 573 less noticeable at the top of the door frame 3, allowing players to recognize at a glance that the decoration is clearly different from that of conventional pachinko machines, making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players, and allowing players to enjoy high-quality stereo sound from the pair of upper speakers 573.

In this way, the door frame 3 of this embodiment has the effect operation unit 400 attached to the tray unit 320 and the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 each protruding significantly forward in the center of the left-right direction below and above the through-hole 111. This allows players to see a unified decoration from top to bottom, with a prominent imaginary line passing through the center of the left-right direction. The sophisticated decoration also makes the machine stand out more than other pachinko machines, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 with great appeal.

In addition, the door frame 3 has the top middle decorative element 576 of the door frame top unit 570 and the performance operation unit 400, which are arranged vertically in the center of the left-right direction, protruding forward. Therefore, when the top middle decorative element 576 and the performance operation unit 400 are illuminated, the player can see an illuminated line extending vertically in the center of the left-right direction on the front of the door frame 3, and the player's gaze can be guided to the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400, which is arranged in the center of the left-right direction.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 60 to 66. Figure 60 is a front view of the game board. Figure 61 is an exploded perspective view of the game board broken down into its main components as seen from the front, and Figure 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board broken down into its main components as seen from the rear. Figure 63 is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the rear unit. Figure 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of Figure 63 broken down as seen from the front, and Figure 65 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of Figure 63 broken down as seen from the rear. Figure 66 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the function display unit from the front when the game board is attached to a pachinko machine.

The gaming board 5 has a playing area 5a into which a player inserts a gaming ball by operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. The gaming board 5 also includes a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the playing area 5a and has a generally rectangular outline when viewed from the front; a plate-shaped gaming panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defines the rear end of the playing area 5a; a board holder 1200 that is attached to the lower rear side of the gaming panel 1100; and a main control unit 1300 that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and has a main control board 1310 that controls the game content played by inserting a gaming ball into the playing area 5a. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the gaming ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front side of the gaming panel 1100 in a portion of the playing area 5a (not shown).

The gaming board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so that it is visible to the player; a peripheral control unit 1500 that is attached to the rear of the gaming panel 1100; a gaming board effect display device 1600 that is positioned in the center of the playing area 5a when viewed from the front and is capable of displaying specified effect images; a front unit 2000 that is attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100; and a rear unit 3000 that is attached to the rear of the gaming panel 1100. The gaming board effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear of the rear unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear of the gaming board effect display device 1600.

The gaming panel 1100 comprises a transparent, flat panel plate 1110 whose outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110 and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, with the rear unit 3000 attached to its rear surface.

The front unit 2000 is equipped with a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open to receive game balls inserted into the game area 5a; a first starting opening 2002 that is always open to receive game balls at a different position in the game area 5a from the plurality of general winning openings 2001; a gate unit 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of game balls; a second starting opening 2004 that can receive game balls depending on the result of a regular lottery drawn when a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003; a movable piece 2004a that is driven to enable the second starting opening 2004 to receive game balls depending on the result of the regular lottery; and a special winning opening 2005 that can receive game balls depending on either the result of a first or second special lottery drawn when a game ball is received in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004.

The front unit 2000 also includes a start port unit 2100 which is attached directly above the outlet 1126 in the center of the left-right direction within the play area 5a and has a first start port 2002 and a large prize port 2005; a lower side unit 2200 which is attached along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the start port unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has multiple general prize ports 2001; an upper side unit 2300 which is attached above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front; and a frame-shaped center device 2500 which is attached approximately in the center of the play area 5a and has a gate section 2003 and a second start port 2004.

The rear unit 3000 comprises a rear box 3010, which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and a locking mechanism 3020 attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 for detachably attaching the game board side performance display device 1600.

Furthermore, the rear unit 3000 includes a rear-left middle decorative unit 3050 attached to the front end of the rear box 3010, from the center upwards on the left side when viewed from the front; a rear-bottom rear movable performance unit 3100 attached below the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010 near the rear wall of the rear box 3010; a rear-upper-left movable performance unit 3200 attached above the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010 on the left side when viewed from the front; a rear-left movable performance unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010 when viewed from the front; a rear-upper-middle movable performance unit 3400 attached above the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010 from the center downwards to the right edge when viewed from the front; and a rear-bottom front movable performance unit 3500 attached below the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010 in front of the rear-bottom rear movable performance unit 3100.

[5-1. Front components]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 64 and 65. The front component 1000 has an approximately square outer shape in a front-to-back view, an approximately circular inner shape that penetrates in the front-to-back direction, and the inner periphery of the inner shape defines the outer periphery of the play area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end toward the left of the center in the front view to the upper right, passing the upper end of the center in the front view to the upper right; an inner rail 1002 that is disposed inside the front component 1000 approximately along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the front view to the upper left of the front view; and an out guide portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the play area 5a on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in a front view and slopes downward toward the rear.

The component 1000 also includes a lower right rail 1004 that slopes linearly from the right end of the out guide section 1003 when viewed from the front to near the right edge of the component 1000, with the right end being slightly higher; a right rail 1005 that extends from the right end of the lower right rail 1004 along the right edge of the component 1000 to below the upper end of the outer rail 1001, with the upper part curved inward of the component 1000; and a collision stop section 1006 that connects the upper end of the right rail 1005 to the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and comes into contact with a game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001.

The component 1000 also includes a backflow prevention member 1007 that is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and can rotate only between a closed position in which it extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 to close the gap between it and the outer rail 1001, and an open position in which it rotates clockwise when viewed from the front to open the gap between it and the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position.

Furthermore, the component 1000 has security recesses 1008 recessed rearward from the front end at the outside of the portions extending approximately perpendicularly from the lower ends of the outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002, the underside of the out guide portion 1003 and lower right rail 1004, and the outside of the right rail 1005. When the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4, the rear projection 202 protruding rearward from the security cover 200 on the door frame 3 is inserted into this security recess 1008. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is bent in a complex manner by the rear projection 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to insert an illegal tool such as piano wire into the game area 5a between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from below the front of the game board 5, the attempt will be blocked by the rear projection 202 and the security recess 1008, preventing the illegal tool from entering the game area 5a.

The front component 1000 also has multiple positioning protrusions 1009 that protrude rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. These positioning protrusions 1009 can be inserted into inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 to position and fix the inner rail 1002 to the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 has multiple mounting bosses 1010 that protrude rearward from the rear surface. The multiple mounting bosses 1010 can be inserted into mounting holes 1128 in the panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 to determine positioning relative to the panel holder 1120 (gaming panel 1100).

The component 1000 also has a notch 1011 cut upward from the bottom end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100, so that when the gaming board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and full ball guide path 862 of the lower full ball path unit 860 pass through these notches 1011 and 1127 and face forward.

[5-2. Game Panel]
Next, the gaming panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 61, 62, 64, 65, etc. The gaming panel 1100 comprises a flat panel board 1110 made of transparent synthetic resin and having an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110 and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and has a rear surface on which the back unit 3000 is attached.

The panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 is formed from a synthetic resin board such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic board such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel board 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1120 (gaming panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) to be able to sufficiently hold obstacle nails planted on the front surface or to attach the front unit 2000. In this example, the panel board 1110 is formed from a transparent synthetic resin board.

The panel board 1110 has an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the bottom end at the lowest point within the play area 5a. The panel board 1110 also has multiple openings 1112 that penetrate from front to back and are used to attach the front unit 2000.

The panel plate 1110 also has multiple fitting holes 1113, which are round holes located near the outer periphery and penetrate in the front-to-back direction, and an elongated hole 1114 located near the outer periphery in the lower left corner, which penetrates in the front-to-back direction and extends vertically. These fitting holes 1113 and elongated holes 1114 are located outside the play area 5a and are used to position the panel plate 1110 with respect to the panel holder 1120. The panel plate 1110 also has stepped engagement steps 1115, recessed at the front, on both ends of its upper and lower edges. These engagement steps 1115 are cut out approximately halfway through the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and, like the fitting holes 1113 and elongated holes 1114, are located outside the play area 5a and are used to engage and secure the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120.

The panel plate 1110 also has multiple inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed in a predetermined position by fitting and fixing the positioning protrusions 1009 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into these inner rail fixing holes 1116.

The panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 has a roughly rectangular outer shape large enough to encompass the panel board 1110, and is thicker than the panel board 1110 (approximately 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of synthetic resin (e.g., thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step 1121 that is recessed from the front side to the rear side and detachably holds the panel board 1110, and a through hole 1122 that penetrates in the front-to-rear direction inside the holding step 1121 and is approximately the same size as the gaming area 5a.

The holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120 has a depth from the front surface that is approximately the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110, so that the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step 1121 is approximately flush with the front surface of the panel holder 1120. Furthermore, the holding step 1121 is sized so that its front inner peripheral surface leaves a predetermined amount of clearance with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. This clearance allows the panel plate 1110 to absorb any expansion or contraction that occurs relative to the panel plate 1110 due to temperature changes or changes over time.

The panel holder 1120 is positioned corresponding to the fitting holes 1113 and elongated holes 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step 1121, extends forward from the front surface of the holding step 1121, and is equipped with a plurality of protruding pins 1123 that can be fitted into and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and elongated holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into and into the fitting holes 1113 and elongated holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned relative to each other.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an engagement claw 1124 and engagement piece 1125 that engage with the engagement step 1115 at a position corresponding to the engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. More specifically, the engagement claw 1124 is located at the top of the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engagement step 1115 on the panel plate 1110, protrudes forward from the front surface of the holding step 1121, and elastically engages with the engagement step 1115. The engagement claw 1124 is sized so that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

The engagement piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is located below the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120 and corresponds to the lower engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. This engagement piece 1125 extends a predetermined distance upward (towards the center) along the front surface of the panel holder 1120, leaving a gap between the front surface of the holding step 1121 that is large enough to allow the engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110 to be inserted. By engaging these engagement claws 1124 and engagement piece 1125 with the engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110, the panel plate 1110 is removably held to the panel holder 1120.

The panel holder 1120 also has an outlet 1126 that runs through from front to back at the lowest point within the play area 5a. The lower rear surface of the panel holder 1120 is recessed forward to the bottom end with the same width as the outlet 1126.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 has a notch 1127 cut upward from the bottom end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1127 coincides with the notch 1011 of the previous component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and full ball guide path 862 of the lower full ball path unit 860 pass through these notches 1011 and 1127 and face forward.

The panel holder 1120 also has multiple mounting holes 1128 that penetrate from front to back at positions corresponding to the multiple mounting bosses 1010 on the preceding component 1000. By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the preceding component 1000 into these multiple mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be attached to the rear side of the preceding component 1000, and the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) can be positioned between the preceding component 1000 and the panel holder 1120.

The panel holder 1120 also has a square insertion hole 1129 that penetrates in the front-to-rear direction above the cutout 1127. The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted through this insertion hole 1129.

When the gaming panel 1100 is attached to the rear of the preceding component 1000, the outlet 1126 of the panel holder 1120 opens to the rear of the out-guide section 1003 of the preceding component 1000. As a result, gaming balls that flow down to the bottom end of the gaming area 5a are guided by the out-guide section 1003 to the rear outlet 1126, and are discharged through the outlet 1126 to the rear of the gaming panel 1100.

[5-2a. Second embodiment of gaming panel]
Next, a gaming panel 1150 of an embodiment different from the gaming panel 1100 described above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of a gaming panel of a different form from that shown in FIG. 63, including the front components, the board holder, and the main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67, seen from the rear. This gaming panel 1150 is formed from a wood board material such as plywood of a predetermined thickness (e.g., 18 mm to 21 mm). This gaming panel 1150 is formed to the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 described above.

The gaming panel 1150 has an outer shape that is approximately the same as that of the previous component 1000. The gaming panel 1150 is provided with an outlet 1151 that penetrates in the front-to-rear direction at the bottom, approximately in the center in the left-to-right direction when viewed from the front, at a position corresponding to the outlet guide portion 1003 of the previous component 1000. The lower rear surface of the gaming panel 1150 is recessed forward to the bottom end with the same width as the outlet 1151.

The game panel 1150 also has a notch 1152 that penetrates horizontally in the front-to-back direction on the left side of the lower end when viewed from the front and is open downward, and has the same shape as the notch 1011 of the previous component 1000, and a square insertion hole 1153 that penetrates vertically above the notch 1152 and through which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

The gaming panel 1150 also has a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1154 that penetrate from front to back and are capable of fitting with the positioning protrusions 1009 that protrude rearward from the inner rail 1002 of the previous component 1000. The gaming panel 1150 also has a plurality of mounting holes 1155 that penetrate from front to back and are capable of fitting with the positioning protrusions 1009 that protrude rearward from the inner rail 1002 of the previous component 1000. By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the previous component 1000 into these mounting holes 1155, the gaming panel 1150 can be attached to the rear side of the previous component 1000 and the gaming panel 1150 can be positioned relative to the previous component 1000.

Furthermore, although not shown, the gaming panel 1150 is provided with multiple openings that run through it from front to back for attaching the front unit 2000, similar to the openings 1112 in the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 described above.

When the gaming panel 1150 is attached to the rear of the preceding component 1000, the outlet 1151 opens to the rear of the out-guide section 1003 of the preceding component 1000. As a result, gaming balls that flow down to the bottom end of the gaming area 5a are guided by the out-guide section 1003 to the rear outlet 1151, and are discharged through the outlet 1151 to the rear of the gaming panel 1150.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the board holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 64 and 65. The board holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box that is open at the top and front, and the bottom is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. When assembled to the gaming board 5, this board holder 1200 can cover from below the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100. This allows it to receive all gaming balls that are discharged to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 through the outlet 1126 and gaming balls that are discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and to discharge them downward from the discharge portion 1201 formed on the bottom surface.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 64 and 65. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. This main control unit 1300 comprises a main control board 1310 that controls the game content and the payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200.

The main control board box 1320 is equipped with multiple sealing mechanisms. When one sealing mechanism is used to close the main control board box 1320, that sealing mechanism must be destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320, leaving traces of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by examining the traces of opening and closing, unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be detected, providing an increased deterrent against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310.

In addition, the main control board box 1320 and the various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, and 3042 are all made of transparent materials so that they can be visually inspected from the outside. As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 and the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 are provided with surface mounting areas that have poor fraud prevention performance, and therefore it is important to ensure such transparency in order to obtain the various effects related to the fraud prevention measures described below.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 64 to 66. As shown in the figures, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. When the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the function display unit 1400 can be seen from the front (player's side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 (see Figure 66). This function display unit 1400 uses multiple LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game status (game situation), the results of the regular lottery, the results of the special lottery, etc.

As shown in FIG. 66, the function display unit 1400 comprises a status indicator 1401 consisting of one LED that displays the game status, a normal pattern indicator 1402 consisting of four LEDs that displays the normal lottery result drawn when a game ball passes through the gate section 2003, a normal hold indicator 1408 consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of holds related to the passage of a game ball through the gate section 2003, a first special pattern indicator 1403 consisting of eight LEDs that displays the first special lottery result drawn when a game ball is accepted into the first starting port 2002, and a normal symbol indicator 1409 consisting of eight LEDs that displays the number of holds related to the passage of a game ball through the gate section 2003. It mainly comprises a first special reserve number display 1404 consisting of two LEDs that displays the relevant reserve number; a second special pattern display 1405 consisting of eight LEDs that displays the second special lottery result drawn when game balls are received into the second starting port 2004; a second special reserve number display 1406 consisting of two LEDs that displays the reserve number related to the reception of game balls into the second starting port 2004; and a round display 1407 consisting of three LEDs that displays the number of times the opening and closing pattern of the big winning port 2005 is repeated (number of rounds) when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "jackpot" or the like.

This functional display unit 1400 can display the number of reserved items, designs, etc. by turning on, off, blinking, etc. the LEDs provided as appropriate.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to Fig. 62. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600, which is attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 comprises a peripheral control board 1510 that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 comprises a peripheral control unit for controlling light effects, sound effects, moving effects, etc., and an effect display control unit for controlling effect images.

[5-7. Game board side performance display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to Figures 61 and 62. The game board side effect display device 1600 is located in the center of the play area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the rear box 3010, approximately in the center. When the game board 5 is assembled, the game board side effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center role device 2500. The game board side effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device backlit by white LEDs, and is capable of displaying still images and videos.

The game board side effect display device 1600 has two left fixed pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side when viewed from the front, and a right fixed piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side when viewed from the front. With the LCD screen facing forward, the game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear box 3010 by inserting the two left fixed pieces 1601 from diagonally behind the rear box 3010 into two fixing grooves 3010c opening on the left inner surface when viewed from the front within the frame-shaped LCD mounting portion 3010b of the rear box 3010 (described below). The right fixed piece 1602 is then moved forward to insert the right fixed piece 1602 into the opening of the locking mechanism 3020, and the locking mechanism 3020 is then slid downward to attach the device to the rear box 3010.

[5-8. Table unit]
Next, the front unit 2000 will be described with reference to Figures 60 to 62. The front unit 2000 of the gaming board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 from the front, with its front end protruding forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and its rear end penetrating the opening 1112 and protruding rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

The front unit 2000 of this embodiment is equipped with a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open and can accept game balls shot into the game area 5a; a first starting opening 2002 that is always open and can accept game balls at a different position in the game area 5a from the plurality of general winning openings 2001; a gate unit 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of game balls; a second starting opening 2004 that can accept game balls depending on the result of a regular lottery that is drawn when a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003; and a special winning opening 2005 that can accept game balls depending on the result of a first or second special lottery that is drawn when a game ball is accepted into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004.

Multiple general winning openings 2001 are located at the bottom of the play area 5a. The first starting opening 2002 is located in the left-right center of the play area 5a, directly above the outlet 1126. The gate section 2003 is located in the upper right corner of the play area 5a when viewed from the front, approximately directly below the impact stop section 1006. The second starting opening 2004 is located directly below the gate section 2003, to the right when viewed from the front. The large winning opening 2005 is located between the first starting opening 2002 and the outlet 1126.

The front unit 2000 also includes a start port unit 2100 which is attached directly above the outlet 1126 in the center of the left-right direction within the play area 5a and has a first start port 2002 and a large prize port 2005; a lower side unit 2200 which is attached along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the start port unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has multiple general prize ports 2001; an upper side unit 2300 which is attached above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front; and a frame-shaped center device 2500 which is attached approximately in the center of the play area 5a and has a gate section 2003 and a second start port 2004.

The start opening unit 2100 is located within the game area 5a, directly above the outlet 1126, near the bottom end in the center of the left-right direction, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. This start opening unit 2100 has a first start opening 2002 that opens upward and is large enough to accept only one game ball at a time, and a large prize opening 2005 that extends left and right and is large enough to accept multiple game balls at a time (e.g., 4 to 6), and is configured to be able to open and close depending on the game status.

The lower side unit 2200 extends in an arc along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting hole unit 2100 within the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The lower side unit 2200 has multiple general winning holes 2001 that can always accept game balls.

The upper side unit 2300 is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front, slightly below the vertical center and above the left of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front, within the gaming area 5a. When the upper side unit 2300 is attached to the front of the panel board 1110, the left end of the shelf is close to the inner rail 1002, allowing gaming balls flowing down along the inner rail 1002 to be guided to the right (the horizontal center of the gaming area 5a).

The center device 2500 is located within the game area 5a, above the starting opening unit 2100 and the lower side unit 2200, and slightly above the center when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. The center device 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and through the frame, the game board side performance display device 1600 located behind the game panel 1100 and the performance units provided in the back unit 3000 can be seen from the front. The center device 2500 has a gate section 2003 and a second starting opening 2004.

The entire periphery of the frame-shaped center device 2500, excluding the bottom edge, protrudes forward beyond the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, preventing gaming balls shot into the gaming area 5a from entering the frame.

The center device 2500 is equipped with a warp entrance 2520 on the outer periphery on the left side when viewed from the front, which opens to allow game balls within the game area 5a to enter; a warp exit 2522 which opens into the frame and allows game balls that have entered the warp entrance 2520 to be released; and a stage 2530 which rolls game balls released from the warp exit 2522 in the left-right direction before releasing them into the game area 5a. A start opening unit 2100 is located directly below the stage 2530, and when a game ball is released downward from the center of the stage 2530, there is an extremely high probability that the game ball will be accepted by the first start opening 2002.

[5-9. Back unit]
Next, the rear unit 3000 of the game board 5 will be described with reference to Figures 60 to 62. The rear unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. In addition, a game board side effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the rear unit 3000.

The rear unit 3000 comprises a rear box 3010, which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and a box-like performance drive board box 3042, which is attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending left and right along the lower edge of the opening 3010a and which houses the performance drive board.

The rear unit 3000 also includes a rear-left middle decorative unit 3050 attached to the front end of the rear box 3010, from the center upwards on the left side when viewed from the front; a rear-bottom rear movable performance unit 3100 attached to the rear wall of the rear box 3010 below the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010; a rear-upper-left movable performance unit 3200 attached to the left side when viewed from the front, above the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010; a rear-left movable performance unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010 when viewed from the front; a rear-upper-middle movable performance unit 3400 attached above the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010, from the center left to the right edge when viewed from the front; and a rear-bottom front movable performance unit 3500 attached to the front of the rear-bottom rear movable performance unit 3100 below the opening 3010a inside the rear box 3010.

The rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000 is box-shaped and open at the front, with a square opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall, a flat frame-like LCD mounting section 3010b that protrudes rearward at a distance from the periphery of the opening 3010a, two fixing grooves 3010c recessed from the inside to the outside of the frame on the left side of the LCD mounting section 3010b when viewed from the rear, into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board-side performance display device 1600 is inserted, and a cutout 3010d cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the rear box 3010 in the vertical center of the right side of the LCD mounting section 3010b when viewed from the rear, into which the locking mechanism 3020 is attached.

The opening 3010a is formed to be approximately the same size as the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600. The LCD mounting portion 3010b is formed to be large enough to fit the game board side effect display device 1600 into the frame. A locking mechanism 3020 is attached to the rear box 3010 so that it can slide up and down, on the left side of the cutout portion 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from behind.

The rear box 3010 also has a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from its front end. This fixing piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 with its front surface abutting the rear surface of the panel holder 1120. The rear box 3010 has bosses and mounting holes formed in appropriate positions for attaching each movable performance unit, etc.

The back unit 3000 can perform lighting effects, movement effects, display effects, etc. by appropriately using the back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100, back top left movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect unit 3300, back top middle movable effect unit 3400, and back bottom front movable effect unit 3500, etc., allowing players to be entertained by various effects and preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

[6. Game Contents]
Next, the game content of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60 and other figures. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a player rotates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 located in the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3, causing game balls stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320 to pass between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and be shot into the upper part of the play area 5a, thereby starting a game using the game balls. The game balls shot into the upper part of the play area 5a flow down either the left or right side of the center device 2500 depending on the force of the shot. The force of the shot can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302. The more clockwise the rotation, the stronger the shot. A maximum of 100 game balls can be shot continuously per minute, i.e., at 0.6-second intervals.

In addition, within the game area 5a, multiple obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110).When the game ball comes into contact with the obstacle nails, the speed at which the game ball flows down is suppressed and various movements are imparted to the game ball, allowing players to enjoy watching those movements.In addition to the obstacle nails, within the game area 5a, windmills (not shown) that rotate when the game ball comes into contact with them are also provided at appropriate positions.

When a game ball is shot into the top of the center device 2500 and enters the left side of the highest part of the outer periphery of the center device 2500 when viewed from the front, it will come into contact with multiple obstacle nails (not shown) and flow down the area to the left of the center device 2500. Then, when the game ball flowing down the area to the left of the center device 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opening on the outer periphery of the center device 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp exit 2522.

Game balls supplied to stage 2530 roll back and forth on stage 2530 before being released forward. When a game ball is released into the game area 5a from the center of stage 2530, it is located directly above the first starting opening 2002, and therefore there is a high probability that it will be received by the first starting opening 2002. When a game ball is received by this first starting opening 2002, a predetermined number (e.g., three) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 onto the upper tray 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951.

When a game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from anywhere other than the center, it flows down toward the start opening unit 2100. A game ball released into the game area 5a from the stage 2530 of the center device 2500 may be received by the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100 or an open big prize opening 2005.

If a gaming ball that flows down to the left side of the center device 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it may be moved toward the center in the left-right direction by the upper side unit 2300 and accepted into the general winning opening 2001 or first starting opening 2002 of the lower side unit 2200. When a gaming ball is accepted into the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number of gaming balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951.

On the other hand, if a game ball is hit into the upper part of the center device 2500 within the game area 5a and enters to the right of the highest point on the outer periphery of the center device 2500 (i.e., hits to the right), it will flow down through an area downstream where the gate section 2003 and second starting port 2004 are located.

When the gaming ball hit to the right passes through the gate section 2003, a regular lottery is conducted on the main control board 1310, and if the result of the regular lottery is a "regular win," the second starting opening 2004 opens for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 to 10 seconds), allowing gaming balls to be received into the second starting opening 2004. When a gaming ball is received into the second starting opening 2004, a predetermined number of gaming balls (e.g., four) are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951.

In this embodiment, in the normal lottery, which is conducted when a gaming ball passes through the gate section 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the normal lottery result is indicated (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as the normal variation time). This indication of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the gaming board 5. The second starting gate 2004 opens after the normal variation time has elapsed.

Furthermore, if a gaming ball passes through gate unit 2003 between the time the gaming ball passes through gate unit 2003 and the time the normal lottery result is suggested, it is not possible to start suggesting the normal lottery result, so the start of suggesting the normal lottery result is postponed until the previous suggestion of the normal lottery result has finished. Furthermore, the number of reserved normal lottery results is limited to four, and any more than this are discarded rather than reserved, even if the gaming ball passes through gate unit 2003. This prevents the burden on the gaming parlor from increasing due to the accumulation of reserved results.

In this embodiment of the pachinko machine 1, when a gaming ball is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the main control board 1310 draws a special lottery result that will result in a favorable gaming state for the player (e.g., a "jackpot," "medium jackpot," "small jackpot," "probability-changing jackpot," "time-shortened jackpot," etc.). The drawn special lottery result is then indicated to the player over a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as the special variable time). The special lottery results that are drawn when a gaming ball is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 include a "miss," a "small jackpot," a "2R jackpot," a "5R jackpot," a "15R jackpot," a "probability-changing jackpot," a "time-shortened jackpot," a "probability-shortened jackpot," a "win without time-shortened jackpot," etc.

If the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by the acceptance of game balls into the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 is a special lottery result that generates a favorable game state, the large prize opening 2005 will be able to accept game balls in a predetermined opening/closing pattern after the special variable time has elapsed. When a game ball is accepted into the large prize opening 2005 while it is in the open state, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 will cause a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 or 13) to be paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321. Therefore, by accepting game balls into the large prize opening 2005 when it is able to accept game balls, a large number of game balls can be paid out, providing enjoyment to the player.

If the result of the special lottery is a "small win," the large prize opening 2005 repeats an opening/closing pattern multiple times (e.g., twice) in which it opens to a state where it can accept game balls for a predetermined short time (e.g., between 0.2 and 0.6 seconds) and then closes. On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a "big win," after the large prize opening 2005 opens to a state where it can accept game balls, and one of the following conditions is met: a predetermined time (e.g., approximately 30 seconds) has elapsed, or a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10) have been received by the large prize opening 2005, the opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) in which it closes to a state where it cannot accept game balls is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, a "2R jackpot" will repeat two rounds, a "5R jackpot" will repeat five rounds, and a "15R jackpot" will repeat 15 rounds, creating an advantageous gaming state for the player.

In addition, after the jackpot game ends, there are "hits" that change the probability of a special lottery result such as a "jackpot" being drawn ("probable hit"), or that change the display time of the effect image suggesting the special lottery result ("time-saving hit").

In this embodiment, if game balls are received into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 between the start of the special lottery due to the reception of game balls into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and the time when the special lottery result is indicated, the indication of the special lottery result cannot begin. Therefore, the start of the indication of the special lottery result is suspended until the indication of the previously drawn special lottery result is completed. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. For any number more than this, the special lottery result is not reserved but discarded even if game balls are received into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. This prevents the burden on the gaming facility from increasing due to the accumulation of reserved results.

The special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side performance display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the special lottery result. The function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off multiple LEDs and flashing them for a predetermined period of time, after which the combination of lit LEDs suggests the special lottery result.

Meanwhile, the game board side effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and suggests the special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 displays three symbol rows consisting of multiple symbols lined up horizontally, and then varies each symbol row, causing the variable symbol rows to be displayed in a stopped state in sequence, and each of the three stopped symbol rows is displayed in a stopped state so that the symbols in the three stopped symbol rows form a combination that corresponds to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than a "lose," after the three symbol rows have stopped and each symbol is displayed in a stopped state, a confirmation image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and a favorable game state (e.g., small win game, big win game, etc.) corresponding to the special lottery result is generated.

The time for which the special lottery result is indicated on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) is different from the time for which the special lottery result is indicated on the game board side performance display device 1600 (the time from when the pattern row changes until the final image is displayed), with the time for which it is indicated on the function display unit 1400 being set to be longer.

In addition to displaying effect images suggesting the results of the special lottery using the game board side effect display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 can also use the operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3, the door frame side effect display device 460, the various decorations of the center role device 2500, the various decorations of the back unit 3000, the back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100, the back top left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back top middle movable effect unit 3400, and the back bottom front movable effect unit 3500, etc., as appropriate, to perform light-emitting effects, movable effects, display effects, etc., depending on the results of the special lottery. This allows players to be entertained by various effects, and prevents a decline in the player's interest in the game.

In this way, with the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 attached to the front of the tray unit 320 that bulges forward in the door frame 3 is viewed from the outside, the player can see decorations that are full of perspective and never before seen, such as decorations where the first button decoration portion 411a overlaps with the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432, and decorations where the first button decoration portion 411a overlaps with the door frame side effect display device 460. This strongly attracts the player's attention, making it a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can be differentiated from other pachinko machines.

In addition, the operation button interior decorative member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are positioned in the direction of movement of the button lens 411 (operation button 410), and the button lens 411 is supported by the unit base 431 so that it can be moved by the player's operation. Therefore, when the player operates (presses) the button lens 411 to move it, the first button interior decorative member 411a and the second button interior decorative member 432g move closer to or farther apart. This changes the distance between the first button interior decorative member 411a and the second button interior decorative member 432g, changing the sense of perspective of the decoration in which the first button interior decorative member 411a and the second button interior decorative member 432g appear to overlap. This allows the player to change the decoration (intersection pattern) of the first button interior decorative member 411a and the second button interior decorative member 432g, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, because the center of the button lens 411 bulges outward, opposite the operation button interior decorative element 432, a space is formed between them. As a result, when viewed from the player's perspective, there is a greater difference between the distance from the button lens 411 to the first button decorative element 411a and the distance from the operation button interior decorative element 432 to the second button interior decorative element 432g. Even when the button lens 411 is not being moved by operation, as the player's eyes move, the intersection pattern (degree of overlap) between the first button decorative element 411a and the second button interior decorative element 432g changes, presenting the player with a dynamic decoration that strongly attracts the player's attention.

Furthermore, the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 is equipped with a first button decoration 411a with a radial decoration pointing toward the center, so the inner operation button decoration element 432 at the back and the door frame side performance display device 460 can be clearly seen through the center side of the button lens 411 where the first button decoration element 411a is not equipped. The radial decoration of the first button decoration element 411a also draws the player's gaze toward the center of the button lens 411, strongly drawing the player's attention to the inner operation button decoration element 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460 through the center of the transparent button lens 411.

In addition, the operation button interior decorative member 432 is equipped with a second button interior decorative portion 432g having multiple polygonal decorations in a concentric pattern centered on the center. Therefore, when viewed from the outside, the decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 and the decoration of the second button interior decorative portion 432g of the operation button interior decorative member 432 intersect with each other, reliably creating a sense of perspective between the decorations of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decorative portion 432g. This makes the decorations of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decorative portion 432g stand out, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, the decoration of the second button interior decorative portion 432g of the operation button interior decorative member 432 is designed to have multiple polygonal decorations in a concentric circle centered at the center. This allows the decoration of the second button interior decorative portion 432g to draw the player's gaze and attention to the door frame side performance display device 460, which can be seen in the center of the operation button interior decorative member 432, allowing the player to enjoy the decoration (performance image) of the door frame side performance display device 460.

Furthermore, when the LEDs mounted on the left operation button interior decorative board 433, the right operation button interior decorative board 434, the upper operation button interior decorative board 435, and the lower operation button interior decorative board 436 are illuminated, the light can be used to illuminate and decorate the operation button interior decorative member 432, and the button lens 411 can also be illuminated and decorated, so that in addition to the decoration of the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button interior decorative portion 432g, players can also be entertained by the illuminated decoration. At this time, the second button interior decorative portion 432g can diffuse the light from each LED of the operation button left interior decorative substrate 433, the operation button right interior decorative substrate 434, the operation button upper interior decorative substrate 435, and the operation button lower interior decorative substrate 436. Therefore, the second button interior decorative portion 432g is illuminated and decorated by direct light from each LED of the operation button left interior decorative substrate 433, the operation button right interior decorative substrate 434, the operation button upper interior decorative substrate 435, and the operation button lower interior decorative substrate 436, whereas the first button decorative portion 411a is illuminated and decorated by direct light from each LED of the operation button left interior decorative substrate 433, the operation button right interior decorative substrate 434, the operation button upper interior decorative substrate 435, and the operation button lower interior decorative substrate 436. The illumination is achieved by indirect light, with the second button interior decorative portion 432g being strongly illuminated and the first button interior decorative portion 411a being weakly illuminated. Therefore, when the LEDs on the left operation button interior decorative board 433, right operation button interior decorative board 434, upper operation button interior decorative board 435, and lower operation button interior decorative board 436 are illuminated, when the first button interior decorative portion 411a and second button interior decorative portion 432g are viewed from the outside, the player will see decorations that emphasize the sense of perspective, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing and strongly attracts the player's attention.

Furthermore, because the decorative element 432 inside the operation button is positioned in the direction in which the button lens 411 moves, there is no need to reserve space outside the outer periphery of the button lens 411 or the decorative element 432 inside the operation button for the button lens 411 to move. This allows the button lens 411 and the decorative element 432 to be spread outward and made as large as possible, and this larger size makes the button lens 411 and the decorative element 432 stand out. Furthermore, as mentioned above, because there is no need to reserve space outside the button lens 411 for movement, by placing the frame unit 415 outside the button lens 411, the decorativeness of the entire pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that looks good and is highly appealing and attracts the attention of players.

Furthermore, because the center of the button lens 411 bulges outward, when a player hits the button lens 411 or applies impact to part of its surface, the force of the impact is more easily dispersed across the entire button lens 411 than if the button lens 411 were flat, making the button lens 411 less likely to break (be damaged). Therefore, damage to the button lens 411 during play can be prevented, which can cause the game to be interrupted and, depending on the player, can be frustrating and reduce interest. In addition, because the button lens 411 is less likely to be damaged, an increase in the burden on the gaming parlor that installs this pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the door frame 3 allows the playing area 5a of the playing board 5 arranged within the main frame 4 to be visible from the front through the through-hole 111. The door frame 3 is attached to the tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320, which bulges forward below the through-hole 111, and the operation button 410, which is circular and approximately 15 cm in diameter and within the range of 10 cm to 30 cm, and which can be moved (advanced and retreated) by the player when operated, is attached to the unit base 431 of the performance operation unit 400. Since the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the door frame side performance display device 460 that can be seen from the front through the lens 411, and the frame-shaped frame unit 415 in which the operation button 410 is arranged within the frame are attached, the performance operation unit 400 having the largest possible operation button 410 can be seen in a position where the game ball storage tray would be prominent in a conventional pachinko machine, so that players can recognize at a glance that this is different from conventional pachinko machines, making it a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal. The frame unit 415 is provided with a translucent frame side lens 417, and a translucent second button decorative part 411b is provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) adjacent to the frame side lens 417. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 behind the frame side lens 417 and the second button decorative part 411b. First LEDs 422a and 423a are provided for illuminating and decorating the second button decorative part 411b, and second LEDs 422b and 423b are provided for illuminating and decorating the frame side lens 417. The frame main body 416 includes an inner cylindrical portion 416d that separates the frame side lens 417 from the center of the button lens 411, and a main body 413a and inner extension 413f that separate the second button decorative portion 411b from the center of the button lens 411. The inner cylindrical portion 416d, main body 413a, and inner extension 413f prevent light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a from illuminating the frame side lens 417 or the center of the button lens 411, and prevent light from the second LEDs 422b, 423b from illuminating the second button decorative portion 411b. This allows the adjacent frame side lens 417 and second button decorative portion 411b to be illuminated and decorated independently. This allows the frame side lens 417 and second button decorative portion 411b to be illuminated and decorated clearly, producing a visually appealing illumination effect. Furthermore, by appropriately combining the off, on, flashing, brightness, color, etc. of the adjacent frame side lens 417 and second button decorative portion 411b, it is possible to create a variety of light-emitting patterns, which prevents players from getting bored and keeps them entertained, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the first LEDs 422a, 423a that illuminate and decorate the second button decorative part 411b of the operation button 410 and the second LEDs 422b, 423b that illuminate and decorate the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are provided on a single operation button left outer decorative board 422 and operation button right outer decorative board 423, and the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431.Therefore, compared to when a board is provided on the second button decorative part 411b (operation button 410), the first LEDs 422a, 423a can be placed as far away as possible from the second button decorative part 411b, and the light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a can be irradiated onto the second button decorative part 411b in a sufficiently diffused state. Therefore, the second button decorative portion 411b can be uniformly illuminated, improving the appearance of the illuminated decoration of the second button decorative portion 411b and the frame side lens 417, strongly attracting the player's attention and entertaining them, and preventing a decline in the player's interest.

Furthermore, because the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and the right operation button outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431, the wiring connected to the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and the right operation button outer decorative board 423 does not bend or stretch as the operation button 410 moves back and forth, eliminating the risk of the wiring breaking due to fatigue. Therefore, even when the operation button 410 (second button decorative part 411b) is moved, the wiring does not break, so players can enjoy the movement (operation) of the operation button 410 and the illuminated decoration of the frame side lens 417 and second button decorative part 411b without any problems, preventing a decline in player interest.

In addition, since a second button decorative part 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, when the rear operation button internal decorative part 432 and door frame side performance display device 460 are viewed through the transparent button lens 411, the second button decorative part 411b decorates the outer edges of the operation button internal decorative part 432 and door frame side performance display device 460, thereby improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, by appropriately illuminating the first LEDs 422a, 423a and second LEDs 422b, 423b, the second button decorative portion 411b and frame side lens 417 that decorate the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411, from which the operation button interior decorative member 432 and door frame side performance display device 460 can be seen to the rear, can be illuminated and decorated in a variety of patterns, as described above. This strongly draws the player's attention to the operation button 410 and door frame side performance display device 460, allowing the player to enjoy the illuminated performances, the operation of the operation button 410, and the performance images displayed by the door frame side performance display device 460, preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the button lens 411 (operation button 410), which is equipped with a second button decoration 411b on its outer edge, can be operated by the player. By having the player operate the operation button 410 while a player-participation effect is being executed, the player can enjoy operating the operation button 410 (player-participation effect), preventing the player's interest in the game from declining. Furthermore, by illuminating the second button decoration 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 during execution of a player-participation effect, the player's attention can be drawn to the operation button 410, encouraging the player to operate the operation button 410 and allowing the player to participate in and enjoy the player-participation effect.

Furthermore, because the opaque main body 413a and inner extension 413f allow only the second button decoration 411b of the operation button 410 to be illuminated by the first LEDs 422a, 423a, the portion of the operation button 410 closer to the center than the second button decoration 411b is not illuminated by the first LEDs 422a, 423a. This prevents the central portion of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) from being brightened, making it difficult to see the operation button interior decoration 432 and door frame side display device 460 located behind it from the front. Therefore, the second button decoration 411b can be illuminated in good condition, and the operation button interior decoration 432 and door frame side display device 460 located behind it can be clearly seen through the transparent button lens 411, allowing players to fully enjoy the decorations and illumination effects, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, since the inner tube portion 416d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 equipped with the frame side lens 417, the inner tube portion 416d can completely separate the frame side lens 417 and the second button decorative portion 411b of the operating button 410 at the rear side of the frame unit 415. Meanwhile, at the rear end (rear end) of the inner tube 416d closest to the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and the right operation button outer decorative board 423, the rear end of the inner tube 416d is closer to the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and the right operation button outer decorative board 423 than the diffusion range of light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b. Therefore, even if a gap is formed between the front of the left operation button outer decorative board 422 and the right operation button outer decorative board 423, light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a will not illuminate the frame side lens 417, and light from the second LEDs 422b, 423b will not illuminate the second button decorative part 411b. Therefore, the inner tube 416d can reliably block light, realizing a pachinko machine 1 that reliably achieves the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, because the main body 413a and inner extension 413f of the button base 413 extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411), the main body 413a and inner extension 413f completely separate the second button decorative portion 411b and the center of the button lens 411 at the rear of the operation button 410. Meanwhile, the end (rear end) of the main body 413a closest to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 extends further rearward than the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423. Therefore, light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a does not pass through the rear end of the main body 413a, completely blocking light from penetrating the center of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410. Therefore, the first LEDs 422a, 423a can illuminate and decorate the second button decoration 411b in good condition, and the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460 can be clearly seen through the transparent button lens 411, allowing players to fully enjoy the decorations and illumination effects and preventing a decline in interest in the game.

When viewed from the front, the second button decoration 411b is located in front of the outer portion of the operation button interior decorative member 432 located behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411). This makes it difficult for the second button decoration 411b to see the components on the outside and rear (back) side of the operation button interior decorative member 432 through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decorative member 432, preventing a deterioration in the appearance of the operation button 410. Furthermore, when the second button decoration 411b is illuminated and decorated by the first LEDs 422a, 423a, the outside and rear side of the operation button interior decorative member 432 become relatively dark compared to the brightness of the second button decoration 411b, making it difficult to see the components on the outside and rear side of the operation button interior decorative member 432. This makes it possible to further improve the appearance of the operation buttons 410, frame unit 415, operation button interior decorative members 432, and door frame side performance display device 460, thereby preventing a decline in the player's interest.

Furthermore, because the outer periphery of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button ornament 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) and the frame side lens 417 adjacent to the second button ornament 411b form an arc-like extension. Therefore, by appropriately illuminating the first LEDs 422a, 423a and second LEDs 422b, 423b, the player can see illumination effects such as light circling the outer edge of the operation button 410, light spreading from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410, and light converging from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410. This diverse illumination effect keeps players from getting bored, keeps players entertained, and prevents a decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, an upper tray 321 is attached to the tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320 in the door frame 3, on which stored game balls are shot into the game area 5a and used for game play, and a presentation operation unit 400 is detachably attached to the front and below the upper tray 321, forming the remaining space of the mounting space 326j of a predetermined size behind the presentation operation unit 400, and a portion corresponding to the lower tray first area A1 of the lower tray main body 325 is positioned on the left side of the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and a portion corresponding to the lower tray second area A2 of the lower tray main body 325 is extended from that portion into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j to attach the lower tray 322 capable of storing game balls.As a result, the lower tray 322 appears smaller when viewed from the front, making the lower tray 322 less noticeable and making the presentation operation unit 400 relatively more noticeable. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the performance operation unit 400 is visible in the position where the upper and lower trays are visible lined up one above the other in conventional pachinko machines, allowing players to recognize at a glance that this is different from conventional pachinko machines, making it a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract players' attention.

In addition, in the lower tray second area A2 portion of the lower tray main body 325 of the lower tray 322, lower tray covers 340, 340A extend upward from the upper end of the main body upright wall portion 325b, which extends upward from the outer periphery, and restrict the movement of game balls toward the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. This prevents game balls in the lower tray 322 from contacting the rear side of the presentation operation unit 400, and prevents game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 or game balls stored in the lower tray 322 from abutting or pressing against the rear side of the presentation operation unit 400. As a result, game balls will not abut the rear side of the presentation operation unit 400, and the rear side of the presentation operation unit 400 will not be damaged by game balls. This prevents a loss of interest for players due to interruptions in play caused by damage to the presentation operation unit 400, and also reduces the burden on the gaming parlor where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, the lower tray second area A2 on the lower tray body 325 of the lower tray 322 is equipped with the main body upright wall portion 325b and lower tray covers 340, 340A that restrict the movement of game balls toward the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, thereby preventing game balls from entering (spilling) from the lower tray body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling like they have lost money or are feeling uncomfortable due to game balls entering the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, because the lower tray covers 340, 340A cover the lower tray second area A2 portion of the lower tray main body 325 on the lower tray 322, even if a game ball supplied into the lower tray 322 bounces up within the lower tray 322, it can be reliably prevented from entering the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, thereby reliably achieving the above-mentioned effect. In addition, because the lower tray covers 340, 340A cover the lower tray second area A2 portion of the lower tray main body 325, when a player inserts their hand into the lower tray second area A2 portion from the lower tray first area A1 side (lower tray opening 326d) of the lower tray main body 325, the lower tray covers 340, 340A can prevent fingertips, etc. from entering the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, thereby preventing fingertips, etc. from touching the underside of the upper tray 321 or the back side of the performance operation unit 400, etc., and causing injury, allowing the player to play in a safe environment.

Furthermore, because there is a gap between the lower tray covers 340, 340A and the performance operation unit 400, even if impacts or pressure caused by a game ball hitting the lower tray covers 340, 340A are applied, these are not transmitted from the lower tray covers 340, 340A to the performance operation unit 400, thereby reliably preventing damage to the performance operation unit 400.

In addition, the lower tray second area A2 on the lower tray body 325 of the lower tray 322 is provided with a lower tray ball removal hole 322a in front of the lower tray ball supply port 323c.When the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is open, game balls released from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can enter the lower tray ball removal hole 322a directly and be discharged downward (to the cash box), making it difficult for the game ball to reach the front end side of the main body vertical wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325.Even if the game ball flies over the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, the lower tray covers 340, 340A as described above can prevent the game ball from hitting the rear side of the presentation operation unit 400, preventing damage to the presentation operation unit 400, reducing game interruptions and preventing a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower tray main body 325 near the front end of the lower tray 322 becomes higher as it moves forward, so that game balls heading toward the front end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray main body 325 climb the inclined bottom surface, thereby attenuating the speed at which the game balls move. Therefore, the speed of game balls that come into contact with the lower tray covers 340, 340A can be slowed down, so the lower tray covers 340, 340A can reliably restrict the game balls from moving toward the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and also reduce the impact when the game ball comes into contact with the lower tray covers 340, 340A or the main body standing wall portion 325b, thereby preventing them from being damaged.

Furthermore, because at least the lower tray covers 340, 340A are separate components, if the lower tray covers 340, 340A are damaged, they can be easily repaired by simply replacing the lower tray covers 340, 340A, thereby reducing the burden on the gaming parlor that installs this pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where games are played such as receiving game balls into the general winning port 2001, etc., a tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320 is provided, which bulges furthest forward in the left-right center of the front, and a presentation operation unit 400 is detachably attached to the most forward-bulging part, and the tray unit cover 326 is provided with a storage tray consisting of an upper tray 321 and a lower tray 322 that can store game balls, and the storage trays (upper tray 321 and lower tray 322) have a lower tray first area A1 located outside the presentation operation unit 400 when viewed from the front, and a lower tray second area A2 located in the space at the rear of the mounting space 326j that is behind the presentation operation unit 400 when viewed from the front. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the presentation operation unit 400 can be made to stand out, and the storage trays (upper tray 321 and lower tray 322) can be made to appear smaller and less noticeable. Therefore, because the conspicuous presentation operation unit 400 is visible in the area where the upper and lower trays are visible in conventional pachinko machines, players can immediately recognize that this is a gaming machine that is different from conventional pachinko machines, making it possible to create a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that is able to strongly attract the player's attention.

In addition, because the presentation operation unit 400 is attached to the center of the front of the tray unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the area on the surface of the tray unit cover 326 where the lower tray 322 is open is small. However, because the lower tray main body 325 has the first extension section 325B, the second extension section 325C, and the lower tray covers 340, 340A, which have the lower tray second area A2 located in the rear space of the mounting space 326j, which is behind the presentation operation unit 400 when viewed from the front, it is possible to store game balls in an area of the lower tray 322 that cannot be seen from the front (lower tray second area A2). Therefore, despite its appearance from the front, a sufficient amount of game balls can be stored, allowing players to concentrate on playing without worrying about the number of game balls remaining in the lower tray 322, allowing them to enjoy the game and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, the lower tray 322 is formed by attaching (combining) the lower tray cover 340, 340A and the first extension part 325B and the second extension part 325C, which have the lower tray second area A2, to the lower tray main body 325 or main body part 325A, which have the lower tray first area A1.Therefore, by preparing multiple lower tray covers 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B and the second extension part 325C, etc. of different sizes in advance and attaching the lower tray cover 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B and the second extension part 325C of a size that corresponds to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the width of the mounting space 326j within the tray unit cover 326, the volume of the lower tray 322 can be optimized. Furthermore, as described above, by rearranging (replacing) the lower tray covers 340, 340A and the first and second extensions 325B and 325C, it is possible to accommodate the size of the space at the rear of the mounting space 326j. Because the size of this space at the rear depends on the amount of rearward protrusion of the performance operation unit 400, the lower tray 322 can be made to accommodate various performance operation units 400 with different amounts of rearward protrusion, thereby increasing the versatility of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the lower tray 322 has a bottom wall portion 325a and a main body upright wall portion 325b that rises from the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall portion 325a, so that the lower tray 322 has a container-like shape that is recessed downward, allowing game balls to be securely stored. Furthermore, the lower tray covers 340, 340A have a cover upright wall portion 340a that rises from the upper end of the main body upright wall portion 325b of the lower tray main body 325. Therefore, by preparing lower tray covers 340, 340A of various shapes in advance and combining (attaching) lower tray covers 340, 340A of shapes that correspond to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size (shape) of the space behind the mounting space 326j, it is possible to accommodate a variety of shapes and achieve the same effects as those described above.

In addition, the lower tray 322 is composed of the lower tray main body 325 and the lower tray covers 340, 340A. The lower tray covers 340, 340A are combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body upright wall portion 325b of the lower tray main body 325. Therefore, the portion of the lower tray 322 where the game balls are placed is the lower tray main body 325. Therefore, the boundary (seam, dividing line PL) between the lower tray main body 325 and the lower tray covers 340, 340A is not located in the portion where the weight of a large number of game balls is applied due to storage. Therefore, since the weight of the stored game balls is borne only by the lower tray main body 325, no force is exerted that would pull the lower tray covers 340, 340A away from the lower tray main body 325, even if a large number of game balls are stored, and the lower tray covers 340, 340A can be prevented from coming off the lower tray main body 325.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, an upper tray 321 and a lower tray 322 capable of storing game balls are provided below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 where games are played such as receiving game balls into the general winning port 2001, etc., and the performance operation unit 400 located in the center left-right direction makes more than half of the lower tray 322, including the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a in the lower tray 322, difficult to see (makes it hard to see) from the front (player).This gives the pachinko machine 1 a neat and attractive appearance, making it a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the attention of players. Furthermore, the performance operation unit 400 makes it difficult to see the game balls moving from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, making it difficult for players to notice the flow of game balls within the lower tray 322, preventing them from becoming distracted and minimizing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, the presentation operation unit 400 makes it difficult to see the gaming balls being guided by guidance means such as the ball guide section 322c and buffer section 322d in the area between the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a on the bottom of the lower tray 322, which guides the gaming balls from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray ball removal hole 322a. Therefore, if the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is left open, the gaming balls supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c are guided by the guidance means and smoothly (instantly) ejected downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, giving the player the illusion that the gaming balls are being ejected below the lower tray 322 (to the cash box) without passing through the lower tray 322. This makes it less likely for the player to feel the annoyance of the gaming balls passing through the lower tray 322, allowing the player to concentrate on the game and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, because the performance operation unit 400 makes more than half of the lower tray 322, including the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, difficult to see from the front, it is likely that the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are located behind the performance operation unit 400. In other words, because more than half of the lower tray 322 wraps around to the rear of the performance operation unit 400, the actual size (capacity) of the lower tray 322 is larger than the size of the lower tray 322 as it appears from the front, and therefore it is possible to ensure a sufficient amount of game balls can be stored in the lower tray 322 compared to its appearance.

Furthermore, when the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a is open, game balls released into the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can be smoothly guided to the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a by guide means such as the area between the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a on the bottom of the lower tray 322, the ball guide section 322c, and the buffer section 322d, and discharged below the lower tray 322 (dollar box). This prevents game balls from circulating within the lower tray 322, and ensures that game balls circulating within the lower tray 322 are difficult to see from the front (player). This makes it difficult for players to notice the flow of game balls within the lower tray 322, preventing players from becoming distracted and suppressing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, if the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a is left open, game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can be instantly ejected downward from the lower tray ball ejection hole 322a using the ball guide section 322c, etc., without the player noticing, giving the player the illusion that the game balls are being ejected below the lower tray 322 (to the cash box) without passing through the lower tray 322. This makes it less likely for the player to feel annoyed by the game balls passing through the lower tray 322, allowing the player to concentrate on the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the performance operation unit 400 makes more than half of the game ball storage area (storage area) of the lower tray 322 in a plan view difficult to see from the front. Therefore, the actual size of the lower tray 322 is more than twice the size that appears from the front, ensuring a sufficient amount of game ball storage, just like the lower trays of conventional pachinko machines.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a presentation operation unit mounting portion 326a for mounting a large presentation operation unit 400 of the same height as the overall height of the plate unit cover 326 is provided at the center of the left-right direction on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, which bulges forward when viewed from the front below the playing area 5a of the playing board 5 where games such as receiving game balls into the general winning port 2001 are played.In addition, the plate front lower decorative portion 326c, which is located on both the left and right sides of the presentation operation unit mounting portion 326a on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 and is lower than approximately the center in the up-down direction, has a recessed shape that is carved out toward the rear, so that the presentation operation unit 400 mounted on the presentation operation unit mounting portion 326a appears to protrude significantly forward, making the presentation operation unit 400 stand out. Therefore, in the position where the upper and lower trays are seen lined up one above the other in conventional pachinko machines, the large presentation operation unit 400 is seen in an emphasized state, allowing players to recognize at a glance that this is different from conventional pachinko machines, resulting in a highly appealing pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, the lower tray 322 is recessed rearward from the tray front lower decorative portion 326c, which is recessed rearward on both the left and right outer sides of the presentation operation unit 400 on the front of the tray unit cover 326, and a portion of it wraps around to the rear of the presentation operation unit 400, ensuring a sufficient amount of game balls can be stored in the lower tray 322 (the volume of the lower tray 322). This means that players do not have to worry about the lower tray 322 becoming full of game balls while playing, allowing them to concentrate on playing, enjoying the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, because a portion of the lower tray 322 wraps around behind the performance operation unit 400, when a player places their hand inside the lower tray 322 from the front, their fingertips are less likely to touch the rear wall of the lower tray 322 (the front surface of the tray unit base 323), the lower tray cover 340, etc. This allows the player to recognize by touch that there is a sufficient amount of game balls stored, and when game balls are stored in the lower tray 322, they are able to recognize that there are many game balls stored in the lower tray 322, which gives the player a sense of satisfaction, allows the player to enjoy the game, and prevents a decline in interest. In addition, because the fingertips of a hand placed in the lower tray 322 are less likely to touch the rear wall of the lower tray 322 or the lower tray cover 340, etc., the player is given the same sensation as the lower tray in a conventional pachinko machine, which reduces the sense of discomfort felt by players accustomed to conventional pachinko machines, puts the player at ease, and prevents a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, because the lower tray 322 is formed so that it becomes wider as it goes towards the back (rear), it is possible to ensure a sufficient amount of storage for game balls even if the front is small. In other words, because the front end portion of the lower tray 322 is small, it is possible to make the lower tray 322 less noticeable on the front surface of the tray unit cover 326 where the lower tray 322 opens (the tray front lower decorative portion 326c), and in comparison, it is possible to make the presentation operation unit 400 more noticeable. Therefore, it is possible to provide a presentation operation unit 400 while ensuring a sufficient amount of storage for game balls in the lower tray 322, which increases the appeal to players and entertains them, preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the lower tray cover 340 covers the sides and top of the part of the lower tray 322 that wraps around to the rear of the performance operation unit 400, so when a player puts their hand inside the lower tray 322, their fingertips are prevented from touching the inner surface of the tray unit cover 326 or the rear of the performance operation unit 400, preventing injury, allowing the player to play in a safe environment. In addition, the lower tray cover 340 prevents game balls from entering (spilling out of) the lower tray 322 into the tray unit cover 326.

Furthermore, because the presentation operation unit 400 is positioned in the center of the left-right direction on the front of the tray unit cover 326, the presentation operation unit 400 is more visible to the player, making the pachinko machine 1 more appealing and able to strongly attract the player's attention. The decorations provided by the presentation operation unit 400 are also more visible, allowing players to enjoy the decorations and presentations provided by the presentation operation unit 400 and preventing a decline in player interest.

In addition, the lower tray 322 is equipped with a lower tray ball supply port 323c that can communicate with the upper tray 321, and a lower tray ball removal hole 322a that penetrates vertically and can be opened and closed, providing the same functions as the lower tray in conventional pachinko machines. Therefore, players familiar with conventional pachinko machines will not be confused by the function of the lower tray 322 when playing this pachinko machine 1, and can play in the same manner as before, allowing the player to concentrate on the game and enjoy it. Furthermore, because the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are each located behind the performance operation unit 400, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are not visible to the player when viewed from the front, giving the pachinko machine 1 a neat and attractive appearance and resulting in a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that is capable of strongly attracting players' attention.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, an operation button interior decorative member 432 that decorates the outside of the door frame side performance display device 460 that can present performances to the player is attached to the base unit 430 of the performance operation unit 400, which is attached to the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward below the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 that faces the game area 5a in the door frame 3. Also, a transparent button lever 432 with an outer diameter of approximately 15 cm and a center that bulges outward away from the base unit 430 is attached to the outer periphery of the operation button interior decorative member 432. The operation button 410 has a lens 411 attached, and the outer periphery of the button lens 411 is provided with a first button decorative portion 411a, a second button decorative portion 411b, and a button frame 412. The button base 413 protrudes from the button lens 411 toward the base unit 430. This reduces visibility of the outer edge and rear (back) of the operation button interior decorative portion 432 through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decorative portion 432, improving the appearance of the operation button 410. This further improves the appearance of the operation button 410, the operation button interior decorative portion 432 provided inside, and the door frame-side display device 460, preventing a decline in player interest.

Furthermore, the first button decorative portion 411a, second button decorative portion 411b, button frame 412, and button base 413 of the operation button 410 make it difficult to see the outer edge and rear side of the operation button interior decorative portion 432 through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decorative portion 432. Therefore, even if the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decorative portion 432 becomes relatively large by increasing the outer diameter of the operation button 410, it can be well hidden by the first button decorative portion 411a, etc., preventing a deterioration in appearance and making it possible to easily realize a large operation button 410 (button lens 411) with an outer diameter of approximately 15 cm. Therefore, because the operation button 410 and the door frame-side performance display device 460 can be enlarged, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out, strongly attracting player attention and becoming a highly appealing pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, since the button base 413 (main body 413a) is provided, protruding cylindrically from the button lens 411 side toward the base unit 430 side, when the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decorative member 432 is viewed obliquely, the inner wall of the button base 413 can shield and make invisible anything outside the operation button internal decorative member 432, further improving the appearance of the operation button 410.

Furthermore, because the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional (hemispherical) shape that bulges outward (away from) the base unit 430, the surface near the outer edge of the button lens 411 is tilted relative to the plane formed by the opening at the front end of the button base 413 (a plane perpendicular to the line-up of the base unit 430 and button lens 411, i.e., a plane perpendicular to the direction in which the operation button 410 moves forward and backward), making it easier for light to be refracted when viewed from the player's side. Therefore, by combining the first button decorative portion 411a and second button decorative portion 411b provided on the outer edge with the button frame 412 and button base 413, it is possible to make it difficult to see the outer edge or the back side of the operation button internal decorative portion 432 through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decorative portion 432, thereby reliably achieving the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, because the button lens 411 is formed into a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the volume inside the operation button 410 is increased, making it possible to make the operation button interior decorative member 432 and the door frame side performance display device 460 placed inside the operation button 410 larger and easier to move. This makes it easier to equip the door frame side performance display device 460 that can entertain players within the operation button 410, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that can provide even more entertainment to players.

Furthermore, because the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape, the operation button 410 is given a design (decorative) quality, making the operation button 410 stand out on this pachinko machine 1 and attracting the player's attention, making it easier for the player to select this pachinko machine 1 as the machine to play.

In addition, the first button decorative portion 411a, the second button decorative portion 411b, and the button frame 412, which are provided on the outer edge of the button lens 411, are opaque. This ensures that the back side of the operation button 410, the operation button internal decorative portion 432, etc., is not visible through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decorative portion 432, thereby reducing deterioration in the appearance of the operation button 410, etc., and improving its appearance.

The button lens 411 also has an opaque button frame 412 that extends from the outer edge of the button to the inside at a specified width around the entire circumference. This works in conjunction with the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button decorative portion 411b to make it difficult for the player to see the gap between the main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the internal decorative member 432 of the operation button. This makes it possible to increase the gap between the main body 413a and the internal decorative member 432 of the operation button, making it easier to ensure space for the operation button 410 to move and allowing it to move smoothly.

Furthermore, because the outer periphery of the button lens 411 is cylindrical, there is no directional aspect to the outer periphery compared to when it is polygonal, making it easier to move the operation button 410 smoothly. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is made larger, it can be pressed without any problems, allowing players to enjoy the player-participation effects that use the operation button 410 without losing interest.

In addition, because the operation button 410 has been enlarged, when a player-participation effect is executed in which the player operates the operation button 410, the player can easily touch and press the operation button 410 without having to check the position of the operation button 410 while operating it. This makes it easier for the player to participate in player-participation effects using the operation button 410, which entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the operation button 410 is equipped with a door frame-side effect display device 460, effect images are displayed according to the game status, strongly drawing the player's attention to the door frame-side effect display device 460 within the operation button 410, allowing the player to enjoy the effects provided by the door frame-side effect display device 460. In addition, the effect images and light-emitting effects provided by the door frame-side effect display device 460 can encourage the player to operate the operation button 410, allowing the player to actively participate in the player-participation effect and enjoy it, thereby preventing a decline in interest. In addition, by executing effects within the operation button 410, some players can be made to think that something good is about to happen, increasing their anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, because the door frame side effect display device 460 can be seen through the transparent button lens 411 (the area inside the first button decorative portion 411a) of the large operation button 410, the player can immediately recognize that the operation button 410 of this pachinko machine 1 is clearly different from the operation buttons of conventional pachinko machines, making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players and increasing the player's anticipation for the effects using the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 inside the operation button 410, thereby preventing a decline in the player's interest.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 has the first button decorative portion 411a formed on the inner periphery of the button frame 412, but this is not limited to this, and a button lens 411 without the first button decorative portion 411a may also be used.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an opaque button frame 412 is attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, but this is not limited to this. Instead of attaching the button frame 412, a decorative part that hides the rear side around the entire periphery may be formed at the part of the button lens 411 that corresponds to the button frame 412.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the operation button 410 is shown equipped with a button base 413 (main body 413a) that protrudes cylindrically from the outer edge of the button lens 411 toward the base unit 430 so as to surround the entire outer periphery of the operation button internal decorative member 432, but this is not limited to this, and at least one button base 413 may protrude toward the base unit 430 so as to surround only a portion of the entire outer periphery of the operation button internal decorative member 432. The shape of this button base 413 may be a shape that follows the outer periphery of the button lens 411, or a shape that does not follow the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button base 413 may have decoration on at least the inner wall side.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the lower tray 322 is recessed rearward only from the outer left portion of the performance operation unit 400 on the front of the tray unit cover 326, but this is not limited to this. The lower tray 322 may be recessed rearward from both the left and right sides of the performance operation unit 400 and connected to each other behind the performance operation unit 400, or it may be recessed rearward only from the outer right portion of the performance operation unit 400 and part of it may wrap around to the rear of the performance operation unit 400.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the shape of the portion of the lower dish 322 on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 where it is recessed rearward (the dish front lower decorative portion 326c) (the shape of the front end of the lower dish 322) is recessed rearward in a curved surface, but this is not limited to this, and the front surface may also be recessed in a polygonal cylindrical or polyhedral shape.

While the above embodiment shows an example in which the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front of the tray unit cover 326, this is not limiting. It is also possible to attach units or panels equipped with the following: "ones equipped with an operation device such as an operation dial or touch panel," "ones equipped with a rotating body with a decorative surface," "ones equipped with a decorative body and a movable device for moving the decorative body," "ones equipped with a decorative body that three-dimensionally resembles characters, items, logos, and scenes (dioramas) that fit the concept of the gaming machine," and "ones decorated with characters, items, logos, predetermined patterns, etc. that fit the concept of the gaming machine, using stickers or printing." Furthermore, the component attached to the mounting space 326j (effect operation unit mounting portion 326a) does not have to be a single component; multiple (two or more) components may be attached. For example, separate components may be attached, such as a component attached to the upper half of the mounting space 326j and a component attached to the lower half of the mounting space 326j.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the dish unit cover 326 is shown to have a presentation operation unit mounting portion 326a that opens forward for mounting the presentation operation unit 400, but this is not limited to this. It is also possible to use a dish unit cover (for example, a panel-shaped cover portion) that does not have an opening (presentation operation unit mounting portion 326a) for mounting the presentation operation unit 400, and to form a space behind the dish unit cover that corresponds to the mounting space 326j (or the remaining space of the mounting space 326j). It is desirable to decorate the front of such a dish unit cover with characters, items, logos, predetermined patterns, etc. that are in line with the concept of the gaming machine, using stickers, printing, the attachment of decorative materials, etc.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which an area slightly larger than half of the game ball storage area (storage area) in a plan view of the lower tray 322 is covered by the performance operation unit 400 as a covering part so as to be difficult to see from the front, but this is not limited to this, and an area less than half of the game ball storage area in the lower tray 322 may be made difficult to see from the front, or the entire lower tray 322 may be made difficult to see from the front.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are shown as being arc-shaped and partially circumferentially arranged, but this is not limited to this, and the second button decorative portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 may also be annular and extend around the entire circumference.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the second button interior decorative portion 432g of the operation button interior decorative member 432 in the performance operation unit 400 is shown as a decoration having multiple polygonal shapes in a concentric circle centered on the center, but this is not limited to this, and the second button interior decorative portion 432g may also be a decoration having multiple circular shapes (including ellipses) in a concentric circle centered on the center.

[7. Main control board, dispensing control board and peripheral control board]
Next, the control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 69 to 74. Figure 69 is a block diagram of the main control board, payout control board, and peripheral control board, Figure 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of Figure 69, Figure 71 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input and output to the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board that relays the electrical connection between the payout control board that constitutes the main board and the CR unit and the degree display board, Figure 72 is a block diagram showing a continuation of Figure 69, Figure 73 is a block diagram showing an outline of the peripheral control MPU, and Figure 74 is a block diagram of the periphery of the VDP with built-in sound source in the liquid crystal display control unit.

As shown in Figure 69, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a first control unit MCG that generates a control power supply (for example, +5V) and controls the game, including the payout of prize balls, and a second control unit SCG that produces effects related to the game progressed by the first control unit MCG.

More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment employs a structure in which various controls are shared by providing multiple boards, with the first control unit MCG comprising a main control board 1310, a payout control board 951, and a power supply board 931, and the second control unit SCG comprising a peripheral control board 1510. In explaining the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first control unit MCG will first be explained in the order of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931, and then the second control unit SCG (peripheral control board 1510).

[7-1. Main control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game, as shown in Figure 69, mainly comprises a main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor that controls the power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on and has built-in various control programs such as a main control program that is executed a predetermined time after the power is turned on and controls the game operation, a ROM that stores various control programs and commands, and a RAM that temporarily stores data, a main control input circuit 1310b to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to external boards, etc., a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, and a power outage monitoring circuit 1310e for monitoring for signs of a power outage or momentary power outage of a predetermined voltage.

In addition to its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), the main control MPU 1310a also has built-in watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT 1310af") that monitors its operation (system), as well as functions to prevent fraud, etc.

The main control MPU 1310a also has built-in non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code (a code that exists only once in the world) assigned by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a to identify the individual unit. Once assigned, this ID code cannot be rewritten, even using an external device, because it is stored in non-volatile RAM. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve and reference the ID code from the non-volatile RAM.

The main control MPU 1310a also incorporates a built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter referred to as the "main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an") that uses hardware to update the jackpot determination random numbers used to determine whether or not a jackpot game state will occur, among various game-related random numbers. This main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value to 32767 as the maximum value is pre-set), and is configured so that the pre-set value as the initial value is not fixed (i.e., the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as its initial value and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range without overlapping, based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator, described below). Once all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an again extracts a value within the predetermined numerical range, and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range without overlapping, based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs this rapid lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an at the time it obtains a value from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an as the random number for determining a jackpot.

The main control input circuit 1310b does not have a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input to its various input terminals as detection signals from the various detection switches, and does not have a reset function. For this reason, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit that does not receive a system reset signal from the main control system reset described below. In other words, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit in which information based on detection signals from the various detection switches input to its various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset described below, and various signals based on that information are output from its various output terminals.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open-collector output type with the emitter terminal grounded (GND). It is composed of a main control output circuit with a reset function (1310ca) that has a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input to its various input terminals, which outputs various signals to external boards, etc., and a main control output circuit without a reset function (1310cb) that does not have a reset terminal and does not have a reset function. The main control output circuit with a reset function (1310ca) is configured as a circuit that receives a system reset signal from the main control system reset (described below). In other words, the main control output circuit with a reset function (1310ca) is configured as a circuit that does not output any signals based on the information input to its various input terminals for outputting various signals to external boards, etc., by resetting the information by the main control system reset (described below). In contrast, the main control output circuit without a reset function (1310cb) is configured as a circuit that does not receive a system reset signal from the main control system reset (described below). In other words, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb is configured as a circuit in which the information for outputting the various signals input to its various input terminals to external boards, etc. is not reset by the main control system reset described below, and signals based on that information are output from its various output terminals.

As shown in Figure 60, the detection signals from the first start port sensor 4002 which detects game balls that have entered the first start port 2002, the second start port sensor 4004 which detects game balls that have entered the second start port 2004, and the general prize port sensor 4020 which detects game balls that have entered the general prize port 2001, as well as the signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e, are input to the input terminal of a designated input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. In addition, detection signals from the gate sensor 4003 shown in Figure 60, which detects gaming balls that have passed through the gate section 2003, the count sensor 4005 which detects gaming balls that have entered the large prize opening 2005, and the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in Figure 69, which is attached to the back unit 3000 and detects fraudulent activity using magnets, are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 4161 attached to the gaming board 5 and the main control input circuit 1310b.

Based on the detection signals from each of these switches, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of its specified output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, which then outputs a control signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d outputs a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2107 and the attacca solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of a specified output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, a drive signal is output from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the panel relay board 4161 and then via the function display unit 1400 to the first special symbol display 1403, second special symbol display 1405, first special reserved number display 1404, second special reserved number display 1406, normal symbol display 1402, status display 1401, and round display 1407.

The main control MPU 1310a also outputs various information about the game (game information) from the output terminal of a specified output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, causing the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to output various information about the game (game information) to the payout control board 951, and outputs a signal (power outage clear signal) from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e by outputting a signal (power outage clear signal) from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca from the output terminal of the specified output port.

In this embodiment, the first start opening sensor 4002, the second start opening sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the count sensor 4005 use non-contact electromagnetic proximity switches, while the general winning opening sensor 4020 uses a contact-type ON/OFF mechanical switch. This is because game balls frequently enter the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 and frequently pass through the gate section 2003, so game balls are frequently detected by the first start opening sensor 4002, the second start opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. For this reason, long-life proximity switches are used for the first start opening sensor 4002, the second start opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. Furthermore, when a jackpot game state advantageous to the player occurs, the large winning opening 2005 opens and game balls frequently enter, so game balls are frequently detected by the count sensor 4005. For this reason, a proximity switch with a long lifespan is also used for the count sensor 4005. In contrast, the general winning opening 2001, where game balls do not enter frequently, is not frequently detected by the general winning opening sensor 4020. For this reason, a mechanical switch with a shorter lifespan than a proximity switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 4020.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to dispensing as serial data from the output terminal of a specified serial output port to the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb, which then transmits the various commands as serial data to the dispensing control board 951. When the dispensing control board 951 has successfully received the various commands as serial data from the main control board 1310, it outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

The main control MPU 1310a also receives various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data via the main control input circuit 1310b, and receives the various commands as serial data from the main control input circuit 1310b via the input terminal of its designated serial input port. When the main control MPU 1310a has successfully received the various commands as serial data from the payout control board 951, it outputs a signal indicating this (main payout ACK signal) from the output terminal of its designated output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, and then outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the payout control board 951.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of game presentations and various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of its specified serial output port to the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb, which then transmits the various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510.

Here, we will briefly explain the main serial transmission port that transmits various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510. The main control MPU 1310a is configured around the main control CPU core 1310aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of the main control various serial I/O ports, is circuit-connected via bus 1310ah (see Figure 79). The main serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510, and is primarily composed of a transmission shift register 1310aea, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management unit 1310aec, etc. (see Figure 79). The main control CPU core 1310aa sets a command in the transmit buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmit start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec. The serial management unit 1310aec then transfers the command set in the transmit buffer register 1310aeb from the transmit buffer register 1310aeb to the transmit shift register 1310aea, and begins transmitting it to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. In this embodiment, the transmit buffer register 1310aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 1310aa sets multiple commands in the transmit buffer register 1310aeb and then outputs a transmit start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec, thereby continuously transmitting multiple commands to the peripheral control board 1510.

The power supply board 931, which supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310, is equipped with an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as "capacitor") BC0 (see Figure 75) as a backup power source to supply power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when the power is cut off. This capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control's built-in RAM during power-off processing even when the power is cut off. When the operation switch 954 of the dispensing control board 951 (described below) is operated within a predetermined period of time after power is turned on, an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is output from the dispensing control board 951 and input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. This triggers the various information stored in the main control's built-in RAM to be completely erased (cleared) by the main control MPU 1310a.

[7-2. Dispensing control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the payout control board 951 that controls the payout of game balls, etc., is equipped with a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout, an operation switch 954 that performs various functions, and an error LED indicator 860b that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, as shown in Fig. 70. The operation switch 954, which also functions as a RAM clear switch, outputs a RAM clear signal to completely erase information stored in the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") based on a detection signal output when operated.

[7-2-1. Dispensing control unit]
As shown in Figure 70, the payout control unit 952, which performs various controls related to payout, is equipped with a payout control MPU 952a, which is a microprocessor that has built-in ROM for storing various control programs and various commands, including a payout control program that controls the power-on processing executed when the power is turned on and controls the payout operation of game media that is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, and a RAM for temporarily storing data, a payout control input circuit 952b to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to external boards, etc., a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830, and a CR unit input/output circuit 952e for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6. In addition to its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as the "built-in payout control RAM") and built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as the "built-in payout control ROM"), the payout control MPU 952a also has built-in functions such as a watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

Under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control program receives various game-related information (game information) and various payout-related commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data via the payout control input circuit 952b as a main payout serial data reception signal. The payout control program also generates a slot status 1 command (equivalent to the first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the payout operation of the game balls, and creates a 16-bit (2-byte) error cancellation navigation command (equivalent to the first error cancellation command) based on the operation signal (detection signal) of the operation switch 954 serving as the error cancellation unit, and outputs these error occurrence commands and error cancellation navigation commands as serial data via the payout control I/O port 952b to the receiving port of the main control board 1310 as a main payout serial data transmission signal (command transmission means). Furthermore, if an error occurs with the dispensing operation after a predetermined time has elapsed since power was turned on, i.e., after the dispensing control unit main process is executed or the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process is executed and dispensing control has begun, the dispensing control program will clear the error based on a detection signal generated by operating the operation switch 954 and stop the output of warning information corresponding to the error (error clearing control means).

In addition, this dispensing control program outputs a door frame open command (first door open command) when a detection signal (door frame open detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the door frame open switch 618, and outputs a main frame open command (first main frame open command) when a detection signal (main frame open detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the main frame open switch 619. On the other hand, this dispensing control program also outputs a door frame close command (first door frame close command) when a detection signal (door frame close detection signal) associated with the closing operation is input from the door frame open switch 618, and outputs a main frame close command (first main frame close command) when a detection signal (main frame close detection signal) associated with the closing operation is input from the main frame open switch 619.

The dispensing control input circuit 952b does not have a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input to its various input terminals as detection signals from the various detection switches, and does not have a reset function. For this reason, the dispensing control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit that does not receive a system reset signal from the dispensing control system reset described below. In other words, the dispensing control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit in which information based on detection signals from the various detection switches input to its various input terminals is not reset by the dispensing control system reset described below, and various signals based on that information are output from its various output terminals.

The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open-collector output type with the emitter terminal grounded (GND). It is composed of a payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, which has a reset function and is provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information input to its various input terminals for outputting various signals to external boards, etc., and a payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, which does not have a reset terminal and does not have a reset function. The payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca is configured as a circuit that receives a system reset signal from the payout control system reset described below. In other words, the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca is configured as a circuit that does not output any signals based on information input to its various input terminals for outputting various signals to external boards, etc., when the information is reset by the payout control system reset described below. In contrast, the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is configured as a circuit that does not receive a system reset signal from the payout control system reset described below. In other words, the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb is configured as a circuit in which the information for outputting the various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board, etc. is not reset by the dispensing control system reset described below, and signals based on that information are output from its various output terminals.

Detection signals from the ball shortage detection sensor 827, which detects the running out of game balls in the supply passage of the ball guidance unit 820 of the payout unit 800, the payout detection sensor 842, which detects game balls released from the payout outlets 831b, 832b of the payout device 830, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840, which detects the rotation of the payout blade 839, are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. For the purposes of the following explanation, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 will be simply referred to as the rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

In addition, detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618, which detects the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4, and the main frame opening switch 619, which detects the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control input circuit 952b.

In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, which detects whether the storage space of the ball cover unit 270 is full of stored game balls, is first input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the handle relay terminal board 315, the power supply board 931, and the payout control input circuit 952b.

The dispensing control MPU 952a receives various commands related to dispensing from the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control input circuit 952b at the input terminal of its serial input port in serial data format, and outputs the operation signal (detection signal) of the operation switch 954 to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control input circuit 952b. When the dispensing control MPU 952a has successfully received various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs a signal (dispenser ACK signal) indicating this from the output terminal of its specified output port to the dispensing control output circuit with reset function 952ca, which then outputs a signal (dispenser ACK signal) to the main control board 1310.

The payout control MPU 952a also transmits various commands indicating the status of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of its serial output port to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, which then transmits the various commands as serial data to the main control board 1310. When the main control board 1310 has successfully received the various commands as serial data from the payout control board 951, it outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 951. This signal (main payout ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

The payout control MPU 952a also outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of its specified output port to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, causing the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to output a drive signal to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, and the payout motor drive circuit 952d to output a drive signal to the payout motor 834. The payout control MPU 952a also outputs a drive signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator 860b from the output terminal of its specified output port to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, causing the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to output a drive signal to the error LED indicator 860b.

The error LED display 860b is a segment display that displays alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1. The information displayed and reported by the error LED display 860b includes the following: For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates "normal", when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates "connection abnormality" (specifically, that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951), when the number "1" is displayed, it indicates "ball out" (specifically, that there are no game balls in the supply passage of the payout device 830 based on the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 827), when the number "2" is displayed, it indicates "ball stuck" (specifically, that at the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 830 based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout rotor and the game ball are meshed near the entrance, making it difficult for the payout rotor to rotate), and when the number "3" is displayed, it indicates a "payout detection sensor error" (specifically, that there is a ball in the supply passage of the payout device 830 based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840). 2, indicating that there is a malfunction in the payout detection sensor 842; when the number "5" is displayed, indicating a "retry error" (specifically, that the number of payout retries has reached a preset upper limit); when the number "6" is displayed, indicating a "full" state (specifically, that the storage space of the fault cover unit 270 is full with stored game balls based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279); when the number "7" is displayed, indicating a "CR not connected" state (that an electrical connection has been cut somewhere between the payout control board 951 and the CR unit 6); and when the number "9" is displayed, indicating a "stocked state (there are prize balls in stock (unpaid))" state (specifically, that the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached a preset number).

In addition, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of game balls actually paid out, etc. from the output terminal of its specified output port to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, which then outputs the number of game balls actually paid out, etc. to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown).

The payout control board 951 also outputs various game-related information (game information) from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via resistors (not shown). The external terminal board 784 is equipped with multiple photocouplers (not shown) (comprising an infrared LED and a photo IC built in), and transmits the number of game balls and various other information (game information, error details related to the payout operation of game balls, or a notice that an error has occurred) to a hall computer installed in the gaming parlor (hall) via these multiple photocouplers. The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by the multiple photocouplers to prevent abnormal voltages from being applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1, which would cause the hall computer to malfunction or break down. Furthermore, the hall computer also prevents abnormal voltages from being applied via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310, which controls the game, or the payout control board 951, which controls payouts, which would cause the hall computer to malfunction or break down. The hall computer monitors the player's play by keeping track of the number of game balls dispensed by the pachinko machine 1 and other game information about the pachinko machine 1.

The ball loan request signal from the ball loan button 328 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 329 are first input to the CR unit 6 via the number of balls display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls to be loaned in accordance with the ball loan request signal to the payout control board 951 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869, and this signal is input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the CR unit input/output circuit 952e. The CR unit 6 also updates the remaining balance on the inserted prepaid card according to the number of gaming balls loaned, and outputs a signal to the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the degree display board 365 to display the remaining balance on the ball lending/return display unit 330. This signal is then input to the ball lending/return display unit 330. The CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball lending/return display unit 330 receives the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880.

The power supply board 931, which supplies various voltages to the dispensing control board 951, is equipped with a capacitor BC1 (see Figure 75) as a backup power supply to supply power to the dispensing control board 951 for a predetermined period of time even when the power is cut off. This capacitor BC1 allows the dispensing control MPU 952a to store various information in the dispensing control built-in RAM (dispensing memory unit) during power-off processing even when the power is cut off. When the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from power-on, the operation signal is input via the dispensing control input circuit 952b to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a. The dispensing control MPU 952a interprets this as a RAM clear signal to completely erase the information stored in the dispensing control built-in RAM, and the dispensing control MPU 952a then completely erases (clears) the information from the dispensing control built-in RAM. This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and is also output from the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb to the main control board 1310.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the game ball lending device connection terminal board]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 952 and the CR unit 6, and between the CR unit 6 and the point display board 365 will be described with reference to Fig. 71. As shown in Fig. 71, the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 not only relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951, but also relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the point display board 365 (to be precise, the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 is electrically connected to the point display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880, and the CR unit 6 and the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 are electrically connected, the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay terminal board 880 and the point display board 365 are electrically connected). Wiring (harnesses) electrically connect the CR unit 6 and the board between the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869, the board between the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and the payout control board 951, the board between the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880, and the board between the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and the degree display board 365. In addition, AC 24V (described later) from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, direct current +12V (DC +12V, hereinafter referred to as "+12V")) from the supplied AC 24V using an internal voltage generation circuit (not shown) and supplies this voltage, together with the ground LG, to the payout control board 951 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869, while also supplying it to the degree display board 365 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880.

A push button switch is mounted on the component side of the power display board 365 in a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328, a push button switch is mounted on the component side of the power display board 365 in a position corresponding to the return button 329, and a segment display that functions as the ball lending/returning display unit 330 is mounted. In addition, a CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the component side of the power display board 365. The display mode of the segment display and the light emission mode of the CR unit lamp 365d are configured to be visible to the player, allowing players and gaming facility staff to check the display mode and light emission mode.

The ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the switch of the ball lending button 328 is turned on, and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is input to the CR unit 6 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the switch of the return button 329 is turned on, and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input to the CR unit 6 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869.

The ball lending/returning display unit 330 consists of three segment displays arranged in a row, and the lighting of these three-digit segment displays is controlled by a so-called dynamic lighting method, which sequentially drives each digit of the three-digit segment displays. Through this lighting control, the ball lending/returning display unit 330 displays the remaining balance on the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit 6, or indicates errors in the CR unit 6. When the ball lending/returning display unit 330 receives digit signals DG0 to DG2 (a total of three signals) for specifying one of the three-digit segment displays, and segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (a total of seven signals) for specifying the content to be displayed by lighting up this specified one-digit segment display from the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880, the one-digit segment displays sequentially light up in accordance with the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and the content shown by the light emitted by these three-digit segment displays can be seen from outside.

A CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the degree display board 365 adjacent to the ball lending/return display unit 330. The CR unit lamp 365d receives a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending available signal TDL via the CR unit lamp 365d and a current-limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 generates the predetermined voltage VL from the AC 24V supplied from the power supply board 931 using an internal voltage generation circuit. When the ball lending button 328 and return button 329 are enabled and ball lending is possible, the logic of the ball lending available signal TDL is controlled to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to light up, and the light emission pattern can be seen from outside. In addition, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball lending/return display unit 330 through a current-limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869.

When the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is input from the degree display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869, the CR unit 6 outputs a ball lending request signal BRDY to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 then outputs a BRQ, a signal requesting the start of a single payout operation to pay out a specified number of loaned balls in one payout operation (in this embodiment, 25 balls, equivalent to 100 yen), via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869 to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a). The payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a), to which BRDY and BRQ are input, outputs an EXS signal, indicating that a single payout operation has started or ended, to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869, and outputs a PRDY signal, indicating whether a payout operation to pay out loaned balls is possible or impossible, to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Note that if, for example, a hall staff member or the like has preset the CR unit 6 so that 200 yen worth of game balls are paid out when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, one payout operation will be performed twice in succession, so that 25 balls worth 100 yen are paid out, followed by 25 balls worth 100 yen, for a total of 50 balls worth 200 yen.

When the return button 329 is pressed and a return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the point display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869, the CR unit 6 ejects and returns the prepaid card from an insertion slot (not shown). This returned prepaid card stores the remaining balance, minus the amount equivalent to the number of game balls dispensed as a result of the ball lending button 328 being pressed.

[7-3. Power supply board]
Next, a brief explanation will be given of the power supply board 931 of the first control unit MCG. The power supply board 931 is provided with a power switch 934 that can electrically connect or disconnect the 24 volt alternating current (AC 24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment, a power supply control unit 935 that generates various power sources, and a launch control unit 953 that controls launching by the launch solenoid 682 of the ball launcher 680 and ball sending by the ball sending solenoid 255 of the ball sending unit 250.

[7-3-1. Power supply control unit]
The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a that rectifies the 24 volt alternating current (AC 24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment when the power switch 934 is operated, a power factor correction circuit 935b that improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a smoothing circuit 935c that smooths the power whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 935b, and a power supply creation circuit 935d that creates various DC power supplies from the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to supply to various boards.

[7-3-2. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 953, which controls launching using the launch solenoid 682 and ball delivery using the ball delivery solenoid 255, is primarily composed of a launch control circuit 953a. The launch control circuit 953a receives, via the handle relay terminal board 315, an operation signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 307, which electrically adjusts the strength (launch strength) with which the gaming balls are launched toward the gaming area 5a depending on the rotation position of the handle 302; a detection signal from a handle touch sensor 310, which detects whether the palm or fingers are touching the handle 302; and a detection signal from a single button operation sensor 312, which detects whether the player intends to forcibly stop the launching (launching) of the gaming balls. Furthermore, when the CR unit 6 and the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869 are electrically connected, a CR connection signal indicating this is input to the launch control circuit 953a via the payout control board 951.

The launch control circuit 953a adjusts the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 and controls the output to the launch solenoid 682. At the same time, by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal board 315, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320, and controls the ball feeding member to send the received game ball to the ball launcher 680.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
In contrast to this first control unit MCG, the peripheral control board 1510 of the second control unit SCG, as shown in Figure 72, performs performance control based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and is also equipped with a peripheral control unit 1511 that exchanges control commands and various information (various data) with the performance display drive board 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460 shown in Figure 19, a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460, while also controlling the sound of music, sound effects, etc. played from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573, a real time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control unit 4165 that holds calendar information specifying the year, month, and day and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second, and a volume adjustment volume 4140a that adjusts the volume of the music, sound effects, etc. played from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control unit 1511 that controls the presentation includes a peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, such as a sub-control program that controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on and that controls the presentation operation after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power is turned on, and various information (for example, game board It is equipped with a peripheral control RAM 1511c that stores information for managing schedule data that specifies the screen to be drawn on the side effect display device 1600 and schedule data that specifies the light emission modes of various LEDs, etc., a peripheral control SRAM 1511d that stores various information that continues across days (for example, information for managing the history of when a jackpot game state has occurred and information for managing special effect flags), and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as ``peripheral control external WDT 1511e'') for monitoring whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally.

Peripheral control RAM 1511c can only retain its stored contents for the time it takes for power to be restored after a momentary power outage, and will lose its contents if power is cut off for an extended period of time (in the event of a prolonged power outage). In contrast, peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power from a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) (hereinafter referred to as the "SRAM electrolytic capacitor") mounted on power supply board 931, allowing it to retain its stored contents for approximately 50 hours. Because the SRAM electrolytic capacitor is mounted on power supply board 931, if the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power will no longer be supplied to peripheral control SRAM 1511d, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d will no longer be able to retain its stored contents, resulting in the loss of its contents.

The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer that monitors whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a system is running out of control, and when this timer expires, it is reset by hardware. In other words, if the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to clear the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period of time (until the timer expires), a reset will be applied. If the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within the certain period of time, it can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, so a reset will not be applied.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has multiple built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and when it receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it transmits game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs, etc., provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 based on these various commands from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board to the lamp drive board 4170 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), and it also transmits game board side motor drive data for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 from the serial I/O port for the motor drive board to the motor drive board via the peripheral control output circuit. door-side motor drive data for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 is transmitted from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and peripheral door relay terminal board 882; door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to multiple LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 is transmitted from the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, the detection signal from the pressure detection switch for detecting operation of the left effect selection button 331, the detection signal from the pressure detection switch for detecting operation of the right effect selection button 332, and the detection signal from the pressure detection switch for detecting operation of the press operation button 410 are serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and this serialized performance operation unit detection data is input from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit, and then to the performance operation unit detection serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

Detection signals from various detection switches (e.g., photosensors) used to detect the original and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the gaming board 5 are serialized by a gaming board-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serialized movable body detection data is input from the gaming board-side serial transmission circuit via a peripheral control input circuit to the motor drive board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input and output of the motor drive board serial I/O port.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as the "peripheral control built-in WDT"), and uses the peripheral control built-in WDT in conjunction with the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to diagnose whether its own system is running out of control.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in Fig. 73, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is composed of a peripheral control CPU core 1511aa at its core, a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation for Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, various peripheral control serial I/O ports 1511ae, a peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, various peripheral control parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and a peripheral control analog/digital converter (hereinafter referred to as a peripheral control A/D converter) 1511ak.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads and writes various data from the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah, while reading and writing various data from the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

In addition, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while reading and writing various data from the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is a dedicated controller that independently transfers data between storage devices such as the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d and input/output devices such as the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. It has four channels, DMA0 to DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac communicates, via the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, between the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a and input/output devices such as the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In order to transfer data independently, data is read from and written to the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab via the internal bus 1511ah, while data is read from and written to input/output devices such as the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

In addition, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac independently transfers data between storage devices such as peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which are external to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and input/output devices such as peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, which are built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. To transfer data, data is read from and written to storage devices such as peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and external bus 1511h, while data is read from and written to input/output devices such as peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511ai.

The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad is a dedicated controller that controls the internal bus 1511ah, peripheral bus 1511ai, and external bus 1511h to exchange various data between the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, storage devices such as the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d, and input/output devices such as the peripheral control various serial I/O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O port 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak.

The various peripheral control serial I/O ports 1511ae include a serial I/O port for the lamp drive board, a serial I/O port for the motor drive board, a serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, a serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED, a serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, a serial I/O port for the main control board, and a serial I/O port for obtaining information from the performance operation unit.

The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 1511af is a timer that monitors whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a system is running out of control, and when this timer expires, it is reset by hardware. In other words, when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer, if it does not output a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af to clear the timer within a certain period of time (until the timer expires), it will be reset. If the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within the certain period of time, it can restart the timer count and will not be reset.

The peripheral control various parallel I/O port 1511ag outputs various latch signals such as the game board side motor drive latch signal and the door side motor drive light emission latch signal, as well as outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, serializes detection signals from various detection switches used to detect the original and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 using a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and outputs a movable body information acquisition latch signal to receive this serialized movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit via the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. This LED is a high-brightness white LED and serves as a confirmation notification lamp to indicate that a jackpot game state has been confirmed. In this embodiment, the LED and the peripheral control parallel I/O port 1511ag are electrically connected directly, shortening the path between the LED and the peripheral control parallel I/O port 1511ag, thereby providing noise protection for the LED lighting control, which is important for gameplay. Note that the LED lighting control is performed during the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, while the lighting control for other LEDs, etc., is performed during the peripheral control unit steady-state process, which will be described later.

The peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume control volume 4140a. Rotating the knob of the volume control volume 4140a changes the resistance value. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and then converted into 1024 levels ranging from 0 to 1023. In this embodiment, the 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as board volumes 0 to 6. Board volume 0 is set to mute, and board volume 6 is set to maximum volume, with the volume increasing from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The LCD display control unit 1512 (the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a, described below) controls the volume set at board volumes 0 to 6, so that music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573. In this way, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation of the knob.

In this embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds are also emitted from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 to alert parlor staff of malfunctions in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1, and to notify game presentation details (for example, to make the screen displayed on the game board presentation display device 1600 more impressive, or to notify the player of a high probability of transitioning to a more advantageous game state). However, these notification sounds are not dependent on volume adjustments based on the rotation of the knob, and the volume can be adjusted from mute to maximum volume by controlling the LCD display control unit 1512 (the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, described later) by a program. Unlike the board volume, which is divided into seven levels as described above, the volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume.
As a result, even if a hall staff member or the like turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume low, the music, sound effects, and other sound effects played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 will be reduced, but the notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or a player is engaging in fraudulent behavior. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sounds is reduced, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from making it difficult for the hall staff member or the like to notice a malfunction or a player's fraudulent behavior. Furthermore, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume through the rotation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound can be reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects, or the volume of the advertising sound can be increased to make the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 more impressive in addition to the music and sound effects, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a more advantageous game state.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral Control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b pre-stores various control programs, data, control data, and schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the LCD display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, etc. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be displayed on the game board side display device 1600 and the door frame side display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, sound generation schedule data for generating music, sound effects, etc., and electrical drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by screen data that specifies the configuration of the screen, arranged in chronological order, and specifies the order in which the screens are displayed on the game board side display device 1600 and the door frame side display device 460. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by light emission data that specifies the light emission modes of various LEDs, arranged in chronological order. The sound generation schedule data is configured by sound command data that is arranged in chronological order, and specifies the order in which the music and sound effects are played. This sound command data specifies an output channel number for specifying which output channel to use out of multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (described later), and a track number for specifying which track out of multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects into. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, and specifies the operation of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Some of the various control programs stored in peripheral control ROM 1511b are read directly from peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, while others are copied to a various control program copy area in peripheral control RAM 1511c (described below) when power is turned on, and then read and executed. Some of the various data, control data, and schedule data stored in peripheral control ROM 1511b are read directly from peripheral control ROM 1511b, while others are copied to a various control data copy area in peripheral control RAM 1511c (described below) when power is turned on, and then read.

The peripheral control ROM 1511b also includes, as one of the various control programs that control the RTC control unit 4165, a brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board display device 1600 depending on the amount of time the game board display device 1600 has been in use. This brightness correction program corrects the decrease in brightness that occurs over time in the game board display device 1600 when the game board display device 1600 is equipped with an LED-type backlight. It obtains the date and time when the game board display device 1600 was first powered on, the current date and time, brightness setting information, etc. from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165 (described below), and corrects the obtained brightness setting information based on the correction information. This correction information is pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side display device 1600 in 5% increments within a range from 100% to 70%, and the currently set brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side display device 1600. For example, if six months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side display device 1600 was first powered on based on the date and time when the game board side display device 1600 was first powered on, corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. When the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness adjustment information obtained for this 75% is used. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 80%, which is an additional 5% correction information, and the game board side display device 1600 is turned on. If 12 months have already passed since the game board side display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and when the LED brightness included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 85%, which is an additional 10% correction information obtained for this 75%.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral Control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is provided with a backup management target work area 1511ca which is dedicated to storing information to be backed up among various information updated by the execution of various control programs, a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc which are dedicated to storing copies of the various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, a various control program copy area 1511cd which is dedicated to storing copies of various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b, a various control data copy area 1511ce which is dedicated to storing copies of various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and a backup non-management target work area 1511cf which is dedicated to storing information not to be backed up among various information updated by the execution of various control programs.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including when power is restored following a momentary or power outage), a value of 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-managed work area 1511cf, clearing it to zero; however, the backup managed work area 1511ca, backup first area 1511cb, and backup second area 1511cc are cleared to zero when the power-on status command (see Figure 89) from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on instructs the start of a RAM clear effect and the game status (for example, instructing the start of an effect when the operation switch 954 shown in Figure 69 is operated within a predetermined period from power-on).

The backup management target work area 1511ca is composed of Bank0 (1fr), which exclusively stores, as a backup target, the performance information (1fr), which is various information updated during the peripheral control unit's routine processing, which is executed each time a V-blank signal is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the LCD display control unit 1512 (described below), and Bank0 (1ms), which exclusively stores, as a backup target, the performance information (1ms), which is various information updated during the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs (described below). To briefly explain the names Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), "Bank" is the smallest management unit representing the size of the memory area for storing various information, and the "0" following "Bank" indicates that this is the normally used memory area for storing various information updated as various control programs are executed. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the normally used memory area is the smallest management unit. Furthermore, "Bank1," "Bank2," "Bank3," and "Bank4," which are provided in the area spanning from the backup first area 1511cb to the backup second area 1511cc described below, have the same memory area size as "Bank0." As will be described later, when the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a outputs one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of drawing data to the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460, it outputs a V blank signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a to inform that it is in a state where it can accept screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a.Therefore, each time a V blank signal is input, in other words, every frame (1 frame), the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, and therefore ``(1fr)'' is appended to ``Bank0'', ``Bank1'', ``Bank2'', ``Bank3'', and ``Bank4'' (the same meaning is also used for performance information (1fr) and performance backup information (1fr) described later). "(1 ms)" is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" because, as described below, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs (the same meaning is also used for the performance information (1 ms) and the performance backup information (1 ms) described below).

Bank 0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board transmission data memory area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data memory area 1511cab, a received command memory area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition memory area 1511cad, and a schedule data memory area 1511cae. The lamp drive board transmission data memory area 1511caa is a memory area in which game board light emission data SL-DAT is set for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. The frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data memory area 1511cab is a memory area in which door light emission data STL-DAT is set for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3. The received command memory area 1511cac is a memory area in which the main control The RTC information acquisition memory area 1511cad is a memory area where various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, described below) is set, and the schedule data memory area 1511cae is a memory area where various schedule data corresponding to commands received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) is set based on the commands received. In the schedule data memory area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy area 1511ce is read and set, and in other areas, various schedule data is read and set directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

Bank 0 (1 ms) includes a transmission data memory area 1511caf for the motor on the frame decoration drive amplifier board, a transmission data memory area 1511cag for the motor drive board, a movable body information acquisition memory area 1511cah, a performance operation unit information acquisition memory area 1511cai, and a drawing status information acquisition memory area 1511cak. The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data memory area 1511caf is a memory area in which door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 is set, the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag is a memory area in which game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is set, the movable body information acquisition memory area 1511cah is a memory area in which various information acquired from the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 is set, and the performance operation unit information acquisition memory area 1511cai is a memory area in which the performance selection left button 331, the performance selection right button 332, the operation button 4 10 based on detection signals from the various detection switches that detect operation of the left effect selection button 331, right effect selection button 332, and operation button 410. (For example, operation history information created based on detection signals from the various detection switches that detect operation of the left effect selection button 331, right effect selection button 332, and operation button 410.) The drawing status information acquisition memory area 1511cak is a memory area that sets various information acquired based on the frequency of malfunctions and the state of malfunctions occurring between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the performance display drive board 4450 based on a LOCKN signal (described below) that is output by the performance display drive board 4450 when it receives drawing data from the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the peripheral control board 1510 and determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data.

In addition, the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data memory area 1511cab in Bank 0 (1fr), and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data memory area 1511caf and the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag in Bank 0 (1ms) are each divided into two areas: a first area and a second area.

When the peripheral control unit steady-state processing described below is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa, and when the next peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa.Each time the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first and second areas of the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa. When the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed and, for example, the game board light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board transmission data storage area 1511caa during the current peripheral control unit regular processing, processing will proceed based on the game board light emission data SL-DAT that was set in the first area of the lamp drive board transmission data storage area 1511caa during the previous peripheral control unit regular processing.

When the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the first area of the transmission data memory area 1511cab for the LED on the frame decoration drive amplifier board, and when the next peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the transmission data memory area 1511cab for the LED on the frame decoration drive amplifier board.Each time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first and second areas of the transmission data memory area 1511cab for the LED on the frame decoration drive amplifier board. When the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed and, for example, door-side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data storage area 1511cab during this peripheral control unit regular processing, processing will proceed based on the door-side light emission data STL-DAT that was set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data storage area 1511cab during the previous peripheral control unit regular processing.

When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing described below is executed, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is set in the first area of the transmission data memory area 1511caf for the motor on the frame decoration drive amplifier board, and when the next peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is set in the second area of the transmission data memory area 1511caf for the motor on the frame decoration drive amplifier board.Each time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is alternately set in the first and second areas of the transmission data memory area 1511caf for the motor on the frame decoration drive amplifier board. When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed and, for example, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data memory area 1511caf during this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, processing proceeds based on the door side motor drive data STM-DAT that was set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data memory area 1511caf when the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed the previous time.

When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag, and when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag.Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first and second areas of the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag. When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed and, for example, the game board motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board transmission data memory area 1511cag during this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, processing proceeds based on the game board motor drive data SM-DAT that was set in the first area of the motor drive board transmission data memory area 1511cag during the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process.

Next, we will explain the backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc, which are dedicated to storing copies of the performance information, which is a variety of information stored in the backup management work area 1511ca. The backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc are managed as one page, with two pairs of two banks as one pair. The effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), a normally used memory area, is quickly copied as effect backup information (1fr) to backup area 1 1511cb and backup area 2 1511cc by peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame). At the same time, the effect information (1ms), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1ms), a normally used memory area, is quickly copied as effect backup information (1ms) to backup area 1 1511cb and backup area 2 1511cc by peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. Consistency of a page is determined by whether the contents of the two banks that make up that page match.

Specifically, the backup first area 1511cb manages two pairs as one page: Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), the normally used memory area, are copied at high speed to Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The contents stored in Bank0 (1ms), the normally used memory area, are copied at high speed to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match, and also by whether the contents of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) match.

In addition, the backup second area 1511cc manages two pairs as one page: Bank 3 (1fr) and Bank 4 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank 3 (1ms) and Bank 4 (1ms) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), the normally used memory area, are copied at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The contents stored in Bank0 (1ms), the normally used memory area, are copied at high speed to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match, and also by whether the contents of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) match.

In this embodiment, the backup first area 1511cb is an area for managing two pairs as one page, with Bank1 (1 fr) and Bank2 (1 fr) as one pair and Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) as one pair. The backup second area 1511cc is an area for managing two pairs as one page, with Bank3 (1 fr) and Bank4 (1 fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) as one pair. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1fr), a memory area that is normally used, is copied as performance backup information (1fr) to the backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame), and the performance information (1ms), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1ms), a memory area that is normally used, is copied as performance backup information (1ms) to the backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, but the program that performs these high-speed copies by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is common. In other words, in this embodiment, performance information (1fr) and performance information (1ms) are managed using a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral Control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is provided with a backup management target work area 1511da, which exclusively stores backup-targeted information among various information updated by the execution of various control programs, and a backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc, which exclusively store copies of the various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. Note that the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are not cleared to zero even when a power-on status command (see FIG. 89) from the main control board 1310 instructs the start of a RAM clear effect and the game state when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including when power is restored after a momentary power outage or blackout) (for example, when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on). This is completely different from the above-mentioned clearing of the backup management work area 1511ca, backup first area 1511cb, and backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Furthermore, after the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 1, if the left effect selection button 331, right effect selection button 332, or operation button 410 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the left effect selection button 331, right effect selection button 332, or operation button 410 according to this setting mode screen, each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (e.g., the history of jackpot game states) can be cleared. However, the content (item) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c is not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. In this respect, the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are completely different.

The backup management work area 1511da is composed of Bank0 (SRAM), which exclusively stores various types of information (e.g., information for managing the history of jackpot game states and information for managing special effect flags) that are maintained across days as backup targets. To briefly explain the name Bank0 (SRAM), as mentioned above, "Bank" refers to the smallest management unit representing the size of the memory area for storing various types of information. The "0" following "Bank" indicates that this is the normally used memory area for storing various types of information updated by the execution of various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" refers to the size of the normally used memory area as the smallest management unit. Furthermore, "Bank1," "Bank2," "Bank3," and "Bank4," which are located in the area spanning the backup first area 1511db and backup second area 1511dc (described below), have the same memory area size as "Bank0." "(SRAM)" is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" respectively because the various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is the target for backup (the same meaning is also used for performance information (SRAM) and performance backup information (SRAM) described below).

Next, we will explain the backup first area 1511db and backup second area 1511dc, which are dedicated to storing copies of the performance information (SRAM), which is the various information stored in the backup management work area 1511da. The backup first area 1511db and backup second area 1511dc are managed as a pair of two banks, with each pair being managed as one page. The performance information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), the normally used storage area, is quickly copied as performance backup information (SRAM) to the backup first area 1511db and backup second area 1511dc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The consistency of one page is determined by whether the contents of the two banks that make up that page match.

Specifically, the first backup area 1511db consists of a pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM), each pair being managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), the normally used storage area, are copied at high speed to Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

The second backup area 1511dc also consists of a pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM), which are managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), the normally used storage area, are quickly copied to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

In this way, in this embodiment, backup first area 1511db is an area for managing a pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one page, and backup second area 1511dc is an area for managing a pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of backup first area 1511db and backup second area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. Liquid crystal display control unit]
The liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which controls the drawing of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 and controls the sound of the music and sound effects etc. that are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, has a built-in sound source (hereinafter referred to as the "built-in sound source") for controlling the sound of the music and sound effects etc., as shown in FIG. 72, and also has a built-in sound source VDP (Video Display an audio data transmission IC 1512c that transmits serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194; and a door frame side performance transmitter 1512b that transmits serialized drawing data to the door frame side performance display device 460 to a performance display drive board 4450 that is located near the bottom of the door frame side performance display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed within the plate unit 320. a differential circuit 1512e that differentiates the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, into a positive signal and a negative signal; and a forced switching circuit 1512f that receives a signal from the differential circuit 1512e in addition to the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, and when a signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, connects the circuit to transmit this signal, but when a signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input, connects the circuit to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. This LCD and sound control ROM 1512b stores image data used to display images displayed in the display areas of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460, such as decorative pattern image data used to display decorative patterns, background image data used to display background images, tone adjustment image data used to display volume adjustment images, and standby image data used to display standby images, as character data.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts the schedule data for screen generation corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511, sets it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and then copies the first screen data of the schedule data for screen generation set in this schedule data storage area 1511cae to the peripheral control ROM 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511. After extracting the next screen data from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 and outputting it to the tone generator VDP 1512a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, in response to the input of a V blank signal (described later), extracts the next screen data following the first screen data from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae and outputs it to the tone generator VDP 1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the screen data arranged in chronological order in the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae to the tone generator VDP 1512a one by one, starting from the first screen data, in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, each time a V blank signal is input.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts the first sound command data of the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, sets it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and then transfers the first sound command data of the schedule data for sound generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae to the peripheral control R of the peripheral control unit 1511. After extracting the sound command data from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, in response to the input of a V blank signal, extracts the next sound command data following the first sound command data from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 in accordance with the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae and outputs it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the sound command data arranged in chronological order in the sound generation schedule data to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a one by one, starting from the first sound command data, in accordance with the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, each time a V blank signal is input.

[7-4-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
In addition to the built-in sound source described above, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source also has a built-in VRAM (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM") that, when screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, extracts game board side character data and upper tray side character data from the LCD and sound control ROM 1512b based on this input screen data, as shown in Figure 74, creates sprite data, and generates drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460. The VDP 1512a with built-in sound source outputs the drawing data generated on its built-in VRAM, of which the drawing data for the game board side performance display device 1600 is output from channel CH1 to the game board side performance display device 1600, and outputs (transmits) the drawing data for the door frame side performance display device 460 from channel CH2 to the door frame side performance display device 460 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and a performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, thereby synchronizing the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460.

The drawing data output from channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side performance display device 1600, while the drawing data output from channel CH2 is output (transmitted) from the peripheral control board 1510 to the door frame side performance display device 460 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 which is located near the bottom of the door frame side performance display device 460 attached to the right side of the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed within the dish unit 320. As described above, the drawing data output from channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side performance display device 1600, and since the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side performance display device 1600 are each attached to the game board 5, the length of the wiring required for the path from channel CH1 to the game board side performance display device 1600 is short.However, as described above, the drawing data output from channel CH2 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the door frame side performance display device 460 via the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, and since the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5 while the performance display drive board 4450 is stored in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, the length of the wiring required for the path from channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 is extremely long compared to channel CH1, making it extremely susceptible to the effects of noise. For this reason, for channel CH2, where the wiring length for transmitting drawing data is significantly longer than that for channel CH1, the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d uses a differential communication method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" from THine Electronics, Inc., making it less susceptible to the effects of noise.

Channel CH1 uses a serial differential interface known as LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), while channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data output from channel CH2 is composed of three video signals (red, green, and blue video signals) and three synchronization signals (horizontal, vertical, and clock signals). This data is serialized by the door frame side performance transmitter IC 4610d and transmitted to the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 housed within the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. These serialized signals are then restored to parallel signals by the performance display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side performance display device 460.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs one screen (one frame) of screen data to be displayed on the game board side display device 1600 and the door frame side display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts character data from the LCD and sound control ROM 1512b based on this input screen data, creates sprite data, and generates one screen (one frame) of drawing data to be displayed on the game board side display device 1600 and the door frame side display device 460. is generated on the built-in VRAM, and of this generated drawing data, image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 is output (transmitted) from channel CH2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. In other words, "one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of screen data" refers to data for generating one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of drawing data on the built-in VRAM to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460.

The VDP 1512a with built-in sound source outputs one screen's worth of drawing data (one frame's worth) from channel CH1 to the game board-side display device 1600, and outputs (transmits) image data for the door frame-side display device 460 from channel CH2 to the door frame-side display device 460 via the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. When this occurs, the VDP 1512a outputs a V-blank signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, indicating that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is ready to accept screen data. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board-side display device 1600 and the door frame-side display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps, so the interval at which the V-blank signal is output is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). When this V blank signal is input, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process described below. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the LCD size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In addition, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary slightly depending on the production lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are implemented.

The VDP 1512a with built-in sound source uses a frame buffer system. This "frame buffer system" is a system in which one screen's worth of drawing data (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side display device 1600 and the door frame side display device 460 is stored in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM), and the one screen's worth of drawing data (one frame) stored in this frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side display device 1600 and the door frame side display device 460.

In addition, when the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on commands from the main control board 1310, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the LCD and sound control ROM 1512b and controls the built-in sound source, as shown in FIG. 74, to incorporate the sound data such as music and sound effects into tracks according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and sets the output channel to be used according to the output channel number, serializing the music, sound effects, etc. played from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573 and outputting them as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track that incorporates the sound data. The multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a incorporate sound data for sound effects such as music and sound effects, as well as sub-volume values for adjusting their volume. These include sound data for alarm sounds that alert parlor staff and others to malfunctions in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1, as well as sub-volume values for adjusting their volume. Specifically, for sound effects, the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 4140a described above is set as the sub-volume value. For alarm sounds, the maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value, completely independent of the volume adjustment based on the rotation of the knob of the volume control volume 4140a. The sub-volume value for sound effects can be adjusted by operating the left effect selection button 331, the right effect selection button 332, or the operation button 410, which allows you to enter setting mode. In the setting mode, for example, operating the left effect selection button 331 decreases the sub-volume value, operating the right effect selection button 332 increases the sub-volume value, and the sub-volume value is determined by operating the operation button 410.

The sound specification data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a combine the sound data of the effect sound incorporated into the track to be used out of the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a with a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the effect sound incorporated into the track to be used, and amplify the volume of this combined effect sound to the master volume value that will actually be played from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573, and then serialize this amplified effect sound and output it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is at its maximum volume, it is amplified up to the master volume value so that the volume played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 becomes the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated into the track being used from among the multiple tracks is synthesized with the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 4140a, which is set as a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the effect sound incorporated into the track being used, and the volume of this synthesized effect sound is amplified up to the master volume value, which is the volume that will actually be played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and this amplified effect sound is serialized and transmitted as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512. For the alert sound, the sound data of the alert sound incorporated into the track being used is combined with the maximum volume that is set as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the alert sound incorporated into the track being used and is not dependent on volume adjustment based on the rotation of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the volume of this combined alert sound is amplified to the master volume value that will actually be the volume played from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573, and this amplified alert sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

Here, briefly explaining the control of playing an alarm sound to alert parlor staff and the like of a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1 when an effect sound is being played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, first, the sub-volume value of the track incorporating the effect sound is forcibly set to mute, then the sound data of the track incorporating this effect sound, the sub-volume value set to mute, the sound data of the track incorporating the alarm sound, and the sub-volume value for which the volume of the alarm sound is set to maximum are combined, and the volume of this combined effect sound and alarm sound is amplified to the master volume value that will actually be played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and these amplified effect sounds and alarm sounds are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In other words, the only sound actually played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is the notification sound at maximum volume. At this time, the sound effects are muted, so they are not played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the sound effects are still playing according to the sound generation schedule data described above. In this embodiment, the notification sound is played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (e.g., 90 seconds). After this predetermined period has elapsed, the volume of the sound effects, which have been playing according to the sound generation schedule data that was previously forcibly muted, is reset to the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a (if the volume has been adjusted by switching to setting mode and operating the left effect selection button 331, the right effect selection button 332, or the operation button 410, the volume is set to the adjusted sub-volume value of the sound effects), and is played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In this way, when sound effects are being played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 and an alarm sound is played to alert parlor staff or others of a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1, the volume of the sound effects is muted and the alarm sound is played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.However, since this muted sound effects progresses according to the sound generation schedule data, when the alarm sound stops being played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 after a predetermined period of time has passed, the sound effects do not resume from the point at which the alarm sound started, but rather from the point at which the alarm sound started being played and progressed according to the sound generation schedule data up until the predetermined period of time had passed.

[7-4-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
As shown in Figure 74, the LCD and sound control ROM 1512b pre-stores game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and upper tray side character data for drawing in the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460, and also pre-stores various sound data such as music, sound effects, alarm sounds, and notification sounds.

[7-4-2c. Audio Data Transmission IC]
When serialized audio data is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the audio data transmission IC 1512c transmits the right-side audio data as differential serial data with positive and negative signals to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and transmits the left-side audio data as differential serial data with positive and negative signals to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882. This allows music and sound effects, etc., to be reproduced in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 in accordance with various performances.

In addition, the audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as differential serial data for each of the left and right sides between the boards from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194.This means that even if the positive and negative signals of the left audio data are affected by noise, when the noise components on the positive signal and the noise components on the negative signal are combined by the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 to form a single left audio data, the noise components cancel each other out, eliminating the noise components, thereby providing a noise countermeasure.

[7-4-2d. Door frame side performance transmitter IC]
As shown in FIG. 74, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d receives drawing data output from channel CH2 of the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a. As described above, channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data is composed of three video signals (red, green, and blue video signals) and three synchronization signals (horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal). The red, green, and blue video signals are each 8 bits long, for a total of 24 bits. In this embodiment, the red, green, and blue video signals that can be input to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d are each 6 bits long, for a total of 18 bits. Therefore, the most significant 6 bits of each video signal are input to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. The least significant 2 bits contain extremely weak color information that is difficult for the human eye to distinguish. Therefore, although the least significant 2 bits are output from the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a, the weak color information is invalidated.

When the drawing data output from channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, consisting of three video signals (red, green, and blue video signals) and three synchronization signals (horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal), is input to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d serializes the three video signals (red, green, and blue video signals) and the three synchronization signals (horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal) into differential serial signals (serial data) using THine Electronics Inc.'s "V-by-One (registered trademark)" and transmits these various signals via only a single differential pair cable from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3.

As described above, the drawing data output from channel CH1 of the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side display device 1600. Therefore, the length of the wiring required for the path (first path) from channel CH1 to the game board side display device 1600 is short. However, the drawing data output from channel CH2 of the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a is output (transmitted) from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, to the door frame side display device 460. Therefore, the length of the wiring required for the path (second path) from channel CH2 to the door frame side display device 460 is significantly longer than the length of the wiring required for the first path, making it extremely susceptible to the effects of noise.

Specifically, because the door frame 3 is pivotally supported on the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed, various wiring must be routed along the closed side of the main frame 4, opposite the locking unit 700 located along the open edge of the main frame 4, to electrically connect various boards on the main frame 4 to various boards on the door frame 3. For example, from the peripheral control board 1510 on the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 on the door frame 3. However, in addition to the payout device 830, the closed side of the main frame 4 is also equipped with a full tank branching unit 770, which can guide game balls paid out by the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320 and branch and guide the paid-out game balls to the lower tray 322 when the upper tray 321 is full of game balls. Also, the payout unit 800, which combines a power supply board 931 and other components supplied with power from the pachinko island equipment, is located below the main frame 4. In this way, the various wiring that electrically connects the various boards on the main body frame 4 side with the various boards on the door frame 3 side is routed near the payout device 830, full tank branch unit 770, power supply board 931, etc., and is in an environment that is subject to noise caused by the operation of the payout motor 834 on the payout device 830, as well as noise caused by electrostatic discharge from game balls and noise that has entered the power line supplied from the pachinko island equipment on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

For this reason, channel CH2, which requires significantly longer wiring for transmitting rendering data than channel CH1, employs a differential communication system called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Inc. in the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510, making it less susceptible to noise. In this embodiment, a differential one-pair cable is used as the wiring for electrically connecting the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 (described below) on the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, i.e., between the transmitter and receiver, as described above. However, this differential one-pair cable is not simply a parallel wire with two parallel wires, but a twisted pair cable. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also known as a twisted pair cable.

Here, we will briefly explain the case where parallel wires are used as a differential one-pair cable electrically connecting the transmitter and receiver. The length of the wiring for transmitting drawing data on channel CH2 of the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a is significantly longer than that of channel CH1 of the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a. Even though the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 uses differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics, Inc., making it less susceptible to noise, this hardware configuration alone can cause interference with the serial data on the parallel wires due to noise caused by electrostatic discharge from game balls and noise that has infiltrated the power lines supplied by the pachinko island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. If this is affected, the noise is not canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 attached to the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, so the serial data is received in an affected state by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, and the drawing data output from channel CH2 of the VDP1512a with built-in sound source is received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 as distorted data that is different from the normal data, causing a problem where an image like a snowstorm is displayed in the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460, making it impossible to tell what the image is.

In this embodiment, for channel CH2 of the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a, where the length of the wiring for transmitting drawing data is significantly longer than channel CH1 of the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 employs differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Inc., making it a system that is less susceptible to the effects of noise.In addition to this hardware configuration, a twisted pair cable is used as the differential one-pair cable electrically connecting the transmitter and receiver, which can cancel (remove) noise on the receiving side even if the differential serial data is affected by noise that has entered the wiring. As a result, even if the serial data in the twisted pair cable is affected by noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game balls or noise that has entered the power line supplied from the pachinko island equipment on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the noise is canceled (removed) when it is received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3.Therefore, the drawing data output from channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is reliably received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 stored in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 and output to the door frame side performance display device 460, so that the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the LCD display control unit 1512 can be reliably displayed on the door frame side performance display device 460. By canceling (removing) noise, it is possible to prevent images such as sandstorms that make it impossible to recognize what the image is on the door frame side display device 460, thereby preventing a decrease in the player's motivation to play. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's motivation to play due to the effects of noise.

In this embodiment, a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are interposed between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 (described later) provided on the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, i.e., between the transmitter and receiver. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not constructed as a single unit, but are assembled separately and then the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. Therefore, after attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4, various wiring such as harnesses and twisted cables from the various boards provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, thereby electrically connecting the various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side with the various boards provided on the door frame 3 side. With this configuration, after opening the door frame 3 from the main frame 4 and disconnecting the various wiring, the door frame 3 can be removed from the main frame 4, allowing maintenance of the main frame 4 and door frame 3.If a problem with the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3' can be attached to the main frame 4 in place of the defective door frame 3, and the various wiring from the various boards on the door frame 3' side can be electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 on the main frame 4 side, thereby electrically connecting the various boards on the main frame 4 side with the various boards on the door frame 3' side.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 employs differential communication using THine Electronics' "V-by-One (registered trademark)" to make it less susceptible to noise. In addition to this hardware configuration, a twisted pair cable is employed as the differential one-pair cable electrically connecting the transmitter and receiver, which is capable of canceling (removing) noise on the receiving side even if the differential serial data is affected by noise that has infiltrated the wiring. Specifically, the electrical connections between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the performance display drive board 4450 are each made by twisted pair cables, while the power wiring and wiring transmitting various other signals are each electrically connected by harnesses. As a result, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 include a video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting differential serial data transmitted by the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, as well as a power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals. Therefore, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 each have the above-mentioned video transmission wiring pattern formed a predetermined distance away from the power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns. Because the path from the transmitter to the receiver crosses multiple relay terminal boards, namely the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, a portion of the signal transmitting differential serial data transmitted by the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is reflected between the inputs and outputs of the video transmission wiring patterns formed on these multiple relay terminal boards, resulting in noise or a reduction in the output level of the signal. Therefore, in this embodiment, impedance matching is performed on the video transmission wiring patterns formed on these multiple relay terminal boards.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the electrical connections between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the boards of the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and between the boards of the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the performance display drive board 4450 are each made by twisted pair cables, whereas the power wiring and the wiring that transmits various other signals are each electrically connected by harnesses, with one wire of the twisted pair cable being red and the other wire being gray, and the wiring that supplies power within the harness being red and the other multiple wires being gray. Note that the wiring that supplies power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differentiating circuit]
The signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted to a forced switching circuit 1512f, a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and a performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. In addition to the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, this forced switching circuit 1512f also receives LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, which is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal by a differentiation circuit 1512e and input. This differentiation circuit 1512e serializes the LOCKN signal output request data into a differential serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is sent as an operation confirmation request to the door frame side performance display device 460 to check whether or not there is a problem with the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided on the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver, during the period when the start-up screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or during the period when the machine is waiting for customers and a demonstration is being performed by the game board side performance display device 1600. The forced switching circuit 1512f is configured to be circuit-connected to transmit two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal when the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, and to be circuit-connected to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d when the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are sent from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and to the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. On the other hand, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input to the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, so that the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is sent from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and to the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits LOCKN signal output request data to the performance display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided on the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 during the period when the start-up screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and during the period when the machine is waiting for customers and a demonstration is being performed by the game board side performance display device 1600.

The performance display drive board 4450 housed within the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 is primarily composed of an LCD module circuit 4450V which receives serial signals (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 via the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 (described below), restores the various serialized signals to parallel signals, and outputs them to the door frame side performance display device 460.

The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 receives drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. If it determines that the received drawing data is abnormal, it outputs a LOCKN signal (described below) to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. When a predetermined condition is met based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the sound source built-in VDP 1512a to generate an image to communicate this and outputs it to the game board side effect display device 1600, thereby displaying it in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to notify the user.

Furthermore, when the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, it outputs the LOCKN signal (described below) to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, when a LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can determine that there is no problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is no problem with the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, while when a LOCKN signal is not input, it determines that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is a problem with the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, and controls the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to output an alert image to that effect (for example, "A problem has occurred with the door frame side effect display device. Please call a store employee.") to the game board side effect display device 1600, and also controls the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to output an alert sound to that effect (for example, "A problem has occurred with the door frame side effect display device.") to the audio data transmission IC 1512c, which causes the alert sound to be played from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. This allows notifications to be made using notification images displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and notification sounds that are repeatedly played from speakers or the like installed in the door frame 3. At this time, all of the decorative LEDs installed in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards installed in the game board 5 may be lit.

[7-4-3. RTC control unit]
The RTC control unit 4165, which stores calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second, is configured around the RTC 4165a, as shown in FIG. 72 . The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa (hereinafter referred to as the "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa") that stores calendar information and time information. The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is used in this embodiment) as a driving power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. In other words, the RTC 4165a does not receive any power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1), but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). This allows the RTC 4165a to update and maintain calendar information and time information using power supplied from the battery 4165b even if power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a and sets it in the RTC information acquisition memory area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described above, allowing effects based on this acquired calendar information and time information to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Examples of such effects include, on December 25th, a screen of a Christmas tree or reindeer is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and on New Year's Eve, a screen running a New Year's countdown is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the factory.

In addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC's built-in RAM 4165aa also stores and retains LED brightness setting information if the game board display device 1600 is equipped with an LED backlight. If the game board display device 1600 is equipped with an LED backlight, the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains the brightness setting information from the RTC's built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight using PWM control. The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED backlight of the game board display device 1600 in 5% increments over a range from 100% to 70%, as well as the currently set brightness of the LED backlights of the game board display device 1600 and the door frame display device 460.

In addition to calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information, the RTC's built-in RAM 4165aa also stores input date and time information, which is the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second when the calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information were first stored in the RTC's built-in RAM 4165aa.

When the backlights of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 are cold cathode fluorescent tube type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the backlight ON/OFF or only turns it ON.

The various information stored in the RTC's built-in RAM 4165aa, such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date and time information, is set on the gaming machine manufacturer's production line. On the production line, in order to perform various tests, such as display tests of the gaming board display device 1600, the input date and time information is set to the manufacturing date and time, which is the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second entered on the production line as the date and time when the gaming board display device 1600 was first powered on.

In this way, the RTC's built-in RAM 4165aa can store and retain, in addition to calendar information and time information, information that needs to be maintained independently of the pachinko machine 1 model information (for example, the probability of a low- or high-probability jackpot game state occurring), such as brightness setting information when the game board side performance display device 1600 is equipped with an LED-type backlight, and input date and time information.

In addition, depending on the environment of the hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the brightness setting information stored in the RTC's built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright or too dim for the backlight brightness of the game board-side effect display device 1600 set at the time of manufacture. Therefore, by operating the effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, or operation button 410, it is possible to enter setting mode and adjust the backlight brightness to a predetermined level. In setting mode, for example, operating the effect selection left button 331 decreases the brightness, the effect selection right button 332 increases the brightness, and the brightness is determined by operation button 410. After powering on the pachinko machine 1, operating the left effect selection button 331, the right effect selection button 332, or the operation button 410 within a predetermined time period causes a screen for entering the setting mode to be displayed on the game board display device 1600. Furthermore, during the waiting-for-customer mode in which the game board display device 1600 is performing a demonstration, operating the left effect selection button 331, the right effect selection button 332, or the operation button 410 causes a screen for entering the setting mode to be displayed on the game board display device 1600. By operating the left effect selection button 331, the right effect selection button 332, or the operation button 410 according to this setting mode screen, calendar information and time information can be reset, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board display device 1600 can be adjusted to the desired brightness. This adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board display device 1600 is overwritten (updated) as the LED brightness stored in the brightness setting information.

In setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the brightness correction program described above to correct the decrease in brightness that occurs over time in the game board display device 1600 if the game board display device 1600 is equipped with an LED backlight. The peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 to determine the date and time the game board display device 1600 was first turned on, acquires calendar information specifying the year, month, and day and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second to determine the current date and time, and acquires brightness setting information containing brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED backlight of the game board display device 1600 in 5% increments within a range from 100% to 70%, as well as the currently set brightness of the LED backlight of the game board display device 1600. The acquired brightness setting information is then corrected based on correction information pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

For example, if six months have already passed since the game board side display device 1600 was first powered on, based on the current date and time and the date and time when the game board side display device 1600 was first powered on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and when the LED brightness included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of the game board side display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 80%, which is 5% higher than this 75%, as obtained as correction information. The brightness of the backlight is adjusted and turned on, and if 12 months have already passed since the game board side display device 1600 was first powered on, corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and when the LED brightness included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 85%, which is 75% plus the 10% correction information obtained.

The current date and time can be determined by directly obtaining calendar information specifying the year, month, and date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, or by obtaining the current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510, and the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510, in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, during the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 of the peripheral control unit power-on process described below.

[7-4-4. Volume adjustment]
As described above, the volume control volume 4140a is configured to adjust the volume of music, sound effects, and the like played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob. As described above, the volume control volume 4140a has a resistance value that can be varied by rotating the knob, and the electrically connected peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob from an analog value to a digital value, and converts the voltage into 1024 levels ranging from 0 to 1023. In this embodiment, as described above, the 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as board volumes 0 to 6. Board volume 0 is set to mute, and board volume 6 is set to maximum volume, with the volume increasing from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512 a with built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573 .

In this way, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation of the knob. In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds are also played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 to alert parlor staff and others of malfunctions in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1, as well as notification sounds to announce game effects (for example, to make the screen displayed on the game board-side effect display device 1600 more impressive, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a game state that is advantageous to the player). However, these notification sounds and notification sounds are played completely independently of volume adjustment based on the rotation of the knob, and the volume can be adjusted from mute to maximum volume by controlling the LCD display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source) using a program.

Unlike the board volume, which is divided into seven levels as described above, the volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly adjusted from mute to maximum volume. As a result, even if, for example, a hall staff member or the like turns the knob on the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume low, the music, sound effects, and other sound effects played from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573 will be reduced in volume, but the alert sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or a player is engaging in fraudulent behavior. Therefore, even if the volume of the sound effects is reduced, it is possible to prevent hall staff and the like from having difficulty noticing a malfunction or a player's fraudulent behavior due to the alert sound.

In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume by rotating the knob, the volume of the advertising sounds can be lowered so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects, or the volume of the advertising sounds can be increased to make the screen displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and door frame side performance display device 460 more impressive in addition to the music and sound effects, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a more advantageous gaming state.

In this embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 4140a, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted by operating the left effect selection button 331, right effect selection button 332, or operation button 410. After the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, operating the left effect selection button 331, right effect selection button 332, or operation button 410 within a predetermined time period displays a screen for setting mode on the game board display device 1600. Furthermore, operating the left effect selection button 331, right effect selection button 332, or operation button 410 during the waiting-for-customer mode during which the game board display device 1600 is performing a demonstration displays a screen for setting mode on the game board display device 1600. By operating the left effect selection button 331, right effect selection button 332, or operation button 410 according to this setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to the desired level. Specifically, the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume control volume 4140a knob from an analog value to a digital value, and the board volume value can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value to this converted value in response to the operation of the left effect selection button 331, the right effect selection button 332, or the operation button 410. This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for tracks that incorporate sound data for sound effects such as music and sound effects, among the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a, and is reflected in adjusting the volume of the sound effects, but is not reflected in adjusting the volume of the alert sounds and notification sounds described above.

As such, in this embodiment, there are two ways to adjust the volume of music and sound effects: by directly rotating the knob of the volume control volume 4140a; or by increasing or decreasing the board volume value by adding or subtracting a predetermined value in response to the operation of the left effect selection button 331, the right effect selection button 332, or the operation button 410. Because the volume control volume 4140a is implemented on the peripheral control board 1510, the main body frame 4 must always be open from the outer frame 2. In this case, only the hall staff can rotate the knob of the volume control volume 4140a. However, the volume adjusted by the hall staff may sound too low for the player, making it difficult for the player to hear the music and sound effects, or it may sound too high for the player, making the music and sound effects too loud. Therefore, if the effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332 or operation button 410 is operated within a predetermined time after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or if the effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332 or operation button 410 is operated during the period when the machine is in a waiting state for customers and a demonstration is being performed by the game board side effect display device 1600, a screen for entering the setting mode will be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the volume of the music and sound effects can be adjusted to the desired volume by operating the effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332 or operation button 410 according to this setting mode screen. This allows the player to adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to the desired volume, so if the volume adjusted by the hall staff is too low and the music and sound effects are difficult to hear, the player can increase the volume to the desired volume by operating the effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, or operation button 410; or if the volume adjusted by the hall staff is too high and the music and sound effects are too loud, the player can decrease the volume to the desired volume by operating the effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, or operation button 410.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the pachinko machine 1 is left in a state where no play is being performed for a predetermined period of time, enters a waiting state for customers, and the demonstration by the game board side performance display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times), the volume adjusted by the player who was previously seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing is canceled and the volume is initialized. This volume initialization restores the volume adjusted by the hall staff, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall staff by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. As a result, if the player who played while seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time felt that the adjusted volume was too low and made it difficult to hear the music or sound effects, the player who will be playing while seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 this time can increase the volume to the desired level by operating the effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, or operation button 410; and if the player who played while seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time felt that the adjusted volume was too high and made the music or sound effects too loud, the player who will be playing while seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 this time can decrease the volume to the desired level by operating the effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, or operation button 410.

8. Power Supply System
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 75 and 76. Figure 75 is a block diagram showing the power supply system of a pachinko machine, and Figure 76 is a block diagram that continues from Figure 75. First, the power supply board 931 will be described, followed by the power supplied to each control board, etc. Note that the grounds (GND) of the various boards and the grounds (GND) of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 931 and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board]
The power supply board 931 is electrically connected to a power cord, and the plug of this power cord is inserted into a power outlet of the pachinko island equipment. When the power switch 934 is operated, power from the pachinko island equipment is supplied to the power supply board 931, and the pachinko machine 1 can be powered on.

As shown in Figure 75, the power supply board 931 is equipped with a power supply control unit 935 and a launch control unit 953. The power supply control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from the 24 volt alternating current (AC 24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and payout control board 951. The launch control unit 953 is a circuit that drives and controls the launch solenoid 682 of the ball launcher 680 and the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250.

The power supply control unit 935 is equipped with a synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power supply creation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island equipment is supplied to the gaming ball dispensing device connection terminal board 869 via the power supply board 931, and is also supplied to the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. This synchronous rectification circuit 935a rectifies the AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island equipment and supplies it to the power factor correction circuit 935b. This power factor correction circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified power to create direct current +37V (DC +37V, hereinafter referred to as "+37V"), which is supplied to the smoothing circuit 935c. This smoothing circuit 935c removes ripples from the supplied +37V, smoothing the +37V and supplying it to the launch control circuit 953a and power supply generation circuit 935d of the launch control unit 953.

Capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and capacitor BC1 supplies backup power to the RAM (dispense control built-in RAM) built into the dispense control MPU 952a of the dispense control unit 952 on the dispense control board 951.

The launch control circuit 953a of the launch control unit 953 uses the +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a driving power source to adjust the drive current to output to the launch solenoid 682 in order to launch (launch) the game ball towards the game area 5a shown in Figure 5 with a launch strength (launch strength) that corresponds to the rotational position of the handle 302, while outputting a constant current to the ball sending solenoid 255 of the ball sending unit 250, causing the ball sending member of the ball sending unit 250 to receive one of the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320 and send the received game ball to the ball launcher 680.

The power supply generation circuit 935d generates DC +5V (DC +5V, hereinafter referred to as "+5V"), DC +12V (DC +12V, hereinafter referred to as "+12V"), and DC +24V (DC +24V, hereinafter referred to as "+24V") from the +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c, and supplies these to the dispensing control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. The power supply system to which +5V is applied and supplied is the +5V power line, the power supply system to which +12V is applied and supplied is the +12V power line, and the power supply system to which +24V is applied and supplied is the +24V power line.

The +5V generated by the power supply generating circuit 935d is supplied to the dispensing control board 951, as described below. The +5V supplied to the dispensing control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control filter circuit 951a, and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM via diode PD0. The +12V generated by the power supply generating circuit 935d is supplied to the +5V generating circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 951. This +5V generating circuit 1310g generates +5V, which is the control reference voltage for the main control MPU 1310a, from the +12V from the dispensing control board 951. The +5V generated by the +5V generating circuit 1310g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control filter circuit 1310h, and is also supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via diode MD0.

The negative terminal of capacitor BC1 on the power supply board 931 is grounded, while the positive terminal of capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM on the dispensing control board 951 and also to the cathode terminal of diode PD0 on the dispensing control board 951. In other words, the +5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d on the power supply board 931 flows toward the power terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, and current flows in the forward direction via diode PD0 toward the power terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM and the positive terminal of capacitor BC1. In this way, capacitor BC1 can be charged by receiving +5V via an electrical connection in which the +5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d on the power supply board 931 flows to the dispensing control board 951 and then returns from the dispensing control board 951 to the power supply board 931. As a result, when the +5V generated by the power supply circuit 935d is no longer supplied to the dispensing control board 951, the charge stored in capacitor BC1 is supplied to the dispensing control board 951 as dispensing VBB. Therefore, although current is prevented from flowing to the power terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a by diode PD0 and the dispensing control MPU 952a does not operate, dispensing VBB is supplied to the power terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM, thereby maintaining the stored contents.

The negative terminal of capacitor BC0 on the power supply board 931 is grounded (GND), while the positive terminal of capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM on the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 951, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of diode MD0 on the main control board 1310. In other words, the +5V generated by the +5V generating circuit 1310g flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and current flows forward via diode MD0 toward the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the positive terminal of capacitor BC0. In this way, capacitor BC0 can be supplied with +5V and charged through an electrical connection method in which the +5V generated by the +5V generating circuit 1310g is supplied to the main control board 1310 and then from the dispensing control board 951 to the power supply board 931. As a result, if the +12V generated by the power supply circuit 935d on the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 and the +5V generation circuit 1310g is no longer able to generate +5V, the charge stored in capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 as main VBB. Therefore, although current is blocked by diode MD0 from flowing to the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, main VBB is supplied to the power terminal of the main control internal RAM, thereby maintaining the memory contents. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to the main control internal RAM is composed of the diode MD0 and capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, we will provide an overview of the voltages supplied to each control board, etc., and then we will explain the voltages supplied mainly to the dispensing control board and the voltages supplied to the main control board.

The three voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V, created by the power supply circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the dispensing control board 951 as shown in FIG. 75, and of these three voltages, +12V and +24V are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 951. In addition, the three voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V, created by the power supply circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and are supplied via this frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively.

The three voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are supplied to the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180, as shown in Figure 76 (a). The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as lighting signals, flashing signals, and gradation lighting signals to the various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 outputs drive signals to electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids of the game board 5.

The peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a +3.3V generation circuit 1510b that generates direct current 3.3V (DC +3.3V, hereafter referred to as "+3.3V") from the +5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The +3.3V generated by the +3.3V generation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board side performance display device 1600. In addition, the +12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power supply 1600b of the game board side performance display device 1600.

In contrast, the three voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, as shown in Figure 76 (b). The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is equipped with a +9V generation circuit 194a that generates direct current +9V (DC +9V, hereinafter referred to as "+9V") from the +12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Along with the +9V generated by the +9V generation circuit 194a, a total of four voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are supplied to various decorative boards, etc. on the door frame 3.

In addition, the +12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 is supplied to the upper tray side LCD module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper tray side LCD module power supply circuit 4450x generates +3.3V from +12V. The +3.3V generated by the upper tray side LCD module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to the various electronic components that make up the LCD module circuit 4450V shown in Figure 74, as well as to the upper tray side LCD module backlight power supply circuit 4450y and the door frame side performance display device 460. The voltage generated by the upper tray side LCD module backlight power supply circuit 4450y is supplied to the door frame side performance display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to the dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 75 , the payout control board 951 includes a payout control MPU 952a and other components, as well as a payout control filter circuit 951a. This payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with +5V from the power supply board 931 and filters out noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 via diode PD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952. The +12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951. This external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 is a circuit that outputs signals conveying the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, game information about the pachinko machine 1, and the like to a hall computer installed in the gaming parlor (hall). The hall computer monitors the player's play by obtaining, from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a, the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1. Note that +24 from the power supply board 931 is not used in the payout control board 951 at all, but is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951.

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to the main control board]
As shown in Figure 75, the main control board 1310 includes, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a, etc., a +5V generating circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power outage monitoring circuit 1310e, etc. The +5V generating circuit 1310g receives +12V from the power supply board 931 via the delivery control board 951, and generates +5V, which is the control reference voltage for the main control MPU 1310a, from this +12V. In the main control board 1310, the power supply system to which the +5V generated by the +5V generating circuit 1310g is applied and supplied becomes the +5V power supply line. In this embodiment, the circuit is configured so that the +5V power line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the +5V power line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected, so the +5V power line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and the +5V power line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of other boards, etc. other than the main control board 1310.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to capacitor BC0 on the power supply board 931 via diode MD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the main control MPU 1310a. The +12V from the dispensing control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 1310b, and the +24V from the dispensing control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d.

The power outage monitoring circuit 1310e receives +12V and +24V from the power supply board 931 via the dispensing control board 951, and monitors these +12V and +24V for signs of a power outage or momentary interruption. When the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e detects signs of a power outage or momentary interruption of +12V and +24V, it outputs a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning. The power outage warning signal is input to the dispensing control MPU 952a via the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control input circuit 952b of the dispensing control board 951. The power outage warning signal is also input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. In addition, the power outage warning signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, as shown in Figure 76 (b), and is then input to the door frame decoration board, etc. via this frame decoration drive amplifier board 194.

In this embodiment, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the voltages applied to the two power lines, the +12V power line and the +24V power line, respectively, thereby enabling more accurate detection of signs of a power outage or momentary power interruption, compared to monitoring the voltage applied to either the +12V power line or the +24V power line.

[9. Main Control Board Circuit]
Next, the circuitry of the main control board 1310 shown in Figure 69 will be described with reference to Figures 77 to 79. Figure 77 is a circuit diagram showing the circuitry of the main control board, Figure 78 is a circuit diagram showing the power outage monitoring circuit, and Figure 79 is a circuit diagram showing the communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in Figure 75 will be described, followed by the power supply, main control system reset, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, power outage monitoring circuit, various input/output signals to the main control MPU, and the communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, which are created on the main control board 1310.

The main control board 1310 is mainly composed of the main control MPU 1310a, main control input circuit 1310b, main control output circuit 1310c, main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, power outage monitoring circuit 1310e, +5V generation circuit 1310g, and main control filter circuit 1310h shown in Figures 69 and 75, as well as peripheral circuits such as the main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal and the main control crystal oscillator MX0 (24 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment) that outputs a clock signal, as shown in Figure 77.

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 77, the main control filter circuit 1310h is primarily composed of a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. This main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit that is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The +5V generated by the +5V generating circuit 1310g is applied to terminal 1 of the main control three-terminal filter MIC0, its terminal 2 is connected to ground (GND), and +5V with noise components removed is output from terminal 3. The +5V applied to terminal 1 is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC0, the other end of which is grounded (GND), thereby first removing ripple (AC components superimposed on the voltage) and smoothing the voltage.

The +5V output from terminal 3 is electrically connected to the other end of capacitor MC1 and electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment), which are grounded to ground (GND), thereby further removing ripple and smoothing the voltage. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal for the main control crystal oscillator MX0, and the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal for the main control MPU 1310a. Furthermore, if a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the charge stored in electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal for the main control MPU 1310a for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary interruption.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to one end of capacitor MC3, the other end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed and ripples are further removed. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded (GND).

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to capacitor MC3 and the anode terminal of diode MD0. The cathode terminal of diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a, and to the other end of capacitor MC4, one end of which is grounded (GND). The VBB terminal of this main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of diode MD0 and the other end of capacitor MC4, and is also electrically connected via resistor MR0 to the positive terminal of capacitor BC0 on the power supply board 931 shown in Figure 75. In other words, the +5V signal, which has been smoothed and noise components removed by the main control filter circuit 1310h, is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and, via diode MD0, to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the positive terminal of capacitor BC0. As a result, as described above, if the +12V generated by the power supply circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is no longer supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the delivery control board 951 and the +5V generation circuit 1310g is no longer able to generate +5V, the charge stored in capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB. Therefore, although current is prevented from flowing to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a by diode MD0 and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM, thereby retaining the stored contents.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
The +5V signal, smoothed and noise-free by the main control filter circuit 1310h, is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, as shown in Figure 77. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, and includes a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC5, the other end of which is grounded (GND). The capacitance of this capacitor MC5 determines the delay time provided by the delay circuit. Specifically, when the +5V signal input to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 reaches a threshold value (e.g., 4.25V), the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from its output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal, which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. The output terminal is an open-collector output type, with one end electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor MR1, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and one end electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC6, which is grounded (GND). This capacitor MC6 removes ripple and smooths the signal. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is greater than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor MR1, resulting in a logic HI, and this logic is input to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, while when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is less than the threshold, the logic becomes LOW, resulting in this logic being input to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca.Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca are both negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes less than the threshold, the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca are reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to one end of capacitor MC7, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the +5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed and ripple is removed. The ground terminal is also grounded to ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
The +5V signal, which has been smoothed and noise removed by the main control filter circuit 1310h, is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, as shown in Figure 77. This VDD terminal is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC8, the other end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the VDD terminal is further smoothed and ripple removed. This smoothed +5V signal is also applied to the A, B, C, and ST terminals, which are output frequency selection terminals, in addition to the VDD terminal. By applying +5V to the A, B, C, and ST terminals, the main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24MHz clock signal from the F terminal, which is its output terminal.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and a 24 MHz clock signal is input to it. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is connected to ground (GND), and the D terminal, which outputs the divided wave of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b is a circuit to which detection signals from the vibration sensor 2405, general winning opening sensor 4020, first starting opening sensor 4002, second starting opening sensor 4004, magnetic detection sensor 4024, count sensor 4005, and gate sensor 4003 shown in Fig. 69 are input, as well as operation signals (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 shown in Fig. 70. The circuit configuration to which the detection signals from each switch are input is the same, so here we will explain the circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input.

[9-4-1. Circuit to which operation signal (RAM clear signal) from operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM (dispense control built-in RAM) built into the dispensing control MPU 952a of the dispensing control board 951 and the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from power-on, or to clear an error when an error is reported after power-on. It has the function of clearing RAM within a predetermined period from power-on and the function of clearing an error after power-on (after the period in which it functions as a RAM clear has elapsed, i.e., after the predetermined period has elapsed from power-on). Since the main control board 1310 does not have the error clearing function of the dispensing control board 951, when an operation signal is input from the operation switch 954 within a predetermined period from power-on, it interprets it as a RAM clear signal to clear the main control built-in RAM and performs the process of clearing the main control built-in RAM.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal with a logic LOW is input from the dispensing control board 951 to the main control board 1310, while when the operation switch 954 is operated, an operation signal with a logic HI is input from the dispensing control board 951 (this point will be explained in more detail later).

As shown in Figure 77, the transmission line that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the dispensing control board 951 for a predetermined period from when the power is turned on is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor MR2, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor MTR0 via resistor MR3. The base terminal of transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to resistor MR3 and also to the other end of resistor MR4, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor MTR0 is connected to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to one end of resistor MR5, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to input terminal PA0 of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a via non-inverting buffer IC MIC10 (the non-inverting buffer IC MIC10 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, one of which (MIC10A) shapes and outputs the signal waveform input without inverting the logic).

The circuit on the dispensing control board 951 that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is connected to ground (GND), and the transmission line that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to +12V by pull-up resistor MR2. When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the dispensing control board 951 is pulled down to ground (GND) and input as a logic LOW, while when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal from the dispensing control board 951 is pulled up to +12V by pull-up resistor MR2 and input as a logic HI.

The circuit consisting of resistors MR3 and MR4 and transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by an operation signal from operation switch 954.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, a logically LOW operation signal is input to the base terminal of transistor MTR0, turning transistor MTR0 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is raised to +5V by resistor MR5, and a logically HI operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input to input terminal PA0 of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to input terminal PA0 is HI, the main control MPU 1310a determines that this does not indicate an instruction to perform a RAM clear, which erases the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal, which is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor MR2 and has a logic HI, is input to the base terminal of transistor MTR0, turning transistor MTR0 ON and also turning the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is pulled down to ground (GND), and the operation signal from the operation switch 954, which has a logic LOW, is input to input terminal PA0 of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 1310a determines that this is an instruction to perform a RAM clear, which erases the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to +12V by pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input via the dispensing control board 951. In other words, between the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 951, in order to suppress the effects of noise that may enter the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the boards, a higher voltage of +12V than the control reference voltage of +5V is used to increase the reliability of the signal. Therefore, in this embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, first starting opening sensor 4002, and second starting opening sensor 4004, which are input directly to the main control board 1310, are pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistors, while the detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, count sensor 4005, general winning opening sensor 4020, and gate sensor 4003, which are input via the panel relay board 4161 shown in FIG. 69, are not input directly to the main control board 1310 and are therefore pulled up to +12V by pull-up resistors, just like the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

[9-5. Power outage monitoring circuit]
As shown in Figure 75, the main control board 1310 receives two voltages, +12V and +24V, from the power supply board 931 via the dispensing control board 951, and the +12V and +24V are input to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e. The power outage monitoring circuit 1310e monitors for signs of a power outage or momentary power outage of +12V and +24V, and when it detects a sign of a power outage or momentary power outage, it outputs a power outage warning signal as a power outage warning to the main control MPU 1310a, the dispensing control MPU 952a of the dispensing control board 951, and the peripheral control board 1510. Here, we will first explain the configuration of the power outage monitoring circuit, then explain the monitoring of a power outage or momentary power outage of +24V, the monitoring of a power outage or momentary power outage of +12V, and the output of the power outage warning signal.

[9-5-1. Configuration of power outage monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 78, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e is mainly composed of a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open-collector output type comparator MIC21, a D-type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, are electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR20, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and +5V is applied. The current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (set to 2.495V in this embodiment), which serves as the comparison reference voltage for the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC20, the other end of which is connected to ground (GND). The reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is smoothed by the capacitor MC20, which removes ripple (AC components superimposed on the voltage). The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is connected to ground (GND).

Comparator MIC21 has two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare a +24V monitoring voltage V1 with a reference voltage Vref, and the other (MIC21B) is used to compare a +12V monitoring voltage V2 with a reference voltage Vref. The +24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied to terminal 3, the positive terminal of MIC21A, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to terminal 2, the negative terminal of MIC21A. The +12V monitoring voltage V2 is applied to terminal 5, the positive terminal of MIC21B, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to terminal 6, the negative terminal of MIC21B. The results of these comparisons are input to D-type flip-flop MIC22. This D-type flip-flop MIC22 has two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in this embodiment. The Vcc terminal, which serves as the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC21, the other end of which is connected to ground (GND). The +5V applied to the Vcc terminal, which serves as the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is smoothed and ripple-free by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal, which serves as the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21, is connected to ground (GND).

[9-5-2. Monitoring of +24V power outage or momentary power outage]
As described above, monitoring for a +24V power outage or momentary power outage is performed by MIC21A of comparator MIC21 comparing the +24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. Terminal 3, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A of comparator MIC21 to which the +24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied, is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR21, one end of which is electrically connected to the +24V power line, and to the other end of a resistor MR22, one end of which is grounded (GND), as shown in Fig. 78, and is also electrically connected to the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22 and the other end of a capacitor MC23, one end of which is grounded (GND). The +24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to terminal 3, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A of comparator MIC21, is divided by the resistance ratio of resistors MR21 and MR22, and ripples are removed and smoothed by capacitor MC23. The values of resistors MR21 and MR22 are set so that when the +24V power supply experiences a power outage or momentary interruption and the voltage starts to drop from +24V to a preset power outage detection voltage V1pf (set to 21.40V in this embodiment), the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes equal to the reference voltage Vref.

The output terminal of comparator MIC21A, terminal 1, is an open-collector output, with one end electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR23, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and one end electrically connected to the other end of capacitor MC24, which is grounded (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22. Capacitor MC24 acts as a low-pass filter.

When the +24V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to terminal 1, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of comparator MIC21, is pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor MR23, and the signal with a logic HI is input to terminal PR, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +24V voltage is lower than the power outage detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to terminal 1, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of comparator MIC21, is pulled down to ground (GND), and a signal with a logic LOW is input to terminal PR, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. Monitoring of +12V power outage or momentary power outage]
As described above, monitoring for a +12V power outage or momentary power outage is performed by MIC21B of comparator MIC21 comparing the +12V monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. Terminal 5, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21 to which the +12V monitoring voltage V2 is applied, is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR24, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line, and to the other end of a resistor MR25, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND), as shown in Fig. 78, and is also electrically connected to the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25 and the other end of a capacitor MC25, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The +12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to terminal 5, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21, is divided by the resistance ratio of resistors MR24 and MR25, and ripples are removed and smoothed by capacitor MC25. The values of resistors MR24 and MR25 are set so that when the +12V power supply experiences a power outage or momentary interruption and the voltage starts to drop from +12V to a preset power outage detection voltage V2pf (set to 10.47V in this embodiment), the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes equal to the reference voltage Vref.

Terminal 7, the output terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21, is an open collector output and is electrically connected to terminal 1, the output terminal of MIC21A mentioned above. As a result, it is electrically connected to one end of pull-up resistor MR23, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and to the other end of capacitor MC24, which is grounded to ground (GND), and is electrically connected to terminal PR, the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22. As mentioned above, capacitor MC24 functions as a low-pass filter.

When the +12V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to terminal 7, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21, is pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor MR23, and the signal with a logic HI is input to terminal PR, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +12V voltage is lower than the power outage detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to terminal 7, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21, is pulled down to ground (GND), and a signal with a logic LOW is input to terminal PR, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Power outage warning signal output]
D-type flip-flop MIC22 memorizes the value (logic) of the signal input to its D-input terminal 1D in response to a change in the edge of the clock signal input to its clock input terminal 1CK, and outputs this memorized value (logic) from its output terminal 1Q, as well as outputting the inverse of the memorized value (logic) from its output terminal, negative logic 1Q. When a logic LOW signal is input to its clear terminal CLR, D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latched state and outputs a signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal input to its preset terminal PR from its output terminal 1Q (at this time, a signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q, i.e., a signal with the same logic as the signal input to the preset terminal PR, is output from the negative logic 1Q). On the other hand, when a logic HI is input to its clear terminal CLR, D-type flip-flop MIC22 sets the latched state. Furthermore, when a signal with a logic HI is input to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal, to set the latch state, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 maintains a state in which it outputs a signal with a logic HI from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, when a signal with a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal (at this time, it maintains a state in which it outputs a signal with the logic of the signal output from 1Q, which is the inverted signal, from the negative logic 1Q terminal).

In this embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22's D input terminal, terminal 1D, and clock input terminal, terminal 1CK, are both grounded to ground (GND). Therefore, the circuit is configured so that there is no change in the edge of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal, terminal 1CK, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the D input terminal, terminal 1D, is not stored and output from the output terminal, terminal 1Q. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives, at its preset terminal, a signal from terminal 1, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 that monitors for power outages or momentary interruptions of +24V, and a signal from terminal 7, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors for power outages or momentary interruptions of +12V, as input to its preset terminal, terminal PR. Based on these signals, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 outputs a signal from its output terminal, terminal 1Q. The power supply terminal Vcc is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC22, the other end of which is grounded (GND). The +5V applied to the Vcc power supply terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is smoothed and ripple removed by the capacitor MC22, the ground terminal GND is grounded, and the negative logic 1Q terminal, which inverts the logic of the output terminal 1Q, is not electrically connected to the outside.

In this embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a power outage clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca at its clear terminal, CLR. This power outage clear signal is output during the main control side power-on process performed by the main control MPU 1310a, described below, and is stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed. Because the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power outage clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, with its logic set to LOW. When a power outage clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases its latched state. At this time, the logic input to the preset terminal, PR, is inverted and output from the output terminal, 1Q.

On the other hand, when the output of the power outage clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HIGH via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca and is input to the CLR terminal. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is set to a latched state when the power outage clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and the logic becomes LOW at the PR terminal, latching the input state.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning signal. In addition, the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb, so that the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is output from the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb to the dispensing control board 951 as a dispensing power outage warning signal and to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal.

The main control input circuit 1310b electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. As shown in FIG. 78, the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR26, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor MTR20 via a resistor MR27. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR27 and also to the other end of a resistor MR28, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor MTR20 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to one end of resistor MR29, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to input terminal PA1 of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a via non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 (the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, one of which (MIC23A) shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input without inverting it).

The circuit consisting of resistors MR27 and MR28 and transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR20 is pulled down to ground (GND), turning transistor MTR20 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR20 is pulled up to +5V, turning transistor MTR20 ON and the switch circuit ON.

When both the +24V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V1pf and the +12V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V2pf are met, a logic HI signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20, turning the transistor MTR20 OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to +5V by the resistor MR29, and a logic HI power outage warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23.

On the other hand, when either the +24V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V1pf or the +12V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V2pf is met, a logic LOW signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic HI and is input to the base terminal of transistor MTR20, turning transistor MTR20 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR20 is pulled down to ground (GND), and a logic LOW power outage warning signal is input to input terminal PA1 of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a via non-inverting buffer ICMIC23.

Furthermore, the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, which outputs a signal from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the dispensing control board 951 as a dispensing power outage warning signal, is configured as an open-collector output type as shown in Figure 78, and terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 via resistor MR30. The base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to resistor MR30 and also to the other end of resistor MR31, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR32, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 via a resistor MR33. The base terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR33 and the other end of a resistor MR34, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC26, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and is also electrically connected to the dispensing control board 951 via a wiring harness. Furthermore, when the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the dispensing control board 951 via wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the +12V power line in the dispensing control input circuit 952b of the dispensing control unit 952 shown in Figure 70 on the dispensing control board 951, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a shown in Figure 70.

The circuit consisting of resistors MR30 and MR31 and the front-stage transistor MTR21 is the front-stage switch circuit, and the circuit consisting of resistors MR33 and MR34 and the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is the rear-stage switch circuit, which is turned ON/OFF by the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is pulled down to ground (GND), turning transistor MTR21 OFF and the preceding switch circuit OFF. Furthermore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR22 in the following stage, is pulled up to +5V by resistor MR32, turning transistor MTR22 ON and the following switch circuit ON. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR21 is pulled up to +5V, turning transistor MTR21 ON and the preceding switch circuit ON; the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR21, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR22 in the following stage, is pulled down to ground (GND), turning transistor MTR22 in the following stage OFF and the following switch circuit OFF.

When both the +24V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V1pf and the +12V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V2pf are met, a logic HI signal is input to the PR terminal, the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal, the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21, turning the preceding transistor MTR21 OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled up to +5V by resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the following transistor MTR22, turning the following transistor MTR22 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the downstream transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side on the dispensing control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic LOW is input to the dispensing control board 951.

On the other hand, when either the +24V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V1pf or the +12V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V2pf is met, a logic LOW signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21, turning the preceding transistor MTR21 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled down to ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the following transistor MTR22, turning the following transistor MTR22 OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the downstream transistor MTR22 is pulled up to +12V by a pull-up resistor in the dispensing control input circuit 952b of the dispensing control unit 952 on the dispensing control board 951 via wiring (harness), and a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic HI is input to the dispensing control board 951.

Furthermore, the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, which outputs a signal from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal, is configured as an open-collector output type as shown in FIG. 78. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above and is electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor MTR23 via resistor MR35. The base terminal of transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to resistor MR35 and also to the other end of resistor MR36, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor MTR23 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the +12V power line in the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a specified input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 72.

The circuit consisting of resistors MR35 and MR36 and transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR23 is pulled down to ground (GND), turning transistor MTR23 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR23 is pulled up to +5V, turning transistor MTR23 ON and the switch circuit ON.

When both the conditions that the +24V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V1pf and the +12V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V2pf are met, a logic HI signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of transistor MTR23, turning transistor MTR23 OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 is pulled up to +12V by a pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of peripheral control unit 1511 on peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), and a logic HI peripheral power outage warning signal is input to peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, when either the +24V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V1pf or the +12V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V2pf is met, a logic LOW signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic HI and is input to the base terminal of transistor MTR23, turning transistor MTR23 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 is pulled down to ground (GND) on the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and a logic LOW peripheral power outage warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

In this way, the main control input circuit 1310b, which transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning signal, and the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, which outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal, each have one transistor, and the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the peripheral control board 1510 While the logic of these signals is the same, the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, which outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the dispensing control board 951 as a dispensing power outage warning signal, has two transistors, one in the front stage and one in the rear stage, and the logic of the dispensing power outage warning signal is the inverse of the logic of the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the peripheral control board 1510, and is different from the logic of the power outage warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal.

In addition, the collector terminal of transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to one end of resistor MR29, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via a non-inverting buffer ICMIC23, while the collector terminal of transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is electrically connected via wiring (harness) to the other end of a pull-up resistor, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, in the dispensing control input circuit 952b of the dispensing control unit 952 on the dispensing control board 951, and the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 of the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is electrically connected via wiring (harness) to a pull-up resistor, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, in the dispensing control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 on the peripheral control board 1510. This is because, between the collector terminal of transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are mounted on the main control board 1310, and therefore a power outage warning is issued using the power outage warning signal logic (ON/OFF signal) that uses the +5V control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a. However, between the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 951, and between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, a power outage warning is issued using the power outage warning signal logic (ON/OFF signal) that uses +12V, a voltage higher than the +5V control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, dispensing control MPU 952a, and peripheral control MPU 1511a, in order to suppress the effects of noise that may enter the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards.

[9-6. Various input/output signals to the main control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals to the main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to Figure 77. The RXA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a, receives serial data from the dispensing control board 951 shown in Figure 69 as a dispensing main serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. On the other hand, the TXA terminal and TXB terminal, which are serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a, transmit serial data to be sent to the dispensing control board 951 from the TXA terminal to the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function as a main dispensing serial data transmission signal, and transmit the main dispensing serial data transmission signal from the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function to the dispensing control board 951, and transmit serial data to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in Figure 69 from the TXB terminal to the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function as a main peripheral serial data transmission signal, and transmit the main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition to the above-mentioned operation signal (RAM clear signal), each input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a also receives, for example, a payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951, which indicates that the above-mentioned main payout serial data reception signal has been successfully received, via the main control input circuit 1310b, and detection signals from various switches such as the first start port sensor 4002 shown in Figure 69 are also input via the main control input circuit 1310b.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a specified output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a main pay ACK signal indicating that the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal has been successfully received is output to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs the main pay ACK signal to the pay control board 951, or a drive signal is output to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca for the start port solenoid 2107 shown in Figure 69, and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs the drive signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 131 0d to the start port solenoid 2107, and outputs drive signals to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca for various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. 69, which then outputs drive signals to the various displays from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, and various information related to the game (game information) is output to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, which then outputs various information related to the game (game information) to the payout control board 951, etc.

[9-7. Interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board]
Next, the communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to Fig. 79. The main control board 1310 is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 931 shown in Fig. 75 via the dispensing control board 951, and the +5V generation circuit 1310g generates from this +12V a control reference voltage of +5V for the main control MPU 1310a. The main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted using +12V, a voltage higher than the +5V control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, in order to suppress the effects of noise that may enter the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, thereby increasing its reliability.

Specifically, the main control board 1310 has the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function function as a communications interface circuit, which is primarily composed of resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and transistor MTR50. In contrast, the peripheral control board 1510 has a communications interface circuit primarily composed of diode AD10, electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and photocoupler AIC10 (composed of a built-in infrared LED and photo IC).

+12V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of diode MD50 on the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 951, and the cathode terminal of diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of electrolytic capacitor MC50 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 220 microfarads (μF)), whose negative terminal is grounded to ground (GND). The cathode terminal of diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). As a result, if, for example, a power outage or momentary power outage occurs and power is no longer supplied from the power supply board 931 to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 951, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 can continue to be applied as +12V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 1510.

In this way, in the event of a power outage or momentary power outage, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 μF in this embodiment) shown in FIG. 77 is applied as +5 V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main serial transmit port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a can at least transfer the command set in its transmit buffer register 1310aeb by the main control CPU core 1310aa to the transmit shift register 41aea via the serial management unit 1310aec, and complete transmission from the transmit shift register 1310aea as main serial data.

As mentioned above, the main serial data transmission signal sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted using a voltage of +12V, which is higher than the +5V control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, in order to reduce the effects of noise that may enter the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, thereby increasing its reliability.

In this embodiment, when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as +12V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, when the main control serial transmit port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set in its transmit buffer register 1310aeb by the main control CPU core 1310aa to the transmit shift register 41aea via the serial management unit 1310aec and transmits it as main serial data from the transmit shift register 1310aea, a main serial data transmit signal with a logic HI due to +12V can be transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50.

In this embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a has a storage capacity of 32 bytes, and since one packet consists of 3 bytes of data, a maximum of 10 packets of data can be stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. Also, in this embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19,200 bps.

The cathode terminal (terminal 3) of photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of transistor MTR50 on the main control board 1310 via resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). Resistor AR10 on the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistor that limits the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of photocoupler AIC10.

The TXB terminal, which outputs the main serial data transmit signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 77, is electrically connected to one end of resistor MR50, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor MTR50 via resistor MR51. The base terminal of transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to resistor MR51 and also to the other end of resistor MR52, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor MTR50 is grounded (GND).

The circuit consisting of resistors MR51 and MR52 and transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit. When the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR50 is pulled down to ground (GND), turning transistor MTR50 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, no forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 1510, turning photocoupler AIC10 OFF. On the other hand, when the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR50 is pulled up to +5V by resistor MR50, turning transistor MTR50 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 1510, turning photocoupler AIC10 ON.

The anode terminal of diode AD10 on peripheral control board 1510 is supplied with +5V from power supply board 931 via frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The cathode terminal of diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of electrolytic capacitor AC10, whose negative terminal is grounded (GND). The cathode terminal of diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of electrolytic capacitor AC10 and also to the Vcc terminal (terminal 6), which is the power supply terminal of photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (terminal 4) of photocoupler AIC10 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal (terminal 5) of photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor AR11, which is electrically connected to the positive terminal of electrolytic capacitor AC10, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of peripheral control MPU 1511a. When photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of photocoupler AIC10 changes, and this signal is input as a main serial data transmission signal to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

As a result, as described above, if, for example, a power outage or momentary power outage occurs and the +5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can continue to be applied as +5V to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. When a power outage or momentary power outage occurs, the +5V is applied from the electrolytic capacitor AC10, allowing the main serial data transmission signal sent from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 to complete transmission of the data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a. This ensures that the main serial data transmission signal, i.e., the main serial data, is reliably received by the peripheral control board 1510 without being interrupted or missing.

When the logic of the main serial data transmission signal sent from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR50 is pulled down to ground (GND), turning transistor MTR50 OFF and turning photocoupler AIC10 OFF. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor AR11, and the main serial data transmission signal with a logic HI is input to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. On the other hand, when the logic of the main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR50 is pulled up to +5V by resistor MR50, turning transistor MTR50 ON and turning photocoupler AIC10 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of photocoupler AIC10 is pulled down to ground (GND), and a main serial data transmission signal with a logic LOW is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of peripheral control MPU 1511a. In this way, the logic of the main serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510.

In this way, in this embodiment, measures are taken to deal with a drop in the control reference voltage and communication voltage due to a power outage or momentary power outage occurring on the +5V power line to which +5V, the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, is applied, and the +12V power line to which +12V, the communication voltage applied via diode MD50, is applied. In other words, for the main serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a, the +5V power line and the positive terminal of electrolytic capacitor MC2, which uses electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power source, are electrically connected in parallel. Therefore, even if a power outage or momentary power outage occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the +5V power line drops, the control reference voltage is applied from the positive terminal of electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h, which serves as the first auxiliary power source, so that the control reference voltage can be maintained. Furthermore, For the reset-free main control output circuit 1310cb, which functions as a communications interface circuit, +12V applied to the +12V power line is applied to the anode terminal of diode MD50 as the communication voltage. The cathode terminal of this diode MD50 is electrically connected in parallel with the positive terminal of electrolytic capacitor MC50, which serves as a second auxiliary power source. Even if a power outage or momentary power interruption causes a drop in the communication voltage applied from the +12V power line via diode MD50, the communication voltage is applied from the positive terminal of electrolytic capacitor MC50, which serves as the second auxiliary power source, thereby maintaining the communication voltage. This prevents commands being sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 from being interrupted or dropped, allowing the peripheral control board 1510 to reliably receive commands being sent. This eliminates the risk of missing commands immediately after a power outage or momentary power interruption.

In addition, the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h is set to 470 μF, and the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is set to 220 μF so that all of the multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a can be completely transmitted as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, which is composed of resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and transistor MTR50 and functions as a communication interface circuit. As a result, even if a power outage or momentary power outage occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb can be completely transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data via the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which functions as an interface circuit, so the peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive the multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb without any interruption or loss.

[10. Circuit of dispensing control board]
Next, the circuits of the dispensing control board 951 shown in Fig. 70 will be described with reference to Figs. 80 to 85. Fig. 80 is a circuit diagram showing the circuits of the dispensing control unit, Fig. 81 is a circuit diagram showing the dispensing control input circuit, Fig. 82 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of Fig. 81, Fig. 83 is a circuit diagram showing the dispensing motor drive circuit, Fig. 84 is a circuit diagram showing the CR unit input/output circuit, and Fig. 85 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals with the main control board 1310 and various output signals to the external terminal board 784. First, the dispensing control filter circuit 951a will be described, followed by the circuits of the dispensing control unit, and various input/output signals with the main control board 1310 and various output signals to the external terminal board 784.

[10-1. Dispense control filter circuit]
As shown in Figure 80, the dispensing control filter circuit 951a is primarily composed of a dispensing control three-terminal filter PIC0. This dispensing control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit with excellent attenuation characteristics and magnetically shielded with ferrite. Terminal 1 of the dispensing control three-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with +5V from the power supply board 931 shown in Figure 75 and is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor PC0, the other end of which is grounded (GND). The +5V from the power supply board 931 is first smoothed by the capacitor PC0, removing ripple (AC components superimposed on the voltage). Terminal 2 of the dispensing control three-terminal filter PIC0 is grounded (GND), and terminal 3 of the dispensing control three-terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5V with noise components removed.

The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) terminals of capacitor PC1 and electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment), respectively. This further smooths and removes ripple from the +5V output from terminal 3 of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. This smoothed +5V is then applied to the power terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCC terminal, which is the power terminal for the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, and the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal for the payout control MPU 952a, as described below. Furthermore, if a power outage or momentary power outage occurs and the power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the charge stored in electrolytic capacitor PC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal for the payout control MPU 952a, for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary power outage.

The VDD terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor PC3, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed and ripples are further removed by capacitor PC3. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, is grounded to ground (GND).

In addition, the VDD terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a is electrically connected to capacitor PC3 and the anode terminal of diode PD0. The cathode terminal of diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (dispensing control built-in RAM) built into the dispensing control MPU 952a, and to the other end of capacitor PC4, one end of which is grounded (GND). The VBB terminal of this dispensing control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of diode PD0 and the other end of capacitor PC4, and is also electrically connected to the positive terminal of capacitor BC1 on the power supply board 931 shown in Figure 75 via resistor PR0. In other words, the +5V signal, which has been smoothed and noise components removed by the dispensing control filter circuit 951a, is applied to the VDD terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a and, via diode PD0, to the VBB terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM and the positive terminal of capacitor BC1. As a result, as described above, when the +5V generated by the power supply generating circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge stored in capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 951 as payout VBB. Therefore, although current is blocked by diode PD0 from flowing to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, preventing the payout control MPU 952a from operating, payout VBB is applied to the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM, thereby maintaining the stored contents. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to the payout control built-in RAM is composed of the diode PD0 and capacitor BC1.

[10-2. Circuit of dispensing control unit]
The dispensing control unit 952 is mainly composed of a dispensing control MPU 952a, a dispensing control input circuit 952b, a dispensing control output circuit 952c, a dispensing motor drive circuit 952d, a CR unit input/output circuit 952e, and peripheral circuits, as shown in Figure 80, including a dispensing control system reset PIC1 that outputs a reset signal and a dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0 (8 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment) that outputs a clock signal. Here, we will first explain the dispensing control system reset, followed by an explanation of the dispensing control crystal oscillator, dispensing control input circuit, dispensing motor drive circuit, CR unit input/output circuit, and various input/output signals to the dispensing control MPU.

[10-2-1. Dispense control system reset]
The +5V signal, smoothed and noise-free by the dispensing control filter circuit 951a, is applied to the power supply terminal of the dispensing control system reset PIC1, as shown in Figure 80. The dispensing control system reset PIC1 resets the dispensing control MPU 952a and the dispensing control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and includes a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the dispensing control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor PC5, the other end of which is grounded (GND). The capacitance of this capacitor PC5 allows the delay time set by the delay circuit to be set. Specifically, when the +5V input to the power supply terminal of the dispensing control system reset PIC1 reaches a threshold value (e.g., 4.25V), the system reset signal is output from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

The output terminal of the dispensing control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is the reset terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, and the reset terminal of the dispensing control output circuit with reset function 952ca. The output terminal is an open-collector output type, and is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor PR1, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and to the other end of a capacitor PC6, which is grounded to ground (GND). This capacitor PC6 acts as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power terminal is greater than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR1, and the logic becomes HI, and this logic is input to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, respectively. On the other hand, when the voltage input to the power terminal is less than the threshold, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is input to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, respectively. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power terminal is less than the threshold, the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function are reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to one end of capacitor PC7, the other end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the +5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed and ripple is removed. The ground terminal is also grounded to ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Dispense control crystal oscillator]
The +5V signal, which has been smoothed and noise removed by the dispensing control filter circuit 951a, is input to the VCC terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0, as shown in Figure 80. This VCC terminal is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor PC8, the other end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed and ripple removed. In addition to the VCC terminal, this smoothed +5V is also applied to the OE terminal, which is the output enable terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0. When +5V is applied to the OE terminal, the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs an 8MHz clock signal from the OUT terminal, which is its output terminal.

The OUT terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the dispensing control MPU 952a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0, is connected to ground (GND).

[10-2-3. Dispense control input circuit]
The dispensing control input circuit 952b is a circuit to which a dispensing power outage warning signal is input from the door frame opening switch 618, the main frame opening switch 619 shown in Fig. 70, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310 shown in Fig. 75, the handle relay terminal board 315 shown in Fig. 70, a circuit to which a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input via the power supply board 931, a circuit to which an operation signal is input from the operation switch 954, etc. First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input will be described, followed by the circuit to which the detection signal from the main frame opening switch is input, the circuit to which the dispensing power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit is input, the circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input, and the circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch is input. In addition, the output terminals of the full tank detection sensor 279 and the various detection switches such as the bulb out detection sensor 827, dispensing detection sensor 842, and rotation detection sensor 840 shown in Figure 70 are open collector output type, so the circuit configurations to which the detection signals from the various detection switches are input are almost identical, and therefore here we will explain the circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input.

[10-2-3a. Circuit to which detection signal from door frame open switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 is a normally closed (NC) switch. The switch is ON (conductive) when the door frame 3 is open from the main frame 4, and OFF (disconnected) when the door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4. Terminal 2 of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded to ground (GND), while terminal 1 of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor PR20, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and to the base terminal of a transistor PTR20 via a resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21 and the other end of a resistor PR22, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). Terminal 1 of the door frame opening switch 618 is also electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20 and the other end of a capacitor PC20, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor PTR20 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to one end of resistor PR23, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to input terminal PA0 of input port PA of dispensing control MPU 952a via non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, one of which (PIC20A) shapes the logic of the signal waveform input to it without inverting it.) When transistor PTR20 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR20 changes, and this signal is input to input terminal PA0 of input port PA of dispensing control MPU 952a as a door open signal.

Furthermore, terminal 1 of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR20 via resistor PR21. Terminal 1 is also pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR21 via resistor PR24. The base terminal of transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to resistor PR24 and to the other end of resistor PR25, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor PTR21 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) on external terminal board 784, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line. When transistor PTR21 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR21 changes, and this signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as the outer end frame door open information output signal.

Furthermore, terminal 1 of the door frame open switch 618 is pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR20 via resistor PR21, pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR21 via resistor PR24, and pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR22 via resistor PR26. The base terminal of transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to resistor PR26 and to the other end of resistor PR27, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor PTR22 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor (not shown), one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line, in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69. When transistor PTR22 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 changes, and this signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door open signal.

The circuit consisting of pull-up resistor PR20 and capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generating circuit, and is configured as a circuit that also has the function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the door frame opening switch 618 caused by a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts that make up the door frame opening switch 618 repeatedly turn ON and OFF for short periods of time when the door frame 3 is released from the main frame 4, or when the door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR21, PR22 and transistor PTR20, the circuit consisting of resistors PR24, PR25 and transistor PTR21, and the circuit consisting of resistors PR26, PR27 and transistor PTR22 are switch circuits that are turned ON/OFF by the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618.

When the door frame 3 is released from the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR20 is pulled down to ground (GND), turning transistor PTR20 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR23, and a door frame opening signal with a logic HI is input to input terminal PA0 of input port PA of dispensing control MPU 952a. Also, when the door frame 3 is released from the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR21 is pulled down to ground (GND), turning transistor PTR21 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +12V via the wiring (harness) by the pull-up resistor on external terminal board 784, and an outer frame door open information output signal with a logic high is input to external terminal board 784. Also, when the door frame 3 is released from the main frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is ON, and therefore the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR22 is pulled down to ground (GND), turning transistor PTR22 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 is pulled up to +12V via the wiring (harness) by the pull-up resistor on main control input circuit 1310b of main control board 1310, and a main frame door open signal with a logic high is input to main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, and therefore the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR20, turning transistor PTR20 ON and also turning the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR20 is pulled down to ground (GND), and a door frame opening signal with a logic LOW is input to input terminal PA0 of input port PA of dispensing control MPU 952a. Also, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, and therefore the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +5V, turning transistor PTR21 ON and also turning the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR21 is pulled down to ground (GND), and an outer frame door open information output signal with a logic LOW is input to the external terminal board 784. Furthermore, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is OFF, and therefore the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR22 is pulled up to +5V, turning transistor PTR22 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 is pulled down to ground (GND), and a main frame door open signal with a logic LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is released from the main frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is turned ON, causing a door frame open signal with a logic HI to be input to input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a, an outer end frame door open information output signal with a logic HI to be input to the external terminal board 784, and a main frame door open signal with a logic HI to be input to the main control board 1310.On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is turned OFF, causing a door frame open signal with a logic LOW to be input to input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a, an outer end frame door open information output signal with a logic LOW to be input to the external terminal board 784, and a main frame door open signal with a logic LOW to be input to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3b. Circuit to which the detection signal from the main body frame open switch is input]
The frame opening switch 619 is a normally closed (NC) switch, which is turned on (conductive) when the frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 and turned off (disconnected) when the frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2. Terminal 2 of the frame opening switch 619 is grounded to ground (GND), while terminal 1 of the frame opening switch 619 is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor PR28, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and to the base terminal of a transistor PTR23 via resistor PR29. The base terminal of transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to resistor PR29 and to the other end of a resistor PR30, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). Terminal 1 of the frame opening switch 619 is also electrically connected to pull-up resistor PR28 and to the other end of a capacitor PC21, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor PTR23 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of transistor PTR21 described above and is also electrically connected to external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) on external terminal board 784, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line. When transistor PTR23 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR23 changes, and this signal is input to external terminal board 784 as an outer frame door open information output signal.

In addition, terminal 1 of the main frame open switch 619 is pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR23 via resistor PR29. It is also pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR24 via resistor PR31. The base terminal of transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to resistor PR31 and to the other end of resistor PR32, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor PTR24 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 described above and to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor (not shown), one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line, in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69. When transistor PTR24 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR24 changes, and this signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door open signal.

The circuit consisting of pull-up resistor PR28 and capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generating circuit, and is configured as a circuit that also has the function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the main frame opening switch 619 caused by a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts that make up the main frame opening switch 619 repeatedly turn ON and OFF for short periods of time when the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, or when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR29, PR30 and transistor PTR23, and the circuit consisting of resistors PR31, PR32 and transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned ON/OFF by the detection signal from the main frame open switch 619.

When the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main frame open switch 619 is ON, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR23 is pulled down to ground (GND), turning transistor PTR23 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +12V via the wiring (harness) by the pull-up resistor on external terminal board 784, and an outer end frame door open information output signal with a logic high is input to external terminal board 784. Also, when the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main frame open switch 619 is ON, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR24 is pulled down to ground (GND), turning transistor PTR24 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +12V via the wiring (harness) by the pull-up resistor in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310, and a main frame door open signal with a logic HI is input to the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is OFF, and therefore the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR28, turning transistor PTR23 ON and also turning the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR23 is pulled down to ground (GND) at external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness), and an outer end frame door open information output signal with a logic LOW is input to external terminal board 784. Also, when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is OFF, and therefore the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR28, turning transistor PTR24 ON and also turning the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR24 is pulled down to ground (GND) on the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and a main frame door open signal with a logic LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In this way, when the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main frame open switch 619 is turned ON, causing an outer end frame door open information output signal with a logic HI to be input to the external terminal board 784, and a main frame door open signal with a logic HI to be input to the main control board 1310.On the other hand, when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main frame open switch 619 is turned OFF, causing an outer end frame door open information output signal with a logic LOW to be input to the external terminal board 784, and a main frame door open signal with a logic LOW to be input to the main control board 1310.

In this embodiment, as described above, even if the door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4 or the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, or if both of these states occur, a main frame door open signal is input to the main control board 1310. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 cannot determine whether the door frame 3 is open from the main frame 4 or the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 based on the main frame door open signal. However, even if a player experiences a situation during normal play where the door frame 3 and/or the main frame 4 is open, It can be determined that a state in which the door frame 3 and/or the main frame 4 are open has occurred, and because an outer end frame door open information output signal is input to the external terminal board 784, this outer end frame door open information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. Although the hall computer cannot determine whether the door frame 3 is open from the main frame 4 or whether the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 based on the outer end frame door open information output signal, it can determine that a state in which the door frame 3 and/or the main frame 4 are open has occurred, which does not occur during normal gameplay.

In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, the door frame opening switch 618 and the main frame opening switch 619 are normally closed switches. This means that even if the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned ON (conductive), the door frame 3 will remain open from the main frame 4, and even if the main frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned ON (conductive), the main frame 4 will remain open from the outer frame 2. In this way, by using normally closed switches for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main frame opening switch 619, even in the event of a short circuit, the main frame door open signal can be output to the main control board 1310, and the outer end frame door open information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

Furthermore, if the door frame opening switch 618 and the main frame opening switch 619 are changed from normally closed switches to normally open (NO) switches (door frame opening switch 618' and main frame opening switch 619'), the door frame opening switch 618' will be ON (conductive) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main frame 4, and will be OFF (disconnected) when the door frame 3 is open to the main frame 4. The main frame opening switch 619' will be ON (conductive) when the main frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, and will be OFF (disconnected) when the main frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2. In this way, even if the door frame opening switch 618' becomes disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the door frame 3 will remain open from the main frame 4, and even if the main frame opening switch 619' becomes disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the main frame 4 will remain open from the outer frame 2. In this way, even if normally open switches are used for the door frame opening switch 618' and the main frame opening switch 619', even in the event of a disconnection, a main frame door open signal can be output to the main control board 1310, and an outer end frame door open information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

[10-2-3c. Circuit to which the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit is input]
A transmission line that transmits a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310 is electrically connected at one end to a pull-up resistor PR40 that is electrically connected to the +12V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor PTR40 via a resistor PR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the resistor PR41 and also to the other end of a resistor PR42 that is grounded at one end (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR43, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a via a non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, one of which (PIC40A) shapes the logic of the signal waveform input to it without inverting it.) When the transistor PTR40 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and this signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a as a dispensing power outage warning signal.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR41 and PR42 and transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a dispensing power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310.

As described above, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e monitors for signs of power outages or momentary power outages of the two voltages, +12V and +24V, from the power supply board 931. When a sign of a power outage or momentary power outage is detected, it outputs a dispensing power outage warning signal to the dispensing control board 951 via the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb as a power outage warning. The power outage monitoring circuit 1310e monitors for signs of power outages or momentary power outages of the +12V and +24V voltages, and when both the condition that the +24V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the +12V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V2pf are met, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the downstream transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side via the wiring (harness) on the dispensing control board 951, resulting in a logic LOW dispensing power outage warning signal. When a signal is input to the dispensing control board 951, and either the +24V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V1pf or the +12V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V2pf is met, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 mentioned above via the wiring (harness), and a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic HI is input to the dispensing control board 951.

When both the conditions that the +24V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V1pf and the +12V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V2pf are met, that is, when there are no signs of a power outage or momentary interruption in the +12V and +24V voltages, a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic LOW is input to the dispensing control board 951. The voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR40 is pulled down to ground (GND), turning transistor PTR40 OFF, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR40 is pulled up to +5V by resistor PR43. As a result, a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic HI is input from the collector terminal of transistor PTR40 to input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when either the +24V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V1pf or the +12V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V2pf is met, that is, when there are signs of a power outage or momentary power outage of the +12V and/or +24V voltage, a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic HI is input to the dispensing control board 951. The dispensing power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e causes the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR40 to be pulled up to +12V by pull-up resistor PR40, turning transistor PTR40 ON and pulling the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR40 down to ground (GND). As a result, a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic LOW at the collector terminal of transistor PTR40 is input to input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

In this way, when there are signs of a power outage or momentary power outage of the +12V and/or +24V voltages, a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic HI is input to input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a, while when there are no signs of a power outage or momentary power outage of the +12V and +24V voltages, a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic LOW is input to input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. As mentioned above, when there are signs of a power outage or momentary power outage of the +12V and/or +24V voltages, a power outage warning signal with a logic HI is input to input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, while when there are no signs of a power outage or momentary power outage of the +12V and +24V voltages, a power outage warning signal is input to input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the logic of the dispensing power outage warning signal input to the dispensing control MPU 952a in response to a power outage warning from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e and the logic of the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a are the same.

[10-2-3d. Circuit that receives detection signal from full tank detection sensor]
A detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the fall cover unit 270 is input to the dispensing control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931. The output terminal of this full tank detection sensor 279 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and on the dispensing control board 951, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR44a, which is electrically connected to the +12V power line, and is also electrically connected to terminal 1 of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. This three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit that is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics.

Terminal 2 of the full tank detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50 is grounded, and terminal 3 of the full tank detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50 is electrically connected to terminal 1 of the full tank detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50 via resistor PR44b and to the base terminal of transistor PTR41 via resistor PR45. As a result, the full tank detection sensor 279 detection signal is filtered out of noise by the full tank detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50 and input to the base terminal of transistor PTR41. The base terminal of transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to resistor PR45, as well as to the other end of resistor PR46, one end of which is grounded, and to the other end of capacitor PC40, one end of which is electrically connected to ground. Capacitor PC40 functions as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of transistor PTR41 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to one end of resistor PR47, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a via non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40B) without inverting the logic). When transistor PTR41 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR41 changes, and this signal is input as a full signal to input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR45 and PR46 and transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that turns ON/OFF based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279.

As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full of stored game balls. In this embodiment, when the storage space is not full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor 44a in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and a logic HI signal is input to the payout control board 951. On the other hand, when the storage space is full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled down to ground (GND) in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and a logic LOW signal is input to the payout control board 951.

When the storage space is not full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor 44a on the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and a logic HI signal is input to the base terminal of the above-mentioned transistor PTR41, turning transistor PTR41 ON and also turning the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR41 is pulled down to ground (GND), and a logic LOW full tank signal is input to input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when the storage space is full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled down to ground (GND) on the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and a logic LOW signal is input to the base terminal of the above-mentioned transistor PTR41, turning transistor PTR41 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR41 is pulled up to +5V by resistor PR47, and a logic HI full tank signal is input to input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

In this embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to a switch circuit consisting of resistors PR45, PR46, and transistor PTR41 via the three-terminal filter for the full tank detection sensor PIC50. However, in this circuit configuration, the detection signals from various detection switches, such as the bulb out detection sensor 827 and dispensing detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70, are input directly to the respective switch circuits without passing through a T-type filter circuit such as the three-terminal filter for the full tank detection sensor PIC50. Because the full tank detection sensor 279 is located in the fault cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, the path for transmitting the detection signal is significantly longer and more susceptible to noise than the bulb out detection sensor 827, dispensing detection sensor 842, etc., located in the dispensing device 830 attached to the main frame 4.

The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full with stored game balls. When the payout control MPU 952a determines that the storage space is full with stored game balls based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, it forcibly stops the drive control of the payout motor 834 and controls the payout of game balls by the payout rotor to stop. In other words, if noise enters the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU 952a may forcibly stop the drive control of the payout motor 834 and stop the payout of game balls by the payout rotor even though the storage space is not full of stored game balls, or if the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled to rotate the payout rotor and continue to pay out game balls even though the storage space is full of stored game balls, and the payout rotor itself becomes unable to rotate, and an abnormal load is placed on the payout motor 834, causing the payout motor 834 to become overloaded, generate abnormal heat, and break down, or the mechanism that transmits the rotational movement of the payout motor 834's rotational shaft to the payout rotor may break down. Therefore, in this embodiment, to prevent such problems from occurring, a circuit configuration is adopted in which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is first filtered out by the full tank detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50, which removes noise components.

[10-2-3e. Circuit to which operation signals from operation switches are input]
Terminals 1 and 2, which are output terminals of the operation switch 954, are grounded, and terminals 3 and 4, which are output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via a resistor PR49. The base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to resistor PR49 and to one end of a resistor PR50, one end of which is grounded to ground. Terminal 4, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to pull-up resistor PR48 and to the other end of a capacitor PC41, one end of which is grounded to ground. The emitter terminal of the front-stage transistor PTR42 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR51, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 via a resistor PR52. The base terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the resistor PR52 and also to the other end of a resistor PR53, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR54, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a via a non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40C) without inverting the logic of the signal). The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 changes when the front-stage and rear-stage transistors PTR42, PTR43 are turned ON/OFF, and this signal is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

In addition, terminals 3 and 4, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via resistor PR49, and are also pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR44 via resistor PR55. The base terminal of transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to resistor PR55 and to the other end of resistor PR56, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor PTR44 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to one end of pull-up resistor MR2, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line, in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. 77. Turning transistor PTR44 ON/OFF changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR44, and this signal is input as a RAM clear signal to input terminal PA0 of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a.

The circuit consisting of pull-up resistor PR48 and capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generating circuit, and is configured as a circuit that also has the function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the operation switch 954 caused by the fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts that make up the operation switch 954 repeatedly turn ON and OFF for a short period of time when the operation switch 954 is pressed.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR49, PR50 and transistor PTR42 is the front-stage switch circuit, the circuit consisting of resistors PR52, PR53 and transistor PTR43 is the rear-stage switch circuit, and the circuit consisting of resistors PR55, PR56 and transistor PTR44 is the switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the operation signal from operation switch 954.

As described above, the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM (dispense control internal RAM) built into the dispensing control MPU 952a of the dispensing control board 951 and the RAM (main control internal RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from power-on, or to resolve an error when an error is reported after power-on. It has two functions: clearing RAM within a predetermined period from power-on, and clearing an error after power-on (after the period during which it functions as a RAM clear has elapsed, i.e., after a predetermined period has elapsed since power-on). The operation signal from the operation switch 954 becomes a RAM clear signal when used to clear RAM within a predetermined period from power-on, and an error clearance signal when used to clear an error after power-on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since power-on).

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the output terminals 3 and 4 of the operation switch 954 are pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR48, causing a logic HI operation signal to be input to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42, turning the preceding transistor PTR42 ON and the preceding switch circuit ON. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor PTR43, which is the voltage applied to the base of the following transistor PTR43, is pulled down to ground (GND), turning the following transistor PTR43 OFF and the following switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the following transistor PTR43 is pulled up to +5V by resistor PR54, causing a logic HI RWMCLR signal to be input to input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. The dispensing control MPU 952a determines that when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to input terminal PA3 is HI during a predetermined period from power-on, it does not instruct to perform a RAM clear to erase the information stored in the dispensing control built-in RAM, and when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to input terminal PA3 is HI after power-on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from power-on), it determines that it does not instruct to clear the error.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the output terminals 3 and 4 of the operation switch 954 are pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR48, and a logic HI operation signal is input to the base terminal of transistor PTR44, turning transistor PTR44 ON and the switch circuit ON. This causes the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR44 to be pulled down to ground (GND) on the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and a logic LOW RAM clear signal is input to the main control board 1310. When a logic LOW RAM clear signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period after power-on, as described above, this logic LOW RAM clear signal shown in FIG. 77 is input to the base terminal of transistor MTR0, turning transistor MTR0 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is raised to +5V by resistor MR5, and a RAM clear signal with a logic high is input to input terminal PA0 of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to input terminal PA0 is high, the main control MPU 1310a determines that this does not indicate an instruction to perform a RAM clear to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the output terminals 3 and 4 of the operation switch 954 are pulled to ground (GND), causing a logic LOW operation signal to be input to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42, turning the preceding transistor PTR42 OFF and the preceding switch circuit OFF. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42, which is the voltage applied to the base of the following transistor PTR43, is pulled up to +5V by resistor PR51, turning the following transistor PTR43 ON and the following switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the following transistor PTR43 is pulled to ground (GND), causing a logic LOW RWMCLR signal to be input to input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. The dispensing control MPU 952a determines that when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from power-on, this indicates that a RAM clear should be performed to erase the information stored in the dispensing control built-in RAM, and when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to input terminal PA3 is LOW after power-on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from power-on), this indicates that an error should be cleared.

When the operation switch 954 is operated, the output terminals 3 and 4 of the operation switch 954 are pulled down to ground (GND) by the pull-up resistor PR48, causing a logic LOW operation signal to be input to the base terminal of transistor PTR44, turning transistor PTR44 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR44 is pulled up to +12V via the wiring (harness) by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310, causing a logic HI RAM clear signal to be input to the main control board 1310. When a RAM clear signal with a logic HIGH is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from power-on, as described above, this RAM clear signal with a logic HIGH is input to the base terminal of transistor MTR0, as shown in Figure 77, turning transistor MTR0 ON and also turning the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is pulled down to ground (GND), and a RAM clear signal with a logic LOW is input to input terminal PA0 of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the RAM clear signal input to input terminal PA0 is logic LOW, the main control MPU 1310a determines that this is an instruction to perform a RAM clear, which will erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
Next, we will explain the dispensing motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the dispensing motor 834 of the dispensing device 830. As shown in FIG. 83, the dispensing motor drive circuit 952d is mainly composed of a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive IC PIC60. The power supply input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the +12V power line and the +5V power line, respectively, to which +12V and +5V are applied, and the ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is grounded (GND). A voltage switching signal is input to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a to the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and then output from the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to terminals 3 and 10, which are the cathode terminals of the drive IC PIC60, via a Zener diode PZD60, and is also electrically connected to the power terminal of the dispensing motor 834.Based on a voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da, +12V or +5V is supplied as a motor drive voltage to terminals 3 and 10, which are the cathode terminals of the drive IC PIC60, via the Zener diode PZD60, and to the dispensing motor 834.

Driver IC PIC60 has four Darlington power transistors, and in this embodiment, terminals 6 and 7, which are the emitter terminals of drive IC PIC60, are each grounded to ground (GND), and terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12, which are the base terminals of drive IC PIC60, receive the dispensing motor drive signal via resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. Terminals 2, 4, 9, and 11, which are collector terminals of drive IC PIC60, correspond to terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12, which are base terminals of drive IC PIC60, respectively, and when a dispensing motor drive signal is input to terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12, which are base terminals of drive IC PIC60, via resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively, a drive pulse, which is an excitation signal, is output to each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) corresponding to dispensing motor 834. This dispensing motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a to the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and then output from the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function to terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12, which are the base terminals of the drive IC PIC60, via resistors PR60-PR63. These drive pulses are generated by switching the excitation current flowing through each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) of the dispensing motor 834, causing the dispensing motor 834 to rotate. Note that when the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) is interrupted by this switching, a back electromotive force is generated. If this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive IC PIC60, the drive IC PIC60 will be damaged, so as a protective measure, a circuit configuration is adopted in which the Zener diode PZD0 described above is electrically connected in front of terminals 3 and 10, which are the cathode terminals of the drive IC PIC60.

[10-2-5. CR unit input/output circuit]
Next, we will explain the CR unit input/output circuit 952e for inputting and outputting various signals to and from the CR unit 6 shown in Figure 71. The payout control board 951 receives a ball request signal BRDY and a single payout operation start request signal BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869, as described above. It also receives a predetermined voltage VL (+12V) and ground LG, generated from the AC 24V supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in Figure 71. The payout control board 951 also outputs an EXS signal indicating the start or completion of a single payout operation and a PRDY signal indicating whether a payout operation to dispense balls is possible or impossible via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. The input/output circuit for inputting and outputting these various signals is primarily composed of photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (which incorporate an infrared LED and a phototransistor), as shown in Figure 84.

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. Resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor that limits the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 turns ON; when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 turns OFF. The emitter terminal of photocoupler PIC70 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR70 via resistor PR71 and also to the base terminal of transistor PTR71 via resistor PR72. The collector terminal of photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to resistor PR71 and also to the other end of pull-up resistor PR73, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line.

The base terminal of transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to resistor PR71 and to the other end of resistor PR74, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor PTR70 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR75, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a shown in Figure 80 via non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, one of which (PIC80A) shapes and outputs the signal waveform input without inverting the logic). When transistor PTR70 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR70 changes, and this signal is input as CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

Meanwhile, the base terminal of transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to resistor PR72 and also to the other end of resistor PR76, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor PTR71 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to power supply board 931 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to power supply board 931 via wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) on power supply board 931, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line. Turning transistor PTR71 ON/OFF changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR71, and this signal is input to power supply board 931 as a CR connection signal.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR71 and PR74 and transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by turning photocoupler PIC70 ON/OFF.

When the specified voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 turns OFF and is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR73, turning on the transistor PTR70 and the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to ground (GND), and the CR connection signal 1, whose logic is LOW, is input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 turns ON and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to ground (GND), turning the transistor PTR70 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1, whose logic is HI, is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR72 and PR76 and transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by turning photocoupler PIC70 ON/OFF.

When the specified voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 turns OFF and is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR73, turning on the transistor PTR71 and the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to ground (GND) on the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and a CR connection signal with a logic LOW is input to the power supply board 931.

On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 turns ON and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to ground (GND), turning the transistor PTR71 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor on the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and a CR connection signal with a logic high is input to the power supply board 931.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via resistor PR77. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. Resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor that limits the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of the BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 turns ON. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of the BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HIGH, the photocoupler PIC71 turns OFF. The emitter terminal of photocoupler PIC71 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to one end of pull-up resistor PR78, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, one of which (PIC80B) shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input without inverting it). When photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC71 changes, and this signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

When a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, photocoupler PIC71 turns ON, pulling the voltage applied to the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC71 to ground (GND), resulting in a BRDY signal with a LOW logic level, which is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, photocoupler PIC71 turns OFF, pulling the voltage applied to the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC71 to +5V by pull-up resistor PR78, resulting in a BRDY signal with a HI logic level, which is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a. In this way, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC71 is the same as the logic of the BRDY signal from the CR unit 6.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, and also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via resistor PR79. The BRQ signal from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. Resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor that limits the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic level of the BRQ signal from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 turns ON. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic level of the BRQ signal from the CR unit 6 is HIGH, the photocoupler PIC72 turns OFF. The emitter terminal of photocoupler PIC72 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to one end of pull-up resistor PR80, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a specified input port of dispensing control MPU 952a via non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, one of which (PIC80C) shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input without inverting it). When photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC72 changes, and this signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of a specified input port of dispensing control MPU 952a.

When a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, photocoupler PIC72 turns ON, pulling the voltage applied to the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC72 to ground (GND), resulting in a BRQ signal with a logic LOW, which is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, photocoupler PIC72 turns OFF, pulling the voltage applied to the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC72 to +5V by pull-up resistor PR80, resulting in a BRQ signal with a logic HI, which is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a. In this way, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from CR unit 6.

The EXS signal, which indicates the start or end of a single dispensing operation from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a, is output to the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and is input from the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb to the cathode terminal of photocoupler PIC73 via resistor PR81. The anode terminal of photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to one end of resistor PR82, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line. Resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor that limits the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of photocoupler PIC73. When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC73 via resistor PR82 and the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is LOW, photocoupler PIC73 turns ON, and when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC73 via resistor PR82 and the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is HI, photocoupler PIC73 turns OFF. The emitter terminal of photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL within the CR unit 6 by pull-up resistor PR83 via the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and is electrically connected to its built-in control device. When photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC73 changes, and this signal is input as EXS to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC73 via resistor PR82 and the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb is LOW, photocoupler PIC73 turns ON, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the EXS with a logic LOW is input to the built-in control device of CR unit 6. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC73 via resistor PR82 and the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb is HI, photocoupler PIC73 turns OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic of EXS, which has become HI, is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. In this way, the logic of the EXS output from the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC73 is the same as the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb.

The PRDY signal, which indicates whether or not the dispensing operation for dispensing balls is possible or impossible, is input from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via resistor PR84. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to one end of resistor PR85, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line. Resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor that limits the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC74 via resistor PR85 and the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is LOW, photocoupler PIC74 turns ON, and when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC74 via resistor PR85 and the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is HI, photocoupler PIC74 turns OFF. The emitter terminal of photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL within the CR unit 6 by pull-up resistor PR86 via the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 and is electrically connected to its built-in control device. When photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC74 changes, and this signal is input as PRDY to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC74 via resistor PR85 and the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb is LOW, photocoupler PIC74 turns ON, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY with a logic LOW is input to the built-in control device of CR unit 6. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC74 via resistor PR85 and the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is HIGH, photocoupler PIC74 turns OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by pull-up resistor PR86, and the PRDY with a logic HIGH is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. In this way, the logic of the PRDY output from the collector terminal of photocoupler PIC74 is the same as the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function.

[10-2-6. Various input/output signals to the dispensing control MPU]
Next, we will explain the various input/output signals input and output from the input/output terminals of the various input/output ports of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

As shown in FIG. 80, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a, receives serial data from the main control board 1310 as a main dispensing serial data reception signal via the dispensing control input circuit 952b. Meanwhile, the TXD terminal, which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a, transmits the serial data to be sent to the main control board 1310 as a main dispensing serial data transmission signal to the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without reset function, and the main dispensing serial data transmission signal is sent from the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without reset function to the main control board 1310.

In addition to the above-mentioned RWMCLR signal, dispensing power outage warning signal, door open signal, full tank signal, and various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection signal 1, etc.), each input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a also receives, for example, a main dispensing ACK signal from the main control board 1310 indicating that the above-mentioned main dispensing serial data reception signal has been successfully received, via the dispensing control input circuit 952b, and detection signals from the bulb out detection sensor 827, dispensing detection sensor 842, rotation detection sensor 840, etc., shown in Figure 70, are also input via the dispensing control input circuit 952b.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a specified output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a, the above-mentioned EXS signal and PRDY signal are output to the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function, and the EXS signal and PRDY signal are output from the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function to the CR unit input/output circuit 952e, the above-mentioned voltage switching signal is output to the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the voltage switching signal is output from the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the voltage switching circuit 952da, and the dispensing motor drive signal is output to the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with a reset function In addition to outputting a dispensing motor drive signal from the output circuit 952ca to the dispensing motor 834 via the dispensing motor drive circuit 952d, for example, a payer ACK signal indicating that the above-mentioned main pay serial data reception signal has been successfully received is output to the dispensing control output circuit with reset function 952ca, which then outputs the payer ACK signal to the main control board 1310, or a drive signal for the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. 70 is output to the dispensing control output circuit with reset function 952ca, which then outputs a drive signal to the error LED indicator 860b.

[10-3. Various input/output signals to the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input/output signals between the dispensing control board 951 and the main control board 1310, and various output signals from the dispensing control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be explained with reference to Figure 85.

[10-3-1. Various input/output signals to/from the main control board]
The dispensing control board 951 exchanges various input and output signals with the main control board 1310. Specifically, as shown in Figure 85 (a), the dispensing control board 951 outputs the above-mentioned payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, etc. to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310.

Meanwhile, in addition to the above-mentioned main payout serial data reception signal, main payout ACK signal, and operation signal (RAM clear signal), the payout control board 951 also receives input from the main control board 1310 of game information signals related to the game, such as jackpot information output signals such as the main prize ball count information output signal, 15-round jackpot information output signal, and 2-round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special pattern display information output signal, normal pattern display information output signal, time-saving information output signal, and starting gate winning information output signal, as well as payout power outage warning signals. These input signals are pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85(b), in addition to the outer end frame door opening information output signal described above, other game information signals are output to the external terminal board 784, such as a prize ball count information output signal output each time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 reaches 10, a main prize ball count information output signal, jackpot information output signals for a 15-round jackpot information output signal and a 2-round jackpot information output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time-saving information output signal, and a starting hole winning information output signal. These output signals are pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistors on the external terminal board 784. In other words, two signals are output to the external terminal board 784 from the payout control board 951 side: an outer end frame door opening information output signal, and a prize ball number information output signal; and eight signals are output via (passing through) the payout control board 951 from the main control board 1310 side: a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15-round jackpot information output signal, a 2-round jackpot information output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special pattern display information output signal, a normal pattern display information output signal, a time-reduction information output signal, and a starting port winning information output signal.

The signal output from external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in the gaming parlor (hall), not shown, which monitors the player's play. When a 15-round jackpot information output signal or a 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as a single jackpot information output signal, the hall computer calculates the number of jackpots on pachinko machine 1 by adding together the number of jackpots with two rounds (number of 2-round jackpots) and the number of jackpots with 15 rounds (number of 15-round jackpots). Therefore, the hall computer cannot determine the number of 2-round or 15-round jackpots from the total number of jackpots, and therefore cannot determine whether the majority of jackpots on pachinko machine 1 are 2-round or 15-round jackpots. In addition, a data counter (not shown) is located above the pachinko machine 1, and some players refer to the number of times a jackpot game state has occurred, displayed on this data counter, when deciding whether or not to play.

However, the number of times a jackpot game state has occurred displayed on the data counter may actually be biased towards the number of two-round jackpots, so even when a player starts playing, they may only get two-round jackpots and never get a 15-round jackpot. In this way, while the number of times a jackpot game state has occurred displayed on the data counter can give players a sense of hope, it may also stimulate their gambling instincts more than necessary.

In this embodiment, a 15-round jackpot information output signal and a 2-round jackpot information output signal are output separately to the hall computer as jackpot information output signals, allowing the hall computer to accurately determine the number of 2-round jackpots and the number of 15-round jackpots. Therefore, the hall computer can determine whether the jackpots that have actually occurred more frequently on pachinko machine 1 are 2-round jackpots or 15-round jackpots, and the data counter can display the number of 15-round jackpots and 2-round jackpots separately, or just the number of 15-round jackpots, as the number of jackpot game states, without unnecessarily encouraging the player's gambling spirit.

In this embodiment, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer from the time a 2-round jackpot occurs until its end, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal is also output to the hall computer from the time a 15-round jackpot occurs until its end. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in this embodiment, another method can be used in which, for example, when a 2-round jackpot occurs, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period, and when a 15-round jackpot occurs, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period.

[11. Arrangement of output terminals on external terminal board]
Next, the arrangement of output terminals on the external terminal board 784, which outputs various signals to the hall computer installed in the gaming parlor (hall), will be described with reference to Figure 86. The external terminal board 784 is attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base, which is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and its rear side is covered by an external terminal board cover 786. Figure 86 is a diagram showing the arrangement of output terminals on the external terminal board.

As described above, the external terminal board 784 outputs to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 the outer end frame door opening information output signal, prize ball count information output signal, main prize ball count information output signal, jackpot information output signals including a 15-round jackpot information output signal and a 2-round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special pattern display information output signal, normal pattern display information output signal, time-saving information output signal, and starting port winning information output signal when they are input from the payout control board 951.

To briefly explain these various signals, the outer end frame door open information output signal is a signal that notifies the player that the door frame 3 and/or main frame 4 are open, a state that does not occur during normal gameplay; the prize ball number information output signal is a signal that notifies the player each time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 70 reaches 10; the main prize ball number information output signal is a signal that notifies the player each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered the various prize openings, such as the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the general prize opening 2001, and the large prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. 60, reaches 10; the 15-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that notifies the player that a 15-round jackpot has occurred; and the 2-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that notifies the player that a 15-round jackpot has occurred. The signal is a signal indicating that a two-round jackpot has occurred, the probability fluctuation information output signal is a signal indicating that a probability fluctuation is occurring, the special pattern display information output signal is a signal indicating that the first special pattern display device 1403 or the second special pattern display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66 has ended (stopped) the display of changing special patterns, the normal pattern display information output signal is a signal indicating that the normal pattern display device 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66 has ended (stopped) the display of changing normal patterns, the time-saving information output signal is a signal indicating that a time-saving state is occurring, and the start port winning information output signal is a signal indicating that each time a game ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. 60.

As shown in FIG. 86, output terminals PT1 to PT10 are arranged horizontally in a row on the external terminal board 784. Output terminal PT1 is colored white and outputs a prize ball count information output signal. As described above, the prize ball count information output signal is a signal that indicates that the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 reaches 10. In this embodiment, the signal is output from output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the prize ball count information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 has paid out 10 game balls each time the prize ball count information output signal is input, and can count the number of game balls paid out to determine the total number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

Output terminal PT2 is colored green and outputs an outer frame door open information output signal. As described above, the outer frame door open information output signal is a signal that notifies the player that the door frame 3 and/or main frame 4 is open, a state that does not occur during normal gameplay. In this embodiment, the signal is output from output terminal PT2 while the door frame 3 and/or main frame 4 are open. When the outer frame door open information output signal from external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that the door frame 3 and/or main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 are open while the outer frame door open information output signal is being input.

The output terminal PT3 is colored gray and outputs a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal is a signal that indicates that the variable display of special symbols has ended (stopped) on the first special symbol display 1403 or second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT3 for 0.128 seconds when the variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display 1403 or second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 has ended (stopped). When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer is able to determine that the variable display of the special symbol has ended (stopped) on the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1, and is able to count the number of times this has occurred and determine the total number of times the variable display of the special symbol has been displayed on the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1.

Output terminal PT4 is colored yellow and outputs a start port winning information output signal. As described above, the start port winning information output signal is a signal that notifies the player each time a gaming ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. 60. In this embodiment, the signal is output from output terminal PT4 for 0.128 seconds each time a gaming ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. When the start port winning information output signal from external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that a gaming ball has entered the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 of pachinko machine 1 each time the start port winning information output signal is input, and can count the number of times the start port winning information output signal is input to determine the total number of gaming balls that have entered the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 of pachinko machine 1.

Output terminal PT5 is colored black and outputs a 15-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that a 15-round jackpot has occurred, and in this embodiment, it is output from output terminal PT5 while a 15-round jackpot is occurring. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal from external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that a 15-round jackpot is occurring in pachinko machine 1 while the 15-round jackpot information output signal is being input, and can count the number of times the 15-round jackpot information output signal is input to determine the total number of times a 15-round jackpot has occurred in pachinko machine 1.

Output terminal PT6 is colored pink and outputs a two-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the two-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that a two-round jackpot has occurred, and in this embodiment, it is output from output terminal PT6 while a two-round jackpot is occurring. When the two-round jackpot information output signal from external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that a two-round jackpot is occurring in pachinko machine 1 while the two-round jackpot information output signal is being input, and can count the number of times the two-round jackpot information output signal is input to determine the total number of times a two-round jackpot has occurred in pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT7 is colored blue and outputs a normal symbol display information output signal. As described above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal that indicates that the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66 has finished (stopped) displaying the variable normal symbol. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display information output signal is output from the output terminal PT7 for 0.128 seconds when the variable normal symbol display in the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 has finished (stopped). When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that the variable normal symbol display in the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 has finished (stopped), and can count the number of times this has happened to determine the total number of times the variable normal symbol display has been displayed in the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1.

Output terminal PT8 is colored red and outputs a time-shortening information output signal. As described above, the time-shortening information output signal is a signal that indicates that a time-shortening state is occurring, and in this embodiment, it is output from output terminal PT8 while the time-shortening state is occurring. When the time-shortening information output signal from external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that a time-shortening state has occurred in pachinko machine 1, and can count the number of times the time-shortening information output signal has been input to determine the total number of times the time-shortening state has occurred in pachinko machine 1.

Output terminal PT9 is colored orange and outputs a probability fluctuation information output signal. As described above, the probability fluctuation information output signal is a signal that indicates that a probability fluctuation is occurring, and in this embodiment, it is output from output terminal PT9 while a probability fluctuation is occurring. When the probability fluctuation information output signal from external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that a probability fluctuation is occurring in pachinko machine 1, and can count the number of times the probability fluctuation information output signal has been input to determine the total number of times a probability fluctuation has occurred in pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT10 is colored light blue and outputs a main prize ball count information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball count information output signal is a signal that notifies the user whenever the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered various prize slots, such as the first start slot 2002, the second start slot 2004, the general prize slot 2001, and the large prize slot 2005 shown in FIG. 60, reaches 10. In this embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds. When the main prize ball count information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that the pachinko machine 1 is scheduled to pay out 10 game balls each time the main prize ball count information output signal is input, and can count the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out to determine the total number of game balls scheduled to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, for example, when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered the various prize ports, such as the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, the general prize port 2001, and the large prize port 2005, reaches 20 or more balls and the main prize ball number information output signal is output multiple times, the main prize ball number information output signal is output at intervals of 0.128 seconds so that it does not become one continuous signal for 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds x 2) seconds.

Of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 on the external terminal board 784, output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the dispensing control board 951 side, while output terminals PT3 to PT10 are arranged so that various signals output on the main control board 1310 side are output via (pass through) the dispensing control board 951. The output terminals PT1 to PT10 are each colored, and by electrically connecting wiring with connectors colored the same to each of these output terminals PT1 to PT10, it is possible to prevent the incorrect electrical connection of other wiring. In order to prevent the various signals output on the payout control board 951 from being mixed with the various signals output on the main control board 1310, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 for transmitting the various signals output on the payout control board 951 to the hall computer are arranged in a row on the left side of the external terminal board 784, and the output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting the various signals output on the main control board 1310 to the hall computer are arranged in a row from the left center of the external terminal board 784 to the right side. This also prevents the wiring for transmitting the various signals output on the payout control board 951 to the hall computer and the wiring for transmitting the various signals output on the main control board 1310 to the hall computer from being mistakenly electrically connected.

In this embodiment, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main prize ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are each configured to be transmitted to the hall computer from the external terminal board 784. This means that, for example, if some kind of trouble in the pachinko island equipment prevents game balls from being supplied to the prize ball tank 802 from the pachinko island equipment side, and the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 802 become scarce, and a 15-round jackpot occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 802 to pay out as prize balls will be insufficient, and payout will not be possible (also, for example, if a ball jam or ball jam occurs in the payout device 830, game balls will not be payout unless this can be resolved). As a result, as described above, the prize ball count information output signal output from the payout control board 951 is a signal that indicates that the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 70 reaches 10. Therefore, when game balls can no longer be paid out, the payout control board 951 is no longer able to output the prize ball count information output signal and transmit it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. When game balls are no longer being paid out, the player will call a hall staff member or the like. The hall staff member, for example, will check the hose-like supply nozzle that supplies game balls from the pachinko island equipment to the prize ball tank 802 to identify the location of the ball jam (or, for example, identify the location of a ball jam or ball breakage that has occurred within the payout device 830) and resolve the issue, thereby restoring the game balls to a state where they can be paid out.

However, even when a hall staff member or the like is performing their work, game play continues using the main control board 1310. Therefore, when the hall staff member or the like returns the machine to a state in which game balls are being paid out after the 15-round jackpot has ended, the payout control board 951 will pay out unpaid game balls one after another. Even though the 15-round jackpot has ended and no further 15-round jackpots have occurred, the payout control board 951 will output a prize ball number information output signal informing the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 that the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 reaches 10. As a result, even though no 15-round jackpots have occurred, an extremely large number of game balls will be paid out, which creates a problem in that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship between the game status of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled by the payout control board 951 to actually pay out prize balls, that is, as a signal separate from the prize ball number information output signal output by the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310 outputs a main prize ball number information output signal as a signal to inform the hall computer that each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered the various prize winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general prize winning port 2001, and the large prize winning port 2005 shown in Figure 60 reaches 10 balls, and transmits this signal to the payout control board 951 and the external terminal board 784. As a result, even if the above-mentioned problems occur (such as ball clogging in the refill nozzle, or ball clogging or ball breakage in the payout device 830), the relationship between the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of gaming balls to be paid out in this gaming state can be accurately communicated to the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of gaming balls to be paid out in this gaming state.

[12. Circuit of the performance display drive board]
Next, the circuit of the performance display drive board 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460 will be explained with reference to Figure 87. As described above, the performance display drive board 4450 is located near the bottom of the door frame side performance display device 460 that is attached to the right side of the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed within the tray unit 320, and is mainly composed of a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that draws the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460. Figure 87 is a circuit diagram showing the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that draws the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460.

[12-1. Liquid crystal module circuit]
The liquid crystal module circuit 4450V of the performance display drive board 4450 is mainly composed of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, as shown in Figure 87.

When serial signals (serial data) using a differential system called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Inc. are transmitted as positive and negative signals from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in Figure 74, the LCD module circuit 4450V inputs these signals to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively. This common mode choke coil SDL0 separates noise from the positive and negative signals. The noise-separated positive and negative signals are input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals, respectively, of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0. Resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals. This resistor SDR0 is a termination resistor (terminator) that prevents the positive and negative signals from reflecting at the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals, respectively, preventing distortion of the serial signal.

The door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 restores the three video signals (red, green, and blue video signals) and the three synchronization signals (horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal) based on the serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals (i.e., restores the signals to the parallel signals before they were serialized). As mentioned above, the red, green, and blue video signals output from channel CH2 of the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a are each 8 bits, but the red, green, and blue video signals that can be input to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d are each 6 bits, for a total of 18 bits, so the red, green, and blue video signals are the most significant 6 bits of each video signal.

In addition to the signal from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510, the LCD module circuit 4450V also receives, as described above, two signals obtained by differentiating the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510. The forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to connect the circuit to transmit these two signals when the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input, as described above, but to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d when the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are not input. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the two signals, and the two signals are sent from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V of the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. On the other hand, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input to the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, and the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is sent from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V of the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3.

When the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal by the differential circuit 1512e are not input, the forced switching circuit 1512f transmits the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the serial signal (serial data) using a differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Inc. from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, as a positive signal and a negative signal from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. The signal is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 and then input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, respectively. On the other hand, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal by the differentiating circuit 1512e are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, these two signals are input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 and then input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0. When two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal by the differentiating circuit 1512e are input, the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 determines that this is a request to output a LOCKN signal, and outputs the LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal (described later) to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 on the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) on the peripheral control board 1510.

As mentioned above, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, is sent as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side performance display device 460 to check whether there is a problem with the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver, during the period when the start-up screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or during the period when the machine is waiting for customers and a demonstration is being performed by the game board side performance display device 1600. In this embodiment, the LOCKN signal output request data is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal by the differentiating circuit 1512e, but has a completely different data format structure from the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the differential serial signal (serial data) of the above-mentioned "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics, Inc. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 determines that the signal is not output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d and determines that the data is abnormal, and outputs a LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal, which will be described later. In other words, in this embodiment, the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0's function of outputting a LOCKN signal when it determines that the received data is abnormal is utilized to forcibly output a LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal described below. In order to do this, LOCKN signal output request data, which has a different data format than the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, is output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 on the peripheral control board 1510, thereby making it possible to check whether the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 device is operating normally. This makes it possible to check whether there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and receiver.

The VDD terminal, VDDO terminal, LVDSVDD terminal, PLLVDD terminal, and PDWN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 are each supplied with +3.3V generated by the upper tray side LCD module power supply circuit 4450x shown in Figure 76, and the GND terminal, GNDO terminal, LVDSGND terminal, PLLGND terminal, EDGE terminal, OE terminal, MODE0, and MODE1 terminal of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 are each grounded.

The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for the digital circuit. A capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between this terminal and the GND terminal, which serves as the ground for this digital circuit, to remove high-frequency noise from the +3.3V power line supplied to the VDD terminal.

The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output. A capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between this terminal and the GND terminal, which serves as the ground for this TTL output, to remove high-frequency noise from the +3.3V power line supplied to the VDDO terminal.

The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input. A capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between this terminal and the LVDSGND terminal, which serves as the ground for the LVDS input, to remove high-frequency noise from the +3.3V power line supplied to the LVDSVDD terminal.

The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for the PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit. A capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between this terminal and the PLLGND terminal, which serves as the ground for the PLL circuit, to remove high-frequency noise from the +3.3V power line supplied to the PLLVDD terminal.

When +3.3V is supplied (applied) to the PDWN terminal, the logic becomes HI, indicating normal operation, but when the supply of +3.3V is stopped, the logic becomes LOW, indicating power-down. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3V via resistor SDR1, and is electrically connected to one end of varistor SDZ0, the other end of which is grounded. This varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage on the +3.3V power line supplied via resistor SDR1.

The EDGE terminal is a terminal used to specify whether the transmission of various signals output from the various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on the clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal (described below) is a rising edge (logic transition from LOW to HIGH) or a falling edge (logic transition from HIGH to LOW). In this embodiment, as described above, a falling edge is specified by grounding the EDGE terminal. Incidentally, a rising edge can be specified by connecting the EDGE terminal to +3.3V.

The OE terminal indicates whether or not to allow output from the various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, D0 terminal to D17 terminal, and CLKOUT terminal) described below. In this embodiment, as mentioned above, the OE terminal is grounded to always enable output. Incidentally, connecting the OE terminal to +3.3V disables output.

The MODE0 and MODE1 terminals are terminals for selecting the operating mode, and can be selected by grounding both. There are two operating modes: normal mode and handshake mode. In normal mode, the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 restores a parallel signal consisting of three video signals (18-bit video signals) - red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal - and three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signals) - horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal - based on the serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals, respectively. In handshake mode, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request the transmission of a specific data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver. This handshake mode is designed to switch automatically.

For example, if the parallel signals restored by the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 based on the serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals are abnormal data that makes it difficult to display on the door frame side performance display device 460, the IC will automatically switch from normal mode to handshake mode and output a LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the damping resistor SDR2, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and then input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. When a predetermined condition is met based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to notify the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d of this fact. When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d transmits a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for restoring the connection with the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450. Receiving this predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) at the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 facilitates the restoration of the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is pre-stored in the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. The INIT terminal of the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 and the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450 may be electrically connected directly via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

As described above, the LOCKN terminal is a terminal that outputs a request to send a specific data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via resistor SDR2, which is a damping resistor on the performance display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and then input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

The SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are terminals that output three synchronization signals: a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. In this embodiment, the restored three synchronization signals (horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal) are not used, and therefore the SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are left unconnected.

The DE terminal outputs a DE signal that indicates whether the clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and the data output from the data output terminals D0 to D17 (described below) are valid or invalid. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side performance display device 460 via resistor SDR3, which is a damping resistor.

The CLKOUT terminal outputs the clock signal DCLK generated by the PLL circuit built into the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side performance display device 460 via resistor SDR4, which is a damping resistor.

Terminals D0 to D17 are data output terminals that output three video signals (18-bit video signals): a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals, respectively. Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output from the 6-bit data output terminals D0 to D5 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of these blue video signals B0 to B5 is input to the door frame side performance display device 460 via ladder resistor SDRA0, which is a damping resistor. Green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output from the 6-bit data output terminals D6 to D11 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of these green video signals G0 to G5 is input to the door frame side performance display device 460 via ladder resistor SDRA1, which is a damping resistor. Red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D12 to D17 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of these red video signals R0 to R5 is input to the door frame side performance display device 460 via ladder resistor SDRA2, which is a damping resistor.

The grounds of the peripheral control board 1510, frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, peripheral door relay terminal board 882, performance display drive board 4450, and door frame side performance display device 460 are electrically connected and share the same ground.

[13. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, the various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and the various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to Figures 88 to 91. Figure 88 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, Figure 89 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, Figure 90 is a table showing a continuation of the various commands transmitted from the main control board in Figure 89 to the peripheral control board, and Figure 91 is a table showing an example of various commands received from the payout control board by the main control board. First, the prize ball command, which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, will be described, followed by the various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and the various commands received from the payout control board by the main control board.

[13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the dispensing control board]
When detection signals are input from various winning switches such as the general winning hole sensor 4020, the first starting hole sensor 4002, the second starting hole sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in Fig. 69, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits a prize ball command to the payout control board based on these detection signals to pay out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls. This prize ball command is a command with a memory capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (a device that communicates with the pachinko machine 1 and drives the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 830) to pay out game balls as loan balls onto the storage trays, i.e., the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322) are electrically connected (such pachinko machines are referred to as "CR machines"), as shown in FIG. 88(a), the prize ball commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 include commands 10H to 1EH ("H" represents a hexadecimal number), with command 10H specifying one prize ball, command 11H specifying two prize balls, ..., and command 1EH specifying fifteen prize balls. The payout control board 951 controls the drive of the payout motor 834 to pay out game balls according to the specified number of prize balls.

Furthermore, when a pachinko machine 1 and a ball dispensing machine (a device that dispenses game balls directly as loan balls into the storage trays, upper tray 321 and lower tray 322) are installed adjacent to each other in an amusement parlor (hall) and are electrically connected to each other (such pachinko machines are called "general machines"), as shown in Figure 88 (b), the prize ball commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 include commands 20H to 2EH, with command 20H specifying one prize ball, command 21H specifying two prize balls, ... and command 2EH specifying 15 prize balls. The payout control board 951 drives the payout motor 834 to dispense game balls according to the specified number of prize balls.

As shown in Figure 88 (c), command 30H is provided as a common command for both CR machines and general machines, and command 30H specifies a self-check. If an ACK signal, which is output as confirmation of receipt of the command, is not input from the receiving side within a predetermined period after sending the command, the sending side sends command 30H and checks whether an ACK signal is input to confirm the connection status. In the case of a CR machine in this embodiment, the payout control board 951 checks the connection status with the CR unit 6.

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a memory capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in Figures 89 and 90, are composed of a status indicating the type of command having a memory capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a mode indicating the variation of the effect having a memory capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

As shown in Figures 89 and 90, the various commands are categorized into special chart 1 synchronization related, special chart 2 synchronization related, jackpot related, power on, normal chart synchronization related, normal electric role related, notification display, status display, and others.

[13-2-1. Special Chart 1 Synchronization Performance Related]
The special symbol 1 synchronization performance related commands are based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 shown in Fig. 69, and as shown in Fig. 89, the classification is made up of commands named "Start special symbol 1 synchronization performance,""Specify special symbol 1,""End special symbol 1 synchronization performance," and "Specify state at time of change," which relate to the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 shown in Fig. 69. These various commands are assigned "A*H" as the status and "**H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The Special Symbol 1 Synchronization Presentation Start Command instructs the start of the Special Symbol Synchronization Presentation with the presentation pattern specified by the mode, the Special Symbol 1 Designation Command designates a miss, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot, the Special Symbol 1 Synchronization Presentation End Command instructs the end of the Special Symbol 1 Synchronization Presentation, and the Variable State Designation Command instructs the probability and time-saving state. The probability and time-saving state consist of a low-probability time-saving state that indicates a low-probability state and a time-saving state, a high-probability time-saving state that indicates a high-probability state and a time-saving state, a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates a low-probability state and a non-time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates a high-probability state and a non-time-saving state (the low-probability non-time-saving state is set as the normal game state). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is set higher than in the low probability state (normal game state), and the time-saving state, for example, shortens the time for which the normal pattern display 1402 shown in FIG. 66 displays the normal pattern variably compared to the non-time-saving state (normal game state) and stops and displays the normal lottery result in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result, so that the number of times the normal lottery result is stopped and displayed in a predetermined time by the normal lottery described later is increased compared to the non-time-saving state, and further, the movable piece 2004a of the second starting hole 2004 shown in FIG. 60 is opened. By lengthening the period for which the closing operation is performed compared to the non-time-shortening state (normal gaming state) and increasing the acceptance rate (ball entry rate) of game balls into the second starting opening 2004 shown in FIG. 60, it is possible to obtain an opportunity to draw for a special symbol without reducing the number of balls in hand (in other words, compared to the non-time-shortening state, there are more decisions to make about whether or not to open or close the movable piece 2004a, and when the movable piece 2004a is opened or closed, the period for the opening or closing operation of the movable piece 2004a is lengthened, thereby increasing the acceptance rate (ball entry rate) of game balls into the second starting opening 2004).

The timing of sending these various commands is as follows: the special symbol 1 synchronization effect start command is sent when special symbol 1 begins to change, the special symbol 1 designation command is sent immediately after the special symbol 1 synchronization effect starts, the special symbol 1 synchronization effect end command is sent when the special symbol 1 change time has elapsed (when special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the change state designation command is sent immediately after the special symbol win/loss information is designated. Note that these various commands are actually sent during the peripheral control board command sending process in step S120 of the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

[13-2-2. Special Chart 2 Synchronization Performance Related]
The special symbol 2 synchronization performance related commands are based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 shown in Fig. 69, and as shown in Fig. 89, the classification is made up of commands named "Start special symbol 2 synchronization performance,""Specify special symbol 2," and "End special symbol 2 synchronization performance," which relate to the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in Fig. 69. These various commands are assigned "B*H" as the status and "**H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special symbol 2 synchronization effect start command instructs the start of the special symbol synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, the special symbol 2 designation command specifies a miss, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot, and the special symbol 2 synchronization effect end instructs the end of the special symbol 2 synchronization effect.

The timing of sending these various commands is as follows: the special symbol 2 synchronization effect start command is sent when the special symbol 2 begins to change, the special symbol 2 designation command is sent immediately after the special symbol 2 synchronization effect starts, and the special symbol 2 synchronization effect end command is sent when the special symbol 2 change time has elapsed (when special symbol 2 is confirmed). Note that these various commands are actually sent during the peripheral control board command sending process in step S120 of the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-3. Jackpot-related]
As shown in Figure 89, the jackpot-related category consists of commands named jackpot opening, large prize slot 1 opening Nth time display, large prize slot 1 closing display, large prize slot 1 count display, jackpot ending, jackpot pattern display, small prize opening, small prize opening display, small prize count display, and small prize ending. These various commands are assigned a status of "C*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The jackpot opening command instructs the start of the jackpot opening, the display large prize opening 1 Nth command instructs the start of large prize opening 1 being open for rounds 1 to 16 (the large prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 shown in FIG. 60 is opening or has started to open for the Nth round), the display large prize opening 1 closing command instructs the start of large prize opening 1 being closed between rounds (the large prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 is closing between rounds or has started to close), the display large prize opening 1 count command notifies that the number of game balls counted from 0 to 10 has been counted (the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 2005 detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69), the jackpot ending command instructs the start of the jackpot ending, and the display jackpot symbol command instructs the display of jackpot symbol information.

The small win opening command instructs the start of a small win opening, the small win opening display command instructs the start of a small win opening (when the large prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 is opening or has started to open during a small win), the small win count display command instructs the large prize opening entry presentation during a small win (a presentation that occurs when a game ball that has entered the large prize opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005 during a small win), and the small win ending command instructs the start of a small win ending.

The timing of sending these various commands is as follows: the jackpot opening command is sent when the jackpot opening begins, the large prize opening 1 Nth opening display command is sent when large prize opening 1 is opened in rounds 1 to 16 (when large prize opening 2005 of starting opening unit 2100 opens in the Nth round), the large prize opening 1 closing display command is sent when large prize opening 1 is closed (when large prize opening 2005 of starting opening unit 2100 starts closing), and the large prize opening 1 closing display command is sent when large prize opening 1 is closed (when large prize opening 2005 of starting opening unit 2100 starts closing). The count display command is sent when large prize opening 1 opens and when the count changes to large prize opening 1 (when large prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 opens and when a game ball that has entered large prize opening 2005 is detected by count sensor 4005), the jackpot ending command is sent when the jackpot ending begins, and the jackpot pattern display command is sent when the large prize opening opens (when large prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 opens).

The small win opening command is sent when the small win opening begins, the small win opening display command is sent when the small win opens (when the large prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 opens during a small win), the small win count display command is sent when the ball enters the large prize opening during a small win (when the game ball that entered the large prize opening 2005 during a small win is detected by the count sensor 4005), and the small win ending command is sent when the small win ending begins. Note that these various commands are actually sent during the peripheral control board command sending process in step S120 of the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-4. Power on]
The power-on category consists of commands named "Power-on state" and "Main control return destination at power-on," as shown in Figure 89. These various commands are assigned a status of "D*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on state command instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state. The power-on state command consists of information instructing the user to clear the RAM when the operation switch 954 on the payout control board 951 shown in Figure 70 is operated to perform a RAM clear when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage), information instructing which state (probability and time-saving state) the user will return to when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage), from the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state, and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The model code of this pachinko machine, for example, when creating so-called max type, mid type, and sweet type machines, specifies which copyright of the work it refers to and what game specifications it has (for example, a game specification in which when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state is reached, or a game specification in which the probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of special symbol fluctuations (e.g., 30 or 70 times) (so-called ST machine)). In other words, the model code information of a pachinko machine is primarily composed of a series code that identifies the machine type (max type, mid type, or sweet type); a copyright code that identifies the copyright of the work; and a game specification code that specifies the game specifications (for example, a game specification in which when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state is reached, or a game specification in which the probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of special symbol fluctuations (ST machine)).

The main control return destination command at power-on indicates the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The main control return destination command at power-on is primarily composed of information indicating the drive state of the starting port solenoid 2107 shown in Figure 69 and information indicating the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in Figure 69.

The power-on status command and power-on main control return destination command are sent when the main control board is powered on (this includes not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage). Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or recovers from a power outage or momentary power outage, the main control side power-on processing described below is executed, and the power-on status command and power-on main control return destination command are sent in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-5. General Illustrated Synchronous Performance Related]
The normal symbol synchronization performance related commands are based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in Fig. 69, and as shown in Fig. 89, the command classification is made up of commands named "normal symbol synchronization performance start,""normal symbol designation,""normal symbol synchronization performance end," and "variable state designation," which relate to the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in Fig. 69. These various commands are assigned "E*H" as the status and "**H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The normal symbol synchronization effect start command instructs the start of a normal symbol synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified by the mode, the normal symbol designation command specifies a miss, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot, the normal symbol synchronization effect end command instructs the end of the normal symbol synchronization effect, and the variable state designation command instructs the probability and time-saving state. As mentioned above, the probability and time-saving state consist of a low-probability time-saving state that indicates a low-probability state and time-saving state, a high-probability time-saving state that indicates a high-probability state and time-saving state, a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates a low-probability state and not time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates a high-probability state and not time-saving state (the low-probability non-time-saving state is set as the normal game state).

The timing of sending these various commands is as follows: the normal symbol synchronization start command is sent when normal symbol 1 begins to change, the normal symbol designation command is sent immediately after the normal symbol synchronization start command, the normal symbol synchronization end command is sent when the normal symbol change time has elapsed (when the normal symbol is confirmed), and the change state designation command is sent immediately after the normal symbol win/loss information is designated. Note that these various commands are actually sent during the peripheral control board command sending process in step S120 of the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-6. Regular Electric Role Performance Related]
The normal electric role performance-related commands relate to the movable piece 2004a of the second starting port 2004 shown in Fig. 60, which is opened and closed by the driving of the starting port solenoid 2107 shown in Fig. 69, and this section is made up of commands named "normal winning opening,""normal electric opening display," and "normal winning ending," as shown in Fig. 89. These various commands are assigned "F*H" as the status and "**H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The normal map opening command instructs the start of normal map opening, the normal power release display command instructs the start of normal power release (when the movable piece 2004a is opened to the left and right by the drive of the starting port solenoid 2107, or when it opens), and the normal map ending command instructs the start of normal map ending.

The timing for sending these various commands is as follows: the normal map opening command is sent when normal map opening begins, the normal power release display command is sent when normal power is released (when the movable piece 2004a opens left and right due to the drive of the starting port solenoid 2107), and the normal map ending command is sent when normal map ending begins. Note that these various commands are actually sent during the peripheral control board command sending process in step S120 of the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in Figure 90, the notification display categories consist of commands named winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, open/short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door open, and door close. These various commands are assigned a status of "6*H" and a mode of "**H" (where "H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The winning abnormality display command instructs the start of a winning abnormality alert when a ball enters the large winning port other than during a jackpot (when the condition device is operating) (when a game ball enters the large winning port 2005 of the start port unit 2100 and is detected by the count sensor 4005 even when there is no jackpot), the connection abnormality display command instructs the start of a connection abnormality alert when, for example, there is an electrical connection abnormality in the path between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, the open circuit/short circuit abnormality display command instructs the start of a open circuit/short circuit abnormality display when, for example, there is a open circuit/short circuit in the electrical connection between the main control board 1310 and the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, etc., and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command instructs the start of a magnetic detection switch abnormality alert when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in Figure 69. Additionally, if an abnormality occurs in the vibration sensor 2405, a vibration detection switch abnormality display command is sent to instruct the start of vibration detection switch abnormality notification.

The door open command instructs a door open notification when the door frame 3 is in an open state relative to the main frame 4 based on a detection signal (open signal) from the door frame open switch 618 input via the dispensing control board 951 shown in FIG. 70, and the door frame close command instructs an end of the door open notification when the door frame 3 is in a closed state relative to the main frame 4 based on a detection signal from the door frame open switch 618. On the other hand, the main frame open command instructs a main frame open notification when the main frame 4 is in an open state relative to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal (open signal) from the main frame open switch 619 input via the dispensing control board 951 shown in FIG. 70, and the main frame close command instructs an end of the main frame open notification when the main frame 4 is in a closed state relative to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal from the main frame open switch 619.

The timing of sending these various commands is as follows: the winning error display command is sent when a prize is won in the large prize slot other than during a jackpot (when the condition device is operating); the connection error display command is sent when the payout control board 951 does not receive an ACK response (ACK signal) when sending a command from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951; the open/short circuit error display command is sent when any of the first start slot sensor 4002, second start slot sensor 4004, or count sensor 4005 is in an open or short state; and the magnetic detection switch error display command is sent when an error is detected in the magnetic detection sensor 4024. The door open command is sent when a door open state is detected (when the door frame 3 is open relative to the main frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618); and the door frame close command is sent when a door closed state is detected (when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618). The main frame open command is sent when the main frame is detected as open (when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame open switch 619), and the main frame close command is sent when the main frame is detected as closed (when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame open switch 619). Note that these various commands are actually sent during the peripheral control board command sending process in step S120 of the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in Figure 90, the status display is divided into commands named Frame Status 1 Command (corresponding to the error occurrence command), Error Cancel Navigation Command (corresponding to the error cancellation command), and Frame Status 2 Command. These various commands are assigned a status of "7*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The Slot Status 1 command, Error Clearance Navigation command, and Slot Status 2 command are each commands with a memory capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the dispensing control board 951; a detailed description of these will be provided below. When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the Slot Status 1 command, Error Clearance Navigation command, and Slot Status 2 command from the dispensing control board 951, it sets "7*H" as the status, as shown in FIG. 90, and sets the received command as the mode. In other words, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the Slot Status 1 command, Error Clearance Navigation command, and Slot Status 2 command from the dispensing control board 951, it adds the additional information "7*H" to the received commands, thereby converting them into commands with a memory capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The formatted Frame Status 1 command is sent when power is restored, when the frame status changes, and when error clearance navigation is performed, the Error Clear Navigation command is sent when error clearance navigation is performed, and the Frame Status 2 command is sent when power is restored and when the frame status changes. Note that these formatted Frame Status 1 command, Error Clear Navigation command, and Frame Status 2 command are actually sent during the peripheral control board command sending process in step S120 of the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-9. Test-related]
The test-related section is made up of various commands named "test," as shown in Fig. 90. These test commands are assigned a status of "8*H" and a mode of "**H" (where "H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The test command instructs various tests of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, tests of various boards such as the peripheral control unit 1511, LCD display control unit 1512, lamp drive board 4170, motor drive board 4180, and frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in Figure 72).

The test command is sent when the RAM is cleared when the main control board is powered on and at times other than RAM clearing. Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, when recovering from a power outage or momentary power outage, and the operation switch 954 on the payout control board 951 is operated, the main control side power-on processing described below is executed, and the test command is sent in the peripheral control board command sending processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-10. Other]
Other categories, as shown in Figure 90, are made up of commands named "Starting hole winning", "Specify variable shortening operation end", "Specify high probability end", "Special symbol 1 memory", "Special symbol 2 memory", "Normal symbol memory", "Special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect", and "Special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect". These various commands are assigned a status of "9*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The start port entry command instructs the start of the start port entry effect, and instructs the start of the effect when a game ball enters the first start port 2002 based on a detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002, and the start of the effect when a game ball enters the second start port 2004 based on a detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004.The fluctuation reduction operation end designation command instructs the state transition from the fluctuation reduction operation state to the fluctuation reduction non-operation state, and is a high probability end designation. The set command instructs a transition from a high probability state to a low probability state, the special symbol 1 storage command conveys 0 to 4 reserved special symbol 1 (the number of balls (reserved number) that have not yet been used to display the changing special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 after a game ball has entered the first start port 2002 shown in FIG. 60), and the special symbol 2 storage command conveys 0 to 4 reserved special symbol 2 (the number of balls (reserved number) that have not yet been used to display the changing special symbol on the second special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 after a game ball has entered the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. 60). The special symbol memory command conveys the number of reserved balls (reserved number) that have not yet been used to display the variation of the special symbol on the special symbol display 1405, the normal symbol memory command conveys 0 to 4 reserved normal symbol 1 (the number of reserved balls (reserved number) that have not yet been used to display the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 after the game ball has passed through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 60), and the special symbol 1 memory pre-reading performance command conveys the number of reserved special symbol 1 that has not yet been used to display the variation of the normal symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400). This command instructs the start of a read-ahead performance that reads ahead and notifies a preview of the display result by the first special pattern display 1403 based on the reserved special pattern 1 before it is used to display the fluctuations of another pattern, and the special pattern 2 storage read-ahead performance command instructs the start of a read-ahead performance that reads ahead and notifies a preview of the display result by the second special pattern display 1405 based on the reserved special pattern 2 before the reserved special pattern 2 is used to display the fluctuations of a special pattern on the second special pattern display 1405 of the function display unit 1400.

The timing of sending these various commands is as follows: the start gate entry command is sent from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 when the game ball enters the start gate (when the game ball enters the first start gate 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start gate sensor 4002, or when the game ball enters the second start gate 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start gate sensor 4004) to notify the fact mainly by voice; the fluctuation reduction operation end designation command is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation has been confirmed after the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been used up (after the miss stop period has elapsed); and the high probability end designation command is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation has been confirmed after the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been used up (after the miss stop period has elapsed). The special symbol 1 memory command is transmitted at the end of the stop period after the confirmation of the variation in which the high probability number of times has been consumed in the case of "N times of probability" (after the non-winning stop period has elapsed), and the special symbol 1 memory command is transmitted when the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 1 operation changes (when a game ball enters the first start port 2002 and there are reserved numbers that have not yet been used for the display of the variation of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400, and when a game ball enters the first start port 2002 and the reserved number increases, or when the reserved number is used for the display of the variation of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the reserved number decreases), and the special symbol 2 memory command is transmitted when the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 1 operation changes (when a game ball enters the first start port 2002 and there are reserved numbers that have not yet been used for the display of the variation of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400, and when a game ball enters the first start port 2002 and the reserved number increases, or when the reserved number is used for the display of the variation of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the reserved number decreases). The command is transmitted when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 activation changes (when a game ball enters the second start opening 2004 and there are reserved numbers that have not yet been used to display the special symbol variations on the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400, and when another game ball enters the second start opening 2004 and the reserved numbers increase, or when the reserved numbers are used to display the special symbol variations on the second special symbol display 1405 and the reserved numbers decrease), and the normal symbol memory command is transmitted when the number of reserved balls for normal symbol 1 activation changes (when a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 and there are reserved numbers that have not yet been used to display the special symbol variations on the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400, and when another game ball enters the second start opening 2004 and the reserved numbers increase, or when the reserved numbers decrease because the second special symbol display 1405 has used the reserved numbers to display the special symbol variations). When there are reserved balls that have not yet been used to display the normal symbol variations, a game ball passes through gate unit 2003 and the reserved number increases, or when the reserved number is used by normal symbol display 1402 to display the normal symbol variations and the reserved number decreases), a special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect command is sent when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 activation increases (when a game ball enters first start port 2002 and the reserved number increases), and a special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect command is sent when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 activation increases (when a game ball enters second start port 2004 and the reserved number increases). Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

As mentioned above, the start hole entry command is transmitted from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 primarily to notify the player of the start hole entry (when a game ball enters the first start hole 2002 based on a detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002, or when a game ball enters the second start hole 2004 based on a detection signal from the second start hole sensor 4004) via audio. However, how the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72 uses the start hole entry command may vary depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is designed to notify the player of the start hole entry command via audio from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, as well as to monitor for fraudulent activity. In contrast, some other pachinko machines are designed so that the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start hole entry command without notifying the player of the start hole entry via audio from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

[13-3. Various commands received by the main control board from the dispensing control board]
Next, we will explain the various commands received by the main control board 1310 from the dispensing control board 951.

As shown in Figure 91, the various commands from the dispensing control board 951 are classified into commands named Slot Status 1, Error Clearance Navigation, and Slot Status 2, with the order of priority set as Slot Status 1, Error Clearance Navigation, and Slot Status 2.

The Frame Status 1 command (equivalent to the Error Occurrence command) has the following statuses: out of bulb, full, 50 or more bulbs in stock, connection error, and no CR connected. When out of bulb, bit 0 (B0, "B" represents a bit) is set to 1, when full, bit 1 (B1) is set to 1, when 50 or more bulbs are in stock, bit 2 (B2) is set to 1, when connection error occurs, bit 3 (B3) is set to 1, and when no CR is connected, bit 4 (B4) is set to 1. Bits 5 (B5) through 7 (B7) of the Frame Status 1 command have B5 set to 1, B6 set to 0, and B7 set to 0.

The error release navigation command (equivalent to the error release command) is available for ball detection, payout detection sensor error, and retry error. For ball detection, a value of 1 is set to bit 2 (B2), for payout detection sensor error, a value of 1 is set to bit 3 (B3), and for retry error, a value of 1 is set to bit 4 (B4). Here, a "payout detection sensor error" indicates whether or not there is a malfunction in the payout detection sensor 842 shown in Figure 70. A "retry error" indicates that inconsistent payouts of game balls have been repeatedly performed through retry operations. Bits (B0), (B1), and bits 5 (B5) through 7 (B7) of the error release navigation command are set to 0 for B0, 0 for B1, 0 for B5, 1 for B6, and 0 for B7.

The Frame State 2 command includes a "ball removed" state, during which bit 0 (B0) is set to a value of 1. Bits 1 (B1) through 7 (B7) of the Frame State 2 command are set as follows: B1 - value 0, B2 - value 0, B3 - value 0, B4 - value 0, B5 - value 1, B6 - value 1, and B7 - value 0.

The timing for sending these various commands is as follows: Slot Status 1 command is sent when power is restored, when the slot status changes, and when error resolution navigation is performed; Error Resolution Navigation command is sent when error resolution navigation is performed; and Slot Status 2 command is sent when power is restored and when the slot status changes. Note that these various commands are actually sent in the command sending process of step S558 in the dispensing control unit main processing of the dispensing control unit power-on processing described below.

[14. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in Fig. 69 in accordance with the progress of play on the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Fig. 92 to Fig. 94. Fig. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on process, Fig. 93 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on process in Fig. 92, and Fig. 94 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side timer interrupt process. First, various random numbers used in game control will be described, followed by the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on process, and the main control side timer interrupt process.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
The various random numbers used for game control include a random number for determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state, a random number for determining reach (missed reach) when a jackpot game state is not generated, a random number for determining a variable display pattern used to determine the variable display pattern of the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 shown in FIG. 69, and a random number for determining whether or not to generate a reach (missed reach) when a jackpot game state is not generated. The random numbers provided are a random number for a jackpot pattern used to determine the jackpot pattern derived and displayed by the first special pattern display device 1403 and the second special pattern display device 1405, a random number for determining an initial value for the jackpot pattern used to determine the initial value of the random number for the jackpot pattern, a random number for a small win pattern used to determine the small win pattern derived and displayed by the first special pattern display device 1403 and the second special pattern display device 1405 when a small win game state is generated, and a random number for determining an initial value for the small win pattern used to determine the initial value of the random number for the small win pattern. In addition to these random numbers, there are also prepared random numbers for determining whether or not to open or close the movable piece 2004a of the second starting port 2004 shown in Figure 60, random numbers for determining the initial value of the random number for determining whether or not to open or close the movable piece 2004a, and random numbers for determining the variable display pattern of the normal pattern that is displayed on the normal pattern display device 1402 shown in Figure 69.

Of the various random numbers used in this type of game control, the random numbers used to determine jackpots are updated by hardware, while the other random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the random number used to determine a jackpot is updated directly by hardware using the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an built into the main control MPU 1310a shown in Figure 69. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, this main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as its initial value, and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in Figure 77). Once all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an again extracts a value within the predetermined numerical range, and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. This high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an at the time it obtains the value from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an as the random number for determining a jackpot.

In contrast, the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol has won is updated within a predetermined fixed range of values from the minimum to the maximum, and counts up this range by adding one value each time the main control timer interrupt process described below is performed. This counter counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol has won toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol has won. Once the counter has finished counting up the range of the random number for determining whether a normal symbol has won, from the minimum to the maximum value, the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol has won is updated. This type of counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter." The random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol has won can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process that draws a value from the fixed range of values of the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol has won.

In this embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated when the power is turned on, or when the checksum value (sum value) obtained by treating the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 69 as a numerical value during the main control side power-on processing described below does not match the checksum value (sum value) stored during the main control side power-off processing (when power is turned off), and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared, the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 69 retrieves an ID code from its built-in non-volatile RAM, and executes an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determining a normal symbol win based on this retrieved ID code, and this derived fixed value is set. In other words, the random number for determining the initial value for determining a normal symbol win is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set in the random number used to determine the initial value for determining a normal symbol win is derived using the ID code, and analysis is prevented by taking two security measures: a first security measure in which the ID code cannot be rewritten even using an external device when it is stored in non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer that produced the main control MPU 1310a; and a second security measure in which the same fixed value is derived based on the ID code by executing an initial value derivation process when the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM is cleared.

Here, we explain the advantages of extracting an ID code from the nonvolatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a and using it as a random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol has been hit. For example, even if someone attempting to fraudulently acquire a prize ball were to somehow obtain and disassemble a gaming board 5, illegally obtain an ID code pre-stored in the nonvolatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, and determine the timing at which the counter value updating the random number for determining whether a normal symbol has been hit matches the normal symbol hit determination value, this ID code would be uniquely coded for individual identification and would be completely different from the ID codes pre-stored in the nonvolatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a' of other gaming boards 5'. In other words, the timing at which the counter value updating the random number for determining whether a normal symbol has been hit matches the normal symbol hit determination value on the other gaming boards 5' would also be completely different from that on the obtained gaming board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the acquired gaming board 5 is completely useless on other gaming boards 5', i.e., other pachinko machines 1', and therefore even if momentary power outages are caused at the predetermined intervals obtained by disassembly and analysis, and gaming balls are allowed to pass through the gate section 2003 shown in Figure 60 at those predetermined intervals, it is not possible to open and close the movable piece 2004a of the second starting opening 2004 shown in Figure 60, thereby creating a gaming state in which gaming balls can be received by the second starting opening 2004.

[14-2. Processing when power is turned on on the main control side]
First, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that a stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default when power is applied to the pachinko machine 1. This stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the contents of a memory element (register) currently in use, or an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the return address of this routine when a subroutine is terminated and the routine is returned to, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is filled.

Then, the above-mentioned main control program performs the main control side power-on processing under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as shown in Figures 92 and 93. When this main control side power-on processing begins, the main control program sets RAM access permissions under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). This RAM access permission setting allows updates to be made to the main control's built-in RAM (game memory unit).

Following step S10, the main control program sets the initial value and startup settings for the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in Figure 69 (step S12). Here, in order to set the initial value for the main control built-in WDT 1310af, which monitors whether the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally (system), a timer setting value is set in the watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as the "WDT control register") built into the main control MPU 1310a, and the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started, starting the time measurement until the main control MPU 1310a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started, timing by the main control built-in WDT 1310af begins, and if a timer clear setting value is not set in the watchdog timer clear register (hereinafter referred to as the "WDT clear register") built into the main control MPU 1310a before the timed time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the main control built-in WDT 1310af will forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started and starts timing, if a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the timed time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the timed time by the main control built-in WDT 1310af will be cleared and timing will start again. In this way, by repeatedly clearing the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af before the time set by the timer setting value is reached and then restarting the timekeeping, it is possible to monitor whether the main control MPU 1310a (system) is operating normally.

Following step S12, the main control program performs a power outage clear process (step S14). This power outage clear process first begins outputting a power outage clear signal to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e shown in FIG. 78. This power outage monitoring circuit 1310e is composed of a comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, and a D-type flip-flop MIC22. Comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, compares the voltage between +24V and a reference voltage, or between +12V and a reference voltage, and outputs the comparison result. If no power outage or momentary power outage has occurred, the comparison result becomes HIGH and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. If a power outage or momentary power outage has occurred, the comparison result becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

The power outage clearing process begins by starting the output of a power outage clear signal to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e, which then starts outputting the power outage clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of this D-type flip-flop MIC22. This power outage clear signal is input, with its logic set to LOW, from the output terminal of a specified output port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC. This allows the main control MPU 1310a to release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and until the latched state is set again, to invert the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and output it from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, and monitor the signal from the 1Q terminal.

Next, in the power outage clearing process, wait timer processing is performed to determine whether a power outage warning signal has been input. The voltage does not rise immediately between power-on and reaching the specified voltage. On the other hand, during a power outage or momentary power outage (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e as a power outage warning. Similarly, during the period from power-on to reaching the specified voltage, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, wait timer processing waits after power-on until the voltage exceeds the power outage warning voltage and stabilizes. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms). The determination of whether a power outage warning signal has been input is based on the signal output as a power outage warning signal from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 described above.

If, after power-on, the voltage exceeds the power outage warning voltage and stabilizes, but no power outage warning signal is received, the main control program stops outputting the power outage clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Here, the power outage clear signal is input, with its logic set to HIGH, from the output terminal of a specified output port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC. This allows the main control MPU 1310a to set the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to a latched state. When the PR terminal, which is its preset terminal, becomes LOW and latches the input state, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 outputs a power outage warning signal from its output terminal, the 1Q terminal.

Following step S14, the main control program enters a state in which it can execute a RAM clear process that initializes the main control's built-in RAM (game memory unit) for a predetermined period of time from when the power is turned on (game-side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 has been operated (step S16). To make this determination, the main control program determines whether an error release navigation command (first error release command) based on an operation signal (detection signal) accompanying operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 has been input to the main control MPU 1310a. Based on the logical value of the operation signal, if the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, the main control program determines that this does not instruct RAM clearing and determines that the operation switch 954 has not been operated. On the other hand, if the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, the program determines that this instructs RAM clearing and determines that the operation switch 954 has been operated.

In step S16, if the operation switch 954 is operated, the main control program sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S18). On the other hand, if the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 0 (step S20). That is, the main control program makes it possible to execute a RAM clear process that initializes the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a (i.e., the main control built-in RAM (game memory unit)) for a predetermined period of time after power is turned on (game control side power-on operation control means). The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not to erase game information related to gameplay, such as probability fluctuations and unpaid prize balls, stored in the main control built-in RAM (game memory unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. It is set to a value of 1 when game information is to be erased, and to a value of 0 when game information is not to be erased. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs a wait time standby process (step S22). This wait time standby process waits until the system shown in FIG. 72, which controls the drawing of the game board side display device 1600 and the door frame side display device 460 using the LCD display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510, starts up (boots). In this embodiment, the standby time until booting (boot timer) is set to 2.5 seconds (s).

Following step S22, the main control program determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or a power outage or momentary power outage occurs, if the voltage drops below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e as a power outage warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power outage warning signal. If the determination in step S24 indicates that a power outage warning signal has been input, the main control program returns to the determination in step S24 and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, clearing the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af and making it impossible to restart timekeeping, resulting in the main control MPU 1310a being forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. The main control program then performs this main control side power-on processing again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Note that the determination in step S24 is made following the wait time standby processing in step S22, which will be explained in detail later.

If it is determined in step S24 that no power outage warning signal has been input, the main control program determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when game information is to be erased, and to a value of 0 when game information is not to be erased. If the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 0 in step S26, that is, when game information is not to be erased, a checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum is calculated by treating the game information stored in the main control's built-in RAM as a numerical value.

Following step S28, the main control program determines whether the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored during the main control side power-off processing (power-off processing) described below (step S30). If they match, the main control program determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG is set to 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG indicates whether game backup information, such as game play information, the checksum value (sum value), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, was stored in the main control's internal RAM during the main control side power-off processing described below. It is set to 1 when the main control side power-off processing has been completed successfully, and to 0 when the main control side power-off processing has not been completed successfully. The calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the determination in step S30, which occur when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after production for inspection during the inspection process on the main control board 1310 production line, will be described in detail below.

When the backup flag BK-FLG is set to 1 in step S32, i.e., when the main control side power outage processing has been completed normally, the main control program sets the work area of the main control's built-in RAM as the time of power restoration (step S34). This setting is performed by reading power restoration information from the ROM (main control's built-in ROM) built into the main control MPU 1310a and setting this power restoration information in the work area of the main control's built-in RAM. This reads game information from the game backup information and stores various commands corresponding to this game information in a specified memory area of the main control's built-in RAM. Note that "power restoration" includes not only the state in which power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, but also the state in which high-frequency waves from fraudulent means (for example, a high-frequency output device hidden in the hem of a cheater's arm) are irradiated onto the main control board 1310, causing the main control MPU 1310a to reset and then return to normal.

Following step S34, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0 (step S36). As a result, various subsequent processes will change the game information, checksum value (sum value), etc. Therefore, unless the main control power failure process described below is successfully completed and the backup flag BK-FLG is set to a value of 1, the entire main control internal RAM will be cleared, as described below.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not set to 0 (is set to 1) in step S26, i.e., when game information is erased, or if the checksum values (sum values) do not match in step S30, or if the backup flag BK-FLG is not set to 1 (is set to 0) in step S32, i.e., when the main control side power-off processing has not been completed successfully, the main control program clears the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clear processing in response to the input of a detection signal accompanying the operation of the above-mentioned operation switch 954 (payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program does this by writing the value 0 to the main control's built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read and set a predetermined value from the main control's built-in ROM as the initial value. Furthermore, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 indicates RAM clearing and game information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, the main control MPU 1310a retrieves a unique ID code previously stored in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, and performs an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determining a normal symbol win based on this retrieved ID code, and sets this fixed value as the random number for determining the initial value for determining a normal symbol win, which is used to determine the initial value of the random number for determining a normal symbol win described above.

Following step S38, the main control program sets the work area of the main control's built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading initial information from the main control's built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control's built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt period when the main control timer interrupt process described below is performed. In this embodiment, this is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, the program sets the communication speed and whether or not parity is enabled in the transmit serial port prescaler corresponding to the various serial input/output ports built into the main control MPU 1310a (for example, the serial input/output ports (receive channels and transmit channels) for the dispensing control board 951 and the serial input/output ports (receive channels and transmit channels) for the peripheral control board 1510), and also sets the transmit serial port control register to initialize the transmit circuit and enable transmission.

Following step S44, the main control program initializes the test signal output port (step S46). Here, the gaming machine testing laboratory initializes the test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information when the power is turned on (setting it to output OFF data).

Following step S46, the main control program performs startup settings for the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an shown in Figure 69 (step S48). Here, the main control program performs settings such as latching and acquiring random numbers in the hardware random number control register built into the main control MPU 1310a to update the jackpot determination random numbers used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state, among various random numbers related to the game, by hardware, and also sets the hardware random number setting register to start the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an. When the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an is started by these settings, it rapidly extracts other values within a predetermined numerical range one after another without overlapping based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77). After extracting all values within the predetermined numerical range, it again extracts a value within the predetermined numerical range and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range one after another without overlapping based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310a obtains a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an, and obtains the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an when this latch signal is input from a hard random number latch register built into the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets this acquired random number as the random number for determining a jackpot.

Following step S48, the main control program reserves commands to be sent when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, based on the power recovery information set in the main control's internal RAM's work area in step S34, a power-on status command and a power-on main control return destination command, classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89, are created to notify the user that power has been turned on (power has been restored). These commands are then stored in the main control's internal RAM's transmission information storage area as transmission information. In some cases, the main control's internal RAM's transmission information storage area contains various commands corresponding to game information read from game backup information in the main control's internal RAM's work area in step S34. In such cases, after the various commands corresponding to the game information have been sent, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command are sent. These commands are sent during the main control's timer interrupt process, which will be described later. The reservation of commands to be sent when the power is turned on in step S50 will be described in detail later.

Following step S50, the main control program performs interrupt permission settings (step S52). This setting causes the main control side timer interrupt processing, described below, to be repeated at the interrupt period set in step S42, i.e., every 4 ms.

Following step S52, once a predetermined time has elapsed since power-on, i.e., once the main control processing on the main control side has begun, the main control program will restrict the execution of the gaming control side RAM clear processing triggered by the receipt of an error cancellation navigation command in response to the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch) (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing to treat the detection signal input in response to the operation of the operation switch 954 as a release switch for canceling an error notification in response to an error that has occurred, by executing the RAM clear processing in response to the input of the error cancellation navigation command for a predetermined time period from power-on (gaming control side power-on operation control means), or by restricting the execution of the RAM clear processing even if the error cancellation navigation command is input after the predetermined time has elapsed (gaming control side normal operation control means). In other words, the operation switch 954 (error reset unit), which was originally intended to be used to reset an error that occurred during the payout operation, can instead function as an operation unit for executing a RAM clear process to initiate initialization of the main control built-in RAM (which serves as the game memory unit) (and the payout control built-in RAM (which serves as the payout memory unit)) for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on, and after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, can function as an operation unit for resetting an error that occurred during the payout operation of the game balls.

Next, the main control program determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs, if the voltage drops below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e as a power outage warning. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

If no power outage warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs a non-win/lose random number update process (step S56). This non-win/lose random number update process updates the random numbers for reach determination, variable display pattern, jackpot symbol initial value determination random number, and small win symbol initial value determination random number, as described above. In this way, the non-win/lose random number update process updates random numbers that are not related to win/lose determination (jackpot determination) by software. Note that the random numbers for normal symbol win determination, normal symbol win symbol initial value determination random number, and normal symbol variable display pattern random number, as described above, are also updated by this non-win/lose random number update process.

Following step S56, the program returns to step S54, where the main control program determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If no power outage warning signal has been input, the program performs a non-win/lose random number update process in step S56, and then repeats steps S54 to S56. The process of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as the "main control side main process."

On the other hand, if a power outage warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program disables interrupts (step S58). This setting disables the main control timer interrupt process described below, prevents writing to the main control's built-in RAM, and protects game information from being overwritten.

Following step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power outage clear signal (step S60). Here, the same processing is performed as in the power outage clear processing of step S14, which started outputting the power outage clear signal. This allows the main control program to release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S60, the main control program stops the drive signals being output to the start port solenoid 2107, attacca solenoid 2108, first special symbol display 1403, second special symbol display 1405, first special reserved number display 1404, second special reserved number display 1406, normal symbol display 1402, normal symbol memory display 1188, status display 1401, round display 1407, etc., as shown in FIG. 69 (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by treating the game information in the working area of the main control's built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control program sets a RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting disables access to the main control's built-in RAM (game memory unit), thereby preventing updates to the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game memory unit).

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af that was started in step S12, clearing the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af and making it impossible to restart timekeeping, resulting in the main control MPU 1310a being forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. The main control program then performs this main control side power-on processing again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off processing."

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset in the event of a power outage or momentary power outage, and then performs main control power-on processing when power is restored.

In step S30, the game backup information stored in the main control's built-in RAM is checked to see if it is correct, and then in step S32, it is checked to see if the main control's power-off processing was completed normally. In this way, by double-checking the game backup information stored in the main control's built-in RAM, it is checked to see if the game backup information was stored as a result of fraudulent activity.

Here, we will explain the fact that the determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, we will explain the problem that occurs when the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal is not determined in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 following the wait time standby process in step S22 and subsequent processing is carried out.

As mentioned above, when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the charge stored in electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in Figure 77 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary interruption. In other words, even if power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off due to a momentary or sudden power outage, the charge stored in the hardware electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V, allowing the main control side power outage processing to be completed within approximately 7 ms after power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off. This ensures that the main control side power outage processing can be completed reliably even if a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off while the player is playing, that is, while the main control side main processing or the main control side timer interrupt processing described below is being performed.

However, in an extremely rare event, when power is restored, the wait time standby process of step S22 starts counting the waiting time (boot timer: in this embodiment, set to 2.5 seconds) until the system that controls the drawing of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 by the LCD display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in Figure 72 starts (boots), and if a momentary power outage or power failure occurs just before this waiting time is reached, the charge stored in the hardware electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a.However, within a period of approximately 7 ms, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52.This causes the main control side timer interrupt processing described below to be performed, and even if the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, it may not be possible to complete the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing. As a result, when power is restored, the main control's power-on processing will begin again without storing the calculated checksum value based on the contents of the main control's built-in RAM.

As a result, when power is restored, the main control side power-on process is initiated and the wait time standby process in step S22 is completed without an instantaneous or power outage. Then, when the checksum calculated in step S28 based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is compared in step S30 with the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous or power outage, the checksum values will not match, and the entire main control built-in RAM will be cleared in step S38. In other words, when power is restored, the operation switch 954 is operated by a waiter or other person, forcing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM to be forcibly erased (cleared) even without the waiter or other person expressing an intention to clear the RAM.

In this embodiment, therefore, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process is provided in step S24 to determine whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If a power outage warning signal has been input, the process returns to the determination of step S24, and the determination of step S24 is repeated as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. As a result, a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, clearing the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af and preventing it from starting timekeeping again, thereby forcing the main control built-in WDT 1310af to reset the main control MPU 1310a. Before performing the wait time standby process in step S22, a value is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20. However, as described above, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, even if RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information) are not changed at all.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process is provided as step S24 to determine whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. If a power outage warning signal has been input (that is, when it is determined in step S24 that power to the pachinko machine 1 has been cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of step S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, the determination of step S24 is repeated, thereby forcibly resetting the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and restarting the main control board 1310. This prevents the game from progressing, prevents the game information from being updated, and prevents fluctuations in the checksum calculation results. As a result, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it will determine that the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum value calculated and stored in step S64, and will not initialize the game information stored in the main control's built-in RAM immediately before the momentary or power outage occurred. Therefore, when power is restored, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the momentary or power outage from being initialized.

In addition, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process is provided in step S24 to determine whether a power outage warning signal has been input. When a power outage warning signal has not been input (i.e., when it is determined in step S24 that power to the pachinko machine 1 has not been cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of step S22), even if power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is progressing a game, power is supplied to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, by the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in Figure 77, and the game information due to the progress of this game is maintained. Because the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is able to complete the main control side power outage processing, which consists of steps S58 to S68, which are backup processing for storing information, and an infinite loop, when restarted, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum calculation result of step S28 matches the checksum calculation result of the backup processing (i.e., the checksum value calculated and stored in step S64), and therefore does not initialize the game information stored in the main control's internal RAM immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage occurred. In other words, the game information is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage occurred, and the main control board 1310 can be started.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has been input immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, the main control's built-in WDT 1310af will forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a, allowing the main control side power outage processing to be started again without any updating of the contents of the main control's built-in RAM.On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, the main control side power outage processing can be reliably completed within the hardware-based "power supply assurance period during momentary power outage or power outage" of approximately 7 ms, as before. That is, in this embodiment, when power is restored and an instantaneous power outage or power failure occurs during the main control side power-on process, and the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied as +5 V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or instantaneous power failure occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power-off process cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power outage or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms due to the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, then step S24 immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22 will be performed. A determination is made as to whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input, and if a power outage warning signal has been input, the process returns to the determination of step S24. As long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, the determination of step S24 is repeated, and a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af that was started in step S12, clearing the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af and making it impossible to start timekeeping again, thereby forcibly resetting the main control MPU 1310a by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. This software-based main control built-in WDT 1310af forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a, preventing progress to steps after step S24 (specifically, the control flow in which interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, followed by enabling interrupts in step S52 and starting the main control timer interrupt processing described below), thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) from being updated. This separate system has two components: a software component that prevents any changes to the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs and the power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, and a hardware component that ensures that the main control power-off processing is completed and no changes are made to the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information). This ensures that the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) are prevented from being changed.

Next, we will explain how the reservation setting for the command to be sent when power is turned on is performed in step S50. In step S50, as described above, based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, a power-on status command classified as power-on shown in Figure 89 and a power-on main control return destination command are created to notify that power has been turned on (power has been restored), and these are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. As described above, this power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information indicating the drive state of the starting port solenoid 2107 and information indicating the drive state of the attack solenoid 2108 shown in Figure 69. Here, we will first explain the problem that occurs when the power-on main control return destination command does not include information indicating the drive state of the starting port solenoid 2107 and information indicating the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69; in other words, the problem that occurs when the power-on main control return destination command in step S50 does not schedule the command to be sent when power is turned on.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a jackpot game status screen (e.g., a jackpot game display screen) in the display area of the game board side display device 1600 shown in Figure 60, and the main control board 1310 is driving the attacca solenoid 2108 to open the large prize opening 2005 shown in Figure 60 by the opening/closing member 2005a, if a momentary or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored, the main control board 1310 will be restored to the game status immediately before the momentary or power outage occurred based on the power recovery information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, and will begin driving the attacca solenoid 2108, causing the large prize opening 2005 to transition from a state in which it is closed by the opening/closing member 2005a to a state in which it is open.

However, when a momentary or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. Therefore, when a momentary or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored. However, when a momentary or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored while the main control board 1310 is generating a jackpot gaming state as the gaming state, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover by displaying a screen in the display area of the gaming board side performance display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving state based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored, but it cannot at all indicate which round in the jackpot gaming state it is. In other words, even if, for example, a gaming ball enters the large prize opening 2005 and is detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69, and the main control board 1310 sends a large prize opening 1 count display command to the peripheral control board 1510 to inform the peripheral control board 1510 of the number of gaming balls that have entered the large prize opening 2005, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 can display the number of gaming balls that have entered the large prize opening 2005 on the screen in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving status, but it cannot at all display which round in the large prize game state (i.e. which round) it is.

In such a situation, for example, when the fourth round (fourth round) of the jackpot game state ends, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacca solenoid 2108 and sends a large prize opening 1 closed display command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, instructing the large prize opening 2005 to transition from an open state by the opening/closing member 2005a to a closed state (i.e., the start of closing the large prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 between rounds), and when the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state, it starts driving the attacca solenoid 2108 and sends a large prize opening 5th open display command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, instructing the large prize opening 2005 to transition from a closed state by the opening/closing member 2005a to an open state (i.e., the start of opening the large prize opening 2005 for the fifth round). As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 will finally switch from the screen corresponding to the probability and time-saving state described above to a screen indicating the start of five rounds of the jackpot game state and display it in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600.

Furthermore, for example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a screen in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 that informs the player that the game state has become favorable to the player, as the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004 (for example, a screen informing the player that the movable piece 2004a is being opened), and the main control board 1310 is driving the starting port solenoid 2107 to open the movable piece 2004a of the second starting port 2004 shown in Figure 60 to the left and right, if a momentary power outage or power failure occurs and power is then restored, the main control board 1310 will be restored to the game state it was in immediately before the momentary power outage or power failure occurred, based on the power recovery information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in setting the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, and will begin driving the starting port solenoid 2107, causing the movable piece 2004a to transition from an approximately vertically standing state to an opened state to the left and right.

However, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 is designed to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 and recover when power is restored.Therefore, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and power is then restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state where a gaming ball can be received at the second starting port 2004, creating a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, if a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and then power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will be able to return to normal by displaying a screen in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving state based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored, but the peripheral control board 1510 will not be able to display at all in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 a screen informing the player that the gaming state has become such that a gaming ball can be received at the second starting port 2004, creating a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. For this reason, a player seated at the front of the pachinko machine may be surprised by the occurrence of a momentary or power outage and forget that when power is restored, the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage occurred was one in which game balls could be received into the second starting port 2004. In such cases, even though the game state at the time of power restoration is restored to one in which game balls can be received into the second starting port 2004, the screen instructing the game (i.e., the screen instructing the game to place a game ball into the second starting port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 when power is restored, which causes the player to become confused about what game to play.

As such, in the two examples mentioned above, there was a problem in that the gaming state immediately before the momentary or blackout could not be quickly restored after power was restored. In other words, when a momentary or blackout occurs and power is subsequently restored, a player seated in front of the pachinko machine may mistakenly believe that the pachinko machine's system has frozen, or in other words, that it has malfunctioned.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs and power is restored), in order to send a power-on status command and a power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on status command and power-on main control return destination command classified as power-on shown in Figure 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. These commands are then sent during the main control's timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

As a result, based on the power-on state command and power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above example, if a momentary or power outage occurs during the fourth round of the jackpot game state and then power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the main control board 1310 will return to its original state by starting to drive the attacca solenoid 2108 and transitioning the jackpot opening 2005 from a closed state to an open state by the opening/closing member 2005a. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 cannot display a screen specifying that it is the fourth round of the jackpot game state (i.e., a screen indicating which round it is) in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, but it can display a screen informing that it is a jackpot game state, that the attacca solenoid 2108 has started to be driven, and that the jackpot opening 2005 has been opened by the opening/closing member 2005a (for example, a screen saying "It's a jackpot. The jackpot opening is open. Play to make the game ball enter the jackpot opening"). In the example described above, for example, in a state where a game ball can be received by the second starting port 2004 and the game is in an advantageous state for the player, if a momentary power outage or a blackout occurs and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 can return to the starting port 2005 as the destination for the game. The peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 informing the player that the opening solenoid 2107 has started to be driven, causing the pair of movable pieces 2004a to be opened left and right (for example, a screen informing the player of the message "The movable pieces are opening. Please play so that the game ball will enter the open starting opening."), and can instruct the player seated in front of the pachinko machine to play by having the game ball enter the second starting opening 2004 after power is restored. This allows the main control board 1310 to give detailed instructions on where to return the peripheral control board 1510 when power is restored after a momentary or power outage occurs. Therefore, the game can be quickly restored to the state it was in immediately before the momentary or power outage after power is restored. In other words, if a momentary or power outage occurs and then power is restored, players seated in front of the pachinko machine will see the pachinko machine's system freeze, preventing them from mistaking it for a malfunction.

Next, we will explain the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the judgment in step S30 when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time since being manufactured for inspection during the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process on the main control board 1310 manufacturing line. When the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time since being manufactured for inspection during the main control board inspection process, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the backup processing of steps S58 to S68 and the main control side power-off processing consisting of an infinite loop. Therefore, even if a checksum is calculated based on the contents of the main control internal RAM in step S28, the checksum values will never match when compared in step S30, and the entire main control internal RAM will necessarily be cleared in step S38. As a result, when the command to be transmitted upon power-on is scheduled in step S50, the power-on status command and power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on as shown in FIG. 89, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. This results in only two commands, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command, being stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted first in the main control timer interrupt process described below, followed by the power-on status command, followed by the power-on main control return destination command. Using this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time since being manufactured for inspection, the power-on status command is transmitted as the first command from the main control board 1310 to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

As mentioned above, the power-on state command is composed of: information instructing the RAM to be cleared when the operation switch 954 on the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated upon power-on (including not only power-on but also power restoration after a power outage or momentary power interruption); information instructing which state (probability and time-saving state) to return to upon power-on (including not only power-on but also power restoration after a power outage or momentary power interruption), from the low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state; and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, we will explain the problem that occurs when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

As mentioned above, when creating the so-called max type, mid type, or sweet type pachinko machine 1 (or more accurately, the main control board 1310), the model code of the pachinko machine can identify which copyright of the work it refers to and what the game specifications are (for example, a game specification in which when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, or a game specification in which the number of times the special pattern can fluctuate is limited (for example, 30 or 70 times) and the probability fluctuation occurs (a so-called ST machine)).

On the production line of a manufacturer that produces pachinko machines 1, main control boards 1310 for multiple copyrights may be mixed when they are produced. This can lead to workers on the production line not knowing which of the multiple copyrights (e.g., copyrights for Movie A, Movie B, Drama C, Movie D, Manga E, and Manga F) the main control board 1310 is being sent down the production line to manufacture for which of the multiple copyrights. Furthermore, even if the main control board 1310 is being sent down the production line to manufacture a main control board 1310 for one of the multiple copyrights (e.g., the copyright for Movie D), they may mistakenly believe that the main control board 1310 is being sent down the production line to manufacture a main control board 1310 for another copyright (e.g., the copyright for Manga F). For this reason, if main control boards 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights are mixed when main control boards 1310 are manufactured on the production line of a manufacturer that manufactures pachinko machines 1, workers on the production line will not be able to confirm which work copyright the main control board 1310 manufactured on the production line is for, and even for the same work copyright, they will not be able to confirm which model type (max type, mid-type, sweet type) or what game specifications (game specifications in which, when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, or ST machine) it is. For this reason, if main control boards 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights are mixed when main control boards 1310 are manufactured on the production line of a manufacturer that manufactures pachinko machines 1, the main control boards 1310 will be sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control boards 1310 to the game board 5, with the main control boards 1310 for multiple types of work copyrights mixed together. As a result, workers on the game board assembly line sometimes attached a main control board 1310 to the game board 5 that did not correspond to the game board 5's copyright. This resulted in a problem of reduced production efficiency of the game board 5.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs and power is restored), in order to send a power-on status command containing information indicating the pachinko machine model code to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on status command and power-on main control return destination command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. These commands are then sent during the main control's timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

As a result, during the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process on the production line, a worker on the production line of the manufacturer that produces pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310, and based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine contained in the power-on status command received by the inspection device from the main control board 1310, the inspection device derives the following information that constitutes the model code of the pachinko machine: a series code that identifies the model type (max type, middle type, or sweet type) as described above; a copyright code that identifies the copyright of the work; and game specifications (for example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs). By visually checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification whereby a probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times that the special symbol changes, in addition to the game specification whereby a probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times that the special symbol changes (such as an ST machine), it is possible to determine which copyright of the work the main control board 1310 corresponds to, and even for the copyright of the same work, it is possible to determine which model type (max type, middle type, or sweet digital type) it is, and what game specification it is (a game specification where when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, or an ST machine). As a result, even if main control boards 1310 for multiple different game copyrights are mixed together when manufacturing main control boards 1310 on the production line of a pachinko machine manufacturer, workers in the main control board inspection process on the production line can visually check the inspection monitor to accurately determine the model type, game copyright, and game specifications of the main control board 1310, allowing them to be separated into game copyrights and sent to the subsequent game board assembly line. This allows workers on the game board assembly line to reliably attach main control boards 1310 that correspond to game boards 5 for the game copyrights, preventing a decrease in game board 5 production efficiency caused by attaching main control boards 1310 that do not correspond to game boards 5 for the game copyrights to game boards 5. This therefore contributes to improving game board 5 production efficiency.

[14-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in Figures 92 and 93.

When the main control side timer interrupt processing begins, the main control program on the main control board 1310, under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, switches register banks as shown in FIG. 94 (step S100). The general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks: a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing described above, while the second register bank is used in this routine, the main control side timer interrupt processing. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in this routine, the main control side timer interrupt processing, the register bank is switched from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing to the second register bank. Note that in this embodiment, when this routine, the main control side timer interrupt processing, begins, there is no need to save each register to a stack.

Following step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). This timer subtraction processing, for example, manages the time that the first special symbol display device 1403 and the second special symbol display device 1405 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric device control processing described below, the time that the normal symbol display device 1402 is lit according to the normal symbol variable display pattern determined by the normal symbol and normal electric device control processing described below, as well as the ACK signal input determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether a payer ACK signal has been input, which indicates that the payout control board 951 has successfully received various commands sent by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). Specifically, when the change time of the variable display pattern or normal symbol change display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt period is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the change time is subtracted by 4 ms, and when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the change time of the variable display pattern or normal symbol change display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes 0. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, this main control program receives, for example, a detection signal from the general prize opening sensor 4020 shown in FIG. 69 that detects a game ball that has entered the general prize opening 2001 shown in FIG. 60, a detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69 that detects a game ball that has entered the special prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. 60, a detection signal from the first start opening sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 that detects a game ball that has entered the first start opening 2002 shown in FIG. 60, and a detection signal from the second start opening sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69 that detects a game ball that has entered the second start opening 2004 shown in FIG. 60. 60 的检测信号、 对应于图90中所示 ...。 60, the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in Figure 69 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 shown in Figure 60, the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 that detects the game ball that has used a magnet shown in Figure 69, the detection signal from the vibration sensor 2405 that detects the game machine that has used a vibration shown in Figure 69, and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951 shown in Figure 69 that notifies the payout control board 951 that the payout ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later has been received successfully, are read, and stored as input information in the input information storage area. Also, when the detection signal from the first start gate sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that has entered the first start gate 2002 and the detection signal from the second start gate sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that has entered the second start gate 2004 are read, the corresponding start gate winning command shown in Figure 90 shown in Figure 90 shown in Figure 90 shown in Figure 90 is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. In other words, when a detection signal is received from the first start gate sensor 4002, the corresponding start gate winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and when a detection signal is received from the second start gate sensor 4004, the corresponding start gate winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

In this embodiment, when the switch input process is initiated, the detection signal from the general prize opening sensor 4020, which detects game balls that have entered the general prize opening 2001; the detection signal from the count sensor 4005, which detects game balls that have entered the special prize opening 2005; the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 4002, which detects game balls that have entered the first start opening 2002; the detection signal from the second start opening sensor 4004, which detects game balls that have entered the second start opening 2004; and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003, which detects game balls that have passed through the gate section 2003, are each read a first time, and then, after a predetermined time (e.g., 10 μs) has elapsed, each is read again a second time. The result of this second reading is then compared with the result of the first reading. It is determined whether any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read a third time, and the result of this third read is compared with the result of the second read. It is again determined whether any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read a fourth time, and the result of this fourth read is compared with the result of the third read. It is again determined whether any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, it is treated as if no game balls have entered the ball.

In this way, during switch input processing, the main control program performs a total of two double readings of the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, count sensor 4005, first starting opening sensor 4002, second starting opening sensor 4004, and gate sensor 4003: a double reading that compares the signals over the first through third readings, and a double reading that compares the signals over the second through fourth readings. This avoids false detections due to the effects of chattering, noise, etc., and thereby improves the reliability of the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, count sensor 4005, first starting opening sensor 4002, second starting opening sensor 4004, and gate sensor 4003.

Following step S104, the main control program performs a win/loss random number update process (step S106). This win/loss random number update process updates the random numbers for the jackpot symbol and the small win symbol, as described above. In addition to these random numbers, the program also updates the random numbers for determining the initial values for the jackpot symbol and the small win symbol, which are updated in the non-win/loss random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 93. These random numbers for determining the initial values for the jackpot symbol and the small win symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby further enhancing randomness. In contrast, the random numbers for the jackpot symbol and the small win symbol are random numbers related to win/loss determination (jackpot determination), and therefore the respective counters count up only each time this win/loss random number update process is performed. In addition, the random numbers used to determine whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol and the random numbers used to determine the initial values for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol are also updated by this winning/losing random number update process.

For example, as mentioned above, the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol is an initial value update type counter that is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from a minimum value to a maximum value, and counts up this range by adding one value each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. It counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol. Once the counter has finished counting up the range of the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol from its minimum value to its maximum value, the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a jackpot is reached is updated by this win/loss random number update process. The random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process that draws a value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol.

In this embodiment, the random numbers used to determine the initial values for the jackpot symbol and the random numbers used to determine the initial values for the small win symbol are updated by the non-win/lose random number update process in step S56 of the main control side power-on processing (main control side main processing) shown in Figure 93, and the win/lose random number update process in step S106 of the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine. However, if the processing time for this routine fluctuates each time the interrupt timer is generated and the main control side main processing is repeatedly executed within the time remaining until the next interrupt timer is generated, causing the number of times the non-win/lose random number update process in step S56 is executed to become random, the random numbers used to determine the initial values for the jackpot symbol and the random numbers used to determine the initial values for the small win symbol can be updated only in the non-win/lose random number update process in step S56.

Following step S106, the main control program performs prize ball control processing (step S108). This prize ball control processing reads input information from the input information storage area described above and creates the prize ball command shown in FIG. 88 for paying out game balls based on this input information. If the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, the program sets the output of a main prize ball number information output signal to notify this and stores this information in the output information storage area as output information. It also creates the self-check command shown in FIG. 88 for checking the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The created prize ball command and self-check command are then sent to the payout control board 951 as main payout serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the large prize opening 2005 shown in Figure 60, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 prize balls, and since the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to notify this, stored as output information in the output information memory area, and the prize ball command is sent to the payout control board 951.If a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has successfully received this prize ball command is not input within a specified time, a self-check command is created to check the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 and sent to the payout control board 951. Furthermore, if the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls exceeds 10, such as when creating a prize ball command to pay out 15 prize balls, the next time this prize ball control process is run, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on this input information is added to the excess number of balls. When this added number of game balls is reached, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to notify this fact, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S108, the main control program performs a slot command reception process (step S110). In the dispensing control board 951, the dispensing control program transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (e.g., slot status 1 command, error release navigation command, and slot status 2 command) classified as status displays shown in FIG. 91. Meanwhile, as described below, the dispensing control program outputs an error occurrence command if an error occurs during the dispensing operation, or outputs an error release navigation command based on the detection signal of the operation switch 954. In the above-described slot command reception process, when the main control program successfully receives these various commands as payer serial data, it stores information informing the dispensing control board 951 of this as output information in the output information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. Furthermore, the main control program converts the commands successfully received as payer serial data into 2-byte (16-bit) commands (various commands classified as status displays shown in FIG. 90 (slot status 1 command, error release navigation command, and slot status 2 command)) and stores them as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. Note that the Frame Status 1 command here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the Error Clear Navigation command corresponds to the first error clear command.

Following step S110, the main control program performs a fraud detection process (step S112). This fraud detection process checks for any abnormal conditions related to the prize balls. For example, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and if a detection signal is input from the count sensor 4005 when the game is not in a jackpot game state (when a game ball enters the big prize opening 2005), a prize abnormality display command classified as an annunciation display shown in Figure 90 is created as an abnormal condition, and is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S112, the main control program performs special symbol and special electric device control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric device control processing, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69, and the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an when the latch signal is input is obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a, and this obtained random number value is set as the random number for determining a jackpot. The system then determines whether the random number for determining a jackpot (i.e., a random number value obtained from a hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a) matches a jackpot determination value pre-stored in the main control MPU 1310a (determines whether a jackpot game state should be generated (referred to as a "special lottery").), or determines whether the value of a counter that updates the random number for the jackpot symbol matches a probability variable determination value pre-stored in the main control MPU 1310a (determines whether a probability fluctuation should be generated). Here, "probability fluctuation" refers to a change in the probability of a jackpot from a normal state (low probability) to a high probability (probability variable). In this embodiment, the range of the jackpot determination value (jackpot determination range) described above is set to a value between 32668 and 32767 for low probability, which is read from the normal state determination table, while the range is set to a value between 31768 and 32767 for high probability, which is read from the probability variable determination table. In this way, in the special symbol and special electric device control process of step S114, when determining whether the random number for determining a jackpot (i.e., the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a built into the main control) matches the jackpot determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, this is done by checking whether the random number for determining a jackpot (i.e., the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a built into the main control) is within the jackpot determination range.

If these determination results are determined by the first start opening sensor 4002, various commands related to the special symbol 1 synchronization effect shown in Figure 89 are created, while if the lottery result is determined by the second start opening sensor 4004, various commands related to the special symbol 2 synchronization effect shown in Figure 89 are created and stored in the transmission information memory area as transmission information.In addition, the output of a lighting signal to the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405 is set to light up according to the determined special symbol variable display pattern, and this is stored in the above-mentioned output information memory area as output information. In addition, depending on the gaming state to be generated, for example, when a jackpot gaming state is reached, various commands classified as jackpot-related commands shown in FIG. 89 (jackpot opening command, command to display Nth times that the large prize opening 1 is opened, command to display the large prize opening 1 closing, command to display the large prize opening 1 count, jackpot ending command, and jackpot pattern display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, the output of a drive signal to the attacca solenoid 2108 is set to open and close the opening/closing member 2005a of the large prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. 60, and stored in the output information storage area as output information, and the number of times that the large prize opening 2005 changes from a closed state to an open state (launch command) is also created. When there have been two rounds, a lighting signal is output to the 2-round indicator lamp 1407a of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. 66 to light up, and this is stored in the output information storage area; when there have been 15 rounds, a lighting signal is output to the 15-round indicator lamp 1407b of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. 66 to light up, and this is stored in the output information storage area; and a lighting signal is output to the status indicator 1401 to light up a specified color to indicate whether or not a probability fluctuation has occurred, and this is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S114, the main control program performs normal symbol and normal electric device control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric device control processing, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and gate winning processing is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning processing, it is determined from the input information whether a detection signal from gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. Based on the result of this determination, if a detection signal has been input to the input terminal, the value of the counter that updates the random number used to determine whether the normal symbol has been won described above is extracted and stored as gate information in the gate information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM.

This gate information storage area has four sections, numbered 0 to 3, with gate information stored in the order of 0, 1, 2, and 3. For example, if gate information is stored in sections 0 to 2 of the gate information storage, and a detection signal from gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in section 3 of the gate information storage.

The gate information stored in Section 0 of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control's built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information in Section 1 of the gate information storage is shifted to Section 0 of the gate information storage, the gate information in Section 2 of the gate information storage to Section 1 of the gate information storage, and the gate information in Section 3 of the gate information storage to Section 2 of the gate information storage, leaving Section 3 of the gate information storage empty. For example, if gate information is stored in Sections 1 and 2 of the gate information storage, the gate information in Section 1 of the gate information storage is shifted to Section 0 of the gate information storage, and the gate information in Section 2 of the gate information storage to Section 1 of the gate information storage, leaving Sections 2 and 3 of the gate information storage empty. Here, if gate information is stored in Sections 1 to 3 of the gate information storage, the output of the lighting signal for the normal symbol memory indicator 1188 is set based on the gate information described above so that the total number of gate information stored is treated as reserved balls and the normal symbol memory indicator 1188 is illuminated, and this is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the working area of the main control's built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for determining whether a normal symbol has been won is extracted from this read gate information to determine whether it matches the normal symbol winning determination value pre-stored in the main control's built-in ROM (referred to as the "normal lottery"). The result of this determination (the result of the normal lottery) determines whether or not to open or close the movable piece 2004a. If the decision is made to open or close the movable piece 2004a, it will open in the left and right directions, creating a gaming state in which a gaming ball can be received into the second starting opening 2004, providing an advantageous gaming state for the player. The normal symbol variable display pattern corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern described above, and various commands classified as related to the normal symbol synchronization performance shown in Figure 89 are created and stored in the transmission information memory area described above as transmission information.In addition, the output of a lighting signal to the normal symbol display device 1402 is set so as to light up the normal symbol display device 1402 in accordance with the determined normal symbol variable display pattern, and stored in the output information memory area described above as output information. Furthermore, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for determining whether a normal symbol has won matches the normal symbol winning determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric role performance shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and a drive signal is set to be output to the start port solenoid 2107 to open and close the movable piece 2004a, and this is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when the value of the extracted random number for determining whether a normal symbol has won does not match the normal symbol winning determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, a normal symbol variable display pattern is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern described above, and various commands classified as related to the normal symbol synchronization performance shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In addition, a lighting signal is set to be output to the normal symbol display device 1402 to light up the normal symbol display device 1402 according to the determined normal symbol variable display pattern, and this is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

Following step S116, the main control program performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area described above through the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control program, for example, outputs a main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 951 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information when various commands from the payout control board 951 have been successfully received; when in a jackpot game state, outputs a drive signal to the attacca solenoid 2108 which opens and closes the opening/closing member 2005a of the large prize opening 2005; and outputs a drive signal to the start opening solenoid 2107 which opens and closes the movable piece 2004a. In addition, it also outputs various information (game information) signals relating to the game to the payout control board 951, such as a main prize ball count information output signal, a 15-round jackpot information output signal, a 2-round jackpot information output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special pattern display information output signal, a normal pattern display information output signal, time-saving information output information, and a start opening winning information output signal.

Following step S118, the main control program performs a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads transmission information from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits this transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified as related to special 1 synchronization effects, various commands classified as related to special 2 synchronization effects, various commands classified as related to jackpots (for example, a large prize entrance 1 count display command corresponding to a large prize entrance count command based on a detection signal from count sensor 4005 (see FIG. 69) when a game ball entering large prize entrance 2005 (see FIG. 8) is detected), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal synchronization effects, various commands classified as related to normal electric role effects, various commands classified as notification displays (door open command, door frame close command, main frame open command, main frame close command, etc.) shown in FIG. 90, various commands classified as status displays (frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame status 2 command), various commands classified as test-related commands, and various other commands. Each packet of main serial data consists of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main serial data consists of a status indicating the type of command with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating the variation of the effect with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a sum value calculated by treating the status and mode as numerical values; this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program transmits various commands as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the following order: status, mode, and sum value. As mentioned above, in the event of a power outage or momentary power outage, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in Figure 77 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a shown in Figure 79 is capable of transferring at least the command set in its transmission buffer register 1310aeb by the main control CPU core 1310aa to the transmission shift register 41aea via the serial management unit 1310aec, and completing transmission from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main serial data. When power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 of the main control side power-on processing shown in Fig. 93, in order to notify that power has been restored, a power-on status command classified as power-on shown in Fig. 89 and a power-on main control return destination command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and the power-on status command is transmitted as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, followed by the power-on main control return destination command in the order of status, mode, and sum value. Note that in the setting of the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 of the main control side power-on processing, game information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this game information may be stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In such cases, after various commands corresponding to the game information have been sent, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command will be sent.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a slot status 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the dispensing control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits a slot status 1 command (second error occurrence command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control unit) (error command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the slot status 1 command in the format shown in Figure 91 received from the dispensing control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a slot status 1 command in the format shown in Figure 90.

On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) from the dispensing control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits an error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (error command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error cancellation navigation command in the format shown in Figure 91 received from the dispensing control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as an error cancellation navigation command in the format shown in Figure 90.

Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame open command (first main body frame open command) from the dispensing control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits a main body frame open command (second main body frame open command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control unit) (main body frame command transmission means, second main body frame transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame open command in the form shown in Figure 91 received from the dispensing control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a main body frame open command in the form shown in Figure 90. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame close command (first main body frame close command) from the dispensing control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits a main body frame close command (second main body frame close command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control unit). (main body frame command transmission means, second main body frame command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main frame close command in the format shown in Figure 91 received from the dispensing control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a main frame close command in the format shown in Figure 90.

Also, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door open command (first door open command) from the dispensing control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits a door open command (second door frame open command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control unit) (door frame command transmission means, second door frame command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame close command in the form shown in Figure 91 received from the dispensing control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a door close command in the form shown in Figure 90. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door close command (first door close command) from the dispensing control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits a door close command (second door close command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control unit) (door frame command transmission means, second door frame command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door close command in the format shown in Figure 91 received from the dispensing control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a door close command in the format shown in Figure 90.

Following step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in Figure 69 (step S122) and terminates this routine. The main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared in step S22 by setting a timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a. This clears the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Then, timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af starts again, preventing the main control MPU 1310a from being forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af.

As described above, the main control board 1310 can execute and complete the above-mentioned backup processing for storing game information as the game progresses while the game is in progress before power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and when power is restored, it can output to the peripheral control board 1510 the main control return destination command at power on of Figure 89, which instructs the drive state of the starting port solenoid 2107 and the attacca solenoid 2108, which are the electrical drive sources, by the port output processing of step S118 in this routine when power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, based on the game information for which the backup processing was executed, as the return destination for the game progress by the main control board 1310. In other words, in the reservation setting of the command to be sent when power is turned on in step S50 of the main control side power-on processing in Figure 93, the main control board 1310 creates a power-on status command and a power-on main control return destination command classified as power-on in Figure 89 and stores them as transmission information in the transmission information memory area of the main control built-in RAM in order to notify that power has been turned on (power has been restored) based on the power recovery information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in setting the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 of the same processing, and in this routine, in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 of this routine, it transmits these as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value that constitute the power-on status command, and then transmits them to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value that constitute the power-on main control return destination command. For this reason, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 can display in the display area of the game board display device 1600 the destination to which the main control board 1310 will return game progress when power is restored. As a result, when a momentary power outage or blackout occurs while a player is playing and power is subsequently restored, the game can be quickly restored to the game state immediately before the momentary power outage or blackout after power is restored, and the destination to which the main control board 1310 will return game progress can be notified by displaying in the display area of the game board display device 1600, thereby preventing the pachinko machine 1 system from appearing frozen to the player and being mistaken for a malfunction. Therefore, by quickly restoring the game state immediately before the momentary power outage or blackout after power is restored, it is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a malfunction.

Furthermore, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process on the manufacturing line for the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38 of the main control side power-on processing in Figure 92. As a result, in the reservation setting of the command to be sent when the power is turned on in step S50 of the same process, when the reservation setting of the command to be sent when the power is turned on is made, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on as shown in Figure 89, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information memory area of the main control built-in RAM, so that only the two commands, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information memory area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in this routine, the power-on status command is transmitted as main peripheral serial data to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the power-on main control return destination command is transmitted in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on peripheral serial data. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process is configured to display detailed model information on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process based on the information indicating the pachinko machine's model code contained in the power-on status command received from the main control board 1310. This information includes the series code that identifies the model type (max type, mid type, or sweet type) described above, the copyright code that identifies the copyright of the work, and the game specification code that identifies the game specifications (for example, a game specification in which, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, and in which the probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times for special symbols to fluctuate (ST machine)).

[15-1. Various control processes of peripheral control units]
[15-1-1. Processing when peripheral control unit is powered on]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 95. When power is applied to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs the peripheral control unit power-on processing as shown in FIG. 95. When this peripheral control unit power-on processing begins, the performance control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the performance control program performs processes such as initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a itself, determining whether it is a hot start or a cold start, and setting a wait timer after reset. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a process to initialize itself, and the time required for this process to initialize the peripheral control MPU 1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), making it possible to initialize the peripheral control MPU 1511a in an extremely short time. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is set to an interrupt permission state, and is then able to receive various commands, such as commands relating to the control of game presentations and commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1, output from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described below, as shown in Figures 89 and 90.

In the hot start/cold start determination process, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in Figure 73, the performance backup information (1fr) which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (1fr) and Bank 2 (1fr) in its backup first area 1511cb is compared, and the performance backup information (1ms) which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (1ms) and Bank 2 (1ms) is compared. In the backup second area 1511cc, the performance backup information (1fr) which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (1fr) and Bank 4 (1fr) is compared, and the content backed up in Bank 3 (1ms) and Bank 4 (1ms) is compared. Certain effect backup information (1 ms) is compared, and if the compared contents match, the effect backup information (1 fr) which is the content stored in Bank1 (1 fr) for Bank0 (1 fr), which is the normally used memory area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in Figure 73, and the effect backup information (1 ms) which is the content stored in Bank1 (1 ms) for Bank0 (1 ms) are copied back respectively, resulting in a hot start. However, if the compared contents do not match (i.e., there is a mismatch), a value of 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1 fr) and Bank0 (1 ms), which are normally used memory areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, respectively, resulting in a cold start.

In addition, in the hot start/cold start determination process, for the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in Figure 73, the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) in its backup first area 1511db is compared, and the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) in its backup second area 1511dc is compared. If the compared contents match, the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), the normally used memory area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in Figure 73, is copied back to Bank 0 (SRAM) and a hot start is performed. However, if the compared contents do not match (i.e., there is a mismatch), a value of 0 is forcibly written to Bank 0 (SRAM), the normally used memory area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, and a cold start is performed. Following such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-managed work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, clearing it to zero. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Following step S1000, the presentation control program performs a current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. 72, and these are set in the calendar information storage section as current calendar information and in the time information storage section as current time information in the RTC information acquisition memory area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. The current time information acquisition process also performs a brightness setting process for the LCD display device. In this LCD display device brightness setting process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and performs a process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the game board-side presentation display device 1600 so that it matches the LED brightness included in the acquired brightness setting information. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side display device 1600 in 5% increments over a range from 100% to 70%, as well as the currently set brightness of the LED backlight of the game board side display device 1600.

Specifically, in the brightness setting process for the LCD display device, when the LED brightness included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75% and the backlight of the game board side display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information; and when the LED brightness included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 80% and the backlight of the game board side display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Note that this brightness setting process for the LCD display device does not perform any correction similar to the brightness correction program used to correct the brightness of the game board side display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side display device 1600, as described above. This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated into the brightness setting process of this LCD display device, preventing the LED brightness from being corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the LCD display device is executed.

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once, when the power is turned on. After performing this current time information acquisition process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Following step S1002, the performance control program sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady-state processing described below, and is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is not executed. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described below, which is executed when a V blank signal, which indicates that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is ready to accept screen data, is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. In step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting it to a value of 0. In addition, after setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Following step S1006, the performance control program determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to 1 (step S1008). If the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not equal to 1 (it is equal to 0), the program returns to step S1008 and repeatedly determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to 1. By repeating this determination, the program enters a standby state until the peripheral control unit's regular processing is executed. After determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 in step S1008, that is, when peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is first set to 1 (step S1009). This steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to 1 when peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to 0 when peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed.

Following step S1009, the performance control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer start process (step S1010). This 1 ms interrupt timer start process starts the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described below, and also initializes the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN by setting the value to 1 to count the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer has started and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has been executed. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process.

Following step S1010, the presentation control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output processing, the presentation control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. 72. Here, continuous transmission via the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73. When this continuous transmission via the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board begins, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 60 has been created in the lamp data creation processing described below and set in the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c external to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in Figure 73 specifies transmission from the lamp drive board serial I/O port as a request factor for the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and transfers and writes the first byte of the game board light-emitting data SL-DAT stored at the top address of the lamp drive board transmission data memory area 1511caa to the transmission buffer register of the lamp drive board serial I/O port via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. This causes the lamp drive board serial I/O port to transfer the written data from the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and begins transmitting the byte of data from the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the game board light-emitting clock signal SL-CLK.

Whenever a transmission interrupt request occurs for the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the trigger is when one byte of data written to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty after one byte of data is lost), and when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac reads the remaining game board side light-emitting data stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa. The data SL-DAT is transferred and written one byte at a time to the transmit buffer register of the lamp drive board serial I/O port via external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai. The lamp drive board serial I/O port then transfers the written data from the transmit buffer register to the transmit shift register, and begins transmitting one byte of data from the transmit shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the game board light emission clock signal SL-CLK, performing continuous transmission via the lamp drive board serial I/O port.

Furthermore, in the lamp data output process, the performance control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in Figure 72. Here too, continuous transmission is performed via the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LEDs using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When this continuous transmission via the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LEDs begins, the door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is created in the lamp data creation process described below and set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data memory area 1511cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511c external to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in Figure 73.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies transmission from the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port as a request cause for the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and transfers and writes the first byte of the door-side light-emitting data STL-DAT stored at the top address of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data memory area 1511cab to the transmit buffer register of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. This causes the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port to transfer the written data from the transmit buffer register to the transmit shift register, and begins transmitting the byte of data from the transmit shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the door-side light-emitting clock signal STL-CLK.

Whenever a transmission interrupt request occurs for the serial I/O port for the LEDs on the frame decoration drive amplifier board, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the trigger is when one byte of data written to the transmission buffer register for the serial I/O port for the LEDs on the frame decoration drive amplifier board is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty after one byte of data is lost), and when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac reads the remaining door-side light-emitting data stored in the transmission data memory area 1511cab for the LEDs on the frame decoration drive amplifier board. The data STL-DAT is transferred and written one byte at a time to the transmit buffer register of the serial I/O port for the LED on the frame decoration drive amplifier board via the external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai. The serial I/O port for the LED on the frame decoration drive amplifier board then transfers the written data from the transmit buffer register to the transmit shift register, and begins transmitting one byte of data from the transmit shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the door-side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, performing continuous transmission via the serial I/O port for the LED on the frame decoration drive amplifier board.

Following step S1012, the presentation control program performs presentation operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). This presentation operation unit monitoring processing monitors whether the operation button 410 has been operated based on the presentation operation unit information acquisition memory area 1511cai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in Figure 73, where various information acquired from the operation of the operation button 410 based on detection signals from the various detection switches provided on the presentation operation unit 400 is set during the presentation operation unit information acquisition processing in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing described below, and appropriately determines whether or not the operation status of the operation button 410 should be reflected in the game presentation.

Following step S1014, the presentation control program performs a display data output process (step S1016). In this display data output process, the sound source VDP 1512a outputs one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source VDP 1512a in the display data creation process described below to the game board side presentation display device 1600 and the door frame side presentation display device 460 via channels CH1 and CH2 shown in FIG. 74. This causes various screens to be drawn on the game board side presentation display device 1600 and the door frame side presentation display device 460. Note that in the display data output process, if drawing is performed that exceeds the drawing capabilities of the sound source VDP 1512a, the output of the generated one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of drawing data to the game board side presentation display device 1600 and the door frame side presentation display device 460 is canceled. This prevents delays in processing time, but may result in dropped frames. However, it is a system that prioritizes synchronization between the effects produced by the multiple LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 60 and the multiple LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, as performed by the lamp data output process in step S1012, and the effects produced by music and sound effects, etc., that are matched to the various effects, output from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573, as performed by the sound data output process described below.

Following step S1016, the performance control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output processing, the performance control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a in the sound data creation processing described below as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c, and outputs sound data such as music, sound effects, and alert sounds as well as music and sound effects as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. When serialized audio data is input from the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a, the audio data transmission IC 1512c transmits the right audio data as differential serial data with positive and negative signals to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and transmits the left audio data as differential serial data with positive and negative signals to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. This allows music and sound effects that accompany various performances to be played in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573, as well as notification sounds and announcement sounds.

Following step S1018, the performance control program performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the performance control program updates the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. For example, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is updated to indicate which screen data, from the first screen data, of the chronologically arranged screen data that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae should be output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source.

In addition, during the scheduler update process, a pointer is updated to indicate which light emission data, from the first light emission data, among the light emission data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for generating light emission modes set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae should be used as the light emission mode for various LEDs.

In addition, during the scheduler update process, a pointer is updated to indicate which sound command data, starting from the first sound command data, should be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a among the sound command data that indicates sound data such as music and sound effects, and sound data for alarms and notification sounds, arranged in chronological order and constituting the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae.

The scheduler update process also updates a pointer to indicate which drive data, starting from the first drive data, of the drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitutes the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is to be output. The drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitutes the electric drive source schedule data is updated by the motor and solenoid drive process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is executed repeatedly every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, as described below. This motor and solenoid drive process, which is executed repeatedly every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, drives the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, updates the pointer to the next drive data specified in chronological order, and updates the pointer each time the process itself is executed. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process. Therefore, even if, for some reason, the pointer in the motor and solenoid drive process changes from the drive data it was originally supposed to point to to other drive data, the scheduler update process forcibly updates it to point to the drive data it was originally supposed to point to.

Following step S1020, the performance control program performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the performance control program analyzes the various commands received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command reception means) described below, including information transmitted from the performance display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 (command analysis means). Based on the information transmitted from the performance display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the performance control program extracts screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and sets the extracted data in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The performance control program also analyzes (command analysis means) whether the command received from main control board 1310 in this peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start port winning command for instructing the start of a start port winning effect, a normal symbol memory command for identifying the number of reserved normal symbols (0 to 4), a symbol synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of a symbol synchronization effect, a symbol memory command output when the start reserve number changes, a large prize port 1 count display command (large prize port count command) output each time a game ball is received in large prize port 2005, or a frame status 1 command (second error occurrence command, full tank error occurrence command) indicating a full tank as shown in Figure 90, and recognizes the current game status. After a predetermined time has elapsed since power was turned on, the performance control program also analyzes whether the command received in this peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is a main body frame open command, main body frame close command, door open command, or door frame close command. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the received command memory area 1511cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in Figure 73, and in the received command analysis processing, the performance control program analyzes the various commands stored in the received command memory area 1511cac. The various commands include, as shown in Figure 89, various commands categorized as related to special chart 1 synchronization effects, various commands categorized as related to special chart 2 synchronization effects, various commands categorized as related to jackpots, various commands categorized as power-on, various commands categorized as related to normal chart synchronization effects, various commands categorized as related to normal electric role effects, various commands categorized as notification displays as shown in Figure 90, various commands categorized as status displays such as the above-mentioned door frame open command, door frame close command, main frame open command, and main frame close command, as well as the error release navigation command (equivalent to the second error release command) and frame status 1 command (equivalent to the second error occurrence command), various commands categorized as test-related, and various commands categorized as others.

Following step S1022, the performance control program performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, if the commands analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022, as described above, include any of the various commands classified as warning displays shown in FIG. 90, the performance control program extracts the screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical drive source schedule data, etc., set in the abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality warnings, from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511, and sets them in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Note that in the warning process, if multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously, the warning process starts with the abnormality warnings registered in descending order of priority, and automatically transitions to the remaining abnormality warnings once the abnormality is resolved. This allows multiple anomalies to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that another anomaly occurred after one anomaly occurred but before the first anomaly was resolved.

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since power-on, if the command analyzed by the presentation control program in the above-mentioned received command analysis process (step S1022) is one of the various commands classified as status displays shown in FIG. 90, such as an error reset navigation command (second error reset command), the LCD display control unit 1512 is controlled in a manner different from the normal presentation mode associated with the presentation operation, to issue a visual warning to the outside using, for example, the game board-side presentation display device 1600 (presentation device), the door frame-side presentation display device 460 (presentation device), or a lamp (presentation device), or an auditory warning to the outside using a speaker (error notification means). In this way, if a malicious player attempts to input an error reset navigation command into the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 on the payout control board 951 even while the game is in progress, the pachinko machine 1 is configured to issue an external warning, thereby deterring fraudulent acts against the main control board 1310 that could affect the progress of the game.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the performance control program performs an RTC acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the performance control program updates the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit and the time information stored in the time information storage unit that were acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition memory area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. This RTC acquisition information update process updates the hour, minute, and second time information stored in the time information storage unit, and updates the year, month, and day calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on this updated time information.

Following step S1026, the presentation control program performs a look-ahead presentation control process (step S1027). The look-ahead presentation control process executes processing related to the look-ahead presentation based on the presentation command analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, when a special symbol 1 memory look-ahead presentation command or a special symbol 2 memory look-ahead presentation command (hereinafter referred to as a "look-ahead presentation command") is received, settings are made to execute the look-ahead presentation. Details of the look-ahead presentation control process will be described later.

The pre-reading effect command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 when a gaming ball enters the first start gate 2002 or the second start gate 2004. In this embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the pre-reading effect command, a pre-reading effect execution flag is set in the received command analysis process of step S1022. In the pre-reading effect control process, if the pre-reading effect execution flag is set, a decision is made as to whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect based on the content of the pre-reading effect command. In other words, in this embodiment, even if a pre-reading effect command is received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 decides whether or not to actually execute the pre-reading effect.

When a look-ahead effect is executed, the mode of the pending display of the start memory displayed in the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600 is changed to reflect the look-ahead effect (normal look-ahead effect). Furthermore, if a specified condition is met after the normal look-ahead effect is executed, a continuous look-ahead effect is executed, which changes the mode of the pending display each time a start memory for which a variable display is executed first is consumed. The look-ahead effect control process executes processing to execute the normal look-ahead effect, and also determines whether or not to execute a continuous look-ahead effect. The specified condition may be, for example, when the number of unconsumed start memories is equal to or greater than a certain number, or when there is a high expectation that the result of the variable display game based on the start memory to be looked-ahead will be a jackpot.

The content of the pre-reading effects may not only change the display mode of the hold display, but may also include display effects that change the character display or background image, display effects on the door frame side effect display device 460, light-emitting effects such as lamps, audio output from speakers, and effects such as the movement of movable objects.

Following step S1027, the presentation control program performs a lamp data creation process (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the presentation control program reads the game board side light emission data SL-DAT from the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511, based on the light emission data indicated by the pointer among the light emission data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for generating light emission modes, and outputs lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation light emission signals to the multiple LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in Figure 60. The door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is extracted and created from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data memory area 1511cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in Figure 73.

Following step S1028, the presentation control program performs a display data creation process (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the presentation control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and extracts the screen data indicated by the pointer from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511, and outputs it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts character data from the LCD and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and generates one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of drawing data on the built-in VRAM to be displayed on the game board side presentation display device 1600 and the door frame side presentation display device 460.

Following step S1030, the performance control program performs a sound data creation process (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the performance control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and extracts the sound command data indicated by the pointer from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, among the sound command data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the sound generation schedule data, and outputs the sound command data to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When the sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored on the LCD and in the sound control ROM 1512b and controls the built-in sound source, thereby incorporating the sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data and setting the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

Note that during the sound data creation process, the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. 73 is activated each time this sound data creation process is performed (i.e., each time the peripheral control unit performs steady-state processing), and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob of the volume control volume 4140a is converted into 1024-level values ranging from 0 to 1023. In this embodiment, the 1024-level values are divided into seven and managed as board volumes 0 to 6, with board volume 0 being set to mute and board volume 6 being set to maximum volume, with the volume increasing from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the LCD display control unit 1512 is controlled to achieve the volume set for board volumes 0 to 6, and the sound data is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above, causing music and sound effects to be played from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573.

Alert sounds and notification sounds are played without relying on volume adjustments based on the rotation of the knob. The volume can be adjusted from mute to maximum volume by controlling the VDP 1512a, a built-in sound source, of the LCD display control unit 1512 via a program. Unlike the board volume, which is divided into seven levels as described above, the volume adjusted by this program allows for a smooth transition from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if a parlor staff member or other such person turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume low, the music, sound effects, and other sound effects played from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573 will be reduced in volume. However, alert sounds set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or a player is engaging in fraudulent behavior. Therefore, even if the volume of the sound effects is reduced, it is possible to prevent parlor staff and other such persons from being distracted by the alert sounds. Furthermore, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume by rotating the knob, the volume of the advertising sound can be reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects, or the volume of the advertising sound can be increased to make the screen displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 and door frame side performance display device 460 more impressive in addition to the music and sound effects, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a more advantageous gaming state.

Following step S1032, the performance control program performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the performance control program copies and backs up the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 to backup area 1511cb and backup area 2 1511cc, respectively, and also copies and backs up the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and external peripheral control SRAM 1511d to backup area 1511db and backup area 2 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, during the backup process, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the lamp drive board side transmission data memory area 1511caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data memory area 1511cab, the received command memory area 1511cac, and the RTC information acquisition memory area 1511cac are backed up for each frame (1frame) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in Figure 73, i.e., each time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac quickly copies the performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in the memory area 1511cad and the schedule data memory area 1511cae, as performance backup information (1fr) to Bank 1 (1fr) and Bank 2 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb, and also quickly copies it to Bank 3 (1fr) and Bank 4 (1fr) of the second backup area 1511cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by this peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in Figure 73 specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb as a request factor for the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) from the first address to the last address of Bank0 (1fr) are copied consecutively in a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at a time to the backup first area. All data is copied in order from the first address of Bank1 (1fr) in area 1511cb, and then the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa requests the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank2 (1fr) in the first backup area 1511cb. The contents stored from the first address of Bank0 (1fr) to the last address of Bank0 (1fr) are copied in order from the first address of Bank2 (1fr) in the first backup area 1511cb in a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at a time.

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa requests the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank 0 (1fr) to Bank 3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and copies all of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1fr) from the first address to the last address of Bank 0 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc in a predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) at a time, in order from the first address of Bank 3 (1fr), The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa then requests the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank4 (1fr) of the second backup area 1511cc, and copies all of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) from the first address to the last address of Bank0 (1fr) in succession, a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at a time, in order from the first address of Bank4 (1fr) of the second backup area 1511cc.

In addition, during backup processing, for the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac quickly copies the performance information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) that is the backup target, to Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, as performance backup information (SRAM) for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. 73, that is, each time peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, and then the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac quickly copies this to Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc.

To briefly explain how the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 requests the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) from the first address to the last address of Bank0 (SRAM) are copied consecutively in the backup first area by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte). All data is copied in order from the first address of Bank 1 (SRAM) in the backup area 1511db, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa requests the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) to Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup area 1511db. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) from the first address to the last address of Bank 0 (SRAM) are copied in order from the first address of Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup area 1511db in succession, a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at a time.

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa requests the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) to Bank 3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc, and copies all of the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) from the first address to the last address of Bank 0 (SRAM) in succession, a predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) at a time, in order from the first address of Bank 3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa then requests the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) to Bank 4 (SRAM) of the second backup area 1511dc, and copies all of the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) from the first address to the last address of Bank 0 (SRAM) in succession, a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at a time, in order from the first address of Bank 4 (SRAM) of the second backup area 1511dc.

Following step S1034, a WDT clear process is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Following step S1036, the performance control program sets the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG to 0 (step S1038), indicating that the peripheral control unit has completed steady-state processing, and then returns to step S1006, initializes the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG by setting it to 0. The program then repeats the judgment of step S1008 until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described below. In other words, step S1008 waits until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1. If step S1008 determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, it performs steps S1009 through S1038, and then returns to step S1006. In this way, if step S1008 determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, it performs steps S1009 through S1038. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady-state processing."

This peripheral control unit steady-state processing begins with the performance control program setting the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG to a value of 1 in step S1009, indicating that peripheral control unit steady-state processing is currently being executed. Then, in step S1010, the program starts a 1 ms interrupt timer. Then, in step S1012, step S1014, ..., and step S1036, the program finally completes the peripheral control unit steady-state processing by setting the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG to a value of 0 in step S1038, indicating that peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. Peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in step S1008. As mentioned above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described below, which is executed when a V blank signal, indicating that the sound source VDP 1512a is ready to accept screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is input. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps, as described above, so the interval at which a V blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit regular processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[15-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, we will explain the peripheral control unit V blanking signal interrupt process shown in Fig. 72, which is executed when a V blanking signal indicating that the LCD display control unit 1512 is ready to accept screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 is input from the sound source VDP 1512a. When this peripheral control unit V blanking signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to 0 (step S1045), as shown in Fig. 96. As described above, this steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Fig. 95 is being executed, and to 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been executed.

If the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is not set to 0 (is set to 1) in step S1045, meaning that peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, the routine ends. On the other hand, if the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to 0 in step S1045, meaning that peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050), and the routine ends. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag used to determine whether or not peripheral control unit steady-state processing is to be executed, and is set to 1 when peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to 0 when peripheral control unit steady-state processing is not being executed.

In this embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is equal to 0, i.e., whether the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. When the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 in step S1050. This is because, if a V blank signal is input and the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 while the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is determined to be executed in step S1008 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Figure 95, and the currently executing peripheral control unit steady-state processing is forcibly canceled midway and the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is started from the beginning. In order to prevent this, In step S1009 of the initial processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing), the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to 1, thereby informing this routine, the peripheral control unit V blanking signal interrupt processing, that peripheral control unit steady-state processing is currently being executed. Furthermore, in step S1038 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing) in FIG. 95, the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to 0, thereby informing this routine, the peripheral control unit V blanking signal interrupt processing, that peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. Step S1045 of this routine, the peripheral control unit V blanking signal interrupt processing, determines whether the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is 0, i.e., whether peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. In other words, this is the procedure to be taken when peripheral control unit steady-state processing cannot be completed between the input of a V blanking signal and the input of the next V blanking signal, resulting in a so-called processing stall.

As a result, if the current peripheral control unit steady-state processing fails to complete within approximately 33.3 ms and stalls, step S1008 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Figure 95 will determine that the system will wait until the next V blank signal is input. In other words, the time required to execute the current peripheral control unit steady-state processing that stalled will be approximately 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described below, which is executed repeatedly each time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing) in Figure 95, is executed 32 times for each peripheral control unit steady-state processing. However, if the current peripheral control unit steady-state processing stalled as described above exists, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times, not 64 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady-state processing stalls, consistency between the performance progress achieved by the peripheral control unit steady-state processing and the performance progress achieved by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is maintained. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing slows down, the progress of the presentation can be reliably maintained.

[15-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing will be described, which is repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Fig. 95. When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in Fig. 72 determines whether the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33, as shown in Fig. 97 (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is a counter that counts the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in the 1 ms interrupt timer start processing in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Fig. 95 and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side display device 1600 and the door frame side display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). In other words, since the peripheral control unit regular processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed 32 times before the next peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, followed by the second, ..., and 32nd 1 ms timer interrupts.

If the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 in step S1100, i.e., if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is initiated, the routine terminates. If the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs before the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is forcibly canceled in this embodiment, even though the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is given a higher interrupt processing priority than the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. In other words, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs before the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the V blank signal is generated, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing, and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started again when a new 1 ms timer interrupt occurs.

On the other hand, if the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33 in step S1100, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is incremented by a value of 1 (step S1102). By incrementing the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN by a value of 1, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in the 1 ms interrupt timer start processing in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Figure 95, and the number of times this routine, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, has been executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the motors, solenoids, and other electric drive sources of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. 72 are driven in accordance with the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitutes the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data memory area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. The pointer is also updated to the next drive data specified in chronological order, and the pointer is updated each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is performed.

Specifically, the motor and solenoid drive processing involves DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. Here, continuous transmission is performed from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in Figure 73. When continuous transmission from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is started, first, based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data memory area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the performance operation unit 400 is extracted and created from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the transmission data memory area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in Figure 73. The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a then specifies transmission from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as a request cause for the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and transfers and writes the first byte of the door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the top address of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transmission data memory area 1511caf to the transmit buffer register of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. This causes the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor to transfer the written data from the transmit buffer register to the transmit shift register, and begins transmitting the byte of data from the transmit shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK.

Whenever a transmission interrupt request occurs for the serial I/O port for the motor for the frame decoration drive amplifier board, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the trigger is when one byte of data written to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the motor for the frame decoration drive amplifier board is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty after one byte of data is lost), and when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, it transfers the remaining door side motor drive data stored in the transmission data memory area 1511caf for the motor for the frame decoration drive amplifier board. The data STM-DAT is transferred and written one byte at a time to the transmit buffer register of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai. The serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor then transfers the written data from the transmit buffer register to the transmit shift register, and begins transmitting one byte of data from the transmit shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, performing continuous transmission via the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor.

In addition, during motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing is performed to the motor drive board 4180. Here too, continuous transmission is performed via the serial I/O port for the motor drive board using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in Figure 73. When continuous transmission from the serial I/O port for this motor drive board is started, first, based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data memory area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting drive signals to the motors and solenoids for moving the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in Figure 60 is extracted and created from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in Figure 73. The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a then specifies transmission from the motor drive board serial I/O port as a request cause for the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and transfers and writes the first byte of the game board motor drive data SM-DAT stored at the top address of the motor drive board transmission data memory area 1511cag to the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I/O port via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. This causes the motor drive board serial I/O port to transfer the written data from the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and begins transmitting the byte of data from the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the game board motor drive clock signal SM-CLK.

Whenever a transmission interrupt request occurs for the serial I/O port for the motor drive board, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the trigger is when one byte of data written to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty after one byte of data is lost), and when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac reads the remaining game board side motor drive data stored in the motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag. The data SM-DAT is transferred and written one byte at a time to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board via external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai. The serial I/O port for the motor drive board then transfers the written data from the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and begins transmitting one byte of data from the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the game board's motor drive clock signal SM-CLK, performing continuous transmission via the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition processing, history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches provided on the game board 5 (for example, original position history information, movable position history information, etc.) is created by determining whether or not detection signals have been input from the various detection switches, and set in the movable body information acquisition memory area 1511cah of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. The original positions, movable positions, etc. of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be obtained from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in this movable body information acquisition memory area 1511cah.

Following step S1106, a performance operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In this performance operation unit information acquisition process, history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches provided in the performance operation unit 400 is created by determining whether or not detection signals have been input from the various detection switches (for example, operation history information of the operation button 410) and set in the performance operation unit information acquisition memory area 1511cai of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. Whether or not the operation button 410 has been operated can be obtained from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in this performance operation unit information acquisition memory area 1511cai.

Following step S1108, a drawing status information acquisition process is performed (step S1110). In this drawing status information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 shown in Figure 87 is created and set in the drawing status information acquisition memory area 1511cak of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in Figure 73. As described above, the LOCKN signal is output by the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450 to communicate that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal. Specifically, the LOCKN signal is output to request the transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver. The drawing status of the door frame side performance display device 460 can be obtained by obtaining the frequency and occurrence of malfunctions between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the performance display drive board 4450 from the LOCKN signal history information set in the drawing status information acquisition memory area 1511cak.

Following step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine is terminated. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are copied and backed up to the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc, respectively, and the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up to the first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c, each time the 1 ms interrupt timer occurs in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in Figure 73, that is, each time this routine, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data memory area 1511caf, motor drive board side transmission data memory area 1511cag, and movable body information acquisition memory area 1511caf, which are included in Bank 0 (1 ms) that is the backup target, are backed up. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac quickly copies the performance information (1 ms) stored in area 1511cah and performance operation unit information acquisition memory area 1511cai as performance backup information (1 ms) to Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) of backup first area 1511cb, and then quickly copies it to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) of backup second area 1511cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in Figure 73 specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) to Bank 1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511cb as a request factor for the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) from the first address to the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) are copied consecutively in a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at a time to the backup first area. All data is copied in order from the first address of Bank 1 (1 ms) in area 1511cb, and then the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa requests the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) to Bank 2 (1 ms) in the first backup area 1511cb. The contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) through to the contents stored in the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) are copied in order from the first address of Bank 2 (1 ms) in the first backup area 1511cb in succession, a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at a time.

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa requests the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) to Bank 3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc, and copies all of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) from the first address to the last address of Bank 0 (1 ms) in the backup second area 1511cc in a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at a time, in order from the first address of Bank 3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa then requests the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) to Bank 4 (1 ms) of the second backup area 1511cc, and copies all of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) from the first address to the last address of Bank 0 (1 ms) in the second backup area 1511cc in succession, a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at a time, in order from the first address of Bank 4 (1 ms).

In this way, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, various processes related to the performance described above in steps S1104 to S1108 are executed within a period of 1 ms to progress the performance. In contrast, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Figure 95, various processes related to the performance described above in steps S1012 to S1032 are executed within a period of approximately 33.3 ms to progress the performance. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, if the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 in step S1100, i.e., if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is initiated, the routine is terminated. Therefore, even if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs by chance before the next V blank signal, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled, and the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing due to the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is initiated due to the first new 1 ms timer interrupt. In other words, consistency is maintained between the performance progress due to the peripheral control unit regular processing and the performance progress due to the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control. This ensures reliable consistency of performance progress.

As mentioned above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the LCD size of the game board-side display device 1600 and the door frame-side display device 460, and the interval at which the V blank signal is output may also vary slightly depending on the production lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a are implemented. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the occurrence of the next V blank signal, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly, the time lag caused by the slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt.

[15-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in Fig. 72 starts transmitting various commands as serial data from the main control board 1310, it uses this as a trigger to load one byte (8 bits) of main serial data into a receive buffer via the main control board serial I/O port built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and when this loading is complete, an interrupt occurs, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is performed. Each packet of main serial data consists of three bytes, with the first byte assigned to the status, the second byte assigned to the mode, and the third byte assigned to a sum value calculated by treating the status and mode as numerical values.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process begins, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out (step S1200), as shown in FIG. 98. This 1-byte reception period timer sets the period during which 1 byte (8 bits) of information can be received from the main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

If the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, if it is within the period in which 1 byte (8 bits) of main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received, the peripheral control MPU 1511a retrieves the received 1 byte of information from the receive buffer of the main control board serial I/O port (step S1202) and adds (increments) the value of the receive counter SRXC by 1 (step S1204). This receive counter SRXC indicates the number of times data has been retrieved from the receive buffer. If the status, the first byte of the main serial data, is retrieved from the receive buffer, the value becomes 1. If the mode, the second byte of the main serial data, is retrieved from the receive buffer, the value becomes 2. If the sum, the third byte of the main serial data, is retrieved from the receive buffer, the value becomes 3. The receive counter SRXC is initially set to 0 when the power is turned on, etc.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether the receive counter SRXC is at a value of 3, i.e., whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, has been retrieved from the receive buffer (step S1206). This determines whether the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, have been retrieved from the receive buffer in that order.

If the receive counter SRXC is not equal to 3 in step S1206, that is, if the status (the first byte of the main serial data), the mode (the second byte of the main serial data), and the sum value (the third byte of the main serial data) have not yet been retrieved from the receive buffer in that order, a 1-byte receive period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. By setting the 1-byte receive period timer in step S1208, a period is set during which the mode (the second byte of the main serial data) or the sum value (the third byte of the main serial data) can be received.

On the other hand, when the receive counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, when the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, have been retrieved from the receive buffer in that order, the receive counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 (step S1210) and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). This calculation regards the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, which were already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202, as numerical values, and calculates their sum (sum value).

Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value of the third byte of the main loop serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value of the third byte of the main loop serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main loop serial data from the main control board 1310, and therefore should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, pachinko machine 1 receives game balls from the pachinko island equipment, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, electrostatic discharge occurs, generating noise, so pachinko machine 1 is in an environment where it is subject to noise. Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 treats the status assigned as the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main serial data as numerical values, calculates their sum (sum value), and determines whether this calculated sum value matches the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main serial data from the main control board 1310. This allows the peripheral control MPU 1511a to determine whether the main serial data between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 has been affected by noise and changed to incorrect main serial data.

In step S1214, if the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the status assigned to the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode assigned to the second byte of the main serial data are stored in the receive command memory area 1511cac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in Figure 73 (step S1216), and this routine ends. This receive command memory area 1511cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status assigned to the first byte of the main serial data and the mode assigned to the second byte of the main serial data are stored in the peripheral control unit receive ring buffer of the receive command memory area 1511cac. This "peripheral control unit receive ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and beginning of the buffer are connected, and data is stored sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and when the end of the buffer is reached, data is stored again from the beginning. Note that when storing data in the peripheral control unit receive ring buffer in step S1216, the peripheral control MPU 1511a stores the status assigned as the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main serial data in association with each other, and discards the sum value assigned as the third byte.

On the other hand, if the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, if the period in which 1 byte (8 bits) of main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received has been exceeded, or if, in step S1214, the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is terminated.

[15-1-5. Peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, we will explain the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process shown in Figure 75, which is executed when a power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310. When this peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in Figure 72 first starts a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300) and determines whether a power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) has been input (step S1302). If this determination is made that a power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) has not been input, the routine is terminated.

On the other hand, if a power outage warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether 2 microseconds have passed (step S1304). This determination determines whether the timer started in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. If 2 microseconds have not passed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If a power outage warning signal has not been input, the routine ends. However, if a power outage warning signal has been input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have passed. In other words, the determination in step S1304 determines whether a power outage warning signal has been continuously input for 2 microseconds since the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, was started.

If the power outage warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is started in step S1304, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). This power saving processing sequentially turns off the backlights of the game board side display device 1600 and the door frame side display device 460, turns off excitation to the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5, and turns off various LEDs, thereby reducing power consumption of the entire pachinko machine 1 system. This ensures stable operation for the 20 millisecond period during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a can operate even if power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). This command reception standby processing assumes that the main control board 1310 is currently sending various commands, and waits for at least 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a can receive the command being sent. When a command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described above is initiated, and the received command is stored in the received command memory area 1511cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, which is external to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in Figure 73.

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In this command backup processing, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac quickly copies the contents stored in the received command memory area 1511cac included in Bank 0 (1fr) of the backup target work area 1511ca (shown in FIG. 73) to Bank 1 (1fr) and Bank 2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and then quickly copies the contents to Bank 3 (1fr) and Bank 4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in the received command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by this peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in Figure 73 specifies, in the request cause of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, that the contents stored in the received command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) be copied to the received command memory area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the contents stored in the received command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the received command memory area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb are copied consecutively by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at a time from the first address of the received command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the last address of the received command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). The contents stored in the receive command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb are copied in order from the first address, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies in a request from the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac that the contents stored in the receive command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) be copied to the receive command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb. The contents stored in the receive command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the receive command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) are copied in order from the first address to the last address of the receive command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) to the first address of the receive command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb.

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies, in response to a request from the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, that the contents stored in the received command memory area 1511cac contained in Bank0 (1fr) be copied to the received command memory area contained in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and copies all of the contents stored in the received command memory area 1511cac contained in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the received command memory area 1511cac contained in Bank0 (1fr) in order, starting from the first address of the received command memory area contained in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, in succession of a predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) at a time. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa then specifies, in response to a request from the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, that the contents stored in the received command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) be copied to the received command memory area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and copies all of the contents stored in the received command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the received command memory area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in order, starting from the first address of the received command memory area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, in succession of a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at a time.

Following step S1310, it is determined whether a power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) has been input (step S1312). If this determination indicates that a power outage warning signal has been input, a WDT clear process is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

On the other hand, if a power outage warning signal is not input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 to determine whether a power outage warning signal has been input. In other words, the process continues indefinitely to determine whether a power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) has been input. By continuing the determination indefinitely in this manner, if a power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) has not been input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is unable to output a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. However, if a power outage warning signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. Note that when the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 is restarted.

In this way, if step S1312 determines that the input of the power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) continues in the infinite loop, the WDT clear process is executed in step S1314, preventing the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset immediately before the power outage occurs. In contrast, if step S1312 determines that the input of the power outage warning signal does not continue in the infinite loop and is released, the WDT clear process is not executed, and the output of the clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing routine is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs for a period exceeding 2 microseconds, and the judgment in step S1302 is passed, if the judgment in step S1312 is that the input of the power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) does not continue in the infinite loop and is released, the WDT clear processing in step S1314 will not be executed, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a will be reset, so it is possible to respond to such noise by automatically returning to reset.

[15-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation process]
Next, we will explain the LOCKN signal history creation process executed as part of the drawing status information acquisition process in step S1110 of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in Figure 97. In this LOCKN signal history creation process, a history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 shown in Figure 87 is created. As described above, this LOCKN signal is a signal that the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 outputs to inform the user when it determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in Figure 74 is abnormal data. Specifically, this signal is output to request the transmission of a specified data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and receiver.

When the LOCKN signal history creation process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in Figure 72 reads the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST from the drawing status information acquisition memory area 1511cak of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in Figure 73, as shown in Figure 100 (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, where "B" represents a bit), and the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 is stored as LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST in the drawing status information acquisition memory area 1511cak.

Following step S1500, it is determined whether or not a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 (step S1502). This judgment is made when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, and determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, and that a specified data pattern (SYNC pattern) has been requested to be sent for confirming (restoring) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, and determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is not abnormal data (it is normal data), and that a specified data pattern (SYNC pattern) has not been requested to be sent for confirming (restoring) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

If a LOCKN signal is received from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, a shift process for the LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1504). In this shift process for the LOCKN signal detection history information, when a LOCKN signal is received from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, as follows: most significant bit B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1, B1←least significant bit B0.

If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST was shifted in step S1504, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to a value of 1 (step S1506), and this routine ends.

On the other hand, if there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, a shift process for the LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1508). This shift process for the LOCKN signal detection history information is the same as the shift process for the LOCKN signal detection history information in step S1504. If there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, as follows: most significant bit B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1, B1←least significant bit B0.

If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST was shifted in step S1508, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to 0 (step S1510), and this routine ends.

In this way, each time this LOCKN signal history creation process is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, and then the least significant bit B0 is set to a value of 1 or 0, thereby creating a history of LOCKN signals from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0.

[15-1-7. Connection Trouble Determination Process]
Next, a description will be given of the connection failure determination process executed as part of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady-state process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in Fig. 95. In this connection failure determination process, based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 shown in Fig. 87, it is determined whether or not a failure has occurred in the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the connection malfunction determination process is initiated, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in Figure 72 reads the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST from the drawing status information acquisition memory area 1511cak of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in Figure 73, as shown in Figure 101 (step S1520). As described above, this LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450. As described above, this LOCKN signal is a signal that is output by the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450 to communicate that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data; specifically, it is a signal that is output to request the transmission of a specific data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver.

Following step S1520, a determination is made as to whether a LOCKN signal is present from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 (step S1522). This determination is made by determining whether the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. 72, and in this embodiment is "00001111B ("B" represents a bit)," with the most significant four bits B7 to B4 having a value of 0 and the least significant four bits B3 to B0 having a value of 1. Step S1522 determines whether the least significant four bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST match the least significant four bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value.

In step S1522, if the lowest four bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 do not match the lowest four bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation judgment value, it is determined that there is no malfunction in the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver, and this routine is then terminated.

On the other hand, in step S1522, if the lowest four bits B3-B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 match the lowest four bits B3-B0 of the connection confirmation judgment value, it is determined that there is a malfunction between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver, and the communication check counter CC-CNT is incremented by 1 (step S1524). This communication check counter CC-CNT counts up (counts the cumulative number of times) the number of times it has been determined in step S1522 that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and receiver. Furthermore, the communication check counter CC-CNT is set to a value of 0 and reset when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, but is not reset by a momentary or power outage, and is restored to the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT immediately before the moment or power outage when power is restored.

Following step S1524, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is less than the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is less than the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT, it is determined that the cumulative number of times a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver has not reached the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT. Conversely, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not less than (greater than) the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT, it is determined that the cumulative number of times a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver has reached the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT.

If the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is less than the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, if the cumulative number of times it is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver has not reached the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to 0 (step S1528), and this routine is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not less than (greater than) the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, if the cumulative number of times it is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver has reached the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to 1 (step S1530), and this routine is terminated. The communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is a flag that indicates whether the cumulative number of times a malfunction has been determined to exist in the connection between the transmitter and receiver has reached the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT, indicating whether a malfunction has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver. It is set to a value of 1 when a malfunction has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver, and to a value of 0 when the cumulative number of times a malfunction has been determined to exist in the connection between the transmitter and receiver has not reached the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT. Note that while the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 0 and reset when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, it is not reset by a momentary power outage or blackout, and is restored to the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG immediately before the momentary power outage or blackout when power is restored.

[15-1-8. Connection recovery process]
Next, we will explain the connection recovery process executed as one of the warning processes of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady-state process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in Figure 95. This connection recovery process is executed following the connection malfunction determination process shown in Figure 101, and outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and receiver, and also notifies the user when the connection between the transmitter and receiver is abnormal.

When the connection recovery process begins, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 determines whether the screen generation schedule data among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 is currently active (step S1540) during the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit regular process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95, as shown in FIG. 102. This determination determines whether the pointer has been updated to indicate which screen data, from the first screen data, among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the screen generation schedule data should be output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. In other words, during the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the performance is progressing according to the screen generation schedule data, so it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is currently active. However, when the performance has completed according to the screen generation schedule data and all pointer updates have been completed, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is not yet active. This judgment is based on the screen generation schedule data to determine whether the period during which the start-up screen displayed on the game board display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or the period during which the game board display device 1600 is providing a demonstration in a customer waiting state, and if the period during which the start-up screen displayed on the game board display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or the period during which the game board display device 1600 is providing a demonstration in a customer waiting state, the process proceeds to step S1542, which will be described later. However, if the period during which the start-up screen displayed on the game board display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or the period during which the game board display device 1600 is providing a demonstration in a customer waiting state (when the game machine is simply in a customer waiting state) the routine is terminated.

When the performance is progressing according to the screen generation schedule data in step S1540, i.e., when the screen generation schedule data is running, the routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the performance has been completed according to the screen generation schedule data in step S1540 and all pointer updates have been completed, i.e., when the screen generation schedule data has not yet started, the routine determines whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is equal to or greater than 0 (step S1542). As described above, each time the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101 is executed, this communication check counter CC-CNT counts up (counts the cumulative number of times) the determination in step S1522 in the process determines that there is a failure in the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver. This determination is made by determining whether there has been at least one instance where a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver.

If the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S1542, meaning that there has not been a single determination that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver, the routine terminates. On the other hand, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 in step S1542, meaning that there has been at least one determination that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver, the routine determines whether the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, this communication abnormality flag CC-FLG indicates whether the cumulative number of determinations that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver has reached the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT and therefore indicates that a malfunction has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver. The flag is set to 1 when a malfunction has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver, and to 0 when the cumulative number of determinations that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver has not reached the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT.

If the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, if the cumulative number of times a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver has not reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, a SYNC pattern output process is performed (step S1546) and this routine is terminated. In this SYNC pattern output process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510, causing the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 to output a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450. This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is pre-stored in the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and is output to the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, restoring the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver.

On the other hand, if the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S1544, that is, if there is definitely a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and receiver, a communication error display process is performed (step S1548) and this routine is terminated. In this communication error display process, in order to convey that there is definitely a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and receiver, a process of drawing a message is performed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 shown in Figure 60. For example, a message saying "A malfunction has occurred in the door frame side performance display device. Please call a store employee" is displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. In addition, in the communication error display process, during the period when the start-up screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or during the period when the game board side performance display device 1600 is in a waiting state for customers and is performing a demonstration, in order to check whether or not a problem has occurred between the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits LOCKN signal output request data as an operation check request for the door frame side performance display device 460, and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 is output. CSDIC0 outputs a LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data. If this LOCKN signal is not input, it is determined that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and receiver and that there is a problem with the door frame side display device 460. To this effect, an alert image (e.g., "A problem has occurred with the door frame side display device. Please call a store employee.") is displayed in the display area of the game board side display device 1600, and an alert sound (e.g., "A problem has occurred with the door frame side display device.") is repeatedly played from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, it is also possible to light up all of the decorative LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5.

Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in Figure 74 will be explained using the timing chart in Figure 103.

First, to briefly explain the decorative patterns that are displayed in a variable manner in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 shown in Figure 60, the variable display of the decorative patterns is executed by the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 95, and the first special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of a game ball into the first starting hole 2002 shown in Figure 60, or the first special lottery result shown in Figure 60, is executed by the main control side main processing of the main control side power-on processing shown in Figure 93 by the main control side MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in Figure 69, or the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 94, If the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving a gaming ball into the second starting opening 2004 is a "jackpot," the number of times (number of rounds) the opening and closing operation of the large prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. 60 is repeated from round 1 to round 15, for a total of 15 rounds, and in each round, when a predetermined number of gaming balls enter the large prize opening 2005 within a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) and the number of balls enters the large prize opening 2005 (e.g., 9 balls), that round is completed, and each time a gaming ball enters the large prize opening 2005, a predetermined number of gaming balls (e.g., 15 balls) are paid out.

Based on commands from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the LCD display control unit 1512 to start displaying the changing left decorative pattern on the left side of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the middle decorative pattern in the center, and the right decorative pattern on the right side, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the changing display of the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern stops, allowing the player to recognize the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.At this time, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result can also be confirmed from the first special pattern or the second special pattern displayed on the first special pattern display device 1403 or the second special pattern display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in Figure 66. When the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a variably manner, the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern become semi-transparent to an extent that the background image can be seen, and the left decorative pattern is displayed in a variably manner from the upper left to the lower left of the display area, the middle decorative pattern from the upper center to the lower center of the display area, and the right decorative pattern from the upper right to the lower right of the display area, as if the reels are rotating, and when the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a stopped state, the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern become opaque so that the background image at the positions corresponding to the stopped and displayed left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern becomes difficult to see. In this way, the first special pattern or second special pattern that starts to change and then stops on the first special pattern display 1403 or second special pattern display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66 is synchronized with the left decorative pattern, center decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern that starts to change and then stops on the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600.

When the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 receives a command from the main control board 1310 conveying the result of the first special lottery drawn by the acceptance of a gaming ball into the first starting opening 2002, or the result of the second special lottery drawn by the acceptance of a gaming ball into the second starting opening 2004, the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the LCD display control unit 1512 based on this received command, and as shown in FIG. 103, when the display of the left decorative pattern, center decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern begins to change in the display area of the gaming board side performance display device 1600 shown in FIG. 60 (timing K0), in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95, the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data memory area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 is constructed. The pointer is updated to indicate which screen data from the first screen data among the screen data arranged in series is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. In other words, during the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the performance is progressing according to the screen generation schedule data. Therefore, while the screen generation schedule data is running, that is, during the time from when the variable display of the left decorative pattern, center decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern begins until they are stopped, even if the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102 is executed in the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit normal processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95, the routine is forcibly terminated as determined in step S1540 of this connection recovery process.

As a result, during the period from when the display of the left decorative pattern, center decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern begins to change and stops in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, even if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, even if it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 (i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver), the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the connection between the transmitter and receiver is restored. The recovery process is not performed, and the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process is not performed. For example, the message "A problem has occurred with the door frame side display device. Please call a store staff member" is not displayed in the display area of the game board side display device 1600. As a result, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side display receiver ICSDIC0, which indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side display transmitter IC1512d is abnormal, is invalidated, and the door frame side display device 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side display receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side display transmitter IC1512d.

When the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 starts to display the varying left decorative pattern, center decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern and then stops (timing K1), in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95, the performance is completed in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data memory area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and all pointer updates are completed. In other words, in the scheduler update process, the screen generation schedule data is not activated. While the screen generation schedule data is not activated, in the judgment of step S1540 in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102, which is executed as part of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95, the process proceeds to step S1542 in the same process. When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0, that is, when the transmitter and receiver If the number of times that it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and receiver has never been equal to or greater than 0, the routine is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, if there has been at least one determination that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and receiver, the routine proceeds to step S1544. If the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0, that is, if the cumulative number of times that it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and receiver has not reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, the routine proceeds to step S1546, where the SYNC pattern output process described above is performed, and the routine is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not 0 (i.e., is 1), that is, if there is definitely a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and receiver, the routine proceeds to step S1548, where the communication error display process described above is performed, and the routine is terminated. In other words, while the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, if there is a malfunction occurring even once between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and if the cumulative number of times it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, then the SYNC pattern output process is always performed to fix the malfunction between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. While processing is performed to restore the connection, if the cumulative number of times it is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT (in other words, there is definitely a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and receiver), a communication error display process is always performed, and a message such as "A malfunction has occurred in the door frame side display device. Please call a store employee" is displayed in the display area of the game board side display device 1600 to notify the user, and the LOCKN signal from the door frame side display receiver IC SDIC0, which indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side display transmitter IC 1512d, is abnormal, is activated.

During the interval period in which the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 starts to display the varying left decorative pattern, center decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern and then stops displaying them, and the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 starts to display the varying left decorative pattern, center decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern again, the left decorative pattern, center decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern are displayed stopped in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. Therefore, as described above, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, which indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is activated, and if there is a malfunction in the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and receiver, even once, When the cumulative count determined to indicate a malfunction has occurred does not reach the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT, a SYNC pattern output process is always performed to restore the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver. On the other hand, when the cumulative count determined to indicate a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver has reached the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT (i.e., a malfunction has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver), a communication error display process is always performed to, for example, display a message in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 stating, "A malfunction has occurred in the door frame side effect display device. Please call a store employee."

When the variable display of the left decorative pattern, center decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern begins again (timing K2), as described above, because the screen generation schedule data is running, during the time until the left decorative pattern, center decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern are displayed stationary (timing K3), even if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, even if it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 (i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver) even once, the SYNC pattern output processing of step S1546 in the connection recovery processing does not perform the process to restore the connection between the transmitter and receiver, and the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection restoration process is not performed. For example, the message "A problem has occurred with the door frame side display device. Please call a store staff member" is not displayed in the display area of the game board side display device 1600. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side display receiver ICSDIC0, which indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side display transmitter IC1512d is abnormal, is invalidated, and the door frame side display device 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side display receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side display transmitter IC1512d.

In this way, during the interval between when the varying display of the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern starts and stops in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and when the varying display of the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern starts again, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, which indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is abnormal, is enabled, whereas during the interval between when the varying display of the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern starts and stops in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, which indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d is abnormal, is disabled. This is because the information of most interest to the player is the combination of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols displayed in a static fashion in the display area of the game board-side display device 1600, which allows the player to determine whether a jackpot game state that will award the player a profit will occur. Therefore, when the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are displayed in a dynamic fashion in the display area of the game board-side display device 1600, even if the effect image displayed in the display area of the door frame-side display device 460 becomes distorted due to noise or the like and cannot be displayed correctly until the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are displayed in a static fashion, the effect is not interrupted midway and processing is performed to restore it to a state where it can be displayed correctly, but rather the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are displayed in a static fashion in the display area of the game board-side display device 1600, which completes the display of the information that interests the player most.

In this respect, this is significantly different from the case where the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 sends LOCKN signal output request data to the differential circuit 1512e provided on the peripheral control board 1510 during the period when the startup screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or during the period when the machine is waiting for customers and a demonstration is being performed by the game board side performance display device 1600. This LOCKN signal output request data is sent from the peripheral control MPU 1511a during the period when the start-up screen is displayed on the game board side display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and during the period when the game board side display device 1600 is performing a demonstration while the machine is waiting for customers. It is sent as a request to check the operation of the door frame side display device 460 to check whether there is a problem with the connection between the door frame side display transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side display receiver IC SDIC0 on the display drive board 4450, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver.

When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal by the differential circuit 1512e provided on the peripheral control board 1510, as described above, the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal by the differential circuit 1512e are input to the forced switching circuit 1512f provided on the peripheral control board 1510. When the two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal by the differential circuit 1512e are input, the forced switching circuit 1512f connects the circuit to transmit the two signals, and the two signals are sent from the peripheral control board 1510 to the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. When the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided on the performance display drive board 4450 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, it determines that the LOCKN signal output request data is abnormal data because, as described above, the data format of the LOCKN signal output request data is different from that of the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, and outputs a LOCKN signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can determine that there is no problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is no problem with the effect display drive board 4450, while when the LOCKN signal is not input, it determines that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is a problem with the effect display drive board 4450, and controls the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to output an alert image to that effect (for example, ``A problem has occurred with the door frame side effect display device. Please call a store employee.'') to the game board side effect display device 1600, and also controls the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to output an alert sound to that effect (for example, ``A problem has occurred with the door frame side effect display device.'') to the audio data transmission IC 1512c, which causes the alert sound to be played from a speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. This allows notifications to be made using notification images displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and notification sounds that are repeatedly played from speakers or the like installed in the door frame 3. At this time, all of the decorative LEDs installed in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards installed in the game board 5 may be lit.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 sends serial data, which is a LOCKN signal output request data, the forced switching circuit 1512f connects the circuit so that the LOCKN signal output request data can be received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, which receives the LOCKN signal output request data, outputs the LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 to the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a response signal.Therefore, when a LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that there is no problem with the connection between the transmitter and receiver and that there is no problem with the door frame side performance display device 460, whereas when a LOCKN signal is not input, it can be determined that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and receiver and that there is a problem with the door frame side performance display device 460. Furthermore, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that a malfunction has occurred in the door frame-side performance display device 460, it is able to execute the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 102 as an alarm process. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a discovers a malfunction in the door frame-side performance display device 460, it is able to notify hall staff and the like by executing an alarm process. This allows hall staff and the like to very easily check whether a malfunction has occurred in the door frame-side performance display device 460 before the player plays, and the check is not time-consuming. Therefore, malfunctions in the door frame-side performance display device 460 can be discovered without much effort.

As mentioned above, the LOCKN signal is a signal that the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 outputs to inform the user when it determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. Specifically, the LOCKN signal is a signal that is output to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and receiver. Since the LOCKN signal is a signal output to request the transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for transmitting the image from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d, when the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 cannot normally receive the image transmitted from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d, the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 can output a LOCKN signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 to notify that a communication failure has occurred in the image communication between the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 and the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and that the received drawing data is abnormal data. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input outputs a connection confirmation signal to the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d to notify that transmission of the predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 will begin, thereby eliminating the communication failure between the image communications. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is capable of detecting malfunctions in the door frame side display device 460 caused by communication problems during image communication at an early stage and instructing the door frame side display transmitter IC 1512d to resolve the malfunction. Therefore, by detecting and resolving malfunctions in the door frame side display device 460, it is possible to prevent a decline in the player's motivation to play.

Furthermore, when the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, which receives images transmitted from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d and outputs them to the door frame side performance display device 460, is unable to properly receive images transmitted from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d, it is capable of outputting a LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure occurrence signal that indicates a communication failure in the image communication between the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d, to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, which is the performance control microprocessor.The peripheral control MPU 1511a, to which the LOCKN signal is input, controls the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the LCD display control unit 1512 to generate a message stating "A failure has occurred in the door frame side performance display device. Please call a store staff member," which is an image that indicates a communication failure, and this generated image can be displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 to alert the user. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is able to detect malfunctions in the door frame side effect display device 460 caused by communication problems during image communication at an early stage, and alert the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 so that the player can inform a hall staff member, or can directly alert a hall staff member who happens to be passing by the pachinko machine 1, allowing the hall staff member to begin work to resolve the malfunction at an early stage after it occurs. Therefore, by detecting and resolving malfunctions in the door frame side effect display device 460 at an early stage, it is possible to prevent a decline in the player's motivation to play.

Furthermore, if there is a malfunction in the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, i.e., between the transmitter and the receiver, even once during the period (interval period) from timing K1 to timing K2, and the cumulative number of times that it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 is capable of repeatedly outputting a connection confirmation signal to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, indicating that a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for activating the LOCKN signal and eliminating the communication malfunction between the image communications will begin to be transmitted from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, until the cumulative number of times reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can continue to repeatedly output connection confirmation signals only during the period when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is not executing game progress by starting and stopping the first special pattern or second special pattern game on the first special pattern display 1403 or second special pattern display 1405, thereby helping to resolve the communication problem.

Then, during the period (interval period) from timing K1 to timing K2, if there is a malfunction in the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, even once, and if the cumulative number of times that it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 activates the LOCKN signal and sends a connection confirmation signal to inform the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to start transmitting a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 to resolve the communication malfunction between the image communications. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the main control board 1310 starts varying the first special pattern or second special pattern game on the first special pattern display 1403 or the second special pattern display 1405 and restarts the game while the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the main control board 1310 continues to repeatedly output a connection confirmation signal to the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d until the cumulative number of times reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d stops outputting a connection confirmation signal, and when the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d stops sending a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 and can output an image generated by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can move in the direction of resolving the communication malfunction by repeatedly outputting a connection confirmation signal, which is a malfunction resolution signal, only during the period when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has started to vary and stopped the first special symbol or second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and is not executing the game. When the connection confirmation signal is repeatedly output only during the period when the display is stopped and game progress is not being executed, even if the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts varying the first or second special pattern game on the first special pattern display device 1403 or second special pattern display device 1405 and starts game progress again, distortion of the performance (image disturbance) progressing on the display screen of the door frame side performance display device 460 can be eliminated each time the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts and finishes game progress again (each time the period from timing K1 to timing K2 (interval period) occurs).

As such, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a main control board 1310 and a payout control board 951. The main control board 1310 is equipped with a main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game based on whether a game ball launched by the ball launcher 680 toward the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 enters the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, which are start areas provided in the game area 5a. The payout control board 951 is equipped with a payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of game balls by the payout device 830 based on prize ball commands output from the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, is equipped with main control built-in RAM, which is capable of storing information related to games even after power is cut off.

The payout control microprocessor, payout control MPU 952a, is equipped with a payout control built-in RAM, which is capable of storing payout information even after a power outage.

The pachinko machine 1 also has an operation switch 954. When the operation switch 954 is operated within the period from when the power is turned on to when the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 92 is performed, it outputs the RAM clear signal of FIG. 77 to the main control MPU 1310a, which is the game control microprocessor, to erase information about the game stored in the main control built-in RAM, and when it is operated within the period from when the power is turned on to when the payout control unit power-on processing is performed, it outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control microprocessor as a RAM clear signal to erase information about payouts stored in the payout control built-in RAM. It also has a RAM clear function that outputs a signal to the payout control MPU 952a, which is the game control microprocessor, and an error clearing function that, when operated after the period from power-on during which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process in FIG. 92 is performed (or the period from power-on during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed), outputs the RWMCLR signal in FIG. 82 as an error clearing signal to clear an error that has occurred in the payout device 830 to the payout control microprocessor, payout control MPU 952a, without outputting it to the main control MPU 1310a, which is the game control microprocessor.

In this way, when the operation switch 954 is operated within the period from power-on to the period in which the judgment process of step S16 in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 92 is performed, it outputs the RAM clear signal of FIG. 77 to the main control MPU 1310a, which is the game control microprocessor, to erase information about the game stored in the main control built-in RAM, and when it is operated within the period from power-on to the period in which the payout control unit power-on processing is performed, it outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control microprocessor, which is the payout control MPU 952a, as a RAM clear signal to erase information about the payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM. When operated after the period from power-on during which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 92 is performed (or the period from power-on during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed), the RWMCLR signal in FIG. 82 is output to the payout control microprocessor, payout control MPU 952a, as an error release signal for clearing an error that has occurred in the payout device 830, without being output to the main control MPU 1310a, which is the game control microprocessor. Therefore, by operating a single operation switch 954, two different functions, a RAM clear function and an error release function, can be provided in the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to provide a RAM clear function and an error release function while contributing to cost reduction.

The following provides an overview of the control over game progress and presentation in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment.

The main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the entire pachinko machine 1, and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the results of these processes. Furthermore, based on the control signals (control commands) output by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display mode of the game board-side performance display device 1600 (such as decorative patterns, background images, text, characters, and other display images) and the display and operation modes of various components that contribute to the performance (such as the performance operation unit 400 and movable components).

The main control board 1310 performs special symbol process processing each time an interrupt process is performed. In this special symbol process processing, first, first and second start port winning processing is performed. In this first and second start port winning processing, a determination is made as to whether or not a game ball has entered the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, and if a winning entry is determined, processing such as increasing the number of reserved balls on the corresponding special symbol side by 1 is performed.

When the first and second starting port winning processing is complete, if the processing flag is "0", the fluctuation start processing is executed. In this fluctuation start processing, provided that the number of reserved balls is 1 or more, the pending jackpot determination is completed and executed, and the result of this jackpot determination (whether it was a win or a loss, its type, etc.) is stored, after which the processing flag is updated to "1".

On the other hand, when the first and second starting port winning processing is completed, if the processing flag is "1", a variation pattern setting process is executed. This variation pattern setting process determines and sets the variation pattern (such as the time it takes for the special pattern to stop displaying from the start of its variation display until it stops) and the stop pattern (such as a jackpot pattern or a losing pattern) of the special pattern (identification pattern) displayed on the first special pattern display 1403 or second special pattern display 1405 based on the stored jackpot determination result and the current game state, and then updates the processing flag to "2".

On the other hand, when the first and second start port winning processing is completed, if the processing flag is "2", the during-variation processing is executed. In this during-variation processing, the fluctuation time determined and set in the fluctuation pattern setting processing is monitored by a timer, and when the timer times out, the display of the fluctuating special pattern on the first special pattern display 1403 or second special pattern display 1405 is stopped. After this, if the result of the jackpot determination stored in the fluctuation start processing is a jackpot, the processing selection flag is updated to "3", and if the result of the jackpot determination stored in the fluctuation start processing is not a jackpot (a miss), the processing selection flag is updated to "0". In other words, in this case, the next interrupt processing will start over from the fluctuation start processing.

On the other hand, when the first and second starting port winning processing is completed, if the processing flag is "3", the jackpot game processing is executed. In this jackpot game processing, the condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is activated, and the jackpot game mode (e.g., the number of rounds) determined based on the type of jackpot won is set, and the opening and closing operation of the opening/closing member 2005a is controlled based on this. Furthermore, when the jackpot game ends, the operation of the condition device is stopped, and if the type of jackpot won is a special type, the game state flag is updated to indicate that the game is controlled to an advantageous state such as a time-saving state or a probability variable state, and then the processing flag is updated to "0". In other words, in this case, the next interrupt processing will start again from the variable start processing.

It should be noted that multiple types of fluctuation patterns are stored. The fluctuation pattern determines the time from when the special symbol fluctuation starts to when it ends, and by transmitting this information to the peripheral control board 1510, it can also determine the type of presentation pattern that appears on the game board presentation display device 1600. In this embodiment, the multiple types of fluctuation patterns can be classified into a jackpot fluctuation pattern, a miss reach fluctuation pattern, and a miss fluctuation pattern. A jackpot fluctuation is a fluctuation that occurs when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, and the game board presentation display device 1600 executes a presentation in which, after a reach presentation, the decorative symbol fluctuation display finally unfolds to display a confirmed jackpot symbol. A miss reach variation is a variation that occurs when the result of the jackpot determination is a miss and it is determined that a reach will be made in the reach determination based on the reach random number, and the game board side performance display device 1600 executes a performance in which, after the reach performance, the variable display of the decorative pattern is ultimately developed to display a confirmed stop of the missing pattern. A miss variation is a variation that occurs when the result of the jackpot determination is a miss and it is not determined that a reach will be made in the reach determination based on the reach random number, and the game board side performance display device 1600 executes a performance in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is ultimately developed to display a confirmed stop of the missing pattern without going through the reach performance. Furthermore, the variation pattern is specified so that it can be identified as either the variation pattern on the first special pattern side or the second special pattern side. It is also possible to configure the system so that a small win occurs as a result of the big win determination. In this case, a small win variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern, and a variation corresponding to the small win variation pattern is carried out, ultimately resulting in a confirmed stop display of the small win symbol.

The peripheral control board 1510 acquires game information such as the results of jackpot determination from the main control board 1310 and references this information, enabling the game board side performance display device 1600 to display changes in decorative symbols based on the change pattern. Furthermore, based on the acquired game information, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the game board side performance display device 1600 to change the appearance of the performance display (background and pending image) to display information related to the level of expectation, change the appearance (display appearance and operation appearance) of the performance operation unit 400, and operate movable components such as the rear-down movable performance unit 3100.

The peripheral control board 1510 also acquires operation information for the operation buttons 410 and operation information from the player near the center device 2500, and can control the presentation in accordance with this information.

Next, the game control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail. Figure 104 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric device control process (Figure 94: step S114).

Now, assuming that the main control program has transitioned to the special symbol and special electric device control processing (Figure 94: step S114), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes the first start hole passage processing (step S5232), such as obtaining a random number for determining the first jackpot from the random number counter and storing it in the first special symbol reserve memory area of the main control built-in RAM, provided that the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002 is in the on state (ball has entered the first start hole 2002) (YES in step S5231), as shown in Figure 104. Furthermore, if the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 4004 is in the ON state (a ball has entered the second start hole 2004) (YES in step S5233), a second special random number for the second special pattern (random number for determining a second jackpot) is obtained from the random number counter and stored in the second special pattern reserved memory area of the main control's built-in RAM, and a second start hole passing process is executed (step S5234).

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot in progress flag, which indicates that control is being exercised in the jackpot gaming state, is set (step S5235), and if the jackpot in progress flag is set, the jackpot control process (step S5240a) is executed to control the jackpot gaming state.

In the jackpot control process according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
When the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol stops indicates either an "8R guaranteed jackpot A" or an "8R normal jackpot," control is made to an 8R jackpot game state in which the large prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or closed when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the large prize opening 2005, repeating an opening/closing pattern (round game) eight times,
When the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol stops indicates a mode suggesting a "16R guaranteed jackpot," the large prize winning port 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the large prize winning port 2005, and the opening and closing pattern (round play) is repeated 16 times to set the state to a 16R jackpot game mode.
When the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol stops indicates a mode suggesting "8R guaranteed jackpot B," the game is controlled to an 8R jackpot game state in which the large prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or is closed when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the large prize opening 2005, and an opening/closing pattern (round game) is repeated eight times,
- When the result of the judgment process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special pattern stops indicates a mode that suggests a "2R normal jackpot," the game is controlled to a 2R jackpot game state in which the large prize opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds) and then closed, repeating an opening and closing pattern (round play) twice.

In this embodiment, the game area 5a is configured so that either a game ball that passes through the left side of the center device 2500 or a game ball that passes through the right side of the center device 2500 can enter the large prize opening 2005. It is also possible to allow only game balls that pass through the left side of the center device 2500 to enter the large prize opening 2005. Alternatively, it is also possible to allow only game balls that pass through the right side of the center device 2500 to enter the large prize opening 2005.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when time-saving control is being implemented, right-handed hits are more advantageous to the player than left-handed hits, and when time-saving control is not being implemented, left-handed hits are more advantageous to the player than right-handed hits. In the left-handed hit state, even if a jackpot is won as a result of the lottery for the first special symbol in response to the acceptance of a gaming ball into the first starting port 2002, only a maximum of eight rounds of long-term open jackpot gaming state (approximately 1,000 gaming balls can be won) will occur.

In contrast, in the right-hand hitting state, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol in response to the reception of a game ball into the second starting port 2004, there is an approximately 50% probability (allocation rate of winning types) of entering a jackpot game state with a long 16-round open period (approximately 2000 game balls can be won). As a result, the expected number of prize balls that can be won when a jackpot is won is higher, so when the machine is controlled to transition to the right-hand hitting state, it can be expected to win more prize balls than when it is in the left-hand hitting state.

In the jackpot control process, before starting the opening control of the jackpot opening 2005, the process first starts the operation of the condition device, resets the fluctuation count counter (described below), and so on.

In addition, in the jackpot control process, after performing this kind of control to open the jackpot opening 2005, as shown in FIG. 110, the high probability flag and time-saving flag are set according to the type of jackpot that triggered the jackpot game.

The high probability flag is a flag indicating a high probability state and is used in the jackpot determination process shown in Figure 109, which will be described later. It is set when the jackpot gaming state based on a jackpot controlled by a probability variable (8R probability variable jackpot A, 16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot B) ends after the jackpot gaming state ends, and is reset when the next jackpot occurs by the first special pattern stop process shown in Figure 114, which will be described later, or the second special pattern stop process, not shown.

The time-saving flag is a flag that indicates that time-saving control is in progress (low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state). As shown in FIG. 110, it is set when the jackpot gaming state based on a jackpot (8R special jackpot A, 16R special jackpot, 8R special jackpot B) that is subject to time-saving control (high-probability time-saving state) after the jackpot gaming state ends, and is reset when the next jackpot occurs by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114 (described later) or the second special symbol stop process (not shown). Alternatively, it is reset by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114 (described later) or the second special symbol stop process (not shown) when 100 special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) have been displayed without a jackpot being won since the low-probability time-saving state occurred.

The variation count counter indicates the number of times the special symbol has varied since the variation count counter was reset, and is used in the first variation pattern setting process (second variation pattern setting process) shown in FIG. 112, which will be described later. It is updated (e.g., counted up) when a variation of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) occurs, and is reset when a jackpot game state based on at least a specific type of jackpot (16R special jackpot, 8R special jackpot B) begins.

If the big win in progress flag is not set (NO in step S5235), the next step is step S5236, where it is determined whether the small win in progress flag, which indicates that control is being exercised to a small win gaming state, is set. If the small win in progress flag is set, the small win control process (step S5240b) is executed to control the small win gaming state. Note that the small win control process involves opening the big prize opening 2005 for a specific opening time (e.g., 1.8 seconds).

Here, in the small win control process (step S5240b), unlike the big win control process (step S5240a), after the opening control of the big prize opening 2005 is performed, the various setting processes such as the high probability flag, time-saving flag, and time-saving count counter are not performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110(A), a small win is not won in the big win determination.

Also, if the small win in progress flag is not set (NO in step S5236), and the value of the second special reserved number counter, which indicates the number of random numbers for determining a second big win stored in the second special pattern reserved memory area, is "0" (step S5237), a first special pattern process is executed (step S5238), which includes a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special pattern stops.

In contrast, if the value of the second special reserved number counter, which indicates the number of random numbers for determining a second jackpot stored in the second special symbol reserved memory area, is not "0" (step S5237), a second special symbol process is executed (step S5239), including a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol stops. As a result, as long as the game is played so that the lottery for the reserved second special symbol does not run out (as long as the value of the second special reserved number counter is not "0"), only the lottery for the random numbers for determining a second jackpot will be held continuously without interruption, regardless of the reserved status of the lottery for the first special symbol (priority execution).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player can continuously and uninterruptedly perform the lottery (determination process) for the second jackpot determination random number simply by continuing to hit the game ball to the right side of the center device 2500 (right hit) during the time-saving mode (low-probability time-saving mode, high-probability time-saving mode).

Note that the variable display of the second special symbol is not limited to being executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol; for example, the variable display of the special symbol may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winning occurs, and the stored data may be used to determine whether to start the variable display using the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

Figure 105 is a flowchart showing the steps for the first starting port passing process (step S5232).

Now, assuming that in the processing of step S5231, the first start hole sensor 4002 is in the ON state and it is determined that a gaming ball has entered the first start hole 2002, as shown in FIG. 105, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains each random number on the first special symbol side (random number for determining a jackpot, random number for determining a reach, random number for the jackpot symbol, random number for the variable display pattern) from the random number counter as processing of step S5241.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value of the first special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and determines whether the reserved number of first special symbols is its maximum value (upper limit value) of "4" based on this counter value (step S5242). If it is determined in the processing of step S5242 that the reserved number of first special symbols is not its maximum value, the processing of the following steps S5243 to S5245 is performed to set the variable display of the first special symbol (determination processing for the first special symbol) to a new reserved state.

First, in step S5243, the first special reserved number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, in step S5244, each random number obtained in step S5241 is stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area in the main control internal RAM that corresponds to the counter value of the first special reserved number counter.

Next, a first special symbol pre-reading process is executed to execute the pre-reading effect on the first special symbol side, and the process ends (step S5245). As will be described later, the first special symbol pre-reading effect is an effect that suggests the first special symbol's judgment result (or its expected value) in advance before the first special symbol's variable display begins. In this first special symbol pre-reading process, the peripheral control board 1510 generates information required to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect and the content of the effect (e.g., information regarding the result of the pre-reading determination, information regarding the symbol type for the pre-reading determination, information regarding the variable pattern number for the pre-reading determination, etc.), and stores this information in a corresponding memory area as transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, instead of the first special symbol's judgment result itself, information regarding the special symbol's stopped symbol as information suggesting the type of jackpot game may be included in the command. For example, information prior to the final determination stage, such as the SP reach group, normal reach group, or the potential hit group or small hit group among the variable patterns, may be transmitted as a pre-reading command.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5242 that the number of reserved first special symbols is at its maximum value, the display of the variable first special symbol will not be newly reserved. In other words, by ending the process without executing steps S5243 to S5245, the display of the variable first special symbol will not be newly reserved.

Figure 106 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S5234).

Now, assuming that the second start hole sensor 4004 is in the ON state and it is determined that a gaming ball has entered the second start hole 2004 in the processing of step S5233, as shown in FIG. 106, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains each random number on the second special symbol side (random number for second jackpot determination, random number for second reach determination, random number for second jackpot symbol, random number for second variable display pattern) from the random number counter as processing of step S5251.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 then obtains the counter value of the second special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and determines whether the reserved number of second special symbols is its maximum value of "4" based on this counter value (step S5252). If it is determined in the processing of step S5252 that the reserved number of second special symbols is not its maximum value, the processing of the following steps S5253 to S5255 is performed to newly place the variable display control of the second special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) on hold.

First, in step S5253, the second special reserved number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, in step S5254, each random number obtained in step S5251 is stored in a second special symbol reserved memory area in the main control internal RAM that corresponds to the counter value of the second special reserved number counter.

Next, a second special symbol pre-reading process is executed to execute the pre-reading effect on the second special symbol side, and the process ends (step S5255). As will be described later, the pre-reading effect on the second special symbol side is an effect that suggests the judgment result (or its expected value) of the second special symbol before the variable display of the second special symbol begins. In this second special symbol pre-reading process, the peripheral control board 1510 generates information (such as win/loss information, symbol type, variable pattern number) required to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect and the content of the effect, and stores this in a corresponding memory area as information to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, instead of the judgment result of the second special symbol itself, information regarding the stopped symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of jackpot game may be included in the command. For example, information at a stage before the final decision is made, such as the SP reach group, normal reach group among variable patterns, or the potential hit group and small hit group among symbol types, may be sent as a pre-reading command.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5252 that the number of reserved second special symbols is at its maximum value, control of the variable display of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. In other words, by ending the process without executing steps S5253 to S5255, control of the variable display of the second special symbol is not newly reserved.

When the number of reserved first special symbols changes based on a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 2002, a command specifying the number of reserved first special symbols (first reserved number designation command 0-4) is set in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) and sent to the peripheral control board 1510. When the number of reserved second special symbols changes based on a gaming ball entering the second starting hole 2004, a command specifying the number of reserved second special symbols (second reserved number designation command 0-4) is set in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) and sent to the peripheral control board 1510.

Figure 107 is a flowchart showing the steps for the first special symbol process (step S5238). Note that the first special symbol process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric device control process and the second special symbol process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric device control process are similar program modules, and only the random numbers and tables used for judgment are different. Therefore, only the first special symbol process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric device control process will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five processes is selectively executed depending on the first special symbol process flag.

1. First special symbol normal processing (step S5280) reads the jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the main control's built-in RAM, and performs a lottery based on the read jackpot determination random number to determine the display mode of the first special symbol when the variable control of the first special symbol is stopped.

2. First Special Symbol Stop Pattern Setting Process (Step S5281) determines the display mode of the first special symbol when the control of the first special symbol is stopped based on the results of the determination process regarding the display mode when the control of the first special symbol is stopped.

3. First variation pattern setting process (step S5282) performs a lottery process to determine the variation of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 1403 based on the variation display pattern random number, and the variation of the effect display executed in response to the special symbol on the effect display device (gameboard-side effect display device) 1600.

4. First special symbol change processing (step S5283) that waits until the first special symbol display 1403 stops changing.

5. First special symbol stop processing (step S5284) stops the display of the first special symbol so that the display mode of the first special symbol when the control of the first special symbol is stopped is displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 based on the results of the determination processing regarding the display mode when the control of the first special symbol is stopped.

The initial value of the first special symbol process flag is set to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S5280) should be performed.

Figure 108 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S5280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that normal processing of the first special symbol should be performed, as shown in FIG. 108, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines, in step S5301, whether there is a display change of the reserved first special symbol based on the counter value of the first special reserved number counter. If it is determined that there is a display change of the reserved first special symbol, then, in step S5302, the random number stored in the earliest memory area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area of the main control built-in RAM (e.g., the random number for determining a first jackpot, the random number for determining a first reach, the random number for the first jackpot symbol, the random number for the first variable display pattern) is read from the main control built-in RAM. Next, in steps S5303 and S5304, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and random numbers related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol stops (e.g., first jackpot determination random number, first reach determination random number, first jackpot symbol random number, first variable display pattern random number) stored in each memory area of the first special symbol reserved memory area of the main control built-in RAM are shifted in a first-in, first-out manner.

Specifically, the first special symbol reserve memory area has four memory areas (first special symbol reserve memory area a through first special symbol reserve memory area d), and random numbers extracted in response to a start winning at the first start gate 2002 are stored in the first (earliest) memory area, starting with the first (earliest) memory area. When a start winning occurs while a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1-3) memory area, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1th (n = 1-3) memory area. When the start condition for the variable display based on the random number stored in the first memory area is met, the various random numbers stored in the first memory area are read out, and the various random numbers stored in the Nth (N = 2-4) memory area are moved to the N-1th (N = 2-4) memory area. This allows the order in which the first special symbol variable display reservations occurred to be stored in a specific order, and the variable display reservations are released in order, starting with the earliest reservation (the reservation that occurred earliest). Similarly, the second special symbol reserve memory area has four memory areas (second special symbol reserve memory area a through second special symbol reserve memory area d), and random numbers extracted in response to a start winning at the second start port 2004 are stored in order, starting with the first (earliest) area. When a start winning occurs while a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) memory area, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1th (n = 1 to 3) memory area. When the start condition for the variable display based on the random number stored in the first memory area is met, the various random numbers stored in the first memory area are read out, and the various random numbers stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) memory area are moved to the N-1th (N = 2 to 4) memory area. This allows the order in which the second special symbol variable display reservations occurred to be stored in a specific order, and the variable display reservations are released in order, starting with the earliest reservation (the reservation that occurred earliest).

Then, in step S5305, a jackpot determination process is performed, which determines whether or not a jackpot has occurred based on the first jackpot determination random number read out above. This process then ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S5306) so that the process transitions to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281).

Figure 109 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S5305).

If the current game state is a high probability state (high probability time-saving state, high probability non-time-saving state) (step S5311), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects the high probability jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 110(A) (step S5312), and if the current game state is a low probability state (step S5311), it selects the low probability jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 110(A) (step S5313), and compares the selected jackpot determination table with the jackpot determination random number read in step S5302 of the first special pattern normal processing (step S5314).

As shown in Figure 110 (A), the jackpot determination table is stored in the main control's built-in ROM and includes a low-probability jackpot determination table for each type of special random number (first jackpot determination random number, second jackpot determination random number) used when the game state is low probability (low-probability non-time-saving state, low-probability time-saving state), and a high-probability jackpot determination table used when the game state is high probability (high-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state). In the low-probability jackpot determination table, which is referenced for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number, the first jackpot determination random numbers (65,536 types) are associated with each other so that the 204 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating a jackpot, and the 65,332 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the miss determination value indicating a miss (low-probability jackpot probability: approximately 1 in 321). In contrast, in the low probability jackpot determination table that is referenced for comparison with the second special pattern jackpot determination random number (second jackpot determination random number) within the second special pattern process executed in step S5239 of the special pattern and special electric device control process, 204 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with the jackpot determination value indicating a jackpot, and 65,332 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with the miss determination value indicating a miss (low probability jackpot; approximately 1 in 321).

In addition, in the high-probability jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the first jackpot determination random numbers, the 2040 types of first jackpot determination random numbers are associated with the jackpot determination value, and the 63,496 types of first jackpot determination random numbers are associated with the miss determination value (jackpot probability during high probability: approximately 1 in 32). In contrast, in the high-probability jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the second jackpot determination random numbers in the second special symbol process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric device control processing, the 2040 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with the jackpot determination value indicating a jackpot, and the 63,496 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with the miss determination value indicating a miss (jackpot probability during high probability: approximately 1 in 32). The jackpot determination values set in the jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number and the jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number may be different (the number of jackpot determination values may be the same but the jackpot determination values may be different (the jackpot probability is the same), or the number of jackpot determination values may be different (the jackpot probability is different)). In this case, it is sufficient to make the jackpot determination values of at least one of the low probability jackpot determination table and the high probability jackpot determination table different (both may be different).

If the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that a jackpot has occurred as a result of comparing the selected jackpot determination table with the jackpot determination random number read in step S5302 of the first special pattern normal processing, it sets a jackpot flag indicating that the variation has resulted in a jackpot (step S5316) and terminates the jackpot determination process.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step S5315 above that the jackpot has not been won, a determination is made based on the selected jackpot determination table as to whether the read-out jackpot determination random number matches the small jackpot determination value, which indicates that a small jackpot has been won (step S5317). However, as mentioned above, in step S5302 of the first special pattern normal processing (second special pattern process processing) in this example, a jackpot determination random number that matches the small jackpot determination value is not read out (small jackpot probability: 0 in 65,536), so in this step S5317 it is determined that the small jackpot has not been won (determined as a miss).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5317 that the win is a miss, the reach determination table is compared with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control's built-in ROM and includes a reach determination table for a high-probability, non-time-saving state that is used when the game state is a high-probability, non-time-saving state, a reach determination table for a high-probability, time-saving state that is used when the game state is a high-probability, time-saving state, and a reach determination table for a low-probability state that is used when the game state is a low-probability state (low-probability, non-time-saving state).

Here, in the reach determination table for the high-probability time-saving state, one type of reach determination random number matches a reach determination value indicating a reach, and 71 types of reach determination random numbers are associated with reach determination values indicating a reach is not reached. However, in the reach determination table for the high-probability time-saving state, in order to maximize the speed at which games progress when in the time-saving state, all 72 types of reach determination random numbers may be made to match reach determination values indicating a reach is not reached, and none may match reach determination values indicating a reach is reached.

Furthermore, in the reach determination table for the low probability state, five types of reach determination random numbers, including the same reach determination random numbers as those set in the reach determination table for the high probability time-saving state, are associated with reach determination values indicating a reach has occurred, and 67 types of reach determination random numbers are associated with reach determination values indicating a reach has not occurred. Thus, in this embodiment, in the low probability state, the reach determination value indicating a reach has occurred is higher than in the high probability time-saving state, and is obtained with a predetermined probability.

Furthermore, in the reach determination table for the high-probability non-time-save state, five types of reach determination random numbers, including the same reach determination random numbers as those set in the reach determination tables for the high-probability time-save state and the low-probability state, are associated with reach determination values that indicate a reach has occurred, and 67 types of reach determination random numbers are associated with reach determination values that indicate a reach has not occurred. In this way, in this embodiment, in the high-probability non-time-save state, the reach determination value that indicates a reach has occurred is the same as in the low-probability non-time-save state.

If the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319) and determines that the reach is missed (YES in step S5320), it sets a reach flag indicating that the change is a reach and ends processing (step S5321).

Figure 111 is a flowchart showing the steps for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 111, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol stops, i.e., the result of the jackpot determination process (step S5305) described above. The result of the lottery process is determined by determining whether the jackpot flag is set (step S5331).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a selects the pattern determination table shown in FIG. 110(B) and compares the random number for the first jackpot pattern read in step S5302 of the normal processing of the first special pattern with the selected pattern determination table to determine the jackpot pattern as the state when the variable control of the first special pattern stops (the stopping pattern of the first special pattern) (step S5332).

As shown in Figure 110(B), the symbol determination table for the first special symbol stores random numbers for the first jackpot symbol (here, a total of 200 random numbers for the first jackpot symbol) associated with the respective judgment results (8R special jackpot A, 8R regular jackpot). As shown in Figure 110(C), the symbol determination table for the second special symbol stores random numbers for the second jackpot symbol (here, a total of 200 random numbers for the second jackpot symbol) associated with the respective judgment results (16R special jackpot, 8R special jackpot B, 2R regular jackpot).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by identifying the judgment result associated with the acquired random number for the jackpot symbol. In this example, the symbol determination table is set so that the type of jackpot determined based on the random number for the first jackpot symbol is different from the type of jackpot determined based on the random number for the second jackpot symbol. More specifically, the allocation rate (allocation) between a special jackpot, which triggers a transition to a high-probability state, and a regular jackpot, which does not trigger a transition to a high-probability state, is the same, but the expected value of game balls that can be obtained from a jackpot determined based on the random number for the second jackpot symbol is greater than the expected value of game balls that can be obtained from a jackpot determined based on the random number for the first jackpot symbol.

The specific gameplay and presentation details for each type of jackpot are briefly summarized below.

1. After a jackpot symbol combination appears on the game board display device 1600, the large prize opening 2005 is opened for a long period of time (e.g., 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the large prize opening 2005. This closes the opening and closing pattern (round play) eight times, controlling the game to an 8R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easy) for a game ball to enter the large prize opening 2005. After this 8R jackpot game state, the game is controlled to a high-probability time-saving state until the next jackpot game state occurs. During the 8R jackpot game state, a battle effect (battle victory effect) is played in which a specific character wins. The game board display device 1600 displays a relatively advantageous state in the high-probability time-saving state. 8R Probable Jackpot A.

2. After a jackpot symbol combination appears on the game board display device 1600, the large prize opening 2005 is opened for a long period of time (e.g., 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the large prize opening 2005. This repeats an open/close pattern (round play) eight times to control the game to an 8R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easy) for a game ball to enter the large prize opening 2005. After this 8R jackpot game state, the game is controlled to a low-probability time-saving state until the special symbol fluctuation display is consumed 100 times (or until a jackpot is won within the period until 100 times are consumed). During the 8R jackpot game state, a battle effect (battle defeat effect) is played in which a specific character is defeated. In the low-probability time-saving state, the game is controlled to a display mode indicated on the game board display device 1600 to indicate that the game is in a relatively unfavorable state. 8R normal jackpot

3. After a jackpot symbol combination appears on the game board display device 1600, the large prize slot 2005 is opened for a long period of time (e.g., 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the large prize slot 2005. This closes the opening and closing pattern (round play) 16 times, controlling the game to a 16R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easy) for a game ball to enter the large prize slot 2005. After this 16R jackpot game state, the game is controlled to a high-probability time-saving state until the next jackpot game state occurs. During the 16R jackpot game state, an additional challenge effect is performed in which an effect (success effect) is displayed to indicate whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 (or becomes 16). After a predetermined period of time has passed since the high-probability time-saving state was entered, the game board display device 1600 is controlled to a relatively favorable state. 16R Probable Jackpot

4. After a jackpot symbol combination appears on the game board display device 1600, the large prize slot 2005 is opened for a long period of time (e.g., 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the large prize slot 2005. This closes the opening and closing pattern (round play) eight times, controlling the game to an 8R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easy) for the game ball to enter the large prize slot 2005. After this 8R jackpot game state, the game is controlled to a high-probability time-saving state until the next jackpot game state occurs. During the 8R jackpot game state, an additional challenge effect is performed in which an effect (failure effect) is displayed to determine whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 (whether it becomes 16 rounds). After a predetermined period of time has passed since the high-probability time-saving state was entered, the game board display device 1600 is controlled to a relatively favorable state, indicating an 8R probability jackpot B effect.

5. After a jackpot symbol combination appears on the game board display device 1600, the large prize opening 2005 is opened for a short time (e.g., 0.6 seconds) or closed when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the large prize opening 2005. This repeats an open/close pattern (round play) twice to control the game into a 2R jackpot game state, making it difficult for game balls to enter the large prize opening 2005. After this 2R jackpot game state, the game is controlled into a low-probability time-saving state until the special symbol fluctuation display is consumed 100 times (or until a jackpot is won within the period until 100 times are consumed). During the 2R jackpot game state, a battle effect (battle defeat effect) is played in which a specific character is defeated. In the low-probability time-saving state, the game is controlled into a display mode indicated on the game board display device 1600 to indicate that the player is in a relatively unfavorable state. 2R normal jackpot

In addition, when the player is hitting from the left, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the movable piece 2004a, which opens the second starting port 2004, is not driven. Therefore, when the player is hitting from the left, the game ball does not enter the second starting port 2004, and only the game ball enters the first starting port 2002. Unless there is a reserved ball with the second special pattern, only the variable display of the first special pattern on the first special pattern display 1403 is executed, and a jackpot related to the first special pattern (8R special jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot) occurs. Similarly, when the player is hitting from the right, the game ball does not enter the first starting port 2002. Therefore, in the right-hand hitting state, only the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 2004 will occur, and unless there is a reserved ball with the first special pattern, only the variable display of the second special pattern will be executed on the second special pattern display 1405, resulting in a jackpot related to the second special pattern (16R special jackpot, 8R special jackpot B, 2R regular jackpot).

Furthermore, in a jackpot associated with the first special symbol, the opening and closing pattern that keeps the large prize opening 2005 open for a maximum long period of time (e.g., 28.5 seconds) is repeated eight times, and approximately 1,000 game balls are paid out, whereas in a jackpot associated with the second special symbol, the opening and closing pattern that keeps the large prize opening 2005 open for a maximum long period of time (e.g., 28.5 seconds) is repeated 16 times, and approximately 2,000 game balls can be paid out.

In addition, if an 8R special jackpot A is determined in the first special symbol stopping symbol setting process, the jackpot symbol will be the 8R special jackpot A symbol, and if an 8R regular jackpot is determined, the jackpot symbol will be the 8R regular jackpot symbol. Also, although not shown, if a 16R special jackpot is determined in the second special symbol stopping symbol setting process, the jackpot symbol will be the 16R special jackpot symbol, if an 8R special jackpot B is determined, the jackpot symbol will be the 8R special jackpot B symbol, and if a 2R regular jackpot is determined, the jackpot symbol will be the 2R regular jackpot symbol.

Furthermore, if the big win flag is not set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 next determines whether the small win flag is set in step S5333. If the small win flag is set in the processing corresponding to step S5333 in the second special symbol process processing (step S5239), the small win symbol (unique symbol stop pattern) is determined as the pattern when the second special symbol stops changing (step S5334), and then the process proceeds to step S5337.

Furthermore, if the small win flag is not set in step S5333, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the pattern when the special pattern stops changing to be a losing pattern (step S5336), and then proceeds to step S5337.

After the process for determining the stopping symbols has been carried out in this manner, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a determination result notification command corresponding to each of the lottery results in step S5337 so that the lottery results (type of big win, small win, reach miss, or miss) are sent to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, in step S5338, the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process transitions to the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282), at which point this process ends. It is also possible to set a command that indicates the type of stopping symbol for the first special symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the decorative patterns on the game board side performance display device 1600 to change and then stop based on the received judgment result notification command and variation pattern command. Specifically, the left, center, and right decorative patterns are displayed in a changing manner, and then stopped in the order of left decorative pattern, right decorative pattern, and center decorative pattern. The left, center, and right decorative patterns may be displayed in a synchronized manner as the same pattern and stopped at the same time. If a jackpot other than a 2R normal jackpot is won, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines a combination of three decorative patterns on the left, center, and right. In contrast, if a 2R normal jackpot is won, a specific pattern combination (a combination in which at least one of the left, center, and right decorative patterns is different from the other patterns) is determined. Furthermore, if a reach miss is identified, a miss pattern accompanied by a reach (a combination of the same left and right decorative patterns between "0" and "9" but with a different center decorative pattern; a reach miss pattern) is determined, and if a miss is identified, a miss pattern not accompanied by a reach (a combination in which at least the left and right decorative patterns are different from each other) is determined. The stopped patterns thus determined are displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (when the game performance ends).

In any case, when a win is obtained as a result of the progress of play, the peripheral control MPU 1511a displays a winning display (special display mode) before the jackpot play begins, and displays a display during the jackpot play after the jackpot play begins.

Figure 112 is a flowchart showing the steps for the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 112, if the jackpot flag is set (step S5341), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects a variation pattern table for a jackpot (not shown) corresponding to the type of jackpot determined in step S5332 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5342); if the small jackpot flag is set (step S5343), it selects a variation pattern table for a small jackpot (not shown) (step S5344); if the reach flag is set (step S5345), it selects a variation pattern table for a reach (not shown) (step S5346); and if none of the jackpot flag, small jackpot flag, or reach flag is set, i.e., if it is a normal miss (a miss where a reach effect is not executed), it selects a variation pattern table for a miss (not shown) (step S5347).

Then, the selected variation pattern table is compared with the random number for the variation display pattern read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing to determine the variation pattern to be executed (step S5348), and a variation pattern command is set to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the determined variation pattern will be initiated, thereby initiating the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 1403 (step S5349). The main control MPU 1310a also sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the variation timer (step S5350). This processing is then terminated when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S5355) to transition the process to the first special symbol variation processing (step S5283). As a result, the first special symbol variation display control is performed on the first special symbol display device 1403 for the determined variation time, and the game board-side effect display device 1600 controls the effects in synchronization with the special symbol variation display.

Fluctuating pattern tables are provided in multiple types for each determination result based on the random numbers for jackpot determination (first jackpot determination random number, second jackpot determination random number) and the random numbers for jackpot symbols (first jackpot determination random number, second jackpot pattern random number). Furthermore, the fluctuation patterns set in each fluctuation pattern table are stored with multiple fluctuation time information indicating the predetermined time (fluctuation time) required for variable display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in association with the random numbers for the first variable display pattern. The main control MPU 1310a compares the selected fluctuation pattern table from multiple types of fluctuation pattern tables corresponding to the determination results based on the random numbers for jackpot determination and the random numbers for the jackpot symbol with the random numbers for the variable display pattern read in step S5302 of the normal processing of the first special symbol, and obtains the fluctuation time information associated with the read random numbers for the variable display pattern from this table to determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). This allows the process to determine the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). The variation pattern table is stored in the main control's built-in ROM.

However, as mentioned above, in this example, a small win will not be won, so the fluctuation pattern table for small wins is not used. In this example, a small win will not be won, but it may be possible to win a small win.

In addition, the variable display pattern table for reach in this example is set up to determine the type of reach effect to be executed by comparing a judgment value indicating which reach effect to execute with the random number for the variable display pattern. For example, in the non-time-saving mode, 164 of the 241 types of random numbers for variable display patterns are set as judgment values (0-163) indicating the execution of one of the normal reach effects, 59 types of random numbers for variable display patterns are set as judgment values (164-222) indicating the execution of one of the super reach effects with low jackpot expectations, and 18 types of random numbers for variable display patterns are set as judgment values (223-240) indicating the execution of one of the super reach effects with high jackpot expectations.

The Super Reach effect (SP effect) has a higher probability of winning than the Normal Reach effect, and for players hoping for a jackpot game state, the player's expectations for a jackpot game state increase when the Super Reach effect is executed. In other words, this type of Super Reach effect has the highest selection rate in the jackpot variation pattern table, which makes it possible to increase the player's expectations for a jackpot game state even if a miss is ultimately displayed. In reality, however, to sufficiently increase the player's expectations for a jackpot game state, it is necessary for a high-expectation preview effect, which is drawn separately from the variation pattern, to appear (combined) during the period in which the Super Reach effect is being executed.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern table for when a loss occurs, which is provided in correspondence with the random number for determining a first jackpot and the random number for the first jackpot symbol and is used to determine the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, has a fluctuation time of 12 seconds set common to both the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state. On the other hand, the fluctuation pattern table for when a loss occurs, which is provided in correspondence with the random number for determining a second jackpot and the second symbol random number and is used to determine the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, allows a fluctuation time of 0.1 to 12 seconds to be set for the time-saving state, and sets a fluctuation time of 12 seconds for the non-time-saving state. In this way, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is the same during both the time-saving state and the non-time-saving state, and while the first special symbol is fluctuating in the time-saving state, the game ball is encouraged to enter the second start hole 2004 and time is secured for the player to enter the game ball into the second start hole 2004.

In addition, if 0.1 seconds is selected as the variable time when the second special symbol is a miss, it will be possible to prevent each game ball that is shot into the game area 5a at 0.6 second intervals in a time-saving state (such as a high-probability time-saving state) from being discharged without being subjected to the lottery process.

In other words, a gaming ball hit to the right is supplied to the area directly above gate 2003. When a gaming ball is received from this area by gate 2003 during a time-saving mode (high-probability time-saving mode, low-probability time-saving mode), a win for a normal symbol is obtained (e.g., a 100% probability of winning), and movable piece 2004a, which opens and closes second starting opening 2004, is maintained in the open state for a long period (5.5 seconds in this example). This enables control to be implemented so that, even in a situation where balls can be received successively by second starting opening 2004 (a time-saving mode in which substantially all gaming balls hit to the right of center device 2500 can be received by second starting opening 2004), each time a gaming ball is received, the lottery draws for the second special symbol are completed one after another with a high probability of winning (probability in a high-probability mode) of roughly 1 in 32.

In this example, since game balls are launched at 0.6 second intervals while the player is operating the handle 302, game balls are often received by the second starting port 2004 at 0.6 second intervals in a time-saving state (such as a high-probability time-saving state). In this regard, as described above, in this example, the variation pattern table for when the second special symbol is lost based on a game ball entering the second starting port 2004 can be set to an extremely short variation time of 0.1 seconds in a time-saving state (such as a high-probability time-saving state). In other words, in this case, when a loss is obtained, the symbol variation ends in just 0.1 seconds, which is less than the interval between game ball launches (0.6 seconds). Therefore, even in a situation where game balls launched at 0.6 second intervals are received one after another by the second starting port 2004, the game balls are prevented from being discharged without being subjected to the lottery process.

Figure 113 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol change processing (step S5283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol fluctuation processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 113, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, in step S5371, subtracts 1 from the fluctuation timer, which is set with the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the fluctuation pattern lottery processing (step S5282). As a result, if the fluctuation time timer reaches 0, i.e., it is determined that the above-mentioned lottery-determined fluctuation time has elapsed (step S5372), the process proceeds to step S5373. In other words, in step S5373, the first special symbol process flag is updated to transition to the first special symbol stop processing (step S5284), and the process ends.

If the variable time timer has not reached 0 despite the variable time timer being decremented by 1 (step S5371), steps S5371 and S5372 will be repeated each time the timer interrupt process is performed until the variable time timer reaches 0 (until the time to stop the symbol from being fixed).

Figure 114 is a flowchart showing the steps for the first special symbol stop processing (step S5284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 114, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs display control to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing on the first special symbol display device 1403 in step S5381, and sets a stop display command to the peripheral control board 1510 instructing the game board side performance display device 1600 to display the derived display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol (step S5382).

When the jackpot flag is set (YES in step S5386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating the start of the jackpot gaming state (step S5387), sets the waiting time until the start of the jackpot gaming state (the time during which a message indicating the start of the jackpot gaming state is displayed, etc.) in the interval timer (step S5388). Then, the main control MPU 1310a sets a jackpot in progress flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is in progress, resets the high probability flag if set, and resets the time-saving flag if set (step S5389). It also resets the fluctuation counter and updates the first special symbol process flag to its initial value, which is to transition to the first special symbol normal processing, at which point the process ends (step S5394). In other words, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, the processing in step S5235 above will determine that the jackpot execution flag has been set, and the jackpot game state will be executed in the jackpot control processing (step S5240a) described above.

The jackpot start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually for each type of jackpot. In step S5387, a jackpot start command (8R special jackpot A command, 8R normal jackpot command, 16R special jackpot command, 8R special jackpot B command, 2R normal jackpot command) corresponding to the type of jackpot (8R special jackpot A command, 8R normal jackpot command, 16R special jackpot command, 8R special jackpot B command, 2R normal jackpot command) is set. As a result, the jackpot game state effects (battle effects or additional challenge effects) corresponding to the type of jackpot indicated by the jackpot start command are executed by the game board effect display device 1600, the lamps, LEDs, speakers, etc.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of step S5386 above that the jackpot flag is not set (NO in step S5386), it is first determined whether or not the game is in the low-probability time-saving mode (step S5390). If the game is in the low-probability time-saving mode, it is determined whether or not the number of special symbol changes that have occurred since the game was switched to the low-probability time-saving mode has reached a predetermined upper limit (100 in this case) (step S5391). In other words, when the number of special symbol changes that have occurred since the game was switched to the low-probability time-saving mode has reached the predetermined upper limit (100), it is determined that the conditions for terminating the low-probability time-saving mode have been met, and the time-saving function is stopped, causing a transition to the normal game mode (low-probability non-time-saving game mode) (step S5392).

After the time-saving function is processed, the system determines whether the small win flag is set (step S5393). If the small win flag is set (YES in step S5393), a small win start command is set (step S5394), indicating the start of the small win game state. The interval timer is set to the waiting time until the start of the small win game state (the time during which a message indicating the start of the small win game state is displayed) (step S5395). The system then sets a small win in-progress flag (step S5396), indicating that the small win game state is in progress. The first special symbol process flag is updated to its initial value, i.e., the first special symbol normal process (step S5394), and the system terminates this process. In other words, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, the system determines that the small win in-progress flag is set in the process of step S5236, and the small win game state is executed in the small win control process (step S5240b) described above. Unlike when a big win is won, the game state does not change when this small win game state is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the big win flag nor the small win flag is set (NO in step S5393), it is considered a miss, and no processing related to the big win or small win is performed. The first special symbol process flag is updated to its initial value, which is to transition to the normal processing of the first special symbol (step S5394), and this processing ends. In other words, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it will be determined that the big win in progress flag or small win in progress flag is not set (steps S5235, S5236), and processing related to the progress of a new game (lottery or symbol control) will be performed according to the pending status (steps S5237-S5239).

Figure 115 is a flowchart showing the procedure for normal symbol and normal electric device control processing (step S116).

Now, in the processing of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and that a gaming ball has passed through the gate section 2003, as shown in FIG. 115, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs gate section passing processing in processing of step S5402, such as first obtaining the normal random number for the normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol reserved memory area of the main control built-in RAM.

Next, in the normal symbol process, one of the following five processes is selectively executed depending on the normal symbol process flag.

1. A normal random number stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and a lottery process for determining the display mode when the variable control of the normal symbol is stopped is performed based on the read normal random number (step S5403).
2. A normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S5404) in which a lottery process is performed on the fluctuation mode (fluctuation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display device 1402 based on the normal symbol fluctuation random number.
3. Normal symbol change processing (step S5405) that waits until the normal symbol change display on the normal symbol display device 1402 stops
4. A normal pattern stop process (step S5406) that stops the normal pattern variable display so that the normal pattern variable control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the normal pattern variable control is stopped is displayed on the normal pattern display device 1402.
5. When the result of the lottery process regarding the state when the normal symbol fluctuation control is stopped indicates a state suggesting a "normal symbol win," the movable piece 2004a is opened to execute a process for controlling the second starting opening 2004 to allow the game ball to be received (step S5407).

The normal symbol process flag is initially set to indicate that normal symbol processing (step S5403) should be performed.

Figure 116 is a flowchart showing the procedure for gate section passing processing (step S5402).

Now, in the processing of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and that a gaming ball has passed through the gate section 2003, then, as shown in FIG. 116, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the counter value of the normal reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a in the processing of step S5411. Then, based on this counter value, it determines whether the reserved number of normal symbols is the maximum value of "4".

If it is determined in step S5411 that the number of reserved normal symbols is not its maximum value, the following steps S5412 to S5414 are carried out to put the variable display control of the normal symbols into a new reserved state. That is, first, in step S5412, the normal reserved number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, in step S5413, the normal random number and normal variable random number are obtained from the random number counter. Next, in step S5414, each of the random numbers thus obtained is stored in the normal symbol reserved memory area in the memory area of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a that corresponds to the counter value of the normal reserved number counter.

However, if it is determined in step S5411 that the number of reserved normal symbols is at its maximum value, control of the variable display of normal symbols will not be newly reserved. In other words, by not executing the processes of steps S5412 to S5414, control of the variable display of normal symbols will not be newly placed on hold.

Figure 117 is a flowchart showing the procedure for normal symbol normal processing (step S5403).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that normal processing for the normal symbol should be performed, as shown in FIG. 117, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines in step S5421 whether there is variable display control for the normal symbol on hold based on the counter value of the normal hold number counter. If it is determined that there is variable display control for the normal symbol on hold, then in step S5422, the random number stored in the earliest memory area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the normal symbol (normal random number, normal symbol variable random number) stored in the normal symbol hold memory area of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read from the main control built-in RAM. Next, in steps S5423 and S5424, the normal reserved number counter is counted down, and random numbers (normal random numbers, normal pattern variable random numbers) related to the display mode when the variable display of the normal pattern stops, which are stored in each memory area of the normal pattern reserved memory area in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, are shifted in a first-in, first-out manner.

Specifically, the normal symbol reserve memory area has four memory areas, 1 through 4, and random numbers extracted in response to the passage of a gaming ball through gate unit 2003 are stored in order, starting with the first (earliest) area. When a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 through 3) memory area and a gaming ball passes through gate unit 2003, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1th (n = 1 through 3) memory area. When the conditions for starting a variable display based on the random number stored in the first memory area are met, the various random numbers stored in the first memory area are read out, and the various random numbers stored in the Nth (N = 2 through 4) memory area are moved to the N-1th (N = 2 through 4) memory area. This allows the order in which reserves for normal symbol variable display control occurred to be stored in a specific order, and reserves for variable display control are released in order, starting with the earliest reserve (the reserve that occurred earliest).

Next, if the current game state is a time-shortened state (high probability time-shortened state, low probability time-shortened state) (step S5425), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects a normal win determination table (not shown) for time-shortened state (step S5426), and if the current game state is a non-time-shortened state (low probability non-time-shortened state, high probability non-time-shortened state) (step S5425), it selects a normal win determination table (not shown) for non-time-shortened state (step S5427), and compares the selected normal win determination table with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal pattern normal processing (step S5428).

The normal win determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM of the main control MPU 1310a and includes a time-saving normal win determination table used when the game state is in time-saving mode (high-probability time-saving mode, low-probability time-saving mode), and a non-time-saving normal win determination table used when the game state is not in time-saving mode (low-probability non-time-saving mode, high-probability non-time-saving mode). In the time-saving normal win determination table, which is referenced for comparison with the normal random number, the normal random numbers are associated with each other so that all 255 types of normal random numbers match the normal win determination value indicating a normal win and never match the normal loss determination value indicating a normal loss. In this way, when the time is saved, when a game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal win is always achieved, and the movable piece 2004a opens, allowing game balls to be received by the second starting port 2004. Instead of all 255 types, more normal random numbers than in non-time-saving mode may match the normal win determination value, which indicates a normal win.

Furthermore, in the normal random number determination table for non-time-saving modes, which is referenced for comparison with the normal random number, all 255 types of normal random numbers are associated with the normal random number determination value, which indicates a normal win, and which indicates a normal miss, so that they match. In this way, even if a game ball passes through gate portion 2003 during non-time-saving modes, it will not result in a normal win, and therefore movable piece 2004a will not be in the open state, thereby preventing game balls from being accepted into second starting port 2004. However, as mentioned above, it is also possible to make it possible to win with a normal symbol even in the non-time-saving state. In this case, the probability of winning is set to be lower than in the time-saving state (for example, 50%), and when the lottery result for a normal symbol is a win, the movable piece 2004a of the second starting opening 2004 may be opened for a shorter period of time than in the time-saving state, for example, 2 seconds, to allow the second starting opening 2004 to receive a game ball, and then the movable piece 2004a may be closed to prevent the second starting opening 2004 from receiving a game ball.

If the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that a normal symbol has been won as a result of comparing the selected normal symbol winning judgment table with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal normal symbol processing, it sets a normal symbol winning flag (step S5430) to indicate that the variation has been won as a normal symbol, and then determines the normal symbol winning pattern as the pattern when the normal symbol variation control stops (the normal symbol stopping pattern) (step S5431).On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that a normal symbol has been won as a result of comparing the selected normal symbol winning judgment table with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal normal symbol processing, it ... lost as a result of comparing the selected normal symbol winning judgment table with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal normal symbol processing, it determines the normal symbol losing pattern as the pattern when the normal symbol variation control stops (the normal symbol stopping pattern) (step S5432). Then, once the normal pattern process flag is updated (step S5433) so that the process transitions to the normal pattern change time determination process (step S5404), this process ends.

While this control is being performed by the main control MPU 1310a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains the various commands described above sent from the main control MPU 1310a, thereby understanding the current game situation within the peripheral control unit's routine processing (received command analysis processing (step S1022)), and is able to execute presentations appropriate to the game situation.

Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether a start win has occurred, and if so, controls the pending display and pre-reading effects corresponding to the start win. It then updates the process flag based on the determined game status, and executes one of the following processes: waiting for a change pattern specification command, start of effect pattern change, during effect pattern change, stop of effect pattern change, jackpot display, during jackpot gameplay, and jackpot end effect processing.

Waiting for receiving a fluctuation pattern specification command: Until a fluctuation pattern command regarding the fluctuation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, this performs control related to the effects (demo effects, etc.) when the pattern is not in a fluctuation state and no control related to a jackpot is being performed, and when a fluctuation pattern command regarding the fluctuation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, the process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect pattern fluctuation start processing.

Performance pattern change start processing: Various performance details (performance patterns, preview performances, etc.) during the pattern change period are determined based on the change pattern command, etc., and control is performed so that the decorative pattern change begins based on the determined performance details. After this, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the performance pattern change processing.

Processing during pattern change: Controls the start of various effects determined in the pattern change start process at the appropriate timing during the pattern change period, and updates the value of the process flag to a value corresponding to the pattern change stop process when the change time ends.

Performs control to stop the change in decorative patterns and derive and display the display result (stopped pattern) based on the reception of a command (pattern confirmation command) instructing the stopping of all patterns. If the decorative pattern is to stop at a jackpot pattern, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display processing, and if the decorative pattern is to stop at a losing pattern, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process of waiting for the change pattern specification command to be received.

Jackpot display processing: Controls the effects (such as the display effects that notify the occurrence of a jackpot on the gameboard effect display device 1600) during the period from when the decorative symbol stops on the jackpot symbol until the jackpot game begins. After that, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot game processing.

Jackpot gameplay processing: Controls various effects during the jackpot gameplay state. When the jackpot game state ends, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect processing.

Jackpot end effect processing: The game board side effect display device 1600 controls the effects (such as display effects informing the player that the jackpot game state has ended) during the period from the end of the jackpot game state until the changeover state is entered. The value of the process flag is then updated to a value corresponding to the changeover pattern specification command reception waiting process.

Here, we will explain how to control the pre-reading effect that is executed when the starting win occurs.

When a gaming ball enters a start entry port (first start entry port 2002, second start entry port 2004), the main control board 1310 executes the first start entry port passing process (Fig. 105) or the second start entry port passing process (Fig. 106) depending on the start entry port through which the gaming ball entered, and extracts (acquires) a random number value as a start memory (steps S5241, S5251). Then, in the first special symbol pre-reading process (S5245) or the second special symbol pre-reading process (S5255), a special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect command or a special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect command (see Fig. 90; hereinafter referred to as the "special symbol pre-reading effect command") is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the extracted random number value or the lottery result based on that random number value.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a special chart pre-reading effect command, it determines whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect based on the received command. The command from the main control board 1310 is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (Figure 98). The received command is then analyzed by the received command analysis processing (S1022) of the peripheral control unit regular processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (Figure 95).

When a special chart pre-reading effect command is received, the peripheral control board 1510 executes pre-reading effect control processing during the received command analysis processing. During the pre-reading effect control processing, processing is executed to execute a normal pre-reading effect that changes the display mode of the pending display. Note that the pre-reading effect control processing may set a flag indicating that a pre-reading effect command has been received during the received command analysis processing, and may be called during the peripheral control unit's regular processing during the peripheral control unit power-on processing (Figure 95).

In the process for executing the normal pre-reading effect that changes the reserved display, a lottery is held based on the special symbol pre-reading effect command, and the display mode of the reserved display after the change is selected based on the result of the lottery. At this time, the display mode of the reserved display may be changed only when the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the special symbol pre-reading effect command transitions to a reach state. Changing the display mode of the reserved display may be done, for example, by changing the color or shape of the reserved display. Then, a normal pre-reading effect setting process is executed to change the mode of the reserved display. In the normal pre-reading effect setting process, settings are made to change the display mode of the reserved display, and settings are made to output sound effects, turn on lamps, or move special devices when the display mode of the reserved display is changed.

With reference to Figures 1 to 8, an embodiment has been shown in which the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a door frame left side unit 530, a door frame right side unit 550, a door frame top unit 570, etc. However, below is shown an embodiment in which the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a movable body (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a frame movable body) used for presentation or decoration.

Figures 118(A) to 118(E) show an embodiment in which a door frame top unit 570 constituting the door frame 3 is provided with a right ear frame movable body 7100 and a left ear frame movable body 7200 modeled after animal (specifically, rabbit) ears as movable frame bodies. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200 are movable in the vertical direction, and their specific structure and operating modes will be described later.

Figures 118(A) and 118(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. Figure 118(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 118(D) and 118(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. Figures 118(A), 118(C), and 118(D) show the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 stored within the door frame top unit 570. Figures 118(B) and 118(E) show the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protruding upward from the door frame top unit 570. Figure 118(D) shows the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 stored within the door frame top unit 570.

In this embodiment, a door frame top unit 570 is provided at the top of the door frame 3. A glass unit 190 is provided in the center of the door frame 3, and through the glass unit 190, the game area 5a located at the rear, the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, and various movable objects within the game board can be seen. A tray unit 320 and a handle unit 300 are provided at the bottom of the door frame 3. In addition, the performance operation unit 400 is equipped with an operation button 410, and can accept operation inputs from the player. Note that the upper tray 321, lower tray 322, ball loan button 328, return button 329, etc. are omitted from the illustration.

The door frame top unit 570 has a horizontally elongated rectangular parallelepiped shape, and its top, right side, and left side are respectively arranged to overlap the top, right side, and left side of the door frame base unit 100 that constitutes the outer frame 2 and door frame 3 when viewed from the front. The door frame top unit 570 is made of a white, translucent synthetic resin with a thickness of approximately several mm, allowing light to pass through. The door frame top unit 570 is equipped with a right ear opening 7000 on the door frame top unit that corresponds to the right ear frame movable body 7100, which can move up and down, and a left ear opening 7010 on the door frame top unit that corresponds to the left ear frame movable body 7200, which can move up and down.

As shown in Figures 118(A) to 118(E), the door frame top unit 570 in this embodiment has a right ear frame movable body 7100 on the left side and a left ear frame movable body 7200 on the right side when viewed from the front. The specific structure and operation of these are described below. Note that the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are basically identical in structure, so in the following explanation, only the right ear frame movable body 7100 may be described as a representative.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 has a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 facing forward and a right ear frame movable body second surface 7120 facing backward. The right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 has an inner right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative portion 7112 made of a colored (specifically, pink) transparent synthetic resin, and an outer right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7114 made of a white translucent synthetic resin. The surfaces of the right ear frame movable body 7100 other than the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 (top surface, left side surface, right side surface, right ear frame movable body second surface 7120) are formed from the same white translucent synthetic resin as the right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7114. The left ear frame movable body 7200 also has the same structure as the right ear frame movable body 7100.

A right ear frame movable body inner light-emitting portion 7116 is provided inside the right ear frame movable body 7100 at a position overlapping the right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative portion 7112 in a front view. In addition, a right ear frame movable body outer light-emitting portion 7118 is provided at a position overlapping the right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7114 in a front view. The right ear frame movable body inner light-emitting portion 7116 is specifically composed of a printed circuit board with a white protective film applied to both sides, and has a light-emitting diode mounted on its surface that can emit light toward the player. The right ear frame movable body inner light-emitting portion 7116 and the right ear frame movable body outer light-emitting portion 7118 are capable of emitting light in a predetermined light-emitting manner toward the front under the control of the peripheral control board 1510, and the right ear frame movable body inner light-emitting portion 7116 can illuminate and decorate the right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative portion 7112, and the right ear frame movable body outer light-emitting portion 7118 can illuminate and decorate the right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7114. The left ear frame movable body 7200 also has the same structure as the right ear frame movable body 7100.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be controlled by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 to move from a state (first state) in which they are stored in a standby position within the door frame top unit 570 as shown in Figures 118(A), 118(C), and 118(D), to a state (second state) in which they protrude vertically upward from the top surface of the door frame top unit 570 as shown in Figures 118(B) and 118(E). The top surfaces of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are formed flush with the top surface of the door frame top unit 570 when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in the standby position. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200 are shaped to resemble animal ears, and can be relocated from the door frame top unit 570 to a position where they protrude vertically upward from the top surface of the door frame top unit 570, making it possible to decoratively express the movement of an animal's ears.

In this embodiment, the door frame top unit 570 is made of a white, translucent synthetic resin and is several millimeters thick. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 118(A), when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200 are stored in the door frame top unit 570, and the right ear frame movable body inner light-emitting portion 7116, right ear frame movable body outer light-emitting portion 7118, left ear frame movable body inner light-emitting portion 7216, and left ear frame movable body outer light-emitting portion 7218 are illuminated in a predetermined manner, the front of the door frame top unit 570 is dimly illuminated, which can be seen by the player.

On the other hand, when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are protruding from the door frame top unit 570, and the right ear frame movable body inner light-emitting portion 7116, right ear frame movable body outer light-emitting portion 7118, left ear frame movable body inner light-emitting portion 7216, and left ear frame movable body outer light-emitting portion 7218 are illuminated in a predetermined manner, the right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative portion 7112 and right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7114 on the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110, and the left ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative portion 7212 and left ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7214 on the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 can be directly viewed by the player in a predetermined illuminated state.

In this way, by moving the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the frame movable body), part of the frame movable body is positioned above the upper surface of the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100, which increases the area it occupies in the player's field of vision when looking up, making it appear as if the volume of the cabinet has increased, providing players with unprecedented surprise and entertainment.

Next, referring to Figures 119(A) to 120(B), examples of effects are shown that combine the specific operating modes of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, the display modes of the frame movable body simulated images that are images that mimic the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 that are displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 in accordance with the operating modes of the frame movable bodies, the mode of accepting player operations on the operation button 410 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the operation unit), and the light emission modes of the right ear frame movable body inner light-emitting unit 7116, right ear frame movable body outer light-emitting unit 7118, left ear frame movable body inner light-emitting unit 7216, and left ear frame movable body outer light-emitting unit 7218 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the frame movable body light-emitting unit).

Figures 119 (A) to 120 (B) are time charts showing the operation mode of the frame movable body, the display state of the frame movable body simulated image that is an image that imitates the frame movable body displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600, the acceptance state of the operation unit, the display state of the operation instruction display displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600, and the light emission performance state of the frame movable body light emitting unit, respectively.

In the time charts shown in Figures 119(A) to 120(B), the passage of time is indicated by notations such as t0, t1 to t34, t35, etc. to explain the timing of the effects. The time between each timing is one second. Furthermore, this is not limited to this embodiment, but also applies to other embodiments described below that use similar notations.

Figure 119 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot and the player operates the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. Figure 119 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. Figure 120 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. Figure 120 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid.

In each of the presentation patterns shown in Figures 119(A) to 120(B), the manner in which the frame movable body moves, the manner in which the frame movable body simulated image is displayed, the timing at which operation acceptance to the operation unit becomes effective, the timing at which the operation instruction display begins, and the timing at which the light-emitting unit of the frame movable body changes from a light-emitting presentation state to an extinguished state are all the same. However, the timing at which the operation instruction display ends and the timing at which the light-emitting unit of the frame movable body changes from an extinguished state to a light-emitting presentation state or a specific light-emitting presentation state may differ depending on the presentation pattern. Below, specific presentation examples for each presentation pattern are shown with reference to Figures 119(A) to 120(B).

In the presentation patterns shown in Figures 119(A) to 120(B), the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are initially stored in the door frame top unit 570 (before timing t0) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the first state or standby state). In this state, when a reach presentation state corresponding to the special lottery result occurs at a predetermined timing between timing t0 and timing t7 (for example, timing t4), the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 begin to rise simultaneously (timing t7).

At the same time, a frame movable body simulated image begins to be displayed in the center of the game board side performance display device 1600. At the same time, a door frame top unit simulated image, which is an image simulating the door frame top unit 570, also begins to be displayed. The frame movable body simulated image is specifically composed of an image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and an image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200. The frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed in such a way that the image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 rise in accordance with the rise of the actual right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200. The frame movable body simulated images finish rising at the same time (timing t9) as the rise of the actual right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200 finishes, and then continue to be displayed in a manner indicating a stopped state (from timing t9 onwards). The right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200 start rising at timing t7, and at timing t9, two seconds later, they have completed rising (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the second state or rising state).

On the other hand, at timing t9, operation acceptance for the operation unit becomes valid, and the game board side effect display device 1600 begins displaying an image instructing the operation of the operation unit (hereinafter sometimes referred to as operation instruction display). The operation instruction display may, for example, display an image that mimics the appearance of the operation button 410, or it may display a string of characters instructing the operation of the operation unit (for example, the string "Push!!"). The valid operation period continues until operation is accepted for the operation unit (timing t14 in the example shown below), or until a predetermined time has passed (until timing t18). Also, at timing t9, all frame movable body light-emitting units change from their light-emitting effect state to their extinguished state.

Figures 119(A) and 119(B) show the presentation mode when an operation is made to the operation unit at timing t14 after the period in which operation to the operation unit is valid has begun (timing t9). In these presentation patterns, the display of the operation instructions ends at timing t14, and the frame movable body light-emitting unit enters a predetermined light-emitting presentation state corresponding to the special lottery result.

Figure 119 (A) shows the presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot. When the operation unit is operated (timing t14), the light-emitting unit on the movable frame body changes from an off state to a specific light-emitting state that is different from the normal light-emitting state. In this way, the light-emitting unit on the movable frame body changes to the specific light-emitting state, indicating to the player that the special lottery result is a jackpot.

On the other hand, Figure 119 (B) shows the presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a loss, and when the operation unit is operated (timing t14), the frame movable body light-emitting unit changes from an unlit state to a normal light-emitting presentation state. In this way, the frame movable body light-emitting unit changes to a normal light-emitting presentation state, indicating to the player that the special lottery result is a loss.

In the specific light-emitting presentation state, it is preferable to adopt a light-emitting mode that is more stimulating to the player, such as faster flashing of light, stronger light intensity, or more colors, compared to the light-emitting mode in the normal light-emitting presentation state. When the player sees this specific light-emitting mode that differs from the normal mode, the player is informed that the special lottery result is a jackpot. Specifically, in the specific light-emitting presentation state, the inner portion of the movable frame body and the outer portion of the movable frame body may be configured to emit light in different modes. For example, the inner portion of the movable frame body may be configured to be visible in a more stimulating light-emitting mode than the outer portion of the movable frame body. These definitions of the specific light-emitting presentation state and the normal light-emitting presentation state may also be applied to other embodiments.

Figures 120(A) and 120(B) show the presentation that occurs when, after the period in which operation of the operation unit is valid has begun (timing t9), the player does not operate the operation unit during the valid operation period, and the valid operation period ends at timing t18 after a predetermined specified time has passed. In these presentation patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t18, and the frame movable body light-emitting unit enters a predetermined light-emitting presentation state according to the special lottery result.

Figure 120 (A) shows the presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a jackpot. At the timing when the valid operation period ends (timing t18), the movable frame light-emitting unit enters a specific light-emitting presentation state that is different from the normal light-emitting presentation state. In this way, the movable frame light-emitting unit entering the specific light-emitting presentation state indicates to the player that the special lottery result is a jackpot.

On the other hand, Figure 120 (B) shows the presentation pattern when the special lottery result is a loss, and at the timing when the valid operation period ends (timing t18), the light-emitting section of the movable frame body enters its normal light-emitting presentation state. In this way, the light-emitting section entering its normal light-emitting presentation state indicates to the player that the special lottery result is a loss.

In each of the presentation patterns shown in Figures 119(A) to 120(B), at a predetermined timing (timing t20) after the end of the valid operation period, the fluctuating decorative symbols are displayed stationary in a manner corresponding to the result of the special lottery. For example, in the presentation patterns shown in Figures 119(A) and 120(A), the decorative symbols are displayed stationary in a matching pattern (e.g., "7", "7", "7") indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, and in the presentation patterns shown in Figures 119(B) and 120(B), the decorative symbols are displayed stationary in a reach-miss pattern (e.g., "7", "6", "7") indicating that the result of the special lottery is a miss.

At the timing (timing t22) when two seconds have elapsed since the decorative pattern stopped, the movable frame body begins to move from the raised position (second state) to the stored position (first state) while maintaining either the specific light-emitting performance state or the normal light-emitting performance state. At the same time, the movable frame body simulated image changes to a display mode in which it descends in accordance with the downward movement of the actual right ear movable frame body 7100 and left ear movable frame body 7200. At the timing (timing t24) when the movement of the movable frame body to the stored position is completed, the movable frame body simulated image changes to a display mode in which it has completely finished descending in accordance with the downward movement of the actual movable frame body, and the display ends.

If the special lottery result is a jackpot, the light-emitting state of the movable frame body can be configured to change from a specific light-emitting effect state to a normal light-emitting effect state at a predetermined timing during the jackpot. If the special lottery result is a loss, the normal light-emitting effect state continues, and the next decorative pattern begins to change.

Figures 121(A) to 121(C) are schematic diagrams showing the movement state of the frame movable body, the display state of the frame movable body simulated image, the acceptance state of the operation unit, the state of the operation instruction display, and the changes in the light emission state of the frame movable body over time when the effect pattern shown in Figure 119(A) is executed. Note that, as mentioned above, the effect pattern shown in Figure 119(A) is the effect pattern that occurs when a player operates the operation unit when the special lottery result is a jackpot.

Figure 121 (A) shows the state at timing t5, where the decorative pattern is changing in a reach state, the movable frame body is in the normal light-emitting performance state and is located in the stored position (first state), the movable frame body simulated image is not displayed, the operation unit is in an operation-disabled period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed.

Figure 121 (B) shows the state at timing t8, where the decorative pattern is changing in a reach state, the movable frame body is in a light-emitting performance state and is moving from the stored position (first state) to the raised position (second state), the movable frame body simulation image is displayed simulating the state of moving from the stored position (first state) to the raised position (second state), the operation unit is in an operation-invalid period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed.

Figure 121 (C) shows the state at timing t11, where the decorative pattern is in a reach state and fluctuating, the movable frame body is off and in the raised position (second state), the movable frame body simulation image is a display simulating the movable frame body in the raised position (second state), the valid operation period has begun in the operation unit, and an image simulating the operation unit is displayed as an operation instruction display.

Figure 122 (A) shows the state at timing t19, where the decorative pattern is fluctuating in a reach state, the movable frame body is in a raised position (second state) in a special light-emitting performance state, the movable frame body simulation image is displayed simulating the raised position (second state), the operation unit is in an operation-invalid period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed.

Figure 122 (B) shows the state at timing t23, where the decorative symbols are displayed in a sequence of numbers (for example, "7", "7", "7") indicating that the special lottery result is a jackpot, the movable frame body is moving from the raised position (second state) to the stored position (first state) in a special light-emitting performance state, the movable frame body simulation image is displayed simulating the state of moving from the raised position (second state) to the stored position (first state), the operation unit is in an operation-invalid period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed.

Figure 122 (C) shows the state at timing t28, where the decorative symbols are displayed in a sequence of numbers (e.g., "7," "7," "7") indicating that the special lottery result is a jackpot, the movable frame body is in the stored position (first state) in a special light-emitting performance state, the movable frame body simulated image is not displayed, the operation unit is in an operation-invalid period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed.

In this way, by displaying a simulated frame moving body image at the timing when the frame moving body starts to move, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a player misses the operation of the frame moving body or the change in the light emission mode in response to the operation of the operation unit. Furthermore, by having the frame moving body appear in an unprecedented position in response to the result of a special lottery (for example, in response to the occurrence of a reach effect), it is possible to give the player a great sense of surprise and excitement. Furthermore, by having the light emission mode of the frame moving body light-emitting unit change in response to the player's operation of the operation unit, it is possible to give the player the feeling that they themselves have decided the result of the special lottery.

When the movable frame body operates, it is advisable to select a presentation pattern that increases the likelihood that the special lottery result corresponding to the changing decorative pattern will be a jackpot compared to when the movable frame body does not operate. For example, the likelihood may be 3% when the movable frame body does not operate, and 20% when the movable frame body operates. With this configuration, when a simulated image of the movable frame body is displayed, a player who looks at the movable frame body and realizes that it is operating will develop a sense of anticipation for a jackpot.

This configuration makes it possible to further increase players' interest in the movable frame, and to expand players' interest beyond the range that was previously limited to a specific area centered on the game board 5.

The volume of the variable effect sound may be changed from a normal state to a suppressed state in which the volume is reduced while the frame movable body is in operation.
The variable effect sound is a sound that is perceived by the player as background music, in which a predetermined piece of music is played in sync with the change in the decorative symbols. For example, a piece of music consisting of the voice of a predetermined singer and the sounds of multiple instruments is played for several minutes, during which the decorative symbols change multiple times (for example, when all of the decorative symbols change in a non-reach miss and the average change time is about 10 seconds). By outputting such variable effect sounds to the player, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the game. It is also possible to prepare multiple such pieces of music in advance, and to start playing a different piece of music when the playback of one piece of music is completed. Alternatively, the music that was being played may be faded out midway through playback in accordance with a change in the game state, and a different piece of music different from the one that was being played may be played instead. In this embodiment, the volume of such variable effect sounds is reduced in sync with the movement of the frame movable body, thereby preventing excessive effects.

In addition, a special sound may be played for a short time in synchronization with the movement of the frame movable body to alert the player that the frame movable body is moving or has moved. The special alert sound may not be a sound that can be recognized as a series of music pieces played over a long period of time, as with the variable effect sound. Instead, the special alert sound may be a sound effect (e.g., a chime sound such as "ping pong") played for one second, a piece of music that ends in a short period of time (e.g., two seconds), or a sound resembling the continuous beating of a drum (e.g., "thud ...

In this way, by reducing the volume of the variable effect sound and emitting a special warning sound in accordance with the movement of the frame movable body, it is possible to prevent the effects provided to the player from becoming excessive. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of situations in which the player is injured or the frame movable body is damaged by coming into contact with the frame movable body.

Instead of informing the player that there is a high probability of a jackpot occurring, which is advantageous to the player, by operating the movable frame body, it may be configured to inform the player of the probability of other game content occurring other than the probability of a jackpot occurring.

For example, even if a jackpot is confirmed, the system may be configured to notify the player of the benefits that will be awarded to them during the jackpot. The benefits may be, for example, the type of benefit or the amount of benefit.

Alternatively, it may be configured to notify the player of the type of benefit that will be awarded to them after a jackpot. For example, it may be configured to notify the player of the type of benefit that will be awarded to them after a jackpot, or it may be configured to notify the player of the amount of benefit that will be awarded to them after a jackpot.

In this way, the device may be configured to not only notify the degree of expectation of a state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot state) occurring, but also the degree of expectation of the amount of benefit given to the player in a state advantageous to the player (for example, the number of balls awarded to the player or the number of times the jackpot slot opens), the degree of expectation of a new state advantageous to the player that may occur after a state advantageous to the player has ended (for example, a special state or an electric chute support state), and the type (for example, a special state or an electric chute support state) and amount (for example, the number of times the special state will continue or the number of times the electric chute support will continue) of benefit given to the player in a new game that occurs after a state advantageous to the player has ended.

By executing a predetermined presentation mode from among a plurality of different presentation modes, the player can be notified by the operation of the movable frame that there is a high expectation of a jackpot occurring, which is advantageous to the player.
The degree of expectation may be notified to the player not only by the movement of the frame movable body but also by other modes that the player can perceive. For example, the degree of expectation may be notified to the player by various modes that the player can perceive, such as the display mode in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the mode of sound output from a predetermined speaker, the mode of light emission based on light output from a predetermined light source, the mode of vibration of a predetermined vibration source, etc.

The expectation level may also be configured to include the certainty that a specific advantageous state will occur (100% certainty that a specific advantageous state will occur). For example, when a specific presentation mode is executed, the expectation level that a specific advantageous state will occur may be 10%, and when another presentation mode is executed, the expectation level that a specific advantageous state will occur may be 100%.

It is also advisable to configure the system so that the rate at which a presentation mode with a higher probability of generating an advantageous state is executed is lower. For example, the execution rate of a presentation mode can be set so that the ratio of the number of times a predetermined presentation mode with a low probability of generating an advantageous state is executed to the number of times a predetermined presentation mode with a high probability of generating an advantageous state is executed is, for example, 90:10. With this configuration, when a predetermined presentation mode with a low probability of occurrence is executed, the player can experience both the joy of experiencing a presentation with a low probability of occurrence and the anticipation of an advantageous state, thereby increasing their interest in the game.

A type of display effect that is performed in the display area of the display device is known as a look-ahead display effect, which occurs over multiple display variations of decorative symbols in response to the occurrence of a specific hold. The decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the specific hold that caused the look-ahead display effect to occur has a higher probability of the decorative symbol being displayed in a manner that indicates the occurrence of a jackpot, compared to a decorative symbol variation display that does not involve a look-ahead display effect. For this reason, when a look-ahead display effect is executed, players feel a sense of anticipation that a jackpot will occur.

Meanwhile, in the display area of the effect display device, not only is the decorative pattern displayed as it changes, but multiple effect displays corresponding to the decorative pattern being displayed as it changes (for example, an effect display indicating the likelihood of the changing decorative pattern stopping in a manner that indicates a jackpot) are also displayed. As a result, players are forced to simultaneously view the look-ahead effect display that suggests the decorative pattern change display results several times in the future, as well as the change display mode of the currently changing decorative pattern and the display content of the effect display corresponding to the currently changing decorative pattern.

While this situation can make the game more interesting, it can also lead to problems where players are unable to fully grasp what these display effects are indicating. In particular, because players are focused on the display of currently changing decorative symbols and the various display effects corresponding to those display effects, the pre-reading display effect is relatively less noticeable, which can lead to players losing track of the fact that the pre-reading display effect is being executed or that the decorative symbols corresponding to the pre-reading display effect are about to begin changing.

Below, we will show an embodiment that makes it easy for players to understand that a pre-reading display is being executed and that the timing for the start of the display of the decorative patterns corresponding to the pre-reading display is approaching.

Below, with reference to Figure 123, we will first explain the various images that are displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pre-reading performance display is executed.
Specifically, examples of the effects in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 from the start of the change in the display of the decorative symbols to the stop of the change when the result of the special lottery performed in response to winning at the first starting port 2002 is a miss will be described with reference to Figures 123(A) to 123(F). Also, examples of the effects from the start of the change in the display of the decorative symbols to the stop of the change when the result of the special lottery performed in response to winning at the first starting port 2002 is a jackpot will be described with reference to Figures 123(A) to 123(D), 123(G), and 123(H).
In this specification, the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 may be simply referred to as the display area.

Figure 123 (A) shows a state in which three decorative symbols are frozen and displayed. It also shows a state in which the reserved images corresponding to the frozen decorative symbols are displayed. It also shows a state in which there are three reserved symbols corresponding to the entry of game balls into the first starting slot 2002. Specifically, the figure shows a state in which a decorative symbol with the number "3" as the left decorative symbol, a decorative symbol with the number "5" as the middle decorative symbol, and a decorative symbol with the number "2" as the right decorative symbol are frozen and displayed at equal intervals from the left in approximately the vertical center of the display area. The decorative symbols are composed of a background region (white text in the figure) consisting of an image that is a vertically elongated rectangle and forms the outline of the decorative symbol, and a number region (black text in the figure) consisting of an image showing one of the numbers "1" to "9." As shown in the figure, the number region is located in the center of the background region.

The decorative pattern may be composed of images in different colors for the background area and the number area. For example, the background area may be white and the number area may be black. Note that the outline of the rectangular shape that forms the outline of the background area may also be black.

At the bottom of the display area, from left to right, the pending display area, the first pending display area, the second pending display area, the third pending display area, and the fourth pending display area are set up, and in the diagram, the pending image is displayed in the pending display area, and pending images are displayed in the first to third pending display areas. Note that the fourth pending display area is shown with a dotted line in the diagram for illustrative purposes, but the dotted line does not actually appear in the display area to indicate the display state, and in the following drawings, such dotted lines indicating the intended location where the pending image will be displayed are generally not used.

In Figure 123 (A), the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area is a reserved image corresponding to the decorative patterns of "3," "5," and "2" that are stopped and displayed. Furthermore, the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is a reserved image corresponding to the next variable display that will be performed after the variable display corresponding to the reserved image has ended. Furthermore, the reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area is a reserved image corresponding to the next variable display that will be performed after the variable display corresponding to the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area has ended. Furthermore, the reserved image displayed in the third reserved display area is a reserved image corresponding to the next variable display that will be performed after the variable display corresponding to the reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area has ended.

Figure 123 (B) shows the display state at the start of the change in the decorative pattern corresponding to the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area described with reference to Figure 123 (A).
Specifically, the upper end of the decorative pattern immediately preceding the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is displayed below each of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, and the lower end of the decorative pattern immediately following the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is displayed above each of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern. Also, the display of the reserved display ends.
The reserved image displayed in the reserved display area and the reserved images displayed in the first to fourth reserved display areas are always displayed in front of the decorative pattern. The reserved image and the reserved image are circular in shape and are basically white in color. In addition, the diameter of the circle of the reserved image is larger than that of the reserved image.

Figure 123 (C) shows the state in which the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are being displayed in a variable manner. Each decorative pattern is displayed in a manner that scrolls downward within the display area.

Specifically, when a decorative pattern is being displayed in a changing state, the lower part of the decorative pattern is first displayed on the top edge of the display area, and then the decorative pattern moves downward until the entire decorative pattern is displayed in the display area. After that, the bottom edge of the decorative pattern reaches the bottom edge of the display area, and only a portion of the upper part of the decorative pattern is displayed. Finally, the top edge of the decorative pattern reaches the bottom edge of the display area, and the decorative pattern is no longer displayed. In this way, each decorative pattern changes display state in a sequence that goes from not being displayed in the display area to being displayed in the display area, and then back to not being displayed in the display area.

The left decorative pattern, right decorative pattern, and left decorative pattern have a display order. Specifically, following a decorative pattern with a certain number (e.g., "1"), the decorative pattern with the next number (e.g., "2") is displayed in order from the top of the display area. The order of the numbers assigned to the decorative patterns is "1," "2," "3," "4," "5," "6," "7," "8," and "9." After the decorative pattern with the number "9," the decorative pattern with the number "1" is displayed in the display area. For example, Figure 123(C) shows a state in which a left decorative pattern with the number "1" attached to the bottom and a left decorative pattern with the number "2" attached to the top are displayed as left decorative patterns. However, both left decorative patterns scroll downward, and following the left decorative pattern with the number "2," the left decorative pattern with the number "3" appears from the top of the display area.

With reference to Figure 123 (B), we have explained that the display of the reserved image that had been displayed in the reserved display area is terminated at the same time as the decorative pattern begins to change. However, at the same time that the display of the reserved image is terminated, the reserved image that was displayed in the first reserved display area is displayed as it expands and moves to the left, and is displayed as the reserved image in the reserved display area. At the same time, the reserved image that was displayed in the second reserved display area is displayed as it moves to the left, and is displayed as the reserved image in the first reserved display area. At the same time, the reserved image that was displayed in the second reserved display area is displayed as it moves to the left, and is displayed as the reserved image in the first reserved display area. This enlargement of the reserved image and movement of the reserved image to the left is carried out over a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.67 seconds). Figure 123 (C) shows the state of the reserved image after such movement.

Figure 123 (D) shows a state in which the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and the middle and right decorative patterns are fluctuating. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number "2" added to the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. It also shows a state in which a new reserved image is displayed in the third reserved display area in response to a game ball entering the first starting hole 2002.

Here, we will explain the temporary stop display. The temporary stop display is a display mode of a decorative pattern in which a decorative pattern with a predetermined number is displayed as if it had stopped at or near the display position where the decorative pattern will ultimately stop. Specifically, for example, the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern is achieved by displaying the decorative pattern with a predetermined number so that it moves up and down gently or sways, based on the display position where the decorative pattern will ultimately stop, so that the number attached to the decorative pattern can be clearly seen. Alternatively, the display may rotate within a predetermined angle (e.g., 5 to 10 degrees) around the vertical axis. In either case, the temporarily stopped decorative pattern continues to be displayed in the display area.
By displaying the temporary stop in this way, the decorative symbols that are being displayed in a varying manner appear to the player as if they are stationary, and the player can confirm the numbers attached to the decorative symbols. When the decorative symbols are finally displayed in a stationary state, the decorative symbols will not be displayed in a vertically moving or oscillating manner, but will be displayed in a completely stationary state.
Although the example given is the end of the variable display, a temporary stop display may be performed for a predetermined period of time at the start of the variable display.
In addition, during the changing display, at least one of the decorative symbols on the left, center, and right may be temporarily stopped for a predetermined period of time, and then all of the decorative symbols may be changed again at high speed. This type of display mode is used, for example, in "pseudo consecutive effects."
The manner of the temporary stop display may be changed depending on the timing of the temporary stop display of the decorative symbols (such as the progress of the variable display) and the game status. For example, one or both of the period and amplitude of the up and down movement of the decorative symbols may be changed. Furthermore, the swinging direction may be left and right or diagonal rather than up and down. Furthermore, instead of displaying the decorative symbols in a manner of rotation around the up and down axis, the decorative symbols may be displayed in a manner of rotation around the left and right axis or diagonal axis within a range of a predetermined angle (for example, 5 to 10 degrees).
In addition, the fluctuation state in which the temporary stop display is being performed may be referred to as "swing fluctuation" in this specification.

The display may change so that the temporarily displayed decorative pattern becomes the decorative pattern that will ultimately be displayed, or the temporarily displayed decorative pattern may be scrolled downwards again, and a decorative pattern with a different number attached may become the decorative pattern that will ultimately be displayed; details of this will be explained later.

In Figure 123 (D), arc-shaped lines are added to the top left and bottom right of the left decorative pattern with the number "2" attached. These lines indicate that the left decorative pattern with the number "2" attached is in a temporarily stopped state. In other drawings, such arc-shaped lines may be added to decorative patterns, and in these cases, they also indicate that the decorative pattern is in a temporarily stopped state.

Figure 123 (E) shows a state in which, following the left decorative pattern, the right decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in a stopped state, and the center decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable state. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number "2" attached is temporarily displayed as the left decorative pattern, and a decorative pattern with the number "4" attached is temporarily displayed as the right decorative pattern.

Figure 123 (F) shows the state in which the left decorative pattern through the right decorative pattern are displayed as still. In conjunction with the display of the center decorative pattern, the left and right decorative patterns that had been temporarily displayed are also displayed as still. In conjunction with the display of the left decorative pattern through the right decorative pattern, the figure shows that a decorative pattern with the number "2" attached to the left decorative pattern, a decorative pattern with the number "7" attached to the center decorative pattern, and a decorative pattern with the number "4" attached to the right decorative pattern are displayed as still. The combination of decorative patterns displayed as still displays indicates that the special lottery result was a loss. When the left decorative pattern through the right decorative pattern are displayed as still, as shown in the figure, the decorative patterns that were displayed above and below each decorative pattern during the fluctuating or temporary stop are no longer displayed. The display of the left decorative pattern through the right decorative pattern continues for a predetermined time (e.g., one second), after which a new display of the fluctuating decorative pattern corresponding to the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area begins. The reserved image that was displayed in the reserved image will cease to be displayed at the same time that the new decorative pattern begins to change.

Figure 123 (G) shows a state in which, following the display state shown with reference to Figure 123 (D), the right decorative pattern is displayed as a temporary stop following the left decorative pattern, and the center decorative pattern is being displayed as a variable stop. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number "2" attached to the left decorative pattern and a decorative pattern with the number "2" attached to the right decorative pattern are both displayed as temporary stops, indicating a display state in which a reach state has occurred.

Figure 123 (H) shows the state in which the left decorative pattern through the right decorative pattern are displayed as still symbols. In conjunction with the display of the center decorative pattern, the left and right decorative patterns that had been temporarily displayed are also displayed as still symbols. In conjunction with the display of the left and right decorative patterns, the figure shows that a decorative pattern with the number "2" added to the left decorative pattern, a decorative pattern with the number "2" added to the center decorative pattern, and a decorative pattern with the number "2" added to the right decorative pattern are displayed as still symbols. The combination of decorative patterns displayed as still symbols indicates that the special lottery result was a jackpot. When the left and right decorative patterns are displayed as still symbols, as shown in the figure, the decorative patterns that were displayed above and below each decorative pattern during the fluctuating or temporarily stopped state are no longer displayed. The left and right decorative patterns remain displayed as still symbols for a predetermined period of time (e.g., one second), after which the left and right decorative patterns are no longer displayed. After that, the jackpot game state begins, and when the jackpot game state ends, the display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern resumes, and then the display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area begins again.

In the example shown, the reserved image is displayed in the reserved image display area until the timing at which the new decorative pattern begins to change, but the display of the reserved image may also end at the same time as the display of the decorative pattern changes stops. Alternatively, the display of the reserved image may end at a predetermined timing between the time the display of the decorative pattern changes stops and the time the display of the new decorative pattern changes starts.

As described above, in the example of the decorative symbol variable display described with reference to FIG. 123 , in response to the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting slot 2002, the left decorative symbol through the right decorative symbol begin to display variably from a static display state, then display variably for a predetermined period of time, after which the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol temporarily stop in that order, and then the center decorative symbol becomes a static display state. Furthermore, in conjunction with the static display of the center decorative symbol, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol simultaneously become static display states. Furthermore, by stopping decorative symbols with the same number as the left decorative symbol through the right decorative symbol, it is indicated to the player that the special lottery result is a jackpot. Furthermore, by stopping decorative symbols with a different number as at least one of the left decorative symbol through the right decorative symbol, it is indicated to the player that the special lottery result is a loss.
The period during which the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are all stopped and displayed is, for example, one second (see FIG. 124, etc., described later). This period is sometimes referred to as the "fixed stop period" (or "fixed display period").

Note that one such variable display (from the start to the end of the variable display) may be referred to as a "game," and the number of times the variable display occurs may be referred to as the "number of games." For example, this term is used in situations such as "the number of time-saving games is 100," or "after the end of a game in which a special effect has been executed, the special effect will not be executed again within four games."

Although it has been shown that the reserved image is displayed in the reserved display area and that reserved images are displayed in the first to fourth reserved display areas, in order to clearly distinguish between them, the reserved image may be referred to as the current reserved image and the reserved image as the standby reserved image. Also, the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area may be referred to as the first standby reserved image, the reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area as the second standby reserved image, the reserved image displayed in the third reserved display area as the third standby reserved image, and the reserved image displayed in the fourth reserved display area as the fourth standby reserved image.
In addition, the reserved image (or the lottery information corresponding to this reserved image) displayed in the first reserved display area may be referred to as "Reserved 1." Similarly, the reserved images (or the lottery information corresponding to this reserved image) displayed in the second to fourth reserved display areas may be referred to as "Reserved 2" to "Reserved 4."

Below, a modified embodiment of the embodiment described with reference to Figure 123 will be described with reference to the presentation examples shown in Figures 124 and 125. Figure 124 is a time chart for this presentation example, and Figure 125 is a diagram showing the display state at a specified timing in the display area of the game board-side presentation display device 1600 in this presentation example. Note that in Figure 125, the variable display mode of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, the display mode of the reserved image in the reserved display area, and the display mode of the reserved image in the first reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area are the same as the display mode described with reference to Figure 123 unless otherwise noted. Note that these points also apply to the other embodiments and presentation examples described below unless otherwise noted.

Figure 124 is a time chart showing an example of a presentation in this embodiment. Just before timing t0, the display state in the display area of the game board presentation display device 1600 is a state in which the decorative symbols are stopped from fluctuating. Figure 125 (A) is a diagram showing this state, with decorative symbols numbered "6," "4," and "5" displayed stationary from left to right. From this state, when timing t0 arrives, a new display of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol begins. Figure 125 (B) is a diagram showing the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t1) after the start of the fluctuating display, showing the fluctuating display of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol.

In the time chart shown in Figure 124 (A), the passage of time is indicated as t0, t1 to t34, t35, etc. to explain the timing of the effects. The time between each timing is one second. These points also apply to the other embodiments and effect examples described below unless otherwise specified.

In the time chart shown in Figure 124, at timing t2, a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002, creating a new reserve. This start winning triggers the start of a pre-reading display at timing t2. Corresponding to the pre-reading display, a specific reserve image shaped like a pine branch with leaves is displayed instead of a regular reserve image. The specific reserve image is green in color. Figure 125 (C) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t3) after the pre-reading display starts at timing t2. It also shows a state in which a specific reserve image shaped like a pine branch with leaves is displayed in the third reserve display area instead of a regular circular reserve image.

When displaying the look-ahead effect, a look-ahead effect image is displayed in a frame around the display area, hiding part of the decorative pattern that scrolls downwards and moves to change position. The look-ahead effect image is an image in which multiple shapes (specifically six) resembling pine branches with leaves are arranged so that they protrude towards the inside of a horizontally long rectangular frame. The color of the look-ahead effect image is a slightly lighter green than the color of the specific reserved image.

The display of the look-ahead effect image and the specific reserve image is based on the results of a special lottery obtained when a game ball enters the first starting slot 2002, and the execution ratio for the effect is set so that the probability of a jackpot is higher when the look-ahead effect image and the specific reserve image are displayed compared to when only the normal circular white reserve image is displayed. For example, when the normal reserve image is displayed, the probability of a jackpot is set to 0.3%, and when the look-ahead effect image and the specific reserve image are displayed, the probability of a jackpot is set to 10.0%.

By configuring it in this way, when a pre-reading effect image and a specific reserved image are displayed and a decorative pattern corresponding to that specific reserved image is changed, the player will have a sense of anticipation that the decorative pattern will be displayed in a manner that indicates that a jackpot will occur as a result of the decorative pattern change, compared to when a normal reserved image is displayed and a decorative pattern corresponding to that reserved image is changed.

From timing t2 to timing t4, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are displayed while the look-ahead effect image is displayed, but while the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are displayed, the look-ahead effect image is displayed closer to the player than the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern. Therefore, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are displayed closer to the player while a portion of the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are hidden by the look-ahead effect image. Note that the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, the regular reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, the regular reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area, and the specific reserved image displayed in the third reserved display area are displayed closer to the player than the decorative patterns and the look-ahead effect image.

At timing t4, the left decorative pattern through the right decorative pattern are all displayed in a stopped state. Figure 125 (D) shows the display state when the left decorative pattern through the right decorative pattern are all displayed in a stopped state at timing t4. When the left decorative pattern through the right decorative pattern are displayed in a stopped state, the front-to-back relationship between the preview effect image and the left decorative pattern through the right decorative pattern is reversed, with the left decorative pattern through the right decorative pattern being displayed in front of the preview effect image. Note that the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, the regular reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, the regular reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area, and the specific reserved image displayed in the third reserved display area are displayed in front of the preview effect image.

When a decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the decorative patterns located above and below it are no longer displayed. For example, in Figure 125(D), only the decorative pattern marked with the number "1" is stopped and displayed as the left decorative pattern, but until just before timing t4, the lower part of the decorative pattern marked with the number "2" is displayed above the decorative pattern marked with the number "1," and the upper part of the decorative pattern marked with the number "9" is displayed below the decorative pattern marked with the number "1." This configuration allows only the decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed to stand out and be visible to the player.

The decorative symbols remain stationary and continue to be displayed from time t4 to time t5. During this period, the left to right decorative symbols continue to be displayed closer to the player than the preview image.

At timing t5, a new display of the decorative symbols begins. At the same time that the new display of the decorative symbols begins, the front-to-back relationship between the preview effect image and the left and right decorative symbols is reversed again, and the preview effect image is displayed in front of the left and right decorative symbols.

When a decorative pattern is statically displayed, the decorative patterns located above and below it are no longer displayed, but when a new decorative pattern begins to change, the display of the decorative patterns located above and below it resumes. For example, in Figure 125(D), only the decorative pattern with the number "1" is statically displayed as the left decorative pattern, but at timing t5, the lower part of the decorative pattern with the number "2" is displayed above the decorative pattern with the number "1," and the upper part of the decorative pattern with the number "9" is displayed below the decorative pattern with the number "1," and then the decorative patterns instantly begin to move downward.

Thereafter, the order of the pre-reading effect image and the left and right decorative patterns will be swapped in accordance with the start and end of the display of the decorative patterns. For example, from timing t4 to timing t5, the display mode in which the left and right decorative patterns are displayed in front of the pre-reading effect image will continue, but from timing t9 to timing t10 and from timing t14 to timing t15, the display mode in which the left and right decorative patterns are displayed in front of the pre-reading effect image will also continue.

At timing t15, the decorative pattern corresponding to the starting winning event that triggered the display of the preview effect image and the specific reserve image begins to change. Figure 125 (E) shows a state in which, at a predetermined timing after timing t15 (for example, timing t16), the preview effect image is displayed in front of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, and the specific reserve image is displayed in the reserve display area.

At timing t25, the left and right decorative symbols, each with the number "2" attached, are displayed in a temporary stop, creating a ready-to-win state. At this time, the middle decorative symbol remains in a variable display state, scrolling downward and moving. Also, at timing t25, the display of the look-ahead effect image that had been displayed up until then ends, and the look-ahead effect image is no longer displayed. Figure 125 (F) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (e.g., timing t26) after the ready-to-win state is created and the display of the look-ahead effect image ends at timing t25.

At timing t33, the center decorative symbol that was being displayed in a variable manner according to the special lottery result stops changing. Specifically, if the special lottery result is a loss, a decorative symbol with a number other than "2" will be displayed as a center decorative symbol. Also, if the special lottery result is a jackpot, a decorative symbol with the number "2" will be displayed as a center decorative symbol.

Figure 125 (G) shows the state in which, at timing t33, a decorative pattern with the number "3" added as the center decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. Then, at timing t34, the display of the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area ends. Meanwhile, the stopped display state of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern continues until a new gaming ball enters the first starting slot 2002.

On the other hand, Figure 125 (H) shows a state in which, at timing t33, a decorative pattern with the number "2" added as the center decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state. Then, at timing t34, the display of the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, along with the display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, ends, and the game transitions to a jackpot game state.

In this embodiment, the predictive effect image is displayed closer to the player than the decorative pattern while the decorative pattern is being displayed in a changing state, and the decorative pattern is displayed closer to the player than the predictive effect image while the decorative pattern is being displayed stationary.

By adopting this configuration, players can clearly visually grasp the start and stop of each variable display, making it possible for them to recognize that they are one step closer to the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the specific reserved image without having to check the movement of the specific reserved image.

In addition, the area occupied by the pre-reading effect image in the display area is larger than the area occupied by the specific hold image, and the pre-reading effect image is displayed closer to the stopping position of the decorative pattern than the specific hold image. Therefore, even if the player is concentrating on visually checking the changing state of the decorative pattern, it is possible for the player to recognize that they are one step closer to the changing display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the specific hold image.

In addition, by displaying the decorative pattern and the preview effect image in an overlapping position, it is possible to increase the size of both the decorative pattern and the preview effect image, thereby improving the efficiency of display area utilization. Furthermore, by configuring the image displayed in the foreground to switch between the decorative pattern and the preview effect image depending on the conditions, the display can be optimized.

Specifically, while the decorative symbols are changing, the look-ahead effect image is displayed in the foreground, creating a sense of anticipation in the player as the timing approaches for the changing display corresponding to the look-ahead effect image. On the other hand, while the decorative symbols are stopped, the stopping mode of the decorative symbols is not obstructed by the look-ahead effect image, making it possible to clearly show the player the entire decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed.

It is also possible to configure the system so that a performance mode can be implemented in which only one of the preview performance image and the specific reserve image is displayed. In this case, it is preferable to configure the system so that the level of expectation is higher when both the preview performance image and the specific reserve image are displayed compared to when only one of the preview performance image and the specific reserve image is displayed.

Although an example has been shown in which a specific reserved image is displayed in a shape resembling a pine branch with leaves, the display form of the specific reserved image may be other forms.
For example, the normal reserved image may be a white circular image, and the specific reserved image may be a red circular image. Also, multiple specific reserved images may be provided. For example, the specific reserved images may be displayed in blue, green, red, and gold (yellow), with the expectation increasing in the order of blue, green, red, and gold (yellow).

In this embodiment, multiple nails 1201 are inserted from the front into the nail through-holes 1110a provided in the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100. Specifically, the nail spiral-shaped portion 1201c provided at the tip of each nail 1201 engages with the panel board 1110 so that the nail 1201 is held in place on the panel board 1110. Furthermore, the panel board 1110 is formed from a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, allowing the movable gimmicks and illuminated decorative elements located behind the panel board 1110 to be viewed through the panel board 1110. However, engaging the nail spiral-shaped portion 1201c with the panel board 1110 can cause scratches or cracks on the panel board 1110, resulting in cloudy areas (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as whitened areas HKB). These areas are visible to players, detracting from the aesthetic appeal of the game. The manufacturing method and structure of the gaming panel 1100 are explained below with reference to Figures 126 and 127.

Figure 126(a) is a side view showing a blocking nail 1201 planted in a panel board 1110. Figure 126(b) is a cross-sectional view of the panel board 1110 and the blocking nail through-hole 1110a formed in the panel board 1110, viewed from the right. Figure 126(c) is a cross-sectional view of the blocking nail 1201 planted in the blocking nail through-hole 1110a formed in the panel board 1110, viewed from the right. Figure 126(d) is a cross-sectional view of a region A, viewed from the right, where a whitened portion HKB may occur around the blocking nail 1201 planted in the panel board 1110. Figure 126(e) is a cross-sectional view of an example of a state in which a whitened portion HKB has actually occurred around the blocking nail 1201 planted in the panel board 1110, viewed from the right. Figure 127(a) is a cross-sectional view showing the dimensions of each part that makes up the obstacle nail 1201, and Figure 127(b) is a cross-sectional view showing the dimensions of each part shown in the glass plate 192, obstacle nail 1201, and panel board 1110 when the obstacle nail 1201 has been implanted into the panel board 1110. Note that some reference numerals have been omitted in the figure.

The structure and shape of the obstacle nail 1201 will be explained with reference to Figure 126 (a). The obstacle nail 1201 is made entirely of brass and has a certain degree of elasticity. Furthermore, when illuminated with white light, the entire object appears to have a yellowish metallic luster. When viewed from the side, the obstacle nail 1201 consists, from the left, of an obstacle nail head 1201a, an obstacle nail first body 1201b, an obstacle nail spiral-shaped portion 1201c, an obstacle nail second body 1201d, and an obstacle nail tip 1201e. The length L1 of the obstacle nail 1201 is 27 mm. The obstacle nail head 1201a has a dome-like round head shape and is a perfect circle when viewed from the front. The diameter L2 of the obstacle nail head 1201a when viewed from the front is 4 mm, and the thickness L3 when viewed from the side is 1 mm. The obstacle nail first body 1201b is cylindrical. The length L4 of the first nail body 1201b is 20 mm. The diameter L5 of the first nail body 1201b is 2 mm. The spiral nail shape is approximately cylindrical. The length L7 of the spiral nail body 1201c is 4 mm. The diameter of the spiral nail body 1201c is slightly larger than the diameter L5 of the first nail body 1201b. The second nail body 1201d is cylindrical. The length L8 of the second nail body 1201d is 1 mm. The diameter L6 of the second nail body 1201d is 2 mm, the same as the diameter L5 of the first nail body 1201b. The tip 1201e is conical. The length L9 of the tip 1201e is 1 mm.

Next, with reference to Figures 126(b) and 127(b), the structure of the panel board 1110 before the obstacle nails 1201 are installed will be described. The panel board 1110 is formed from a colorless, transparent acrylic plate material. The front and rear surfaces of the panel board 1110 are formed smooth, allowing the components located to the rear to be clearly seen through the panel board 1110. The panel board 1110 may also be made from a plate material made from a colorless, transparent synthetic resin such as polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin. The thickness L10 of the panel board 1110 is 10 mm. The panel board 1110 has obstacle nail through-holes 1110a for installing the obstacle nails 1201. The obstacle nail through-holes 1110a are cylindrical in shape and have a diameter L11 of 2 mm. The obstacle nail through-holes 1110a are formed by cutting the panel board 1110. As a result, the inner walls of the obstacle nail through holes 1110a become slightly cloudy and are visible to the player.

Next, referring to Figures 126(c) and 127(b), a method for planting the obstacle nail 1201 into the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a provided in the panel board 1110 will be described. The obstacle nail tip 1201e of the obstacle nail 1201 is pushed into the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a, and force is applied backward (to the right in the figure) until the obstacle nail spiral-shaped portion 1201c, the obstacle nail second body portion 1201d, and the obstacle nail tip 1201e are all positioned within the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a, and a portion of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b is positioned within the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a, completing the planting of the obstacle nail 1201 into the panel board 1110. The obstacle nail 1201 is planted using a nail gun. The length L4 of the first body portion 1201b of the nail is 20 mm, of which the length L12 of the portion located within the nail hole 1110a is 3 mm, and the length L13 of the portion not located within the nail hole 1110a but located in front of the front surface of the panel board 1110 is 17 mm. Figure 126 (c) shows the state after the nail 1201 has been installed into the panel board 1110.

The distance L14 between the tip of the obstacle nail tip 1201e and the rear surface of the panel board 1110 is 1 mm. This configuration makes it possible to prevent situations in which an amusement machine manufacturer or an amusement parlor employee is injured by the obstacle nail 1201, even if they inadvertently touch the rear surface of the panel board 1110.

The reason why the shape of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a is such that it passes through the panel board 1110 is to allow the acrylic resin powder that is produced when the inner wall of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a is scraped away when the obstacle nail 1201 is planted into the panel board 1110 to be expelled to the outside from the rear of the panel board 1110.

As described above, the diameter L5 of the first nail body portion 1201b and the diameter L6 of the second nail body portion 1201d are 2 mm. Similarly, the diameter L11 of the nail through hole 1110a is also 2 mm. On the other hand, the diameter of the nail spiral portion 1201c is slightly larger than 2 mm. Therefore, when the nail 1201 is pushed into the nail through hole 1110a, the nail spiral portion 1201c slightly deforms the inner wall of the nail through hole 1110a. Once the nail 1201 has been pushed in, the nail spiral portion 1201c engages with the inner wall of the nail through hole 1110a, firmly holding the nail 1201 against the panel board 1110.

The diameter L11 of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a may be configured to be slightly larger than the diameter L5 of the first obstacle nail body portion 1201b and the diameter L6 of the second obstacle nail body portion 1201d, and slightly smaller than the diameter of the spiral-shaped obstacle nail portion 1201c. In this case, when the spiral-shaped obstacle nail portion 1201c is engaged with the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a, a small gap will be created between the first obstacle nail body portion 1201b or the second obstacle nail body portion 1201d and the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a. With this configuration, when a game ball strikes the obstacle nail 1201 and the obstacle nail 1201 elastically deforms, the obstacle nail 1201 is allowed to elastically deform by the amount of this gap. This prevents the obstacle nail 1201 from breaking when the game ball repeatedly strikes the obstacle nail 1201.

However, during the process of installing the obstacle nail 1201, the obstacle nail spiral-shaped portion 1201c moves backward within the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a, causing scratches on the inside of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a in the panel board 1110, which can appear white.

Furthermore, the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a is formed by cutting the panel board 1110, and has a shape that penetrates the panel board 1110. Because it is formed by cutting, the inner surface of the through-hole is rough and appears white. In particular, because the tip portion 1201e of the obstacle nail is planted while remaining within the panel board 1110, the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a itself appears white at the rearmost portion.

Furthermore, once the installation of the obstruction nail 1201 is complete, the obstruction nail through-hole 1110a undergoes elastic deformation, maintaining its engagement with the obstruction nail spiral-shaped portion 1201c. However, if the limit of elastic deformation is exceeded, cracks may develop from the inner wall of the obstruction nail through-hole 1110a, into which the obstruction nail spiral-shaped portion 1201c engages, toward the outside.

Furthermore, when playing on a gaming machine installed in an amusement parlor, the gaming ball may collide with the obstacle nail 1201 multiple times, causing the kinetic energy of the gaming ball to be transmitted to the inner wall of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a via the part of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b located within the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a, which may cause cracks to form on the front side of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a. Cracks may also form around the area where the obstacle nail spiral-shaped portion 1201c engages in the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a (inside the panel board 1110).

Furthermore, when a gaming machine is installed in an amusement parlor, there is a risk of fraudulent behavior, such as forcibly bending the obstacle nail 1201 in an attempt to favorably influence the winning rate for a specific winning slot. Or, an amusement parlor employee may clean the front of the panel board 1110 with the door frame 3 in the open position, and then accidentally pinch a cleaning tool or the like between the door frame 3 and the obstacle nail 1201 when moving the door frame 3 in the closing direction to close the door frame 3. In such cases, a large force is applied to the obstacle nail 1201, and this force is transmitted to the inner wall of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a via the portion of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b located within the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a, possibly causing a crack to form on the front side of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a. Furthermore, cracks may form around the area where the obstacle nail spiral-shaped portion 1201c engages in the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a (inside the panel board 1110).

In Figure 126(d), A indicates the area where a whitened portion HKB may occur due to a collision with the game ball YGK. Figures 126(e) and 127(b) show examples of actual whitened portions HKB. Figures 126(e) and 127(b) show a state in which the force applied to the first body portion 1201b of the obstacle nail is transmitted to the inner wall of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a, causing a whitened portion HKB to occur on the front surface of the panel board 1110. They also show a state in which a whitened portion HKB occurs inside the panel board 1110, starting from the point where the obstacle nail spiral-shaped portion 1201c engages with the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a. As shown in Figure 127(b), the diameter L15 of the game ball YGK is 11 mm, the thickness L16 of the glass plate 192 is 3 mm, and the distance L17 between the glass plate 192 and the obstacle nail 1201 is 2 mm.

Furthermore, the longer the operation period at the gaming parlor, the higher the possibility of whitened areas HKB occurring on the panel board 1110. In addition, once whitened areas HKB occur, the structure of the synthetic resin around the whitened areas HKB weakens, and the whitened areas HKB gradually expand from that point, and when viewed from the front, the whitened areas HKB may extend outward from the obstructing nail 1201 as their center.

The shape of a single whitened area HKB that occurs in this way is generally flat, with an area of approximately 1-2 square mm, but multiple whitened areas HKB may occur radially from a single obstructing nail 1201 when viewed from the front. Furthermore, such whitened areas HKB may occur on multiple obstructing nails 1201.

Furthermore, the occurrence of such whitened portions HKB may weaken the engagement strength between the obstructing nail through-hole 1110a and the obstructing nail spiral-shaped portion 1201c. In this case, the rebound behavior of the gaming ball when it hits the obstructing nail 1201 may be weaker than expected at the time of shipping the pachinko machine 1 (the gaming ball may not bounce much when it hits the nail, and instead absorbs its momentum), which could result in a change in the winning rate for the winning slot.

When playing on a gaming machine installed in an amusement parlor, if the machine is operated at the amusement parlor for an extended period of time, the obstructing pin 1201 may break. In this case, the entire gaming board 5' will need to be replaced.

When obstacle nails 1201 are planted in a panel board 1110 made of colorless, transparent synthetic resin, the aesthetic appearance is improved by making the specified movable parts and specified illuminating decorative parts located behind the panel board 1110 visible. However, there is also the problem that the area around the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a where the obstacle nail 1201 is planted appears white, which detracts from the aesthetic appearance. Measures to solve these problems are described below.

Figure 128 shows an embodiment in which a panel board back rough surface portion 1110b is provided on the rear surface of the panel board 1110. Figure 128(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. Note that the obstacle nail head portion 1201a is omitted from the illustration. Therefore, the circles representing the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 shown in the figure actually indicate the thickness of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b of the obstacle nail 1201 that constitutes the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232. This can also be said to indicate the thickness of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a. These points are also true for each drawing that illustrates an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to Figure 128.

Figure 128(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A in Figure 128(a). Figure 128(b) shows a schematic cross-section of the area where the life nail 1230, located on the left side when viewed from the front, is implanted. This also applies to the other drawings that illustrate modified embodiments of the embodiment described with reference to Figure 128.

Figure 128(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure near the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection. The inclination angle in this cabinet diagram is 45 degrees. Note that in the figure, the fine structure of the obstacle nail 1201, such as the obstacle nail head 1201a, obstacle nail spiral-shaped portion 1201c, and obstacle nail tip portion 1201e, is omitted, and the entire obstacle nail 1201 is shown as a single cylinder. Note that in this cylinder, the portion shown in solid lines indicates the obstacle nail head 1201a of the obstacle nail 1201 and the portion of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b that is located in front of the panel board 1110. Additionally, in this cylinder, the portions indicated by dotted lines indicate the portion of the first nail body 1201b located inside the panel board 1110, the spiral nail portion 1201c, the second nail body 1201d, the nail tip 1201e, and the rear end of the nail through-hole 1110a. Note that these points also apply to the drawings illustrating modified versions of the embodiment described with reference to Figure 128.

Note that the whitened portion HKB is omitted from illustration in Figure 128(a). Also, the whitened portion HKB is omitted from illustration in Figure 128(c), but the whitened portion HKB occurs around the portion of the obstructing nail 1201 indicated by the dotted line. Also, the first starting hole 2002 is omitted from illustration in Figures 128(a) to 128(c). Note that these points also apply to the various drawings illustrating modified versions of the embodiment described with reference to Figure 128.

The panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b may be formed by cutting the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 to a thickness of approximately 1 mm. The panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b may also be formed with a lens cut or matte finish. When light emitted by the pachinko machine 1, light from lighting equipment installed inside the gaming parlor, or light from other gaming machines installed inside the gaming parlor is incident on the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b formed in this way from the front or rear, this light is diffused by the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, causing it to appear whitish.

As shown in Figures 128(a) and 128(c), the portion of the panel board 1110 where the obstacle nail through holes 1110a are provided will be visible to the player as overlapping with the rough surface portion 1110b of the panel board when viewed from the front or from diagonally above left in relation to the rough surface portion 1110b of the panel board.

In this way, by positioning the brightly colored visible portion (roughened back surface of panel 1110b) behind the obstacle nails 1201 planted as life nails 1230, jump nails 1231, and left-side guide nails 1232 on the transparent plate portion (panel 1110), the brightly colored visible portion, which appears white, makes it possible to make the whitened portion HKB near the planted location of the obstacle nails 1201 less noticeable.

White refers to the color that is visible when a given object uniformly and diffusely reflects all wavelengths of natural light irradiated onto it (approximately 100-80%), regardless of wavelength range. Light colors refer to colors that are visible when a given object absorbs a portion of the natural light irradiated onto it in a specific wavelength range and largely diffusely reflects the remaining wavelength range, resulting in colors such as cream, light gray, and light yellow. Black refers to the color that is visible when the surface of a given object uniformly absorbs most of the visible light in all wavelengths of natural light irradiated onto it and diffusely reflects a portion of the irradiated natural light (approximately 20-several percent). Dark colors refer to colors that uniformly absorb most of the wavelength range of natural light irradiated onto a given object and diffusely reflect only a portion of the irradiated light (approximately 20-several percent), but due to differences in light absorption in certain wavelength ranges, appear as a color close to black, such as a dark blue. These definitions may be adopted as the definitions of each color in this specification. Note that in the embodiments described in this specification, a white portion may be configured to be a light color, or a light portion may be configured to be white. For example, instead of emitting white light from a specific light-emitting component, a light-colored portion may be configured to emit light light. Furthermore, a black portion may be configured to be a dark color, or a dark portion may be configured to be black.

Figure 128(d) shows a modified example of the embodiment described with reference to Figure 128(a). In the example shown in Figure 128(d), a lower panel light-emitting board 2400 is provided below the panel board 1110, and white light emitted from the lower panel light-emitting board 2400 is introduced into the panel board 1110. The introduced white light is diffused by the rough rear surface 1110b of the panel board. In this case, the rough rear surface 1110b of the panel board is visible to the player as white light. The lower panel light-emitting board 2400 may be configured to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. Alternatively, a light-emitting unit similar to the lower panel light-emitting board 2400 may be provided to the side or above the panel board 1110, rather than below the panel board 1110, instead of or in addition to the lower panel light-emitting board 2400, and the light-emitting unit thus provided may be configured to emit light in the same way as the lower panel light-emitting board 2400.

With this configuration, even if the amount of light emitted from the lighting equipment installed inside the gaming parlor is weak or the light emitted by the gaming machines installed inside the gaming parlor is weak (for example, a gaming machine that is not being played on may automatically enter power saving mode, reducing the amount of light emitted by the gaming machine, or a player may adjust the light output of a gaming machine that is being played on, reducing the amount of light emitted by the gaming machine), the rough surface back of the panel board 1110b and the whitened portion HKB will be visible as a single unit, making it possible to make the whitened portion HKB near the installation site of the obstructing nail 1201 less noticeable. In this state, the whitened portion HKB itself will diffusely reflect the introduced white light and will appear white, but because the rough surface back of the panel board 1110b is larger than the whitened portion HKB and diffusely reflects more light behind the whitened portion HKB, the whitened portion HKB will not be noticeable.

Note that several embodiments that are modifications of the embodiment described with reference to Figure 128 are shown below, and the technical content shown in one embodiment may be applied to the technical content shown in another embodiment.

In the example shown, white light is introduced from the lower panel light-emitting substrate 2400 to the side of the panel 1110, but yellow light may be introduced instead. In this case, the roughened rear surface 1110b of the panel will appear yellow to the player due to the introduced light. The whitened portion HKB will also appear yellow due to the introduced light. As mentioned above, the obstacle nail 1201 is made of brass and has a yellowish metallic luster. Therefore, the colors of the roughened rear surface 1110b of the panel and the whitened portion HKB will appear similar to the color of the obstacle nail 1201, making the presence of the whitened portion HKB less noticeable. This is because the use of the obstructing nails 1201 in pachinko machines 1 has been around for several decades, so players are unlikely to feel uncomfortable with the color or shape of the portions of the obstructing nail 1201 located closer to the front of the panel board 1110 (the obstructing nail head 1201a and the portion of the obstructing nail first body 1201b that is not embedded in the panel board 1110).

Below, with reference to Figure 129, we will explain an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to Figure 128, in which a panel board rear decorative member 2410 capable of diffusely reflecting light is provided close to the back surface of the panel board 1110.

Figure 129(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. Figure 129(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A in Figure 129(a). Figure 129(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection. Figure 129(d) is a cross-sectional view showing an embodiment in which a lower panel light-emitting substrate 2400 is provided below the panel board 1110.

In this embodiment, a rear panel decorative member 2410 made of a colorless, transparent synthetic resin is positioned behind the panel 1110. The rear panel decorative member 2410 is 2 mm thick and has a rear panel decorative member rough surface 2410a formed on the front side by lens cutting or matte finishing. The rear panel decorative member rough surface 2410a diffuses ambient light and appears whitish in color. The rear panel decorative member rough surface 2410a is located on the front of the rear panel decorative member 2410 because, compared to when it is located on the rear surface, it can be positioned closer to the whitened portion HKB, allowing it to be viewed as more integrated with the whitened portion HKB.

The panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is configured to be located behind the obstacle nails 1201, which are planted as life nails 1230, jump nails 1231, and left guide nails 1232 in the panel board 1110.

In this way, a decorative member (such as the rear panel decorative member 2410) with a diffused reflection portion (such as the rough surface portion 2410a of the rear panel decorative member) is positioned behind the obstacle nails 1201 planted as life nails 1230, jump nails 1231, and left-side guide nails 1232 on the transparent plate portion (such as the panel 1110). This diffused reflection portion, which appears white, makes the whitened portion HKB near the installation site of the obstacle nail 1201 less noticeable. Furthermore, by providing the diffused reflection portion on the front surface of the decorative member, the distance between the diffused reflection portion and the whitened portion HKB can be reduced, allowing the diffused reflection portion and the whitened portion HKB to be more clearly visible as a single unit. In this or other embodiments, the front surface of the diffused reflection portion (such as the rough surface portion 2410a of the rear panel decorative member) of the decorative member (such as the rear panel decorative member 2410) may be metal-plated to form a textured, metallically glossy portion.

As shown in Figure 129(d), the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 may be configured to irradiate the panel board rear decorative member 2410 with light of a predetermined color (e.g., white or yellow), and the irradiated light may be reflected by the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a. Furthermore, the light emitting modes shown in the embodiment described with reference to Figure 128(d) may be adopted as the light emitting modes of the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 in this embodiment. With this configuration, even when the light emitted by the pachinko machine 1, the light from lighting equipment installed in the gaming parlor, or the light from other gaming machines installed in the gaming parlor is weak, the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a can be made to appear whitish, and as a result, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

Below, with reference to Figure 130, we will describe an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to Figure 129, in which a panel board rear substrate 2420 capable of reflecting light is provided close to the back surface of the panel board 1110.

Figure 130(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. Figure 130(b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure of the panel board rear base plate 2420 using an oblique projection. Figure 130(c) is a cross-sectional view taken along A-A in Figure 130(a). Figure 130(d) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection.

In this embodiment, the panel board rear substrate 2420, which is made of a white printed circuit board, is configured to be directly visible through the panel board 1110. Even with this configuration, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable by the panel board rear substrate 2420, which is visible in white. It is recommended that a light-colored light-emitting diode be used for the light-emitting diode mounted on the front surface of the panel board rear substrate 2420.

In this embodiment, a light-emitting diode that emits light laterally may be used as the panel board rear board light-emitting unit 2425. In this case, it is possible to emit light from the panel board rear board light-emitting unit 2425 all over the front surface of the panel board rear board 2420.

An embodiment that combines the embodiment described with reference to Figure 129 and the embodiment described with reference to Figure 130 will be described with reference to Figure 131.

Figure 131(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. Figure 131(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A in Figure 131(a). Figure 131(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, jump nail 1231, and left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment using an oblique projection.

In this embodiment, a panel rear decorative member 2410 made of colorless, transparent synthetic resin with a lens-cut front surface is placed behind the obstruction nail 1201, and further behind that is a white panel rear board 2420 having a panel rear board light-emitting portion 2425. This configuration makes the whitened portion HKB less noticeable, especially when the panel rear board light-emitting portion 2425 is turned off.

In this embodiment, the light emitted from the panel board rear board light-emitting unit 2425 is reflected between the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a, which is capable of diffusely reflecting light, and the panel board rear board 2420, which is made of a white printed circuit board. This results in the light being uniformly irradiated over the entire panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a, thereby improving the utilization efficiency of the light emitted from the panel board rear board light-emitting unit 2425.

With reference to Figures 129 to 131, we have shown an embodiment in which the whitened portion HKB is less noticeable by positioning one or both of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 behind the panel board 1110. However, as an effect, one or both of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 may be configured to be able to move or rotate. This movement effect may also be configured to be executed under control of the peripheral control board 1510. This movement effect may also be configured to indicate the likelihood of a jackpot. The drive mechanism for moving and rotating the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 may also be configured to be driven and controlled by the peripheral control board 1510.

However, if the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and panel board rear substrate 2420 are configured to be movable in this manner, there is a possibility that the whitened portion HKB, which was previously less noticeable due to the panel board rear decorative member 2410 or panel board rear substrate 2420 being positioned in the standby position, may become more noticeable when the panel board rear decorative member 2410 or panel board rear substrate 2420 moves to the moving position. Therefore, in order to prevent the whitened portion HKB from becoming more noticeable, the following embodiment may be adopted.

Figure 132 shows an embodiment in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 of the embodiment described with reference to Figure 129 has been modified to be movable in the vertical direction. Figure 132(a) is an A-A cross-sectional view of Figure 129(a), showing the panel board rear decorative member 2410 in the standby position. Figure 132(b) is an A-A cross-sectional view of Figure 129(a), showing the panel board rear decorative member 2410 in the moving position. When the panel board rear decorative member 2410 moves from the standby position to the first moving position, it moves a predetermined distance (10 mm) upward in a plane parallel to the panel board 1110. Even in this state, the obstruction nail 1201 and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 are positioned so that they overlap when viewed from the front. Figure 132(c) is an A-A cross-sectional view of Figure 129(a), showing the panel board rear decorative member 2410 in the moving position. When the panel board rear decorative member 2410 moves from the standby position to the second movement position, it moves a predetermined distance (20 mm) upward on a plane parallel to the panel board 1110, but in this state, the obstruction nail 1201 and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 are positioned so that they do not overlap when viewed from the front.

In this way, when a decorative element having a diffuse reflection portion (for example, the rear panel decorative element 2410) moves from a standby position to a first movement position during a movement performance, the obstruction nail 1201 is positioned so that it overlaps with the rear panel decorative element 2410 when viewed from the front, thereby maintaining a state in which the whitened portion HKB is less noticeable.

When the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is moved to the first movement position, it is desirable that all of the obstruction nails 1201 remain overlapping the panel board rear decorative member 2410 in a front view. However, even if only some of the obstruction nails 1201 are positioned so that they overlap the panel board rear decorative member 2410 in a front view, the whitened portion HKB can remain inconspicuous.

When the panel board rear decorative member 2410 moves to the second movement position, which is farther away than the first movement position, the greater the impact on the player due to the greater movement distance, but the obstacle nail 1201 shown in Figure 132 (c) and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 no longer overlap when viewed from the front. Therefore, it is preferable to configure the system so that the frequency of the effect in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is moved from the standby position to the first movement position and then returned to the standby position without moving to the second movement position is higher than the frequency of the effect in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is moved from the standby position to the second movement position and then returned to the standby position. This configuration makes it possible to diversify the performance patterns for moving the panel board rear decorative member 2410 while reducing the frequency of situations in which the whitened portion HKB becomes noticeable.

When moving the rear panel decorative member 2410, it is advisable to move the rear panel decorative member 2410 and the lower panel light-emitting board 2400 together. Alternatively, it is advisable to move the rear panel decorative member 2410 and the lower panel board 2420 together. Then, when the rear panel decorative member 2410 is in the first movement position or the second movement position, it is advisable to put the lower panel light-emitting board 2400 or the rear panel board 2420 into a light-emitting performance state.

Furthermore, when the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is in the first movement position, the panel board lower light-emitting substrate 2400 or the panel board rear substrate 2420 may be configured to emit different light when it is in the first movement position and when it is in the second movement position, thereby creating a light-emitting effect state in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is visible in a different light-emitting state. Furthermore, the game board side effect display device 1600 may simultaneously display a special effect image corresponding to this light-emitting effect state. Also, different effect images may be displayed when the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is in the first movement position and when it is in the second movement position. The external shape of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 in the first movement position or the second movement position and the special effect image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to represent a single character or a single effect. For example, a special effect image may be displayed in which rain or snow has fallen on the panel board rear decorative member 2410 representing a mountain range. Additionally, these multiple presentation modes may be configured to suggest different odds of winning.

This configuration draws the player's attention to the rear panel decorative member 2410 and the game board side performance display device 1600 located in the direction of the movement of the rear panel decorative member 2410, so even if the rear panel decorative member 2410 moves to the second movement position and the obstructing nail 1201 no longer overlaps with the rear panel decorative member 2410 when viewed from the front, it is possible to divert the player's attention from the whitened portion HKB.

Figure 133 shows an embodiment in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and panel board rear base plate 2420 have been modified to be movable in the vertical direction in the embodiment described with reference to Figure 131.

Figure 133(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in Figure 131(a), showing the rear panel decorative member 2410 and rear panel base plate 2420 in their standby positions.

Figure 133(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in Figure 131(a), showing the state in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is in the moving position. When the panel board rear decorative member 2410 moves from the standby position to the moving position, it moves a predetermined distance (20 mm) upward on a plane parallel to the panel board 1110. In this state, the obstruction nail 1201 and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 are positioned so that they overlap when viewed from the front, but the obstruction nail 1201 and the panel board rear base plate 2420 are also positioned so that they overlap when viewed from the front.

Figure 133(c) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in Figure 131(a), showing the state in which the rear panel board substrate 2420 is in the moving position. When the rear panel board substrate 2420 moves from the standby position to the moving position, it moves a predetermined distance (20 mm) upward in a plane parallel to the panel board 1110. In this state, the obstructing nail 1201 and the rear panel board substrate 2420 are positioned so that they do not overlap when viewed from the front, but the obstructing nail 1201 and the rear panel board decorative member 2410 are positioned so that they overlap when viewed from the front.

In this way, it is possible to configure the system so that at a certain timing, only one of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 moves from the standby position to the moving position, and to prevent both the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 from moving to the moving position at the same time. For example, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 may move alternately in and out of the upward and downward directions.

With this configuration, even when a movement effect is performed in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 or the panel board rear substrate 2420 is moved to a moving position, the obstructing nail 1201 is positioned so as to overlap, in a front view, with either the panel board rear decorative member 2410 or the panel board rear substrate 2420 that has not moved, thereby maintaining a state in which the whitened portion HKB is less noticeable. While an embodiment has been shown in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are each moved from a standby position to a moving position, a panel board rear decorative member 2410 may be provided in place of the panel board rear substrate 2420, and two panel board rear decorative members 2410 overlapping in the front-to-back direction may be moved in the same manner. Furthermore, a panel board rear substrate 2420 may be provided in place of the panel board rear decorative member 2410, and two panel board rear substrates 2420 overlapping in the front-to-back direction may be moved in the same manner. Additionally, the front-to-rear positions of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 may be reversed, with the panel board rear substrate 2420 positioned forward and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 positioned rearward, and they may be moved in the same manner. Additionally, multiple decorative units consisting of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 may be stacked and positioned, and they may be moved in the same manner.

Figure 133(d) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in Figure 131(a), showing both the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 in their moving positions. When the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 move from their standby position to their moving position, they move a predetermined distance (20 mm) upward in a plane parallel to the panel board 1110. In this state, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are positioned so that they do not overlap with the obstructing nail 1201 when viewed from the front. In this case, there is a risk that the whitened portion HKB around the tip of the obstructing nail 1201 will be noticeable.

Therefore, when both the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are in the moving position, the panel board rear substrate 2420 may be made to emit light in a specified luminous color, thereby putting the panel board rear decorative member 2410 into a light-emitting performance state. Furthermore, the game board side performance display device 1600 may simultaneously display a special performance image corresponding to this light-emitting performance state. A single character, etc. may be represented by the external shape of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 in the moving position and the special performance image displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. Note that an embodiment similar to that described with reference to Figure 132 may also be adopted.

With this configuration, the player's attention is drawn to the rear panel decorative member 2410, the rear panel board base plate 2420, and the game board side performance display device 1600 located in the direction in which the rear panel decorative member 2410 or the rear panel board base plate 2420 has moved. Therefore, even if the rear panel decorative member 2410 or the rear panel board 2420 has moved to a new position and the obstructing nail 1201 no longer overlaps with the rear panel decorative member 2410 or the rear panel board 2420 when viewed from the front, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

A decorative member with a predetermined pattern or the like on its front surface and visible with a bright color or metallic luster may be provided behind the movable panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the movable panel board rear substrate 2420, in a position overlapping the obstructing nail 1201 in a front view. This decorative member may be configured to be visible when both the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are moved from the standby position to the moving position. Note that a similar decorative means may also be used when only one of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 is present. This configuration makes it possible to maintain an inconspicuous whitened portion HKB even when both the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are moved to their moving positions.

Figure 134 shows an embodiment in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 of the embodiment described with reference to Figure 129 has been modified to be rotatable around a left-right axis. Figure 134(a) is an A-A cross-sectional view of Figure 129(a), showing the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear base plate 2420 in the standby position. Figure 134(b) is an A-A cross-sectional view of Figure 129(a), showing the panel board rear decorative member 2410 in the moving position. By rotating the panel board rear decorative member 2410 from the standby position to the moving position, it rotates approximately 30 degrees clockwise when viewed from the right side. Even in this state, the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 are positioned so that they overlap when viewed from the front. Figure 134(c) is a modified version of the cross-sectional view shown in Figure 134(b), showing the game board side performance display device 1600 located behind the panel board rear decorative member 2410.

In this way, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 may be configured to be rotatable around the panel board rear decorative member rotation axis 2410c, allowing it to assume a standby state parallel to the panel board 1110 and a moving state that is not parallel. Furthermore, it is preferable to configure the action of moving to the moving state to be executable as an effect indicating a high likelihood of a jackpot. Specifically, it is preferable to provide multiple rotation angles for the moving position of the panel board rear decorative member 2410, so that the rotation angle indicates the likelihood of a jackpot. Furthermore, when the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is not parallel to the panel board 1110, it is preferable to configure it so that light from the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 located behind the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is directly incident on the front surface of the panel board rear decorative member 2410, as shown in FIG. 134(c). In this case, the light emitted from the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 is diffused by the panel board rear decorative member 2410, making the whitened portion HKB less noticeable. Furthermore, if the display mode of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 is to flash a specified image at a specified cycle, the whitened portion HKB can be made even less noticeable.

In addition, light may be emitted not only onto the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, but also onto the front surface of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 rotated a predetermined angle using another component capable of emitting light.

In this way, the panel board rear decorative member 2410, which is originally tilted or has become tilted, may be configured so that the game board side performance display device 1600 or other light-emitting decorative member directly illuminates it with white light, indicating a high likelihood of a jackpot. In this case, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is illuminated in white, making the whitened portion HKB less noticeable than when illuminated in another color. Note that yellow light may be used instead of white light.

Incidentally, gaming machines may be installed in gaming parlors for several years. Meanwhile, the history of gaming boards formed by embedding nails in transparent panels is shorter than that of gaming boards formed by embedding nails in wooden panels. It's only been in the last 10 years or so that gaming machines with nails embedded in transparent panels have been fully installed in gaming parlors. Furthermore, the playability of gaming machines themselves is constantly evolving. For this reason, the gauge configuration formed by driving in nails and the devices installed on gaming boards change from time to time, and accordingly, the number of nails embedded in the transparent panel, the positions at which the nails are embedded, and the spacing between the nails also change accordingly. For this reason, it currently takes a certain amount of time to verify whether these diverse gauge configuration patterns are prone to or less likely to cause whitened areas (HKB).

In the past, examples of obstacle nails that receive impacts from collisions with game balls, particularly immediately after launch, include multiple obstacle nails 1201 planted in the upper left of the play area 5a and specific obstacle nails 1201 among multiple obstacle nails 1201 planted on the right side of the play area 5a. Furthermore, deterioration of the whitened HKB has been suspected in obstacle nails 1201 onto which game balls subsequently concentrate depending on the game status, such as multiple obstacle nails 1201 planted on the left side of the play area 5a, which game balls rolling from the upper left of the play area 5a collide with with a predetermined probability and concentrate during normal play, obstacle nails 1201 (jump nail 1231, life nail 1230, left-side guide nail 1232) installed in accordance with the rolling path from the upper left of the play area 5a to the first starting hole 2002, and obstacle nails 1201 installed near the big prize hole 2005 and which concentrate during jackpot play.

The following embodiment describes an embodiment that allows a gaming establishment's staff member to determine whether a quality problem is likely to occur in a gaming machine before such a problem occurs, which could impair the progress of play or the aesthetics perceived by players during operation of the gaming machine at the gaming establishment.

In the example shown, a brightly colored visible portion, a diffusely reflective portion, and a metallic gloss portion are provided behind the area where the obstructing nails 1201 are implanted to make the whitened portion HKB less noticeable when the area where the obstructing nails 1201 are implanted is viewed from the front. However, to solve the above problem, a configuration may be adopted in which the whitened portion HKB of certain obstructing nails 1201 is intentionally implanted in a more noticeable position.

Specifically, of the obstacle nails 1201 that make up the left guide nail 1232, the first obstacle nail 1201 and the second obstacle nail 1201 from the left may be positioned so that they overlap a decorative member that is not light-colored (preferably a dark-colored decorative member) when viewed from the front.

This configuration makes the whitened areas HKB less noticeable for many of the obstructing nails 1201, while making the occurrence of the whitened areas HKB clearly visible for some specific obstructing nails 1201. This makes it easy to estimate the cumulative operating time of the gaming machine, and can serve as an indicator of whether or not a quality problem is likely to occur with the gaming machine.

As a dark decorative member, it is desirable to use a decorative member decorated with a black base, for example, to make the whitened portion HKB more noticeable. Alternatively, it is advisable to use a liquid crystal display device, which is often used as a basic device that makes up a gaming machine as an effect display device. For example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600 appears as a flat black surface in front of it.

Figure 135 shows an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to Figure 60. Figure 135 is a front view of the game board 5. In this embodiment, a game board-side performance display device 1600 is provided behind a colorless and transparent panel board 1110, and some of the life nails 1230, jump nails 1231, left-side guide nails 1232, and other obstacle nails 1201 planted in the panel board 1110 are positioned so that they overlap with the display area 1600a of the game board-side performance display device 1600 in a front view. When the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, the front of the display area 1600a is visible as a black flat surface.

In this way, by planting a specified obstacle nail 1201 in a position that overlaps with a dark decorative member or the display area 1600a of the game board side display device 1600, which is visible as a dark surface when viewed from the front, or in a position that overlaps with a dark decorative member or the display area 1600a of the game board side display device 1600 when the line of sight is tilted a specified angle in a specified direction around the center position of the pachinko machine as described above, it becomes easy to check the state of the whitened portion HKB on the specified obstacle nail 1201.

This configuration makes it easy to check the occurrence of whitened portions HKB for specific obstructing nails 1201 that are planted in positions that overlap with the dark-colored decorative members and the display area 1600a of the game board-side display device 1600 when viewed from the front. It is also possible to configure the dark-colored decorative members and the display area 1600a of the game board-side display device 1600 to be positioned so that they overlap with the specific obstructing nails 1201 when the line of sight is tilted a specific angle in a specific direction around the center of the pachinko machine, as described above. This configuration may also be adopted for the obstructing nails 1201 in other embodiments to enhance the visibility of the whitened portions HKB.

Figure 136 shows an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to Figure 135. Figure 136 is a front view of the game board 5. In this embodiment, a panel board back surface portion 1110b is provided on the back surface of the panel board 1110. The life nails 1230, jump nails 1231, and some of the left-side guide nails 1232 embedded in the panel board 1110 are positioned so that they overlap with the panel board back surface portion 1110b, which is visible in a bright color, when viewed from the front. On the other hand, some of the left-side guide nails 1232 (the two obstacle nails 1201 at the top left) and the other obstacle nails 1201 do not overlap with the panel board back surface portion 1110b when viewed from the front, but are positioned so that they overlap with the display area 1600a of the game board-side performance display device 1600.

With this configuration, the whitened portions HKB of some of the obstructing nails 1201 can always be made less noticeable, and for other obstructing nails 1201, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the whitened portions HKB can be made less noticeable by displaying bright or yellow effect images in the display area 1600a in the manner described above depending on the game status, and the whitened portions HKB can be made more noticeable when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned off.

In the embodiment described with reference to Figure 136, the above-mentioned embodiment may be applied in place of the panel board back surface portion 1110b, thereby making the whitened portion HKB less noticeable for some of the obstructing nails 1201. For example, at least one of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 may be provided in place of or in addition to the panel board back surface portion 1110b. The shapes of these members when viewed from the front should preferably be the same as the shape of the panel board back surface portion 1110b when viewed from the front.

Gaming machines equipped with operating means have been considered in the past, but below we will explain a gaming machine that is equipped with multiple operating means and effectively utilizes these operating means in its presentation. As shown in Figure 137, the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment is equipped with a mission button 3700, attack button 3710, left lever 3720, right lever 3730, and defense button 3740 that can be operated by the player at the bottom of the door frame 3.

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of displaying an image of the player's tank in the display area of the game board-side display device 1600 while the decorative symbols are being displayed. In this display, the player's tank travels various routes and engages in battles with enemy tanks while traveling to the destination, and the results of the battles suggest the results of the decorative symbols. Furthermore, while the player's tank is traveling or during a battle with an enemy tank, the player can change the content of the display, such as the suggestion of the results of the decorative symbols' changes, by accepting the player's operation of the operation means, such as the mission button 3700, attack button 3710, left lever 3720, right lever 3730, and defense button 3740, located at the bottom of the door frame 3.
In this specification, the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 may be simply referred to as the display area.

The mission button 3700 is a button that functions in various ways in the presentation displaying the player's tank. The attack button 3710 is a button that can be used to attack enemy forces in the presentation displaying the player's tank. The defense button 3740 is a button that can be used to defend against attacks from enemy tanks in the presentation displaying the player's tank. Each button can be pressed downward a predetermined distance. The pachinko machine 1 detects the player pressing each button using a sensor (not shown), and inputs this information into the peripheral control board 1510 for use in the presentation. When the player no longer presses each button, a return mechanism (not shown) using a spring or similar mechanism returns the button to its upward position.

The left lever 3720 is a rod-shaped operating means capable of inputting directions. The base of the left lever 3720 is supported by a pivot, allowing it to be tilted in any direction through 360 degrees. The maximum tilt angle is 45 degrees. The left lever 3720 is designed to return to a vertical position (not tilted in any direction) when the player releases the left lever 3720, using a return mechanism (not shown) that uses a spring or similar. The pachinko machine 1 detects the direction and angle in which the left lever 3720 is tilted using a sensor (not shown), and inputs this information to the peripheral control board 1510 for use in presentations. The player can perform operational input by grasping the left lever 3720 and tilting it a specified angle in a specified direction.

A left lever vibration source 3722 capable of generating vibrations is built into the vertically lower portion of the left lever 3720. The left lever vibration source 3722 may be configured as a stepping motor with an eccentric weight attached to a rotating shaft or a reciprocating solenoid. The left lever vibration source 3722 is capable of generating vibrations by being driven and controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. The vibrations generated from the left lever vibration source 3722 are transmitted to the palm of the player holding the left lever 3720, allowing the vibrations to be used as an effect. For example, the left lever vibration source 3722 may be vibrated in a predetermined vibration pattern in response to an operation performed in response to an operation instruction on the left lever 3720. The vibration pattern may also be configured to indicate the player's likelihood of an advantageous event, such as a jackpot.

Multiple left lever vibration sources 3722 may be provided within the left lever 3720. For example, a left lever vibration source 3722 may be provided in the upper half of the left lever 3720 and a left lever vibration source 3722 may be provided in the lower half of the left lever 3720. Only one of the vibration sources may be vibrated, or both vibration sources may be vibrated simultaneously.

Left lever light sources 3724 capable of emitting light in a predetermined color are built into the upper and lower upper portions of the left lever 3720. The left lever 3720 is made of milky-white synthetic resin, and the color of light output from the left lever light sources 3724 can illuminate the entire left lever 3720. Specifically, the left lever light sources 3724 are composed of multiple full-color LEDs and a drive circuit, and can emit light in a predetermined color by driving and controlling the drive circuit using the peripheral control board 1510. The left lever light sources 3724 can illuminate mainly the upper half of the left lever 3720, and the light emission colors and light emission patterns, such as flashing and lighting, can be used for dramatic effects. For example, the left lever 3720 may emit light in a predetermined light emission pattern in response to an operation performed in response to an operation instruction. The light emission pattern may also be configured to indicate the player's likelihood of an advantageous event, such as a jackpot. The left lever 3720 may be made of other materials that allow light to pass through, such as a colorless, transparent synthetic resin with a lens cut.

Right lever 3730 has the same structure and function as left lever 3720. For example, right lever 3730 can accept operational input. Also, like left lever 3720, right lever 3730 is provided with right lever vibration source 3732 and right lever light source 3734, which can be used to create the same effects as left lever 3720.

The placement of each button is not limited to the embodiment described with reference to Figure 137. Figure 138 shows an embodiment in which the attack button 3710 is located at the top end of the left lever 3720, and the defense button 3740 is located at the top end of the right lever 3730. In this case, while gripping the left lever 3720 and tilting the left lever 3720, it is possible to press the attack button 3710 at the top end of the left lever 3720 with your thumb. Similarly, while gripping the right lever 3730 and tilting the right lever 3730, it is possible to press the defense button 3740 at the top end of the right lever 3730 with your thumb.

The attack button 3710 may be formed from a milky white or colorless transparent synthetic resin, and the left lever light source 3724 may be set to a predetermined light-emitting mode in response to the operation of the attack button 3710, thereby causing the attack button 3710 to emit light in a predetermined manner. Similarly, the defense button 3740 may be formed from a milky white or colorless transparent synthetic resin, and the right lever light source 3734 may be set to an predetermined light-emitting mode in response to the operation of the defense button 3740, thereby causing the defense button 3740 to emit light in a predetermined manner.

Instead of placing the attack button 3710 at the top end of the left lever 3720 and the defense button 3740 at the top end of the right lever 3730, the mission button 3700 may be placed at the top end of the left lever 3720 in place of the attack button 3710. Alternatively, the defense button 3740 may be placed at the top end of the right lever 3730. Alternatively, two or three of these buttons may be placed at the top end of one lever.
With this configuration, the lever can be tilted and one or more buttons can be pressed with one hand.

Figure 139 shows an embodiment configured to execute a display of the player's tank as a reach effect while the decorative symbols are changing. Figure 139(a) shows the state in which the decorative symbols are displayed stationary. When a start winning occurs in the first start slot 2002 or the second start slot 2004, the left, center, and right decorative symbols begin to change.

Figure 139 (b) shows the state in which the left, center, and right decorative symbols appear from the top of the display area and are displayed in a fluctuating manner, disappearing downwards. The decorative symbols may be displayed as a symbol representing a miss without forming a reach state, as a symbol representing a miss that forms a reach state, or as a symbol representing a jackpot that forms a reach state.

Figure 139 (c) shows the state in which the "3" symbols on the left and right are temporarily displayed, forming a reach state. In this embodiment, as a reach effect, it is possible to execute a tank reach effect in which the player's tank is displayed in the display area and moves forward.

Figure 139 (d) shows the state in which the display of the player's tank has begun as part of the tank reach effect. Specifically, the player's tank is moving forward on the road. The decorative pattern is displayed in the upper left corner of the display area.

Figure 139(e) shows a state in which the player's tank and an enemy tank are engaged in combat. Figure 139(f) shows a state in which the player's tank has arrived at its destination. These function as effects that suggest the outcome of a special lottery. For example, an effect display is executed that shows whether the player's tank can defeat the enemy tank shown in Figure 139(e), or whether the player's tank will be defeated by the enemy tank, and the result of the effect display suggests the outcome of the special lottery. Alternatively, as shown in Figure 139(f), an effect display is executed that shows whether the player's tank can reach the destination without being defeated by the enemy tank, and the result of the effect display suggests the outcome of the special lottery.

Figure 139 (g) shows how the display of the decorative symbols stops changing when the result of the special lottery is a loss. Also, Figure 139 (h) shows how the display of the decorative symbols stops changing when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. Images of the player's tank, enemy tank, roads, etc., end display just before the display of the decorative symbols stops.

Referring to FIG. 139, an example of a display area displaying the player's tank as a reach effect is shown. However, the display area may be configured to display the player's tank across multiple decorative pattern variations. For example, the display area may be configured to predict the results of a special lottery related to a reserve created by a game ball entering the first starting slot 2002 or the second starting slot 2004, thereby initiating the execution of the display of the player's tank and running it across multiple pattern variations to suggest the result of the decorative pattern variations corresponding to the predicted reserve. Alternatively, the display area may be configured to display the player's tank from the start to the end of a jackpot, or to display the tank from the end of a jackpot until a predetermined number of decorative pattern variations (e.g., 10 times) are reached, thereby suggesting the type of game state that has changed at the end of the jackpot (e.g., whether the probability of determining a jackpot in the special lottery is high or low). In this way, the subject suggested by the effect of displaying the player's tank is not limited to the result of a special lottery (for example, the likelihood of winning a jackpot), but may also suggest, for example, the game status.

Figure 140 shows a performance situation that requires the player to operate either the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 with the left hand and rotate the handle 302 with the right hand. During the performance that displays the player's tank, the player's tank will generally automatically move forward. At this time, the player can change the speed of the player's tank or move it left or right by operating the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730. Specifically, as shown in Figure 140, the player can increase the speed of the player's tank by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 forward as seen from the player's perspective. The player can also decrease the speed of the player's tank by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 backward (toward the player) as seen from the player's perspective. The player can also move the player's tank to the right by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 to the right as seen from the player's perspective. Additionally, by tilting the left lever 3720 or right lever 3730 to the left as viewed by the player, the player's tank can be moved to the left.

In the embodiment shown, one lever is operated with one hand (left hand) to move the player's tank, but the configuration may also be such that an effect can be executed in which the left lever 3720 is operated with the left hand and the right lever 3730 is operated with the right hand. Furthermore, because a reach effect, which has a higher probability of winning than the usual decorative pattern fluctuations, is generated, the player does not necessarily need to operate the handle 302, and can use both hands to operate various buttons such as the left lever 3720, right lever 3730, and mission button 3700, thereby further enhancing the excitement of the effect.

During the performance displaying the player's tank, the player's tank will generally automatically move forward. At this time, the player can change the tank's speed or move it left or right by operating the left lever 3720 and right lever 3730. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 141, the player can increase the tank's speed by tilting the left lever 3720 or right lever 3730 forward as seen by the player. The player can decrease the tank's speed by tilting the left lever 3720 or right lever 3730 backward (toward the player) as seen by the player. The player can move the tank to the right by tilting the left lever 3720 or right lever 3730 to the right as seen by the player. The player can move the tank to the left by tilting the left lever 3720 or right lever 3730 to the left as seen by the player.

Furthermore, when the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 are simultaneously tilted forward as viewed by the player, it is possible to significantly increase the speed compared to when only one of the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 is operated. Similarly, when the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 are simultaneously tilted backward as viewed by the player, it is possible to significantly decrease the speed compared to when only one of the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 is operated. Furthermore, when the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 are simultaneously tilted to the right as viewed by the player, it is possible to move the tank significantly to the right compared to when only one of the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 is operated. Similarly, when the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 are simultaneously tilted to the left as viewed by the player, it is possible to move the tank significantly to the left compared to when only one of the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 is operated.

In this way, by using the left lever 3720 and right lever 3730 to change the direction of the tank's movement as it moves forward, it is possible to perform effects such as avoiding attacks from enemy forces or moving forward while avoiding obstacles such as mines and rocks placed on the field.

The basic usage of the mission button 3700, attack button 3710, and defense button 3740 in tank reach will be explained below. Operating the mission button 3700 will allow bullets to be fired forward from the machine gun mounted on the player's tank. Operating the attack button 3710 will allow shells to be fired forward from the artillery mounted on the player's tank. Operating the defense button 3740 will allow a defensive shield to be placed in front of the player's tank to protect against attacks from enemy tanks. Note that the functions assigned to each button may differ depending on the situation of the performance.

In this embodiment, new conditions are adopted as conditions for changing the game state. Below, we will explain the new conditions for changing the game state with reference to Figures 142 and 143.

When a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 2002, the first special symbol display 1403 displays a variation of the special symbol and displays the result of the first special lottery. Also, in the display area of the performance display device on the gaming board side, the decorative symbol is displayed in a manner corresponding to the result of the variation of the special symbol.
Similarly, when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 2004, the second special symbol display 1405 displays a variation of the special symbol and displays the result of the second special lottery. Also, in the display area of the performance display device on the gaming board side, the display of the variation of the decorative symbol is performed in a manner corresponding to the result of the variation of the special symbol.
In addition, if the result of the normal lottery drawn when a game ball passes through the gate section 2003 is a "win," the second starting port 2004 can change from a state in which it is impossible or difficult to accept a game ball to a state in which it is possible to accept a game ball.

In this embodiment, the lottery mode for the special pattern can be either a state in which the probability that the result of the special pattern lottery will be a "jackpot" lottery result is low (probability: 1/300), or a state in which the probability that the result of the special pattern lottery will be a "jackpot" lottery result is high (probability: 1/30).
In addition, with regard to the lottery mode for the normal symbols, it is possible to have a state in which the normal symbol fluctuation time is long (average 30 seconds) and the probability that the normal symbol lottery result will be a "win" lottery result is low (probability: 1/100), or a state in which the normal symbol fluctuation time is short (average 2.0 seconds) and the probability that the normal symbol lottery result will be a "win" lottery result is high (probability: 1/1.2).
The following four game states can be achieved by combining these.
1: Normal state in which the probability that the result of the special pattern lottery will be a "jackpot" lottery result is low, the time for the normal pattern to fluctuate is long, and the probability that the result of the normal lottery will be a "win" lottery result is low.
2: A time-saving state in which the probability that the result of the special pattern lottery will be a "jackpot" lottery result is low, the time for the normal pattern to fluctuate is short, and the probability that the result of the normal lottery will be a "win" lottery result is high.
3: A non-time-reduced probability variation state in which the probability that the result of the special pattern lottery will be a "jackpot" is high, the time for the normal pattern to fluctuate is long, and the probability that the result of the normal lottery will be a "win" is low.
4: A special state in which there is a high probability that the result of the special pattern lottery will be a "jackpot" lottery result, the time for the normal pattern to fluctuate is short, and there is a high probability that the result of the normal lottery will be a "win" lottery result.
In addition to these game states, if the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a "jackpot," the following state will occur.
5: A jackpot state in which the large prize opening 2005 is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. Note that during the jackpot state, the display of the special symbols is not changed.
FIG. 142 is a table showing these five game states.
In this embodiment, five game states are possible. When certain conditions are met during play, the game state changes from one of these game states to another. Figure 143 shows the game state transition conditions.

The time-saving state transitions to the normal state on the condition that the number of times that a special lottery result has failed since the time-saving state was entered reaches a predetermined number. For example, if the jackpot state ends and the time-saving state is entered, and the number of times that the special symbol has changed reaches 100 in the time-saving state, the game state transitions to the normal state.
The non-time-reduction probability variable state and probability variable state continue until a jackpot game state occurs.

In this embodiment, three special lottery results are provided: "Miss," "Miss with Time Reduction," and "Big Hit."

If the special lottery result is a "lose," the special lottery result will be displayed for a predetermined time, and then the large prize opening 2005 will not open or close in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. This increases the probability that the regular lottery result will be a "win," and also prevents the occurrence of a "time-saving state" in which the time until the regular lottery result is displayed is short.

If the special lottery result is a "miss with time reduction," the special lottery result is displayed for a predetermined time, and then the large prize slot 2005 does not open or close in a predetermined opening and closing pattern, and the game state transitions to a "time-reduced state," which increases the probability that the normal lottery result will be a "win" and shortens the time until the normal lottery result is displayed. Even if the special lottery result is a "miss with time reduction," if the game state is in the time-reduced state, non-time-reduced special probability state, or special probability state, the transition to the time-reduced state will not occur. Note that a "miss with time reduction" may occur with a predetermined probability. For example, the probability of a "jackpot" occurring among the special lottery results may be 1/300, the probability of a "miss" occurring may be 298/300, and the probability of a "miss with time reduction" occurring may be 1/300.

If the special lottery result is a "jackpot," the special lottery result is displayed for a predetermined time, and the large prize slot 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. After the jackpot state ends, the game state transitions to one of the following states based on a predetermined jackpot breakdown: normal state, time-saving state, non-time-saving special state, or special state. The rate of transitions after a jackpot state can be set as appropriate, and the number of game states that can be transitioned to after a jackpot may be less than four. For example, after a jackpot state, the rate of transitioning to special state and the rate of transitioning to time-saving state may be set to 50%, and the rate of transitioning to normal state or non-time-saving special state may be set to 0%.

On the other hand, if the "miss with time reduction" is not adopted, the number of consecutive misses in the special lottery results is counted in the normal state, and when the number of consecutive misses in the special lottery results reaches a predetermined specific number (for example, 500 times), the special lottery result is displayed for a predetermined time, and then the game state transitions from the normal state to the time reduction state without opening or closing the large prize opening 2005.
Furthermore, even if the number of times the special lottery result is a miss during the time-saving state, non-time-saving special state, or special state reaches a predetermined specific number (for example, 500 times), the transition to the time-saving state will not occur.

The transition from the normal state to the time-saving state based on a miss with time-saving, or the transition from the normal state to the time-saving state based on a specific number of special lottery draws, may be either one or both.

By adopting a "miss with time-saving" as the special lottery result, the game state can be transitioned from normal to time-saving mode without any balls being dispensed. It is also possible to receive the special lottery result in the time-saving mode, where game balls are less likely to be consumed than in normal mode.

In addition, by executing the special lottery a specific number of times, the game state will transition from the normal state to the time-saving state. If the normal state continues for a certain period of time, it will be possible to receive the results of the special lottery in the time-saving state, where game balls are less likely to be consumed than in the normal state.

The breakdown of the jackpot when the first special lottery result is a jackpot may be the same as the breakdown of the jackpot when the second special lottery result is a jackpot.
Alternatively, the breakdown of the jackpot when the first special lottery result is a jackpot may be different from the breakdown when the second special lottery result is a jackpot. For example, the breakdown when the first special lottery result is a jackpot may be 50% for a jackpot that results in a normal state and 50% for a jackpot that results in a time-saving state, and the breakdown when the second special lottery result is a jackpot may be 20% for a jackpot that results in a time-saving state and 80% for a jackpot that results in a probability variable state.

In the low-probability non-time-saving state and the high-probability non-time-saving state, the player fires the game ball to the left side of the game area in order to make the game ball enter the first starting hole 2002. This act of firing the game ball toward the left side of the game area is called a "left shot." The probability that a game ball that flows into the left side of the game area will enter the first starting hole 2002 is approximately 1/10 to 1/15. Furthermore, a game ball that flows into the left side of the game area will never enter the second starting hole 2004.

On the other hand, during a jackpot game state, the player shoots the game ball toward the right side of the game area in order to make the game ball enter the big prize hole 2005. Also, during a low probability time-saving state or a high probability time-saving state, the player shoots the game ball toward the right side of the game area in order to make the game ball enter the second starting hole 2004. This act of shooting the game ball toward the right side of the game area is called a "right hit."
The probability that a gaming ball flowing into the right side of the gaming area will enter the second starting opening 2004 varies depending on the gaming state. This is because the probability that the movable piece 2004a of the second starting opening 2004 will be in an open state and the duration of the open state differ between the non-time-saving state (low-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state) and the time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state). In the non-time-saving state (low-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state), the probability that a gaming ball flowing into the right side of the gaming area will enter the second starting opening 2004 is extremely low, for example, about 1/200 to 1/300. In the time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state), the probability that a gaming ball flowing into the right side of the gaming area will enter the second starting opening 2004 is extremely high, for example, about 1/2 to 1/3.
In addition, although a game ball that flows into the right side of the game area will not enter the first starting hole 2002, the game area may be configured so that it may enter the first starting hole 2002.

In the low-probability time-shortening state, the variable display time of the special pattern is shorter on average than in the low-probability non-time-shortening state.
In the high-probability time-shortening state, the variable display time of the special symbols is shorter on average than in the low-probability non-time-shortening state, and the probability that the stopping mode of the special symbols will be a mode indicating a jackpot result is higher than in the low-probability non-time-shortening state.
Therefore, compared to when hitting the left side (when in a low-probability non-time-saving state), when hitting the right side (when in a low-probability time-saving state or a high-probability time-saving state), the average time until the next jackpot game state occurs after the end of the jackpot game state is shorter, and from the player's perspective, it feels as if the next jackpot has occurred immediately, with no time having passed since the previous jackpot.

When the first jackpot game state occurs in a low-probability, non-time-saving state, and then after this jackpot game state ends, the game transitions to a low-probability or high-probability time-saving state, and the jackpot game state occurs again, this is called a consecutive win state. The number of consecutive wins in this case is "2." If the game enters a low-probability, non-time-saving state again after this jackpot game state, and the jackpot game state occurs again, the number of consecutive wins will be "3." The consecutive win state ends when the game enters a low-probability, non-time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends, or when the game enters a low-probability, time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends, but the special lottery results are unsuccessful a predetermined number of times (e.g., 100 times), and the game enters a low-probability, non-time-saving state. While the consecutive win state continues, the player fires game balls toward the right side of the game area, and when the consecutive win state ends, the area from which the game balls are fired is changed to the left side of the game area.

142 and 143, it is shown that after the end of the jackpot state, the game transitions to one of four predetermined game states (combinations of high probability or low probability, time-saving or non-time-saving). These game states may be referred to as follows in this specification.
Specifically, a jackpot that enters a low-probability non-time-saving state after the end of the jackpot state may be referred to as a low-probability non-time-saving jackpot. Also, a jackpot that enters a low-probability time-saving state after the end of the jackpot state may be referred to as a low-probability time-saving jackpot. Also, a jackpot that enters a high-probability non-time-saving state after the end of the jackpot state may be referred to as a high-probability non-time-saving jackpot. Also, a jackpot that enters a high-probability time-saving state after the end of the jackpot state may be referred to as a high-probability time-saving jackpot (note that this jackpot is generally sometimes referred to as a "probable jackpot").
In addition, the jackpot state may be referred to as a jackpot gaming state.

If the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, decorative symbols with predetermined numbers will be displayed as a doublet, indicating to the player that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. In this case, if the type of jackpot is a high-probability non-time-saving jackpot or a high-probability time-saving jackpot, decorative symbols with odd numbers may be displayed as a doublet, and if the type of jackpot is a low-probability non-time-saving jackpot or a low-probability time-saving jackpot, decorative symbols with even numbers may be displayed as a doublet. For example, if the types of numbers displayed on the decorative symbols range from 1 to 7, and the number combinations of the decorative symbols displayed are "222," "444," and "666," the game state after the jackpot state will be a low-probability non-time-saving state or a low-probability time-saving state. Furthermore, if the number combinations of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed are "111," "333," "555," or "777," the game state after the jackpot state will be a high-probability non-time-saving state or a high-probability time-saving state. Decorative symbols with the numbers "2," "4," or "6" are sometimes referred to as "normal symbols," while decorative symbols with the numbers "1," "3," "5," or "7" are sometimes referred to as "probable variable symbols." In this embodiment, the player can learn the game state after a jackpot, if one were to occur, when the reach state is formed, thereby enhancing the player's interest.

In addition, the decorative symbols that constitute the reach state are sometimes called "reach symbols." In particular, the number attached to the decorative symbol that forms the reach state is an even number or an odd number, that is, it is used to indicate whether the reach state is formed by a "normal symbol" or a "probability variable symbol." For example, if you say, "The reach symbol is '1'," it indicates that the reach state is formed by the decorative symbol with the number 1 attached.
In addition, the reach state formed by the "normal pattern" is sometimes called a "normal reach," and the reach state formed by the "probability variable pattern" is sometimes called a "probability variable reach."

The type of symbol that forms the reach state may also indicate the likelihood of a jackpot. For example, if the numbers attached to the decorative symbol are "1," "2," "4," or "5," the likelihood may be less than 5%, 20% for "6," 50% for "3," and 90% (or even 100%) for "7." This increases the player's interest not only in whether the reach symbol is a normal symbol or a probability variable symbol (i.e., whether it is an even number or an odd number), but also in whether the number attached to the symbol is a number between "1" and "7."

The number of rounds that occur during a jackpot state may be added to these names to further categorize the type of jackpot. For example, a 10-round jackpot that generates a high-probability time-saving state after the jackpot ends may be referred to as a 10R high-probability time-saving jackpot. Similarly, if the number of rounds is 3 or 6, it may be referred to as a 3R high-probability time-saving jackpot or a 6R high-probability time-saving jackpot. Furthermore, if the probability state or time-saving state after the jackpot state ends is not important, it may be referred to as a 3R jackpot or a 6R jackpot.

In this specification, the probability of winning a jackpot may be simply referred to as the probability of winning.
Furthermore, while the present invention shows an embodiment in which the execution of a predetermined effect indicates the degree of expectation of a jackpot, it may be modified to indicate the degree of expectation of a high-probability time-saving jackpot or the degree of expectation of the occurrence of other predetermined events, instead of the degree of expectation of a jackpot. The degree of expectation can be calculated using the formula "probability of occurrence during a jackpot / (probability of occurrence during a jackpot + probability of occurrence during a miss)." Furthermore, a player will recognize the degree of expectation when a predetermined effect is executed based on their own gaming experience or articles in specialized magazines.

Below, we will explain embodiments of reach effects and game state change conditions that are executed using such an operation unit, along with the display content displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600.

Conventionally, an effect has been implemented in which an image of a character or the like is displayed on a display means to suggest the result of the display of a decorative pattern (for example, JP 2016-179063 A, JP 2010-022544 A). For example, an effect has been implemented in which an image of a predetermined character is displayed before the decorative pattern stops changing, suggesting to the player that there is a predetermined probability (for example, 10%) that the result of the display of the decorative pattern will be a jackpot.
However, some players may not necessarily prefer to see such suggestive effects. For example, if a certain suggestive effect is displayed multiple times, but the results of the most recent multiple variable displays in which that suggestive effect was displayed are all showing a loss, the player may feel suspicious of the suggestive effect, thinking, "Maybe I'll lose again..." or may feel that the suggestive effect is unlucky, and may not want to see it. This tendency is particularly noticeable in suggestive effects that require the player to operate a specified operating unit, and a display showing a predetermined expectation level is displayed based on the operation received. In such cases, the player may lose interest if they have taken the trouble to operate the operating means and are forced to see a suggestive effect they do not want to see, which can cause a loss of interest.

In addition, there are players who prefer to be clearly notified of the results of the variable display, rather than having the results suggested with an indeterminate degree of expectation. For such players, being shown a suggestive effect with a low degree of expectation (for example, 10%) could actually reduce their interest.

However, in the past, the presence of such players was not taken into consideration, and there was room for improvement in how suggestive effects were executed. In the following embodiment, we will explain an embodiment that takes into consideration the presence of such players and is configured to prevent a decline in interest.

Below, with reference to Figure 144 etc., we will explain "Shield Bullet Reach," which displays a defensive shield by firing shield bullets from a newly developed player's tank capable of firing shield bullets during battle scenes between the player's tank and an enemy tank.

FIG. 144 is a time chart showing the progression of the "Shield Bullet Reach" of this embodiment. This time chart shows the progression of the performance mode in which, when the main control board 1310 determines that a special symbol is to be displayed over 34 seconds in response to a single starting win, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display area of the game board performance display device 1600 to display a decorative symbol over 34 seconds. After the special and decorative symbols are displayed over 34 seconds, the special and decorative symbols are displayed stationary over 1 second. In addition to the decorative symbol display, the display area also displays an image of the player's tank, an image of the enemy tank, a simulated image of the attack button 3710, a simulated image of the defense button 3740, and the like, as will be described in more detail below.
145 and 146 show the display state of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 at a predetermined timing of the time chart described with reference to FIG. 144.

In the time chart shown in Figure 144, the passage of time is indicated by t0, t1 to t34, t35, etc. to explain the timing of the effects. The time between each timing is one second. These points also apply to the other embodiments and effect examples described below unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, each of the embodiments shown in Figures 149 to 196 is basically a modification of the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 144 to 148. Therefore, for configurations not specifically mentioned in the explanation of each of the embodiments shown in Figures 149 to 196 (for example, the display mode when the decorative pattern starts to change, the display mode when it stops, etc.), the embodiments shown in Figures 144 to 148 can be applied.

In the time chart shown in Figure 144, the display of varying decorative symbols begins at timing t0. From timing t0 to timing t5, the display of varying left, center, and right decorative symbols is carried out as shown in Figure 139(b). At timing t5, as shown in Figure 139(c), when the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are displayed as the same symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol consisting of the number "3") in a temporary stop state, a reach state occurs, and the left, center, and right decorative symbols are reduced in size and displayed in the upper left of the display area. At the same time, an image of the player's tank advancing on the road, etc. is displayed in the display area. Furthermore, from timing t5 to timing t27, operation of the defense button 3740 is enabled.

Figure 145(a) shows the state in which an image of the player's tank is displayed in the display area at timing t5. The display area shows the decorative symbols ("3," "↓," "3") that are in a reach state in the upper left of the display area, the image of the player's tank in the lower center of the display area, an image of the road along which the player's tank will move in the horizontal center of the display area, an image of the horizon and sky in the upper part of the display area, an image of the dialogue of the special character "Colonel Dyna" and a window image surrounding the dialogue image in the lower right of the display area, and an image of the dialogue of the special character "Sergeant Might" and a window image surrounding the dialogue image in the lower left of the display area. The player himself is set as a second lieutenant piloting the player's tank, and an effect is executed in which the player moves across the battlefield in his tank alongside "Colonel Dyna," who is higher in rank than a second lieutenant, and "Sergeant Might," who is lower in rank than a second lieutenant. This configuration can increase the sense of immersion in the virtual reality reach effect.

As shown in the lines of "Colonel Dyna" in Figure 145(a), by pressing and holding the defense button 3740, an effect will be displayed in front of the player's tank, but more details will be given later.

At timing t9, an image of a white enemy tank begins to appear in the upper right corner of the display area, and moves to the left. Figure 145(b) shows the state at timing t10 in which the image of the enemy tank is moving to the left toward the road.

At timing t11, the image of a white enemy tank that has been moving from right to left within the display area is positioned on the road. At this timing, the image of the white enemy tank may be replaced with an image of a red enemy tank. At the same time, acceptance of operation of the attack button 3710 becomes valid, and an imitation image of the attack button 3710 is displayed to the right of the lines of "Sergeant Might." The valid operation period for the attack button 3710 continues for three seconds, from timing t11 to timing t14.
Two types of enemy tank images are prepared as images of enemy tanks to be displayed on the road: an image of a white enemy tank and an image of a red enemy tank, and the display ratio of the enemy tank images is set so that the special lottery result is more likely to be a big win when the image of a red enemy tank is displayed than when the image of a white enemy tank is displayed.
In addition, two types of simulated images of the attack button 3710 are provided: a white simulated image and a red simulated image, and the display ratio of the enemy tank image is set so that the special lottery result is more likely to be a jackpot when a red simulated image is displayed than when a white simulated image is displayed.

The likelihood of a big win may be indicated by the combination of the color of the image of the enemy tank and the color of the simulated image that resembles the attack button 3710.
For example, the appearance rate may be set so that the expected probability is 10% when the colors of the simulated image simulating the enemy tank image and the attack button 3710 are both white, the expected probability is 20% when one color of the simulated image simulating the enemy tank image and the attack button 3710 is white and the other color of the simulated image simulating the enemy tank image and the attack button 3710 is red, and the expected probability is 30% when the colors of the simulated image simulating the enemy tank image and the attack button 3710 are both red.
The degree of expectation may be indicated by configuring only one of the enemy tank image and the simulated image of the attack button 3710 to change color from white to red. Also, depending on the combination of the color of the enemy tank image and the color of the simulated image of the attack button 3710, a pattern may be prepared in which the degree of expectation of a jackpot is 100%, i.e., the occurrence of a jackpot is confirmed when that combination is displayed.

Figure 145 (c) shows the state at timing t12 in which a white mock-up image resembling the attack button 3710 and an image of a white enemy tank are displayed on the road in the display area.

On the other hand, Figure 145 (e) shows a state in which, from timing t11 to timing t12, a red simulated image of the attack button 3710 and an image of a red enemy tank are displayed on the road in the display area.

If the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 (timing t11 to timing t14), an image of a shell flying out of the player's tank's turret is displayed, and the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of it being destroyed. An image of an exploding shell is also displayed. The display of the simulated image of the attack button 3710 also ends.

Figure 144(b) is a time chart showing the display mode when the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid operation period of the attack button 3710. Also, Figure 144(c) is a time chart showing the display mode when the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid operation period of the attack button 3710.

The display of the image of the enemy tank being destroyed and the image of the shell exploding will continue for three seconds from the time the attack button 3710 is pressed. For example, if the attack button 3710 is pressed at time t13, the display of the image of the enemy tank being destroyed and the image of the shell exploding will continue until time t16.

Two types of images of exploding shells are provided: an image of a medium-sized shell explosion and an image of a large shell explosion. The display rate is set so that the larger the explosion, the higher the likelihood of a jackpot. For example, the effect occurrence rate may be set so that, compared to the likelihood indicated by the previously displayed image of an enemy tank and an image imitating the attack button 3710, when an image of a medium-sized shell explosion is displayed, the likelihood increases by +10%, and when an image of a large shell explosion is displayed, the likelihood increases by +20%.

Figure 145(d) shows a state in which an image of a destroyed white enemy tank and an image of a medium-sized shell explosion are displayed on the road in the display area from timing t13 to timing t16. On the other hand, Figure 145(f) shows a state in which an image of a destroyed white enemy tank and an image of a large-sized shell explosion are displayed on the road in the display area from timing t13 to timing t16. Note that even when a red enemy tank is displayed as in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 145(e), in addition to the image of a destroyed red enemy tank, either an image of a medium-sized shell explosion or an image of a large-sized shell explosion is displayed on the road. In this way, the color of the image of the moving tank and the color of the image of the destroyed tank are the same.

FIG. 144(c) is a time chart showing the content displayed in the display area when the attack button 3710 is not operated within the valid operation period. If the attack button 3710 is not operated within the valid operation period, at timing t14, which is the end timing of the valid operation period, an image effect of a shell flying out from the player's tank is displayed, and the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed tank. In addition, either an image of a medium-sized shell explosion or an image of a large shell explosion is displayed. The display of the destruction image continues for three seconds, from timing t14 to timing t17. These display modes are the same as when the attack button 3710 is operated.
In this way, the player will see the same display effects, except for the timing of the display and the left-right position of the enemy tank, whether or not the player operates the attack button 3710. The player will then recognize the likelihood of the special lottery result being a jackpot based on the presentation mode of the displayed effects that they have seen.

This display effect is displayed from time t9 to a maximum of time t17 (if the attack button 3710 is not operated), and then the same effect is displayed again from time t17 to a maximum of time t25 (if the attack button 3710 is not operated). The effect displayed again also indicates the likelihood that the special lottery result will be a jackpot.

In the above example, an effect in which an enemy tank moves and is destroyed is executed from timing t9 to timing t17 at the longest (when the attack button 3710 is not operated), and from timing t17 to timing t25 at the longest (when the attack button 3710 is not operated). However, it is also possible to execute an effect pattern in which an enemy tank moves and is destroyed only at the former timing, or an effect pattern in which an enemy tank moves and is destroyed only at the latter timing. It is also possible to execute an effect pattern in which an enemy tank is not displayed at two timings. In this case, the "shield bullet reach" effect will end without the player operating the attack button 3710.

The probability of appearance of the effect pattern can be set so that the probability of a jackpot is higher for an effect pattern in which an enemy tank is displayed than for an effect pattern in which the enemy tank is not displayed. Furthermore, the probability of appearance of the effect pattern can be set so that the probability of a jackpot is higher for an effect pattern in which the enemy tank moves twice and is destroyed than for an effect pattern in which the enemy tank moves only once and is destroyed. By configuring it in this way, when this suggestive effect is executed, the enemy tank can move and be destroyed zero to two times, which increases the player's anticipation for the enemy tank's appearance pattern (color and number of times) and the manner in which it is destroyed. It is also possible to configure the game so that an effect pattern in which the enemy tank moves and is destroyed three or more times can be executed.

Figure 144(d) is a time chart showing the display content when no operation is performed on the defense button 3740. As shown in Figure 144(d), when no operation is performed on the defense button 3740, no effect display based on the operation of the defense button 3740 is performed. Figures 145(c) to 145(f) show the display state in the display area when no effect display based on the operation of the defense button 3740 is performed.

Next, we will explain the display mode in the display area when the defense button 3740 is operated.

By pressing and holding the defense button 3740 during the operation valid period of the defense button 3740 (timing t5 to timing t27), a shield image set to prevent attacks from enemy tanks is displayed between the image of the player's tank and the image of the enemy tank. Note that the condition for determining that a long press has started may be that the defense button 3740 is continuously pressed for 0.5 seconds. Furthermore, the display of the shield image continues as long as the defense button 3740 is continuously pressed.
In the drawing, the shape of the shield image is a horizontally elongated oval, but the shape of the shield image may be configured to change dynamically while it is being displayed. The shield image may also be displayed intermittently. For example, if the defense button 3740 is continuously pressed, the shield image may start to be displayed, gradually become smaller, and when the shield image is no longer displayed, a shield bullet is automatically fired, the shield bullet explodes, and a new shield image is displayed. The continuous display of the shield image is also considered to include such display modes.

Figure 144 (e) is a time chart showing the display mode when the defense button 3740 is pressed and held during the valid operation period of the defense button 3740. As shown in this time chart, a shield image is displayed from time t7, when it is determined that the player is pressing and holding the button, to time t24, when the player releases the defense button 3740 and the long press ends. By displaying a shield image in this way based on the player's operation of the defense button 3740, it is possible to hide the color of the image of the enemy tank, the color of the simulated image that mimics the attack button 3710, and the manner in which the enemy tank is destroyed.

For example, Figure 146(a) shows the display state that is displayed when the player presses and holds the defense button 3740 during the period when the enemy tank image is not displayed (for example, from timing t6 to timing t9) after the display shown in Figure 145(a) has been performed. As shown in the figure, a shield image is displayed based on the detection of a long press of the defense button 3740. In addition, a dialogue image of "Colonel Dyna" also corresponds to the display of the shield image.

Figure 146(b) shows a state in which a shield image is displayed at a specific timing (e.g., timing t9 to timing t11) while an image of an enemy tank is displayed and moving toward the road. In other words, if a shield image were displayed in the display state shown with reference to Figure 145(b), the display state would be as shown in Figure 146(b).

Figures 146(c) and 146(e) show display modes in which a shield image is displayed when an image of an enemy tank is displayed on the road and a simulated image of the attack button 3710 is displayed (for example, from timing t11 to timing t14). That is, if a shield image is displayed in the display mode shown with reference to Figure 145(c), the display mode will be as shown in Figure 146(c). Similarly, if a shield image is displayed in the display mode shown with reference to Figure 145(e), the display mode will be as shown in Figure 146(e).

At this time, the color of the enemy tank image and the color of the simulated image of the attack button 3710 suggest the likelihood of the special lottery result being a jackpot, but these images are hidden by the shield image, making it difficult to perceive the likelihood of a jackpot.

Figures 146(d) and 146(f) show an example of a state in which a shield image is displayed when an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed (for example, from timing t12 to timing t15 when an operation is performed, and from timing t14 to timing t17 when no operation is performed). That is, if a shield image is displayed in the display state shown with reference to Figure 145(d), the display state will be as shown in Figure 146(d). Similarly, if a shield image is displayed in the display state shown with reference to Figure 145(f), the display state will be as shown in Figure 146(f).

At this time, the explosion pattern of the shells and the color of the image of the destroyed enemy tank suggest the likelihood of the special lottery result being a jackpot, but these images are hidden by a shield image, making it difficult to discern the likelihood of a jackpot.

To hide the image of the enemy tank, the simulated image of the attack button 3710, or the explosion of a shell with a shield image, the display priority of the shield image can be set higher than the display priority of the image of the enemy tank, the simulated image of the attack button 3710, or the image of a shell. Also, the display priority of the window displaying the lines of "Colonel Dina" or "Sergeant Might" can be set higher than the display priority of the shield image.

The operation acceptance period for the defense button 3740 is from timing t5, when the reach effect begins, to timing t27, after the second destruction image of the enemy tank is displayed. Even if the defense button 3740 is pressed and held, the display of the shield image ends at the same time as the effective operation period for the defense button 3740 ends.

With this configuration, the display indicating the degree of expectation can be made difficult to see according to the player's preferences, making it possible to provide a stress-free gaming environment for players who do not want to know the degree of expectation.
For example, by operating the defense button 3740 at the moment when an image of an enemy tank is displayed on the right side of the display area, as shown in Figure 145 (b), the player can make the image showing the expectation level that is displayed thereafter difficult to see, depending on the player's preferences or mood of the day.

Referring to Figures 145(a) to 145(f) and 146(a) to 146(f), embodiments have been shown in which the colors of the simulated images of enemy tanks and attack button 3710 are white or red. However, in addition to these, a configuration may be implemented in which a simulated image of an enemy tank or attack button 3710 is displayed in gold, which has a 100% expected probability. In particular, it is preferable to configure the simulated image of an enemy tank or attack button 3710 to be displayed the first time in a pattern in which the simulated image of an enemy tank or attack button 3710 is displayed twice. In this case, by ceasing the long press of the defense button 3740, the player can enjoy the "shield bullet reach" effect in which a jackpot is confirmed to have occurred without the shield image being displayed when the enemy tank image is displayed the second time.

It should be noted that there is a possibility that a player may mistakenly press the defense button 3740 instead of the attack button 3710. In this case, it may be difficult to see the simulated image of the attack button 3710, the image of a moving enemy tank, the image of an enemy tank being destroyed, and the image of an exploding shell, which may actually reduce the enjoyment of the game. Therefore, in this embodiment, as described above, the shield image is displayed not only when the defense button 3740 is simply pressed, but also when the defense button 3740 is pressed and held. With this configuration, even if the defense button 3740 is pressed by mistake, the shield image is not displayed immediately, which prevents situations from occurring where players who want to see suggestive effects feel stressed.

In the embodiment shown, the display of the shield image ends when the long press on the defense button 3740 ends, but the shield image may continue to be displayed for a predetermined number of seconds (6 seconds) after the long press ends.

The shield image may be configured so that when a player presses and holds the defense button 3740, the shield image gradually becomes larger in a concentric circle, and when the player releases the defense button 3740, the shield image gradually becomes smaller in a concentric circle. For example, the shield image may be configured so that it gradually becomes larger in a concentric circle over two seconds, and then gradually becomes smaller in a concentric circle over two seconds. With this configuration, even if the player accidentally presses the defense button 3740, the visibility of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and the enemy tank image is restored by quickly releasing the defense button 3740, preventing a situation in which a player who wants to see the suggestive effects feels stressed. Furthermore, by changing the display mode of the shield image in this way, the image indicating the expectation level may be configured to change from one of a display mode in which the shield image does not hide it at all, a display mode in which it is partially hidden, or a display mode in which it is completely hidden by the shield image to another display mode.

Although an example has been shown in which the display mode of the shield image changes based on the player's operation, the display mode of the shield image being displayed may also be configured to be changeable without the player's operation. For example, the shield image may be configured to automatically increase or decrease in size, or to have its shape change periodically, or to have its transparency change. These display modes may also be combined. Furthermore, by changing the display mode of the shield image in this way, the image indicating the expectation level (a simulated image of the attack button 3710 or an enemy tank image) may be configured to change from a display mode in which it is not hidden at all, partially hidden, or completely hidden by the shield image to another display mode.

Instead of or in addition to pressing and holding the defense button 3740, a shield image may be displayed for a predetermined number of seconds when it is detected that the player has repeatedly pressed the defense button 3740. FIG. 144( f) is a time chart illustrating such a modified presentation mode. This time chart shows that, based on the detection of the player repeatedly pressing the defense button 3740, a shield image is displayed from timing t10 to timing t16 and from timing t18 to timing t24. It should be noted that the condition for determining that a rapid press has occurred may be four or more presses per second. After the shield image is displayed, it is not necessary to continue the rapid press, and the shield image is displayed for a predetermined number of seconds (six seconds).
Instead of pressing and holding the defense button 3740 or repeatedly pressing the defense button 3740, when the defense button 3740 is pressed, a predetermined lottery may be conducted so that a shield image is displayed with a probability of 1/3.

Alternatively, the shield image may be configured to be displayed when the mission button 3700 and the defense button 3740 are pressed simultaneously. Alternatively, if the operation unit described with reference to FIG. 138 is used, the shield image may be configured to be displayed when the defense button 3740 is pressed while tilting the right lever 3730 forward.

In this way, by configuring the shield image to be displayed when specific conditions related to the defense button 3740 are met based on the operation of the defense button 3740, it is possible to prevent situations such as the shield image being immediately displayed even if the player accidentally operates the defense button 3740, and the visibility of the suggestive effects is not impeded.

It may be configured so that when the variable display in which the tank reach effect, in which only the attack button 3710 is enabled, shows a predetermined number of consecutive misses (e.g., three or five times), operation acceptance for the defense button 3740 is enabled, and a "shield bullet reach" in which a shield image is displayed can be executed. Furthermore, on the condition that the variable display in which the "shield bullet reach" is executed shows a jackpot, operation acceptance for the defense button 3740 is disabled, and the shield image will not be displayed even if the defense button 3740 is operated until the variable display in which the tank reach effect, in which only the attack button 3710 is enabled, shows a predetermined number of consecutive misses (e.g., three or five times). This configuration makes it possible to disable erroneous operation of the defense button 3740 while reducing the frustration felt by players when consecutive misses are displayed in the special lottery.

The display time of the shield image displayed by pressing the defense button 3740 can be set longer than the display time of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710. For example, in this embodiment, the enemy tank's movement time before the operation valid period is set to 2 seconds, and the display time of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is set to 3 seconds, but the display time of the shield image displayed upon pressing the defense button 3740 can be set to 6 seconds. With this configuration, once the display of the shield image begins, the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 can be kept hidden until the display of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 ends, reducing the operational burden on the player.

After the attack button 3710 is operated, or at the end of the effective period of the attack button 3710, an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding shell are displayed, but the display time of the shield image may be determined so that these images are also hidden by the shield image. For example, in this embodiment, the display time of the image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding shell is set to 3 seconds, but the display time of the shield image displayed by pressing the defense button 3740 may be set to 6 seconds. With this configuration, the image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding shell can be hidden by the shield image.

In this embodiment, the simulated image of the attack button 3710 is displayed for a maximum of 3 seconds, and the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding shell are displayed for 3 seconds, but the display time of the shield image may be longer than the total of these times (for example, 10 seconds). With this configuration, by displaying the shield image while the enemy tank is moving, it is possible to hide both the simulated image of the attack button 3710, the image of the destroyed enemy tank, and the image of the exploding shell with the shield image.

The system may be configured so that the player can cancel the display of the shield image that has been displayed for a predetermined period of time. For example, the system may be configured so that the display of the shield image ends when the mission button 3700 or the defense button 3740 is pressed while the shield image is being displayed. With this configuration, a player who notices that an effect indicating high expectations is actually being executed by visually recognizing part of the effect suggesting the level of expectation can be quickly provided with a situation in which the effect is visible. Alternatively, the system may be configured so that the display of the shield image automatically stops when an indication effect indicating a level of expectation above a predetermined level is initiated. For example, the system may be configured so that the display of the shield image automatically stops when an image of a golden enemy tank with a 100% expectation level or a simulated image of the attack button 3710 is displayed.

On the other hand, if the display of the shield image is configured to be stopped when a simple condition such as pressing a button is met, the effect could become easily visible if the player presses the button incorrectly. Therefore, it is recommended that the display of the shield image be stopped when specific conditions are met based on pressing the mission button 3700 or defense button 3740. Specifically, it is recommended that the same conditions as those for starting the display of the shield image as described above be used as the conditions for stopping the display of the shield image.

When a shield image is being displayed, the system may be configured to display instructions for stopping the display of the shield image. For example, the dialogue window for Colonel Dyna may display a line such as "You coward! Press the mission button to release the shield!" or "You coward! Press the defense button 3740 to release the shield!". With this configuration, even if the player accidentally displays a shield image, the display of the shield image can be quickly terminated.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 144 (e), the shield image can be displayed multiple times by accepting multiple operations of the defense button 3740 during the valid period. Furthermore, the display time of the shield image is extended and it is displayed continuously as long as the defense button 3740 is held down. This makes it possible to make the image of the enemy tank, the simulated image of the attack button 3710, the image of a destroyed enemy tank, and the image of an exploding shell all difficult to see.

The display effect may be configured to disable the display of a shield image or to terminate the display of a currently displayed shield image. For example, the display of the shield image may be terminated when an image suggesting high expectations (e.g., a red or gold image) is displayed, and the player may be prevented from displaying the shield image for a predetermined period during which the image suggesting high expectations is displayed, or until the display of the decorative symbols suggesting high expectations has ended. Alternatively, when a start winning occurs in the first start slot 2002 or the second start slot 2004 while the shield image is being displayed, and a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result, which is determined by the pre-reading result of the reception of a gaming ball, is determined to be a high-expectation effect, the display of the shield image may be terminated, and the "shield bullet reach" effect may be continued until the display of the decorative symbols targeted by the pre-reading has ended, while the player may be prevented from displaying the shield image. In this case, the display effect may be configured to display an image of an enemy tank larger than the shield image.
In this way, the teacher can be improved by making the shield image invisible to the player when a predetermined condition is met. Also, by displaying a predetermined image larger than the shield image, the expectation that a situation advantageous to the player will occur can be increased.

In this embodiment, the operation acceptance period for the defense button 3740 begins after the display of the decorative pattern changes begins, but it may also be possible to start the operation acceptance period for the defense button 3740 simultaneously with the start of the display of the decorative pattern changes. In this case, it is recommended to display the mode shown in Figure 145(a) at timing t0.

In this embodiment, the operation acceptance period for the defense button 3740 is set to end before the display of the decorative symbols stops, but the operation acceptance period for the defense button 3740 may continue until the display of the decorative symbols stops (timing t35). By configuring it in this way, the shield image can be used to make it difficult to see the stopping state of the decorative symbols indicating the special lottery results, depending on the player's wishes.

These embodiments may be combined to display a shield image from the start of the decorative pattern change (timing t0) until the change display ends (timing t35).

In the embodiment shown, the shield image is displayed for a predetermined time (e.g., 6 seconds) based on conditions such as repeated pressing of the defense button 3740 or a 1/3 lottery that is held when the defense button 3740 is operated, but the predetermined time may also be configured to be set by the player. For example, during a demo period when no decorative symbol variations are being displayed and no jackpot play is being played, the display time of the shield image may be set to, for example, between 5 and 60 seconds by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730. This configuration makes it possible to display the shield image in a manner that suits the player's mood.

The period during which a shield image can be displayed may be set by the player based on the number of times the decorative symbol changes. For example, if the number of times the decorative symbol changes is set to 20, then the player can operate the defense button 3740 to display a shield image during a tank reach effect that occurs between the time the player makes the setting and the time the decorative symbol changes 20 times. On the other hand, if the player does not make a setting, then the shield image will not be displayed even if the defense button 3740 is operated during a tank reach effect.

Even if the conditions for displaying a shield image again are met while a shield image is being displayed, a new shield image will not be displayed. This prevents excessive effects from being executed. On the other hand, if the conditions for displaying a shield image again are met while a shield image is being displayed, the display time of the currently displayed shield image may be extended from the point when the conditions for displaying the shield image are met. With this configuration, it is possible to continue hiding suggestive effects with the shield image while suppressing excessive effects.

On the other hand, if the conditions for redisplaying a shield image are met while a shield image is being displayed, a new shield image may be displayed immediately. In this case, the display of the currently displayed shield image may be interrupted and a new shield image may be displayed, or the new shield image may be displayed in addition to the currently displayed shield image. This configuration can shorten the time during which a shield image is not displayed, and also easily extend the time during which a shield image is displayed.

In addition, it may be configured to output sound effects corresponding to the type of image of the enemy tank, the type of simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, or the type of image of an exploding shell. In this case, the output sound effects also indicate the player's level of expectation.
On the other hand, for players who do not want to know the expected rate, the output of such a sound effect is not desirable. Therefore, when a shield image is displayed, the output of a special sound may be started at the timing when the shield image is displayed. The output of the special sound may be continued until the display of the shield image is finished.
Furthermore, when the special sound is output, the volume of the effect sound may be suppressed. The suppression of the volume of the effect sound may be continued until the display of the shield image is finished. The volume of the special sound may be made larger than the volume of the effect sound. Alternatively, both of these may be adopted.
By adopting such a configuration, the effect sound can be made hard to hear due to a decrease in volume or by a special sound, so even if the expectation level is suggested by the effect sound, the indicated expectation level can be made hard to understand.
It is also possible to configure the system so that when an enemy tank appears, a predetermined sound effect that does not indicate the expected level is output. In this case, a player who does not want to know the expected level can quickly operate the defense button 3740 upon hearing the predetermined sound effect, thereby displaying a shield image and starting the output of a special sound.

Suggestive effects may also be executed in game states that are advantageous to the player, such as a time-saving state in which the decorative pattern changes over a short time, or a probability-changing state in which the probability of a special lottery resulting in a jackpot is increased. In this case, the system may be configured so that a shield image is not displayed even if the defense button 3740 is operated. This configuration prevents the player from accidentally operating the defense button 3740 in game states in which a jackpot is more likely than usual, making it difficult to see the image of an enemy tank, a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, or an image of a destroyed enemy tank. This prevents the player from missing highly anticipated effects.

On the other hand, if suggestive effects can be executed in a game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a time-saving state or a probability-varying state, a shield image may be configured to be displayed in response to the operation of the defense button 3740. By configuring in this way, suggestive effects can be hidden even in a game state in which a jackpot is more likely to occur than usual.
Alternatively, in a game state that is advantageous to the player, the size of the shield image may be made smaller or the display time of the shield image may be shortened compared to the normal state, thereby slightly increasing the visibility of the suggestive effects that are hidden by the shield image.

In addition, suggestive effects may be executed during a jackpot game state. In this case, suggestive effects may indicate the likelihood of another jackpot occurring after the jackpot game state ends by predicting the pending state, or may indicate the likelihood of transitioning to a time-saving state or probability-varying state, which are more advantageous than the normal state, after the jackpot ends. For example, when a 10-round jackpot is being executed, such suggestive effects may be executed from the third round to the fifth round. This configuration prevents the player from accidentally operating the defense button 3740 at a time when the game state that occurs after a jackpot can be known, making it difficult to see the image of the enemy tank, the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, or the image of a destroyed enemy tank.

On the other hand, if suggestive effects can be executed during a jackpot, a shield image can be displayed in response to the operation of the defense button 3740. This configuration makes it possible to hide suggestive effects even during a jackpot. This makes it difficult for players who do not want to know the game status after a jackpot to recognize the degree of expectation regarding the game status after a jackpot.

An effect similar to the "shield bullet reach" effect in which the player's tank moves along a road may be executed across multiple changes in decorative patterns as a look-ahead effect based on the pending look-ahead effect in the normal state.
In this case, it is preferable to configure the display effect of the player's tank moving along the road so that it continues from the start of the decorative pattern change multiple times until the change stops. Also, while the decorative pattern is changing, the expected probability of a jackpot for the pending ball that is the subject of the pre-reading may be indicated by a simulated image of the attack button 3710, an image of an enemy tank, an image of an exploding shell, or the like, as described above, or a shield image may be displayed in response to the operation of the defense button 3740, making these images difficult to see. It is also preferable to configure the display of the shield image so that it spans the display of multiple decorative pattern changes.
The reserved image to be pre-read may be configured to be hidden by a shield image.
In this way, by suggesting that the player's tank moves along the road across the variation of multiple decorative patterns, it is possible to create a sense of unity in the presentation.

When a transition to a jackpot state is made by a "shield bullet reach" effect in which the player's tank moves along a road, if a jackpot occurs, the display effect of the player's tank moving along a road may be continued throughout the jackpot state and after the jackpot state. Furthermore, after the jackpot state is reached, the player may be notified of the expected probability of another jackpot occurring after the jackpot state ends by performing a hold-up prediction, or the player may be notified of the expected probability of transitioning to a time-saving state or a probability-varying state, which are more advantageous than the normal state, by a suggestive effect of the player's tank moving along a road. Furthermore, if the player enters a time-saving state or a probability-varying state after a jackpot, the suggestive effect of the player's tank moving along a road may be continued until the time-saving state or the probability-varying state ends. In this case, too, the shield image displayed in response to the operation of the defense button 3740 may be configured to obscure simulated images such as the attack button 3710, enemy tank images, and shell explosion images.
In addition, it is preferable that the display of the shield image is configured to be displayed across the decorative pattern changing display state, the decorative pattern stationary display state, the big win game state, and the decorative pattern changing state after the big win game state.
Even with this configuration, it is possible to create a sense of unity in the presentation.

Although an example has been given in which a part of the image of the enemy tank is made invisible by the shield image, it is also possible to configure the shield image so that the entire image of the enemy tank is made invisible.
Fig. 147(a) shows a modified example of the example of the effect shown with reference to Fig. 146(e). In the example of the effect shown in Fig. 147(a), the entire image of the enemy tank and part of the simulated image of the attack button 3710 are hidden by a shield image.

An example has been shown in which a portion of the simulated image that resembles the attack button 3710 is made invisible by the shield image, but the shield image may be configured to make all of the simulated image that resembles the attack button 3710 invisible.
Fig. 147(b) shows a modified example of the example of the effect shown with reference to Fig. 146(e). In the example of the effect shown in Fig. 147(b), part of the image of the enemy tank and all of the simulated image of the attack button 3710 are hidden by a shield image.

An example has been given in which the shield image makes the image of the destroyed enemy tank and part of the explosion pattern of the shell invisible, but the shield image may be configured to make all of the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the explosion pattern of the shell invisible.
Fig. 147(c) shows a modified example of the example shown with reference to Fig. 146(d). In the example shown in Fig. 147(c), the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the explosion of the shell are all hidden by a shield image.

In the example shown, the shield image is opaque, and the image of the enemy tank, the simulated image of the attack button 3710, the image of the destroyed enemy tank, and the explosion of the shell, which have a lower display priority than the shield image, are hidden by the shield image. However, the shield image may be made translucent, so that these images, which have a lower display priority, can be seen through the shield image.

In this way, the entire simulated image that mimics the first operating unit and the corresponding display that corresponds to the operation of the operating unit can be displayed in a hidden manner by the image that is displayed based on the operation on the second operating unit, and the degree of expectation suggested by these images can be hidden.
Furthermore, it is possible to display a simulated image that imitates the first operating unit and part of the corresponding display that corresponds to the operation of the operating unit in a hidden manner by an image that is displayed based on the operation on the second operating unit, so that these images make it difficult to recognize the degree of expectation indicated by the image while allowing the user to recognize that an image indicating the degree of expectation is being displayed.
Alternatively, only a portion of these images may suggest the degree of expectation, and the portion suggesting the degree of expectation may be partially or entirely hidden by a shield image.

In the example shown, the degree of expectation is indicated by the color of the simulated image that resembles the attack button 3710, but instead of or in addition to the color of the simulated image, the shape and size of the simulated image itself may be different. The shape and size of the simulated image itself may also be configured to indicate the degree of expectation. Here, it is preferable to configure the area that protrudes from the shield image to be larger when the degree of expectation is high. It is also preferable to adopt a similar configuration for the image of the enemy tank, the image of the destroyed enemy tank, and the explosion pattern of the shell. By using such a configuration, it is possible to make it less likely that the image indicating the degree of expectation will be obscured by the shield image when the degree of expectation is high.

When a shield image is displayed, a larger shield image may be displayed by performing a more difficult operation (for example, pressing and holding the defense button 3740 further or repeatedly pressing the defense button 3740). Also, this larger shield image may be configured to hide more of the simulated image of the attack button 3710, the image of the enemy tank, the image of the destroyed enemy tank, and the state of the shell explosion than a normal shield image.
By adopting such a configuration, the player can be involved in determining the proportion of images suggesting the degree of expectation that are hidden, which can further increase the interest.

Figures 148(a) to 148(d) show modified examples of the example presentation shown with reference to Figure 145(c). Figure 148(a) shows an example presentation in which a small-sized mock image is displayed as a mock image that imitates the attack button 3710. Figure 148(b) shows an example presentation in which a small-sized mock image and a shield image are displayed as mock images that imitate the attack button 3710. Figure 148(c) shows an example presentation in which a large-sized mock image is displayed as a mock image that imitates the attack button 3710. Figure 148(d) shows an example presentation in which a large-sized mock image and a shield image are displayed as mock images that imitate the attack button 3710.
The configuration is such that the probability of winning a big win is higher when a large size simulated image is displayed as the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 than when a small size simulated image is displayed as the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710.
With this configuration, when a simulated image with a high degree of expectation is displayed, the area of the simulated image that is not hidden by the shield image becomes larger, allowing the player to recognize that the degree of expectation is high.
It should be noted that the image is not limited to the simulated image, and the degree of expectation may be similarly indicated by varying the shape and size of the image of the enemy tank or the image of the destroyed enemy tank.

An example has been shown in which the degree of expectation is indicated by a simulated image of the attack button 3710, an image of an enemy tank, an image of a destroyed enemy tank, and an image of an exploding shell, but an embodiment applied to one image may also be applied to an embodiment for another image. Alternatively, an embodiment applied to a number of images may also be applied to an embodiment for a number of other images.

In the above example, the degree of expectation is indicated by a simulated image of the attack button 3710, an image of an enemy tank, an image of a destroyed enemy tank, and an image of an exploding shell, but the degree of expectation may also be indicated by the display mode of a portion of these images. In this case, it is preferable to configure the image so that at least a portion of this image is hidden by a shield image. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to grasp the progress of the presentation, while making the degree of expectation imperceptible or difficult to perceive.

In this way, with the "Shield Bullet Reach" feature of this embodiment, the predetermined image indicating the degree of expectation related to the first operation unit is made difficult to see by the image displayed by operating the second operation unit, thereby providing players who do not want to know the degree of expectation with the option of hiding it, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

Gaming machines equipped with multiple control units have been known in the past (see, for example, JP 2011-087638 A). Furthermore, the valid period during which operations on the control units were acceptable was limited to a portion of the time while the decorative symbols were changing. As a result, some players may feel frustrated that they were unable to operate the control units, even if they felt a strong desire to do so. Furthermore, since any operation performed during the valid period always resulted in a display effect corresponding to the operation, players may feel a sense of monotony when operating the control units. Therefore, in the embodiment described below, taking into consideration the existence of players who think this way, an operating means is provided that can be operated for a long period of time while the decorative symbols are changing, and a special display change is not necessarily implemented in response to an operation on the control units; furthermore, a special display change is implemented only when certain conditions are met.

An embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to Fig. 144 etc. will be described below with reference to the time charts shown in Figs. 149 to 152 and the display examples shown in Figs. 153 and 154. In the "Special Machine Gun Reach" effect in this embodiment, the functions and displays related to the attack button 3710 are displayed in the same manner as in the embodiment described with reference to Fig. 144.
On the other hand, in the "Special Machine Gun Reach" effect, an effect pattern is executed in which operation acceptance is enabled for the mission button 3700, not the defense button 3740. The decorative symbol on the mission button 3700 becomes a reach state, and operation acceptance is enabled at the timing (timing t5) when the reach effect in which the player's tank moves begins. Operation acceptance ends at timing t27, which is the timing after the enemy tank has been displayed twice.

The period during which the mission button 3700 is valid for operation (timing t5 to timing t27) is longer than the period during which the attack button 3710 is valid for operation (timing t11 to timing t14), and the period during which the mission button 3700 is valid for operation includes the period during which the attack button 3710 is valid for operation. As described above, the attack button 3710 always changes its display in response to operation during the valid operation period. On the other hand, even if the mission button 3700 is operated, a display corresponding to the operation is not necessarily produced; rather, a display change is produced in the display area with a predetermined probability (e.g., a 1/3 probability). For example, each time the mission button 3700 is operated, a lottery is held with a 1/3 probability of winning, and if a winning result is obtained, an image of a bullet fired from a special machine gun hitting an enemy tank and causing an explosion is displayed in the display area for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, a simulated image of the mission button 3700 is continuously displayed during the period during which operation acceptance of the mission button 3700 is valid (timing t5 to timing t27), indicating that operation of the mission button 3700 is valid.

The time chart in Figure 149 shows an example of the effect when neither the attack button 3710 nor the mission button 3700 is operated.
In the time chart shown in FIG. 149, the variable display of decorative symbols begins at timing t0. From timing t0 to timing t5, the variable display of the left, center, and right decorative symbols is performed as shown in FIG. 139(b). At timing t5, as shown in FIG. 139(c), when the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are the same symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol consisting of the number "3") temporarily stopped and a reach state occurs, the left, center, and right decorative symbols are reduced in size and displayed in the upper left of the display area. At the same time, an image of the player's tank advancing on the road is displayed in the display area. Furthermore, during the period from timing t5 to timing t27, operation of the mission button 3700 is enabled.

Figure 153 (a) shows the state in which an image of the player's tank is displayed in the display area at timing t5. The display area shows the various decorative symbols ("3", "↓", "3") that are in a reach state at the top left of the display area, an image of the player's tank at the bottom center of the display area, an image of the road along which the player's tank will move at the left-right center of the display area, an image of the horizon and sky at the top of the display area, an image of the dialogue of the special character "Colonel Dyna" and a window image surrounding the dialogue image at the bottom right of the display area, an image of the dialogue of the special character "Sergeant Might" and a window image surrounding the dialogue image at the bottom left of the display area, and a mock image of the mission button 3700 at the top left of the window image displaying the dialogue image of "Colonel Dyna".

As shown in the lines of "Colonel Dyna" in Figure 153(a), by operating the mission button 3700, a bullet will be fired from the player's tank's special machine gun and displayed as a moving bullet; more details will be provided later.

At timing t9, an image of a white enemy tank begins to appear in the upper right corner of the display area, and moves to the left. Figure 145(b) shows the state at timing t10 in which the image of the enemy tank is moving to the left toward the road.

At timing t11, an image of a white enemy tank moving from right to left within the display area is positioned on the road. At the same time, operation of the attack button 3710 becomes valid, and an imitation image of the attack button 3710 is displayed to the right of the lines of "Sergeant Might." The valid operation period for the attack button 3710 continues for three seconds, from timing t11 to timing t14.

Figure 153(b) shows a state in which a white mock-up image resembling the attack button 3710 and an image of a white enemy tank are displayed on the road in the display area at timing t11. Also, Figure 153(c) shows a state in which a white mock-up image resembling the attack button 3710 and an image of a white enemy tank are displayed on the road in the display area at timing t12.

At timing t14, the image of the enemy tank appears to have reached the left edge of the road. The valid operation period for the attack button 3710 also ends. Figure 153 (d) shows the display state at timing t14.

From timing t14 to timing t16, the image of the enemy tank continues to move to the left in the display area, and at timing t16, the image of the enemy tank moves off the screen and is no longer displayed.

The valid operation period for the mission button 3700 and the display of the simulated image of the mission button 3700 continue until timing t27. At timing t27, the valid operation period for the mission button 3700 and the display of the simulated image of the mission button 3700 end.

After that, from timing t32 to timing t34, the display state shown in Figure 139(f) will be displayed, and at timing t34, the decorative symbols will be displayed stationary. If the special lottery result is a loss, the display state shown in Figure 139(g) will be displayed from timing t34 to timing t35, and if the special lottery result is a jackpot, the display state shown in Figure 139(h) will be displayed from timing t34 to timing t35.

Referring to the time chart in Figure 149, an example of the effect that occurs when the player does not operate the attack button 3710 or mission button 3700 is shown.

Next, referring to the time chart in Figure 150, we will show an example of the effects that occur when the player operates the attack button 3710.

The timing chart in Figure 150 shows an example of the effect when the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t12. In this case, a display of a moving cannonball is displayed from timing t12 to timing t13. Figure 153 (e) shows an example of the display of a moving cannonball. Furthermore, the effective operation period for the attack button 3710 ends at timing t12, when the attack button 3710 is operated.

At timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. In addition, an image of an exploding shell is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding shell are displayed for three seconds (in this example, for three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). Figure 153 (f) is an example display showing the state in which the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding shell are displayed.

Next, referring to the time chart in Figure 151, we will show an example of the presentation that occurs when a player operates the mission button 3700.

The time chart in Figure 151 shows an example of a presentation when the mission button 3700 is operated at timing t12. Figure 151(a) is a time chart showing an example of a presentation in which the mission button 3700 is operated, a bullet is fired from the special machine gun, and an image of the bullet exploding is displayed. Figure 151(b) is a time chart showing an example of a presentation in which the mission button 3700 is operated, a bullet is fired from the special machine gun, but an image of the bullet exploding is not displayed.

In the example shown in Figure 151(a), a bullet fired from the special machine gun is displayed moving from timing t12 to timing t13. Figure 154(a) shows an example of the display of a bullet moving. Note that the valid operation period for the attack button 3710 ends at timing t14.

The example presentation shown in Figure 151(a) is an example presentation in which a lottery based on operation of the mission button 3700 is won (selected with a 1/3 probability), and an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. In addition, an image of an exploding bullet is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding bullet are displayed for three seconds (in this example presentation, for three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). Figure 154(b) is an example display showing the state in which the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding bullet are displayed.

On the other hand, the example of the presentation shown in Figure 151 (b) is an example of a presentation in which the lottery conducted based on the operation of the mission button 3700 results in a loss (selection with a 2/3 probability), and the image of the destroyed enemy tank is not displayed. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank does not change to an image of a destroyed enemy tank, and the image of the enemy tank continues to move to the left. In addition, an image of an exploding bullet is not displayed. Figure 154 (c) is an example of a display in which the image of the enemy tank continues to move to the left without changing to an image of a destroyed enemy tank (for example, timing t14).

Next, referring to the time chart in Figure 152, we will show an example of the presentation when the player operates both the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700.

The time chart in Figure 152 shows an example of a presentation when the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 are operated simultaneously at timing t12. Figure 152(a) is a time chart showing an example of a presentation in which the mission button 3700 is operated and an image of a bullet exploding is displayed. Figure 152(b) is a time chart showing an example of a presentation in which the mission button 3700 is operated but an image of a bullet exploding is not displayed.

In the example shown in Figure 152(a), from timing t12 to timing t13, a moving cannonball fired from a cannon turret and a moving bullet fired from a special machine gun are displayed. Figure 154(d) shows an example of a display of a moving cannonball and bullet. Also, the valid operation period for the attack button 3710 ends at timing t12.

The example presentation shown in Figure 152(a) is an example presentation in which a lottery based on operation of the mission button 3700 is won (selected with a 1/3 probability), and an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. In addition, an image of an exploding shell and an image of an exploding bullet are displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank, the image of the exploding shell, and the image of the exploding bullet are displayed for three seconds (in this example presentation, for three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). Figure 154(e) is an example display showing the state in which the image of the destroyed enemy tank, the image of the exploding bullet, and the image of the exploding shell are displayed.

On the other hand, the example presentation shown in Figure 152(b) is an example presentation in which the lottery conducted based on the operation of the mission button 3700 results in a losing draw (selection with a 2/3 probability), and an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. In addition, an image of an exploding shell is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding shell are displayed for three seconds (in this example presentation, for three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). Figure 154(f) is an example display showing the state in which the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding shell are displayed.

154( e), the size of the image of an exploding bullet displayed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is larger than the size of the image of an exploding artillery shell displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710. Furthermore, the image of an exploding artillery shell displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710 is set to have a higher display priority than the image of a destroyed enemy tank. Furthermore, the image of an exploding bullet displayed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is set to have a higher display priority than the image of an exploding artillery shell displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710.
This configuration makes it possible to highlight display changes that are not necessarily given based on the operation of the mission button 3700. This makes it difficult for the player to miss the display changes that are given in this way.

When the player operates the attack button 3710, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed in response to the operation. Therefore, during the tank movement effect, the player can operate the attack button 3710 to display an explosion image and change the image of the enemy tank to a destroyed display mode, and then operate the mission button 3700 to add a further explosion image to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. On the other hand, the player can also change the image of the enemy tank to an image of a destroyed enemy tank by operating only the mission button 3700, without operating the attack button 3710.

It is preferable to configure the device so that the likelihood of a jackpot is indicated by at least one of the display modes (color, size, shape, etc.) of the image of a destroyed enemy tank, the simulated image of the mission button 3700, the simulated image of the attack button 3710, the image of an exploding shell, and the image of an exploding bullet. Specifically, it is preferable to adopt a method similar to that of the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 144, etc. (color, size, shape, etc. of each image). Note that it is not necessary for these images to indicate the likelihood of a jackpot.

With this configuration, by operating the mission button 3700 and meeting certain conditions (a one-third chance of winning), the image of the enemy tank can be changed to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. Furthermore, an image of an exploding bullet can be added to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. By adding such a display change, the player feels that their operation of the mission button 3700 has been rewarded, and they feel great joy for having gone to the trouble of making the display change appear, thereby increasing the player's interest.

The display priority of the explosion image displayed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is higher than that of the explosion image displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710. This configuration ensures the visibility of the image that is displayed only when a specific condition (a 1/3 lottery win) is met in addition to the operation of the mission button 3700, preventing situations in which the visibility of the image displayed by the operation of the mission button 3700 is impaired and the player becomes dissatisfied.

The display change that occurs in the display area in response to the operation of the attack button 3710 or mission button 3700 may be displayed in multiple modes with different appearance rates. For example, there may be three enemy tank destruction images with different degrees of destruction, and the destruction image may be selected and displayed so that there is a 10% chance that a highly destructive image will be displayed, a 30% chance that a medium destructive image will be displayed, and a 60% chance that a less destructive image will be displayed. Alternatively, there may be an extremely destructive enemy tank destruction image that appears with an extremely low probability (1%) only when the mission button 3700 is operated. This allows the player to see an even rarer display change when they have struggled to make a display change appear. Similar displays may be made using explosion images instead of or in addition to destruction images.

If the player does not operate the attack button 3710, a shell may be automatically fired from the turret at the end of the valid operation period for the attack button 3710 (timing t14), and an image of the enemy tank being destroyed may be automatically displayed without the player having to operate the button. This configuration allows the player to concentrate on operating the mission button 3700.

In this embodiment, when no enemy tanks are displayed, it is possible to operate the mission button 3700 to fire a bullet from the special machine gun of the player's tank, and display an image of the fired bullet exploding on impact with the road. For example, by operating the mission button 3700 at timing t5, a display of the fired bullet moving from timing t5 to timing t6 is displayed. Furthermore, if the 1/3 lottery is won, an image of the fired bullet exploding on impact with the ground is displayed for three seconds from timing t6 to timing t9.
The operation timing at which an image of a moving enemy tank being destroyed by a bullet fired based on the operation of the mission button 3700 may be from timing t9 to timing t16, which is the period during which the enemy tank is moving, or from timing t11 to timing t14, which is the period during which the operation of the attack button 3710 is valid.

On the other hand, if the player operates the mission button 3700 before operating the attack button 3710 and wins a one-third lottery, resulting in a display of a bullet fired from the player's tank's special machine gun hitting an enemy tank and exploding, the game may be configured so that the image of a moving shell or an exploding shell corresponding to the operation of the attack button 3710 is not displayed, even if the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid operation period of the attack button 3710. This configuration can create an effect that makes the player feel as if they have defeated the enemy tank with their own strength, thereby increasing the player's satisfaction with the display of the image of an exploding bullet, which is an effect that was achieved with great effort. Furthermore, by not displaying the image of an exploding shell, the visibility of the image of an exploding bullet, which was achieved with great effort by operating the mission button 3700, can be ensured.
In addition, when the mission button 3700 is operated in a situation where an image of an exploding shell corresponding to the operation of the attack button 3710 and an image of a destroyed enemy tank are displayed, an image of an exploding bullet may be additionally displayed in response to the operation of the mission button 3700. In this case, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of satisfaction as if they had destroyed the enemy tank.

As in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 144 etc., the degree of expectation may be indicated by the color of the enemy tank or the manner of destruction of the enemy tank. In this case, it is preferable that at least a part of the color of the enemy tank or the manner of destruction of the enemy tank be visible from the image of an exploding bullet displayed by operating the mission button 3700. By adopting such a configuration, the visibility of the indicated degree of expectation can be ensured.
Furthermore, if the suggestive effect has a low expectation level, by operating the mission button 3700 during a predetermined period after the suggestive effect has ended (for example, the period from timing t16 to timing t27), an image of an exploding bullet can be displayed once or multiple times, thereby restoring interest in the game that may have waned when the effect with a low expectation level was executed.

While an embodiment in which the mission button 3700 is operated has been described, a right lever 3730 or a left lever 3720 may also be operable in addition to the mission button 3700, and the orientation of the special machine gun may be changed left or right using the right lever 3730 or the left lever 3720. When the special machine gun is pointed toward an enemy tank, the probability of winning the lottery when the mission button 3700 is operated may be set to 1/2, which is a probability that is higher than 1/3. When the special machine gun is not pointed toward an enemy tank, the probability of winning the lottery when the mission button 3700 is operated may be set to 1/10, which is a probability that is lower than 1/3. Furthermore, when the right lever 3730 or the left lever 3720 is operated in an extremely appropriate manner, the probability of winning the lottery may be set to 100%. Conversely, when the right lever 3730 or the left lever 3720 is operated in an extremely inappropriate manner, the probability of winning the lottery may be set to 0%.
In this case, the player operates the mission button 3700 while operating the right lever 3730 and the left lever 3720, aiming to display the enemy tank in a destroyed state, which allows the player to feel more immersed in the game. Furthermore, when an image of the enemy tank being destroyed is displayed, the player feels a great sense of accomplishment.

In addition, the gaming facility may be configured so that the probability of winning the lottery can be changed when the mission button 3700 is operated. Alternatively, a real-time clock function may be used so that the probability of winning the lottery can be changed each week when the mission button 3700 is operated. By configuring it in this way, the appearance rate of effects can be adjusted according to the tendencies of players visiting the facility. For example, the probability of winning the lottery may be cyclically switched each day from 0%, 30%, 100%, 50%, 0%, etc.

The mission button 3700 may be configured to have two situations during the period in which operation acceptance is enabled: one in which operation instructions are displayed, and one in which operation instructions are not displayed. For example, it may be possible to implement a presentation pattern in which a mock image of the mission button 3700 is displayed, and another in which a mock image of the mission button 3700 is not displayed.

Such selection of effect patterns may be configured so that an amusement parlor staff member can select which effect pattern to execute, or a real-time clock function may be used to change which effect pattern to execute each month. For example, for one month after the introduction of pachinko machine 1, only effect patterns that do not display operation instructions may be executed, and after one month has passed since the introduction of pachinko machine 1, both effect patterns that do not display operation instructions and effect patterns that display operation instructions may be executed. Alternatively, when a "special machine gun reach" is executed, either an effect pattern that does not display operation instructions or an effect pattern that displays operation instructions may be selected with a predetermined probability (e.g., a 50/50 probability).

By configuring in this way, in the case of a presentation pattern in which no operation instructions are displayed, the content displayed in the display area can be simplified. It also prevents players who are unfamiliar with the game from becoming confused when multiple operation instructions are displayed. On the other hand, even in situations in which no operation instructions are displayed, experienced players can operate the mission button 3700 to fire bullets from the special machine gun of their tank, and display a pattern in which the fired bullets explode on impact.

An example has been shown in which a 1/3 lottery is held in response to the operation of the mission button 3700. In this case, a player hoping to receive a display change will press the mission button 3700 repeatedly. However, there is also the problem that players may become bored if the mission button 3700 is simply pressed repeatedly. Therefore, the system may be configured so that a 1/3 lottery is held by another operation method, for example, by pressing and holding the mission button 3700. In this case, it is advisable to configure the system so that one lottery is held each time the mission button 3700 is pressed for one second.

In addition, when it becomes possible to accept operation of the mission button 3700, it is advisable to instruct the player which operation is required for the presentation pattern. For example, if the presentation pattern requires repeated pressing of the mission button 3700, the line from "Colonel Dyna" may be displayed as "Press the mission button 3700 repeatedly!", and if the presentation pattern requires a long press of the mission button 3700, the line from "Colonel Dyna" may be displayed as "Press and hold the mission button 3700!".

With this configuration, the player does not simply operate the mission button 3700 aimlessly, but instead feels a sense of tension as he wonders which presentation pattern will be executed and which operation instruction will be presented. Also, since the number of times a lottery can be entered is reduced when the mission button is pressed for a long time compared to when the button is pressed repeatedly (since rapid pressing can generally be performed several times per second), the player will feel a greater sense of accomplishment when a presentation pattern that requires a long press results in a display of an enemy tank exploding. In this way, by providing multiple presentation patterns with different levels of difficulty for image display, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.
The appearance ratio of presentation patterns requiring rapid tapping and presentation patterns requiring long presses may be configured to be selectable by the gaming store staff, or may be configured to be set using a real-time clock function.

Furthermore, when the player performs an operation different from the operation instruction for the mission button 3700, a presentation pattern may be implemented in which a bullet is displayed being fired from a special machine gun.

For example, in a presentation pattern that displays "Press the mission button 3700 repeatedly!", if the mission button 3700 is pressed repeatedly in accordance with the operational instructions, no display will be shown of the special machine gun being fired. However, if a long press is performed, which is an operation different from the operational instructions, a lottery will be held with a 50% chance of winning every time the mission button 3700 is pressed for one second, and if the lottery is won, a display will be shown of the special machine gun being fired.

On the other hand, in a presentation pattern that displays "Press and hold mission button 3700," if the mission button 3700 is pressed and held in accordance with the operational instructions, no display will be shown of the special machine gun being fired. However, if a rapid press is performed, which is an operation that differs from the operational instructions, a lottery will be held with a 50% chance of winning each time the mission button 3700 is pressed, and if the lottery is won, a display will be shown of the special machine gun being fired.

You can also configure it so that different images of exploding bullets (perhaps different colors or shapes) are displayed when the button is pressed and held and when it is pressed repeatedly.

Furthermore, the system may be configured to execute an effect pattern that does not instruct the player on how to operate the mission button 3700, displaying a line from Colonel Dyna such as "To fire the special machine gun, press the mission button...what do you do...?" Internally, the game may execute either an effect pattern that requires a long press of the mission button 3700, or an effect pattern that requires the player to repeatedly press the mission button 3700. Furthermore, if the player's operation differs from the required operation, Colonel Dyna may prompt the player to operate in the appropriate manner by displaying a line such as "I remembered! To fire the special machine gun, press the mission button repeatedly!" or "I remembered! To fire the special machine gun, press and hold the mission button!" In this way, if the operation performed by the player after estimating the operation mode is an appropriate operation mode, or if the operation performed by the player after estimating the operation mode is inappropriate and the appropriate operation mode is displayed as an operation instruction and then the player performs the appropriate operation mode, an image of a bullet exploding in a special manner different from when an operation mode instruction display has been displayed in advance may be displayed. Also, different special sound effects may be output corresponding to the explosion image.

This configuration can satisfy the rebellious spirit of players who feel as though they are constantly being ordered around by the gaming machine. It can also provide a sense of surprise and satisfaction to players who accidentally or intentionally perform operations that are different from the instructions. Furthermore, since players play while guessing how to operate the operation unit, it can increase their enthusiasm for participating in the game. Furthermore, the second operation unit may be displayed in a way that does not necessarily clearly indicate the operation instructions, which will further increase the player's sense of satisfaction with the operations they performed.

In the example shown, a lottery is held by pressing and holding or repeatedly pressing the mission button 3700, and a display is displayed showing the firing of a special machine gun when certain conditions are met, but other methods of achieving certain conditions are also possible. For example, in a presentation pattern that requires a long press of the mission button 3700, a display may be configured to show a bullet being fired from the special machine gun if the mission button 3700 is held down for 10 seconds. Alternatively, in a presentation pattern that requires repeated pressing of the mission button 3700, a display may be configured to show a bullet being fired from the special machine gun if the mission button 3700 is pressed 16 or more times in one second.

The attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 have the same operation mode in the sense that they are pressed. Therefore, instead of using the mission button 3700, the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 may be rotated one turn clockwise or counterclockwise to perform the lottery described above, and a display of a bullet being fired from the special machine gun may be displayed with a 1/3 probability. Alternatively, the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 may be rotated multiple times clockwise or counterclockwise (for example, three turns) to display a bullet being fired from the special machine gun.

The system may be configured to always accept operation of the mission button 3700 while the decorative symbols are fluctuating. With this configuration, if a player experiences a loss despite the highly anticipated variable display result, the player's frustration can be alleviated by operating the mission button 3700. For example, while a decorative symbol has stopped displaying as a loss, the player can vent his frustration by attacking the decorative symbol.
In addition, it is preferable to configure the display change that has been given not to end even when the next variable display after the missing variable display starts. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the display of the image of an exploding bullet, which was displayed to relieve frustration, is forcibly interrupted, causing the player to feel even more dissatisfied. Note that, in this way, if it is determined that the display of the image of an exploding bullet crosses over the variation of the decorative pattern, it is also possible to configure the "Special Machine Gun Reach" to be executed again at timing t0, which is the start of the variation of the next decorative pattern. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent unnatural situations in the presentation.

In addition, whether or not a bullet will be fired when the mission button 3700 is operated may also be determined by lottery. For example, the probability may be 1/2 that a bullet will be fired, and 1/2 that a bullet will not be fired.

In this embodiment, when the mission button 3700 is operated and certain conditions are met, a change is made to the content displayed in the display area, giving the player a sense of satisfaction at having gone to great lengths to achieve this display. Furthermore, even if the display result resulting from an operation on the attack button 3710 is not what the player wanted and the player is dissatisfied with the display result, the player's dissatisfaction is alleviated by the display based on the operation on the mission button 3700. In particular, because the mission button 3700 can be operated multiple times, a display corresponding to the operation will eventually be displayed, which is effective in alleviating the player's dissatisfaction.

Gaming machines equipped with multiple operation units have been known (for example, JP 2011-087638 A). Other gaming machines have also been known that output sound effects indicating that an operation can be accepted or that an operation has become available when an operation on an operation unit becomes valid, or that an operation has been accepted when an operation is performed. However, there is room for further improvement in presentation. Below is shown an embodiment in which no sound effect is output even when operation acceptance on an operation unit becomes valid or an operation on an operation unit is performed, but when certain conditions are met, an operation acceptance display is displayed and a special sound is output.

Below, an embodiment relating to the "Silent Machine Gun Reach", which is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to Figure 149 etc., will be described with reference to Figure 155 etc. Note that, apart from the output of sound effects such as voice, the display area displays almost the same as the embodiment described with reference to Figure 149 etc. Note that various modifications of the embodiment described with reference to Figure 149 etc. can be applied to this embodiment. Note that the "Silent Machine Gun" in this embodiment is an improvement over the "Special Machine Gun" in the embodiment described with reference to Figure 149 etc., and is set to make an extremely quiet firing sound when firing a bullet.

The time chart in FIG. 155 illustrates a situation in which neither the attack button 3710 nor the mission button 3700 is operated. As shown in FIG. 155 , in this embodiment, a sound effect "prepare for cannon fire" is output as a precursor sound indicating that operation acceptance for the attack button 3710 is now possible for a predetermined period (timing t9 to timing t11) immediately prior to the timing at which operation acceptance for the attack button 3710 is enabled. Furthermore, at timing t11, when operation acceptance for the attack button 3710 is enabled, a sound effect "OK" begins to be output as an effective sound indicating that operation acceptance is now possible. The sound effect "OK" is output from timing t11 to timing t12. The effective operation period for the attack button 3710 ends at timing t14. When the operation acceptance period for the attack button 3710 ends at timing t14, a sound effect "stop preparing cannon fire" is output as an ending sound indicating that the operation acceptance period for the attack button 3710 has ended from timing t14 to timing t16.
On the other hand, for the mission button 3700, the valid operation period begins at timing t5 and ends at timing t27, but no sound effects are output in response to the start or end of the valid operation period.

FIG. 159(a) shows the state in which an image of the player's tank is displayed in the display area at timing t5.
As shown in the lines of "Colonel Dyna" in Figure 159(a), by operating the mission button 3700, a bullet is fired from the silent machine gun equipped on the player's tank and displayed as a moving bullet, which will be described in more detail below.

Figures 159 and 160 show examples of display in the display area, and the type of sound that will be output (or is being output) when that display state is reached is written in the upper right corner of the figure. For example, the character string "\OK/" is written in the upper right corner of the display example shown in Figure 159(c), which indicates that the sound "OK" will be output (or is being output) when the display example shown in Figure 159(c) is reached.

At timing t9, an image of a white enemy tank is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area. Furthermore, from timing t9 to timing t11, a voice message saying "Prepare for cannon fire" is output. Figure 159 (b) shows the state in which an image of a white enemy tank is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area at timing t9.

At timing t11, an image of an enemy tank is displayed on the road. At the same time, the valid operation period for the attack button 3710 begins. In addition, the sound "OK" is output from timing t11 to timing t12. Figure 159 (c) shows the state in which an image of an enemy tank is displayed on the road at timing t11.

Figure 159 (c) shows the display state at timing t12.

At timing t14, the image of the enemy tank appears to have reached the left edge of the road. The valid operation period for the attack button 3710 also ends. From timing t14 to timing t16, a voice message saying "Stop preparing the cannon" is output. Figure 159 (d) shows the display state at timing t14.

The time chart in Figure 156 shows an example of a performance in which the attack button 3710 is operated while the mission button 3700 is not operated during the valid operation period. As shown in Figure 156, when the attack button 3710 is operated at a predetermined timing (timing t12 in this example) during the valid operation period of the attack button 3710, the sound effect of "boom," which is the sound of a shell being fired from a cannon, is output for a predetermined time (timing t12 to timing t13), and then the sound effect of "boom," which is the sound of the shell hitting a tank and exploding, is output for a predetermined time (timing t13 to timing t15).

From timing t12 to timing t13, a display of moving cannonballs is displayed. Figure 159 (f) shows an example of a display of a moving cannonball. Also, the valid operation period for the attack button 3710 ends at timing t12.

At timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. In addition, an image of an exploding shell is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding shell are displayed for three seconds (in this example, for three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). In addition, the sound effect of a shell exploding, "boom," is output from timing t13 to timing t15. Figure 159 (g) is an example display showing the state in which the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding shell are displayed.

The time chart in FIG. 157 shows an example of a performance when the attack button 3710 is not operated, but the mission button 3700 is operated. When the mission button 3700 is operated, as described above, there are cases where the enemy tank can be destroyed and cases where the enemy tank cannot be destroyed. FIG. 157(a) shows an example of a performance when the enemy tank can be destroyed, and FIG. 157(b) shows an example of a performance when the enemy tank cannot be destroyed. As described above, the probability of destroying the enemy tank is 1/3, and the probability of not destroying the enemy tank is 2/3. When the enemy tank is destroyed, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed, and at the same time, a sound effect of "boom" is output, which is the sound of a bullet hitting the enemy tank and exploding. On the other hand, when the enemy tank cannot be destroyed, no sound effect is output.
In the example of the effect shown in Figure 157, since the attack button 3710 is not operated, sound effects similar to those in the embodiment described with reference to Figure 155 are output.

In the example shown in Figure 157(a), a bullet fired from a silent machine gun is displayed moving from timing t12 to timing t13. Figure 160(a) shows an example of the display of a bullet moving. Note that the valid operation period for the attack button 3710 ends at timing t14.

The example presentation shown in Figure 157(a) is an example presentation in which a lottery based on operation of the mission button 3700 is won (selected with a 1/3 probability), and an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. An image of an exploding bullet is also displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding bullet are displayed for three seconds (in this example presentation, for three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). In addition, from timing t13 to timing t15, the sound effect of a bullet hitting the enemy tank and exploding is output -- "boom!". Figure 160(b) is an example display showing a state in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding bullet are displayed (for example, timing t14).

On the other hand, the example of the presentation shown in Figure 157(b) is an example of a presentation in which the lottery conducted based on the operation of the mission button 3700 results in a loss (selection with a 2/3 probability), and the image of the destroyed enemy tank is not displayed. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank does not change to an image of a destroyed enemy tank, and continues to move to the left. Furthermore, an image of an exploding bullet is not displayed. Furthermore, no sound corresponding to the firing of a bullet is output. Figure 160(c) is an example of a display in which the image of the enemy tank continues to move to the left without changing to an image of a destroyed enemy tank (for example, timing t14).

The time chart in Figure 158 shows a situation where both the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 are operated. In this case, in response to the operation of the attack button 3710, sound effects similar to those in the embodiment described with reference to Figure 156 are output. In addition, in response to the operation of the mission button 3700, sound effects similar to those in the embodiment described with reference to Figure 157 are output.

The time chart in Figure 158 shows an example of a presentation when the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 are operated simultaneously at timing t12. Figure 158(a) is a time chart showing an example of a presentation in which the mission button 3700 is operated and an image of a bullet exploding is displayed. Figure 158(b) is a time chart showing an example of a presentation in which the mission button 3700 is operated but an image of a bullet exploding is not displayed.

In the example shown in Figure 158(a), from timing t12 to timing t13, a moving cannonball fired from a cannon turret and a moving bullet fired from a silent machine gun are displayed. In addition, the sound effect of a "bang" is output, representing the sound of a cannonball being fired from a cannon. Figure 160(d) shows an example display of the cannonball and bullets moving. In addition, the valid operation period for the attack button 3710 ends at timing t12.

The example of presentation shown in Figure 158 (a) is an example of presentation in which a lottery based on operation of the mission button 3700 is won (selected with a 1/3 probability), and an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. In addition, an image of an exploding shell and an image of an exploding bullet are displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank, the image of an exploding shell, and the image of an exploding bullet are displayed for three seconds (in this example of presentation, for three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). In addition, from timing t13 to timing t15, the sound effect of a "boom" is output, which is the sound of a bullet hitting the enemy tank and exploding. At the same time, the sound effect of a "boom" is output, which is the sound of a bullet hitting the enemy tank and exploding. Figure 160(e) is a display example showing a state (e.g., timing t14) in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank, an image of an exploding bullet, and an image of an exploding artillery shell are displayed.

On the other hand, the example presentation shown in Figure 158(b) is an example presentation in which the lottery conducted based on the operation of the mission button 3700 results in a loss (selection with a 2/3 probability), and an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. An image of an exploding shell is also displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding shell are displayed for three seconds (in this example presentation, for three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). In addition, from timing t13 to timing t15, the sound of a shell hitting the enemy tank and exploding is output, a "boom!" sound. Figure 160(f) is an example display showing a state in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding shell are displayed (for example, timing t14).

The volume of the "boom" sound effect output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 may be set to be louder than the "boom" sound effect output based on the operation of the attack button 3710. In Figures 160(b) and 160(e), the loudness of the "boom" sound effect is indicated by the larger font of the characters "\boom/".
In addition, during the period (timing t13 to timing t15) when the sound effect "boom" is output based on the operation of the mission button 3700, the volume of the variable sound effects such as background music may be suppressed.
Furthermore, when the sound effect "boom" is output based on the operation of the mission button 3700, the sound effect "boom" that would normally be output when the attack button 3710 is operated may not be output, or if it is already being output, the output may be interrupted and the output of the sound effect "boom" based on the operation of the mission button 3700 may be started.
Furthermore, the period during which the "boom" sound effect output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is output may be longer than the period during which the "boom" sound effect output based on the operation of the attack button 3710. For example, the period during which the "boom" sound effect output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is output may be six seconds, which is three times the period during which the "boom" sound effect output based on the operation of the attack button 3710 is output. Furthermore, the sound effect output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 (the "boom" sound effect) may be output multiple times. For example, the "boom" sound effect may be output three times in six seconds. Furthermore, an image of an exploding bullet may be displayed multiple times. For example, an image of an exploding bullet may be displayed three times in six seconds.
Furthermore, the sound effect output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 may be different from the sound effect output based on the operation of the attack button 3710. For example, the sound effect "boom" may be output based on the operation of the mission button 3700.
Furthermore, the display displayed and sound effects output based on the operation of the attack button 3710 can be seen and heard by the player once for each player operation that satisfies the conditions, but the display displayed and sound effects output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 can be seen and heard by the player two or more times for each player operation that satisfies the conditions.

In this way, for the attack button 3710, a sound effect is output indicating that operation acceptance is possible, a sound effect indicating that operation acceptance is possible, and a sound effect indicating that operation acceptance has been performed.
On the other hand, no sound effect indicating that an operation is possible or that an operation is possible is output for the mission button 3700. Furthermore, even if an operation is performed, a sound effect is output with a predetermined probability (1/3) a predetermined time (1 second) after the operation is performed.
In this way, sound effects are not necessarily output when the mission button 3700 is operated, which can increase the player's interest in the game.
Furthermore, sound effects that are output or explosion images that are displayed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 can be output or displayed multiple times, thereby further increasing the interest.
Furthermore, the explosion image displayed in response to the operation of the mission button 3700 is larger than the explosion image displayed in response to the operation of the attack button 3710. Also, as described above, it is desirable to make the sound effect output in response to the operation of the mission button 3700 easier to hear than the sound effect output in response to the operation of the attack button 3710.
This configuration makes it easier for the player to recognize the sound effects and special displays associated with operating the mission button 3700, which are relatively difficult to make appear.

In this embodiment, the operation acceptance period for the mission button 3700 is set to start after the display of the decorative pattern changes begins, but it is also possible to set the operation acceptance period for the mission button 3700 to start simultaneously with the display of the decorative pattern changes. In this case, it is recommended to display the mode shown in Figure 159(a) at timing t0.

In this embodiment, the operation acceptance period for the mission button 3700 is set to end before the display of the changing decorative patterns stops, but operation acceptance for the mission button 3700 may continue until the timing at which the display of the changing decorative patterns ends (timing t35).

These embodiments may be combined to continue accepting operations on the mission button 3700 from the start of the decorative pattern change (timing t0) until the change display ends (timing t35). This configuration increases the player's opportunities to make sound effects and special displays appear when the mission button 3700 is operated, which are relatively difficult to make appear.

When an image of an exploding bullet is displayed or the sound effect of a bullet exploding, such as "boom," is output once based on the operation of the mission button 3700, it is preferable that the image display and sound output can be executed after these display and sound output have ended.
157(a), for example, the output of the sound effect "boom" ends at timing t15, and the display of the image of an exploding bullet ends at timing t16. In this case, the period from timing t16 to timing t17 is set as a period during which the image of an exploding bullet and the sound effect "boom," which is the sound of an exploding bullet, are not displayed, and it is preferable that the display of these images and the output of these sound effects can be executed from timing t17 onwards.
Furthermore, even if the operation of the mission button 3700 between timings t15 and t16 satisfies the condition for outputting the sound effect "boom" or the condition for displaying an image of an exploding bullet, the sound may not be output or the image may not be displayed while these sounds and images are being executed, and the output of the sound effect or the display of the image may be resumed if an operation that satisfies the conditions is performed after timing t16 when these sounds and images end.
By adopting such a configuration, the display of an image or the output of a sound effect can be more clearly recognized each time, thereby reducing the occurrence of a situation in which the player is unable to recognize the start of the display of an image or the output of a sound effect that he or she has worked so hard to achieve.

In the example of the effect shown with reference to FIG. 155 etc., the valid period during which the attack button 3710 can be operated occurs only once, from timing t11 to timing t14, but it may be configured to occur multiple times. For example, a similar display may be displayed from timing t19 to timing t22. Furthermore, the number of occurrences may be determined based on the results of a special lottery, and the degree of expectation may be indicated by the number of occurrences and the content of each occurrence. It is preferable that the valid period for operating the attack button 3710 occurs multiple times during the valid period for operating the mission button 3700.
In this way, the number of occurrences of the valid operation period for the attack button 3710, i.e., the number of times an image of an exploding shell is displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710, can be determined based on the result of a special lottery. On the other hand, the display of an image of an exploding bullet and the output of the sound effect "boom" that is the sound of an exploding bullet based on the operation of the mission button 3700 can be executed multiple times during the valid operation period without being based on the result of a special lottery.
With this configuration, by operating the mission button 3700 multiple times, it is possible to successfully display an image of an exploding bullet, thereby increasing the player's sense of accomplishment.

The tank may also be configured to be equipped with an additional machine gun. In this case, a presentation style intermediate between the artillery shells fired from the turret in this embodiment and the bullets fired from the silent machine gun may be adopted. For example, the additional machine gun basically has the same operation acceptance and presentation style as the silent machine gun in this embodiment, but may be configured to always output a sound (for example, the sound of a bullet flying) indicating that the operation has been accepted when an operation is performed. In this case, the defense button 3740 may be used as the operation unit. The size of the bullet explosion image may be intermediate between that of the artillery shell explosion image and that of the silent machine gun explosion image.

As shown in Figure 159 (a) etc., the fact that operation of the mission button 3700 is valid is indicated by a simulated image of the mission button 3700 and the lines of "Colonel Dinah", but it is also possible to configure the system so that the fact that operation of the mission button 3700 is valid is not notified.
For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the mission button 3700 is not operated during the first half of the valid operation period of the mission button 3700, and the mission button 3700 is operated during the second half of the valid operation period of the mission button 3700. It is preferable that an enemy tank moves in from the right side of the display area during both the first and second halves of the valid operation period of the mission button 3700, and operation of the attack button 3710 becomes valid. In this case, when an enemy tank is displayed for the first time, it is possible to concentrate on operating the attack button 3710, and when an enemy tank is displayed for the second time, it is possible to operate the mission button 3700 in addition to operating the attack button 3710.
In this way, even if it is enabled to display based on the operation reception of the mission button 3700, it may be configured so that there are cases where the operation instruction display of the mission button 3700 is displayed and cases where it is not displayed.
Note that the special sound and display content based on the acceptance of the operation of the mission button 3700 may be different depending on whether or not the operation instruction display for the mission button 3700 is performed. For example, when the operation instruction display for the mission button 3700 is not performed, a louder special sound may be output or a larger explosion image may be displayed compared to when the operation instruction display for the mission button 3700 is performed. This configuration can further increase the player's interest.

The display of operational instructions may be switched on or off by the above-mentioned real-time clock function or by operation by the player or store clerk.

In this way, with the "Silent Machine Gun Reach" of this embodiment, a special sound is output when the second operation unit is operated and certain conditions are met. With this configuration, even when the second operation unit is operated, there is a chance that a special sound will or will not be output, so players who are lucky enough to have a special sound output will feel great joy.

Gaming machines that display operational instructions for the operation unit have been known (for example, JP 2010-046210 A). In such gaming machines, players simply follow the instructions, leaving room for improvement in terms of increasing entertainment value. For example, if the operational instructions are not followed, a display similar to that displayed when the operational instructions are followed is typically displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed, or if no operational instructions are performed, no display is typically displayed at all. This does not respect the player's desire to not follow the operational instructions. Therefore, the following embodiment shows an embodiment in which a special display is displayed when an operation on the operation unit is performed in a manner contrary to the instructions.

Below, with reference to Figure 161 etc., we will explain the "Bomb Character Reach" mode, in which the player's tank and a bomb character engage in combat while accelerating or decelerating the player's tank.

Figure 161 is a table showing the presentation patterns that can be selected in the "Bomb Character Reach." Figures 162 to 164 are time charts showing examples of presentations when one of the presentation patterns is executed. Figures 165 to 170 show examples of display at specific timings in these time charts.

In "Bomb Character Reach," the decorative symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner for 34 seconds, and are static for 1 second. While the decorative symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner, at timing t5 the decorative symbols enter a reach state. Furthermore, during the period from timing t6 to timing t15 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "first period") and the period from timing t16 to timing t25 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "second period"), a presentation is presented in which bomb character A or bomb character B is displayed in addition to the player's tank that is currently displayed.

In "Bomb Character Reach," a bomb character appears on the road along which the player's tank is traveling, and the player is asked whether or not to operate the left lever 3720 to move the player's tank toward the bomb character.

The bomb characters displayed are Bomb Character A, a bomb character wearing sunglasses, and Bomb Character B, which has sunglasses facing upside down compared to Bomb Character A. If Bomb Character A is displayed, part of your tank will be destroyed if your tank crashes into it, but if Bomb Character B is displayed, your tank will not be destroyed and will be able to move forward even if it crashes into it.

A bomb character is displayed in front of the player's tank, and two characters ("Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might") indicate whether or not the player should drive their tank into the bomb character. For example, "Colonel Dyna" may say something like "It's obviously a fake! Move forward!", instructing the player to push the left lever 3720 forward (towards the gaming machine, same below). Also, "Sergeant Might" may say something like "Enemy bomb spotted ahead! Slow down!", instructing the player to push the left lever 3720 backward (towards the player, same below). Note that instead of indirect expressions such as "move forward" or "move backward," more direct expressions such as "move the left lever forward" or "move the left lever backward" may be used.

Furthermore, on the left side of the window in which Colonel Dyna's lines are displayed, a vertically long rectangular mock-up image of the left lever 3720 and an image instructing how to operate the left lever 3720 (the words "lean forward" and "lean backward") are displayed. Similarly, on the right side of the window in which Sergeant Might's lines are displayed, a vertically long rectangular mock-up image of the left lever 3720 and an image instructing how to operate the left lever 3720 are displayed.

In the "Bomb Character Reach," if "Colonel Dyna" speaks a line giving an operation instruction, the instruction is basically 100% an incorrect operation instruction. Furthermore, the image indicating the operation mode of the left lever 3720 is also an image indicating an incorrect operation mode. On the other hand, if "Sergeant Might" speaks a line giving an operation instruction, there is a 20% chance that a line giving an incorrect operation instruction will be displayed, and an 80% chance that a line giving a correct operation instruction will be displayed. Furthermore, the image indicating the operation mode of the left lever 3720 is displayed as an image that matches the instruction indicated by the line.
Therefore, the player only needs to operate the lever in the opposite direction to the instructions given by "Colonel Dina" and the left lever 3720, and only needs to pay some attention to the instructions given by "Sergeant Might" and the left lever 3720 when operating the lever.
Once the player becomes accustomed to the game, they will be able to determine the type of bomb character by the shape of their sunglasses, and will be able to decide whether or not to crash their tank into the bomb character and operate the left lever 3720 appropriately.

If bomb character A is displayed, the player's tank will be partially destroyed if it collides with the bomb character A. If the player's tank does not run into bomb character A, only bomb character A will explode before the player's tank collides, preventing the player's tank from being destroyed. When bomb character A collides with the player's tank, the first collision results in the player's tank's gun turret being destroyed (the player's tank's state shown in Figure 166(c)). Furthermore, the second collision results in the player's tank's machine gun also being destroyed (the player's tank's state shown in Figure 166(f)).
On the other hand, when bomb character B is displayed, even if the player's tank collides with bomb character B, the player's tank will not be destroyed and will be able to move forward. Bomb character B is actually a giant balloon disguised as a bomb, and even if the player's tank crashes into it, the player's tank will not be destroyed.
As the player's tank advances, a giant bomb character appears and effects can be performed using the attack button 3710 and mission button 3700, but details will be given later.

The presentation patterns shown in the table in Figure 161 indicate whether a bomb character will be displayed from timing t6 to timing t11 and timing t16 to timing t21 in the time charts shown in Figures 162 and 163, and if a bomb character is displayed, whether the displayed bomb character is bomb character A or bomb character B. They also indicate the possible states of the image of the player's tank at timing t26.

The bomb character A does not appear in effect patterns 01, 03, 07, and 09. Therefore, at timing t26, the player's tank remains undestroyed.
In effect patterns 02, 04, 06, and 08, the bomb character A appears once. Therefore, at timing t26, the player's tank will be in either an undestroyed state or the player's tank's turret will be destroyed.
In the effect pattern 05, the bomb character A appears twice. Therefore, at the timing t26, the player's tank will be in one of the following states: not destroyed, the player's tank's turret will be destroyed, or the player's tank's turret and machine gun will be destroyed.

Which of the effect patterns 01 to 09 will be executed is determined by the peripheral control board 1510. For example, it may be determined based on the results of a special lottery.

Next, the manner of presentation using explosion character A will be explained with reference to Figures 162, 165 and 166.
Figure 162(a) is a time chart showing the state of the variable display of decorative patterns executed together with the effects shown in the time charts of Figures 162(b) and 162(c).
162(b) is a time chart showing the execution mode of a presentation pattern in which bomb character A is displayed during the first period. Below, we will explain the presentation state when presentation pattern 04, which is a presentation pattern in which bomb character A is displayed during the first period (timing t6 to timing t15), is executed.
At timing t5, the "Bomb Character Reach" begins. Figure 165(a) shows a display example from timing t5 to timing t6.
At timing t6, bomb character A is displayed in the upper center of the display area. At this time, one of the following lines is displayed as the lines of "Colonel Dyna": "It's obviously a fake! Advance!" or "Hmm, mumble." On the other hand, one of the following lines is displayed as the lines of "Sergeant Might": "Enemy bomb spotted up ahead! Slow down!", "That one's a fake. Advance!" or "Hmm, mumble." Furthermore, if the line indicates that the left lever 3720 should be tilted forward, a simulated image of the lever with the words "Tilt Forward" attached is displayed together with the line. Furthermore, if the line indicates that the left lever 3720 should be tilted backward, a simulated image of the left lever 3720 with the words "Tilt Backward" attached is displayed together with the line. Furthermore, if the line does not indicate the operation mode of the left lever 3720, no simulated image of the left lever 3720 is displayed.

Figures 165(b) to 165(g) show examples of what is displayed in the display area from timing t6 to timing t11. As mentioned above, there are two types of lines for "Colonel Dina" and three types of lines for "Sergeant Might," and by combining these, there are a total of six possible combinations that can be displayed. These six combinations are shown in Figures 165(b) to 165(g).

For example, Figure 165 (b) is an example display showing a state in which an incorrect operation instruction, "Colonel Dyna's" line "It's obviously a fake! Advance!", is displayed, and a correct operation instruction, "Enemy bomb spotted ahead! Slow down!", is displayed.
In this case, the player can avoid a collision with bomb character A by performing an operation opposite to the operation instructed by the lines of "Colonel Dina" (tilting the left lever 3720 backward). Also, the player can avoid a collision with bomb character A by performing an operation in accordance with the operation instructed by the lines of "Sergeant Might" (tilting the left lever 3720 backward). Also, regardless of the instructions in the lines, the player can avoid a collision with bomb character A by confirming that the displayed bomb character is bomb character A and tilting the lever backward.

Also, Figure 165 (e) is an example of a display showing the state in which the line "Hmm, mumble mumble" from "Colonel Dyna" is displayed and the line "He's a fake. Advance!" from "Sergeant Might", which is the correct operating instruction, is displayed.
In this case, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" do not instruct the mode of operation. Furthermore, performing the operation in accordance with the mode of operation instructed by the lines of "Sergeant Might" (tilting the left lever 3720 forward) will result in a collision with bomb character A. On the other hand, if the player does not pay attention to the instructions in the lines, but rather confirms that the displayed bomb character is bomb character A, and tilts the left lever 3720 backward, the collision with bomb character A can be avoided.

The operation period for tilting the left lever 3720 in a predetermined direction is determined to be when the left lever 3720 is tilted in a predetermined direction for a predetermined time within the period from timing t6 to timing t11. For example, it is determined that an operation has been performed when the left lever 3720 is tilted forward for two seconds from timing t7 to timing t9.

If the left lever 3720 is tilted forward when the bomb character A is displayed, a visual effect of the bomb character A colliding with the player's tank is displayed from timing t11 to timing t15.
Specifically, from timing t11 to timing t12, an image is displayed showing the player's tank colliding with bomb character A. Figure 166(a) is an example of the display from timing t11 to timing t12.
Next, from timing t12 to timing t15, an image showing the gun turret of the player's tank being destroyed is displayed. Figure 166(c) is an example of the display from timing t12 to timing t15.

On the other hand, if the left lever 3720 is tilted backward when bomb character A is displayed, a display will be displayed in which bomb character A explodes in front of the player's tank from timing t11 to timing t12. Figure 166(b) is an example of the display from timing t11 to timing t12. Note that from timing t12 to timing t15, it is recommended to display something like that shown in Figure 165(a).

162(c) is a time chart showing the execution mode of the effect pattern in which bomb character A is displayed during the second period. Fig. 162(c) shows an example of an effect when effect pattern 02, which is an effect pattern in which bomb character A is displayed during the second period, is executed.
In this example of presentation, from timing t16 to timing t25, a presentation display similar to that shown with reference to Figure 162 (b) is performed.

When either bomb character A or bomb character B is displayed in both the first and second periods, as in effect patterns 05, 06, 08, and 09, an effect that combines the effect from timing t11 to timing t15 in the time chart shown in FIG. 162(b) or the effect from timing t11 to timing t15 in the time chart shown in FIG. 163(b), described below, with the effect from timing t16 to timing t25 in the time chart shown in FIG. 162(c) or the effect from timing t16 to timing t25 in the time chart shown in FIG. 163(c), is executed.

For example, when presentation pattern 05 is selected, a presentation pattern is executed that combines the presentation pattern relating to timing t11 to timing t15 in the time chart shown in Figure 162 (b) and the presentation pattern relating to timing t16 to timing t25 in the time chart shown in Figure 162 (c).
In this case, there is a possibility that the player's tank will crash into the bomb character A in both the first period and the second period.
For example, in the first period, if a player's tank crashes into bomb character A, the tank's turret will be destroyed, but in the second period, if a player's tank with a destroyed turret crashes into bomb character A, the tank's machine gun will be destroyed.
166(d) shows a display example from timing t21 to timing t22 when the player's tank, whose turret has been destroyed, crashes into bomb character A during the second period. Also, from timing t22 to timing t25, the display example shown in FIG. 166(f) appears.
On the other hand, if the player's tank, whose turret has been destroyed, does not crash into bomb character A during the second period, the display example shown in FIG. 166(e) will be displayed from timing t21 to timing t22.

Next, the manner of presentation using the explosion character B will be explained with reference to Figures 163, 167 and 168.
Figure 163(a) is a time chart showing the state of the variable display of decorative patterns executed together with the effects shown in the time charts of Figures 163(b) and 163(c).
163(b) is a time chart showing the execution mode of a presentation pattern in which a bomb character B is displayed during the first period. The following describes the presentation state when presentation pattern 07, which is a presentation pattern in which a bomb character B is displayed during the first period (timing t6 to timing t11), is executed.
At timing t5, the "Bomb Character Reach" begins. Figure 167(a) shows a display example from timing t5 to timing t6.
At timing t6, bomb character B is displayed in the upper center of the display area. At this time, one of the following lines is displayed as lines from "Colonel Dyna": "It's an enemy bomb! Slow down!" or "Hmm, mumble." On the other hand, one of the following lines is displayed as lines from "Sergeant Might": "That guy's a fake. Advance!", "Enemy bomb spotted up ahead! Slow down!" or "Hmm, mumble." Furthermore, if each line indicates that the left lever 3720 should be tilted forward, a simulated image of the left lever 3720 with the word "tilt forward" attached is displayed together with the line. Furthermore, if each line indicates that the left lever 3720 should be tilted backward, a simulated image of the left lever 3720 with the word "tilt backward" attached is displayed together with the line. Furthermore, if the line does not indicate the operation mode of the left lever 3720, no simulated image of the left lever 3720 is displayed.

Figures 167(b) to 167(g) show examples of what is displayed in the display area from timing t6 to timing t11. As mentioned above, there are two types of lines for "Colonel Dina" and three types of lines for "Sergeant Might", and by combining these there are a total of six possible combinations that can be displayed. These six possible combinations are shown in Figures 167(b) to 167(g).

For example, Figure 167(b) is an example display showing a state in which an incorrect operation instruction, "There's an enemy bomb! Slow down!", is displayed by "Colonel Dyna," and a correct operation instruction, "He's a fake. Advance!", is displayed by "Sergeant Might."
In this case, the player can slam into bomb character B by performing an operation opposite to the operation instructed by the lines of "Colonel Dina" (tilting the left lever 3720 forward). Also, the player can slam into bomb character B by performing an operation in accordance with the operation instructed by the lines of "Sergeant Might" (tilting the left lever 3720 forward). Also, regardless of the instructions in the lines, the player can confirm that the displayed bomb character is bomb character B and slam into bomb character B by tilting the left lever 3720 forward.

Also, Figure 167 (e) is an example of a display showing the state in which the line "Hmm, mumble mumble" from "Colonel Dyna" is displayed and the line "Enemy bomb spotted ahead! Slow down!" from "Sergeant Might", which is the correct operating instruction, is displayed.
In this case, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" do not instruct the operation mode. Also, by performing the operation in accordance with the operation mode instructed by the lines of "Sergeant Might" (tilting the left lever 3720 forward), it becomes impossible to slam into bomb character B. On the other hand, if the player does not pay attention to the instructions of the lines, confirms that the displayed bomb character is bomb character B, and tilts the left lever 3720 forward, it becomes possible to slam into bomb character B.

If the lever is tilted forward when the bomb character B is displayed, a visual effect of the player's tank crashing into the bomb character B is displayed from timing t11 to timing t15.
From timing t11 to timing t12, an image of the player's tank crashing into bomb character B is displayed. Figure 168(a) is an example of the display from timing t11 to timing t12. Note that from timing t12 to timing t15, it is recommended to display as shown in Figure 165(a).

On the other hand, if the left lever 3720 is tilted backward when bomb character B is displayed, bomb character B located in front of the player's tank will remain displayed from timing t11 to timing t12. Figure 168(b) is an example of the display from timing t11 to timing t12. Note that from timing t12 to timing t15, it is recommended to display as shown in Figure 165(a).

163(c) is a time chart showing the execution mode of the effect pattern in which the bomb character B is displayed during the second period. Fig. 163(c) shows an example of an effect when effect pattern 03, which is an effect pattern in which the bomb character B is displayed during the second period, is executed.
In this example of presentation, from timing t16 to timing t25, a presentation display similar to that shown with reference to Figure 163 (b) is performed.

Next, referring to the time chart of Figure 164, we will explain the presentation mode from timing t26 to timing t35 when presentation pattern 01 to presentation pattern 09 are executed.
As described above, based on the selected presentation pattern and the manner in which the player operates the left lever 3720, at timing t26 the player's tank is displayed in one of three states: undamaged, with the turret destroyed, or with the turret and machine gun destroyed.

164(a), at timing t26, the display of bomb character A or bomb character B begins. Furthermore, from timing t26 to timing t28, operation of either the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 becomes valid.
The attack button 3710 is enabled when the player's tank is undamaged. On the other hand, the mission button 3700 is enabled when the player's tank's turret is destroyed. Note that when the turret and machine gun are destroyed, neither the operation of the attack button 3710 nor the mission button 3700 is enabled. Note that the presentation mode when the operation of the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is disabled will be described later.

At timing t26, operation of the attack button 3710 becomes valid and simultaneously the bomb character A is displayed in the center of the display area. In addition, an imitation image of the attack button 3710 is displayed in the upper right corner of the window displaying the lines of "Sergeant Might."
Figure 169(a) is an example of a display from timing t26 until the attack button 3710 is operated (until t28 in Figure 164(a)), or until the valid operation period of the attack button 3710 ends (until t29 in Figure 164(a)).

If the special lottery result is a jackpot, a display of the bomb character A exploding is displayed for three seconds from the moment the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid operation period for the attack button 3710 or from the moment the valid operation period ends. Figure 169 (b) shows a display mode in which the bomb character A explodes after the attack button 3710 is operated or after the valid operation period ends, when the special lottery result is a jackpot. Then, at timing t34, the decorative pattern is displayed stationary in a mode indicating a jackpot.
On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, a display of the bomb character A moving toward the player's tank is displayed for three seconds from the moment the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid operation period for the attack button 3710 or from the moment the valid operation period ends. Figure 169 (c) shows a display mode in which the bomb character A moves toward the player's tank after the attack button 3710 is operated or after the valid operation period ends, when the result of the special lottery is a loss. Then, at timing t34, the decorative pattern is displayed stationary in a mode indicating a loss.
In addition, based on the operation of the attack button 3710 or the expiration of the valid operation period, a display effect is executed in which a cannonball is fired from the tank's cannon, as in the example shown with reference to Figure 153.

At timing t26, operation of the mission button 3700 becomes valid and simultaneously the bomb character A is displayed in the center of the display area. Also, an imitation image of the mission button 3700 is displayed in the upper left of the window displaying the lines of "Colonel Dina."
Figure 169 (d) is an example of a display from timing t26 until the mission button 3700 is operated (until t28 in Figure 164 (a)), or until the valid operation period of the mission button 3700 ends (until t29 in Figure 164 (a)).

If the special lottery result is a jackpot, a display of the bomb character A exploding is displayed for three seconds from the moment the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period for the mission button 3700 or from the moment the valid operation period ends. Figure 169(e) shows a display mode in which the bomb character A explodes after the operation or after the valid operation period ends when the special lottery result is a jackpot. Then, at timing t34, the decorative pattern is displayed stationary in a mode indicating a jackpot.
On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, a display of bomb character A moving toward the player's tank is displayed for three seconds from the time when the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period for the mission button 3700 or from the time when the valid operation period ends. Figure 169 (f) shows a display mode in which bomb character A moves toward the player's tank after the mission button 3700 is operated or after the valid operation period ends, when the result of the special lottery is a loss. Then, at timing t34, the decorative pattern is displayed stationary in a mode indicating a loss.
In addition, based on the operation of the mission button 3700 or the expiration of the valid operation period, a display effect is executed in which a bullet is fired from the machine gun of the player's tank, as in the example shown with reference to Figure 154.

When presentation pattern 05 is executed and the player's tank crashes into bomb character A in both the first and second periods, the player's tank with its turret and machine gun destroyed is displayed at timing t26.
Figure 164(b) is a time chart showing the performance state executed in this case.

In this case, if the special lottery result is a loss, the bomb character A starts to be displayed at timing t26 and remains displayed in that position until timing t29. Figure 170(a) shows an example of the display from timing t26 to timing t29.
From timing t29 to timing t32, a display of bomb character A moving toward the player's tank is displayed for three seconds. Figure 170(b) shows a display mode in which bomb character A is moving toward the player's tank. Then, at timing t34, the decorative pattern is displayed stationary in a mode indicating a miss.
On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, the bomb character B starts to be displayed at timing t26 and remains displayed in that position until timing t29. Figure 170(a) shows an example of the display from timing t26 to timing t29.
From timing t29 to timing t32, a display of the bomb character B moving toward the player's tank is displayed for three seconds. Figure 170(b) shows a display mode in which the bomb character B is moving toward the player's tank. Then, at timing t34, the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state in a manner indicating a jackpot.
In either case, neither the attack button 3710 nor the mission button 3700 will be enabled for operation.

In this way, by issuing appropriate operation instructions without being misled by incorrect operation instructions for the left lever 3720, the player can operate the special operation parts (the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700) as shown in Figures 169(a), (b), (d), and (e), and can see special images (an image of bomb character A exploding, an image of the sunglasses worn by bomb character A tilting, and the lines of "Colonel Dina" and "Sergeant Might"). On the other hand, if the player simply follows the operation instructions, the player will not be able to operate the special operation parts as shown in Figures 170(a) and (d), and will not be able to see the special images.
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 169(a) and (d) or Figures 169(b) and (e), the player will be able to see special effects displayed depending on the manner in which the player's tank is destroyed.

If the player does not operate the left lever 3720, the operation instruction indicated by "Colonel Dyna" or "Sergeant Might" may be automatically executed. At this time, the image that would be displayed if the player performed that operation instruction may be automatically displayed. If "Colonel Dyna" or "Sergeant Might" do not perform an operation instruction and the player does not operate the left lever 3720, either a forward tilt operation or a backward tilt operation may be automatically displayed by lottery. For example, the forward tilt operation may be selected with a 50/50 probability, and a backward tilt operation with a 50/50 probability, and the display corresponding to that operation may be displayed.

In the above-described embodiment, the player is required to perform an operation that does not follow the operation instructions during at least one of the first period and the second period. Furthermore, by performing an operation that does not follow the operation instructions, it is possible to generate an effect in which an operation to a specific operation unit becomes valid and a special image is displayed just before the decorative symbols stop.
In this way, the player is presented with operation instructions that are different from or contradictory to the operation instructions that should be performed, and so the player must estimate what the appropriate operation for the operation unit is and perform a tilt operation on the left lever 3720. If the player is able to perform an appropriate operation contrary to the operation instructions, the player will be able to operate a special operation unit or see special images or effect displays.
Furthermore, in addition to performing an operation contrary to the operation instructions, the special image may be displayed only when a specific condition (for example, performing an operation contrary to the operation instructions successfully multiple times) is met. By configuring in this way, the special display can be visible only to players who have performed the operation appropriately, rather than being displayed accidentally when the player operates the operation unit in an inappropriate manner.

The player may operate the left lever 3720 left or right to allow the tank moving forward to avoid a minefield set up on the road.
For example, an image of a real minefield and an image of a fake minefield may be displayed on the right or left side of the road, and an effect may be executed in which the player operates the left lever 3720 left or right to avoid the minefield. If the player's tank enters the real minefield, the player's tank's turret and machine gun may be destroyed. Furthermore, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might" may be configured to give incorrect instructions regarding the operation of the left lever 3720. Such effects may be executable in the first period and the second period.

In this way, by appropriately operating the left lever 3720, the player can move their tank left and right while avoiding the minefield, and even if they successfully perform an operation contrary to the operating instructions, the player can operate a special operating unit or view special images or special effects, just as in the embodiment described with reference to Figures 161 to 170, etc.

The presentation table shown in Figure 161 has a first period and a second period, but it may be configured to have only the first period, and a table may be adopted in which a presentation pattern is selected during the first period from among a presentation pattern in which the bomb character does not appear, a presentation pattern in which bomb character A appears, and a presentation pattern in which bomb character B appears.
In this case, it is advisable to configure the game so that if the player's tank crashes into bomb character A, both the tank's turret and machine gun will be destroyed.

The presentation table shown in Figure 161 has a first period and a second period, but the presentation may also be performed using a presentation table configured to provide three or more periods in which the bomb character can be displayed.
In addition, the system may be configured to read ahead of time the pending status, and based on the results of the read-ahead, provide multiple periods during which a bomb character can be displayed across multiple decorative pattern changes (one period may be provided for each decorative pattern change, or a period may be provided during each decorative pattern change during which any number of bomb characters can be displayed), and execute the display effects shown in Figures 164, 169, and 170 just before the change display corresponding to the pending status that was the subject of the read-ahead stops.

In addition, while three stages of display mode for the player's tank were provided, two stages, or four or more stages may also be provided. Furthermore, while an example of a display mode change in which the player's tank is gradually destroyed was shown, it is also possible to implement a display in which the player's tank is repaired and returns to a relatively intact stage.

Although examples have been shown in which, during the first period or the second period, the bomb character may not appear, bomb character A may appear, or bomb character B may appear, it is also possible to configure it so that either bomb character A or bomb character B is always displayed during the first period or the second period. For example, the table shown in FIG. 161 may be modified to adopt a table consisting of only effect pattern 05, effect pattern 06, effect pattern 08, and effect pattern 09. With this configuration, one of the bomb characters is displayed during each period of the effect pattern, which can increase the sense of tension when operating the left lever 3720.

In the embodiment described with reference to Figures 165 to 170, display examples when a bomb character is displayed are mainly shown, but when a bomb character is not displayed, it is preferable to display the player's tank character moving forward, as shown in Figure 165(a).

The system may be configured so that a special image is displayed only when certain conditions are met. For example, the special image may only be displayed if the player successfully performs an operation that does not follow the operating instructions multiple times. Furthermore, even if the player performs an operation that does not follow the operating instructions, a predetermined lottery may be held, and the special image may be displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/5). With this configuration, a special image will not be displayed by chance simply by operating the operating unit, and the difficulty of displaying the special image can be increased, thereby increasing the surprise and delight felt by the player when the special image is displayed.

When a special image is displayed based on the operation of the left lever 3720, the volume of the variable effect sound may be reduced and suppressed at least during the period in which the special image is displayed.
In addition, when a special image is displayed based on the operation of the left lever 3720, a special sound (for example, a special explosion sound) may be output at least during the period in which the special image is displayed.
Furthermore, the variable effect sound may be suppressed and a special sound may be output at the same time.
In this way, by suppressing the variable effect sound and outputting the special sound in response to the display of the special image, the fact that the special image is being displayed is not disturbed by the variable effect sound, and the display of the special image can be made more conspicuous by the output of the special sound.

The variable effect sound refers to a predetermined piece of music played in synchronization with the change in the decorative symbols, and is perceived by the player as background music. For example, a piece of music consisting of the voice of a predetermined singer and the sounds of multiple instruments is played for several minutes, during which the decorative symbols change multiple times (for example, when all the decorative symbol change results are non-reach misses and the change time is approximately 10 seconds on average). By outputting such a variable effect sound to the player, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the game. It is also possible to prepare multiple such pieces of music in advance, and to start playing a different piece of music when the playback of one piece of music has been completed. Alternatively, the music that was being played may be faded out midway through playback in accordance with a change in the game state, and a different piece of music different from the one that was being played may be played.
It is also possible to make predetermined light-emitting members provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 emit light in a manner that matches the melody of the variable effect sound. This can enhance the effect of the variable effect sound.

When the left lever 3720 is operated appropriately without being fooled by the operating instructions, a game state in which a special image is displayed is triggered. The display period of the special image and the display period of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 can overlap, and an example of a presentation in which a special image (such as an image of an exploding bomb) and a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 are displayed simultaneously is shown below.

171(a) to 171(c) show other display examples that can be displayed at the timing when the diagram shown in FIG. 169(a) is displayed.
In each of Figures 171(a) to 171(c), the display priority of the image of diagonally tilted translucent sunglasses is higher than the display priority of the window displaying "Colonel Dyna's" lines, the image of "Colonel Dyna's" lines, the image of the player's tank, the image of bomb character A, and the simulated image of the attack button 3710. Furthermore, the translucent sunglasses images may be displayed in one form as shown in Figure 171(a), two forms as shown in Figure 171(b), or three forms as shown in Figure 171(c). Whether or not to display a translucent sunglasses image is determined so that the likelihood of winning a jackpot increases when a translucent sunglasses image is displayed compared to when a translucent sunglasses image is not displayed, as shown in Figure 169(a). Furthermore, the display mode of the translucent sunglasses images is determined so that the greater the number of translucent sunglasses images, the higher the likelihood of winning a jackpot.

For example, it is advisable to display a translucent sunglasses image so that the expected probability for the display state shown in Figure 169(a) is 10%, the expected probability for the display state shown in Figure 171(a) is 30%, the expected probability for the display state shown in Figure 171(b) is 50%, and the expected probability for the display state shown in Figure 171(c) is 80%.

The display of the translucent sunglasses image begins at timing t26 and continues until the attack button 3710 is operated or the valid operation period for the attack button 3710 ends. Note that if bomb character A is successfully detonated (i.e., the special lottery result is a jackpot), the display of the translucent sunglasses image may continue until the display of the explosion image ends.

This configuration can achieve the same effects as the above-described embodiment. Furthermore, because the translucent sunglasses image (special image) is displayed in front of the simulated image of the attack button 3710, it is possible to prevent the special image that was once visible from being obscured by the simulated image of the attack button 3710.

Fig. 171(d) is a modified version of the display example shown with reference to Fig. 171(c). As in this display example, the simulated image of the attack button 3710 may be configured to be displayed in front of the translucent sunglasses image (special image).
Alternatively, the display mode shown in Fig. 171(c) and the display mode shown in Fig. 171(d) may be alternately displayed. For example, the display mode may be switched every 0.5 seconds from timing t26 to timing t29.
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make both the simulated image of the attack button 3710 and the semi-transparent sunglasses image stand out.
The bomb character A before or after the explosion may also be displayed in the same manner as the simulated image of the attack button 3710.

Note that the expectation level does not have to be indicated by an image of translucent sunglasses. In this case, the appearance rate of the displayed image may be varied.

In the example shown with reference to Figures 164 and 169, the attack button 3710 or mission button 3700 can be operated once between timing t26 and timing t29. Below, however, an embodiment modified so that the attack button 3710 or mission button 3700 can be operated multiple times will be described with reference to Figure 172.

172(a) to 172(c) show display examples in which the attack button 3710 can be operated multiple times (e.g., five times) from timing t26 to timing t29. Furthermore, multiple (e.g., five) simulated images of the attack button 3710 are displayed depending on the number of times the attack button 3710 can be operated. Furthermore, each time the attack button 3710 is operated once, the display of the simulated image that is displayed in the foreground among the simulated images of the attack button 3710 is terminated. When the attack button 3710 is operated, if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, an image of a bomb character A being hit by a cannonball and exploding may be displayed with a predetermined probability (e.g., 1/2). Furthermore, if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot and the fifth operation is performed, an image of an explosion may be displayed with a 100% probability. Note that if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the bomb character A is not hit by a cannonball, and no image of an explosion is displayed.
FIG. 172(a) shows a display example at timing t26.
Also, FIG. 172(b) shows a state in which, when the attack button 3710 is operated a third time, a predetermined probability of winning is achieved and an exploded image is displayed.
On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the display state shown in Figure 172 (c) will be displayed for three seconds from the moment the attack button 3710 is operated five times or the moment the valid operation period ends.
Furthermore, if there are remaining times when the exploded image can be operated on the attack button 3710 when the exploded image is displayed, the remaining number of operations can be accepted, and in response to this operation, the display mode of the exploded image can be configured to be displayed in an even more exploded mode.
When an explosion image is displayed, it is not necessarily necessary to operate the attack button 3710, so the simulated image of the attack button 3710 may be displayed with a lower display priority than the exploded image. Figure 172 (b) shows a display example in which the simulated image of the attack button 3710 is displayed with a lower display priority than the exploded image.

172(d) to 172(f) are display examples in which the mission button 3700 can be operated multiple times (e.g., five times) between timing t26 and timing t29. Furthermore, multiple simulated images (e.g., five) of the mission button 3700 are displayed depending on the number of times the mission button 3700 can be operated. Furthermore, each time the mission button 3700 is operated once, the display of the simulated image displayed in the foreground among the simulated images of the mission button 3700 is terminated. When the mission button 3700 is operated, if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, an image of a bomb character A being hit by a cannonball and exploding may be displayed with a predetermined probability (e.g., 1/3). Note that if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the image of the explosion is not displayed.
FIG. 172(d) shows a display example at timing t26.
FIG. 172(d) shows a state in which, when the mission button 3700 is pressed a third time, a predetermined probability of winning is met and an exploded image is displayed.
On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the display state shown in Figure 172 (f) will be displayed for three seconds from the moment the mission button 3700 is operated five times or the moment the valid operation period ends.
In addition, when the exploded image is displayed, if there are still a number of times that the mission button 3700 can be operated, the remaining number of operations may be accepted, and in response to this operation, the display mode of the exploded image may be displayed in an even more exploded mode.
When an explosion image is displayed, it is not necessarily necessary to operate the mission button 3700, and therefore the simulated image of the mission button 3700 may be displayed with a lower display priority than the exploded image. Figure 172 (e) shows a display example in which the simulated image of the mission button 3700 is displayed with a lower display priority than the exploded image.

In the example presentation shown with reference to Figures 172(d) to 172(f), Colonel Dyna's lines are "Fire the special machine gun! Press the defense button!", which is an incorrect instruction. For this reason, the player must carefully observe the presentation and operate the mission button 3700. If the player can operate the mission button 3700, they will be able to see a special image of a bomb exploding.

Next, referring to Figure 173, an example of a performance that combines the performance examples shown with reference to Figures 172(a) to 172(c) and the performance examples shown with reference to Figures 172(d) to 172(f) will be described. In this embodiment, if timing t26 arrives without the player's tank's turret being destroyed, acceptance of operation of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 becomes valid simultaneously. At this time, the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 can each be operated a predetermined number of times (for example, five times each). In addition, a predetermined number of simulated images of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 are displayed.

173(a) shows an example display in which five simulated images of the attack button 3710 and five simulated images of the mission button 3700 are displayed. As described above, the valid operation period may start from timing t26.
In this state, if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated, an exploded image will be displayed depending on whether the special lottery result is a jackpot or not and whether the lottery has a predetermined probability (1/2 for the attack button 3710, 1/3 for the mission button 3700) as described above.

FIG. 173(b) shows a state in which an exploded image is displayed in response to a third operation of the attack button 3710. FIG. 173(d) shows a state in which an exploded image is displayed in response to a third operation of the mission button 3700. The display examples shown in FIGS. 173(b) and 173(d) may be displayed when the special lottery result is a jackpot. Note that if there are remaining times when the exploded image is displayed, the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 can be operated, and the display mode of the exploded image may be configured to accept the remaining number of operations and display an even more explosive image in response to the operation.
For example, if a predetermined lottery (1/3) is won based on an operation on the mission button 3700 in the display state shown in Fig. 173(b), the display state may be changed to an explosion state as shown in Fig. 173(d). Alternatively, if a predetermined lottery (1/2) is won based on an operation on the attack button 3710 in the display state shown in Fig. 173(d), the display state may be changed to an explosion state as shown in Fig. 173(b).
Furthermore, when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, even if the mission button 3700 and the attack button 3710 are operated and the predetermined lottery is not won repeatedly, if the operation is performed a total of 10 times, there is a 100% probability that an exploded image of the type corresponding to the last button operated will be displayed.
When an explosion image is displayed, it is not necessarily necessary to operate the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700, so it is preferable to display the simulated image that imitates the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 with a lower display priority than the exploded image. Figures 173(b) and 173(d) show display examples in which the simulated image that imitates the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is displayed with a lower display priority than the exploded image.
In addition, if the special lottery result is a loss, the display state shown in Figure 173 (c) will be displayed for three seconds from the moment the attack button 3710 is operated five times and the mission button 3700 is operated five times during the valid operation period, or from the moment the valid operation period ends.
173(a), the line from "Colonel Dyna" is "Fire the special machine gun! Press the defense button!", which is an incorrect instruction. Therefore, the player needs to carefully observe the situation and operate the mission button 3700.

In the example of the performance described with reference to Figure 169 (d), Colonel Dyna's lines instruct the player to operate the mission button 3700, but instead of the line "Fire the special machine gun! Press the mission button!", it is also possible to configure the display to display the incorrect line "Fire the special machine gun! Press the defense button!"
Furthermore, in the examples of presentation described with reference to Figure 169(a), the examples of presentation described with reference to Figure 171(a), the examples of presentation described with reference to Figure 172(a), and the examples of presentation described with reference to Figure 173(a), the lines of "Sergeant Might" instruct the operation of the attack button 3710, but instead of the line "It's a big bomb! Attack with the attack button!", it is also possible to configure it so that an incorrect line such as "It's a big bomb! Attack with the defense button!" is displayed.
This configuration requires the player to carefully observe the presentation, which can further enhance the enjoyment of the game. The player can recognize which operation part to operate by the simulated image of the mission button 3700 and the simulated image of the attack button 3710.

Furthermore, while the simulated images for the attack button 3710 and mission button 3700 indicate the operating section that should be operated, these may also be configured to display simulated images that indicate an operating section other than the operating section that should actually be operated, similar to the lines of "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might" (when an incorrect instruction is given). In this case, if an appropriate operation is performed, a display of a cannonball or bullet being fired may be displayed to indicate to the player that the appropriate display has been made.

Although the display examples show simulated images of the left lever 3720, attack button 3710, and mission button 3700, these do not have to be displayed. In this case, the player will need to operate the controls in a manner that goes against or differs from the operating instructions based on the type of bomb character and the destruction status of the player's tank, etc. This increases the difficulty of performing the appropriate operation, thereby increasing the excitement felt when the appropriate operation is performed.

Referring to Figures 172 and 173, an example of a presentation is shown in which, even after timing t26, if the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation instructions, a presentation state is generated in which a special image (such as an explosion image or an image of tilted sunglasses) is displayed. This embodiment also achieves the same effects as the embodiment described above with reference to Figures 161 to 171.

It is advisable to display the special image that contradicts the operation instructions for a longer period of time than the simulated image that resembles the attack button 3710. This configuration allows the player to fully enjoy the special image.

The special image displayed when an operation is performed in a manner contrary to or different from the operation instructions can be displayed as a larger image than the operation instructions. For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 171, it is possible to display an image (the large translucent sunglasses image shown in Figure 171(c)) that is larger than the image that provides the operation instructions (the image of dialogue instructing the player to operate the lever incorrectly). This configuration can increase the player's interest in the more special image that is displayed.

In this embodiment, operation instructions such as "tilt forward" and "tilt backward" are displayed as operation instructions for the left lever 3720. However, even if no operation instructions are given (as in the display examples shown in Figures 165(g) and 167(g)), the operation content can be inferred from the display mode of the displayed bomb character. A special image may be displayed only if the player is able to operate the left lever 3720 appropriately in such a more difficult operation situation. For example, in the display example shown in Figure 169(b), there may be cases where an image of tilted sunglasses is displayed and cases where it is not, and when no operation instruction is given for the attack button 3710, if the attack button 3710 is operated, an image of tilted sunglasses (special image) may be displayed with a predetermined probability (1/10).

It is also possible to configure the system so that when the left lever 3720 or the various buttons described above are operated, no operation acceptance sound directly corresponding to the operation of the left lever 3720 or the various buttons described above is output, and a special sound corresponding to the operation is output only when the special conditions described above are met based on the operation of the left lever 3720 or the various buttons described above, causing a special image to be displayed. This configuration makes the display of a special image feel even more special to the player. A similar configuration may also be used in the display of special images in the embodiments shown with reference to Figures 171 to 173.

Note that, although examples of operations that go against operational instructions have been given in which the left lever 3720 is tilted in a different direction or a button other than the one instructed is operated, other modes are also acceptable. For example, when the player is instructed to hold down the attack button 3710, deliberately repeatedly pressing the attack button 3710 may be used as an operation that goes against operational instructions. Alternatively, when the player is instructed to operate the attack button 3710, deliberately operating the defense button 3740 may be used as an operation that goes against operational instructions.

In the example shown above, a special display change is applied when an operation is performed that does not follow the displayed operating instructions. However, such special display changes may be configured to indicate the likelihood of a jackpot. Alternatively, the likelihood of a jackpot may not be indicated. Alternatively, of the special display changes described above, some of the display changes may indicate the likelihood of a jackpot, while other display changes may not indicate the likelihood of a jackpot.

In this embodiment, the operation acceptance period for the left lever 3720 begins after the decorative pattern changes begin to be displayed, but it may also be configured to start the operation acceptance period for the left lever 3720 simultaneously with the start of the decorative pattern changes. In this case, at timing t0, the display shown in FIG. 165(b) may be displayed to start the "Bomb Character Reach."

Furthermore, based on the prediction of pending changes, an effect similar to the "bomb character reach" shown with reference to FIGS. 165 to 173 may be executed over multiple display cycles of decorative symbol variations. In this case, bomb character A or bomb character B may be displayed once in the display cycle of decorative symbols executed before the display cycle of the decorative symbol that was the subject of the prediction. Then, an effect that accepts operation of the left lever 3720 corresponding to the displayed bomb character may be executed throughout the entire period during which the decorative symbol variations are displayed, and a display effect corresponding to operation of the left lever 3720 may be executed throughout the entire period during which the decorative symbol variations are stopped. For example, the example effect executed from timing t6 to timing t11 in FIGS. 162 and 163 may be executed during the display cycle of decorative symbols, and the example effect executed from timing t11 to timing t15 may be executed during the display cycle of decorative symbols that are stopped. Then, during the period from the start of the display cycle of the decorative symbol that was the subject of the prediction to the end of the stopped display, an effect executed from timing t26 to timing t35 in FIG. 164 may be executed.

In addition, when the player's tank's turret is destroyed, the destroyed turret may be resurrected by performing an operation that does not follow the displayed operation instructions.
In addition, the game may be configured so that when the machine gun of the player's tank is destroyed, the destroyed machine gun is restored by the player performing an operation that does not follow the displayed operation instructions.
Furthermore, if the player performs an operation that does not follow the displayed operation instructions while the turret of the player's tank is not destroyed, the player's tank may be upgraded. For example, the player may add one turret at a time, change the color of the turret, or change the turret into an extra-large turret.
In this case, the bomb character can be made to appear five times, rather than just twice, as shown in Fig. 161, to increase the number of times to make the game more interesting. Also, the player can be made to see special effects, such as the revival of a destroyed machine gun or an upgrade of the player's tank.

The display change may be configured to indicate the likelihood of a big win, or may be configured to simply change the display as a presentation effect and not indicate the likelihood of a big win.
For example, the degree of expectation may be indicated by the number of turrets, the color of the turrets, or the size of the turrets. Alternatively, the number of turrets, the color of the turrets, or the size of the turrets may be configured to suggest or notify the current game state or an upcoming game state.

It may also be configured so that bomb character A or bomb character B is always displayed during the first period, second period, and the variable display during the look-ahead performance. By configuring it in this way, operation instructions are always shown to the player, creating a sense of tension for the player and thereby increasing the player's interest.

An example has been shown in which a special display change is applied by operating the left lever 3720 without following the instructed operation content, but it may also be configured so that a special display change is applied by an operation that goes against the instructed operation content or an operation that is different from the instructed operation content.

We've shown an example where both "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might" give operational instructions, but it's also possible to configure a series of "bomb character reaches" so that only one character gives operational instructions. In this case, the other character could display a line such as "Hmm, mumble."

In this way, in the "Bomb Character Reach" mode, if an operation is performed that does not follow the displayed operation instructions, a special display change is given, giving the player a special sense of satisfaction.

In the past, in order to suggest the outcome of a special lottery, a predetermined image was displayed based on a player's operation to indicate the result of the special lottery (for example, JP 2010-046210 A). However, the number of times such operations were accepted and the number of times a display was made in response to the acceptance of an operation were predetermined. Furthermore, the period during which a player could make an operation was also predetermined, and the display mode could not be freely changed by the player's free operation. Furthermore, the display time of the effects displayed in this manner was fixed, and this aspect also left room for improvement. In the embodiment described below, we will explain an embodiment that allows multiple operations to be accepted during the valid operation period, and that makes it possible to vary the display time of the image displayed based on the operation, thereby suggesting the outcome of the special lottery depending on the length of the display time.

The following describes the "sudden tank effect" that can be executed as a look-ahead effect pattern, with reference to Figure 174 etc. Whether or not to execute the "sudden tank effect" is determined based on the peripheral control board 1510 reading ahead the reserved contents.
Figure 174 is a table showing the types of presentation patterns that can be selected in the "Sudden Tank Presentation," the conditions under which the presentation pattern is selected, and the period during which the predictive presentation is executed (specifically, how many times the decorative pattern is displayed and changed)

Predictive display pattern 01 is a display pattern that can be selected when the previous decorative pattern variable display has ended and a new decorative pattern variable display has begun, and the number of reserved symbols is between 1 and 4. Predictive display pattern 01 is a display pattern in which a "sudden tank display" is executed in the variable display related to that reserved symbol at the start of the variable display. Note that predictive display pattern 01 is only executed during one variable display period, so strictly speaking it is not a predictive display, but for convenience we will refer to it as such.

Predictive display pattern 02 is a display pattern that can be selected when the previous decorative pattern change display has ended and a new decorative pattern change display has begun, and the number of reserved symbols is 1 to 3. Predictive display pattern 02 is a display pattern in which a "sudden tank display" is executed in the change display related to the reserved symbol at the start of the change display and in the change display related to the first reserved symbol.

Predictive display pattern 03 is a display pattern that can be selected when the previous decorative pattern change display has ended and a new decorative pattern change display has begun, and the number of reserved symbols is 1 to 2. Predictive display pattern 03 is a display pattern in which a "sudden tank display" is executed in the change display related to the reserved symbol, the change display related to the first reserved symbol, and the change display related to the second reserved symbol at the start of the change display.

Predictive display pattern 04 is a display pattern that can be selected when the number of reserved symbols is 1 to 3 when the previous decorative symbol variable display has ended and a new decorative symbol variable display is about to begin. Predictive display pattern 04 is a display pattern in which a "sudden tank display" is executed in the variable display related to the reserved symbol at the start of the variable display, the variable display related to the first reserved symbol, the variable display related to the second reserved symbol, and the variable display related to the third reserved symbol.

In addition, in presentation patterns that perform multiple variable displays, such as pre-reading presentation pattern 02 to pre-reading presentation pattern 04, the result of the special lottery for the final variable display in which the "sudden tank presentation" is executed can be either a jackpot or a miss, but if the results of the special lottery for all intermediate variable displays other than the final variable display in which the "sudden tank presentation" is executed are misses, a pre-reading presentation based on pre-reading presentation pattern 02 to pre-reading presentation pattern 04 should be executed.

Figure 175 is a table showing the three display effect patterns that are displayed in the "Sudden Tank Effect." Figure 176 is a time chart showing the effect when pre-reading effect pattern 01 is selected.

As shown in Figure 176 (a), in the "Sudden Tank Effect," the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner for 14 seconds, from timing t0 to timing t14. The decorative symbols are displayed statically for 1 second. At timing t0, operation of the attack button 3710 is enabled, and at timing t14, when the display of the decorative symbols in a variable manner ends, operation of the attack button 3710 is disabled. During the period when operation of the attack button 3710 is enabled (timing t0 to timing t14), a simulated image resembling the attack button 3710 is displayed in the display area. Below, with reference to Figure 177, the effect displayed in the display area based on the player's operation of the attack button 3710 will be described.

Figure 177 shows the display state in the display area at a specific timing in the time chart described with reference to Figure 176.

177(a) shows a state in which an image of the player's tank is displayed in the display area at timing t0. The display area shows the following: decorative symbols ("3,""↓,""3") that are in a reach state in the upper left of the display area; an image of the player's tank facing forward in the lower center of the display area; an image of an enemy tank facing left in the upper center of the display area; an image of the road along which the player's tank is moving in the left-right center of the display area; an image of the horizon and sky in the upper part of the display area; a dialogue image of the character "Colonel Dyna" for the presentation purposes and a window image surrounding the dialogue image in the lower right of the display area; a dialogue image of the character "Sergeant Might" for the presentation purposes and a window image surrounding the dialogue image in the lower left of the display area; and a simulated image of the attack button 3710 to the right of the window image surrounding the dialogue image of Sergeant Might.
In this way, in the "sudden tank effect", at timing t0, an image of the player's tank and an image of the enemy tank are suddenly displayed, and operation of the attack button 3710 becomes valid.

As shown in FIG. 176(a), if the attack button 3710 is not operated during the valid operation period, the image of the enemy tank will continue to be displayed until timing t14. In addition, the decorative pattern will be statically displayed at timing t14.

On the other hand, after the operation of the attack button 3710 by the player is detected, an effect display corresponding to the operation is immediately executed. Figure 175 is a table showing the effect patterns executed based on the operation of the attack button 3710.
Also, Figures 176(b) to 176(d) are time charts showing the state in which a performance pattern corresponding to an operation is executed based on the acceptance of an operation on the attack button 3710 at timing t3.
In addition, Figures 176 (e) to 176 (g) are time charts showing the state in which a performance pattern corresponding to an operation is executed based on the acceptance of an operation on the attack button 3710 at two timings, timing t3 and timing t8.

FIG. 175 shows the effect patterns that can be selected in response to the operation of the attack button 3710.
When smoke display effect pattern 01 is selected, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second. At the same time, a smoke image showing smoke rising from the enemy tank is displayed for one second in the upper right corner of the image of the destroyed enemy tank. After that, the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second.
When smoke display effect pattern 02 is selected, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed for two seconds. At the same time, a smoke image showing smoke rising from the enemy tank is displayed in the upper right corner of the image of the destroyed enemy tank for two seconds. After that, the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second.
When smoke display effect pattern 03 is selected, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed for three seconds. At the same time, a smoke image showing smoke rising from the enemy tank is displayed in the upper right corner of the image of the destroyed enemy tank for three seconds. After that, the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second.

The appearance rates of smoke display pattern 01 to smoke display pattern 03 are predetermined to indicate the likelihood that the variable display result will be a jackpot. When smoke display pattern 01 is executed, the likelihood is 30%, when smoke display pattern 02 is executed, the likelihood is 50%, and when smoke display pattern 03 is executed, the likelihood is 100%.

Figure 176 (b) is a time chart showing an example of a performance in which smoke display performance pattern 01 is executed from timing t3 to timing t5 based on operation of the attack button 3710.
Figure 176 (c) is a time chart showing an example of a performance in which smoke display performance pattern 02 is executed from timing t3 to timing t6 based on operation of the attack button 3710.
Figure 176 (d) is a time chart showing an example of a performance in which smoke display performance pattern 03 is executed from timing t3 to timing t7 based on operation of the attack button 3710.

Figure 177(b) shows an example of what appears in the display area when the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t3 in the performance examples shown in Figures 176(b) to 176(d). Figure 177(b) shows a state in which a shell is fired at an enemy tank, and an image of the shell exploding and an image of the destroyed enemy tank are displayed in the display area.

The display shown in Figure 177(b) ends in less than one second (for example, 0.1 seconds), and the display state shown in Figure 177(c) appears. In this display state, the enemy tank's gun turret is destroyed, and a smoke image showing smoke rising from the enemy tank is displayed in the upper right corner of the image of the destroyed enemy tank.

In the example shown in Figure 176(b), when smoke display effect pattern 01 is selected, the display state shown in Figure 177(c) changes one second after which the display state shown in Figure 177(d) changes to one where no smoke image is displayed. In addition, the lines of "Colonel Dina" are also displayed differently, indicating that the level of expectation is low.

In the example shown in Figure 176(c), when smoke display effect pattern 02 is selected, the display state shown in Figure 177(c) changes to one where no smoke images are displayed two seconds later (not shown). The line displayed by "Colonel Dyna" two seconds later is "The power of the new type of cannon is decent..." Here, the line from "Colonel Dyna" indicates that the level of expectation is medium.

In the example shown in Figure 176(d), when smoke display effect pattern 03 is selected, the display state shown in Figure 177(c) changes three seconds later to the display state shown in Figure 177(e) where no smoke image is displayed. In addition, the lines of "Colonel Dina" are also displayed in a different way, indicating high expectations.

In this way, the longer the time for which the smoke image is displayed (1 second, 2 seconds, or 3 seconds), the higher the likelihood of a jackpot.
Therefore, the player will look at the display area in the hope that the smoke image will be displayed for a long time.
Furthermore, the words of "Colonel Dyna" that are displayed when the smoke image finishes displaying correspond to each smoke display effect pattern. Therefore, the words of "Colonel Dyna" also suggest the likelihood of a jackpot. Since "Colonel Dyna"'s words correspond to the display time of the smoke image, even if the exact display time of the smoke image is not known, the expectation level can be known, and even players who are not very focused on the game and do not bother to check the display time of the smoke image can feel the excitement of the game.

One second after the smoke image disappears, an image of a new enemy tank is displayed. For example, in the example shown in Figure 176(b), an image of a new enemy tank is displayed at timing t5. In the example shown in Figure 176(c), an image of a new enemy tank is displayed at timing t6. In the example shown in Figure 176(d), an image of a new enemy tank is displayed at timing t7. Figure 176(f) is an example of an image of a new enemy tank being displayed.

In the example presentation shown in Figures 176(b) to 176(d), if no further operation is performed on the attack button 3710, the display of the changing decorative symbols will end at timing t14.

Figure 178(a) shows a display example that is displayed for one second from timing t14 to timing t15 when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot in the performance examples shown in Figures 176(b) to 176(d). In the figure, the decorative pattern is shown as "333," indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. In addition, dialogue images of "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might" are also displayed in a manner that notifies the player that they have won a jackpot.
Figure 178(b) shows a display example that is displayed for one second from timing t14 to timing t15 when the result of the special lottery is a loss in the performance examples shown in Figures 176(b) to 176(d). In the figure, the decorative pattern is shown as "343," which indicates that the result of the special lottery is a loss. In addition, the dialogue images of "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might" are also displayed in a manner that notifies that the result is a loss.

Referring to Figures 176(b) to 176(d), an example of the effect when operation of the attack button 3710 is accepted at timing t3 is shown, but it is possible to accept operation from the player at any timing between timing t0 and timing t14 and execute one of the smoke display effect patterns.

In this way, by accepting the player's operation multiple times, rather than just once, between timing t0 and timing t14, it is possible to execute the smoke display effect pattern multiple times.

Figures 176(e) to 176(g) show examples of effects when operation of the attack button 3710 is detected at two timings, timing t3 and timing t8.
Figure 176 (e) shows an example of a performance in which smoke display performance pattern 01 starts at timing t3 and smoke display performance pattern 01 starts at timing t8.
Figure 176 (f) shows an example of a performance in which smoke display performance pattern 01 starts at timing t3 and smoke display performance pattern 02 starts at timing t8.
Figure 176 (g) shows an example of a performance in which smoke display performance pattern 01 starts at timing t3 and smoke display performance pattern 03 starts at timing t8.
Even if the smoke display performance pattern is executed multiple times, the same display as the performance example described with reference to Figures 176(b) to 176(d) will be displayed each time the performance pattern is executed.

In addition, if it is detected that the player has operated the attack button 3710 while a certain smoke display effect pattern is being executed, the display state shown in Figure 177(f) may be continued for one second after the current smoke display effect pattern ends, and then one of the smoke display effect patterns may be automatically executed, resulting in the display state shown in Figure 177(b) or later. For example, if the player operates the attack button 3710 three times within a short period of time (e.g., one second) when an image of an undestroyed enemy tank is being displayed, three smoke display effect patterns will be automatically executed.

An example has been shown in which predictive performance pattern 01 is selected and an "sudden tank performance" is executed in one variable display, but below we will explain how the "sudden tank performance" is executed when predictive performance pattern 02 to predictive performance pattern 04 are selected.
In the "Sudden Tank Effect," the effect is executed over a maximum of four changing displays, with each changing display taking 14 seconds to change and one second to stop the change.

179 and 180, an example of a performance when the look-ahead performance pattern 02 is executed will be described below. The look-ahead performance pattern 02 is a performance pattern in which a "sudden tank performance" is executed over two variable displays.
In this case, the target for which the expectation is suggested by the pre-reading effect is the special lottery result corresponding to the second variable display. Also, the special lottery result corresponding to the variable display other than the second variable display is a loss. This point is the same for pre-reading effect pattern 03 and pre-reading effect pattern 04.
In addition, in the pre-reading performance patterns 02 to 04, if the display of smoke images or images of destroyed enemy tanks begins and ends during the changing display of decorative patterns, a display similar to the performance examples described with reference to Figures 176 and 177 is displayed.

The following describes the display modes of the smoke image and the image of the destroyed enemy tank while the decorative pattern is statically displayed.
As shown in FIG. 179(a), if no operation is performed on the attack button 3710, the display state shown in FIG. 180(a) will be displayed from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in Figure 179 (b), if smoke display performance pattern 01 is started at timing t12 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the performance using smoke display performance pattern 01 ends at timing t14, and the display state shown in Figure 180 (b) is displayed from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in Figure 179 (c), if smoke display effect pattern 02 is started at timing t13 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, a smoke image and an image of a destroyed enemy tank will be displayed from timing t14 to timing t15, and the display state shown in Figure 180 (c) will be obtained from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in Figure 179 (d), if smoke display effect pattern 03 is started at timing t12 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, a smoke image and an image of a destroyed enemy tank will be displayed from timing t14 to timing t15, and the display state will be as shown in Figure 180 (c) from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in Figure 179 (e), if smoke display effect pattern 01 is started at timing t13 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, an image of a destroyed enemy tank will be displayed from timing t14 to timing t15, and the display state will be as shown in Figure 180 (d) from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in Figure 179 (f), if smoke display effect pattern 03 is started at timing t11 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, an image of a destroyed enemy tank will be displayed from timing t14 to timing t15, and the display state will be as shown in Figure 180 (e) from timing t14 to timing t15.

At timing t15, the display of new decorative symbols begins. The display of the decorative symbols at this time also begins in a display mode that creates a reach state, such as "3↓3."

With reference to Figure 179, we have explained the display modes of smoke images and enemy tank destruction images when decorative patterns corresponding to holds that occurred before the hold that is the target of the pre-reading performance stop. Below, with reference to Figure 181, we will explain the display modes of smoke images and enemy tank destruction images when decorative patterns corresponding to holds that are the target of the pre-reading performance stop.

All of Figures 181(b) to 181(f) show examples in which the execution period of the selected smoke display effect pattern overlaps with the period in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state (timing t29 to timing t30). In the examples shown in Figures 181(b) to 181(f), even during the execution period of the selected smoke display effect pattern, the currently executing smoke display effect pattern is stopped at timing t29 and the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state. Between timing t29 and timing t30, the display state shown in Figure 178(a) or 178(b) will be displayed based on the results of the special lottery.

On the other hand, the smoke display effect pattern may be configured to be executed for a predetermined period of time only if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. In this case, the jackpot game state begins at timing t30, but the opening state of the jackpot game is maintained from timing t30 to timing t35, and the opening and closing operation of the large prize opening 2005 begins from timing t35. Figures 182(b) to 182(f) show examples of effects in which smoke images or images of destroyed enemy tanks are displayed while the decorative patterns are stopped changing or during jackpot gameplay.

On the other hand, the smoke display effect pattern may be configured to be executed for a predetermined execution period only if the result of the special lottery is a loss. In this case, although the next variable display starts from timing t30, the sudden tank effect may be continued in the next variable display as well, and the sudden tank effect may be configured to end in the middle of the variable display.
Figures 182(b) to 182(f) show examples of presentations in which smoke images or images of destroyed enemy tanks are displayed while the decorative pattern stops changing or when the next changing display begins.

In this way, the "sudden tank effect" of this embodiment allows for operation of the attack button 3710 (operation unit) to be accepted simultaneously with the start of the decorative pattern change. Furthermore, the number of times that display effects based on operation of the operation unit are performed is not predetermined; rather, the display effect can be executed any number of times based on the player's will. This makes it possible to arouse strong interest in the player's operation of the operation unit. Furthermore, in addition to simply operating the operation unit, players must also pay attention to the display time of the smoke image (specific display) displayed in response to the operation (since a longer display time indicates a higher likelihood of a jackpot), further enhancing the player's interest. Furthermore, because the decorative pattern change time is set short, it is possible to create more tension regarding the operation of the operation unit and the display time of the smoke image displayed in response to the operation. Furthermore, by configuring this display effect to be executable across multiple decorative pattern changes as a predictive effect, players can be more interested in which decorative pattern change the expectation level indicated by the display time of the smoke image corresponds to.

Although three smoke display effect patterns are shown in Figure 175, the "sudden tank effect" may be executed using a table in which only smoke display effect pattern 01 and smoke display effect pattern 02 are executed. Alternatively, the "sudden tank effect" may be executed using a table in which only smoke display effect pattern 01 and smoke display effect pattern 03 are executed, or a table in which only smoke display effect pattern 02 and smoke display effect pattern 03 are executed.

Furthermore, smoke display effect pattern 04 may be used, in which a destruction image and a smoke image are displayed for four seconds, followed by a destruction image alone for one second, resulting in a jackpot expectation rate of 100%; or smoke display effect pattern 05 may be used, in which a destruction image and a smoke image are displayed for five seconds, followed by a destruction image alone for one second, resulting in a jackpot expectation rate of 100%. In this way, by using an effect pattern with a long effect execution period, players can almost certainly notice that the expectation rate is 100%, making it possible to increase interest.

With reference to Figures 174 to 182, an embodiment has been shown in which the longer the display time of the smoke image (specific display), the higher the likelihood of the special lottery resulting in a jackpot. Below, with reference to Figures 183 to 190, a modified embodiment will be described in which the shorter the display time of the specific display (the image of a destroyed enemy tank in the embodiment shown below), the higher the likelihood of the special lottery resulting in a jackpot. Note that descriptions of processes and displays that are the same as those before the modification may be omitted.

FIG. 183 shows the effect patterns that can be selected in response to the operation of the attack button 3710.
When white flag display effect pattern 01 is selected, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed for three seconds. After that, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second. At the same time, a white flag image indicating that the enemy tank has surrendered is displayed for one second above the image of the destroyed enemy tank.
When white flag display effect pattern 02 is selected, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed for two seconds. After that, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second. At the same time, a white flag image indicating that the enemy tank has surrendered is displayed for one second above the image of the destroyed enemy tank.
When white flag display effect pattern 03 is selected, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second. After that, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second. At the same time, a white flag image indicating that the enemy tank has surrendered is displayed for one second above the image of the destroyed enemy tank.

The appearance rates of white flag display pattern 01 to white flag display pattern 03 are predetermined to indicate the likelihood that the variable display result will be a jackpot. When white flag display pattern 01 is executed, the likelihood is 30%, when white flag display pattern 02 is executed, the likelihood is 50%, and when white flag display pattern 03 is executed, the likelihood is 100%.

Figure 184 (b) is a time chart showing an example of a presentation in which white flag display presentation pattern 01 is executed from timing t3 to timing t7 based on operation of the attack button 3710.
Figure 184 (c) is a time chart showing an example of a presentation in which white flag display presentation pattern 02 is executed from timing t3 to timing t6 based on operation of the attack button 3710.
Figure 184 (d) is a time chart showing an example of a presentation in which white flag display presentation pattern 03 is executed from timing t3 to timing t5 based on operation of the attack button 3710.

Figure 185(b) shows an example of what appears in the display area when the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t3 in the performance examples shown in Figures 184(b) to 184(d). Figure 185(b) shows a state in which a shell is fired at an enemy tank, and an image of the shell exploding and an image of the destroyed enemy tank are displayed in the display area.

The display shown in Figure 185(b) ends in less than one second (for example, 0.1 seconds), and the display state shown in Figure 185(c) appears. In this display state, the enemy tank's gun turret is destroyed and an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed. Note that at this stage, the white flag image has not yet been displayed.

In the example shown in Figure 184(b), when white flag display effect pattern 01 is selected, the display state shown in Figure 185(c) is displayed, and three seconds later the white flag image shown in Figure 185(d) is displayed. Also, here, the lines of "Colonel Dina" are also displayed in a different way, indicating that the expectation is low.

In the example presentation shown in Figure 184(c), when white flag display presentation pattern 02 is selected, the display state shown in Figure 185(c) is displayed, and two seconds later a white flag image is displayed (not shown). The line displayed by "Colonel Dyna" two seconds later is "The enemy's morale seems to be okay..." Here, the line from "Colonel Dyna" indicates that the level of expectation is medium.

In the example shown in Figure 184(d), when white flag display effect pattern 03 is selected, the display state shown in Figure 185(c) is displayed, followed one second later by the white flag image shown in Figure 185(e). In addition, the lines of "Colonel Dina" are also displayed differently, indicating high expectations.

In this way, the longer the time (1 second, 2 seconds, or 3 seconds) during which the white flag image is not displayed and only the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed, the higher the chance of winning the jackpot.
Therefore, the player will view the display area in the hope that the white flag image will not be displayed and only the image of the destroyed enemy tank will be displayed for a long time.
Furthermore, the lines of "Colonel Dyna," which are displayed when the white flag image starts to be displayed, correspond to each white flag display effect pattern. Therefore, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" also suggest the likelihood of a jackpot. Since "Colonel Dyna"'s lines correspond to the time when the white flag image is not displayed and only the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed, even if the player does not know the exact time when the white flag image is not displayed and only the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed, the player can know the likelihood of a jackpot. This makes it possible to make the game more interesting for players who have low levels of concentration and who do not bother to check the time when the white flag image is not displayed and only the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed.

One second after the white flag image is displayed, the image of a new enemy tank is displayed. For example, in the example shown in Figure 184(b), the image of a new enemy tank is displayed at timing t7. In the example shown in Figure 184(c), the image of a new enemy tank is displayed at timing t6. In the example shown in Figure 184(d), the image of a new enemy tank is displayed at timing t5. Figure 185(f) is an example of a display showing the image of a new enemy tank being displayed.

In the example presentation shown in Figures 184(b) to 184(d), if no further operation is performed on the attack button 3710, the display of the changing decorative symbols will end at timing t14.

Figure 186(a) shows a display state that is displayed for one second from timing t14 to timing t15 when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot in the presentation examples shown in Figures 184(b) to 184(d). In the figure, the decorative pattern is shown stopped and displayed as "333," indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. In addition, dialogue images of "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might" are also displayed in a manner that notifies the player that they have won a jackpot.
Figure 186(b) shows a display state that is displayed for one second from timing t14 to timing t15 when the result of the special lottery is a loss in the performance examples shown in Figures 184(b) to 184(d). In the figure, the decorative pattern is displayed as "343," indicating that the result of the special lottery is a loss. In addition, the dialogue images of "Colonel Dina" and "Sergeant Might" are also displayed in a manner that notifies that the result is a loss.

Referring to Figures 184(b) to 184(d), an example of the effect when operation is received on the attack button 3710 at timing t3 is shown, but it is possible to receive operation from the player at any timing between timing t0 and timing t14 and execute one of the white flag display effect patterns.

In addition, by accepting the player's operation multiple times between timing t0 and timing t14, rather than just once, it is possible to execute the white flag display effect pattern multiple times.

Figures 184(e) to 184(g) show examples of effects when operation of the attack button 3710 is detected twice at timings t3 and t8.
Figure 184 (e) shows an example of a presentation in which white flag display presentation pattern 01 starts at timing t3 and white flag display presentation pattern 01 starts at timing t8.
Figure 184 (f) shows an example of a presentation in which white flag display presentation pattern 01 starts at timing t3 and white flag display presentation pattern 02 starts at timing t8.
Figure 184 (g) shows an example of a presentation in which white flag display presentation pattern 01 starts at timing t3 and white flag display presentation pattern 03 starts at timing t8.
Even if the white flag display effect pattern is executed multiple times, the same display as the effect example described with reference to Figures 184(b) to 184(d) will be displayed each time the effect pattern is executed.

In addition, if it is detected that the player has operated the attack button 3710 while a certain white flag display effect pattern is being executed, the display state shown in Figure 185(f) may be continued for one second after the currently executed white flag display effect pattern ends, and then one of the white flag display effect patterns may be automatically executed, resulting in the display state shown in Figure 185(b) or later. For example, if the player operates the attack button 3710 three times within a short period of time (e.g., one second) when an image of an undestroyed enemy tank is being displayed, three white flag display effect patterns will be automatically executed.

An example has been shown in which predictive performance pattern 01 is selected and an "sudden tank performance" is executed in one variable display, but below we will explain how the "sudden tank performance" is executed when predictive performance pattern 02 to predictive performance pattern 04 are selected.
In the "Sudden Tank Effect," the effect is executed over a maximum of four changing displays, with the changing time for one changing display being 14 seconds and the change stopping time being 1 second.

187 and 188, an example of a performance when the look-ahead performance pattern 02 is executed will be described below. The look-ahead performance pattern 02 is a performance pattern in which a "sudden tank performance" is executed over two variable displays.
In this case, the target for which the expectation is suggested by the pre-reading effect is the special lottery result corresponding to the second variable display. Also, the special lottery result corresponding to the variable display other than the second variable display is a loss. This point is the same for pre-reading effect pattern 03 and pre-reading effect pattern 04.
In addition, in the pre-reading performance patterns 02 to 04, if the display of a white flag image or an image of a destroyed enemy tank begins and ends during the changing display of the decorative pattern, a display similar to the performance example described with reference to Figures 184 and 185 is displayed.

The following describes the display mode of the white flag image and the image of the destroyed enemy tank while the decorative pattern is statically displayed.
As shown in FIG. 187(a), if no operation is performed on the attack button 3710, the display state shown in FIG. 188(a) will be displayed from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in Figure 187(b), if the white flag display effect pattern 03 is started at timing t12 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the effect using the white flag display effect pattern 03 ends at timing t14, and the display state shown in Figure 188(b) is displayed from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in Figure 187(c), when white flag display effect pattern 02 is started at timing t13 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed from timing t14 to timing t15, and the display state shown in Figure 188(c) is obtained from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in Figure 187 (d), if white flag display performance pattern 01 is started at timing t12 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, an image of a destroyed enemy tank will be displayed from timing t14 to timing t15, and the display state will be as shown in Figure 188 (c) from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in Figure 187 (e), if white flag display performance pattern 03 is started at timing t13 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, a white flag image and an image of a destroyed enemy tank will be displayed from timing t14 to timing t15, resulting in the display state shown in Figure 188 (d) from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in Figure 187 (f), when white flag display performance pattern 01 is started at timing t11 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, a white flag image and an image of a destroyed enemy tank are displayed from timing t14 to timing t15, and the display state shown in Figure 188 (e) is obtained from timing t14 to timing t15.

At timing t15, the display of new decorative symbols begins. The display of the decorative symbols at this time also begins in a display mode that creates a reach state, such as "3↓3."

With reference to Figure 187, we have explained the display modes of the white flag image and the destroyed enemy tank image when the decorative pattern corresponding to the hold that occurred before the hold that is the target of the pre-reading performance stops. Below, with reference to Figure 189, we will explain the display modes of the white flag image and the destroyed enemy tank image when the decorative pattern corresponding to the hold that is the target of the pre-reading performance stops.

Figures 189(b) to 189(f) all show examples in which the execution period of the selected white flag display pattern overlaps with the stopped display period of the decorative symbols (timing t29 to timing t30). In the examples shown in Figures 189(b) to 189(f), even during the execution period of the selected white flag display pattern, the currently executing white flag display pattern is stopped at timing t29 and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. Between timings t29 and t30, the display state shown in Figure 186(a) or 186(b) will be displayed based on the results of the special lottery.

On the other hand, the currently running white flag display effect pattern may be configured to be executed for a predetermined execution period only if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. In this case, the jackpot game state begins from timing t30, but the opening state of the jackpot game is set from timing t30 to timing t35, and the opening and closing operation of the large prize opening 2005 begins from timing t35. Figures 190(b) to 190(f) show examples of effects in which a white flag image or an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed while the decorative pattern is stopped changing or during jackpot game play.

On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the currently running white flag display effect pattern may be configured to be executed for a predetermined execution period, and if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, the currently running white flag display effect pattern may be interrupted without being executed for the predetermined execution period. This is to prevent the occurrence of a situation where, if the display of the image of the enemy tank destruction is interrupted, the player will be dissatisfied because the result of the special lottery was a loss even though a highly anticipated effect was executed.
If the result of the special lottery is a loss and there is one or more reserved items, the next variable display will start from timing t30, but the "sudden tank effect" will continue even in the next variable display, and it is preferable to configure the "sudden tank effect" to end in the middle of the variable display. By configuring it in this way, the "sudden tank effect" can be ended in a natural way that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.
Figures 190(b) to 190(f) show examples of presentations in which smoke images or images of destroyed enemy tanks are displayed while the decorative pattern stops changing or when the next changing display begins.

The embodiment shown with reference to Figures 183 to 190 can also achieve the same effects as the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 175 to 182. Note that in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 183 to 190, the shorter the display time of the destroyed enemy tank, the higher the likelihood of a jackpot, so the player will watch the display presentation while hoping that the display time of the destroyed enemy tank will be short.

Referring to Figures 174 to 190, an embodiment of the "sudden tank effect" has been shown, but the following modified embodiments are also possible. Note that while an embodiment in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and a smoke image are displayed will be described as an example, similar modifications may also be made to an embodiment in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and a white flag image are displayed.

As shown in Figures 175 and 183, the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for either 2 seconds, 3 seconds, or 4 seconds. A specified sound effect may be output during the period in which the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed. For example, sound effects of 2, 3, or 4 seconds may be prepared in advance, and the output of the sound effect for the same number of seconds may begin simultaneously with the start of the display of the image of the destroyed enemy tank. In this way, the display of the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the output of the sound effect may be configured to begin and end at the same time.

On the other hand, modifications can be made so that the display time of the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the output time of the sound effect are different. For example, it is possible to prepare only a sound effect with an output time of 4 seconds, and configure it so that this sound effect is output regardless of whether the display time of the image of the destroyed enemy tank is 2, 3, or 4 seconds. By configuring it in this way, the player will not know the level of expectation unless they pay close attention to the display mode of the image of the destroyed enemy tank, which can add tension to the game. It is also possible to use only sound effects with an output time of 3 seconds, or only sound effects with an output time of 2 seconds.

A specific sound effect may be looped to output the sound. For example, a one-second sound effect may be played multiple times (two, three, four times) to match the display time of the image of the destroyed enemy tank. For example, a one-second sound effect may be played four times in succession to output the sound effect for four seconds. In this case, as with the above, by outputting the sound effect a set number of times (for a set period of time) even though the display times may differ, the player will not be able to sense the level of expectation unless they are paying close attention to the display of the image of the destroyed enemy tank, which can add a sense of tension to the game.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 175, the expected probability when smoke display effect pattern 01 is executed is set to 30%, but it may be set to 0% instead of 30%. Similarly, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 183, the expected probability when white flag display effect pattern 01 is executed is set to 30%, but it may be set to 0% instead of 30%.

This embodiment is configured so that, based on the player's operation, each of the presentation patterns shown in Figures 175 and 183 can be referenced to execute presentation patterns that display an image of an enemy tank being destroyed multiple times. However, a limit may be placed on the number of times that high-expectation presentation patterns are executed. For example, the number of times that smoke display presentation pattern 03 or white flag display presentation pattern 03, which have a jackpot expectation rate of 100%, are executed during one "sudden tank presentation" may be limited to one. Similarly, the number of times that presentation patterns with an expectation rate of 0%, such as those described above, are executed may be limited to one. This configuration creates a sense of tension in the game, as the player carefully observes whether a presentation pattern with a high (or low) expectation rate is executed.

As shown in Figures 177 and 185, in this embodiment, the decorative symbols (during variable display and static display), the simulated image of the attack button 3710, the image of an undestroyed enemy tank, and the image of a destroyed enemy tank are displayed relatively small in the display area, but at least one of these may be displayed larger. For example, the decorative symbols may be displayed variably at the sizes shown in Figures 139(b) and 139(c). In this case, these images may be displayed in an overlapping manner. In this case, the display priority may be highest for the image of an undestroyed enemy tank and the image of a destroyed enemy tank, followed by the simulated image of the attack button 3710 and the decorative symbols (during variable display and static display). In addition, the display priority may be even lower for the image of the player's tank, dialogue images, and background images such as roads.

With this configuration, even if the decorative pattern (during variable display and static display), the simulated image of the attack button 3710, and the image of an undestroyed enemy tank or the image of a destroyed enemy tank are displayed overlapping each other, the visibility of the images of the undestroyed enemy tank or the destroyed enemy tank is not obstructed by the decorative pattern or the simulated image of the attack button 3710. As a result, the timing when the image of the destroyed enemy tank starts and ends to be displayed is clear, preventing the player from having a wrong understanding of the display time of the image of the destroyed enemy tank, i.e., the level of expectation.

In the embodiment shown, operating the attack button 3710 always results in the image of the enemy tank being destroyed and displayed, but the difficulty may be increased so that the image of the enemy tank is displayed in a destroyed state. In this case, the display conditions for operating the operation unit in the above-mentioned embodiment may be adopted. For example, a lottery may be held when the attack button 3710 is operated, and if a predetermined probability (e.g., 1/2) is reached, the image of the enemy tank is displayed in a destroyed state. In this way, by configuring the image of the destroyed enemy tank to be displayed when certain conditions are met, the difficulty of displaying the image of the destroyed enemy tank can be increased, and the player can experience a sense of tension, as they do not know when the image of the destroyed tank will be displayed, even if they have operated the attack button 3710.

In the above-described embodiment, an example was shown in which an image of a destroyed tank is displayed for a different duration than usual in the "Sudden Tank Effect" when the expected probability of a jackpot is 100%, i.e., when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot (an example of an effect when smoke display effect pattern 03 or white flag display effect pattern 03 is selected). However, in addition to indicating a jackpot, other game value that will be beneficial to the player may also be suggested in a similar manner. For example, as described above, the "Sudden Tank Effect" may be executed in a losing variation that triggers a switch from the normal game mode to a time-saving game mode in which time is saved, such as when a symbol that saves time is won, or when a predetermined number of losing variations have occurred since the power was turned on or the previous win. In this case, the same effect can be achieved as in the previous embodiment, as the time-saving game mode is awarded instead of a winning one as a beneficial benefit to the player.

In the above-described embodiment, the "sudden tank effect" indicated the likelihood of a jackpot, but the "sudden tank effect" may also be configured to indicate the type of benefit to be awarded to the player. For example, the benefit to be awarded to the player may indicate whether a time-saving state or a high probability state will be awarded after the changing decorative symbol becomes a jackpot, or whether it is likely to be awarded (for example, what is the expected percentage probability of entering the high probability state). Alternatively, in a gaming machine that can transition to a time-saving state or a high probability state after the decorative symbol changes without going through a jackpot state, the benefit may indicate whether a time-saving state or a high probability state will be awarded after the decorative symbol changes, or whether it is likely to be awarded (for example, what is the expected percentage probability of entering the high probability state).

In this way, the "sudden tank effect" can increase the excitement of the gaming machine.

In the past, there have been effects that require players to operate the control unit (for example, JP 2010-046210 A). In such effects, a predetermined effect display is displayed whether the player operates the control unit or not, which makes operating the control unit less tense. In particular, even if complex operation modes are required, they are ultimately merely a show, and a predetermined effect is simply performed regardless of the operation mode performed by the player. Therefore, implementing such effects could actually reduce the player's interest in the effect display. As such, there is room for improvement in conventional gaming machines in terms of effectively utilizing operation modes to increase gaming interest. Therefore, in the following embodiment, we will describe a gaming machine that can create a sense of tension in the player regarding the operation modes performed by the player, thereby preventing a decline in gaming interest.

In the embodiment described below, the player is required to operate the left lever 3720, and depending on whether the player is able to tilt the left lever 3720 in a specified direction and angle and maintain that position, the special effect display may or may not be obstructed from being visible (it may be impossible or difficult to see).

Below, we will explain an embodiment of a "Full Power Breakthrough Reach" in which the player is required to operate the left lever 3720 within a specified range, with reference to the time chart shown in Figure 191 and the display examples shown in Figures 192 and 193. Note that Figure 192 shows an example of the display when appropriate operation is performed, as shown in Figure 191(a). Furthermore, Figure 193 shows an example of the display when appropriate operation is not performed, as shown in Figure 191(b).

At timing t5, a reach effect state occurs. In a "Full Power Breakthrough Reach," a speed display window showing the speed of the player's tank is displayed above Colonel Dyna's dialogue window. The display within the speed display window changes depending on how the player operates the left lever 3720. Images of decorative patterns, roads, and the player's tank are displayed in the same way as in other embodiments. Figures 192(a) and 193(a) show examples of the display at timing t5, when the reach effect state occurs.

At timing t5, the effective operation period for the left lever 3720 occurs. As shown with reference to FIG. 140, by operating the left lever 3720, the left-right position and speed of the player's tank can be changed. The effective operation period for the left lever 3720 continues until timing t34, when the decorative pattern stops changing.

At timing t7, a state is created in which a cannonball is flying from behind the player's tank. This state continues for four seconds until timing t11. During this period, a simulated image of the left lever 3720 is displayed to the left of the dialogue window for "Colonel Dyna." The simulated image is also labeled "forward tilt," which indicates the operating mode of the left lever 3720.
192(b) and 193(b) show display examples at timing t7.

Below, an example of the effect that occurs when the left lever 3720 is operated appropriately will be explained with reference to the time chart shown in Figure 191(a) and the display example shown in Figure 192. Below, an example of the effect that occurs when the left lever 3720 is not operated appropriately will be explained with reference to the time chart shown in Figure 191(b) and the display example shown in Figure 193.

From timing t7 to timing t11, the player must tilt the left lever 3720 forward by a predetermined angle for a predetermined period of time. Specifically, the left lever 3720 must be held between 10 and 45 degrees forward from the upright position of the left lever 3720 for two seconds. By performing this operation, the player's tank is displayed accelerating and moving in the display area. Figure 192(c) shows an example display when the player's tank has sufficiently accelerated at timing t9.

The time chart shown in Figure 191(a) shows a state in which the player is able to tilt the left lever 3720 at the appropriate angle from timing t8 to timing t10. At timing t11, the display of the operation instructions for the left lever 3720 ends. Figure 192(d) shows an example of the display from timing t11 to timing t15 when the left lever 3720 is operated appropriately.

On the other hand, if the left lever 3720 is not operated properly, for example, if the time to operate the left lever 3720 is insufficient or the angle at which it is operated is insufficient, a display will be displayed showing a shell fired from an enemy tank hitting the player's tank and exploding.

The time chart in Figure 191(b) shows an example of a performance in which the left lever 3720 is operated for only one second, from timing t8 to timing t9, during the valid operation period of the left lever 3720. In this case, the player's tank is not moving quickly enough. Therefore, from timing t11, which is the end of the operation instruction display, an image of smoke caused by an exploding shell begins to be displayed around the image of the player's tank.

The display state shown in Figure 193(c) shows an example of a display when the player's tank's speed is insufficient at timing t9. Figure 193(d) shows an example of a display in which a smoke image is displayed from timing t11 to timing t15 because the player's tank's speed was insufficient.

Note that Figures 192(c) and 192(d) show a state in which the text "30 km/h" is displayed as the player's tank's speed. Figures 193(c) and 193(d) show a state in which the text "20 km/h" is displayed as the player's tank's speed. In this way, if an appropriate operation is performed with the left lever 3720 while the operation instructions are displayed, the display in the speed display window will be 30 km/h or higher. If an appropriate operation is not performed while the operation instructions are displayed, or if an appropriate operation is not performed while the operation instructions are displayed, the display in the speed display window will be less than 30 km/h. Specifically, the time after the left lever 3720 reaches the appropriate angle is measured, and the player's tank's speed display is increased by 1 km/h every 0.1 seconds. With this configuration, by looking at the display in the speed display window, the player can determine whether the left lever 3720 is being operated appropriately and whether the left lever 3720 has been operated appropriately.

From timing t15 to timing t24, a display is produced in which the player's tank moves forward. Even if a smoke image is displayed due to the explosion of a shell from an enemy unit, the display of the smoke image ends at timing t15. Figures 192(e) and 193(e) show examples of a display in which the player's tank moves forward from timing t15 to timing t24. Note that the speed in the speed display window that has been changed in response to operation of the left lever 3720 should be set to "10 km/h" at a predetermined timing between the timing when the display of the smoke image ends (timing t15) and the timing when the operation instruction for the left lever 3720 is again displayed (timing t24).

In this embodiment, the speed of the player's tank can be changed in response to operation of the left lever 3720 during the period from timing t5 to timing t34. Therefore, by operating the left lever 3720 during the period when no operation instructions are displayed, the player can practice changing the speed of the player's tank. In this case, it is recommended that the speed display window display be set to "10 km/h" when the speed instruction display begins.

At timing t24, images of multiple enemy tanks are displayed in the upper part of the display area. The images of multiple enemy tanks move to the left in the upper part of the display area and are displayed until timing t32. At the same time, a simulated image of the left lever 3720 is displayed, and operation instructions for the left lever 3720 begin to be displayed. Operation instructions for the left lever 3720 are displayed until timing t32.

From timing t24 to timing t32, the player must tilt the left lever 3720 forward by a predetermined angle for a predetermined period of time. Specifically, the player must maintain the left lever 3720 at a forward angle of between 30 and 45 degrees from the upright position of the left lever 3720 for four seconds. By performing this operation, the display area will show the player's tank accelerating and moving at a maximum speed of 50 km/h.

The time chart shown in Figure 191(a) shows a state in which the player is able to tilt the left lever 3720 at the appropriate angle from timing t25 to timing t29. At timing t32, the display of the operation instructions for the left lever 3720 ends. Figure 192(g) shows an example of the display from timing t32 to timing t34 when the left lever 3720 is operated appropriately.

Next, from timing t34 to timing t35, the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state. Figure 192(h) is a display example showing the display state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state.

On the other hand, if the left lever 3720 is not operated properly, for example, if the left lever 3720 is not operated for enough time, the angle is not sufficient, or the direction is incorrect, a display will appear showing the player's tank colliding with an enemy tank and causing the player's tank to explode.

The time chart in Figure 191(b) shows a state in which the left lever 3720 is only tilted appropriately for two seconds, from timing t25 to timing t27, during the valid operation period of the left lever 3720. In this case, the speed of the player's tank is insufficient. Therefore, from timing t32, which is the end timing of the operation instruction display, an image of smoke generated by a collision with an enemy tank begins to be displayed around the image of the player's tank.

Figure 193(g) shows an example display from timing t32 to timing t34 when the player's tank is not accelerating sufficiently. Also, Figure 193(h) shows an example display in which a smoke image is displayed from timing t34 to timing t35, when the decorative pattern is displayed in a static state.

Note that while the display examples shown in Figures 192 and 193 show a display example when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, a similar display is also made when the result of the special lottery is a loss. In this case, it is advisable to stop the decorative pattern to show the numbers "343" to indicate that the result of the special lottery is a loss.

As such, according to the "Full Power Breakthrough Reach" of this embodiment, if the player fails to operate the left lever 3720 in the appropriate operating manner, the visibility of the stopped display mode of the large displayed decorative symbols is obstructed by the smoke image. This makes it difficult for the player to confirm the stopped display mode of the large displayed decorative symbols, and the player will be conscious of operating the lever appropriately from the next time onwards. On the other hand, if the player operates the left lever 3720 in the appropriate operating manner, the player will be able to see the stopped display mode of the large displayed decorative symbols without any obstruction to visibility, and will feel a sense of satisfaction for having completed a tense operation.

In this embodiment, operation instructions for the left lever 3720 are displayed twice: from timing t7 to timing t11 and from timing t24 to timing t32, and display effects are displayed according to the operation mode during both periods.
At this time, the operation of the left lever 3720 takes longer and has a narrower operating angle range at later timings than at the first timing, providing the player with a more tense operation.

Fig. 191(c) shows an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 191(a) and Fig. 191(b). In this embodiment, the display time of the smoke image when it is displayed due to a shell fired by an enemy tank is extended so that the smoke image is displayed until the enemy tanks are displayed.
Specifically, the smoke image is displayed until timing t27. In this configuration, the display period of the smoke image (timing t11 to timing t27) overlaps with a part of the display period (timing t24 to timing t31) during which the second operation instruction is displayed.
At this time, it is preferable that the smoke image hides part or all of the simulated image imitating the left lever 3720. Similarly, it is preferable that the lines of "Colonel Dinah" instructing the operation of the left lever 3720 and the speed display window are hidden part or all of the same.
With this configuration, if an appropriate operation is not performed during the display period (timing t7 to timing t11) when the first operation instruction is displayed, it becomes difficult to recognize the operation mode during the display period (timing t24 to timing t31) when the second operation instruction is displayed, thereby increasing the sense of tension when operating the left lever 3720.

The length of time for which the smoke image is displayed when the left lever 3720 is not operated appropriately may also be determined by lottery. For example, the display time may be determined by lottery from a minimum of 4 seconds to a maximum of 24 seconds. In this case, the smoke image will be displayed for a minimum of 4 seconds, from timing t11 to timing t15, and a maximum of 24 seconds, from timing t11 to timing t35. In particular, when the longest display period is selected, the decorative pattern displayed frozen in the center of the display area will be difficult or impossible to see due to the smoke image, regardless of how the left lever 3720 is operated the second time.

The technical concept of the "Sudden Tank Effect" shown in Figures 174 to 190 may also be applied to the display mode of the smoke image in the "Full Power Breakthrough Reach." For example, the display time of the smoke image in the "Full Power Breakthrough Reach" may be configured to differ depending on whether a jackpot state or a time-saving state occurs.

An example has been given in which a smoke image is displayed if the player fails to perform the appropriate operation while the operation instructions are displayed, but rather than always displaying these images, the system may be configured to display these images with a predetermined probability (for example, a 1/2 probability) if the player fails to perform the appropriate operation.
In addition, if the special lottery result is a miss, the smoke image may be configured to be displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 3/4), and if the special lottery result is a jackpot, the smoke image may not be displayed.
In addition, the color and shape of the smoke image may be provided in a plurality of patterns, and the display pattern of the displayed smoke image may indicate the likelihood of winning the special lottery result.

Another embodiment, which is a modification of the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 191 etc., will be described with reference to Figures 194 and 195. Figure 194 is a time chart for this embodiment. Also, Figure 195 shows an example display for this embodiment.

In this embodiment, instead of displaying a group of tanks, a minefield is displayed on the road along which the player's tank is traveling from timing t24 to timing t29. Figure 195(a) shows an example of the display at timing t29, when the minefield display begins. From timing t24 to timing t29, the player's tank is displayed approaching the minefield.

At timing t26, acceptance of the mission button 3700 operation becomes valid. The valid operation period for the mission button 3700 continues until the mission button 3700 is operated. If the mission button 3700 is not operated, it continues until timing t29. Furthermore, during the valid operation period for the mission button 3700, a mock image of the mission button 3700 is displayed in the upper left corner of the dialogue window for "Colonel Dina." Figure 195 (b) shows an example of the display at timing t26, when the valid operation period for the mission button 3700 occurs.

As shown in Figure 194(c), if the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period (timing t28), a display of the player's tank jumping over an advancing minefield is displayed for three seconds. Figure 195(c) shows an example of the display at the timing (e.g., timing t31) when the player operates the mission button 3700 during the valid operation period and the display of the player's tank jumping ends. This display continues until timing t34.

Next, from timing t34 to timing t35, the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state. Figure 195(d) is a display example showing the display state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state.

Figure 194(d) shows an example of the effect when the mission button 3700 is not operated during the valid operation period. In this case, from timing t29, when the valid operation period ends, to timing t35, a smoke image with a higher display priority than the player's tank is displayed, and an effect is displayed in which the player's tank enters a minefield and is enveloped in smoke. Figure 195(e) shows an example of the display from timing t29 to timing t34.

Next, from timing t34 to timing t35, the decorative symbols are displayed in a frozen state. Figure 195(f) is a display example showing the display state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a frozen state. At this time, the decorative symbols displayed in the center of the display area are hidden by the smoke image.

In this way, if the mission button 3700 is operated appropriately, the visibility of the decorative symbols that are displayed in a stopped state will not be impaired, but if the mission button 3700 is not operated appropriately, the smoke image will impair the visibility of the decorative symbols that are displayed in a stopped state. This will cause the player to feel even more tense when operating the mission button 3700.

The modified example shown in FIG. 191(c) may also be applied to the embodiment shown in FIG. 195. In this case, the simulated image of the mission button 3700, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" instructing the player to operate the mission button 3700, and the display of the player's tank jumping are made difficult to see or impossible to see due to smoke images generated by shells from enemy tanks. This increases the sense of tension surrounding the operation of the left lever 3720.

As such, with the "Full Power Breakthrough Reach" of this embodiment, depending on whether the left lever 3720 can be operated within the specified operating range, the visibility of the stopped display mode of the decorative pattern indicating the result of the special lottery (or the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700, the operation instruction display for the mission button 3700, or the performance display corresponding to the operation of the mission button 3700) may or may not be obstructed by the smoke image. This causes the player to operate the left lever 3720 with a sense of tension, motivating them to operate the left lever 3720 more actively and increasing their interest in the game.

In the example shown, a smoke image is displayed with a predetermined probability (1/2 probability) when the left lever 3720 is operated inappropriately, but the probability of displaying a smoke image when the left lever 3720 is operated inappropriately may be varied depending on the operation content. For example, if the tilt direction of the left lever 3720 is appropriate but the operation time is shorter than a predetermined time, the shorter the operation time, the more likely the smoke image is to be displayed. Furthermore, if no operation is performed or if an operation is performed in the opposite direction to the instructed operation, the smoke image may be displayed with a probability of 90% or 100%.

The visibility of the operation instruction image, decorative pattern, etc. may be made completely invisible by the smoke image, or may be made partially invisible but partially visible. Alternatively, a translucent image may be used as the smoke image, and the operation instruction image, decorative pattern, etc. may be configured to be vaguely visible through the translucent smoke image. This configuration ensures a certain degree of visibility of the operation instruction image and decorative pattern.

A display effect (such as displaying a specific character image) with a 100% probability of appearance can be configured to be executable, and the timing at which this display effect is executed can be set to coincide with the timing at which a smoke image is displayed. Alternatively, the display effect can be configured to be partially or completely invisible or difficult to see due to the smoke image. In this case, there may be cases where the display effect is obscured by the smoke image, which is a very frustrating gaming situation for the player. This configuration can maintain a greater sense of tension for the player when operating the operating means.

Although the smoke image obstructs the visibility of the decorative symbol's reach status, the display time of the smoke image may be set so that it ends before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, the display of the smoke image may be configured to end at timing t34, and not be displayed during the period from timing t34 to timing t35. With this configuration, the visibility of the stopped decorative symbol is not obstructed by the smoke image, which prevents a player from mistaking the result of the special lottery for a loss when the stopped decorative symbol actually indicates a jackpot, or for a jackpot when the stopped decorative symbol actually indicates a loss.

Alternatively, even when a smoke image is displayed, the visibility of the decorative symbols displayed in a stopped state may or may not be obstructed. For example, a lottery with a 1/2 probability may be performed, and the decorative symbols displayed in a stopped state may or may not be hidden by the smoke image. Alternatively, the decorative symbols displayed in a stopped state may remain hidden by the smoke image if the left lever 3720 is tilted for less than half the required operation time, and the decorative symbols displayed in a stopped state may not be hidden by the smoke image (for example, the display of the smoke image ends at timing t34) if the left lever 3720 is tilted for more than half the required operation time. This configuration allows the player to operate the left lever 3720 with greater tension.

The display of the decorative pattern may be configured to be invisible or difficult to see over multiple display cycles using a smoke image.
For example, the display time of the smoke image may be set to 120 seconds instead of 4 seconds, and the smoke image may be displayed across the varying display of multiple decorative symbols. Alternatively, the lottery method described above for determining the display time of the smoke image may be modified so that the display time of the smoke image is determined by lottery from a minimum of 4 seconds to a maximum of 120 seconds. Furthermore, it is preferable to configure the display of such a smoke image with a high probability (99/100 probability) when the operation instruction display of the left lever 3720 is ignored twice (from timing t7 to timing t11, and from timing t24 to timing t32) and the left lever 3720 is not tilted.
In this case, during the period when the decorative pattern is displayed in a varying manner (timing t32 to timing t34) and the period when the decorative pattern is displayed in a stationary manner (timing t34 to timing t35), the decorative pattern etc. will be hidden by the smoke image, hindering visibility, and furthermore, the display of the decorative pattern in a varying manner and the display of the decorative pattern in a stationary manner that begin after timing t35 may each be hindered visibility by the smoke image multiple times.
In this case, it is advisable to configure the "Full Power Breakthrough Reach" to continue after timing t35 in order to ensure consistency in the presentation. In this case, the player will be required to operate the left lever 3720 again.
Furthermore, in this case where the display of the smoke image crosses over the display of the changing decorative pattern, the operation of the left lever 3720 is not invalidated even while the decorative pattern stops changing or immediately after the display of the changing decorative pattern starts (between timing t0 and timing t5), and the valid operation period may be configured to continue over multiple changing displays 7, so that a performance display (such as a change in the speed display in the speed display window) based on the operation reception of the left lever 3720 can be performed at any time.

In the figure, the speed of the player's tank is displayed in the display area, but it may also be configured to display the direction or angle to which the left lever 3720 is tilted. Alternatively, when an instruction to operate the left lever 3720 is being given, it may be configured to display the elapsed time since the left lever 3720 was tilted at the required angle. By using such a configuration, the player can recognize whether the left lever 3720 is being operated within the appropriate range and how many seconds the left lever 3720 has been operated within the appropriate range.

Examples have been shown in which simulated images of the left lever 3720 are displayed and operational instructions are displayed through lines from "Colonel Dyna." However, instead of or in addition to this presentation pattern, an operational pattern requiring tilting of the left lever 3720 may be implemented, without providing clear operational instructions through such image displays. For example, an enemy tank approaching from behind may be indicated by displaying a shell being fired from the rear, allowing the player to spontaneously tilt the left lever 3720 without requiring an operational instruction display. By configuring the game so that more difficult game situations can occur in this way, the sense of tension surrounding the operation of the left lever 3720 can be further increased.

There are cases where the player is unable to properly recognize whether the left lever 3720 is being properly maintained within the specified operating range. Therefore, the operating mode of the left lever 3720 may be notified by the vibration mode of the left lever vibration source 3722 built into the left lever 3720. For example, when the operating range of the left lever 3720 is moved into the appropriate operating range by operation by the player, the vibration source may be vibrated for 0.5 seconds. Alternatively, the vibration of the left lever vibration source 3722 may be initiated when the operating range of the left lever 3720 moves into the appropriate operating range, the vibration of the left lever vibration source 3722 may be continued while the operating range of the left lever 3720 is within the appropriate operating range, and the vibration of the vibration source may be stopped when the operating range of the left lever 3720 falls outside the appropriate range.

In addition, while the operation mode of the left lever 3720 (whether the operation is being performed appropriately) is indicated by the content displayed in the speed display window, it may be configured so that the operation mode is displayed in some cases and the operation mode is not displayed in others. For example, it may be configured so that the speed of the player's tank in the speed display window is hidden by a smoke image. In this case, since the operation mode is not displayed, the player will operate the left lever 3720 with a greater sense of tension.

An example of tilting the left lever 3720 forward has been shown, but to further increase the difficulty of operation, the range of operation of the lever can be limited to approximately 30 degrees forward (for example, a range of 25 to 35 degrees). If the lever is tilted completely forward 45 degrees, there is a predetermined probability (1/2 probability) that smoke will come out of the player's tank's engine, and a smoke image as shown in Figure 193(d) or 193(g) will be displayed, with this smoke image obscuring the image of the player's tank and the operation instruction display. In this case, a more difficult operation is required of the player, which can further increase the sense of tension. Note that if such an embodiment is adopted, it will be possible to practice tilting the left lever 3720 to the appropriate range at any time during the period in which the left lever 3720 can be operated.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 194 and 195, if the left lever 3720 is not operated properly, a smoke image is displayed, hindering the visibility of the operation instructions for the mission button 3700. Furthermore, even if the mission button 3700 can be operated, the smoke image hinders the visibility of the display effect corresponding to the operation of the mission button 3700 (a display mode in which the player's tank jumps). This configuration increases the sense of tension surrounding the operation of the left lever 3720.

Furthermore, an operation-responsive image indicating the likelihood of the special lottery winning may be displayed depending on the type of display mode of the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700, the display mode or type of the dialogue of "Colonel Dyna" instructing the operation mode of the mission button 3700, and the type of display mode of the player's tank jumping when the mission button 3700 is operated. With this configuration, depending on whether the left lever 3720 can be operated within the appropriate operation range, the visibility of the display indicating the likelihood may or may not be obstructed by the smoke image. Therefore, a player who wants to know the likelihood will naturally operate the left lever 3720 with a sense of tension, which increases the player's interest.
144 to 148 may be applied to the display modes of the images of artillery shells fired from enemy forces, the simulated images of the left lever 3720, the simulated images of the mission button 3700, the images of enemy tanks, and the images of minefields in the "Full Power Breakthrough Reach." For example, the display modes of these images in the "Full Power Breakthrough Reach" may be configured to indicate the expectation of the occurrence of a jackpot state or a time-saving state. Furthermore, the technical concept related to the shield image in the "Shield Bullet Reach" may be applied to the smoke image in the "Full Power Breakthrough Reach."

Although the request to operate the mission button 3700 is made after the operation instruction for the left lever 3720 has been completed, it is also possible to configure the request to operate the mission button 3700 while the request to operate the left lever 3720 is still in progress. This configuration increases the difficulty of operating the left lever 3720 and the mission button 3700, further increasing the player's sense of tension. When both operation instruction displays are displayed simultaneously, it is recommended that the operation instruction displays be displayed in a manner that does not overlap. For example, it is recommended that the simulated image of the left lever 3720 and the simulated image of the mission button 3700 in the display mode shown in FIG. 192(b) be displayed in a manner that does not overlap. If there is insufficient space available for display in the display area, it is recommended that the simulated image of the left lever 3720 and the simulated image of the mission button 3700 be displayed overlapping each other, with one in the foreground and the other in the background, so that part of the simulated image displayed in the background can be seen.

However, if the difficulty level is too high, there is a risk that players who are not good at complex operations will be put off playing. Therefore, an auto-reception mode may be adopted in which the same effect display as when the player performs an appropriate operation is executed even when there is no operation by the player, so that the same effect display as when the player performs an appropriate operation is executed even when the left lever 3720 or the mission button 3700 is not operated. In this case, the player only needs to concentrate on operating the operation unit that is not in the auto-reception mode.
It is preferable to configure the system so that only the operation of the left lever 3720 can be set to the auto-acceptance mode, or only the operation of the mission button 3700 can be set to the auto-acceptance mode, or both the operation of the left lever 3720 and the mission button 3700 can be set to the auto-acceptance mode.
In particular, when only the operation of the mission button 3700 is set to the auto-acceptance mode, the player only needs to concentrate on skillfully operating the left lever 3720, which prevents situations in which players who are not accustomed to the "full-power breakthrough reach" become confused. Also, when both the left lever 3720 and the mission button 3700 are set to the auto-acceptance mode, the player only needs to concentrate on viewing the effects without operating the left lever 3720 or the mission button 3700.

In addition to the left lever 3720, the right lever 3730 may also be configured to be operable. For example, when the right lever 3730 is operated, it may be required that it be tilted within a predetermined tilting range for a predetermined period of time, just like the left lever 3720, in order to execute a visual effect. For example, it may be possible to display a visual effect in which dust comes out of the caterpillar tracks to represent the tank accelerating. In this case, it is preferable to configure the display so that an image (such as a simulated image) instructing the player to operate the right lever 3730 is not displayed.
In this way, the right lever 3730 may be set to a performance mode that makes the performance display based on the operation of the left lever 3720 look more luxurious. Therefore, no operation instruction display is performed, and the image displayed based on the operation of the right lever 3730 does not suggest the degree of expectation.
The valid operation period of the right lever 3730 may be set to coincide with the valid operation period of the left lever 3720 .
This configuration allows players who are tired of operating the left lever to maintain a higher sense of tension.

Furthermore, it is advisable to place the left lever 3720, the right lever 3730, and the mission button 3700 in positions that make it difficult to operate them simultaneously with one hand, in positions where they cannot be operated (positions where they are impossible to operate), or in positions where they cannot be easily reached. In other words, since one operating part is operated with one hand, the sense of tension in the game can be further increased.
Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, there are cases where the three operating parts, the left lever 3720, the right lever 3730, and the mission button 3700, can be operated simultaneously, and in such cases, a great sense of tension can be felt when operating each operating part.
In the operation unit shown in FIG. 137 , the mission button 3700 and the left lever 3720 are separated by a distance due to the presence of the attack button 3710, making it extremely difficult or impossible to operate both operation units with one hand. On the other hand, the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 are close to each other. Therefore, the positions of the right lever 3730 and the defense button 3740 may be swapped. In this case, the defense button 3740 will be located between the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730, making it extremely difficult or impossible to operate both operation units with one hand.

In the embodiment shown, the left lever 3720 is used for a specific effect, but the right lever 3730 may be used instead of the left lever 3720. Both the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 may be configured to accept operation, and when operation of either lever satisfies the above-mentioned conditions, the above-mentioned display effect or the like may be executed.

In this way, the "Full Power Breakthrough Reach" in this embodiment can increase the sense of tension when operating the control unit.

Conventionally, gaming machines have been known to produce effects by pressing a single operating unit. In this case, providing multiple operating units and using them for effects can increase gaming enjoyment (for example, JP 2011-087638 A). Furthermore, if operations on multiple operating units are enabled simultaneously, gaming enjoyment can be further increased. On the other hand, for players seeking simple gaming, the requirement for such complex operating modes can be tedious and stressful, and there is a risk that this could actually lead to a decrease in interest. Below, we will explain a gaming machine that satisfies players with different preferences and does not decrease interest in any case.

In the "AI Tank Reach" of this embodiment, the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 may become active at the same time at a predetermined timing during the display performance, but the player can set whether or not to display the simulated image of the attack button 3710 that indicates an operation instruction for the attack button 3710, and the simulated image of the mission button 3700 that indicates an operation instruction for the mission button 3700.
The player can select and set one of four settings (presentation situations) in advance: a first setting (first presentation situation) that displays both a simulated image that imitates the attack button 3710 and a simulated image that imitates the mission button 3700; a second setting (second presentation situation) that displays only a simulated image that imitates the attack button 3710; a third setting (third presentation situation) that displays only a simulated image that imitates the mission button 3700; and a fourth setting (fourth presentation situation) that displays neither a simulated image that imitates the attack button 3710 nor a simulated image that imitates the mission button 3700.
The player can make a selection during the demo when the decorative symbols are not changing, using the left lever 3720, the attack button 3710, etc. Also, when the power is turned on without the player making a selection, the first setting is selected by default.

When the valid operation period for the attack button 3710 and mission button 3700 occurs while the decorative symbols are changing, a simulated image of the attack button 3710 and a simulated image of the mission button 3700 are displayed in a manner corresponding to the setting selected by the player. For example, if the player selects the third setting, the simulated image of the attack button 3710 is not displayed, and only the simulated image of the mission button 3700 is displayed.

Below, with reference to Figures 196 to 201, etc., we will explain examples of the display of "AI Tank Reach" depending on whether the attack button 3710 or mission button 3700 is operated when the first to fourth settings are made.

Figure 196 (a) is a time chart showing an embodiment in which the first setting (first performance situation) is made and a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 are displayed.
Figure 198 corresponds to the time chart shown in Figure 196(a), and shows a display state in which the first setting is made and a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 are displayed.

In the time chart shown in Figure 196(a), an "AI tank reach" occurs at timing t5. In the "AI tank reach", a display effect is produced in which the player's tank moves along a mountain path. Figure 198(a) is an example of the display at timing t5.
At timing t8, an image of an enemy tank is displayed at the top of the display area. Also, lines from "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might" are displayed instructing the player to operate the attack button 3710 and mission button 3700. Also, the valid operation periods for the attack button 3710 and mission button 3700 begin. Also, during the valid operation periods for the attack button 3710 and mission button 3700 (timing t8 to timing t11), simulated images of the attack button 3710 and mission button 3700 are displayed. FIG. 198(b) shows an example of the display at timing t8.
The valid operation period for the attack button 3710 and the valid operation period for the mission button 3700 each lasts for 3 seconds until timing t11. On the other hand, if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period, the valid operation period for the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 ends. Furthermore, when the valid operation period ends, the display of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 also ends.
If the attack button 3710 is operated during the operation valid period, a display is produced in which a shell is fired from the player's tank's turret, the fired shell moves toward the enemy tank, and the shell explodes upon hitting the enemy tank. Fig. 198(c) shows an example display of a shell moving toward the enemy tank. Fig. 198(d) shows an example display in which an image of the shell hitting the enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The display of the shell's movement and the subsequent image of the shell exploding are displayed for three seconds after the attack button 3710 is operated.
If the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period, a display is produced in which a bullet is fired from the machine gun of the player's tank, the fired bullet moves toward the enemy tank, and the bullet explodes upon hitting the enemy tank. FIG. 198( e) shows an example display of a bullet moving toward the enemy tank. FIG. 198( f) shows an example display in which an image of the bullet hitting the enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The display of the bullet movement and the subsequent image of the bullet exploding are displayed for three seconds after the mission button 3700 is operated.
If no operation is performed on the attack button 3710 or mission button 3700 during the valid operation period, the display will not show any moving or exploding shells or bullets, and the enemy tank will move backward and disappear from the display area.
Furthermore, even after timing t23, the same display effects as those executed after timing t8 are performed.

Figure 196 (b) is a time chart showing an embodiment in which the second setting (second presentation situation) is made, and a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed, but a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is not displayed.
Figure 199 corresponds to the time chart shown in Figure 196 (b), and shows a display state in which the second setting is made and a simulated image of the attack button 3710 is displayed but a simulated image of the mission button 3700 is not displayed.

In the time chart shown in Figure 196(b), an "AI tank reach" occurs at timing t5. In the "AI tank reach", a display effect is produced in which the player's tank moves along a mountain path. Figure 199(a) is an example of the display at timing t5.
At timing t8, an image of an enemy tank is displayed at the top of the display area. Also, a line from "Sergeant Might" is displayed instructing the player to operate the attack button 3710. Also, the valid operation period for the attack button 3710 and the valid operation period for the mission button 3700 begin. Also, during the valid operation periods for the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 (timing t8 to timing t11), a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed, but a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is not displayed. FIG. 199(b) shows an example of the display at timing t8.
The valid operation period for the attack button 3710 and the valid operation period for the mission button 3700 each lasts for 3 seconds until timing t11. On the other hand, if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period, the valid operation period for the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 ends. Furthermore, when the valid operation period ends, the display of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 also ends.
If the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid operation period, a display is produced in which a shell is fired from the player's tank's turret, the fired shell moves toward the enemy tank, and the shell explodes upon hitting the enemy tank. FIG. 199( c) shows an example display of a shell moving toward the enemy tank. FIG. 199( d) shows an example display in which an image of the shell hitting the enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The display of the shell's movement and the subsequent image of the shell exploding are displayed for three seconds after the attack button 3710 is operated.
If the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period, a display is produced in which a bullet is fired from the machine gun of the player's tank, the fired bullet moves toward the enemy tank, and the bullet explodes upon hitting the enemy tank. FIG. 199( e) shows an example display of a bullet moving toward the enemy tank. FIG. 199( f) shows an example display in which an image of the bullet hitting the enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The display of the bullet movement and the subsequent image of the bullet exploding are displayed for three seconds after the mission button 3700 is operated.
If no operation is performed on the attack button 3710 or mission button 3700 during the valid operation period, the display will not show any moving or exploding shells or bullets, and the enemy tank will move backward and disappear from the display area.
Furthermore, even after timing t23, the same display effects as those executed after timing t8 are performed.

Figure 197 (a) is a time chart showing an embodiment in which the third setting (third presentation situation) is made, and a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is not displayed, but a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is displayed.
Figure 200 corresponds to the time chart shown in Figure 197(a), and shows a display state in which the third setting is made and a simulated image of the attack button 3710 is not displayed, but a simulated image of the mission button 3700 is displayed.

In the time chart shown in Figure 197(a), an "AI tank reach" occurs at timing t5. In the "AI tank reach", a display effect is produced in which the player's tank moves along a mountain path. Figure 200(a) is an example of the display at timing t5.
At timing t8, an image of an enemy tank is displayed at the top of the display area. Also, a line from "Colonel Dyna" is displayed instructing the player to operate the mission button 3700. Also, the valid operation periods for the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 begin. Also, during the valid operation periods for the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 (timing t8 to timing t11), the simulated image of the attack button 3710 is not displayed, but the simulated image of the mission button 3700 is displayed. FIG. 200(b) shows an example of the display at timing t8.
The valid operation period for the attack button 3710 and the valid operation period for the mission button 3700 each lasts for 3 seconds until timing t11. On the other hand, if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period, the valid operation period for the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 ends. Furthermore, when the valid operation period ends, the display of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 also ends.
If the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid operation period, a display is produced in which a shell is fired from the player's tank's turret, the fired shell moves toward the enemy tank, and the shell explodes upon hitting the enemy tank. FIG. 200(c) shows an example display of a shell moving toward the enemy tank. FIG. 200(d) shows an example display in which an image of the shell hitting the enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The display of the shell's movement and the subsequent image of the shell exploding are displayed for three seconds after the attack button 3710 is operated.
If the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period, a display is produced in which a bullet is fired from the machine gun of the player's tank, the fired bullet moves toward the enemy tank, and the bullet explodes upon hitting the enemy tank. FIG. 200(e) shows an example display of a bullet moving toward the enemy tank. FIG. 200(f) shows an example display in which an image of the bullet hitting the enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The display of the bullet movement and the subsequent image of the bullet exploding are displayed for three seconds after the mission button 3700 is operated.
If no operation is performed on the attack button 3710 or mission button 3700 during the valid operation period, the display will not show any moving or exploding shells or bullets, and the enemy tank will move backward and disappear from the display area.
Furthermore, even after timing t23, the same display effects as those executed after timing t8 are performed.

Figure 197 (b) is a time chart showing an embodiment in which the fourth setting (fourth performance situation) is made and neither the simulated image of the attack button 3710 nor the simulated image of the mission button 3700 is displayed.
Figure 201 corresponds to the time chart shown in Figure 197 (b), and shows a display state in which the fourth setting is made and neither the simulated image of the attack button 3710 nor the simulated image of the mission button 3700 is displayed.

In the time chart shown in Figure 197(b), an "AI tank reach" occurs at timing t5. In the "AI tank reach", a display effect is produced in which the player's tank moves along a mountain path. Figure 201(a) is an example of the display at timing t5.
At timing t8, an image of an enemy tank is displayed at the top of the display area. Also, the valid operation periods for the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 begin. Also, during the valid operation periods for the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 (timing t8 to timing t11), the simulated image of the attack button 3710 and the simulated image of the mission button 3700 are not displayed. FIG. 201(b) shows an example of the display at timing t8.
The valid operation period for the attack button 3710 and the valid operation period for the mission button 3700 each lasts for 3 seconds until timing t11. On the other hand, if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period, the valid operation period for the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 ends. Furthermore, when the valid operation period ends, the display of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 also ends.
If the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid operation period, a display is produced in which a shell is fired from the player's tank's turret, the fired shell moves toward the enemy tank, and the shell explodes upon hitting the enemy tank. FIG. 201( c) shows an example display of a shell moving toward the enemy tank. FIG. 201( d) shows an example display in which an image of the shell hitting the enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The display of the shell's movement and the subsequent image of the shell exploding are displayed for three seconds after the attack button 3710 is operated.
If the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid operation period, a display is produced in which a bullet is fired from the machine gun of the player's tank, the fired bullet moves toward the enemy tank, and the bullet explodes upon hitting the enemy tank. FIG. 201( e) shows an example display of a bullet moving toward the enemy tank. FIG. 201( f) shows an example display in which an image of the bullet exploding upon hitting the enemy tank is displayed. The display of the bullet movement and the subsequent image of the bullet exploding are displayed for three seconds after the mission button 3700 is operated.
If no operation is performed on the attack button 3710 or mission button 3700 during the valid operation period, the display will not show any moving or exploding shells or bullets, and the enemy tank will move backward and disappear from the display area.
Furthermore, even after timing t23, the same display effects as those executed after timing t8 are performed.

The valid operation period for the attack button 3710 and the valid operation period for the mission button 3700 are the same. At this time, a simulated image that resembles the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is displayed in accordance with the settings selected by the player. In addition, in response to the display of these simulated images, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might" also change to indicate the type of operation instruction. When operation of either the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is accepted, the valid operation period ends. Therefore, when operation of either the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is accepted, no effect display corresponding to operation of the other operation unit is performed.

It is preferable to configure the display so that the likelihood of a big win is suggested by display modes such as an image of an enemy tank, a simulated image of the attack button 3710, an image of an exploding artillery shell, etc. In this case, it is preferable to apply various suggestion modes of the likelihood in the "shield bullet reach" shown with reference to Figures 144 to 148 to the display effects in this embodiment.
The display mode of the simulated image of the mission button 3700 and the image of an exploding bullet may be the same as the display mode of the simulated image of the attack button 3710 and the image of an exploding shell.

In this way, with the "AI Tank Reach" in this embodiment, a presentation situation in which a simulated image simulating the operation unit is displayed and a presentation situation in which a simulated image simulating the operation unit is not displayed are realized based on the player's wishes, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Although an example has been shown in which players can select from settings 1 to 4, an operating unit (dip switch, button, etc.) for selecting settings can be provided on the rear of the door frame 3, allowing the settings to be changed by amusement parlor staff with the door frame 3 open. This configuration allows the settings to be changed appropriately depending on the patronage of the parlor, its location, the number of days since installation, etc., to provide players with the optimal gaming environment. Note that the settings made by the parlor may only be valid when the gaming machine is turned on, and the settings may be changed by players thereafter.

The game may be configured such that, by operating a predetermined operation unit (e.g., the defense button 3740) operable by the player, the game alternates between a first setting, which does not restrict the display of simulated images imitating the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700, and one of the second through fourth settings, which restrict the display of simulated images imitating the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700. For example, if the player has selected the second setting, operating the defense button 3740 once may switch to the first setting, and operating the defense button 3740 once more may switch back to the second setting. Note that if the player has selected the first setting, the first setting remains selected even if the defense button 3740 is operated. For example, the game may be configured such that the setting is switched when the defense button 3740 is operated at a predetermined timing (e.g., timing t14) during the variable display of decorative symbols. On the other hand, the configuration may be such that the settings cannot be switched during the valid operation period (the period during which the simulated image of the attack button 3710 or the simulated image of the mission button 3700 is displayed).
With this configuration, it is possible to quickly switch to a setting in which simulated images of both the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 are displayed.

However, if the player can easily change settings with a simple operation, it is possible that the player may feel dissatisfied if the settings are changed simply by pressing a button by mistake. Therefore, a configuration may be adopted that prevents settings from being changed easily. For example, it may be configured so that settings are changed when certain operational conditions are met, such as holding down the defense button 3740 for three seconds.

If a non-play state continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 minutes), and the setting is set to one of the second, third, or fourth settings, the setting may be automatically changed to the default setting, the first setting. This configuration prevents players who have just started playing from feeling uncomfortable because the setting has changed.

In the example shown, both the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 can be operated simultaneously, and when either button is operated, the valid operation period for the other button ends. However, it is also possible to configure the system so that the valid operation period for either button does not end even when the other button is operated. For example, if the attack button 3710 is operated and then the mission button 3700 is operated, it is recommended that the display effects corresponding to the operation of the attack button 3710 (display of shell firing, movement, and explosion) be initiated, and then the display effects corresponding to the operation of the mission button 3700 (display of bullet firing, movement, and explosion) be initiated.

It may be configured so that there are cases where only the operation of the attack button 3710 is valid, and cases where only the operation of the mission button 3700 is valid. In this case, it is advisable to determine whether or not to display a simulated image of the button whose operation is valid based on the settings. Alternatively, it may be configured so that a simulated image of the operating means whose operation is valid is displayed regardless of the settings. When there is only one operating means whose operation is valid, it is expected that the player will have little difficulty operating the button, so it is beneficial to adopt this method.

Rather than simultaneously enabling the attack button 3710 and mission button 3700, for example, one operation unit may be enabled when the other operation unit is enabled. In this case, too, it is advisable to determine whether or not to display a simulated image that resembles the operation unit based on the settings.

After the mission button 3700 is enabled for operation, the attack button 3710 may also be enabled for operation. Here, when an image corresponding to the operation of the mission button 3700 (an image of a moving bullet) is displayed, if the attack button 3710 is enabled for operation, the simulated image of the attack button 3710 may not be displayed. This configuration can avoid excessive information and reduce the stress that the player may feel.

A sound effect indicating that the valid operation period has started or is currently in the valid operation period may be output before or simultaneously with the start of the valid operation period. For example, a predetermined sound effect may be output before the valid operation period starts (from timing t7 to timing t8, or from timing t22 to timing t23). Alternatively, a predetermined sound effect may be output when the valid operation period starts (from timing t8 to timing t9, or from timing t23 to timing t24).
On the other hand, if the setting is such that the simulated image of the operation unit is not displayed even when the valid operation period has occurred, it is preferable to configure the game so that the sound effect indicating the occurrence of the valid operation period for that operation unit is not output. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling confused. On the other hand, it is preferable to configure the game so that when an operation is performed, a predetermined sound corresponding to the acceptance of the operation is output. In this case, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of the presentation.

Depending on the selected setting, a presentation situation in which one simulated button image is displayed or a presentation situation in which two simulated button images are displayed may occur. In this case, when only one simulated image is displayed, the size of the simulated image may be displayed larger than when two simulated images are displayed.
By adopting such a configuration, the display area can be used effectively. Also, elderly players who do not select the display of multiple simulated images may not even notice that a simulated image has been displayed, but by displaying the simulated image in a large size like this, the player can notice that the operation has been validated, and this can more effectively prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, in a first presentation situation in which the third operation unit (defense button 3740) is used and both the first operation unit (attack button 3710) and the second operation unit (mission button 3700) are capable of accepting operations and both a simulated image of the first operation unit (display relating to the operation of the first operation unit) and a simulated image of the second operation unit (display relating to the operation of the second operation unit) are displayed, a special display may be made to appear based on the player operating the third operation unit, making it difficult to see both the displayed simulated image of the first operation unit and the simulated image of the second operation unit.
This special display can inform a player who operates the third operation unit in a situation where the first or second operation unit should normally be operated that the operation is incorrect. Note that, since a player who operates the third operation unit in a situation where the simulated images of the first operation unit and the second operation unit are clearly displayed is considered to be doing so intentionally, it is desirable that the condition for the appearance of the special display to be displayed to such an intentional player is not limited to the simple operation of the third operation unit, but that the special display be displayed when the third operation unit is operated and the operation time of the third operation unit is equal to or longer than a predetermined number of seconds, which satisfies a special condition.

In this way, the "AI Tank Reach" feature of this embodiment can prevent players from becoming confused by the effects related to the display mode of the simulated image.

Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that, before an operation on a control panel becomes valid, a special premonition is displayed to indicate that the operation will be valid, and then, during the valid operation period, a simulated image of the control panel is displayed to indicate that the control panel is valid, prompting the player to operate the control panel, and suggesting the likelihood of the special lottery result being a jackpot based on the operation on the control panel (for example, JP 2011-125549 A).

By performing such a special premonition effect, the player is informed that the operation on the operation unit may be effective.
However, for some players, such premonition effects can distract them, and their attention may be distracted from the display of the operation unit simulated image, which indicates that the operation of the operation unit has been validated, or from the operation of the operation unit itself, which could result in them not having enough time to deal with the display of the operation unit simulated image or to operate the operation unit.
For example, some experienced players prefer to concentrate on operating the control unit rather than visually recognizing and enjoying the premonition effects. This is because, while the player merely visually recognizes the premonition effects, the player concentrates on operating the control unit, hoping to hit the jackpot. However, there is a risk that this concentration will be disrupted by premonition effects that occur before the validity period has elapsed.
On the other hand, players with little gaming experience may not understand the meaning of various effects, including premonition effects, and may not notice that a simulated image of the control unit has been displayed, indicating that an operation on the control unit has been activated, and may not be able to operate the control unit, thereby missing an opportunity to intervene in the effects.

In this way, the premonition effects, which are relatively unimportant to the player, may prevent the player from concentrating on operating the control unit, which is relatively important to the player, or may prevent the player from noticing the display of the operation unit simulation image, which indicates that the operation of the operation unit has been validated.
In the embodiment shown below, the visibility of the premonition effects can be reduced at the player's own discretion, and an example is shown in which a simulated image of the operation unit is displayed to indicate that the operation of the operation unit has been validated, allowing the player to concentrate on operating the operation unit.

An embodiment that is a modification of the "shield bullet reach" shown with reference to Figure 144 etc. will be described below with reference to Figures 202, 203, 204 etc.
Fig. 203 is a diagram showing a time chart in this embodiment. Fig. 202 and Fig. 204 are diagrams showing display examples in the display area.

In this embodiment, it is possible to set the display mode of the premonition effect during the demo. If a predetermined time (e.g., three minutes) has passed without the decorative symbols shown in FIG. 139(a) being displayed in a variable manner, it is determined that no play is being performed, and control is exercised to transition to the display state shown in FIG. 202(a). FIG. 202(a) shows an example of the display during a demo. Furthermore, pressing the attack button 3710 from the display state shown in FIG. 139 or FIG. 202(a) changes the display state to that shown in FIG. 202(b). As shown in FIGS. 202(a) to 202(c), in this case the decorative symbols are displayed in a static state in the upper left of the display area, smaller than when they are displayed in a variable manner.

Figure 202(b) shows a display state in which the display mode of the premonition effects can be set. In this state, by operating the left lever 3720 left or right, one of the settings "normal display," "small display," or "no display" can be selected. The frame corresponding to the selected setting is displayed in a thicker color. In addition, the lines displayed in the "Sergeant Might" dialogue window show the player how to select the setting. When the gaming machine is turned on, "normal display" is automatically selected.

FIG. 202(c) shows the display state in which "normal display" is selected and "small display" is selected by tilting the left lever 3720 to the right. Operating the attack button 3710 again in this state returns to the display state shown in FIG. 202(a). At the same time, the setting selected by the player (in this case, the setting to display the premonition effects in a small size) is stored in the peripheral control board 1510. In this way, the player can select one of the display settings that differ in the visibility of the premonition effects.
Even if the player selects "Do not display," the same display and storage process of the selected setting contents are performed.

Next, with reference to Figures 203 and 204, the display mode when the premonition effect is executed will be explained. Figure 203(a) shows the change state of the decorative pattern and the operation acceptance state of the attack button 3710 (whether operation acceptance is enabled or disabled). Figures 203(b) and 203(c) show the display state of the cheering line image, attack button simulation image, enemy tank image, etc. when "normal display" is selected. Note that in this embodiment, the display of the cheering line image functions as the premonition effect. Figures 204(a) to 204(d) are examples of the display area when "normal display" is selected.

As shown in Figure 203, cheering line images are displayed for six seconds, from timing t13 to timing t19. Four cheering line images are displayed: "<Miss it~", "<Go for it~", "Miss it~", and "Go for it~". The two cheering line images, "<Miss it~" and "<Go for it~", appear from the left edge of the display area, move horizontally to the right within the display area, and move out of the display area at the right edge of the display area. On the other hand, the two cheering line images, "Miss it~" and "Go for it~", appear from the right edge of the display area, move horizontally to the left within the display area, and move out of the display area at the left edge of the display area. Also, from timing t13, an image of an enemy tank is displayed moving from the right edge to the left edge of the display area.

Figure 204(a) shows an example display at timing t14, when the display of the cheering line image has just begun. Figure 204(b) shows an example display at timing t16, when the display of the cheering line image is halfway through. Figure 204(c) shows an example display at timing t18, when the display of the cheering line image is nearing the end. As shown in the display examples, the cheering line image moves horizontally to the right or left.

At the same time that the display of the cheering line image ends at timing t19, a simulated image of the operation section simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed in the center of the display area. Figure 204(d) shows a state in which a simulated image of the operation section simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed in the center of the display area (for example, the display state at timing t20). After the display of the cheering line image ends, similar to the embodiment shown for the "shield bullet reach," a simulated image of the operation section simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed, the valid operation period begins, and destruction images are displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710 and the end of the valid operation period, suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot. Figure 203(b) shows the display state when the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t21. Figure 203(c) shows the display state when the valid operation period ends at timing t22.

Next, a display example when "Small display" is selected will be described. Fig. 203(d) is a time chart when "Small display" is selected. Fig. 204(e) to Fig. 204(g) are display examples when "Small display" is selected.
Note that Fig. 204(e) shows the display state at timing t14, Fig. 204(f) shows the display state at timing t16, and Fig. 204(g) shows the display state at timing t18.
As shown in Figures 204(e) to 204(g), when "Small display" is selected, the cheering line image is displayed smaller than when "Normal display" is selected, making it difficult to see.

Next, a display example when "Do not display" is selected will be described. Figure 203(e) is a time chart when "Do not display" is selected. When "Do not display" is selected, only the image of the enemy tank is displayed in the display area, and the cheering line image is not displayed during the period from timing t13 to timing t19.
When "Do not display" is selected in this way, the cheering message image is not displayed as when "Normal display" or "Small display" is selected.

In this way, by allowing the player during the demo to set three states - a state in which the special sign display (cheerleading image) is displayed, a state in which it is displayed small, or a state in which it is not displayed - it is possible to execute a presentation style that suits the player's preferences. For example, a player who does not want to see the special sign display can make the special sign display difficult to see or invisible, allowing them to focus their attention on the display of the operation unit mock image that imitates the first operation unit (attack button 3710) and on operating the operation unit.

In the above embodiment, however, the visual appearance of the premonition effects could only be changed during the demo. Therefore, if you wanted to change the visual appearance of the premonition effects, you had to first reset the number of reserved symbols to 0, so that the decorative symbols were not displayed in a variable manner. This could cause players to find it troublesome to reset the number of reserved symbols to 0, or it could impair the tempo of the game.

Therefore, we will explain an embodiment that has been modified so that the visual appearance of the premonition effects can be changed while the decorative patterns are being displayed in a variable manner, with reference to the time chart shown in Figure 205.

205(a) to 205(c) are time charts showing the same effects as those in the embodiment shown in Fig. 203(a) to 203(c). That is, the display of the changing decorative symbols, the simulated image of the operation part of the attack button 3710, the image of the enemy tank being destroyed, and the operation valid period are the same effects.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 205(d), operation of the defense button 3740 is valid from time t5, which is the timing when the reach effect starts, to time t27, which is the timing after the display of the image of the enemy tank being destroyed has finished. When a specific condition is met with respect to the operation of the defense button 3740 (when a long press or a rapid-fire operation is detected, as will be described in detail later), it is possible to change the cheering line image from the normal display to a small display state or to a non-display state.

Figure 205(e) is a time chart when "Small display" is selected in the demo settings. After the cheering line image is displayed at timing t13, the player presses and holds the defense button 3740, and the cheering line image is displayed in a small size when the long press is detected at timing t14. In this case, for example, the display state of the cheering line image changes from the display state shown in Figure 204(a) to the display state shown in Figure 204(e) while the cheering line image is being displayed.

Figure 205(f) is a time chart when "Do not display" is selected in the demo settings. After the cheering line image is displayed at timing t13, the player presses and holds the defense button 3740, and the cheering line image is hidden when the long press is detected at timing t14. In this case, for example, the display state of the cheering line image is changed from the normal display state shown in Figure 204(a) to a state where the cheering line image is not displayed while the line image is being displayed.

The display state in which the cheering line image is displayed small or the display state in which the cheering line image is not displayed is configured to continue as long as a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected.
Alternatively, once a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected, even if the player releases the defense button 3740, the cheering line image may continue to be displayed in a small size or may not be displayed at all until timing t19, which is the timing at which the display of the cheering line image ends.

In addition, by pressing and holding the defense button 3740 in advance during the period from time t5, when the effective operation period of the defense button 3740 begins, to time t13, when the display of the cheering line image begins, it is possible to display the cheering line image in a smaller size or not display the cheering line image at all, from time t13, when the display of the cheering line image begins.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the special sign display (cheerleading image) is set in advance during the demo, and when a reach effect occurs during the display of changing decorative symbols and the possibility arises that a special sign display (cheerleading image) indicating that the first operation unit (attack button 3710) will become operable will be displayed, the player can operate the second operation unit (defense button 3740) at any timing to select the display mode of the special sign display during the display of changing decorative symbols. For example, if the player does not want to see the special sign display, the player can reduce the visibility of the special sign display, making it difficult or impossible to see, allowing the player to focus their attention on the display of the operation unit mock-up image that imitates the first operation unit and on operating the operation unit.

In addition, instead of detecting a long press of the defense button 3740, the display mode of the cheering line image may be changed when repeated presses of the defense button 3740 are detected.

It is also possible to configure the cheering line image to be displayed in a small size only when a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected, without providing a function for setting the display mode of the cheering line image during the demo as shown in FIG. 202. Alternatively, it is also possible to configure the cheering line image not to be displayed.

In the "Shield Bullet Reach" example shown in Figure 144, etc., an embodiment was shown in which a shield image was displayed by operating the defense button 3740, but an embodiment modified so that the cheering line image is hidden by the display of such a shield image is shown below.

With reference to Figures 205(a) to 205(d), 205(g) to 205(h), and 206, an embodiment modified to display an image (first shield image) that conceals the special precursor display (cheerleading image) will be described. In this embodiment, rather than displaying the cheerleading image in a smaller size or hiding it based on operation of the second operation unit (defense button 3740), an image (first shield image) that conceals the cheerleading image is displayed, hiding the cheerleading image and reducing the visibility of the cheerleading image, making it difficult or impossible to see.

Figure 205 (g) is a time chart showing the display state of the first shield image when a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at a predetermined timing (timing t14 in this performance example). The display period of the first shield image is predetermined to be 6 seconds. In this performance example, it is displayed for 6 seconds, from timing t14 to timing t20. Furthermore, it is not necessary to continuously press and hold the defense button 3740; after a long press is detected and the first shield image is displayed, the first shield image will continue to be displayed even if the defense button 3740 is released.

Figure 206(a) shows an example display at timing t14, when the display of the cheering line image has just begun. Figure 206(b) shows an example display at timing t16, when the display of the cheering line image is halfway through. Figure 206(c) shows an example display at timing t18, when the display of the cheering line image is nearing the end. Figure 206(d) shows an example display from timing t19 to timing t20, when operation of the attack button 3710 becomes effective.

Figure 206(e) shows an example display when the first shield image is displayed at timing t14. Figure 206(f) shows an example display when the first shield image is displayed at timing t16. Figure 206(g) shows an example display when the first shield image is displayed at timing t18. Figure 206(h) shows an example display when the first shield image is displayed from timing t19 to timing t20.

As shown in Figures 206(e) to 206(h), the size and display position of the first shield image do not change. Therefore, the premonition effect can be hidden without making the first shield image itself stand out, allowing the player to patiently wait for the timing when the operation unit simulative image resembling the attack button 3710 is displayed. The color of the first shield image may be an inconspicuous color, such as gray. The display mode of the first shield image may be configured so that the expectation level for the special lottery result is not indicated. As in the "Shield Bullet Reach" embodiment, the expectation level may be indicated by the operation unit simulative image or the enemy tank destruction image. In this case, multiple different expectation levels may be indicated by the colors of the operation unit simulative image or the enemy tank destruction image. The display priority of the destruction image may be higher or lower than that of the first shield image. If the display priority of the destruction image is higher than that of the first shield image, even if part or all of the destruction image overlaps the first shield image, it is displayed in front of it. When the display priority of the destruction image is set lower than the display priority of the first shield image, it is preferable that part or all of the destruction image is displayed without being hidden by the first shield image.
These points for the first shield image may be adopted in the second shield image described below.

As shown in Figure 206 (h), between the first shield image and the operation section simulated image simulating the attack button 3710, the operation section simulated image has a higher display priority. Therefore, even when the first shield image is displayed, the visibility of the operation section simulated image is not impaired, and in fact, the visibility of the operation section simulated image is improved.

In this way, by displaying an image (first shield image) that conceals the special premonition display (cheerleading line image) at the player's discretion, and configuring the special premonition display so that part or all of it is hidden, a player who does not want to see the special premonition display can reduce the visibility of the special premonition display, making it difficult or impossible to see, and thereby focus their attention on the display of the operation unit mock image that imitates the first operation unit (attack button 3710) and on operating the first operation unit.
Furthermore, the operation unit simulation image that imitates the first operation unit (attack button 3710) is not difficult or impossible to see, and therefore does not hinder the progress of the game using the first operation unit.

Referring to Figure 205(g), an embodiment in which the player presses and holds the defense button 3740 has been shown, but the first shield image may also be displayed based on repeated pressing of the defense button 3740 instead of a long press of the defense button 3740. Figure 205(h) shows an example presentation in which repeated pressing of the defense button 3740 is detected at timing t14, and the first shield image is displayed until timing t20. Note that in this case, the display examples shown in Figures 206(e) to 206(h) will be the same as in the above-mentioned embodiment.

The size of the first shield image may be different. Figures 207(a) to 207(d) are display examples in an embodiment in which the size of the first shield image is modified from the embodiments shown with reference to Figures 205(a) to 205(d), 205(g), 205(h), and 206(e) to 206(h). In this embodiment, the size of the first shield image is smaller. It is also displayed slightly higher. Figures 207(a) to 207(d) are display examples at timings t14, t16, t18, and from timing t19 to t20, respectively. In this embodiment, the cheering line images "<Miss it~" and "Miss it~" are made difficult or impossible to see by the first shield image. On the other hand, the cheering line images "<Go for it~" and "Go for it~" are not made difficult or impossible to see by the first shield image.

In this way, the visibility of a portion of the special precursor display (cheerleading line image) may be reduced by the first shield image, making it difficult or impossible to see, while the visibility of other portions of the special precursor display may not be reduced to make them difficult or impossible to see.

A configuration may be adopted in which multiple shield images can be displayed. Figures 205(i) and 207(e) to 207(h) are time charts and display examples illustrating an embodiment modified from the embodiments shown with reference to Figures 205(a) to 205(d), 205(g), 205(h), and 207(a) to 207(d) so that multiple shield images can be displayed. In this embodiment, a first shield image is displayed when a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected, and then a second shield image is displayed when a long press of the defense button is detected again. The display time of the second shield image is six seconds, the same as the display time of the first shield image.
In the drawing, the first shield image is shaded diagonally downward to the right, and the second shield image is shaded diagonally upward to the right.

Figure 205(i) is a time chart showing the display state when a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at timing t15, and shows the state in which the second shield image is displayed for 6 seconds until timing t21. Figures 207(e) to 207(h) are display examples at timings t14, t16, t18, and from timing t19 to timing t20, respectively.

In Figure 207 (e), the cheering line images "<Get it off~" and "Get it off~" are made difficult to see by the first shield image, but the cheering line images "<Go for it~" and "Go for it~" are shown to be easily visible without being hidden by the first shield image.
In Figure 207 (f), in addition to the first shield image, the second shield image begins to be displayed, and the cheering line images "<Go for it~" and "Go for it~" are shown to be invisible due to the second shield image.
In Figure 207 (g), a first shield image and a second shield image are displayed, and the cheering line images "<Go for it~" and "Go for it~" are shown to be difficult to see due to the second shield image.
207(h) shows a state in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed, and an operation section simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed in front of the second shield image. As shown in FIG. 207(h), the operation section simulated image has a higher display priority than the second shield image and the operation section simulated image simulating the attack button 3710. Therefore, even when the second shield image is displayed, the visibility of the operation section simulated image is not impaired.

The second shield image is slightly wider than the first shield image. Also, like the first shield image, the second shield image does not move. It is also recommended that the color of the second shield image be gray, just like the first shield image. Furthermore, the colors of the first and second shield images may be grays of the same brightness, or grays of different brightnesses.

After the first shield image is displayed by pressing and holding the defense button 3740, the second shield image may be displayed if the defense button 3740 continues to be pressed for a predetermined period of time. With this configuration, it becomes possible to display both the first shield image and the second shield image simply by continuing to press the defense button 3740.
On the other hand, the second shield image may be displayed when the player presses and holds the defense button 3740 long to display the first shield image, then releases the defense button 3740 to release it from the pressed state, and then presses the defense button 3740 again for a predetermined period of time. This configuration increases the difficulty of displaying the second shield image, making it easier for the player to intentionally create either a state in which only the first shield image is displayed, or a state in which both the first and second shield images are displayed.

In this way, by providing multiple images (first shield image, second shield image) that conceal the special precursor display (cheerleading line image) and displaying these in stages in response to operation of the second operation unit (defense button 3740), the special precursor display will not be suddenly hidden, and even if the player accidentally operates the second operation unit, some of the special precursor display will remain easily visible. It is also possible to realize a display style that suits the player's preferences.

While an embodiment has been shown in which a first shield image and a second shield image are displayed by a single operation unit (defense button 3740), a modified embodiment will be described below in which a plurality of shield images (first shield image and second shield image) are displayed corresponding to a plurality of operation units (defense button 3740 and mission button 3700). Figures 205(j), 205(k), and 207(e) to 207(h) are time charts and display examples showing an embodiment modified from the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 205(a) to 205(d), 205(g), 205(h), and 207(a) to 207(d).
In this embodiment, during the period from timing t5 to timing t27, operation acceptance is enabled for the mission button 3700 in addition to the defense button 3740. Furthermore, when a press operation of the mission button 3700 is detected, the second shield image is displayed. The display time of the second shield image is 6 seconds, the same as the display time of the first shield image.

Figure 205 (j) is a time chart showing the valid operation period of the mission button 3700 and the display state when a press of the mission button 3700 is not detected.
Figure 205(k) shows a state in which pressing of the mission button 3700 is detected at timing t15, and the second shield image is displayed for 6 seconds until timing t21. Figures 207(e) to 207(h) are display examples at timing t14, timing t16, timing t18, and timing from timing t19 to timing t20, respectively.

In Figure 207 (e), the cheering line images "<Get it off~" and "Get it off~" are made difficult to see by the first shield image, but the cheering line images "<Go for it~" and "Go for it~" are shown to be easily visible without being hidden by the first shield image.
In Figure 207 (f), in addition to the first shield image, the second shield image begins to be displayed, and the cheering line images "<Go for it~" and "Go for it~" are shown to be invisible due to the second shield image.
In Figure 207 (g), a first shield image and a second shield image are displayed, and the cheering line images "<Go for it~" and "Go for it~" are shown to be difficult to see due to the second shield image.
207(h) shows a state in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed, and an operation section simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed in front of the second shield image. As shown in FIG. 207(h), the operation section simulated image has a higher display priority than the second shield image and the operation section simulated image simulating the attack button 3710. Therefore, even when the second shield image is displayed, the visibility of the operation section simulated image is not impaired.

In this way, by configuring the system so that multiple images (first shield image and second shield image) that conceal different positions in the special premonition display (cheerleading dialogue image) can be displayed in response to operations on multiple operation units, namely the second operation button and the third operation button (defense button 3740 and mission button 3700), the player can select to what extent the special premonition display is to be concealed and which positions of the special premonition display are to be concealed according to their preferences.
Furthermore, by displaying an operation unit simulative image that resembles the first operation unit (attack button 3710) in front of the second shield image, the operation unit simulative image is not difficult or impossible to see, and therefore does not hinder the progress of the game using the first operation unit.

With reference to Figures 205 to 207, etc., we have explained an embodiment in which the special precursor display (supporting dialogue image) can be hidden by the first shield image and the second shield image. Below, with reference to Figures 208 and 209, we will explain an embodiment in which these images, etc. are modified. Note that the behavior of the gaming machine other than these image displays is the same as in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 205 to 207, etc.

208(a) to 208(d) are display examples at timing t14, timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19 to timing t20, respectively.
In this embodiment, the first shield image is a horizontally long rectangle with a hole in the center through which the image displayed behind it can be seen, and the second shield image is a horizontally long doughnut shape.
208(a) is a display example showing a state in which the first shield image is displayed. As shown in the figure, the cheering message image is difficult to see or cannot be seen due to the first shield image. Note that the display priority of the decorative pattern is higher than the display priority of the first shield image, and the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the first shield image.
208(b) and 208(c) are display examples showing a state in which a second shield image is displayed in addition to the first shield image.
208(d) is a display example showing a state in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed and an operation valid period has occurred. As shown in the figure, an operation section simulated image resembling an attack button 3710 is displayed in the center of the display area.

Instead of making the second shield image doughnut-shaped, it may be elliptical, and modified so that the area behind the hole in the center of the first shield image is not visible. Figures 208(e) and 208(f) show display examples at timing t18 and from timing t19 to timing t20, respectively. As shown in Figure 208(f), an operation unit imitation image resembling the attack button 3710 is displayed in a position overlapping the second shield image.

209(a) to 209(d) are display examples at timing t14, timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19 to timing t20, respectively.
In this embodiment, the first shield image and the second shield image each have a vertically long rectangular shape, and two first shield images and two second shield images are displayed.
209(a) is a display example showing a state in which the first shield image is displayed. As shown in the figure, the cheering message image is difficult to see or cannot be seen due to the first shield image. Note that the display priority of the decorative pattern is higher than the display priority of the first shield image, and the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the shield image.
209(b) and 209(c) are display examples showing a state in which a second shield image is displayed in addition to the shield image.
209(d) is a display example showing a state in which a valid operation period has occurred while a shield image and a second shield image are displayed. As shown in the figure, an operation section simulated image resembling an attack button 3710 is displayed in the area between the two second shield images.

Although a gap is provided between the two second shield images, it is also possible to modify the display so that there is no gap. Figures 209(e) and 209(f) show display examples at timing t18 and from timing t19 to timing t20, respectively. As shown in Figure 209(f), an operation section simulated image simulating an attack button 3710 is displayed in a position overlapping the two second shield images.

In this way, in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 208 and 209, the first shield image is displayed at a position relatively far from the operation unit simulation image that resembles the attack button 3710, and the second shield image is displayed at a position relatively close to it.
The player can display only the first shield image, only the second shield image, or both the first and second shield images according to his or her preference.

An embodiment has been shown in which a cheering line image is displayed as the image displayed as a special sign, but below is shown an embodiment in which a modified version is shown in which an operation unit imitation image shaped like the first operation unit (attack button 3710) is displayed instead of the cheering line image.

Figure 210 is a time chart for this embodiment, specifically a modified version of Figure 205. Note that instead of displaying a cheering line image as a premonition effect, a mock image shaped like the attack button 3710 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "premonition mock image") is displayed in a predetermined format, but operation timing and the like are the same as in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 205, etc.

Figures 211 to 213 are display examples of premonition effects in this embodiment, and specifically, are display examples that are modifications of Figures 206 and 207.
Figures 211(a) to 211(d), Figures 212(a) to 212(d), and Figures 213(a) to 213(d) are display examples corresponding to the display examples at each timing (timings t14, t16, t18, t19 to t20) shown in Figures 206(a) to 206(d), respectively.
Similarly, Figures 211(e) to 211(h), Figures 212(e) to 212(h), and Figures 213(e) to 213(h) are display examples corresponding to the display examples at each timing (timings t14, t16, t18, t19 to t20) shown in Figures 206(e) to 206(h), respectively.

In the embodiment shown in Figure 211, first, a precursor simulation image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed in a 5x5 grid (Figure 211(a)). The precursor simulation image is opaque, and images behind it (such as images of roads) are not visible. Note that some precursor simulation images are hidden by dialogue windows or images of the player's tank. Next, as shown in Figure 211(b), precursor simulation images are displayed in a 3x3 grid (Figure 211(b)). Next, as shown in Figure 211(c), only one precursor simulation image is displayed. Simultaneously with the start of the valid operation period for the attack button 3710, the character "attack" is added to the only precursor simulation image displayed, and an operation unit simulation image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed, as shown in Figure 211(d).

Figures 210(e) and 211(e) to 211(h) show a time chart and display example when a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at timing t14 in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 211(a) to 211(d). In this case, the precursor simulation image is displayed semi-transparently from timing t14 to timing t19. At timing t19, when the valid operation period begins, the precursor simulation image becomes opaque, the character "attack" is added, and an operation unit simulation image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed.

As shown in the time chart in Figure 210(f), the premonition image resembling the attack button 3710 may be configured not to be displayed.

Figures 210(g) and 212 are time charts and display examples showing an embodiment in which, in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 211, instead of displaying the precursor simulation image simulating the attack button 3710 semi-transparently, the precursor simulation image is hidden by the first shield image.

Figures 212(a), 212(b), 212(c), and 212(d) respectively show display examples at timing t14, timing t16, timing t18, and timings t19 to t20 when the defense button 3740 is not operated and the first shield image is not displayed.

As shown in Figure 210(g), when a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at a predetermined timing (timing t14 in this example), a first shield image is displayed in front of the precursor simulation image that resembles the attack button 3710, making part of the precursor simulation image difficult to see or impossible to see. Figure 212(e) shows an example display when the display of the first shield image begins at timing t14. Figures 212(f), 212(g), and 212(h) show example displays at timings t16, t18, and from timing t19 to timing t20, respectively.

Instead of a long press of the defense button 3740, the first shield image may be modified to be displayed when repeated hits of the defense button 3740 are detected.
Figure 210 (h) shows an example of a presentation when repeated pressing of the defense button 3740 is detected instead of a long press of the defense button 3740.

Figure 213 is a display example showing an embodiment in which the premonition simulating image shown in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 210(g), 210(h), and 212 is transformed into another premonition simulating image.

As shown in Figures 213(a) to 213(c), nine precursor simulation images resembling the attack button 3710 gradually gather slightly left of the center of the display area, and finally reach the clustered display state shown in Figure 213(d), enabling operation of the attack button 3710. Figure 213(a) is an example display at timing t14. At this time, the precursor simulation images are displayed at separate positions. Figure 213(b) is an example display at timing t16, in which the precursor simulation images are gradually moving closer to each other. Figure 213(c) is an example display at timing t18. At this time, the precursor simulation images are displayed overlapping on the right side of the dialogue window for "Sergeant Might." Each precursor simulation image is displayed with three protrusions, like afterimages, indicating the direction of movement. At timing t19, operation of the attack button 3710 becomes effective, the display of each protrusion ceases, and the character "attack" is added to the precursor image and displayed as an operation section simulation image. Figure 213 (d) shows an example display from timing t19 to timing t20.

As shown in Figure 210(g), when a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at a predetermined timing (timing t14 in this example), a first shield image is displayed in front of the precursor simulation image that resembles the attack button 3710, making part of the precursor simulation image difficult to see or impossible to see. Figure 213(e) shows an example display when the display of the first shield image begins at timing t14. Figures 213(f), 213(g), and 213(h) show example displays at timings t16, t18, and from timing t19 to timing t20, respectively.

In this way, even if a premonition simulation image that mimics the first operation unit (attack button 3710) is displayed as the special premonition display instead of a cheering line image, the same effect as in the above-described embodiment can be achieved by reducing the visibility of the special premonition display and making it difficult or impossible to see.

An embodiment in which the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 210(a) to 210(h) and 211 to 213 (an embodiment in which a precursor simulation image is displayed) is applied to the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 205(i) and 207 (an embodiment in which a second shield image can be displayed) will be described with reference to the time chart shown in Figure 210(i) and the display example shown in Figure 214.
In this embodiment, the precursor simulation image that resembles the attack button 3710 displayed as the precursor effect is configured to be hidden by the first shield image and the second shield image.

214(a) to 214(d) show display examples in an embodiment in which the second shield image is modified so as to be displayable in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 212(a) to 212(h).
210(i) is a time chart showing a case where a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at timing t15 and the second shield image is displayed. The second shield image is displayed for a predetermined time (6 seconds).
Figures 214(a), 214(b), 214(c), and 214(d) respectively show a display example in which the first shield image is displayed at timing t14, a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at timing t16, a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at timing t18, and a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed from timing t19 to timing t20.

Figures 214(e) to 214(h) show display examples in an embodiment in which the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 213(a) to 213(h) is modified so that the second shield image can be displayed.
210(i) is a time chart showing a case where a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at timing t15 and the second shield image is displayed. The second shield image is displayed for a predetermined time (6 seconds).
Figures 214(e), 214(f), 214(g), and 214(h) respectively show a display example in which the first shield image is displayed at timing t14, a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at timing t16, a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at timing t18, and a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed from timing t19 to timing t20.

An embodiment in which the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 210(j), 205(k), and 207 (an embodiment in which a second shield image can be displayed in response to operation of the mission button 3700) is applied to the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 210(a) to 210(h) and 211 to 213 (an embodiment in which a precursor simulation image is displayed) will be described with reference to the time charts shown in Figures 210(j) and 210(k) and the display example shown in Figure 214.
In this embodiment, the precursor simulation image that resembles the attack button 3710 displayed as the precursor effect is configured to be hidden by the first shield image and the second shield image.
The second shield image is configured to be displayed when pressing of the mission button 3700 is detected.

214(a) to 214(d) show display examples in an embodiment in which the second shield image is modified so as to be displayable in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 212(a) to 212(h).
As shown in Figures 210(j) and 210(k), in this embodiment as well, it is possible to display a second shield image in response to operation of the mission button 3700.
Figures 214(a), 214(b), 214(c), and 214(d) respectively show a display example in which the first shield image is displayed at timing t14, a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at timing t16, a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at timing t18, and a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed from timing t19 to timing t20.

Figures 214(e) to 214(h) show display examples in an embodiment in which the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 213(a) to 213(h) is modified so that the second shield image can be displayed.
As shown in Figures 210(j) and 210(k), in this embodiment as well, it is possible to display a second shield image in response to operation of the mission button 3700.
Figures 214(e), 214(f), 214(g), and 214(h) respectively show a display example in which the first shield image is displayed at timing t14, a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at timing t16, a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at timing t18, and a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed from timing t19 to timing t20.

In addition, in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 211, 213, etc., which displays a premonition simulation image as a premonition effect, the first shield image and second shield image in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 208 and 209 may be adopted.

The embodiments shown with reference to Figures 210(i) to 210(k) and 214 can also achieve the same effects as the above-described embodiments.

Referring to Figures 205 and 210, an embodiment has been shown in which the first shield image and the second shield image can be displayed by operating the defense button 3740 and the mission button 3700, but the effective period for operating the defense button 3740 and the mission button 3700 is from timing t5 when the reach presentation state occurs to timing t27, which is the end of the reach presentation state.
During this period, the first shield image or the second shield image can be displayed at any timing, triggered by the player's operation of the defense button 3740 or the mission button 3700. Furthermore, the first shield image or the second shield image is displayed for a predetermined time (6 seconds), but after the display of the first shield image or the second shield image has ended, the first shield image or the second shield image can be displayed again, triggered by the player's operation.

For example, if a reach effect state occurs at time t5, but a player does not want to see the premonition effect, they can operate the defense button 3740 or mission button 3700 at a predetermined time before time t13, when the premonition effect begins, to display the first shield image or second shield image, thereby making the premonition effect difficult or impossible to see in advance.

Furthermore, for example, from timing t16 to timing t22, the first shield image and the second shield image can be displayed simultaneously with an operation section simulated image that resembles the attack button 3710, which indicates that operation acceptance of the attack button 3710 is valid.
Furthermore, it is possible to continue displaying the first shield image and the second shield image even after the operation of the attack button 3710 has been accepted or the valid operation period has ended. When the operation of the attack button 3710 is accepted or the valid operation period has ended, the expected probability of the special lottery result is indicated by the state of the image of the enemy tank being destroyed, but the display priority of the first shield image and the second shield image may be set higher than that of the destruction image, and part or all of the destruction image may be hidden by the first shield image or the second shield image.
In this case, the player needs to pay attention to the display time of the first shield image or the second shield image and the timing at which the display starts. For example, if the player operates the defense button 3740 or the mission button 3700 carelessly regardless of the progress of the presentation, a display state may occur in which the visibility of the destruction image is impaired as a penalty, which encourages the player to operate the defense button 3740 or the mission button 3700 diligently, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

It is also possible to prepare multiple types of operation section simulation images according to the degree of expectation, and have them continue to be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) rather than disappearing when the operation is accepted or when the valid operation period ends.
Since the display status of the operation unit simulated image is important to a player who has made at least a part of the premonition display difficult or impossible to see by the first shield image and the second shield image so that he can concentrate on operating the operation unit, by leaving this presentation status even after the operation, it is possible to give the player a lingering impression of interest in the operation presentation.

Note that the display time for the first shield image and the second shield image, and the display time for the cheering line image and the premonition simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 that function as special premonition displays, are each set to six seconds, but the display time for the first shield image and the second shield image may be longer. For example, the first shield image and the second shield image may be configured to be displayed for ten seconds. Alternatively, once the display of the first shield image or the second shield image has begun, the first shield image or the second shield image may continue to be displayed until the valid operation period begins or until the display of the destruction image begins (i.e., until the player operates the attack button 3710 or the valid operation period ends). With this configuration, the visibility of the special premonition display can be reduced with a small number of operations, maintaining it in a difficult or impossible state.

On the other hand, the time for which the first shield image or second shield image is displayed may be shorter than the time for which the special precursor display is displayed (for example, 3 seconds). In this case, a player who does not want to see the special precursor display will be required to perform multiple operations, but a player who accidentally displays the first shield image or second shield image will be able to see the special precursor display without its visibility being obstructed by the first shield image or second shield image for at least part of the period during which the special precursor display is displayed, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

If a condition for displaying the first shield image is satisfied as a result of operating defense button 3740 while the first shield image is being displayed, the first shield image may be continued to be displayed again from the point in time when the condition is satisfied. For example, if the condition for displaying the first shield image is satisfied when the first shield image has been displayed for four seconds, the first shield image may be displayed for another six seconds, for a total of ten seconds.
Similarly, with regard to the second shield image, when a condition for displaying the second shield image is satisfied as a result of operating mission button 3700, the display of the second shield image may be continued again from the timing at which the condition is satisfied. For example, when the condition for displaying the second shield image is satisfied when the second shield image has been displayed for four seconds, the second shield image may be displayed for another six seconds, for a total of ten seconds.

During the active period of the defense button 3740, if the first shield image is displayed for a predetermined time (6 seconds) and the display of the first shield image has ceased, and the conditions for displaying the first shield image again are met, the first shield image can be displayed again. The same applies to the second shield image.

With this configuration, a player who hesitates about whether or not to see the special precursor display and then decides not to see it can extend the display time of the first or second shield image. On the other hand, a player who wants to see the special precursor display may accidentally operate the second operation unit (defense button 3740) or the third operation unit (mission button 3700), reducing the visibility of the special precursor display and making it difficult or impossible to see. However, if the player does not operate the second operation unit any further, the reduced visibility of the special precursor display and the difficult or impossible to see state will quickly end. Furthermore, because the first or second shield image can be displayed at any time (for example, before the special precursor display begins or after the operation valid period has ended), it is possible to practice displaying the first or second shield image.

Figures 215(a) to 215(d) show display examples in an embodiment in which the display positions of the first shield image and the second shield image are modified in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 214(a) to 214(d).
As shown in Figures 210(j) and 210(k), in this embodiment as well, it is possible to display a second shield image in response to operation of the mission button 3700.
Figures 215(a), 215(b), 215(c), and 215(d) respectively show a display example in which the first shield image is displayed at timing t14, a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at timing t16, a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at timing t18, and a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed from timing t19 to timing t20.

Figures 215(e) to 215(h) show display examples in an embodiment in which the display positions of the first shield image and the second shield image are modified in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 214(e) to 214(h).
As shown in Figures 210(j) and 210(k), in this embodiment as well, it is possible to display a second shield image in response to operation of the mission button 3700.
Figures 215(e), 215(f), 215(g), and 215(h) respectively show a display example in which the first shield image is displayed at timing t14, a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at timing t16, a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at timing t18, and a display example in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed from timing t19 to timing t20.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 215(a) to 215(d) and the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 215(e) to 215(h), the display priority of the first shield image is set higher than the display priority of the second shield image, and the first shield image is displayed in front of the second shield image. Furthermore, the first shield image is displayed at a position relatively close to the position where the operation unit simulation image is displayed, and the second shield image is displayed at a position relatively far from the position where the operation unit simulation image is displayed. Furthermore, the size of the first shield image (specifically, the area it occupies in the display area) is larger than the size of the second shield image.
Furthermore, as described above, a special operation (long press or rapid press) on the defense button 3740 is required to display the first shield image, whereas the second shield image can be displayed by simply pressing the mission button 3700. In other words, the second shield image is displayed at the timing when the operation of the mission button 3700 is started (timing when the operation start is accepted), while the first shield image is not displayed at the timing when the operation of the defense button 3740 is started (timing when the operation start is accepted).

With this configuration, the first shield image is displayed when the player operates the second operation unit (defense button 3740) in a complex manner with a clear intention.
On the other hand, the second shield image is displayed when the player operates the third operation unit (mission button 3700) in a simple manner. Therefore, the second shield image is displayed not only when the player intentionally operates the third operation unit, but also when the player operates it unintentionally or by mistake.
In this way, in this embodiment, the difficulty of the operation required to display the first shield image is made relatively higher than the difficulty required to display the second shield image, but the first shield image can more effectively hinder the visibility of the special precursor display than the second shield image.

In this way, by displaying the first shield image, which will not be displayed unless the player operates it with a clear intention, the player can concentrate on the operation unit imitation image that resembles the first operation unit (attack button 3710) and on operating the first operation unit.
Furthermore, even when the second shield image, which can be displayed with a simple operation, is displayed, the player can concentrate on the operation unit simulation image and the operation unit. On the other hand, by making the visibility of the special precursor display relatively higher when the second shield image is displayed compared to when the first shield image is displayed, even if the player accidentally displays the second shield image, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest felt by the player who wanted to see the special precursor display.

Furthermore, the first shield image may be displayed after a predetermined time (for example, two seconds) has elapsed since a special operation (such as a long press or a rapid tap) was detected on the defense button 3740. The display time of the first shield image may be set longer than the display time of the second shield image.
Even when such a configuration is adopted, the same effect can be obtained.

The size and display time of the first shield image, which is displayed in response to the operation of the defense button 3740, may be different from that of the second shield image, which is displayed in response to the operation of the mission button 3700. For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 207 and 214, the size of the second shield image is made larger than that of the first shield image, making a large area of the special sign display invisible.
Alternatively, the display times of the first shield image and the second shield image may be different. For example, the display time of the first shield image may be 6 seconds and the display time of the second shield image may be 9 seconds. Conversely, the display time of the first shield image may be 9 seconds and the display time of the second shield image may be 6 seconds.
By adopting such a configuration, the special sign display can be made to look like something that suits the player's preferences.

The first shield image and the second shield image may not simply appear at a predetermined position but may appear as a dynamic display. When showing them as a dynamic display, for example, they may be displayed so as to dynamically appear from above, below, left, or right of the display area in a so-called cut-in manner, or dynamic display such as wipe-in, wipe-out, fade-in, or fade-out may be adopted.
The first shield image and the second shield image that have appeared while moving in this manner may continue to move and stop at the center of the display area, or may continue to move and move at the other end of the display area so as to disappear outside the display area.
This not only allows the first shield image and the second shield image to simply hide the special precursor display, but also allows the first shield image and the second shield image to be presented in a dramatic way when they appear or disappear, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

The configuration may be such that operation of the defense button 3740 triggers the display of a cheering line image or a precursor image for the attack button 3710 in a semi-transparent manner, and operation of the mission button 3700 triggers the display of a first shield image or a second shield image, making the cheering line image or the precursor image for the attack button 3710 difficult or impossible to see.
In this way, by making it possible to make the special sign display invisible or difficult to see in different ways depending on the type of operating unit, it is possible to provide a visibility mode that suits the player's preferences.

In addition, there may be multiple display modes for the premonition simulation image that resembles the attack button 3710, and the type of premonition simulation image displayed may indicate the degree of expectation of the special lottery result. For example, the degree of expectation may be indicated by the color or shape of the premonition simulation image. In this case, too, it is preferable to configure the special premonition display so that it can be made difficult or impossible to see by using the first shield image or the second shield image.
By using this configuration, the player is not misled by the degree of expectation indicated by the premonition simulated image, and can concentrate on the display of the operation unit simulated image that resembles the first operation unit (attack button 3710) and on operating the first operation unit.

Even if the special precursor display (display of a cheering line image or precursor simulated image) ends while the first or second shield image is being displayed, it is recommended that the first or second shield image continue to be displayed for a predetermined period of time. This is because if the display of the first or second shield image ends at the same time as the start of the valid operation period, a background image (such as a road) behind the first or second shield image will be displayed, causing a sense of discomfort to the player who wants to concentrate on the display of the operation unit simulated image that resembles the attack button 3710. In this way, it is recommended that the display of the concealed image (first shield image, second shield image) continue even if the valid operation period has begun.

Furthermore, the display priority of the operation section simulated image may be set higher than the display priority of the first shield image. For example, as shown in FIG. 206(h), the operation section simulated image may be displayed closer to the player than the first shield image. This configuration allows the player to focus solely on the displayed simulated image. If the first shield image were to be removed, the background image hidden by the first shield image would become visible, which would disrupt the player's focus on the operation section simulated image.
It should be noted that the same configuration can be adopted not only for the first shield image but also for the second shield image.

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 207(h) and 214(h), the operation section simulated image may be displayed so that a portion of the operation section simulated image overlaps a portion of the second shield image. In this case, it is preferable to give the operation section simulated image a higher display priority than the second shield image. Alternatively, as shown in Figures 212(h) and 213(h), the operation section simulated image may be displayed near the first shield image or the second shield image but not overlapping with the first shield image or the second shield image.
By adopting such a configuration, the player can concentrate only on the displayed operation section simulated image.

In the embodiment shown, the display priority of the operation section simulated image is higher than the display priority of the first shield image and the second shield image, but the display priority of the operation section simulated image may also be lower than the display priority of the first shield image and the second shield image. In this case, it is preferable to configure the operation section simulated image so that a portion of it does not overlap with the first shield image or the second shield image and can be seen by the player.

In addition to displaying the premonition simulated image and the operation unit simulated image, the display area may be configured to display the name and operation mode of the first operation unit (attack button 3710) while the special premonition display is being displayed (while the premonition simulated image is being displayed) or during the operation valid period (while the operation unit simulated image is being displayed). In this case, a player who is unfamiliar with the game will have a deeper understanding of the name and operation method of the first operation unit, and will be able to operate it with confidence.
On the other hand, for experienced players, such a display may not be necessary. Therefore, the name and operation mode of the attack button 3710 may be made difficult or impossible to see by displaying the first shield image and the second shield image. On the other hand, it is preferable to configure the operation unit simulation image so that it is not made difficult or impossible to see by the first shield image and the second shield image.
The operation mode and name of the attack button 3710 may be displayed only before the valid operation period begins, or only during the valid operation period, or may be displayed from before the valid operation period begins until the valid operation period begins.
The embodiment shown with reference to Figures 208 and 209 is one example of such an embodiment. In Figures 208(d), 208(f), 209(d), and 209(f), the dialogue window for "Sergeant Might" displays the text "Second Lieutenant! Aim at the enemy tank with the attack button!", but the first shield image and second shield image are displayed, making the operation mode and name of the attack button 3710 invisible.
With this configuration, the player can concentrate only on the displayed operation unit simulated image.

Furthermore, if the configuration is such that the first shield image can be easily displayed, there is a risk that the player may accidentally operate the defense button 3740, causing the first shield image to be unintentionally displayed while the premonition effect is being performed, thereby impairing the visibility of the premonition effect and ruining the excitement provided by the premonition effect.
Therefore, the first shield image is configured to be displayed when a specific condition is satisfied as a result of an operation on the defense button 3740. Although the specific condition has been exemplified by repeated pressing of the defense button 3740 (detecting a pressing operation a predetermined number of times or more within a predetermined time) and a long press (detecting a pressing operation continuously for a predetermined time or more) of the defense button 3740, other conditions that are satisfied as a result of an operation on the defense button 3740 may also be employed.

In the embodiment shown, the second shield image is displayed when the defense button 3740 is pressed and held or when the mission button 3700 is pressed, but the second shield image may be displayed under other conditions. For example, the second shield image may be displayed when the defense button 3740 is pressed and then the mission button 3700 is pressed. Alternatively, the second shield image may be displayed when a long press or repeated press of the mission button 3700 is detected.

In the embodiment shown above, the second shield image is displayed regardless of whether the first shield image is displayed or not, but the second shield image may also be configured to be displayed only if the first shield image is currently being displayed.

The display priority of the first and second shield images is set lower than the display priority of the decorative pattern displayed in the upper left corner of the display area. This ensures that the decorative pattern is not hidden by the first and second shield images, ensuring the visibility of the decorative pattern.

Although the effective operation period of the defense button 3740 is set to be from timing t5 to timing t27, the effective operation period and the period during which the first shield image is displayed may be set to be the entire period during which the decorative symbols are displayed or stopped from changing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to practice operating the defense button 3740 at any timing and displaying the first shield image.
It should be noted that the valid operation period of the mission button 3700, which triggers the display of the second shield image, does not need to be configured as such, and it may be configured so that the valid operation period is only during the display of the varying decorative symbols (for example, the period from timing t5 to timing t27), or the second shield image can be displayed. Alternatively, it may be configured so that the second shield image is not displayed at least while the varying decorative symbols are stopped. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the visibility of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed.

In the embodiment shown, multiple images are displayed to display the special sign, but only one image may be used to display the special sign. For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 204, four cheering line images are displayed, but only one of them may be displayed. Also, in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 213, nine sign simulation images are displayed, but only one of them may be displayed.

A case may be provided in which operation of the first operation unit (attack button 3710) is not valid after the special premonition display is displayed. In this case, an operation unit simulated image that imitates the first operation unit is not displayed after the special premonition display is displayed, and no valid operation period occurs.
For a player who has hidden the premonition simulation image by the first shield image or the second shield image for the special premonition display, the operation part simulation image is not displayed even though he has made the premonition simulation image difficult or impossible to see, and as a result he feels disappointed, but by deliberately displaying such an effect, the player can be made to feel that he wants to operate the operation part next time.

Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that, in a game presentation instructing a player to operate an operating means, displays the same presentation as when the operating means is operated, even if the player does not operate the operating means (for example, JP 2007-136096 A).
However, while the operational burden on the player is reduced by displaying the same effect even when no operation is performed, there is a risk that the player's motivation to operate the operating means may be lost. In particular, in game presentations that require complex operational instructions to the operating means, if the same effect display as when an operation is performed is displayed even when no operation is performed, there is a risk that the player's motivation to operate the operating means may be significantly lost.
Below, we will show an embodiment of a gaming machine that solves these problems and makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest by increasing the player's motivation to operate the operating means.

Below, with reference to Figures 216 to 218, an embodiment that is a modification of the "shield bullet reach" will be described.
Fig. 216 shows a time chart in this embodiment, and Figs. 217 and 218 show examples of display in the display area.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 216( a), a reach state occurs at timing t5. Next, an image of an enemy tank is displayed at timing t15. Next, the valid operation period for the attack button 3710 occurs from timing t18 to timing t22. If a repeated press or a long press of the attack button 3710 is detected during the valid operation period, the valid operation period ends. Next, a display according to the operation status of the attack button 3710 is displayed, and then a decorative pattern is statically displayed at timing t34.
Figures 216(b) to 216(d) show examples of effects that may occur depending on the operation status of the attack button 3710 during the valid operation period.

Figure 216 (b) shows an example of a presentation when a rapid tap on the attack button 3710 is detected at timing t21.
In this example presentation, at timing t15, an enemy tank appears from the right side of the display area and begins to move to the left. Next, at timing t18, the valid operation period for the attack button 3710 begins. The valid operation period ends when a rapid press or long press operation is detected. Furthermore, if a long press operation or rapid press operation is detected, a presentation display according to the operation mode is performed. If a long press operation or rapid press operation is not detected, the valid operation period ends at timing t22, four seconds after the start of the valid operation period.
FIG. 217(a) shows an example of the display at timing t19. As shown in the figure, an image of an enemy tank is displayed in the upper part of the display area. In addition, the line "Lieutenant! Press the attack button repeatedly to attack the enemy tank!" is displayed in the dialogue window of "Sergeant Might," and the operation mode of the attack button 3710 is shown to the player. In addition, an operation unit imitation image (circular image) that imitates the attack button 3710 is displayed in the upper right corner of the dialogue window of "Sergeant Might." In addition, the character "attack" is displayed in the operation unit imitation image.
In addition, the same display as this (display examples shown in Figures 218(a) and 218(d)) is also performed in the presentation examples shown with reference to Figure 216(c) and Figure 216(d) described below.

When a rapid tapping operation is detected at timing t21, a display of a shell being fired from the player's tank at an enemy tank is displayed, and then a smoke image representing the smoke generated by the shell exploding is displayed in place of the image of the enemy tank. Figure 217(b) shows an example of a display at timing t22. In this example, the smoke image is displayed in the center of the display area.
At timing t23, two seconds after the start of display of the smoke image, a bomb character image appears from behind the smoke image and moves to the left. The bomb character images displayed include bomb character image A and bomb character image B, and the type of bomb character image displayed indicates the likelihood of the special lottery result being a jackpot.
Figure 217(c) is an example of a display at timing t25. In this example of a display, a bomb character image A is displayed to the left of the smoke image. Figure 217(d) is an example of a display at timing t25. In this example of a display, a bomb character image B is displayed to the left of the smoke image. The display of the bomb character image and the smoke image continues until timing t27 (6 seconds after the rapid tapping operation is detected).
In this way, when the player performs an appropriate operation on the operation unit, the player is shown the expected probability of the special lottery result.

Figure 216 (c) shows an example of a presentation when a long press of the attack button 3710 is detected at timing t21.
In this example of presentation, the display state switches from the display example shown in Figure 218(a) to the display examples shown in Figure 218(b) and Figure 218(c).
In this example, when a long press is detected at time t21, the image of the enemy tank is replaced with a display of a shell being fired from the player's tank, followed by a smoke image representing the smoke generated by the shell exploding. Figure 218(b) shows an example of the display at time t22. In this example, the smoke image is displayed in the center of the display area.
In this example, the bomb character image is not displayed, and only the smoke image is displayed. Figure 218 (c) is an example of the display at timing t25. The smoke image continues to be displayed until timing t27 (6 seconds after the long press is detected).
In this way, if the operation performed by the player on the operating means is not an appropriate operation, a display corresponding to the operation will be displayed, but the expectation of the special result (the expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot, etc.) will not be shown to the player.

Figure 216 (d) shows an example of the presentation when no rapid press or long press operation on the attack button 3710 is detected during the valid operation period from timing t18 to timing t22 (for example, when it is pressed only once or when it is not operated at all).
In this example of presentation, the display state shown in Figure 218(d) switches to the display state shown in Figures 218(e) and 218(f).
In this example, when the operation valid period ends at timing t22, the image of the enemy tank turns right at the top center of the display area and begins to move upward in the display area. Figure 218(e) shows an example of the display at timing t22. In this example, the image of the enemy tank is displayed in the center of the display area.
Figure 218(f) is a display example at timing t25. In this display example, the image of the enemy tank has moved upward and is displayed smaller than in the case shown in Figure 218(e).
In this way, if the player does not perform an appropriate operation on the operating means, the display corresponding to the operation will not be displayed, and the expectation of the special result (the expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot, etc.) will not be shown to the player.

As described above, in this embodiment, the type of bomb character image is configured to indicate the degree of expectation for the special lottery result. Specifically, when bomb character image A is displayed, it is suggested that there is a higher degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot compared to when bomb character image B is displayed. Note that different colors of the bomb character image (red or green) may be configured to indicate different degrees of expectation. Furthermore, it may also be configured so that the bomb character may not be displayed even when the appropriate operation (repeated taps) is performed.

In this embodiment, a player who performs an appropriate operation on the operation means (attack button 3710) can see a special game-related display (smoke image) as well as a specific effect (display of a bomb character image). Furthermore, the type of specific effect can indicate the expected outcome of the special lottery. On the other hand, a player who does not perform an appropriate operation on the operation unit can see the special game-related display but cannot see the specific effect, or cannot see both the special game-related display and the specific effect. This configuration can increase a player's motivation and enthusiasm for operating the operation unit.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 216 etc., two types of effect patterns may be implemented: one requiring rapid tapping of the attack button 3710 as an instruction to operate it, and the other requiring a long press. Modifications may be made so that either of these effect patterns is executed. In this case, the dialogue window for "Sergeant Might" may be configured to display a line such as "Second Lieutenant! Rapidly tap the attack button to attack the enemy tank!" or "Second Lieutenant! Long press the attack button to attack the enemy tank!" Furthermore, if the player performs a long press despite an instruction to perform rapid tapping, or if the player performs a long press despite an instruction to perform rapid tapping, the bomb character image may be prevented from being viewed, as shown in FIG. 218(c).
This configuration requires the player to carefully observe the contents of the operation instruction display (the character string displayed in the dialogue window), which increases the sense of tension regarding the operation and improves the player's motivation and enthusiasm for operating the operation unit.

216 to 218, the same smoke image was displayed in the same position when the attack button 3710 was pressed repeatedly and when it was pressed and held down (for example, Fig. 217(b) and Fig. 218(b)). With this configuration, even if other players can see the contents displayed in the display area, it is difficult for them to determine whether the operation was appropriate, and the player can be prevented from being noticed by other players and feeling embarrassed.
Note that the smoke images displayed when the operation is appropriate and when the operation is inappropriate may be partially different and partially the same, or images showing the same or similar concepts may be displayed as smoke images.
In this way, even if a similar image is displayed instead of an identical image as the smoke image, or a similar image that can be recognized as a similar motif (smoke in this embodiment) is displayed, it is possible to make it difficult for other players to determine whether the operation was appropriate or not.
A similar configuration may also be employed for the embodiment displaying smoke images and explosion images described below. For example, images that the player recognizes as having a similar motif may be displayed. Furthermore, similar smoke images may be displayed when the operation content is appropriate and when it is inappropriate, similar messages regarding the operation of the operation means may be displayed, or smoke images and explosion images similar to smoke images may be displayed. Furthermore, these similar images may be displayed in a position overlapping the display position of the reserved image or near the center of the display area. A similar effect can be achieved even when slightly different images are displayed in this way.

A specified suggestive display indicating the expected probability of a special lottery result may be executed over a predetermined period (e.g., from timing t10 to timing t30) spanning the valid operation period (timing t18 to timing t22), and if the attack button 3710 is not operated appropriately during the valid operation period while the suggestive display is being executed, the suggestive display being executed may be terminated. For example, a suggestive display different from the display displaying a bomb character may be executed over the period from timing t10 to timing t30, and this suggestive display may be continued if the attack button 3710 is operated appropriately, and may be terminated if the attack button 3710 is not operated appropriately.

Furthermore, during a predetermined period after the valid operation period (for example, from timing t22 to timing t34 when the display of the changing decorative patterns ends), a predetermined suggestive effect display indicating the expected probability of a special lottery result may be executed, and if the attack button 3710 is not operated appropriately during the valid operation period (timing t18 to timing t22), the execution of the suggestive effect display may be restricted during the predetermined period after the valid operation period. For example, during the period from timing t22 to timing t34, a suggestive effect display different from the effect displaying a bomb character may be executed, and if the attack button 3710 is operated appropriately, this suggestive effect display may be executed with a predetermined probability, and if the attack button 3710 is not operated appropriately, this suggestive effect display may not be executed.

In this way, if an operation is not performed appropriately, the currently running suggestive display will be terminated, or the suggestive display will not be executed until the display of the decorative patterns has stopped changing. This increases the sense of tension surrounding the operation, and improves the player's motivation and enthusiasm for operating the operating means.

If the attack button 3710 is not operated properly in a certain variable display, the execution of suggestive effects may be restricted in a predetermined number of variable displays after that variable display. For example, the execution of suggestive effects may be restricted until the decorative pattern variable display is performed 10 times.
With this configuration, depending on the manner in which the operating means is operated, a gaming situation may arise in which the execution of a specific effect (suggestive effect) is restricted over multiple display changes of decorative patterns, which increases the sense of tension regarding the operation and further improves the player's motivation and enthusiasm in operating the operating means.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 216 etc., if the attack button 3710 is not operated appropriately, the expected value is not indicated for the variable display results being executed. However, below, with reference to Figure 219 etc., we will explain a modified embodiment in which the execution of the pre-reading effect is restricted if the attack button 3710 is not operated appropriately.

Fig. 219 shows a time chart in this embodiment, and Figs. 220 to 222 show examples of display in the display area.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 219(a), a reach state occurs at timing t5. Next, an image of a minefield is displayed at timing t16. Next, an effective operation period for the attack button 3710 occurs from timing t18 to timing t22. Note that at the timing when the effective operation period occurs, three reserved symbols have occurred. Next, decorative symbols are displayed statically from timing t34 to timing t35. Next, new variable display of decorative symbols is performed from timing t35 to timing t44, and decorative symbols are displayed statically from timing t44 to timing t45.
Figures 219(b) to 219(d) each show a number of examples of effects corresponding to the operation manner of the attack button 3710 during the valid operation period.

Figure 219 (b) shows an example of a presentation when a rapid tap on the attack button 3710 is detected at timing t21.
In this example, at timing t16, a minefield made up of bomb characters appears from the top of the display area and begins to move downward. Then, at timing t18, the valid period for operating the attack button 3710 begins.
FIG. 220(a) shows an example display at timing t19. An image of an enemy tank is displayed at the top of the display area. The dialogue window for "Sergeant Might" displays the text "Lieutenant! Press the attack button repeatedly to attack those guys!", indicating to the player how to operate the attack button 3710. A simulated control image (circular image) resembling the attack button 3710 is displayed in the upper right corner of "Sergeant Might"'s dialogue window, with the character "attack" (attack) attached. Furthermore, reserve images are displayed in the lower right corner of the display area. Specifically, reserve images corresponding to the reserve in question, the first reserve, the second reserve, and the third reserve are displayed from left to right. Of these, the reserve in question, the first reserve, and the third reserve are displayed as white reserve images, which are normal reserve images. On the other hand, the second reserve is displayed as a red reserve image, indicating a higher probability of the special lottery result being a jackpot than a normal reserve. It is possible to display a total of five reserve images, including one reserve and the maximum number of reserves (four). In addition, for each of the reserved positions from the reserved position to the fourth reserved position, it is possible to display the reserved image in a display mode that indicates that the probability of the special lottery result being a jackpot is higher than that of a normal reserved image. Also, the reserved image basically continues to be displayed whether the decorative pattern is changing or not.
In addition, a display similar to this is also performed in the example of presentation shown with reference to Figure 219(c) and the example of presentation shown with reference to Figure 219(d).

When a rapid-fire operation is detected at timing t21, a display of a shell being fired from the player's tank into a minefield is displayed, and then a smoke image, which represents the smoke produced by the shell exploding, is displayed in place of the image of the minefield. Figure 220(b) shows an example display at timing t22. In this example display, the smoke image is displayed in the center of the display area. Figure 220(c) shows an example display from timing t23 onwards. Note that the display position of the smoke image will vary depending on the timing of rapid-fire detection. For example, if rapid-fire detection is early, the smoke image will be displayed relatively higher in the display area, and if rapid-fire detection is late, the smoke image will be displayed relatively lower in the display area. Furthermore, the position of the displayed smoke image does not change and remains displayed in the same position.

At timing t34, the display of the decorative symbols changes to finish. Figure 220(d) shows an example display from timing t34 to timing t35. During this period, the reserved symbol is erased. Next, at timing t35, a new display of the decorative symbols changes to begin. At this time, the reserved symbol that was previously the first reserved symbol moves to the left, becomes larger, and becomes the reserved symbol. The reserved symbol that was previously the second reserved symbol moves to the left and becomes the first reserved symbol. Similarly, the reserved symbol that was previously the third reserved symbol moves to the left and becomes the second reserved symbol. In this example, when the third reserved symbol moves to the left and becomes the second reserved symbol, it changes from a normal reserved symbol (white reserved symbol) to a reserved symbol with a higher probability of winning (green reserved symbol). Figure 220(e) shows an example display at timing t36. Figure 220(f) shows an example display from timing t44 to timing t45, when the display of the changing symbol ends.

In this way, by the player performing appropriate operations on the operating means, the expectation level for the special result (the expectation level that the special lottery result will be a jackpot, etc.) is maintained for the player.

Figure 219 (c) shows an example of a presentation when a long press of the attack button 3710 is detected at timing t21.
In this example, at timing t16, a minefield made up of bomb characters appears from the top of the display area and begins to move downward. Then, at timing t18, the valid period for operating the attack button 3710 begins.
Fig. 221(a) shows a display example at timing t19. The display content at this time is the same as the display content in the display example shown with reference to Fig. 220(a).

Even if a long press operation is detected at timing t21, no display is made of a shell being fired from the player's tank into the minefield. Instead, the display continues to show the minefield approaching the player's tank. Figure 221(b) shows an example display from timing t22 to timing t23, when the operation valid period ends. Next, at timing t23, the player's tank comes into contact with the minefield, causing the minefield to explode, and a smoke image is displayed at the bottom of the display area in place of the image of the minefield. At the same time, the second hold, which had previously been displayed in red, changes to a white hold image. Figure 221(c) shows an example display at timing t24.

At timing t34, the display of the decorative symbols changes to a state where they have finished. Figure 221(d) shows a display example from timing t34 to timing t35. During this period, the reserved symbol is erased. Next, at timing t35, a new display of the decorative symbols begins to change to a new reserved symbol. At the same time, the previously displayed first reserved symbol moves to the left, enlarging and becoming the reserved symbol. The previously displayed second reserved symbol moves to the left and becomes the first reserved symbol. Similarly, the previously displayed third reserved symbol moves to the left and becomes the second reserved symbol. Figure 221(e) shows a display example from timing t36. Figure 221(f) shows a display example from timing t44 to timing t45, when the display of the decorative symbols has finished to a state where the display of the decorative symbols has finished to a state where the smoke image overlaps with the display area of the reserved symbol. Furthermore, while the smoke image is displayed, only the normal reserved symbol can be displayed, and the previously displayed high-expectation reserved symbol (red reserved symbol) is replaced with the normal reserved symbol (white reserved symbol). Furthermore, while the smoke image is displayed, no special display is performed to change the normal reserved image into another reserved image (for example, a green reserved image) indicating high expectations.
The display of the smoke image continues until the display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the reserved symbol that existed when the smoke image began to be displayed ends. Also, while the smoke image is displayed, only the normal reserved symbol is displayed.
In addition, in this example, for the second hold, an example is shown in which the hold image (red hold image) indicating high expectations is replaced with a normal hold image (white hold image), but if there is a hold other than the second hold that indicates high expectations, it will be replaced with a normal hold image, just like the second hold.

In this way, if the player does not perform the appropriate operation, the player will not be informed of the expected special result (the expected special lottery result being a jackpot, etc.), and this state will remain for a predetermined period of time.

Figure 219 (d) shows an example of a presentation when no rapid tapping or long press of the attack button 3710 is detected during the valid operation period (timing t18 to timing t22).
In this example, at timing t16, a minefield made up of bomb characters appears from the top of the display area and begins to move downward. Then, at timing t18, the valid period for operating the attack button 3710 begins.
Fig. 222(a) shows a display example at timing t19. The display content at this time is the same as the display content in the display example shown with reference to Fig. 220(a).

In this example, as in the other examples, a minefield is displayed approaching the player's tank. Figure 222(b) shows an example display from timing t22 to timing t23, when the effective operation period has ended. Next, at timing t23, the minefield comes into contact with the player's tank, causing it to explode, and an explosion image is displayed at the bottom of the display area in place of the minefield image. The explosion image has a higher display priority than the player's tank image and the reserved image, making the player's tank image difficult to see and the reserved image impossible to see. Figure 222(c) shows an example display at timing t24.

At timing t34, the variable display of the decorative symbols ends. Figure 222(d) shows a display example from timing t34 to timing t35. The explosion image is set to a higher display priority than the decorative symbols, making the stopped display mode of the decorative symbols difficult to see due to the explosion image. The reserved image also remains invisible. Next, a new variable display of the decorative symbols begins at timing t35. Figure 222(e) shows a display example at timing t36. Figure 222(f) shows a display example from timing t44 to timing t45, when this variable display ends. In this embodiment, the explosion image is displayed in a position overlapping the display area of the reserved image and decorative symbols. The explosion image has a higher display priority than the reserved image and decorative symbols, and the reserved image and decorative symbols are displayed hidden by the explosion image. As a result, the reserved image becomes invisible, and the decorative symbols are also difficult to see.
The explosion image continues to be displayed until the display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the reserved symbols that existed when the explosion image began to be displayed is completed. Also, as described above, while the explosion image is displayed, the reserved symbols become invisible and the decorative symbols become difficult to see.

In this way, if the player does not perform the appropriate operation, the player will not be shown the expected special result (the expected special lottery result being a jackpot, etc.) or the number of reserved balls, and this state will remain for a specified period of time.

In this way, in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 219 etc., the display of the smoke image or explosion image continues even after the variable display in which the smoke image or explosion image is displayed has ended and the next variable display has begun, and the visible state of the reserved image and decorative pattern changes according to the player's operating mode.

In this way, when a specific condition is met (when the operation of the operation means (attack button 3710) is appropriate), a special game-related display (smoke image) is displayed across multiple variable displays, and a specific effect (changed pending image) suggesting the degree of expectation for a special result (the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a jackpot, etc.) is displayed. When a specific condition is met (when the operation of the operation means is inappropriate), a special game-related display is displayed across multiple variable displays, and the specific effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a special result is not displayed, thereby further increasing the player's motivation to operate the operation means. Furthermore, by imposing graded penalties depending on the manner in which the operation means is operated, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to perform more appropriate operations.

During the valid operation period, if a long press of the attack button 3710 is detected and then a successive hit is detected, an effect similar to the example of the effect shown with reference to Figure 219(b) is executed from the timing when the successive hits are detected. In order to perform this processing, the timing when the display corresponding to the long press is executed is set to the end of the valid operation period, not when the long press is detected.
With this configuration, even if the operation of the operation means is incorrect, if the correct operation is performed quickly, it is possible to avoid a situation where the display showing the expectation level becomes invisible, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

An example of a performance has been given in which the change in the display mode of the reserved image is restricted or the reserved image is made invisible until the variable display corresponding to the reserved image that existed at the time the display of the smoke image or explosion image began has ended, but it is also possible to restrict the change in the display mode of the reserved image or make the reserved image invisible until the variable display has been performed a number of times corresponding to the maximum number of items that can be reserved (in this embodiment, four, which is the maximum number of items that can be reserved for the first starting port 2002).
In this way, by predetermining the number of times the display changes to limit pending changes and the number of times the display changes to make the pending image invisible, the display control of smoke images and explosion images on the peripheral control board 1510 can be simplified.

219 and the like, the embodiment may be configured so that there are cases where an effect pattern is executed that requires rapid tapping as an operation instruction for the attack button 3710, and cases where an effect pattern is executed that requires a long press. In this case, the line displayed as "Sergeant Might" in an effect pattern that requires rapid tapping is "Second Lieutenant! Rapidly tap the attack button to attack those guys!", and in an effect pattern that requires a long press, the line displayed as "Second Lieutenant! Long press the attack button to attack those guys!"
If an appropriate operation is performed, the same display as the display examples shown in Figures 220(b) to 220(f) may be displayed.
On the other hand, if a player presses and holds a button even though an instruction to press repeatedly has been given, or if a player presses and holds a button even though an instruction to press and hold has been given, the same display as the display examples shown in Figures 221(b) to 221(f) should be displayed.
Also, if neither rapid tapping nor long pressing is performed, the same display as the display examples shown in Figures 222(b) to 222(f) may be displayed.
This configuration requires the player to carefully check the content of the operation instructions, which increases the sense of tension regarding the operation and improves the player's motivation and enthusiasm in operating the operating means.

Referring to Figure 221, an example of a presentation in which a reserved image is displayed in front of a smoke image has been shown, but a modified embodiment in which a smoke image is displayed in front of a reserved image may also be used. Figure 219(e) is a time chart showing an example of a presentation in this embodiment. Figure 223 shows an example of a display in this embodiment.

In this example, at timing t23, the minefield explodes when the player's tank comes into contact with it, and a smoke image is displayed at the bottom of the display area in place of the minefield image. However, the smoke image has a higher display priority than the reserved image and decorative patterns. Figure 223(a) is an example of the display at timing t24. As shown in the figure, the reserved image is hidden by the smoke image, making it invisible.

At timing t34, the display of the decorative patterns has finished changing. Figure 223(b) shows an example of the display from timing t34 to timing t35. Next, a new display of the decorative patterns begins at timing t35. Figure 223(c) shows an example of the display at timing t36. Figure 223(d) shows an example of the display from timing t44 to timing t45, when this display of the decorative patterns has finished. In this embodiment, the smoke image is displayed in a position that overlaps with the display area of the reserved image, making the reserved image invisible. In addition, part of the decorative patterns that are changing also become invisible. However, the visibility of the decorative patterns that are still displayed is not obstructed.

In each of the performance examples shown in Figures 220, 221, 222, and 223, the smoke image or explosion image is displayed until all the variable displays corresponding to the reserved game that existed when the smoke image or explosion image began to be displayed have ended. However, these displays may be ended at a predetermined timing before the variable displays corresponding to all reserved game games have ended. For example, the display of the smoke image or explosion image may be ended at the timing t35 when the variable display displaying the smoke image or explosion image ends and a new variable display begins, thereby making the reserved game game visible. It is preferable that only normal reserved game images are displayed at this time, and that highly anticipated reserved game images (e.g., red reserved game images) are not displayed. The period during which only normal reserved game images are displayed may be determined not only based on the number of remaining variations, but also based on the elapse of a predetermined time (e.g., 120 seconds) from the time when the display of the smoke image or explosion image has ended.
In this way, by ending the special game-related display (display of smoke images and explosion images) in a short period of time, while prohibiting specific effects (preview effects) for a predetermined period of time and displaying only normal reserved images for a predetermined period of time, the player can only see the normal reserved images for reserved items, and cannot see reserved images with high expectations, but can still know the number of reserved items. Also, it is possible to prevent the embarrassment of other players finding out that the smoke images and explosion images were displayed for a long period of time and the player was unable to operate the operating means properly.

The gaming machine may also be equipped with a new operating means that, when operated while a special game-related display such as a smoke image or explosion image is being displayed, can terminate the special game-related display before its display end period has arrived. While this operating means may be designed to terminate the display early with a simple operation, requiring a special operation such as multiple operations is preferable in terms of preventing erroneous operations, as the display will be terminated early as a result of the operation being performed with the clear intention of terminating the display. Furthermore, even if the operating means is operated to terminate a special game-related display such as a smoke image or explosion image, it is preferable that the execution of pre-reading effects be prohibited for a predetermined period of time in games that proceed after the special operation of the operating means is performed. Furthermore, it is preferable that only the normal hold image is displayed during this predetermined period of time.

When a long press is performed, the display may be in the manner shown in Figures 219(d) and 222 (an explosion image is displayed, the reserved image becomes invisible, and the decorative pattern is difficult to see), and when an operation that does not involve repeated pressing or a long press is performed or when no operation is performed, the display may be in the manner shown in Figures 219(c) and 221 (a smoke image is displayed and the reserved image is normally reserved).
In this case, if a player dares to perform an operation different from the operation instructions, an explosion image will be displayed, the reserved image will become invisible, and the decorative patterns will also become difficult to see, resulting in a game situation in which a severe penalty will be imposed compared to if no operation was performed.
On the other hand, if an operation that does not involve rapid tapping or long pressing is performed, or if no operation is performed, a smoke image will be displayed and only the normal reserved image will be displayed, but the number of reserved items can be recognized. This is because it would be cruel to give a large penalty for a situation where the player is unable to perform an operation (for example, when purchasing a drink from a store clerk).

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 219, restrictions were placed on the display content based on the operation mode during one valid operation period (timing t18 to timing t22), but it is also possible to execute the presentation shown with reference to Figure 219 multiple times, and place restrictions on the display content if the player performs an operation that does not amount to rapid tapping or a long press, or if no operation occurs multiple times (a predetermined number of times, two or more times) during the valid operation period.
In this case, in the performance up to the predetermined number of times, it is possible to display a specific reserved image indicating high expectations by not displaying smoke images or explosion images regardless of the operation content, and in the performance when the predetermined number of times is reached, it is also possible to display a smoke image and only a normal reserved image as the reserved image, or to display an explosion image so that the reserved image cannot be seen.

Alternatively, if the player performs an operation that does not amount to rapid tapping or a long press, or if no operation occurs multiple times (two or more times, a predetermined number of times), a special effect may be executed when the decorative pattern changes from the next time onwards, so that only a normal reserved image is displayed as the reserved image, or the reserved image becomes invisible.
As a special effect, for example, the effect examples shown with reference to Figures 221(a) to 221(f), the effect examples shown with reference to Figures 222(a) to 222(f), the effect examples shown with reference to Figures 222(a) to 223(d), etc. may be modified to execute an effect in which the player cannot intervene without generating an effective operation period in these effect examples (and without displaying a simulated image of the operation unit), and smoke images or explosion images may be automatically displayed.
The special effect may be executed on the next variable display after the variable display for which the predetermined number of appropriate operations have not been performed, or may be executed on the variable display after a predetermined number of randomly selected times (for example, after 2 to 10 rotations) from the variable display for which the predetermined number of appropriate operations have not been performed, or may be started after a randomly selected period of time has elapsed (for example, after 10 to 120 seconds have elapsed) from the timing when the predetermined number of appropriate operations have not been performed.

With this configuration, a penalty is imposed only if an inappropriate operation is performed multiple times, thereby preventing a situation in which a player is suddenly penalized.
Furthermore, since the same effects as those that were operable are automatically executed in an inoperable state, it is possible to impose restrictions on the display that suggests the degree of expectation in a natural way as an effect.
If the player continues to ignore the operation instructions, the pending display indicating high expectations will no longer be displayed, allowing the player to concentrate solely on the display of the currently changing decorative symbols. In other words, it can be said that the player can change the presentation mode to suit their preferences.

In this embodiment, the execution of a specific effect (displaying a highly anticipated hold image based on a read-ahead hold) is restricted for holds that existed at the time an operation was not performed appropriately, but the execution of the specific effect is not restricted for holds that occurred after the time an operation was not performed appropriately. For example, the execution of the specific effect could be restricted a predetermined number of times (number of holds), but in this case, it would be possible for a player to commit nuisance behavior by deliberately performing an inappropriate operation on the gaming machine they were playing at, leaving the store, and then forcing the next player to play on that gaming machine to start play with the execution of the effect restricted. Therefore, by not restricting the execution of the specific effect (read-ahead effect) for holds that occurred after the time an operation was not performed appropriately, it is possible to prevent players from committing nuisance behavior against other players.

Instead of continuously displaying the smoke image, the smoke image may alternate between being displayed and not being displayed, for example, every 0.5 seconds.
By using such a configuration, it is possible to highlight specific effects (preview effects such as a bomb character image, a reserved image, etc.) that may be displayed together with the special game-related display (smoke image).

The explosion image or the smoke image shown with reference to FIG. 223 may also be alternately displayed and hidden. For example, the explosion image or the smoke image may be alternately displayed and hidden every 0.5 seconds. When the explosion image or the smoke image shown with reference to FIG. 223 is hidden, the reserved image hidden by the explosion image or the smoke image becomes visible, but it is preferable that only the normal reserved image (white reserved image) be displayed.
By adopting such a configuration, it becomes impossible to recognize the degree of expectation regarding the reservation and it becomes difficult to recognize the number of reservations, making it possible to impose an appropriate penalty on the player.

In this embodiment, as described above, the display position of the smoke image varies depending on the timing of rapid tap detection. For example, if rapid taps are detected early, the smoke image is displayed relatively higher in the display area; if rapid taps are detected late, the smoke image is displayed relatively lower in the display area. In other words, the later rapid tap detection is, the closer the smoke image is displayed to the display position of the smoke image that would be displayed if a long press were detected. Furthermore, the smoke image displayed by a rapid tap operation and the smoke image displayed by a long press operation are the same image. For this reason, if a player performs rapid taps just before the valid operation period ends, it is difficult to distinguish from a case where the player has performed a long press operation by mistake. This makes it difficult for other players to tell whether the player performed the operation appropriately or incorrectly, even if they see the smoke image being displayed. This prevents other players from noticing and feeling embarrassed even if the player performed the wrong operation.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 221, all of the holds from the first to the fourth are displayed as normal holds, but the first to fourth holds may be displayed only with normal hold images, but the hold images may continue to be displayed in a manner that indicates a higher likelihood of a jackpot than normal holds. For example, if the hold is a hold indicating a high likelihood, it is advisable not to change the display mode of the hold even if the display of a smoke image begins. Furthermore, while the smoke image is being displayed, it may be possible to change the hold from a normal hold image to a hold image indicating a higher likelihood of a jackpot (for example, a red hold image).

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 222 and 223, the first through fourth holds may be hidden by a smoke image or an explosion image, and the hold in question may not be hidden. Furthermore, if the hold in question is a hold image indicating high expectations, it is preferable that the display mode of the hold in question does not change to a normal hold image even if a smoke image or explosion image begins to be displayed. Furthermore, while a smoke image or explosion image is being displayed, it may be possible to change the hold in question from a normal hold image to a hold image indicating higher expectations (for example, a red hold image).

By configuring it in this way, the player is not shown the expected results for the first through fourth reserves, but the expected results for the currently changing decorative pattern are shown to the player by the display mode of that reserve, preventing the penalty given to the player from becoming excessive.

In the examples of effects shown in Figures 220 to 223, instead of the smoke image or explosion image, a dialogue window of "Colonel Dyna" may be displayed in the display position of the smoke image or explosion image. In this case, as for the reserved image, it is preferable to display only the normal reserved image as described above, or to limit the visibility of the reserved image by displaying a dialogue window in place of the smoke image or explosion image. Also, a character string such as "Check the operation content and operate carefully!" may be displayed in the dialogue window. Alternatively, when rapid tapping is performed appropriately, it may display "You did a good job of rapid tapping!", or when rapid tapping is not performed appropriately, it may display "You should have rapid tapped!". Alternatively, a character string such as "Don't confuse rapid tapping with long press!" may be displayed to indicate that there are multiple operation modes.
In this way, by displaying a message regarding the operation of the operating means, a player who is not familiar with the operation method of the operating means can learn the operation method of the operating means after the expiration of the valid operation period, and can operate the operating means well from the next time onwards.

In the example shown, a hold image indicating high expectations is displayed instead of the normal hold image by predicting the outcome, but other display modes of presentations other than hold images may also be used to indicate high expectations for a specific hold.

The display mode of the pending image indicates the likelihood that the special lottery result will be a jackpot, but the display mode of the pending image may also indicate the likelihood that other events will occur. For example, it may indicate the likelihood of a guaranteed jackpot, or the likelihood of a loss with time reduction.

With reference to Figures 137 to 223, we have described embodiments that further enhance the entertainment value of effects using the operation unit. Below, we will explain embodiments that can be applied to these embodiments.

While an example has been shown in which the operating unit is located at the bottom of the door frame, other operating units may also be used. For example, a non-contact infrared sensor may be installed on the gaming board, and the glass plate may be divided into multiple equal regions in a cross shape, for example, four regions at the top right, bottom right, bottom left, and top left, and an operation may be accepted when the player's hand approaches one of these regions. With this configuration, the player will move their hand upwards significantly, giving them a greater sense of participation in the game. In this regard, sensors may be installed on the movable parts of the movable body installed on the frame (such as parts resembling rabbit ears) to detect movement by the player, and these movable parts may be given the function of accepting operation inputs from the player. In this case, the sense of participation in the game will be further enhanced.

In the various operational instructions in each embodiment shown with reference to Figures 137 to 223, a special display may be displayed when a specific operation that does not comply with the operational instructions (for example, operating in a different manner than instructed, operating an operation unit different from the one instructed, etc.) is performed. For example, each embodiment may be modified so that an image that would normally be displayed when an operation is performed in compliance with the operational instructions is displayed when a specific operation that does not comply with the operational instructions is performed.

On the other hand, there are players, such as tired players and elderly players, who may be reluctant to perform such large-body inputs. Therefore, one or more sensors may be installed in a designated area within the game area, and the detection of a game ball launched by the player into the game area by this sensor may be used to indicate operation of the various control units described above. In this case, the player can operate the control unit solely with their right hand, allowing even tired or elderly players to perform control inputs while launching game balls. It is also possible to accept both operation of the control unit and input from a sensor installed in a designated area, and display a visual effect corresponding to the control input when input is made to either one. Alternatively, the game may be configured so that the player or a game parlor staff member can select whether to accept input from the control unit or the sensor installed in the designated area. Alternatively, the game may be configured so that input is only received from the game ball being launched. The predetermined area may be a dedicated effect sensor on the game board that can detect the passage or approach of a gaming ball. Alternatively, operation input may be accepted based on the entry (detected by a sensor) of a gaming ball into an existing winning slot (e.g., a general winning slot, a first starting slot, a gate, a special winning slot, etc.). Note that instead of a predetermined area, a sensor function may be added to an existing component. For example, a sensor may be provided on a backflow prevention member at the top end of the rail or on the impact stop at the upper right of the game board, so that operation input is accepted when it detects the passage or collision of a gaming ball launched based on a player's operation. Note that, to correspond to directional input of a lever, two or more sensors installed in different positions may be used to simulate directional input. Furthermore, operation time may be calculated based on the number of detections per unit time. In this way, operation input may be accepted by the player adjusting the strength of the launch of the gaming ball so that a predetermined sensor detects the gaming ball. This allows for a greater variety of effects by reducing the number of control elements and enabling additional effects to be displayed based on the operation received from the control elements.

144 to 148 have been shown embodiments capable of displaying a predetermined image hidden by a shield image. However, the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 144 to 148 may be configured so that simulated images representing multiple operation units are displayed and can be hidden by shield images. Furthermore, operation instruction displays may be displayed corresponding to multiple operation units and can be hidden by shield images. Furthermore, operation correspondence displays may be displayed corresponding to operations performed on multiple operation units and can be hidden by shield images. By using such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for players who are not very interested in operating the operation units to see the displays related to the multiple operation units.
Similarly, the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 149 to 223 may also be configured to be able to display a shield image and display a plurality of operation units.
The display of the shield image may be configured to be performed by operating a predetermined operation unit (defense button 3740, etc.).

Referring to Figures 137 to 223, we have shown various effects such as "Shield Bullet Reach," "Special Machine Gun Reach," "Silent Machine Gun Reach," "Bomb Character Reach," "Sudden Tank Effect," "Full Power Breakthrough Reach," and "AI Tank Reach." However, it is possible to adopt a specific technical concept in one effect as the technical concept in another effect. It is also possible to adopt multiple technical concepts in multiple effects as multiple technical concepts in one effect.

For example, the display of a shield image related to the "shield bullet reach" may be applied to each of the effects of the "special machine gun reach,""silent machine gun reach,""bomb character reach,""sudden tank effect,""full power breakthrough reach," and "AI tank reach." In this case, the degree of expectation may be indicated by a method related to the "shield bullet reach" in a predetermined image displayed in each effect (an image of an enemy tank, an image of a bomb character, an image imitating a predetermined button, an image of an exploding shell, an image of an exploding bullet, a smoke image, a white flag image, or other image used in each effect). Also, the degree of expectation indicated in this way may be configured to be hidden by the shield image.
In addition, the predictive aspects of the "sudden tank effect", the execution aspects of the predictive effects, and their technical concepts may be applied to the "shield bullet reach", "special machine gun reach", "silent machine gun reach", "bomb character reach", "full power breakthrough reach", and "AI tank reach", and the "shield bullet reach", "special machine gun reach", "silent machine gun reach", "bomb character reach", "full power breakthrough reach", and "AI tank reach" may be executed over multiple variable displays.
For example, a presentation style or technical concept using an image of a destroyed enemy tank in a "sudden tank presentation" may be applied to a presentation style using a shield image in a "shield bullet reach" or a smoke image in a "full-power breakthrough reach."
Also, the shield image or smoke image may be configured so that the player can display it multiple times, or the shield image or smoke image may be configured to be displayed across the variable display. In this case, it is preferable to configure the image that indicates the degree of expectation corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the pre-read (in the "sudden tank effect," the image of the destroyed enemy tank) to be hidden by the shield image or smoke image.
Also, for example, in the "Special Machine Gun Reach" and "Silent Machine Gun Reach," images of shells fired from a cannon, bullets fired from a machine gun, and exploding shells and bullets may be displayed across the variable display.
Also, for example, in a "bomb character reach," it may be configured so that a collision scene between the bomb character and the player's tank can occur not only while the decorative pattern is changing, but also just before the decorative pattern stops changing, so that there may be cases where the player's tank explodes (part of the player's tank is destroyed) across the decorative pattern's stopped display, and cases where the player's tank does not explode across the decorative pattern's stopped display.In addition, just before the change display that is the target of the look-ahead stops changing, it is advisable to execute an effect that displays a large bomb character as shown in Figures 164, 169, 170, etc.
In addition, in the "Full Power Breakthrough Reach," the player may be attacked by enemy artillery shells multiple times during one display of a changing decorative pattern. Also, a smoke image may be displayed across the display of changing decorative patterns. After multiple display effects based on the prediction are performed in this way, a display of enemy tanks appearing at the final timing of the display change that was the subject of the prediction may be displayed.
Furthermore, in the "AI Tank Reach" mode, multiple variable displays may be displayed based on the prediction. In this case, each variable display may be configured to have one or more encounters with an enemy tank. At least, an encounter with an enemy tank may occur immediately before the decorative symbol stops changing, and an image of a shell or bullet being destroyed may be displayed across the decorative symbol changing display. Furthermore, when the left lever 3720, which is not normally operated, is operated, a tank may fall off a cliff on the left side of the road and a smoke image may be displayed on the screen as a visual effect. In this case, the smoke image may be displayed across multiple decorative symbol changing displays until the decorative symbol changing display that is the target of the predictive visual effect stops.
In each of the effects of "Shield Bullet Reach,""Special Machine Gun Reach,""Silent Machine Gun Reach,""Bomb Character Reach,""Sudden Tank Effect,""Full Power Breakthrough Reach," and "AI Tank Reach," the mission button 3700, attack button 3710, left lever 3720, defense button 3740, etc. have been shown to be operable. However, for some or all of the operation units in each effect example, the valid period may be configured to be executable during the display of the decorative pattern variations, or across the display of multiple decorative pattern variations when a pre-reading effect is performed. Furthermore, the valid number of operations may be configured to be executable multiple times during the display of one decorative pattern variations. Furthermore, the display corresponding to the operation acceptance of the operation unit may be configured to be displayed multiple times. Furthermore, the display corresponding to such operation acceptance may be configured to be displayed across the display of the decorative pattern variations.
By configuring it this way, some kind of reaction on the display occurs in response to the player's operation on the operation unit, which makes it possible to satisfy the player. Furthermore, by executing the effect display based on the operation across the changing display without being interrupted by the stopping display of the changing display, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the effect that has been executed.

Conventionally, gaming machines capable of executing a display effect in which effect images are switched depending on the game situation have been known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-340037).
However, if the display effect of switching effect images feels strange to the player, it may decrease the interest, and there is a need for a more appropriate display method for the display effect of switching effect images. Also, by realizing a more appropriate display method, it is possible to increase the interest.
Therefore, in the embodiment shown below, we will explain a gaming machine that is less likely to make players feel uncomfortable with the display effects that switch between presentation images, and that can prevent a decline in interest and increase interest.

Below, an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment shown with reference to Figs. 123 to 125, 137 to 148, etc. will be described with reference to Figs. 224 to 236, etc. Figs. 224 to 228 show examples of images displayed in this embodiment (or a modification). Fig. 229 shows the display priority of these images. Figs. 230 and 233 show time charts in this embodiment. Figs. 231, 232, and 234 to 236 show display examples in this embodiment.
In this embodiment, in the special reach effects such as "giant tank reach" and "enemy tank destruction reach," a special reach background image is displayed instead of the normal background image.

224 to 226 show examples of images displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 in this embodiment. Specifically, background images (normal background image A, normal background image B, special reach background image A, special reach background image B, normal background image C displayed during right-hand hits), images of various decorative symbols, images of the player's tank and enemy tank, a belt-shaped pre-reading effect image, the reserved image, the first reserved image to the fourth reserved image, a character image for the revival effect, the fourth symbol, an image displaying the number of reserved symbols, and an error notification image are shown.
Note that data of various images and moving images in this embodiment and its modified examples is stored in advance in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b.
As shown in Figures 225 and 226, images other than the background image are also shown as horizontally long rectangles in the figures, and in this case the horizontally long rectangles indicate the display area. This makes it possible to clearly show the size and position of images other than the background image when they are displayed in the display area. Note that images displayed in the display area may be explained in figures other than Figures 225 and 226, and the same applies in these cases.

224(a) shows a normal background image A. The normal background image A is an image showing a state in which multiple tanks have gathered near a destroyed building.
224(b) shows a normal background image B. The normal background image B is an image showing a tank parked in a hangar.
The normal background image A and the normal background image B are images that are displayed when the gaming state is in the normal state.

224(c) shows a special reach background image A that is displayed when a "giant tank reach" effect, which is a special reach effect, is executed. The special reach background image A is an image that depicts the sky, the desert, and an unpaved road.
224(d) shows a special reach background image B that is displayed when the special reach effect, "enemy tank destruction reach," is executed. The special reach background image B is an image depicting the sky, grassland, and road.

Figure 224 (e) shows the normal background image C that is displayed when the player enters a special state or time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, which may occur after the end of a jackpot game state. The normal background image C is an image that indicates to the player to hit the right.

The size (number of pixels) of the background image is the same as the size of the display area. The background image is also opaque. Therefore, no image will be displayed behind the background image and will not be visible to the player.

Figure 225 shows examples of decorative symbols that can be displayed on the pachinko machine 1. Each decorative symbol consists of a left decorative symbol, a center decorative symbol, and a right decorative symbol. These are switched and displayed as appropriate depending on the progress of the presentation and the game situation.

225(a) shows a normal decorative symbol. This figure shows an example of a normal decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed, but each normal decorative symbol can be displayed by scrolling in a predetermined direction (for example, downward) or can be displayed temporarily stopped at a predetermined position.
The display mode of the normal decorative symbols is determined according to the result of the special lottery, and if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, they are displayed as a sequence of numbers (for example, "222"), and if the result of the special lottery is not a jackpot, they are displayed as a sequence of numbers that are not a sequence (for example, "352"). Figure 225(a) shows an example of the normal decorative symbol being displayed as "352".
A typical decorative pattern consists of a vertically long rectangular background area and numbers and characters arranged in front of the background area. The numbers and characters have a one-to-one correspondence.

Figure 225 (b) shows the special reach decorative pattern that is displayed when the special reach effects, such as the "Giant Tank Reach" effect and the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" effect, are executed.
The special reach decorative symbols are displayed in a smaller size than the normal decorative symbols near the center of the display area, making it easier for players to see the effects that suggest the special lottery results that are executed during the "Giant Tank Reach" effect and the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" effect.
225(c) shows a modified example of the special reach decoration symbol. In this way, the special reach decoration symbol in which the numbers are displayed more emphasized may be adopted.
Note that Figures 225(b) and 225(c) show the state in which the special reach decorative pattern is temporarily stopped.
During the reach performance, only the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern may be displayed, and the center decorative pattern may not be displayed.

Figure 225(d) shows the right-hit decorative pattern that is displayed during a right-hit. The right-hit decorative pattern is a decorative pattern that is displayed in game states that require the player to hit the right, such as a probability hit state or a time-saving state. Figure 225(d) shows the state in which the right-hit decorative pattern is displayed stopped at "352."

As shown in Figure 225, normal decorative symbols, special reach decorative symbols, and right-hand decorative symbols can be distinguished by the size and design of the background area, the presence or absence of characters, the size of the numbers, etc. This makes it easy to understand the presentation situation and game status by visually checking the decorative symbols.

226(a) shows an image of the player's tank, an image of the enemy tank, an image of lines from "Sergeant Might," an image of lines from "Colonel Dyna," and a simulated image of the mission button 3700, which are displayed when the "Giant Tank Reach" effect is executed. The display manner of these images suggests the result of the special lottery.
226(b) shows an image of the player's tank, an image of the enemy tank, an image of lines from "Sergeant Might," an image of lines from "Colonel Dyna," and a simulated image of the attack button 3710, which are displayed when the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" effect is executed. The display manner of these images suggests the result of the special lottery.
The specific manner in which the special lottery results are indicated will be described later with reference to Figure 233, etc.

Figure 226 (d) shows a reserved image. At the bottom of the display area, from left to right, the reserved display area, the first reserved display area, the second reserved display area, the third reserved display area, and the fourth reserved display area are set. The reserved image and the reserved image are circular in shape and are basically white in color. In addition, the diameter of the circle of the reserved image is larger than that of the reserved image.
The figure shows an example in which the pending image is displayed in the pending display area, and pending images are displayed in the first pending display area to the fourth pending display area.
When a game ball wins the first starting hole 2002, the reserved image or reserved images are displayed in the reserved display area, the first reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area. For example, when the reserved image is displayed in the reserved display area and reserved images are displayed in the first reserved display area and the second reserved display area (i.e., when there are two reserved images), if a game ball wins the first starting hole 2002, the reserved image is displayed in the third reserved display area.

As shown with reference to Figures 123 to 125, based on the prediction of the reserved items, a specific reserved item image or a specific reserved item image that has a different display format (color or shape) from the normal reserved item image or reserved item image (circular white) may be displayed, and the display format may indicate that there is a high expectation that the special lottery result corresponding to that reserved item will be a jackpot.

For example, instead of the usual white reserved image, a reserved image of a predetermined color (e.g., red) may be displayed to indicate that there is a high expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a jackpot.
More specifically, for example, the expectation of a jackpot may be increased in the order of white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow colors. Also, the display probability may be configured to decrease in this order. In other words, the lower the expectation, the higher the probability of appearance, and the higher the expectation, the lower the probability of appearance. Note that the expectation for rainbow colors may be set to 100%. Note that, not only for reserved images, but generally, the higher the expectation, the lower the probability of appearance.
If the expected probability of rainbow colors is set to 100%, a predetermined image may be displayed in rainbow colors as an effect during a jackpot game. For example, all or some of the characters displayed during a jackpot game may be displayed in rainbow colors. Also, when the number of game balls paid out during a jackpot game is displayed numerically, the number may be displayed in rainbow colors. Note that the rainbow colors used when displaying the number of game balls, etc., are not used to indicate any degree of expectation, but are simply used to enhance the effect.
In addition, a reserve read-ahead process may be performed during jackpot play, and if there is a lottery result in the reserve that will result in a jackpot, a specific rainbow-colored image (for example, text such as "Another jackpot next time!?") may be displayed to notify the player that a jackpot will occur soon.

Strictly speaking, there is no single color called gold, but by combining pixels that emit yellow, ochre, and white light in a specific display area in a specific manner as part of the display process, it is possible to achieve a display that the player perceives as gold, a color with a metallic luster.

Although there is no single color that can be called the rainbow, a display process can be used to illuminate pixels in stripes in a specified display area (for example, a specified character image) in the following order: blue, light blue, green, yellow, red, pink, blue, light blue, green, etc., to create a display that the player perceives as the colors of the rainbow. In addition, within this specified display area, each striped illuminated area may be moved in a certain direction (for example, a direction perpendicular to the direction of the stripes).

When displaying the colors of the rainbow, it is desirable that the areas displaying the six colors that make up the rainbow be visible at the same time within a specified display area. Depending on the size of the specified display area, there may be cases where some of the six colors that make up the rainbow are not displayed, but in this case, by displaying more than half of the six colors (i.e., four or more colors) and moving the areas painted with each color in a certain direction so that each color is displayed in sequence, the player can recognize that the colors of the rainbow are being displayed.
The relationship between the expectation level and the display probability (proportion to the number of variable display times) can be configured, for example, so that the reserved image or reserved picture displayed at the time of initial winning has the highest probability of being a white reserved image or reserved picture, and the lowest probability of being a rainbow-colored reserved image or reserved picture.
In addition, it is preferable to configure the reserved image that was last displayed at the timing when the decorative pattern change ends so that it has the highest probability of being a white reserved image and the lowest probability of being a rainbow-colored reserved image.

Furthermore, the reserved image or reserved image may be displayed in green, red, or gold when the initial winning is achieved, or the reserved image or reserved image that is white when the initial winning is achieved may change to a green, red, or gold reserved image or reserved image at a predetermined timing before the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.

Note that this change at a predetermined timing from a presentation mode indicating a predetermined expectation level to a presentation mode indicating a higher expectation level is sometimes referred to as "promotion."
Conversely, changing the presentation style indicating a predetermined expectation level to a style indicating a lower expectation level at a predetermined timing may be referred to as "demotion."

It is desirable to set the probability of "promotion" or "demotion" being executed at a low rate (for example, the probability of "promotion" or "demotion" being executed at a rate of approximately 5-10% when the expected level is indicated by a predetermined color is used as the denominator). This makes it possible to raise or lower the expected level indicated while maintaining a rough correspondence between the expected level and the color. Note that promotion is a desirable event for players, but demotion is not. Therefore, in order to prevent a decline in interest, promotion may be executable but demotion may not be executed.

Note that the execution of a specified effect may or may not result in promotion, and effects that do not result in promotion are sometimes referred to as "fake." Also, when a highly anticipated effect is executed, but the variable display results in a miss, this is sometimes referred to as "fake."

The examples above show how the terms "promotion" and "demotion" are used to describe changes in the likelihood of winning a jackpot. However, when suggesting a gaming benefit to a player, a change in the gaming benefit to a player's advantage or an increase in the amount of benefit awarded to the player may be referred to as "promotion." Conversely, when suggesting a gaming benefit to a player, a change in the gaming benefit to a player's disadvantage or a decrease in the amount of benefit awarded to the player may be referred to as "promotion." For example, a change from a ready-to-win state formed by a "normal symbol" to a ready-to-win state formed by a "probability variable symbol" may be referred to as "promotion." Furthermore, as a presentation at the start of a jackpot game to announce the number of rounds (assuming the number of balls dispensed per round is constant), a presentation may be implemented that announces "four rounds" at the start of the jackpot game and announces that the jackpot game will continue for up to eight rounds at a predetermined round before the fourth round. In this case, the number of rounds is referred to as being "promoted."

While the reserved image and reserved image have been used as examples, the color of the image used for other effects can also suggest the level of expectation, just like the reserved image and reserved image.

Although it has been shown that the expected jackpot probability increases in the colors of reserved images in the order of white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow, it is also possible to use only some of these colors for other effect images rather than all of these colors. Even in this case, it is preferable that the order of expectation probability and the order of appearance probability do not change. For example, if three colors, white, red, and gold, are used as the colors of the predetermined effect images, it is preferable that the red effect image has a higher expectation probability but a lower appearance probability than the white effect image, and the gold effect image has a higher expectation probability but a lower appearance probability than the red effect image.
In addition, when three colors, blue, green, and red, are adopted as the colors of the other effect images, it is preferable that the green effect image has a higher expectation but a lower probability of appearance than the blue effect image, and that the red effect image has a higher expectation but a lower probability of appearance than the green effect image.
In this way, even if the indication of the degree of expectation using specified colors is made in a different presentation, the relationship between the order of the colors and the degree of expectation and appearance probability does not change, so the player can recognize the general degree of expectation.

Although an image (such as the reserved image) has been used as an example, the degree of expectation can also be indicated by the light-emitting color of a decorative element equipped with a light-emitting element, just like the reserved image. For example, a plurality of light-emitting elements such as LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light may be mounted on a decorative element visible to the player, and each may be made to emit light in a predetermined color. Note that instead of a light-emitting element, a group of light-emitting elements consisting of a plurality of light-emitting elements may be made to emit light in a predetermined color.
For gold, it is preferable to appropriately illuminate multiple light-emitting elements in the following order: yellow, white, and ochre. Similarly, for rainbow colors, it is preferable to appropriately illuminate multiple light-emitting elements in a striped or circular pattern in the following order: blue, light blue, green, yellow, red, pink, blue, light blue, green, etc. Furthermore, the light-emitting elements may be cyclically changed so that the colors appear to be moving. Furthermore, rainbow light-emitting elements may be realized using multiple decorative elements each equipped with multiple light-emitting elements. It is preferable that the six colors constituting the rainbow are illuminated by a light-emitting element at a certain timing. Alternatively, rainbow light-emitting elements may be realized by chronologically illuminating one or more light-emitting elements (or a group of light-emitting elements) in the following order: blue, light blue, green, yellow, red, pink, blue, light blue, green, etc. In this case, the light-emitting elements may emit any of the following colors at a certain timing: blue, light blue, green, yellow, red, and pink. With this type of light emission, even if the number of light emitting elements (or groups of light emitting elements) is less than the number of light emitting colors (for example, five or less), a rainbow-colored light emission pattern can be provided to the player.
Although the embodiment has been described in which one decorative member is used to emit light in gold or rainbow colors, it is also possible to realize an embodiment in which multiple decorative members are each made to emit light in gold or rainbow colors.

In addition, an effect with a 100% expectation of a jackpot but a low occurrence rate (for example, an effect that is executed with a 5% probability in a variable display that results in a jackpot) is sometimes referred to as a premium effect (sometimes simply referred to as premium or premium for short). Because the expectation of a premium effect is 100%, it is not executed if the variable display result is a miss. Premium effects can include the display of a special image (for example, a special character image, a special pending image to a special fourth pending image, a special icon image, or a special background image), the display of a special video, the output of a special sound or special background music, the display of a special operation unit simulating image when a button operation is valid, the execution of a special reach effect, and the execution of light-emitting control that lights or flashes the light-emitting decoration means in a special manner.
In addition, the predetermined presentation modes described in this specification may be adopted as premium presentation modes. These images or videos may be displayed in rainbow colors, or rainbow colors may be used as the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting decorative means. Furthermore, among these presentation modes, multiple (two or more) presentation modes may be executed in one variable display.
Furthermore, when describing various images, etc., displayed in these premium effects, the word "premium" (or "premier") is sometimes placed before the name of the image, etc., to describe the image, etc. For example, it is used in the form of premium image, premium character (image), premium hold (image), premium icon, premium background (image), premium reach (effect), etc. Similarly, sound is sometimes referred to as premium sound. When these images are displayed, reach effects are executed, or sounds are output, a jackpot will definitely occur.

If a premium effect is executed in 5% of the variable displays that result in a jackpot, and the probability of a jackpot is 1/300, then the probability of the premium effect being executed is 1/6000. On the other hand, compared to premium effects, other effects have a relatively low expectation and a high probability of being executed. For example, the probability of the blue pending image, which has a relatively low expectation, being displayed is higher than the probability of the premium effect being executed (e.g., 1/15). Similarly, the probability of a normal reach, which has a relatively low expectation, occurring is higher than the probability of the premium effect being executed (e.g., 1/10).

When a premium effect is executed, experienced players will instantly recognize that a jackpot has occurred, and will feel a great excitement not only because a jackpot has been confirmed, but also because a premium effect with a low probability of occurring has been executed. Meanwhile, players who are inexperienced will gradually become able to recognize that a jackpot has occurred as they gain more gaming experience, by experiencing the process of recognizing that an unfamiliar special effect is being executed and ultimately resulting in a jackpot.

As mentioned above, the execution of a premium effect indicates that a jackpot will occur, but it may also be configured to indicate that a specific jackpot will occur. For example, the premium effect may be executed only when the highest value jackpot occurs among multiple types of jackpots of different values. For example, if there are three types of jackpots, a 3R jackpot, a 6R jackpot, and a 10R jackpot (note that the maximum number of balls dispensed per round is the same for each jackpot), the premium effect may be executed only when a 10R jackpot, which has the most rounds, occurs. Alternatively, if there are two types of jackpots, a low-probability time-saving jackpot and a high-probability time-saving jackpot (note that the number of rounds and the maximum number of balls dispensed per round are the same for both jackpots), the premium effect may be executed only when a high-probability time-saving jackpot occurs.

Note that the reserved image or reserved image corresponding to the game ball entering the first starting hole 2002 is displayed in the reserved display area and the first to fourth reserved display areas. However, for example, in response to the game ball entering the second starting hole 2004 during a right-hand hit, the reserved image or reserved image corresponding to the game ball entering the second starting hole 2004 may be displayed in a similar manner in the reserved display area and the first to fourth reserved display areas.

Alternatively, the reserved image or reserved picture corresponding to the winning of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 2004 may be displayed in the same position as the reserved image or reserved picture corresponding to the winning of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 2002, but in a different display format. For example, the reserved image or reserved picture may be represented as a hexagonal shape instead of a circle, or by superimposing the word "electric chute" on each circular image.

In addition, the reserved image or reserved picture corresponding to the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 2004 may be displayed in the same display format as the reserved image or reserved picture corresponding to the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 2002 but in a different position (for example, the lower left side of the display area).
In addition, these may be combined to display the reserved image or reserved images corresponding to the winning of the game ball into the second starting hole 2004 in different positions and in different display modes.
By adopting such a configuration, the player can understand which starting slot the reserved ball corresponds to.

Figure 226 (e) shows the revival effect character and its dialogue that may be displayed when the decorative pattern temporarily stops in a reach miss state. Details of the effect using the revival effect character will be described later.

Figure 226(f) shows the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol that indicates whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405, and is displayed, for example, in the upper right corner of the display area, smaller than the decorative symbols shown in Figures 225(a) to 225(d). The fourth symbol begins to display in a variable manner at the same time as the special symbol begins to display in a variable manner, and is displayed in a static manner at the same time as the special symbol is displayed in a static manner. Similarly, the decorative symbol begins to display in a variable manner at the same time as the special symbol begins to display in a variable manner, and is displayed in a static manner at the same time as the special symbol is displayed in a static manner.
In addition, like the decorative symbols, the fourth symbol is displayed in a doublet mode if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, and is displayed in a mode other than a doublet mode if the result of the special lottery is a loss. Figure 226(f) shows the number "352" displayed as the fourth symbol.

Although the fourth symbol is shown as consisting of three numbers in the embodiment, the result of the special lottery may be shown by only two symbols, a "○" symbol indicating a jackpot and an "×" symbol indicating a loss, as the type of symbol displayed as the fourth symbol. While the special symbol is being displayed, the "○" and the "×" may be alternately displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds).
According to this configuration, while the decorative pattern is being displayed in a changing manner, "○" and "×" are displayed alternately as the fourth pattern, and if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state in a manner that matches the pattern, and the fourth pattern is displayed as a stopped "○", and if the result of the special lottery is a loser, the decorative pattern is displayed in a manner other than a stopped state, and the fourth pattern is displayed as a stopped "×".
In this case, the combination of decorative symbols that are displayed in a stopped state can be displayed in different ways for each variable display, but the symbols that are displayed as the fourth symbol in a stopped state are only two types: "○" and "×".

In this embodiment, the change display of the first special pattern display 1403 and the change display of the second special pattern display 1405 are not performed simultaneously, so the fourth pattern indicates the change status of both the first special pattern display 1403 and the second special pattern display 1405. However, the fourth pattern corresponding to the first special pattern display 1403 and the fourth pattern corresponding to the second special pattern display 1405 may be provided separately. For example, the fourth pattern corresponding to the first special pattern display 1403 may be displayed above the reserved number display image, and the fourth pattern corresponding to the second special pattern display 1405 may be displayed below the reserved number display image.

Figure 226(g) shows a hold number display image. The hold number display image consists of an image on the top that displays the hold number corresponding to the first starting port 2002, and an image on the bottom that displays the hold number corresponding to the second starting port 2004. Figure 224(h) shows an example display where there are 3 holds corresponding to the first starting port 2002 and 0 holds corresponding to the second starting port 2004. In this way, the hold number can be confirmed not only by the hold number display image shown in Figure 226(g), but also by the corresponding hold image and hold image shown in Figure 226(d).

Figure 226 (h) shows an error notification image that is displayed when some kind of abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1 is detected. The figure shows an example of a message that reads "Error has occurred. Please call a store employee." The error notification image may also show specific details of the abnormality that has occurred in the gaming machine or the fraudulent activity committed by the player. In this case, the error notification image is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the fourth symbol or the image displaying the number of reserved balls.

Note that a hitting instruction image that instructs the user to operate the handle 302 may be displayed using the same display method as the error notification image. For example, the hitting instruction image may display a message such as "Please hit to the right" or "Please return to hitting to the left." The display priority of the hitting instruction image should be higher than the display priority of the fourth symbol and the pending number display image, and lower than the display priority of the error notification image.

An object may be placed in a virtual space, a moving image may be created in which a virtual camera is moved in a predetermined manner, and the moving image may be displayed as a normal background image, so that the normal background image can be viewed dynamically.
227(a) to 227(c) show examples of displaying normal background moving image A at a predetermined timing, which is generated by tracking a group of tanks entering an enemy position in a virtual space with a virtual camera. By generating and repeatedly playing back such normal background moving image A, it is possible to repeatedly display a dynamic background image in a loop.
Specifically, Figure 227(a) shows an example of a display when a group of tanks departs, Figure 227(b) shows an example of a display when a group of tanks is entering an enemy position, and Figure 227(c) shows an example of a display when a group of tanks has entered further into an enemy position.

Although an example of displaying a moving image of a group of tanks advancing into enemy territory has been shown with reference to Figures 227(a) to 227(c), other types of moving images may also be displayed.
Below is an example of normal background video image B created by moving the virtual camera from its initial position to the right and then to the left in virtual space. In this normal background video image B, each tank is stopped inside a hangar. At the end of its movement, the virtual camera returns to the position from which it started. The orientation of the virtual camera is adjusted so that it faces the tanks. Figure 227(d) shows an example display when the virtual camera is in its initial position. Figure 227(e) shows an example display when the virtual camera has moved to the right and in front of the hangar. Figure 227(f) shows an example display when the virtual camera has moved all the way to the right. The virtual camera then moves to the left and finally returns to its initial position. The player will view video images of the tanks and hangar displayed in the order of Figure 227(d), Figure 227(e), Figure 227(f), Figure 227(e), and Figure 227(d).
When normal background moving image B is displayed in a loop, after the images are displayed in the order of Figure 227(d), Figure 227(e), Figure 227(f), and Figure 227(e), normal background moving image B is displayed again from Figure 227(d).

The length (playback time) of normal background moving image A and normal background moving image B should be set to about 30 to 120 seconds. In this case, normal background moving image A and normal background moving image B can be displayed in a loop with a cycle of about 30 to 120 seconds.
It is also possible to generate a plurality of normal background moving images such as normal background moving image A and normal background moving image B, and display them in a predetermined order, including normal background moving image A and normal background moving image B.
In addition, normal background moving image A and normal background moving image B can also be displayed across multiple variable displays, just like normal background image A and normal background image B.

As in the example described below, if the execution of a special reach effect such as a "Giant Tank Reach" effect or an "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" effect is initiated while the normal background video image A is being displayed, the background image will be changed to a background image or background video image specifically for the special reach effect.
Thereafter, in accordance with the end of the special reach effect, the normal background moving image A that was displayed before the special reach effect was performed may be displayed in place of the background image or background moving image dedicated to the special reach effect. At this time, the normal background moving image A may be displayed from the beginning of the moving image (the display state shown in FIG. 227(a)), or the playback of the normal background image A may be continued even during the special reach effect, and the normal background image A that has been progressed may be displayed in accordance with the end of the special reach effect.
Although the normal background moving image A has been taken as an example, the normal background moving image B may also be displayed in a similar manner.

In the example shown, dynamically displayed normal background moving image A and normal background moving image B are displayed instead of statically displayed normal background image A and normal background image B. However, special reach background image A, special reach background image B, the reserved image, and the reserved image may also be displayed as still images or dynamically using moving images. When displayed dynamically, the image may be displayed by looping at a predetermined cycle. For example, the special reach background image may be displayed by looping at a cycle of about 10 to 60 seconds. The reserved image and the reserved image may also be displayed by looping at a cycle of about 1 to 2 seconds.

228(a) to 228(c) show examples of background concealed images.
The background concealment image is an image that is displayed when switching between the normal background image A or normal background image B and the special reach background image that is displayed when the "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" effects are executed. The background concealment images shown in Figures 228(a) to 228(c) are made up of black images. The background concealment image can reduce the visibility of images that have a lower display priority than the background concealment image.
A plurality of background concealment images (specifically, three) with different degrees of visibility reduction are provided. In this embodiment, each background concealment image is black but has a different transparency. Specifically, three background concealment images are provided: background concealment image A ( FIG. 228( a) ), which has high transparency and a low degree of visibility reduction; background concealment image B ( FIG. 228( b) ), which has medium transparency and a medium degree of visibility reduction; and background concealment image C ( FIG. 228( c) ), which has low transparency and a high degree of visibility reduction. These are displayed sequentially in a predetermined order. As will be described in detail later, by sequentially displaying each background concealment image, the player can perceive the transition of the background images in a natural manner. Note that although three background concealment images with different degrees of transparency are shown, two or four or more background concealment images may be used, or a moving image consisting of more images may be used. In this case, the player can perceive the transition of the background in a more natural manner.
Furthermore, instead of preparing multiple background concealment images with different degrees of transparency, the visibility of the background image may be changed by gradually changing the transparency of a single black background concealment image using the functions of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. This configuration makes it possible to smoothly change the visibility of the background image while reducing the capacity used to store the background concealment images.
228(d) to 228(f) show other examples of background concealment images. In these examples, an image of a bomb character (specifically, bomb character A shown in the above-described embodiment) is used as the background concealment image. As will be described in more detail later, a white background concealment image may also be used instead of black.

Each image shown in Figures 224 to 228 has a display priority assigned to it. Figure 229 is a table showing the display priority, the name of the layer on which the image is placed, and the type of image that can be placed on each layer. For example, a background image is placed on layer L90, an image of the player's tank, an image of an enemy tank, an image of an operation instruction, etc. are placed on layers L75 to L80, and a decorative pattern is placed on layer L70, and these are displayed superimposed based on the display priority assigned to each layer.
As shown in the table in Figure 229, the display priority increases in the following order: background image (normal background image, special reach background image), various images displayed during a special reach (image of the player's tank, image of the enemy tank, image of lines from Sergeant Might, image of lines from Colonel Dyna, operation instruction images imitating the attack button 3710 and mission button 3700, etc.), decorative patterns (normal decorative patterns, special reach decorative patterns, etc.), pseudo-consecutive number display image, strip-shaped pre-reading effect image, first hold image to fourth hold image, the hold image, the line preview image described later with reference to Figure 269 etc., background concealment image, game result image described later with reference to Figure 256 etc., revival effect image (revival effect character and its lines), fourth pattern, hold number display image, error notification image.
Specifically, the display priority of the various images, decorative patterns, reserved images, etc. displayed during a special reach is higher than the display priority of the background image, and the various images, decorative patterns, reserved images, etc. displayed during a special reach are displayed in front of the background image.
On the other hand, the display priority of the background concealment image is higher than the display priority of the background image, various images displayed during special reaches, decorative patterns, the reserved image, etc., and by displaying the background concealment image in front of these images, these images are hidden and their visibility is reduced.

Although an example in which the reserved image is placed on layer L40 and the reserved image is placed on layer L45 has been shown, the reserved image may also be placed on layer L26 and the reserved image may also be placed on layer L27. In this case, the reserved image and the reserved image are not hidden by the background concealment image placed on layer L30.
Alternatively, the reserved image may be placed on layer L21, and the reserved image may be placed on layer L22. In this case, the reserved image and the reserved image are not hidden by the background concealment image placed on layer L30 or the game result image placed on layer L25.

The decorative pattern may also be placed on layer L26. In this case, the decorative pattern will not be hidden by the background concealment image placed on layer L30.

The various presentation modes in this embodiment and various modified examples are determined by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the results of the special lottery determined by the main control board 1310, the game status, etc., and are executed by the peripheral control board 1510 at predetermined timing.
For example, if the result of the special lottery is a miss, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the decorative symbols stopped in a non-reach miss state (e.g., "352") in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, or displays them in a reach state (e.g., "2↓2") and then finally displays them stopped in a reach miss state (e.g., "232"). On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, the decorative symbols are displayed in a reach state ("2↓2") and then finally displays them stopped in a matching number (e.g., "222").
The peripheral control board 1510 also decides whether or not to execute the special reach effects ("Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach") and other effects described below.

First, we will explain an example of a presentation in which the decorative pattern does not reach a winning state and the background image does not change, with reference to Figures 230(a) and 231. Figure 230(a) shows a time chart for this presentation example, and Figure 231 shows a display example at a specified timing for this presentation example.

Immediately before timing t0, the display state in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 is a state in which the decorative symbols have stopped fluctuating. Figure 231 (a) shows a state in which the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols is stopped. At this time, the number of reserved symbols is 3. As the decorative symbol, a normal decorative symbol is displayed. In addition, as the background image, a normal background image A is displayed behind the decorative symbol.
From this state, at timing t0, a new variable display of the decorative symbols begins. Figure 231(b) shows the display state immediately after the variable display begins.
After that, the left, center, and right decorative symbols are displayed in a manner that scrolls downward. Figure 231(c) shows the display state at that time.
After that, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 and the reserved image is displayed in the third reserved display area, the left decorative image is temporarily stopped and displayed at timing t5. Figure 231 (d) shows the display state at that time.

Next, at timing t10, the right decorative pattern is displayed temporarily stopped. Figure 231 (e) shows the display state at that time. Next, at timing t15, the middle decorative pattern is displayed temporarily stopped. Next, at timing t16, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed temporarily stopped. At the same time, the display of the reserved image ends. Figure 231 (f) shows the display state from timing t16 to timing t17. In this state, it is indicated that the special lottery result is a loss. From timing t17 onwards, a variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the next reserved prize is carried out.

Next, an example of a presentation in which the decorative symbol reaches a ready state but the background image is not switched will be described with reference to the time chart shown in Fig. 230(b) and the display example shown in Fig. 232. Note that during the period from timing t0 to timing t10, the same display as the presentation example shown with reference to Fig. 230(a) is performed.
In this example, at timing t10, the right decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed as the same number "2" as the left decorative symbol, and a reach state occurs. Figure 232 (a) shows the display state at that time. Then, at timing t20, the center decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, and at timing t21, the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, and the player is informed of whether the special lottery result is a miss or a jackpot.
232(b) shows an example of the display from timing t21 to timing t22 when the special lottery result is a loss. In the figure, the decorative symbol "232" is displayed stopped.
232(c) shows an example of the display from timing t21 to timing t22 when the special lottery result is a jackpot. In the figure, the decorative symbols are displayed in the sequence "222".
After timing t22, if the result of the special lottery is a miss, a variable display of a decorative pattern corresponding to the next hold is executed, and if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, the background image is switched from the normal background image A to a jackpot background image exclusively used during a jackpot, and a jackpot game state is executed.

Compared to the example of a presentation that does not result in a reach state shown with reference to Figure 230(a), the example of a presentation that does result in a reach state shown with reference to Figure 230(b) displays the decorative pattern changes for a longer period of time. This allows the player to feel a sense of anticipation for a long period of time that the special lottery result may be a jackpot.

In the presentation examples shown with reference to Figures 230(a) and 231 and Figures 230(b) and 232, while the decorative patterns are changing, only the normal background image A continues to be displayed, and the special reach background image A and special reach background image B are not displayed. Furthermore, the background concealment image is not displayed either.

The time chart in Figure 230(a) shows an example of a display in which the normal background image A continues to be displayed while the decorative symbols are changing (timing t0 to t16), while the decorative symbols are stopped (timing t16 to t17), and while the decorative symbols are changing from the next time onwards (timing t17 onwards). However, the normal background image A is also displayed when there are no reserved symbols and the decorative symbols are not changing. Figure 232(d) shows an example of a display after there are no reserved symbols and the most recent decorative symbol change display has stopped and displayed "253," indicating that the result of the special lottery was a loss. This display state is maintained unless a winning ball is placed in the first starting slot 2002 (or the second starting slot 2004).
In addition, the normal background moving image is also maintained in a display state when the decorative pattern is not changing, similar to the normal background image. Specifically, even after the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the normal background moving image that was displayed during the changing display of the decorative pattern continues to be played. Furthermore, after the normal background moving image is played to the end, it is preferable that the moving image is played again from the beginning, so that the moving image is played in a loop.
In this way, the normal background image or normal background moving image is an image or moving image that is displayed as a background image when the decorative symbols are not displayed in a variable manner and when the game is not in a jackpot game state.

If the number of reserved items remains at 0 for a predetermined period of time (if the variable display has not been performed for a predetermined period of time), the decorative pattern may not be displayed.
Specifically, when the decorative symbols are not displayed in a variable manner and the number of reserved symbols is 0, the decorative symbols shown in Fig. 232(d) may be displayed stationary for 1 second, and then the decorative symbols may be further displayed stationary until a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed, after which the decorative symbols may not be displayed. Fig. 232(e) shows an example of a display in which the decorative symbols are not displayed stationary.
This display state may be continued until a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 (or the second starting hole 2004).

In this way, when the decorative pattern determination stop period ends without any pending, the period from the time the determination stop period ends to the time when the new display of the decorative pattern begins may be referred to as the demo period.
Alternatively, when the decorative pattern confirmation stop period ends and a predetermined time has passed without any pending, the demo period may be the period from the time when the predetermined time has passed until the new display of the decorative pattern begins to change.
Alternatively, when the decorative pattern confirmation stop period has ended with no pending, and a predetermined time (e.g., 20 seconds) has passed during which no contact with the handle 302 is detected by the handle touch sensor 310, the demo period may be the period from when the predetermined time has passed until the new display of the changing decorative pattern begins.

In addition, a specific effect display that is only executed during the demo period may be started at the timing when the demo period starts or when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the demo period.
For example, the display of the decorative symbols may be interrupted when a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the demo period. In this case, the currently displayed background image (e.g., normal background image A) may be continued to be displayed as is as the background image. Alternatively, the currently displayed background image may be hidden, and a video introducing the gaming machine or the gaming machine manufacturer may be played. Note that after the video has been played for a predetermined time (e.g., several minutes), the original decorative symbols and background image may be displayed again. Alternatively, the display of the original decorative symbols and background image and the playback display of the video may be alternately displayed.

Furthermore, the character that appears during the reach effect may be displayed during the demo period. In this case, by making the character's behavior different from that during the reach effect, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking that the reach effect has occurred.
Furthermore, during the demo period, it may be assumed that no players are seated (no players are playing), and a message such as "Please sit" may be displayed in the display area. This can appeal to players who are looking for a gaming machine to play, and contribute to increasing the operation of the gaming facility.
In addition, the display area may be shifted to a demo image display state in which a demo image is displayed to introduce the pachinko machine 1. In the demo image display state, the demo image may be displayed in front of the stopped decorative pattern, or the demo image may be displayed without displaying any decorative pattern.
These displays may be realized by playing still images or moving image data that have been created in advance.

In this way, the normal background image A continues to be displayed even when the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner and then changes to a state where the decorative pattern is not displayed in a variable manner (demo period).
In addition, the normal background image A continues to be displayed even when the state changes from when the decorative pattern is not being displayed in a changing manner, to when the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first starting port 2002 (or the second starting port 2004) is 0, to when a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 (or the second starting port 2004) and the display of the decorative pattern in a changing manner begins.

In addition, when the decorative pattern is not being displayed in a variable manner and the number of reserved symbols is 0, and after the decorative pattern has been displayed in a static state for one second, if the handle touch sensor 310 does not detect the player's contact with the handle 302 for a predetermined period of time, the decorative pattern may not be displayed.
Furthermore, the display of the decorative symbols may be resumed when the handle touch sensor 310 detects a new touch by the player to the handle 302, or when a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 (or the second starting hole 2004). At the same time, the demo period may end, and the display of the various images displayed during the demo period may be terminated. In this case, it is preferable that the normal background image A continues to be displayed regardless of whether or not the decorative symbols are displayed.

Normal background image A has been used as an example, but normal background image B and normal background image C can also be used in the same way as normal background image A, and can be displayed as background images when the decorative pattern is changing or not changing.

In addition, the normal background image may be switched from one of normal background image A and normal background image B to the other when a predetermined condition is met (for example, when a predetermined number of variable displays are performed, when a predetermined lottery is won, when a special reach effect, which is a high-expectation reach effect, results in a loss, etc.).
In addition, it is advisable to execute an effect of switching the normal background image in the most recent decorative pattern change display that starts after a specified condition is met (for example, the change display executed next to the change display in which a special reach effect that resulted in a miss was executed).
Although the normal background images that can be displayed in a gaming state (normal state) other than a gaming state in which right-hand play is not performed have been described as normal background image A and normal background image B, the number of types is not limited to two and may be three or more. In this case, the normal background images may be switched based on a predetermined rule, such as being displayed in a predetermined order. Alternatively, the normal background images may be switched irregularly, such as being displayed in a random order.
Furthermore, when a game state in which a jackpot is reached is triggered by a game state in which right-hand play is performed (probability variable state or time-saving state), the normal background image C is displayed as the background image during right-hand play. In this way, the normal background image displayed may be changed in response to a change in the game state. Note that there may be multiple background images other than the normal background image C as the background image during right-hand play. In this case, too, the background image may be switched in the same way as the normal background image is displayed during the normal state.

In the performance examples shown with reference to Figures 230(a), 230(b), 231, and 232, the background image is not switched during the display of the varying decorative symbols, and the normal background image is displayed continuously, but below, an "enemy tank destruction reach" performance in which the normal background image is switched to a special reach background image during the display of the varying decorative symbols will be explained with reference to the time charts shown in Figures 230(c) and 233(a), and the display examples shown in Figures 234 to 236. Note that the time chart shown in Figure 230(c) shows a performance example from timing t0 to timing t10 in the "enemy tank destruction reach" performance, and the time chart shown in Figure 233(a) shows a performance example from timing t10 to timing t45 in the "enemy tank destruction reach" performance.
During the period from timing t0 to timing t13, the variable display is performed in the same manner as the example shown with reference to Fig. 230(b). Fig. 234(a) is a display example at a predetermined timing during a predetermined period (timing t10 to timing t13) before the background concealment image is displayed.

In this example, from timing t13 to timing t19, background concealment image A, background concealment image B, and background concealment image C are displayed in a predetermined order. Furthermore, at timing t16, when background concealment image C is displayed, the background image is switched from normal background image A to special reach background image B.

Specifically, as shown in Fig. 233(a), background-concealed image A is displayed during the period from timing t13 to timing t14 (1 second). Fig. 234(b) shows an example of the display during this period.
Furthermore, during the period from timing t14 to timing t15 (1 second), background concealed image B is displayed. Figure 234(c) shows an example of the display during this period.
Furthermore, during the period from timing t15 to timing t17 (2 seconds), background concealed image C is displayed. Figure 234(d) shows an example of the display during this period.
Furthermore, during the period from timing t17 to timing t18 (1 second), background concealed image B is displayed. Figure 234(e) shows an example of the display during this period.
Furthermore, during the period from timing t18 to timing t19 (1 second), background concealed image A is displayed. Figure 234(f) shows an example of the display during this period.

At timing t16 when background concealment image C is displayed, the background image is changed from normal background image A to special reach background image B, and the decorative pattern is changed to a special reach decorative pattern that is smaller than the normal decorative pattern shown with reference to Figure 225 (b). However, since background concealment image C is displayed in front of the background image and decorative pattern, it is not until timing t17 when background concealment image B is displayed that it becomes possible to recognize that these images have been switched.
The special reach decorative symbols are displayed during the period when the special reach background image is displayed (timing t16 to timing t39). The left decorative symbols and the right decorative symbols are not scrolled downward, and are displayed in a temporarily stopped state.

From timing t30 to timing t33, there occurs a valid operation period during which operation of the attack button 3710 is valid. Figure 234 (g) shows an example of the display during this period. Simultaneously with the start of the valid operation period, an imitation image of the attack button 3710 is displayed, along with a line instructing the player to operate the attack button 3710.
If an appropriate operation is performed on the attack button 3710 during the valid operation period, or if the valid operation period ends, a display indicating the result of the special lottery (whether or not an indication that the enemy tank has been destroyed) will be displayed.

Figure 235 shows an example of the display when the special lottery result is a jackpot. Specifically, if the special lottery result is a jackpot, an image of an enemy tank being destroyed is displayed. In addition, at timing t34, when a predetermined time has passed since the valid operation period for the attack button 3710 ended, the special reach decorative pattern is displayed in a temporarily stopped state in a double-digit pattern ("222"). Figure 235(a) shows this state.

On the other hand, Figure 236 shows an example of the display when the special lottery result is a miss. If the special lottery result is a miss, an image of an enemy tank passing through without being destroyed is displayed. In addition, at timing t34, when a predetermined time has passed since the valid operation period for the attack button 3710 ended, the special reach decorative pattern is displayed in a temporarily stopped state in the reach miss mode ("232"). Figure 236(a) shows this state.

Next, during the period from timing t36 to timing t42, the background concealed image is displayed.
Specifically, background concealed image A is displayed during the period from timing t36 to timing t37 (one second). Figures 235(b) and 236(b) show examples of the display during this period.
Furthermore, background concealed image B is displayed during the period from timing t37 to timing t38 (1 second). Figures 235(c) and 236(c) show examples of the display during this period.
Furthermore, during the period from timing t38 to timing t40 (2 seconds), background concealed image C is displayed. Figures 235(d) and 236(d) show examples of the display during this period.
Furthermore, background concealed image B is displayed during the period from timing t40 to timing t41 (one second). Figures 235(e) and 236(e) show examples of the display during this period.
Furthermore, background concealed image A is displayed during the period from timing t41 to timing t42 (one second). Figures 235(f) and 236(f) show examples of the display during this period.

At time t39, when background concealment image C is displayed, the background image changes from special reach background image B to normal background image A, and the decorative pattern changes from special reach decorative pattern B to normal decorative pattern A. However, because background concealment image C is displayed in front of the background image and decorative pattern, it is not until time t40, when background concealment image B is displayed, that it becomes apparent that these images have been changed.

From timing t34 to timing t44, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern remain temporarily stopped. From timing t42 to timing t44, the background concealment image A is not displayed, and the visibility of the temporarily stopped normal decorative pattern A is not obstructed by the background concealment image. Figures 235(g) and 236(g) show the display state at this time.

At timing t44, the decorative symbols are displayed in a static state, and the special lottery results are shown to the player. Figures 235(h) and 236(h) show the display status from timing t44 to timing t45.

Between a reach where the background image does not change as shown with reference to Figures 230(b) and 232, and a special reach where the background image changes as shown with reference to Figures 230(c) and 233 to 236 ("enemy tank destruction reach"), the latter has a higher probability of resulting in a jackpot as a special lottery result. For example, the former may have a 3% probability of winning, while the latter may have a 10% probability of winning.

Alternatively, multiple special reaches with different expectations of a jackpot may be implemented, and any of these may be implemented. In this case, the special reach background image, the image of the player's tank, the image of the enemy tank, the operation unit that requires operation, etc. may be different depending on the type of special reach. In this way, by visually checking the displayed special reach background image, the image of the player's tank and the enemy tank, and the operation instruction image of the operation unit, the player can know whether the expectation of a jackpot is high or low.
It is also possible to adopt a mode that suggests the degree of expectation in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 145 etc. and its modified example.

An example of a presentation in which the background image is switched at timing t16 is shown, but since the change to the special reach background image B or the small special reach decorative pattern becomes recognizable from timing t17 onwards, the change to the special reach background image B or the small special reach decorative pattern may also be made at timing t15 or timing t17.
An example of a presentation in which the background image is switched at timing t39 is shown, but since the change to the normal background image A or the small normal decorative pattern becomes recognizable from timing t40 onwards, the change to the normal background image A or the normal decorative pattern may also be made at timing t38 or timing t40.

In this manner, in this example of effect, at timing t16, the background image is switched from the normal background image A to the special reach background image B. Similarly, at timing t39, the background image is switched from the special reach background image B to the normal background image A.
At timing t16 and timing t39, the background concealment image C is displayed, so the player does not realize that the background image has been switched.

In the background image switching performance of this embodiment, there is a period in which background concealment image A and background concealment image B are displayed in sequence, the visibility of the background image decreases, and the background image before the switch gradually becomes difficult to see (hereinafter, this may be referred to as the "first period"), a period in which background concealment image C is displayed, and the background images before and after the switch are not visible (hereinafter, this may be referred to as the "second period"), and a period in which background concealment image B and background concealment image A are displayed in sequence, the visibility of the background image increases, and the background image after the switch gradually becomes easier to see (hereinafter, this may be referred to as the "third period").
After the end of the third period, the background image remains easily visible during the period from timing t42 to timing t44 until the decorative pattern stops changing (hereinafter, this period may be referred to as the "fourth period").

With this configuration, the change in background image is perceived by the player in a natural way, and a loss of interest can be prevented.
In addition, at the start of a special reach, the normal background image is switched to the special reach background image while the background concealment image is displayed, so that the start of the special reach is perceived by the player in a natural way, and a decline in interest can be suppressed.
Similarly, when the special reach ends, the special reach background image is switched to the normal background image while the background concealment image is displayed, so that the player perceives the end of the special reach in a natural way, and a decline in interest can be suppressed.

In this background image switching effect, the background image is switched during the period (second period) when the background is most difficult to see (note that the background image may be switched simultaneously with the start of the third period). This allows the background to be switched smoothly, making it less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable with the effect.
In addition, by displaying a black background concealing image over the entire display area, the brightness of the display area is reduced, and the visibility of the decorative symbols is reduced, resulting in less image movement within the display area. Therefore, a player who has become less aware of the content displayed in the display area due to operating a smartphone, for example, can be made to realize that an opportunity has come to pay close attention to the display area.
Furthermore, when the special reach ends, a black background concealment image is displayed and the special reach background image is switched to the normal background image, so that the display content in the display area is simplified for a predetermined period of time. As a result, even if the special reach display result indicates to the player that the result of the special lottery is a loss, the player's excitement due to the expectation of a big win calms down, and he or she continues playing without losing interest in the subsequent variable display, thereby preventing a decline in the operation of the gaming machine.

Although a display example when the special lottery result is a jackpot is shown with reference to Figure 235, a background concealed image may be displayed only when the special lottery result is a miss, and when the special lottery result is a jackpot, the background concealed image may not be displayed and the display mode shown in Figure 235(a) may be continued until timing t44, and the special reach decorative pattern may be statically displayed. Also, although a background concealed image is displayed, at timing t39, the special reach background image B may be switched to the jackpot background image rather than the normal background image A.
By adopting such a configuration, the excitement caused by the occurrence of a jackpot can be maintained until the jackpot game starts.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 235 and 236, the result of the special lottery was indicated by the display mode of the enemy tank and the temporary stop display mode of the special reach decorative pattern, but the large special reach decorative pattern shown with reference to Figure 225 (c) may also be used as the special reach decorative pattern indicating the special lottery result.
For example, at the timing when the valid operation period ends (timing t33) or at the timing when a predetermined time (1 second) has elapsed since the valid operation period ended and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed (timing t34), the decorative pattern may be changed from the small special reach decorative pattern shown with reference to Figure 225(b) to the large special reach decorative pattern shown with reference to Figure 225(c).
The display of the large special reach decorative pattern continues until timing t39 during the second period, and after timing t39, the normal decorative pattern is displayed.
If the special lottery result is a jackpot and the background concealment image is not displayed, the display of the large special reach decorative pattern may be continued until timing t45.

The reserved image or reserved image may be configured not to be hidden by the background concealing image. For example, if the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 234 to 236 etc. is modified so that the reserved image or reserved image is displayed in front of the background concealing image, the display examples shown in Figures 236(a) to 236(h) will be displayed as shown in Figures 237(a) to 237(h), respectively. Such a display can be achieved by setting the display priority of the reserved image or reserved image higher than the display priority of the background concealing image. Note that the reserved image or reserved image may be configured not to be hidden by the background concealing image not only at the end of a special reach, but also at the start of a special reach.

With this configuration, the reserved image and the visibility of the reserved image are not reduced, so the player can check the number of reserved balls and can operate the handle 302 to make a decision on whether or not to place the game ball into the first starting hole 2002.
Specifically, the background concealment image is displayed at the start of a special reach, which has a relatively long variable display time compared to a reach in which only a normal background image is displayed, or immediately after a reach decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. Also, from the state in which a reach decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, one reserved symbol is reduced and the next variable display begins, or a jackpot game state occurs and the opening and closing of the big prize opening 2005 begins.
Therefore, if it is possible to check the number of reserved balls at the start of a special reach, it will be possible to decide whether or not to increase the number of reserved balls during a special reach when the expectation of a jackpot is high and there is not necessarily a high need to increase the number of reserved balls.
Furthermore, if it is possible to check the number of reserved balls at the end of a special reach, a player who has stopped firing game balls during the special reach can accurately decide whether or not to fire game balls.

With reference to Figures 124 and 125, an embodiment has been shown in which a look-ahead performance display is performed over multiple variable displays based on the look-ahead results, but the method in this embodiment may be applied to modify the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 234 to 236, etc., so as to perform a look-ahead performance display.
For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 234 to 236, if a pre-reading display is configured, the display examples shown in Figures 236(a) to 236(h) will be displayed as in the display examples shown in Figures 238(a) to 238(h), respectively.
In the embodiment shown in FIG. 238 , as a look-ahead effect display in a special reach, a strip-shaped look-ahead effect image with the text "Enemy tank approaching!" is displayed in the upper right and upper left of the display area. Furthermore, background concealed image A and background concealed image B are displayed, resulting in a first period in which the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image is difficult to see, and background concealed image C is displayed, resulting in a second period in which the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image is unviewable. Thereafter, background concealed image B and background concealed image A are displayed, resulting in a third period in which the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image gradually becomes more viewable, and the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image changes from a difficult-to-view state to an easily viewable state. This display mode can be achieved by setting the display priority of the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image lower than the display priority of the background concealed image.

The display of the strip-shaped pre-reading effect image ends at timing t45, when the stopped display of the decorative pattern has ended. Alternatively, the display of the strip-shaped pre-reading effect image may end during the period from timing t36 to timing t42, when the background concealed image is displayed (see FIG. 233). In this case, the display of the strip-shaped pre-reading effect image may end during any of the first to third periods. Alternatively, the display of the strip-shaped pre-reading effect image may end during the fourth period, when the visibility of the background image returns to normal and the decorative pattern stops. Alternatively, the display of the strip-shaped pre-reading effect image may end at timing t44, when the decorative pattern has stopped being displayed. In this way, the strip-shaped pre-reading effect image can also be displayed in a manner that is difficult or impossible to see by using a background concealed image, using the same display method as for other images such as reserved images.

By displaying the strip-like pre-reading performance image even during the first and third periods when the background concealing image is being displayed, the player can recognize the degree of expectation under which the display of the decorative pattern is changed.
On the other hand, by ending the display of the strip-like pre-reading effect image in the first to third periods (particularly the second period), the display of the strip-like pre-reading effect image can be ended in a natural way.
Furthermore, by terminating the display of the strip-shaped preview effect image before the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the visibility of the stopped and displayed decorative pattern is not impaired.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 238, the reserved image or the reserved image and the preview performance image are made difficult to see or impossible to see by a background concealing image.
On the other hand, the look-ahead effect image in the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 238 may also be displayed in front of the background concealed image, similar to the reserved image or the reserved image in the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 237. In this case, the reserved image or the reserved image and the look-ahead effect image are displayed in front of the background concealed image, so these images are easy to see.
On the other hand, the reserved image and the reserved image may be displayed in front of the background concealed image to make them easy to see, and the preview performance image may be displayed behind the background concealed image to make them difficult or impossible to see.
Alternatively, the reserved image and the reserved image may be displayed behind the background concealing image to make them difficult or impossible to see, and the preview performance image may be displayed in front of the background concealing image to make them easy to see.
It should be noted that the superimposition of these images can be carried out by appropriately setting display priority for each image and using a layer function.

If the reserved image or both the reserved image and the preview effect image are not visible, the player will be more likely to recognize that the scene has changed.
When the reserved image or both the reserved image and the preview effect image are visible, the player may find it difficult to recognize that the scene has changed, but the player can recognize the degree of expectation indicated by these images.
When only the reserved image or only one of the reserved image and the preview effect image is visible, the sense of scene change is somewhat diminished, but the player can recognize the general degree of expectation.

Furthermore, if the reserved image is displayed in a special manner that is different from the usual (for example, the reserved image is green or red), which indicates that there is a high probability of winning a jackpot, the player can recognize that there is a high probability of winning a jackpot.
For example, if the pending image is visible at the start of a special reach, it is possible to recognize the degree of expectation under which the special reach is being achieved.
Furthermore, if the reserved image is visible at the end of the special reach, it is possible to confirm under what expectation the decorative symbols at the reach stopped in a matching pattern indicating a jackpot, or in a non-matching pattern indicating a miss. For example, if a miss occurs under high expectation conditions, or if a jackpot occurs under low expectation conditions, the result is presented in a way that betrays the player's expectations, creating a sense of surprise. Then, in subsequent games, if a similar reserved image is displayed, the player will not lose expectation that the result of the special reach will be a jackpot, even if low expectation conditions are indicated, and will be able to enjoy the special reach presentation with a sense of tension, taking into consideration the possibility that the result of the special reach will be a miss, even if high expectation conditions are indicated.
Furthermore, the display of the reserved image or reserved image can prevent the player from mistakenly thinking that the gaming machine is broken.

A white background concealing image may be used as the background concealing image. For example, if the embodiments shown with reference to Figures 234 to 236 etc. are modified to display a white background concealing image, the display examples shown in Figures 236(a) to 236(h) will be displayed as shown in Figures 239(a) to 239(h), respectively.
Similar to the black background concealment image, white background concealment images A to C with different degrees of transparency are prepared. First, white background concealment images A and B are displayed, and the transparency is gradually decreased to gradually decrease the visibility of the image behind the white background concealment image (Fig. 239(b) and Fig. 239(c)). Next, white background concealment image C is displayed, making the image behind the white background concealment image invisible (Fig. 239(d)). Next, white background concealment images B and A are displayed, and the transparency is gradually increased to gradually increase the visibility of the image behind the white background concealment image (Fig. 239(e) and Fig. 239(f)). After that, the decorative pattern is temporarily displayed, and then is displayed stationary (Fig. 239(g) and Fig. 239(h)).

A predetermined character or the like may be displayed as a background concealing image. For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 234 to 236, etc., if a modification is made so that a plurality of bomb characters are displayed, the display examples shown in Figures 236(a) to 236(h) will be displayed as in the display examples shown in Figures 240(a) to 240(h), respectively.
In the first period in this modified embodiment, an image of a bomb character and a triangular background area begins to be displayed from the top left and bottom right of the display area as background concealment image A (Figure 240 (b)), and then background concealment image B is displayed (Figure 240 (c)).
In addition, during the second period, an image of a bomb character and two trapezoidal background areas is displayed as background concealment image C (Figure 240 (d)).
In the third period, background concealed image B is displayed (FIG. 240(e)), followed by background concealed image A (FIG. 240(f)). After that, the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed and then stopped (FIG. 240(g), FIG. 240(h)).
In this manner, in this embodiment, the background concealment image is composed of the bomb character and the image of the background region (triangular or trapezoidal portion).
The background area may be a single color (white or black). The bomb character itself may be a still image, or may be dynamically displayed, such as by moving its hands or feet. Instead of or in addition to the bomb character, at least one of a character other than the bomb character, a predetermined picture, the model name of the pachinko machine 1, or the name of a special reach that is being or has been executed may be displayed as part of the background concealment image in front of the background area.
With this configuration, the player's attention can be switched to the next variable display of the decorative symbols.

With reference to Figures 234 to 236, an example is shown in which a black background concealing image is displayed and the background image is switched at both the start and end of a special reach.
Furthermore, as the background concealment image, instead of a black background concealment image, an embodiment in which a white background concealment image is displayed with reference to Figure 239, and an embodiment in which a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character or the like is displayed with reference to Figure 240 have been shown, but rather than displaying the same background concealment image at the start and end of a special reach, different background concealment images may be displayed at the start and end of the special reach.
For example, the background concealment image at the start of a special reach may be one of a black background concealment image, a white background concealment image, or a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character, etc., and the background concealment image at the end of a special reach may be one of a black background concealment image, a white background concealment image, or a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character, etc., displayed.
Specifically, a white background concealment image may be displayed as the background concealment image at the start of a special reach, and a black background concealment image or a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character, etc. may be displayed as the background concealment image at the end of the special reach.

In the embodiment shown in Figure 233(a), the first period during which the background image becomes gradually less visible, the second period during which the background image is not visible, and the third period during which the background image becomes gradually more visible are all the same length (specifically, 2 seconds). This embodiment can simplify the display process for background-hiding images and reduce the amount of work required to develop image effects.

On the other hand, the lengths of each period may be different rather than being the same. Figures 233(b) and 233(c) show modified examples (Modifications 01 to 12) in which the lengths of the first to third periods at the start and end of a special reach are different. For example, in Modification 08, the length of the first period is the longest at 3 seconds, the length of the second period is the shortest at 1 second, and the length of the third period is an intermediate length at 2 seconds.
In each modified example, the length of the fourth period may also differ from that of the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 233 (a).
According to this configuration, it is possible to appropriately switch and display background images within a limited time without unnecessarily lengthening the time required to display the background concealing image.

Below are the basic effects at the start of special reaches for Variations 01 to 12.

In variant 01, the relationship between the lengths of the first period, second period, and third period at the start of a special reach is set to "third period > first period = second period" (i.e., the time until the special reach background image is fully recognized is lengthened), allowing players to enjoy wondering which of the multiple reach effects is being displayed.

In variant 02, the relationship between the lengths of the first to third periods at the start of a special reach is set to "first period = second period > third period" (i.e., the time until the special reach background image is fully recognized is shortened), allowing the player to recognize the special reach effect being executed earlier.

In variant 03, the relationship between the lengths of the first to third periods at the start of a special reach is set to "second period > first period = third period" (i.e., the period during which the background concealment image C is displayed and the special reach background image and normal background image are not displayed is lengthened), ensuring more time to enjoy seeing which of the multiple reach effects will be executed.

In variant 04, the relationship between the lengths of the first to third periods at the start of a special reach is set to "first period = third period > second period" (i.e., the period during which background concealment image C is displayed and the special reach background image and normal background image are not displayed is shortened), allowing the special reach performance to be enjoyed for a longer period of time.

In variant 05, the relationship between the lengths of the first period, second period, and third period at the start of a special reach is set to "first period > second period = third period" (i.e., the time until the normal background image becomes completely unrecognizable is lengthened), making it possible to provide a longer period of enjoyment from the development of a special reach performance.

In variant 06, the relationship between the lengths of the first period, second period, third period, and third period at the start of a special reach is set to "second period = third period > first period" (i.e., the time it takes for the normal background image to become completely unrecognizable is shortened), which allows the background concealment image C to be displayed earlier, allowing players to prepare for the special reach performance earlier.

In variant 07, by setting the length relationship between the first period, second period, and third period at the start of a special reach as "first period > second period > third period," it takes longer for the normal background image to become completely unrecognizable, allowing the player to enjoy the joy of progressing to a special reach effect for a longer period of time and allowing the player to recognize the special reach effect being executed earlier.

In variant 08, by setting the length relationship between the first period, second period, and third period at the start of a special reach as "first period > third period > second period," the time until the normal background image becomes completely unrecognizable is lengthened, allowing the player to enjoy the pleasure of progressing to a special reach effect for a longer period of time, and by shortening the period during which the background concealment image C is displayed and the special reach background image and normal background image are not displayed, the special reach effect can be enjoyed for a longer period of time.

In variant 09, by setting the length relationship between the first period, the second period, and the third period at the start of a special reach as "second period > first period > third period," it is possible to ensure more time to enjoy which of the multiple reach effects will be executed, and to make it possible to recognize early on which special reach effect will be executed.

In variant 10, by setting the length relationship between the first period, the second period, the third period, and the first period at the start of a special reach, background concealment image C is displayed early, allowing the player to prepare for the special reach effect early and ensuring more time to enjoy finding out which of the multiple reach effects will be executed.

In variant 11, by setting the length relationship between the first period, the second period, and the third period at the start of a special reach as "third period > first period > second period," the special reach effect can be enjoyed for a long time, and players can enjoy which of the multiple reach effects is being displayed.

In variant 12, by setting the length relationship between the first period, second period, and first period at the start of a special reach, background concealment image C is displayed early, allowing the player to prepare for the special reach effect early and enjoy finding out which of the multiple reach effects is being displayed.

Below are the basic effects at the end of special reaches for variants 01 to 12.

In Variation 01, the relationship between the lengths of the first, second, and third periods at the end of a special reach is set to "third period > first period = second period" (i.e., the time until the normal background image is fully recognized is lengthened), allowing time for the player to change their mindset for the next change.

In variant 02, by setting the relationship between the lengths of the first, second, and third periods at the end of a special reach to "first period = second period > third period" (i.e., shortening the time it takes for the normal background image to be fully recognized), it is possible to end anticipation for the change in question early and create anticipation for the next change (allowing players to switch their mood more quickly).

According to variant 03, by setting the relationship between the lengths of the first period, the first period, and the third period at the end of the special reach as "second period > first period = third period" (i.e., lengthening the period during which the background concealing image C is displayed and the special reach background image and normal background image are not displayed), the time during which the background concealing image C is displayed can be made to feel longer, creating a sense of anticipation that the normal background image will not be displayed.

According to variant 04, by setting the relationship between the lengths of the first period, third period, and second period at the end of the special reach as "first period = third period > second period" (i.e., shortening the period during which the background concealment image C is displayed and the special reach background image and normal background image are not displayed), the normal background image, although less visible, can be recognized early, ending anticipation for the change early and creating anticipation for the next change (allowing players to switch their mood more quickly).

In variant 05, the relationship between the lengths of the first period, second period, and third period at the end of the special reach is set to "first period > second period = third period" (i.e., the time until the special reach background image becomes completely unrecognizable is lengthened), allowing the player to enjoy the afterglow of missing the variation.

In variant 06, by setting the relationship between the lengths of the first period, third period, and third period at the end of a special reach to "second period = third period > first period" (i.e., shortening the time it takes for the special reach background image to become completely unrecognizable), it is possible to end anticipation for the change in question early and create anticipation for the next change (allowing players to switch their mood more quickly).

In variant 07, by setting the length relationship between the first period, second period, and third period at the end of a special reach to "first period > second period > third period," it is possible to enjoy the afterglow of a missed fluctuation, as well as to end anticipation for that fluctuation early and create anticipation for the next fluctuation (allowing for a quicker change of mood).

According to variant 08, by setting the length relationship between the first period, second period, and third period at the end of the special reach as "first period > third period > second period," it is possible to enjoy the afterglow of the missed variation, and, although the visibility is low, to make the normal background image more readily recognizable, thereby ending anticipation for the variation early and creating anticipation for the next variation (allowing players to switch their mood more quickly).

According to variant example 09, by setting the length relationship between the first period, the second period, and the third period at the end of a special reach to "second period > first period > third period," the time that the background concealment image C is displayed can be made to feel longer, creating a sense of anticipation that the normal background image may not be displayed, and by allowing the player to recognize the normal background image early when it is displayed, anticipation for the next change can be created (allowing the player to switch their mood more quickly).

In Variation 10, by setting the length relationship between the first period, the second period, and the third period at the end of the special reach as "second period > third period > first period," the time it takes for the special reach background image to become completely unrecognizable is shortened, and the background concealment image C is displayed for a long time when the player thought that anticipation for the change had ended early, creating a new sense of anticipation.

According to variant example 11, by setting the length relationship between the first period, the second period, and the third period at the end of a special reach to "third period > first period > second period," the normal background image, although less visible, is recognized early, ending anticipation for the change early. By lengthening the time until the normal background image is completely recognized, more time can be spent changing one's mood for the next change.

In variant 12, the relationship between the lengths of the first, second, and third periods at the end of a special reach is "third period > second period > first period," which ends anticipation for the change early and lengthens the time until the normal background image is fully recognized, allowing more time for the player's feelings to change as they prepare for the next change.

233(a) and each of the modified examples shown in Figures 233(b) and 233(c) may be appropriately combined with the display modes of the background concealed images at the start of a special reach in the embodiment shown in Figure 233(a) and each of the modified examples shown in Figures 233(b) and 233(c). For example, at the start of a special reach, each background concealed image may be displayed in the mode of modified example 01, and at the end of the special reach, each background concealed image may be displayed in the mode of modified example 02.
With this configuration, the background image can be switched in a more appropriate manner.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 233(a), the first to third periods each last 2 seconds, for a total of 6 seconds. In the embodiments shown with reference to Figures 233(b) and 233(c), the first to third periods each last 1 to 3 seconds, for a total of 5 to 7 seconds, but these are merely examples.
For example, the first to third periods may each be set appropriately within a range of about 1 to 3 seconds, and the total number of seconds may also be set appropriately within a range of about 3 to 9 seconds. Note that the number of seconds for each period may be shortened or lengthened as long as an effect is observed.

As shown in Modifications 04, 05, 08, and 11 of FIG. 233, the second period may be shorter than the first period.
Furthermore, as shown in Modifications 01, 04, 08, 11, and 12 of FIG. 233, the second period may be shorter than the third period.
Furthermore, as shown in Modifications 04, 08, and 11 of FIG. 233, the second period may be shorter than the first and third periods.

During the first and third periods, the transparency of the background concealing image changes dynamically, making it visible, and although the visibility of the decorative patterns and background image is reduced, they are not invisible. On the other hand, during the second period, the decorative patterns and background image become invisible and appear to have stopped displaying, which may lead some players to mistakenly believe that the gaming machine has broken down (or that a freeze effect has occurred, indicating a high probability that the special lottery result will be a jackpot). However, by making the second period relatively shorter than the first and third periods, it is possible to prevent such situations from occurring.

Furthermore, when a black background concealment image is displayed, the player's own face or light from the light-emitting means of a gaming machine located behind the gaming machine may be reflected in the display area of the gaming board side effect display device 1600 and be visible to the player, which may reduce the player's sense of immersion in the game. This tendency is more pronounced when a glossy (glare) type display device is used as the liquid crystal display device that makes up the gaming board side effect display device 1600. However, by making the second period shorter than the first and third periods, it is possible to prevent this from happening.

Alternatively, the second period may be omitted, and the third period may be executed after the first period is executed. In this case, the background image may be switched at the timing of switching from the first period to the third period. This configuration also achieves the same effect.
233, if the second period is not provided, the start timing of the first period may not be changed and the third period may be executed after the end of the first period. Alternatively, the end timing of the third period may not be changed and the end timing of the first period may be adjusted to coincide with the start timing of the third period.

As shown in Modifications 03, 06, 09, 10, and 12 of FIG. 233, the second period may be longer than the first period.
Furthermore, as shown in Modifications 02, 03, 07, 09, and 10 of FIG. 233, the second period may be longer than the third period.
Furthermore, as shown in Modifications 03, 09, and 10 of FIG. 233, the second period may be longer than the first and third periods.

With this configuration, the background image and decorative patterns are hidden by the background concealment image for a longer period of time, making the display content in the display area simpler and allowing the player's attention to be shifted to the presentation and game situation after the background image has been changed.
For example, when a special reach begins, the player's attention can be focused on the content of the effect that will be performed during the special reach. In this case, multiple special reach effects with different degrees of expectation can be performed as special reach effects, and one of the special reach effects can be performed (the "giant tank reach" effect described below is one example). In this case, the player can be kept waiting, wondering which special reach will develop, which can increase the player's interest.
On the other hand, when the special reach ends, the player's attention can be switched to the next pattern change or big win game.

Furthermore, if a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character or the like is displayed as the background concealment image, the player can take time to carefully observe the displayed background concealment image during the second period, which allows the player to more easily change his or her focus. The background concealment image may also be a dynamic display, such as a character moving around on the screen. In this case, the player's focus can be more easily switched to the next pattern change or jackpot game.
On the other hand, a black or white background concealment image only changes transparency and does not move, so the player is not given any unnecessary information, the division of the effect is made clearer, and the player can change their mood.

As shown in Variations 02, 05, 07, 08, and 09 of Figure 233, the first period may be longer than the third period.

This configuration allows the player to fully perceive that the background image has started to change, preventing situations in which the player is unable to understand how the presentation has changed. If the first period were shorter than the third period, the player may not be able to understand how the presentation has changed.

As shown in variants 01, 06, 10, 11, and 12 of Figure 233, the third period may be longer than the first period.

According to this configuration, the special reach background image is gradually displayed at the start of the special reach, which makes the player feel teased and increases his or her sense of anticipation for the special reach. In this case, it is possible to configure the special reach effects to be executed in multiple ways with different degrees of expectation, and to execute any one of the special reach effects (the "giant tank reach" effect described below is one example). In this case, the player is interested in which special reach effect will be executed, and by extending the third period, the player can feel even more interested.
In addition, the visibility of the special reach background image can be quickly reduced when the special reach ends, allowing the player to switch their attention to the next pattern change or jackpot game. This is particularly effective when the result of the special lottery is a loss.

The embodiments shown in Figures 233(a) to 233(c) may be modified so that the first period is not provided. In this case, the background concealment image is not displayed during the period that would have been the first period, and the second period may start at the timing shown in the figures.
Even when the first period is not provided in this way, the same effect as that described above can be achieved.

The embodiments shown in Figures 233(a) to 233(c) may be modified so that the third period is not provided. In this case, the background concealment image may be hidden during the period that would have been the third period, and the second period may end at the timing shown in the figures.
Even when the third period is not provided in this way, the same effect as that described above can be achieved.

Furthermore, the type of background concealment image displayed at the start of a special reach may be configured to indicate the likelihood of a jackpot. For example, when a black background concealment image is displayed, the likelihood of a jackpot may be higher when a white background concealment image is displayed than when a black background concealment image is displayed.

The display mode of the background concealment image may be configured not to indicate the likelihood of a jackpot. For example, even when a special reach with a different likelihood of a jackpot is executed, the same background concealment image may be displayed.
With this configuration, the player waits for the end of the background concealment image display with a sense of anticipation about what kind of special reach will occur. Also, when the special reach ends, the player can calmly face the next and subsequent decorative pattern changes and jackpot games.

In the middle of a special reach effect, the effect content may be switched to a special reach effect with a higher expectation level. In this case, one of the above-mentioned modes may be adopted to display a background concealment image. In this case, the special reach effect after the switch may be configured to display one of multiple special reach background images with different jackpot expectation levels.

Although the embodiment has been described in which the background image is made invisible by the background concealing image, it is also possible to make it difficult to see instead of making it invisible.
For example, even during the second period when the visibility of the background image is reduced most by the background concealing image, the background image may be configured to be visible through the background concealing image rather than being invisible. For example, when a black background concealing image is used, the background image may be configured to be visible during the second period in a display state intermediate between the display state shown in Figure 234(c) and the display state shown in Figure 234(d).
Alternatively, the size of the background concealing image may be set to a size that can conceal most of the background image (at least 70% or more, preferably 90% or more), rather than a size that can conceal the entire background image, and this background concealing image may be displayed during the second period.
These aspects may also be combined.
Even with this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the change in background image.

Although the embodiment has been shown in which a black background concealing image, a white background concealing image, a background concealing image made up of a bomb character, etc., is displayed as the background concealing image, these background concealing images may also be displayed simultaneously.
For example, the display area may be divided and a different background-concealing image may be displayed in each divided area, for example, a black background-concealing image may be displayed in the right half of the display area and a white background-concealing image may be displayed in the left half of the display area.
Furthermore, a display priority may be assigned to the background concealing image, and the background concealing image may be displayed in an overlapping manner.
For example, a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character or the like and a black background concealment image may be displayed, with the display priority of the background concealment image consisting of a bomb character or the like being higher than the display priority of the black background concealment image. In this case, the background concealment image consisting of a bomb character or the like narrows the area in which the background image is visible from the left and right, and the background image is perceived by the player in such a manner that its visibility is reduced even within the area in which the background image is visible. Note that a white background concealment image may be displayed instead of a black background concealment image.
The display times (lengths of the first to third periods) of the multiple background-concealed images displayed in this manner may be any one of the embodiments or modifications thereof shown in Fig. 233. Alternatively, a different display time (a different one of the embodiments or modifications thereof shown in Fig. 233) may be used for each background-concealed image.
Even with this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the change in background image.

At the timing (timing t34) when the special reach is temporarily stopped and displayed as a miss, the background image itself is darkened, and the background image is switched using a background concealment image that is brighter than the background image (for example, a white background concealment image or a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character, etc.).
This allows the player to clearly see that the background concealment image has been displayed, allowing the player to recognize that the presentation content has changed, and the player's attention can be switched to the next pattern change.

On the other hand, at the timing when the special reach is temporarily stopped and displayed as a miss (timing t34), the background image itself may be darkened and the background image may be switched using a black background concealment image. In this case, the visual difference between the background image and the background concealment image is reduced, making it less noticeable that the background image has been switched.

In the embodiments shown with reference to Figures 224 to 240, display effects were performed using the display area, but these embodiments may be modified so that in addition to these display effects, effects using decorative members provided near the display area may be performed simultaneously.
Below, with reference to Figure 241 etc., we will explain about the tank device 3770 which lights up and moves during special reaches to liven up the special reaches.

The tank device 3770 is a three-dimensional device that resembles the shape of a tank when viewed from behind, and is provided on the gaming board 5. When viewed from the front, the tank device 3770 is provided at the bottom and in front of the display area of the gaming board-side performance display device 1600. Figure 241 shows the positional relationship between the display area and the tank device 3770 when viewed from the front.

The tank role object 3770 has a tank role object light-emitting unit (not shown). The tank role object light-emitting unit is equipped with a full-color LED and can be in a non-light-emitting state or a state in which it emits light in a predetermined color. Specific light-emitting modes include, for example, lighting up or flashing white, green, red, or yellow.
The tank feature 3770 has the function of moving up and down between a lower standby position and an upper moving position by driving a tank feature drive mechanism (not shown). It can also stop at any position between the standby position and the moving position.

Figure 241 (a) shows the tank prop 3770 in a non-illuminating standby position.
Figure 241 (b) shows the tank device 3770 emitting light in a predetermined color (e.g., red) and positioned in a standby position.
241(c) shows a state in which the tank role object 3770 is not emitting light and is positioned at the movement position. When viewed from the front, the display area and the tank role object 3770 overlap and are visible to the player.
241(d) shows a state in which the tank role object 3770 is emitting light in a predetermined color (for example, red) and is located at the movement position. When viewed from the front, the display area and the tank role object 3770 overlap and are visible to the player.

241(b) and 241(d) show examples in which a reserved image is displayed in the reserved image display area in red, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a normal reserved image, instead of the normal white reserved image. Also shown is a state in which the tank role device 3770 is positioned at a standby position or a moving position, and the tank role device 3770 is illuminated in the same red color as the reserved image.
Although red is given as an example of the color of the reserved image, it is not limited to red and may be green or gold.

The tank feature 3770 may be configured to move from a standby position to a moving position when a special reach begins.

The lighting and movement of the tank feature 3770 are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the results of the special lottery.

Below, with reference to Figure 242(a), we will explain an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment explained with reference to Figure 233(a). Note that aspects other than the tank prop 3770 and the reserved image are basically the same as the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 233(a) etc., so explanations of these will be omitted.

Figure 242(a) is a time chart showing an example of a presentation in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the tank device 3770 does not move from its standby position, but instead emits red light, the same color as the reserved image, indicating a high probability of a jackpot. The reserved image may be turned red when a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 and the reserved image is displayed, when the variable display begins (timing t0), or at a predetermined timing during the variable display (for example, a predetermined timing during the period from timing t1 to timing t33).

In the embodiment shown in Fig. 242(a), the red reserved image is displayed as the reserved image until timing t45 when the variable display ends and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed for one second. Note that the reserved image is difficult to see or cannot be seen during the period from timing t13 to timing t19 when the background concealed image is displayed and during the period from timing t36 to timing t42.
On the other hand, the tank role object 3770 remains in the standby position without moving during the period from timing t0 when the variable display starts to timing t45.
The tank device 3770 will begin to emit red light at the timing when the pending image is displayed in red (as described above, at the timing of the initial winning, the timing when the variable display begins, or at a specified timing during the variable display), and will continue to emit red light until timing t45.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 242(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 242(b).
242(b) is a time chart showing Modification 01. In Modification 01, the display mode of the reserved image is changed from red to white at timing t36, which is the timing when the display of background concealment image A starts. At the same time, the light emission mode of tank character object 3770 is also changed from red to white.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 242(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 242(c).
242(c) is a time chart showing Modification 02. In Modification 02, the display mode of the reserved image is changed from red to white at timing t38, which is the timing when the display of background concealment image C starts. At the same time, the light emission mode of tank character object 3770 is also changed from red to white.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 242(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 242(d).
242(d) is a time chart showing Modification 03. In Modification 03, the display mode of the reserved image is changed from red to white at timing t40, which is the timing when the display of background concealment image C ends. At the same time, the light emission mode of tank role-playing object 3770 is also changed from red to white.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 242(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 242(e).
242(e) is a time chart showing Modification 04. In Modification 04, the display mode of the reserved image is changed from red to white at timing t42, which is the timing when the display of background concealment image A ends. At the same time, the light emission mode of tank character object 3770 is also changed from red to white.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 242(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 242(f).
242(f) is a time chart showing Modification 05. In Modification 05, the display mode of the reserved image is changed to non-display at timing t36, which is the timing when the display of background concealment image A starts. At the same time, the light emission mode of the tank role-playing device 3770 is also changed from a red light emission state to an off state.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 242(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 242(g).
242(g) is a time chart showing Modification 06. In Modification 06, the display mode of the reserved image is changed to non-display at timing t38, which is the timing when the display of background concealment image C starts. At the same time, the light emission mode of the tank role-playing device 3770 is also changed from a red light emission state to an off state.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 242(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 242(h).
242(h) is a time chart showing Modification 07. In Modification 07, the display mode of the reserved image is changed to non-display at timing t40, which is the timing when the display of background concealment image C ends. At the same time, the light emission mode of tank role-playing object 3770 is also changed from a red light emission state to an off state.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 242(a) is shown with reference to Figure 242(i).
242(i) is a time chart showing Modification 08. In Modification 08, the display mode of the reserved image is changed to non-display at timing t40, which is the timing when the display of background concealment image A ends. At the same time, the light emission mode of tank role-playing object 3770 is also changed from a red light emission state to an off state.

Next, another modified example will be shown with reference to Figure 243. Note that Figure 243(a) is the same as Figure 242(a).

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 243(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 243(b).
243(b) is a time chart showing Modification 09. In Modification 09, the display mode of the reserved image remains red until timing t45. Meanwhile, the light emission mode of the tank role-playing device 3770 decreases in brightness from timing t36 to timing t38, turns off from timing t38 to timing t40, increases in brightness from timing t40 to timing t42, and emits red light at the original brightness from timing t42 to timing t45.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 243(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 243(c).
243(c) is a time chart showing Modification 10. In Modification 10, the display mode of the reserved image is changed from red to white at timing t39. Meanwhile, the light emission mode of the tank role-playing device 3770 decreases in brightness from timing t36 to timing t39, increases in brightness from timing t39 to timing t42, and emits red light from timing t42 to timing t45.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 243(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 243(d).
243(d) is a time chart showing Modification 11. In Modification 11, the display mode of the reserved image is changed from red to white at timing t39. Meanwhile, the light emission mode of the tank role-playing device 3770 decreases in luminance from timing t36 to timing t38, becomes extinguished from timing t38 to timing t40, increases in luminance to emit white light from timing t40 to timing t42, and emits white light from timing t42 to timing t45.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 243(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 243(e).
243(e) is a time chart showing Modification 12. In Modification 12, the display mode of the reserved image is changed from red to white at timing t39. Meanwhile, the light emission mode of the tank role-playing device 3770 decreases in luminance from timing t36 to timing t39, changes the light emission color from red to white at timing t39, increases in luminance while emitting white light from timing t39 to timing t42, and emits white light from timing t42 to timing t45.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 243(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 243(f).
243(f) is a time chart showing Modification 13. In Modification 13, the display mode of the reserved image is changed to non-display at timing t39. Meanwhile, the light emission mode of the tank role-playing device 3770 decreases in brightness from timing t36 to timing t38, and is turned off from timing t38 to timing t45.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 243(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 243(g).
243(g) is a time chart showing Modification 14. In Modification 14, the display mode of the reserved image is changed to non-display at timing t39. Meanwhile, the light emission mode of the tank role-playing device 3770 decreases in brightness from timing t36 to timing t39, and is turned off from timing t39 to timing t45.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 243(a) is shown with reference to FIG. 243(h).
243(h) is a time chart showing Modification 15. In Modification 15, the display mode of the reserved image remains red until timing t45. Meanwhile, the light emission mode of the tank role-playing device 3770 decreases in brightness from timing t36 to timing t38, and is turned off from timing t39 to timing t45.

In these embodiments, the degree of expectation can be shown to the player by making the luminous decorative component (tank device 3770) glow in the same color as the reserved image.
In addition, when switching the background image along with the display of the background concealing image, it is possible to switch the display mode of the reserved image or to end the display of the reserved image.
At this time, the brightness of the light emitted from the luminous decorative member can be gradually decreased as the visibility of the background image decreases, or the brightness of the light emitted from the luminous decorative member can be gradually increased as the visibility of the background image increases, thereby making the luminous decorative member look natural.

In the embodiment shown, the reserved image is displayed until timing t45, but the display of the reserved image may be terminated at timing t44, when the decorative pattern is displayed in a static state. Furthermore, at the same time as the display of the reserved image is terminated, the luminous color of the tank role-playing device 3770 may be changed from the luminous color of the reserved image to the normal luminous color, white.

In variant example 15 of Figure 243, the pending image is displayed in red and the tank device 3770 is turned off at timing t38, but instead of being turned off, it may be illuminated in white.
In variants 11 to 13 of Figure 243, at timing t39, the red reserved image is changed to a white reserved image or the reserved image is not displayed, but at this time the red light emission state of the tank role-piece 3770 may be continued until a predetermined timing (for example, timing t44 when the stopped display of the decorative pattern begins or timing t45 when the stopped display of the decorative pattern ends).

In the embodiment shown, the light emission mode of the tank role object 3770 is changed to white or turned off, but it is also possible to modify the light emission mode of the tank role object 3770 so that, at the timing when the light emission mode of the tank role object 3770 is changed to white or turned off, the light emission mode of the tank role object 3770 stops being adjusted to the light emission mode of the hold display and starts to emit light simply as decoration. In this case, the expectation level may not be indicated by the light emission mode, or a light emission mode that matches the type of normal background image being displayed may be adopted.

It may also be possible to implement an effect in which, while the decorative pattern is being displayed in a changing state, the reserved image or reserved image is changed to a reserved image or reserved image that indicates a higher level of expectation.
For example, at timing t25 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 242(a), the reserved image may be changed from red to gold, thereby letting the player know that the expectation is higher.
In addition, during the first to third periods in which the background concealment image is displayed, it is preferable not to change the reserved image or the reserved image to another display mode that indicates a different degree of expectation.
With this configuration, the visibility of the reserved image and the reserved image is guaranteed at the time when the expectation level changes, preventing the player from missing the reserved image and the changes in the display mode of the reserved image.

An embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to Fig. 242(a) will be described below with reference to Fig. 244(a). Note that, other than the movement of the tank role object 3770, the performance is basically the same as the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 242(a) etc., and therefore a description of these aspects will be omitted.
In this embodiment, when a special reach is executed, the tank role object 3770 moves from the standby position to the moving position, and then moves from the moving position to the standby position.
As described above, Figures 241(a) and 241(b) show the tank role object 3770 in the standby position, while Figures 241(c) and 241(d) show the tank role object 3770 in the moving position.

In this embodiment, the tank role object 3770 is located in a standby position from timing t0 to timing t21. Then, from timing t21 to timing t24, it moves upward from the standby position to the moving position. From timing t24 to timing t36, it is located in the moving position. From timing t36 to timing t42, it moves downward from the moving position to the standby position. From timing t42 to timing t45, it is located in the standby position. It is recommended that the tank role object 3770 make these movements at a constant speed.

In addition, the tank device 3770 will begin to emit red light at the time when the pending image is displayed in red (such as the time when the initial winning occurs or the time when the variable display begins, as described above), and will continue to emit red light until time t45.
In this way, in this embodiment, the downward movement of the tank character 3770 begins at the same time as the display of the background concealment image begins, and the downward movement of the tank character 3770 ends at the same time as the display of the background concealment image ends.

It is advisable to configure the tank device 3770 so that the likelihood of a jackpot is higher when it moves upward than when it does not.

This configuration makes it possible to make the action of moving the movable decorative member (tank device 3770) from the moving position to the standby position less noticeable. Therefore, if the special lottery results in a jackpot, it is possible to prevent the joy of the player who is excited about winning the jackpot from diminishing. It is also possible to make it less likely for a player who loses to feel disappointed that their expectations were high but the result was a loss.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 244(a), the tank feature 3770 was moved downward during the period from timing t36 to timing t42. Below, however, an embodiment in which the timing for moving the tank feature 3770 downward is modified will be described with reference to the time chart in Figure 244(b).

Variation 01 is an example in which the tank role-playing object 3770 is moved from the moving position to the standby position between timing t34 and timing t36.
Similarly, in variants 02 to 14, the tank role-piece 3770 moves from the moving position to the standby position at the respective timings shown in Figure 244 (b).

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 244(a) and 244(b), the movement of the tank prop 3770 starts and ends at the same time as the start and end of the period before the visibility of the background image decreases, the period when the background image gradually becomes less visible (first period), the period when the background image is not visible (second period), the period when the background image gradually becomes more visible (third period), and the period after the visibility of the background image has returned to normal (fourth period).However, these embodiments may be modified so that the downward movement of the tank prop 3770 starts in the middle of a certain period, or the downward movement of the tank prop 3770 ends in the middle of a certain period.
For example, the downward movement may start at timing t37 in the middle of the first period and end at timing t39 in the middle of the second period. Also, for example, the downward movement may start and end within the second period.

In this way, by moving the movable decorative element (tank element 3770) from the moving position to the standby position around the time when the background concealment image is displayed and the visibility of the decorative pattern decreases, the movement of the movable decorative element returning to the standby position can be made less noticeable.

Each embodiment of the movement mode of the tank character 3770 shown with reference to Figures 244(a) and 244(b) may be combined with each embodiment of the display mode of the reserved image and the light emission mode of the tank character 3770 shown with reference to Figures 242(a) to 242(i) and 243(a) to 243(h).
For example, the embodiments described in Figure 244 may be combined with the embodiments described in Figure 242 or Figure 243 at the timing shown in the figure to move and illuminate the tank character 3770 and display the pending image.
Alternatively, the light emission pattern or change in the pending image shown in Figures 242 and 243 may begin at the timing when the period in which the tank character 3770 shown in Figure 244 moves downward begins or ends.
Alternatively, the lighting pattern and change in the pending image shown in Figures 242 and 243 may begin exactly in the middle of the period in which the tank character 3770 shown in Figure 244 moves downward.

By using this configuration, the light emission pattern of the tank part 3770 can be made more or less noticeable.
Even if a background concealing image is displayed in the display area, reducing the visibility of the display area, the movable decorative member (tank device 3770) emits light, allowing the player to know the degree of expectation of a jackpot or a miss.
Alternatively, as a background concealment image is displayed in the display area, reducing the visibility of the display area, the movable decorative element (tank element 3770) can be turned off, making the movement of the movable decorative element less noticeable.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 233 to 236, the visibility of the background image and decorative pattern is reduced simultaneously, but an embodiment modified to reduce the visibility of these at different times will be described with reference to Figures 245 and 246.

Note that Figure 245(a) shows basically the same presentation as the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 233(a) etc., except for the addition of an explanation of the visual appearance of the decorative pattern, so explanation of this will be omitted.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 245 (a), during the period from timing t13 to timing t19 and the period from timing t36 to timing t42, the visibility of the background image and decorative pattern gradually decreases, the background image and decorative pattern become invisible, and the visibility of the background image and decorative pattern gradually increases.

Figure 245(b) shows an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment shown in Figure 245(a) in which the visibility of the background image and the visibility of the decorative pattern may not match.

In variant 01, the visibility of the decorative pattern decreases from timing t14 to timing t15, the decorative pattern becomes invisible from timing t15 to timing t17, and the visibility of the decorative pattern increases from timing t17 to timing t18.
In addition, the visibility of the decorative pattern decreases from timing t37 to timing t38, the decorative pattern becomes invisible from timing t38 to timing t40, and the visibility of the decorative pattern increases from timing t40 to timing t41.

In variants 02 to 08, similarly, at the respective times shown in Figure 245 (b), the visibility of the decorative pattern decreases, the decorative pattern becomes invisible, and the visibility of the decorative pattern increases.

Fig. 246 shows a display example corresponding to Modification 03 of Fig. 245(b). Also, Fig. 246(a) to Fig. 246(h) show display states corresponding to the respective display states shown with reference to Fig. 236(a) to Fig. 236(h).
246(b) shows a display example from timing t37 to timing t38 in Modification 03 of FIG. 245(b). This figure shows a display example in which the visibility of the background image is reduced, but the visibility of the decorative pattern is not reduced. In order to prevent the visibility of the decorative pattern from being reduced, it is preferable to temporarily set the display priority of the decorative pattern higher than the display priority of the background concealing image.
246(g) shows a display example from timing t42 to timing t43. This figure shows a display example in which the visibility of the background image is not reduced, but the visibility of the decorative pattern is reduced. Note that, in order to reduce the visibility of the decorative pattern when the background concealment image is not displayed, it is preferable to display a black translucent image in front of the decorative pattern.
As Figures 246(a), 246(c) to 246(f), and 246(h) are similar to the embodiments shown with reference to Figures 236(a), 236(c) to 236(f), and 236(h), explanations thereof will be omitted.

In addition, the visual recognition mode of the decorative symbols at the start of the special reach in the embodiment shown in Fig. 245(a) and each modified example shown in Fig. 245(b) may be appropriately combined with the visual recognition mode of the decorative symbols at the end of the special reach in the embodiment shown in Fig. 245(a) and each modified example shown in Fig. 245(b). For example, at the start of the special reach, the decorative symbols may be displayed in the manner of modified example 01, and at the end of the special reach, the decorative symbols may be displayed in the manner of modified example 02.
With this configuration, the background image can be switched appropriately according to the content of the presentation.

Referring to Figure 246, an embodiment in which a black background concealment image is displayed has been shown, but instead of a black background concealment image, a white background concealment image or a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character, etc. may also be displayed.

According to the embodiments of variants 01, 02, 03, 04, and 06, when the background image is switched, the time during which the decorative pattern is visible can be extended, thereby preventing the player from being unable to understand the game content.
According to the embodiments of Variations 03, 05, 06, 07, and 08, the time during which the decorative symbols are difficult to see can be extended when the background image is switched. This allows the player to focus their attention on the display content other than the decorative symbols when the special reach begins, thereby increasing interest. Furthermore, when the special reach ends, decorative symbols are displayed in a manner indicating a reach miss or a jackpot, and in the case of a reach miss, the player's disappointment can be alleviated. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot, the player's interest can be increased by teasing them.

During the special reach, a special decorative pattern with a different design from that of the normal decorative pattern is displayed. Specifically, during the normal reach, a large normal decorative pattern with a character as shown in Fig. 225(a) is displayed, and during the special reach, a small special reach decorative pattern without a character as shown in Fig. 225(b) is displayed. Note that although the design of the decorative pattern is different, the numbers indicated by the decorative pattern are the same before and after the background concealment image is displayed.
At the end of the special reach, the special reach decorative pattern is displayed in a temporarily stopped state in the first period, the special reach decorative pattern is changed to a normal decorative pattern in the second period, and the normal decorative pattern is displayed in a temporarily stopped state in the third period.
During the temporary stop display, the displayed decorative pattern is not changed to another decorative pattern with a different number, and the decorative pattern is displayed in a manner that oscillates periodically, and the oscillating manner may be the same or different between the first period and the third period. For example, the temporary stop display manner of the decorative pattern in the first period and the third period may be one of an up-down oscillating manner, a left-right oscillating manner, or a oscillating manner that rotates around an axis of up-down.
Furthermore, the oscillation period of the decorative symbols in the first period may be the same as the oscillation period of the decorative symbols in the third period. For example, the oscillation period of the decorative symbols in the first period and the oscillation period of the decorative symbols in the third period may be set to 1 second.
Alternatively, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be longer than the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the third period. For example, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be set to 2 seconds, and the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be set to 1 second.
Alternatively, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be shorter than the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the third period. For example, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be 1 second, and the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be 2 seconds.

In this way, by differentiating the display mode when the normal decorative symbols and the special reach decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, it becomes easier for players to recognize the difference between the normal decorative symbols and the special reach decorative symbols.

The oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the first period may be shorter than the length of the first period. Similarly, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be shorter than the length of the third period. For example, when the first period and the third period are each 2 seconds, the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the first period and the oscillation period of the decorative pattern in the third period may be 1 second.
Alternatively, the oscillation period of the decorative symbols in the first period may be longer than the length of the first period. On the other hand, the oscillation period of the decorative symbols in the third period may be shorter than the length of the third period. For example, when the first period and the third period are each 2 seconds, the oscillation period of the decorative symbols in the first period may be 3 seconds, and the oscillation period of the decorative symbols in the third period may be 1 second.
Alternatively, the oscillation period of the decorative symbols in the first period may be shorter than the length of the first period. On the other hand, the oscillation period of the decorative symbols in the third period may be longer than the length of the third period. For example, when the first period and the third period are each 2 seconds, the oscillation period of the decorative symbols in the first period may be 1 second, and the oscillation period of the decorative symbols in the third period may be 3 seconds.
Alternatively, the oscillation period of the decorative symbols in the first period may be longer than the length of the first period. Similarly, the oscillation period of the decorative symbols in the third period may be longer than the length of the third period. For example, when the first period and the third period are each 2 seconds, the oscillation period of the decorative symbols in the first period and the third period may be 3 seconds.

In this way, by differentiating the display mode when the normal decorative symbols and the special reach decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, it becomes easier for players to recognize the difference between the normal decorative symbols and the special reach decorative symbols.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 233(a), the third period, during which the background image gradually becomes more visible, is set to two seconds, and the fourth period, during which the background image visibility returns to normal, is set to two seconds. However, the fourth period may be omitted, and the change in the decorative pattern may be stopped at the end of the third period. For example, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 233(a), the decorative pattern may be displayed in a static state at time t42, when the third period ends. Similarly, in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 233(b), the decorative pattern may be displayed in a static state at time t43, when the third period ends. Similarly, in Modifications 02 to 12, the decorative pattern may be displayed in a static state at the end of the third period.
The fourth period may be shorter than the third period. For example, if the third period is 2 seconds, the fourth period may be set to less than 2 seconds.

With this configuration, the decorative pattern can be definitively displayed promptly after the end of the third period.

Referring to Figure 233 (a), in the embodiment, the display of the reserved image was terminated at timing t44 when the decorative pattern was displayed in a stopped state, but a dynamic display that erases the reserved image may also be performed for a short period of time from timing t44.
At this time, rather than simply ending the display of the reserved image, a concealed image that conceals at least a part of the reserved image may be displayed in front of the reserved image at the same time as the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, and then the display of the reserved image and the concealed image may be ended after 0.3 to 0.5 seconds have elapsed.
Alternatively, the reserved image itself may be dynamically erased and displayed in the same manner. For example, the size of the reserved image may be gradually reduced, and after 0.3 to 0.5 seconds, the size of the reserved image may be set to 0, and the display of the reserved image may be terminated.

With this configuration, the player can accept the results of the special lottery without being bound by the degree of expectation shown during the variable display.
Furthermore, the display of the reserved image can be ended in a natural manner.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 233 to 236, the decorative symbols provisionally displayed at timing t34 indicate whether the result of the special lottery is a loss or a jackpot. However, a modification of this embodiment will be described below with reference to Figures 247 to 251, in which the decorative symbols may be provisionally displayed in a display mode indicating a loss, and then change to a display mode indicating a jackpot. Note that the decorative symbols will not change to a display mode indicating a loss, after being provisionally displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot.

In this embodiment, at timing t34 during a special reach, the left, center, and right special reach decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a miss (for example, "232"), after which a revival effect may be executed after the temporary stop miss. After the revival effect is executed after the temporary stop miss, the normal decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a miss, or in a display mode indicating a jackpot.

247 to 249 are time charts showing examples of effects in this embodiment, and Fig. 250 and Fig. 251 are diagrams showing examples of displays in this embodiment.
In addition, the presentation modes other than the revival presentation after a temporary stop miss are basically the same as those in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 233 (a) etc., so explanations of these will be omitted.

Figures 247(b), 248(b), and 249(b) show the display time of the decorative pattern changes when the revival effect after the temporary stop is unsuccessful and the display time of the decorative pattern changes when the revival effect after the temporary stop is unsuccessful.
Figures 247(c) to 247(g), 248(c) to 248(f), and 249(c) to 249(h) show examples of the presentation in the display area when the revival presentation after a temporary stop misses fails, and examples of the presentation in the display area when the revival presentation after a temporary stop misses is successful.
Figure 250 shows an example of the display in the display area when the revival effect after a temporary stop misses fails, and Figure 251 shows an example of the display in the display area when the revival effect after a temporary stop misses is successful.

Among these presentation examples, we will explain the revival presentation after a temporary stop miss by referring to the time chart (variation 06) shown in Figure 248 (d) and the display examples shown in Figures 250 and 251.

In the sixth modification, at timing t34, the reach decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss. Figures 250(a) and 251(a) show a state in which the reach decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss.
Next, from timing t36 to timing t37, an image of a bomb character and the line "You still have a chance!" is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area. Figures 250(b) and 251(b) show the display state from timing t36 to timing t37. Figures 250(c) and 251(c) show the display state from timing t37 to timing t38.
Next, from timing t38 to timing t39, the bomb character and the dialogue image move from the upper right corner of the display area to the center of the bottom of the display area.
From timing t39 to timing t40, a bomb character is displayed together with either an image with the line "There's nothing I can do..." indicating that the revival effect after a missed temporary stop has failed, or an image with the line "A feeling of victory!" indicating that the revival effect after a missed temporary stop has succeeded. Figure 250(d) shows an example of a display when the revival effect after a missed temporary stop has failed, and Figure 251(d) shows an example of a display when the revival effect after a missed temporary stop has succeeded.

If the revival performance after the temporary stop is unsuccessful, the bomb character and the dialogue image are no longer displayed at timing t40, and the same display as that in the case where the revival performance after the temporary stop is not performed is performed from timing t40 to timing t45.
Figure 250(e) shows an example of display from timing t40 to timing t41, Figure 250(f) shows an example of display from timing t41 to timing t42, Figure 250(g) shows an example of display from timing t42 to timing t44, and Figure 250(h) shows an example of display from timing t44 to timing t45.

If the revival effect after a missed temporary stop is successful, at timing t40, the decorative symbols are displayed temporarily stopped in a pattern that indicates a jackpot, the display of the decorative symbols stops at timing t49, and the decorative symbols are displayed stationary from timing t49 to timing t50. In addition, the bomb character and dialogue image continue to be displayed from timing t40 to timing t50. In other words, the display time of the decorative symbols when the revival effect after a missed temporary stop is successful is longer than the display time of the decorative symbols when the revival effect after a missed temporary stop is unsuccessful.

Figure 251(e) shows an example of the display from timing t40 to timing t41, Figure 251(f) shows an example of the display from timing t41 to timing t42, Figure 251(g) shows an example of the display from timing t42 to timing t49, and Figure 251(h) shows an example of the display from timing t49 to timing t50. As is clear from the figure, if the revival effect is successful after a temporary stop miss (if the special lottery result is a jackpot), the bomb character and dialogue image will continue to be displayed until the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.

Variant 06 has been described as a representative example, but in other variants, the timing at which the revival effect begins after a missed temporary stop, the number of seconds the bomb character is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area, the timing at which the bomb character moves to indicate whether it was a failure or success, and the length of time the bomb character is displayed in the bottom center of the display area when the revival effect is successful will differ, but in other aspects, the same display as variant 06 will be displayed.
For example, in the embodiments shown in Figures 247(c) to 247(g) and variants 01 to 04, the display of the bomb character begins at timing t34, but the timing at which the bomb character moves and the display of the dialogue image showing the result of the special lottery begins is timing t37 in variant 01, timing t39 in variant 02, timing t41 in variant 03, and timing t43 in variant 04.
Similarly, FIG. 248 shows a modified example in which the display of the bomb character begins at timing t36, and FIG. 249 shows modified examples in which the display of the bomb character begins at timing t38, timing t40, and timing t42.

If the revival effect after a temporary stop miss is successful, the display mode of the decorative pattern displayed in the temporary stop state can be changed from a display mode indicating a miss to a display mode indicating a jackpot when the image with the line "A feeling of victory!" is displayed. Alternatively, the display mode can be changed to a display mode indicating a jackpot a predetermined number of seconds after the image with the line "A feeling of victory!" is displayed (for example, one second later).

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 247 to 251, after the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern temporarily stop in a mode indicating a miss, the display of the bomb character and dialogue image begins at the start of the period until the visibility of the background image begins to decrease, the period when the background image gradually becomes less visible (first period), the period when the background image is not visible (second period), the period when the background image gradually becomes more visible (third period), and the period after the visibility of the background image has returned to normal (fourth period), or the display of the dialogue image begins during these periods, and at the end of these periods, an announcement of whether or not a jackpot has been reached is made using the dialogue image (when the revival performance fails). However, these embodiments may be modified so that the display of the bomb character and dialogue image begins in the middle of a certain period, or the display of the bomb character and dialogue image begins at the end of a certain period, or an announcement of whether or not a jackpot has been reached using the dialogue image is made in the middle of a certain period.
For example, the display of the bomb character and the dialogue image may start at timing t37 in the middle of the first period, and the dialogue image may be used to notify whether or not a jackpot has been awarded at timing t38, which is the start timing of the second period. Also, for example, the display of the bomb character may start and the bomb character may move and the dialogue image may be used to notify whether or not a jackpot has been awarded, during the second period.

The display priority of the bomb character and dialogue image is higher than the display priority of the background concealment image. On the other hand, the display priority of the bomb character and dialogue image is lower than the display priority of the fourth symbol and the pending number display image.

If the result of the revival effect after the temporary stop miss is unsuccessful, the revival effect after the temporary stop miss may be executed again. For example, if the execution mode shown in Fig. 247(c) is unsuccessful, the revival effect may be executed again in any of the modes shown in Figs. 248(c) to 248(f) or 249(c) to 249(h). Similarly, even if the mode shown in Fig. 248(c) is unsuccessful, the revival effect after the temporary stop miss may be executed again in the modes shown in Figs. 249(c) to 249(h).
In this way, the revival effect after a temporary stop miss may be configured to be executable multiple times so that after a failed result is displayed once in the revival effect after a temporary stop miss, the revival effect after a temporary stop miss may finally be successful and the player may be shown that the result of the special lottery is a win.

In this way, even if the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a miss, a revival effect after the temporary stop miss may be executed when the background image is switched, resulting in a big win, so the player can have a sense of expectation for a big win until the final stage of the variable display.
In particular, since the display content in the display area is simple due to the background concealment image being displayed, the player can be given a great sense of surprise and joy when a revival effect is executed after a temporary stop miss in this state, or when the result of the revival effect after a temporary stop miss is announced as a success and a jackpot occurs.

In the period (first period) when the visibility of the special reach background image gradually decreases, when a revival performance is performed after a temporary stop miss, the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in a manner indicating a miss, so that the player's disappointment is not sustained, and the player's expectation for a big win can be increased.
When a revival effect after a temporary stop miss is performed during a period (second period) when the special reach background image is not visible, the visibility of the revival effect after a temporary stop miss is high, so that a player can easily notice that the revival effect after a temporary stop miss has been executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking that the revival effect after a temporary stop miss is being executed.
When a revival effect is performed after a temporary stop miss during a period (third period) when the normal background image gradually becomes easier to see or during a period (fourth period) when the normal background image is easily visible, the normal background image can be seen, making the player think that the result of the special lottery is a miss, but it may turn out to be a big win, which can excite the player.
As shown with reference to FIG. 233(b), by lengthening the lengths of the first to fourth periods, these effects can be made more effective.
In addition, by lengthening the lengths of the first to fourth periods, the revival effect may be executed multiple times after the temporary stop fails in a certain period.

Referring to Figures 247 to 251, an embodiment of the revival effect after a temporary stop miss has been shown, but it may also be combined with the other embodiments described above.

Referring to Figures 224 to 251, an embodiment and its variations of the "enemy tank destruction reach" effect are shown, but the embodiment and its variations of the "enemy tank destruction reach" effect may also be applied to other embodiments described in this specification (for example, the "giant tank reach" effect described below).

Below, an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to Figures 224 to 236 etc. will be described. In the "Giant Tank Reach" which is a special reach effect in this embodiment, special reach background image A is displayed instead of special reach background image B. Also, operation of mission button 3700 is valid instead of attack button 3710. Also, while the special reach background image is displayed, no reserved image is displayed.
252(a) is a time chart showing an example of the effect from timing t10 to timing t45 in this embodiment. Note that, apart from the reserved image, the display mode of the reserved image, and the effect mode during the special reach (such as the background image and the enemy tank), the effect mode is basically the same as that in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 233(a) etc., and therefore a description of these will be omitted.

Fig. 253 shows a display example at the start of the "Giant Tank Reach" effect. The display examples shown in Fig. 253(a) to Fig. 253(g) correspond to the display examples shown in Fig. 234(a) to Fig. 234(g), respectively, and the display timing etc. are the same as the effect examples shown with reference to Fig. 234(a) to Fig. 234(g).
Fig. 254 shows a display example at the end of the "Giant Tank Reach" (when a jackpot occurs). The display examples shown in Fig. 254(a) to Fig. 254(g) correspond to the display examples shown in Fig. 235(a) to Fig. 235(g), respectively, and the display timing etc. are the same as the presentation examples shown with reference to Fig. 235(a) to Fig. 235(g).
Fig. 255 shows a display example at the end of the "Giant Tank Reach" (when you lose). The display examples shown in Fig. 255(a) to Fig. 255(g) correspond to the display examples shown in Fig. 236(a) to Fig. 236(g), respectively, and the display timing etc. are the same as the presentation examples shown with reference to Fig. 236(a) to Fig. 236(g).

As shown in Figures 252 to 255, in the "Giant Tank Reach" of this embodiment, the image of the enemy tank displayed is different from that in the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach." Furthermore, the special reach background image A is displayed as the background image. Furthermore, operation of the mission button 3700 is effective, not the attack button 3710. Furthermore, the reserved image or reserved image is not displayed during the "Giant Tank Reach."

In this embodiment, the "Giant Tank Reach" has a higher probability of winning when a reach effect is executed than the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" shown with reference to Figures 233 to 236, etc. For example, the probability of winning is 10% for the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" and 50% for the "Giant Tank Reach."

As shown with reference to Figures 254 and 255, the reserved image and the reserved image are not displayed during the "Giant Tank Reach", but it is also possible to display the reserved image and not display the reserved image.
By using this configuration, the player can recognize the expectation level indicated by the reserved image even during the "Giant Tank Reach." Also, during the execution of the "Giant Tank Reach," which has a very high expectation level, the player basically does not consider increasing the number of reserved positions or the expectation level of the variable display that will be performed after the current variable display (for example, even if a green reserved image is displayed in the third reserved display area, the player is more concerned with the result of the "Giant Tank Reach"). Therefore, by not displaying the reserved image, the display content of the display area can be simplified, allowing the player to concentrate on the "Giant Tank Reach."

Referring to Figures 233 and 252, an example has been shown in which a "Giant Tank Reach" and an "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" are reached at the same time, but when a "Giant Tank Reach" occurs, the time for which the normal background image is displayed may be longer than when an "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" occurs. For example, the time for which the normal background image is displayed may be extended by 5 seconds, a reach state occurs at timing t15, and at timing t21, the normal background image A is switched to the special reach background image A, and the "Giant Tank Reach" begins.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 233 and 252, the length of time the reach performance is executed is the same for the "Giant Tank Reach" and the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", but the length of time the reach performance is executed may be different. For example, the "Giant Tank Reach" may take longer than the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", or the reach performance of the "Giant Tank Reach" may end in a shorter time than the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach".

When the reserved image indicating that the expectation level is above a predetermined level (for example, a red reserved image or a gold reserved image) is displayed, the "giant tank reach" may always occur. On the other hand, when the reserved image indicating that the expectation level is below a predetermined level (for example, a white reserved image or a green reserved image) is displayed, the presentation may be such that the "giant tank reach" occurs, the "enemy tank destruction reach" occurs, or neither reach occurs.

It has been shown that in the "enemy tank destruction reach," any of a black background concealment image, a white background concealment image, a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character, etc. may be used, but in the "giant tank reach," any of a black background concealment image, a white background concealment image, a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character, etc. may also be used.
For example, the background concealment image may be different, such as by using a bomb character or the like in the "giant tank reach" and a black background concealment image in the "enemy tank destruction reach." Alternatively, the "giant tank reach" and the "enemy tank destruction reach" may use the same background concealment image (for example, a black background concealment image for both).

Figures 252(b) and 252(c) show several embodiments (Variation 01 to Variation 12) that are modifications of the embodiment shown in Figure 252(a) so that the lengths (specifically, 2 seconds) of the first period during which the background image becomes gradually less visible, the second period during which the background image is not visible, and the third period during which the background image becomes gradually more visible are different rather than being the same. Note that these embodiments may also achieve the same effects as the embodiments shown with reference to Figures 233(b) and 233(c).

In this way, in the first reach effect ("giant tank reach"), the reserved image is not displayed while the special reach background image is displayed. On the other hand, in the second reach effect ("enemy tank destruction reach"), the reserved image is displayed while the special reach background image is displayed. In this way, by providing cases where the reserved image is not displayed and cases where it is displayed depending on the type of reach, the display content can be diversified.
For example, by not displaying the reserved image, the player can focus on the tank-based effects. On the other hand, by displaying the reserved image, the player can decide whether or not to operate the handle 302. Furthermore, when the reserved image is displayed, the player can know the degree of expectation of a jackpot.

The visual appearance of the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" may be the embodiment shown in Fig. 252(a) or the modified embodiments shown in Fig. 252(b) and Fig. 252(c). The contents shown in the time chart are the same as those shown with reference to Fig. 233, with some exceptions.
In addition, the visual appearance of the background image in the "enemy tank destruction reach" may be the embodiment shown in Figure 233(a) or the modified embodiments shown in Figures 233(b) and 233(c).
In addition, the configuration may be such that a "giant tank reach" employing any of the embodiments or modified examples shown in FIG. 252 and an "enemy tank destruction reach" employing any of the embodiments or modified examples shown in FIG. 233 can be executed.
For example, in the "giant tank reach", modified example 01 shown in FIG. 252(b) may be adopted, and in the "enemy tank destruction reach", modified example 02 shown in FIG. 233(b) may be adopted.

The embodiment and modified example shown with reference to Figure 252 can also achieve the same effects as the embodiment and modified example shown with reference to Figure 233.

As shown in variant example 01 in Figure 252(b) and variant example 02 in Figure 233(b), in the "Giant Tank Reach", the third period (3 seconds) during which a display employs a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character or the like may be made longer than the third period (1 second) during which a display employs a black background concealment image different from that in the "Giant Tank Reach" in the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach".
According to this configuration, in the first reach performance ("giant tank reach"), the reserved image that has not been displayed until then is displayed more slowly at the end of the reach performance than in the second reach performance ("enemy tank destruction reach").

As shown in variant example 01 in Figure 252(b) and variant example 01 in Figure 233(b), in the "Giant Tank Reach", the third period (3 seconds) during which a display employs a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character or the like may be made the same length as the third period (3 seconds) during which a display employs a black background concealment image different from that in the "Giant Tank Reach" during the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach".
With this configuration, the display process can be simplified.

As in variant example 02 shown in Figure 252(b) and variant example 01 shown in Figure 233(b), in the "Giant Tank Reach", the third period (1 second) during which a display employs a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character or the like may be made shorter than the third period (3 seconds) during which a display employs a black background concealment image different from that in the "Giant Tank Reach" during the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach".
According to this configuration, in the first reach performance ("giant tank reach"), the reserved image that has not been displayed until then becomes visible in a short period of time at the end of the reach performance, compared to the second reach performance ("enemy tank destruction reach").

By making the third period during which the background image becomes gradually more visible longer when the background image changes at the end of the first reach effect ("giant tank reach") than when the background image changes at the end of the second reach effect ("enemy tank destruction reach"), the player's eyes are drawn to the reserved image that has been displayed for the first time in a while, and the player's awareness of the reserved number is heightened. This allows the player to decide whether or not to launch the game ball.
In particular, in the first reach performance, a longer time has passed since the variable display began and the expectation of a big win is higher, so players tend to lose consciousness of the number of reserved balls, but by adopting this display method, players can regain consciousness of the number of reserved balls and become more aware of the launch of game balls, which was paused during the reach performance.

As in variant example 02 shown in Figure 252(b) and variant example 01 shown in Figure 233(b), in the "Giant Tank Reach", the fourth period (3 seconds) after the end of the third period in which a display employs a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character or the like is made may be longer than the fourth period (1 second) after the end of the third period in which a display employs a black background concealment image different from that in the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" is made.
According to this configuration, in the first reach effect ("giant tank reach"), the reserved image that was previously invisible or difficult to see is displayed clearly for a relatively long period at the end of the reach effect compared to the second reach effect ("enemy tank destruction reach"), so the player can remember to launch the game ball. Also, although there is a risk that the result of the special lottery will be a loss and the player will be shocked, this will ensure that the player has time to switch their mind to the next and subsequent display of the decorative patterns.

As in variant example 01 shown in Figure 252(b) and variant example 01 shown in Figure 233(b), in the "Giant Tank Reach", the fourth period (1 second) after the end of the third period in which a display employs a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character or the like may be made the same length as the fourth period (1 second) after the end of the third period in which a display employs a black background concealment image different from that in the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" is made.
With this configuration, the display process can be simplified.

As shown in variant example 01 in Figure 252(b) and variant example 02 in Figure 233(b), in the "Giant Tank Reach", for example, the fourth period (1 second) after the end of the third period in which a display employing a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character or the like is made may be shorter than the fourth period (3 seconds) after the end of the third period in which a display employing a black background concealment image different from that in the "Giant Tank Reach" is made in the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach".
According to this configuration, the time for which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at the end of the first reach performance ("giant tank reach") can be made shorter than that of the second reach performance ("enemy tank destruction reach").

In addition, one method for making the length of the fourth period different or the same for the "Giant Tank Reach" and the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" is to change the timing at which the decorative pattern stops changing from timing t44 to timing t43 or timing t45 in the embodiments and variants shown in Figures 252 and 233.

In the "enemy tank destruction reach" shown with reference to Fig. 233 etc., the display priority of the decorative symbols may be higher than the display priority of the background concealment image. For example, during the period from timing t10 to timing t44, the display priority of the decorative symbols may be higher than the display priority of the background concealment image.
By adopting such a configuration, the decorative pattern is always visible during a period in which the background image becomes gradually difficult to see (first period), a period in which the background image is not visible (second period), and a period in which the background image becomes gradually easier to see (third period).
In addition, it is advisable to switch between the reach decorative pattern and the normal decorative pattern at an appropriate timing, such as when the next variable display starts.
In this way, in the first reach performance ("giant tank reach"), the decorative pattern may be made invisible during the second period, and in the second reach performance ("enemy tank destruction reach"), the decorative pattern may be made visible during the second period.

In the first reach effect ("giant tank reach"), which has a relatively high expectation, even if the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in a losing state, the decorative pattern becomes invisible in the second period, so that the shock felt by the player due to the losing result can be alleviated.
On the other hand, in the second reach presentation ("enemy tank destruction reach"), which has a relatively low expectation, the decorative symbols are displayed temporarily stopped in a losing state, and even if the decorative symbols are visible in the second period, the player does not feel that much of a shock; rather, since the decorative symbols continue to be visible, the player can smoothly switch his/her mind to the change in the next decorative symbol, and the tempo of the change in the decorative symbol is not hindered.

In the embodiment shown, the normal decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in the same position and at the same size during the third period of the "Giant Tank Reach" in which a display employs a background concealment image consisting of, for example, a bomb character, and during the third period of the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" in which a display employs a black background concealment image different from that of the "Giant Tank Reach." However, other modes may be adopted as the mode of temporarily displaying the normal decorative pattern during the third period of the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach."
For example, during the third period, the size of the normal decorative pattern displayed at the same position may be reduced. Alternatively, during the third period, the position of the normal decorative pattern may be changed and the size of the normal decorative pattern displayed may remain the same. Alternatively, during the third period, the position of the normal decorative pattern may be changed and the size of the normal decorative pattern may be reduced.
Strictly speaking, the same position may mean the average position of the normal decorative pattern that is displayed while swaying at a predetermined cycle.

For both the "Giant Tank Reach" and the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach," after the reach performance ends (the end of the special reach background image for each reach), the same normal decorative symbol is displayed as the decorative symbol from the third period onwards. The temporary stopping position of the normal decorative symbol is also the same. During the third period of the "Giant Tank Reach," a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character or the like is displayed, while during the third period of the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach," a black background concealment image different from that of the "Giant Tank Reach" is displayed.
By adopting such a configuration, after the end of the first reach and the second reach, which have different contents and expectations of the presentation display, the normal decorative symbols are visible to the player in the same presentation mode, so that the player can direct his/her intention to the changes from the next time onwards.

Referring to Figure 238, an example is shown in which a strip-shaped preview performance image is displayed when an "enemy tank destruction reach" is executed, but a strip-shaped preview performance image may also be displayed in a similar manner when a "giant tank reach" is executed.
Furthermore, the display mode of the strip-shaped pre-reading effect image when the background concealed image in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 238 is displayed can be adopted as the display mode of the strip-shaped pre-reading effect image in the "giant tank reach." For example, the display priority may be higher than that of the background concealed image so that the display of the strip-shaped pre-reading effect image is not affected even in the first period through the third period, or the display priority may be lower than that of the background concealed image so that the visibility of the strip-shaped pre-reading effect image is reduced in the first period, made invisible in the second period, and improved in the third period. Alternatively, the display of the strip-shaped pre-reading effect image may be stopped while the background concealed image is displayed (the visibility of the strip-shaped pre-reading effect image is reduced in the first period, made invisible in the second period, and also invisible in the third and fourth periods).

Three display modes for the strip-shaped preview effect image have been shown: a mode in which the display priority is higher than the background concealment image so that the display of the strip-shaped preview effect image is not affected from the first period through the third period; a mode in which the display priority is lower than the background concealment image so that the visibility of the strip-shaped preview effect image is reduced in the first period, made invisible in the second period, and improved in the third period; and a mode in which the display of the strip-shaped preview effect image is stopped while the background concealment image is displayed (the visibility of the strip-shaped preview effect image is reduced in the first period, made invisible in the second period, and also invisible in the third and fourth periods). However, any one of these display modes may be used as the display mode for the strip-shaped preview effect image in the "Giant Tank Reach," and any one of these display modes may be used as the display mode for the strip-shaped preview effect image in the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach."

Even if the types of reaches are different in this way, by adopting the same display mode as the display mode of the pre-reading effect image, the effect processing is standardized, and the display processing and development man-hours can be simplified.
On the other hand, by adopting different display modes as the display mode of the look-ahead effect image depending on the type of reach, it is possible to diversify the effect modes.

Referring to Figures 241 to 244, in the "enemy tank destruction reach", embodiments and variations thereof have been shown in which the tank device 3770 is made to emit light in a predetermined light color and is moved between a standby position and a moving position, but in the "giant tank reach", the embodiments and variations thereof in the "enemy tank destruction reach" may be adopted to make the tank device 3770 emit light in a predetermined light color and is moved between a standby position and a moving position.
That is, the light emitting mode of the tank role object 3770 in the "giant tank reach" may be any of the light emitting modes shown in Fig. 242 and Fig. 243. Similarly, the operation mode of the tank role object 3770 may be any of the operation modes shown in Fig. 244.

Even if the types of reaches are different, by using the same lighting and movement patterns for the movable decorative component (tank part 3770), the presentation processing can be standardized, simplifying the display processing and development man-hours.
On the other hand, by adopting different lighting and movement patterns for the movable decorative element (tank element 3770) depending on the type of reach, the presentation patterns can be diversified.

Although the tank role object 3770 is shown as an example of a movable decorative member, one or more other movable decorative members having similar functions may be provided on the game board 5. For example, a total of three movable decorative members may be provided, with standby positions above, to the right, and to the left of the display area and a moving position near the center of the display area. When multiple movable decorative members are provided, they may be illuminated or moved at the same timing as the tank role object 3770, or may be illuminated or moved at a different timing than the tank role object 3770. In other words, any of the illumination modes and operation modes shown in Figures 242 to 244 may be employed for other movable decorative members as well.
In addition, the lighting patterns and movement patterns of other movable decorative components may be different for the ``Giant Tank Reach'' and the ``Enemy Tank Destruction Reach,'' and in this case, any of the lighting patterns and movement patterns shown in Figures 242 to 244 can be adopted for the ``Giant Tank Reach'' and the ``Enemy Tank Destruction Reach.''

Although the tank role device 3770 is shown as an example of a light-emitting decorative member, light-emitting decorative members may also be provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5. The decorative means provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the door frame left side unit 530 or the door frame right side unit 550) or the decorative members provided on the game board 5 may be made to emit light at the same timing as the tank role device 3770, or may be made to emit light at a different timing from the tank role device 3770. In other words, the light-emitting decorative means provided on the door frame 3 and the light-emitting decorative members provided on the game board 5 may also employ any of the light-emitting modes shown in FIGS. 242 to 244.
In addition, the lighting patterns of the decorative means provided on the door frame 3 and the decorative members provided on the game board 5 may be different for the ``Giant Tank Reach'' and the ``Enemy Tank Destruction Reach,'' and any of the lighting patterns shown in Figures 242 to 244 can be adopted for the ``Giant Tank Reach'' and the ``Enemy Tank Destruction Reach.''

Referring to Figures 242 and 243, embodiments and variations thereof have been shown for the display mode of the reserved image in the "enemy tank destruction reach," but the reserved image may also be displayed in the "giant tank reach" by adopting any of the display modes of the reserved image in the "enemy tank destruction reach" embodiments and variations thereof.

For example, in the "giant tank reach", modified example 01 shown in FIG. 242(b) may be adopted, and in the "enemy tank destruction reach", the embodiment shown in FIG. 242(a) may be adopted.
In the case of the "Giant Tank Reach" which has a relatively high expectation level, the pending image can be quickly returned to its normal state once it is confirmed that the result of the special lottery is a loss, thereby easing the shock of the player who has had high expectations but has ended up with a loss.
On the other hand, in the case of the "enemy tank destruction reach" which has a relatively low expectation, even if it is confirmed that the result of the special lottery is a miss, the pending image is displayed in red, so that the player can be impressed with the expectation level under which the variable display was made, and can use this as a reference when a similar presentation situation occurs in the next or subsequent variable display.

Alternatively, the embodiment shown in FIG. 242(a) may be adopted in the "giant tank reach" and the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 242(b) may be adopted in the "enemy tank destruction reach."
In the case of the "enemy tank destruction reach" in which the expectation is relatively high, even if it is confirmed that the result of the special lottery is a loss, the reserved image is displayed in red so that the player can clearly recognize that the result of the special lottery is a loss despite the high expectation, and can motivate the player for the next and subsequent variable display.
On the other hand, in the case of the "enemy tank destruction reach" which has a relatively low expectation, by quickly returning the reserved image to its normal state at the stage when it is confirmed that the result of the special lottery has been a miss, the player's attention can be smoothly switched from the reach performance which originally had a relatively low expectation and was unlikely to result in a jackpot to the next variable display.

Regarding the display mode of the pending image, whether to adopt the "Giant Tank Reach" embodiment or the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" embodiment or variant, it is advisable to adopt an appropriate combination, taking into consideration the priority of these effects.

The expected jackpot probability for the "Giant Tank Reach" in this embodiment may be lower than the expected jackpot probability for the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" shown with reference to Figures 233 to 236, etc.

In addition to the above examples, the modified examples applied to the embodiment relating to the "enemy tank destruction reach" shown with reference to Figure 233 etc. may also be applied to the embodiment relating to the "giant tank reach" shown with reference to Figure 252 etc. to create a new embodiment.

In this way, during the third period of the first reach performance ("giant tank reach"), a display (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special display A") is performed in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases.
In addition, during the third period of the second reach presentation ("enemy tank destruction reach"), a display is performed in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "special display B").

As shown in Figures 142 and 143, when a jackpot occurs in the normal state, the subsequent game state may be a time-saving state, a non-time-saving probability variable state, or a probability variable state with time-saving (probability variable time-saving state), which are states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state. The advantageous states shown below refer to the time-saving state and the probability variable time-saving state among the states.
As shown with reference to Figures 142 and 143, the configuration may be such that a time-saving state occurs when a "miss with time-saving" occurs as a special lottery result, or when a miss special lottery result occurs a predetermined number of times in succession.
When in an advantageous position, the player rotates the handle 302 widely to hit the game ball toward the area on the right side of the game area (hereinafter, this may be referred to as "right hit"), causing the game ball to enter a starting hole (e.g., second starting hole 2004) located on the right side of the game area.
In addition, if a jackpot occurs during an advantageous state and the advantageous state continues thereafter, the number of balls released from the jackpot and small jackpot during that period are added up and stored in the peripheral control board 1510.
In addition, when the player is in an advantageous state, a normal background image C, which indicates that the player is in an advantageous state, is displayed in place of the normal background images A and B.
Such an advantageous state ends when a predetermined condition is met. Specifically, after the advantageous state begins, it ends when a predetermined number of consecutive misses are displayed without the decorative symbols becoming a jackpot (when the special lottery results in a predetermined number of consecutive misses). For example, in the probability variable time-saving state, the probability variable time-saving state ends when 100 consecutive misses occur. The time-saving state may also end when a predetermined number of misses occur (for example, 100). Furthermore, in a so-called "fall-down" type game in which a lottery is held at the start of each game to determine whether or not to end the probability variable time-saving state, the predetermined condition may be satisfied when the lottery to end the state is won.
In this way, the advantageous state ends when the specified conditions are met, and at the timing when the advantageous state ends (specifically, during the 100th fluctuation if the advantageous state ends after a specified number of consecutive misses (e.g., 100), or during the fluctuation when the fall-down lottery is won in the case of a fall-down type), normal background image C is switched to normal background image A or normal background image B, and the total number of game balls paid out to the player during the jackpot or advantageous state is displayed.

Figure 256 shows the images displayed at the end of a right hit. Figure 256(a) shows background concealed image A at the end of a right hit, Figure 256(b) shows background concealed image B at the end of a right hit, and Figure 256(c) shows background concealed image C at the end of a right hit. These images are based on the sunglasses worn by the bomb character.
Figure 256 (d) shows a game result image indicating that "Dynamite Time" in the right-hand hitting state has ended, the number of consecutive wins (13), and the number of game balls paid out to the player (14,125 balls).

The presentation at the end of a right hit will be explained with reference to the time chart shown in Figure 257 and the display example shown in Figure 259.
In Figure 257 (a), from timing t0 to timing t7, the 99th decorative symbol variation display is performed in the advantageous variable time-saving state. Note that the decorative symbol displayed during the variable time-saving state is the decorative symbol during right-hit.
After that, from timing t8 to timing t24, the 100th decorative symbol variation display is performed in the probability variable time-saving state. Note that this time chart shows an example of a performance in which the result of the 100th decorative symbol variation display is a miss.
259(a) shows a display example from timing t14 to timing t16. It shows a display state in which a decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in front of the normal background image C during right-hand hit.

From timing t16 to timing t17, the background concealed image A at the end of a right hit is displayed. Figure 259 (b) shows the state in which the background concealed image A at the end of a right hit is displayed.
From timing t17 to timing t18, the background concealed image B at the end of the right hit is displayed. Figure 259 (c) shows the state in which the background concealed image B at the end of the right hit is displayed.
From timing t18 to timing t20, the background concealed image C at the end of a right hit is displayed. Figure 259 (d) shows the state in which the background concealed image C at the end of a right hit is displayed.

From timing t18 to timing t20, game result images showing the game results during the right hit, such as "Dynamite Time Ended,""13 Bodies Defeated," and "14,125 Obtained," are displayed. The display of "Dynamite Time Ended" indicates that the time-saving probability variable state has ended. The display of "13 Bodies Defeated" indicates that the number of consecutive wins was 13. The display of "14,125 Obtained" also informs the player that a game ball entered the large prize slot 2005 during the right hit and the number of game balls paid out was 14,125.
Furthermore, at timing t19 during the second period when the background concealment image C is displayed at the end of right hitting and the background image is not visible, the background image is switched from the normal background image C to the normal background image A. Note that the switching may also be performed at timing t18 or timing t20.

From timing t20 to timing t21, the background concealment image B is displayed at the end of the right hit. Figure 259 (e) shows the state in which the background concealment image B is displayed at the end of the right hit. At this time, the background image has been changed to the normal background image A. In addition, the decorative pattern has been changed to the normal decorative pattern.
From timing t21 to timing t22, the background concealed image A at the end of a right hit is displayed. Figure 259 (f) shows the state in which the background concealed image A at the end of a right hit is displayed.
From timing t22 to timing t24, the normal decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. Figure 259 (g) shows the state where the background concealment image A is no longer displayed after the right hit.
Thereafter, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed from timing t24 to timing t25. Figure 259(h) shows a state in which the normal decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.

At timing t25, a new display of varying decorative symbols begins, with the background image changed to the normal background image A and the decorative symbols changed to the normal decorative symbols. Furthermore, as the game state has changed from the time-saving probability mode to the normal mode, the probability of a jackpot being determined has also changed from 1/30 to 1/300 (see Figures 142 and 143).

In this way, when the background concealment image is displayed at the end of a right hit, there is a period during which the background image gradually becomes less visible (first period), a period during which the background image is not visible (second period), a period during which the background image gradually becomes more visible (third period), and a period after which the visibility of the background image returns to normal (fourth period).

If the result of the 100th variable display in the probability variable state is a big win, the background concealing image is not displayed at the end of the right hit, and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big win.
At this time, a "giant tank reach" effect or an "enemy tank destruction reach" effect may be executed.

Figures 257(b), 257(c), and 257(d) each show an embodiment in which the timing of displaying the background concealment image at the end of a right hit is modified in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 257(a).
For example, in the time chart shown in Figure 257 (c), at timing t24, the display of background concealment image A ends when right-hand play ends, and the display of the decorative pattern changes and stops simultaneously.

Figures 258(b) and 258(c) show examples (Variation 01 to Variation 12) of modified display times and display timings of background concealed image A at the end of a right hit, background concealed image B at the end of a right hit, and background concealed image C at the end of a right hit.

By displaying this information, the player can know the number of consecutive wins (the number of consecutive jackpots) and the number of game balls acquired at the end of the right-hand hitting state.
In addition, when normal background images A to C are not displayed, the display area displaying the number of consecutive wins and the number of game balls acquired can be photographed using a mobile device such as a smartphone or digital camera.
Additionally, while such a display is being performed, the background image and decorative patterns can be smoothly switched from those in the special time-saving state or the time-saving state to those in the normal state.

The period (second period) during which the background image is not visible at the end of a right hit may be shorter than the period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in the "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach."
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 04 shown in FIG. 258 is shorter than the length of the second period in Modification 03 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period (second period) during which the background image is not visible at the end of a right hit may be the same length as the period (second period) during which the background image is not visible during the ``Giant Tank Reach'' or ``Enemy Tank Destruction Reach.''
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 258 is the same as the length of the second period in Modification 01 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period (second period) during which the background image is not visible at the end of a right hit may be longer than the period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in the "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach." The period (second period) during which the background image is not visible at the end of a right hit may be set to last for more than half the fluctuation time of the relevant fluctuation (i.e., the final fluctuation at which the advantageous state ends). This period (more than half the fluctuation time) may be longer than the shortest time of all fluctuation patterns.
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 03 shown in FIG. 258 is longer than the length of the second period in Modification 04 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period (third period) during which the background image becomes gradually more visible at the end of right-clicking may be shorter than the period (third period) during which the background image becomes gradually more visible in the ``Giant Tank Reach'' and ``Enemy Tank Destruction Reach.''
For example, the length of the third period in Modification 02 shown in FIG. 258 is shorter than the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period (third period) during which the background image becomes gradually easier to see at the end of a right hit may be the same length as the period (third period) during which the background image becomes gradually easier to see in the ``Giant Tank Reach'' and ``Enemy Tank Destruction Reach.''
For example, the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 258 is the same as the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period (third period) during which the background image becomes gradually easier to see at the end of right-clicking may be longer than the period (third period) during which the background image becomes gradually easier to see in the ``Giant Tank Reach'' and ``Enemy Tank Destruction Reach.''
For example, the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 258 is longer than the length of the third period in Modification 02 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image returns to normal at the end of right-clicking may be shorter than the period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image returns to normal in the ``Giant Tank Reach'' and ``Enemy Tank Destruction Reach.''
For example, the length of the fourth period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 258 is shorter than the length of the fourth period in Modification 02 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image returns to normal at the end of a right hit may be the same length as the period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image returns to normal in the ``Giant Tank Reach'' and ``Enemy Tank Destruction Reach''.
For example, the length of the fourth period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 258 is the same as the length of the fourth period in Modification 01 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image returns to normal at the end of right-clicking may be shorter than the period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image returns to normal in the ``Giant Tank Reach'' and ``Enemy Tank Destruction Reach.''
For example, the length of the fourth period in Modification 02 shown in FIG. 258 is shorter than the length of the fourth period in Modification 01 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

In the example shown, the background image displayed at the end of a right hit and the background image displayed after the "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" ends in a miss are both normal background image A, but the background image displayed at the end of a right hit and the background image displayed after the "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" ends in a miss may be different.
For example, normal background image B may be displayed at the end of a right hit, and after the "giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach" ends in a miss, normal background image A may be displayed. Alternatively, normal background image A may be displayed at the end of a right hit, and after the "giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach" ends in a miss, normal background image B may be displayed.

Although an example has been shown in which normal background image A is displayed instead of normal background image C at the end of a right hit, either normal background image A or normal background image B may be displayed randomly instead of normal background image C.
Furthermore, in addition to the normal background image C, background images of other types than the normal background image C (for example, background images with different types of bomb characters or dialogue) may be randomly displayed as background images during right-hand hits.

Furthermore, upon completion of right-hand hitting, normal background moving image A or normal background moving image B may be displayed instead of normal background image C. In this case, normal background moving image A or normal background moving image B may be displayed from the beginning of the moving image (the display state shown in FIG. 227(a) or FIG. 227(d)).
In addition, during right-hand hits, a background moving image specifically for right-hand hits may be displayed.

Referring to Figure 256, an example of a background concealment image at the end of a right hit is shown, but a background concealment image of another display type may also be used as the background concealment image at the end of a right hit. For example, one of a black background concealment image, a white background concealment image, a background concealment image consisting of a bomb character, etc. may be used as the background concealment image exclusively at the end of a right hit.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 259, an example was shown in which the game result image was displayed during the second period (from timing t18 to timing t20), but the game result image may also be displayed during the first or third period. In this case, the game result image may be made to appear in the display area or to disappear from the display area by moving the game result image from the left or right side of the display area in accordance with the movement of the background concealing image at the end of a right hit.

When the decorative symbols change display at the end of a right hit, a background concealment image is displayed if the special lottery result is a loss, regardless of whether a reach state occurs or not. On the other hand, in the case of a "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach," a background concealment image is displayed when a reach state occurs.

Referring to Figure 242 etc., it has been shown that before and after the background concealment image is displayed when the "enemy tank destruction reach" is executed, the display mode of the reserved image may be maintained (for example, the red reserved image may remain red) or the display mode may be changed (for example, the red reserved image may be changed to a normal reserved image (white reserved image) and displayed) (note that a similar display may also be made in the "giant tank reach").
On the other hand, when the right-hit state ends and the normal state is restored by executing the variable display of the decorative pattern a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), a background concealment image is displayed at the end of the right-hit, but at this time, the reserved image displayed after the background concealment image at the end of the right-hit ends should preferably be a normal reserved image (white reserved image).
Regarding the reserved image that will be displayed after the right hit is completed, it is advisable to display it as a normal reserved image (white reserved image), and not display a reserved image that indicates a higher degree of expectation than a normal reserved image (red reserved image or gold reserved image).

At the end of the right-hit state, a background concealment image at the end of right-hit is displayed, and the reserved image is prevented from changing to another reserved image during the period (third period) when the normal background image A and the normal background image B gradually become easier to see.
Similarly, when the "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" is executed, a background concealment image may be displayed, and the reserved image may not be changed to another type of reserved image during the period (third period) when the normal background image gradually becomes easier to see.
This configuration can prevent the player from overlooking the change in the state of the reserved image and the change in the displayed expectation level.

Referring to Figure 238 etc., it is shown that the display mode of the strip-shaped preview performance image may be maintained before and after the background concealment image is displayed when the ``Enemy Tank Destruction Reach'' is executed, or the display mode of the strip-shaped preview performance image may be ended without being maintained (note that a similar display may also be made in the ``Giant Tank Reach'').
On the other hand, when the right-hit state ends and the normal state is entered after the decorative pattern variable display has been executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), a background concealment image is displayed at the end of the right hit, but at this time, it is preferable that the strip-shaped read-ahead effect image is not displayed after the background concealment image at the end of the right hit ends. Alternatively, the strip-shaped read-ahead effect image may not be displayed in the variable display at the end of the right hit state.
Whether or not the strip-shaped pre-reading effect image is executed is determined by the pre-reading process at the time of the start winning, but for the start winning that occurs after the start of the variable display a predetermined number of times before the end of the advantageous state, it is preferable not to start displaying the strip-shaped pre-reading effect image. For example, for a hold that occurs when the 96th to 100th variable display is being performed, it is preferable not to start displaying the strip-shaped pre-reading effect image.

If the result of the special lottery is a jackpot when the decorative pattern changes for the final time (100th time) during the right-hand hit state, a jackpot announcement image announcing that a jackpot will occur may be displayed during the period when a background concealing image consisting of sunglasses or the like is displayed (first to third periods) or during the period after the background concealing image is displayed (fourth period).

An embodiment in which the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 257 is modified to display a jackpot notification image that notifies the occurrence of a jackpot will be described with reference to Figure 260.
Figure 260 (a) shows an embodiment in which a jackpot announcement image is displayed during the period from timing t14, when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped, to timing t16, when the first period begins.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 260(a), variations (Variations 01 to 14) in which the period during which the jackpot notification image is displayed are modified are described below with reference to Figure 260(b).

In variant example 01, a jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t14, when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped, to timing t18, when the first period ends.
In variant example 02, a jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t14 to timing t20, which is the end timing of the second period.
In variant example 03, a jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t14 to timing t22, which is the end timing of the third period.
In variant example 04, a jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t14 to timing t24, which is the end timing of the fourth period.

In variant example 05, a jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t16, which is the start timing of the first period, to timing t18, which is the end timing of the first period.
In variant example 06, a jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t16 to timing t20, which is the end timing of the second period.
In variant example 07, a jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t16 to timing t22, which is the end timing of the third period.
In variant example 08, a jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t16 to timing t24, which is the end timing of the fourth period.

In variant example 09, a jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t18, which is the start timing of the second period, to timing t20, which is the end timing of the second period.
In variant example 10, a jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t18 to timing t22, which is the end timing of the third period.
In variant example 11, a jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t18 to timing t24, which is the end timing of the fourth period.

In variant example 12, a jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t20, which is the start timing of the third period, to timing t22, which is the end timing of the third period.
In variant example 13, a jackpot notification image is displayed during the period from timing t20 to timing t24, which is the end timing of the fourth period.

In variant 14, a jackpot notification image is displayed from timing t22, which is the start timing of the fourth period, to timing t24, which is the end timing of the fourth period.

The timings for starting to display the jackpot announcement image are shown as timing t14, which is the timing when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped, timing t16, which is the start timing of the first period, timing t18, which is the start timing of the second period, timing t20, which is the start timing of the third period, and timing t22, which is the start timing of the fourth period, but a specified timing within these periods may also be used as the timing for starting to display the jackpot announcement image.
For example, timing t15, timing t17, timing t19, timing t21, and timing t23 may be set as the timings for starting to display the jackpot notification image.

In addition, the timings for ending the display of the jackpot announcement image are shown as timing t16, which is the start timing of the first period, timing t18, which is the end timing of the first period, timing t20, which is the end timing of the second period, timing t22, which is the end timing of the third period, and timing t24, which is the end timing of the fourth period, but a specified timing within these periods may also be used as the timing for ending the display of the jackpot announcement image.
For example, timing t15, timing t17, timing t19, timing t21, and timing t23 may be set as the timings for ending the display of the jackpot notification image.

In this way, the timing for starting to display the jackpot notification image can be any time between timing t14 and timing t23, and the timing for ending the display of the jackpot notification image can be any time between timing t15 and timing t24.

In the embodiment shown in Figure 260, normal background image C is switched to normal background image A at timing t19, but if the display of the jackpot notification image has started before timing t19, normal background image C may continue to be displayed after timing t19, and normal background image C may be changed to the jackpot background image at timing t25.

The display priority of the jackpot announcement image should be higher than the display priority of the background concealment image and the game result image. The jackpot announcement image should also be displayed in a position that overlaps the game result image. The jackpot announcement image may be a moving image, and the jackpot announcement may be made by displaying the moving image.

The period from the start of the variable display to the display of the background concealment image at the end of right-hand hitting should be shorter than the period from the start of the variable display to the display of the special reach background concealment image in the "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach."
For example, in the example of the presentation shown in Figure 257 (a), the display of the background concealment image begins at timing t16, 8 seconds after timing t8 when the variable display began, at the end of right-hand play.
On the other hand, in the "Giant Tank Reach" shown with reference to Figure 252(a) and the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" shown with reference to Figure 233(a), the display of the special reach background concealment image begins at timing t36, 36 seconds after the start of the variable display.
In addition, when the right-hand hit ends (if the result of the 100th variable display is a miss), the "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" should not be executed, and the special reach background concealment image should not be displayed.

This configuration allows for a desirable presentation.

In this way, during the third period at the end of the advantageous state, a display is displayed in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special display C").

When the first reach performance ("giant tank reach") is executed, a background concealing image of a bomb character or the like is displayed, so that even if the first reach performance results in a miss, the player can see a special performance in which a character appears, thereby alleviating his or her disappointment.
Furthermore, when comparing the special display A in the first reach effect with the special display C at the end of the right hit, the background concealment image used for the special display A is different from the background concealment image used for the special display C. This prevents the player from confusing the game state.

When the second reach performance ("enemy tank destruction reach") is executed, a black background concealing image is displayed, so that the player can calm his/her disappointment even if the second reach performance results in a failure.
Furthermore, when comparing the special display B in the second reach effect with the special display C at the end of the right hit, the background concealment image used for the special display B is different from the background concealment image used for the special display C. This prevents the player from confusing the game state.

Next, referring to Figure 261 etc., an embodiment of a pseudo consecutive effect in which the decorative pattern appears to stop for a moment, and then changes and is displayed again will be shown.
Specifically, as shown in the time charts of Figures 261 and 262, the left and right decorative symbols temporarily stop with decorative symbols of different numbers, and then a special symbol stop effect is performed in which a special decorative symbol is temporarily displayed in the center symbol, causing each temporarily stopped decorative symbol to scroll downward again and change. Also, when each decorative symbol temporarily stops and then begins scrolling downward again, an image of "x2" is displayed in the display area. Hereinafter, this type of effect is referred to as a pseudo-consecutive effect.

When the image "x2" is displayed, the decorative symbols on the left and right may temporarily stop with decorative symbols of different numbers, and a special symbol may be displayed in the center symbol, causing the temporarily stopped decorative symbols to scroll downward again and change. In this case, the image "x3" is displayed instead of the image "x2." Hereinafter, these images "x2" and "x3" are referred to as pseudo consecutive number display images. Figures 261(b) and 262(b) are time charts showing an example of a performance in which the image "x2" is displayed, followed by the image "x3."

A specific example of the effect will be described below with reference to the time chart shown in Fig. 261(b) and the display example shown in Fig. 263. At timing t0, the variable display of the decorative symbols begins.
At timing t4, the left decorative symbol temporarily stops. At timing t6, the right decorative symbol temporarily stops. Figure 263(a) shows the display state at this time. At timing t8, the middle decorative symbol temporarily stops. A decorative symbol with the kanji character "continue", which is a special decorative symbol, is displayed on the middle decorative symbol. Figure 263(b) shows the display state at this time. At timing t10, the left to right decorative symbols are scrolled downward again and displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the pseudo consecutive number of times display image "x2" is displayed in the upper left of the display area. Figure 263(c) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t14, the left decorative symbol temporarily stops. At timing t16, the right decorative symbol temporarily stops. Figure 263 (d) shows the display state at this time. Note that, as shown in this figure, the display priority of the pseudo consecutive win count display image is higher than the display priority of the decorative symbols. At timing t18, the middle decorative symbol temporarily stops. A special decorative symbol with the kanji character "continue" is displayed in the middle decorative symbol. Figure 263 (e) shows the display state at this time. At timing t20, the left to right decorative symbols are again scrolled downward and displayed in a variable manner. In addition, "x3" on the pseudo consecutive win count display image is displayed in the upper left corner of the display area. Figure 263 (f) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t25, the left decorative symbol temporarily stops. At timing t30, the right decorative symbol temporarily stops at the same number as the left decorative symbol (the number "2"), creating a reach state. Figure 263 (g) shows the display state at this time. From timing t37 to timing t39, the "x3" in the pseudo-consecutive win count display image gradually becomes translucent and difficult to see. Figure 263 (h) shows the display state at this time. At timing t40, the middle decorative symbol temporarily stops. The display state of the decorative symbol at the time of the temporary stop indicates whether the result of the special lottery is a jackpot or a loss. At timing t41, the left to right decorative symbols are displayed as still symbols, and this state is maintained until timing t42. From timing t42 onwards, either the next or subsequent variable display is executed, or the jackpot game state is executed.

The pseudo consecutive effects have been explained using Figure 261(b) as an example, but similar displays are also made on other time charts.

In the example of the presentation shown in the time chart of Fig. 261(a), after the pseudo consecutive number of times display image finally shows "x2", it does not develop into a "Giant Tank Reach" or an "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", and at timing t31, the decorative pattern is displayed in a state indicating a reach miss or a jackpot. The pseudo consecutive number of times display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t27 to timing t29.
In addition, since the pseudo consecutive number of times display image has a higher display priority than the normal background image, the pseudo consecutive number of times display image makes part of the normal background image difficult or impossible to see, and therefore the gradual disappearance of the pseudo consecutive number of times display image in the time chart of Figure 261 (a) is synonymous with the normal background image gradually becoming visible.

In the example of the presentation shown in the time chart of Figure 262(a), the pseudo consecutive number of hits display image finally shows "x2", and then progresses to a "Giant Tank Reach" presentation or an "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" presentation. After a reach occurs at timing t20, the reach presentation is executed in the manner shown in Figure 252(a) or Figure 233(a).

In the example of the timing chart shown in Figure 262(b), the pseudo consecutive number of wins display image finally shows "x3", and then progresses to a "Giant Tank Reach" effect or an "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" effect. After a reach occurs at timing t30, the reach effect is executed in the manner shown in Figure 252(a) or Figure 233(a).

In the example presentations shown in Figures 262(a) and 262(b), the pseudo consecutive number of spins display image is made difficult or impossible to see due to the background concealment image displayed at the start of the "Giant Tank Reach" presentation or the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" presentation, and the display ends when this state occurs. For example, the display may end at a predetermined timing during the period from timing t13 to timing t19 shown in Figures 252(a) and 233(a).

As described above, the display priority of the pseudo consecutive win count display image is higher than the display priority of the decorative symbols, and the pseudo consecutive win count display image is displayed in front of the decorative symbols. In FIG. 263, it is shown that the pseudo consecutive win count display image is displayed in front of the decorative symbols.
Furthermore, the display priority of the pseudo consecutive number display image is lower than the display priority of the background concealing image, and the pseudo consecutive number display image is displayed behind the background concealing image.

As shown in FIG. 261(a), from timing t27 to timing t29, the pseudo consecutive number of times display image ("x2") gradually disappears.
Similarly, as shown in FIG. 261(b), from timing t37 to timing t39, the pseudo consecutive number of times display image ("x3") is gradually erased.
During these periods, the pseudo consecutive win count display image should gradually change from opaque to semi-transparent over the course of two seconds, and when it finally becomes transparent, the display should cease, improving the visibility of the background image and decorative symbols. Figure 263(h) shows the pseudo consecutive win count display image displayed in a semi-transparent state in this manner.
It should be noted that instead of gradually making the entire pseudo consecutive number display image transparent, the pseudo consecutive number display image may be made transparent from the edges, and finally the central part may be made transparent to terminate the display of the pseudo consecutive number display image.
Other display modes may be adopted as long as the pseudo consecutive number display image is displayed in a manner that gradually decreases its visibility.

The display priority of the pseudo consecutive win count display image is higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern, and the image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. However, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the display priority of the pseudo consecutive win count display image may be temporarily lowered below the priority of the decorative pattern, so that at least a portion of the pseudo consecutive win count display image is hidden by the temporarily stopped decorative pattern.

As shown in Figures 262(a) and 262(b), when a background concealment image is displayed to switch the background image to a special reach background image, it is preferable to end the display of the pseudo consecutive win count display image at a predetermined timing during the period in which the background concealment image is displayed. For example, the display may be ended when background concealment image A or background concealment image B is displayed, or when background concealment image C is displayed.

When the pseudo consecutive performance is executed and the pseudo consecutive number of times display image ("x2", "x3") is displayed, it is preferable that the stop display mode of the decorative pattern does not become a non-reach miss.
In other words, when a pseudo consecutive performance is executed, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern stop with decorative patterns of the same number, resulting in a reach state, and then, as shown in Figures 261(a) and 261(b), the middle decorative pattern stops without developing into a special reach, indicating the result of the special lottery, or, as shown in Figures 262(a) and 262(b), the middle decorative pattern stops after developing into a special reach, indicating the result of the special lottery.
Alternatively, when "x3" is displayed as the pseudo consecutive number of times display image, the stop display mode of the decorative symbol may not be a non-reach miss. Also, when "x2" is displayed as the pseudo consecutive number of times display image but "x3" is not displayed, the stop display mode of the decorative symbol may be a non-reach miss.

When the pseudo consecutive performance is not performed, and when the pseudo consecutive performance is performed and an image showing the number of pseudo consecutive performances "x2" is displayed, the latter has a higher probability of expecting a big win.
In addition, when a pseudo consecutive performance is performed and a pseudo consecutive number of times display image "x2" is displayed, and then a pseudo consecutive number of times display image "x3" is not displayed, the latter has a higher probability of winning than when a pseudo consecutive performance is performed and a pseudo consecutive number of times display image "x2" is displayed, and then a pseudo consecutive number of times display image "x3" is displayed.

The temporary stopping mode of the decorative pattern in the pseudo consecutive performance is not limited to the display example shown in Figure 263, and other temporary stopping modes may also be used.
For example, only one of the left and right decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped, and a special symbol such as "NEXT,""Ren,""JisouRen," or "Next" may be stopped as the middle decorative symbol.
Alternatively, such a special symbol may stop on one of the left and right decorative symbols, not limited to the central decorative symbol.
In addition, the decorative patterns on the left, center, and right may be temporarily stopped at special combinations (such as the numbers "1, 3, 5" or "6, 7, 7").
In this way, in the pseudo consecutive presentation, some or all of the left decorative pattern, the middle decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are visually perceived as if they are displayed stationary, and then these patterns are again displayed moving and are visually perceived by the player.
In addition, although the decorative symbols themselves do not temporarily stop, an effect image in which a recollection story of a predetermined character progresses in stages may be displayed in front of the decorative symbols, hiding part or all of the decorative symbols, so that the player can visually recognize it as a division in the variable display of the decorative symbols. In this case, the first effect image and the second effect image will show different stories.

In the examples of presentation shown in Figures 261(a) and 261(b), by displaying the pseudo consecutive win count display image in front of the decorative pattern, it becomes easier for the player to understand the degree of expectation. Also, by ending the display of the pseudo consecutive win count display image at a timing (timing t29 or timing t39) before the timing (timing t30 or timing t40) when a part of the decorative pattern (middle decorative pattern) is temporarily stopped and displayed, the visibility of the decorative pattern is guaranteed, making it easier for the player to recognize the special lottery result.
In the examples of presentation shown in Figures 262(a) and 262(b), the display of the pseudo consecutive number of times display image is terminated during the period when the background concealment image is displayed, so that the pseudo consecutive number of times display image is not displayed during the special reach, allowing the player to focus their attention on the outcome of the battle between tanks during the execution of the special reach.

In the example shown in Fig. 261(a), the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased from timing t27 to timing t29, but it may be erased at other times. Fig. 264(b) shows an embodiment in which the manner in which the pseudo consecutive number display image is erased is modified in the example shown in Fig. 261(a).
As shown in Modifications 01 to 11 in Fig. 264(b), the timing to start erasing the pseudo consecutive number of times display image, the period required for erasing the pseudo consecutive number of times display image, the timing to end erasing the pseudo consecutive number of times display image, and the period from the end of erasing the pseudo consecutive number of times display image until the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed may be determined. Note that Fig. 264(a) is the same as Fig. 261(a). Note that in Modification 01 and the like, for convenience of drawing, the part that should be written as "gradually erased" is written as "gradually."

Note that, to facilitate comparison with other inventions, the period from when the pseudo-consecutive run count display image starts to when it starts to disappear (timing t10 to timing t27 in FIG. 264(a)) may be referred to as the "second period" for convenience. Similarly, the period required for the pseudo-consecutive run count display image to disappear (timing t27 to timing t29 in FIG. 264(a)) may be referred to as the "third period" for convenience. Similarly, the period from when the pseudo-consecutive run count display image has finished disappearing to when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed may be referred to as the "fourth period" (timing t29 to timing t30 in FIG. 264(a)). Note that a first period (timing t10 to timing t12 in FIG. 264(a)) may be provided in which the pseudo-consecutive run count display image is displayed in a semi-transparent state, gradually becoming opaque.

Variation 01 shows that the pseudo consecutive number of times display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t26 to timing t27.
Modification 02 shows that the pseudo consecutive number of times display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t26 to timing t28.
Modification example 03 shows that the pseudo consecutive number of times display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t26 to timing t29.
Variation 04 shows that the pseudo consecutive number of times display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t27 to timing t28.
An example of a presentation in which the pseudo consecutive number display image gradually disappears during the period from timing t27 to timing t29 has already been shown in Figure 261 (a).
Variation 05 shows that the pseudo consecutive number of times display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t27 to timing t30.
Variation 06 shows that the pseudo consecutive number of times display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t28 to timing t29.
Variation 07 shows that the pseudo consecutive number of times display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t28 to timing t30.
Variation 08 shows that the pseudo consecutive number of times display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t28 to timing t31.
Variation 09 shows that the pseudo consecutive number of times display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t29 to timing t30.
Modification 10 shows that the pseudo consecutive number of times display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t29 to timing t31.
In the modification 11, the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased during the period from timing t30 to timing t31.
In these examples, the time for erasing the pseudo consecutive number of times display image is set to be between 1 and 3 seconds, and the time for the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed after the pseudo consecutive number of times display image is completely erased is set to be between 0 and 4 seconds.

Referring to Figure 264(b), an embodiment and modified example for erasing the pseudo consecutive number of times display image "x2" is shown, but the method described in Figure 264(b) can also be applied when erasing the pseudo consecutive number of times display image "x3" in the performance example shown with reference to K30(b).

The decorative symbols displayed during the "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" effects differ in design and size from the decorative symbols displayed during the reach effects shown in Figures 261(a) and 261(b). Specifically, the decorative symbols displayed during the "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" effects consist only of numbers and a square frame and are small in size, whereas the decorative symbols displayed during the reach effects shown in Figures 261(a) and 261(b) consist of numbers, a rectangular frame, and a bomb character and are large in size.

The period required to erase the pseudo consecutive number display image may be shorter than the period (third period) during which the background image in the "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" gradually becomes more visible.
For example, the length of the period required to erase the pseudo consecutive number display image in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 264 is shorter than the length of the third period in the modified example 01 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period required to erase the pseudo consecutive number display image may be the same length as the period (third period) during which the background image in the "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" gradually becomes easier to see.
For example, the length of the third period in Modification 02 shown in FIG. 264 is the same as the length of the third period in Modification 03 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period required to erase the pseudo consecutive number display image may be longer than the period (third period) during which the background image in the "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" gradually becomes more visible.
For example, the length of the period required to erase the pseudo consecutive number display image in variant 03 shown in Figure 264 is longer than the length of the third period in variant 02 shown in Figures 252 and 233.

The period from the end of the display of the pseudo consecutive number of times display image to the cessation of the display of the changing decorative pattern may be shorter than the period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image in the "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" returns to normal.
For example, in variant example 05 shown in Figure 264, the length of the period from the end of the display of the pseudo-consecutive number display image to the cessation of the varying display of the decorative pattern is shorter than the length of the fourth period in variant example 02 shown in Figures 252 and 233.

The period from the end of the display of the pseudo consecutive number of times display image to the cessation of the display of the changing decorative pattern may be the same length as the period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image in the "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" returns to normal.
For example, the length of the period from the end of the display of the pseudo-consecutive number display image in variant example 05 shown in Figure 264 to the cessation of the varying display of the decorative pattern is the same as the length of the fourth period in variant example 01 shown in Figures 252 and 233.

The period from the end of the display of the pseudo consecutive number of times display image to the cessation of the display of the changing decorative pattern may be longer than the period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image in the "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" returns to normal.
For example, the length of the period from the end of the display of the pseudo-consecutive number display image to the cessation of the varying display of the decorative pattern in variant example 01 shown in Figure 264 is longer than the length of the fourth period in variant example 01 shown in Figures 252 and 233.
In the "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach," the decorative symbols are small in size, but in the reach effects shown with reference to Figures 261(a) and 261(b), the decorative symbols are large and are displayed overlapping the pseudo consecutive number of times display image. Therefore, by lengthening the period from when the pseudo consecutive number of times display image is erased to when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, it becomes easier for the player to see the stopping state of the decorative symbols.

In the reach effects shown with reference to Figures 261(a) and 261(b), the "giant tank reach" effect, and the "enemy tank destruction reach" effect, the normal background image A is displayed at the start of the variation, but after the display of the background concealment image or the pseudo consecutive number display image has ended, the normal background image A may be displayed again. Alternatively, the normal background image A may be switched to the normal background image B at the timing when the background concealment image C is displayed or when the display of the pseudo consecutive number display image has ended. The background image may always be switched, or the original normal background image may be displayed with a predetermined probability, and another normal background image may be displayed with a predetermined probability.
In addition, the background image may be switched to another normal background image only when the pseudo consecutive number of times display image shown with reference to Figures 261(a) and 261(b) has finished being displayed, or only when the "Giant Tank Reach" effect or the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" effect has finished.

In this way, by configuring the normal background image that was displayed while the pseudo consecutive win count display image was being displayed or before the special reach effect was achieved to be switched to another normal background image after the pseudo consecutive win count display image has finished being displayed or after the special reach effect has been achieved, it is possible to change the mood of a player who is feeling disappointed after the special lottery results in a loss.

Instead of the normal background image A and the normal background image B, the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B may be displayed.
When the display of the pseudo consecutive number display image ends, the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B may be displayed from the beginning. Alternatively, when the pseudo consecutive number display image A or the normal background moving image B is displayed while the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B is being displayed, and the visibility of the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B decreases, and the visibility of the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B is increased during the period when the pseudo consecutive number display image is erased, the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B may continue to be displayed without being displayed from the beginning even when the period when the pseudo consecutive number display image is erased has arrived, and the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B may continue to be displayed without being displayed from the beginning even when the period when the pseudo consecutive number display image is erased has ended.

The examples of performance shown in Figures 262(a) and 262(b) will transition to a ``giant tank reach'' or an ``enemy tank destruction reach,'' but the display mode of the reserved image or reserved image in the ``giant tank reach'' or ``enemy tank destruction reach'' at this time may adopt the display mode in the embodiments described above with reference to Figures 233 to 244, etc.
As shown in Figures 230(b), 261(a) and 261(b), the left and right decorative patterns temporarily stop at the same decorative pattern, entering a reach state, and then the decorative pattern or background image is not switched, and the middle decorative pattern, for example, scrolls or moves frame by frame at a slow speed, and after a predetermined time has passed, the middle decorative pattern stops at the same decorative pattern as the left and right decorative patterns (in the case of a jackpot) or a different decorative pattern (in the case of a miss), which is called a normal reach.
On the other hand, as shown in Figures 230(c), 262(a), and 262(b), after the left and right decorative symbols temporarily stop with the same decorative symbol and enter a reach state, the decorative symbol is switched to a special decorative symbol (often a smaller decorative symbol than before the temporary stop), the background image is switched to a special background image, and an effect is displayed in which characters fight each other and the winner is decided, and the result of this effect display essentially indicates the result of a special lottery; this effect is called SP reach (short for special reach or super reach). Note that, corresponding to the result of this effect display, the middle decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot (a symbol with the same number as the left and right decorative symbols) or a manner indicating a loss (a symbol with a different number from the left and right decorative symbols).

In this specification, SP reaches are referred to as "special reaches" or "special reach effects," and examples of SP reaches include "giant tank reaches" and "enemy tank destruction reaches." In addition, SP reaches are sometimes referred to as battle reaches (effects), as they involve the display of effects such as characters fighting each other.

In addition, between normal reach and SP reach, the expectation is higher for SP reach. Therefore, after the decorative symbols on the left and right temporarily stop with the same decorative symbol and enter a reach state, the player will watch the changing display to see if it will transition to SP reach.
It is also possible to make multiple types of SP reaches (for example, "giant tank reach" and "enemy tank destruction reach") executable, and to vary the expectation level depending on the type of SP reach. In this case, an SP reach with a relatively high expectation level (or an expectation level higher than a predetermined probability) may be called a strong SP (reach), and an SP reach with a relatively low expectation level (or an expectation level lower than a predetermined probability) may be called a weak SP (reach).

Whether the result of the special lottery is a jackpot or not may be expressed as a win or loss or a win or loss result. For example, if it is said that the win or loss result is determined by the outcome of a battle between characters, this means that the outcome of the battle between characters will determine whether the result of the special lottery is a jackpot or not.

On the other hand, while the pseudo consecutive number display image is being erased, it is preferable not to change the reserved image or the display mode of the reserved image to a display mode indicating another expectation level.
For example, if the reserved image is a green reserved image at timing t27 in Figure 261 (a), the green reserved image should be displayed from timing t27 to timing t29, when the pseudo consecutive number display image is gradually erased.

If a pseudo consecutive performance is executed while a strip-shaped pre-read performance image is displayed based on a pending pre-read, a special reach such as the "giant tank reach" shown with reference to Figure 252 etc. or the "enemy tank destruction reach" shown with reference to Figure 233 etc. may be guaranteed to occur from timing t20 onwards in the performance example shown in Figure 262(a) or from timing t30 onwards in the performance example shown in Figure 262(b).

In this way, while the pseudo consecutive win count display image is being erased, a display is displayed in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special display D").

When the decorative pattern variable display begins, the normal background image may be switched to another normal background image. Below, we will explain an embodiment of a normal background image switching effect in which a special background concealment image is displayed and the normal background image is switched to another normal background image.

First, the background concealment image displayed in the normal background image switching performance in this embodiment will be described.
Figure 265(a) shows a giant bomb character as seen from the front left diagonal. The rest of the image is blue and semi-transparent. Hereinafter, this image will be referred to as background-hiding image A.
Figure 265(b) shows the bomb character as seen from slightly front and diagonally to the left. The rest of the image is a semi-transparent blue. Hereinafter, this image will be referred to as background-hiding image B.
265(c) shows the bomb character as seen from the front. The rest of the image is an opaque blue. Hereinafter, this image will be referred to as background-concealed image C.
Figure 265(d) shows the bomb character as seen from slightly front right. The rest of the image is blue and semi-transparent. Hereinafter, this image will be referred to as background-hiding image D.
265(e) shows the bomb character as seen from the diagonal front right. The rest of the image is blue and semi-transparent. Hereinafter, this image will be referred to as background-hiding image E.
The image of the giant bomb character has an opaque black outline and the other parts (within the area enclosed by the outline) are opaque white.
In this embodiment, the normal background image is switched while a background concealment image consisting of such a giant bomb character or the like is being displayed.

In background concealment images consisting of a giant bomb character, etc., the blue semi-transparent portions of background concealment images A and E are more transparent than the blue semi-transparent portions of background concealment images B and D, allowing for high visibility of the image located behind them. Note that the blue portions of background concealment image C are opaque, making the image located behind it invisible. Note that the bomb character may be displayed larger in background concealment image C so that only the bomb character is visible.

Below, with reference to the time chart shown in Figure 266 (a) and the display example shown in Figure 267, we will explain an example of a normal background image switching effect in which the normal background image currently being displayed is switched to another normal background image.
First, a new variable display of the decorative pattern begins at timing t0. FIG. 267(a) shows an example of the display from timing t0 to timing t1. Note that at timing t0, the normal background image A is already displayed. For example, the normal background image A is displayed over multiple variable displays.
Next, during the period from timing t1 to timing t2, background concealed image A is displayed. Figure 267(b) shows an example of the display during the period from timing t1 to timing t2.
Next, during the period from timing t2 to timing t3, background concealed image B is displayed. Figure 267(c) shows an example of the display during the period from timing t2 to timing t3.
Next, during the period from timing t3 to timing t5, background concealed image C is displayed. Furthermore, at timing t4, the background image is switched from normal background image A to normal background image B. Figure 267(d) shows an example of the display during the period from timing t3 to timing t5.
Next, during the period from timing t5 to timing t6, the background concealed image D is displayed. Fig. 267(e) shows an example of the display during the period from timing t5 to timing t6.
Next, from timing t6 to timing t7, background concealed image E is displayed. Figure 267(f) shows an example of the display from timing t6 to timing t7. In this way, the normal background image switching effect is executed from timing t1 to timing t7.
After timing t7, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner without displaying the background concealment image. Figure 267(g) shows an example of the display after timing t7.
In this manner, in this embodiment, the normal background image A is displayed from time t0 to time t4, and the normal background image B is displayed from time t4 to time t32. Note that the normal background image B is displayed from the next time onwards when the variable display is performed.

In this embodiment, the normal background image gradually becomes less visible (first period), the normal background image becomes invisible (second period), the normal background image gradually becomes more visible (third period), and the normal background image returns to normal visibility and the decorative pattern stops (fourth period). Note that the normal background image in the first period is different from the normal background image in the third and fourth periods. This allows the normal background image to be switched seamlessly.
Also, immediately after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols, a background concealment image is displayed, and the normal background image is switched, thereby changing the mood of the player.

In this embodiment, the background concealment image used when starting a "Giant Tank Reach" or an "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" is different from the background concealment image used when ending a "Giant Tank Reach" or an "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach," and the background concealment image used when ending an advantageous state. This prevents the player from thinking that an advantageous reach effect has occurred.
In this way, after switching to the normal background image, it is possible to execute the pseudo consecutive effects described above, such as the "Giant Tank Reach" and the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach," depending on the results of the special lottery.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 266, the display of the background concealment image begins immediately after the start of the display of the decorative pattern changes, and the normal background image is changed, but the normal background image may also be changed in the middle or at the end of the display of the decorative pattern changes.
It is preferable that the normal background image can be changed only once during one change of the decorative pattern.
In addition, the change of the normal background image should be performed when none of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. For example, in the example shown in Figure 266(a), the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at timing t20, which is the timing after timing t7 when the display of the background concealment image ends.

The left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern may be changed at high speed before the display of the background concealment image ends (before timing t7 in FIG. 266(a)). Specifically, the downward scrolling speed of the decorative patterns may be changed at the fastest speed before the display of the background concealment image ends (note that the scrolling speed immediately after the decorative patterns start to change and the scrolling speed immediately before the temporary stop are slower than this scrolling speed).
Alternatively, at least one of the decorative symbols that were statically displayed in the previous variable display may remain visible even after the display of the background concealment image has ended. For example, a predetermined decorative symbol whose variable display began at timing t0 in FIG. 266(a) may remain visible after timing t7 by not moving or by moving slowly.

The background may be hidden as shown in Modifications 01 to 12 in Fig. 266. In these modifications, the lengths of the first to fourth periods are 1 to 3 seconds, and the lengths of the first, second, and third periods are compared.
For example, in Variation 01, the lengths of the first and second periods are the same, but the third period is longer than the first and second periods. This creates the effect of creating excitement as to which normal background image will be displayed as the new normal background image. In Variation 02, the lengths of the first and second periods are the same, but the third period is shorter than the first and second periods. This has the effect of displaying the new normal background image early, allowing more time for so-called preview effects such as comment previews (e.g., preview effects using dialogue preview images, as described below). In Variation 03, the lengths of the first and third periods are the same, but the second period is longer than the first and third periods. This allows the player to enjoy the display of the background-hiding image itself. Needless to say, the other variations also have similar effects.
In addition, various modified examples may be applied to each of multiple types of normal background image switching performances, such as switching the normal background image in the manner of modified example 01 in the first normal background image switching performance, and switching the normal background image in the manner of modified example 02 in the second normal background image switching performance.

The period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in the normal background image switching performance may be shorter than the period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in the "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach."
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 04 shown in FIG. 266 is shorter than the length of the second period in Modification 03 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in the normal background image switching performance may be the same length as the period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in the ``Giant Tank Reach'' or ``Enemy Tank Destruction Reach.''
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 266 is the same as the length of the second period in Modification 01 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in the normal background image switching performance may be longer than the period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in the "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach."
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 03 shown in FIG. 266 is longer than the length of the second period in Modification 04 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period (third period) during which the background image in the normal background image switching performance gradually becomes easier to see may be shorter than the period (third period) during which the background image in the "giant tank reach" and "enemy tank destruction reach" gradually becomes easier to see.
For example, the length of the third period in Modification 02 shown in FIG. 266 is shorter than the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period (third period) during which the background image in the normal background image switching performance gradually becomes easier to see may be the same length as the period (third period) during which the background image in the ``giant tank reach'' or ``enemy tank destruction reach'' gradually becomes easier to see.
For example, the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 266 is the same as the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period (third period) during which the background image in the normal background image switching performance gradually becomes easier to see may be longer than the period (third period) during which the background image in the "giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach" gradually becomes easier to see.
For example, the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 266 is longer than the length of the third period in Modification 02 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

The period (fourth period) after the normal background image switching effect ends and the visibility of the background image returns to normal may be shorter than the period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image returns to normal in the "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach."

The period after the normal background image switching effect ends and the visibility of the background image returns to normal (fourth period) may be the same length as the period after the visibility of the background image returns to normal during the "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" (fourth period).

The period (fourth period) after the normal background image switching performance ends and the visibility of the background image returns to normal may be longer than the period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image returns to normal in the ``Giant Tank Reach'' and ``Enemy Tank Destruction Reach.''
For example, the length of the fourth period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 266 is longer than the length of the fourth period in Modification 01 shown in FIGS. 252 and 233.

As mentioned above, when the special reach ends, the high-expectation reserved image that was displayed in the reserved image display area may be displayed as is, or it may be reverted to a white reserved image.

On the other hand, with regard to the reserved image in this embodiment, the reserved image may be moved while the background concealed images A-E are displayed (during at least one of the first, second, and third periods; the same applies below). Furthermore, while the background concealed images A-E are displayed, it may be possible to change the reserved image or the state of the reserved image to a higher-expectation reserved image. When the state of the reserved image or the state of the reserved image is changed to a higher-expectation reserved image while the background concealed images A-E are displayed, the changed state of the reserved image or the reserved image may be recognized during any of the first through fourth periods if the change starts in the first period; any of the second through fourth periods if the change starts in the second period; any of the third through fourth periods if the change starts in the third period; and any of the third and fourth periods if the change starts in the fourth period. For example, if the reserved image or the state of the reserved image after the change begins in the first period and becomes recognizable in the first period, the changed reserved image or state of the reserved image can be recognized early, which has the effect of creating a sense of anticipation early on. If the reserved image or the state of the reserved image after the change begins in the first period and becomes recognizable in the fourth period, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation about what state it will change to. If the change begins in the fourth period, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation that even periods 1 through 3, where no change occurs, may change, and it goes without saying that each pattern has its own effect. Alternatively, it is possible to prohibit changing the reserved image or the reserved image while background concealment images A through E are displayed.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 266 etc., an example was shown in which the visibility of the reserved image or reserved image is reduced by a background concealing image, but it may also be configured so that the visibility of the reserved image or reserved image is not reduced, as in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 237. For example, it is advisable to set the display priority of the reserved image or reserved image higher than the display priority of the background concealing image.

When the display of the decorative pattern begins to change, the reserved images that had been displayed in the first to fourth reserved display areas are displayed moving to the reserved display areas to the third reserved display areas. Figure 268(a) shows that the movement of the reserved images begins and ends during the period from timing t0, when the display of the change begins, to timing t1. Note that the movement of the reserved images may also begin and end during this period. This also applies to variants 01 to 07 shown in Figure 268(b).
Figure 267 (a) shows the state in which the movement of the pending image from the first pending display area to the pending display area has finished before the display of background concealment image A begins.

Figure 268(b) shows a modified example of the period during which the movement of the reserved image takes place.
Variation 01 indicates that the movement of the reserved image starts and ends during the period from timing t1 to timing t2.
Variation 02 indicates that the movement of the reserved image starts and ends during the period from timing t2 to timing t3.
Variation example 03 indicates that the movement of the reserved image starts and ends during the period from timing t3 to timing t4.
Variation 04 indicates that the movement of the reserved image starts and ends during the period from timing t4 to timing t5.
Variation 05 indicates that the movement of the reserved image starts and ends during the period from timing t5 to timing t6.
Variation 06 indicates that the movement of the reserved image starts and ends during the period from timing t6 to timing t7.
Variation example 07 indicates that the movement of the reserved image starts and ends during the period from timing t7 to timing t8.

In Modifications 01 to 07, the movement of the reserved image is shown to start and end over one second during the period from timing t1 to timing t8, but the movement of the reserved image may start and end at a predetermined timing within the period from timing t1 to timing t8. Also, the time required for the movement of the reserved image is not limited to one second, and may be shorter or longer than one second.
For example, the movement of the reserved image may start at timing t1 and end at timing t7, or the movement of the reserved image may start at timing t6 and end at timing t8.

In this way, in this embodiment, it is possible to move the reserved image while the normal background image switching effect is being executed. On the other hand, the reserved image does not move while the "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" effect is being executed, and the position of the reserved image does not change before or after the reach effect.

In this embodiment, an embodiment in which a strip-shaped preview effect image shown with reference to Figure 238 is displayed may be adopted.
For example, after the normal background image switching effect is executed, the display of a strip-like pre-reading effect image may be started based on the pre-reading result. Alternatively, while the strip-like pre-reading effect image is being displayed, the normal background image switching effect may be executed to change the normal background image.
On the other hand, if the strip-like pre-reading effect image is already displayed, the normal background image switching effect may not be executed, thereby preventing excessive effects from being seen by a player whose expectations for a jackpot are increasing due to the display of the strip-like pre-reading effect image.
In addition, when a reserve image (for example, a green or red reserve image) that has a higher expectation than the normal white reserve image is displayed in the reserve display area, the first reserve display area, the first reserve display area, the fourth reserve display area, or the fourth reserve display area, the normal background image switching effect may similarly not be executed, and the same effect will be achieved in this case.

The time from when the display of the decorative pattern begins to change to when the normal background image begins to change (for example, the time until the display of the background concealment image begins) should be shorter than the time from when the display of the decorative pattern begins to change to when a special reach (such as a "giant tank reach" or an "enemy tank destruction reach") begins.
In addition, the time from when the display of the decorative pattern changes to when the change in the normal background image ends (for example, the time until the display of the background concealment image ends) should be shorter than the time from when the display of the decorative pattern changes to when a special reach (such as a "giant tank reach" or an "enemy tank destruction reach") begins.
In addition, it is preferable to configure the game so that after the switching of the normal background image has finished and the display of the background concealment image has ended, the display of the background concealment image at the start of a special reach (such as a "giant tank reach" or an "enemy tank destruction reach") can begin after a predetermined time has elapsed.
This configuration can prevent the player from confusing the change in the normal background image with the change in the background image when a special reach occurs.

In the above embodiment, a background concealment image consisting of a giant bomb character or the like is displayed in the normal background image switching effect, but multiple effect patterns may be executed as the normal background image switching effect, and any one of these effect patterns may be executed. For example, instead of the giant bomb character, a giant tank may be displayed to switch the normal background image.
Furthermore, the execution of the normal background image switching effect may not indicate the expected result of the special lottery. In other words, the normal background image switching effect may be executed regardless of the result of the special lottery during the variable display. Specifically, in the next variable display after a special reach has resulted in a miss, the normal background image switching effect may be executed with a predetermined probability (e.g., a 1/3 probability). Note that in the variable display after a non-reach miss as shown in FIG. 230(a) or a reach miss (no background switching) as shown in FIG. 230(b), the normal background image switching effect may be executed with a predetermined probability (e.g., a 1/30 probability) that is lower than the probability of executing the normal background image switching effect (e.g., a 1/3 probability) in the next variable display after a special reach has resulted in a miss.
On the other hand, the execution of the normal background image switching effect may indicate the jackpot expectation for the decorative pattern that is changing. For example, when another normal background image is displayed instead of the normal background image A or the normal background image B, the expectation may be higher than when the normal background image A or the normal background image B is displayed. In this case, the expectation indicated by the switching of the normal background image may be lower than the expectation indicated by the occurrence of a special reach.

A plurality of presentation patterns for the normal background image switching presentation may be provided. For example, a plurality of types and colors of characters to be displayed may be provided. Also, a different expectation of a jackpot may be indicated for each presentation pattern. Also, for each presentation pattern, any one of the variations shown in FIG. 266 may be appropriately adopted, and the first to third periods may be different.
For example, the length of the third period in the normal background image switching effect may be varied depending on the type or color of the displayed character. In addition, different expectations may be indicated depending on the type or color of the displayed character.

In the examples of the "Giant Tank Reach" effect and the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" effect shown with reference to Figures 252 and 233, normal background image A is displayed at the start of the variation, and normal background image A is displayed again after the background concealment image ends, but normal background image B may be displayed instead of normal background image A at the timing when background concealment image C is displayed. The background image may always be switched, or the original normal background image may be displayed with a predetermined probability, and another normal background image may be displayed with a predetermined probability.
On the other hand, in the example of the background image switching effect shown with reference to Figures 266 and 267, normal background image A is displayed when the change starts, and a normal background image (normal background image B in this embodiment) different from normal background image A is displayed at the timing when background concealment image C is displayed. Note that there may be cases where normal background image A continues to be displayed after the background concealment image ends. In this case, it is possible to add an element of surprise to the background image switching effect.

Instead of the normal background image A and the normal background image B, the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B may be displayed.
The normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B may be displayed from the beginning at the timing when the display of the background concealing image C is finished. Alternatively, when the background concealing image is displayed while the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B are being displayed and the visibility of the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B decreases, and the visibility of the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B is increased during the period in which the background concealing image is erased, the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B may continue to be displayed without being displayed from the beginning even when the period in which the background concealing image is erased arrives, and the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B may continue to be displayed without being displayed from the beginning even when the period in which the background concealing image is erased ends.

In this way, in the effect of switching the normal background image, a display (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special display E") is performed in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases during the third period.

Below, we will compare the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 256 etc. with the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 265 etc. The embodiment shown with reference to Figure 256 etc. displays a background concealment image at the end of a right hit and switches the background image when a right hit ends. On the other hand, the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 265 etc. switches the background image when the decorative pattern begins to change.

The period (third period) during which the background image becomes gradually more visible at the end of a right hit may be longer than the period (third period) during which the background image becomes gradually more visible in a normal background image switching performance.
For example, the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 258 is longer than the length of the third period in Modification 02 shown in FIG.

The period (third period) during which the background image becomes gradually more visible at the end of a right hit and the period (third period) during which the background image becomes gradually more visible in the normal background image switching performance may be the same length.
For example, the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 258 is the same as the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 266.

The period (third period) during which the background image becomes gradually more visible at the end of a right hit may be shorter than the period (third period) during which the background image becomes gradually more visible in a normal background image switching performance.
For example, the length of the third period in Modification 02 shown in FIG. 258 is shorter than the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIG.

The period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image returns to normal at the end of a right hit may be longer than the period (fourth period) after the normal background image switching effect ends and the visibility of the background image returns to normal.

The period after the visibility of the background image returns to normal at the end of a right hit (the fourth period) may be the same length as the period after the normal background image switching effect ends and the visibility of the background image returns to normal (the fourth period).

The period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image returns to normal at the end of right-hand hitting may be shorter than the period (fourth period) after the normal background image switching performance ends and the visibility of the background image returns to normal.
For example, the length of the fourth period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 258 is shorter than the length of the fourth period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG.

In the example of the effect at the end of a right hit shown with reference to Figure 257 etc., the normal background image C is displayed during the right hit, and the normal background image A is displayed after the display of the background concealment image has finished, but there may be cases where the normal background image C is displayed instead of the normal background image. For example, the normal background image A may be displayed with a predetermined probability, and the normal background image C may be displayed with a predetermined probability.
On the other hand, in the example of the normal background image switching effect shown with reference to Figures 266 and 267, normal background image A is displayed when the change starts, and a normal background image different from normal background image A (normal background image B in this embodiment) is displayed at the timing when background concealment image C is displayed. Note that normal background image A may also be displayed after the background concealment image ends. In this case, it is possible to add an element of surprise to the background image switching effect.

Instead of the normal background image A and the normal background image B, the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B may be displayed.
In addition, instead of the normal background image C, a normal background moving image C that is displayed as a moving image in the same way as the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B may be displayed.
At the end of a right hit or at the timing when the display of background concealed image C in the normal background image switching effect has ended, normal background moving images A to C may be displayed from the beginning. Alternatively, when a background concealed image is displayed in a situation where normal background moving images A to C are displayed and the visibility of normal background moving images A to C decreases, and the visibility of normal background moving images A to C is increased during the period in which the background concealed image is erased, normal background moving images A to C may continue to be displayed without being displayed from the beginning even when the period in which the background concealed image is erased arrives, and normal background moving images A to C may continue to be displayed without being displayed from the beginning even when the period in which the background concealed image is erased has ended.

When the right-hit state ends and the normal state is restored, a background concealment image is displayed at the end of the right hit, but at this time, the reserved image displayed after the background concealment image at the end of the right hit ends should preferably be a normal reserved image (white reserved image).
In addition, at the end of the right-hit state, a background concealment image at the end of the right-hit state may be displayed, and the reserved image may not be changed to another reserved image during the period (third period) in which normal background image A and normal background image B gradually become easier to see.

On the other hand, with regard to the reserved image in the normal background image switching performance, the reserved image may be moved while background concealed images A to E are displayed (first period to third period). Furthermore, while background concealed images A to E are displayed, it may be possible to change the reserved image or the state of the reserved image to a reserved image with a higher expectation. Alternatively, while background concealed images A to E are displayed, it may be prohibited to change the reserved image or the reserved image.

In this way, during the third period at the end of the advantageous state, a display is displayed in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases ("special display C"). Furthermore, during the third period in the effect of switching the normal background image, a display is displayed in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases ("special display E").

While the decorative pattern is being displayed, a presentation may be executed to indicate the likelihood that the special lottery result will be a jackpot. Below, we will explain an embodiment in which a dialogue preview presentation that displays a dialogue preview image can be executed.

First, the dialogue preview image displayed in the dialogue preview performance in this embodiment will be described.
Figure 269 shows dialogue preview images A to E displayed in the dialogue preview performance of this embodiment.
The display priorities of the dialogue preview images A to E are higher than the decorative patterns and reserved images, and the dialogue preview images A to E are displayed in front of these images.
The preview image consists of a bomb character (white image) located in the center, the lines consisting of four kanji characters "bomb boy" (white image), and the other area (green background image). Note that the background image here is merely called a background image for convenience in comparison with the image of the bomb character and the image of the lines.
The green background areas of the dialogue preview images A and E have high transparency, the green background areas of the dialogue preview images B and D have low transparency, and the green area of the dialogue preview image C has the lowest transparency, making the background image invisible.
The dialogue preview image A has the kanji character "baku" written on it, the dialogue preview image B has the kanji character "bomb" written on it, and the dialogue preview images C to E have the kanji character "bomb boy" written on them.

Figure 270 shows a time chart illustrating an example of a dialogue preview effect. Figure 271 shows an example of a display in which a dialogue preview image is displayed at a specified timing.

As shown in the time chart of Figure 270(a), the decorative symbols start to change at timing t0. Figure 271(a) shows the state in which the decorative symbols are changing. At this time, the normal background image A is displayed as the background image.
Next, during the period from timing t10 to timing t11, a dialogue preview image A is displayed. Figure 271 (b) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during the period from timing t11 to timing t12, a dialogue preview image B is displayed. Figure 271(c) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during the period from timing t12 to timing t14, a dialogue preview image C is displayed. Figure 271(d) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during the period from timing t14 to timing t15, a dialogue preview image D is displayed. Figure 271(e) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during the period from timing t15 to timing t16, a dialogue preview image E is displayed. Figure 271(f) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t16, the series of display of the dialogue preview images ends. Figure 271 (g) shows the display state at a predetermined timing from timing t16 to timing t20 (the period until the left decorative pattern temporarily stops).
At timing t20, the left decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, at timing t25, the right decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, and at timing t30, the center decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed.
At timing t31, all decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and the result of the special lottery indicates whether or not it is a big win.

In this way, the dialogue preview performance also has a period during which the background image becomes gradually less visible due to the display of the dialogue preview image (first period), a period during which the background image is not visible (second period), a period during which the background image becomes gradually more visible (third period), and a period during which the visibility of the background image returns to normal and the decorative pattern stops (fourth period). In other words, the dialogue preview image also functions like a background concealment image.

In this way, when a dialogue preview effect is executed, which displays a series of dialogue preview images while the decorative patterns are changing, the expectation of a big win is higher than when the dialogue preview effect is not executed. Whether or not to execute the dialogue preview effect is determined based on the results of a special lottery.
In some situations while the dialogue preview performance is being performed, the normal background image becomes invisible, but the normal background image is not changed to another normal background image before or after the performance of the dialogue preview performance, and the same normal background image is displayed.

A plurality of dialogue preview effects with different display modes may be executed, and any of the dialogue preview effects may be executed. For example, dialogue preview images with different dialogue content, character types, background area colors, etc. may be used. Also, the same degree of expectation may be suggested depending on the type of dialogue preview effect, or different degrees of expectation may be suggested.
For example, if the color of the background area is red, the expectation may be higher than if the color is green.

An example of displaying dialogue and characters has been given, but this is merely an example, and the preview effect may be executed without displaying either the dialogue or the character. Alternatively, other images may be displayed instead of the dialogue or character to create a preview effect.

Although the dialogue preview effect is shown by displaying dialogue preview images A through E, the dialogue preview effect may also be achieved by displaying moving images. For example, the characters or dialogue may be moved, or the transparency may be smoothly changed.

When comparing the normal background image switching effect in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 265 etc. with the dialogue preview effect in this embodiment, it is preferable to make the time for executing the dialogue preview effect longer than in the normal background image switching effect.
For example, compared to variant 02 of the normal background image switching effect, variant 01 of the dialogue preview effect has a longer execution time.
This prevents the player from overlooking the probability of winning a jackpot indicated by the dialogue preview effect. On the other hand, the probability of winning a jackpot is not generally indicated by the execution of the normal background image switching effect. Therefore, even if the execution time of the effect is relatively short, the impact of the player overlooking the probability of winning a jackpot can be reduced.

The period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in the dialogue preview performance may be shorter than the period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in the normal background image switching performance.
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 04 shown in FIG. 270 is shorter than the length of the second period in Modification 03 shown in FIG.

The period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in the dialogue preview performance and the period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in the normal background image switching performance may be the same length.
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 270 is the same as the length of the second period in Modification 01 shown in FIG.

The period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in the dialogue preview performance may be longer than the period (second period) during which the background image is not visible in the normal background image switching performance.
For example, the length of the second period in Modification 03 shown in FIG. 270 is longer than the length of the second period in Modification 04 shown in FIG.

The period (third period) during which the background image in the dialogue preview performance becomes gradually more visible may be shorter than the period (third period) during which the background image in the normal background image switching performance becomes gradually more visible.
For example, the length of the third period in Modification 02 shown in FIG. 270 is shorter than the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIG.

The period (third period) during which the background image in the dialogue preview performance becomes gradually more visible may be the same length as the period (third period) during which the background image in the normal background image switching performance becomes gradually more visible.
For example, the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 270 is the same as the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIG.

The period (third period) during which the background image in the dialogue preview performance becomes gradually more visible may be longer than the period (third period) during which the background image in the normal background image switching performance becomes gradually more visible.
For example, the length of the third period in Modification 01 shown in FIG. 270 is longer than the length of the third period in Modification 02 shown in FIG.

The period (fourth period) after the dialogue preview performance is over and the visibility of the background image is restored may be shorter than the period (fourth period) after the normal background image switching performance is over and the visibility of the background image is restored.
For example, the length of the fourth period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 270 is shorter than the length of the fourth period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG.

The period after the dialogue preview performance ends and the visibility of the background image returns to normal (fourth period) may be the same length as the period after the normal background image switching performance ends and the visibility of the background image returns to normal (fourth period).

The period (fourth period) after the dialogue preview performance ends and the visibility of the background image returns to normal may be longer than the period (fourth period) after the normal background image switching performance ends and the visibility of the background image returns to normal.

It is also possible to configure the device so that both the dialogue preview effect shown in Figure 270 and the normal background image switching effect shown in Figure 266 can be executed during one change in decorative pattern.
For example, a normal background image switching effect may be executed from timing t1 to timing t7, and a dialogue preview effect may be executed from timing t10 to timing t16. Also, modified examples of both embodiments may be combined as appropriate.
It is preferable that the dialogue preview effect is not executed before the normal background image switching effect, but rather that the dialogue preview effect is executed after the normal background image switching effect. Also, it may be possible to configure the normal background image switching effect to be executed regardless of whether or not the dialogue preview effect is executed.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 270 etc., an example was shown in which the visibility of the reserved image or reserved image is reduced during the dialogue preview performance, but it may also be configured so that the visibility of the reserved image or reserved image is not reduced, as in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 237. For example, it is advisable to set the display priority of the reserved image or reserved image higher than the display priority of the dialogue preview image.

In both the dialogue preview performance shown with reference to Figure 270 etc. and the normal background image switching performance shown with reference to Figure 266, the reserved image or reserved images may be made difficult to see or impossible to see during the performance.
Alternatively, in both the dialogue preview performance shown with reference to Figure 270 etc. and the normal background image switching performance shown with reference to Figure 266, the reserved image or reserved image may be maintained in an easily visible state, just as it was before the performance was performed, without becoming difficult or impossible to see even during the performance.

Alternatively, in the dialogue preview performance shown with reference to Figure 270, etc., the reserved image or reserved image may be made difficult or impossible to see while the performance is being performed, and in the normal background image switching performance shown with reference to Figure 266, the reserved image or reserved image may not become difficult or impossible to see even while the performance is being performed, but may remain easily visible, just as it was before the performance was performed.
Conversely, in the dialogue preview performance shown with reference to Figure 270, etc., the reserved image or reserved image does not become difficult or impossible to see even during the performance, and remains easily visible, just as it was before the performance was performed, and in the normal background image switching performance shown with reference to Figure 266, the reserved image or reserved image may become difficult or impossible to see during the performance.

Even when the strip-shaped preview effect image shown in FIG. 238 is displayed, it is preferable to configure the dialogue preview effect to be executable.
On the other hand, when a strip-shaped preview effect image is being displayed, it is preferable to configure the device so that the normal background image switching effect is not executed.
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of situations in which the player becomes confused about the level of expectation due to the execution of a normal background image switching effect, which does not necessarily indicate the level of expectation.

When only the dialogue preview performance is executed, it is preferable to increase the expectation level when only the dialogue preview performance is executed compared to when only the normal background image switching performance is executed.
Alternatively, the expectation level may be the same when both the dialogue preview effect and the normal background image switching effect are executed as when only the dialogue preview effect is executed.

Since the normal background image is not changed before and after the execution of the line preview performance, the player is unlikely to feel uncomfortable even if the first period or the third period of the line preview performance is shortened or the second period is lengthened.
Furthermore, since the background image is not usually changed, the player is unlikely to feel uncomfortable even if there is a short time left until the decorative pattern changes.

The dialogue preview effect may be executed as a look-ahead effect based on a look-ahead of the pending status. For example, in the display example shown in Figure 271 (a), the number of pending statuses is two and a pending image is displayed in the second pending display area, but a look-ahead of the pending status corresponding to the pending image displayed in the second pending display area may be performed, and a dialogue preview image may be displayed in each of the three variable displays until the pending image displayed in the second pending display area becomes the pending image in question. In this way, the dialogue preview effect may be displayed over multiple variable displays. It is also advisable to indicate a predetermined degree of expectation depending on the display mode of the dialogue preview image.

On the other hand, the normal background image switching effect is not executed based on the pre-reading effect. Also, as described above, it may be executed in the next variable display that results in a miss.
At the timing when the variable display resulting from a miss is stopped and displayed, if there is a hold, the normal background image switching effect is executed with a predetermined probability, and if there is no hold, the normal background image switching effect may not be executed even if a start winning occurs and the next variable display is started.
Alternatively, if a specific reach effect (such as the aforementioned "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach," in which a special reach background image is displayed instead of the normal background image) is executed and results in a miss, the execution of the normal background image switching effect in the next variable display may be determined and stored internally with a predetermined probability (including 100% execution of the normal background image switching effect), and the normal background image switching effect may be executed based on the determination when the next variable display is executed. A specific implementation can be achieved by turning on or off a normal background image switching effect execution flag stored in a predetermined memory area of the peripheral control board 1510. With this configuration, even if the number of reserved balls is zero, by keeping the normal background image switching effect execution flag on, the normal background image switching effect can be executed when a start win occurs and the next variable display is executed. The normal background image switching effect execution flag may remain on until the next variable display is started.
In addition, even if it has been decided that the normal background image switching effect will be executed, the decision may be changed (the normal background image switching effect execution flag may be turned off) so that the normal background image switching effect will not be executed in the next variable display, provided that no starting winning occurs for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). In addition, at the same time as the predetermined period has elapsed, the display may transition to a demo image display state in which the pachinko machine 1 is introduced in the display area. Even when transitioning to the demo image display state, the normal background image switching effect execution flag may be kept on, and when a starting winning occurs in the demo image display state and the variable display is performed, the normal background image switching effect may be executed and the normal background image switching effect execution flag may be turned off.

In this way, while the dialogue preview image is being erased, a display is displayed in which the visibility of the normal background image gradually increases (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special display F").

With reference to Figures 224 to 271, we have described several embodiments and variations of these embodiments, but all of the described embodiments and variations may be implemented in a single pachinko machine 1. Alternatively, some of the described embodiments and variations may be implemented in a single pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, a player or a staff member at a gaming facility may be able to select in advance before the start of a game which of the multiple aspects of the embodiments and modifications shown with reference to Figures 224 to 271 will be executed. For example, a player may be able to set the lengths of the first to fourth periods in each of the effects shown with reference to Figures 224 to 271 on a customization screen or the like.
With this configuration, players can set the game effects to be executed in a manner that suits their preferences. Also, store staff can set the game effects to be executed in a manner that suits the customer demographic of the store. As a result, the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

In each of the effects shown in the embodiments with reference to Figures 224 to 271, there is a first period in which the visibility of the background image decreases as the display of an image that conceals the background image begins, a second period in which the visibility of the background image is at its lowest, and a third period in which the visibility of the background image increases. Furthermore, after each effect ends, there is a fourth period in which the display of the image that conceals the background image ends, the visibility of the background image returns to normal, and the decorative pattern stops.

An example has been shown in which the display of the background concealing image makes the entire background image invisible during the second period, but rather than making it completely invisible, it may be made more difficult to see than when the background concealing image is not displayed.
In this case, it is preferable that the transparency of the background concealment image is set to the lowest during the second period.
Alternatively, the size of the background concealing image may be smaller than the display area rather than being the same size as the display area, so that part of the background image can be visible even when the background concealing image is displayed. In this case, it is desirable that the proportion of the display area occupied by the background concealing image be 50% or more, or 2/3 or more.
The dialogue preview image can also be transformed in the same way.
On the other hand, the pseudo consecutive number display image and the revival effect image (the revival effect character and its lines) are originally smaller than the display area, and it is desirable that these images occupy less than 50% of the display area.

It has been stated that there are first to fourth periods in the background image change effect at the start of a special reach, the background image change effect at the end of a special reach, the background image change effect at the end of a right hit, the pseudo consecutive effect, the normal background image change effect, and the dialogue preview effect which is part of the preview effect, but the length of at least one of the periods (first to fourth periods) in each effect may be longer or shorter than the length of each state described below.

The special reach decorative symbols oscillate up and down at a predetermined cycle during the special reach, but the cycle may be longer or shorter than this cycle for each of the periods (first to fourth periods) in each effect (background image change effect at the start of the special reach, background image change effect at the end of the special reach, background image change effect at the end of the right hit, pseudo consecutive effect, normal background image change effect, and dialogue preview effect). Or, even if it is longer, it should be less than two cycles.
For example, by making the length of the first period in the background image switching performance at the start of a special reach longer than the specified cycle of the special reach decorative pattern that is displayed at a specified cycle during the special reach, since the specified cycle of the special reach decorative pattern during the special reach is relatively long (if it were shorter it would look hectic and it would be difficult to concentrate on the reach performance), by setting the first period in the background image switching performance at the start of a special reach to be longer than that, the effect is that the joy of developing into a special reach can be provided for a longer period of time.
Furthermore, for example, by making the length of the third period in the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach shorter than the predetermined cycle of the special reach decorative pattern that is displayed at a predetermined cycle during the special reach, it is possible to end the sense of expectation for the change in question early and create anticipation for the next change (allowing players to switch their mood more quickly).
It goes without saying that other modifications also have their own effects.

The reserved image or the reserved image may be a moving image and may be repeatedly displayed at a predetermined cycle. In this case, the respective periods (first to fourth periods) in each effect (background image switching effect at the start of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a right hit, pseudo consecutive effect, normal background image switching effect, and dialogue preview effect) may be longer or shorter than this cycle. Or, even if it is longer, it is preferable that it be less than two cycles.
For example, by making the length of the third period in the background image switching performance at the end of a special reach in which the reserved image or reserved image is not displayed during the special reach longer than the specified cycle of the reserved image or reserved image displayed as a moving image, the reserved image or reserved image is displayed for more than one cycle during the third period, thereby impressing the player with the existence of the reserved image and having the effect of reminding the player to operate the handle 302.
For example, by making the length of the second period in a normal background image switching performance or a dialogue preview performance shorter than the reserved image or the specified cycle of the reserved image displayed as a moving image, the visibility of the reserved image or the dynamic performance display of the reserved image can be ensured to a certain extent.
It goes without saying that other modifications also have their own effects.

142 and 143, there are four game states (normal state, time-saving state, non-time-saving probability variable state, probability variable state) other than the jackpot state. In these four game states, it is possible to variably display special symbols. It is also possible to variably display decorative symbols simultaneously with the special symbols.
In the normal state, the variable display is performed in a plurality of presentation patterns with different variable display times (the time from when the decorative pattern starts to display variable until it stops displaying), but compared to the shortest variable display time among them, each of the periods (first period to fourth period) in each presentation (background image switching presentation at the start of a special reach, background image switching presentation at the end of a special reach, background image switching presentation at the end of a right hit, pseudo consecutive presentation, normal background image switching presentation, dialogue preview presentation) may be longer or shorter than this length.
In the time-saving state, the variable display is performed in a plurality of presentation patterns with different variable display times (the time from when the decorative pattern starts to display variable until it stops displaying), and compared to the shortest variable display time among them, each of the periods (first period to fourth period) in each presentation (background image switching presentation at the start of a special reach, background image switching presentation at the end of a special reach, background image switching presentation at the end of a right hit, pseudo consecutive presentation, normal background image switching presentation, dialogue preview presentation) may be longer or shorter than this length.
In the non-time-shortened probability variable state, the variable display is performed in a plurality of presentation patterns with different variable display times (the time from when the decorative pattern starts to display variable until it stops displaying), and compared to the shortest variable display time among them, each of the periods (first period to fourth period) in each presentation (background image switching presentation at the start of a special reach, background image switching presentation at the end of a special reach, background image switching presentation at the end of a right hit, pseudo consecutive presentation, normal background image switching presentation, dialogue preview presentation) may be longer or shorter than this length.
In the probability variable state, the variable display is performed in a plurality of presentation patterns with different variable display times (the time from when the decorative pattern starts to display variable until it stops displaying), and compared to the shortest variable display time among them, each of the periods (first period to fourth period) in each presentation (background image switching presentation at the start of a special reach, background image switching presentation at the end of a special reach, background image switching presentation at the end of a right hit, pseudo consecutive presentation, normal background image switching presentation, dialogue preview presentation) may be longer or shorter than this length.

The shortest time of the variable display time may be different depending on the number of reserved symbols at the start of the decorative pattern variation. For example, the more reserved symbols there are, the shorter the shortest time of the variable display time may be, and the fewer reserved symbols there are, the longer the shortest time of the variable display time may be.
In this case, compared to the shortest variable display time among the variable display times of the effect patterns that can occur corresponding to each pending number, each period (first period to fourth period) in each effect (background image switching effect at the start of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a right hit, pseudo consecutive effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue preview effect) may be made longer or shorter than this length.

The presentation pattern of the decorative symbols and the time for which the decorative symbols change display are also determined according to the game status and the number of reserved symbols, but compared to the shortest time among the time periods for which the pachinko machine 1 can take, each of the periods (first period to fourth period) in each presentation (background image switching presentation at the start of a special reach, background image switching presentation at the end of a special reach, background image switching presentation at the end of a right hit, pseudo consecutive presentation, normal background image switching presentation, dialogue preview presentation) may be made longer or shorter than this time.
For example, by making the length of the fourth period (the fourth period is the period immediately after the display of a different type of decorative pattern than before) of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach or at the end of a right hit shorter than the shortest variable display time among the effect patterns, it has the effect of preventing the player from mistaking that a new variable display has begun and then stopped.
For example, by making the length of the fourth period of the normal background image switching effect or the dialogue preview effect longer than the shortest variable display time among the effect patterns, there is an effect that there is enough time to develop the effect (for example, develop it into a special reach or pseudo-consecutive effect) after the normal background image switching effect or the dialogue preview effect is executed.
It goes without saying that other modifications also have their own effects.

Referring to Figures 261 to 264, an embodiment of the pseudo consecutive effects is shown, but compared to the time taken to display a message to make the player aware that a pseudo consecutive effect has occurred (display of a special pattern such as "Continued" as shown in Figure 263 (b)), each period (first period to fourth period) in each effect (background image switching effect at the start of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a right hit, pseudo consecutive effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue preview effect) may be longer or shorter than this time.
For example, by making the length of the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach or the background image switching effect at the end of a right hit shorter than the display that makes the player aware that a pseudo consecutive effect has occurred, the second period is quickly transitioned to, making it possible to clearly distinguish the effect from the pseudo consecutive effect, and it is less likely that the player will mistakenly believe that a pseudo consecutive effect has occurred (since the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are all displayed as temporarily stopped, it may be difficult for the player to recognize which effect has occurred).
For example, by making the length of the fourth period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach or the background image switching effect at the end of a right hit longer than the display that makes the player aware that a pseudo consecutive effect has occurred, the combination of decorative symbols that was temporarily stopped will be displayed as is (in the case of a pseudo consecutive effect, a re-changing display will always be performed after the temporary stop, but in the fourth period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach or the background image switching effect at the end of a right hit, the decorative symbols that were temporarily stopped will be displayed as is, except in cases where a revival effect is executed and the result is successful), the player will be made to clearly recognize this, which has the effect of making them give up on the changing display.
It goes without saying that other modifications also have their own effects.

Compared to the shortest interval between launches of game balls into the game area, each of the periods (first to fourth periods) in each effect (background image switching effect at the start of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a right hit, pseudo consecutive effect, normal background image switching effect, and dialogue preview effect) may be longer or shorter than the shortest interval between launches. For example, when 100 game balls can be launched in 60 seconds, the shortest interval between launches of game balls is 0.6 seconds.
For example, by making the length of the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach shorter than the shortest interval between launches of game balls, the following effects can be achieved.
Some experienced players stop firing game balls when a special reach (e.g., "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach") with a high probability of winning a jackpot is initiated. When the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach begins, such experienced players assume that the result of the special lottery is a loss and operate the handle 302 to resume firing game balls. In this case, the length of the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is shorter than the shortest interval between game balls, thereby resuming firing of game balls. By the time the second game ball is fired, the special reach background image displayed during the special reach is completely unrecognizable. This gives the player confidence that their own assumption of a loss meant that the result of the special lottery was a loss, allowing them to focus their attention from the second game ball on the fate of the game balls (whether or not they will win the starting prize). In other words, the background change can be smoothly performed while minimizing the number of game balls that are distracting the player.
For example, by making the length of the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach longer than the shortest interval between launches of game balls, the following effects can be achieved.
As described above, when the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach begins, an experienced player will assume that the result of the special lottery is a loss and operate the handle 302 to resume launching the game ball. At this time, the special reach background image displayed during the special reach is displayed in the display area and is recognizable to the player, so the player will be interested in both the fate of the launched game ball and the special reach background image. Even an experienced player will be particularly interested in viewing the special reach background image, which they have been staring at for a long time in hopes of a jackpot result, under circumstances in which a loss is suspected. Due to these circumstances, even an experienced player may be distracted and agitated by the content displayed in the display area, making it difficult to accurately launch the game ball. Therefore, the probability of a game ball launched during the first period winning the starting prize is lower than when the player accurately launches the game ball. In this way, by making the length of the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach longer than the shortest interval between launches of game balls, it is possible to prolong the state in which the player has a reduced probability of winning the starting prize, thereby contributing to sales at the game parlor.
It goes without saying that other modifications also have their own effects.

When the display of the decorative symbols changes with no reserved balls, and a predetermined waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the display area may transition to a demo image display state in which an image introducing the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. At this time, the predetermined waiting time may be set longer or shorter than this time for each of the periods (first to fourth periods) in each effect (background image switching effect at the start of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a right hit, pseudo consecutive effect, normal background image switching effect, and dialogue preview effect).
For example, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach shorter than the specified waiting time before transitioning to the demo image display state, the following effects can be achieved.
Even players who are not necessarily very experienced at games sometimes stop shooting game balls during a special reach. However, when a player with not necessarily much gaming experience executes a special reach and strongly expects a jackpot result, but ends up losing, they often experience a major shock, thinking, "No way!", and are unable to recover for a while, preventing them from resuming shooting game balls (note that the more experienced and advanced the player, the more quickly they are able to regain their composure). If a screen change (transition to a demo presentation state) is executed when a player is unable to recover for a while, this may seem like a final blow (an exaggeration of the fact that they lost) to a player with not necessarily much gaming experience (this tendency is particularly noticeable in pachinko machines that employ a revival presentation). Therefore, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching presentation at the end of a special reach shorter than the predetermined waiting time for the transition to the demo image display state, it is possible to provide care for the minds of such players who are not necessarily very experienced at games.
For example, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach longer than the specified waiting time, the following effects can be achieved.
When a player who is not necessarily very experienced in gaming loses the special lottery, they are often shocked and think, "Seriously?", and are unable to recover for a while. By deliberately quickly transitioning to the demo image display state and causing a change in the screen in such a shocked situation, the player can feel like, "Oh, maybe a revival effect has occurred!?" (This tendency is particularly noticeable in pachinko machines that employ revival effects. Experienced players remain calm in such situations.) In this way, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach longer than the predetermined waiting time for transitioning to the demo image display state, it is possible to give a sense of elation to players who are not necessarily very experienced in gaming, and motivate them to resume firing game balls.
It goes without saying that other modifications also have their own effects.

In addition, when the payout motor 834 is driven and game balls successively enter winning ports such as the start port or the large winning port that pays out when a win is made, a payout corresponding to the first winning ball is made, and then a payout corresponding to the second winning ball is made. However, after making the payout corresponding to the first winning ball, it takes a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) before making the payout corresponding to the second winning ball. However, compared to this predetermined time, each of the periods (first period to fourth period) in each effect (background image switching effect at the start of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a right hit, pseudo consecutive effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue preview effect) may be longer or shorter than this predetermined time.
For example, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach shorter than the specified time until a new payout is made, the following effects can be achieved.
During the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach, there is a possibility that a revival effect will be executed, so if game balls are paid out multiple times during the third period, the player may be distracted by events caused by the payout (such as the sound of the game balls hitting the upper tray 321 and the management of the number of game balls in the upper tray 321), which may interfere with the player's desire for the revival effect to be executed, and may reduce their concentration on the game.However, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach shorter than the predetermined time until a new payout is made, it is possible to prevent such a situation in which concentration is broken.The reason for making a payout once is that players may become suspicious if a payout is not made immediately when a predetermined winning slot (such as the general winning slot 2001 or the first starting slot 2002) is won during the third period.
For example, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach longer than the specified time until a new payout is made, the following effects can be achieved.
The experienced player described above assumes that the result of the special lottery will be a loss when the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach begins, and therefore naturally launches game balls during the third period. Therefore, it is conceivable that a situation will occur in which multiple game balls enter a predetermined winning slot (such as the general winning slot 2001 or the first starting slot 2002) during the third period that follows the first period. Experienced players understand that when a game ball enters a predetermined winning slot (such as the starting slot or the general winning slot), the game ball will be paid out immediately. If the payout is not made immediately, this may cause players to feel distrustful. (This tendency is more pronounced when the background image switching effect allows players to focus a certain amount of attention on the payout by suppressing the output of the variable effect sound or simplifying the display area.) However, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach longer than the predetermined time until a new payout is made, this distrust can be prevented.
It goes without saying that other modifications also have their own effects.

If the result of the regular lottery is a winning result, the movable piece 2004a is driven and moved to open the second starting opening 2004, allowing the game ball rolling in the play area 5a to enter, and after a predetermined time has passed, the movable piece 2004a is returned to its original position to close the second starting opening 2004, preventing the game ball rolling in the play area 5a from entering. A plurality of different times may be set as the time from when the second starting opening 2004 is opened by the movement of the movable piece 2004a to when it is closed (opening time), so that the game ball can enter the second starting opening 2004 at any of the opening times, or the second starting opening 2004 may be set to a state where the game ball can enter multiple times for one winning regular lottery (this is achieved by driving and moving the movable piece 2004a multiple times). At this time, compared to the shortest time during which the second starting port 2004 is in a state where the ball can be entered (if there is only one pattern for the opening time of the second starting port 2004, the opening time for that pattern), each of the periods (first period to fourth period) in each effect (background image switching effect at the start of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a right hit, pseudo-consecutive effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue preview effect) may be made longer or shorter than this time.
For example, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach shorter than the shortest opening time of the second starting port 2004, the following effects can be achieved.
During the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach, a normal background image is displayed instead of the special reach background image that was displayed during the special reach, and therefore players who are not necessarily very experienced at games often experience a great shock when the normal background image is seen in the third period, leaving them unable to recover for a while, with a feeling of "Seriously?" In such a situation, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach shorter than the shortest opening time of the second start port 2004, for example, if the start of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach and the second start port 2004 become available for ball entry at the same time, the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach can be ended before the second start port 2004 becomes unavailable for ball entry. When the second starting hole 2004 is in a state where a ball can be entered, a lottery for a special symbol is held when the game ball can be entered into the second starting hole 2004, so that a player who is not necessarily very experienced at games can operate the handle 302 to try to enter the game ball into the second starting hole 2004, thereby increasing interest again, and when the second starting hole 2004 ends its open state, the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach has also ended, so the player can forget that the special reach has occurred and that the result was a miss, and can switch his/her attention to the change in the new decorative symbol.
For example, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach longer than the shortest opening time of the second starting port 2004, the following effects can be achieved.
During the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach, a normal background image is displayed instead of the special reach background image that was displayed during the special reach, and therefore players who are not necessarily very experienced at games often experience a great shock when the normal background image is seen in the third period, leaving them unable to recover for a while, with a feeling of "Seriously?" In such a situation, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach longer than the shortest opening time of the second start port 2004, for example, if the start of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach and the timing when the second start port 2004 becomes available for ball entry are the same, the second start port 2004 can be made unavailable for ball entry before the end of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach. When the second starting hole 2004 is in a state where a ball can be entered, a lottery for a special symbol is held when the game ball can be entered into the second starting hole 2004, so that a player who is not necessarily very experienced at games can operate the handle 302 to try to enter the game ball into the second starting hole 2004, thereby increasing interest again, and even if the game ball cannot be entered into the second starting hole 2004, the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach continues, so the player can expect that the revival effect will be executed, thereby mitigating the shock received by the player as a whole.
It goes without saying that other modifications also have their own effects.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 233 and 252, the effective operation period for the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 was set to 3 seconds (there is only one type of effective operation period), but as other operation presentation patterns, the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 may be configured to be able to execute presentation patterns or presentation patterns with effective operation periods longer or shorter than 3 seconds.
For example, it is possible to adopt an effect pattern A in which the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is, for example, two seconds, and an effect pattern B in which the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is, for example, four seconds. In this way, multiple operation valid periods may be provided.
In this case, each of the periods (first period to fourth period) in each effect (background image switching effect at the start of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a right hit, pseudo consecutive effect, normal background image switching effect, and line preview effect) may be longer than the effective operation period of effect pattern A and effect pattern B. Also, each of the periods (first period to fourth period) in each effect (background image switching effect at the start of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a right hit, pseudo consecutive effect, normal background image switching effect, and line preview effect) may be longer than the effective operation period of effect pattern A and shorter than the effective operation period of effect pattern B. In addition, each period (first period to fourth period) for each effect (background image switching effect at the start of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a right hit, pseudo-consecutive effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue preview effect) may be shorter than the effective operation period for effect pattern A and effect pattern B.
During the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach, an effect in which the operation unit can be operated (effect pattern A or effect pattern B) may be executed, in which case the effects described below can be expected. Furthermore, when an effect in which the operation unit can be operated is executed during the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach, the effective operation period may not extend into the fourth period or after the variable display has stopped (i.e., the effective operation period may end within the third period), or the fourth period may be deleted, in which case the effects described below can be expected.

For example, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach longer than the shortest of the multiple effective operation times that are available as effective operation times, the effect is that the player can expect an operation instruction image (such as a display of "PUSH!") to be displayed as a revival effect during the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach.
For example, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach longer than the longest of the multiple effective operation times, which has the effect of making the player look forward to the display of an operation instruction image (such as a display of "PUSH!") as a revival effect during the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach,
For example, by setting the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach to be shorter than the shortest of the multiple effective operation times, which allows the player to recognize that an operation instruction image (such as a display of "PUSH!") will not be displayed as a revival effect during the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach, the player can quickly switch their mind to anticipation for the next changing display.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach is set to be longer than the operation valid period of one of the multiple operation valid periods but shorter than the operation valid period of another of the multiple operation valid periods, thereby making it possible for the player to expect that an operation instruction image (such as a display of "PUSH!") will be displayed as a revival effect during the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach is 1 operation valid time (there is only 1 operation valid time), and by making the length longer than that operation valid time, the effect is that the player can expect an operation instruction image (such as a display of "PUSH!") to be displayed as a revival effect during the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach has an effective operation time of 1 (there is only one effective operation time), and by making it shorter than that effective operation time, it is possible to make the player realize that an operation instruction image (such as a display of "PUSH!") will not be displayed as a revival effect during the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of a special reach, which has the effect of allowing the player to quickly switch their mind to anticipation for the next changing display.
It goes without saying that other modifications also have their own effects.

The degree of expectation for a jackpot may be varied by displaying special display A to special display F. In addition, in the relationship between any one of special display A to special display F and any one of special display A to special display F, the degree of expectation for one may be higher, the degree of expectation for both may be the same, or the degree of expectation for one may be lower.
Similarly, in the case of three or more special displays, the expectation level of a certain special display may be increased, the expectation levels of multiple special displays may be the same, or the expectation level of a certain special display may be decreased.

For example, the degree of expectation may be higher when special display A is displayed than when special display E is displayed than when special display B or special display D is displayed. Furthermore, the degree of expectation may be higher when special display A is displayed than when special display E is displayed, or the degree of expectation may be higher when special display B is displayed.
In addition, the expectation level when special display C is displayed may be lower than that of special display A and special display E, but higher than that of special display B and special display D. Alternatively, it may be lower than that of special display A, special display B, special display D, and special display E.

The illuminating decorative means provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the door frame left side unit 530 or the door frame right side unit 550) may be illuminated when the special display is executed.
For example, the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 may be illuminated with illumination patterns A to F corresponding to the special displays A to F. The illumination patterns may be different or the same for any one of the special displays A to F and any one of the special displays A to F.
For example, for displays with high expectations such as special display A and displays indicating a change in game status such as special display C, unique lighting patterns may be used, while the same lighting pattern may be used for special displays B, C, and E.
In this way, by using different lighting patterns for each special display, even if the player is looking away without looking at the display area, the door frame left side unit 530, door frame right side unit 550, etc. will come into view, allowing the player to recognize which special display has been executed.
As a method for making the light emission pattern different for each special display, methods such as lighting or blinking, making the light emission color or light emission time different, etc. may be adopted.

A lighting pattern corresponding to the color of the image used for the special display may be adopted. For example, when a black background concealment image is displayed, the brightness of the left door frame side unit 530 and the right door frame side unit 550 may be reduced or turned off. When a white background concealment image is displayed, the left door frame side unit 530 and the right door frame side unit 550 may be made to emit light in white. When other background concealment images are displayed, the left door frame side unit 530 and the right door frame side unit 550 may be made to emit light in the color of the displayed character, or in the color of the background area of the displayed background concealment image.

The light emission pattern corresponding to each special display may end earlier than the special display, may end simultaneously with the special display, or may end later than the special display.
After the lighting pattern corresponding to each special display has ended, the display may be turned off or may be illuminated in a manner that matches the background music.

An embodiment of the "Giant Tank Reach" has been shown with reference to Figure 252 etc., but it is also possible to configure multiple types of "Giant Tank Reach" to be executable, with different enemy tank display modes and different operating units. The expected level of the "Giant Tank Reach" may also differ depending on the enemy tank display mode and the display unit operated. Even in this case, it is preferable that the expected level of the "Giant Tank Reach" be higher than that of the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach." Furthermore, it is preferable that background images be switched in the same manner for such different types of "Giant Tank Reach." For example, in multiple "Giant Tank Reach," a background concealing image consisting of a bomb character or the like may be displayed, and background images may be switched in the same manner.

An embodiment of the "enemy tank destruction reach" has been shown with reference to Figure 233 etc., but it is also possible to configure multiple types of "enemy tank destruction reach" to be executable, with different enemy tank display modes and different operation units. The expectation level of the "enemy tank destruction reach" may also differ depending on the enemy tank display mode and the display unit operated. Note that even in this case, the expectation level should be lower than that of the "giant tank reach." Furthermore, the background image may be switched in the same manner for these different types of "enemy tank destruction reach." For example, for multiple "giant tank reaches," a black background concealment image may be displayed, and the background image may be switched in the same manner.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 233, a simulated image simulating the operation unit is displayed during the valid operation period to suggest the results of the special lottery, but during the execution of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, the valid operation period is not established, and no simulated image simulating the operation unit is displayed.
Similarly, for each of the other effects (background image switching effect at the start of a special reach, background image switching effect at the end of a right hit, pseudo consecutive effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue preview effect), the first to third periods should not be considered as valid operation periods, and simulated images that resemble the operating parts should not be displayed (i.e., simulated images that resemble the operating parts should not be displayed).
In this way, the first to third periods in all reach effects should not be considered as valid operation periods, and simulated images that mimic the operation unit should not be displayed (i.e., simulated images that mimic the operation unit should not be displayed).
Note that the first to third periods are merely examples of periods that are not valid operation periods and in which simulated images simulating the operation unit are not displayed (i.e., simulated images simulating the operation unit are not necessarily displayed), and may include the fourth period, or may be any one of the first to fourth periods or any multiple periods within these periods.
By adopting such a configuration, the display content in the display area becomes simple, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player does not realize that the operation reception of the operation unit is enabled and is unable to operate the operation unit.

While the decorative pattern is being displayed in a changing state, a changing effect sound is output, but in special displays A to F, the output of the changing effect sound may be suppressed.
Below, a modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 252 etc. will be described with reference to Fig. 272(a). Similarly, a modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 270 will be described with reference to Fig. 272(b).
In the example of Fig. 272(a), the variable effect sound is suppressed during the period from timing t13 to timing t19 when the background concealment image is displayed. Also, the variable effect sound is suppressed during the period from timing t36 to timing t42.
In the example of the presentation shown in Figure 272 (b), even during the period from timing t10 to timing t16 when the background concealment image is displayed, the variable presentation sound is not suppressed, and output in the normal state is maintained.
Thus, in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 272 (a), the output state of the variable effect sound was suppressed for the first period in which the background image gradually becomes less visible, the second period in which the background image is not visible, and the third period in which the background image gradually becomes more visible.
On the other hand, in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 272 (b), even during the first to third periods, the output state of the variable effect sound was not suppressed but maintained in the normal state.
When the background image is switched in this manner, the output state of the variable effect sound may be suppressed, and when the background image is not switched, the output state of the variable effect sound may be maintained in the normal state.

An example has been shown in which the first through third periods are in a suppressed state, but the variable effect sound may be in a suppressed state during at least one of the first through third periods and the fourth period, which is the period until the visibility of the background image returns to normal and the decorative symbols stop. Furthermore, after the fourth period, the suppressed state may be maintained even during the period in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a static state, and the normal state may be restored when the next variable display begins.

The suppressed state may be a state in which the volume of the variable effect sound is output at a lower level than in the normal state. Alternatively, it may be a state in which the variable effect sound is not output. In this case, although the variable effect sound is played internally, the output volume may be set to 0 internally (muted) so that the variable effect sound is not output from the speaker. Alternatively, the playback of the variable effect sound itself may be terminated or interrupted so that the variable effect sound is not output from the speaker.

In the embodiment shown in Figure 272(a), the normal state is from timing t19 to timing t36, but during this period, a special variable effect sound corresponding to the type of special reach may be output. In this case, it is recommended that the output of the special variable effect sound begin at timing t16 during the suppression state or timing t19 when the suppression state ends. It is also recommended that the output of the special variable effect sound end at timing t36 when the suppression state begins or timing t39 during the suppression state.

Not limited to the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 252 etc., similar aspects may be adopted to suppress the variable effect sound in the "enemy tank destruction reach" effect shown with reference to Figure 233 etc., the background image switching effect at the end of a right hit shown with reference to Figure 257 etc., the pseudo consecutive effect shown with reference to Figure 261 etc., and the normal background image switching effect shown with reference to Figure 266 etc.

The following describes, with reference to Figures 273 to 281, the "Hold Change Chance Effect," a special effect in an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 123 to 272, etc. Figures 273 to 275 show examples of images displayed in this embodiment (or a modification), etc. Figure 280 shows a time chart in this embodiment. Figure 281 shows an example of display in the display area.

273 to 275 show examples of images displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 in this embodiment. Specifically, Fig. 273 shows a background image, Fig. 274 shows a decorative pattern, and Fig. 275 shows a background concealment image.
Note that data of various images and moving images in this embodiment and its modified examples is stored in advance in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b.

273(a) shows a normal background image A. The normal background image A is an image depicting the scenery inside a recording studio, a microphone stand, and a female singer character.
273(b) shows a normal background image B. The normal background image B is an image showing the scenery inside the female singer character's room, including the furniture installed therein.
The normal background image A and the normal background image B are images that are displayed when the gaming state is in the normal state.

273(c) shows a special reach background image A that is displayed when the special reach effect, "Year-end Song Battle Reach Effect," is executed. The special reach background image A is an image that shows the stage, audience seats, and reach name.
273(d) shows a special reach background image B that is displayed when the special reach effect "The Countdown Reach Effect" is executed. The special reach background image B is an image that shows the stage, the audience seats, the reach name, and the expected probability that the variable result will result in a jackpot.
The degree of expectation when the "Year-end Song Battle Reach Effect" is executed is set to be higher than the degree of expectation when the "The Countdown Reach Effect" is executed. For example, the degree of expectation when the "Year-end Song Battle Reach Effect" is executed may be 50%, and the degree of expectation when the "The Countdown Reach Effect" is executed may be 15%.
It should be noted that the "Year-end singing contest reach effect" and "The countdown reach effect" are similar to the "giant tank reach effect" and "enemy tank destruction reach effect" shown with reference to Figures 224 to 272, etc., and various embodiments of the "giant tank reach effect" and "enemy tank destruction reach effect" (effects when the background image changes, pseudo consecutive effects, dialogue preview effects, effects of operating various operating units, etc.) may be adopted in the "Year-end singing contest reach effect" and "The countdown reach effect."

Figure 273 (e) shows the normal background image C that is displayed during high-probability and low-probability time-saving modes that are advantageous to the player. Normal background image C is an image that indicates to the player the number of consecutive jackpots (number of consecutive jackpots), the number of game balls paid out during the consecutive jackpot mode, and the instruction to hit the right. The number portion of the image "LIVE x 15" indicates the number of consecutive jackpots (number of consecutive jackpots), and in this example, the number of consecutive jackpots is 15. Furthermore, the number portion of the image "Number of spectators: Over 12,000" indicates the number of game balls paid out during the consecutive jackpot mode, and in this example, more than 12,000 game balls have been paid out. Specifically, normal background image C is displayed during the display of changing or stationary decorative symbols during high-probability and low-probability time-saving modes, and during a jackpot that occurs during high-probability and low-probability time-saving modes.

Figure 274 shows examples of decorative symbols that can be displayed on the pachinko machine 1. Each decorative symbol consists of a left decorative symbol, a center decorative symbol, and a right decorative symbol. These decorative symbols are switched and displayed as appropriate depending on the progress of the performance and the game situation.

274(a) shows a normal decorative pattern. This figure shows an example of a normal decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed, but each normal decorative pattern can be displayed by scrolling in a predetermined direction (for example, downward) or by temporarily stopping at a predetermined position.
The display mode of the normal decorative symbols is determined according to the result of the special lottery, and if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, they are displayed as a sequence of numbers (for example, "222"), and if the result of the special lottery is not a jackpot, they are displayed as a sequence of numbers that are not a sequence (for example, "352"). Figure 274(a) shows an example of the normal decorative symbols being displayed as "538".
A typical decorative pattern consists of a vertically long rectangular background area and numbers and characters (or letters) arranged in front of the background area. The numbers and characters (or letters) have a one-to-one correspondence.

Figure 274 (b) shows the special reach decorative pattern that is displayed when the special reach effects, such as the "Year-end Singing Battle Reach Effect" and the "The Countdown Reach Effect," are executed.
The special reach decorative symbols are displayed in a predetermined position (near the center in the figure) in the display area, smaller than the normal decorative symbols. This makes it easier for players to see the effects that suggest the results of the special lottery that are executed during the "Year-End Song Battle Reach Effects" and "The Countdown Reach Effects."
274(c) is a modified example of the special reach decoration symbol. In this way, a special reach decoration symbol in which the numbers are displayed more emphasized may be adopted. This is displayed during the execution of the special reach performance (especially at the end).
In addition, Figures 274(b) and 274(c) show the state in which the special reach decorative pattern is temporarily stopped.
During the execution of a special reach effect (especially in the middle stage), only the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern may be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, and the middle decorative pattern may not be displayed.

Figure 274 (d) shows the right-hit decorative pattern that is displayed during a right-hit. The right-hit decorative pattern is a decorative pattern that is displayed in game states that require the player to hit the right, such as low-probability time-saving states and high-probability time-saving states. Figure 274 (d) shows the state in which the right-hit decorative pattern is displayed stopped at "538."

Special reach decorative patterns and right-hand decorative patterns only have numbers, not characters or letters like regular decorative patterns. This simplifies the visual appearance of the patterns.

The decorative symbols scroll slowly for a predetermined period (for example, one second) after the variable display begins, a predetermined period (for example, one second) before the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped when a reach state occurs, and a predetermined period (for example, one second) before the variable display ends, so that the player can clearly see the decorative symbols. Note that this type of variable state is sometimes called a slow variable.
On the other hand, outside of these periods, the decorative symbols are displayed semi-transparently and scroll at a high speed, so that although the player can see that the decorative symbols are being displayed in a changing manner, it is impossible or difficult to see the numbers, characters, etc. that the decorative symbols have. This type of changing state is sometimes called high-speed changing.
When starting to display the decorative pattern variations, the display may be changed to a high speed variation immediately without first being changed at a low speed.
Figure 274(e) is a diagram showing a decorative pattern during rapid fluctuations as a downward-pointing arrow, and in the embodiment described below, a decorative pattern during rapid fluctuations is shown as a schematic arrow.

When the symbols are scrolled slowly, for example, it is preferable to scroll two symbols per second. Note that the speed is not limited to two symbols per second, and any speed within the range of one to three symbols can be selected. By scrolling the symbols slowly in this way, it becomes easier to identify the type of symbol.
In addition, multiple (two or more) variation modes with different variation speeds may be provided as the mode of slow variation. For example, a slow variation in which the pattern scrolls by one symbol per second, a slow variation in which the pattern scrolls by two symbols per second, or a slow variation in which the pattern scrolls by three symbols per second may be provided. In addition, when displaying the variation, the slow variation may be performed in any of these modes.
In addition, a changing display in which the pattern scrolls by one symbol per second may be referred to as an ultra-slow changing display, and a changing display in which the pattern scrolls by three symbols per second may simply be referred to as a slow changing display.

In addition, when the symbols are scrolled at high speed, it is preferable to scroll and display 10 symbols per second, for example. Note that the speed is not limited to 10 symbols per second, and any speed within the range of 8 to 12 symbols per second can be selected. By scrolling the symbols at high speed in this way, it becomes difficult or impossible to identify the type of symbol.
In addition, multiple (two or more) high-speed fluctuation modes with different fluctuation speeds may be provided as modes of high-speed fluctuation. For example, high-speed fluctuations in which the symbols scroll by 8 symbols per second, high-speed fluctuations in which the symbols scroll by 10 symbols per second, and high-speed fluctuations in which the symbols scroll by 12 symbols per second may be provided. In addition, when displaying the fluctuations, high-speed fluctuations may be performed in any of these modes.
In addition, a changing display in which 12 symbols scroll per second may be referred to as ultra-high speed changing, and a changing display in which 10 symbols scroll per second may simply be referred to as high speed changing.

As shown in FIG. 274, normal decorative symbols, special reach decorative symbols, and right-hit decorative symbols can be distinguished by the size and design of the background area, the presence or absence of characters or letters, the size of the numbers, etc. The numbers that make up the decorative symbols are not limited to being written in Arabic numerals, and Chinese numerals or Roman numerals may also be used.
With this configuration, the player can recognize the presentation situation and game status based on the type of decorative pattern, the number, etc.

275(a) to 275(c) show examples of background concealment images. The background concealment images in this embodiment have the same functions as those shown with reference to Figures 228, 229, etc.
The background concealment image in this embodiment is displayed when switching between the normal background image A or normal background image B and the special reach background image displayed when the "Year-end Song Battle Reach Performance" or "The Countdown Reach Performance" is executed. The background concealment image shown in Figures 275(a) to 275(c) is made up of a white image imitating a curtain, and is displayed moving from the top to the bottom of the display area, and then from the bottom to the top, and during this period the background image and decorative pattern are changed.
Figures 275(d) to 275(f) show other examples of background concealment images. These background concealment images are the same as those in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 228 etc. except that the bomb character is removed, and the image is displayed so as to move left and right in the same manner as in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 228 etc.

Below, we will explain the outline of the "Year-End Singing Battle Reach Performance" with reference to Figure 276. Also, we will explain the outline of the "Countdown Reach Performance" with reference to Figure 277.

First, the left and right normal decorative symbols are temporarily displayed as the same symbol, and the ready state is established. Figure 276(a) and Figure 277(a) show the display state at this time.
Next, the background concealed images are displayed in the following order: background concealed image A, background concealed image B, background concealed image C, background concealed image B, and background concealed image A. Note that the background concealed images are displayed in the same manner as in the embodiments shown with reference to Figs. 224 to 272 etc.

Next, in the case of the "Year-end Song Battle Reach Effect," a special reach background image A is displayed, and in the case of the "The Countdown Reach Effect," a special reach background image B is displayed. The titles of these reach effects are also displayed. Figures 276(b) and 277(b) show the display state at this time. The displayed title disappears after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed.
The color of the letters indicating the title of the reach effect is displayed in one of white, red, and gold, and it is set so that red letters have a higher expectation of a jackpot than white letters, and gold letters have a higher expectation of a jackpot than red letters.

Next, an image of a female singer character and a microphone is displayed. In addition, in the case of the "Year-End Singing Battle Reach Performance," an image of the Evil Princess character is displayed, and in the case of the "Countdown Reach Performance," an image of the Small Princess character is displayed. Figures 276(c) and 277(c) show the display state at this time.

Next, for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), a visual effect is displayed in which the female singer character and the evil princess character or the small fish princess character compete for the microphone, and the result of the visual effect indicates the result of the special lottery. Specifically, if the female singer character can hold the microphone, the special reach decorative pattern is displayed temporarily stopped in a doublet pattern, indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. Figures 276(d) and 277(d) show the display state at this time. After that, the background concealment image is displayed again, and the normal decorative pattern temporarily stopped in a doublet pattern and the normal background image are displayed. Figures 276(e) and 277(e) show the display state at this time.
On the other hand, if the microphone is taken away by the evil princess character or the small fish princess character, the special reach decorative pattern is displayed temporarily stopped in a reach miss mode, indicating that the result of the special lottery is a miss. Figures 276(f) and 277(f) show the display state at this time. After that, the background concealment image is displayed again, and the normal decorative pattern temporarily stopped in a reach miss mode and the normal background image are displayed. Figures 276(g) and 277(g) show the display state at this time.
After the state in which the normal decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, one second), the normal decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, and then the game state shifts to a big win game state or the next variable display is started.
During the special reach effect, a predetermined song may be output from the speaker. Also, different songs may be output for the "Year-End Song Battle Reach Effect" and the "Countdown Reach Effect."

The evil princess character or the small fish princess character may appear twice during one special reach effect. In this case, for example, if the female singer character can hold the microphone twice in succession during the special reach effect, the decorative symbols may be displayed as stopped in a big win mode, and if the female singer character is unable to hold the microphone even once, or if she was able to hold the microphone the first time but was unable to hold it the second time, the decorative symbols may be displayed as stopped in a losing mode.
In this case, after the display shown in Figures 276(d) and 277(d) is made, the evil princess character or the minor princess character may be made to appear again as shown in Figures 276(c) and 277(c) to display whether the female singer character can continue to hold the microphone.
In this way, the special reach effect can be divided into two parts, the first half and the second half, and a predetermined display (in this case, holding the microphone) can be made in each part to indicate to the player that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot.
The evil princess character or the minor princess character may appear three or more times, not just twice in the first and second halves.

Following the display states shown in Figures 276(d), 276(f), 277(d), and 277(f), the temporarily stopped special reach decoration symbol may be stopped and displayed without displaying the background concealment image, while the special reach background image and characters (female singer character, evil princess character, and small fish princess character) remain displayed. At this time, the small special reach decoration symbol may be changed to the large special reach decoration symbol shown in Figure 274(c) and stopped and displayed.

During the execution of the special reach effect, predetermined characters may be displayed, and the color of the characters may indicate the likelihood of a jackpot. For example, a line such as "Don't let go of the microphone!" may be displayed as a line spoken by a female singer character. FIG. 278(a) shows a state in which the evil princess character appears during the "Year-end singing battle reach effect," and the characters "Don't let go of the microphone!" are displayed as the line spoken by the female singer character. The line image is displayed while the evil princess character and the small fry princess character appear and are fighting over the microphone, and after the display of the line image has ended, a display is made as to whether the female singer character will be able to hold on to the microphone.
The color of the lines is displayed in one of white, red, and gold, and it is preferable to set it so that red characters have a higher probability of winning than white characters, and gold characters have a higher probability of winning than red characters.

Similarly, a cut-in image may be displayed during the execution of the special reach effect to indicate the degree of expectation. Figure 278 (b) shows an example of a cut-in image in which a window image, an image of the line "I'll sing until the end!!", and an image of a female singer character are displayed. The cut-in image is displayed while the evil princess character and the small fish princess character appear and are fighting over the microphone, and after the display of the cut-in image has ended, a display is made as to whether the female singer character will be able to hold the microphone.
The color of the image displayed as the cut-in image (at least one of the entire window image, a part of the window image (for example, a frame part), a dialogue image, and an image of a female singer character) is displayed in any one of green, red, and gold, and it is preferable to set it so that the red image has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the green image, and the gold image has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the red image.

In addition, during the special reach effect, a predetermined effect may be generated in response to the operation of a button (for example, the operation button 401 or the attack button 3710) to indicate the likelihood that the result of the special lottery will be a jackpot.
For example, a cheering message image showing the support from the audience may be displayed in response to a button operation, and the degree of expectation may be indicated in accordance with the amount of support indicated by the cheering message image.
Fig. 279(a) shows the display state when the Akuhime character is displayed. In this state, button operation acceptance is valid for a predetermined time, and an image resembling a button shape is displayed to instruct button operation. Fig. 279(b) shows the display state at this time. Note that a gauge indicating the operation validity period is displayed below the image instructing button operation.
When the player presses a button or when the valid period for button operation ends, cheering message images cheering on the female singer character are displayed. The number of cheering message images displayed indicates the expectation of a jackpot. The more cheering message images there are, the higher the expectation can be set.
Figure 279(c) shows a state where two cheering message images are displayed. Figure 279(d) shows a state where four cheering message images are displayed. In this case, the latter display state where four cheering message images are displayed has a higher expectation of a jackpot.
In addition, when an effect instructing a button operation is performed, it is advisable to set the expectation level higher than when an effect instructing a button operation is not performed (i.e., when a cheering message image is not displayed).
The display of the cheering message image will end after a predetermined time, after which a display will be displayed indicating whether the female singer character will be able to continue holding the microphone (either the display shown in Figure 276 (d) or Figure 276 (f)).
Although the operation button 401 and the attack button 3710 have been given as examples of button operations, button operations for the mission button 3700 and the defense button 3740 may also be required.

This configuration creates a sense of anticipation in the player that an image instructing them to operate the buttons will be displayed during the special reach performance, and if an image instructing them to operate the buttons is displayed, the player will expect more cheering message images to be displayed.

Instead of button operation, a display based on operation of a lever (left lever 3720 or right lever 3730 in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 137, etc.) may be performed. In that case, a predetermined number of penlight images (for example, four to eight) may be displayed instead of the cheering message image, and the more penlight images displayed, the higher the expectation level may be set.
Fig. 279(e) shows a display state in which an image instructing a lever operation is displayed, and Fig. 279(f) shows a display state in which six penlight images are displayed after the lever operation (or after the valid period of the lever operation has ended).

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 276 and 277, the reserved image and all of the reserved images in the first reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area were displayed during the special reach effect, but only the reserved image may be displayed during the special reach effect. Alternatively, all reserved images, including the reserved image, may not be displayed during the special reach effect.
In addition, an embodiment has been shown in which a background concealment image is displayed at the end of the special reach performance, and the special reach background image is switched to a normal background image, but after this switching timing, the normal background image, normal decorative pattern, the reserved image, and the reserved images in the first reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area gradually become visible. Note that although the reserved images are displayed in the first reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area, the reserved images may not be displayed.

The "Hold Change Chance Presentation" will be explained below with reference to Figures 280 and 281. Figure 280 shows a time chart illustrating an embodiment of the "Hold Change Chance Presentation." Figure 281 also shows an example of the display in the display area when the "Hold Change Chance Presentation" is executed.

First, referring to Figure 280(a), we will explain the presentation mode when the "reserved change chance presentation" is not performed. Note that the decorative symbols displayed in the figures shown in Figures 281 to 284 are normal decorative symbols.
The variable display begins at timing t0, and after one second has elapsed, the decorative pattern changes to a display state in which it is rapidly changing. Figure 281 (a) shows the display state in which the decorative pattern is rapidly changing, and a normal background image A is displayed as the background image. The number of pending items is two, and a normal pending image is displayed in the pending display area, and normal pending images are displayed in the first pending display area and the second pending display area. Details of the pending display area, first pending display area, and second pending display area are as described above with reference to Figure 123.
In this example of presentation, the visual appearance of the reserved image does not change until the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state at timing t31.
From timing t31 to timing t32, the decorative symbols are displayed in a static state. The display of the reserved image ends at timing t31. From timing t32 onwards, the next and subsequent variable display and jackpot game will start. Note that at the timing when the next variable display starts (timing t32), the display of a new reserved image will start.

Next, we will explain the presentation mode when the "Hold Change Chance Presentation" is executed for Presentation Examples 01 to 04 shown in Figure 280 (b). In the "Hold Change Chance Presentation," a hold concealment image indicating whether the currently displayed hold image will change to another hold image is displayed in front of the hold image. The hold concealment images consist of a first hold concealment image with the kanji character "uta" (song) placed within an octagonal area, a second hold concealment image with the kanji character "hime" (princess) placed within an octagonal area, a third hold concealment image with the kanji character "den" (transfer) placed within an octagonal area, a fourth hold concealment image with the kanji character "setsu" (setsu) placed within an octagonal area, and a roughly circular hold concealment effect image with a radially shaped circumference (note that for simplicity, this is referred to as "circular" in the figures).

Performance example 01 shows a performance example in which the first reserved concealed image is displayed in front of the normal reserved image (white reserved image) from timing t2 to timing t3. Figure 281 (b) is a display example from timing t2 to timing t3.

Presentation example 02 shows a presentation example in which a first reserved concealed image is displayed in front of the normal reserved image from timing t2 to timing t3, and a second reserved concealed image is displayed in front of the normal reserved image from timing t3 to timing t4.
Fig. 281(b) is a display example from timing t2 to timing t3, and Fig. 281(c) is a display example from timing t3 to timing t4.

Presentation example 03 shows a presentation example in which a first reserved concealed image is displayed in front of the normal reserved image from timing t2 to timing t3, a second reserved concealed image is displayed in front of the normal reserved image from timing t3 to timing t4, and a third reserved concealed image is displayed in front of the normal reserved image from timing t4 to timing t5.
Fig. 281(b) is a display example from timing t2 to timing t3, Fig. 281(c) is a display example from timing t3 to timing t4, and Fig. 281(d) is a display example from timing t4 to timing t5.

In performance example 04, a first reserved concealed image is displayed in front of the normal reserved image from timing t2 to timing t3, a second reserved concealed image is displayed in front of the normal reserved image from timing t3 to timing t4, a third reserved concealed image is displayed in front of the normal reserved image from timing t4 to timing t5, a fourth reserved concealed image is displayed in front of the normal reserved image from timing t5 to timing t6, and a reserved concealment effect image is displayed in front of the normal reserved image from timing t6 to timing t7. In this performance example, the changed reserved image is displayed from timing t7 onwards.
Fig. 281(b) is a display example from timing t2 to timing t3. Fig. 281(c) is a display example from timing t3 to timing t4. Fig. 281(d) is a display example from timing t4 to timing t5. Fig. 281(e) is a display example from timing t5 to timing t6. Fig. 281(f) is a display example from timing t6 to timing t7. Fig. 281(g) is a display example from timing t7 onwards.
It is confirmed that the fourth reserved concealment image will change to another reserved image when it is displayed at timing t5, but in this embodiment, by displaying a reserved concealment effect image, the timing of displaying the changed reserved image is delayed, making it possible to maintain the player's sense of anticipation for a long period of time.

In the performance examples 01 to 03, at timings t2 to t4, the display of the reserved hidden image ends, and the reserved image that was displayed before the reserved hidden image is displayed is displayed. Figure 281 (h) shows the display state at this time.
When the display of the reserved hidden image is terminated, the display of the reserved hidden image may be terminated instantly or gradually. In the case of gradual termination, the reserved image gradually becomes visible.
On the other hand, in performance example 04, after displaying the fourth reserved concealment image and the reserved concealment effect image, the display of the reserved concealment effect image ends at timing t7, and the reserved image is displayed in a color (blue in this case) indicating a higher expectation of a jackpot compared to the normal reserved image that was displayed before the reserved concealment image was displayed. Figure 281 (g) shows the display mode at this time.
In this way, the display performance progresses in stages, with the characters "Uta,""Hime,""Den," and "Setsu" (or just the character "Setsu") being displayed, a reserved concealment effect image being displayed, and then the reserved image being displayed, and ultimately the expected probability of a jackpot is indicated by the display mode of the reserved image, which can increase the player's sense of anticipation compared to when the display mode of the reserved image suddenly changes.

Although the example in which the reserved image is displayed in blue when the display of the reserved concealment effect image has ended has been shown, the reserved image is not limited to blue, and may be configured to be displayed in green, red, gold, or other colors that indicate a higher expectation of a jackpot. By configuring in this way, the player will wait with anticipation as to which reserved image will be displayed when the fourth reserved concealment effect image is displayed.
In each example, the reserved image is invisible while the reserved hidden image is displayed, but a part of the image may be made visible. In this case, it is possible to recognize the color of the reserved image being displayed.

When a reserved image other than the normal reserved image is displayed, the "reserved change chance effect" may be executed. Below, referring to FIG. 280 (c), an example of the effect when the "reserved change chance effect" is executed when the blue reserved image is displayed is shown.
Rendering example 05 shows a rendering example in which only the first reserved concealed image is displayed when the blue reserved image is displayed. In this rendering example, the blue reserved image is displayed even after timing t2 when the display of the first reserved concealed image ends. Note that even if only the second reserved concealed image or the third reserved concealed image is displayed, the blue reserved image is displayed after the display of these reserved concealed images ends.

Example 06 shows a presentation in which a reserve image concealment effect image is also displayed while a blue reserve image is being displayed. In this presentation, at time t7 when the display of the reserve image concealment effect image has finished, the display of reserve images in colors such as green, red, and gold, which have higher expectations than the blue reserve image, begins.

In the example of the display shown with reference to Figures 280(a) and 280(b), decorative symbols are sequentially displayed in a temporary stopped state from timing t10 onwards, and all decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state at timing t21; however, the timing at which the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state may be delayed, and in the period up to that point, other effects described in this specification, such as pseudo consecutive effects, "Year-end singing battle reach effect," and "The countdown reach effect," may be executed.

In this way, in the "reserved change chance presentation", the reserved hidden images are displayed in stages in a predetermined order, and when the display of the reserved hidden image of the final stage is reached (when the fourth reserved hidden image is displayed), the reserved image is changed and displayed to the reserved image indicating a higher expectation. On the other hand, when the display of the reserved hidden image does not reach the final stage (when only the first reserved hidden image to the third reserved hidden image are displayed), the reserved image does not change, and the reserved image that was displayed before the display of the reserved hidden image began is displayed as it is.
With this configuration, the player will be very interested in whether the display of the reserved hidden image will progress to the final "theory," and it is possible to provide the player with a new interest.

Referring to Figure 280(b), an example is shown in which a maximum of four reserved concealed images (first reserved concealed image to fourth reserved concealed image) are displayed, but the number of reserved concealed images may be greater or less than this. For example, in the example performance shown with reference to Figure 280(f), a seventh reserved concealed image may be displayed, but details will be given below.

Although the above example shows the reserved hidden image instantly switching at a predetermined timing (timing t3, timing t4, timing t5, timing t6, etc.), the reserved hidden image before the switch may be displayed so that it gradually switches to the reserved hidden image after the switch. For example, within an octagonal area, the kanji character "uta" (song) may be moved to the left while the kanji character "hime" (princess) appears from the right, allowing the reserved hidden image to be dynamically switched. Figure 282(a) shows the display mode of the reserved hidden image during the switch. It is desirable that this type of switch display be performed over a period of approximately 0.1 to 0.3 seconds.

Although examples of the case where the reserved hidden image is only partially displayed have been shown with reference to performance examples 01 to 03, in this case, instead of instantly erasing the reserved hidden image to make the original reserved image visible, the reserved hidden image may be gradually erased over a predetermined period (for example, one second). For example, the transparency may be gradually increased so that the reserved image becomes visible.
Figure 282 (b) shows the state in which the first reserved concealed image is displayed semi-transparently. In this state, the kanji characters added to the reserved concealed image and the shape and color of the reserved image can be recognized.

Although an example of a presentation in which a reserved concealed image is suddenly displayed at a position overlapping the reserved image has been shown, the reserved concealed image may also be displayed at a position that does not overlap the reserved image, and then moved toward the reserved image so that it overlaps with the reserved image.
Figures 282(c) to 282(e) show examples of display in which a large first reserved concealed image is displayed in the upper left corner of the display area, and then the size of the first reserved concealed image is gradually reduced while being moved towards the reserved image, and finally the first reserved concealed image is displayed overlapping in front of the reserved image.

A reserved concealment image may be displayed within the reserved image. Figures 283(a) to 283(d) show examples of displaying the first to fourth reserved concealment images superimposed on the foreground within the reserved image. It is also advisable to display the reserved concealment effect image superimposed on the foreground within the reserved image. It is also possible for the first to fourth reserved concealment images to consist of text only.

Note that the first through fourth reserved concealed images and reserved concealed effect images displayed in the "reserved change chance effect" are temporary images and do not continue to be displayed in front of the reserved image. In other words, the display of the first through fourth reserved concealed images and reserved concealed effect images ends at a predetermined timing during the display of the changing decorative pattern, and the effect is executed so that the reserved image in a predetermined form (white, blue, etc.) is visible at least immediately before the decorative pattern stops changing. For example, in effect examples 01 through 04, the display of the first through fourth reserved concealed images and reserved concealed effect images ends by timing t7 at the latest.

Other display modes may be adopted as the display modes of the first to fourth reserved concealed images. Figure 283(e) is an example in which a square (tilted at 45 degrees) is used. Figure 283(f) is an example in which the size of the kanji characters displayed within the octagonal area is increased. Figure 283(g) is an example in which the color within the octagonal area is green. Furthermore, the color of the characters may be green, not limited to the color within the area. Furthermore, reserved concealed images in a mode that combines these may be adopted.
Furthermore, these display modes may indicate the likelihood of the characters being executed to the end in the "hold change chance presentation" or the likelihood of a jackpot.
Specifically, the likelihood of characters being executed to completion and the likelihood of a jackpot may be higher when a reserved concealed image in the manner shown in Figure 283 is displayed than when a reserved concealed image in the manner shown in Figures 281(b) to 281(e) is displayed.
In addition, a reserved concealed image with a 100% probability of the characters being executed to the end or a 100% probability of a jackpot may be displayed in any of the first to fourth reserved concealed images.
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding whether the reserved concealed image will be displayed to the end or not, and the likelihood of a big win if the reserved concealed image is displayed to the end.

Referring to Figures 281(f) and 281(g), an example is shown in which the reserved image is changed and displayed at the timing when the display of the reserved concealment effect image ends (timing t7), but at the timing when the display of the reserved concealment effect image ends, a performance image suggesting or predicting the occurrence of a specified event may also be displayed in front of the reserved image.
284(a) and 284(b) are effect images including the words "Chance" and "Super Hot." Each of these shows an example of a display in which an effect image indicating the likelihood of the variable display result being a jackpot is displayed. The latter effect image has a higher likelihood of being a jackpot.
284(c) shows an example of a display in which an effect image including the word "Waiting" is displayed, indicating that some effect will be executed before the variable display ends. When the effect is executed, the display of this effect image ends, and the reserved image becomes visible.
FIG. 284(d) shows an example of a display in which an effect image including the words "Live Reach" is displayed, which indicates that a "Year-End Song Battle Reach Effect" or "The Countdown Reach Effect" will occur. Note that an effect image including the words "Year-End Song Battle" or "The Countdown" may be displayed more clearly to indicate the type of reach effect that will occur. Note that when the reach effect begins, the display of this effect image ends, and the reserved image becomes visible.
In addition, the effect image including the words "Diva Legend" shown in Figure 284 (e) is also an effect image indicating that a decorative pattern will be displayed in a stopped state in a manner indicating a jackpot.

284(c) and 284(d) show that the display ends midway through the change of the decorative pattern and the reserved image becomes visible, but the display of the decorative image shown in Fig. 284(a), 284(b), and 284(e) may end midway through the change of the decorative pattern and the reserved image becomes visible, or the display may continue until the decorative pattern stops and the reserved image may not become visible after the display of the decorative image. In this case, the decorative image will essentially perform the same function as the reserved image.
Although an example has been given in which text is used to suggest or predict the occurrence of a specified event, the occurrence of a specified event may also be suggested or predicted by display modes other than text (color, shape, icon, etc., or a combination thereof).

Although an example has been given in which the "hold change chance presentation" is started immediately after the decorative pattern changing display enters a display state in which it changes at high speed, the "hold change chance presentation" may also be started at other times.
For example, the "hold change chance effect" may be started at the start of a pseudo consecutive effect (for pseudo consecutive effects, see the embodiments shown with reference to Figures 262, 263, etc.), during a pseudo consecutive effect, at the start of special reach effects such as the "Year-end Singing Battle Reach Effect" or "The Countdown Reach Effect" (the time when the special reach background image becomes visible), when the title of the special reach effect is displayed (at the time shown in Figures 276(b) and 277(b)), or during a special reach effect (at the time shown in Figures 276(c) and 277(c)).
In these cases, the "hold change chance effect" will end during the pseudo consecutive effect or the special reach effect.

The "Hold Change Chance Effect" may be executed one or more times, and may be executed at any of these times. For example, it may be executed two or more times during the rapid fluctuations before the decorative symbols reach a reach state. Alternatively, the first "Hold Change Chance Effect" may be executed during a pseudo consecutive effect, and the second "Hold Change Chance Effect" may be executed during a special reach effect.

Next, other examples of presentation will be described.
280(d) shows a modified example in which the first to third reserved concealed images are the same, but a plurality of types of fourth reserved concealed images are provided, and any of the fourth reserved concealed images is displayed. In this modified example, depending on the type of the fourth reserved concealed image, there are cases in which the reserved image changes with a predetermined probability (for example, 50%) and cases in which the reserved image always changes.

First, referring to presentation example 07 and presentation example 08, we will explain the presentation mode when a fourth reserved concealed image of a type in which the reserved image changes with a predetermined probability (for example, 50%) is displayed.
In performance example 07 and performance example 08, "Hold", "Reserve", "Up", and "Up" are displayed in that order from timing t2 to timing t6, but in performance example 07, the reserved image is not displayed to be promoted at timing t7. On the other hand, in performance example 08, the reserved image is displayed to be promoted at timing t7. In this way, when "Up" is displayed as the fourth reserved concealment image, a display is made to promote the reserved image with a predetermined probability (for example, 50%).

Next, referring to presentation example 09, we will explain the presentation mode when a fourth reserved concealed image of a type in which the reserved image always changes is displayed.
In performance example 09, "Hold,""Reserve,""Up," and "Rise" are displayed in this order from timing t2 to timing t6. Then, at timing t8, a display is made to promote the reserved image. In this way, when "Rise" is displayed as the fourth reserved concealment image, a display is made to promote the reserved image with a 100% probability.

Although an example in which four characters, "uta", "hime", "den", and "setsu", are displayed, three characters or five or more characters may be displayed.
Furthermore, kanji characters (such as "uta,""hime,""den,""setsu,""ho,""ryu,""jo," and "sho") have been shown as examples of characters contained within the reserved concealed image, but hiragana (such as "u,""ta,""hi," and "me"), katakana (such as "u,""ta,""hi," and "me"), and English alphabetic notation (such as "D,""I,""V," and "A") may also be used as characters contained within the reserved concealed image.
In addition, although an example has been shown in which the letters contained in the reserved concealed image are the same until halfway through and then change from halfway through ("Hold", "Reserve", "Up", "Yu" and "Hold", "Reserve", "Up", "Rise"), it is also possible to have some of the English spellings of the letters contained in the reserved concealed image be the same and some be different ("C" and "G"), such as "C", "H", "A", "N", "C", "E" and "C", "H", "A", "N", "G", "E". Note that if the displayed character string is "CHANCE", the reserved image is promoted with a predetermined probability (for example, 50%), similar to "Reserve Up", and if the displayed character string is "CHANGE", the reserved image is promoted with a 100% probability, similar to "Reserve Up".

After the display of the reserved concealment effect image is performed, the reserved image may not be immediately changed, but may be displayed after waiting for a predetermined time, in which case the reserved image may be promoted. During the waiting period, it is advisable to display the effect image "Waiting" shown in Fig. 284(c).
In the example 10, the effect image "Waiting" is displayed from the timing t7 to the timing t22, and the reserved image is promoted at the timing t22. In the example 10, the reserved image is promoted while the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed.
In the example 11, the effect image "Waiting" is displayed from the timing t7 to the timing t27, and the reserved image is promoted at the timing t27. In the example 11, the reserved image is promoted with the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed.

While the example has been shown in which the effect image "Waiting" is displayed while the reserved image is waiting to be promoted, other effect images may be displayed. For example, effect images such as "Waiting for reserved change" or "Reserved change" may be displayed.
Alternatively, a presentation image may be displayed that includes all of the characters displayed as the first to fourth reserve concealment images, such as "Reserve excellent" or "Reserve rising."

The promotion of the reserved image may be performed at another timing.
For example, the pending image may be promoted at the start of a pseudo consecutive performance (for pseudo consecutive performances, see the embodiments shown with reference to Figures 262, 263, etc.), during a pseudo consecutive performance, at the start of special reach performances such as the "Year-end Singing Battle Reach Performance" and "The Countdown Reach Performance" (the time when the special reach background image becomes visible), when the title of the special reach performance is displayed (the timing shown in Figures 276(b) and 277(b)), or during a special reach performance (the timing shown in Figures 276(c) and 277(c)).

An example has been shown in which, on the condition that the "hold change chance effect" progresses to a predetermined stage (display of the fourth hold concealed image), the hold image is upgraded or an effect image suggesting that a special effect will be performed is displayed, but it is also possible to implement an effect mode in which a hold concealed image is further displayed after the effect has progressed to the predetermined stage.
280(f) shows a pattern in which reserved hidden images with the characters "ho", "ryu", "hen", and "ka" are displayed as the first reserved hidden image to the fourth reserved hidden image. Also, presentation example 13 shows a pattern in which the characters "ho", "ryu", "hen", "ka", "geki", "a", and "tsu" are displayed as the first reserved hidden image to the seventh reserved hidden image.
When the "Hold Change Chance Presentation" of Presentation Example 12 is executed, and when the "Hold Change Chance Presentation" of Presentation Example 13 is executed, the latter may be made more likely to be promoted to the reserved image with a higher expectation.
Furthermore, when the "Hold Change Chance Presentation" of Presentation Example 12 is executed, the reserved image is promoted to one of blue to red, but not to a gold reserved image, and when the "Hold Change Chance Presentation" of Presentation Example 13 is executed, the reserved image is not promoted to a blue reserved image, but to one of green to gold.
Rendering example 14 shows a pattern in which the first to seventh reserved concealed images are displayed as "hold,""reserved,""change,""change,""wait,""machine," and "in progress." In this case, after the reserved concealment effect image is displayed, a "waiting" effect image is displayed, and after a predetermined time has passed, the reserved image is promoted. Rendering example 14 can also be configured to be promoted to a reserved image with a higher expectation level than in rendering example 12, in the same manner as when rendering example 13 is executed.

While an example has been shown in which the "hold change chance effect" is executed for the reserved image, the "hold change chance effect" may also be executed for any of the reserved images displayed in the first to fourth reserved display areas. In this case, whether or not to execute the "hold change chance effect" is determined based on the hold read-through. The reserved hidden image is also displayed in a manner overlapping the foreground of the reserved image corresponding to the hold that is the subject of the read-through. The "hold change chance effect" may also be executed within a single display of the decorative pattern change, or may be executed across multiple displays of the decorative pattern change. In addition, when the display spans multiple displays of the decorative pattern change, the reserved image will move to the left, and it is preferable that the reserved hidden image also move to the left together with the reserved image.
For example, the "hold change chance effect" may be executed during the period in which a hold image corresponding to a certain hold is displayed in the second hold display area. Alternatively, the "hold change chance effect" may be executed during the period in which it is displayed in the second hold display area, and the "hold change chance effect" may be executed to end during the period in which it is displayed in the first hold display area. Alternatively, the "hold change chance effect" may be executed during the period in which it is displayed in the second hold display area, and the "hold change chance effect" may be executed to end during the period in which it is displayed in the hold display area.

When the letters "Z,""O,""N," and "E" are displayed as the first to fourth reserved concealed images, the preview performance image (green) shown with reference to Figures 123 to 125 may be displayed.
In addition, when the letters "Z,""O,""N,""E,""G,""O,""L," or "D" are displayed as the first reserved concealed image to the eighth reserved concealed image, the pre-reading performance image (gold) shown with reference to Figures 123 to 125, etc. may be displayed.
In addition, it is possible that the 8th reserved concealed image is not displayed, and only one of the 5th reserved concealed image to the 7th reserved concealed image is displayed, in which case a preview effect image (green) will be displayed.
The degree of expectation when a gold pre-reading effect image is displayed may be set to be higher than the degree of expectation when a green pre-reading effect image is displayed.
According to this embodiment, when "Z,""O,""N," and "E" are displayed as the first through fourth reserved concealed images, the player can recognize that a green pre-reading effect image will be displayed. Furthermore, "G,""O,""L," and "D" are displayed as the fifth through eighth reserved concealed images, and the player can visually confirm the effect mode while anticipating whether a gold pre-reading effect image will be displayed.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 123 to 125, the preview effect image was displayed across multiple decorative pattern variations, but it may also be displayed only during the single variation corresponding to the pending display.

It is also possible to limit the display of the reserved concealed image to "Hold", "Reserve", "Change", "Change", "Geki", or "Hold", "Reserve", "Change", "Change", "Geki", or only up to "Hold", "Reserve", "Change", "Change", "Wai", or "Hold", "Reserve", "Change", "Wai", and "Ki", in which case the reserved image should be promoted in the same manner as when up to "Hold", "Reserve", "Change", or "Change" are displayed. A similar presentation style should also be adopted for "Z", "O", "N", "E", "G", "O", "L", and "D".

The characters may be displayed in the order "Setsu," "Den," "Hime," and "Uta," and when the final character "Uta" is displayed, a special reach effect such as a "Year-End Song Battle Reach Effect" or "The Countdown Reach Effect" may be executed. In this example, the last character displayed suggests that a reach effect with a song motif will be executed, so the player will be even more eager for the character "Uta" to be displayed.

In the example of the performance shown with reference to Figure 280 (b), the display time of the first reserved concealment image to the fourth reserved concealment image and the reserved concealment effect image is 1 second each, but it may also be 0.5 seconds or 2 seconds each.
In addition, the display times of the reserved hidden images may be different. In the example 01 shown in FIG. 285(b), the display times of the first reserved hidden image to the fourth reserved hidden image are the same, but the examples 02 to 09 include images in which the display times of the first reserved hidden image to the fourth reserved hidden image are different.
Regarding the display time, taking into consideration the effect to be achieved, the relationship between any two of the first to fourth reserved concealed images can be such that the display times are the same, one display time is longer, or one display time is shorter.

For example, as in performance example 01, by making the display times of the first pending concealed image to the fourth pending concealed image the same, the amount of work involved in creating the performance can be reduced.
In addition, by extending the display time of the first hold concealment image, as in presentation example 02, it becomes easier for the player to notice that a "hold change chance presentation" has occurred, and the player is less likely to miss the progress of the presentation thereafter.
In addition, by lengthening the display time of the second reserved concealed image and the third reserved concealed image, as in presentation example 03 and presentation example 04, the player can be made to feel a sense of anticipation for a long period of time as to whether or not the fourth reserved concealed image will be displayed as the game approaches the display stage of the fourth reserved concealed image.
Furthermore, by extending the display time of the fourth reserved concealment image, as in presentation example 05, the "reserved change chance presentation" can reach the final stage, allowing the player to feel a sense of satisfaction for a long period of time that the reserved image has been confirmed to be promoted.
It goes without saying that the effects of each of the presentation examples 06 to 09 and other variations are similarly achieved.

With reference to Figures 280 to 285, etc., an embodiment has been shown in which a reserved hidden image is displayed in stages, and when the reserved hidden image is displayed to the final stage, the reserved image is promoted. Below, with reference to Figures 286 to 288, other embodiments of the "reserved change chance presentation" will be explained.

Figure 286(a) shows a state in which the left and right decorative symbols are displayed as temporary stop symbols with the same number, creating a reach state, and the middle decorative symbol is fluctuating at high speed. The background image displayed is a standard background image A depicting the interior of a recording studio. Additionally, there are four reserved symbols corresponding to the first starting slot 2002.

Next, the speed of the change of the central decorative symbols slows down, and the central decorative symbols become easily visible. Figure 286 (b) shows the display state at this time.
Next, a lightning bolt image is displayed moving toward the central decorative symbol, and the central decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. Figure 286 (c) shows the display state at this time.
Next, the display of the image imitating a lightning bolt ends, and a window image with the words "Diva Legend Pending Change Chance!" is displayed in the center of the display area. Figure 286(d) shows the display state at this time.

Next, circular images are gradually displayed in the two partitioned areas set on the left and right of the display area. Figures 286(e), 286(f), and 287(a) show the state in which the circular images indicating the partitioned areas are gradually displayed.
Next, a pseudo-reserved image for effect, having the same size as the reserved image, is displayed at the position of the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area. The pseudo-reserved image for effect moves toward the partition area on the left while gradually increasing in size.
Similarly, a pseudo-reserved image for effect, the same size as the reserved image, is displayed at the position of the reserved image displayed in the third reserved display area. The pseudo-reserved image for effect moves toward the right partition area while gradually increasing in size.
The color of the pseudo reserved image for effect is the same color as the reserved image displayed at the source of the movement, which is white in this example. Figure 287 (b) shows the state in which two pseudo reserved images for effect are moving.
The arrows in the figure are used to indicate the movement of the pseudo-hold image for presentation purposes and are not actually displayed. This notation may also be used in other drawings (e.g., Figures 288 to 292).
Next, the pseudo-hold image for effect that started moving from the first hold display area is moved to the left partition area. At the same time, the pseudo-hold image for effect that started moving from the third hold display area is moved to the right partition area. Figure 287 (c) shows the display state at this time.

Next, the kanji character "song" is added to the pseudo reserve images for effect in the left and right partition areas and displayed. Figure 287 (d) shows the display state at this time. In the left and right partition areas, an effect is executed to see whether or not the final characters will be displayed, such as "song," "hime," "den," and "setsu," in the same manner as the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 280, etc. Note that the characters in the pseudo reserve images for effect in the left partition area are larger, while the characters in the pseudo reserve images for effect in the left partition area are smaller. In this embodiment, the larger the characters, the higher the probability that the final characters will be displayed, and the player will hope that larger characters will be displayed. Note that the degree of probability that the final characters will be displayed may be indicated by the color of the kanji rather than the size of the kanji.

In the section on the left, the song is displayed up to the "story" stage. On the other hand, in the section on the right, only the first song is displayed, with a semi-transparent pseudo-hold image for presentation purposes. Figures 287(e) and 287(f) show the display state at this time.

Next, in the partition area on the left, the word "explanation" is displayed, followed by a green pseudo-hold image for presentation purposes. The message "Change?!" is also displayed. Figure 287 (g) shows the display state at this time. The word "Change?!" may also be displayed superimposed on the pseudo-hold image for presentation purposes.

Next, the green pseudo-hold image for effects displayed in the left-hand section area begins to move toward the hold image display area. At the same time, the semi-transparent pseudo-hold image for effects displayed in the right-hand section area ends display. Figure 288 (a) shows the display state at this time.

When the pseudo reserved image for effect is displayed up to the last "setsu" in a predetermined color, either an effect is performed in which the image collides with the temporarily stopped middle decorative pattern and is bounced back, causing the decorative pattern to be displayed in a manner indicating a reach miss, or an effect is performed in which the image collides with the middle decorative pattern, causing the middle decorative pattern to move, changing the color of the reserved image to the color of the pseudo reserved image for effect, causing a reach effect to be executed.
288(b) to 288(d) show the display mode in the former case. Specifically, the pseudo-reserved image for the performance collides with the center decorative symbol but is repelled, moves toward the left side of the display area, and finally moves off the screen. After that, the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are temporarily displayed in the form of "3", "7", "3", and then are displayed as stopped.
Figures 288(e) to 288(g) show the display mode in the latter case. Specifically, the pseudo-reserved image for the performance collides with the central decorative pattern, knocking the central decorative pattern out, and is displayed as the reserved image in the reserved display area. In addition, after the central decorative pattern enters a state of high-speed fluctuation, a special reach performance (the figure shows an example of "The Countdown Reach Performance") is executed.

In this way, if the pseudo reserved image for the effect is displayed to the end and the decorative pattern can be knocked away, the reserved image changes to a state indicating high expectations, a special reach effect is executed, and a jackpot state occurs with a predetermined probability.
On the other hand, if the pseudo reserved image for effect is displayed to the end and the decorative pattern cannot be flicked off, the decorative pattern is displayed stopped in a manner indicating a miss.

With reference to Figures 286 to 288, an example has been shown in which the display of a pseudo hold image for effect purposes starts from the position where a normal hold image (a white hold image) is displayed. However, with reference to Figure 289, an embodiment will be described in which the display of a pseudo hold image for effect purposes starts from the position where a non-normal hold image (a hold image in blue, green, etc.) is displayed.

Normal hold images are displayed in the first, second, and fourth hold display areas, but a blue hold image is displayed in the third hold display area. Figure 289(a) shows the display state at this time.

Next, the display and movement of the pseudo hold image for effect begins. A blue hold image is displayed in the third hold display area, and the pseudo hold image for effect also becomes a blue hold image. Figure 289 (b) shows the display state while the pseudo hold image for effect is moving. Figure 289 (c) shows the display state when the movement of the pseudo hold image for effect is complete.

Next, the text display of the pseudo-hold image for the effect begins. In the left-hand section, the word "Song" is displayed in small letters on a white pseudo-hold image for the effect, and in the right-hand section, the word "Song" is displayed in large letters on a blue pseudo-hold image for the effect. Figure 289 (d) shows the display state at this time.

In this embodiment, the probability that the final character will be displayed is higher when the pseudo reserve image for effect is blue or green, compared to when the pseudo reserve image for effect is white. Also, when the final character is displayed, the color of the pseudo reserve image for effect may change to a pseudo reserve image for effect of a color with a higher expectation.
For example, if the color of the pseudo reserve image for effect is blue, the reserve image may be changed to blue or to green, which is a color with higher expectations than blue. Also, if the color of the pseudo reserve image for effect is red, the reserve image may be changed to red or to gold, which is a color with higher expectations than red.
By using such a configuration, it is possible to make the player take a great interest in which reserved image will move and become the pseudo reserved image for the effect.

Referring to Figures 286 to 288, we have shown an embodiment in which the text display of pseudo-hold images for presentation purposes is performed in parallel. However, we will now explain an embodiment in which the text display of pseudo-hold images for presentation purposes is performed one by one in sequence, with reference to Figures 290 and 291.

In this embodiment, pseudo hold images for presentation purposes are also displayed in the first hold display area and the third hold display area, and move to the left and right partition areas. Figures 290(a) to 290(c) show the display state from the display of the partition areas to the completion of the movement of the pseudo hold images for presentation purposes.

Next, a large "Song" is displayed in the left-hand partition area, and a smaller "Song" is displayed in the right-hand partition area. The size of the characters indicates the likelihood that the characters will be displayed to the last character. In this embodiment, characters are displayed in order, starting from the left-hand partition area. Radial images are displayed as markers in partition areas where a character is being displayed. Figures 290(d) to 290(f) show the display state at this time. As shown in the figures, the pseudo-hold image for effect on the left displays up to "Setsu", while the pseudo-hold image for effect on the right is in a standby state with "Song" displayed.

The pseudo-hold image on the left for presentation purposes displays up to "Theory" and then changes to green. It also displays "Change?!" Figure 290 (g) shows the display state at this time.

Next, the display mode of the pseudo-hold image for effects on the right changes in order, starting with "Song." Figures 291(a) to 291(c) show the display state when "Song" through "Explanation" are displayed. At this time, the pseudo-hold image for effects on the left remains green and in a standby state.

The pseudo-hold image on the right for presentation purposes displays "Theory" and then changes to blue. It also displays "Change?!" Figure 291 (d) shows the display state at this time.

Next, the word "Change?!" and the radial image displayed on the right side are erased. Figure 291(e) shows the display state at this point.
In this way, by sequentially changing the display mode of the pseudo hold image for presentation in multiple divided areas (the divided area on the left side and the divided area on the right side), the visibility of the change mode is improved.

Next, the pseudo-reserved image for the effect on the left moves toward the reserved image, but is bounced off the temporarily stopped decorative pattern in the middle and moves toward the bottom left. Figure 291 (f) shows the display state at this time.

Next, the pseudo reserved image for effects on the right moves toward the reserved image, tilting the temporarily stopped central decorative pattern and moving it so that it overlaps with the display position of the reserved image. Figure 291 (g) shows the display state at this time.

Finally, the pseudo-hold image for the effect on the right is erased when it overlaps with the actual hold image. At the same time, the actual hold image changes from the normal hold image to the blue color that was the color of the pseudo-hold image for the effect on the right and is displayed. At the same time, the high-speed fluctuation of the middle decorative pattern resumes. Figure 291 (h) shows the display state at this time. After that, special reach effects such as the "Year-end Singing Battle Reach Effect" and "The Countdown Reach Effect" are executed.

286 to 291, the divided areas are all the same size, but divided areas of different sizes may be displayed. For example, divided areas of three sizes, large, medium, and small, may be displayed.
292(a) to 292(d) show examples in which a large partitioned area is displayed as the left partitioned area and a medium-sized partitioned area is displayed as the right partitioned area, and the reserved image moves toward the left and right partitioned areas to display a pseudo reserved image for presentation. Note that the size of the pseudo reserved image for presentation is displayed at the same size as the displayed partitioned area.
It is also preferable that the larger the partition area, the higher the probability that the last character will be displayed.

In the embodiments shown with reference to Figures 286 to 291, an example was shown in which two defined areas were displayed, but the number of defined areas to be displayed may also be determined by lottery from one to four. Figure 292(e) is an example of a display in which one defined area is displayed. Figure 292(f) is an example of a display in which three defined areas are displayed. Figure 292(g) is an example of a display in which four defined areas are displayed.
In the above-described embodiment, an example is given in which the hold images in the first hold display area and the third hold display area are displayed in a moving manner, but this is only one example, and it is possible that a pseudo hold image for presentation purposes may be displayed in any of the first to fourth hold display areas.
It is advisable to prevent the display of a number of partitioned areas greater than the number of reserved balls. For example, if the number of reserved balls is three, a lottery may be held to display one to three partitioned areas. Also, if the number of reserved balls is zero, the "reserved ball change chance effect" may not be performed. By adopting such a configuration, players are conscious of maintaining a large number of reserved balls, which can increase the operation of the gaming machine.

When multiple partition areas (2 to 4) are displayed, one of the following presentation patterns can be executed: one in which all partition areas are displayed to the last character; one in which only part of the characters are displayed in some partition areas and the last character is displayed in others (multiple successes and one failure, one success and multiple failures, etc.); or one in which no characters are displayed to the last character in all partition areas, and the presentation pattern to be executed can be determined based on the results of a special lottery.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 286 to 291, an example is shown in which the ``Hold Change Chance Presentation'' progresses automatically, but it is also possible to have part of the ``Hold Change Chance Presentation'' presentation progress in response to a player's operation.
For example, while the display of the pseudo-reserved image for effect movement toward the partitioned area may be performed automatically, the character display may not progress unless the player repeatedly or long-presses a button (e.g., the operation button 401 or the attack button 3710). For example, while the pseudo-reserved image for effect is displayed (FIG. 293(a)), the character display may begin (FIG. 293(b)) and continue to display up to a predetermined character, provided that the player continues to repeatedly or long-press the button. Note that if the player stops the rapid pressing or long-pressing midway, the display may stop or end at, for example, "Hime" or "Den." If the player resumes the rapid pressing or long-pressing, the display of new characters also resumes. Note that an image of "press" may be displayed in the lower left corner of the display area to suggest to the player how to operate the button. Alternatively, "press" may be replaced with "rapid pressing" or "long pressing" to indicate the operation mode.
Figure 293 (c) shows an example of a display in which the first and fourth divided areas from the left display up to the last "explanation," while the second and third divided areas from the left do not display up to the last "explanation."

Also, when the pseudo-hold image for effect is displayed moving into the partitioned area (as shown in Figure 293(a)), the player may press a button to start displaying text. The text may then be displayed automatically, preferably up to a predetermined state (for example, the state shown in Figure 293(c)).

In the display examples shown in Figures 293(a) to 293(c), circular operation unit simulated images are displayed that resemble the operation button 401 and the attack button 3710, but if the operation of another button is required, an operation unit simulated image that resembles the shape of that button may also be displayed.
293(d) shows an example of a simulated image of the operation section of the mission button 3700 that is displayed when operation of the mission button 3700 is required. Note that the simulated image of the operation section may be displayed in a position other than the bottom left of the display area, and in the figure, an example is shown in which it is displayed in the upper center of the display area.
In addition to the simulated image of the operation unit, a gauge indicating the valid operation period of the operation unit may be displayed. Fig. 293(d) shows an example in which a gauge image indicating the valid operation period is displayed below the simulated image of the operation unit. Note that the black portion in the figure gradually becomes shorter as the valid operation period elapses, and the boundary portion is displayed moving to the right. The figure shows a state in which one-third of the valid operation period has elapsed.

In addition, if such a button is not operated, after a predetermined time has elapsed, a pseudo-hold image for effect purposes may be displayed in a predetermined manner (the same manner as when the button is operated), and a display effect may be performed in which the hold image is changed.
Alternatively, if such a button is not operated, the display of the pseudo-reserved image for the effect may be terminated after a predetermined time has elapsed without advancing the character display, and the central decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the special lottery result.

Alternatively, each character may be displayed periodically in the order "Uta → Hime → Den → Sessh → Uta → Hime → Den → Sessh → ..." and one of the characters may be displayed depending on the player's button operation. Figure 293(e) shows the state in which each character is displayed periodically. In this case, too, if "Uta,""Hime," or "Den" is displayed, it is considered a failure, and if "Sessh" is displayed, it is considered a success, and the color of the pseudo-reserved image for the effect may be changed. It is recommended that each character be displayed at a speed that allows it to be recognized (for example, the time it takes for one character to be displayed may be approximately 0.1 to 0.4 seconds).
In addition, when a plurality of defined areas are displayed, the display of the plurality of defined areas may be determined simultaneously by a single operation of the button by the player.
Alternatively, the display of each partitioned area may be determined one by one in response to a single button operation by the player. For example, as shown in FIG. 293(f), an operation unit simulation image may be displayed for each pseudo reserve image for effect. In this case, it is also preferable that the pseudo reserve images for effect stop one by one from the left in response to a single button operation.
Although an example has been shown in which an operation unit simulated image is displayed overlapping each pseudo-hold image for effect, the display position of the operation unit simulated image may be set slightly downward so that the pseudo-hold image for effect and the operation unit simulated image do not overlap.

The operation instruction image that instructs the operation of the operation unit may overlap part or all of the pseudo-hold image for effect. Figure 293 (g) shows a display state in which the operation instruction image and the pseudo-hold image for effect overlap part. Also, Figure 293 (h) shows a display state in which the operation instruction image and the pseudo-hold image for effect overlap entirely.
Also, Figure 294 (a) shows a display state in which the operation unit simulated image and the pseudo-hold image for effect all overlap. In the example of this figure, the pseudo-hold image for effect is arranged in an arc shape. Specifically, from a predetermined position on the left side of the operation unit simulated image, the pseudo-hold image for effect corresponding to the hold image displayed in the first hold display area to the fourth hold display area is displayed clockwise.
In addition, the operation manner for stopping the pseudo-hold image for effect can be the same as that in the above-mentioned embodiment.

The display mode of the operation unit simulation image or the operation instruction image may indicate either the probability of winning a jackpot or the probability of the "theory" being displayed, or both. For example, the operation unit simulation image or the operation instruction image may be displayed in white, red, gold, etc., and the probability of expectation may be higher when the operation unit simulation image or the operation instruction image is displayed in red than white, or gold than red.
In addition, it is desirable that the timing for displaying the operation unit simulation image and operation instruction image be after the timing when at least all of the characters that can be finally displayed, such as "Song → Princess → Legend → Story," have been displayed in the pseudo-hold image for performance purposes.

The following presentation pattern was shown: each character is displayed cyclically in the order "Uta → Hime → Den → Setsu → Uta → Hime → Den → Setsu → ...," followed by a static display of one of the characters. In this presentation pattern, the characters "Uta,""Hime,""Den," and "Setsu" are typically white; however, by using a color other than white for any one or all of the characters, the likelihood of "Setsu" eventually being displayed may be indicated. For example, by coloring the character "Uta" blue, the likelihood of "Setsu" being displayed may be indicated as being higher than when the character "Uta" is white. Note that when "Setsu" is displayed, the reserved image changes to a reserved image in a manner indicating a higher likelihood of winning (e.g., a normal reserved image changes to a blue reserved image). Therefore, when the character color is other than white, the likelihood of winning is substantially higher than when the character color is white.
Although white and blue are used as examples of the colors of the characters, colors other than blue may also be used as the color other than white. For example, the characters may be displayed in one of three colors: blue, green, and red. In this case, the probability of "setsu" being displayed may increase in the order of blue, green, and red. In this case, too, the order of blue, green, and red indicates that the probability of a jackpot is essentially higher. By varying the probability of expectation depending on the multiple display modes in this way, the player can also be interested in the presentation mode itself, in which each character is displayed cyclically in the order "song → princess → legend → legend → song → princess → legend → legend → ...".
The likelihood of "theory" being displayed may be indicated by other display modes other than color. For example, star-shaped marks may be attached to the characters, and the more of these marks there are, the higher the likelihood of "theory" being displayed.
In addition, before the display of the characters begins (for example, the period from timing t1 to timing t2), the pending concealment effect image may be displayed in a predetermined color (white, blue, green, red), and the display mode may indicate the expected probability of ``explanation'' being displayed (increasing in the order of white, blue, green, and red), and then the display of the characters may begin.

Although a presentation pattern in which each character is displayed periodically as "Uta → Hime → Den → Setsu → Uta → Hime → Den → Setsu → ..." has been shown (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "first presentation pattern"), this presentation pattern may be modified to provide a presentation pattern in which the character "?" is displayed periodically by scrolling within a pseudo-hold image for presentation as "? → ? → ? → ..." (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "second presentation pattern").
Figure 294(b) shows an example of a display when the second presentation pattern is adopted in displaying the pseudo-hold image for presentation in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 292(g).
Also, Figure 294 (c) shows an example of a display when the second presentation pattern is adopted in displaying the pseudo-hold image for presentation in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 293 (g).
Also, Figure 294 (d) shows an example of a display when the second presentation pattern is adopted in displaying the pseudo-hold image for presentation in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 293 (a).

In the second presentation pattern, the trigger for the characters to stop displaying can be the same as in the first presentation pattern, and depending on the passage of a predetermined time or the operation of a button, one of the characters "Uta,""Hime,""Den," or "Setsu" will stop and be displayed, and if "Setsu" is displayed, a display will be made to promote the reserved image with a predetermined probability.
In addition to the four characters "song,""princess,""legend," and "story," other characters may be displayed as frozen characters. For example, characters such as "red" and "gold" may be frozen to display a red or gold pseudo-reserved image for effect. Alternatively, the character "rising" may be displayed to indicate that the reserved item is being promoted. In this case, a pseudo-reserved image for effect of a predetermined color may be displayed to display the reserved item being promoted to the reserved item of the color of the pseudo-reserved image for effect.
Alternatively, the character "Tai" may be displayed in a frozen state to indicate that a jackpot has been won. In this case, a pseudo reserved image for presentation in a special mode (for example, a mode including the character "Tai") may be displayed, and the reserved image may be upgraded to the reserved image in the special mode.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 280 and 285, an example is shown in which the "reserved change chance effect" is performed only once during one display change of the decorative pattern, but it may be performed multiple times. In that case, it is preferable that the execution of the next "reserved change chance effect" starts after one "reserved change chance effect" has ended.
For example, the first effect pattern may be executed two or more times during one display of the decorative pattern, and similarly, the second effect pattern may be executed two or more times.
Alternatively, the second presentation pattern may be executed after the first presentation pattern is executed, or the first presentation pattern may be executed after the second presentation pattern is executed.
In addition, the first presentation pattern, the second presentation pattern, and the first presentation pattern may be executed in that order, or the second presentation pattern, the first presentation pattern, and the second presentation pattern may be executed in that order.
By configuring it in this way, there is a possibility that the reserved image will be displayed to be promoted two or more times during one change, and even if promotion fails in the first "reserved change chance presentation", the player can have a sense of expectation that the second "reserved change chance presentation" will occur. Also, if promotion is successful in the first "reserved change chance presentation", the player can have a sense of expectation that the second "reserved change chance presentation" will occur and the image will be further promoted.

The effective button operation period may be the same length for the first presentation pattern and the second presentation pattern.
Alternatively, the length of the valid operation period in the first presentation pattern and the length of the valid operation period in the second presentation pattern may be different. For example, the length of the valid operation period in the first presentation pattern may be longer than the length of the valid operation period in the second presentation pattern. Alternatively, the length of the valid operation period in the second presentation pattern may be longer than the length of the valid operation period in the first presentation pattern.

In this way, by displaying a pseudo-hold image for effect and changing the display mode of that hold image, players can be made to feel a sense of interest by indicating a high expectation that the result of the changing decorative pattern will indicate a jackpot. Furthermore, because the pseudo-hold image for effect is displayed in a static state by operating the control unit, players' motivation to operate the device can be heightened.

The following describes the "prediction effect when a reach misses," a special effect in an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 123 to 272, etc., with reference to Figures 273 to 275, 295 to 297, etc. Note that Figure 295 shows a time chart for this embodiment. Also, Figures 296(a) to 297(g) show the display content in the display area.

An outline of the presentation mode shown in the time chart shown in Fig. 295(a) will be explained. In this presentation mode, the display mode of characters etc. indicates that a special reach presentation ("The Countdown Reach Presentation") will result in a miss, and when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a miss, a presentation display based on the results of the hold look-ahead is performed.
Specifically, the effect display involves displaying a microphone icon image where the middle decorative pattern is displayed, followed by a small microphone icon image in the bottom left of the display area. Then, when the decorative pattern corresponding to the pending pre-reading is displayed in a variable manner, the microphone icon image is displayed again in the position where the middle decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner, suggesting that a special reach effect will occur (in response to the stock of microphone icons, a "Year-End Song Battle Reach Effect" or "The Countdown Reach Effect," which are microphone-related effects, will occur). In this example, the "Year-End Song Battle Reach Effect" is executed.

Specific examples of the performance will be described in detail below.
Before timing t4 in Figure 295(a), the microphone is taken by the Minor Princess character in "The Countdown Reach Presentation," suggesting to the player that the special lottery result is a loss. At this time, the number of reserved balls is four. Figure 296(a) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t4, the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss. Figure 296(b) shows the display state at this time.
From timing t6 to timing t12, a background concealed image is displayed, and the background image is switched from special reach background image B to normal background image A. Figure 296(c) shows a display state in which background concealed image A is displayed from timing t6 to timing t7. Figure 296(d) shows a display state in which background concealed image C is displayed from timing t8 to timing t10. Figure 296(e) shows a display state in which background concealed image A is displayed from timing t11 to timing t12. Details of the display modes of the background concealed images are as shown with reference to Figures 224 to 236, etc.

At timing t12, the display of background concealment image A ends. Figure 296 (f) shows the display state from timing t12 to timing t13. Note that from timing t12 to timing t17, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in a temporary stopped state.

At timing t13, a microphone icon image is displayed in front of the middle decorative pattern. After that, the microphone icon image is displayed large, and the words "Got it!" are displayed until timing t15. Figure 296 (g) shows the display state from timing t13 to timing t14. Figure 296 (h) shows the display state from timing t14 to timing t15.

At timing t15, the microphone icon image moves and becomes smaller as it is displayed in the bottom left of the display area. Figure 297(a) shows the display state after the movement. At timing t17, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in a static state. Figure 297(b) shows the display state at this time.

The next variable display occurs between timing t18 and timing t28, and the static display occurs between timing t28 and timing t29. The result of this variable display is a loss.

At timing t29, the next variable display starts. Figure 297(c) shows a state in which a predetermined time (for example, one second) has passed since the variable display, and the decorative symbols are fluctuating at high speed.
At timing t34, the microphone icon image displayed in the lower left corner of the display area becomes larger and moves to the center of the display area. The words "Microphone activated!" are also displayed. The microphone icon image and the words "Microphone activated!" are displayed in front of the center decorative pattern. Figure 297 (d) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t36, the display of the microphone icon image and the text "Microphone activated!" ends.
At timing t37, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are displayed as the same symbol in a provisionally stopped state, resulting in a ready-to-win state. Figure 297(e) shows the display state at this time.
From timing t38 to timing t45, a background concealment image is displayed, the background image is changed from a normal background image A to a special reach background image A, and a special reach effect (in this case, "year-end singing battle reach effect") is started.
FIG. 297(f) shows a display state in which background concealed image C is displayed from timing t41 to timing t43.
Figure 297 (g) shows the display state during the execution of the "Year-end Singing Battle Reach Performance" at a predetermined timing after timing t45.
In Figure 295 (a), the presentation style from timing t51 onwards is similar to that described above for the "Year-end Singing Battle Reach Presentation", and decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state in a manner indicating the result of a jackpot or miss.

As shown in this embodiment, displaying a microphone icon image displayed at a predetermined position (for example, near the center) of the display area in a predetermined location of the display area (in the embodiment, it is displayed small on the left side) may be referred to as ``acquisition'' in this specification.
Furthermore, the state in which the microphone icon image is displayed in a predetermined location in the display area may be referred to as "standby."
In addition, in this specification, the act of enlarging the microphone icon image that was displayed small as shown in this embodiment and executing the effect suggested by the microphone icon image may be referred to as activation.
Although the microphone icon image has been used as an example, in the embodiments described below, images other than the microphone icon image may be acquired, waited for, or activated. Therefore, these may be collectively referred to as suggestion images.

The acquisition and activation of various suggestive images such as a microphone icon image is an effect that is executed based on foresight. Therefore, if there is no reserved position at the timing when the special reach is missed (timing t13 in FIG. 295(a)), the acquisition of various suggestive images such as a microphone icon image will not be displayed.
In addition, although the timing of the activation is determined within the gaming machine, it is unknown to the player. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while looking forward to finding out which of the reserved symbols that existed at the time the suggestive image was acquired will activate the suggestive image.

In this way, by displaying a predictive display related to the next and subsequent variable displays at the time when a special reach effect is executed but the decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in a manner indicating a reach miss, it is possible to alleviate the disappointment that arises from the heightened anticipation caused by the execution of the special reach effect, and to focus the player's attention on the next and subsequent variable displays, thereby preventing a decline in the operation of the gaming machine.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 295(a), a microphone icon image is activated when the decorative pattern is fluctuating at high speed to notify the occurrence of a special reach effect, but the microphone icon image may also be activated at other times.

For example, in the first half of the "Year-end Song Battle Reach Performance," when a female singer character and an evil princess character are fighting over a microphone, the microphone icon image may be enlarged and then collide with the evil princess character, causing the evil princess character to run away to the left of the display area, thereby confirming that the "Year-end Song Battle Reach Performance" will progress to the second half.
Alternatively, in the first half of the "Year-end Singing Battle Reach Performance," after the evil princess character is shown taking away the microphone, the microphone icon image may be enlarged and the microphone may be handed over to the female singer character, confirming that the "Year-end Singing Battle Reach Performance" will progress to the second half.

Similarly, in the latter half of the "Year-end Song Battle Reach Presentation," when the female singer character and the evil princess character are fighting over the microphone, the microphone icon image may be enlarged and then collide with the evil princess character, causing the evil princess character to run away to the left of the display area, thereby suggesting that a jackpot has been confirmed in the "Year-end Song Battle Reach Presentation."
Similarly, in the latter half of the "Year-end Singing Battle Reach Performance," after the display shows the microphone being taken away by the evil princess character, the microphone icon image may be enlarged and the microphone may be handed over to the female singer character, suggesting that a jackpot has been confirmed in the "Year-end Singing Battle Reach Performance."

It is unclear to the player when the displayed microphone icon image will activate. Therefore, if the "Year-End Singing Battle Reach Effect" occurs while the microphone icon image is displayed, but the microphone icon image does not activate and the decorative pattern is displayed in a manner indicating a miss, the player will continue playing in the hope that the microphone icon image will activate in the next or subsequent variable display.

In addition, to clearly indicate which hold corresponds to which effect, a microphone icon image may be displayed overlapping the front of the hold image and moved left and right. In this case, there is a possibility that the microphone icon image will be activated for the hold image that overlaps with the microphone icon image. Figure 298(a) shows that the microphone icon image may be activated for any of the first through third holds. Figure 298(b) shows an example display after the decorative pattern has stopped and displayed twice. In this example, the microphone icon image moves so that it overlaps the hold and the first hold.
In addition, instead of displaying the microphone icon image superimposed on the pending image, it is also possible to display "Activate within 〇 fluctuations" together with the microphone icon image displayed in a predetermined position.
By displaying in this way, the player can understand which holds have the possibility of being activated, and even if a start winning occurs after the microphone icon image is acquired and the number of holds increases, the player can distinguish between holds that have the possibility of being activated by the microphone icon image and holds that do not.

Although the embodiment in which one microphone icon image can be acquired has been described, a plurality of microphone icon images may be acquired.
In this case, multiple microphone icon images may be activated during one variable display, or microphone icon images may be activated separately in different variable displays.
FIG. 298(c) shows a display state in which two microphone icon images are acquired (display state from timing t15 to timing t17).
298(d), the number of microphone icon images acquired may be displayed with the word "x2." Depending on the number of microphone icon images acquired, "x3,""x4," etc. may be displayed.

For example, when the "Year-end singing contest reach effect" is started, the first microphone icon image may be activated in the first half of the reach effect, and the second microphone icon image may be activated in the second half of the reach effect.
Alternatively, when the microphone icon image is acquired, the microphone icon image may be activated in each of the variable displays corresponding to the first hold and the third hold, thereby starting the ``Year-end Singing Battle Reach Performance.''

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 295 (a), the microphone icon image can only be acquired during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in a reach miss state (timing t13 to timing t15), but it may also be possible for microphone icon images to be added in subsequent periods.
For example, when one microphone icon image has been acquired, one or more additional microphone icon images may be acquired. For example, in the time chart shown in FIG. 295(a), a presentation in which additional microphone icon images are acquired may be executed from timing t26 to timing t28. In this case, at least at timing t26, the result of the decorative pattern change display may be indicative of a losing result. For example, at timing t25, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern may be displayed temporarily frozen with decorative patterns of different numbers, and the center decorative pattern may change from a rapidly changing state to a scrolling state at a slower rate. This presentation allows for effective use of the period when a losing result is likely to be indicated and the player feels disappointed.
As a display mode when a microphone icon image is added, the display modes shown with reference to Figures 298(c) and 298(d) can be adopted.

A plurality of types of microphone icon images may be provided for display.
FIG. 298(e) shows an example in which a microphone icon image in a different color (red) from the normal (white) microphone icon image has been acquired.
A microphone icon image of a different color may be set to have a higher expectation of a jackpot in the effect (for example, a special reach effect) executed when the microphone icon is activated, compared to a normal microphone icon image. For example, when a normal microphone icon image is activated to produce a "year-end singing battle reach effect," and when a microphone icon image of a different color is activated to produce a "year-end singing battle reach effect," the latter may be set to have a higher expectation of a jackpot.
Alternatively, the probability of an effect with a high expectation of a jackpot being performed when a microphone icon image is activated may be set to be higher. For example, when a normal microphone icon image is activated, the probability of "The Countdown Reach Effect" occurring is 70% and the probability of "Year-End Song Battle Reach Effect" occurring is 30%, and when a microphone icon image of a different color is activated, the probability of "The Countdown Reach Effect" occurring is 30% and the probability of "Year-End Song Battle Reach Effect" occurring is 70%.
Although red is given as an example of a microphone icon image that is different from the usual color, any color may be used to distinguish the colors, and for example, in addition to white, blue, green, and red microphone icon images may be displayed. Also, the order of white, blue, green, and red may be such that the likelihood of a jackpot increases, or the probability of an effect advantageous to the player being executed increases.

Although multiple types of microphone icon images are provided by differentiating the colors, the microphone icon image may be different in some manner other than color. For example, multiple sizes of microphone icon images may be provided, and the larger the size of the microphone icon image, the higher the likelihood of a jackpot or the higher the probability that an effect advantageous to the player will be executed.
In this way, the display mode (color, size, etc.) of the microphone icon image may be used to increase the likelihood of a big win or to increase the probability of a more advantageous effect being executed for the player.
Note that the microphone icon image may be visually recognized differently in other display modes, not limited to color and size.

Although an example of a microphone icon image that is always activated is shown, a microphone icon image that may not be activated may also be provided. For example, a microphone icon image that is activated with a 30% probability and not activated with a 70% probability may be used. Figure 298 (f) shows an example of a display of such a microphone icon image that may not be activated. As shown in the figure, a "?" is added to the microphone icon image to indicate that it may not be activated.
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to increase the rate and number of microphone icon images acquired while keeping the probability of the microphone icon being activated low.

Although examples have been shown in which the display of a microphone icon image suggests that a microphone or song-related effect will be performed (examples of the occurrence of a special song-related reach effect or victory in a battle during a special reach effect, as shown with reference to Figure 295(a) and Figures 296-297), the embodiment may be modified so that other suggestive images can be acquired instead of the microphone icon image. The following mainly shows embodiments in which the display form of the suggestive images has been modified in terms of function, etc., but the display form of the unmodified parts will be displayed in the same way as the embodiments shown with reference to Figures 295(a), 296, and 297.

Figure 299(a) shows a state in which an upgrade suggestion image indicating that the presentation mode will be upgraded is displayed.
In the example 01 of Figure 295(b), a promotion suggestion image is displayed from timing t13 to timing t15, and the promotion suggestion image can be acquired. Figure 299(a) shows the display state from timing t15 to timing t17.
At timing t42, a special reach background image B is displayed and execution of "The Countdown Reach Performance" is started, but during the period from timing t46 to timing t48, a promotion suggestion image is displayed and a more promising "Year-end Singing Battle Reach Performance" is executed in place of the currently executing "The Countdown Reach Performance".
When the promotion suggestion image is activated in this way, a display is made that changes the predetermined presentation mode to a presentation mode with a higher expectation.
Below are examples of performances in which performance modes other than the special reach performance are promoted.

For example, activation of the promotion suggestion image may upgrade the display mode of the look-ahead effect image shown with reference to Figures 124, 125, etc. to a display mode with a higher expectation of a jackpot. Note that the timing for upgrading the look-ahead effect image may be before the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead effect starts, or may be during the execution of the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead effect.
In addition, the promotion suggestion image may be acquired at a predetermined timing after the display of the preview effect image has begun, or the display of the preview effect image may be started at a predetermined timing after the promotion suggestion image has been acquired.

Referring to Figure 278(a), an example is shown in which lines are displayed during a special reach effect to indicate the degree of expectation, but a promotion suggestion image may be activated while the lines are displayed, and the lines may be displayed in a color indicating a higher degree of expectation.

Also, referring to Figure 278 (b), an example has been shown in which a cut-in image is displayed during a special reach effect to indicate the degree of expectation, but a promotion suggestion image may be activated while the cut-in image is displayed, and the cut-in image may be displayed in a color indicating a higher degree of expectation.

Figure 299(b) shows a state in which a hold change suggestion image is displayed, indicating that the hold will be upgraded.
In the example 02 of Figure 295 (b), a reserve change suggestion image is displayed during the period from timing t13 to timing t15, and the reserve change suggestion image can be acquired. Figure 299 (b) shows the display state from timing t15 to timing t17.
The reserve change suggestion image is activated from timing t26 to timing t27, and at timing t27, the normal reserve image displayed in the first reserve display area changes to a reserve image of blue or green with a higher expectation. From timing t29, a variable display corresponding to the blue or green reserve image is displayed.
In this way, at the end of the change display before the change display corresponding to the hold that is the target of the advance reading (in this example, the change display one time before), a hold change suggestion image is activated, and the hold image displayed in the first hold display area changes from a normal hold image to a hold image that is blue or green and has a higher expectation.

In the performance example 03 of Figure 295 (b), a hold change suggestion image is activated from timing t30 to timing t32, and at timing t32 the normal hold image displayed in the hold display area changes to a blue or green hold image with a higher expectation.
In this way, immediately after the decorative pattern starts to change, a pending change suggestion image is activated and the pending image displayed in the pending display area changes from the normal pending image to a more promising pending image in blue or green, thereby increasing anticipation for the result of the changing display immediately after the changing display begins.

299(c) and 299(d) show a state in which a button operation suggestion image is displayed, indicating that a button operation is enabled. Note that the button operation suggestion image shown in Fig. 299(d) has a shape that imitates the shape of a button.
In the example 04 of FIG. 295(b), a button operation suggestion image is displayed between timing t13 and timing t15, and the button operation suggestion image can be acquired. FIGS. 299(c) and 299(d) show the display state between timing t15 and timing t17. Between timing t30 and timing t32, a button operation suggestion image is activated, and between timing t32 and timing t35, an effect requiring button operation is executed, and acceptance of button operation is enabled. Note that the effect requiring button operation can be configured to indicate a predetermined expectation level by employing a configuration similar to that of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 145, etc.
The buttons whose operations are valid may be the mission button 3700, attack button 3710, and defense button 3740 in the embodiment shown in Fig. 137. Alternatively, instead of the buttons, the operations of the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 may be valid.

Regarding button operations, in addition to pressing only once, operations such as long pressing (pressing continuously for about 2 to 3 seconds) or rapid pressing (requiring multiple pressings during the valid operation period) may be required, and the required operation may be displayed with a button operation suggestion image.
Figure 299 (e) shows a state in which a button operation suggestion image is displayed, suggesting that a long press of the square mission button 3700 in a plan view is required.
The operation of left lever 3720 and right lever 3730 may require pulling, pulling for a long time, or pushing for a long time.

When the operation valid period has occurred, an operation instruction image instructing a button operation is displayed, and the operation instruction image may have a plurality of display modes with different expectation levels. For example, a white operation instruction image and a red operation instruction image may be provided, and the expectation level may be set higher when the red operation instruction image is displayed. Note that the mode of the operation instruction image may be the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 145, etc.
In addition, a white button operation suggestion image and a red button operation suggestion image may be provided, and when the white button operation suggestion image is activated, a white operation instruction image may be displayed, and when the red button operation suggestion image is activated, a red operation instruction image may be displayed.

A button operation suggestion image may be activated during the valid button operation period, changing the appearance of the displayed operation instruction image to one with a higher level of expectation. For example, if a red button operation suggestion image is activated when a white operation instruction image is being displayed, the operation instruction image may change to red. This may also increase the level of expectation. Note that operation instruction images may be gradually displayed before the valid operation period begins, and a red button operation suggestion image may be activated at this time, so that the operation instruction image has changed to red at the start of the valid operation period.

When a button operation suggestion image is activated during the valid button operation period to change the state of the displayed operation instruction image to one with a higher expectation, a low expectation effect result may not be displayed. For example, if an effect image of any of white, red, or gold is displayed as an effect display corresponding to a button operation, and the expectation of a red effect image is higher than that of a white effect image, and the expectation of a gold effect image is higher than that of a red effect image, the white effect image with a low expectation may not be displayed, and the red or gold effect image may be displayed.
A button operation suggestion image may be displayed when a button is operated. In this case, it is also preferable to prevent low expectation effect images from being displayed.

FIG. 299(f) shows a state in which a pseudo consecutive win suggestion image is displayed, suggesting that a pseudo consecutive win will occur.
In the performance example 05 of Figure 295 (b), a pseudo consecutive suggestion image is displayed during the period from timing t13 to timing t15, and the pseudo consecutive suggestion image can be acquired. Figure 299 (f) shows the display state from timing t15 to timing t17.
A pseudo consecutive suggestion image is activated from timing t30 to timing t32, and in the period from timing t32 to timing t35, the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in a predetermined manner, and then the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is again displayed variably at high speed, thereby performing a pseudo consecutive performance.
Regarding the pseudo consecutive effects, a configuration similar to that of the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 261 etc. can be adopted, and the configuration can be such that a predetermined expectation level is indicated.

Referring to Figures 298(a) and 298(b), an example is shown in which a microphone icon image is displayed in front of the first to third holds when the microphone icon image is acquired, but the example may also be modified to display similarly suggestive images other than the microphone icon image (promotion suggestive image, hold change suggestive image, button operation suggestive image).
Figure 300(a) is an example of a display from timing t13 to timing t15, in which a window with the word "promotion" is displayed across the first to third holds, indicating that some kind of promotion effect will be performed on one of the first to third holds.
Figure 300 (b) is an example of a display from timing t13 to timing t15, in which a window with the words "Hold Change" is displayed across the first to third holds, indicating that a hold change will occur in one of the first to third holds.
As the pending orders are cleared, the positions and horizontal lengths of these windows are displayed moving to the left and becoming shorter.

Although an embodiment in which only one type of image can be acquired has been shown with reference to FIG. 299, it may be modified so that multiple suggestive images can be acquired simultaneously.
Figure 300(c) shows a display example from timing t13 to timing t15, in which a microphone icon image, a promotion suggestion image, a hold change suggestion image, and a button operation suggestion image are acquired. In this case, in any of the first to fourth holds, the effect corresponding to each of the acquired suggestion images is executed.

Figure 300(d) is a display example from timing t13 to timing t15, showing an example in which a microphone icon image, a promotion suggestion image, a hold change suggestion image, and a button operation suggestion image are acquired. In this example, as with the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 298(f), a "?" is added to the acquired suggestion image. The effect corresponding to the acquired suggestion image is not necessarily executed. In other words, in any of the first to fourth holds, the effect corresponding to each acquired image is executed with a predetermined probability (e.g., 30%).

Referring to Figures 298(c) and 298(d), an embodiment has been shown in which multiple microphone icon images can be acquired, but multiple other suggestion images may also be acquired.
Figures 300(e) and 300(f) are display examples from timing t13 to timing t15, showing a state in which two pending change suggestion images and two button operation suggestion images have been acquired.
In addition, if multiple promotion suggestion images are acquired, an effect in which multiple promotion suggestion images are activated is executed. The same applies to the pending change suggestion image and the button operation suggestion image. The activation timing may be set to activate multiple times within one variable display, or may be set to activate separately within different variable displays.

298(e) shows an example of a performance in which a microphone icon image of a different color (red) from the normal (white) microphone icon image can be acquired, but the promotion suggestion image, the hold change suggestion image, and the button operation suggestion image may also be displayed in different colors. Also, the color of the suggestion image may indicate the likelihood of a jackpot or the probability that a highly anticipated display will be displayed in the performance executed in response to the suggestion image.
Furthermore, the expectation of a jackpot may be varied depending on the type of suggestive image (microphone icon image, promotion suggestive image, hold change suggestive image, button operation suggestive image). For example, the expectation may be higher when a microphone icon image is acquired than when a hold change suggestive image is acquired. In other words, the expectation may be higher when a certain suggestive image is acquired compared to when another suggestive image is acquired among the four suggestive images.

An embodiment may also be created that combines the embodiments shown with reference to Figures 298 to 300.

An embodiment capable of acquiring multiple microphone icon images has been shown with reference to Figures 298(c) and 298(d), but a more detailed embodiment will be described with reference to Figure 301.
First, a large microphone icon image and the words "Win x?" are displayed. The left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped. Figure 301(a) shows the display state at this time.
Next, a horizontally long window is displayed in the display area, with a regular microphone icon image displayed on the left side of the window and rapidly changing numbers (e.g., "1" to "3") displayed on the right side of the window. Figure 301(b) shows the display state at this time. The time for the changing display should be set to about 1 to 2 seconds.
Next, the rapidly changing numbers on the right side of the window stop and "2" is displayed. Figure 301(c) shows the display state at this time. Note that "1" or "3" may also be displayed.
Next, on the left side of the display area, microphone icon images are displayed in the number corresponding to the displayed number (any of 1 to 3). Figure 301(d) shows the display state at this time.
After that, the decorative symbols are displayed in a static state. Figure 301(e) shows the display state at this time.
In this way, by displaying how many microphone icon images can be acquired, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of anticipation.

With reference to FIG. 301, an embodiment capable of acquiring multiple microphone icon images has been shown, but now, with reference to FIG. 302, another embodiment will be described.
In this embodiment, the same display is performed up to a certain point as in the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 301. Figs. 302(a) to 302(c) show the same display states as Figs. 301(a) to 301(c), respectively.
Next, a red microphone icon image is displayed on the left side of the horizontally long window, and rapidly changing numbers (for example, "1" to "3") are displayed on the right side of the window. Figure 302(d) shows the display state at this time. The acquired normal microphone icon image is also displayed on the left side of the display area. The time for the changing display should be about 1 to 2 seconds.
Next, the rapidly changing numbers on the right side of the window stop and "1" is displayed. Figure 302(e) shows the display state at this time. Note that "1" or "3" may also be displayed.
Next, on the left side of the display area, red microphone icon images are displayed in a number corresponding to the displayed number (any number from 1 to 3). Figure 302(f) shows the display state at this time.
After that, the decorative symbols are displayed in a static state. FIG. 302(g) shows the display state at this time.
In this way, by displaying how many of each microphone icon image can be acquired, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of anticipation.

As shown with reference to Figure 302, if multiple suggestion images are acquired, they should be displayed in the order in which they were acquired, from bottom to top.
Furthermore, when the acquired suggestion image is activated, the suggestion images displayed above the activated suggestion image may be moved downward and displayed.

With reference to FIG. 301, an embodiment capable of acquiring multiple microphone icon images has been shown, but now, with reference to FIG. 303, another embodiment will be described.
First, the word "Win x?" is displayed. The left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are temporarily stopped. Figure 303(a) shows the display state at this time.
Next, a horizontally long window is displayed in the display area, and a rapidly changing microphone icon image (for example, a normal microphone icon image and a red microphone icon image) is displayed on the left side of this window, and rapidly changing numbers (for example, "1" to "3") are displayed on the right side of the window. Figure 303(b) shows the display state at this time. It is recommended that the time for the changing microphone icon image display be approximately 1 to 2 seconds, and the time for the changing numbers display be approximately 1 to 2 seconds longer.
Next, a normal microphone icon image is displayed. Figure 303(c) shows the display state at this time. Note that a red microphone icon image may also be displayed.
Next, the rapidly changing numbers on the right side of the window stop and "2" is displayed. Figure 303(d) shows the display state at this time. Note that "1" or "3" may also be displayed.
Next, on the left side of the display area, microphone icon images are displayed in a number (any of 1 to 3) corresponding to the displayed number. Figure 303(e) shows a display state in which two white microphone icon images are displayed on the left side of the display area. The microphone icon images are displayed in either white or red.
After that, the decorative symbols are displayed in a static state. Figure 303(f) shows the display state at this time.
In this way, by displaying how many of each microphone icon image can be acquired, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of anticipation.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 301 to 303, an example was shown in which at least one microphone icon image could be obtained, but it is also possible to add "0" to the variable displayed number so that when "0" is displayed, no microphone icon image can be obtained.

Note that while two microphone icon images have been given as examples, a white microphone icon image and a red microphone icon image, three or more may be used. For example, a gold microphone icon image, which has an even higher expectation than a red microphone icon image, may be used.

An example has been shown in which one or more suggestive images can be acquired when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed in a reach miss mode, but additional suggestive images may also be acquired at other times.

Simultaneously with activation of a predetermined suggestive image, the same or a different type of suggestive image may be acquired.
For example, a hold change suggestion image may be acquired when the microphone icon image is activated. In this case, it is preferable to display "hold change acquired" together with the display "microphone activated!"
By making it possible to acquire suggestive images at the timing when the display is made to reduce the number of suggestive images, it is possible to reduce the disappointment felt when the number of times a predetermined effect is executed has decreased.

Alternatively, during the waiting period after a specific suggestion image has been acquired, a new suggestion image of the same or a different type may be acquired. In this case, too, it is advisable to display the image in the same manner as in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 296(g) and 296(h).

Alternatively, a new suggestive image may be acquired during an effect being executed based on the activation of a suggestive image. For example, if a special reach effect is executed based on the activation of a microphone icon image, a microphone icon image or another suggestive image may be acquired again during the execution of the special reach effect. Furthermore, by activating a microphone icon image during the execution of a special reach effect, a display may be displayed in which the female singer character wins the battle for the microphone with the diva or the minion princess and is able to keep the microphone, or a display may be displayed in which the microphone is delivered to the female singer character even if she loses the battle for the microphone, so that the female singer character is able to keep the microphone in the end in the first or second half of the special reach effect.
In this case, the player can be made to feel a sense of anticipation that suggestive images will be added until the final stage of the variable display.

Referring to Figures 296(h) to 297(c), in the embodiment, an example is shown in which when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in a temporary stop state in a reach miss mode, the suggestive image is displayed moving to the left side of the display area, but the timing for moving the suggestive image may also be other.
For example, the suggestion image may be moved while the decorative pattern is being displayed stationary or when the next variable display of the decorative pattern begins.

When a special reach effect in which a microphone icon image is activated is executed, it may be possible to acquire an additional microphone icon image before the special effect begins. Note that pseudo consecutive effects may be executed 0, 1, or 2 times, and the effect format will be explained based on the number of pseudo consecutive effects.

First, if a pseudo consecutive effect is not performed, it may be possible to acquire additional microphone icon images during one or more of the following periods: from the start of the variable display until the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern reach a ready state, and from the time the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern reach a ready state until the special ready effect begins.

In addition, when a pseudo consecutive effect is performed once, it may be possible to acquire additional microphone icon images during one or more of the following periods: the period from when the variable display begins until the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a pseudo consecutive effect; the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols resumes until the left decorative symbols and right decorative symbols reach a reach state; and the period from when the left decorative symbols and right decorative symbols reach a reach state until the special reach effect begins.

For example, it may be possible to acquire additional microphone icon images during one or more of the following periods: the period from when the variable display begins until the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a manner indicating a pseudo consecutive display; the period after that from when the variable display of the decorative symbols resumes until the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped again in a manner indicating a pseudo consecutive display; the period after that from when the variable display of the decorative symbols resumes until the left and right decorative symbols reach a reach state; and the period after the left and right decorative symbols reach a reach state until a special reach display begins.

In this way, the more times the pseudo consecutive effects are performed, the more microphone icon images can be acquired, so players will hope that the pseudo consecutive effects will be performed.

When a microphone icon image is activated and a special reach effect begins, the color indicating the title of the reach effect (for details, see the embodiments shown with reference to Figures 276(b) and 277(b)) may be displayed in the same color as the activated microphone icon image. For example, if the color of the activated microphone icon image is red, the title of the reach effect may be displayed in red, and if the color of the activated microphone icon image is gold, the title of the reach effect may be displayed in gold.

Below, we will explain more specific implementation modes for special reach effects, etc. First, let's explain the premise. The probability that the special lottery result will be a jackpot is 1/300, and the probability that the special lottery result will be a miss is 299/300. In the case of a jackpot, the probability of entering a reach state is 1/1. On the other hand, in the case of a miss, the probability of entering a reach state is 30/299. The occurrence rate of a miss reach is 299/300 x 30/299, or 1/10.

FIG. 304(a) shows the distribution of reach effects.
In the case of a jackpot, the occurrence ratio of the "Year-end Singing Battle Reach Effect,""The Countdown Reach Effect," and "Other Reach (Effect)" is 70:20:10.
On the other hand, in the case of a miss, the occurrence ratio of the "Year-end Singing Battle Reach Effect,""The Countdown Reach Effect," and "Other Reach Effect" is 2:4:94.
In this case, the expected probability of the "Year-end Singing Battle Reach Performance" is approximately 54%, the expected probability of the "The Countdown Reach Performance" is approximately 14%, and the expected probability of the "Other Reach (Performance)" is approximately 0.4%.
The occurrence rate in the figure indicates the ratio to the total variable display of the decorative symbols. In approximately 0.4% of the variable displays, the "Year-End Song Battle Reach" effect occurs, in approximately 0.5% of the variable displays, the "Countdown Reach" effect occurs, and in approximately 9.4% of the variable displays, other reaches occur (after the decorative symbols are in a Reach state, the decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed in the form of a jackpot or miss, or after the Reach state, other Reach effects may be executed and the decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed in the form of a jackpot or miss). In the remaining approximately 89.7% of the variable displays, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the form of a non-reach miss.

304(b) shows a table for selecting the number of microphone icon images to be acquired when the "Year-End Song Battle Reach" is executed. In both the case of a jackpot and a miss, the denominator is 100, and the number of microphone icon images to be acquired is set at a predetermined ratio.
As shown in the table, the ratio of the number of microphone icon images acquired is set so that the greater the number of microphone icon images acquired, the higher the likelihood of winning the jackpot.
The occurrence rate in the figure indicates the ratio to the total variation display of the decorative pattern. As mentioned above, the "Year-end Song Battle Reach Effect" occurs in approximately 0.4% of the total variation display of the decorative pattern, but the probability of the "Year-end Song Battle Reach Effect" with 0 microphone icon images acquired is approximately 0.230%, the probability of the "Year-end Song Battle Reach Effect" with 1 microphone icon image acquired is approximately 0.078%, the probability of the "Year-end Song Battle Reach Effect" with 2 microphone icon images acquired is approximately 0.051%, the probability of the "Year-end Song Battle Reach Effect" with 3 microphone icon images acquired is approximately 0.039%, and the probability of the "Year-end Song Battle Reach Effect" with 4 microphone icon images acquired is approximately 0.035% (the sum of these values is the occurrence probability of the "Year-end Song Battle Reach Effect" of approximately 0.4%).

Figure 304(c) shows a selection table for presentation patterns when the winning number is 0. In both the case of a jackpot and a miss, the denominator is 100, and the probability of selecting a presentation pattern is set at a predetermined rate.
Similarly, Figure 304(d) shows a selection table of presentation patterns when the number of winnings is "1", Figure 304(e) shows a selection table of presentation patterns when the number of winnings is "2", Figure 304(f) shows a selection table of presentation patterns when the number of winnings is "3", and Figure 304(g) shows a selection table of presentation patterns when the number of winnings is "4".

Figure 305 is a table showing the acquisition ratio of microphone icon images (acquisition ratio of gold microphones and regular microphones) in each effect pattern.
FIG. 305(a) is a selection table when the number of microphone icon images acquired is "1".
FIG. 305(b) is a selection table when the number of acquired microphone icon images is "2".
FIG. 305(c) is a selection table when the number of acquired microphone icon images is "3".
FIG. 305(d) is a selection table when the number of microphone icon images acquired is "4".

In this embodiment, if the player wins the fight for the microphone with the Evil Princess four times in the "Year-End Singing Battle Reach Presentation" (sometimes referred to as a "battle" in the examples; the fight for the microphone with the Small Princess may also be referred to as a "battle"), a jackpot result will be displayed. On the other hand, if the player loses the first three battles, a losing result will be displayed. As will be described later, after a display that makes it appear as if the player has lost the battle, a microphone icon image may be activated and a display may be displayed indicating that the player has won the battle.

306 is a table showing the results of the first through fourth battles for each presentation pattern. "O" indicates a mode in which a display indicating victory in the battle is made, "X" indicates a mode in which a display indicating a loss in the battle is made, and "X → O" indicates a mode in which a display that makes it appear as if the battle has been lost is made, followed by the activation of a microphone icon image and the display indicating that the battle has been won.
FIG. 306(a) shows the presentation mode when the number of acquired microphone icon images is "0".
FIG. 306(b) shows the presentation mode when the number of microphone icon images acquired is "1".
FIG. 306(c) shows the presentation when the number of microphone icon images acquired is "2".
Figure 306 (d) shows the presentation mode when the number of microphone icon images acquired is "3".
Figure 306(e) shows the presentation mode when the number of microphone icon images acquired is "4".

As shown in FIG. 306(a), if the number of acquired items is "0", the microphone icon image will not be activated.
On the other hand, when the number of acquired items is "1" as shown in FIG. 306(b), the microphone icon image (either the gold microphone icon image or the normal microphone icon image) will be activated a maximum of once.
In effect patterns "PTN06" to "PTN11," the microphone icon image is activated in any of the first to third battles, but the result is a loss in any subsequent battles.
The presentation pattern "PTN12" is a presentation pattern in which four battles are won without the microphone icon image being activated.
The presentation pattern "PTN13" is a presentation pattern in which the fourth battle occurs without the microphone icon image being activated, and although the fourth battle is lost, the microphone icon image is activated and the fourth battle is won.
In effect patterns "PTN14" to "PTN16," a microphone icon image is activated in any of the first to third battles, and the subsequent battles are won.

As shown in FIG. 306(c), when the number of microphone icon images acquired is "2", the microphone icon image (either the gold microphone icon image or the normal microphone icon image, or both) will be activated a maximum of two times.
The acquisition ratio of the microphone icon image is as shown in Figure 305 (b).
If two golden microphone icon images or two regular microphone icon images are acquired, the microphone icon images will be activated at the timing shown in each performance pattern in Figure 306 (c).

When one golden microphone icon image and one normal microphone icon image are acquired, the order of activation is determined with a predetermined probability.
In the case of PTN17, the probability of the golden microphone icon appearing in the second battle is 50%, and the probability of the regular microphone icon appearing is 50%. In the third battle, the microphone icon that was not appearing will appear.
In the case of the effect pattern "PTN18," in the first battle, the probability of the golden microphone icon image being activated is 80%, and the probability of the regular microphone icon image being activated is 20%. In the third battle, the microphone icon image that was not activated will be activated.
In the case of the effect pattern "PTN19," in the first battle, the probability of the golden microphone icon image being activated is 20%, and the probability of the regular microphone icon image being activated is 80%. In the second battle, the microphone icon image that was not activated will be activated.
In the case of the "PTN20" effect, in the first battle, there is a 50% chance that the gold microphone icon will be displayed, and a 50% chance that the regular microphone icon will be displayed. In the second battle, the microphone icon that was not displayed will be displayed.

In the case of the effect pattern "PTN21", the microphone icon image is not activated.
In the case of the effect pattern "PTN22," in the fourth battle, there is a 50% probability that a gold microphone icon image will be displayed, and a 50% probability that a normal microphone icon image will be displayed.
In the case of the effect pattern "PTN23," in the third battle, there is a 50% probability that a gold microphone icon image will be displayed, and a 50% probability that a normal microphone icon image will be displayed.
In the case of the effect pattern "PTN24," in the second battle, there is a 50% probability that a gold microphone icon image will be displayed, and a 50% probability that a normal microphone icon image will be displayed.
In the case of the effect pattern "PTN25," in the first battle, there is a 50% probability that a gold microphone icon image will be displayed, and a 50% probability that a normal microphone icon image will be displayed.
In the case of effect pattern "PTN26," in the third battle, there is a 50% chance that the gold microphone icon will be displayed, and a 50% chance that the regular microphone icon will be displayed. In the fourth battle, the microphone icon that was not displayed will be displayed.
In the case of effect pattern "PTN27," the probability of the golden microphone icon image being activated in the second battle is 80%, and the probability of the regular microphone icon image being activated is 20%. In the fourth battle, the microphone icon image that was not activated will be activated.
In the case of effect pattern "PTN28," in the first battle, the probability of the golden microphone icon image being activated is 80%, and the probability of the regular microphone icon image being activated is 20%. In the fourth battle, the microphone icon image that was not activated will be activated.
In the case of PTN29, the probability of the golden microphone icon appearing in the second battle is 20%, and the probability of the regular microphone icon appearing is 80%. In the third battle, the microphone icon that was not appearing will appear.
In the case of the effect pattern "PTN30," in the first battle, the probability of the golden microphone icon image being activated is 80%, and the probability of the regular microphone icon image being activated is 20%. In the third battle, the microphone icon image that was not activated will be activated.
In the case of effect pattern "PTN31," in the first battle, the probability of the golden microphone icon image being activated is 20%, and the probability of the regular microphone icon image being activated is 80%. In the second battle, the microphone icon image that was not activated will be activated.

As shown in FIG. 306(d), when the number of microphone icon images acquired is "3", the microphone icon image (either the gold microphone icon image or the normal microphone icon image, or both) will be activated up to three times.
The acquisition ratio of the microphone icon image is as shown in Figure 305 (c).
If three golden microphone icon images or three regular microphone icon images are acquired, the microphone icon images will be activated at the timing shown in each performance pattern in Figure 306 (d).

If two golden microphone icon images and one regular microphone icon image are acquired, or if one golden microphone icon image and two regular microphone icon images are acquired, the order of activation will be determined as follows:
In the case of effect pattern "PTN32," in the first battle, the probability that a gold microphone icon image will be activated is 80%, and the probability that a regular microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. In the second battle, if there is a waiting gold microphone icon image, the probability that a gold microphone icon image will be activated is 80%, and the probability that a regular microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. In the third battle, the remaining microphone icon image will be activated.
In the case of the effect pattern "PTN33", the microphone icon image is not activated.
In the case of effect pattern "PTN34," in the fourth battle, there is a 50% probability that a gold microphone icon image will be displayed, and a 50% probability that a normal microphone icon image will be displayed.
In the case of the effect pattern "PTN35," in the third battle, there is a 50% probability that a gold microphone icon image will be displayed, and a 50% probability that a normal microphone icon image will be displayed.
In the case of effect pattern "PTN36," in the second battle, there is a 50% chance that a gold microphone icon image will be displayed, and a 50% chance that a normal microphone icon image will be displayed.
In the case of effect pattern "PTN37," in the first battle, there is a 50% probability that a gold microphone icon image will be displayed, and a 50% probability that a normal microphone icon image will be displayed.
For effect pattern "PTN38," in the third battle, there is a 50% chance that a gold microphone icon will be displayed, and a 50% chance that a regular microphone icon will be displayed. In the fourth battle, if there is a gold microphone icon on standby, the gold microphone icon will be displayed, and if there is no gold microphone icon on standby, the regular microphone icon will be displayed.
For effect pattern "PTN39," in the second battle, the probability of a gold microphone icon image being displayed is 80%, and the probability of a regular microphone icon image being displayed is 20%. In the fourth battle, if there is a standby gold microphone icon image, the gold microphone icon image is displayed, and if there is no standby gold microphone icon image, the regular microphone icon image is displayed.
In the case of effect pattern "PTN40," in the first battle, the probability that a gold microphone icon image will be activated is 80%, and the probability that a regular microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. In the fourth battle, if there is a standby gold microphone icon image, the gold microphone icon image will be activated, and if there is no standby gold microphone icon image, the regular microphone icon image will be activated.
For effect pattern "PTN41," in the second battle, the probability of a gold microphone icon image being displayed is 20%, and the probability of a regular microphone icon image being displayed is 80%. In the third battle, if a gold microphone icon image is on standby, the probability of a gold microphone icon image being displayed is 80%, and the probability of a regular microphone icon image being displayed is 20%.
In the case of effect pattern "PTN42," in the first battle, the probability of a gold microphone icon image being displayed is 20%, and the probability of a regular microphone icon image being displayed is 80%. In the third battle, if there is a waiting gold microphone icon image, the probability of a gold microphone icon image being displayed is 80%, and the probability of a regular microphone icon image being displayed is 20%.
For effect pattern "PTN43," in the first battle, the probability of a gold microphone icon image being displayed is 20%, and the probability of a regular microphone icon image being displayed is 80%. In the second battle, if there is a waiting gold microphone icon image, the probability of a gold microphone icon image being displayed is 80%, and the probability of a regular microphone icon image being displayed is 20%.
In the case of effect pattern "PTN44," in the first battle, the probability that a gold microphone icon image will be activated is 20%, and the probability that a regular microphone icon image will be activated is 80%. In the second battle, if a regular microphone icon image is on standby, the probability that a gold microphone icon image will be activated is 20%, and the probability that a regular microphone icon image will be activated is 80%. In the third battle, the remaining microphone icon image will be activated.
In the case of effect pattern "PTN45," in the first battle, the probability that a gold microphone icon image will be activated is 20%, and the probability that a regular microphone icon image will be activated is 80%. In the second battle, if a regular microphone icon image is on standby, the probability that a gold microphone icon image will be activated is 80%, and the probability that a regular microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. In the fourth battle, the remaining microphone icon image will be activated.
In the case of effect pattern "PTN46," in the first battle, the probability that a gold microphone icon image will be activated is 80%, and the probability that a regular microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. In the third battle, if a regular microphone icon image is on standby, the probability that a gold microphone icon image will be activated is 50%, and the probability that a regular microphone icon image will be activated is 50%. In the fourth battle, the remaining microphone icon image will be activated.
In the case of effect pattern "PTN47," in the second battle, the probability that a gold microphone icon image will be activated is 80%, and the probability that a regular microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. In the third battle, if a regular microphone icon image is on standby, the probability that a gold microphone icon image will be activated is 80%, and the probability that a regular microphone icon image will be activated is 20%. In the fourth battle, the remaining microphone icon image will be activated.

As shown in FIG. 306(e), if the number of microphone icon images acquired is "4", the microphone icon image (either the gold microphone icon image or the normal microphone icon image, or both) will be activated a maximum of four times.
The acquisition ratio of the microphone icon image is as shown in Figure 305 (d).
If four golden microphone icon images or four regular microphone icon images are acquired, the microphone icon images will be activated at the timing shown in each performance pattern in Figure 306 (e).

If three gold microphone icon images and one regular microphone icon image are obtained, if two gold microphone icon images and two regular microphone icon images are obtained, or if one gold microphone icon image and three regular microphone icon images are obtained, the order of activation will be determined as follows:
In the "PTN48" pattern, after losing all four battles, the microphone icon image is activated and the player is revived. In other words, the four microphone icon images acquired are activated in all four battles. The activation order is as follows: all the regular microphone icon images (1-3) are activated, and then the gold microphone icon image (3-1) is activated.

In addition, in battles after the golden microphone icon image is activated, the probability of the golden microphone icon image being activated is set to make it easier to win the battle compared to battles after the normal microphone icon image is activated.
The microphone icon image that is enlarged upon activation may be displayed as being held by the female singer character until she loses the battle, allowing the player to recognize the color of the microphone icon image that was most recently activated.

If there is no standby microphone icon image and you lose the battle with the evil princess or the small fry princess, the display of the decorative symbols will end in a manner indicating a loss, but after displaying that you have lost the battle, the female singer character may take out a microphone hidden in her costume, displaying that you have turned the tide and won the battle, and the next battle may begin. If this is the fourth battle, if such a display is made, the decorative symbols will stop and be displayed in a manner indicating a big win.
According to this aspect, even if there is no standby microphone icon image and the player loses the battle with the evil princess or the small fry princess, the player can expect to win the jackpot.

In this way, if you win four battles, you will win the jackpot. The more microphone icon images you have (or the number of waiting images) at the start of the special reach effect, the higher the chance of winning the jackpot, so players can enjoy the effect display while hoping to win as many microphone icon images as possible.

The timing for activating the waiting suggestion images may be in the order in which they are acquired. Alternatively, the suggestion images may be activated in order of the highest expected value indicated by the suggestion images, or in order of the lowest expected value indicated by the suggestion images.

Although the effect patterns in which a normal microphone icon image and a gold microphone icon image are displayed as microphone icon images have been shown, other types of microphone icon images may also be displayed.
For example, it may be possible to acquire one to four suggestive images labeled "Special Moves," and when these suggestive images are activated, the player is guaranteed to win the battle against the Evil Princess or the Minor Princess. It is preferable to limit the number of times the player can win a battle to one. If the player acquires four suggestive images, the player is guaranteed to win all four battles, which means that a jackpot will definitely occur.

It may also be possible to acquire suggestive images containing words such as "jackpot," "V," or "national tour." When the suggestive images "jackpot" or "V" are displayed, a jackpot will definitely occur without losing the battle. Also, when the suggestive image "national tour" is displayed, a jackpot will occur without losing the battle, and after the jackpot, a transition to a high probability time-saving state may occur.

The timing at which the obtained suggestive image is activated may be different.
For example, when one microphone icon image is acquired, there may be a battle in which the microphone icon image is activated in the first battle but not in the second to fourth battles, a battle in which the microphone icon image is activated in the second battle but not in the third to fourth battles, and a battle in which the microphone icon image is activated in the fourth battle.
In this case, if the microphone icon image is displayed up to the fourth battle, the player will hope that the microphone icon image will be activated in the final battle, resulting in a big win.

In addition, when one promotion suggestion image has been acquired, the promotion suggestion image may be activated when the reach title is displayed, promoting the reach title (white becomes red or gold), or it may not be activated when the reach title is displayed, but may be activated when a cut-in image is displayed, promoting the cut-in image (green becomes red or gold).
In this case, the effect may be set so that the later the effect is activated, the higher the chance of a big win.

For example, the suggestive image may move slightly from the left side of the display area to the center and then return to the left side.
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation as to when the suggestive image will be activated.
Furthermore, if the expectation of a big win is made higher when the bonus is activated later, the player will hope that the bonus will be activated as late as possible.

The timing at which the suggestive image is activated may be made recognizable to the player.
For example, it may be indicated that it will be activated when the decorative pattern starts to change, when a special reach effect starts, when a battle ends, or when the final battle (fourth battle) ends.
Specifically, it is a good idea to display text such as "Activates when the fluctuation begins" or "Activates when the reach effect begins!" to the right of the suggestive image to indicate the timing.

Alternatively, the player may be informed that the effect will be activated before a certain timing, or that the effect will be activated after a certain timing.
For example, it may indicate that it will be activated before the timing at which the decorative pattern starts to change, the timing at which a special reach effect starts, the timing at which a battle ends, or the timing at which the final battle (fourth battle) ends.
Alternatively, it may indicate that it will be activated after the timing at which the decorative pattern starts to change, the timing at which a special reach effect starts, the timing at which a battle ends, or the timing at which the final battle (fourth battle) ends.
Specifically, it is a good idea to display text such as "Activate before the fluctuation starts,""Activate after the fluctuation starts,""Activate before the reach effect starts!" or "Activate after the reach effect starts!" to the right of the suggestive image to indicate the timing.

300 and 302, examples have been shown in which multiple suggestion images of the same or different types can be acquired, but the timing at which these are activated may be different or the same. Furthermore, the suggestion images may be activated in an order based on a predetermined priority for each suggestion image. Alternatively, the suggestion images may be activated in the order in which they are acquired.
For example, between a pending change suggestion image and a button operation suggestion image, the pending change suggestion image may be always activated before the button operation suggestion image. Alternatively, the button operation suggestion image may be always activated before the pending change suggestion image.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 300(d), only the character "?" may be displayed, and after a predetermined time has passed, it may be possible to know which of the suggestive images is being displayed. For example, a timer may be displayed next to the character "?" to count down (for example, displaying from "20" to "0" over 20 seconds), and when "0" is displayed, one of the suggestive images may be displayed.
Alternatively, the words "Hold change? Button?" may be displayed. In this case, a hold change suggestion image or a button operation suggestion image is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed.
In this way, by not knowing which suggestive image will be displayed until a predetermined timing arrives, the player's sense of anticipation can be heightened.

A timer may be displayed next to the character "?" to count down, and when "0" is displayed, a normal microphone icon image may be displayed.
Alternatively, after the normal microphone icon image is displayed, the timer may be displayed again, and when the timer reaches "0," the normal microphone icon image may change to a gold microphone icon image. Note that the probability that the normal microphone icon image changes to a gold microphone icon image may be 100%, or may be a predetermined probability less than that (for example, 50%).

The decorative symbols may be displayed in a manner that indicates a missed chance, and then the background image is restored to the normal image, after which the decorative symbols may be displayed in a manner that indicates a big win. This type of display mode can initially disappoint the player, and then display a message indicating that a big win has occurred, which can make the player feel very excited.
In this way, if the result of the special lottery is a big win, the suggestive image is not acquired, and it is preferable that the suggestive image can be acquired only if the result of the special lottery is a loss.

In addition, when the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in a reach miss mode, after a specified teasing effect is displayed, the decorative symbols may be displayed in a jackpot mode without acquiring a suggestive image, or the decorative symbols may be displayed in a miss mode, although a suggestive image can be acquired. In this case, the player will recognize that either a jackpot or the acquisition of a suggestive image will occur at the time the specified teasing effect is displayed.

In this way, by displaying a visual effect based on foresight at the time when a highly anticipated variable display result is displayed in a manner indicating a miss, the disappointed player's feelings can be quickly shifted to the next or subsequent variable display.

The "History Display Step-Up Effect," a special effect in an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 123 to 272, etc., will be explained below with reference to Figures 273 to 275, 307 to 315, etc. Note that Figures 307 to 312 are tables showing the effect patterns of the "History Display Step-Up Effect" in this embodiment. Also, Figure 313 is a time chart showing the effect modes of the "History Display Step-Up Effect." Also, Figure 314 is a diagram showing the display content in the display area.

The effect patterns "PTN-1-001" to "PTN-1-004" shown in FIG. 307 indicate effect patterns in which only the first step-up image is displayed.
As shown in the figure, step-up images A to D are displayed in effect patterns "PTN-1-001" to "PTN-1-004", respectively.

The effect patterns "PTN-2-001" to "PTN-2-016" shown in FIG. 307 indicate effect patterns in which a step-up image of the first stage is displayed, and then a step-up image of the second stage is displayed.
For example, the effect pattern "PTN-2-002" is an effect pattern in which a step-up image A is displayed, and then a step-up image B is displayed.

The presentation patterns "PTN-3-001" to "PTN-3-064" shown in Figure 308 indicate presentation patterns in which a first-stage step-up image is displayed, followed by a second-stage step-up image, and then a second-stage step-up image is displayed, followed by a third-stage step-up image.
For example, the effect pattern "PTN-3-007" is an effect pattern in which step-up image A is displayed, then step-up image B is displayed, and then step-up image B is displayed, then step-up image C is displayed.

Presentation patterns "PTN-4-001" to "PTN-4-256" shown in Figures 309 to 312 indicate presentation patterns in which a first-stage step-up image is displayed, then a second-stage step-up image is displayed, then a second-stage step-up image is displayed, then a third-stage step-up image is displayed, then a third-stage step-up image is displayed, then a fourth-stage step-up image is displayed.
For example, the presentation pattern "PTN-4-028" is a presentation pattern in which step-up image A is displayed, then step-up image B is displayed, then step-up image B is displayed, then step-up image C is displayed, then step-up image C is displayed, then step-up image D is displayed.

According to the effect patterns shown in Figures 307 to 312, step-up images are displayed from the first stage to a maximum of four stages. In addition, at each stage, one of step-up images A to D is displayed.
Whether or not to execute the "history display step-up effect" and which effect pattern to execute is determined by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the results of a special lottery, etc. The "history display step-up effect" is executed based on the control of the peripheral control board 1510.

Note that the effect patterns "PTN-1-001" to "PTN-1-004" may be collectively referred to as effect pattern "PTN-1."
Similarly, the effect patterns "PTN-2-001" to "PTN-2-016" may be collectively referred to as effect pattern "PTN-2."
Similarly, effect patterns "PTN-3-001" to "PTN-3-064" may be collectively referred to as effect pattern "PTN-3."
Similarly, effect patterns "PTN-4-001" to "PTN-4-256" may be collectively referred to as effect pattern "PTN-4."

Fig. 313 is a time chart showing the effect of the "history display step-up effect". Fig. 313(a) shows, for comparison, the effect when the "history display step-up effect" is not performed.
Figures 313(b) to 313(g) show the presentation mode when the "history display step-up presentation" is performed.
First, an example of the effect when effect pattern "PTN-4-028" is executed will be explained with reference to Figures 313(b), 314, and 315.

First, the display of the decorative symbols begins to change at time t0, and one second later at time t1, the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol changes at high speed. Figure 314(a) shows the display state at this time.

Next, at timing t1, the "history display step-up effect" starts, and the step-up effect display window is displayed. During the period up to timing t2, the step-up image is not yet displayed, and only the step-up effect display window is displayed. Figure 314 (b) shows the display state while the "history display step-up effect" is being executed. A step-up image is displayed within the rectangular step-up effect display window shown in the center (the specific display mode within the window is omitted in the figure). In this embodiment, the step-up effect display window and the step-up image are the same size.
The figures shown in Figures 314(d) to 315(f) show the display modes of the step-up effect display window. The display modes of the step-up effect display window will be described below with reference to Figures 314(d) to 315(f).

314(d) shows the state before the step-up image is displayed. At the bottom of the step-up effect display window, there is provided a history display area that shows the order in which the step-up images were displayed.
The history display area consists of four display areas arranged horizontally, and the first step-up image is reduced and displayed in the leftmost display area. Similarly, the second to fourth step-up images are reduced and displayed in order from left to right.

Next, from timing t2 to timing t4, a first step-up image is displayed.
Fig. 314(e) shows a state in which step-up image A is displayed as the first step-up image, and Fig. 314(f) shows a state in which the displayed step-up image A is reduced and displayed in the leftmost display area.

As shown in Figures 314(d) to 314(f), before the step-up image is displayed, a question mark is displayed in the history display area. After the step-up image is displayed, a reduced version of the step-up image is displayed in the history display area.
The display priority of the step-up effect display window is higher than the display priority of the decorative symbols, and the step-up effect display window is displayed in front of the decorative symbols.
Furthermore, the display priority of the step-up image is higher than the display priority of the step-up effect display window, and the step-up image is displayed in front of the step-up effect display window.
Furthermore, the display priority of the image (reduced step-up image) displayed in the history display area is higher than the display priority of the step-up image, and the image displayed in the history display area is displayed in front of the step-up image.
The size of the step-up image may be one size smaller than the step-up effect display window.

Next, the second step-up image is displayed from timing t4 to timing t6. Figure 315(a) shows the state in which step-up image B is displayed in the step-up effect display window as the second step-up image. Figure 315(b) shows the state in which the displayed step-up image B is reduced and displayed in the second display area from the left.

Next, from timing t6 to timing t8, a third-stage step-up image is displayed. Figure 315(c) shows the state in which step-up image C is displayed in the step-up effect display window as the third-stage step-up image. Figure 315(d) shows the state in which the displayed step-up image C is reduced and displayed in the third display area from the left.

Next, from timing t8 to timing t10, the fourth step-up image is displayed. Figure 315(e) shows the state in which step-up image D is displayed in the step-up effect display window as the fourth step-up image. Figure 315(f) shows the state in which the displayed step-up image D is reduced and displayed in the fourth display area from the left.

At timing t10, the display of the step-up image ends. Figure 314 (c) shows the display state after the history display step-up effect has ended.

As shown in Figures 314(d) to 315(f), a star-shaped mark is added to the top right of the letter A in step-up image A. Furthermore, the letter "protect" is added to the top right of the letter B in step-up image B. Furthermore, the letter "control" is added to the top right of the letter C in step-up image C. Note that no mark or letter is added to the top right of the letter D in step-up image D.
When each step-up image is reduced and displayed in the history display area, these marks and characters are also reduced and displayed, but they may also be displayed without these marks and characters.

As shown in Figures 314(d) to 315(f), step-up images A to D have different background portions. Step-up image A has a background portion including two horizontal lines. Step-up image B has a background portion including two diagonal lines sloping downward to the left. Step-up image C has a background portion including two diagonal lines sloping downward to the right. Step-up image D has a background portion including four diagonal lines. This configuration makes it easier to recognize the type of step-up image.
When the step-up image is displayed in a reduced size in the history display area, the lines in the background are also displayed in a reduced size, but the lines may be omitted or displayed in a simplified manner. For example, only one of the letters "A" to "D" may be displayed in the history display area.
Instead of lines, the background of each step-up image may be formed by colors, patterns, etc. In this case, when displayed in the history display area, the colors and patterns may be displayed as they are, but in a reduced size, or the colors and patterns may be omitted or displayed in a simplified manner.

When the same step-up image is displayed consecutively, as in effect pattern "PTN-3-022"("B","B","B") or effect pattern "PTN-4-001"("A","A","A","A"), there is a risk that the player will not be able to recognize that a new step-up image has been displayed. However, in this embodiment, there is a period during which no large step-up image is displayed within the step-up effect display window (resulting in the display state shown in Figures 314(f), 315(b), 315(d), and 315(f)), thereby preventing the player from being unable to recognize that a new step-up image has been displayed.
The length of the period during which the large step-up image is not displayed in the step-up effect display window may be shorter than the period during which the large step-up image is displayed, and may be, for example, about 0.2 to 0.4 seconds.

The history display area is smaller than the step-up effect display window, so if a step-up image were simply reduced in size and displayed in the history display area, it may be difficult for the player to recognize what was displayed as the step-up image. However, when a step-up image is reduced in size and displayed in the history display area, part of the step-up image is omitted or simplified to display something similar to the original step-up image, making it easier for the player to recognize which step-up image was displayed.

In this embodiment, when the effect pattern "PTN-3" or the effect pattern "PTN-4" is executed, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern always temporarily stop at decorative patterns of the same number, resulting in a reach state.
When the effect pattern "PTN-1" or the effect pattern "PTN-2" is executed, the ready state is not reached, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a miss.
Alternatively, it may be possible to make it so that a reach state occurs even when the presentation pattern "PTN-1" or the presentation pattern "PTN-2" is executed, although this is a lower probability compared to when the presentation pattern "PTN-3" or the presentation pattern "PTN-4" is executed.
For example, it is advisable to make the probability of reaching a reach state (i.e., the probability of ultimately hitting a jackpot) increase in the order of presentation pattern "PTN-1," presentation pattern "PTN-2," presentation pattern "PTN-3," and presentation pattern "PTN-4."
With this configuration, the player will be very interested in how many levels of step-up images will be displayed.

In this embodiment, each of the presentation patterns shown with reference to Figures 307 to 312 is configured to suggest or notify the occurrence of some kind of event related to the game.

When a plurality of step-up images A (in the range of 2 to 4) are displayed, the greater the number of step-up images A displayed, the higher the expectation.
Specifically, the degree of expectation is higher when three step-up images A are displayed than when two step-up images A are displayed, and the degree of expectation is higher when four step-up images A are displayed than when three step-up images A are displayed.
For example, the expectation rate may be set to 10% when two step-up images A are displayed, 20% when three are displayed, and 60% when four are displayed.
FIG. 313(c) shows an example of the effect when the effect pattern "PTN-2-001" is executed and two step-up images A are displayed.

In addition, when multiple step-up images B (in the range of 2 to 4) are displayed, after the "history display step-up effect" ends, a pending image change effect is executed in which the pending image changes at a predetermined timing. Note that the more step-up images B are displayed, the more likely the pending image will change to one with a higher expectation.
Specifically, when two step-up images B are displayed, the reserved image changes to green at a predetermined timing. Figure 313(d) shows an example of a performance when the performance pattern "PTN-3-006" is executed and two step-up images B are displayed.
Furthermore, when three step-up images B are displayed, the reserved image changes to a red state at a predetermined timing. Figure 313(e) shows an example of an effect when effect pattern "PTN-3-022" is executed and two step-up images B are displayed. Furthermore, when four step-up images B are displayed (effect pattern "PTN-4-086"), the reserved image changes to a gold state at a predetermined timing.
The expected probability of the reserved image is highest for white, followed by green, red, and gold.

When two step-up images B are displayed, the reserved image may change to either green, red, or gold. Furthermore, when three step-up images B are displayed, the reserved image may change to either red or gold. This makes it possible to create a sense of anticipation in the player that a highly anticipated reserved image change effect will be executed even when only a small number of step-up images B are displayed.

Furthermore, if multiple step-up images C (in the range of 2 to 4) are displayed, a button operation effect is executed at a predetermined timing after the "history display step-up effect" ends. Note that the more step-up images C are displayed, the more likely the operation effect will be executed.
Specifically, when two step-up images C are displayed, button operation becomes effective at a predetermined timing, and a light source provided in the button emits white light, resulting in an operation effect in which the button appears to be emitting white light. Figure 313(f) shows an example of an effect when effect pattern "PTN-3-041" is executed and two step-up images C are displayed.
Furthermore, when three step-up images C are displayed, button operation becomes effective at a predetermined timing, and a light source provided in the button emits red light, so that an operation effect is executed in which the button is visually recognized as emitting red light.
Furthermore, when four step-up images C are displayed (when the effect pattern "PTN-4-171" is executed), an operation effect is executed in which the lever operation becomes effective at a predetermined timing.
In addition, the expectation level is higher when an operation effect is performed than when no operation effect is performed. Also, the expectation level for the operation effect is highest for button operation (white light emission), followed by button operation (red light emission), and lever operation.

When two step-up images C are displayed, one of the following operation effects may be executed: a button operation (white light emission), a button operation (red light emission), or a lever operation. Also, when three step-up images C are displayed, one of the following operation effects may be executed: a button operation (red light emission) or a lever operation. By doing this, the player can have a sense of anticipation that a highly anticipated operation effect will be executed even when only a small number of step-up images C are displayed.
In addition, in the button operations in the operation presentation, operation acceptance is enabled for the mission button 3700, the attack button 3710, etc. In addition, in the lever operations, operation acceptance is enabled for the left lever 3720, the right lever 3730, etc. In addition, as various aspects related to operation acceptance, various aspects in other embodiments can be adopted.

Regarding step-up images D, regardless of the number displayed, they do not have the function of executing effects that suggest or notify any events.

In the embodiment shown, when effect pattern "PTN-2" is executed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a miss, rather than entering a reach state. However, when the step-up image displays "A" "A" (effect pattern "PTN-2-001"), "B" "B" (effect pattern "PTN-2-006"), or "C" "C" (effect pattern "PTN-2-011"), it is desirable to at least enter a reach state and, in some cases, result in a jackpot. This prevents a miss from always occurring despite the execution of an effect, and keeps the player hopeful of a jackpot.

An example has been given in which the degree of expectation is indicated by a predetermined presentation mode based on the number of step-up images, but the predetermined presentation mode may also be executed based on the step-up images being displayed in a predetermined order.
Specifically, when step-up images are displayed in a special order (displayed in the order of "A", "B", "C", "D" or "D", "C", "B", "A"), such as in effect pattern "PTN-4-028" or effect pattern "PTN-4-217", after the "history display step-up effect" ends, a special reach effect, "Year-end singing battle reach effect" or "The countdown reach effect", is executed at a predetermined timing.

As described above, when the effect pattern "PTN-3" or the effect pattern "PTN-4" is executed, the decorative symbols always enter a reach state.
Here, by checking the step-up images displayed in the history display area, if the step-up images are displayed as "A,""B,""C," or "D," the player can recognize that a special reach will occur. Similarly, the number of step-up images A allows the player to recognize the likelihood of a jackpot occurring. Similarly, the number of step-up images B allows the player to recognize what type of hold change effect will occur. Similarly, the number of step-up images C allows the player to recognize what type of operation effect will occur.

On the other hand, even if the "History Display Step-Up Effect" is executed, if the history of the displayed step-up images does not meet the above-mentioned conditions, such as "D", "B", "D", or "C" (effect pattern "PTN-4-223"), there is no indication that the expectation level, the hold change effect, or the operation effect will be executed.

When step-up images are displayed as "B," "B," "C," and "C" (effect pattern "PTN-4-091"), the player is informed that the decorative symbols are in a reach state, and that both the hold change effect and the operation effect will occur. Figure 313(g) shows an example effect when effect pattern "PTN-4-091" is executed and two step-up images B and two step-up images C are displayed.

According to such an embodiment, in addition to being able to see up to what stage the history display step-up effect has been displayed, the player can also recognize the degree of expectation and what kind of effect will occur by referring to the history of the displayed step-up images.
The player visually recognizes the presentation by paying attention to both how many stages the history display step-up presentation will continue and how the history display step-up presentation is continuing, and thus feels a new interest.

After the "history display step-up effect" ends, the hold change effect or operation effect may be executed immediately (for example, after one second).
Also, a special reach effect may be started immediately (for example, one second) after the "history display step-up effect" ends.

The occurrence of the hold change effect, the operation effect, or the special reach effect may be displayed in the display area until the effect is executed. For example, the display method in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 295 etc. may be adopted.
For example, the hold change effect may be displayed in text such as "hold (green),""hold(red)," or "hold (gold)." Alternatively, a circular green (or red or gold) image may be displayed as an icon to indicate the color the hold will change to.
The operation effects may be displayed in text such as "button (white),""button(red)," or "lever." Alternatively, a white (or red) image resembling a button or an image resembling a lever may be displayed as an icon to indicate the type of operation effect that will be performed.
In addition, for special reach effects, the name of the reach effect may be displayed in text, such as "Year-end singing contest" or "The countdown."
The degree of expectation may also be displayed as a numerical value or the like.

For example, when the effect pattern "PTN-4-086"("B","B","B","B") is executed, some kind of jackpot may be guaranteed to occur.
In addition, when the presentation pattern "PTN-4-001"("A","A","A","A") is executed, a high probability time-saving jackpot (a jackpot that results in a high probability time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends) may be set to occur without fail.
In this way, some kind of jackpot or high-probability time-saving jackpot may occur based on the combination of step-up images displayed up to the fourth stage.

In addition, among the presentation patterns that are displayed only up to the second or third stage, a presentation pattern that results in some kind of jackpot or a high probability time-saving jackpot may be provided.
For example, when the effect pattern "PTN-3-020"("B","A","D") is executed, some kind of big win may always occur.
In addition, when the presentation pattern "PTN-2-014"("D" or "B") is executed, a high probability time-saving jackpot (a jackpot that results in a high probability time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends) may be set to occur without fail.

Although four types of step-up images, step-up image A to step-up image D, have been shown, other types of step-up images may also be displayed.
In addition, an example has been given in which, when the history of displayed step-up images forms a specific combination, the expectation level is indicated or a specified effect (the relevant hold change effect or operation effect) is executed, but it may also be possible to indicate that a specified expectation level or a specified effect will be executed in response to a special step-up image being displayed once.
For example, a step-up image of "Hold" may be displayed at any one of the first to fourth stages to indicate that the hold change effect will be executed.
In addition, a step-up image of "Operation" may be displayed at any one of the first to fourth stages to indicate that an operation presentation is being performed.
In addition, a step-up image such as "V" or "Win" may be displayed at any of the first to fourth stages to indicate that some kind of big win will occur.
In addition, a step-up image saying "sure" may be displayed at any of the first to fourth stages to indicate that a high probability time-saving jackpot will occur.

With reference to FIG. 314, an example of the "history display step-up effect" is shown, but it is also possible to have a display that makes it appear as if the "history display step-up effect" is about to start, but the "history display step-up effect" does not actually start. For example, it is also possible to have a case where first only a translucent step-up effect display window is displayed, and then the step-up effect display window is displayed in an opaque state, resulting in the display state shown in FIG. 314(d), and the "history display step-up effect" starts, or a case where only a translucent step-up effect display window is displayed, and then the display of the translucent step-up effect display window ends, and the "history display step-up effect" does not start. It is preferable to have such a display from timing t1 to timing t2.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation as to whether or not the "history display step-up effect" will begin.

In the "History Display Step-Up Effect," an embodiment has been shown in which the step-up image is displayed between one and four times, but the step-up image may also be displayed between one and three times, or between one and five or more times, a predetermined number of times.

In the "history display step-up effect," if the player does not notice that the step-up image is displayed in a predetermined combination, the player's interest may be diminished. Therefore, an effect display may be provided to notify the player that a predetermined combination has been displayed.
316(a) to 316(d) show examples of the display in the step-up effect display window from the first stage to the fourth stage when the effect pattern "PTN-4-091" is executed. In FIG. 316(b), two step-up images B are displayed in a reduced size and surrounded by a frame. Similarly, in FIG. 316(d), two step-up images C are displayed in a reduced size and surrounded by a frame.
By displaying the information in this manner, it becomes easier for the player to notice that a predetermined combination has been achieved.

In addition, as when effect pattern "PTN-4-103" is executed, multiple step-up images may be displayed, such as "B," "C," "B," and "C," but they may not be displayed consecutively. In such cases, instead of enclosing the reduced step-up image in a frame, the reduced step-up image may be moved in a predetermined manner. For example, step-up image B may be displayed by vibrating up and down when two are displayed, and step-up image C may be displayed by vibrating left and right when two are displayed. Figure 316(e) shows an example of such a display when effect pattern "PTN-4-103" is executed up to the fourth stage. Note that the arrows in the figure are a schematic representation of the vibrating and moving pattern (direction of movement) and do not indicate that an arrow image will actually be displayed.

The frame may be displayed in a different manner depending on the number of step-up images that are complete. For example, when three step-up images B are displayed, such as when the effect pattern "PTN-4-087"("B,""B,""B,""C") is executed, the frame may be thickened. FIG. 316(f) shows an example of such a display when the effect pattern "PTN-4-087" is executed up to the fourth stage. It is also preferable to further thicken the frame when four step-up images B are displayed. By adopting such an embodiment, the frame becomes gradually thicker as the number of displayed step-up images B increases, thereby more effectively appealing to the player that a predetermined combination has been achieved.
While the example of changing the display mode of the frame has been given, it is also possible to vibrate the reduced step-up images in different modes. For example, the more step-up images displayed, the larger the amplitude or the smaller the period of the vibrating step-up images. When these amplitudes or periods are changed, it is desirable to make them different enough that the player can recognize the difference.

By implementing this type of implementation, the player can recognize that the step-up image is displayed in a predetermined combination. It also makes it easier for the player to notice when a highly anticipated combination occurs.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 313 to 314, etc., while the "History Display Step-Up Presentation" is being executed, the player simply watches the presentation displayed in the display area and is unable to actively participate in the presentation.
The following describes a modified embodiment in which the player can participate in the "history display step-up effect" by operating a button. Note that the button required to operate is the attack button 3710.

The condition for the "history display step-up presentation" to proceed to the next stage may be that the player operates a button, and if the player does not operate a button, the "history display step-up presentation" may not proceed to the next stage.
For example, a step-up effect display window and an image instructing a button operation may be displayed first, and the "history display step-up effect" may be started on the condition that the button operation is performed. FIG. 317(a) shows a state in which the step-up effect display window and an image instructing a button operation are displayed. Specifically, it shows a state in which an image of the attack button 3710 is displayed with the character "press" indicating the operation mode added in the center of the simulated image. Note that a "?" is displayed in each history display area.
On the other hand, if no operation is performed on the button for a predetermined time, the step-up image is not displayed, the display of the step-up performance display window and images instructing button operation is terminated, and the display mode shown in Figure 314 (c) is displayed.
It should be noted that the configuration of the buttons operated by the player (such as the type of button and the display mode) may be the same as that in other embodiments.

In the example shown with reference to Figure 313(b), the step-up image for each stage was displayed for two seconds, but a predetermined time (for example, two seconds) may be added to the period during which button operation is valid, so that the display time for a step-up image for a certain stage is four seconds in total. For example, if a button operation is performed one second into the valid operation period, the step-up image may be displayed for the remaining three seconds.

Furthermore, the display of the first step-up image is performed automatically, but if a button is operated at that timing, the display of the second and subsequent step-up images may be performed automatically. Fig. 317(b) shows a state in which step-up image B is displayed as the first step-up image, and then an image instructing a button operation is displayed.
On the other hand, if no operation is performed on the button for a predetermined time, the step-up image from the second stage onwards will not be displayed, and the display of the step-up performance display window and images instructing button operation will be terminated, and the display will transition to the mode shown in Figure 314 (c).
According to such an embodiment, after recognizing the step-up image displayed initially, the player can select whether or not to display the next step-up image, and the player can decide for himself or herself whether or not to proceed with the presentation, which will suit the player's preferences.

Furthermore, the display of step-up images up to the second stage is performed automatically, but when the second stage step-up image is displayed, an image instructing a button operation is displayed, and if the button operation is performed at this time, step-up images from the third stage onwards may be displayed. Figure 317(c) shows a display mode in which the image instructing a button operation is displayed at this time.
Similarly, the step-up images up to the third step are displayed automatically, but when the third step-up image is displayed, an image instructing a button operation is displayed, and if the button operation is performed at this time, the fourth step-up image may be displayed. Figure 317(d) shows a display mode in which the image instructing a button operation is displayed.
In addition, if no operation is performed on the button for a specified period of time, the step-up image is not displayed, and the display of the step-up performance display window and images instructing button operation is terminated, and the display mode shown in Figure 314 (c) is displayed.
According to such an embodiment, as the stages progress and multiple step-up images are displayed, the player can operate the next step-up image himself, increasing the expectation that a predetermined combination will be achieved, thereby increasing the player's interest.

The button operation may be required at all of the above timings, or the button operation may be required at multiple timings within the above timings, with no button operation required at some timings.
According to such an embodiment, the number of times the button is operated increases, which can satisfy players who are highly motivated to play.

If an operation is requested but not performed, a step-up image may be displayed in the same way as if an operation had been performed. By displaying a step-up image even when no operation has been performed, the player can be made to see the effects even if the player has lost interest in operating the game or is operating a smartphone and is unable to perform button operations.
On the other hand, if no operation is performed, the step-up image at that stage is not displayed, the display in the history display area remains as "?", and the next step-up image (or a display instructing a button operation) may be displayed. Instead of displaying the "?", the words "No operation!" may be displayed in the history display area. By not displaying the step-up image when no operation is performed in this way, it is possible to encourage the player to participate in button operation.

The button operation mode may not be limited to a simple single press, but may require the player to perform other operation modes.
For example, the next step-up image may be displayed when the button is pressed repeatedly (e.g., pressed 10 times or more within 2 seconds), or when the button is pressed continuously for a predetermined time (e.g., 1 second) or more.
In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 317(a) to 317(d), the word "press" indicating the operation mode is displayed in the center of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710, but the words "rapid press" or "long press" may be displayed instead of "press" to indicate the operation mode to the player. Figures 317(e) and 317(f) show the display states in which the words "rapid press" and "long press" are displayed, respectively.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 317(a) etc., operation of the attack button 3710 is required, but operation of other operating means may also be required, not just the attack button 3710. Other operating means that can be used include the mission button 3700, defense button 3740, left lever 3720, right lever 3730, etc.

As an example of an operation means that requires operation, an embodiment has been shown in which operation of only one type of operation means (attack button 3710) is required, but it is also possible to select one of multiple operation means with a predetermined probability and request operation for that operation means.
For example, in one "history display step-up effect," operation of the attack button 3710 may be required at each stage, and in another "history display step-up effect," operation of the mission button 3700 may be required at each stage.
Alternatively, in a certain "history display step-up effect," operation of the attack button 3710 may be required at one stage, and operation of the mission button 3700 may be required at another stage.
In this way, instead of being required to operate a predetermined button every time, by making it possible to request the operation of a different button in some cases, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming boring.

An example has been given in which if the player does not operate a button, the subsequent step-up image is not displayed, but if a predetermined time (the valid time for each button operation assigned as a step-up effect) has passed without the player operating a button, the step-up image may be displayed according to a predetermined effect pattern.
According to this embodiment, a player who wants to operate a button can do so, and a player who does not want to operate a button need not do so, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

If the decision as to whether or not to display a step-up image when a button is operated is made by lottery, it may be possible to have the step-up image not be displayed if no operation is performed by the player.

It is also possible to allow the player to select which of these presentation modes to select. For example, during a demo display, it may be possible to customize whether or not a button operation is required in the "history display step-up presentation," and if so, in what mode the button operation is required.
The customization content may be such that only one of these modes selected by the player is executed in the "History Display Step-Up Presentation," or multiple modes selected by the player from these modes may each be executed with a predetermined probability in the "History Display Step-Up Presentation."

In the embodiment shown, the "history display step-up effect" is initiated or the next step-up image is displayed in response to a button operation, but the "history display step-up effect" may be initiated or the next step-up image is displayed when a game ball enters or passes through a predetermined winning hole (general winning hole 2001, first starting hole 2002, gate section 2003, second starting hole 2004, etc.) in the game area instead of a button operation.

In the above-described embodiment, an example was shown in which a step-up image was displayed under the conditions of a predetermined time elapsed (two seconds), a button operation, or a game ball entering or passing through a predetermined winning slot. However, a "history display step-up effect" that combines these conditions may also be executed. For example, a "history display step-up effect" may be executed by applying a predetermined one of these conditions to each of the display of the first-stage step-up image, the second-stage step-up image, the third-stage step-up image, and the fourth-stage step-up image.

For example, the display of the first step-up image may be switched to the display of the second step-up image upon button operation, the display of the second step-up image may be switched to the display of the third step-up image upon the game ball entering or passing through a specified winning slot, and the display of the third step-up image may be switched to the display of the fourth step-up image upon the passage of a specified amount of time.

Alternatively, the display of the first-stage step-up image may be switched to the display of the second-stage step-up image when a gaming ball enters or passes through a predetermined winning slot, the display of the second-stage step-up image may be switched to the display of the third-stage step-up image when a predetermined time has passed, and the display of the third-stage step-up image may be switched to the display of the fourth-stage step-up image when a predetermined time has passed.

Two examples have been given, but the present invention is not limited to these examples. Any of the conditions described above may be used as the condition for displaying the step-up image at each stage, and a "history display step-up effect" may be executed that combines the conditions appropriately adopted at each stage. As mentioned above, the player may be able to customize the conditions at each stage.

In this embodiment, there may be cases where button operation is not required, cases where button operation is required, and cases where the game ball is required to be constantly released. By providing cases where button operation is not required and cases where button operation is required, it is possible to vary the pace of the game. Furthermore, by requiring the game ball to be released, it is possible to increase the operating rate of the game machine and improve sales at the game parlor.

Although the embodiment has been shown in which the next step-up image is displayed after a predetermined time (2 seconds) has elapsed, the predetermined time may be different depending on the display stage of the step-up image.
For example, the "history display step-up effect" may be ended by displaying a first-stage step-up image for one second, then a second-stage step-up image, then a second-stage step-up image for two seconds, then a third-stage step-up image, then a third-stage step-up image for three seconds, then a fourth-stage step-up image, and finally a fourth-stage step-up image for four seconds.
Alternatively, the "history display step-up effect" may be ended by displaying a first-stage step-up image for two seconds, then a second-stage step-up image, then a second-stage step-up image for two seconds, then a third-stage step-up image, then a third-stage step-up image for three seconds, then a fourth-stage step-up image, and finally a fourth-stage step-up image for three seconds.
In this way, as the "history display step-up effect" progresses to the latter half, the display time of each step-up image is lengthened and the time until the next step-up image is displayed is lengthened, thereby ensuring that the player has sufficient time to wait to see whether or not a predetermined combination will be displayed.

Alternatively, the "history display step-up effect" may be ended by displaying a first-stage step-up image for four seconds, then a second-stage step-up image, then a second-stage step-up image for three seconds, then a third-stage step-up image, then a third-stage step-up image for two seconds, then a fourth-stage step-up image, and finally a fourth-stage step-up image for one second.
Alternatively, the "history display step-up effect" may be ended by displaying a first-stage step-up image for three seconds, then a second-stage step-up image, then a third-stage step-up image for three seconds, then a third-stage step-up image for two seconds, then a fourth-stage step-up image, and finally a fourth-stage step-up image for two seconds.
In this way, as the "history display step-up performance" progresses to the latter half, the display time of each step-up image is shortened and the time until the next step-up image is displayed is shortened, so that a predetermined combination is displayed as if it has been suddenly decided, which can give the player great interest.

314(d) shows an example in which one star-shaped mark is attached to step-up image A, but step-up image A with multiple star-shaped marks may be displayed. Also, the number of star-shaped marks displayed may suggest or notify a predetermined event.
FIG. 318(a) shows a state in which step-up image A with one star mark is displayed as the first step-up image.
FIG. 318(b) shows a state in which step-up image A with two star-shaped marks is displayed as the first step-up image.
FIG. 318(c) shows a state in which step-up image A with three star-shaped marks is displayed as the first step-up image.
FIG. 318(d) shows a state in which step-up image A with four star-shaped marks is displayed as the first step-up image.

The more star-shaped marks there are, the higher the likelihood of a jackpot. By adopting this approach, even if the step-up image combination is such that there is little hope of a jackpot, or if the step-up image is only displayed up to the first or second stage, where there is little hope of a jackpot, the number of star-shaped marks can help maintain the expectation of a jackpot.

Furthermore, after the step-up image starts to be displayed, star-shaped marks may be displayed after a predetermined time (for example, one second) has elapsed. By using this display format, even if the level of expectation indicated by the step-up image display is low, the expectation of a jackpot can be maintained depending on the number of star-shaped marks displayed.

The predetermined lottery process for determining the number of star-shaped marks to be displayed may be performed independently of the predetermined lottery process for determining the effect pattern to be executed ("PTN-1-001" to "PTN-4-0256").
For example, in the case of a jackpot, a lottery may be held in which one star is displayed with a probability of 10%, two stars with a probability of 20%, three stars with a probability of 30%, and four stars with a probability of 40%, and in the case of a loss, a lottery may be held in which one star is displayed with a probability of 40%, two stars with a probability of 30%, three stars with a probability of 20%, and four stars with a probability of 10%.
By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to prevent the number of effect patterns from becoming enormous.

Although step-up image A is shown as an example, the same aspect may be adopted for step-up image B or step-up image C.
For example, step-up image B may be displayed with any number of the kanji characters "保" (protection) added, ranging from 1 to 4. Fig. 318(e) shows a state in which step-up image B with four kanji characters "保" added is displayed as the first step-up image.
Alternatively, a step-up image C may be displayed with any number of the kanji character "操" (play) added, ranging from 1 to 4. Fig. 318(f) shows a state in which a step-up image C with four kanji characters "操" (play) added is displayed as the first step-up image.
In these cases, it is advisable to set the expectation level higher as the number of "保" or "操" characters increases.

The total number of displayed marks or kanji characters may indicate the degree of expectation of the effect to be executed.
For example, when presentation pattern PTN-2-001 is executed and "A" and "A" are displayed, the total number of star-shaped marks displayed will be between 2 and 8, but the more marks displayed, the higher the expectation.
The degree of expectation when two step-up images A are displayed and eight star-shaped marks are displayed may be set lower than the degree of expectation when three step-up images A are displayed and three star-shaped marks are displayed.

Similarly, if "B" "B" or "C" "C" is displayed, the total number of "保" and "操" displayed will be between 2 and 8, but in this case too, the same approach as for "A" "A" may be adopted. For example, the higher the total number of "保" and "操" displayed, the higher the expectation level.

Although the example in which step-up images A to D include the letters "A" to "D" respectively has been shown, other types of images may be used as long as they can be distinguished. For example, instead of these four alphabets, four character images of a female singer character in different costumes or poses may be displayed.
Although an embodiment has been shown in which the degree of expectation is indicated by the total number of star-shaped marks or letters displayed, the same effect can be achieved by instead indicating the degree of expectation by adding letters such as "GOOD" or "EXCELLENT!"

Furthermore, in each step-up image, a predetermined number of straight lines are combined to form the background, but other forms than straight lines may be used. For example, any one of a daytime landscape image representing a daytime landscape, an evening landscape image representing an evening landscape, and a nighttime landscape image representing a nighttime landscape may be displayed. Furthermore, the expectation level may be higher when an evening landscape image is displayed than when a daytime landscape image is displayed. Furthermore, the expectation level may be higher when a night landscape image is displayed than when an evening landscape image is displayed.
These display modes may be combined.

Referring to Figures 307 to 314, etc., we have shown an embodiment in which the displayed step-up image is reduced and displayed in the history display area, but other embodiments that are variations of this embodiment are described below.

In this embodiment, a reduced version of the step-up image is displayed in advance in the history display area. The player is then notified of their expectation level based on whether the step-up image displayed at each stage matches the reduced version displayed in the history display area.

This embodiment will be explained below with reference to Figures 319 and 320. Note that Figures 319 and 320 show the display mode within the step-up effect display window. The effect mode will be explained using the example of when effect pattern "PTN-4-030" ("A", "B", "D", "B") is executed.

First, as the step-up effect display window begins to be displayed, a reduced version of the step-up image is displayed in the history display area. The first history display area displays a reduced version of step-up image A, the second history display area displays a reduced version of step-up image C, the third history display area displays a reduced version of step-up image D, and the fourth history display area displays a reduced version of step-up image B. The background of each history display area is displayed in gray. Figure 319(a) shows the display state at this time.
Next, step-up image A is displayed as the first step-up image. Figure 319(b) shows the display state at this time.
Next, the background of the first history display area is displayed in white, and the word "EXCELLENT!" is displayed near the center of the step-up effect display window. Figure 319(c) shows the display state at this time.

Next, after the display of the characters "EXCELLENT!" has finished (Fig. 319(d)), step-up image B is displayed as the second step-up image. Fig. 319(e) shows the display state at this time.
Next, an image in the shape of the letter "x" is displayed in the entire second history display area, and the words "Not so good..." are displayed near the center of the step-up effect display window. Figure 319(f) shows the display state at this time.

Next, after the display of the text "Not so good..." has finished (Fig. 320(a)), step-up image D is displayed as the third step-up image. Fig. 320(b) shows the display state at this time.
Next, the background of the third history display area is displayed in white, and the word "EXCELLENT!" is displayed near the center of the step-up effect display window. Figure 320(c) shows the display state at this time.

Next, after the display of the characters "EXCELLENT!" has finished (Fig. 320(d)), step-up image B is displayed as the fourth step-up image. Fig. 320(e) shows the display state at this time.
Next, the background of the fourth history display area is displayed in white, and the word "EXCELLENT!" is displayed near the center of the step-up effect display window. Figure 320(f) shows the display state at this time.

In this way, when a step-up image that is the same as a step-up image that was previously displayed in the history display area is displayed (first stage, third stage, fourth stage), the background becomes white.
On the other hand, when a step-up image different from the step-up image previously displayed in the history display area is displayed (second stage), the background remains gray, and an image in the shape of the letter "X" is displayed in front of the step-up image previously displayed in the history display area.
The more times (three times in this example) the same step-up image as the one previously displayed in the history display area is displayed, the higher the expectation level becomes. The player can recognize the expectation level by the number of areas displayed with a white background in the history display area.

Note that if the matching step-up image satisfies various conditions shown with reference to Figures 307 to 314, etc., an effect corresponding to each condition may be executed. For example, if the matching step-up image contains two "C"s, an operation effect may be executed. Note that similarly, for "A" and "B," the expected degree may be displayed in a manner corresponding to the number of matches, or the corresponding hold change effect may be executed.

In the example shown, the background color is different depending on whether the step-up image matches or does not match. However, if there is a match, the color of the frame of the step-up image displayed in a reduced size in the history display area may change from black to red, and if there is no match, it may remain black.

In the example of the effect shown with reference to Figures 319 and 320, the step-up image of the second stage did not match, but if all stages from 1 to 4 match, a special display may be performed. For example, the history display area may be surrounded by a frame, or the word "PERFECT!" may be displayed near the center of the step-up effect display window. Figure 321(a) shows the display mode when such a display is performed.
The number of matches may also be displayed. Figure 321(b) shows a display mode when the text "3 matches!" is displayed.
Also, whether or not there is a match may be displayed by using "○" or "×" in correspondence with each history display area. Figure 321(c) shows the display mode when such a display is made.
Note that these displays are examples of effects that are displayed within the step-up effect display window, but displays such as "PERFECT!" and "Match three!" may also be displayed outside the step-up effect display window, or in a manner that spans both the step-up effect display window and outside the step-up effect display window.

As shown with reference to Figures 319(c), 319(f), 320(c), and 320(f), when displaying the characters indicating whether or not there is a match ("EXCELLENT!" or "Not so good..."), the history display area continues to be displayed as is, but during the period when these characters are displayed, the display of the history display area may be erased, or if they are displayed, they may be displayed in a smaller size.
By adopting such a configuration, the player can more clearly recognize whether or not there is a match.

319 and 320, no operation by the player is required, but a mode in which a step-up image is displayed in response to button operation by the player may be adopted. Note that the above-mentioned modes may be appropriately adopted for the implementation and display modes of various effects related to button operation by the player.
It is preferable to display the next operation instruction at the timing when the display indicating whether or not there is a match is erased. For example, it is preferable to display the operation instruction in the display states shown in Figures 319(a), 319(d), 320(a), and 320(d).
Also, "?" may be displayed as a history display when no operation has been performed. Fig. 321(d) shows an example of a display when no operation has been performed in the third stage display.

Referring to Figures 319 and 320, an embodiment has been shown in which "Not so good..." is displayed when there is no match, and "EXCELLENT!" is displayed when there is a match, but other display modes may also be adopted.
For example, if there is no match, one of "Not so good...", "Excellent!" or "Wonderful" may be displayed, and if there is a match, one of "Excellent!" or "Wonderful" may be displayed.
Specifically, if there is no match, "Not so good..." may be displayed with a 95% probability, "EXCELLENT!" with a 3% probability, and "WONDERFUL" with a 2% probability, and if there is a match, "EXCELLENT!" may be displayed with a 70% probability, and "WONDERFUL" with a 30% probability.
Also, in the case of a miss, the probability of no match may be 80% and the probability of match may be 20%, and in the case of a win, the probability of no match may be 10% and the probability of match may be 90%.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which text is displayed ("EXCELLENT!", "Not so good...") to indicate whether or not the step-up image matches, the time for which the text is displayed may be different depending on whether or not there is a match.
For example, by displaying the matched text ("EXCELLENT!") for a longer period of time, the player can be given a sense of satisfaction.
On the other hand, by displaying the text ("Not quite...") for a longer period of time when the match does not occur, the player can be stimulated and motivated to operate the button again.

Alternatively, the length of time for which the text is displayed may be different depending on whether a specific button operation is performed or not. For example, the display time may be longer when a button operation is performed, allowing the player to view the text displayed by their own action for a longer period of time, which can be used as compensation for performing the operation.

As mentioned above, text may be displayed to indicate whether or not there is a match ("EXCELLENT!", "Not so good...") both when a specified button operation is performed and when the specified button operation is not performed. However, when a specified button operation is performed, the time for which the text is displayed may be longer than the display time (effective period of button operation) of a new operation instruction image that instructs the button operation to be performed after the text display has ended.
On the other hand, if a specified button operation is not performed, the time for which the text is displayed should be shorter than the display time (effective period of button operation) of a new operation instruction image that instructs the button operation to be performed after the text display ends.

When a predetermined button operation is performed, the time for which the text is displayed may be shorter than the time for which a new operation instruction image instructing the button operation to be performed after the text display has ended is displayed.
On the other hand, if a specified button operation is not performed, the time for which the text is displayed should be longer than the time for which a new operation instruction image that instructs the button operation to be performed after the text display has ended is displayed.

As mentioned above, the history display area may be cleared when displaying the text indicating whether or not a match occurred (such as "EXCELLENT!" or "Not so good..."), but the time between when the history display area is resumed and when it is cleared again may also be shortened if certain conditions are met.

For example, when the display of the history display area is resumed, whether or not to shorten the time may be determined by lottery. Alternatively, the time may be shortened when a button is pressed. Alternatively, the time may be shortened when a predetermined number of game balls enter a predetermined winning slot within a predetermined time.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 314 to 320, etc., the "history display step-up effect" was executed immediately after the decorative pattern began to change and entered a state of rapid change, but the "history display step-up effect" may also be executed at other times.
For example, the "history display step-up effect" may be executed while the "year-end singing contest reach effect" or the "countdown reach effect" is being executed.

In addition, the execution of the "history display step-up effect" may not be completed during one display of a changing decorative pattern, but may be executed over multiple displays of changing decorative patterns.
For example, a "history display step-up effect" may be executed as a look-ahead effect. Specifically, when there are four reserved items, a step-up image may be displayed one step at a time in each of the four variable displays, and in the variable display corresponding to the fourth reserved item, a fourth step-up image may be displayed to indicate the degree of expectation corresponding to the fourth reserved item.

In addition, if there are less than four reserved items, step-up images are displayed one step at a time until the display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the reserved item that has been read in advance is displayed, and step-up images are displayed in multiple steps in the display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the reserved item that has been read in advance.
For example, when there are three pending items, the first variable display corresponding to the first pending item may display a first step-up image, the second variable display corresponding to the second pending item may display a second step-up image, and the third variable display corresponding to the third pending item may display third and fourth step-up images to indicate the degree of expectation corresponding to the third pending item.

Another embodiment in which display is performed in the history display area will be described.
First, the premise of this embodiment will be described.
When a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 2002, a special lottery is held and a variable display of decorative symbols is performed. The probability that the special lottery will result in a jackpot is 1/300.
If the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed in which the big prize winning port 2005 opens and closes a predetermined number of times. After the jackpot game ends, a time-saving state is entered in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the second starting port 2004. Up to this point, the game progresses in the same manner as in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 142 and 143.
In this embodiment, the jackpot based on winning at the first starting port 2002 and the jackpot based on winning at the second starting port 2004 are only 10R low probability time-saving jackpots.
The number of time-saving times granted after a jackpot based on winning at the first starting port 2002 is 1. On the other hand, the number of time-saving times granted after a jackpot based on winning at the second starting port 2004 is 10.

Furthermore, if a gaming ball enters the second starting opening 2004, a small win occurs as a special lottery result with a high probability (1/7). When a small win occurs, a decorative symbol corresponding to the small win is displayed and the second large winning opening (not shown) is opened. The second large winning opening is located to the right of the gaming area. A specific area is provided within the second large winning opening, and when a gaming ball that enters the second large winning opening passes through the specific area, a jackpot game is initiated in which the large winning opening 2005 opens and closes a predetermined number of times. Note that because the position of a gaming ball that enters the second large winning opening or a gaming ball that enters the second large winning opening is configured to always (or with a high probability) pass through the specific area, the start of the next jackpot game is virtually confirmed when a small win occurs, except in exceptional circumstances such as the player not firing a gaming ball. The probability that the special lottery for second starting hole 2004 will result in a jackpot is the same (1/300) as the special lottery held when the ball enters first starting hole 2002, but as mentioned above, small jackpots occur with a high probability (1/7), so most jackpot games for second starting hole 2004 occur via small jackpots. Note that when a game ball enters first starting hole 2002, the probability of a small jackpot occurring is 0%.

The number of time-saving times granted after a jackpot game that occurs based on a game ball entering the first starting port 2002 is 1, but the number of time-saving times granted after a jackpot game that occurs based on a game ball entering the second starting port 2004 is 10. In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls for the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are both 4.
Therefore, after a jackpot game that occurs based on a game ball entering the first starting port 2002, the player can participate in up to five special lotteries for the second starting port 2004, and if the player wins a small jackpot (which occurs with a probability of 1/7) during a total of five special lotteries, including the upper limit on the number of reserved balls for the second starting port 2004, it is virtually certain that the next jackpot state will occur.
On the other hand, after a jackpot game that occurs based on a game ball entering the second starting port 2002, the player can take part in up to 14 lotteries, and if the player gets a small jackpot (which occurs with a probability of 1/7) during a total of 14 special lotteries, including the upper limit on the number of reserved balls in the second starting port 2004, it is virtually certain that the next jackpot state will occur.

According to these game specifications, the player first hits the ball from the left side to make the ball enter the first starting hole 2002, aiming to win a jackpot as a result of a special lottery.
Next, when a jackpot game is started, the player hits the right side, and continues hitting the right side even after the jackpot ends, causing five game balls to enter the second starting hole 2004, which has been driven and opened by the movable piece 2004a, thereby obtaining the results of up to five special lotteries. The time for which the movable piece 2004a is kept open is set to a time (for example, one minute) sufficient to maximize the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second starting hole 2004.

A small win occurs with a probability of 1/7 in response to a ball entering the second starting hole 2004. The player can expect a small win (which is essentially a big win as described above) to occur during the five variable displays.
If no small win occurs during the five fluctuation displays, it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 2004 (even if there is time remaining in the movable piece 2004a which is set to be open for one minute, it will close when it is controlled to the normal state), and therefore it is not possible to display fluctuations more than five times, so the player will have to hit the left side again in an attempt to generate a big win.

On the other hand, if a small win occurs during the five variable display times, the second large prize opening will be opened, and a big win state will occur in which the large prize opening 2005 opens and closes, provided that the game ball passes through a specific area within the second large prize opening.
When this jackpot state ends, 10 time-saving rounds are awarded, and the movable piece 2004a is driven to open the second starting slot 2004, allowing the player to enter the game ball and obtain up to 14 special lottery results. Even in this case, if the player continues to hit the right button without interrupting the game ball launch, up to 14 special lottery results will be obtained. If a small win occurs during the 14 variable display, which occurs with a 1/7 probability, the second large prize slot will open and close again, and the jackpot state will occur, provided that the player passes through a specific area. Thus, if a small win occurs during the 14 variable display, the game essentially transitions to a jackpot game state, and this game state repeatedly loops, creating a winning streak from the player's perspective. Even if a small win occurs during the time-saving round, the player will not be awarded 10 new time-saving rounds unless the ball passes through a specific area.

In this way, players will play while being aware of which of the three states with different degrees of advantage they are in: a left-handed hit state, a first right-handed hit state (a state in which one time-saving play has been granted), or a second right-handed hit state (a state in which ten time-saving play has been granted).

In this embodiment, too, when hitting from the left, the aforementioned "Year-End Song Battle Reach Effect" and "The Countdown Reach Effect" are performed, and the story is about a female singer character who plays the main character and is displayed in the Year-End Song Battle Reach Effect, etc., aiming to perform a live concert around the world.

In this embodiment, to allow the player to recognize how far they have progressed among the three states of left-handed hitting, first right-handed hitting state (state in which one time-saving count has been granted), and second right-handed hitting state (state in which ten time-saving counts have been granted), for example, "Aim for a local live performance," "Aim for a national live performance," and "Aim for a world live performance" are displayed (not shown) from left to right at the top of the display area of the game board-side performance display device 1600. Note that this display is always displayed, but may be hidden in special states (for example, during the jackpot opening and ending, and when a special error occurs).

When playing from the left, all of "Aim for a Local Live," "Aim for a National Live," and "Aim for a World Live" are displayed normally, and when playing in the first right-hand state (when one time-saving count has been added), a special display is displayed to indicate that only "Aim for a Local Live" has been completed, and when playing in the second right-hand state (when ten time-saving counts have been added), a special display is displayed to indicate that of "Aim for a Local Live," "Aim for a National Live," and "Aim for a World Live," only "Aim for a Local Live" and "Aim for a National Live" have been completed, and when playing in the second right-hand state (when ten time-saving counts have been added) and a small hit that actually results in a jackpot is won and passes through a specific area (or when a jackpot is won), a special display is displayed to indicate that all of the lives have been completed. Furthermore, when a small jackpot that effectively results in a big jackpot is won in the second right-hit state (when 10 time-saving attempts have been granted) and passes through a specific area, a special display is displayed to indicate that all lives have been completed. This is because it is possible that a small jackpot was won in the first right-hit state but not in the second right-hit state (a so-called single pass), and therefore the final goal of completing the "Aim for the World Live" is achieved when a single pass is avoided. This is because displaying the completion of all lives when there is a possibility of a single pass that would cause the player an unpleasant experience could cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

A special display that indicates that a "Local Live" or similar has been completed could, for example, slightly dim the "Local Live" display, display an effect around the "Local Live" display, or display a message such as "CLEAR!" overlaid on the "Local Live" display.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the first right-hand hit state and the second right-hand hit state, decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state indicating that a big hit or small hit has occurred only if the decorative symbols have the same numbers as those displayed in a stopped state indicating that a big hit has occurred in the left-hand hit state.

Specifically, for example, if there are eight decorative symbols (1-8) available in the left-hand hitting state, and a jackpot occurs with "333" in the left-hand hitting state, the "333" decorative symbol will always be displayed as a static symbol whenever a jackpot or small jackpot occurs in the first right-hand hitting state or the second right-hand hitting state. The decorative symbols displayed in the first right-hand hitting state and the second right-hand hitting state are the same eight decorative symbols (1-8) available as in the left-hand hitting state, but the designs are different for the left-hand hitting state, the first right-hand hitting state, and the second right-hand hitting state. For example, if the decorative symbol in the left-hand hitting state is a basic design (e.g., a number symbol with a character), the first right-hand hitting state will have a design with a halo around the number symbol with a character, and the second right-hand hitting state will have a halo around the number symbol with a character, and the number is painted in gold. In this way, by using increasingly more luxurious designs as the degree of advantage increases, the player's sense of excitement can be heightened.

By doing this, many gaming machines, in which an advantageous state ends after a predetermined number of variable displays, are primarily designed to entertain players by waiting for a reach state to occur. However, the gaming machine of this embodiment indicates a loss when the left decorative pattern does not stop on a specific pattern (for example, if a jackpot is hit with "333" while playing left-handed, the specific pattern will be "3"). This increases interest in the stopping of the left decorative pattern, and even if the left decorative pattern does not stop on a specific pattern, when the right decorative pattern stops, there are more opportunities to increase interest, for example, by re-changing the left decorative pattern from a temporary stopped state so that the left decorative pattern stops on a specific pattern.

In addition, there have been conventional techniques that increase the expectation of a win when the left decorative symbol stops, for example, when a "7" is reached, in order to increase interest. However, since a "7" reach generally occurs rarely, it has not been possible to increase interest when the left decorative symbol stops. However, in this embodiment, since only specific symbols can win, it is possible to make the specific symbol stop on the left decorative symbol with a probability higher than that of a small win, and it is possible to create a reach state with specific symbols on the left and right decorative symbols with a probability higher than that of a small win.

The special display indicating completion may be displayed as a decorative symbol of a jackpot when the player is hitting the ball from the left. In this way, for example, if a jackpot is hit with "333" when the player is hitting the ball from the left, "333" will be displayed superimposed on the "Aim for Local Live" display. When the player transitions from the first right-hand hitting state to the second right-hand hitting state (i.e., a small jackpot is won in the first right-hand hitting state and "333" is displayed), and the player is controlled to the second right-hand hitting state, "333" will be displayed superimposed on the "Aim for Local Live" display, as well as on the "Aim for National Live" display. When a small jackpot is won in the second right-hand hitting state for the first time and the player passes through the specified area (i.e., a small jackpot is won in the second right-hand hitting state and "333" is displayed), "333" will be displayed superimposed on the "Aim for Local Live" and "Aim for National Live" displays, as well as on the "Aim for World Live" display, creating an impactful display.

Note that "Aim for a Local Live," "Aim for a National Live," and "Aim for a World Live," which are displayed in order from left to right at the top of the display area of the game board display device 1600, do not encourage players to expect a win, but merely indicate their status. Therefore, it is recommended that they be displayed in, for example, less than half the size of the display area of the game board display device 1600. This is because it is easier for players to recognize the main effects that take place in the display area of the game board display device 1600 if they are based on the results of the lottery.

In this case, "Aim for a Local Live," "Aim for a National Live," and "Aim for a World Live," which are displayed in order from left to right at the top of the display area of the game board effect display device 1600, are displayed smaller than the preview effects and reach effects based on the results of the special lottery. Therefore, if the special display indicating completion is slightly dimmed, effects are displayed around the "Aim for a Local Live" display, or a message such as "CLEAR!" is displayed, the player will be able to recognize it. However, if three decorative symbols (e.g., "333") are displayed as special displays, the player may have difficulty recognizing which symbol is being displayed. Therefore, for example, it is better to display one decorative symbol instead of three. By displaying one decorative symbol, when all the lives are completed, "3," "3," and "3" will be displayed at the top of the display area of the game board effect display device 1600, giving the player the illusion of winning even though they have not.

Also, certain live shows (e.g., "Aim for a Local Live Show" and "Aim for a National Live Show") may be indicated as complete with three decorative symbols, while other live shows (e.g., "Aim for a World Live Show") may be indicated as complete with one decorative symbol. In this case, since the greatest challenge in the specifications of this embodiment is winning a big or small jackpot in the first right-hit state, only the "Aim for a National Live Show" completion display (a display indicating that a big or small jackpot has been won in the first right-hit state) may be displayed with three decorative symbols, while the remaining "Aim for a Local Live Show" and "Aim for a World Live Show" may be displayed with one decorative symbol, or only the "Aim for a National Live Show" completion display (a display indicating that a big or small jackpot has been won in the first right-hit state) may be displayed with one decorative symbol, while the remaining "Aim for a Local Live Show" and "Aim for a World Live Show" may be displayed with three decorative symbols.

Furthermore, when "CLEAR" is displayed, it may be displayed in different ways, such as red letters for "Aim for a Local Live," gold letters for "Aim for a National Live," and rainbow letters for "Aim for a World Live." As mentioned above, the greatest challenge in the specifications of this embodiment is to win a big or small win in the first right-hand hit state, so rainbow letters may be displayed when "Aim for a National Live" is completed (when a big or small win is won in the first right-hand hit state).
Although there is strictly no single color that can be called rainbow, in this specification, the display mode that is perceived by the player as a rainbow by illuminating the pixels that make up the display means in a striped pattern in the following order within a specified area (in this embodiment, the part of the text) - blue, light blue, green, yellow, red, pink, blue, light blue, etc. - is referred to as rainbow.

When decorative symbols are displayed at the top of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, since the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 itself is small, the decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display displayed approximately in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600 may be displayed in a reduced size, or data for small-sized decorative symbols may be prepared in advance and this data may be displayed. In addition, with regard to "CLEAR", the "CLEAR" displayed in reach effects, etc. may be displayed in a reduced size, or data for small-sized "CLEAR" may be prepared in advance and this data may be displayed.

In the above explanation, "Aim for Local Live," "Aim for National Live," and "Aim for World Live" are all displayed at the top of the display area of the gameboard-side performance display device 1600, but it is also possible to display only "Aim for Local Live" when playing left-handed, only "Aim for National Live" in the first right-handed state, and only "Aim for World Live" in the second right-handed state, thereby indicating which state the player is in.

Also, while it has been explained that "Aim for a Local Live," "Aim for a National Live," and "Aim for a World Live" are always displayed except in special situations (for example, during the jackpot opening or ending, or during a special error), they may also be made to disappear after a specified period of time has passed.

Specifically, when all of "Aim for a Local Live," "Aim for a National Live," and "Aim for a World Live" are displayed, when the first right-hit state (a state in which one time-saving count has been granted) is entered, "Aim for a Local Live" is displayed as completed and "Aim for a National Live" and "Aim for a World Live" are displayed as incomplete, and when a predetermined time has passed since the start of this display (for example, a time close to the average fluctuation time of one time, about 10 seconds, a time shorter than the shortest fluctuation time that can be selected in the first right-hit state, a time longer than the shortest fluctuation time that can be selected in the first right-hit state but shorter than the longest fluctuation time that can be selected in the first right-hit state, or a time longer than the longest fluctuation time that can be selected in the first right-hit state), they are hidden (including being displayed but not recognizable).

Similarly, when all of "Aim for a Local Live," "Aim for a National Live," and "Aim for a World Live" are displayed, when the second right-hit state (a state in which 10 time-saving attempts have been granted) is entered, "Aim for a Local Live" and "Aim for a National Live" are displayed as completed and "Aim for a World Live" is displayed as incomplete, and when a predetermined time has passed since the start of this display (for example, a time close to the average fluctuation time of one time, about 10 seconds, a time shorter than the shortest fluctuation time that can be selected in the first right-hit state, a time longer than the shortest fluctuation time that can be selected in the first right-hit state but shorter than the longest fluctuation time that can be selected in the first right-hit state, or a time longer than the longest fluctuation time that can be selected in the first right-hit state), they are hidden (including being displayed but not recognizable).

Similarly, when all of "Aim for Local Live," "Aim for National Live," and "Aim for World Live" are to be displayed, when the player transitions to the second right-hit state (a state in which 10 time-saving attempts have been granted) and wins a small jackpot in that state and passes through a specific area (or when a jackpot is won), a display will appear indicating that "Aim for Local Live," "Aim for National Live," and "Aim for World Live" have been completed, and when a predetermined amount of time has passed since the start of this display (for example, a time close to the average fluctuation time of about 10 seconds, a time shorter than the shortest fluctuation time selectable in the first right-hit state, a time longer than the shortest fluctuation time selectable in the first right-hit state but shorter than the longest fluctuation time selectable in the first right-hit state, or a time longer than the longest fluctuation time selectable in the first right-hit state), the display will no longer be displayed (including being displayed but not recognizable).

The time period for which the display when only "Aim for a Local Live" is completed is hidden (hour 1), the time period for which the display when only "Aim for a Local Live" and "Aim for a National Live" are completed is hidden (hour 2), and the time period for which the display when "Aim for a Local Live," "Aim for a National Live," and "Aim for a World Live" are completed is hidden (hour 3) can be set to appropriate times according to each purpose, but hours 1 through 3 could all be the same, hours 1 and 2 could be the same but hour 3 could be longer or shorter than hours 1 and 2, hours 1 through 3 could all be different but hour 2 could be longer than hour 1 and hour 3 longer than hour 2, etc. Each combination of hours 1 through 3 has its own purpose and effect, so it is best to set them according to your purpose.

Here, we will describe the effects of typical combination patterns. As a typical example, if the first through third periods are all the same, the display will be hidden for a uniform period of time regardless of the state it is controlled to, which has the effect of allowing you to focus on effects based on the results of the lottery, such as reach effects and preview effects.

Furthermore, if the pattern is such that the second time is longer than the first time, and furthermore, the third time is longer than the second time, the display time will become longer as the game moves to a more advantageous state (situation), which can give players a sense of satisfaction and also appeal to players who are not playing, which is expected to have the effect of increasing operation.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the greatest challenge in the specifications of this embodiment is winning a big or small jackpot in the first right-hit state, so the second time can be the longest, followed by the third time and the first time (the first and third times can be reversed or the same). By displaying for a long time that the greatest challenge has been overcome, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction, and by appealing to players who are not playing, it is expected to have the effect of improving operation.

Furthermore, since some players may feel more joy in avoiding a single pass in the second right-hand state than in overcoming the greatest challenge in the specifications of this embodiment, the third time may be the longest, followed by the second time and the first time (the first and second times may be reversed or the same). Furthermore, if the third time is the longest, non-playing customers may gaze eagerly at the machine, wondering "How much will that machine pay out?", which may cause players to feel pressured. Therefore, the display for the third time may be shortened. The "all completed" display is displayed when the machine transitions to the second right-hand state (a state in which 10 time-saving cycles have been granted) and a small win is won and the ball passes through a specific area (or a big win is won). Therefore, for example, it is advisable to shorten the time if one ball passes through the specific area, but not if two or more balls pass through. This allows the expectations of both players who feel pressured and those who do not to be met. Additionally, the jackpot may be configured to not pass through a specific area, and the time may be shortened if the specific area is passed.

In addition, when the player transitions to the second right-hand hitting state (a state in which 10 time-saving attempts have been granted), the display indicates that "Aim for a Local Live" and "Aim for a National Live" have been completed, and that "Aim for a World Live" has not been completed. However, this display may also be changed to occur when the player transitions to the first right-hand hitting state (a state in which 1 time-saving attempt has been granted) and wins a small jackpot in that state and passes through a specific area (or when a jackpot is won). In this case, the second time may or may not be shortened depending on the number of game balls that have passed through the specific area, in order to meet the expectations of both parties mentioned above.

Up to this point, this embodiment has been explained in the form of a story in which the player aims to perform a world live show and show how far they have advanced. However, instead of this, for example, it may be possible to display which reach effect was won in each state (left-hitting state, first right-hitting state, second right-hitting state). In this case, for example, instead of displaying "Aim for a local live show," it may be possible to display "the reach effect displayed when you win (not a dynamic image of all the reach effects, but a display that shows that you have won in that reach effect)."

In addition, a prediction may be made regarding the reserve corresponding to the second starting port 2004, and a prediction effect may be used to suggest or notify whether a small hit or a big hit will occur.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 321 etc. will be described below with reference to FIGS. 322 to 324 etc.
In the "hourglass reserve change effect," which is a special effect in the embodiment described below, an hourglass image resembling an hourglass is displayed in a predetermined area (position) of the display area of the effect display means (for example, the game board side effect display device 1600) in a position overlapping with the reserved image, which is displayed in a predetermined manner (predetermined color), and by moving sand of a specific color within the hourglass, an effect is produced in which sand of the specific color falls within the hourglass, and the reserved image of the predetermined color is gradually hidden by the sand, and at the same time, the falling sand image gradually displays the reserved image of a specific color different from the predetermined color.
If all the sand does not fall and the performance ends midway, the display that changes the reserved image is not performed, and the reserved image of a predetermined color before the hourglass reserved change performance is executed continues to be displayed.
On the other hand, if all the sand falls and the reserved image is hidden by the fallen sand, the reserved image will change to a reserved image of a specific color. For example, when the reserved image is blue, as green sand falls, the reserved image of green will gradually be displayed, and finally only the green reserved image will be displayed. In this way, when the "hourglass reserved change effect" is executed to the end, the reserved image with a higher expectation will be displayed.

The detailed presentation of the "hourglass reserve change presentation" will be explained below with reference to Figs. 322 to 324. Fig. 322 shows a time chart for the "hourglass reserve change presentation." Figs. 323 and 324 show the display form in the display area of the presentation display device 1600 on the game board side.
It should be noted that, as shown in other embodiments, a predetermined background image can be displayed in the display area, but this is not shown in the present embodiment.

The "hourglass pending change effect" is executed immediately after the variable display starts, when each decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. Note that the decorative symbol temporarily stopped may be the same as the stopped display result of the previous variable display, or another combination of decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped.
323(a) shows the state when the decorative pattern is stopped and just before the variable display starts. In this example, the color of the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is displayed in blue due to the pre-reading effect.
The presentation pattern 01 shown in Figure 322(a) is a presentation pattern in which the "hourglass reserve change presentation" is not executed, but is shown for comparison with other presentation patterns in which the "hourglass reserve change presentation" is executed. The variable display begins at timing t0, and is temporarily stopped from timing t0 to timing t1. Figure 323(b) shows the state in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped. Next, from timing t1, a state of high-speed fluctuation begins, and at timing t30 the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol temporarily stop, and at timing t31 all symbols are displayed as stopped. After being displayed in a stopped state until timing t32, depending on the result of the special lottery indicated by the stopping state of the decorative symbols, if there is a loss, the next variable display will begin, and if there is a jackpot, the jackpot game will begin.

The reserved image is erased at the time when the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, but during the period when the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the visibility of the reserved image is gradually reduced or reduced all at once (hidden) by gradually making it semi-transparent or shrinking or by displaying a predetermined effect display over it, and the display of the reserved image is preferably terminated at a predetermined time before the end of the stopped display period of the decorative pattern or at the end of the stopped display period of the decorative pattern.
For example, if the decorative pattern is displayed for one second, the display of the reserved image may be terminated when 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the decorative pattern was displayed. Note that, if a special reach effect is executed, the display of the reserved image may be terminated at the timing when the special reach effect is started.

In the presentation pattern 02 shown in Figure 322(b), only a portion of the hourglass image is displayed, but not the entire image, and no sand is displayed falling. In this case, from timing t0 to timing t3, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in a temporarily stopped state, remaining as the patterns at the start of the changing display. Furthermore, from timing t2 to timing t3, the hourglass image gradually appears from the bottom in the reserved display area, overlapping with the reserved image, but the display ends without being completely displayed. Figure 323(c) shows the state in which the bottom half of the hourglass image is displayed at a predetermined timing between timing t2 and timing t3. In presentation pattern 02, the half-displayed hourglass image ends at timing t3, and the decorative pattern begins to change rapidly. Figure 324(a) shows the display state at the time the display of the hourglass image ends. Furthermore, Figure 324(b) shows the display state after the decorative pattern enters a state of rapid change. Note that from timing t2 to timing t3, the time chart indicates that the reserved image is visible as an hourglass, but as shown in Figure 323 (c), the reserved image is visible when the hourglass is displayed.

In presentation patterns 03 to 05 shown in Figures 322(c) to 322(e), the entire hourglass image is displayed at timing t3. Figure 323(d) shows the display state at this timing. Immediately after this, a sand image of a predetermined color (green in this example) is displayed above the hourglass image. Figure 323(e) shows the display state at this timing. After that, the sand image is displayed falling downward.

Effect pattern 03 shown in Figure 322 (c) is an effect pattern in which the "hourglass hold change effect" is executed halfway. In this case, from timing t0 to timing t5, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in a temporarily stopped state, remaining as the patterns at the start of the changing display. In addition, from timing t3 to timing t5, a display of sand falling from top to bottom is displayed. Figure 323 (f) shows the display state at timing t5. In effect pattern 03, the display of the hourglass image ends at this timing, and the decorative pattern that was in a temporarily stopped state enters a state of rapid change. Figure 324 (a) shows the display state at the timing when the display of the hourglass image has ended. In addition, Figure 324 (b) shows the display state after which the decorative pattern enters a state of rapid change.

Effect pattern 04 shown in Figure 322 (d) is an effect pattern in which the "hourglass hold change effect" is executed halfway. In effect pattern 04, the sand falls for an additional 2 seconds compared to effect pattern 03, but not all of the sand falls. Figure 323 (g) shows the display state at timing t7. In effect pattern 04, the display of the hourglass image ends at this timing, and the decorative pattern, which was in a temporary stopped state, begins to change at high speed. Figure 324 (a) shows the display state at the timing when the display of the hourglass image ends. Furthermore, Figure 324 (b) shows the display state after which the decorative pattern changes to a state of high speed change.

The effect pattern 05 shown in Figure 322 (e) is an effect pattern in which the "hourglass reserve change effect" is executed to the end. Compared to effect pattern 04, the sand falls for an additional 2 seconds, and all the sand falls. At timing t9, the entire display area occupied by the blue reserved image is hidden by the sand. Figure 323 (h) shows the display state at timing t9.
Immediately thereafter, the display of the hourglass image ends. Figure 324 (c) shows the state in which the display of the hourglass image has ended. As shown in the figure, the color of the reserved image is displayed in a state in which it has changed to the color of the sand in the falling hourglass image (green in this case). Also, immediately thereafter, the decorative pattern begins to fluctuate at high speed. Figure 324 (d) shows the display state in which the decorative pattern has entered a state of rapid fluctuation.
In this embodiment, the probability that all the sand will fall and the reserved image will be promoted is set to 30%, and the probability that all the sand will not fall and the reserved image will not be promoted is set to 70%, but the probability of promotion may be set as appropriate, for example, the probability of promotion may be around 30% to 70%.
In this presentation pattern, all the sand images fall over a total of six seconds, but the time required for all the sand images to fall can be set appropriately, and may be, for example, between three and ten seconds.

In effect pattern 02, the "hourglass hold change effect" ends without the sand image obscuring the display area occupied by the reserved image. Furthermore, in effect patterns 03 and 04, the "hourglass hold change effect" ends with only a portion of the display area occupied by the reserved image obscured by the sand image, so the reserved image is not changed and is displayed in its original form. Figure 324(a) shows the display state at the time the hourglass image display ends in effect patterns 02 to 04. As shown in the figure, the color of the reserved image is displayed in the same color as the color of the reserved image before the "hourglass hold change effect" was executed.

If a failed presentation pattern (one in which the reserved image does not change) is selected, it is preferable to make presentation pattern 04, which ends when two-thirds of the sand has fallen, more likely to be selected than presentation pattern 03, which ends when one-third of the sand has fallen. By adopting such an arrangement, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of anticipation until the latter half of the presentation.
Conversely, it may be possible to make it less likely that presentation pattern 04, which ends when two-thirds of the sand has fallen, will be selected than presentation pattern 03, which ends when one-third of the sand has fallen. By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to create a great sense of anticipation in the player when the presentation progresses to the latter half. Also, some players are averse to presentations that drag on, so it is possible to create a presentation that is less likely to arouse disgust in such players.
Furthermore, although multiple failure timings are provided (in this example, three timings are provided: timing t3, timing t5, and timing t7), failure timings may be limited to only one of these. For example, presentation pattern 02 and presentation pattern 03 may be made unfeasible, and whether the display mode of the pending image changes may be determined depending on whether the sand finishes falling at timing t7. By adopting such a configuration, it is only necessary to pay attention to certain timings during the presentation, thereby preventing situations requiring excessive concentration on the presentation.

As shown in performance pattern 05, the color of the sand in the hourglass image indicates the color that the reserved image will change to when the sand falls to the end of the ``hourglass reserved change performance.''
The presentation patterns shown in presentation patterns 01 to 05 are whether or not the blue reserved image changes to a green reserved image, but other colors may be used as the color of the reserved image before the change or the color of the sand image (i.e., the color of the reserved image after the change).
For example, the colors of the pending image at the start of the performance can be white, blue, green, red, or gold.
In addition, the sand image can be displayed in any of blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow colors, but only sand images of a color with a higher expectation than the color of the reserved image when the ``hourglass reserved change effect'' is executed will be displayed.
For example, if the reserved image is red, a gold or rainbow colored sand image will be displayed, but blue or green sand images will not be displayed. This is because players dislike effects that lower their expectations.

The reserved image is based on a colorless, transparent or milky white crystal ball, and the color of the crystal ball appears to change as the sand falls through the hourglass.
When the new reserved image overlaps in front of the original reserved image, part of the original reserved image becomes unrecognizable. In this case, the display priority of the new reserved image may be set higher than that of the original reserved image, so that although the lower part of the original reserved image is displayed as part of the display process, it is hidden by the new reserved image with the higher display priority and becomes unrecognizable.
Alternatively, the shapes of the original and new reserved images may be changed as the performance progresses (for example, the bottom edge that forms part of the outer shape of the original reserved image and the top edge that forms part of the outer shape of the new reserved image may be adjacent), and the two images may be displayed without overlapping as part of the display process.
323 shows an example of displaying a two-dimensional image, but the display in the "hourglass reserve change effect" may be realized by image processing using a three-dimensional model. For example, the reserve image may be composed of a spherical, colorless, transparent or milky white 3D object resembling a crystal ball, and image processing may be employed in which tiny 3D objects of a specific color are displayed falling from the top of the hourglass toward the periphery of the crystal ball, so that the spherical 3D object is gradually hidden by tiny objects of the specific color from the bottom and changes to the specific color.
It should be noted that instead of causing the decorative pattern to rapidly change at the same time as the display of the hourglass image ends, the decorative pattern may be slowly scrolled for a predetermined time (for example, one second) from the timing when the display of the hourglass image ends, and then be put into a rapidly changing state.

In effect patterns 02 to 04, the sand in the hourglass image does not fall, or if it does fall, some of it remains, and the display of the hourglass image ends. At this time, the hourglass may be blown away by the wind to display the hourglass moving off-screen, or the hourglass may be broken and the sand scattered so that the sand and the reserved image cannot overlap, and then a display process may be performed to make the broken hourglass and the scattered sand semi-transparent, thereby hiding the broken hourglass and the scattered sand.
By adopting such an embodiment, the reserved image can be returned to the original color in a natural manner.

In this way, in the "hourglass reserve change effect," an hourglass image is displayed in a position overlapping with the reserved image, and as time passes, an image of sand of a specific color different from the color of the original reserved image is dropped, so that the original reserved image is gradually eroded by the new reserved image and gradually hidden, and whether the color of the reserved image changes or not is displayed depending on whether the original reserved image is completely eroded and hidden by the sand image.
Therefore, the player will watch the progress of the "hourglass reserve change effect" with anticipation as to which of the reserved images with different display modes (colors) that are simultaneously displayed in the area where the reserved image is displayed will ultimately be displayed.

By using this type of presentation, when the display mode of the reserved image is changed, the color of the original reserved image that was displayed in the area where the reserved image is displayed appears to gradually change to the color of the new reserved image in the area where the reserved image is displayed, so the player can easily recognize which color the reserved image may change to since they only need to look at the area where the reserved image is displayed, and can also look forward to the color of the reserved image changing.
In addition, both the color of the reserved image before it changes (the color before the hourglass reserved change effect is performed) and the color that may change due to the hourglass reserved change effect can be recognized simultaneously within the area where the reserved image is displayed, so it is easy for the player to understand how the degree of expectation is changing from one to another.
Furthermore, since the "hourglass hold change effect" is executed using the display area in which the hold image is displayed, the display area used for the "hourglass hold change effect" can be made smaller, thereby securing a display area for executing other effects.
In addition, since the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped when the "hourglass reserve change effect" is executed, the player can focus his/her attention on the "hourglass reserve change effect."

Furthermore, in this hold change presentation, while the presentation is being performed, the pre-change hold image with low expectations gradually becomes unrecognizable and is gradually replaced by a new hold image with a color with high expectations, so the player's expectations for the hold image changing can be gradually increased from an early stage in the presentation, compared to when the pre-change hold image is changed to the post-change hold image at the final timing of the hold change presentation.
Furthermore, since the reserved image with low expectation is more likely to be displayed than the reserved image with high expectation, the player may become tired of looking at the reserved image with low expectation, but by the reserved image with low expectation disappearing partway through the performance, the player's feelings are refreshed and he or she can turn his or her attention to the reserved image with high expectation being displayed.
In addition, by providing a false presentation pattern (for example, a presentation pattern in which the pending image does not change and the suggested degree of expectation does not change, such as the presentation patterns shown in presentation pattern 02 to presentation pattern 04 in Figure 322), the player can be made to see only a portion of the pending image with high expectation, thereby increasing the sense of excitement.

In addition, the effect begins immediately after the change display begins, allowing the player to forget the results of the previous change display and quickly build up anticipation for the current change display.

In the display examples shown with reference to Figures 323(a) to 323(h) and Figures 324(a) to 324(d), in areas where the original reserved image has been eroded by the sand image and the new reserved image is displayed, the circular outline of the reserved image remains visible. The outline color may be the color of the original reserved image. Alternatively, a common color (e.g., black) may be used regardless of the color of the reserved image. It is recommended that the common color be different from the color used for the reserved image and the color used for the falling sand.

It is also possible to choose not to display such contours. In this case, the contour of the original reserved image will also be eroded by the sand image, so that only the upper part (uneroded area) of the original reserved image is visible, and the lower part (eroded area) of the original reserved image will become invisible. Furthermore, the new reserved image will be displayed as a polygon (such as a square or hexagon) rather than a circle. Figure 324(e) shows the state where 2/3 of the sand has fallen at time t7, and Figure 324(f) shows the state where all the sand has fallen at time t9. Note that after the hourglass image is erased, the shape of the reserved image may remain hexagonal, or it may become circular as shown in Figure 324(c).

The size of the reserved image may be made to match the size of the bottom of the hourglass image.
Figures 324(g) and 324(h) show examples of display in the case of "hourglass hold change effect" in which the size and shape of the hold image match the size and shape of the bottom of the hourglass image.
Figure 324(g) shows the state at time t3 when the hourglass image and sand image are displayed, before the sand falls. Figure 324(h) shows the state at time t6, three seconds after the sand falls, when half of the sand has fallen. Note that when all the sand has fallen, the original reserved image is completely replaced with the new reserved image.
With this type of display mode, the falling sand itself only affects the area where the new reserved image is displayed, so it is possible to clearly communicate to the player that the reserved image itself is changing, which increases anticipation for the color of the reserved image to change.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the "hourglass reserve change effect" is executed when the decorative pattern is displayed in a temporarily stopped state, the "hourglass reserve change effect" may also be executed when the decorative pattern is changing at high speed or scrolling at a slow speed (a speed at which the player can clearly see the moving decorative pattern).
It is advisable not to change the display state of the decorative pattern change during the execution of the "hourglass hold change effect." For example, if the execution of the "hourglass hold change effect" is started while the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the temporarily stopped state of the decorative pattern should be maintained until the execution of the "hourglass hold change effect" is completed. Similarly, in the case of high-speed change or slow-speed scrolling, if the execution of the "hourglass hold change effect" is started, the high-speed change or slow-speed scrolling state should be maintained until the execution of the "hourglass hold change effect" is completed.
By adopting this configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the "hourglass hold change effect."

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 322 and 323, it is preferable to make the amount of sand falling per unit time in the hourglass constant (i.e., the sand falling is displayed in a manner similar to that of a real hourglass).
Below, with reference to Figure 325, another embodiment of the amount of sand falling per unit time inside an hourglass is shown. Note that Figures 325(a) to 325(c) each show the display state of the hourglass image and the reserved image (colored white) at a predetermined timing (timings t3 to t9). The color of the sand is green. The dotted line at the bottom of the hourglass indicates the top edge of the sand at a predetermined timing (timings t4 to t8).
FIG. 325(a) shows an example in which the reserved image is circular and the sand height increases uniformly per unit time. In other words, in this case, the falling sand is displayed in a manner different from that of a real hourglass. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 325(a), in a display in which the sand is divided into six sections (six levels) of equal height, for example, 1/6 of the sand is filled every second. When displaying the filling of 1/6 of the sand after 1 second has elapsed, the amount of sand falling can be changed so that 1/6 of the area is gradually filled over the course of 1 second, or the sand is displayed falling but the area is not filled, and 1/6 of the area is suddenly filled with sand after 1 second has elapsed. Although it may seem a little strange that the falling sand is displayed in a way that is different from that of a real hourglass, by increasing the height of the sand evenly (for example, the area does not increase evenly, such as filling 1/6 of the height in 6 times), it is easier for the player to understand the timing until the sand has completely fallen and to keep up with the tempo, so the player can suddenly feel a sense of excitement at the hold change presentation at the timing (t8 in Figure 325(a)) just before the sand has completely fallen (for example, if 1/6 of the height is filled in 6 times, it would be 5/6).As is clear from Figure 325(a), when the reserved image (white) is gradually eroded by the sand in the hourglass (green sand in this case), the eroded area gradually increases, and the eroded area is displayed to gradually decrease halfway through the erosion.

On the other hand, Figure 325(b) shows an example in which the shape of the reserved ball is circular and the amount of sand falling per unit time is uniform (i.e., the sand is displayed falling in a manner similar to that of a real hourglass). In the example shown in Figure 325(b), the time for which the sand height rises is short at the beginning and end of the presentation, and the time for which the sand height rises is longer as the presentation approaches the middle stage (i.e., the sand height rises slowly), allowing the player to fully enjoy the presentation of whether or not the color of the reserved image changes. The time for which the sand height rises near the middle stage of the hourglass is longer than the time for which the sand height rises at the beginning or end of the hourglass, and this time can be made to correspond to the time periods known as "tame" and "ma" in pachinko machines, thereby increasing the interest in the reserved ball change presentation.

Figure 325 (c) shows an example in which the shape of the reserved image is square. In this case, if the amount of sand falling per unit time is made uniform, the sand will fill in evenly from the bottom as the performance progresses. Note that the shape of the reserved image is not limited to a square; it can also be a vertically or horizontally long rectangle.

325(d) and 325(e) show other examples of the hourglass image and the reserved image (white). Note that the sand image is not shown in the figures.
Figure 325(d) shows an example of the reserved image and hourglass image when a reserved image with a square tilted at 45 degrees is used. In this case, as in the example shown in Figure 325(b), if the amount of sand falling per unit time is made uniform, the time during which the sand height rises will be short at the beginning and end of the performance, and the time during which the sand height rises will be longer as the performance approaches the middle stage.
Figure 325(e) shows an example of the reserved image and hourglass image when a triangular reserved image is used. In this case, if the amount of sand falling per unit time is made uniform, the height of the sand will slowly increase in the early stages of the presentation, allowing the player to recognize what color sand is falling. Furthermore, as the presentation progresses, the time it takes for the sand to increase in height will become shorter, making it appear to the player that the height of the sand has suddenly increased at the end of the presentation, making the presentation more dynamic.
In these examples, the height of the sand may be increased uniformly per unit time.

In Figures 325(a) to 325(c) (including Figures 325(d) and 325(e)), an example is described in which the process starts at timing t3 and ends at timing t9, but it goes without saying that the time from start to end is not limited to this.
Also, for example, in a low-probability non-time-saving state, it may be possible to execute an "hourglass hold change effect" in any of a plurality of effect stages (such as a first effect stage in which a first background image and a first character are displayed, a second effect stage in which a second background image different from the first background image and a second character different from the first character are displayed, etc.; a certain effect stage continues over a plurality of (for example, 10 to 30) changing displays, and is changed to another effect stage based on a predetermined trigger, such as a special reach effect resulting in a miss).
Furthermore, the "hourglass reserve change effect" may be executable in all or some of these stages. In this case, the appearance (display mode) of the reserved image may be the same or different for each stage. If it is different, for example, the shape of the reserved image may be a shape corresponding to the motif of the stage. Note that even if the stages are different, the degree of expectation suggested by the color of the reserved image and the relationship between the color and the order of expectation may be the same.
In all performance stages, the falling sand performance may start at timing t3 and end at timing t9, for example, or in the first performance stage, the falling sand performance may start at timing t3 and end at timing t9, while in the second performance stage, the falling sand performance may start at timing t3 and end at timing t7, and so on, so that it may be different for each performance stage (depending on the performance stage, or for each performance stage, the start timing may be the same, the end timing may be the same, or both the start timing and the end timing may be different).

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 322, one of presentation patterns 02 to 04 is executed, but it is also possible to execute only presentation pattern 04. In this case, the color of the reserved image is confirmed to be upgraded to a color with a high expectation when the hourglass image begins to be displayed, so the player will have great anticipation as to what color sand image will be displayed. Furthermore, after the sand image is displayed, the player will be able to watch with satisfaction as the reserved image changes color to the sand image color.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 322, the "hourglass hold change effect" is executed immediately after the start of the changing display, but the "hourglass hold change effect" may also be executed at other times.
For example, the "hourglass reserve change effect" may be executed after the start of the variable display and before the pseudo consecutive effect (a so-called general pseudo consecutive change effect in which decorative symbols are changed again at high speed after a predetermined symbol or a predetermined symbol combination is displayed), during the pseudo consecutive effect, while a reach state is being formed, during a special reach effect, etc. Alternatively, the execution of this effect may be started during one of these periods and ended during the other period.
Alternatively, a special reach effect may be displayed in a manner suggesting a loss, and the decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped in a manner indicating a loss, and an "hourglass reserve change effect" may be executed. In this case, the stop mode of the decorative symbols (the result of the special lottery) may be indicated depending on whether the reserve change effect is successful or not. That is, if the sand falls to the end and the reserved image changes, the decorative symbols may change to a mode indicating a jackpot and then be stopped and displayed, and if the sand does not fall to the end and the reserved image does not change, the decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed while remaining temporarily stopped in a manner indicating a loss.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 322, the presentation pattern in which the sand images continue to fall has been shown with reference to presentation pattern 03 to presentation pattern 05. Below, a modified presentation pattern in which the falling of the sand images may be interrupted will be described with reference to Figure 326.
In the effect pattern 01 shown in Fig. 326, the falling of the sand is stopped from timing t5 to timing t7, and then the display shows the sand falling again from timing t7 to timing t9. Note that the display state at timing t9 is such that two-thirds of the sand has fallen, as shown in Fig. 323(g).
After that, the display of the hourglass image ends and the reserved image is displayed in its original state. Figure 324(a) shows the display state at this time.
On the other hand, in the effect pattern 02 shown in Fig. 326, the falling of the sand is interrupted during the period from timing t5 to timing t7, and then the display shows the sand falling again during the period from timing t7 to timing t11. Note that the display state at timing t11 is a state in which all the sand has fallen, as shown in Fig. 323(h). After that, the display of the hourglass image ends, and the reserved image is displayed in the color of the falling sand. Fig. 324(c) shows the display state at this time.
In this way, by allowing the falling of the sand to be interrupted (the erosion of the sand in the hourglass to be temporarily stopped), the player has to wait and watch to see whether the sand has fallen to the end and the pending image has changed, which gives the player a sense of teasing, increasing the player's anticipation for the sand to fall again and making it possible to increase the interest.

Multiple interruption periods may be provided, each of which may be different. The presentation pattern 02 shown in FIG. 326(b) shows an effect pattern in which the sand is stopped from falling for two seconds, from timing t5 to timing t7, and then the sand continues to fall. The presentation pattern 03 shown in FIG. 326(c) shows an effect pattern in which the sand is stopped from falling for four seconds, from timing t5 to timing t9, and then the sand does not continue to fall (the sand stops falling at timing t11). The presentation pattern 04 shown in FIG. 326(d) shows an effect pattern in which the sand is stopped from falling for four seconds, from timing t5 to timing t9, and then the sand continues to fall (all the sand has fallen at timing t13). By providing multiple interruption periods in this way, the player can be kept waiting, wondering when the sand will resume falling.
The length of the interruption time is not limited to four seconds, but may be one second or three seconds.

The number of interruptions is not limited to one, but can be two or more times. Presentation pattern 05 shown in Figure 326 (e) shows an presentation pattern in which the falling of the sand is interrupted twice, for two seconds from timing t5 to timing t7 and for two seconds from timing t9 to timing t11, after which the sand falls to the end. Note that in presentation pattern 05, the first and second interruption times are the same, two seconds, but the interruption times can also be different. For example, the first interruption time could be one second and the second interruption time could be three seconds. By providing multiple interruptions in this way, the sand falling can be interrupted again after it has resumed, further teasing the player.

The expectation that the sand will fall to the end (i.e., the expectation that the reserved ball will be upgraded) may be suggested by either the length of the interruption time or the number of interruptions, or both. For example, the longer the interruption time or the more interruptions there are, the higher the expectation that the sand will fall to the end. In this case, the player will watch the presentation in the hope that the interruption time or the number of interruptions will be longer.
On the other hand, the longer the interruption time or the more interruptions there are, the lower the likelihood that the sand will fall to the end. In this case, the player will watch the presentation in the hope that the sand will resume falling as soon as possible or that the sand will not be interrupted.

The falling of sand may be interrupted by a player's operation. For example, the falling of sand may be interrupted by pressing a button once, and may be resumed by pressing the button again. This configuration allows the player to interrupt the effect at their will, allowing them to take a photo of the effect with their smartphone or operate the ball lending button 328 at their leisure. Furthermore, after these tasks are completed, the player can enjoy the effect at their leisure.
In this case, a button-like image may be displayed to prompt the player to operate the button, or the button-like image may not be displayed (but the button operation itself is enabled) in a hidden button effect. In addition, when the button-like image is displayed, it may be displayed at any timing, such as before the hourglass hold change effect starts, before the sand is displayed and starts to fall, or while the sand is falling.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 323, the reserved image is displayed as being upgraded when all the sand has fallen, but at the timing when all the sand has fallen (for example, timing t9 in presentation pattern 05 shown in Fig. 322(e) or timing t11 in presentation pattern 02 shown in Fig. 326(b)), the hourglass image may be temporarily erased and immediately thereafter an hourglass image with sand of a more promising color may be displayed, allowing the reserved image to be further upgraded. For example, after all the green sand has fallen and the blue reserved image has changed to a green reserved image, the "hourglass reserved change presentation" may be executed again, and a presentation in which a red sand image falls within the hourglass image may be executed.
When changing from blue to green, the sand image may be dropped in the manner shown in FIG. 325(a). On the other hand, when changing from green to red, the sand image may be dropped in the manner shown in FIG. 325(b). Furthermore, when comparing the manner shown in FIG. 325(a) with the manner shown in FIG. 325(b), it is preferable that the time required for all the sand to fall is longer in the latter. This manner can prolong the presentation of the latter manner, which creates a greater sense of anticipation.

Although an example has been shown in which the "hourglass hold change effect" may be executed again immediately after the "hourglass hold change effect" has ended, the "hourglass hold change effect" may also be executed two or more times in succession.
Furthermore, instead of ending the display of the hourglass image at the end of the "hourglass reserve change effect," the hourglass may be turned 180 degrees and a sand image of a more promising color may be displayed, thereby starting a second "hourglass reserve change effect."
Furthermore, the "hourglass hold change effect" may be executed two or more times without being consecutive. For example, the "hourglass hold change effect" may be executed a total of two or more times in situations such as after the start of the variable display and before the pseudo consecutive effect starts, during the pseudo consecutive effect, while a reach state is forming, or during a special reach effect. Furthermore, between the execution of the "hourglass hold change effect" and the "hourglass hold change effect," another effect that suggests the degree of expectation may be executed. Alternatively, the execution of this effect may be started during one of these periods (after the start of the variable display and before the pseudo consecutive effect starts, during the pseudo consecutive effect, while a reach state is forming, or during a special reach effect), and the execution of this effect may be ended during another period.
Alternatively, the special reach effect may end in a manner suggesting a loss, and the decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped in a manner indicating a loss, and the "hourglass reserve change effect" may be executed. In this case, as described above, it is preferable that the decorative symbols change to a manner indicating a jackpot when all the sand has fallen.
In this way, by making it possible for the "hourglass hold change effect" to be executed multiple times, even if not all the sand falls and the effect ends in failure, it is possible to create a sense of expectation that the effect will start a second time or later.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 322 and 323, if the effect ends before the sand has fallen to the end (for example, effect pattern 02 to effect pattern 04 in Figure 322), the reserved image in its original color (in the examples of effect patterns 02 to 04 in Figure 322, the reserved image in blue) is displayed so that the expectation level does not decrease, but if the effect ends before the sand has fallen to the end, a display that decreases the expectation level (demotion) may be displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, 50%). For example, at timing t3 of effect pattern 02, timing t5 of effect pattern 03, and timing t7 of effect pattern 04, the blue reserved image may be changed to the normal white reserved image with a predetermined probability.
Furthermore, to clearly inform the player that the sand has not yet fallen to the end, for example, after a predetermined time (e.g., one second) has elapsed at timing t3 of presentation pattern 02, timing t5 of presentation pattern 03, or timing t7 of presentation pattern 04, the blue reserved image may be changed to the normal white reserved image with a predetermined probability. During this one second, the hourglass display may be left as is. The timing for ending the hourglass display may be the timing when a display is made to demote the reserved image, or one second after the timing when a display is made to demote the reserved image.
The reserved image may be changed to any reserved image that suggests a lower degree of expectation than the reserved image before the start of the performance. For example, if the reserved image before the start of the performance was green, the reserved image may be changed to blue or normal white.
Alternatively, regardless of the reserved image before the start of the performance, it may be changed to a normal reserved image that suggests the lowest expectation. For example, if the reserved image before the start of the performance is a green reserved image or a red reserved image, it may be changed to a normal white reserved image. In other words, in this case, green and red reserved images are displayed in the area where the reserved image is displayed, and a white reserved image is displayed in the area where the reserved image is displayed thereafter.
The predetermined probability is not limited to 50%, but may be 10% or 100%. A probability of about 10% can be less likely to cause anxiety in the player. On the other hand, if it is set to 100%, a greater sense of tension is created in the player, which can increase the joy felt by the player when all the sand falls and the reserved image is promoted.
This type of effect can make the player feel a sense of tension. Also, the number of times the "hourglass reserve change effect" is executed can be increased.

In addition, if the "hourglass hold change presentation" ends before it has progressed to a predetermined stage, the display indicating a decrease in the degree of expectation is not displayed, and the display indicating a decrease in the degree of expectation may be displayed only when the "hourglass hold change presentation" has progressed to a predetermined stage. An example of the predetermined stage is the t7 stage (stage 4/6) in the case of FIG. 325(a), but since it is more tense to display a display indicating a decrease in the degree of expectation only when a certain number of stages have progressed, the predetermined stage may be set arbitrarily, but it is more desirable not to display a display indicating a decrease in the degree of expectation when half of the stages have not been reached.
This type of presentation can prevent the player from feeling unreasonable or uncomfortable when a display that lowers the expectation of the reserved image is suddenly displayed.

Sand images of a color with lower expectation than the color of the reserved image may be displayed, and when all the sand images have fallen, the reserved image may change to a reserved image of a color with lower expectation. For example, a "hourglass reserved image change effect" may be executed in which blue sand falls while a green reserved image is displayed, and when all the sand has fallen, the reserved image may be demoted to a blue reserved image. This can increase the appearance rate of reserved images with high expectation.

Although it has been shown that the reserved image may be demoted as a result of the execution of the "hourglass reserve change effect," in that situation, another reserve change effect may be executed or the hourglass reserve change effect may be executed again to again promote the reserved image. Also, after the reserved image is promoted again, the "hourglass reserve change effect" may be executed. In this case, if the reserved image is promoted by another reserve change effect or if the reserved image is promoted by another "hourglass reserve change effect," the result of the change display of the decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot, and a jackpot game state may be generated.
For example, if the reserved image displayed in blue is demoted to a white regular reserved image without all the sand falling due to an "hourglass reserved change effect" (the area displaying the reserved image changes from blue and green to white), and then another reserved change effect or another hourglass reserved change effect is executed, the reserved image changes back to blue. In this state, the "hourglass reserved change effect" occurs again, and the green sand, which has a higher expectation than blue, falls again (blue and green is displayed again in the area displaying the reserved image). The blue reserved image may always change to a green reserved image, and a jackpot game state may always occur. While a jackpot game state is always triggered when the effect is triggered again, it may also be set to occur three or more times. In the case of three times, the display corresponding to the demotion (blue/green followed by white) will be displayed twice (multiple times) for each change. Also, although it has been described that a jackpot gaming state always occurs, it is also possible to make it so that the jackpot gaming state does not always occur. However, it is preferable to set the expected probability of the jackpot gaming state occurring at about 50% so that the impression of demotion is not perceived as a bad one. Furthermore, when the reserved image turns blue again after demotion and the "hourglass reserved change effect" occurs again in that state, the "hourglass reserved change effect" may be generated in a color different from the color that failed the first time. Specifically, for example, the color of the sand in the second "hourglass reserved change effect" may be red or gold, etc., when the expected probability is green or higher.

In this way, even if a player is demoted, depending on how the presentation progresses, a favorable result may occur for the player, thereby maintaining motivation to play. Furthermore, if other players only view the latter part of such a series of presentations, for example, only the presentation that has been promoted to a green reserved image, the decorative symbols will be displayed in a manner that indicates the occurrence of a jackpot game state when the green reserved image is displayed. This will lead players to change their perception of the reserved image (in this case, the green reserved image) that they perceive as having a relatively low probability of winning to the point that it actually has a fairly high probability of winning, which will result in an increase in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the display mode of the reserved image changes due to the "hourglass reserved change effect," the reserved images displayed in the first to fourth reserved display areas (see Figures 123 to 125, etc. for the reserved display areas) may also be modified so that the "hourglass reserved change effect" is executed. In this case, it is preferable to execute the "hourglass reserved change effect" based on the look-ahead processing.

When executing the "hourglass reserve change effect" for the reserved images displayed in the first to fourth reserved display areas, it is preferable to complete the effect during the execution of a single variable display. With this configuration, it is not necessary to move the reserved images during the execution of the "hourglass reserve change effect," which prevents the player from becoming confused about the effect content and simplifies the display process.
The "hourglass hold change effect" may be executed at the timing when the reserved image moves to the adjacent reserved display area at the start of the variable display. For example, the "hourglass hold change effect" may be executed immediately after the blue reserved image that moves from the third reserved display area to the second reserved display area at the start of the variable display completes the movement.

Although an example has been shown in which the "hourglass hold change effect" is executed within a single change display, it may also be executed across two or more change displays. For example, the effect may be started when a certain hold image is displayed in the third hold display area, and finished when that hold image is displayed in the first hold display area. Alternatively, the effect may be started when a certain hold image is displayed in the fourth hold display area, and finished when that hold image is displayed in that hold display area.

Based on the look-ahead process, the execution of the "hourglass hold change effect" may be notified in advance before the variable display begins. For example, when a start winning occurs during the execution of a preceding variable display, the look-ahead process is performed, and if it is determined that the "hourglass hold change effect" will be executed on the variable display corresponding to the start winning and the variable display corresponding to the start winning is started, an hourglass-shaped hourglass icon image may be displayed in a predetermined location in the display area to notify the execution of the "hourglass hold change effect." Note that the icon image may be displayed in a predetermined location on the left side of the display area, as in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 295 to 297, etc. Furthermore, when the hourglass icon image is acquired, it may be displayed in the same manner as the microphone icon image.
The hourglass icon image thus obtained may be enlarged and moved to the position of the reserved image (or a predetermined reserved image) at the start of the variable display, so as to function as an hourglass image. In this case, a sand image of a predetermined color (e.g., green or red) may be displayed in advance within the hourglass icon image. In this case, the player will wait for the start of the variable display while anticipating the color change from the time of the initial winning, providing a sense of anticipation for a jackpot over a long period of time. Note that, in this case, if the "hourglass reserved change effect" is indicated for the reserved image before the variable display corresponding to the reserved image is executed, the change may be guaranteed without executing the so-called false effect as shown in FIGS. 322(a) to 322(d).

An example has been shown in which the "hourglass hold change effect" is executed on the hold image in question or on the hold images displayed in the first hold display area to the fourth hold display area, but the "hourglass hold change effect" may also be modified so that it can be executed on the hold images displayed in the first hold display area to the fourth hold display area at the same time as the "hourglass hold change effect" is executed on the hold image in question.
For example, in the reserved image, the effect may be performed in the form of effect pattern 03 shown in Fig. 322(c), and in the reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area, the effect may be performed in the form of effect pattern 05 shown in Fig. 322(e). In this case, the color of the reserved image does not change, but the color of the reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area will change.
With this configuration, even if the color does not change in one effect, the color may change in the other effect, thereby reducing the disappointment felt by the player who was watching one effect. Furthermore, when the reserved image and the "hourglass reserved change effect" on the reserved image are executed simultaneously, it is also possible to provide patterns in which all change, only a portion change, or none change. When all change, the player can be provided with an unparalleled sense of pleasure, when only a portion change, a sense of relief, and by providing cases in which none change, a sense of tension can be provided to the player.
While an example has been shown in which the "hourglass hold change effect" is executed on the reserved image and one reserved image, the "hourglass hold change effect" may be executed on multiple (up to four) reserved images displayed in the first to fourth reserved display areas, rather than just one. In this case, up to five "hourglass hold change effects" will be executed in parallel. However, when the reserved image is displayed in the fourth reserved display area, up to the third reserved image has been stored, and when it is stored in the fourth reserved image (when the starting gate is entered), the remaining time may be long or short. Therefore, up to four "hourglass hold change effects" (reserved images displayed in the fourth reserved display area, excluding the reserved image displayed in the fourth reserved display area) may be executed in parallel.

The "hourglass reserve change effect" of the reserved image and the "hourglass reserve change effect" of the reserved image may be executed in a predetermined order.
For example, after the "hourglass hold change effect" of the reserved image is executed, the "hourglass hold change effect" may be executed simultaneously on the reserved images displayed in the first reserve display area to the fourth reserve display area.
Alternatively, the "hourglass hold change effect" may be executed in the following order: the hold image, the hold image displayed in the first hold display area, the hold image displayed in the second hold display area, the hold image displayed in the third hold display area, and the hold image shown in the fourth hold display area.
Alternatively, the "hourglass hold change effect" may be executed in the following order: the hold image, the hold image displayed in the fourth hold display area, the hold image displayed in the third hold display area, the hold image displayed in the second hold display area, and the hold image shown in the first hold display area.

Alternatively, the "hourglass hold change effect" may be executed simultaneously on the hold images displayed in the first hold display area through the fourth hold display area, and then the "hourglass hold change effect" on the hold image may be executed.
Alternatively, the "hourglass hold change effect" may be executed in the order of the hold image displayed in the first hold display area, the hold image displayed in the second hold display area, the hold image displayed in the third hold display area, and the hold image shown in the fourth hold display area.
Alternatively, the "hourglass hold change effect" may be executed in the order of the hold image displayed in the fourth hold display area, the hold image displayed in the third hold display area, the hold image displayed in the second hold display area, the hold image shown in the first hold display area, and the hold image itself.

Note that while the example given shows the case where the maximum number of reserved items is present, if the number of reserved items is not the maximum, it is advisable to execute the effect on each reserved item image corresponding to the existing reserved items. For example, if there are two reserved items, it is advisable to execute the "hourglass reserved item change effect" in a predetermined order on the reserved item image, the reserved item image displayed in the first reserved item display area, and the reserved item image displayed in the second reserved item display area.

In these examples, a subsequent "hourglass hold change effect" may be started while a previously started "hourglass hold change effect" is being executed, so that multiple "hourglass hold change effects" are executed simultaneously.
Alternatively, the subsequent "hourglass hold change effect" may be started immediately after the execution of the previously started "hourglass hold change effect" is completed or after a predetermined time (for example, one second) has elapsed.

In this way, when the "hourglass reserve change effect" is executed simultaneously, there is a possibility that one of the reserved images will be promoted, which reduces the disappointment felt by the player. Also, when the "hourglass reserve change effect" is executed in sequence, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the effect results.

The "Exploding Reserve Change Effect," another reserve change effect with a different presentation format from the "Hourglass Reserve Change Effect," will be explained with reference to Figures 327, 328, etc. Note that, like the "Hourglass Reserve Change Effect," the "Exploding Reserve Change Effect" is a modified version of the embodiment explained with reference to Figures 123 to 321, etc.

Figure 327 shows a time chart for the "Explosion Reserve Change Presentation." Also, Figure 328 shows an example of the display when the "Explosion Reserve Change Presentation" is executed.

Figure 328 (a) shows the state when the decorative pattern is stopped and just before the variable display starts. In this example, the color of the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is blue.
The presentation pattern 01 shown in Figure 327(a) is a presentation pattern in which the "explosion reserve change presentation" is not executed, but is shown for comparison with a presentation pattern in which the "explosion reserve change presentation" is executed. The variable display begins at timing t0, and is temporarily stopped from timing t0 to timing t1. Figure 328(b) shows the state in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped. Next, from timing t1, a state of high-speed fluctuation occurs, and at timing t30, the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol temporarily stop, and at timing t31, all symbols are displayed as stopped. After being displayed in a stopped state until timing t32, depending on the result of the special lottery indicated by the stopping state of the decorative symbols, if there is a miss, the next variable display will begin, and if there is a jackpot, the jackpot game will begin.

Effect pattern 02 shown in Figure 327(b) is an effect pattern in which a bomb character image is displayed in the lower left corner of the display area and moves toward the right side of the reserved image, but then turns back midway. In this case, from timing t0 to timing t3, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in a temporarily stopped state with the patterns they had when the changing display began. Also, from timing t2 to timing t3, a bomb character image is displayed in the lower left corner of the display area and moves toward the right side of the reserved image, but then turns back midway. Figure 328(c) shows a state in which a bomb character image is displayed in the lower left corner of the display area at a specified timing between timing t2 and timing t3. In effect pattern 02, at timing t3, the bomb character image moves off the screen from the lower left corner of the display area and becomes invisible, and the decorative pattern begins to change at high speed. Figure 328(f) shows the display state at the time when the display of the bomb character image ends.

The effect pattern 03 shown in Figure 327(c) and the effect pattern 04 shown in Figure 327(d) are effect patterns in which a bomb character image is displayed at the bottom left of the display area, moves toward the right side of the reserved image, overlaps the reserved image, and explodes. In this case, from timing t0 to timing t4, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in a temporarily suspended state, remaining as they were at the start of the variable display. Also, from timing t2 to timing t3, the bomb character image is displayed at the bottom left of the display area and moves toward the right side of the reserved image. Figure 328(c) shows the state in which the bomb character image is displayed at the bottom of the display area at a predetermined timing between timing t2 and timing t3. Figure 328(d) shows the state in which the bomb character image is displayed overlapping the foreground of the reserved image at timing t3. In effect pattern 03 and effect pattern 04, the bomb character image explodes immediately after being displayed overlapping the foreground of the reserved image at timing t3, displaying an explosion image, and this state continues until timing t4. Figure 328(e) shows the state in which the explosion image is displayed. The display of the explosion image ends at timing t4.
As shown in Figures 328(d) and 328(e), the reserved image becomes invisible during the period from timing t3 to timing t4.
The color of the explosion image is composed of colors such as gray and black, which are not displayed as the colors of the reserved image before or after the change.

In the case of effect pattern 03 shown in Figure 327(c), after the explosion image has finished displaying, the pending image will become visible in blue, the color it was in before the "explosion pending change effect" was executed. Figure 328(f) shows the display state at this time.

In the case of effect pattern 04 shown in Figure 327(d), after the explosion image display has finished, the reserved image becomes visible in green, which is different from the color before the "explosion reserved change effect" was executed. Figure 328(g) shows the display state at this time.

The reserved image is not limited to green, but may change to a reserved image with a higher expectation (red, gold, rainbow). Note that in the "hourglass reserved change effect," an embodiment was shown in which the reserved image may change to a reserved image with a lower expectation, but in the "explosion reserved change effect," the reserved image will not change to a reserved image with a lower expectation.

In the "Explosion Hold Change Effect," the time required from the appearance of the bomb character to the display of the hold image after the explosion is set to 2 seconds (timing t2 to timing t4), but it is not limited to 2 seconds and can be set to anywhere from 1 to 3 seconds.

In this way, in the "explosion reserve change effect", a predetermined reserved image changes to a reserved image with a higher expectation, but does not change to a reserved image with a lower expectation. By making it possible to implement both the "hourglass reserve change effect" and the "explosion reserve change effect", it is possible to increase the variety of effects that change the reserved image.
Furthermore, in the "explosion reserve change effect," the reserved image changes in a shorter time (2 seconds) than in the "hourglass reserve change effect," in which the reserved image changes when sand falls over 6 seconds, so if the reserved image is suddenly displayed as being downgraded, the player may feel unreasonable and lose interest, so the reserve image is prevented from being downgraded.
On the other hand, in the "hourglass reserve change effect", the effect time is longer than the "explosion reserve change effect", and if all the sand falls during the effect, the reserved image is promoted, so the player can feel a sense of suspense for a long time as to whether the reserved image will be promoted or not, which can increase the interest. In some modified examples, the reserved image may be demoted, but in this case, it is possible to make the player feel an even more suspenseful sense of suspense.

In addition, various embodiments and variations of the "hourglass hold change effect" can be applied to the "explosion hold change effect" as appropriate. For example, if the "explosion hold change effect" is applied to the hold images displayed in the first hold display area to the fourth hold display area, it is possible to change the hold image into one with a higher level of expectation.

The rate at which the "hourglass reserve change effect" is executed should be higher than the rate at which the "explosion reserve change effect" is executed. For example, the "hourglass reserve change effect" and the "explosion reserve change effect" may be executed at a ratio of 4:1. With this configuration, the "hourglass reserve change effect", which has a relatively longer execution time, is executed more frequently, which can make the player feel more interested.

On the other hand, the "hourglass reserve change effect" and the "explosion reserve change effect" may be executed at the same rate. For example, the "hourglass reserve change effect" and the "explosion reserve change effect" may be executed at a 1:1 ratio.
Alternatively, the rate at which the "hourglass reserve change effect" is executed may be lower than the rate at which the "explosion reserve change effect" is executed. For example, the "hourglass reserve change effect" and the "explosion reserve change effect" may be executed at a ratio of 1:4.

It is recommended that the probability of the reserved image being promoted in the "hourglass reserved image change effect" be higher than the probability of the reserved image being promoted in the "explosive reserved image change effect." This can increase the interest of players over a long period of time.

On the other hand, the reserved image may be promoted at the same rate when the "hourglass reserved change effect" is executed and when the "explosion reserved change effect" is executed.
Alternatively, the probability that the reserved image will be promoted in the "hourglass reserved change effect" may be lower than the probability that the reserved image will be promoted in the "explosive reserved change effect."

In the "hourglass reserve change effect," it takes at least six seconds from the time the sand starts falling until all the sand has fallen and the reserved image changes (for example, the period from timing t3 to timing t9 in effect pattern 05 of Figure 322 (e)). On the other hand, in the "explosion reserve change effect," it takes two seconds from the time the bomb character starts to be displayed until the reserved image changes. This makes the "hourglass reserve change effect" even more interesting.

The time from when the sand starts falling in the "hourglass reserve change effect" until all the sand has fallen and the reserved image changes may be the same (for example, 4 seconds) as the time from when the bomb character starts to be displayed until the reserved image changes in the "explosion reserve change effect."
Alternatively, the time from when the sand starts falling in the "hourglass reserve change effect" until all the sand has fallen and the reserved image changes (for example, 3 seconds) may be shorter than the time from when the bomb character starts to be displayed until the reserved image changes in the "explosion reserve change effect" (for example, 6 seconds). In this way, for example, when the "hourglass reserve change effect" is performed on the reserved image, the reserved display after the change gradually erodes the area of the reserved image, whereas the "explosion reserve change effect" erodes the area of the reserved image all at once, so that variation in the display mode when the reserve changes can be provided, increasing interest.

When executing the "hourglass reserve change effect" or "explosion reserve change effect," a specific sound may be output that matches the effect (the "specific sound" here refers to a sound that is output in accordance with the progress of the reserve change effect, and is not a sound that indicates that the reserve has changed). In this case, the sound output may be the same sound or different sounds. Also, the specific sound may be output only for one effect, and not for the other effect.
If the same specific sound is output for the "hourglass hold change effect" and the "explosion hold change effect," there is an effect that neither effect will be missed, and if different sounds are output, there is an effect that the player can recognize which hold change effect is being performed just by the sound without looking at the display area, and if only one effect is performed, there is a risk of missing the effect, so there is an effect that the player can focus on the LCD.
The timing for outputting the specific sound may be the start of the effect or a predetermined timing during the effect. Furthermore, a special sound different from the specific sound (the special sound here is not a sound output in accordance with the progress of the hold change effect, but a sound indicating that the hold has changed) may be output for the "hourglass hold change effect" and the "explosive hold change effect." However, since the changed hold display is suddenly displayed for the "explosive hold change effect" (FIG. 328(e) and FIG. 328(f)), it is advisable to always output a sound indicating that the hold has changed or a sound indicating which hold has changed. However, for the "hourglass hold change effect," when the hold changes, the player already knows which hold display will change to during the hourglass hold change effect, so the special sound does not need to be output.

In one change display, both the "hourglass reserve change effect" and the "explosion reserve change effect" may be executed. For example, the "explosion reserve change effect" may be executed after the "hourglass reserve change effect" is executed, or the "hourglass reserve change effect" may be executed after the "explosion reserve change effect" is executed.
With this configuration, if the result of the first hold change performance is not favorable to the player (such as the hold not changing or being demoted), a hold change performance different from that hold change performance will be executed, so the player can view the performance with a changed mindset compared to when the first hold change performance is executed again.
Furthermore, if the same hold change effect is executed again, the player may be reminded of the undesirable result of the most recent effect, which may cause the player to feel unpleasant, but the above configuration can prevent the player from feeling unpleasant.

The "hourglass reserve change effect" may be executed simultaneously with other effects that can suggest the degree of expectation.
For example, while the "hourglass reserve change effect" is being executed, the execution of another effect may be started. Alternatively, the "hourglass reserve change effect" and the execution of another effect may be started simultaneously. Alternatively, the "hourglass reserve change effect" may be started while the other effect is being executed.
Also, the execution of the "hourglass hold change effect" may be terminated while another effect is being executed. Alternatively, the execution of the "hourglass hold change effect" and another effect may be terminated simultaneously. Alternatively, the execution of another effect may be terminated while the "hourglass hold change effect" is being executed.

Other examples of effects that can be adopted include the pseudo consecutive effects shown with reference to Figure 261, etc., the special reach effects shown with reference to Figures 276, 277, etc., the title images showing the titles of the reach effects shown with reference to Figures 276, 277, etc., the preview image (dialogue image or cut-in image) display effect shown with reference to Figure 278, etc., and the step-up effect shown with reference to Figure 313, etc.
The hourglass image in the "hourglass reserve change effect" may be displayed overlapping a predetermined image displayed in another effect. In this case, it is preferable to display the hourglass image in front of the predetermined image.
Alternatively, a predetermined image that is displayed in another effect may be displayed in a position that does not overlap with the hourglass image in the "hourglass hold change effect."

With this configuration, even if a sand image of a color with low expectations is displayed during the "hourglass reserve change effect," other effects can be used to maintain the expectation of a jackpot.

From the viewpoint of drawing the player's attention to the "hourglass reserve change effect," it is advisable to prevent one or all of the other effects from being executed simultaneously with the "hourglass reserve change effect." In this case, the hourglass image and the image used to execute the other predetermined effect are not displayed simultaneously. This configuration allows the player to focus on the "hourglass reserve change effect."
In addition, the predetermined other effects with a 100% expectation rate may not be executed simultaneously with the "hourglass reserve change effect." In this case, the player can be directed to the predetermined other effects that are more desirable to the player.

A predetermined image displayed in another presentation may be displayed in a plurality of different colors, and the color of the image may indicate the degree of expectation.
The colors used in this case may be white, red, or gold, which are some of the colors used as the colors of the reserved image in the "hourglass reserved change effect." It is also preferable to make the degree of expectation increase in this order of colors (white, red, gold). Specifically, if another effect is a step-up effect as shown in FIG. 313, etc., and the degree of expectation is indicated by the color of the frame of the image displayed as this step-up effect, the colors of this frame should be white, red, and gold.
In this way, by using the color used to suggest the degree of expectation in the "hourglass reserve change effect" to suggest the degree of expectation in other effects as well, there will be cases where the color used in other effects is the same as the color of the falling sand in the "hourglass reserve change effect." This provides a sense of security to the player that the reserved image will change to a reserved image of a different color in the "hourglass reserve change effect."

On the other hand, colors that are not used in the "hourglass hold change effect" may be used as the image colors in other effects. For example, brown, orange, and purple may be used as the image colors. The degree of expectation may also increase in this order (brown, orange, purple). It is advisable to suggest the degree of expectation in some of the other effects using colors that are used in the "hourglass hold change effect," and to suggest the degree of expectation in the remaining other effects using colors that are not used in the "hourglass hold change effect."
In this way, by suggesting the degree of expectation with a color that is not used in the "hourglass hold change effect," it is possible to create a sense of expectation in the player that the effect may be a special color.
Furthermore, in a predetermined effect among the other effects, a plurality of display modes with different degrees of expectation may be provided, depending on the color used in the "hourglass hold change effect" and the color not used in the "hourglass hold change effect." Specifically, for example, when the predetermined effect is a step-up effect, if the expectation of the step-up effect varies depending on the color of the frame, the frame colors may be white, purple, red, and gold, with the expectation increasing in this order. In this case, the color not used in the "hourglass hold change effect" is purple, and when a purple frame is displayed, the expectation may be higher or lower than that of red, making the user wonder if it is a premium effect, and providing a sense of excitement.

After the "hourglass reserved change effect" has ended and the reserved image has been completely replaced with the reserved image of another color, execution of another effect may begin. Conversely, the "hourglass reserved change effect" may begin after execution of another effect has ended.
By adopting such an embodiment, the player can focus his/her attention on each of the effects.

In the "hourglass hold change effect," it has been shown that the time from when the sand starts to fall to when it stops is 6 seconds (effect pattern 05 shown in Figure 322 (e)), but in other effects, the time for which the image suggesting the degree of expectation is displayed should be shorter than this time.
With this configuration, the "hourglass reserve change effect" that determines whether the indicated expectation level changes or not can be more effectively executed.

In addition, for all other effects, the time for which the image indicating the degree of expectation is displayed may be shorter than the time from when the sand in the ``hourglass hold change effect'' starts to fall until it ends (from when the erosion of the area in which the hold image is displayed starts to when the erosion ends).
Alternatively, for some of the other effects, the time for which the image suggesting the degree of expectation is displayed may be shorter than the time from when the sand in the ``hourglass hold change effect'' starts to fall until it ends (from when it starts to erode the area in which the hold image is displayed until the erosion ends), and for other of the other effects (effects excluding some effects), the time for which the image suggesting the degree of expectation is displayed may be longer than the time from when the sand in the ``hourglass hold change effect'' starts to fall until it ends (from when it starts to erode the area in which the hold image is displayed until the erosion ends).
Alternatively, for all other effects, the time for which the image indicating the degree of expectation is displayed may be longer than the time from when the sand in the "hourglass hold change effect" starts to fall until it ends (from when the erosion of the area in which the hold image is displayed starts to when the erosion ends).

The output of specific background music (here, the specific background music is a sound different from the specific sound described above) may start from the start of the "hourglass pending change effect" or the start of the sand falling. If the pending image is successfully changed, the output of the specific background music may continue even after the "hourglass pending change effect" ends. On the other hand, if the pending image is unsuccessful in changing, the output of the specific background music may end at the time of failure (the time when the display of the sand image ends).
In this way, the fact that the reserved image has been promoted can be recognized for a predetermined period of time by the specific background music even after the reserved image has been promoted, which increases the sense of satisfaction of being promoted. Also, it is possible to inform other players of the promotion.
The timing for starting the output of the specific BGM may be a predetermined timing before the start of the "hourglass hold change effect." In this case, the output of the specific BGM also functions as a notice that the "hourglass hold change effect" will begin. Even if the output timing of the specific BGM is set to, for example, the start timing of the "hourglass hold change effect," when a special condition is met, the output timing of the specific BGM may be delayed from the start timing of the "hourglass hold change effect," or the output timing may be the same but the timing at which the specific BGM becomes audible may be delayed. If the specific BGM becomes audible later than the normal timing, the expectation level may be increased, thereby enhancing the excitement. The special condition referred to here may be determined based on the result of a win, determined by a customization setting operated by the player, or when a change before the change that causes the "hourglass hold change effect" as the hold image satisfies a predetermined condition (e.g., a non-reach change pattern or a change pattern that causes a specific SP reach).

The timing for ending the output of the specific BGM may be a predetermined timing before the variable display of the decorative pattern ends, or may be the timing when the variable display of the decorative pattern ends.
For example, when a reach state (a state in which the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed as the same symbol, and the center decorative symbol is scrolling or rapidly fluctuating) occurs, the output of a specific background music may be terminated. Also, at this time, background music corresponding to the reach state may be output.
In addition, when a reach state does not occur and the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state in a non-reach state, it is advisable to continue outputting the specific background music until the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, and to end outputting the specific background music at the timing when the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state.

Alternatively, if a special reach effect occurs, background music corresponding to the special reach effect is output and the output of the specific background music is terminated; if a special reach effect does not occur, the output of the specific background music may continue until the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state.

The background music may be music by a specific singer or the melody of a specific song. Alternatively, audio of specific lines may be used instead of background music.

In the "hourglass reserve change effect," a decorative light-emitting element having multiple light-emitting elements (e.g., full-color LEDs) may be illuminated in a color that is the same as or similar to the color of the reserved image or the sand image. Examples of the decorative light-emitting elements include the left door frame unit 530 and the right door frame unit 550 shown in FIGS. 47 to 55, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 shown in FIGS. 118 to 122, and the rear panel board 2420 shown in FIGS. 130 and 131. In the "hourglass reserve change effect," some or all of these decorative light-emitting elements may be illuminated.
Specifically, at the same time as the start of the "hourglass reserve change effect" or the start of the display of the sand image, the entirety of one or more illuminating decorative elements can be made to glow in the same color as the reserved image that was displayed before the "hourglass reserve change effect" started, and as the sand image falls, the lower part of the illuminating decorative element can be made to glow in the same color as the fallen sand image.
For example, in the case of performance pattern 05 shown in FIG. 322(e), at timing t2 or t3, the entire illuminating decorative element is illuminated in blue, the same color as the reserved image. Next, as the sand falls, the illuminating decorative element gradually changes from blue illumination from the bottom to green illumination. At timing t6, exactly half of the sand has fallen, and at this time, the illuminating decorative element is illuminated in blue in the upper half and green in the lower half. When the sand reaches the end at timing t9, the entire illuminating decorative element is illuminated in green illumination. It is also advisable to continue illuminating in green illumination throughout the entire display from timing t9 onward. Furthermore, to more clearly indicate the color change between timing t9 and timing t10, a flashing display may be used, alternating between the new color and off.
When the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 are illuminated in this manner, the entire gaming machine can alert those around it for a long period of time that the "hourglass reserve change effect" is being executed and that the color of the reserve image has changed.

If the sand stops falling midway, the light-emitting decorative element should return to its original color. For example, in the case of performance pattern 04 in Figure 322 (d), at timing t7, the display of the sand image ends and only the blue pending image is displayed. At the same time, the light-emitting decorative element should also return to its entire blue illumination.

The rear panel board substrate 2420 provided on the gaming board 5 can also be illuminated in a similar manner. The rear panel board substrate 2420 may be circular, the same shape as the reserved image. The rear panel board substrate 2420 is provided near the first starting hole 2002, but may also be provided in another location. For example, it may be provided near the display area of the gaming board side performance display device 1600, or near a movable decorative member provided on the gaming board 5.

The timing at which the light emission in green, which is the same or similar color as that after the pending image has changed due to the "hourglass pending change effect," ends may be a predetermined timing before the display of the decorative pattern changes ends, or it may be the timing at which the display of the decorative pattern changes ends.
For example, when a reach state (a state in which the decorative symbols on the left and right are temporarily stopped and displayed as the same symbol, and the central decorative symbol is scrolling or rapidly fluctuating) occurs, the green light may be turned off. Also, at this time, the light may be turned on in a color corresponding to the reach state.
In addition, if a reach state does not occur and the decorative pattern is displayed in a non-reach state, the green light should continue to be emitted until the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, and the green light should end at the time the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state.

Alternatively, if a special reach effect occurs, the light may be emitted in a manner corresponding to the special reach effect and the green light may be terminated, and if no special reach effect occurs, the green light may continue to be emitted until the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state.

The entire illuminating decorative component may be illuminated in the same color as the sand image simultaneously with the start of the "hourglass reserve change effect" or the start of the sand image display (i.e., the entire or part of the illuminating decorative component may be illuminated in the same color as the new sand before the area where the reserved image is displayed in the "hourglass reserve change effect" begins to be eroded by the new sand color). In such a case, all of the sand images of that color may be made to fall. This allows the player to be made aware in advance that the display mode of the reserved image will change. Note that while the example described here uses a reserved image displayed in blue and then changes to green in the "hourglass reserve change effect," other patterns (e.g., the reserved image displayed in green and then changes to red in the "hourglass reserve change effect") can also be applied based on the same technical concept. Note that in cases where the player is made aware of the pattern in advance, the flashing display described above may not be used (since the player is notified in advance).

The speed at which the sand falls may be changed in response to a predetermined button operation by the player. For example, the speed at which the sand falls may be increased or decreased in response to a predetermined button operation during the execution of the "hourglass hold change effect." The predetermined button operation may be any of a single button press, repeated button presses, a long button press, etc., as appropriate.
The valid operation period of the button operation may be from the start to the end of the "hourglass hold change effect." Alternatively, it may be from the time the sand image is displayed until the end of the "hourglass hold change effect."

The buttons may be any of the various buttons described in this specification, or may be configured to respond to the operation of other operating parts such as a lever instead of a button.
Furthermore, in this specification, when operational input from a player, such as a button (operation unit) or button operation (operation of the operation unit), is accepted, such an embodiment can be adopted as appropriate.
In addition, during the valid operation period of the operation unit, a simulated image that imitates the operation unit may be displayed in the display area, and may be called a "simulated image" instead of a "simulated image." In this case, the meaning is the same, that is, an image that imitates the operation unit.

For example, the player may press a button once to increase the speed at which the sand falls, so that all the sand falls in as little as three seconds, or the player may press a button once to decrease the speed at which the sand falls, so that all the sand falls in as long as nine seconds.
Alternatively, if the player presses the button repeatedly, the sand may fall faster, so that all the sand falls in as little as three seconds, or if the player holds down the button, the sand may fall slower, so that all the sand falls in as long as nine seconds.
If the player starts or stops pressing a button during the "hourglass hold change effect," the speed at which the sand falls will be longer than 3 seconds or shorter than 9 seconds.

The valid operation period may begin simultaneously with the start of the "hourglass hold change effect" or the start of the display of the sand image, and a simulated image resembling the shape of the button may be displayed during the valid operation period. The operation type (single press, rapid press, long press, etc.) and the effect obtained by the operation ("The sand will fall faster," "The sand will fall slower," etc.) may also be displayed at the same time. Furthermore, to let the player know in advance, the simulated image may be displayed before the valid operation period begins, or, to provide a sense of surprise, the simulated image may be displayed after the sand image starts falling (while it is falling and erosion is occurring).

In this way, by changing the speed at which the sand falls and altering the timing at which the display result is obtained depending on the operation mode, it is possible to make the presentation progress quickly or slowly. For example, when green sand, which has a relatively low expectation, is displayed, the presentation can progress quickly, and when gold sand, which has a relatively high expectation, the presentation can progress slowly, allowing the presentation to be tailored to the player's preferences.

In the "hourglass reserve change effect," when all the sand has fallen (at this time, the display state shown in FIG. 323(h) is reached), the hourglass image is not erased, and button operation is enabled for a predetermined period (for example, the valid operation period is set to 2 seconds), or the valid operation period is continued and a simulated image simulating the operation unit is displayed when all the sand has fallen or at a time after the valid operation period has ended, and when an operation is performed or when the valid operation period ends without an operation, the hourglass image is erased, or a new hourglass image is displayed at the same time as the hourglass image is erased. In the former case, the "hourglass reserve change effect" ends as is. In the latter case, a new display of falling sand is performed based on the newly displayed hourglass image and sand image. It is recommended that the newly displayed sand image be a sand image of a color that is more promising.
For example, after the blue reserved image is changed to the green reserved image, a new hourglass image and a red sand image may be displayed in response to operation of the operating unit, and the red sand may be displayed as falling.
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to create a sense of expectation that the reserved image will change further even immediately after all the sand has fallen.

When erasing the hourglass image at the time when an operation is performed or when the operation valid period ends without any operation being performed, a plurality of display modes for erasing the hourglass image may be provided, and the degree of expectation may be indicated depending on the display mode.
For example, display modes such as a display in which the hourglass image is erased as is, a display in which the hourglass image is broken and scattered around the reserved image and then erased, or a display in which the hourglass image is broken and scattered throughout the display area and then erased may be adopted. The degree of expectation may also increase in this order. Also, a display unrelated to the "hourglass reserve change display" may be selected. For example, an hourglass image erasure pattern may be selected at 1/3, and a display unrelated to the "hourglass reserve change display" (for example, a display that does not affect the reserve change display, such as a comment preview) may be selected at 2/3.

On the other hand, during the "hourglass hold change effect," it is possible to not set a valid operation period for button operations and not display simulated images that resemble the shape of the buttons. This allows the player to concentrate on watching the effect.

It is also possible to start displaying a simulated image shaped like a button just before all the sand images have fallen (for example, at timing t8 in Figure 325(a)), and start the valid operation period after all the sand images have finished falling. Even with this configuration, the player can concentrate on watching the presentation. It is also possible to start displaying an effect that is displayed just before all the sand images have fallen (for example, at timing t8 in Figure 325(a)), before the simulated image shaped like a button is displayed, and then display the simulated image shaped like a button after all the sand images have finished falling.

As movable members for presentation having a decorative function, the movable frame members (right ear frame member 7100, left ear frame member 7200, etc.) shown with reference to Figures 118 to 122, etc., and the movable members for presentation (panel board rear decorative member 2410, panel board rear substrate 2420, etc.) shown with reference to Figures 133 and 134, etc., have been shown, but these decorative members for presentation may be operated in a predetermined manner in connection with the execution of the "hourglass hold change presentation." For example, the decorative member for presentation may be moved from the standby position to the moving position during the execution of the "hourglass hold change presentation" (at the start of the "hourglass hold change presentation," when the held image is being eroded by the falling sand images, or at any time between when all the sand images have finished falling and when the hourglass image display is erased).
The decorative members for presentation may have any suitable shape.
Furthermore, the operating modes of the decorative elements for performance are not limited to simple movement modes such as moving from a standby position to a moving position, but can also include operation modes such as continuous movement back and forth within a specified area, vibrating operation modes, and rotational or rotary movement around a specified axis.

The degree of expectation may be suggested depending on the type and operation of the decorative member for performance. For example, a different degree of expectation may be set for each decorative member for performance, and the degree of expectation may be suggested when the decorative member for performance is operated.
Alternatively, the decorative member for performance may be capable of taking on different movement modes, and when the decorative member for performance moves, different degrees of expectation may be suggested depending on the movement mode.

Only one of the above decorative elements for performance may be activated during the execution of the "hourglass reserve change effect" (at any timing between the start of the "hourglass reserve change effect", when the reserved image is being eroded by falling sand images, or after all the sand images have finished falling and the hourglass image display is erased). Alternatively, multiple of the above decorative elements for performance may be activated during the execution of the "hourglass reserve change effect" (at any timing between the start of the "hourglass reserve change effect", when the reserved image is being eroded by falling sand images, or after all the sand images have finished falling and the hourglass image display is erased). Furthermore, multiple decorative elements for performance may be activated simultaneously or in a predetermined order. Furthermore, when multiple decorative elements for performance are operated in a predetermined order, for example, the first decorative element for performance may be operated when the pending image is being eroded by the falling sand image, and the next decorative element for performance may be operated after the erosion has finished, or multiple decorative elements for performance may be operated when the pending image is being eroded by the falling sand image, or multiple decorative elements for performance may be operated after the erosion has finished.
In addition, the decorative element for the effect may be activated before the execution of the "hourglass reserve change effect" so that the element continues to operate even during the execution of the "hourglass reserve change effect." This will indicate to the player that the "hourglass reserve change effect" will begin.

If the decorative element for the effect is operating while the "hourglass hold change effect" is being executed (at least while the sand image is falling and encroaching on the area of the held image), the operation of the decorative element for the effect may be terminated after the execution of the "hourglass hold change effect" has finished. Conversely, it is preferable that the decorative element for the effect be in an operating state (not in its normal position) while the "hourglass hold change effect" is being executed (at least while the sand image is falling and encroaching on the area of the held image). This way, even if the held image does not change due to the "hourglass hold change effect," the decorative element for the effect will continue to operate, preventing a decrease in interest.

In this embodiment, the pending image is displayed in a designated area near the center in the left-right direction at the bottom of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, and the ``hourglass pending change performance'' is also performed in an area that includes this area, but a decorative component for the performance that can be moved to the front side of the designated area where the pending image is displayed may also be provided.
However, while the "hourglass pending change effect" is being performed, it is advisable to prevent the decorative element for the effect from moving to the front side of the specified area where the pending image is displayed, and the decorative element for the effect may not be activated when the pending image is being eroded by the falling sand image, but may be activated when the erosion ends and an effect such as the hourglass breaking is being performed.

On the other hand, during the execution of the "hourglass reserved change effect" (while the sand image is falling and encroaching on the area of the reserved image), the decorative element for the effect may move to the front side of the area where the hourglass image or the reserved image is displayed. For example, the decorative element for the effect may be moved left and right in front of the area where the hourglass image or the reserved image is displayed, so that the hourglass image or the reserved image can be hidden or not hidden.
Alternatively, the decorative element for the performance may be moved to the front side of the area displaying the hourglass image or the reserved image, and the display may be stopped temporarily (for example, for about one second) or for the entire duration of the performance. In this case, rather than making the hourglass image or the reserved image completely invisible, a portion of the hourglass image or the reserved image may be made invisible and a portion may be made visible. Also, it is preferable that the entire hourglass image or the reserved image is invisible when viewed from the front, but that some or all of the hourglass image or the reserved image is visible when the viewpoint is changed so that it is viewed from the left or right.
By adopting such an embodiment, it becomes difficult to immediately recognize how much sand has fallen, and the flickering appearance of the hourglass image and the reserved image stimulates the imagination (expands the imagination) of the parts that are not visible, thereby increasing the interest.

It is also possible to prevent any of the decorative elements from moving during the execution of the "hourglass hold change effect." All decorative elements may be placed in their standby positions, or decorative elements that are in their movement positions before the effect starts may not be moved to their standby positions.
By adopting this configuration, the player can concentrate on the "hourglass hold change effect."

The rate at which the "hourglass hold change effect" is executed may be, for example, once in every 10 of the total change displays.
Alternatively, the rate at which the "hourglass reserve change effect" is executed may be set to a different rate depending on the game status. For example, the rate at which the "hourglass reserve change effect" is executed may be set to a different rate depending on the number of reserved balls.

Below, we will explain an embodiment in which, when the number of reserved balls in the second starting port 2004 is 0 and a changing display corresponding to the winning of a game ball into the first starting port 2002 is performed, the rate at which the ``hourglass reserved change effect'' is executed varies depending on the number of reserved balls in the first starting port 2002.
If the number of reserved items at the first starting port 2002 is 1 to 4, it should be executed once every 5 times, and if the number of reserved items at the first starting port 2002 is 0, it should be executed once every 8 times (setting balance 1).
The probability of a reach state occurring is set to 1 in 10. If a reach state does not occur, a jackpot will not occur and reach effects will not occur, so players first hope for a reach state to occur, but if the reach state occurrence probability is extremely high (for example, 1/2), the expectation of a jackpot will be extremely low even if the reach state occurs, and if the reach state occurrence probability is extremely low (for example, 1/200), the reach state will not occur at all. Therefore, the probability of a reach state occurrence is set to 1/10 in this embodiment because a setting balance is required that allows a jackpot to be expected when the reach state occurs and that the reach state is generated appropriately.
In the case of such a setting balance 1, the "hourglass reserve change effect" is performed at a rate higher than the probability of a reach state occurring regardless of the number of reserved balls, so the "hourglass reserve change effect" can be made to function as an effect to increase interest in situations where a reach state does not occur and non-reach misses are occurring consecutively, and it is possible to wait for the reach state to occur while suppressing a decrease in interest in the period until the reach state occurs. Note that the same effect can be obtained by making the "hourglass reserve change effect" occur once in eight times when the number of reserved balls is 1 to 4, and once in five times when the number of reserved balls is 0.

Alternatively, if the number of reserved items in the first starting port 2002 is 1 to 4, it may be executed once in 5 times, and if the number of reserved items in the first starting port 2002 is 0, it may be executed once in 20 times (setting balance 2).
In this case, the probability of the reach state occurring is 1/10.
In the case of setting balance 2, if there are reserved numbers, similar to setting balance 1, the "hourglass reserved change effect" can be used to enhance interest in situations where a reach state does not occur and there are consecutive non-reach misses, allowing the player to wait for the reach state to occur while suppressing a decline in interest during the period until the reach state occurs. On the other hand, if there are no reserved numbers, once the current variable display ends, the variable display will cease unless a new starting win occurs. In such a situation, if the "hourglass reserved change effect" is used to enhance interest in situations where a reach state does not occur and there are consecutive non-reach misses, it may actually be frustrating for the player. Therefore, in such a situation where the variable display is interrupted (when there are no reserved numbers), rather than using the "hourglass reserved change effect" to enhance interest in situations where a reach state does not occur and there are consecutive non-reach misses, it is more appropriate to set the probability of the "hourglass reserved change effect" appearing to be a win (a probability lower than the probability of the reach state occurring).

Alternatively, if the number of reserved items in the first starting port 2002 is 1 to 4, it may be executed once in 20 times, and if the number of reserved items in the first starting port 2002 is 0, it may be executed once in 5 times (setting balance 3).
In this case, the probability of the reach state occurring is 1/10.
In the case of setting balance 3, when the number of reserved balls is 0, the "hourglass reserve change effect" functions as an effect to increase interest in a situation where a reach state does not occur and non-reach misses occur consecutively, and when the number of reserved balls is 1 to 4, the "hourglass reserve change effect" is unlikely to appear, so as the reserves accumulate while playing, the "hourglass reserve change effect" does not appear often, but if the player tries to stop playing, the "hourglass reserve change effect" becomes more likely to appear, so it is possible to stop the player from quitting playing.

In these examples, the execution rate is different when the number of reserved items in the first starting port 2002 is 1 to 4 compared to when it is 0. However, this is not limited to this. The above embodiments may be modified so that the execution rate is different when the number of reserved items in the first starting port 2002 is 2 or more compared to 1 or less, 3 or more compared to 2 or less, or 4 compared to 3 or less, as long as the same effect is obtained.

In addition, it may be executed at a predetermined rate, not limited to the number of reserved numbers at the first starting port 2002.
In this case, the probability of the reach state occurring is 1/10.
In this way, if the "hourglass hold change effect" is made to appear at a rate higher than the probability of a reach state occurring, for example, once in five, regardless of the number of reserved balls, an effect similar to that of setting balance 1 can be expected, and if the "hourglass hold change effect" is made to appear at a rate lower than the probability of a reach state occurring, for example, once in 20, regardless of the number of reserved balls, a sense of excitement can be provided as the "hourglass hold change effect" itself is excited just by being displayed.

An effect suggesting that an "hourglass hold change effect" will be executed may be executed. For example, an hourglass image may be displayed in the upper center of the display area (this hourglass image is the suggestion image), and then the hourglass image may slowly scroll down from the upper center of the display area, stopping at a position where it overlaps with the reserved image, thereby initiating the execution of the "hourglass hold change effect." Furthermore, the time required for scrolling (the time from when the hourglass image (suggestion image) starts moving until it stops at a position where it overlaps with the reserved image) may be the same as the execution time of the "hourglass hold change effect" (7 seconds in effect pattern 05 of FIG. 322(e)), or it may be longer (e.g., 20 seconds), or shorter (e.g., 2 seconds). Furthermore, it is preferable that the time from when the hourglass image (suggestion image) starts moving until it first reaches the overlapping position with the area where the reserved image is displayed (this time is designated as A), which is a portion of the time required for scrolling, be longer than the time from when the hourglass image (suggestion image) first reaches the overlapping position with the area where the reserved image is displayed until it completely overlaps with the area where the reserved image is displayed (this time is designated as B). This is because the player will be able to know in advance that the "hourglass reserve change effect" will be performed. Even if time B is made longer than time A, there is no problem in making time B longer than time A as long as the effect display allows the player to know in advance that the "hourglass reserve change effect" will be performed.
In addition to scrolling the hourglass image, the execution of the "hourglass hold change effect" may be indicated by displaying a dialogue image (such as "Hold change?").
By adopting this configuration, you can prepare yourself in advance for the execution of the "hourglass reserve change effect." Note that this suggestive effect may be executed not only for the reserve in question, but also for the first to fourth reserves.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 322 and 323, the color of the reserved image and the color of the sand in the hourglass image were different colors, but below, with reference to Figures 329 to 331, we will explain an embodiment of an "hourglass reserved change effect" in which the color of the sand image is modified to be the same color as the reserved image (for example, both are green).

Presentation patterns 01 to 05 in Figure 329 correspond to presentation patterns 01 to 05 in Figure 322, respectively, but in presentation patterns 01 to 05 in Figure 329, the color of the reserved image and the color of the sand in the hourglass image are the same color.
Moreover, the display examples shown in Figures 330(a) to 330(h) are display examples corresponding to the display examples shown in Figures 323(a) to 323(h), respectively.
As shown in each figure, the display mode differs in that the color of the reserved image and the color of the sand image are different or the same, but other aspects (such as the display timing and display mode of various images) are basically the same between the two embodiments, so specific explanations will be omitted.

Below, we will explain the presentation mode after all the sand has fallen, with reference to presentation pattern 05 in Figure 329, Figures 330 and 331.
As shown in effect pattern 05 of Figure 329, the falling of the green sand is completed at timing t9. Figure 330(h) shows an example of the display at this time.
Next, a martial artist character holding a hammer appears from the left side of the display area, and is displayed hitting the hourglass image. Next, the hourglass image is rotated 180 degrees by being hit by the hammer, and the reserved image and the sand image are now positioned above the hourglass. These displays are performed from timing t9 to timing t10. Note that the martial artist character remains displayed on the left side of the display area thereafter. Figures 331(a) and 331(b) show the display state at this time.
Next, from timing t10 to timing t16, the sand falls downward. In this case, too, the display shows sand falling from the top of the hourglass to the bottom over a total of six seconds. Specifically, at timing t12, one-third of the sand has fallen (FIG. 331(c)), at timing t14, two-thirds of the sand has fallen (FIG. 331(d)), and at timing t16, all of the sand has fallen (FIG. 331(e)).
Here, the pending image that becomes newly visible as the sand falls is not the green pending image that was displayed when the performance started, but a more promising pending image, for example, red.

Next, the martial artist character moves to the right, approaches the hourglass, and is displayed destroying the hourglass. After that, the display of the destroyed hourglass image ends, and the red reserved image moves downward. The martial artist character also moves to the left, moving off the edge of the display area and off the screen. These displays are performed from timing t16 to timing t17. Figures 331(f) and 331(g) show the display state at this time.
At timing t17, the movement of the reserved image is completed. Figure 331 (h) shows the display state at this time.

In this way, in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 329 to 331, the reserved image of a predetermined color (for example, green) is displayed as to whether it is hidden by a sand image of a predetermined color that is the same color as the reserved image, and if it is hidden, the reserved image of a more promising color (for example, red) is displayed as gradually appearing from among the sand image of the predetermined color.
The color before and after the change of the reserved image can be appropriately selected from the colors described above. For example, a pattern in which the blue reserved image changes to a red reserved image, or a pattern in which the red reserved image changes to a rainbow-colored reserved image, etc. may be executed.

It should be noted that while it has been explained in the reserved images (Figures 331(c) to 331(f)) that the sand falls and gradually becomes visible, it is also possible to make an image different from the reserved image, which suggests the expectation of a win, gradually visible. Examples of images different from the reserved image are shown below. It should be noted that when an image different from the reserved image is displayed, it is displayed in place of the red reserved image displayed above the hourglass in Figures 331(c) to 331(f).
For example, if a text image saying "Pending change!" is displayed in place of the pending image, it suggests that the pending image will definitely be promoted at a predetermined timing before the changing display ends.
For example, if a text image saying "Pending change?" is displayed in place of the pending image, it suggests that the pending image may be promoted at a predetermined timing before the changing display ends.
For example, if a text image saying "Pseudo consecutive wins!" is displayed in place of the pending image, it indicates that a pseudo consecutive win performance will definitely be performed at a predetermined timing before the variable display ends.
For example, if a text image saying "Pseudo consecutive?" is displayed in place of the pending image, it suggests that there is a possibility that a pseudo consecutive performance will be performed at a predetermined timing before the variable display ends.
For example, if a text image saying "Super hot!" is displayed in place of the reserved image, it suggests that there is an extremely high expectation of winning the variation.
For example, if a text image saying "Chance!" is displayed in place of the pending image, it suggests that there is a high expectation of winning the variation.
For example, if a text image saying "XX Reach!" is displayed in place of the pending image, it suggests that XX Reach will be made in the change.
For example, if a text image saying "Congratulations!" is displayed in place of the pending image, it suggests that a jackpot will occur in the variation.
It should be noted that the images do not have to be limited to those described above, and any appropriate changes may be made to the display, for example, changing "Pseudo-Ren!" to "Ren!", as long as the suggested content can be conveyed to the player.
In addition, when the above image is displayed in place of the reserved image, the image displayed in place of the reserved image is displayed in the position where the red reserved image in Figure 331 (f) is displayed, and when the sand image below the hourglass in Figure 331 (f) and the hourglass are erased, the reserved image is displayed in the display mode of the reserved image before the performance was performed.
It goes without saying that the "hourglass effect" may be configured to execute both the "hourglass hold change effect" and the "hourglass effect other than the hourglass hold change effect."

It is also possible to provide multiple speeds for the sand to fall (the time it takes for all the sand to fall), and the slower the speed at which the sand falls (the longer it takes for all the sand to fall), the more promising the pending image that is displayed. Alternatively, a display effect with a higher expectation may be displayed.

Certain embodiments and variations shown with reference to Figures 322 to 328 may be applied to the embodiments shown with reference to Figures 329 to 331.

It may be configured to be able to implement both the "hourglass reserve change effect" shown with reference to Figures 322 to 328 and the "hourglass reserve change effect" shown with reference to Figures 329 to 331. In this case, in the state shown in Figures 323 and 330, when a reserved image of a specific color is displayed, a display will be displayed in which a sand image of a different color than the reserved image falls, or a sand image of the same color will fall. In the case of sand images of different colors, the player can enjoy the effect while anticipating what color the reserved image will change to. In the case of sand images of the same color, the player can first enjoy whether all the sand will fall, and then enjoy the two-stage display of what color the reserved image will appear from the sand image.

After the "hourglass reserve change effect" shown with reference to Figures 322 to 328 is executed, the "hourglass reserve change effect" shown with reference to Figures 329 to 331 may be executed.
Alternatively, after the "hourglass hold change effect" shown with reference to Figures 329 to 331 is executed, the "hourglass hold change effect" shown with reference to Figures 322 to 328 may be executed.

This "hourglass reserve change effect" can provide new excitement to players.

An embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to Figures 123 to 321, etc., is shown below with reference to Figures 332 to 334, etc. In this embodiment, a "double roulette effect" can be executed as a special effect. The "double roulette effect" consists of two effects: an "expectation roulette effect" and a "hold change roulette effect."

The detailed effects of the "double roulette effect" will be described below with reference to Figs. 332 to 334. Fig. 332 shows a time chart for the "double roulette effect." Figs. 333 and 334 show display examples for the "double roulette effect."
332(a) shows the first half of one time of the variable display, and FIG. 332(b) shows the second half of one time of the variable display. Specifically, FIG. 332(a) shows the presentation mode from timing t0 when the variable display starts to timing t40 when the special reach presentation starts, and FIG. 332(b) shows the presentation mode from timing t40 when the special reach presentation starts to timing t80 when the stopped display of the decorative pattern ends.
It should be noted that, as shown in other embodiments, a predetermined background image can be displayed in the display area, but this is not shown in the present embodiment.

At timing t0, the display of the decorative pattern changes begins. At the same time as the display of the changes begins, a fan-shaped expectation roulette image is displayed in the lower left of the display area, and a fan-shaped reserve change roulette image is displayed in the lower right of the display area. The kanji character "期" is displayed within the expectation roulette image. Furthermore, the kanji character "保" is displayed within the reserve change roulette image. In addition, in the display of the changes in the expectation roulette image and the reserve change roulette image, the reserve display area to the fourth reserve display area are shifted slightly to the left compared to the embodiments shown with reference to Figures 123 to 125, etc. Furthermore, a normal (white) reserve image is displayed as the reserve image.
Fig. 333(a) shows the display state in which the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in a stopped state before the variable display starts. Also, Fig. 333(b) shows the display state immediately after the variable display starts, in which the expectation roulette image is displayed in the lower left of the display area and the reserved change roulette image is displayed in the lower right of the display area. Note that the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are in a temporarily stopped state.
At timing t1, the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol start to fluctuate at high speed. Figure 333(c) shows the display state when the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol start to fluctuate at high speed.

At timing t5, a convex rotation suggestion image is displayed outside the expectation roulette image. The rotation suggestion image is displayed until the rotation of the expectation roulette image ends. Figure 333 (d) shows a display state in which the rotation suggestion image is displayed.
Next, at timing t6, the expectation roulette image starts to rotate clockwise. Fig. 333(e) shows a display state in which the expectation roulette image is rotating clockwise. Note that the arrow in the figure indicates the direction of rotation, but does not indicate that the arrow is actually displayed as an image (the same applies to Fig. 334(c) described later).

The expectation roulette image rotates at high speed for two seconds from timing t6 to timing t8, and then is stopped and displayed at timing t8, where the number "30" is displayed as the expectation image. Fig. 333(f) shows a display state in which the expectation roulette image is stopped and the number "30" is displayed as the expectation image.
Five types of expectation images are prepared for display: "10,""30,""50,""70," and "99." One of the expectation images is displayed after the expectation roulette image stops. The number displayed as the expectation image indicates the expected probability of winning for the displayed variation. For example, the number "30" indicates that the expected probability is approximately 30%.
In this way, the expectation roulette image rotates and one of the multiple expectation images is displayed in a stopped state, allowing the player to recognize the degree of expectation.

Next, at timing t40, a special reach effect occurs. In the special reach effect in this embodiment, a martial artist character and a bomb character are displayed in the display area, and a dynamic display of the martial artist character and the bomb character fighting is performed, and if the martial artist character wins, the decorative pattern is displayed stationary in a manner indicating a jackpot, and if the bomb character wins, the decorative pattern is displayed stationary in a manner indicating a miss.
At the start of the special reach effect, a reach title image such as "Fighter vs. Bomb" may be displayed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., two seconds from timing t40 to timing t42). A "hold change roulette effect" may be initiated at a predetermined timing after the display of the reach title image has ended. Alternatively, as shown with reference to Figures 224 to 272, a special image may be displayed (e.g., a display that conceals the background) at the start of the special reach effect. The "expectation roulette effect" may be executed before the display of these images, and the "hold change roulette effect" may be executed after the display of these images. In this way, by switching the type of effect that can be executed at the start of the special reach effect, the execution timing of both effects becomes different, allowing the player to focus their attention on the effect being executed.
334(a) shows the display state when a special reach effect occurs. During the special reach effect, as shown in the figure, a decorative symbol with a predetermined number (in this case, the number "5") is displayed in a temporarily stopped reach state.

Next, at timing t50, a convex rotation suggestion image is displayed outside the reserved change roulette image. The rotation suggestion image is displayed until the rotation of the reserved change roulette image ends. Figure 334 (b) shows the display state in which the rotation suggestion image is displayed.
Next, at timing t51, the reserved change roulette image starts to rotate counterclockwise. Figure 334 (c) shows a display state in which the reserved change roulette image is rotating counterclockwise.

The reserved change roulette image spins at high speed for two seconds from timing t51 to timing t53, and then stops at timing t52, displaying the word "red." Figure 334(d) shows the display state in which the reserved change roulette image stops and displays the word "red."
While the reserved change roulette image is rotating, five types of letters, "blue,""green,""red,""gold," and "rainbow," are displayed cyclically in this order. After the rotation of the reserved change roulette image begins and the letter "protect" moves from the bottom of the display area off the screen, the letter "protect" is no longer displayed and the letters "blue,""green,""red,""gold," and "rainbow" are displayed in a rotating manner.
After the rotation of the reserved change roulette image, one of five letters "blue,""green,""red,""gold," and "rainbow" will stop and be displayed as an expectation image. The displayed letter indicates the change mode of the reserved image, and when "blue" is displayed, the reserved image will change to a blue reserved image, and when "red" is displayed, the reserved image will change to a red reserved image.
At timing t54, one second after the reserved image change roulette image stops, the reserved image changes to a red reserved image. Figure 334 (e) shows the display state at this time.
In this way, the reserved change roulette image rotates and predetermined characters are displayed in a stopped state, allowing the player to recognize what color the reserved image will change to.

334(f) shows a state in which the fighter character wins against the bomb character at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t70) during a special reach effect. When this display is made, the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state in a manner indicating a big win. When the display is made in which the fighter character loses to the bomb character, the decorative symbols are displayed in a manner indicating a loss.
Thereafter, at timing t76, the special reach effect ends, and at timing t78, the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed. Figure 334(g) shows the display state at this time.
Next, at timing t77, the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed. The display of the reserved image, the expectation roulette image, and the reserved change roulette image ends at this timing. Figure 334 (h) shows the display state at this time.

In this way, the "expectation roulette effect" is an effect that can be executed before the execution of a special reach effect begins. On the other hand, the "hold change roulette effect" is an effect that can be executed while a special reach effect is being executed. Note that, as special reach effects, "giant tank reach" (Fig. 224 to Fig. 236, etc.), "enemy tank destruction reach" (Fig. 252 to 255, etc.), "year-end singing battle reach effect" (Fig. 277, etc.), "the countdown reach effect" (Fig. 277, etc.), etc. can be adopted.
In this way, in this embodiment, an effect using the expectation roulette image is performed before the start of the special reach effect, and an effect using the reserve change roulette image is performed during the special reach effect. In this way, the effects using the roulette image are performed at different times and are not performed simultaneously, allowing the player to concentrate on the effects.

Although an example has been shown in which the expectation roulette image and the pending change roulette image are displayed from the start of the changing display to the end of the changing display (until the timing when the decorative pattern stops displaying), the display of the expectation roulette image and the pending change roulette image may be started or ended at other timings.
For example, the display of the expectation roulette image and the reserve change roulette image may be started when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the change display (for example, when all decorative patterns are changing at high speed, or when some decorative patterns are changing at high speed and other decorative patterns that are not changing at high speed (for example, slow change or swaying change)), or when a pseudo-change effect is being performed after suggesting that a pseudo-consecutive combination will occur (for example, when a display is being displayed indicating the number of pseudo-consecutive combinations such as x2 or x3, or when an effect or the like is being displayed on the LCD screen suggesting that a pseudo-consecutive combination is occurring).
Furthermore, even if it is decided to execute a double roulette effect, the expectation roulette effect is executed before the special reach effect is executed, and the reserve change roulette effect is executed while the special reach effect is executed, so that the expectation roulette effect and the reserve change roulette effect are not executed at the same time, it is possible to make the effect related to the reserve change roulette effect invisible when an effect related to the expectation roulette effect is executed, and make the effect related to the expectation roulette effect invisible when an effect related to the reserve change roulette effect is executed. This is because it is possible to concentrate on the roulette effect that is being displayed.

In this way, even if the effects related to the hold change roulette effect are hidden when the effects related to the expectation roulette effect are being performed, the start timing of the expectation roulette effect is not limited to the start of the changing display, but may be set to start, for example, when all decorative symbols are changing at high speed, when some decorative symbols are changing at high speed while other decorative symbols are not changing at high speed (for example, slow change or swaying change), or when a pseudo-change effect is being performed after suggesting that a pseudo-consecutive streak will occur (for example, when a display is displayed indicating the number of pseudo-consecutive streaks, such as x2 or x3, or when an effect or the like is displayed on the LCD screen suggesting that a pseudo-consecutive streak is occurring).

In addition, the timing at which the reserve change roulette effect is started is an effect that can be executed at a predetermined timing while the special reach effect is being executed, and this predetermined timing may be, for example, immediately after the special reach effect is started, or immediately before the branching timing (the timing at which the result of the win/loss effect is shown) of the win/loss effect in the special reach effect (an effect in which characters, etc. fight, etc., and the result of the variable display finally indicates whether it is a jackpot or a miss), or it may be when a display is being displayed that prompts the user to operate an operating means that can be displayed when the special reach effect is being executed.
Whether or not to execute the double roulette effect is determined based on the result of the win/loss judgment made at the start of the variation, but whether or not to execute the "double roulette effect" may also be determined based on a look-ahead process. In this case, if a win/loss judgment is made in advance at the time of the start winning and it is decided to execute the "double roulette effect", the reserved image corresponding to the start winning may be kept displayed as a normal reserved image (the reserved image at the time of effect execution) until the "reservation change roulette effect" is started.
Furthermore, instead of or in addition to whether to execute a double roulette effect, it may be determined whether to execute a single roulette effect. This single roulette effect is an effect in which only one of the "expectation roulette effect" or the "hold change roulette effect" is executed. For example, if it is determined to execute a single roulette effect and also to execute an "expectation roulette effect," the "expectation roulette effect" is executed, but the "hold change roulette effect" is not executed while the special reach effect is being executed. Conversely, if it is determined to execute only the "hold change roulette effect," the "expectation roulette effect" is not executed. Here, since the "hold change roulette effect" is an effect executed while the special reach effect is being executed, only the "expectation roulette effect" can be executed when it is not determined to execute a special reach effect as a variable effect, and when it is determined to execute a special reach effect as a variable effect, it is preferable to be able to select any of the double roulette effect, only the "expectation roulette effect," and only the "hold change roulette effect."
Furthermore, as explained above, when a decision is made to perform a double roulette effect or a single roulette effect and an "expectation roulette effect" is performed, if the number displayed as the expectation image is displayed, it may be displayed until the change ends or may be hidden when the effect related to the "hold change roulette effect" is started. However, for example, the number displayed as the expectation image may be hidden after a predetermined time (e.g., about 3 seconds) has passed, or may be hidden based on the operation of a predetermined operation means (unlike the expectation roulette effect, in which a preview effect prompting the operation means to be operated is displayed and the operation of the operation means in response to the preview effect is accepted). Furthermore, with regard to the "hold change roulette effect," the reserved image may be hidden when it changes to a red reserved image or after a predetermined time has passed since that time. This is because the reserved image allows the user to clearly determine which color the reserved image is.
Furthermore, if the variable display that has determined to perform a double roulette effect or a single roulette effect results in a loss, and it has been determined or decided that a double roulette effect or a single roulette effect will be performed in the next variable display, the expectation roulette image and the reserved change roulette image may be returned to their initial state (a state in which "期" and "保証" are displayed), and the "double roulette effect" may be performed again in the next variable display. Furthermore, it is even more preferable to display the initial state images of the expectation roulette image and the reserved change roulette image (a state in which "期" and "保証" are displayed) even during the period from the fixed stop due to a loss result until the start of the next variable display (fixed stop period).

The colors of the expectation roulette image, hold change roulette image, and rotation suggestion image should be expressed in colors that are not used for the hold image or hold image (for example, gray or brown). This will prevent players from mistaking the color of the expectation roulette image or hold change roulette image for an indication of expectation, and will make them interested in the display state after rotation.

In the above example, the degree of expectation is indicated by the numbers and letters displayed on the expectation roulette image and the hold change roulette image, but in addition to these displays, the degree of expectation may also be indicated by using color.
For example, the numbers "10,""30,""50,""70," and "99" are displayed as a result of the rotation of the expectation roulette image, and when these numbers are stopped and displayed, the color of the expectation roulette image may be changed to a color corresponding to the number. For example, when the stopped and displayed number is "10," the expectation roulette image may be displayed in blue, when it is "30," in green, when it is "50," in red, when it is "70," in gold, and when it is "99." Note that the color of the numbers themselves may be changed to a corresponding color, or the color of the numbers may be a common color, such as black, regardless of the number, and the color of the background other than the numbers may be changed to a corresponding color, or both may be changed to a corresponding color.
Similarly, the rotation of the reserve change roulette image displays the letters "blue,""green,""red,""gold," and "rainbow." When these letters are stopped and displayed, the color of the reserve change roulette image may be changed to a color corresponding to the letters. For example, if the stopped and displayed letter is "blue," the reserve change roulette image may be displayed in blue; if it is "green," the reserve change roulette image may be displayed in green; if it is "red," the reserve change roulette image may be displayed in red; if it is "gold," the reserve change roulette image may be displayed in gold; and if it is "rainbow," the reserve change roulette image may be displayed in rainbow colors. Note that the color of the letters themselves may be a corresponding color, or the color of the letters may be a common color, such as black, regardless of the letter, and the color of the background other than the letters may be a corresponding color, or both may be displayed in corresponding colors.

In addition, instead of changing the color of the expectation roulette image to the color corresponding to the number when the rotation of the expectation roulette image stops, the color of the expectation roulette image may be modified so that it is displayed in the color corresponding to the number from the start of rotation. When the expectation roulette image rotates, the numbers will be displayed in the order "10", "30", "50", "70", "99", "10", "30", etc., but when modified in this way, the expectation roulette image will be visually recognized by the player in the order blue, green, red, gold, rainbow, blue, green, etc.

When the expectation roulette image is stopped and displayed, a display may be made to highlight to the player which number (or color) has stopped. For example, the displayed numbers may be repeatedly reduced and enlarged during the period when the image is stopped, or the numbers may be gradually made larger over one second from the time when the image stops compared to the rotating numbers.
Alternatively, if the expectation roulette image is displayed in a color corresponding to the number, the brightness of the color may be increased or decreased so that the player perceives it as brighter or darker.

Although an example has been shown in which the expectation roulette image and the pending change roulette image rotate at high speed for two seconds and then stop and are displayed, the time required for high-speed rotation may be one second, and in the remaining one second, the rotation speed may be slower than during high-speed rotation or may be gradually slowed down so that the numbers and letters being rotated become visible, and then the expectation image as a result display corresponding to the expectation roulette image and the pending change roulette image may stop and be displayed.
In addition, while the expectation roulette image or the pending change roulette image is rotating at high speed, the numbers and letters may be invisible, or may be difficult to see even though they are rotating at high speed.
When the expectation roulette image or the reserve change roulette image rotates at a low speed, a state where two (or more) adjacent numbers or letters are displayed at the same time and are visible, and a state where only one letter or number is displayed and is visible, alternately occur, and finally the state where only one letter or number is displayed occurs, and the image stops. Alternatively, the image may be displayed so that three (or more) adjacent numbers or letters are displayed at the same time and are visible.

The numbers displayed on the expectation roulette image may be displayed in the order of "10", "30", "50", "70", and "99", or in the order of "99", "70", "50", "30", and "10", or may be displayed in a random order.
The letters displayed on the pending change roulette image may be displayed in the order of "blue,""green,""red,""gold," and "rainbow," or in the order of "rainbow,""gold,""red,""green," and "blue," or in a random order.

In the examples of effects shown with reference to Figures 332 to 334, the "expectation roulette effect" was performed only once, but it may be performed multiple times (two or more times). Below, an embodiment modified from the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 332(a) is shown with reference to Figure 335, but since the reserved images displayed are all normal (white) reserved images, the display mode of the reserved images is omitted from the time chart.
When the "expectation roulette effect" is executed multiple times, it is preferable to display a number indicating a higher expectation than the number displayed last time. The effect pattern 01 shown in Figure 335(a) is an effect pattern in which the "expectation roulette effect" is executed for the second time from timing t14 to timing t16, and "50" is displayed.
Alternatively, in addition to a number indicating a higher probability of winning compared to the number displayed last time, the same number as before the performance may be displayed.

When the "Expectation Roulette Presentation" is executed multiple times, a number with a relatively lower expectation level compared to the number displayed immediately before may be displayed the next time. Presentation pattern 02 shown in Figure 335(b) is an presentation pattern in which the first "Expectation Roulette Presentation" is executed from timing t6 to timing t8, displaying "50," and the second "Expectation Roulette Presentation" is executed from timing t14 to timing t16, displaying "30."

In addition, the "expectation roulette effect" may be made possible to be executed three or more times, and after a number with a relatively low expectation compared to the number displayed initially is displayed the second time, a number with a relatively higher expectation than that number may be displayed.
The presentation pattern 03 shown in Figure 335 (c) is a presentation pattern in which the first ``expectation roulette presentation'' is executed from timing t6 to timing t8, displaying ``50,'' the second ``expectation roulette presentation'' is executed from timing t14 to timing t16, displaying ``30,'' and the third ``expectation roulette presentation'' is executed from timing t22 to timing t24, displaying ``70.''
In this way, numbers with a relatively lower expectation than the numbers displayed the first time, such as "50" → "30" → "70", may be displayed the second time, and then a number with a relatively higher expectation than the first or second numbers may be displayed the third time.

In addition, it is also possible to have the number ("30") displayed the third time with a lower expectation than the number "50" displayed the first time, such as "50" → "10" → "30", or to have the number ("50") with the same expectation as the number displayed the first time, such as "50" → "10" → "50".

Even if the number "99" with the highest expectation is displayed, it may change to a number with a lower expectation depending on the next or subsequent performance, or it may change to a number with a lower expectation and then display the number with the highest expectation, "99," again. For example, it may be possible for the numbers to be displayed in the order "99" → "10" → "99."

In addition, after the display of a number with high expectation changes to a number with low expectation, numbers with relatively low expectation may be displayed multiple times, and then the display may return to the number with high expectation. For example, numbers may be displayed in the order of "99" → "10" → "30" → "99", or "99" → "50" → "30" → "99", or "99" → "10" → "50" → "99", or "99" → "50" → "99" → "30" → "99".
By adopting such an embodiment, the player's emotions can be stimulated and the game can be made more interesting.

In addition, if the number "99" with the highest expectation is displayed, "99" may be displayed again in the next or subsequent performance, or even if a number with a low expectation is displayed once, "99" may be displayed finally in the next or subsequent performance. In other words, if the number with the highest expectation, "99", is displayed even once, "99" may be displayed finally even if a number with a low expectation is displayed once. For example, numbers may be displayed in the following order: "99" → "99", "99" → "99" → "99", "99" → "50" → "99", "99" → "50" → "99", "70" → "99".
By adopting this type of configuration, the player is made to feel anxious that a number with low expectations will be displayed, but the number with the highest expectations is ultimately displayed, thereby maintaining the player's confidence in the presentation.

As shown with reference to Figures 332 to 335, the number that stops and is displayed at a predetermined timing is one of multiple numbers (multiple types may be displayed while the roulette is spinning). Therefore, even if a number with high expectation is displayed, the execution of the effect may cause the number with low expectation to be displayed instead of the number with high expectation, which can create a sense of tension for the player.

When the "expectation roulette effect" is executed multiple times, it is advisable to execute the next "expectation roulette effect" after a predetermined number of seconds have elapsed as the interval time (i.e., the time during which the spin result is displayed) after the effect ends (for example, in the case of effect pattern 01 shown in Figure 335 (a), for 5 seconds from timing t8 to timing t13).
The interval time is preferably set to a length (for example, one second or more) that allows the player to clearly see the displayed numbers, thereby ensuring time to build up anticipation for the occurrence of a jackpot.
In addition, when the "expectation roulette effect" is executed multiple times, it is advisable to keep the time (for example, 5 seconds) between the end of the effect and the start of the next effect the same. For example, in the case of effect pattern 03 shown in Figure 335(c), after waiting for 5 seconds from timing t8 to timing t13 and 5 seconds from timing t16 to timing t21, the execution of the next effect is started.
Alternatively, the interval time may not be constant but may be gradually shortened or lengthened, or each interval time may be determined randomly. For example, in effect pattern 04 shown in Figure 335(d), the interval time is gradually shortened from 5 seconds to 4 seconds to 3 seconds.

In this way, by performing the "Expectation Roulette Effect" multiple times and then starting the special reach effect, the player can have high or low expectations about the outcome of the special reach effect, depending on the outcome of the "Expectation Roulette Effect," thereby achieving a gameplay experience in which the player can have high or low expectations about the outcome of the special reach effect.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 332 to 334, an example is shown in which the "hold change roulette effect" is performed only once. By performing the "hold change roulette effect" only once in this way, the player's attention can be focused on the battle between characters (for example, a martial artist character and a bomb character) that takes place during the special reach effect.

On the other hand, the "reserve change roulette effect" may be executed multiple times. Below, an effect pattern obtained by modifying the effect pattern shown in Figure 332(b) will be described with reference to Figure 336.
The effect pattern 01 shown in Fig. 336(a) shows an effect example in which the "hold change roulette effect" is performed twice. The effect pattern 02 shown in Fig. 336(b) shows an effect example in which the "hold change roulette effect" is performed three times.
In the case of performance pattern 01, the reserved image changes from the normal (white) reserved image to a blue reserved image, and then changes from the blue reserved image to a red reserved image.
In addition, in the case of performance pattern 01, the reserved image changes from the normal (white) reserved image to a blue reserved image, then changes from the blue reserved image to a red reserved image, and then further changes from the red reserved image to a gold reserved image.
In this way, by making it possible to execute the "hold change roulette effect" multiple times, even if a result with a relatively low expectation is displayed, the player can have a sense of expectation that the "hold change roulette effect" will be executed again and a result with a higher expectation will be displayed.

If the character "rainbow," which is the character with the highest expectation, is displayed as a result of the execution of the "hold change roulette effect," it is advisable to prevent the "hold change roulette effect" from being executed thereafter. For example, if "rainbow" is displayed as a result of the execution of the first "hold change roulette effect," the second and subsequent "hold change roulette effects" will not be executed.
By adopting such an embodiment, the player's attention can be focused on the content of the special reach effect itself (the battle between characters).

As a result of executing the "hold change roulette effect," if the character "rainbow," which is the character with the highest expectation, is displayed and the hold image changes to the colors of the rainbow, a special bonus display may be displayed after the hold image changes to the colors of the rainbow. The special bonus display may be, for example, a display that changes the image displayed in the special reach effect (for example, changing the hammer held by the martial artist character to a rainbow hammer), or a display that is added to the image displayed in the special reach effect (for example, displaying the rainbow hammer in a manner that overlaps with the hold change roulette image to suggest that the attack with the martial artist character's hammer is powerful (likely to hit)), or a display that is not displayed in the special reach effect (a display that is completely unrelated to the special reach effect, such as a bromide photo of a celebrity, which may be displayed even outside the special reach effect). Since "rainbow", the character with the highest expectation, is displayed, the player's expectations are at their peak, but by displaying a display that will not be displayed in a special reach effect (a display that is completely unrelated to the special reach effect, such as a bromide photo of a celebrity, which may be displayed in other than the special reach effect), it is possible to provide the player with an excited state that exceeds the limit of the player's expectations that are at their peak.
The special bonus display does not have to be displayed every time the character "rainbow," which has the highest expectation, is displayed, but may be displayed at a predetermined rate (e.g., once in 20 times) when the character "rainbow," which has the highest expectation, is displayed. The special bonus display may also be displayed even when a character other than "rainbow," which has the highest expectation, is displayed. However, in this case, the lower the expectation, the lower the rate at which the special bonus display is displayed. In other words, the lower the expectation, the less likely the special bonus display is to be displayed for a character with a low expectation. This creates a premium feel for the special bonus display. If a character other than "rainbow," which has the highest expectation, is displayed and the lottery result is a loss, the disappointment of the loss can be alleviated to some extent. Furthermore, if a character other than "rainbow," which has the highest expectation, is displayed and the special bonus display is displayed, the winning result may be confirmed. In this way, the special bonus display can suggest the result of the special lottery.
In addition, when a display that is not displayed in a special reach effect (a display that is completely unrelated to the special reach effect and that may be displayed in other ways than the special reach effect, such as displaying a photo of a celebrity, etc.) is displayed after the character with the highest expectation, "rainbow," is displayed and the reserved image changes to rainbow colors, this display that is not displayed in a special reach effect may be displayed in a way that overlaps the position where the reserved change roulette image was displayed, or may be displayed in a way that overlaps the entire area where the reserved change roulette image was displayed.
In addition, displays that are not displayed in special reach effects (displays that are completely unrelated to special reach effects, such as displaying a bromide photo of a celebrity, and that may be displayed in other ways than special reach effects) may be displayed even if the hold change roulette effect is not performed, or may be displayed after the display of the special reach effect has ended.
Furthermore, when a display that is not displayed in a special reach effect (a display that is completely unrelated to the special reach effect and that may be displayed in other situations besides the special reach effect, such as a photo of a celebrity) is being displayed, a mock image of an effect button or the like may be displayed, and an instruction display prompting a predetermined operation may be displayed, and the display of the photo may be switched (changed), for example, whether or not an operation is performed in accordance with the instruction display, or the player may be able to select the type of photo (for example, male idol, female idol, etc.).

With reference to FIG. 332, an embodiment in which an "expectation roulette effect" and a "reserve change roulette effect" are each executed once in a "double roulette effect" is shown. Also, with reference to FIG. 335, an embodiment in which an "expectation roulette effect" is executed multiple times in a "double roulette effect" is shown. Also, with reference to FIG. 336, an embodiment in which a "reserve change roulette effect" is executed multiple times in a "double roulette effect" is shown. Also, it is shown that there are cases in which an "expectation roulette effect" or a "reserve change roulette effect" is not executed in a "double roulette effect".
For example, in the "double roulette effect," the "expectation roulette effect" may be executed 0, 1, or multiple times (2 or more), and the "reserve change roulette effect" may be executed 0, 1, or multiple times (2 or more), and these may be appropriately combined to execute the "expectation roulette effect" and the "reserve change roulette effect" a predetermined number of times (or not even once).
For example, it may be possible to implement an effect pattern in which the "expectation roulette effect" is executed twice and the "hold change roulette effect" is not executed, or it may be possible to implement an effect pattern in which the "expectation roulette effect" is executed once and the "hold change roulette effect" is executed three times, but the most effective combination of the number of times the "expectation roulette effect" and the "hold change roulette effect" are executed is a pattern in which the "expectation roulette effect" is executed multiple times (two or more times) but the "hold change roulette effect" is executed only once. Since the "expectation roulette effect" is an effect that is executed before the special reach effect occurs, the player's expectation is not yet that high, and if an image of a number with low expectation is displayed in the "expectation roulette effect," if the number is not changed thereafter, the expectation for the variable display in which the "expectation roulette effect" is executed will be lost until the end of the variable display (when the symbol is fixed and stopped). Therefore, it is preferable to implement the "expectation roulette effect" multiple times (twice or more). On the other hand, the "hold change roulette effect" is an effect that is performed after a special reach effect has occurred, so the player's expectations are quite high. In this situation, if the "hold change roulette effect" is performed multiple times, the player will not be able to concentrate on the special reach effect, and there is also a risk that the player will miss the effect that suggests the degree of expectation in the special reach effect (for example, an effect that suggests the degree of expectation by having multiple colors of text or multiple character cut-ins).

Of the "double roulette effects," the "expectation roulette effect" may be executed only before the decorative pattern reaches a reach state, and the "hold change roulette effect" may be executed only after the decorative pattern reaches a reach state.
Furthermore, among the "double roulette effects," the "expectation roulette effect" may be executed only before the decorative symbols reach a ready-to-win state, and the "hold change roulette effect" may be executed only after the decorative symbols reach a ready-to-win state and a special ready-to-win effect has occurred. In this case, it is preferable to display each of the roulette effects when they are executed. For example, if the "expectation roulette effect" starts to be executed but the "hold change roulette effect" does not start to be executed, only the display related to the "expectation roulette effect" is displayed.

The size of the expectation roulette image in the "expectation roulette effect" of the "double roulette effect" is smaller than the size of the decorative symbols in the state before the decorative symbols reach a reach state (for example, the state shown in Figure 333(e)), and is larger than the size of the decorative symbols in the state when a special reach state has occurred (for example, the state shown in Figure 334(a)). In this way, it is desirable to make the size of the expectation roulette image in the "expectation roulette effect" larger or smaller than the size of the decorative symbols depending on the timing at which the expectation roulette image is displayed. On the other hand, the size of the roulette image in the "hold change roulette effect" of the "double roulette effect" is always larger than the size of the decorative symbols. This is because the timing at which the "hold change roulette effect" occurs is when a special reach state is being performed, so the player is aware that the player is in a reach state, and the decorative symbols do not play much of a role (meaning).
In the display examples shown with reference to Figures 333 and 334, the size of the decorative pattern is changed, but instead of or in addition to changing the size of the decorative pattern, the size of the roulette image in the ``double roulette effect'' may also be changed.

Although the display position of the expectation roulette image in the "expectation roulette effect" has been described as the bottom left of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is not limited to the bottom left of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, but may be approximately in the center of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, or approximately at the bottom center of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, or the display position may be changed at an appropriate timing when the "expectation roulette effect" starts to be executed, or the expectation may be suggested depending on the display position. For example, the expectation of a win is higher when the expectation roulette image is displayed approximately in the center of the display area of the liquid crystal display device rather than at the bottom left.
In addition, when the entire expectation roulette image is displayed in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, the number displayed in a predetermined position (for example, directly above) when the rotation stops can be used as the stopping result indicating the expectation.

The "Hold Change Roulette Effect" is executed during special reach effects, but during special reach effects, decorative symbols are displayed in small size, allowing players to focus on the "Hold Change Roulette Effect."

When the "reserved change roulette effect" is executed, the small decorative symbols may be displayed even smaller or may be erased. Also, when the execution of the "reserved change roulette effect" is completed, the display of the small decorative symbols may be resumed.
In addition, when the "reserve change roulette effect" is executed before or after the start of a special reach effect, or when it is executed in a variable display in which a special reach effect is not executed, it is good to reduce the size of the decorative symbols or increase the size of the reserve change roulette image at the start of the effect, just like in the case of the expectation roulette image. Also, at the end of the effect, it is good to return the size of the decorative symbols to the original size or return the size of the reserve change roulette image to the original size.

The "double roulette effect" may be executed over multiple variable display rounds. In this case, the "expectation roulette effect" may be executed before the variable display starts based on a look-ahead process. For example, the "expectation roulette effect" may be executed in response to the reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area to display a predetermined number, and the number may be displayed until the variable display corresponding to this reserved image ends. In this case, since the player does not know which reserved image the expectation is being displayed for, the player can maintain a sense of expectation until the display of the number ends.
On the other hand, for the "hold change roulette effect", it is preferable to decide whether or not to execute the effect when the variable display starts, and to make it possible to execute the effect at a predetermined timing while the decorative pattern is changing (that is, the "hold change roulette effect" is not executed before the variable display that performs the "hold change roulette effect" starts). In this way, even if a normal (white) reserved image is displayed as the reserved image at the start of the special reach effect, the "hold change roulette effect" will be executed, and the player can be made to feel a sense of anticipation that this suggests a higher level of expectation.

A predetermined display effect suggesting the degree of expectation may be executed during the execution of the "expectation degree roulette effect." Similarly, a predetermined display effect suggesting the degree of expectation may be executed during the execution of the "hold change roulette effect."
As a predetermined display effect, for example, a predetermined comment may be displayed together with the display of a character image, and the degree of expectation may be suggested by the content or color of the comment. Alternatively, a timer image that counts down a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) may be displayed, and a predetermined image may be displayed when the timer reaches zero seconds, suggesting the predetermined degree of expectation by the type of image displayed. In addition to this, the predetermined degree of expectation may also be suggested by the type of color or shape of the timer image, the time on the timer that is initially displayed (i.e., the time elapsed until zero seconds), etc.
In addition, the predetermined display effect executed during the execution of the "expectation roulette effect" and the predetermined display effect executed during the execution of the "hold change roulette effect" may be the same display effect, or may be different display effects.
In addition, a specified display effect may be started while the ``expectation roulette effect'' or the ``hold change roulette effect'' is being executed, or the ``expectation roulette effect'' or the ``hold change roulette effect'' may be started while the specified display effect is being executed.
In addition, a predetermined display effect may be ended while the "expectation roulette effect" or the "hold change roulette effect" is being executed, or the "expectation roulette effect" or the "hold change roulette effect" may be ended while the predetermined display effect is being executed.
According to this embodiment, multiple entertainment options can be provided to the player.

Although the "expectation roulette effect" and the "reserve change roulette effect" have been described, both the expectation and the reserve change may be suggested by an effect using a single roulette image. For example, only one roulette image may be displayed, and one of ten numbers and letters, "10,""30,""50,""70,""99,""blue,""green,""red,""gold," and "rainbow," may be displayed as the display result when the roulette spins and stops.
In addition, it may be possible to implement similar effects using roulette images for other display effects as well, not just for expectation levels and hold changes.
For example, the display may be configured to display words such as "change,""pseudoconsecutive," or "rise." Note that "change" suggests that a pending change will occur, "pseudo consecutive" suggests that a pseudo consecutive will occur, and "rise" suggests that the color of the displayed comment will differ depending on the expectation level, and that when the color displayed is low expectation, "rise" will change to a color with high expectation.

Alternatively, "change roulette effect,""pseudo consecutive roulette effect,""rising roulette effect," and "development reach roulette" may be provided, and the change mode, pseudo consecutive mode, rising mode, or special reach effect may be selected from multiple options. Note that it is preferable to vary the degree of expectation suggested by the option.
The "changing roulette effect" and the "rising roulette effect" are as described above, but in the case of a "pseudo consecutive roulette effect," the specific number of pseudo consecutive times to be executed may be suggested, and in the case of an "advanced reach roulette effect," the specific reach effect to be executed may be suggested. Note that in each roulette effect, the image when the roulette is spinning may be the same, and a predetermined display (for example, pseudo consecutive! or rising!) may be made when the roulette is stopped and displayed, or the type displayed may be distinguishable from the image when the roulette is spinning.

Although the embodiment in which the "expectation roulette effect" and the "hold change roulette effect" are executed in two places in the display area has been shown, the "expectation roulette effect" may be executed in each of the two places in the display area. Also, the "hold change roulette effect" may be executed in each of the two places in the display area. In this way, the same roulette effect may be executed in two places.
In this case, the roulette effects may be started to be executed at the same time, and the display results of the roulette effects may be made at the same time, so that a display with a high expectation is applied; alternatively, after one roulette effect is started to be executed and before the one roulette effect is stopped and displayed, the other roulette effect may be started to be executed, and before the one roulette effect is stopped and displayed, and after the one roulette effect is stopped and displayed, the other roulette effect may be stopped and displayed; alternatively, after one roulette effect is started to be executed and the one roulette effect is stopped and displayed, the result of the stopped and displayed is hidden, and then the other roulette effect may be started to be executed.
Even in this case, it is preferable that a predetermined roulette effect that starts when a special reach effect is being executed is executed only once, and that a roulette effect that starts before the special reach effect is executed can be executed multiple times.
Specifically, for example, in a "double roulette effect," if it is determined that both "potential roulette effects" are to be executed, one of the potential roulette effects can be executed multiple times before the special reach effect is executed (e.g., the potential image may be displayed as "10" → "30" → "50," or "99" → "10" → "99," or "99" → "99" → "99"). The other potential roulette effect is executed once while the special reach effect is being executed. In this case, it is preferable to hide the display result of one of the potential roulette effects before the other potential roulette effect is executed (e.g., at the timing when the special reach effect is executed, the timing when the other potential roulette effect is executed, or a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds) after the display result of one of the potential roulette effects is executed). This is because displaying multiple potential images may confuse the player.
In addition, since the result displayed in one expectation roulette effect is hidden when the result displayed in the other expectation roulette effect is displayed, it is possible that the player has forgotten the result displayed in one expectation roulette effect, and therefore it is not necessary to display a result higher than the result displayed in one expectation roulette effect, and it is also possible to display the lowest expectation ("10" as an expectation image) in the other expectation roulette effect. Also, a result display higher than the result displayed in one expectation roulette effect may be displayed in the other expectation roulette effect.

Furthermore, in the "double roulette effect," if it is decided to execute both "hold change roulette effects," the hold display is displayed even when the special reach effect is displayed, so so-called "demotion" does not occur. In such a situation, if multiple hold changes are made before the special reach effect is performed, the display may be in a manner suggesting that multiple hold changes will be made (for example, "hold change! x 2"), or it may not suggest that multiple hold changes will be made. Furthermore, if the result display for the hold change roulette effect is "hold change! (a display result that does not show a specific color)," the hold display after the change may be displayed immediately after "hold change!" is displayed, or the hold display after the change may be displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed rather than immediately displaying the hold display after the change.
The type of roulette effect to be used is determined based on the results of the win/loss judgment, but with regard to the ``pseudo consecutive roulette effect,'' since the pseudo consecutive effect itself does not occur after the special reach effect is executed, it is not decided to execute the ``pseudo consecutive roulette effect'' after the special reach effect is executed.
Furthermore, the roulette effect may be executed in three or more display areas, not limited to two, or may be executed in only one display area.
Furthermore, as mentioned above, it may be possible to execute roulette effects other than the "expectation roulette effect" and the "hold change roulette effect"("change roulette effect,""pseudo consecutive roulette effect," and "rise roulette effect"), and it may also be possible to execute appropriate combinations of each roulette effect.

In addition, "x" or "?" may be displayed as the display result for each roulette effect. For example, when a roulette wheel showing "期" starts to run, a "?" may be displayed as the display result, or when a roulette wheel showing "保" starts to run, an "x" may be displayed as the display result and no reserve change will occur.

This "double roulette effect" can provide players with a new and exciting experience.

Modified embodiments of the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 321 etc. will be described below with reference to FIGS. 337 to 344 etc.
In the "silhouette preview effect," which is a special effect in the embodiment shown below, multiple characters are displayed in silhouette in an effect window displayed in the display area, and then one of these characters is displayed to indicate the degree of expectation. Note that this "silhouette preview effect" is an effect that can be executed after a special reach effect (all SP reach effects excluding normal reach or some of the SP reach effects excluding normal reach (such as the battle reach effect mentioned above)) has started.

First, we will explain each character displayed in the "Silhouette Preview Effect" with reference to Figures 337 and 339. Four types of characters are available for display in this effect: martial artist character, warrior character, samurai character, and wizard character.

FIG. 337(a) shows an image of a martial artist character painted in multiple colors.
Figure 337(b) shows the state in which the martial artist character is displayed in a monochrome silhouette in the presentation window.
Figure 337 (c) shows a state in which the martial artist character is displayed as a monochrome silhouette in the performance window, and a halo image is displayed behind the martial artist character, which appears to be a halo.
Figure 337(d) shows a state in which a martial artist character painted in multiple colors is displayed in the presentation window.
Figure 337(e) shows a state in which a character image indicating the degree of expectation is displayed in the presentation window together with a martial artist character painted in multiple colors. In this example, the character image "Super Hot" is displayed on the tip of the hammer. Note that other character images may also be displayed, but details will be given later.
Figure 337(f) shows a state in which a dialogue image is displayed in the performance window along with a martial artist character painted in multiple colors.
Figure 337(g) shows a state in which a martial artist character painted in multiple colors is trembling and shaking in excitement in the performance window, and a dialogue image is displayed.

FIG. 338(a) shows a warrior character image painted in multiple colors.
Figure 338(b) shows a warrior character displayed in a monochrome silhouette in the presentation window.
Figure 338 (c) shows a state in which a warrior character is displayed in a monochrome silhouette in the performance window, and a halo image is displayed behind the warrior character, appearing like a halo.
Figure 338(d) shows a state in which a warrior character painted in multiple colors is displayed in the presentation window.
Figure 338(e) shows a state in which a character image indicating the degree of expectation is displayed in the presentation window together with a warrior character painted in multiple colors. In this example, the character image "Super Hot" is displayed near the sword. Note that other character images may also be displayed, but details will be given later.
Figure 338(f) shows a state in which a dialogue image is displayed in the performance window along with a warrior character painted in multiple colors.
Figure 338(g) shows a state in which a warrior character painted in multiple colors in the performance window is wearing a tiara and armor, holding a sword, and a dialogue image is displayed.

FIG. 339(a) shows an image of a samurai character painted in multiple colors.
Figure 339(b) shows the samurai character displayed in a monochrome silhouette in the presentation window.
Figure 339 (c) shows a state in which the samurai character is displayed as a monochrome silhouette in the performance window, and a halo image is displayed behind the samurai character, which is visible as a halo.
Figure 339(d) shows a state in which a samurai character painted in multiple colors is displayed in the performance window.
Figure 339(e) shows a state in which a character image indicating the degree of expectation is displayed in the performance window together with a samurai character painted in multiple colors. In this example, the character image "Super Hot" is displayed on the headband worn on the forehead. Note that other character images may also be displayed, but details will be given later.
Figure 339(f) shows a state in which a dialogue image is displayed in the performance window along with a samurai character painted in multiple colors.
Figure 339(g) shows a state in which a samurai character painted in multiple colors is holding his sword in a cross shape in the performance window, and a dialogue image is displayed.

FIG. 340(a) shows an image of a wizard character painted in multiple colors.
Figure 340(b) shows the wizard character displayed in a monochrome silhouette in the presentation window.
Figure 340 (c) shows a state in which the wizard character is displayed as a monochrome silhouette in the performance window, and a halo image is displayed behind the wizard character, appearing like a halo.
Figure 340(d) shows a wizard character painted in multiple colors displayed in the performance window.
Figure 340(e) shows a state in which a text image indicating the degree of expectation is displayed in the presentation window together with a wizard character painted in multiple colors. In this example, the text image "Super Hot" is displayed at the tip of the wand. Note that other text images may also be displayed, but details will be described later.
Figure 340(f) shows a state in which a dialogue image is displayed in the performance window along with a wizard character painted in multiple colors.
Figure 340 (g) shows a wizard character painted in multiple colors in the performance window, raising his left hand and holding up his wand, and a dialogue image is displayed.

Figures 337(a), 338(a), 339(a), and 340(a) show images of each character, with each character having a different hairstyle, facial expression, body shape, clothing, and weapon. These body parts are also painted in multiple different colors. This allows the detailed facial expression, hairstyle, and clothing to be seen within the character's outline. In this embodiment, this type of display is sometimes referred to as a non-silhouette display or a non-silhouette display. Furthermore, in this display, each character has a different hair color and clothing color. For example, a warrior character's hair may be brown and clothing may be blue, while a wizard character's hair and clothing may be pink. Using this type of non-silhouette display allows the player to easily recognize which character is being displayed.

On the other hand, in this presentation, only the outlines of these characters may be recognized, and the inside of the outlines may be displayed in a manner in which only a predetermined color (e.g., black or gray) is filled in. Figures 337(b), 337(c), 338(b), 338(c), 339(b), 339(c), 340(b), and 340(c) show a state in which the inside of each character's outline is displayed in a manner in which a predetermined color is filled in. This display mode is sometimes referred to as a silhouette display in this embodiment. According to this display mode, the characters are displayed as shadow puppets or silhouettes, and only their outlines are visible. Therefore, although it is not visible whether the character has the "Super Hot" character image indicating the expected level displayed on it, it is easy to recognize which of the characters it is.
It should be noted that instead of filling the inside of each character's outline with only one color, it may be filled with a predetermined pattern (for example, a gradation or checkerboard pattern), and such a display mode may also be included in the silhouette display.

Figures 337(c), 338(c), 339(c), and 340(c) show a state in which a halo image is displayed behind a character displayed in silhouette. Note that the display of a halo image suggests a higher level of expectation than when no halo image is displayed, but more details will be provided later.

Figures 337(e), 338(e), 339(e), and 340(e) show a state in which a text image ("Super Hot") is displayed on a character's weapon or part of their body. The types of text images that can be displayed are "Chance," "Super Hot," and "Hit," which suggest that the likelihood of winning increases in that order; more details will be provided later.

In Figures 337(f), 338(f), 339(f), and 340(f), a dialogue image is displayed to the left of the character, which is not displayed in silhouette. Note that each character is displayed statically, and is not displayed in a moving manner as described below.

In Figures 337(g), 338(g), 339(g), and 340(g), a dialogue image is displayed to the left of the characters displayed in silhouette, and dynamic displays such as each character moving are performed, showing a change in the display mode (hereinafter, dynamic displays such as each character moving may be referred to as "specific displays"). Note that the change in display mode suggests higher expectations than when the display mode does not change, but more details will be provided below.

Next, the effect patterns of the "silhouette preview effect" will be described with reference to the effect pattern table of FIG. 341. In this embodiment, effect patterns 01 to 13 are provided. Furthermore, in each effect pattern, multiple execution modes may be provided for a given effect. For example, for "presence or absence of a halo when a silhouette is displayed,""display mode of a character when a character is confirmed,""text display when a character is displayed," and "character movement," one of multiple display modes is selected and the effect is executed.
In the "silhouette preview performance," silhouette characters are first displayed four times, and then one of the characters is displayed.
As shown in the "First Silhouette Display" column in Figure 341, the martial artist character is displayed in silhouette form the first time.
Next, as shown in the "Second Silhouette Display" column in FIG. 341, a silhouette warrior character is displayed for the second time.
Next, a silhouette of the samurai character is displayed for the third time, as shown in the "Third Silhouette Display" column in Figure 341. The display mode up to the third silhouette display is common to all effect patterns.
Next, as shown in the "4th Silhouette Display" column in Fig. 341, one of the four characters is displayed in silhouette for the fourth time. Specifically, one of the martial artist character, warrior character, samurai character, and wizard character is displayed.

As shown in the "Halo presence or absence when silhouette is displayed" column in Figure 341, the display mode of the character when the silhouette is displayed for the first through fourth times can be either when no halo image is displayed behind the character, or when a halo image is displayed behind the character, and either display mode can be selected.
These display modes will be explained using a martial artist character as an example. Fig. 337(b) shows an example in which a martial artist character is displayed in a mode in which a halo image is not displayed. Fig. 337(c) shows an example in which a martial artist character is displayed in a mode in which a halo image is displayed.

After that, if there are three characters displayed, i.e., if the wizard character is not selected in the "fourth silhouette display," the three characters, the martial artist character, the warrior character, and the samurai character, are rapidly switched and displayed, and then one of the three characters displayed is finally displayed as a frozen character. The characters that are frozen are as shown in the "Finally frozen character" column in Figure 341, and in the case of presentation pattern 01 to presentation pattern 03, the martial artist character is frozen, in the case of presentation pattern 05 to presentation pattern 07, the warrior character is frozen, and in the case of presentation pattern 09 to presentation pattern 11, the samurai character is frozen.
On the other hand, if there are four characters displayed, i.e., if the wizard character is selected in the "fourth silhouette display," the four characters, namely, the martial artist character, the warrior character, the samurai character, and the wizard character, are rapidly switched and displayed, and then one of the four characters displayed is finally displayed as a frozen character. The characters that are finally displayed as frozen characters are as shown in the "Finally displayed as a frozen character" column in Figure 341, and in the case of presentation pattern 04, the martial artist character is displayed as a frozen character, in the case of presentation pattern 08, the warrior character is displayed as a frozen character, in the case of presentation pattern 12, the samurai character is displayed as a frozen character, and in the case of presentation pattern 13, the wizard character is displayed as a frozen character.

As shown in the "Character display mode when character is confirmed" column in Figure 341, there are two types of character display modes when the character is stopped and displayed: "silhouette display" and "non-silhouette display", and either mode can be selected.
These display modes will be explained using a martial artist character as an example. Fig. 337(b) shows an example in which a martial artist character is displayed in the "silhouette display" mode. Fig. 337(d) shows an example in which a martial artist character is displayed in the "non-silhouette display" mode.
When a character is displayed as a silhouette, the character gradually begins to take on color, and the character no longer appears as a silhouette, but is instead painted in multiple colors.

When comparing the case where no halo is displayed with the case where a halo is displayed, the expectation is higher in the latter case.
The type of character displayed also indicates the degree of expectation. Specifically, the degree of expectation increases in the order of martial artist character, warrior character, samurai character, and wizard character.
Also, when a character is confirmed, the character may be displayed as a silhouette or not (i.e., not as a silhouette but suddenly displayed in multiple colors), with the latter being more likely to occur.
Furthermore, when a character is determined, the expectation of a big win may be set higher when the character is displayed as a silhouette than when the character is not displayed as a silhouette.
Furthermore, when a character is confirmed, the expectation level for either the case where the character is displayed as a non-silhouette or a silhouette may be set to 100%, and the expectation level for the other case may be set to less than 100%. By setting either case to 100%, a sense of security is provided when an effect with 100% expectation level is displayed, and the sense of expectation is maintained even if an effect with 100% expectation level is not displayed.

In a mode in which a character is displayed in multiple colors (i.e., in a mode in which the character is not displayed in silhouette), a text image may be displayed along with the character to indicate the degree of expectation. As shown in the "Text display when character is displayed" column in Fig. 341, one of the following modes may be selected: a mode in which no text is displayed, a mode in which the text "Chance" is displayed, a mode in which a text image of "Super Hot" is displayed, or a mode in which the text "Win" is displayed. Using a martial artist character as an example, Fig. 337(e) shows an example in which the word "Super Hot" is displayed on the martial artist character's hammer.
The degree of expectation increases in the order of the mode in which no characters are displayed, the mode in which the character "chance" is displayed, the mode in which the character "super hot" is displayed, and the mode in which the character "win" is displayed. The degree of expectation for the mode in which the character "win" is displayed is 100%. Also, the appearance rate decreases in the order of the mode in which no characters are displayed, the mode in which the character "chance" is displayed, the mode in which the character "super hot" is displayed, and the mode in which the character "win" is displayed.

After the character is confirmed, a predetermined dialogue image is displayed next to the character, and there is a one-to-one correspondence between the character type and the dialogue displayed, as shown in the "Character dialogue" column in Figure 341. For example, in the case of a martial artist character, the dialogue displayed is "Go, fight, and come back! Just like always!"
Simultaneously with the display of the lines, a display (dynamic display) may be made in which the character performs a predetermined action, such as swinging a weapon, as shown in the "Character Action" column of FIG.
Taking a martial artist character as an example, Fig. 337(f) shows a display mode in which the martial artist character does not perform a predetermined action, while Fig. 337(g) shows an example in which the martial artist character is dynamically displayed in a mode in which the entire body is shaking.
When the character does not move (when it is not displayed dynamically), the expectation is higher when the character moves (when it is displayed dynamically).
It is also possible to make the characters always be displayed dynamically.

Next, a more specific embodiment of the "silhouette preview effect" will be explained with reference to the effect pattern table shown in Figure 341, the time chart in Figure 342, and the display examples in Figures 343 to 345.
In the time chart shown in Fig. 342, vertical lines indicating each timing are drawn in 0.5-second increments. Timings may also be expressed in 0.5-second increments, such as timing t44.5 and timing t50.5. Similar notations may also be used in other figures described in this specification, not just this figure.
Note that expressions such as timing t10.2, timing t10.4, timing t10.33, and timing t10.67 may be used to specify any timing, not just in 0.5-second increments. These expressions indicate timings 10.2 seconds, 10.4 seconds, 10.33 seconds, and 10.67 seconds after timing t0, respectively.
Although an example has been shown in which vertical lines are drawn in the figure at increments of 1 second or 0.5 seconds, in explaining the technical content described in the specification, it is not necessarily necessary to draw vertical lines at the timings you want to specify. For example, in a time chart in which vertical lines are drawn at increments of 1 second, it is possible to specify specific timings shorter than 1 second (for example, the above-mentioned timing t10.2, timing t10.33, etc.) using decimal points.

First, we will explain performance example 01 shown in Figure 342 (a). Performance example 01 is a performance example when, in performance pattern 04 shown in Figure 341, "none" is selected for "Whether or not to display halo when silhouette is displayed," "silhouette display" is selected for "Display mode of character, etc. when character is confirmed," "none" is selected for "Text display when character is displayed," and "none" is selected for "Character movement."

First, at a predetermined timing (timing t44.5) during the execution of a special reach effect (all SP reach effects excluding normal reach, such as the battle reach effect described above, or some of the SP reach effects excluding normal reach), an effect window is displayed near the center of the display area. Figure 343(a) shows a display example at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t44) before the effect window is displayed. In this example, as a special reach effect, an effect in which a martial artist character and a bomb character fight each other is displayed, and if the martial artist character wins as a result of the battle, it is a jackpot, and if the bomb character wins, it is a loss. Note that instead of the martial artist character, an effect in which a warrior character, a samurai character, or a wizard character fights the bomb character may be displayed.
The effect window may be configured to use the entire display area, in which case the player will not be able to see the special reach effects or decorative symbols.
343(b) shows an example of a display during the display of the effect window (for example, at a predetermined timing between timing t44.5 and timing t45). Note that no characters are displayed in the effect window during the period from timing t44.5 to timing t45, but character images, etc. are displayed during the period from timing t45 to timing t50.5.
Next, the details of the display content in the performance window will be explained with reference to Figure 343 (d) and subsequent figures.
First, during the period from timing t45 to timing t45.5, an image of a silhouette of a martial artist character is displayed in the presentation window. Figure 343(d) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during the period from timing t45.5 to timing t46, an image of a silhouette warrior character is displayed in the effect window. Figure 343(e) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during the period from timing t46 to timing t46.5, an image of a silhouette of a samurai character is displayed in the effect window. Figure 343(f) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during the period from timing t46.5 to timing t47, an image of a silhouette of a wizard character is displayed in the effect window. Figure 343(g) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during the period from timing t47 to timing t48, the silhouette images of each character are displayed in sequence in the presentation window at high speed (for example, every 0.1 seconds). Figure 344(a) shows the state in which all four silhouette characters are superimposed (the state visually perceived by the player).

Next, from timing t48 to timing t48.5, a silhouette of a martial artist character is displayed as frozen. Figure 344(b) shows the display state at this time. By displaying the character as a silhouette in this way, the player can imagine which character is displayed in color.
In other words, when the silhouette images of each character are switched and displayed at high speed (for example, every 0.1 seconds), it is not possible to recall which colored character will be displayed, but at the stage when the silhouette display of one of the characters is selectively performed (timing t48), it is possible to recall which colored character will be displayed, and therefore the display that allows one to recall which colored character will be displayed (the display at timing t48) may be referred to below as a recall display.
Note that, since one of the multiple silhouette characters displayed during the period from timing t45 to timing t48 is displayed in color, it could be said that the colored character can be recalled by the multiple silhouette characters displayed during the period from timing t45 to timing t48, but since the player cannot determine with certainty which colored character has been selected, the multiple silhouette characters displayed during the period from timing t45 to timing t48 are not recalled.
Next, during the period from timing t48.5 to timing t49, the martial artist character gradually changes from a silhouette to one painted in multiple colors. Figure 344(c) shows the display state during the change. Figure 344(d) shows the display state after the change has ended. Note that when the silhouette character displayed in the recalled display gradually changes to one painted in multiple colors, for example, if the silhouette character is a martial artist, the character will not be changed to another character; for example, the character will gradually change color and become a wizard.
Next, during the period from timing t49 to timing t50, the martial artist character is displayed in a stationary state. Figure 344(d) shows the display state at this time.
Next, from timing t50 to timing t50.5, an image of the dialogue "Go, fight, and come back! Just like always!" is displayed to the left of the martial artist character. Figure 344(e) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t50.5, the display of the martial artist character and his/her lines ends, and at timing t51, the display of the effect window ends. Figure 343 (c) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t52) after the display of the effect window ends. Note that at the timing when the display of the effect window ends, the win/loss notification effect (the effect indicating whether it is a win or a loss) for the special reach effect (all SP reach effects excluding normal reach, such as the battle reach effect described above, or some of the SP reach effects excluding normal reach) has not yet been performed.

Next, we will explain performance example 02 shown in Figure 342 (b). Performance example 02 is a performance example when, in performance pattern 13 shown in Figure 341, "Yes" is selected as "Whether or not to display halo when silhouette is displayed," "No silhouette display" is selected as "Display mode of character etc. when character is confirmed," "Super hot" is selected as "Text display when character is displayed," and "Raises wand" is selected as "Character action."

First, at a predetermined timing (timing t44.5) during the execution of a special reach effect (all SP reach effects excluding normal reach effects, such as the battle reach effect mentioned above, or some of the SP reach effects excluding normal reach effects), an effect window is displayed near the center of a part of the display area. Figure 343(a) shows an example of a display at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t44) before the effect window is displayed.
The effect window may be configured to use the entire display area, in which case the player will not be able to see the special reach effects or decorative symbols.
Also, Figure 343 (b) shows an example of the display while the rendering window is being displayed (for example, at a predetermined timing between timing t44.5 and timing t51). Note that no characters are displayed in the rendering window during the period from timing t44.5 to timing t45. Note that the display content up to this point is the same as in rendering example 01.
Next, the details of the display content in the performance window will be explained with reference to Figures 345(a) to 345(g).
First, during the period from timing t45 to timing t45.5, an image of a silhouette of a martial artist character is displayed in the presentation window. Figure 345(a) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during the period from timing t45.5 to timing t46, an image of a silhouette warrior character is displayed in the effect window. Figure 345(b) shows the display state at this time.
Next, during the period from timing t46 to timing t46.5, an image of a silhouette of a samurai character is displayed in the effect window. Figure 345(c) shows the display state at this time.
Next, from timing t46.5 to timing t47, an image of a silhouette of a wizard character is displayed in the effect window. Figure 345(d) shows the display state at this time.
As shown in the figure, a halo is displayed behind each character.
Next, during the period from timing t47 to timing t48.5, the silhouette images of each character are displayed in sequence in the presentation window at high speed (for example, every 0.1 seconds). Figure 345(e) shows the state in which all four silhouette characters are superimposed (as visually perceived by the player).

Next, from timing t48.5 to timing t49.5, a wizard character is displayed frozen and not silhouetted, painted in multiple colors. The character is holding a wand with the words "Super Hot" (super hot) on the end. Figure 345(f) shows the display state at this time.
Next, from timing t49.5 to timing t50, an image of the words "Sorry to keep you waiting!" is displayed to the left of the wizard character. Also, a specific dynamic display is performed in which the wizard character moves his left arm and changes into a pose with his wand raised. Figure 345(g) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t50, the display of the wizard character and his lines ends, and at timing t50.5, the display of the effect window ends. Figure 343 (c) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (e.g., timing t52) after the display of the effect window ends.

Here, the differences between rendering example 01 and rendering example 02 will be explained.
First, the first difference is that the display mode of the characters after they are rapidly switched between in performance example 01 and performance example 02 is different. In performance example 01, the characters are first displayed in silhouette, and then gradually become colored. On the other hand, in performance example 02, the characters are not displayed in silhouette, but are immediately displayed in color. In other words, performance example 01 provides a reminder display (a frozen display in silhouette) that allows the viewer to recall which character has been selected from the characters that will later be displayed in color, whereas performance example 02 does not provide a reminder display (a frozen display in silhouette).
In this way, in each presentation pattern, both a presentation mode in which the character is first displayed as a silhouette (with a reminder display) and a presentation mode in which the character is displayed as a non-silhouette, suddenly colored (without a reminder display) may be executed. Furthermore, the expectation of a win may differ depending on the presentation mode (depending on whether or not a reminder display is present). For example, the expectation of the latter may be higher than the former when comparing a presentation mode in which the character is first displayed as a silhouette (with a reminder display) with a presentation mode in which the character is displayed as a non-silhouette, suddenly colored (without a reminder display). Furthermore, in this case, the appearance rate of the latter may be lower than the former.
Alternatively, for example, a presentation mode in which the character is first displayed as a silhouette (with a reminder display) may be set to have a higher expectation level than a presentation mode in which the character is first displayed as a non-silhouette and suddenly colored (without a reminder display).In this case, the appearance rate of the former may be set to be lower than that of the latter.

Next, as a second difference, in production example 01 and production example 02, in addition to the display mode of the character after the character is rapidly switched (whether or not it is displayed as a reminiscence), the length of time (period) for which the character is rapidly switched is also different, corresponding to whether the character is displayed as a silhouette or a non-silhouette after the rapid switching. Specifically, in production example 01, it is 1 second (the period from timing t47 to timing t48), and in production example 02, it is 1.5 seconds (the period from timing t47 to timing t48.5).
For this reason, if the expectation of a win is higher in performance example 02, in which the time (period) of rapidly switching characters is longer than in performance example 01 and the display mode of the stopped characters is displayed in a non-silhouette form, than in performance example 01, in which the time (period) of rapidly switching characters is shorter and the display mode of the stopped characters is displayed in a silhouette form (reminiscent display), it can make the player feel that the time (period) of rapidly switching characters is longer.Also, if the expectation of a win is lower in performance example 02, in which the time (period) of rapidly switching characters is longer than in performance example 01 and the display mode of the stopped characters is displayed in a non-silhouette form, than in performance example 01, in which the time (period) of rapidly switching characters is shorter and the display mode of the stopped characters is displayed in a silhouette form (reminiscent display), it can make the player feel that the high-speed switching will end soon.Furthermore, when the display mode of the stopped characters is displayed in a silhouette form (reminiscent display), the expectation of a win may be set to 100%. In this way, if the high-speed switching is completed quickly, the player is provided with a sense of security, and even if the high-speed switching is not completed quickly, the player's sense of anticipation is maintained.

In this way, with the "silhouette preview effect," players will pay close attention to the progress of the effect, focusing on such things as whether or not there is a halo when the silhouette is displayed, whether or not a wizard character will appear when the fourth silhouette is displayed, which character will ultimately be displayed, whether or not the displayed character is in silhouette (whether or not the rapid switching display time is long), an effect in which a character displayed in silhouette gradually changes color and is displayed as a non-silhouette (an effect in which the displayed character changes from being unclear to being clearly identifiable), whether or not a text image is attached to a colored character, and if so, what text image is attached, and whether or not the character will move (whether or not a dynamic display is performed), and the level of expectation suggested will increase anticipation for the resulting decorative pattern change display.

In the embodiment shown, a "silhouette preview effect" is executed during a special reach effect, but after the "silhouette preview effect" ends (the effect window display ends), the battle between the characters ends at a predetermined timing, and a display is made to show which character will win. Also, depending on the battle result, the decorative pattern is displayed in either a mode indicating a big win or a mode indicating a loss.
In this embodiment, at timing t53, the character's battle result is shown and a decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in a manner corresponding to the battle result, and at timing t54, the decorative pattern is changed to a decorative pattern exclusive to special reach performances or a decorative pattern for normal times, and the background image is changed from a background image exclusive to special reach performances to a background image for normal times, and at timing t55, the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state.
After timing t56, if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, a jackpot game will start. If the result of the special lottery is a loss and there are pending winnings, a new variable display will start. If the result of the special lottery is a loss and there are no pending winnings, the game will enter a standby state.

The dialogue image may be displayed together with audio output. The entire dialogue may be output as audio, or only a portion of the dialogue may be output as audio.
Alternatively, the dialogue image may not be displayed, and only the audio may be output.

Note that the timing of switching between character images at high speed is not limited to every 0.1 seconds, but may be, for example, every 0.33 seconds to 0.2 seconds.

We have mentioned that the degree of expectation can be suggested by various effects (presence or absence of a halo, the type of character that is finally displayed in a stopped state, the display mode of the character when the character is confirmed, the mode of text display when the character is displayed, whether the character moves, etc.), but it is best to increase the appearance rate the lower the expectation, and decrease the appearance rate the higher the expectation.
For example, the characters that are finally displayed in a stopped state are a martial artist character, a warrior character, a samurai character, and a wizard character, but it is preferable to make the expected appearance probability of the martial artist character, warrior character, samurai character, and wizard character increase in that order, and the probability of their appearance decrease.

Although an example has been shown in which the "silhouette preview effect" ends (at timing t51 in the case of effect example 01 in FIG. 342) before the win/loss branching effect (the effect suggesting a win or loss) in a special reach effect (all SP reach effects excluding normal reach, such as the battle reach effect described above, or some of the SP reach effects excluding normal reach) is performed, the display of the effect window may continue after timing t51. For example, the display of the effect window may continue even when the time for the win/loss notification effect to be performed arrives, or the display of the effect window may continue even while the win/loss notification effect is being performed, or the display of the effect window may continue even when the variable state of the decorative pattern is displayed as stopped (a fixed stop period). Note that if the display of the effect window is to continue when the time for the win/loss notification effect to be performed arrives or while the win/loss notification effect is being performed, it is desirable to display it in a different manner, such as by reducing the display of the effect window, so that the win/loss notification effect can be seen.
For example, if the decorative symbol stops and displays as a jackpot, the effect window may continue to be displayed during the jackpot game.
In addition, if the decorative pattern stops and displays as a miss, and there is no pending symbol, the effect window display may be continued.
For example, the display of the effect window may continue until the decorative patterns are temporarily displayed as a combination of "5", "6", and "5" (display state shown in Figure 346(a)), or thereafter until the decorative patterns are temporarily displayed as a combination of "5", "6", and "5" (display state shown in Figure 346(b)).
It is preferable to set the display priority of the effect window (including characters and letters; the same applies below) lower than that of the normal decorative symbols. Also, after the decorative symbols have been displayed stationary for one second, it is preferable to set the display priority of the effect window higher than that of the normal decorative symbols (display state shown in FIG. 346(c)).
Furthermore, if a starting winning does not occur within a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) after the decorative symbol stops, the display of the decorative symbol may be interrupted and a demo video of the gaming machine (a video explaining the model name and the story and characters that are the motif of the model) may be played. Even in this situation, the display of the effect window may be continued (display state shown in FIG. 346(d)). The display priority of the demo video may be set lower than the display priority of the effect window, so that the effect window is displayed in front of the demo video. Alternatively, the display priority of the demo video may be set higher than the display priority of the effect window, so that the effect window is displayed behind the demo video.
Note that the character may be displayed statically in the effect window. In this case, it is advisable to continue to display the character in a static manner after it has made a predetermined movement, as shown in Figures 338(g), 339(g), and 340(g).
Alternatively, the character may be displayed dynamically. For example, the martial artist character shown in Fig. 337(g) may be displayed with its entire body continuously shaking. Furthermore, warrior characters, samurai characters, and wizard characters may be displayed with their weapons continuously swung.
In addition, the display of the effect window and characters should end when a new variable display begins (when there is a hold or when a starting winning occurs when there is no hold) or after a predetermined time (e.g., 10 minutes) has passed since the decorative pattern stopped display.
In this way, the character continues to be displayed even after the special reach effect has ended, which can soothe the player's spirit.
It is more effective if the dynamic display of each character is made comical. Furthermore, as a dynamic display pattern, a dynamic display pattern that is not displayed during the special reach performance may be displayed.

For example, at timing t50 in rendering example 01, a dialogue image encouraging the player to operate the operating means may be displayed. For example, a character may prompt the player to operate the handle 302 by displaying "You missed... too bad, hit it left!"
By displaying such a message, it is possible to prevent a player who has stopped shooting game balls during a special reach effect from simply quitting the game, thereby increasing the operating rate of the gaming machine.
Furthermore, if there are holds and one of them will result in a jackpot, a line such as "You missed it... too bad, but now it's time to hit left!" may be displayed based on the pre-reading process to suggest that a jackpot will occur.
In this case, first, the text "You missed...too bad," is displayed, and then the text "Hit left!" or "Hit left now!" is displayed, thereby contributing to preventing a decline in interest even when the special reach effect results in a miss.

In Presentation Example 01, the martial artist character is displayed as a silhouette from timing t48 to timing t48.5. On the other hand, in Presentation Example 01, the martial artist character may be dynamically displayed from timing t50 to timing t50.5.
Although the example has been given in which the time period during which the character is displayed as a silhouette and the time period during which the character is displayed dynamically are the same length, they may be different times.
For example, the length of time that a character is displayed in silhouette may be longer than the length of time that a character is displayed dynamically. For example, the length of time that a character is displayed in silhouette may be 2 seconds, and the length of time that a character is displayed dynamically may be 0.5 seconds. This allows the player sufficient time to recognize which character is displayed.
Alternatively, the length of time for which the character is displayed in silhouette may be shorter than the length of time for which the character is displayed dynamically. For example, the length of time for which the character is displayed in silhouette may be 0.5 seconds, and the length of time for which the character is displayed dynamically may be 2 seconds. In this case, even if the player does not carefully watch the flow of the presentation during the course of the presentation, there will still be enough time to check the type of character, whether or not and what type of text is displayed, and whether or not the character is moving, and certain information about the degree of expectation can be provided to the player. Furthermore, the time for the player to enjoy the character's movements can be ensured.

In addition, the decorative elements for the performance described in the example of the "hourglass hold change performance" may also be used in the "silhouette preview performance."
For example, during the period from timing t50 to timing t50.5 in performance example 01 shown in Figure 342(a) and the period from timing t49.5 to timing t50 in performance example 02 shown in Figure 342(b), there are cases where the character is displayed dynamically and cases where it is not displayed dynamically, but when the character is displayed dynamically, the decorative element for the performance may move.
In addition, it is advisable to set the expectation level higher when the decorative member for performance moves than when the decorative member for performance does not move.

It is also possible to make the decorative elements move whenever a character is displayed dynamically, thereby enhancing the dynamic display of the character.
Conversely, when a character is displayed dynamically, the decorative members for effect may be set not to move, which allows the player to focus on the dynamic display of the character.
In addition, when the decorative member for performance moves, it may be set to always be a big win. In addition, when the decorative member for performance does not move, it may be set to always be a loss.

During the period when the character is displayed in silhouette (the period when it is determined which colored character will be displayed (for example, in presentation example 01, the period from timing t48 to timing t48.5)), button operation (for example, operation of operation button 401 or attack button 3710) may be validated. Also, a simulated image imitating an operation unit indicating that button operation is valid or an image indicating the operation mode (an image such as "PUSH") may be displayed. Then, in response to button operation by the player, the displayed character may change to a character with higher expectations.
For example, with a martial artist character displayed in silhouette, a simulated image of the operation button 401 and an image of "PUSH" indicating the operation mode are displayed in the display area, and when the player presses the operation button 401, a warrior character (or a samurai character or a wizard character) may be displayed in silhouette instead of the martial artist character.
In this case, it is advisable to set the time for which the character is displayed in silhouette to be longer than 0.5 seconds (for example, 3 seconds).
According to this aspect, a character with low expectation is changed to a character with high expectation, so that even if a character with low expectation is displayed, the expectation of a big win can be maintained.
In addition, a plurality of display modes of the simulated image of the operation unit or the image showing the operation mode may be provided, and the degree of expectation may be indicated by the difference in the display mode. For example, the simulated image of the operation unit or the image showing the operation mode may be displayed in any one of white, red, and gold, and the degree of expectation may increase in this order.

In addition, the decorative elements for the performance described in the example of the "hourglass hold change performance" may also be used in the "silhouette preview performance."
For example, during the period from timing t48 to timing t48.5 in performance example 01 shown in Figure 342 (a), the character is displayed in silhouette, but it is also possible for the decorative elements for the performance to move during this period.
In addition, it is advisable to set the expectation level higher when the decorative member for performance moves than when the decorative member for performance does not move.

It is also possible to always activate the decorative elements for effect during the period when the character is displayed in silhouette, thereby enhancing the display of the silhouette character.
Conversely, when a character is displayed in silhouette, the decorative elements for effect may be set not to move, which allows the player to focus their attention on the display of the silhouette character.
In addition, when the decorative element for performance moves, it may be set to always be a big win. In addition, when the decorative element for performance does not move, it may be set to always be a loss.

In the example shown, a predetermined character is displayed after a total of four silhouette displays and rapid switching between the displayed characters, but a colored character may be suddenly displayed at a predetermined time out of the four silhouette displays. Furthermore, the various effects described above (such as those shown in the "Character Display When Character is Displayed" and "Character Action" columns in Figure 341) may be executed in response to the character.
For example, a silhouette martial artist character may be displayed the first time, and then a non-silhouette colored warrior character may be displayed the second time, and an expectation indication effect corresponding to the warrior character may be performed.
Alternatively, a silhouette martial artist character may be displayed the first time, a silhouette warrior character may be displayed the second time, a silhouette samurai character may be displayed the third time, and a colored non-silhouette wizard character may be displayed the fourth time, and an expectation suggestion effect corresponding to the wizard character may be performed.

It is advisable to use the same color for the presentation window (the color of the body part displayed as the background of the character) regardless of the type of character.
Some players who are accustomed to playing games may be disappointed when they realize that a character with low expectations will be displayed because they can know in advance the type of character that will be displayed from the color of the presentation window, but this prevents such a situation from occurring.
Alternatively, the colors of the effect windows may be different depending on the type of character.
In this case, some players who are not familiar with the game can predict the type of character in advance from the color of the presentation window, and if the displayed character matches the predicted character, the player can feel happy that he or she has become accustomed to the presentation.

This type of "silhouette preview" can provide players with a new level of excitement.

The decorative elements provided on the game board 5 include a rear panel board base plate 2420 (e.g., Figure 130), a rear panel board decorative element 2410 (e.g., Figure 131), and a tank role-playing device 3770 (e.g., Figure 241). Examples of how these decorative elements can be used for presentations, etc., have been shown. Below, we will explain modified examples that can be applied to the decorative elements.

These decorative members can be moved between a standby position and a moving position, and are therefore sometimes referred to as movable decorative members.
The movement mode is not limited to linear movement between the standby position and the moving position, and various movement and operation modes can be adopted. For example, as shown in FIG. 134, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 may be configured to rotate between the standby position and the moving position. Furthermore, the direction of the rotation axis is not limited to the left-right direction, but may be vertical or front-to-back. Alternatively, any direction can be used as the rotation axis. The movement of the movable decorative member is not limited to rotation, and it may be configured to be rotatable.

Also, with reference to Figure 241 etc., an embodiment has been shown in which the tank accessory 3770 can move in the up and down direction, but the direction in which the movable decorative member moves is not limited to the up and down direction, and it may also be left and right or front and back. Alternatively, it may be movable along a straight line with any inclination. For example, the decorative member may move diagonally from the upper left to the lower right of the display area, or from the upper right to the lower left of the display area.

Note that, with reference to Figure 241 etc., an example has been shown in which, when the tank role object 3770 moves from the standby position to the moving position, the tank role object 3770 approaches the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 and becomes visible as it overlaps with the display area. However, the movable decorative member may also move along a straight line with any inclination, or the decorative member may rotate or turn, causing the movable decorative member to move from the standby position to the moving position, changing from a state in which the movable decorative member does not overlap with the display area to a state in which it is visible as it overlaps with the display area.

It is also possible to adopt an operating mode in which the decorative member is vibrated in the standby position or the moving position.
Such an operating mode can be realized by using a known drive source or drive mechanism (such as a pulse motor or link mechanism) (the same applies to the case of realizing other operating modes described in this specification).

Among these decorative members, the rear panel board 2420 and the tank accessory 3770 are equipped with predetermined light sources (multiple full-color LEDs) and can directly emit light in a predetermined color. For this reason, these decorative members are sometimes referred to as luminous decorative members.
The panel board rear decorative member 2410 has the function of diffusely reflecting light of a predetermined color irradiated from the panel board rear substrate 2420 provided behind the panel board rear decorative member 2410, but the light irradiated from the panel board rear substrate 2420 ultimately passes through the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and is irradiated toward the player. This allows the player to visually recognize the panel board rear decorative member 2410 illuminated and decorated in a predetermined color.
In addition, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 may be integrated to function as a decorative member, a movable decorative member, a light-emitting decorative member, etc.

As already mentioned, the light-emitting decorative member can emit light in a specific color (white, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow, etc.) that indicates the likelihood of a jackpot. Alternatively, the light-emitting decorative member can emit light in a predetermined color simply for presentation purposes, without indicating the likelihood of a jackpot. For example, the light-emitting decorative member can emit light in a predetermined color during a demo when no game is being played.

In this way, the decorative members in this embodiment can have either a movable (or moving) function or a light-emitting function, or both. Furthermore, by using one of these functions (for example, moving from a standby position to a moving position, emitting light in a specific or predetermined color, etc.) or a combination of multiple functions (for example, emitting light in a specific or predetermined color after moving from a standby position to a moving position, etc.), the decorative members can be used for a variety of effects, such as effects that suggest predetermined game content (for example, the likelihood that the result of the changing decorative pattern during the changing display will result in a jackpot), or effects that liven up a specific game period (for example, during a jackpot game state). For this reason, these decorative members are sometimes referred to as decorative members for effects.

A plurality of decorative members (two or more) may be provided. In this case, the plurality of decorative members may have the same function, or the plurality of decorative members may have different functions. The function here refers to the movement mode, light emission mode, etc. of the decorative member.
Furthermore, one or more decorative members having a first function may be provided, and one or more decorative members having a second function different from the first function may be provided. Similarly, one or more decorative members having a third function different from the first and second functions, one or more decorative members having a fourth function different from the first to third functions, and so on (the same applies below).

For example, a first tank prop 3770 movable in the vertical direction may be provided below the display area, and a second tank prop 3770 movable in the vertical direction may be provided above the display area. Alternatively, a first rear panel decorative member 2410 and a first rear panel substrate 2420 movable in the horizontal direction may be provided on the right side of the display area, and a second rear panel decorative member 2410 and a second rear panel substrate 2420 movable in the horizontal direction may be provided on the left side of the display area. As shown with reference to Figure 241, these decorative members may not overlap the display area in a front view when in the standby position, but may overlap the display area when moved from the standby position to the moving position.

The panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are decorative members that represent mountain ranges. Furthermore, the tank prop 3770 is a decorative member that resembles a tank. Note that the shape of the decorative member is not limited to these examples. For example, it may be a member that resembles a predetermined image (character, etc.) that is displayed in the display area. Furthermore, the decorative member and the predetermined image that is displayed in the display area may be integrated to represent a single motif. Furthermore, a single motif may be represented by multiple decorative members.
It should be noted that decorative members do not necessarily need to represent or imitate any object, and decorative members that do not represent or imitate any object may be used, since the decorative members can exert a dramatic effect simply by the way they move or emit light.

As in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 134, the decorative member is arranged to be positioned between the panel board 1110 and the game board side performance display device 1600 in the front-to-back direction.
The decorative member may be provided so as to be positioned between the glass plate 192 and the panel plate 1110. In this case, a partition or the like may be provided to prevent the rolling game ball from colliding with the decorative member, or the strength of the decorative member may be increased so that the decorative member is less likely to be damaged even if the game ball collides with it.

Alternatively, the decorative member may be located behind the game board side performance display device 1600 or the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. Note that by reducing the size of the game board side performance display device 1600, it is possible to position the decorative member in a position where it does not overlap with the game board side performance display device 1600 when viewed from the front. Alternatively, the decorative member may move from a standby position to a moving position, changing from a state where it is hidden behind the game board side performance display device 1600 and cannot be seen from the front to a state where it can be seen from the front. In this case, the decorative member will appear to the player as if it is emerging from behind the game board side performance display device 1600.

Although an example has been shown in which decorative members are provided on the game board 5, the door frame left side unit 530, door frame right side unit 550, and door frame top unit 570 shown with reference to Figure 5 etc. are luminous decorative members provided on the door frame 3. Note that the door frame left side unit 530, door frame right side unit 550, and door frame top unit 570 may be moved or rotated within a range of movement that does not pose a danger to players or game parlor staff, so as to function as movable decorative members.
Also, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 shown with reference to Figure 118 etc. are provided on the door frame 3. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are capable of emitting light and moving, and function as light-emitting decorative members and movable decorative members.
In addition, the functions of the various decorative members provided on the game board 5 may be appropriately applied to these decorative members provided on the door frame 3 to form an embodiment.

Note that instead of the term "decorative member," terms such as "decorative body" or "decorative means" may be used, but this does not result in any substantial difference from the term "decorative member." Furthermore, even when referring to "decorative body," "decorative means," etc., the various embodiments described above can be applied in the same way as for "decorative members."

When a game ball enters a prize slot (general prize slot 2001, first start slot 2002, second start slot 2004, large prize slot 2005, etc.), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. At this time, the paid-out game balls are sometimes called prize balls. The number of paid-out game balls is sometimes called the number of prize balls.
The number of prize balls is set appropriately within the range of 1 to 15 depending on the specifications and playability of the gaming machine, but for example, the number of prize balls for the general prize slot 2001 may be 4, the number of prize balls for the first start slot 2002 may be 4, the number of prize balls for the second start slot 2004 may be 1, and the number of prize balls for the large prize slot 2005 may be 10.

Furthermore, the greater the number of prize balls at the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, and the second starting port 2004, the less likely the game balls held by the player will decrease, and therefore the number of game balls that can be paid out in the event of a jackpot will be relatively reduced, making the game less prone to gambling.
On the other hand, the fewer the number of prize balls at the general winning port 2001 and the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the more likely it is that the number of game balls the player has will decrease, so the number of game balls that can be paid out in the event of a jackpot will increase relatively, making the game more suitable for speculation.

In addition, by increasing the number of prize balls in the big prize slot, the total number of game balls paid out during a big win can be increased.
On the other hand, by reducing the number of prize balls in the big prize slot, the total number of game balls paid out during a big win can be reduced.

Also, as shown in Figures 5 and 135, by arranging the second starting hole 2004 on the right side of the game area, and by arranging the obstacle pins 1201 and the second starting hole 2004 in a position such that if a game ball can enter the second starting hole 2004 when a right-hand hit is made, the player will be paid out a number of prize balls equal to or slightly less than the number of game balls that were shot, thereby preventing the game balls from decreasing during a right-hand hit and the player's interest from decreasing.
The number of prize balls in the second starting hole 2004 may be set to one, and almost all of the game balls launched may be configured to land in the second starting hole 2004. Alternatively, the number of prize balls in the second starting hole 2004 may be set to two, and almost half of the game balls launched may be configured to land in the second starting hole 2004.
In this way, the number of winning balls for each winning slot (general winning slot 2001, first starting slot 2002, second starting slot 2004, large winning slot 2005, etc.) is determined comprehensively taking into consideration the probability of winning for each winning slot, the probability of winning a jackpot, and various other factors.

The following describes an embodiment that includes a new effect, "Character Current Hold Surprise Effect." Note that this embodiment is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to Figures 123 to 346, etc.
347 to 349 show various images displayed in the display area in this embodiment. 350 and 351 show time charts in this embodiment. 352 to 358 show display modes in the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600 in this embodiment.
In this embodiment, the reserved image is referred to as the current reserved image, and the reserved images displayed in the first through fourth reserved display areas are referred to as standby reserved images (first standby reserved image to fourth standby reserved image). The variable display of decorative symbols and the functions and effects of the reserved images, reserved images, etc., are as described above with reference to Figures 123 to 125. Furthermore, while the probability of a special lottery resulting in a jackpot in a low-probability non-time-saving state is shown to be 1/300 with reference to Figures 142 and 143, the probability of a reach state occurring can be set to 30/300 (i.e., 1/10). With these probabilities, when a reach state occurs, there is a 29/30 probability of a reach miss and a 1/30 probability of a jackpot. According to this embodiment, the player will feel a sense of anticipation for a jackpot when a reach state occurs.

FIG. 347 shows various images displayed in the display area.
Figure 347(a) shows normal background image A. Normal background image A is an image showing a road in the center of a grassland with trees growing along the road. In addition, the words "Road Stage," which indicate the content of the background image, are added to the upper left area of the image.
Figure 347(b) shows normal background image B. Normal background image B is an image showing a post town with two houses on the right side of the road. The words "Post Town Stage," which indicate the content of the background image, are added to the upper left area of the image.
347(c) shows a reach-time background image A. The reach-time background image A is an image in which a plurality of winding lines are provided from the upper right to the lower left.
Figure 347(d) shows a reach background image B. The reach background image B is an image depicting the inside of a stalactite cave. The image contains a plurality of images of stalactites facing downward and stalactites facing upward.
Figure 347(e) shows a monster character image. The monster character image occupies more than half of the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600. The monster character has eyes, a mouth, hands, etc. Figures 347(f) and 347(g) show, in addition to the monster character image, miasma image A and miasma image B, which represent miasma spewed from the monster character's mouth. As is clear from the figure, miasma image B is larger in size than miasma image A.
347(h) shows the types of decorative symbols that are displayed in the display area in this embodiment. There are seven types of decorative symbols, each of which is assigned a number from "1" to "7."

FIG. 348(a) shows a normal background image C. The normal background image C is an image showing a map of Japan. The normal background image C is also an image that is displayed during right-clicking.
Figure 348(b) shows an image displayed during right-hand play that has a higher display priority than the normal background image C and a lower display priority than the decorative pattern. Specifically, as shown in the figure, a frame with an opaque background is displayed in the upper left position of the display area. Also displayed within this frame are the words "WIN x 15,""Break 12,000 Ryo!!," and "Next Destination: Owari." The numerical portion of "WIN x 15" indicates the number of consecutive wins, which in this case indicates that the number of consecutive wins is 15. The numerical portion of "Break 12,000 Ryo!!" indicates the number of game balls paid out to the player during the consecutive wins. These numerical portions are displayed as numbers corresponding to the number of consecutive wins and the number of game balls paid out to the player during the consecutive wins.
Additionally, the words "Musha Shugyo RUSH" are displayed at the top of the display area.
Additionally, the martial artist character and the martial artist character's lines ("Training all over the country!") are displayed in the lower left corner of the display area.
348(c) shows an image displayed during a right-hand hit that has a higher display priority than decorative symbols. Specifically, as shown in the figure, an image of a right-pointing arrow containing the words "Right Hit!" is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area. By visually checking the words "Right Hit" and the direction of the arrow, the player can recognize that the game is in a right-hand hit state (time-saving state).

349(a), 349(b), and 349(c) show lightning strike image A, lightning strike image B, and lightning strike image C.
Lightning strike image A shows a lightning strike occurring from the upper right to the lower left of the display area.
Lightning strike image B shows a state in which lightning strikes from the upper right to the lower left of the display area, and a state in which lightning strikes from the upper left to the lower right of the display area.
Lightning strike image C shows a lightning strike occurring from the top right to the bottom left of the display area, a lightning strike occurring from the top left to the bottom right of the display area, and a lightning strike occurring from the top to the bottom of the display area.
A lightning strike image may be displayed when a reach state is reached, but details will be described later.

Figures 349(d), 349(e), and 349(f) show tornado image A, tornado image B, and tornado image C.
Each tornado image includes three tornadoes. The positions where these three tornadoes are displayed correspond to the positions where the decorative patterns are displayed on the left, center, and right. The tornado images increase in size in the order of tornado image A, tornado image B, and tornado image C.
A tornado image may be displayed when a reach state is formed, but details will be described later.

350 and 351, description will be given of effect patterns 1 to 5. Note that the variable display time of the decorative symbols in each effect pattern is 10 seconds, and the fixed stop period of the decorative symbols is 0.5 seconds.
In addition, a total of seven types of decorative patterns numbered 1 to 7 can be displayed as decorative patterns, and when the display is changed, the decorative patterns are displayed in a cyclical manner starting from the decorative pattern numbered 1.
Also, while Figure 352 and other figures show an example in which the number of reserved symbols immediately before the decorative symbol variation begins is three, the number of reserved symbols can be any number between one and four. Furthermore, a martial artist character standby reserved image, which is a reserved image based on the results of the pre-reading process, is displayed in the first reserved display area, but the martial artist character standby reserved image is displayed only when a start win is made or when a new variable display begins. Therefore, martial artist character standby reserved images may also be displayed in the second to fourth reserved display areas. In this case, a display process is performed in which the martial artist character standby reserved image moves leftward in the adjacent reserved display area at the same time as the new variable display begins.
Depending on the type of presentation pattern, the timing at which the left decorative pattern, right decorative pattern, and center decorative pattern change from a state where they are displayed changing at high speed to a state where they are displayed changing at low speed, the timing at which they change from a state where they are displayed changing at low speed to a temporary stop, whether or not a reach state will occur, whether or not the background image will be switched, whether or not the current pending image and standby pending image will be hidden, and the timing at which they will be hidden will differ.

Referring to Figures 350(a) and 352, we will explain performance pattern 1.
At timing t0, the variable display begins, and all decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner at high speed until timing t6. Figure 352 (a) shows the display state in the display area before the variable display begins. As shown in the figure, a normal background image A is displayed as the background image. Also, as mentioned above, the number of reserved items at this time is three. A martial artist character standby reserved image is displayed in the first reserved display area. Also, a white circular normal standby reserved image is displayed in the second reserved display area and the third reserved display area. Whether or not the martial artist character standby reserved image is displayed is determined based on the results of the pre-reading process.

Figure 352 (b) shows the display state at a specified timing from timing t0 when the changing display begins to timing t6 when the left decorative pattern is displayed at a slow speed. During this period, all decorative patterns are displayed changing at high speed. In addition, a martial artist character current reserved image is displayed as the current reserved image. At the same time as the changing display begins, the image displayed as the martial artist character standby reserved image moves to the left within the display area and gradually increases in size, stopping approximately in the center in the left-right direction and being displayed as the martial artist character current reserved image.

During the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the left decorative pattern is displayed in a slowly varying manner. Figure 352(c) shows the state in which the left decorative pattern is displayed in a slowly varying manner.

At timing t7, the left decorative pattern is displayed temporarily still. Furthermore, from timing t7 to timing t8, the right decorative pattern is displayed slowly and variably. Figure 352(d) shows a state in which the left decorative pattern with the number 2 attached is displayed temporarily still, while the right decorative pattern is displayed slowly and variably.

At timing t8, the right decorative symbol is displayed temporarily stopped. Furthermore, from timing t8 to timing t9, the middle decorative symbol is displayed variably at a slow speed. Figure 352(e) shows a state in which the right decorative symbol with the number 2 attached is displayed temporarily stopped, and the middle decorative symbol is displayed variably at a slow speed. Note that in this case, the number attached to the left decorative symbol and the number attached to the right decorative symbol are the same number (the number "2"), and a reach state has occurred.

At timing t9, the center decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. FIG. 352(f) shows a state in which the center decorative symbol with the number 3 is temporarily stopped and displayed.
In this case, the number combination attached to the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is "232," which indicates that the result of the variable display is a reach miss.

At timing t10, all decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state, and the stopped state continues until timing t10.5. In this case, the number combination attached to the stopped decorative symbols is "232," which indicates that the result of the variable display is a reach miss.
Also, at timing t10, the display of the martial artist character current reserved image ends. Alternatively, at timing t10, the display of the martial artist character current reserved image begins to end, and the display of the martial artist character current reserved image ends by timing t10.5. For example, the transparency of the martial artist character current reserved image may be increased, or a predetermined display image (e.g., a smoke image) may be displayed so as to overlap the martial artist character current reserved image. Note that a similar method can be used when the martial artist character current reserved image is not displayed in performance patterns 2 to 5. Figure 352(g) shows the display state when all decorative patterns are stopped and displayed.
After timing t10.5, a new variable display begins.

In the above-mentioned example presentation, the variable display results stop in a reach-miss mode, but there are also cases where the numbers attached to the left and right decorative symbols are different and the reach state is not formed. Furthermore, after the left and right decorative symbols temporarily stop and the reach state is formed, at timing t9, a center decorative symbol with the same number as the number attached to the left and right decorative symbols may temporarily stop. Then, at timing t10, the numbers attached to the left, center, and right decorative symbols all stop and display as the same number, indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. In this case, the jackpot game state (strictly speaking, a jackpot opening presentation suggesting the start of jackpot gameplay) occurs from timing t10.5.

In this embodiment, when the decorative symbols are displayed in a rapidly changing manner, the decorative symbols are displayed by scrolling 10 symbols per second.
When the decorative symbols are displayed in a slow, variable manner, the decorative symbols are displayed by scrolling three symbols per second.
In addition, when the decorative pattern is displayed in a very slow changing manner (details will be described later in performance pattern 2), the decorative pattern is displayed scrolling by one pattern per second.

Furthermore, when decorative patterns are displayed in a rapidly changing manner, it becomes difficult or impossible to identify the type of decorative pattern (the type of number attached to the decorative pattern).
On the other hand, when the decorative pattern is displayed variably at a slow or very slow speed, the type of decorative pattern (the type of number attached to the decorative pattern) can be easily identified.
In addition, when the decorative pattern is displayed in a slowly varying manner and when the decorative pattern is displayed in an extremely slowly varying manner, the type of decorative pattern (the type of number attached to the decorative pattern) can be more easily identified in the latter case.

Next, presentation pattern 2 will be explained with reference to Figures 350(b) and 353.
The presentation mode from timing t0 to timing t6 is the same as presentation pattern 1, so for simplicity's sake, only the diagrams will be explained. Fig. 353(a) shows the display mode before the variable display starts, similar to Fig. 352(a). Fig. 353(b) shows the state in which the variable display starts and all decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner at high speed, similar to Fig. 352(b).

During the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the left and right decorative patterns are displayed in a slow, variable manner. Figure 353 (c) shows the variable display manner of the decorative patterns during this period. As shown in the figure, decorative patterns with the same numbers on the left and right (specifically, the left decorative pattern with a "7" and the right decorative pattern with a "7", and the left decorative pattern with a "1" and the right decorative pattern with a "1") are displayed in a variable manner, scrolling synchronously at the same speed.

At timing t7, the left and right decorative symbols are displayed in a temporary stop state. Because the left and right decorative symbols are displayed in a synchronized, variable manner, they will always be displayed in a reach state when temporarily stopped. Also, at timing t7, the middle decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner at an extremely slow speed (scrolling one symbol per second). Also, in place of the normal background image A, a reach background image A may be displayed. Figure 353 (d) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t9, the center decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. FIG. 353(e) shows a state in which the center decorative symbol with the number 3 is temporarily stopped and displayed.
In this case, the number combination attached to the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is "232," which indicates that the result of the variable display is a reach miss.

At timing t10, all decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state, and the stopped state continues until timing t10.5. In this case, the number combination attached to the stopped decorative symbols is "232," indicating that the result of the variable display is a reach miss. Also, at timing t10, the display of the martial artist character current reserved image ends. Also, during the period from timing t10 to timing t10.5, the normal background image A is displayed as the background image. Figure 353 (f) shows the display state when all decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state.
After timing t10.5, a new variable display begins.

In presentation pattern 2, a reach state always occurs. In the display example shown in Figure 353, the reach state ultimately fails, but if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, at timing t9, a center decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative patterns on the left and right is temporarily displayed. After that, from timing t10 to timing t10.5, decorative patterns with the same number are displayed as the left, center, and right decorative patterns.

Next, we will explain presentation pattern 3 with reference to Figures 350(c) and 354. Note that the presentation mode outside the period from timing t7 to timing t9 is the same as presentation pattern 2, so for simplicity's sake we will only explain the figures. Figure 354(a) shows the display mode before the variable display begins, similar to Figure 353(a). Also, Figure 354(b) shows the state in which the variable display has begun and all decorative patterns are being displayed in a variable manner at high speed, similar to Figure 353(b). Also, Figure 354(c) shows the state in which the same decorative patterns are scrolling synchronously as the left and right decorative patterns, similar to Figure 353(c).

In performance pattern 3, the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily displayed at timing t7, but the center decorative symbol continues to fluctuate rapidly even during the period from timing t7 to timing t8. Figure 354 (d) shows the display state at this time.

Next, from timing t8 to timing t9, the middle decorative pattern is displayed in a slowly varying manner. Figure 354 (e) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t9, the middle decorative symbol is temporarily displayed. Figure 354(f) shows the state in which the middle decorative symbol with the number 3 is temporarily displayed.

At timing t10, all decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state, and the stopped state continues until timing t10.5. In this case, the number combination attached to the stopped decorative symbols is "232," indicating that the result of the variable display is a reach miss. Also, at timing t10, the display of the martial artist character current reserved image ends. Also, during the period from timing t10 to timing t10.5, the normal background image A is displayed as the background image. Figure 354 (f) shows the display state when all decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state.
After timing t10.5, a new variable display begins.

In presentation pattern 3, a reach state always occurs. In the display example shown in Figure 354, the reach state ultimately fails, but if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, at timing t9, a center decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative patterns on the left and right is temporarily displayed. After that, from timing t10 to timing t10.5, decorative patterns with the same number are displayed as the left, center, and right decorative patterns.

In the illustrated embodiment, the reach-time background image A is displayed instead of the normal background image A during the period from timing t7 to timing t10 in presentation pattern 2 and presentation pattern 3. However, it is also possible to have the normal background image A displayed as is without changing the background image during the period from timing t7 to timing t10. In this case, it is preferable to set the expectation level when the reach-time background image A, which is not displayed when the decorative pattern is not changing, is displayed in place of the normal background image A, higher than the expectation level when the normal background image A is displayed as is without being changed. This can arouse the player's interest in whether the background image will change as the reach state occurs, and if the background image does change, it can provide great excitement to the player and liven up the reach state.

350(d), 351, and 355 to 357, we will explain effect pattern 4 ("Character current hold surprise effect"). Note that the effect mode from timing t0 to timing t1 is the same as effect pattern 1, so for simplicity's sake, we will only explain the figures.
351(a) is a time chart showing the state of change of the left, center, and right decorative symbols during the period from timing t8 to timing t10 when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. Also, FIG. 351(b) is a time chart showing the state of change of the left, center, and right decorative symbols during the period from timing t8 to timing t10 when the result of the special lottery is a loss.
Fig. 355(a) shows the display state before the variable display starts, similar to Fig. 352(a). Also, Fig. 355(b) shows the state in which the variable display starts and all decorative symbols are displayed variably at high speed, similar to Fig. 352(b).

In effect pattern 4, a monster character image is displayed at timing t1. Also, an exclamation mark (! mark) is displayed in the upper left corner of the current pending image of the martial artist character, indicating that the martial artist character has noticed that a monster character has appeared.
FIG. 355(c) shows the display state at this time.

From timing t1 to timing t2, the martial artist character current pending image runs away to the left within the display area, moves from the left end of the display area to the outside of the display area, and the display ends.
Fig. 355(d) shows the state in which the martial artist character current reserved image is on the run, and Fig. 355(e) shows the state in which the display of the martial artist character current reserved image has ended.

At timing t4, miasma image A is displayed in front of the monster character image, and at timing t6, miasma image B is displayed in front of the monster character image.
Fig. 355(f) shows a state in which miasma image A is displayed at timing t4, and Fig. 355(g) shows a state in which miasma image B is displayed at timing t6.
The miasma image may be displayed more dynamically. For example, a moving image may be displayed in front of the monster character image, showing a small amount of miasma being exhaled from the monster character's mouth and gradually increasing in size over the course of two seconds.

During the period from timing t7 to timing t8, the left, center, and right decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner at a low speed. Each symbol is displayed by scrolling synchronously at the same speed, and at this time, the left and right decorative symbols are displayed with the same number, and the center decorative symbol is displayed with the number immediately preceding the number assigned to the left and right decorative symbols in the variable display order.
Figure 355(h) shows decorative symbols that are being displayed in a slow, varying manner. The combination of "171" and "212" is shown in the figure as a combination of decorative symbols displayed synchronously on the left, center, and right.

At timing t8, the decorative symbols that were scrolling synchronously are displayed temporarily stopped. Figures 356(a) and 357(a) show the state in which the left, center, and right decorative symbols are displayed temporarily stopped in the combination "212." Note that the large miasma image makes the player perceive the left, center, and right decorative symbols as if they were stopped, which increases the interest in the display mode in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped.

At timing t8.1, a master character image is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area. The master character is set as the master of the martial artist character. Also, at timing t8.1, the display priority of the decorative pattern and the monster character image is changed. Until timing t8.1, the display priority of the decorative pattern is higher than that of the monster character image, and from timing t8.1 onwards, the display priority of the monster character image is set higher than that of the decorative pattern. Also, the display of the miasma image ends at the same time as the display priority is switched. Also, the display priority of the master character is set higher than that of the decorative pattern and the monster character image.
Figures 356(b) and 357(b) show the display state in which the master character image is displayed at timing t8.1 and the display priority of the monster character image and decorative pattern is switched.

Next, at timing t8.5, the master character attacks (kicks) the monster character. The master character's attack causes the monster character to rotate counterclockwise and tilt, and appear slightly smaller. This display continues until timing t9. Figures 356(c) and 357(c) show the display state at this time.

Figures 356(a) to 356(c) and 357(a) to 357(c) show the same display mode, but below we will explain the display mode when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot with reference to Figures 351(a) and 356(d) to 356(f), and the display mode when the result of the special lottery is a loss with reference to Figures 351(b) and 357(d) to 357(f).

The display mode when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot will be explained with reference to Figures 351(a) and 356(d) to 356(f).
At timing t9, the master character returns to the bottom right position of the display area, and the monster character is displayed even smaller than when attacked by the master character. The monster character finally moves off the screen from the left side of the display area and disappears, becoming invisible.
FIG. 356(d) shows the display state at timing t9.1.

As shown in FIG. 351(a), from timing t9.4 to timing t9.6, the center decorative symbol moves by one symbol. A decorative symbol with the number "1" attached was temporarily stopped as the center decorative symbol, but in this case, by moving by one symbol, a decorative symbol with the number "2" attached is temporarily stopped and displayed. Because the center decorative symbol temporarily stops one symbol away, the numbers attached to the left, center, and right decorative symbols all become "2," suggesting to the player that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot (the period from timing t9.6 to timing t10).
Figure 356(e) shows the display state when the middle decorative pattern is moving.

During the period from timing t10 to timing t10.5, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. During this period, the numbers attached to the left, center, and right decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed all become "2," indicating to the player that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot.
Figure 356(f) shows the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state.

The display mode when the result of the special lottery is a loss will be explained with reference to Figure 351(b) and Figures 357(d) to 357(f). As shown in Figure 351(b), the decorative symbols on the left, center, and right continue to be temporarily stopped from timing t8 to timing t10.
At timing t9, the monster character is displayed back at its original position and size. The master character is thrown back by the monster character and spins towards the bottom right of the display area. The master character eventually moves from the bottom right of the display area off the screen and disappears, becoming invisible.
FIG. 357(d) shows the display state at timing t9.1.

At timing t9.5, the display priority of the decorative symbols becomes higher than the display priority of the monster character images. As a result, the decorative symbols are displayed closer to the player than the monster character images, and the player can clearly see that the numbers attached to the decorative symbols on the left, center, and right are displayed as the combination "212," suggesting to the player that the result of the special lottery is a loss.
FIG. 357(e) shows a display state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the monster character image.

During the period from timing t10 to timing t10.5, decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state. During this period, the numbers attached to the decorative symbols on the left, center, and right sides that are displayed in a stopped state are the combination of "212," indicating to the player that the result of the special lottery was a loss.
Figure 357(f) shows the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state.

In performance pattern 4, the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the monster character image until the decorative pattern temporarily stops, and at the time the decorative pattern temporarily stops (timing t8), the monster character image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. In this case, the impact of the monster character image display can be increased. On the other hand, the visibility of the decorative pattern is impaired. Therefore, for example, without changing the display priority, the transparency of the decorative pattern can be changed from opaque to semi-transparent, so that the monster character image displayed in the background can be seen through the decorative pattern displayed in the foreground. Alternatively, without changing the display priority, only the numbers attached to the decorative pattern can be displayed opaquely, and the remaining rectangular area that makes up the decorative pattern can be made completely transparent, thereby improving the visibility of the monster character image.

Next, we will explain presentation pattern 5 with reference to Figures 350(e) and 358. Note that the presentation from timing t0 to timing t5 is the same as presentation pattern 3, so for simplicity's sake we will only explain the figures. Figure 358(a) shows the display state before the variable display begins, similar to Figure 354(a). Furthermore, Figure 358(b) shows the state after the variable display has begun and all decorative patterns are being displayed in a high-speed variable manner, similar to Figure 354(b).

During the period from timing t5 to timing t6, the left and right decorative patterns are displayed in a slow, variable manner. Figure 358(c) shows the variable display manner of the decorative patterns during this period. As shown in the figure, decorative patterns with the same numbers on the left and right (specifically, the left decorative pattern with a "7" and the right decorative pattern with a "7", and the left decorative pattern with a "1" and the right decorative pattern with a "1") are displayed in a variable manner, scrolling synchronously at the same speed.

At timing t6, the left and right decorative symbols are displayed in a temporary stop state. Because the left and right decorative symbols are displayed in a synchronized, variable manner, they are always displayed in a reach state when temporarily stopped. The middle decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner at high speed. In addition, in place of the normal background image A, reach background image B is displayed. Furthermore, the current hold image and standby hold image are not displayed. Figure 358 (d) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t7, the middle decorative pattern changes to a state where it is displayed changing at an extremely slow speed (scrolling one pattern per second). Figure 358(e) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t9, the middle decorative symbol is temporarily displayed. Figure 358(f) shows the state in which the middle decorative symbol with the number 3 is temporarily displayed.

At timing t10, all decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state, and the stopped state continues until timing t10.5. In this case, the number combination attached to the stopped decorative symbols is "232," indicating that the result of the variable display is a reach miss. Also, at timing t10, the display of the standby image resumes. Also, during the period from timing t10 to timing t10.5, the normal background image A is displayed as the background image. Figure 358 (g) shows the display state when all decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state.
After timing t10.5, a new variable display begins.

In presentation pattern 5, a reach state always occurs. In the display example shown in Figure 358, the reach state ultimately fails, but if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, at timing t9, a center decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative patterns on the left and right is temporarily displayed. During the period from timing t10 to timing t10.5, decorative patterns with the same number are displayed as the left, center, and right decorative patterns.

In presentation pattern 5, as soon as the reach state is reached, the reach background image B is displayed, and the current hold image and standby hold image are hidden. Furthermore, the middle decorative pattern remains displayed in a rapidly changing state, and does not immediately change to a slow-changing state. This ensures sufficient visibility of the reach background image B that has just been displayed.

According to the "Character Current Hold Surprise" effect executed in effect pattern 4, the appearance of a monster character surprises the character current hold image, causing it to move out of the display area and disappear from the display area, providing the player with a new and unprecedented interest. On the other hand, the hold images in the first hold display area to the fourth hold display area do not disappear, so it is not difficult to check the number of holds.
In addition, the current pending image not only functions to indicate the degree of expectation during the changing display, but also can be used as part of a dramatic display using characters by displaying the current pending image in a character form as if it is running away from other characters (monster characters).
Furthermore, by displaying the monster character large in front of the normal background image A, it is no longer necessary to switch the background image, which simplifies the display process.

In presentation pattern 4, the normal background image is not changed to the background image used when a win occurs (part of the normal background image is recognizable), but the size of the monster character image is set to a size that occupies most of the display area of the game board-side presentation display device 1600 (at least half the size), eliminating the need to change the background image, reducing the cost and storage space required to create a dedicated background image and making it possible to reduce the cost of manufacturing the gaming machine.

The selection rate for each of presentation patterns 1 to 5, which are selected after the lottery to determine whether or not a jackpot has been awarded, is such that presentation pattern 1 is most likely to be selected, followed by presentation pattern 2. Presentation pattern 3 is less likely to be selected than presentation patterns 1 and 2, but more likely to be selected than presentation patterns 4 and 5. Presentation pattern 4 may be more likely to be selected than presentation pattern 5, or less likely to be selected than presentation pattern 5, or may be the same. The higher the selection rate, the lower the expectation of a jackpot. Note that selection rate is synonymous with appearance rate (probability of being displayed).

In addition, in presentation pattern 4, a monster character image is displayed in the area where the martial artist character current pending image was displayed, which increases the impact of the monster character being displayed and further enhances the reach state.

An embodiment regarding the demo period has been shown with reference to Figure 232 etc., but in this embodiment too, the normal background image that was displayed during the changing display of the decorative pattern is displayed during the demo period that may occur after the changing display has ended.

Comparing presentation pattern 3 and presentation pattern 4, in presentation pattern 3, characters are not displayed, so whether or not the background image is changed can clearly convey to the player whether or not the expectation is high.
On the other hand, in the case of presentation pattern 4, the characters (monster character and master character) are displayed occupying most of the display area, so there is no need to change the normal background image, and a presentation suggesting the variable display result (a presentation in which the monster character and master character fight) can be executed without changing the normal background image. Also, because the normal background image is displayed as is, there is no need to create a dedicated reach-time background image, which reduces the costs associated with image development and the storage capacity required to store the images.

When presentation pattern 3 is executed and a reach state is reached with a normal background image displayed, it is preferable to increase the expectation of the latter when presentation pattern 4 is executed.
In addition, when presentation pattern 4 is executed, it is preferable to increase the expectation level of the latter when presentation pattern 3 is executed and the reach state is reached with the reach-time background image displayed.

Furthermore, in presentation pattern 3, the time during which the reach-time background image is displayed and the decorative symbols form a reach state (3 seconds from timing t7 to timing t10) is longer than the time during which the decorative symbols form a reach state (2 seconds from timing t8 to timing t10) in presentation pattern 4. As described above, it is preferable to increase the expectation level when presentation pattern 4 is executed compared to when presentation pattern 3 is executed and a reach-time background image is displayed, resulting in a reach state.
By extending the execution time of the effects that have a high probability of winning a jackpot in this way, the player can be provided with a sense of anticipation for winning a jackpot for a longer period of time.

Furthermore, comparing the decorative symbols in presentation pattern 3 with those in presentation pattern 4, the left and right decorative symbols indicate a ready-to-win state in both presentation patterns. Presentation pattern 3 is a presentation in which the player is made aware of the number at which the center decorative symbol (a decorative symbol not indicating a ready-to-win state) will stop while the left and right decorative symbols indicate a ready-to-win state by changing the decorative symbol (by switching from high-speed change to low-speed change). Meanwhile, presentation pattern 4, as mentioned above, displays a monster character a short time after the start of the change (timing t1), and suggests the outcome of the winning or losing game depending on whether the monster character is defeated. Presentation pattern 4 displays the left and right decorative symbols indicating a ready-to-win state, and the center decorative symbol also displays a decorative symbol with a different number from the left and right decorative symbols, and all decorative symbols sway (display a temporary stop). In this way, by swaying all decorative symbols and displaying a combination of decorative symbols that does not indicate a jackpot, the player can focus on the battle with the monster character rather than the decorative symbols. If the decorative pattern of presentation pattern 4 were displayed like the decorative pattern of presentation pattern 3 (if the presentation were to show which number the middle decorative pattern would stop at), the player would be confused as to whether to focus on the decorative pattern or on the fight with the monster character, and the problem would arise that the highly anticipated reach presentation would end without increasing interest.
Furthermore, in presentation pattern 4, if the player loses the battle with the monster character (if the lottery result suggests that he has lost), displaying a losing symbol combination after losing the battle with the monster character would mean that the player is repeatedly reminded that he has lost, which could irritate the player, but this risk can be avoided by configuring presentation pattern 4. Also, displaying a losing symbol combination after losing the battle with the monster character would take time, but reducing the time required results in a gaming machine with good variability efficiency, which in turn leads to increased sales.

The effect pattern 4 is an effect pattern that can be executed only in the variable display in which the character current pending image is displayed. In other words, the effect pattern 4 is not executed in the variable display in which the character current pending image is not displayed.
When it is determined based on the pre-reading process that a character standby pending image is to be displayed, presentation pattern 4 may be selected as the presentation pattern to be executed at the start of the variable display in which the character standby pending image is displayed as a character current pending image variable display.
Alternatively, when presentation pattern 4 is selected as the presentation pattern to be executed at the start of the variable display, the white circular current pending image may be changed to the character current pending image.

In addition, the display mode of the character standby image or the character current image may suggest the likelihood that the result of the change in the variable display corresponding to the character standby image or the character current image will result in a jackpot. For example, three colors of white, red, and gold may be provided as the colors of the gi worn by the martial artist character, and the likelihood of the colors increasing in the order of white, red, and gold.
As described above, the circular current hold image and standby hold image can also be white, blue, green, red, gold, or rainbow colored. The expectation of the variable display corresponding to the current hold image or standby hold image may increase in the order of white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow.
Although a martial artist character has been given as an example of a character displayed as a character standby pending image or a character current pending image, other characters may be used. For example, characters such as a warrior character, a samurai character, or a wizard character shown in FIGS. 338 to 340 may be displayed as a character standby pending image or a character current pending image. Furthermore, the degree of expectation may differ depending on the type of character. For example, the degree of expectation may increase in the order of martial artist character, warrior character, samurai character, and wizard character.
The circular current pending image or standby pending image and the character standby pending image or character current pending image are indicated with the same color (white, red, gold) to indicate the degree of expectation, but in this case, it is preferable that the character standby pending image or character current pending image has a higher degree of expectation. For example, it is preferable that the red character current pending image has a higher degree of expectation than the red circular current pending image.
In presentation pattern 4, the display of the current pending image ends immediately after the change begins, but if the degree of expectation is indicated by the display mode of the current pending image (for example, the three colors white, red, and gold), the player needs to keep a close eye on what the degree of expectation was, which can create a sense of tension in the game immediately after the change display begins.

In addition, the circular current pending image or standby pending image may be changed to a character standby pending image or a character current pending image at a predetermined timing. For example, when a new variable display starts, the circular standby pending image may be changed to a character standby pending image.
Similarly, the circular current reserved image may be changed to a character current reserved image. In this case, the circular current reserved image must be changed to a character current reserved image before one second has elapsed since the start of the variable display (i.e., before the monster character image is displayed).
When a circular standby image or a circular current image is changed to a character standby image or a character current image, it is preferable to change the image to the same color or a color with a higher expectation. For example, a white circular standby image may be changed to a white character standby image. Alternatively, a red circular current image may be changed to a gold character current image.

In the case of presentation pattern 4, some kind of character current pending image must be displayed as the current pending image at the time the monster character image is displayed; however, in the cases of presentation patterns 1 to 3 and presentation pattern 5, a current pending image other than a character current pending image (for example, a circular pending image) may be displayed as the current pending image.

In the embodiments (presentation pattern 3, presentation pattern 5) shown with reference to Figures 354 and 358, the decorative symbols on the left and right were temporarily stopped in a reach state at timing t7.0 and timing t6.0, but an embodiment modified so that the symbols forming the reach state during the temporary stop are changed from normal symbols to probability variable symbols will be described with reference to Figures 349, 359 to 361.

359(a) is a time chart (from timing t5.0 to timing t8.0) in an embodiment in which the symbols forming the reach state are changed from normal symbols to probability variable symbols in performance pattern 3. Also, FIG. 360 shows an example of the display of predetermined timings in this time chart.
In this embodiment, during the period from timing t7.0 to timing t7.2, the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a ready-to-win state, and the center decorative symbol is displayed variably at high speed. Figure 360(a) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t7.2, a lightning strike image is displayed in the display area. The type of lightning strike image displayed is one of lightning strike image A to lightning strike image C. At the same time as the lightning strike image is displayed, the decorative pattern is made non-displayable. This display state continues until timing t7.8.
Fig. 360(b) shows a display state in which lightning strike image A is displayed, Fig. 360(c) shows a display state in which lightning strike image B is displayed, and Fig. 360(d) shows a display state in which lightning strike image C is displayed.

At timing t7.8, the display of any one of the lightning strike images A to C is finished, and the left and right decorative patterns are temporarily stopped in a ready state with a normal pattern or a probability variable pattern, and the central decorative pattern is displayed variably at high speed.
Figure 360(e) shows a display state in which the normal symbol is displayed again as the symbol that forms the reach state, and Figure 360(f) shows a display state in which the probability variable symbol is displayed instead of the normal symbol as the symbol that forms the reach state.

At timing t7.2, one of lightning strike images A to C is displayed, and the type of lightning strike image displayed indicates the likelihood of the symbol forming the ready-to-win state changing from a normal symbol to a variable symbol. Specifically, the likelihood of the normal symbol changing to a variable symbol increases in the order of lightning strike image A, lightning strike image B, and lightning strike image C.
For example, the expected probability of a normal symbol changing to a variable symbol when lightning strike image A is displayed may be 10%, the expected probability of a normal symbol changing to a variable symbol when lightning strike image B is displayed may be 20%, and the expected probability of a normal symbol changing to a variable symbol when lightning strike image C is displayed may be 50%. Also, the expected probability of a jackpot may increase in the order of lightning strike image A, lightning strike image B, and lightning strike image C.

359(b) is a time chart (from timing t5.0 to timing t8.0) in an embodiment in which the symbols forming the reach state are changed from normal symbols to probability variable symbols in performance pattern 5. Also, FIG. 361 shows an example of the display of predetermined timings in this time chart.
In this embodiment, during the period from timing t6.0 to timing t6.2, the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a ready-to-win state, and the center decorative symbol is displayed variably at high speed. Figure 361(a) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t6.2, a tornado image is displayed in the display area. The type of tornado image displayed is one of tornado image A to tornado image C. At the same time as the tornado image is displayed, the decorative pattern is made invisible. This display state continues until timing t6.8.
Fig. 361(b) shows a display state in which tornado image A is displayed, Fig. 361(c) shows a display state in which tornado image B is displayed, and Fig. 361(d) shows a display state in which tornado image C is displayed.

At timing t6.8, the display of any one of the tornado images A to C is finished, and the left and right decorative patterns are temporarily stopped in a ready state with a normal pattern or a probability variable pattern, and the central decorative pattern is displayed variably at high speed.
Fig. 361(e) shows a display state in which the normal symbol is displayed again as the symbol that forms the reach state, and Fig. 361(f) shows a display state in which the probability variable symbol is displayed instead of the normal symbol as the symbol that forms the reach state.

At timing t6.2, one of tornado images A to C is displayed, and the type of tornado image displayed indicates the degree of expectation that the symbol forming the reach state will change from a normal symbol to a probability variable symbol. Specifically, the degree of expectation that the normal symbol will change to a probability variable symbol increases in the order of tornado image A, tornado image B, and tornado image C.
For example, the expected probability of a normal symbol changing to a variable symbol when tornado image A is displayed may be 10%, the expected probability of a normal symbol changing to a variable symbol when tornado image B is displayed may be 20%, and the expected probability of a normal symbol changing to a variable symbol when tornado image C is displayed may be 50%. Also, the expected probability of a jackpot may increase in the order of tornado image A, tornado image B, and tornado image C.

According to the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 359 to 361, even if a reach state is reached with a normal pattern, an effect is executed in which a lightning strike image or a tornado image is displayed, giving the player a sense of anticipation that the state will change to a reach state with a special pattern.
In the following examples, the modified examples shown with reference to Figures 359(a) and 360 may be considered as part of effect pattern 3. In other words, when effect pattern 3 is executed, if a lightning strike image is not displayed, one of lightning strike images A to C may be displayed.
359(b) and 361 may be considered as part of effect pattern 5. In other words, when effect pattern 5 is executed, if no tornado image is displayed, one of the tornado images may be displayed.

It is advisable to not execute effects that display images of lightning strikes or tornadoes when a reach state is formed by a probability variable symbol. Alternatively, effects that display images of lightning strikes or tornadoes may be executed so that the symbol can be changed to a special decorative symbol (e.g., "7") that has a high probability of winning.

359(a) and 360 show an embodiment in which effect pattern 3 is modified. In this embodiment, the decorative symbols are not displayed during the period in which the lightning strike image is displayed (0.6 seconds from timing t7.2 to timing t7.8).
On the other hand, in presentation pattern 4, the decorative pattern may be similarly hidden during the period when the master character is attacking the monster character (0.5 seconds from timing t8.5 to timing t9.0).
In this way, when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a reach state or a reach miss state, the decorative symbols are hidden for a predetermined period of time, making them in a display state in which they cannot be recognized by the player. This initially teases the player as to whether the decorative symbols forming the reach state or reach miss state will be promoted from normal symbols to probability variable symbols, whether the numbers attached to the decorative symbols forming the reach state will be promoted to numbers with a high probability of a jackpot, and what the outcome of the battle between the characters will be (whether the middle decorative symbols will move and result in an indication that a jackpot will occur), but after the predetermined time has passed, the display of the decorative symbols resumes and a predetermined result (whether they will be promoted or whether it indicates that a jackpot will occur or not) is displayed, so the joy felt by the player when the result is favorable to the player can be increased by the amount of teasing.

In addition, an embodiment has been shown in which the decorative pattern is hidden during the period when the lightning strike image is displayed in a modified embodiment of presentation pattern 3 (0.6 seconds from timing t7.2 to timing t7.8) and during the period when the master character is attacking the monster character in presentation pattern 4 (0.5 seconds from timing t8.5 to timing t9.0), but the length of the period during which the lightning strike image is displayed and the master character is attacking the monster character (i.e., the length of the period during which the decorative pattern is hidden) can be set as appropriate.
For example, the period during which the master character attacks the monster character may be longer than the period during which the lightning strike image is displayed. For example, the period during which the lightning strike image is displayed may be 0.5 seconds, and the period during which the master character attacks the monster character may be 2 seconds. Because the expectation of a win is higher in presentation pattern 4 than in presentation pattern 3, the length of the period during which the decorative pattern is not displayed in presentation pattern 4 (the period during which the monster character is being attacked) may be longer than the length of the period during which the decorative pattern is not displayed in presentation pattern 3 (the period during which the lightning strike image is displayed) (the longer the interval is in the presentation pattern with higher expectation), thereby prolonging the sense of excitement that something might change.
Also, the duration of the period during which the lightning strike image is displayed and the duration during which the master character is attacking the monster character may be the same (for example, one second for both). By doing so, even in presentation pattern 3, which has a lower likelihood of a jackpot compared to presentation pattern 4, players can expect a change in the symbols (because the duration of the change is the same for presentation pattern 3 and presentation pattern 4).
Furthermore, the period during which the lightning strike image is displayed may be longer than the period during which the master character is attacking the monster character. For example, the period during which the lightning strike image is displayed may be 2 seconds, and the period during which the master character is attacking the monster character may be 0.5 seconds. Presentation pattern 4, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than presentation pattern 3, can add a sense of surprise by shortening the time until the decorative pattern is redisplayed, and can rapidly create a sense of expectation when the pattern changes.

In addition, when the display of the lightning strike image in performance pattern 3 ends and the decorative patterns on the left and right are displayed again, an example has been shown in which the same decorative pattern as before the decorative pattern was hidden or a decorative pattern with a different number is displayed, but it is preferable to set the rate of displaying the same decorative pattern higher than the rate of displaying decorative patterns with different numbers.
Furthermore, when the same decorative pattern is displayed again, it does not have to be completely identical before and after display. For example, a decorative pattern that was composed of numbers and characters may consist of only numbers when redisplayed, or a decorative pattern that was composed of numbers and dynamic characters may consist of numbers and static characters when redisplayed, or the size of the decorative pattern may be different, or the font of the decorative pattern may be different. Even if the numbers are the same but the appearance is different, it is acceptable to treat them as the same (similar) decorative pattern.
Furthermore, in presentation pattern 4, all decorative symbols may be given higher display priority than the master character and monster character, and all decorative symbols may be visible even when the master character and monster character are fighting (timings t8.1 to t9.0). In this case, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, all visible decorative symbols are symbol combinations corresponding to a loss and are therefore displayed as they are. However, if the result of the lottery is a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 356(e), the center decorative symbol may be re-varied to display decorative symbols of the same number as the decorative symbols on either side, or all decorative symbols may be re-varied. However, when all decorative symbols are re-varied, it is preferable to display a different decorative symbol (e.g., although the "2" is displayed as a reach indicator in FIG. 356, a decorative symbol other than "2") with a double number (a symbol combination corresponding to a jackpot). For example, instead of a double number "2," a double number "3" or "7" may be displayed. This can provide a sense of expectation for a big win.

During the period when the left and right decorative symbols of the effect pattern 3 are temporarily stopped (from timing t7 to timing t10), the display mode of the standby reserved image may be changed based on the pre-reading process. For example, the white circular reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area may be changed to a red circular reserved image.
On the other hand, in presentation pattern 4, the expectation for a jackpot is higher than in presentation pattern 3, so the display mode of the standby image may not be changed during the period when the left, center, and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (from timing t8 to timing t10). Note that from timing t8 to timing t9, although the decorative symbols displayed are a symbol combination corresponding to a miss, a branching effect of whether the player wins or loses (an effect in which the master character wins or loses) begins at timing t9, so the decorative symbols from timing t8 to timing t9 are synonymous with indicating a reach mode.
In this way, in presentation pattern 3, the display mode of the standby image may change, which not only makes it possible to determine the outcome of the variable display in the reach state, but also increases the expectation that a jackpot will occur with respect to the standby image.
On the other hand, in presentation pattern 4, the display mode of the standby image is not changed, allowing the player to focus on the outcome of the battle between the characters currently being displayed.

The display mode of the current reserved image may be changed during the period until the left and right decorative patterns of performance pattern 3 temporarily stop (from timing t0 to timing t7). For example, a white circular current reserved image may be changed to a red circular current reserved image. Alternatively, a white circular current reserved image may be changed to a current reserved image of a martial artist character wearing a white gi. Alternatively, a current reserved image of a martial artist character wearing a white gi may be changed to a current reserved image of a martial artist character wearing a red gi.
The display mode of the current reserved image may be changed during the period (from timing t0 to timing t1) until the monster character image of performance pattern 4 is displayed. For example, a white, circular current reserved image may be changed to a current reserved image of a martial artist character wearing a white gi. Alternatively, a current reserved image of a martial artist character wearing a white gi may be changed to a current reserved image of a martial artist character wearing a red gi. Alternatively, a current reserved image of a martial artist character wearing a white gi may be displayed at timing t1, and may change from white to a current reserved image of a martial artist character wearing a red gi by timing t2. In such a case, the display mode of the current reserved image changes while the martial artist character is moving (dynamic display). When changing the display mode of the current reserved image while the martial artist character is moving (dynamic display), a predetermined display image may be displayed for the current reserved image. It is preferable that this predetermined display image also moves in the same way as the character.
In addition, the display mode of the standby image may be changed during the period until the decorative patterns on the left and right of presentation pattern 3 temporarily stop (from timing t0 to timing t7) or during the period until the decorative patterns on the left, center, and right of presentation pattern 4 temporarily stop (from timing t0 to timing t8).
By changing the display mode of the current pending image and the standby pending image at a predetermined timing in this way, it is possible to increase the expectation in advance of the occurrence of a reach state and the change results.

The rate at which a variation pattern that executes presentation pattern 3 is selected may be set higher than the rate at which a variation pattern that executes presentation pattern 4 is selected.
The long period of time during which the intermediate decorative symbols are displayed in a rapidly changing manner can give the player a sense of discomfort, making the player feel excited, as if "something special is happening."
Conversely, the rate at which a variation pattern that executes presentation pattern 3 is selected may be lower than the rate at which a variation pattern that executes presentation pattern 4 is selected.

When the rate at which the variable pattern that executes presentation pattern 3 is selected is set higher than the rate at which the variable pattern that executes presentation pattern 4 is selected, the rate at which the display mode of the current reserved image is changed during the period until the decorative patterns on the left and right of presentation pattern 3 are temporarily stopped (timing t0 to timing t7) (note that the rate here is the denominator of all the variable displays selected to execute presentation pattern 3) should be lower than the rate at which the display mode of the current reserved image is changed during the period until the monster character image of presentation pattern 4 is displayed (timing t0 to timing t1) (note that the rate here is the denominator of all the variable displays selected to execute presentation pattern 4). By doing this, when the display mode of the current reserved image changes during the period from timing t0 to timing t1, the player can expect that presentation pattern 4 will be executed.
In addition, when the rate at which the variable pattern that executes presentation pattern 3 is selected is set higher than the rate at which the variable pattern that executes presentation pattern 4 is selected, the rate at which the display mode of the current reserved image is changed during the period until the decorative patterns on the left and right of presentation pattern 3 are temporarily stopped (timing t0 to timing t7) (note that the rate here is the denominator of all the variable displays selected to execute presentation pattern 3) may be higher than the rate at which the display mode of the current reserved image is changed during the period until the monster character image of presentation pattern 4 is displayed (timing t0 to timing t1) (note that the rate here is the denominator of all the variable displays selected to execute presentation pattern 4). By doing so, if the display mode of the current reserved image does not change during the period from timing t0 to timing t1, the player can expect presentation pattern 4 to be executed.

The period when the decorative patterns on the left and right of presentation pattern 3 are temporarily stopped (from timing t7 to timing t10) and the period when the decorative patterns on the left, center, and right of presentation pattern 4 are temporarily stopped (from timing t8 to timing t10) are both before and after the timing when the display indicating whether the player has won or lost branches, so the player needs to focus their attention on whether the player has won or lost. If the position of the standby image were to be different during the period when the left and right decorative symbols of presentation pattern 3 are temporarily stopped (timing t7 to t10) and the period when the left, center, and right decorative symbols of presentation pattern 4 are temporarily stopped (timing t8 to t10), the player would be given the mistaken idea that the standby image might change or that a specific effect might occur near the standby image, which could cause the player to lose focus on winning or losing. However, by displaying the standby image in the same position during both the period when the left and right decorative symbols of presentation pattern 3 are temporarily stopped (timing t7 to t10) and the period when the left, center, and right decorative symbols of presentation pattern 4 are temporarily stopped (timing t8 to t10), this problem can be solved and the player can focus their attention on winning or losing.

In a modified example of presentation pattern 3 shown with reference to Figures 359(a) and 360, the expected degree of progression of the normal pattern constituting the reach state to a probability variable pattern (and the expected degree of a jackpot in presentation pattern 3) was indicated depending on which of lightning strike images A to C was displayed (whether the number of lightning strikes was 1 to 3).
On the other hand, in presentation pattern 4, as shown in Figures 356(c) and 357(c), the master character kicks with only one foot, but the master character may also drop kick the monster character with both feet. In this case, the probability of defeating the monster character (i.e., the probability of winning) may be higher than when the master character kicks with only one foot.
In this way, by enabling effects with different expectation levels to be executed while the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the sense of expectation for a jackpot can be heightened. In a modified version of effect pattern 3, the expectation level for the normal symbols constituting the reach state to be upgraded to probability variable symbols (and the expectation level for a jackpot in effect pattern 3) changes not only depending on whether or not a lightning strike image is displayed, but also depending on which lightning strike image is displayed. Therefore, while the player wishes for the display of a lightning strike image and a high-expectation lightning strike image, effect pattern 4 only wishes for the display of a drop kick with both feet. Since effect pattern 4 has a higher expectation level for a win than effect pattern 3, when multiple expectation-boosting effects can be displayed in effect pattern 4, the number of expectation-boosting effects in effect pattern 4 is limited to one, to prevent a decrease in interest when a low-expectation-boosting effect is displayed despite the high-expectation effect pattern 4 being displayed.

It is also possible to make it so that when the lightning strike image C is displayed, the normal symbol always changes to a variable symbol. Alternatively, when the lightning strike image C is displayed, there may or may not be a change from the normal symbol to a variable symbol, but the result of the variable display is always a jackpot. Alternatively, when the lightning strike image C is displayed, there may always be a change from the normal symbol to a variable symbol, and the result of the variable display is always a jackpot.
Also, if the master character performs a drop kick with both feet on the monster character, the master character may always win against the monster character (i.e., the result of the variable display may always be a jackpot).

In both presentation pattern 3 and presentation pattern 4, during the period when the decorative patterns on the left, center, and right are displayed in rapid fluctuations (the period from timing t0 to timing t1 during which it is impossible to determine whether presentation pattern 3 or presentation pattern 4 is being displayed), the same expectation suggestion presentation that suggests the likelihood of a jackpot may be executed. For example, as an expectation suggestion presentation, a samurai character image may be displayed behind the decorative patterns, appearing from the right side of the display area and disappearing to the left side, over the course of one second. In addition, it is advisable to make the likelihood of a jackpot when a samurai character image is displayed higher than the likelihood of a jackpot when a samurai character image is not displayed.
In this way, by making it possible to execute the same expectation suggestion effect that suggests the expectation of a big win whether it is the effect pattern 3 or the effect pattern 4, the player can have a sense of expectation that an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big win will appear when the expectation suggestion effect is displayed.

The rate at which the expectation suggestion effect is executed in effect pattern 3 (note that the rate here is the denominator of all the variable displays for which effect pattern 3 is selected to be executed) may be higher than the rate at which the expectation suggestion effect is executed in effect pattern 4 (note that the rate here is the denominator of all the variable displays for which effect pattern 4 is selected to be executed). By doing this, effect pattern 3 will appear more often than effect pattern 4 when the expectation suggestion effect is executed, but because effect pattern 3 appears more frequently than effect pattern 4, it is possible to prevent early onset of boredom by frequently executing the expectation suggestion effect.
Alternatively, the rate at which the expectation suggestion effect is executed in effect pattern 3 (note that the rate here is the denominator of all the variable displays for which execution of effect pattern 3 is selected) may be lower than the rate at which the expectation suggestion effect is executed in effect pattern 4 (note that the rate here is the denominator of all the variable displays for which execution of effect pattern 4 is selected).By doing this, it is possible to create anticipation for the appearance of effect pattern 4 when the expectation suggestion effect is executed, and therefore interest can be heightened just by the execution of the expectation suggestion effect.

Although it has been shown with reference to FIG. 350 etc. that effect patterns 1 to 5 can be executed, it is also possible to execute any of effect patterns 1 to 5 after executing any of effect patterns 1 to 5. Note that the variable display time for effect patterns 1 to 5 is 10 seconds, so if effect patterns can be executed consecutively in this way, the variable display time will be 20 seconds. Also, if effect patterns can be executed consecutively in this way, there will be 25 possible combinations.
When the presentation patterns are executed consecutively, all decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a reach miss state at the end of the first presentation pattern (the period from timing t9 to timing t10), but as the second presentation pattern begins, all decorative symbols are displayed in a rapidly changing state, so that even if a miss is shown when the first presentation pattern is executed, the player can have a sense of anticipation that the second presentation pattern will start and result in a jackpot.

When effect pattern 4 is executed, the current pending image is hidden, so other effect patterns may not be executed after effect pattern 4 is executed. Alternatively, the display of the current pending image may be resumed at timing t10, and other effect patterns may be executed after effect pattern 4 is executed.
Furthermore, after effect pattern 3 is executed, effect pattern 4 may be executed consecutively. Alternatively, after effect pattern 4 is executed, effect pattern 3 may be executed consecutively. In this case, the expectation level may be higher for the former, or higher for the latter.

Regarding the degree of expectation, the degree of expectation when a certain presentation pattern is executed and then a second presentation pattern is executed may be higher or lower than the degree of expectation when a certain presentation pattern is executed once and then terminated.
For example, the expectation level when presentation pattern 4 is executed after presentation pattern 3 is executed may be higher or lower than the expectation level when presentation pattern 3 is executed.
Alternatively, the expectation level when presentation pattern 3 is executed after presentation pattern 4 is executed may be higher or lower than the expectation level when presentation pattern 4 is executed.

During the period when the left and right decorative symbols of presentation pattern 3 are temporarily stopped (timing t7 to timing t10), operation acceptance for the operation unit (e.g., operation button 401, attack button 3710, etc.) may be enabled. For example, operation acceptance for the operation unit may be enabled during the period from timing t7.5 to timing t9.0, and an operation unit simulation image simulating the enabled operation unit may be displayed in the display area. Furthermore, when an operation is performed on the operation unit, a display indicating whether the result of the variable display is a jackpot (e.g., displaying text such as "jackpot" or "miss") may be displayed. Alternatively, rather than directly indicating the result of the variable display, a display indicating the degree of expectation, such as "High expectation!" or "Low expectation!" may be displayed. After these displays are displayed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t10, and the variable display result is shown to the player.
On the other hand, during the period when the decorative patterns on the left, center, and right of performance pattern 4 are temporarily stopped (timing t8 to timing t10), it is advisable not to enable operation acceptance for the operation unit (naturally, display of an operation unit simulation image, etc. will not be performed).
According to such an embodiment, in the case of presentation pattern 3, which has a relatively lower expectation level compared to presentation pattern 4, the player can find out early on whether or not there is a jackpot, at his or her own discretion, thereby preventing the player from feeling annoyed by being shown a presentation with a low expectation level for a long time.
On the other hand, in the case of presentation pattern 4, which has a relatively higher expectation level compared to presentation pattern 3, the player cannot know whether or not a jackpot has been won until the decorative pattern stops, regardless of the player's intention, so the player can feel a sense of anticipation for a jackpot to occur for a long period of time until the variable display ends.

In the embodiment of the "hourglass hold change effect," it was shown that the effect decorative member may be driven in a predetermined manner (for example, moved or illuminated), but in this embodiment, the effect decorative member may also be driven in a similar manner. The effect decorative member may be positioned between the panel board 1110 and the game board effect display device 1600 in the front-to-back direction, as shown in FIG. 134. Also, when viewed from the front, the effect decorative member may not overlap with the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 when in the standby position, and may overlap with the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 when in the moving position.
These decorative elements may also be driven during the period (timing t7 to timing t10) when the left and right decorative symbols of effect pattern 3, which has a relatively lower expected value compared to effect pattern 4, are temporarily stopped. For example, by moving the decorative elements for effect from the standby position to the moving position during the period from timing t7 to timing t10, the variable display can be enhanced. The decorative elements for effect may also be illuminated. In this case, the decorative elements for effect may be set to an illuminated state at the standby position, and then moved to the moving position while still illuminated. Alternatively, the decorative elements may be moved to the moving position while still in an unlit state, and then changed from an unlit state to an illuminated state when the movement to the moving position is completed.
On the other hand, in the case of presentation pattern 4, which has a relatively higher expectation level than presentation pattern 3, the presentation decorative member is not moved from the standby position to the moving position during the period when the left, center, and right decorative symbols of presentation pattern 4 are temporarily stopped (timing t8 to timing t10), thereby preventing the visibility of the presentation display (battle between characters) from being impaired. Also, while the presentation decorative member may be moved from the standby position to the moving position before timing t8, it is preferable to move it to the standby position before timing t8. Note that during the period when the left, center, and right decorative symbols of presentation pattern 4 are temporarily stopped (timing t8 to timing t10), the presentation decorative member may be made to emit light in the standby position.
It is preferable to set a higher expectation level when the decorative member for performance moves compared to when the decorative member for performance does not move.Similarly, it is preferable to set a higher expectation level when the decorative member for performance lights up compared to when the decorative member for performance does not light up.

During the period (timing t7 to t10) when the left and right decorative symbols in presentation pattern 3 are temporarily stopped, a first specific sound effect may be output as background music or sound effects when a normal background image is displayed as the background image, and a second specific sound effect different from the first specific sound may be output as background music or sound effects when a reach background image A, such as that shown in FIG. 360, is displayed as the background image. On the other hand, during the period (timing t8 to t10) when the left, center, and right decorative symbols in presentation pattern 4 are temporarily stopped, when a normal background image is displayed as the background image, not only the first specific sound effect but also any other sound effects are not output. Presentation pattern 4 has a higher probability of winning than presentation pattern 3, so silence can increase the sense of tension (however, if the game ball enters the starting hole during this silent period, the starting winning sound that is output when the ball enters the starting hole will still be output).

Next, we will explain the differences (and in some cases differences from other presentation patterns) between presentation pattern 4, which was explained with reference to Figures 350(d) and 354 to 356, and presentation pattern 5, which was explained with reference to Figures 350(e) and 358, as well as variations on these presentation patterns.

Comparing presentation pattern 4 and presentation pattern 5, in presentation pattern 5, characters are not displayed, so by changing the background image to a special reach background (special background) that cannot be displayed when the decorative pattern is not changing, it is possible to clearly convey to the player that there is high expectation.
On the other hand, in the case of presentation pattern 4, the characters (monster character and master character) are displayed occupying most of the display area, so there is no need to change the normal background image, and a presentation suggesting the variable display result (a presentation in which the monster character and master character fight) can be executed without changing the normal background image. Also, because the normal background image is displayed as is, there is no need to create a dedicated reach-time background image, which reduces the costs associated with image development and the storage capacity required to store the images.

The expectation of a big win may be set to increase in the order of presentation pattern 4, presentation pattern 3 (when background image A is displayed when a reach is reached), and presentation pattern 5. The time during which the decorative symbols on the left and right form a reach state and are temporarily stopped is 2 seconds in presentation pattern 4, 3 seconds in presentation pattern 3, and 4 seconds in presentation pattern 5.
With this configuration, the higher the expectation of the presentation pattern, the longer the time that the ready state is formed, so that the player can be effectively provided with a sense of expectation due to the ready state.

Furthermore, comparing the decorative symbols in presentation pattern 5 with those in presentation pattern 4, the left and right decorative symbols indicate a reach state in both presentation patterns. Presentation pattern 5 uses the fluctuation of the decorative symbols (by switching from high-speed fluctuation to ultra-slow fluctuation) to help the player recognize which number the center decorative symbol (a decorative symbol not indicating a reach state) will stop on while the left and right decorative symbols indicate a reach state. Meanwhile, presentation pattern 4, as mentioned above, displays a monster character a short time after the start of fluctuation (timing t1), suggesting the outcome of the winning or losing game depending on whether the monster character is defeated. Presentation pattern 4 displays the left and right decorative symbols indicating a reach state, and the center decorative symbol also displays a decorative symbol with a different number than the left and right decorative symbols, causing all decorative symbols to oscillate and fluctuate. In this way, by fluctuating all decorative symbols and displaying non-winning combinations, the player is directed to the battle with the monster character rather than the decorative symbols. If the decorative symbols in presentation pattern 4 were to be the same as those in presentation pattern 5 (i.e., if the presentation showed which number the medium decorative symbols would stop at), the player would be confused as to whether to focus on the decorative symbols or on the battle with the monster character, resulting in the highly anticipated reach presentation ending without increasing interest. Furthermore, in presentation pattern 4, if the player loses the battle with the monster character (if the lottery result suggests a loss), displaying a losing symbol combination after the loss would repeatedly remind the player that they had lost, which could be upsetting. However, this risk can be avoided by configuring presentation pattern 4. Displaying a losing symbol combination after the loss of the battle with the monster character would take time, but minimizing this time would result in a gaming machine with high variability efficiency, which in turn would lead to increased sales.

359(b) and 361 show an embodiment that is a modification of effect pattern 5. In this embodiment, the decorative symbols are hidden during the period when the tornado image is displayed (0.6 seconds from timing t6.2 to timing t6.8). In effect pattern 4, the decorative symbols may also be hidden during the period when the master character is attacking the monster character (0.5 seconds from timing t8.5 to timing t9.0).
In this way, when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a reach state or a reach miss state, the decorative symbols are hidden for a predetermined period of time, making them in a display state in which they cannot be recognized by the player. This initially teases the player as to whether the decorative symbols forming the reach state will be promoted from normal symbols to probability variable symbols, whether the numbers attached to the decorative symbols forming the reach state will be promoted to numbers with a high probability of a jackpot, and what the outcome of the battle between the characters will be (whether the middle decorative symbols will move and result in an indication that a jackpot will occur), but after the predetermined time has passed, the display of the decorative symbols resumes and the predetermined result (whether they will be promoted or whether it indicates that a jackpot will occur or not) is displayed, so the joy felt by the player when the result is favorable to the player can be increased by the amount of teasing.

In addition, an embodiment has been shown in which the decorative pattern is hidden during the period when the tornado image is displayed in a modified embodiment of presentation pattern 5 (0.6 seconds from timing t6.2 to timing t6.8) and during the period when the master character is attacking the monster character in presentation pattern 4 (0.5 seconds from timing t8.5 to timing t9.0), but the length of the period when the tornado image is displayed and the master character is attacking the monster character (i.e., the length of the period when the decorative pattern is hidden) can be set as appropriate.
For example, the period during which the master character attacks the monster character may be longer than the period during which the tornado image is displayed. For example, the period during which the tornado image is displayed may be 0.5 seconds, and the period during which the master character attacks the monster character may be 2 seconds. Because the expectation of a win is higher in presentation pattern 5 than in presentation pattern 4, the length of the period during which the decorative pattern is not displayed in presentation pattern 5 (the period during which the tornado image is displayed) may be longer than the length of the period during which the decorative pattern is not displayed in presentation pattern 4 (the period during which the monster character is being attacked) (the longer the interval is in the presentation pattern with higher expectation), thereby prolonging the sense of excitement that something might change.
Also, the duration of the period during which the tornado image is displayed and the duration during which the master character is attacking the monster character may be set to the same length (for example, one second for both). By doing so, even with presentation pattern 4, which has a lower probability of winning compared to presentation pattern 5, players can expect a change in the design (because the duration of the change is the same for presentation pattern 4 and presentation pattern 5).
The period during which the tornado image is displayed may be longer than the period during which the master character is attacking the monster character. For example, the period during which the tornado image is displayed may be 2 seconds, and the period during which the master character is attacking the monster character may be 0.5 seconds.

In addition, when the display of the tornado image in effect pattern 5 ends and the left and right decorative patterns are displayed again, an example has been shown in which the same decorative patterns as before the decorative patterns were hidden or decorative patterns with different numbers are displayed, but it is preferable to set the rate at which the same decorative patterns are displayed higher than decorative patterns with different numbers. Also, when the same decorative pattern is displayed again, it is acceptable to treat it as the same (similar) decorative pattern even if it is not completely identical before and after display. For example, a decorative pattern consisting of numbers and characters may be redisplayed as numbers only, a decorative pattern consisting of numbers and dynamic characters may be redisplayed as numbers and static characters, the size of the decorative pattern may be different, or the font of the decorative pattern may be different.
Furthermore, in presentation pattern 4, all decorative symbols may be given higher display priority than the master character and monster character, and all decorative symbols may be visible even when the master character and monster character are fighting (timings t8.1 to t9.0). In this case, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, all visible decorative symbols are symbol combinations corresponding to a loss and are therefore displayed as they are. However, if the result of the lottery is a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 356(e), the center decorative symbol may be re-varied to display decorative symbols of the same number as the decorative symbols on either side, or all decorative symbols may be re-varied. However, when all decorative symbols are re-varied, it is preferable to display a different decorative symbol (e.g., although the "2" is displayed as a reach indicator in FIG. 356, a decorative symbol other than "2") with a double number (a symbol combination corresponding to a jackpot). For example, instead of a double number "2," a double number "3" or "7" may be displayed. This can provide a sense of expectation for a big win.

The rate at which presentation pattern 5 is selected should be higher than the rate at which presentation pattern 4 is selected. For example, the ratio between the rate at which presentation pattern 5 is selected and the rate at which presentation pattern 4 is selected could be 9:1. In this case, compared to the timing at which high-speed fluctuations switch to low-speed fluctuations in presentation pattern 5 (timing t5), the timing at which high-speed fluctuations switch to low-speed fluctuations when presentation pattern 4 is executed (timing t7) is later than the start of the fluctuation display. In other words, when presentation pattern 4 is executed, the period during which the decorative symbols fluctuate at high speed appears longer, giving the player a sense of discomfort and providing the player with a sense of excitement that an advantageous situation such as a jackpot may occur. This also prevents the fluctuation display from becoming monotonous.

The rate at which presentation pattern 5 is selected may be lower than the rate at which presentation pattern 4 is selected. For example, the ratio between the rate at which presentation pattern 5 is selected and the rate at which presentation pattern 4 is selected may be 1:9. In this case, the timing at which high-speed fluctuations switch to low-speed fluctuations in presentation pattern 4 (timing t5) is earlier from the start of the variable display than the timing at which high-speed fluctuations switch to low-speed fluctuations when presentation pattern 5 is executed (timing t7). In other words, when presentation pattern 5 is executed, the time during which the decorative patterns are rapidly fluctuating appears short, giving the player a sense of discomfort and providing the player with a sense of excitement that an advantageous situation such as a jackpot may occur. This also prevents the variable display from becoming monotonous.

In a modified example of presentation pattern 5 shown with reference to Figures 359(b) and 361, the expected degree of progression of the normal pattern constituting the reach state to a special pattern (and the expected degree of a jackpot in presentation pattern 5) was indicated by which of tornado images A to C was displayed (whether the tornado was small, medium, or large).
On the other hand, in presentation pattern 4, as shown in Figures 356(c) and 357(c), the master character kicks with only one foot, but the master character may also drop kick the monster character with both feet. In this case, the probability of defeating the monster character (i.e., the probability of winning) may be higher than when the master character kicks with only one foot.
In this way, by enabling effects with different expectation levels to be executed while the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the sense of expectation for a jackpot can be heightened. In a modified version of effect pattern 5, the expectation level for the normal symbols that constitute the reach state to be upgraded to probability variable symbols (and the expectation level for a jackpot in effect pattern 5) changes not only depending on whether or not a tornado image is displayed, but also depending on which tornado image is displayed. Therefore, while the player wishes for the display of a tornado image and a tornado image with a high expectation level, effect pattern 4 only wishes for the display of a drop kick with both feet. Since effect pattern 4 has a higher expectation level for a win than effect pattern 5, when multiple expectation-boosting effects can be displayed in effect pattern 4, the number of expectation-boosting effects in effect pattern 4 is limited to one, to prevent a decrease in interest when an expectation-boosting effect with a low expectation level is displayed, even though the expectation-boosting effect of effect pattern 4 with a high expectation level is displayed.

It should be noted that when the tornado image C is displayed, it may be configured to always change from the normal symbol to the variable symbol. Alternatively, when the tornado image C is displayed, there may or may not be a change from the normal symbol to the variable symbol, but the result of the variable display may always be a jackpot. Alternatively, when the tornado image C is displayed, there may always be a change from the normal symbol to the variable symbol, and the result of the variable display may always be a jackpot.
Also, if the master character performs a drop kick with both feet on the monster character, the master character may always win against the monster character (i.e., the result of the variable display may always be a jackpot).

In both presentation pattern 4 and presentation pattern 5, the same expectation suggestion effect that suggests the likelihood of a jackpot may be executed during the period when the decorative patterns on the left, center, and right are displayed in rapid variance. For example, the expectation suggestion effect may involve a samurai character image appearing from the right side of the display area behind the decorative patterns and disappearing to the left side over the course of one second. It is also preferable to set the likelihood of a jackpot when the samurai character image is displayed higher than when the samurai character image is not displayed.
By making it possible to execute the expectation suggestion effect, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation as to in what manner the left, center, and right decorative symbols will temporarily stop.

The rate at which the expectation suggestion effect is executed in effect pattern 4 (note that the rate here is the denominator of all the variable displays for which effect pattern 4 is selected to be executed) may be higher than the rate at which the expectation suggestion effect is executed in effect pattern 5 (note that the rate here is the denominator of all the variable displays for which effect pattern 5 is selected to be executed).
Alternatively, the rate at which the expectation suggestion effect is executed in effect pattern 4 (note that the rate here is the denominator of all variable displays for which effect pattern 4 is selected to be executed) may be lower than the rate at which the expectation suggestion effect is executed in effect pattern 5 (note that the rate here is the denominator of all variable displays for which effect pattern 5 is selected to be executed).

Although it has been shown with reference to FIG. 350 etc. that effect patterns 1 to 5 can be executed, it is also possible to execute any of effect patterns 1 to 5 after executing any of effect patterns 1 to 5. Note that the variable display time for effect patterns 1 to 5 is 10 seconds, so if effect patterns can be executed consecutively in this way, the variable display time will be 20 seconds. Also, if effect patterns can be executed consecutively in this way, there will be 25 possible combinations.
When the presentation patterns are executed consecutively, all decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a reach miss state at the end of the first presentation pattern (the period from timing t9 to timing t10), but as the second presentation pattern begins, all decorative symbols are displayed in a rapidly changing state, so that even if a miss is shown when the first presentation pattern is executed, the player can have a sense of anticipation that the second presentation pattern will start and result in a jackpot.

When effect pattern 4 is executed, the current pending image is hidden, so other effect patterns may not be executed after effect pattern 4 is executed. Alternatively, the display of the current pending image may be resumed at timing t10, and other effect patterns may be executed after effect pattern 4 is executed.
Furthermore, after effect pattern 4 is executed, effect pattern 5 may be executed consecutively. Alternatively, after effect pattern 5 is executed, effect pattern 4 may be executed consecutively. In this case, the expectation level may be higher for the former, or higher for the latter.

Regarding the degree of expectation, the degree of expectation when a certain presentation pattern is executed and then a second presentation pattern is executed may be higher or lower than the degree of expectation when a certain presentation pattern is executed once and then terminated.
For example, the expectation level when presentation pattern 5 is executed after presentation pattern 4 is executed may be higher or lower than the expectation level when presentation pattern 4 is executed.
Alternatively, the degree of expectation when presentation pattern 5 is executed followed by presentation pattern 4 may be set higher or lower than the degree of expectation when presentation pattern 5 is executed.

During the period when the decorative symbols on the left and right of presentation pattern 5 are temporarily stopped (timing t6 to timing t10), operation acceptance for the operation unit (e.g., operation button 401, attack button 3710, etc.) may be enabled. For example, operation acceptance for the operation unit may be enabled during the period from timing t6.5 to timing t9.0, and an operation unit simulation image simulating the enabled operation unit may be displayed in the display area. Furthermore, when an operation is performed on the operation unit, a display indicating whether the result of the variable display is a jackpot (e.g., displaying text such as "jackpot" or "miss") may be displayed. Alternatively, rather than directly indicating the result of the variable display, a display indicating the degree of expectation, such as "High expectation!" or "Low expectation!" may be displayed. After these displays are displayed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t10, and the variable display result is shown to the player.
On the other hand, during the period when the decorative patterns on the left, center, and right of performance pattern 4 are temporarily stopped (timing t8 to timing t10), it is advisable not to enable operation acceptance for the operation unit (naturally, display of an operation unit simulation image, etc. will not be performed).
According to this embodiment, in the case of presentation pattern 5, which has a relatively lower expectation level compared to presentation pattern 4, the player can find out early on whether or not it is a jackpot at his or her own will, thereby preventing the player from feeling annoyed by being shown a presentation with a low expectation level for a long time.
On the other hand, in the case of presentation pattern 4, which has a relatively higher expectation level compared to presentation pattern 5, the player cannot know whether or not a jackpot has been won until the decorative pattern stops, regardless of the player's intention, so the player can feel a sense of anticipation for a jackpot to occur for a long period of time until the variable display ends.

In the embodiment of the "hourglass hold change effect," it was shown that the effect decorative member may be driven in a predetermined manner (for example, moved or illuminated), but in this embodiment, the effect decorative member may also be driven in a similar manner. The effect decorative member may be positioned between the panel board 1110 and the game board effect display device 1600 in the front-to-back direction, as shown in FIG. 134. Also, when viewed from the front, the effect decorative member may not overlap with the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 when in the standby position, and may overlap with the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 when in the moving position.
These decorative elements may also be driven during the period (timing t6 to timing t10) when the left and right decorative symbols of effect pattern 5, which has a relatively lower expected value compared to effect pattern 4, are temporarily stopped. For example, by moving the decorative elements for effect from the standby position to the moving position during the period from timing t6 to timing t10, the variable display can be enhanced. The decorative elements for effect may also be illuminated. In this case, the decorative elements for effect may be illuminated in the standby position, and then moved to the moving position while still illuminated. Alternatively, the decorative elements may be moved to the moving position while still illuminated, and then changed from the illuminated state to the illuminated state when the movement to the moving position is completed.
On the other hand, in the case of presentation pattern 4, which has a relatively higher expectation level than presentation pattern 5, by not moving the presentation decorative member from the standby position to the moving position during the period when the left, center, and right decorative symbols of presentation pattern 4 are temporarily stopped (timing t8 to timing t10), it is possible to prevent the visibility of the presentation display (battle between characters) from being impaired. Also, while the presentation decorative member may be moved from the standby position to the moving position before timing t8, it is preferable to move it to the standby position before timing t8. Note that during the period when the left, center, and right decorative symbols of presentation pattern 4 are temporarily stopped (timing t8 to timing t10), the presentation decorative member may be made to emit light in the standby position.
It is preferable to set a higher expectation level when the decorative member for performance moves compared to when the decorative member for performance does not move.Similarly, it is preferable to set a higher expectation level when the decorative member for performance lights up compared to when the decorative member for performance does not light up.

In this way, the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 347 to 361 can provide players with new and exciting experiences.

An embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 123 to 361 will be described below with reference to Figures 362 to 367. In this embodiment, a "barbell training effect" in which a character trains using a barbell is performed in the display area, followed by a special reach effect, and the expected probability of a jackpot is indicated by the content of the effect. Note that during the training, a barbell may fall from above; details will be provided later.

Figure 362 shows a time chart for this embodiment. Figures 364 to 367 show the display content in the display area, or the display content in the presentation window displayed in the display area.

In the "Barbell Training" effect, one of the effect patterns 1-1 to 3-8 is selected and executed. Based on the content of the executed effect, the probability of winning a jackpot is suggested.
First, the display modes common to effect patterns 1-1 to 3-8 will be described.
In the presentation patterns 1-1 and 1-2 shown in FIG. 362(a), decorative patterns are displayed in a rapidly varying manner from timing t0 to timing t14; in the presentation patterns 2-1 to 2-4 shown in FIG. 362(b), decorative patterns are displayed in a rapidly varying manner from timing t0 to timing t16; and in the presentation patterns 3-1 to 3-8 shown in FIG. 363, decorative patterns are displayed in a rapidly varying manner from timing t0 to timing t18. Of these, from timing t0 to timing t4, as shown in FIG. 364(a), in addition to the decorative patterns, a normal background image (here, normal background image B shown in FIG. 347(b)), a current hold image, a standby hold image, etc. are displayed. From timing t4 onwards, a presentation window is displayed in the center of the display area, a "barbell training presentation" begins, and within the presentation window, a display is displayed of a character training using a barbell. FIG. 364(b) shows the presentation window displayed near the center of the display area.
Note that Figures 365(a) to 365(h), 366(a), 366(b), and 366(e) are figures showing the display modes within the performance window.
Although an example has been shown in which the effect window occupies most of the display area, it may be made to occupy the entire display area, or it may be displayed in a small effect window that does not occupy most of the display area. Also, the size of the effect window may be made variable (increasing or decreasing) when the "barbell training effect" is being executed.

The "barbell training effect" consists of a "training effect," which is the period during which training using a barbell is displayed, a "training end effect," which displays the state when training has ended, and a "reach character confirmation effect," which shows the character to fight when the reach is reached.
In the "Barbell Training Effect", the "Training Effect" is executed first. The time required to execute the "Training Effect" is either 4 seconds, 6 seconds, or 8 seconds. The time required for execution varies depending on the effect pattern selected. After the "Training Effect", the "Training End Effect" is executed. The time required to execute the "Training End Effect" is 4 seconds. After the "Training End Effect", the "Reach Character Confirmation Effect" is executed. The time required to execute the "Reach Character Confirmation Effect" is 2 seconds.
After the "reach character determination effect" ends, the "window enlargement display effect" is executed, in which the effect window expands. In addition, when the "window enlargement display effect" starts, special reach decorative symbols are displayed in a reach state as decorative symbols on the left and right (details will be described later with reference to Figures 366(c) and 366(f)).
After the "window enlargement display effect" ends, a special reach effect ("character reach effect") is executed in which the character indicated in the "reach character confirmation effect" appears.

The display content within the presentation window during the period from timing t4 to timing t6 is common to presentation patterns 1-1 to 3-8.
Specifically, as shown in Fig. 365(a), in the presentation window, the words "Training Chance" are displayed in the upper left, the master character and the master character's lines are displayed in the lower left, and the martial artist character and the martial artist character's lines are displayed to the right of the master character. Also, an image of the martial artist character holding a guts barbell with the word "guts" written on it is displayed.

When the effect pattern 1-1 or effect pattern 1-2 is selected, the time required to execute the "training effect" is 4 seconds. Also, at timing t6, a 1-ton barbell may fall.
When effect pattern 2-1 to effect pattern 2-4 are selected, the time required to execute the "Training effect" is 6 seconds. Also, a 1-ton barbell may fall at timing t6. Also, a 1-ton barbell or a 5-ton barbell may fall at timing t8.
When presentation pattern 3-1 to presentation pattern 3-8 are selected, the time required to execute the "Training Presentation" is 8 seconds. Also, a 1-ton barbell may fall at timing t6. Also, a 1-ton barbell or a 5-ton barbell may fall at timing t8. Also, a 1-ton barbell, a 5-ton barbell, or a 10-ton barbell may fall at timing t10.

Figure 365(b) shows the display state when a 1-ton barbell is dropped. As shown in the figure, the 1-ton barbell is larger than the gutsy barbell. It also has the word "1 ton" written on it.
Figure 365(c) shows the display state when a 5-ton barbell is dropped. As shown in the figure, the 5-ton barbell is larger than the 1-ton barbell. The word "5 tons" is also added.
Figure 365(d) shows the display state when a 10-ton barbell is dropped. As shown in the figure, the 10-ton barbell is larger than the 5-ton barbell. The word "10 ton" is also added.
The barbells fall in the following order: 1 ton barbell, 5 ton barbell, and 10 ton barbell. In other words, if the martial artist character is holding only the guts barbell, the 5 ton barbell and the 10 ton barbell will not fall.
As shown in the figure, the lines of the martial artist character and the master character change as the barbell falls.

When the "Training in progress effect" ends, the "Training end effect" begins. As shown in Figures 362 and 363, the timing at which the "Training end effect" begins varies depending on the effect pattern being executed. Specifically, if either effect pattern 1-1 or effect pattern 1-2 is being executed, the "Training end effect" begins at timing t8. Also, if either effect pattern 2-1 to effect pattern 2-4 is being executed, the "Training end effect" begins at timing t10. Also, if either effect pattern 3-1 to effect pattern 3-8 is being executed, the "Training end effect" begins at timing t12.
When the "Training End Effect" begins, the combinations of barbells held by the martial artist character will be one of four types: guts barbell only, guts barbell and 1 ton barbell, guts barbell, 1 ton barbell and 5 ton barbell, and guts barbell, 1 ton barbell, 5 ton barbell and 10 ton barbell.
Figures 365(e) to 365(h) show the display modes during the "Training End Presentation." Specifically, Figure 365(e) shows a state in which the martial artist character is holding only the guts barbell. Figure 365(f) shows a state in which the martial artist character is holding both the guts barbell and a 1-ton barbell. Figure 365(g) shows a state in which the martial artist character is holding both the guts barbell, a 1-ton barbell, and a 5-ton barbell. Figure 365(h) shows a state in which the martial artist character is holding both the guts barbell, a 1-ton barbell, a 5-ton barbell, and a 10-ton barbell.

The longer the duration of the "training performance," the higher the expectation. For example, the expectation increases when the duration of the "training performance" is 4 seconds, 6 seconds, and 8 seconds, in that order.
For example, if the barbell remains as it is, if it falls to a 1-ton barbell, if it falls to a 5-ton barbell, and if it falls to a 10-ton barbell, the expectation increases in that order.
It should be noted that the higher the expectation, the lower the probability of effect execution (selection probability).
By adopting such an embodiment, the player will watch the progress of the presentation in the hope that the "training presentation" will continue for a long time and that many barbells will fall.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 362 and 363, only one barbell falls at a certain timing during the "training performance" (for example, timing t6, timing t8, timing t10), but multiple barbells may fall simultaneously at these timings. For example, two barbells (a 1-ton barbell and a 5-ton barbell, or a 5-ton barbell and a 10-ton barbell) or three barbells (a 1-ton barbell to a 10-ton barbell) may fall simultaneously.
Specifically, for example, at timing t10 of performance pattern 3-2, instead of only the 1-ton barbell falling, a 1-ton barbell, a 5-ton barbell, and a 10-ton barbell may fall simultaneously.
In this way, by allowing multiple barbells to fall at the same time, the expectation level increases dramatically, making the player feel very excited.

It should be noted that a barbell may be dropped during the "end of training" performance. The "end of training" performance lasts for four seconds, but one barbell may be dropped at the first, second, and third second intervals from the start of the "end of training" performance.
For example, when performance pattern 3-5 is executed, a 1-ton barbell falls at timing t6, but the next barbell, a 5-ton barbell, does not fall until timing t12. In this situation, the 5-ton barbell may fall at timing t14 during the "end of training performance," and the 10-ton barbell may fall at timing t15. Figure 366(a) shows the 5-ton barbell falling.
In this way, by allowing the barbell to fall even during the "end of training effect," it is possible to keep the player's sense of expectation that the level of expectation will increase.

In addition, at the timing when the barbells can fall during the "Training End Effect," multiple barbells (two or three) may fall at the same time, just as in the "Training During Effect." This also increases the likelihood of a jackpot, heightening the excitement felt by the player.

When the "training end effect" ends, the "reach character confirmation effect" begins. As shown in Figures 362 and 363, the timing at which the "reach character confirmation effect" begins varies depending on the effect pattern being executed. Specifically, when effect pattern 1-1 or effect pattern 1-2 is being executed, the "reach character confirmation effect" begins at timing t12, when effect pattern 2-1 to effect pattern 2-4 are being executed, the "reach character confirmation effect" begins at timing t14, and when effect pattern 3-1 to effect pattern 3-8 are being executed, the "reach character confirmation effect" begins at timing t16.
The "reach character confirmation effect" is an effect that notifies the player whether the SP reach effect that will be performed thereafter will be character reach effect 1 by a martial artist character or character reach effect 2 by a master character.
366(b) shows that the martial artist character will perform character reach performance 1. Note that the lines of both characters indicate that the martial artist character will perform character reach performance 1, but it may also be indicated that the martial artist character will perform character reach performance 1 by a special performance using the entire display area (for example, by displaying a close-up of the martial artist character's face in the entire display area).
Figure 366 (c) shows that a character reach effect 2 will be performed by the master character. Note that, although the lines of both characters indicate that a character reach effect 2 will be performed by the master character, it may also be indicated by a special effect using the entire display area (for example, by displaying a close-up of the master character's face in the entire display area). Furthermore, the size and display mode of the notification effect of the "reach character confirmation effect" may be changed depending on which character reach effect is developed, such as by using the lines of both characters when a character reach effect 1 is performed by the martial artist character, or by displaying a close-up of the master character's face in the entire display area when a character reach effect 2 is performed by the master character.
Furthermore, since it is the martial artist character who is training in the "barbell training performance," it is generally better for the rate at which it develops into Character Reach Performance 1 by the martial artist character to be higher (for example, the rate at which it develops into Character Reach Performance 1 by the martial artist character is 90%, and the rate at which it develops into Character Reach Performance 2 by the master character is 10%).
It should be noted that the higher the expectation, the lower the probability of execution (selection probability) of the reach effect.
In this way, by occasionally selecting a master character as the character to appear in the "character reach effect" (a martial artist character is not selected), a player who had expected a "character reach effect" in which a martial artist character would appear can be surprised, thereby increasing interest.

The rate at which the character reaches a martial artist character progresses to character reach performance 1 may be set to the same as the rate at which the character reaches a master character progresses to character reach performance 2. By setting the rates to be the same, character reach performance 1 by the martial artist character and character reach performance 2 by the master character appear evenly, and the display of various performances maintains interest for a long time.
Furthermore, the rate at which the game progresses to Character Reach Presentation 2 by a master character may be set higher than the rate at which the game progresses to Character Reach Presentation 1 by a martial artist character. This makes it possible to create a scenario that is easy for players to understand, in which the expectation of Character Reach Presentation 1 by a martial artist character increases as the martial artist character becomes stronger through training.

When the "Training End Effect" ends (i.e., the "Barbell Training Effect" ends), the "Window Enlargement Display Effect" begins.
In the "expanded window display effect," the size of the effect window becomes the same size as the display area over the course of two seconds, and the effect window continues to expand until the frame of the effect window moves outside the display area and is no longer visible. While the "expanded window display effect" is being performed, the character appearing in the "character reach effect" and the name of the "character reach effect" being performed are displayed within the effect window. Also, at the same time as the "expanded window display effect" begins, special reach decorative symbols (see Figure 225(b)) are displayed in reach state, replacing the decorative symbols on the left, center, and right that had been displayed at high speed until then.
Figures 366(c) and 366(f) show the display state when one second has elapsed since the "window enlargement display effect" began.
In Figure 366 (c), a martial artist character and the words "martial artist character reach" are displayed. The display also shows a state in which the size of the presentation window is in the middle of increasing. The special reach decoration symbols on the left and right are temporarily displayed as "2." Note that the middle decoration symbol among the special reach decoration symbols is not yet displayed at this timing.
In Figure 366 (f), the master character and the words "Master Character Reach" are displayed. It also shows a state in which the size of the effect window is in the middle of expanding. The left and right special reach decorative symbols are displayed as "2"s in the upper left and upper right positions of the display area, respectively. The middle decorative symbol among the special reach decorative symbols is not yet displayed at this timing. The timing for displaying the left and right special reach decorative symbols in the reach state may be simultaneous with the start of the "window enlargement display effect," after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the "window enlargement display effect," at the start of character reach effects 1 and 2, which are SP reach effects, or after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of character reach effects 1 and 2, which are SP reach effects.

366(c) or 366(f), the display content in the effect window can be changed from the display content shown in Fig. 366(b) or 366(e) to the display content shown in Fig. 366(c) or 366(f) by changing the position and size of the characters (fighter characters and master characters) appearing in the "character reach effect" and the barbells they are holding, and by ending the display of other images in the effect window. By adopting such an embodiment, the effect can be smoothly developed from the "barbell training effect" to the "character reach effect," making it less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable with the effect.
In addition, the name of the "character reach effect" to be executed may be displayed at the same time as the "window enlargement display effect" starts, or may be displayed while the "window enlargement display effect" is being executed.

As shown in Figures 362 and 363, the timing at which the "window enlargement effect" starts varies depending on the effect pattern being executed. Specifically, when effect pattern 1-1 or effect pattern 1-2 is being executed, the "window enlargement effect" starts at timing t14; when effect pattern 2-1 to effect pattern 2-4 are being executed, the "window enlargement effect" starts at timing t16; and when effect pattern 3-1 to effect pattern 3-8 are being executed, the "window enlargement effect" starts at timing t18.

When the "expanded window display effect" ends, the effect window display ends, and the background image changes from the normal background image to the reach background image. Also, when the "expanded window display effect" ends, a special reach effect, the "character reach effect" (such as a "fighter character reach effect" or a "master character reach effect"), begins.
366(d) shows the display state at the timing when the "fighter character reach effect" starts. Here, reach background image B is displayed as the background image.
366(g) shows the display state at the timing when the "master character reach effect" starts. Here, the reach background image A is displayed as the background image.
When two seconds have elapsed since the start of the character reach performance, the display of the name "character reach performance" ends and an enemy character fighting the martial artist character or master character is displayed.

Note that, at the same time as the "window enlargement display effect" ends, the display of the current hold image and the standby hold image is stopped. As shown in Figures 366(c) and 366(f), the current hold image and the standby hold image are displayed during the "window enlargement display effect", and as shown in Figures 366(d) and 366(g), the display of the current hold image and the standby hold image is stopped after the "window enlargement display effect" ends. Note that the timing for hiding the current hold image and the standby hold image does not have to be the exact moment the "window enlargement display effect" ends, but may be slightly before or slightly after the "window enlargement display effect" ends. If it is slightly later, the current hold image and the standby hold image will be recognizable at the start of the "character reach effect", but will no longer be recognizable immediately.
If the result of the special lottery is a loss, the display of the standby image will resume when the "Character Reach" effect ends and the decorative pattern is displayed. The current image will not be displayed again.
On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, the standby hold image may not be displayed or the current hold image may not be redisplayed even when the "character reach effect" ends and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, or it may be as explained in the case where the result of the special lottery is a miss. Also, even if the result of the special lottery is a miss, it may be changed depending on the type of reach effect. For example, if the character reach effect by a martial artist is a miss, the current hold image is not displayed, and if the character reach effect by a master is a miss, the current hold image is displayed. Even if the result of the special lottery is a hit, it may be changed depending on the type of reach effect, just like in the case of a miss.

In the "character reach effect," a display is made of the character determined in the "barbell training effect" fighting another character. Specifically, four types of "character reach effects" are executed: a reach effect in which a martial artist character fights a samurai character (Fig. 367(a)), a reach effect in which a martial artist character fights a warrior character (Fig. 367(b)), a reach effect in which a master character fights a fake samurai character wearing sunglasses (Fig. 367(c)), and a reach effect in which a master character fights a fake warrior character wearing sunglasses (Fig. 367(d)). Note that Figs. 367(a) to 367(d) show one scene in a reach effect, and during the reach effect, a dynamic display is made in which the two characters move and fight with the weapons they are holding.
Furthermore, if the martial artist character or the master character wins in the "character reach performance", the special reach decoration symbol is displayed in a stopped state in a manner indicating a big win after the reach performance ends. Furthermore, if the martial artist character or the master character loses in the "character reach performance", the special reach decoration symbol is displayed in a stopped state in a manner indicating a loss after the reach performance ends.

The likelihood of winning varies depending on the type of "character reach effect," with the likelihood increasing in the following order: a reach effect in which a martial artist character and a samurai character fight, a reach effect in which a martial artist character and a warrior character fight, a reach effect in which a master character and a fake samurai character wearing sunglasses fight, and a reach effect in which a master character and a fake warrior character wearing sunglasses fight.
For example, the expected probability of a reach effect in which a martial artist character fights a samurai character may be 20%, the expected probability of a reach effect in which a martial artist character fights a warrior character may be 30%, the expected probability of a reach effect in which a master character fights a fake samurai character wearing sunglasses may be 40%, and the expected probability of a reach effect in which a master character fights a fake warrior character wearing sunglasses may be 50%.

The time required for the "character reach effect" can be set to a predetermined number of seconds, such as 60 or 90 seconds, independent of the execution time of the "barbell training effect." Alternatively, the time required for the "character reach effect" can be determined according to the type of character being fought. For example, the execution time for the "fighter character reach effect" can be 60 seconds, and the execution time for the "master character reach effect" can be 90 seconds.

The timing at which the reach effect begins varies depending on the effect pattern that was executed. If effect pattern 1-1 or effect pattern 1-2 was executed, the reach effect begins at timing t16. If effect pattern 2-1 to effect pattern 2-4 were executed, the reach effect begins at timing t18. If effect pattern 3-1 to effect pattern 3-8 were executed, the reach effect begins at timing t20.

Note that while each effect pattern shown in Figure 362 shows the display mode up to timing t25, the reach effect continues after timing t25, and decorative symbols are displayed statically at a predetermined timing. Note that in embodiments in which the reach effect described below is not executed, decorative symbols may be displayed statically before timing t25.

In this way, two characters appear in the "barbell training effect," and the expectation level is indicated by the length of the "training effect" execution time and the barbell that has fallen. Therefore, the player can know in advance the expectation level for the "character reach effect" that occurs afterwards.
In addition to simply indicating the degree of expectation, the characters that appeared in the "Barbell Training Performance" also appear in the "Character Reach Performance," creating a sense of unity in the performance.
Furthermore, the probability that the "character reach effect" of the character who was training (the martial artist character) among the characters who appeared in the "barbell training effect" will be executed is set to be high, but the "character reach effect" may also be executed, albeit with a low probability, for the character who was providing training instruction (the master character). By adopting this type of configuration, the player can be made to feel a sense of surprise (the excitement of thinking, "Oh, that's it!") when a character who was not training appears in the reach effect.
Furthermore, when a character who has not been training appears in a reach effect, the expectation is higher, so in addition to the sense of surprise, the player can feel a sense of anticipation for a big hit.

In the "Training Performance," the master character's lines simply change in accordance with the various barbells that fall, but it is also possible to have the various barbells fall in response to the master character's movements.
For example, the barbell may fall only when the master character jumps and hits the top edge of the presentation window one second before the barbell is about to fall (at timing t6, timing t8, or timing t10). In this case, the master character may say, "Watch your head!" to clearly explain the meaning of the presentation to the player.
It should be noted that the barbell may always fall when the master character jumps, or the barbell may fall with a predetermined probability (for example, 30%, 40%, etc.).
Furthermore, if the master character jumps, there is a relatively high probability (for example, 60% or 50%) that the barbell will fall, and if the master character does not jump, there is a relatively low probability (for example, 10% or 5%) that the barbell will fall.
In addition, a similar embodiment may be adopted not only during the "training in progress" but also during the "training completion" performance.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to realistically portray the state of the character training, and it is also possible to further enhance the feeling of surprise that a master character who has not been training appears in the reach performance.

Although an embodiment in which a master character gives training guidance to a martial artist character has been shown, an embodiment in which the master character trains using a barbell may also be implemented. In this case, the martial artist character is displayed on the left side of the presentation window, and the master character holding up a guts barbell is displayed on the right side of the martial artist character, and various barbells may fall on the master character, as in the above embodiment.
In this case, the probability that the "fighter character reach effect" will be executed may be set to 10%, and the probability that the "master character reach effect" will be executed may be set to 90%.
According to this aspect, it is possible to recognize before the start of the "character reach effect" that the "master character reach effect," which has a relatively higher expectation than the "fighter character reach effect," will be executed, and therefore it is possible to make the player recognize a strong sense of expectation for a jackpot at an early stage of the changing display, and to maintain a high sense of expectation for a jackpot for a long period of time until the changing display of the decorative pattern ends.

368 is a table showing the relationship between the effect contents and the expected degree of the "Barbell Training Effect" and the "Character Reach Effect" that is executed afterwards. Each effect number in the table has an effect content set, and one of the effect numbers is selected with a predetermined probability, and the effect corresponding to the selected effect number is executed.
For example, if effect number 1 is selected, effect pattern 1-1 is executed, the training effect lasts for 4 seconds, only the guts barbell is displayed in the end, and the type of character reach effect executed is "fighter character VS samurai character," with an expected probability of 15%.
This table is based on an embodiment in which an additional barbell falls during the "end of training" performance.

The barbells may be colored in any of a plurality of predetermined colors from 1 ton to 10 ton. The color may also indicate the degree of expectation.
For example, three types of 1-ton barbells may be prepared in advance: a white 1-ton barbell, a red 1-ton barbell, and a gold 1-ton barbell, and one of the barbells may fall during the performance. In this case, it is preferable to set the expectation level to increase in the order of the white 1-ton barbell, the red 1-ton barbell, and the gold 1-ton barbell.
Similarly, three types of 5-ton barbells may be provided in advance: a white 5-ton barbell, a red 5-ton barbell, and a gold 5-ton barbell, and one of the barbells may fall during the performance. In this case, it is preferable to set the expectation level to increase in the order of the white 5-ton barbell, the red 5-ton barbell, and the gold 5-ton barbell.
Similarly, three types of 10-ton barbells may be provided in advance: a white 10-ton barbell, a red 10-ton barbell, and a gold 10-ton barbell, and one of the barbells may fall during the performance. In this case, it is advisable to set the expectation level to increase in the order of the white 10-ton barbell, the red 10-ton barbell, and the gold 10-ton barbell.
It should be noted that the color of the tenacity barbell should not be multiple colors, but should be only one color (for example, white or brown).
According to such an embodiment, instead of simply waiting for a barbell to fall, the player will be anticipating a more promising barbell to fall, thereby increasing the excitement.

In the embodiment shown, the falling barbell is confirmed by displaying the master character jumping and hitting the top edge of the presentation window, but it is also possible to implement a presentation that confirms the color of the falling barbell. For example, the color of the falling barbell may be indicated by the type of dialogue displayed when the master character jumps.
According to this embodiment, it is possible to create a great sense of anticipation as to what color barbell will fall.

In the embodiment shown, one to ten ton barbells fall, either white, red, or gold, and the color of the falling barbell indicates the degree of expectation, but if a red barbell falls, the next barbells to fall should be red or gold, and no white barbells should fall.Similarly, if a gold barbell falls, the next barbells to fall should be gold, and no white or gold barbells should fall.
For example, after a red 1-ton barbell falls, red and gold 5-ton barbells fall, but the white 5-ton barbell does not. Similarly, after a red 5-ton barbell falls, red and gold 10-ton barbells fall, but the white 10-ton barbell does not fall.
When multiple types of images (in this embodiment, multiple types of images shown in different colors) with a set order of relative expectation are displayed consecutively, if an image with a relatively high expectation is displayed followed by an image with a relatively low expectation, the player may feel that their expectation has decreased and their interest may decrease, but this embodiment can prevent such a situation from occurring.

As shown with reference to Figures 362, 363, 364(b), etc., the "Barbell Training Effect" is executed while the decorative symbols on the left, center, and right are fluctuating at high speed. This allows the player to concentrate on the "Barbell Training Effect" without worrying about the temporary stopping state of the decorative symbols. If a reach state were to occur during the "Barbell Training Effect," it would be difficult for the player to concentrate on the "Barbell Training Effect" (this problem is particularly pronounced when the degree of expectation is indicated by the type of numbers attached to the decorative symbols that form the reach state), but this embodiment can prevent such a situation from occurring.

The decorative symbols may be in a reach state while the "barbell training effect" is being executed. For example, the decorative symbols may be in a reach state while one of the "training effect," "training end effect," or "reach character confirmation effect" of the "barbell training effect" is being executed.

In the embodiment shown, when the "barbell training effect" is executed, the decorative pattern always goes into a reach state and the reach effect is executed, but there may also be cases where the decorative pattern goes into a reach state when the "barbell training effect" is executed, but the reach effect is not executed and the decorative pattern is displayed stopped in a manner indicating a miss (a so-called normal reach miss), or where the decorative pattern does not go into a reach state when the "barbell training effect" is executed (naturally the reach effect is not executed either) and the decorative pattern is displayed stopped in a manner indicating a miss.
In this case, when the "window enlargement display effect" is executed, it is advisable to perform an effect display in which the window is reduced in size and then disappears over a period of two seconds.
Furthermore, it is advisable to end the variable display of the decorative symbols when these two seconds or a few seconds (for example, 1 to 5 seconds) have elapsed in addition to these two seconds.
In addition, it may be notified during the "barbell training performance" that the decorative pattern is in a reach state but the reach performance is not executed, or that the decorative pattern is not in a reach state.
For example, the master character may say, "I'm going home today!" or the martial artist character may drop all of the barbells he is holding during the "barbell training performance" (during the performance of either the "training in progress performance,""training end performance," or "reach character confirmation performance").

As shown with reference to Figures 364 to 367, the current pending image and standby pending image are displayed while the "barbell training performance" is being executed, but the current pending image and standby pending image are not displayed while the "character reach performance" is being executed.
During the execution of the "barbell training effect," the hold change effect shown with reference to Figures 123 to 125 may be executed for the current hold image and the standby hold image. For example, in this embodiment, the current hold image and the standby hold image are white and circular, but these may be changed to a display mode that indicates a higher degree of expectation. Specifically, they may be changed from white to any color from blue to rainbow.

If the reserve change effect only changes color, it will end instantly at a predetermined timing, but by executing it over a predetermined period of time, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation as to what display mode (specifically, what color) it will change to. For example, as in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 322 to 329, the reserve change effect may be executed over several seconds.
In addition, the timing at which the hold change effect begins to be executed and the timing at which the hold change effect ends to be executed may be, for example, such that the hold change effect begins to be executed before the "barbell training effect" begins to be executed and ends while the "barbell training effect" is being executed (the changed hold display appearance is shown), or the hold change effect may begin to be executed while the "barbell training effect" is being executed and ends while the "barbell training effect" is being executed (the changed hold display appearance is shown), or the hold change effect may begin to be executed while the "barbell training effect" is being executed and ends after the "barbell training effect" has ended (the changed hold display appearance is shown) (in this case, it is preferable that the current hold image and standby hold image are displayed even while the "character reach effect" is being executed).
According to such an embodiment, while the "barbell training effect" or the "character reach effect" is being executed, the sense of anticipation can be increased by using other effects that are different from the "barbell training effect" or the "character reach effect," thereby increasing the level of anticipation and increasing the player's anticipation of a jackpot.

Referring to Figure 278 (b), an embodiment has been shown in which a cut-in image is displayed during a special reach performance to indicate the expected probability of a jackpot, but it is also possible to display a cut-in image in a similar manner during a character reach performance in this embodiment.
The display mode of the cut-in image will be described with reference to Figures 369(a) to 369(c).
During the martial artist character reach effect, the martial artist character and the samurai character approach each other and are shown fighting. Figure 369(a) shows the display state at this time.
Next, a cut-in image is displayed. The cut-in image consists of a horizontally elongated rectangular frame, a character (in this embodiment, a "wizard character") displayed within the frame, and the character's lines. The cut-in image is displayed for several seconds (e.g., 3 seconds). Figure 369(b) shows the display state at this time. The cut-in image indicates the expected probability of a jackpot by the background color within the frame. For example, three background colors may be displayed within the frame: green, red, and gold, with the expected probability increasing in this order. In addition to the background color within the frame, multiple types of characters (e.g., three or more types) may be provided, and the expected probability may be set for each type in a predetermined order. In addition, the figure shows light emanating from the tip of the wand held by the wizard character. The color of the part representing this light may be three colors: green, red, and gold, with the expected probability increasing in this order.
After the display of the cut-in image ends, the fight between the characters is decided and one of the characters wins. If the martial artist character wins, the decorative pattern is displayed as stopped in a manner indicating a jackpot. Conversely, if the samurai character wins, the decorative pattern is displayed as stopped in a manner indicating a loss. Figure 369(c) shows a display state in which the martial artist character wins the fight and the decorative pattern is displayed as stopped in a manner indicating a jackpot.
Although the martial artist character reach performance has been given as an example, a similar cut-in image may also be displayed in the master character reach performance.
The cut-in image is not displayed during the "barbell training effect." The cut-in image is also displayed immediately before the fight between the characters is concluded. For example, it is recommended that the fight between the characters be concluded 5 to 10 seconds after the cut-in image display ends. This makes it possible to create a sense of anticipation for a big win in the player just before the outcome of the fight between the characters is announced. The display of the cut-in image also allows the player to recognize that the outcome of the fight between the characters will soon be announced.

The same suggestive effect that indicates the degree of expectation may be executed in the "training effect" and the "character reach effect."
As a suggestion effect, for example, a wizard character riding a wand may appear from the right side of the display area and fly horizontally to the left, and the type of dialogue displayed to the left of the wizard character may suggest the likelihood of a jackpot (hereinafter, this may be referred to as a "character flight suggestion effect"). It is recommended that three types of dialogue be provided: "hot,""superhot," and "super hot," with the likelihood increasing in that order.
369(d) shows the display state in the effect window when the "character flight suggestion effect" is executed during the "training effect." As shown in the figure, the wizard character's lines are "Hot."
369(e) shows the display state in the display area when the "character flight suggestion effect" is executed during the "character reach effect." As shown in the figure, the wizard character's lines are "super hot."
Note that the sizes of the wizard character and dialogue window displayed by executing the "character flight suggestion effect" are the same during the "training effect" and the "character reach effect," but Fig. 369(d) is the display within the effect window and shows the display content in a part of the display area, whereas Fig. 369(e) shows the display content in the entire display area. Therefore, the wizard character and dialogue window shown in Fig. 369(d) are larger than those in Fig. 369(e).
The "character flight suggestion effect" may be executed twice, once during the "training effect" and once during the "character reach effect." Alternatively, if it is executed during either the "training effect" or the "character reach effect," it may not be executed during the other, so that the "character flight suggestion effect" is executed only once during one variable display.

A predetermined background music may be played while the "barbell training effect" is being executed. A predetermined background music may also be played while the "character reach effect" is being executed. The same background music may be played from the execution of the "barbell training effect" to the execution of the "character reach effect". By using such an embodiment, the player can recognize the "barbell training effect" and the "character reach effect" as a series of effects, enhancing the sense of unity of the effects.
On the other hand, different background music may be played during the execution of the "barbell training effect" and the execution of the "character reach effect." For example, a first background music may be played during the execution of the "character reach effect," and a second background music different from the first background music may be played during the execution of the "barbell training effect." By using such an embodiment, the player can clearly recognize which effect is being performed.
There are two types of character reach effects: a "fighter character reach effect" and a "master character reach effect." The same background music may be played during the execution of the "barbell training effect," the "fighter character reach effect," and the "master character reach effect."
Alternatively, the first background music may be played during the execution of the "fighter character reach performance," and the second background music may be played during the execution of the "barbell training performance" and the "master character reach performance."
Alternatively, the first background music may be played during the execution of the "master character reach performance," and the second background music may be played during the execution of the "barbell training performance" and the "martial artist character reach performance."

When the "Barbell Training Effect" is executed and a "Character Reach Effect" is performed, the BGM output changes from the second BGM that was being output while the "Barbell Training Effect" was being executed to the first BGM (output of the first BGM stops before the symbol change ends). However, if the "Character Reach Effect" is not executed even after the "Barbell Training Effect" is executed, the second BGM that was being output while the "Barbell Training Effect" was being executed may be continued to be output (not to be played from the start of the second BGM) even after the "Barbell Training Effect" ends. Furthermore, output of this continuously output second BGM may be stopped before the symbol change ends, or it may be continued to be output even after the symbol change ends (not to be played from the start of the second BGM). If output continues, it will be output across the next symbol change, creating a sense of anticipation that the "Barbell Training Effect" may be executed during the next symbol change as well.

In the "barbell training effect," operation acceptance for the operation unit (e.g., operation button 401, attack button 3710, etc.) may be enabled, and the barbell may fall based on the player's operation of the operation unit. For example, when an operation is performed on the operation unit, a display may be made in which the master character jumps and hits the top edge of the effect window, causing the barbell to fall.
For example, when the gutsy barbell is displayed during the "barbell training performance," operation acceptance for the operation unit can be enabled, and an operation unit imitation image shaped like the operation unit can be displayed in the display area. Also, when an operation is performed on the operation unit, a display is made of the master character jumping and hitting the top edge of the performance window, causing the one-ton barbell to fall, and when no operation is performed on the operation unit, the master character does not jump and the one-ton barbell does not fall.
Similarly, when the 1-ton barbell is displayed during the "barbell training performance," operation acceptance for the operation unit can be enabled, and an operation unit imitation image shaped like the operation unit can be displayed in the display area. Furthermore, when an operation is performed on the operation unit, the master character can be displayed as jumping and hitting the top edge of the performance window, causing the 5-ton barbell to fall, and when no operation is performed on the operation unit, the master character can be displayed as not jumping, and the 5-ton barbell can be displayed as not falling.
It is also possible to display the barbell falling in a similar manner based on the operation received from the operation unit while the 5-ton barbell is being displayed.
The valid operation period of the operation unit may be only a part of the "barbell training performance", or may be the entire period of the "barbell training performance", or may be only the entire period of the "training performance".
For example, when a 1-ton barbell can be changed to a 5-ton barbell, it may be possible to change it to a 5-ton barbell only when the player operates it, or it may be possible to change it to a 5-ton barbell even if the player does not operate it.
By adopting such an embodiment, the player can drop the barbell at a timing of his or her choice, which can enhance the player's sense of excitement.

Referring to Figures 369(a) to 369(c), an embodiment in which a cut-in image is displayed during a "character reach effect" has been shown, but it is also possible to enable operation acceptance for an operation unit (e.g., operation button 401, attack button 3710, etc.) during a "character reach effect" and display an operation unit imitation image shaped like an operation unit in the display area, so that one of the cut-in images is displayed based on the player's operation of the operation unit.
By adopting such an embodiment, the cut-in image can be displayed at a timing preferred by the player, thereby increasing the player's sense of excitement.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which a barbell falls based on operation of the control unit during the "barbell training performance," and an embodiment in which a cut-in image is displayed based on operation of the control unit during the "character reach performance," it is also possible to enable operation acceptance for the same control unit in both performances, and display the same control unit simulated image in the display area as the control unit simulated image.
For example, if a barbell is made to fall based on the operation of the operation button 401 during the "barbell training performance," a cut-in image may be displayed based on the operation of the operation button 401 during the "character reach performance." Also, during the effective operation periods during both performances, a simulated image that resembles the operation button 401 may be displayed in the display area.
Alternatively, if a barbell is made to fall based on the operation of the attack button 3710 during the "barbell training effect," a cut-in image may be displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710 during the "character reach effect." Also, during the effective operation period during both effects, a simulated image that resembles the attack button 3710 may be displayed in the display area.
By adopting such an embodiment, it becomes easier for the player to understand which operating unit to operate.

Although the embodiment in which the same operation section simulated image is displayed during the "barbell training effect" and the "character reach effect" has been described, the position where the operation section simulated image is displayed should also be the same during the "barbell training effect" and the "character reach effect." The size of the operation section simulated image should also be the same.
For example, whether during the "barbell training performance" or the "character reach performance," it is advisable to display an operation section simulating image in the center of the display area.
By adopting such an embodiment, it becomes easier for the player to understand which operating section to operate.

The valid operation period of the operation section may be the same or different during the "barbell training effect" and the "character reach effect."
For example, the effective operation period during the "barbell training effect" may be longer than the effective operation period during the "character reach effect."
Alternatively, the effective operation period during the "barbell training effect" and the effective operation period during the "character reach effect" may be set to the same length.
Alternatively, the effective operation period during the "barbell training effect" may be shorter than the effective operation period during the "character reach effect."

The shape of the simulated image of the operation unit may be the same, but the color of the simulated image of the operation unit may be displayed in a plurality of colors. Also, the degree of expectation of a jackpot may be varied depending on the color of the simulated image of the operation unit.
For example, the simulated image of the operation part displayed during the "barbell training performance" may be either a white simulated image of the operation part or a red simulated image of the operation part, and the simulated image of the operation part displayed during the "character reach performance" may be either a white simulated image of the operation part, a red simulated image of the operation part or a gold simulated image of the operation part.
Alternatively, the simulated image of the operation part to be displayed during the "barbell training performance" may be any one of a white simulated image of the operation part, a red simulated image of the operation part, and a gold simulated image of the operation part, and the simulated image of the operation part to be displayed during the "character reach performance" may be any one of a white simulated image of the operation part and a red simulated image of the operation part.
In addition, the number of types of operation section simulated images displayed during the "barbell training performance" may be different from the number of types of operation section simulated images displayed during the "character reach performance".

Although the embodiment has been described in which the operation of the operation unit is valid only once during the execution of the "barbell training effect" or the "character reach effect," it may be possible to execute the effect multiple times. When the "barbell training effect" is being executed, it is preferable that the barbell falls multiple times in response to multiple operations.
Also, when a "character reach effect" is being performed, it is advisable to display the cut-in image multiple times in response to multiple operations.
It is preferable to display the operation unit simulated image each time operation acceptance is enabled, that is, if operation acceptance is enabled multiple times, the operation unit simulated image will also be displayed multiple times.
Furthermore, the number of times that operation acceptance to the operation unit is valid during the execution of the "barbell training effect" and the "character reach effect" may be the same (which may be once or multiple times), or may be different (which may be once or multiple times).
For example, while the "barbell training performance" is being performed, the operation acceptance of the operation unit may be enabled only once, whereas during the "character reach performance" the operation acceptance of the operation unit may be enabled once or multiple times (two or more times).
Alternatively, while the "barbell training performance" is being performed, the operation acceptance of the operation unit may be enabled multiple times, either once or twice or more, whereas during the "character reach performance" the operation acceptance of the operation unit may be enabled only once.
Alternatively, the operation acceptance of the operation unit may be enabled two or more times during the execution of the "barbell training effect," while the operation acceptance of the operation unit may be enabled two or more times during the execution of the "character reach effect." In this case, the number of times that the "barbell training effect" and the "character reach effect" are enabled may be the same or different.
For example, the number of times that the operation unit's operation acceptance is enabled during the execution of the "barbell training effect" may be less than or more than the number of times that the operation unit's operation acceptance is enabled during the execution of the "character reach effect."

The execution time of the "barbell training effect" (10 seconds, 12 seconds, 14 seconds) is longer than the execution time of the "character reach effect" (60 seconds, 90 seconds).
According to this embodiment, players who prefer the reach effect after the reach state is formed can be provided with a longer period of time to enjoy the reach effect.

Conversely, the execution time of the "barbell training effect" may be longer than the execution time of the "character reach effect." For example, the execution time of the "barbell training effect" may be 40, 48, or 56 seconds instead of 10, 12, or 14 seconds, and the execution time of the "character reach effect" may be 20 or 30 seconds instead of 60 or 90 seconds.
According to this embodiment, the "character reach effect" can be executed in a state where the "barbell training effect" has heightened the expectation of a big win. Also, even if the "barbell training effect" suggests that the expectation is low and the game transitions to the "character reach effect," the short execution time of the "character reach effect" allows the player to quickly switch their attention to the variable display from the next time onwards.

Although the "character reach performance" includes a "fighter character reach performance" and a "master character reach performance," and various modified examples that can be applied to the "character reach performance," the same modified examples may be applied to each of the "fighter character reach performance" and the "master character reach performance."
Alternatively, a certain modified example may be applied to one of the "fighter character reach effect" and the "master character reach effect," while not applying a modified example to the other.
Alternatively, different modified examples may be applied to each of the "fighter character reach effect" and the "master character reach effect."
The number of applied modifications may be one, or two or more.

An embodiment has been shown in which, after a "barbell training effect" is executed, the rate at which a "master character reach effect" is executed is lower than the rate at which a "fighter character reach effect" is executed. For example, after a "barbell training effect" is executed, the rate at which a "fighter character reach effect" is executed is 90%, and the rate at which a "master character reach effect" is executed is 10%. Also, as shown with reference to FIG. 368, the expectation level when a "master character reach effect" is executed may be higher than the expectation level when a "fighter character reach effect" is executed.
According to this embodiment, it is possible to surprise a player who would have expected the martial artist character who was training with a barbell to appear in the reach performance, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Conversely, after the execution of the "barbell training effect," the rate at which the "master character reach effect" is executed may be set higher than the rate at which the "fighter character reach effect" is executed. For example, the rate at which the "fighter character reach effect" is executed may be set to 10%, and the rate at which the "master character reach effect" is executed may be set to 90%.
In this case, the degree of expectation when the "master character reach effect" is executed may be lower than the degree of expectation when the "fighter character reach effect" is executed.
According to this embodiment, the martial artist character who has been training with a barbell finally appears in the reach performance, and the expectation at that time is high, so the player can feel great excitement and the interest can be increased.
On the other hand, the expectation level when a "master character reach effect" is executed may be higher than the expectation level when a "fighter character reach effect" is executed.
According to such an embodiment, when a martial artist character who has been training with a barbell appears in a reach performance, the decrease in interest due to low expectations can be compensated for by the satisfaction of being able to see a rare performance, and the decrease in interest can be prevented.

The display state may be switched from the "training end effect" state to the "character reach effect" state without executing the "reach character confirmation effect" and the "window enlargement display effect," and the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 233 to 240 may be applied during this switching. For example, at the end of the "training end effect," a predetermined background concealment image may be displayed, turning the entire display area black or white and displaying a predetermined character, and these displays may be gradually terminated at the start of the "character reach effect." In this case, the display state will transition from the display state shown in FIGS. 365(e) to 365(h) to the display state shown in FIGS. 366(d) and 366(g).
According to this embodiment, when the "character reach effect" starts, the player can be made to feel a sense of anticipation as to which character (the martial artist character or the master character) will start the reach effect.

The length of time for which a predetermined background concealment image is displayed, turning the entire display area black or white, or displaying a predetermined character may indicate which character (a martial artist character or a master character) will be displayed.
For example, two display times for the background concealment image can be prepared: a short time (for example, 4 seconds) and a long time (for example, 6 seconds), and if the time is short, a "fighter character reach effect" is executed, and if the time is long, a "master character reach effect" is executed.
Conversely, if the time is short, a "master character reach effect" may be executed, and if the time is long, a "fighter character reach effect" may be executed.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to keep the player interested in how long the display of the background concealed image will continue, and which reach effect will start when the display of the background concealed image ends.

Note that the type of reach effect to be executed is not determined in accordance with the display time of the background concealment image, but the type of reach effect may be selected with a predetermined probability in accordance with the display time of the background concealment image. For example, if the display time of the background concealment image is 5 seconds, the probability that the "fighter character reach effect" will be selected may be 50%, and the probability that the "master character reach effect" will be selected may be 50%.
Alternatively, if the display time of the background concealment image is short (for example, 4 seconds), the probability that the "fighter character reach effect" will be selected is 90%, and the probability that the "master character reach effect" will be selected is 10%; and if the display time of the background concealment image is long (for example, 6 seconds), the probability that the "fighter character reach effect" will be selected is 10%, and the probability that the "master character reach effect" will be selected is 90%.
Even in such an embodiment, it is possible to make the player more interested in which reach effect will be initiated.

In addition, an embodiment has been shown in which multiple display times for the background concealment image are prepared and the type of ``character reach effect'' to be executed is selected corresponding to the display time, but it is also possible to select the type of enemy character that appears in the ``character reach effect'' corresponding to the display time of the background concealment image.
For example, four different display times for the background concealment image (for example, 4 seconds, 6 seconds, 8 seconds, and 10 seconds) may be prepared, and for 4 seconds a "fighter character reach effect" in which a samurai character appears as the enemy character is executed, for 6 seconds a "fighter character reach effect" in which a warrior character appears as the enemy character is executed, for 8 seconds a "master character reach effect" in which a fake samurai character appears as the enemy character is executed, and for 10 seconds a "master character reach effect" in which a fake warrior character appears as the enemy character is executed. In this case, the longer the display time of the background concealment image, the more likely a character reach effect will be executed.
After the "reach character confirmation effect" is executed, two display times for the background concealment image (for example, two seconds and four seconds) can be prepared, and when it is indicated that the "fighter character reach effect" will be executed, a samurai character can be displayed for two seconds, and a warrior character can be displayed for four seconds. Similarly, when it is indicated that the "master character reach effect" will be executed, a fake samurai character can be displayed for two seconds, and a fake warrior character can be displayed for four seconds.
According to such an embodiment, the time taken for the background image to change can be used to allow the player to predict what kind of reach effect will be performed and what kind of enemy character will be displayed, thereby increasing the player's anticipation of a big win.

Although an embodiment in which the effect display is performed within a window has been shown, a similar effect display may be performed in the entire display area without displaying a window. In this case, the display priority of the image of the character, etc. may be set higher than the background image, and lower than the fourth symbol, the reserved number display image, and the error notification image.
The display priority of the effect display may be higher or lower than the display priority of the decorative pattern.
When the display priority of the effect display is set higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern, the visibility of the effect display can be ensured whether the decorative pattern is fluctuating at high speed, fluctuating at low speed, or temporarily stopped.
If the display priority of the effect display is set lower than the display priority of the decorative pattern, there is a risk that the visibility of the effect display will be hindered by the decorative pattern, but by, for example, displaying the effect only while the decorative pattern is rapidly fluctuating and increasing the transparency of the decorative pattern during rapid fluctuation, the player can recognize both that the decorative pattern fluctuation display is being performed and that the effect display is being performed.

In this way, the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 362 to 369 can provide players with new and exciting experiences.

Below, we will explain an embodiment that includes a new effect, the "Bomb Expectation Effect." Note that this embodiment is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to Figures 123 to 369, etc.

First, an overview of the "bomb expectation effect" will be described. In the "bomb expectation effect," when a winning ball enters second start port 2004 (the number of winning balls in this embodiment is one) during a time-saving mode (low-probability time-saving mode, high-probability time-saving mode) and the number of balls reserved in second start port 2004 reaches a predetermined maximum number (specifically, four balls), a bomb image and a countdown image are displayed. Part of the bomb image resembles a fuse, with the end of the fuse lit. Whether or not the "bomb expectation effect" begins to be executed when the condition that the number of reserved balls reaches the maximum is met is predetermined by peripheral control board 1510 at the time of the winning ball, when the number of balls reserved in second start port 2004 reaches a predetermined maximum number (specifically, four balls).
When it is determined that the "bomb expectation effect" will begin when a predetermined maximum number of winnings (specifically, four) have occurred, the number "8" is displayed as a countdown image along with a bomb image when the predetermined maximum number of winnings (specifically, four) have occurred. After the bomb image is displayed, each time a winning occurs in the second starting hole 2004, the number on the countdown image decreases by one with a predetermined probability (e.g., a 1/2 probability), and the length of the fuse shortens. Finally, when the number on the countdown image reaches 0, a bomb is displayed as if it were exploding, and an expectation suggestion image is displayed in the position where the bomb was displayed, indicating the expectation that the changing decorative pattern will result in a jackpot. The expectation suggestion images displayed are "hot,""superhot," and "win?". Note that the expectation increases in the order of "hot,""superhot," and "win?".
Note that "each time a win occurs in the second starting port 2004" may refer to an over-winning win in the starting port described below, or may refer to a win that is not an over-winning win, in which case the numbers on the countdown image are reduced by one and the length of the fuse is shortened at the above-mentioned predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/2). Alternatively, the predetermined probability may be set to 1/1, so that the numbers on the countdown image are reduced by one and the length of the fuse is shortened whenever an over-winning win occurs in the second starting port 2004, or the numbers on the countdown image are reduced by one and the length of the fuse is shortened whenever a win occurs in the second starting port 2004, regardless of whether an over-winning win occurs or not. Note that the numbers on the countdown image are not reduced unless the length of the fuse is shortened.

An over-winning refers to a game ball entering the second starting port 2004 when the number of balls reserved in the second starting port 2004 is at the maximum of four, and is sometimes referred to as an over-winning in this specification.
Similarly, when the number of reserved balls in the first starting port 2002 is at the maximum of four, a game ball entering the first starting port 2002 can be said to be an over-entry.
Note that, on the condition that a predetermined number of game balls enter the large prize opening 2005, when the open large prize opening 2005 is closed, there are cases where more game balls than the predetermined number enter the large prize opening 2005. This is because there is a time lag between when the entry of the predetermined number of game balls is detected and when the closure of the large prize opening 2005 is completed, and during this period game balls may enter the large prize opening 2005. Such a gaming situation may also be referred to as an over-entry.

Furthermore, if a winning entry into the second starting port 2004 is not detected for a predetermined time (for example, 6 seconds) while the bomb image and countdown image are displayed, the display of the bomb image and countdown image will be interrupted and the bomb image and countdown image will become hidden (or only one of the images may be hidden to make the player aware that the bomb expectation effect itself is being performed).
Furthermore, if six more seconds have passed since the bomb image and countdown image went into a non-display state, the execution of the "bomb expectation effect" will end.
On the other hand, when the bomb image and the countdown image are not displayed or only one of the images is not displayed, if a win is detected in the second starting gate 2004, the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is resumed. When the display is resumed, the same process as that when a win is detected in the second starting gate 2004 while the bomb image and the countdown image are displayed is performed (a determination is made with a 1/2 probability as to whether or not the assigned number will decrease by one), and the bomb image and the countdown image are displayed according to the determination result.

Next, with reference to Figures 370 and 371, the images displayed in the "bomb expectation effect" will be described.
Figures 370(a) to 370(h) show eight bomb images, numbered 1 to 8, and countdown images corresponding to each bomb image. Each bomb image consists of a portion representing a spherical bomb, a portion representing a fuse, and a portion representing the burning end of the fuse. The length of the fuse is longest in the eighth bomb image, and decreases in order with the seventh and sixth bomb images, with the first bomb image being the shortest.
In addition, a predetermined number is displayed above the spherical bomb image as a countdown image. The size of the number on the countdown image corresponds to the length of the fuse of each bomb image. In other words, the length of the fuse can be recognized from the number displayed as the countdown image.
As shown in the figure, the bomb image and the countdown image are displayed in positions where they do not overlap, thereby ensuring the visibility of both images.
In the "bomb expectation effect" described below, the eighth bomb image, the seventh bomb image, the sixth bomb image, ..., the second bomb image, and the first bomb image are displayed in that order to express the shortening of the fuse length.

371(a) shows an explosion image. The explosion image is an image that is displayed when a starting winning occurs while the first bomb image is being displayed.
371(b) to 371(d) show the expectation suggestion images, which are displayed after the explosion image has finished displaying.
As shown in each figure, there are three types of expectation suggestion images: "Hot,""SuperHot," and "Win?", each of which suggests a different expectation. Specifically, the expectation of "Hot" is 20%, the expectation of "Super Hot" is 40%, and the expectation of "Win?" is 100%.
Note that this expectation level is merely an example, and the expectation level for "hot" may be 10%, the expectation level for "super hot" may be 20%, and the expectation level for "right?" may be 100%.
Also, the expected probability of "winning" is set to 100%, but it may be set to 90% or 95%.
The number of types of expectation suggestion images is not limited to three, but may be two or more types (for example, four to ten types).

The "bomb expectation effect" will be explained below with reference to the flowcharts shown in Figures 372 to 374.
Fig. 372 is a flowchart showing the bomb expectation effect execution processing. The bomb expectation effect execution processing is a subroutine that is periodically called from the main routine (the peripheral control unit regular processing described with reference to Fig. 95 etc.) in the peripheral control board 1510 when it is decided to execute the bomb expectation effect. Fig. 373 is a flowchart showing the bomb image display processing. Fig. 374 is a flowchart showing the bomb image display stop processing.
The bomb image display process and the bomb image display stop process are subroutines called from the bomb expectation performance execution process.

In step S140 of the bomb expectation effect execution process, it is determined whether an expectation indication image is being displayed. If an expectation indication image is not being displayed, the process proceeds to step S142; if an expectation indication image is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S168.

In step S142, it is determined whether an explosion image is being displayed. If an explosion image is not being displayed, the process proceeds to step S146; if an explosion image is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S164.

In step S146, it is determined whether the number of reserved items at the second starting port 2004 is four. If the number of reserved items at the second starting port 2004 is four, the process proceeds to step S148. If the number of reserved items at the second starting port 2004 is not four (i.e., 0 to 3), the process proceeds to step S162.

In step S148, it is determined whether a gaming ball has entered the second starting hole 2004. If a gaming ball has entered the second starting hole 2004, the process proceeds to step S150; if a gaming ball has not entered the second starting hole 2004, the process proceeds to step S162.

In step S150, it is determined whether the display of the bomb image is paused. If the display of the bomb image is paused, the process proceeds to step S152. If the display of the bomb image is not paused, the process proceeds to step S154.

In step S152, the display of the bomb image and countdown image is resumed. The displayed bomb image and countdown image may be the same bomb image and countdown image that were displayed before the display was interrupted, or they may be images that have advanced by one step (for example, if the countdown number is hidden at 5 and then resumed at 4). Then, the process proceeds to step S154.

In step S154, it is determined whether the bomb expectation effect execution flag is 1. If the bomb expectation effect execution flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S156. If the bomb expectation effect execution flag is not 1, the process proceeds to step S158.

The bomb image display process in step S156 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S180, it is determined whether or not the bomb image development lottery has been won. The bomb image development lottery is a lottery in which, for example, there is a 1/2 probability of winning and a 1/2 probability of losing. If the bomb image development lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S182, and if the bomb image development lottery has been lost, the process returns to the bomb expectation effect execution process.

In step S182, it is determined whether the first bomb image is being displayed. If the first bomb image is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S184. If the first bomb image is not being displayed (if the second to eighth bomb images are being displayed), the process proceeds to step S186.

In step S184, the first bomb image is hidden and an explosion image is displayed. The number "0" is also displayed as the next countdown image. Then, the process returns to the bomb expectation effect execution process.

In step S186, the next bomb image and countdown image are displayed as the bomb image and countdown image. For example, if the number "8" is displayed as the eighth bomb image and countdown image, the number "7" is displayed as the seventh bomb image and countdown image. Then, the process returns to the bomb expectancy performance execution process.

We have explained the bomb image display process with reference to Figure 373, but we will return to the explanation of the bomb expectation effect execution process with reference to Figure 372.

In step S158, the bomb expectation effect execution flag is set to 1.

In step S160, the display of the bomb image and countdown image begins. The first bomb image displayed is the eighth bomb image. The number "8" is also displayed as the countdown image.

The bomb image display cancellation process in step S162 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S200, it is determined whether or not a winning entry into the second start port 2004 has occurred continuously for a predetermined period of time (6 seconds) while the bomb image is being displayed. If no winning entry into the second start port 2004 has occurred, the process proceeds to step S202. If a winning entry into the second start port 2004 has occurred, the process proceeds to step S204.

In step S202, the display of the bomb image and countdown image is interrupted. Then, the process proceeds to step S204.

In step S204, it is determined whether a winning combination has occurred in the second start slot 2004 for a predetermined consecutive period of time (6 seconds) from the time the display of the bomb image was interrupted. If no winning combination has occurred in the second start slot 2004, the process proceeds to step S206. If a winning combination has occurred in the second start slot 2004, the process returns to the bomb expectation effect execution process.

In step S206, the bomb expectation effect execution flag is set to 0. After that, the process returns to the bomb expectation effect execution process. In the returned bomb expectation effect execution process, there is no process to be executed, so the process returns to the main routine. In the main routine, when the bomb expectation effect execution flag changes from 1 to 0, the execution of the bomb expectation effect is terminated, and the bomb expectation effect execution process is not executed again until it is determined to execute the bomb expectation effect.
It is possible to terminate the bomb expectation presentation midway by determining whether or not a winning entry into the second starting port 2004 has occurred continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 6 seconds) from the start of the suspension of the display of the bomb image (for example, the countdown display may end at 5 without progressing to 0), but it is also possible to prevent the bomb expectation presentation from ending midway.

We have explained the bomb image display cancellation process with reference to Figure 374, but we will return to the explanation of the bomb expectation effect execution process with reference to Figure 372.

In step S164, it is determined whether two seconds have passed since the explosion image began to be displayed. If two seconds have passed since the explosion image began to be displayed, the process proceeds to step S166. If two seconds have not passed since the explosion image began to be displayed, the process returns to the main routine.

In step S166, the explosion image and countdown image are hidden and an expectation suggestion image is displayed. The expectation suggestion image to be displayed is determined based on the results of a special lottery. After that, the process returns to the main routine. Note that "based on the results of the special lottery" means that even for wins that are not over-wins, if the numbers in the countdown image are decreased by one and the length of the fuse is shortened with a predetermined probability (for example, a 1/2 probability), when the explosion image is displayed, there will either be a change but no pending numbers, or there will be a change but some pending numbers. Therefore, there are cases where an expectation suggestion image for the ongoing change is displayed, and cases where the expectation suggestion image remains displayed even after the ongoing change has ended, and an expectation suggestion image for one of the pending numbers is displayed. In other words, it may be based on the results of a lottery held at the start of the change, or it may be based on the results of a so-called advance lottery.

In step S168, it is determined whether three seconds have passed since the expectation suggestion image began to be displayed. If three seconds have passed since the expectation suggestion image began to be displayed, the process proceeds to step S170. If three seconds have not passed since the explosion image began to be displayed, the process returns to the main routine.

In step S170, the expectation degree suggestion image is hidden.
Next, in step S172, the bomb expectation effect execution flag is set to 0. After that, the process returns to the main routine.
In the main routine, when the bomb expectation effect execution flag changes from 1 to 0, the execution of the bomb expectation effect is terminated, and the bomb expectation effect execution process is not executed until it is determined to execute the bomb expectation effect again.
In other words, the expectation suggestion image is displayed two seconds after the explosion image is displayed, and the expectation suggestion image is hidden three seconds after the expectation suggestion image is displayed (the expectation suggestion image is displayed for a longer period of time than the time until the expectation suggestion image is displayed), but since it may happen that no fluctuation has occurred two seconds after the explosion image is displayed, the expectation suggestion image may be displayed together with the explosion image. Specifically, if a single shot is performed when the bomb expectation effect is being executed even though no fluctuation has occurred, the bomb expectation effect may progress each time a game ball enters the second starting hole 2004.

Below, with reference to Figures 375 and 376, we will explain the specific display modes in the ``bomb expectation presentation.''
The "bomb expectation effect" is executed in the time-saving state (low probability time-saving state, high probability time-saving state). In the time-saving state, the probability of the game ball entering the second starting hole 2004 is higher than in the non-time-saving state (low probability non-time-saving state, high probability non-time-saving state). In addition, since the second starting hole 2004 is located on the right side of the game area, the player will hit the ball to the right.
375 shows a time chart of a rendering example in this embodiment, and FIG. 376 shows a display state at a predetermined timing in the rendering example.

First, referring to Figures 375(a) and 376, we will explain presentation example 1. Presentation example 1 shows a presentation example assuming that the bomb image development lottery is won in all of the multiple start winning attempts for second start port 2004, and it is determined that the next bomb image will be displayed. As mentioned above, the probability of winning the bomb image development lottery is 1/2, and the probability of losing is 1/2, so there is a 1/2 probability that the next bomb image will be displayed, and a 1/2 probability that the original bomb image will continue to be displayed, but in this case the next bomb image will always be displayed.
In addition, the timings at which the starting winning occurs in presentation example 1 are timing t9, timing t10, timing t13, timing t14, timing t15, timing t16, timing t18, timing t19, and timing t22.

Figure 376(a) shows the display state in the display area just before timing t0 (just before the start of the variable display). At this time, the number of reserved balls in the second starting slot 2004 is four, and the reserved ball number display image shows "4." The game is also in a time-saving mode (low-probability time-saving mode, high-probability time-saving mode), requiring the player to hit the right. The display area displays the normal background image C, the number of consecutive wins (the "Win x 15" number), the number of game balls paid out to the player during the consecutive wins (the "Over 12,000 Ryo!!" number), the text "Next Destination: Owari," the text "Warrior Training RUSH," the martial artist character and the martial artist character's line ("Training across the country!"), a right-pointing arrow image containing the text "Hit Right!", and a decorative pattern that is displayed in a static state. Note that these text and images continue to be displayed even while the decorative pattern is being displayed.
At timing t0, the display of the decorative pattern begins to change. At the same time, the number of reserved items decreases by one to three, and the waiting reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area moves leftward while becoming larger, and is displayed as the current reserved image in the current reserved display area. In addition, the waiting reserved images displayed in the second to fourth reserved display areas each move leftward and are displayed in the first to third reserved display areas. As a result, the waiting reserved image is no longer displayed in the fourth reserved display area. In addition, "3" is displayed as the reserved number display image.
FIG. 376(b) shows the display state at this time (at a predetermined timing between timing t0 and timing t9).
The decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner at high speed from timing t0 to at least timing t33. The variable display manner of the decorative symbols after timing t33 will be described later.

At timing t9, a game ball enters the second starting hole 2004. In response to this entry, a waiting hold image is displayed in the fourth hold display area. In addition, the eighth bomb image and countdown image (number "8") are displayed on the left side of the display area. Note that the display priority of the bomb images (first bomb image to eighth bomb image) and countdown image is higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern. In addition, "4" is displayed as the hold number display image.
FIG. 376(c) shows the display state at this time.

Next, at timing t10, a game ball enters the second starting hole 2004. This winning occurs when the number of reserved balls in the second starting hole 2004 is four (as described above, this is an over-winning). In response to this winning, the eighth bomb image changes to the seventh bomb image. At the same time, the countdown image changes from the number "8" to the number "7." As the eighth bomb image changes to the seventh bomb image, the length of the fuse becomes shorter.
FIG. 376(d) shows the display state at this time.

Similarly, at timing t13, timing t14, timing t15, timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19, the game ball enters the second starting hole 2004. With each entry, the bomb image changes in sequence from the seventh bomb image to the first bomb image. At the same time, the countdown image changes in sequence from the number "7" to the number "1." Furthermore, the length of the fuse gradually shortens as the bomb image changes.
Figure 376 (e) shows a display state in which the first bomb image and a countdown image of the number "1" are displayed (the display period is from timing t19 to timing t22).

Next, at timing t22, the gaming ball enters the second starting hole 2004. In response to this entry, the first bomb image changes to an explosion image. At the same time, the countdown image changes from the number "1" to the number "0." The display priority of the explosion image is higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern. The explosion image is displayed for two seconds.
Figure 376 (f) shows a display state in which the first bomb image and a countdown image of the number "0" are displayed (the display period is from timing t22 to timing t24).

Next, at timing t24, the display of the explosion image and countdown image ends. Also, an expectation suggestion image is displayed in the position where the explosion image was displayed. In this case, the expectation suggestion image of "Super Hot" is displayed. The expectation suggestion image is displayed for 3 seconds.
Figure 376 (g) shows the display state in which the expectation level suggestion image is displayed (the display period is from timing t24 to timing t27).

Next, at timing t27, the display of the expectation suggestion image ends, and the execution of the "bomb expectation effect" also ends.
Figure 376 (h) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t30) after the display of the expectation degree indication image has ended.

Next, referring to Figures 375(b) and 376, we will explain presentation example 2. Presentation example 2 shows a presentation example assuming that it is determined that the next bomb image will be displayed in some of the multiple start wins at second start port 2004, and that it is determined that the next bomb image will not be displayed in the other start wins. As mentioned above, the probability of winning the bomb image development lottery is 1/2, and the probability of losing is 1/2, so there is a 1/2 probability that the next bomb image will be displayed, and a 1/2 probability that the original bomb image will continue to be displayed. However, in this case, there are cases where the next bomb image will be displayed and cases where the original bomb image will continue to be displayed.
In addition, the timings at which the starting winning occurs in presentation example 2 are timing t9, timing t10, timing t12, timing t13, timing t14, timing t15, timing t16, timing t17, timing t18, timing t19, timing t21, and timing t22.

Of these, for the start winnings at timing t9, timing t10, timing t13, timing t14, timing t15, timing t16, timing t18, timing t19, and timing t22, the next bomb image will be displayed in response to the occurrence of the start winning.
On the other hand, for the start winning at timing t12, timing t17, and timing t21, the original bomb image continues to be displayed even though the start winning has occurred. For example, at timing t12, the start winning has occurred but it is determined that the original bomb image continues to be displayed, so the display content in the display area does not change.
The display content in the display area (specifically, the display format of a bomb image, countdown image, explosion image, etc.) is displayed in the same format as in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 375 (a).

Next, referring to FIG. 375(c), presentation example 3 will be described. Presentation example 3 shows a presentation example in which a start winning occurs at the second starting port 2004, and the execution of the "bomb expectation effect" is initiated, but the player stops firing the game ball, and after the bomb image changes only once during the "bomb expectation effect," no start winning occurs. As described above with reference to FIG. 374, if a start winning does not occur for a predetermined period of time during the execution of the "bomb expectation effect," the display of the bomb image and countdown image is interrupted. Furthermore, if a start winning does not occur for a predetermined period of time after the interruption of the display of the bomb image and countdown image, the execution of the "bomb expectation effect" is terminated.
In the example 3, the timings at which the start winning occurs are timing t9 and timing t10. The bomb image development lottery executed in response to the start winning at timing t10 is also considered to be a win.

As shown in Figure 375(c), at timing t9, a start winning occurs, and the eighth bomb image and the number "8" of the countdown image begin to be displayed. Figure 376(c) shows the display state at this time.
Next, at timing t10, a start winning occurs, and the bomb image development lottery is won, whereby the seventh bomb image and the number "7" are displayed as a countdown image.
After that, no starting winning occurs, and at timing t16 (6 seconds after timing t10), the display of the seventh bomb image and the number "7" as the countdown image is interrupted. Figure 376(h) shows the display state at this time.
Next, at timing t22 (6 seconds after timing t16), the execution of the "bomb expectation effect" ends. In other words, even if a start winning occurs after timing t22, the display of the seventh bomb image and the number "7" of the countdown image will not resume.

Next, referring to Figure 375 (d), we will explain performance example 4. Performance example 4 is a partial modification of performance example 3, and in addition to the timing shown in performance example 3, it shows a performance example assuming that a start winning occurs at timing t18 for the second start port 2004.
In this example of presentation, at timing t16, the display of the seventh bomb image and the number "7" in the countdown image is interrupted, but at timing t18, in response to the occurrence of a starting winning, the display of the seventh bomb image and the number "7" in the countdown image is resumed.
Furthermore, at timing t24 (6 seconds after timing t18), the display of the seventh bomb image and the number "7" on the countdown image is again interrupted.

Presentation examples 1 to 4 of the "bomb expectation presentation" have been shown, but from timing t33 onwards, the decorative symbols are displayed stopped in a manner indicating a miss without entering a reach state, or the decorative symbols are displayed stopped in a manner indicating a miss or a jackpot after entering a reach state.
After the reach state is reached, a special reach effect (for example, the martial artist character reach effect or the master character reach effect described above) may be executed. In this case, the effect content during the reach effect (such as the outcome of a battle between characters) indicates whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and then decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state indicating either a miss or a jackpot.

Even in the time-shortening state (low-probability time-shortening state, high-probability time-shortening state), if a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute or 2 minutes) is selected and the "bomb expectation effect" is executed, and if start winnings occur consecutively for the second start port 2004, the "bomb expectation effect" is executed only within one fluctuation display as in the performance examples 1 to 4. However, in the time-shortening state (low-probability time-shortening state, high-probability time-shortening state), a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time (for example, 1 second or 2 seconds) is selected at a high rate (for example, 1/2 or more). When a "bomb expectation effect" is executed when a variation pattern with a long variation time (for example, 1 minute or 2 minutes) is selected despite the time-saving state (low probability time-saving state, high probability time-saving state) and the "bomb expectation effect" is executed, or when the game ball is stopped from being shot or a shot is taken to the left, a start winning will not occur for the second starting hole 2004, so it is expected that the variation will stop before the explosion image is displayed in the "bomb expectation effect" (when the first bomb image to eighth bomb image and the numbers corresponding to them as countdown images are displayed).
In this case, even if the fluctuation is interrupted (the symbol is fixed, there is no pending and the next fluctuation does not start), the "bomb expectation effect" itself continues to be displayed (the first to eighth bomb images and their corresponding countdown images are displayed even if the fluctuation is interrupted (the symbol is fixed, there is no pending and the next fluctuation does not start)), so that the "bomb expectation effect" is executed over multiple fluctuation displays. In this case, the expectation suggestion image suggests the expectation of the display result of the newly started fluctuation display (specifically, for the fluctuation that triggered the display of the explosion image in the "bomb expectation effect", or for the fluctuation before the fluctuation that triggered the display of the explosion image in the "bomb expectation effect").
Even if the "bomb expectation effect" is executed across the variable display, the bomb image and countdown image will continue to be displayed. This allows the player to continue to recognize that the "bomb expectation effect" is being executed, and keeps the player interested.

According to the embodiments such as Presentation Example 1 and Presentation Example 2, the bomb image is switched to the next bomb image with a predetermined probability in response to the occurrence of a starting winning, and the countdown image shows the player the countdown as the fuse gradually shortens, so that players who want to know the expectation level will actively play to generate the starting winning. Furthermore, by displaying numbers as the countdown image, the progress of the effect can be clearly communicated to the player. Furthermore, when the bomb image is switched, the countdown image is also switched, and the countdown image decreases toward 0, and when it reaches 0, the expectation level suggestion image is displayed. Therefore, a typical player can quickly understand what kind of effect it is by seeing the "bomb expectation level effect" two or three times. Furthermore, a player who understands the content of the effect will feel a sense of excitement as the numbers on the countdown image decrease toward 0.
Alternatively, there are a certain number of players who find it troublesome to interrupt the firing of game balls and do not interrupt the firing of game balls. Furthermore, some gaming establishments prohibit interrupting the firing of game balls. In such cases, an over-winning may inevitably occur, and the player may feel as if they have lost out by not gaining any profit from the initial winning, which may reduce their interest. However, according to this embodiment, the occurrence of an over-winning gradually shortens the fuse, ultimately indicating the degree of expectation, thereby increasing the interest.
On the other hand, a player who does not want to know the expected rate, or a player who does not want to release the game ball because they are more concerned about the risk of losing game balls than knowing the expected rate, can immediately stop the release of the game ball even if they have released the game ball, thereby interrupting or ceasing the display of the bomb image or countdown image (in this case, the situation may be similar to presentation example 3 or presentation example 4).
If the player changes his/her mind midway, the bomb image or countdown image can be displayed again by restarting the firing of the game ball. For example, in the fourth example of the presentation, if the player continues to fire the game ball after the timing t18, the expectation suggestion image can be displayed.

In this way, according to this embodiment, players continue to fire game balls even when the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit, which increases the operating rate of the gaming machine and contributes to sales at the gaming parlor. Furthermore, players continue to fire game balls at least until multiple initial wins occur, which increases the operating rate of the gaming machine. On the other hand, players who do not like their expectations being suggested can avoid having their expectations suggested by the "bomb expectation effect" by suspending the firing of game balls.

In the embodiment shown, when the varying display ends while a bomb image is being displayed, the display of the bomb image continues, but it is also possible to end the display of the bomb image at the same time as the varying display that started the execution of the "bomb expectation effect" stops, thereby ending the execution of the "bomb expectation effect."
Alternatively, the execution of the "bomb expectation effect" may be terminated when the decorative pattern reaches a reach state during the variable display, or when the reach effect is started.

In this embodiment, the "bomb expectation effect" is initiated based on the number of balls reserved in the second starting port 2004 during the time-saving mode (either during the low-probability time-saving mode or the high-probability time-saving mode). During the time-saving mode, the movable piece 2004a is frequently opened, making it possible to increase the number of balls reserved in a short period of time. This can easily maximize the number of balls reserved in the second starting port 2004, which can lead to the player pausing the firing of game balls. However, the "bomb expectation effect" can be executed, thereby motivating the player to continue firing game balls.
On the other hand, a "bomb expectation effect" may be executed based on the number of balls reserved in the first starting port 2002 during left-handed play (during a low-probability non-time-saving state or a high-probability non-time-saving state). The first starting port 2002 is not provided with a component that changes the winning rate, such as the movable piece 2004a in the second starting port 2004. When the "bomb expectation effect" is executed based on the number of balls reserved in the first starting port 2002, it is preferable to display the normal background image A or the normal background image B as the background image.

It is preferable that the probability of winning when a bomb image is displayed (when any of the bomb images from the 8th bomb image to the 1st bomb image is displayed) remains the same regardless of the type of bomb image.
By adopting such an embodiment, even if a player who has been firing game balls hoping to know the expectation level indicated by the expectation level suggestion image becomes anxious during the execution of the "bomb expectation level effect" that "an expectation level suggestion image with low expectation level might be displayed" and comes to a state of mind where "I don't want to see the expectation level suggestion image after all," by immediately stopping the firing of the game balls, the expectation level suggestion image will no longer be displayed, thereby providing an effect that can respond to the player's psychological changes and making it possible to maintain the sense of expectation until the expectation level suggestion image is displayed.

It is also possible to provide a plurality of colors for the bomb image, so that different degrees of expectation are suggested depending on the color of the bomb image.
For example, a white bomb image, a red bomb image, and a gold bomb image may be displayed as the bomb image, and the expectation level may be set to increase in the order of the white bomb image, the red bomb image, and the gold bomb image.
The color of the entire bomb image may be changed, or the color of only a part of the bomb image may be changed.
When changing the color of a part of the bomb image, the part to be changed may be one or two of the following: the part representing the spherical bomb, the part representing the fuse, or the burning part at the end of the fuse. If two parts are used, it is better to make them the same color rather than different colors.
When the next bomb image is displayed, the changed color part should be left the same color or should be changed to a color that indicates a higher expectation level. Conversely, it is better not to change it to a color that indicates a lower expectation level.
For example, when the seventh bomb image with a red burning portion is displayed, if the bomb image development lottery is won and it is decided to display the sixth bomb image, either the sixth bomb image with a red burning portion or the sixth bomb image with a gold burning portion will be displayed, but it is preferable that the sixth bomb image with a white burning portion will not be displayed.
The timing of the change to a high-expectation mode may be the timing of the display of the next bomb image, or may be the timing of the change after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the display of the next bomb image. When the predetermined time is elapsed, the interval between launches is typically approximately 0.6 seconds. Because the progression of the "bomb expectation effect" (countdown) of the present invention is triggered by the ball entering the second starting hole 2004, it is preferable to set the time shorter than the interval between launches. This is because the player can recognize that the ball that was launched is the one that caused the change to a high-expectation mode, enhancing the sense of excitement. Furthermore, if the predetermined time is set to, for example, 1.0 seconds, longer than the interval between launches, it is possible that, even though a change to red has been determined, the ball will again enter the second starting hole 2004 and change to gold before the red is displayed. In such a case, the gold color may be displayed after the red color is displayed, or the gold color may be displayed without the red step being skipped (i.e., without being displayed).

Instead of the bomb image, the color of the countdown image may be changed in the same way as the bomb image. Alternatively, when changing the color of the entire bomb image or part of the bomb image, the color of the countdown image may be the same or a different color, or only the countdown image may be changed.

The color of the explosion image may also be changed to the same color as the first bomb image (all or part) or the countdown image. For example, if a gold first bomb image is displayed, a gold explosion image may be displayed.

In the above embodiment, the degree of expectation is indicated by the color of the bomb image or countdown image, but it is not limited to color. Multiple display formats for the bomb image or countdown image may be prepared, and the degree of expectation may be indicated by the type. For example, three types of bomb images may be displayed: a small bomb image, a medium bomb image, and a large bomb image, and the larger the bomb image, the higher the expectation. A similar format may also be used for the countdown image.

When the number of winning balls in the second starting hole 2004 reaches a predetermined maximum (specifically, four), the eighth bomb image and the countdown number 8 are always displayed, and when the eighth bomb image is displayed, any one of a white bomb image, a red bomb image, and a gold bomb image may be displayed. In this case, the red bomb image or the gold bomb image, which have a relatively high expectation, is suddenly displayed at the start of the "bomb expectation effect," so that the player can feel a sense of excitement that a highly expected bomb image will be displayed when the number of reserved balls in the second starting hole 2004 reaches three and it is likely that a game ball will win in the second starting hole 2004.
Although the bomb image has been used as an example, as described above, the color of a part of the bomb image or the countdown image may be changed.

In this embodiment, an expectation suggestion image is displayed on the condition that the start win occurs multiple times (for example, at least eight times) during the "bomb expectation effect" and the bomb image development lottery is won a predetermined number of times. In other words, the expectation level is not indicated to the player until the start win occurs multiple times. This can increase the operating rate of the gaming machine. Note that this is not limited to eight times, and may be, for example, anywhere from three to ten times depending on the specifications of the gaming machine and the probability of the start win occurring.

In the embodiment shown, a bomb image development lottery is held when the game ball enters the second starting hole 2004 (either in the case of an over-entry or a non-over-entry), and the probability of winning the bomb image development lottery is 1/2, but the probability of winning the bomb image development lottery may be other probabilities, for example, 1/3 or 2/3.
Alternatively, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 2004 without conducting the bomb image development lottery (in both cases of an over-winning or not an over-winning), the next bomb image and countdown image or an explosion image may be displayed without fail. Such a modification can be realized by not performing the processing of step S180 in the flowchart of FIG. 373 or by setting the probability of winning the bomb image development lottery to 1/1.

The examples shown above show the expectation level for the display result of the decorative pattern during the changing display of the expectation level suggestion image in the "bomb expectation level effect," and the expectation level for any of the waiting holds displayed in the first through fourth hold display areas. However, when the expectation level for any of the waiting holds displayed in the first through fourth hold display areas is shown, the hold image for which the "bomb expectation level effect" is being executed may be indicated by a display with an arrow or the like, or this display with an arrow or the like may be shown on multiple waiting holds (for example, the first and third hold display areas) and the display may correspond to one of the waiting holds to which it is attached. In this case, both may be displayed as chance, or only one may be chance.

In steps S150 and S152 of Fig. 372, an embodiment has been shown in which the display of the bomb image and countdown image is resumed, but at this time, instead of displaying the original bomb image and countdown image, the next bomb image and countdown image may be displayed. Note that if the number "1" was displayed as the first bomb image and countdown image, it is preferable to display the number "0" as the explosion image and countdown image.
According to such an embodiment, when the display is resumed, the explosion image and countdown image are displayed in a state that is one step ahead of when the display was interrupted, so that a player who resumes firing game balls can feel as if they have scored one goal by scoring a game ball.

As special reach effects, during a time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state), a first reach effect during time-saving, a second reach effect during time-saving, and a third reach effect during time-saving may be executed. In the first reach effect during time-saving, the second reach effect during time-saving, and the third reach effect during time-saving, the martial artist character fights a different opponent character, and if the martial artist character wins, the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state indicating a jackpot after the reach effect ends, and then the jackpot game begins. On the other hand, if the martial artist character loses, the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state indicating a loss after the reach effect ends, and then the next decorative symbol is displayed in a variable state.
In addition, the first reach effect during the time-saving period, the second reach effect during the time-saving period, and the third reach effect during the time-saving period each begin to be executed a predetermined number of seconds after the start of the variable display, based on the effect pattern determined at the start of the variable display.
In addition, the expectation level increases in the order of the first reach performance during the time-saving period, the second reach performance during the time-saving period, and the third reach performance during the time-saving period.

Since the period during which the "bomb expectation effect" is executed varies depending on the state of the game ball being launched, a game situation may occur in which a reach effect is started during the execution of the "bomb expectation effect."
In this case, it is advisable to stop displaying the bomb image and countdown image when all of the reach effects have started. By adopting such an embodiment, the player can concentrate on the reach effects.
Alternatively, for some reach effects, the bomb image and countdown image may continue to be displayed even while the reach effect is being executed, and for other reach effects, the display of the bomb image and countdown image may be stopped at the timing when the reach effect is started. By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to generate cases where the bomb image and countdown image are displayed or not displayed during the execution of the reach effect depending on the type of reach effect.
For example, the display of the bomb image and countdown image may be suspended during the execution of the third reach effect during time-saving, which has the highest expectation, and the display of the bomb image and countdown image may be continued during the execution of the first reach effect during time-saving or the second reach effect during time-saving, which have relatively lower expectation.
In this way, by making the number of reach effects in which the display of bomb images and countdown images is not interrupted (hidden) greater than the number of reach effects in which the display of bomb images and countdown images is interrupted (hidden), it is possible to remind players that the reach effects in which the display of bomb images and countdown images is interrupted (hidden) are reach effects with a particularly high level of expectation.
Also, the number of reach effects in which the display of the bomb image and countdown image is not interrupted (hidden) may be made smaller than the number of reach effects in which the display of the bomb image and countdown image is interrupted (hidden). In this case, a sense of expectation can be provided even in the second reach effect during the time-saving period, which has a relatively low level of expectation (because the display of the bomb image and countdown image is interrupted (hidden) in the third reach effect during the time-saving period, which has a high level of expectation, the player is given the illusion that the level of expectation is high when the display of the bomb image and countdown image is interrupted (hidden).
In addition, the number of reach effects in which the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is interrupted (hidden) may be the same as the number of reach effects in which the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is not interrupted (hidden). Note that the reach effects referred to here are reach effects excluding so-called normal reach effects that are performed while the background image is displayed during the time reduction.
In such a case, the bomb image and countdown image are displayed from the start of the fluctuation until the reach effect starts (until a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation), and are hidden while the reach effect is being executed, but it is preferable that the time during which the bomb image and countdown image are hidden is longer than the time during which the bomb image and countdown image are displayed.

If the martial artist character loses during the first reach effect during the time-saving period through the third reach effect during the time-saving period (if a display suggesting a loss is displayed in the display suggesting the result of the lottery), the display of the bomb image and countdown image should resume after the display suggesting the result of the lottery is displayed, but before the decorative pattern is displayed as a confirmed stop. By using this type of embodiment, the display of the bomb image and countdown image can ease the disappointment of a player who finds out that the result of the special lottery is a loss.

If a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 2004 during the execution of the first reach effect during time reduction through the third reach effect during time reduction (including both over-entry and non-over-entry), it is preferable not to resume displaying any of the bomb images and countdown images. This embodiment allows the player to concentrate on the reach effect. Note that while it is desirable not to resume displaying any of the bomb images (first bomb image through eighth bomb image) and their corresponding countdown images, it is also possible to resume displaying a specific bomb image (for example, the first bomb image) and their corresponding countdown images.

In the first to third reach effects during the time-saving mode, if the martial artist character wins (if a display suggesting a jackpot is displayed in the display suggesting the result of the lottery), the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped, and the bomb image and countdown image are hidden until the jackpot game state ends, and when the jackpot game state ends and the next variable display begins, the bomb image and countdown image are displayed again. By using such an embodiment, it is possible to concentrate the player on the jackpot game state.
The "bomb expectation effect" may be ended when the display of the decorative symbols has finished changing. In this case, the display of the bomb image and countdown image will not resume after the end of the jackpot game state.
Furthermore, if the martial artist character wins in the first to third reach effects during the time-saving mode (if a display suggesting a win is displayed in the display suggesting the result of the lottery), the display of the bomb image and countdown image may be resumed before the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped. In this case, a sense of anticipation can be provided after the end of the jackpot game state.

Although the embodiment in which the display of the bomb image and countdown image resumes when the jackpot gaming state ends and the next variable display begins has been shown, the display of the bomb image and countdown image may be resumed at a predetermined timing during the jackpot gaming state, or after the martial artist character wins in the first to third reach effects during the time-saving period (a display suggesting a jackpot is made in the display suggesting the result of the win or loss) and before the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. According to such an embodiment, the variable display executed after the jackpot can make the player feel a sense of anticipation that another jackpot will occur (a consecutive win will occur).
In the embodiment shown, the bomb image and countdown image are displayed again when the big win game state ends and the next variable display starts, but the bomb image and countdown image may be displayed before the big win game state ends and the next variable display starts. In such a case, a sense of anticipation can be created even before the variable display starts.

In this embodiment, the display of the bomb image and countdown image is resumed when the jackpot game state ends and the next variable display starts. The bomb image and countdown image displayed upon resumption are the same as those before resumption. According to this embodiment, the variable display executed after the jackpot can make the player feel a sense of anticipation that another jackpot will occur.
On the other hand, when the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is resumed, the bomb image and the countdown image displayed may be different from those displayed before the display was interrupted (hidden).
For example, regardless of the type of bomb image and countdown image that were previously displayed, an eighth bomb image and countdown image (the number "8") may be displayed, and the countdown may be started from the beginning. According to such an embodiment, the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.
Alternatively, the bomb image and countdown image may be displayed one step ahead of the image before the display was interrupted. According to this embodiment, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the game ball has been shot in vain.

In the embodiment shown, if no winning entry into the second starting port 2004 occurs for six consecutive seconds while the bomb image is being displayed, the display of the bomb image and the countdown image is stopped and the image is not displayed. However, the time for which the bomb image and the countdown image are not displayed may be determined by a predetermined lottery rather than being set to six seconds. For example, at the start of the "bomb expectation effect," six seconds may be selected with a 50% probability, or ten seconds with a 50% probability.
Also, 10 seconds may be added with a probability of, for example, 3/4 by a predetermined lottery when a prize is won at the second starting port 2004. In this case where 10 seconds are added, the prize will be hidden if there is no prize at the second starting port 2004 for 16 seconds (6 seconds + 10 seconds), so there will be multiple periods of time until the prize is hidden.
Specifically, we will explain the case where six seconds is determined at the start of the "bomb expectation effect" and no winning occurs in the second start slot 2004 until all fluctuations, including the reserved ones, have ended. In this case, if six seconds have passed before all fluctuations, including the reserved ones, have ended, no fluctuations have occurred, and the bomb image and countdown image are hidden. If a winning occurs in the second start slot 2004 at this time, the bomb image and countdown image will be redisplayed (the redisplayed image may be the same image as before or a different image), but the time until they are hidden again may be six seconds or sixteen seconds. As such, there are multiple patterns for the time from the start of fluctuation until the bomb image and countdown image are hidden. A player who expected them to be hidden in six seconds will feel a sense of elation when they see that they were not hidden in six seconds. Furthermore, by setting the number of added seconds to be essentially infinite, a pattern may be created in which the bomb image and countdown image are never hidden from the start of fluctuation until the end of fluctuation. This is to clearly recognize that the "bomb expectation effect" is being performed.

In the embodiment shown, when a winning bid occurs at the second starting port 2004, the bomb image and countdown image currently being displayed are replaced by the next bomb image with a shortened fuse and the next countdown image, which are displayed in the same position. However, the next bomb image and countdown image may also be displayed in a position different from the original bomb image and countdown image.
For example, when a win occurs in the second starting hole 2004, the next bomb image and the next countdown image may be displayed by swinging them left and right.
FIG. 377(a) shows the display state before a winning entry into the second starting gate 2004 occurs. FIG. 377(b) shows the display state after a winning entry into the second starting gate 2004 occurs. In the figure, the number "7" of the seventh bomb image and the countdown image is shown shifted to the right. FIG. 377(c) also shows the display state after a winning entry into the second starting gate 2004 occurs. In the figure, the number "7" of the seventh bomb image and the countdown image is shown shifted to the left.
It is preferable that such a swaying display continues for a predetermined time (for example, one second) after the display of the next bomb image and new countdown image begins.
In this way, by making the bomb image visible as if it is flickering, the player can be made to more clearly recognize that a win has occurred in the second starting slot 2004. Also, the player can be made to feel a sense of tension that the bomb may explode at any moment.

The bomb image and countdown image may be dynamically displayed in a manner other than a swaying display. For example, each time a new bomb image and countdown image are displayed, the bomb image and countdown image may gradually move linearly toward a predetermined position.
For example, the bomb image and countdown image may move toward the current pending display area and finally be displayed immediately to the left of the current pending image. Figure 377(d) shows a state in which the bomb image is displayed to the left of the current pending image.
The final display positions of the bomb image and countdown image may not be immediately to the left of the current reserved image, but may be a position where the current reserved image and the bomb image overlap in part or in whole. In this case, the bomb image may be displayed in front of the current reserved image, or may be displayed behind the current reserved image.
Figure 377(e) shows a display state in which the first bomb image is displayed in front of the current pending image.

At the start of the "bomb expectation effect," the eighth bomb image and the number "8" of the countdown image are displayed simultaneously, but the timing of displaying the bomb image and the timing of displaying the countdown image may be different.
For example, when the "bomb expectation effect" starts, only the eighth bomb image may be displayed, and when the seventh bomb image is displayed, the countdown image (in this case, the countdown starts from the number "7") may begin to be displayed.
Alternatively, only the bomb image may be displayed until the "bomb expectancy effect" starts, and then the countdown image may be displayed at a predetermined stage. For example, the countdown image (in this case, the countdown starts from the number "4") may be displayed when the fourth bomb image is displayed.
According to this embodiment, the bomb image, which is difficult for other players to distinguish, is displayed first compared to the countdown image, which clearly indicates the stages with numbers, so that other players are less likely to notice that the "bomb expectation effect" is being executed, allowing the player to enjoy it privately. Also, a player who does not want to launch game balls unnecessarily can avoid the countdown image from being displayed by quickly stopping the launch of game balls even when the bomb image is displayed, and can therefore interrupt or cancel the "bomb expectation effect" before the overall volume of the effect becomes apparent.

In the embodiment shown, when the "bomb expectancy effect" is executed, the bomb image and countdown image simultaneously change to the next bomb image and countdown image upon winning the second starting gate 2004. However, the timing at which the bomb image and countdown image change to the next bomb image and countdown image may be different. For example, the next bomb image may be displayed upon winning the second starting gate 2004, but the next countdown image may not be displayed upon winning the second starting gate 2004, and may be displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed (e.g., 0.5 seconds). In this way, to enable both a situation in which the next images are displayed simultaneously and a situation in which the next countdown image is displayed delayed, the next countdown image may be displayed delayed when a predetermined condition is met (e.g., winning a delayed lottery, or an even-numbered image among the first through eighth bomb images). In such cases, the ratio of delayed and simultaneous occurrences may be the same, or the delayed occurrence may be made more likely or more difficult to occur.

In the embodiment shown, the eighth bomb image is sequentially switched to the first bomb image, but the portion representing the fuse and the portion representing the burning portion of the fuse end may be displayed more dynamically. Specifically, when switching from one bomb image to the next, the length of the fuse may be displayed dynamically so that it gradually shortens. In this case, it is preferable to dynamically display the burning portion of the fuse as it shortens.
Furthermore, when this dynamic display ends and the switching of one bomb image to the next bomb image is completed, the countdown image may be switched to the next countdown image.

In the embodiment shown, the next bomb image and countdown image are displayed on the condition that a prize is won at the second starting hole 2004, but the next bomb image and countdown image may also be displayed under other conditions.
For example, the bomb image and countdown image may be displayed in response to the start of the "bomb expectation effect" or the occurrence of a winning entry into the second starting port 2004 while the "bomb expectation effect" is being executed, and then the next bomb image and countdown image may be displayed based on the passage of a predetermined time.
Specifically, after the bomb image and countdown image are displayed, the next bomb image and countdown image may be displayed two seconds later and four seconds later. If no gaming ball enters the second start hole 2004 for six consecutive seconds, the display of the bomb image and countdown image will be interrupted, so a player who wants to view the "bomb expectation effect" without interruption will need to get a gaming ball to enter the second start hole 2004 within the remaining two seconds.
Similarly, after the bomb image and countdown image are displayed, the next bomb image and countdown image may be displayed one second and two seconds later. In this case, it is necessary to land the gaming ball in the second starting hole 2004 within the remaining four seconds.
If a winning jackpot is entered into the second starting port 2004 before the predetermined time has elapsed, the timing may be started again from the beginning to determine whether the predetermined time has elapsed.
According to such an embodiment, the display of the bomb image and countdown image is partially performed automatically, and the performance can be enjoyed with a relatively small number of game balls fired, which has the effect of reducing the reluctance of players who do not like to fire game balls aggressively as described above to participate in the performance.

In the embodiment shown, at the same time as the display of the explosion image and countdown image ends, an image indicating the degree of expectation, either "Hot,""SuperHot," or "Right?", is displayed in the position where the explosion image was displayed, but the following display mode may also be adopted.
For example, the position where the expectation suggestion image is displayed may be the position where the countdown image was displayed instead of the position where the explosion image was displayed. In this case, the expectation suggestion image will be displayed in the position where the number "0" was displayed on the countdown image.
Alternatively, the expectation suggestion image may be displayed at a position different from the position where the explosion image or countdown image was displayed. In this case, the position where the expectation suggestion image is displayed may be a predetermined position.
According to this embodiment, by the time the expectation suggestion image is displayed, the display of the explosion image or countdown image has finished, so the player's attention can be focused on the expectation suggestion image. Also, since the player can recognize in advance the position where the expectation suggestion image will be displayed, the player can be prevented from missing the expectation suggestion image.

The expectation level suggestion image may be a "Change!" display, suggesting a change in the current pending image or the standby pending image. In this case, it is suggested that the color of the current pending image or the standby pending image will change to a color with a higher expectation level (the relationship between the color of the standby image and the expectation level is as described above). For example, it is preferable to change the color of the current pending image or the standby pending image from white to one of blue, green, red, gold, or rainbow colors.
Similarly, a message saying "Changed twice!" may be displayed. In this case, the color of the current reserved image and the standby reserved image will change twice. Note that the same reserved image changes twice, not two separate reserved images.
It is preferable to change the current pending image or the standby pending image while the expectation indication image is being displayed or when the display of the expectation indication image has finished.
Furthermore, based on the advance reading process, the number of pending balls among the four pending balls that will result in a jackpot as a result of the special lottery may be counted, and the number may be notified by an image indicating the degree of expectation.
For example, the expectation suggestion image may display "Win x 1,""Win x 2,""Win x 2,""Win x 4," etc. In this case, the player is informed that the four pending waiting times include one to four special lottery results that will result in a jackpot.
In addition, an example has been shown in which an image indicating the degree of expectation (such as "Hot!" or "Change!") is displayed after an explosion image is displayed, but instead of an image indicating the degree of expectation, a display that is only displayed during the time-saving mode and that does not create the expectation of a jackpot (as shown in Figure 376 (b)), which is different from the basic information displayed during the time-saving mode (such as the number of consecutive wins and the number of wins), may be displayed, for example, the time spent in the time-saving mode and the jackpot mode (for example, "40 minutes and 30 seconds have now passed!") or a message such as "Today is Sports Day!") may be displayed.

The display of the countdown image may be terminated at the timing when the display of the explosion image is terminated, but the display of the countdown image may be terminated at the timing when the display of the bomb image is terminated, and only the explosion image may be displayed. According to this embodiment, the display mode of the "bomb expectation effect" is simplified, and the player can concentrate on the fact that the bomb has exploded and the expectation indication image that is displayed after the display of the explosion image is terminated.
Alternatively, the display of the countdown image may be terminated before the bomb image is displayed. For example, the display of the countdown image may be terminated when the sixth, seventh, or eighth bomb image is displayed. In this embodiment, no clear countdown is performed using numbers, so the player can feel a sense of suspense as to when the bomb will explode.
On the other hand, the display of the bomb image may be terminated before the countdown image. For example, the display of the bomb image may be terminated when the numbers "3,""2," and "1" of the countdown image are displayed. According to such an embodiment, a clear countdown using numbers is performed, so that it is possible to clearly indicate to the player when the explosion image will be displayed.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 370, the displayed bomb image and the countdown image correspond one-to-one. However, after the bomb expectation effect begins, when a winning entry into the second starting slot 2004 occurs, the eighth bomb image may continue to be displayed, and the next countdown image may be displayed instead. In this case, even if a winning entry into the second starting slot 2004 occurs next time, the eighth bomb image may continue to be displayed, and only the numbers on the countdown image may decrease. This effect is only executed if the special lottery results in a jackpot. The expectation indication image may display the words "Miss" or "The Opposite of Miss!" This effect may be executed with a low probability (e.g., 1/100) when the "bomb expectation effect" is executed. While this embodiment may cause a player seeing the effect for the first time to feel uneasy, players who have seen the effect multiple times may be able to recognize that a jackpot is occurring.
It should be noted that this effect may be performed not only when the eighth bomb image is displayed, but also when other bomb images are displayed.
It may be used as a one-shot announcement mode that is executed only when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, and that always executes this strange effect (an effect in which only the countdown progresses) when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. It may also be possible to allow the player to select whether to use this one-shot announcement mode or a normal notice mode (a notice mode in which the bomb image and countdown image as described above are displayed to the end) to suggest or announce the result of the special lottery.

In addition, when a ball enters the second starting slot 2004 and a win is determined in advance through pre-reading, and a "bomb expectation effect" is to be executed, an effect different from the aforementioned strange feeling effect may be displayed, such as displaying the eighth bomb image and the "8" in the countdown image, or, when a ball enters the second starting slot 2004, the ball advances up to a predetermined number (for example, up to the fifth bomb image and the "5" in the countdown image), but once the predetermined number is exceeded, a strange feeling effect may be executed in which the ball does not advance no matter how many balls are entered into the second starting slot 2004. By doing this, the player may initially feel the strangeness of the "bomb expectation effect" not progressing partway through, but will later realize that a win has been confirmed when the "bomb expectation effect" stops progressing partway through, thereby increasing the excitement when a ball enters the second starting slot 2004 and the ball does not progress. For example, if the predetermined number progresses to "1" for the first bomb image and the countdown image, the player will soon be able to see the expectation image, and will be concentrating on which expectation image will be displayed. Therefore, it is preferable to set the predetermined number to "4," which is the first half of the "bomb expectation effect," or to "4" or less. This allows the player to play while hoping for the appearance of a strange effect in the first half of the "bomb expectation effect," and for the expectation image with a high expectation level to be displayed in the second half, thereby preventing a decline in interest throughout the "bomb expectation effect." The player may also be able to choose whether or not to execute such an effect.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the displayed bomb image and countdown image correspond one-to-one (see, for example, FIG. 370), either one may be hidden for a predetermined period of time.
For example, the countdown image may be hidden until halfway through the "bomb expectancy effect" and then displayed from that point on. Specifically, during the execution of the "bomb expectancy effect," the countdown image is not displayed during the period from the eighth bomb image to the fifth bomb image is displayed, and the countdown image is displayed during the period from the fourth bomb image to the first bomb image is displayed.
Alternatively, the countdown image may be displayed until the middle of the "bomb expectation effect" and then hidden from that point on.
Also, the bomb image may be hidden until the middle of the "bomb expectation effect" and then displayed from that point on.
Alternatively, the bomb image may be displayed until the middle of the "bomb expectation effect" and then hidden from the middle.
The timing for switching the display in this way may be any of the seven times when the bomb image and countdown image are changed to the next bomb image and countdown image.
According to such an embodiment, when only one of the images is displayed, the player will want to see both images displayed, and will launch a gaming ball, thereby increasing the operation of the gaming machine. Furthermore, by hiding one of the images partway through, the player can concentrate on the countdown presentation. Furthermore, when only the bomb image is displayed, the progress of the countdown becomes unclear, which creates a motivation to want to see the countdown image displayed. Furthermore, when only the countdown image is displayed, the player will be motivated to decrease the numbers displayed as the countdown image. In either case, the player will launch a gaming ball, and the operation of the gaming machine can be increased.

At the same time that the bomb image or the countdown image is displayed, sound corresponding to the bomb image or the countdown image may be output.
For example, the same explosion sound may be output at each timing corresponding to the display of the eighth bomb image through the first bomb image.Also, the same sound (such as a "beep" sound) may be output at each timing corresponding to the numbers on the countdown image.
Alternatively, different explosion sounds may be output in response to the display of the eighth bomb image through the first bomb image. Also, different numbers (e.g., "eight,""seven," etc.) may be output in response to the numbers on the countdown image.
In addition, the same explosion sound or audio may be output during the first half of the "bomb expectation effect" (for example, up to the time when the fifth bomb image or the fourth bomb image is displayed), and different explosion sounds or audio may be output during the second half.
According to this embodiment, the progress of the "bomb expectation effect" is made clear, which can increase the player's sense of excitement.

As mentioned above, if the timing at which the bomb image advances (the next bomb image is displayed) differs from the timing at which the countdown image advances (the next countdown image is displayed), it is preferable to output a sound or audio corresponding to the bomb image advancing (the next bomb image is displayed), but not output a sound or audio corresponding to the countdown image advancing (the next countdown image is displayed). If the timing at which the bomb image advances (the next bomb image is displayed) differs from the timing at which the countdown image advances (the next countdown image is displayed), and if the player continues to hit the ball to the right, it is relatively easy for the ball to land in the second starting hole 2004, so many game balls will land in the second starting hole 2004. In such a case, if the launch interval is approximately 0.6 seconds and the timing is different, some kind of sound will be output twice every 0.6 seconds, or once every approximately 0.3 seconds on average, which may be unpleasant for the player. Note that the opposite pattern may also be used, where no sound or audio is output when the bomb image progresses (the next bomb image is displayed), but a sound or audio is output when the countdown image progresses (the next countdown image is displayed).

In the "bomb expectation effect," decorative members may be made to move or emit light.
For example, the decorative members may not be activated when a bomb image or countdown image is first displayed, but the movable decorative members may be activated when subsequent bomb images or countdown images are displayed.
Alternatively, the movement of the movable decorative element may be gradually increased. For example, the movable decorative element may not move when the bomb image or countdown image is first displayed, but may move when the second or subsequent bomb image or countdown image is displayed. This embodiment can enhance the player's sense of excitement.
In addition, a movable decorative element having a light emitting means may be used, and the light emitting means may be made to emit light in a predetermined light pattern in accordance with the timing of the movement of the movable decorative element or after the movement of the movable decorative element. By adopting such an embodiment, the player's sense of excitement can be further enhanced.

At the timing when the bomb image and countdown image are displayed, operation acceptance for the operation unit may be enabled and a simulated operation unit image prompting operation of the operation unit may be displayed. Fig. 377(f) shows an example in which a simulated operation unit image is displayed above the number "7" in the countdown image.
In addition, when an operation is performed on the operation unit and a predetermined condition is satisfied, the display mode of the bomb image or countdown image may change with a predetermined probability (for example, changing from a white bomb to a red bomb).
In addition, if the operation section simulant image is displayed but the player does not operate it (if one variation has been confirmed and stopped before the player operates it), the operation section simulant image may not be hidden at the time of the confirmation and stop, but may continue to be displayed even when the time for the next variation to start arrives, so that the operation section simulant image is displayed over multiple variation displays.
Furthermore, while the operation unit simulation image is displayed, the operation unit may be operated multiple times. In addition, the display mode of the bomb image or countdown image may be changed multiple times in response to the operation of the operation unit. In such a case, the display of the operation unit simulation image continues even if an operation is performed on the operation unit.
Furthermore, the simulated image of the operation unit may be displayed less conspicuously than the bomb image or the countdown image, making it difficult for the player to notice that operation of the operation unit is being accepted. Figure 377(g) shows a state in which the simulated image of the operation unit is displayed in the lower left of the display area. By displaying the simulated image of the operation unit smaller than the bomb image or the countdown image and closer to the edge of the display area, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the simulated image of the operation unit is being displayed.

In this way, the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 370 to 377 can provide players with new and exciting experiences.

Below, we will explain an embodiment that includes a new effect, the "scroll stock effect." Note that this embodiment is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to Figures 123 to 377, etc.

First, an overview of the "scroll stock effect" will be explained. In the "scroll stock effect," when a reserve occurs, a look-ahead process is performed for the reserve, and based on the look-ahead result, it is determined whether or not to execute the "scroll stock effect."
When it is decided to execute the "scroll stock effect", a martial artist character is displayed behind the current reserved image, and a demon character is displayed behind each of the displayed standby reserved images. Note that the characters are displayed so as to overlap with the current reserved image and each standby reserved image, but they may also be displayed so as not to overlap.
When the variable display ends and a new variable display starts, the martial artist character continues to be displayed at the same position, but as the reserved image moves, the demon character displayed corresponding to the first standby reserved image that is closest to the martial artist character moves and a "scroll acquisition performance" is executed in which the demon character fights with the martial artist character.
In the battle in the "scroll acquisition effect," the martial artist character may win or lose against the demon character, but if the martial artist character wins, he or she can acquire a scroll. The acquired scroll is displayed in a predetermined position in the display area (for example, the upper left position of the display area). If the martial artist character loses, he or she cannot acquire the scroll.
In this way, each time the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner, a "scroll acquisition effect" is executed, and a display is produced in which the martial artist character and the demon character are engaged in a battle. Note that the final battle between the martial artist character and the demon character takes place in the variable manner corresponding to the reserved memory that triggered the execution of the "scroll stock effect." Also, even if a new reservation occurs during the execution of the "scroll stock effect," no new demon character will be displayed in response to that reservation.
After the battle with the final demon character is over, the scrolls acquired up to that point are opened in a "scroll release effect" while the decorative pattern is changing. The opened scrolls contain predetermined characters and other inscriptions, which indicate the degree of expectation, and the preview effect display content is changed to a display content with a higher expectation of a jackpot. Note that the changing display during the battle with the final demon character may develop into a reach effect.
The timing at which the "scroll release effect" is executed is a predetermined timing within the period from immediately after the end of the battle with the last demon character to the stop display of the decorative symbols. For example, the "scroll release effect" can be executed at a predetermined timing before the decorative symbols enter a reach state, during the reach state, or during the reach effect.

378 is a presentation pattern table showing the number of scrolls in standby reserve at the time when it is decided to execute the "scroll stock presentation," and the type and number of scrolls that can be acquired. In the "scroll stock presentation," a presentation pattern is selected based on the pre-reading process.
Specifically, if the number of pending items at the time when it is decided to execute the "scroll stock effect" is one, one of the effect patterns PTN01 to PTN03 is selected.
Furthermore, if the number of pending items at the time when it is decided to execute the "scroll stock effect" is two, one of the effect patterns PTN04 to PTN09 is selected.
Furthermore, if the number of pending items at the time when it is decided to execute the "scroll stock effect" is three, one of the effect patterns PTN10 to PTN19 is selected.
Furthermore, if the number of pending items at the time when it is decided to execute the "scroll stock effect" is four, one of the effect patterns PTN20 to PTN34 is selected.

The presentation pattern selected will be such that the greater the number of pending scrolls at the time it is decided to execute the "Scroll Stock Presentation," the greater the number of scrolls that can ultimately be acquired. Also, the greater the total number of scrolls acquired, the higher the likelihood of a jackpot.

As shown in the figure, the maximum number of scrolls that can be acquired in the "scroll stock effect" is the same as the number of scrolls in the standby state at the time when it is decided to execute the "scroll stock effect." For example, if the fourth standby effect occurs and one of the effect patterns PTN30 to PTN34 is selected to start the "scroll stock effect," a display will be displayed in which the martial artist character defeats the demon character four times, and four scrolls can be acquired.
On the other hand, regardless of the number of scrolls in reserve at the start of the "scroll stock effect," there may be cases where no scrolls are acquired. For example, if effect pattern PTN01, effect pattern PTN04, effect pattern PTN10, or effect pattern PTN20 is selected, the martial artist character will not be able to defeat the demon character even once, and will not be able to acquire any scrolls.

Additionally, the types of scrolls that can be acquired include scrolls without a timer and scrolls with a timer.
FIG. 379 is a table showing the correspondence between the number of scrolls acquired and the order in which the scrolls are acquired. Which scroll acquisition pattern a scroll will be acquired in is also determined based on the results of the look-ahead. For example, scroll acquisition pattern PTN04 is a pattern in which a scroll with a timer is acquired as the first scroll, and a scroll without a timer is acquired as the second scroll. Furthermore, scroll acquisition pattern PTN25 is a pattern in which a scroll without a timer is acquired as the first scroll, a scroll with a timer is acquired as the second scroll, a scroll without a timer is acquired as the third scroll, and a scroll with a timer is acquired as the fourth scroll.

In this way, in the "Scroll Acquisition Effect," the focus of the player's attention is how many scrolls are in reserve at the start of the "Scroll Stock Effect," i.e., how many times the "Scroll Acquisition Effect" will be performed, and how many scrolls with and without a timer will ultimately be acquired.

At a predetermined timing in the variable display after the last "Scroll Acquisition Presentation" has finished, a "Scroll Release Presentation" corresponding to each acquired scroll is executed. In the "Scroll Release Presentation," the scroll is opened and enlarged and displayed near the center of the display area, bringing about a predetermined change in the content of the presentation being executed. Specifically, a display is made that increases the expectation suggested by the presentation.
There are two types of scrolls that can be acquired: scrolls without timers, and scrolls with timers.
When a scroll with a timer is acquired, the timer counts down from the time the scroll is acquired, and when the timer reaches zero, the scroll is opened, and a change is made to the predetermined effect content that is being executed when the scroll is opened. In other words, the player can recognize when the "scroll release effect" will be executed. Also, the countdown may start not when the scroll is acquired, but after it has finished moving and displayed in the upper left corner, as will be described later.
On the other hand, with a scroll without a timer, the player is not informed of when the scroll will be opened, but the scroll is opened at a predetermined timing, and a change is made to the predetermined effect that is being executed when the scroll is opened. In other words, the player cannot know when the "scroll release effect" will be executed.
Also, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher when a scroll with a timer is acquired than when a scroll without a timer is acquired. Also, for scrolls with timers, the timer counts down from a predetermined number of seconds, and the longer the number of seconds at the start of the countdown, the higher the probability of winning a jackpot. Also, a scroll without a timer at the time of acquisition may be changed to a scroll with a timer when it has finished moving to the upper left, as will be described later, and the countdown may begin. In other words, in this case, the scroll without a timer functions as a precursor to the scroll with a timer.

Below, specific examples of the "scroll stock effect" will be explained with reference to Figs. 378 to 385, etc. Fig. 378 shows the effect pattern table in this embodiment as described above. Fig. 379 shows the scroll acquisition pattern table in this embodiment. Figs. 380 and 381 show time charts for this effect example. Figs. 382 to 387 show the display state of the display area at a predetermined timing in this effect example.
In this example, when there are three reserved balls, a winning ball enters the first starting slot 2002, bringing the number of reserved balls to four. Based on the pre-reading process based on this winning ball, the effect pattern PTN32 is selected, and a "scroll stock effect" is initiated. Thereafter, each time the display of the decorative symbols corresponding to each reserved ball is changed, a "scroll acquisition effect" is performed. Furthermore, the scroll acquisition pattern PTN25 is selected, and in the "scroll acquisition effect," two scrolls without a timer and two scrolls with a timer are acquired. In the display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the fourth reserved ball that was the subject of the pre-reading process, the "scroll acquisition effect" is executed, followed by four "scroll release effect."
In other words, in this example, the "scroll stock effect" is executed over five variable displays. Of the five variable displays, the first to fourth display results in a miss, and the fifth display results in either a jackpot or a miss.

Figures 380(a) to 380(d) show time charts corresponding to the first to fourth variable displays, and Figures 381(a) and 381(b) show time charts corresponding to the fifth variable display.
Also, timing t20 in Fig. 380(a) (the timing when the static display in the first variable display ends) is the same timing as timing t0 in Fig. 380(b) (the timing when the second variable display starts). Similarly, timing t20 in Fig. 380(b) and timing t0 in H30(c), timing t20 in Fig. 380(c) and timing t0 in H30(d), timing t20 in Fig. 380(d) and timing t0 in H32(a), and timing t30 in Fig. 381(a) and timing t30 in H32(b) are all the same timing.

Here, the execution time for each of the first to fourth variable displays is set to 19 seconds, and the decorative pattern confirmation stop period is set to 1 second, but as long as there is enough time to execute the "scroll acquisition effect," the execution time for each variable display can be set appropriately, for example, within the range of approximately 5 to 40 seconds.
Similarly, the execution time of the fifth variation display is set to 59 seconds, but as long as there is enough time to execute the reach effect and the "scroll release effect," it can be set appropriately within a range of, for example, 30 to 180 seconds. In other words, the average variation time of the reserved state determined to perform the "scroll stock effect" should be longer than the average variation time of each of the first through fourth variations. Even when the "scroll stock effect" is performed, since the number of acquired scrolls may be zero, the target variation may be a so-called normal variation time (approximately 10 seconds for non-reach) or a shortened variation time (e.g., approximately 3 seconds, which is the most likely variation time for hold 4). It is preferable to set the duration of the fifth variation display to be longer as the number of acquired scrolls increases. However, it is also possible to set a pattern in which the variation time is long but the number of acquired scrolls is small, such as two scrolls acquired in a 120-second variation time and three scrolls acquired in a 90-second variation time.

The first variable display will be explained with reference to Figure 380(a). The number of pending items at the start of the variable display is three. Also, normal background image A (see Figure 347(a)) is displayed as the background image. Figure 382(a) shows the display state of the display area during the period from timing t0 to timing t10.
At timing t10, a game ball enters the first starting slot 2002, and the "scroll stock effect" begins based on the pre-reading process. Here, a martial artist character is displayed in the upper left corner of the current reserved image, and a demon character is displayed in the upper right corner of each standby reserved image. Figure 382 (b) shows the display state of the display area during the period from timing t10 to timing t17.
At timing t17, the left decorative symbol is temporarily displayed, at timing t18 the right decorative symbol is temporarily displayed, and at timing t19 all decorative symbols are displayed as stopped symbols indicating a loss, and these stop displays continue until timing t20. Figure 382(c) shows the display state of the display area during the period from timing t19 to timing t20.
As shown in Figure 382(d) etc., the display priority of the martial artist character and the demon character is higher than the display priority of the decorative symbols during the variable display. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 382(c), the display priority of the martial artist character and the demon character is lower than the display priority of the decorative symbols during the stationary display.

Next, referring to Figure 380 (b), the second variable display will be explained.
The second variable display begins at timing t0. From timing t0 to timing t1, each reserved image moves one space to the left. At the same time, the demon character moves along with each reserved image. At timing t1, the movement of each reserved image and demon character ends, and from timing t1 to timing t3, a battle begins between the martial artist character and the moving demon character above the current reserved image. The word "battle" is also displayed behind both characters. Figure 382 (d) shows the display state of the display area during the period from timing t1 to timing t3.

At timing t3, the battle between the martial artist character and the demon character ends, and from timing t3 to timing t4, a display is made indicating that the martial artist character has won, or a display is made indicating that the demon character has won.
If the martial artist character wins, the demon character falls to the ground and then disappears from view, and the martial artist character acquires the scroll and holds it in his left hand. Figures 382(e) and 382(f) show the display state at this time. Next, the scroll acquired by the martial artist character is displayed, becoming slightly larger and moving to the upper left of the display area, ending the "scroll acquisition effect." Figures 382(g) and 382(h) show the display state at this time. Furthermore, the scroll displayed in the upper left may be smaller than the scroll that the martial artist character acquires and holds in his left hand.
On the other hand, if the martial artist character loses, the martial artist character falls to the ground, the demon character is not displayed, and the "scroll acquisition effect" ends. If the martial artist character loses, the scroll cannot be acquired, and the scroll is not displayed. Figure 383(a) shows the display state when the martial artist character falls to the ground. Also, Figure 383(b) shows the display state when the "scroll acquisition effect" ends.
Thereafter, the left decorative pattern is displayed temporarily stopped at timing t17, the right decorative pattern is displayed temporarily stopped at timing t18, and all decorative patterns are displayed temporarily stopped in a manner indicating a miss at timing t19, and the stopped display continues until timing t20.

As shown in Figures 380(c), 380(d), and 381(a), a "scroll acquisition effect" in which the martial artist character and the demon character fight is also performed at timings t3 and t4 of the third through fifth variable displays. Furthermore, in the third and fourth variable displays, the decorative patterns are displayed stationary in the same manner as in the second variable display. In this example, the martial artist character wins the battle against the demon character in all four "scroll acquisition effects," resulting in the state of having acquired four scrolls. Figure 383(c) shows a display example at timing t5 of Figure 381(a).
The acquired scrolls are displayed in the order they were acquired, from the top left to the right of the display area. In this example, the first and third scrolls from the left are scrolls without timers, and the second and fourth scrolls from the left are scrolls with timers. A countdown begins for the scrolls with timers from the moment they are acquired. At timing t5 in FIG. 381(a), the second timer from the left has a value of "14:00" and the fourth timer from the left has a value of "38:00." The "scroll release effect" is executed at timing t19, 14 seconds after timing t5, and timing t43, 38 seconds after timing t5. Furthermore, the countdown may begin not when the scroll is acquired, but when the scroll begins to move to the upper left, or after the scroll has finished moving to the upper left.

If four scrolls have been acquired at the start of the fifth variable display, the "scroll release effect" will be executed four times, and an example of the effect is shown below.
The first "scroll release effect" is executed at timing t10 during the execution of the "step-up notice effect" during the period from timing t8 to timing t12 when the decorative pattern is fluctuating at high speed.
The second "scroll release effect" is executed at timing t19 during the execution of the "dialogue preview effect" in the period from timing t17 to timing t21 when the decorative pattern is fluctuating at high speed.
The third "scroll release effect" is executed at timing t33 during the execution of the "reach title preview effect" in the period from timing t31 to timing t35 during the reach effect.
The fourth "scroll release effect" is executed at timing t43 during the execution of the "dialogue preview effect" in the period from timing t41 to timing t45 during the reach effect.
The following describes the presentation mode of each "scroll release effect." Note that the "scroll release effect" for a scroll with a timer and the "scroll release effect" for a scroll without a timer will never be performed simultaneously (when the countdown for a scroll with a timer reaches 0, the "scroll release effect" for a scroll without a timer will not be performed).

Here, we will explain the ``Step Up Preview Performance'' with reference to Figure 384.
The "Step Up Preview" is a display in which multiple images are displayed in a predetermined order, and the degree of expectation is indicated depending on which images are displayed. Specifically, a rectangular frame is displayed near the center of the display area, and a martial artist character, a warrior character, a samurai character, and a wizard character are displayed in that order within the frame.
The presentation patterns include a presentation pattern in which only the first stage character, the martial artist character, is displayed, a presentation pattern in which up to the second stage warrior character is displayed, a presentation pattern in which up to the third stage samurai character is displayed, and a presentation pattern in which up to the fourth stage wizard character is displayed.
Fig. 384(a) shows a display state in which a martial artist character is displayed. Fig. 384(b) shows a display state in which a warrior character is displayed. Fig. 384(c) shows a display state in which a samurai character is displayed. Fig. 384(d) shows a display state in which a wizard character is displayed.
For example, when a presentation pattern is executed in which up to the fourth stage wizard character is displayed, the display state of the display area will change in the order of Figure 384(a), Figure 384(b), Figure 384(c), and Figure 384(d).
The display time for each character can be set as long as the visibility of the character is ensured, but in the example below, it is set to 2 seconds.

In the "Step Up Preview Performance," the degree of expectation is also indicated by the background color within the frame. Specifically, one of three colors, white, red, and gold, is selected as the background color. The degree of expectation increases in the order of white, red, and gold. Figures 384(a) to 384(d) show the display state when white is selected as the background color.
The background color may remain unchanged at the start of the "Step-Up Preview Performance," or it may change to a color with a higher expectation level during the "Step-Up Preview Performance." For example, a white background image may be displayed continuously from the first stage to the fourth stage, without changing color. Alternatively, the color of the background image may change to a color with a higher expectation level when changing from one stage to the next, or may change to a color with a higher expectation level while the background image of a certain stage is being displayed. When the background image changes in this way, the color of the background image after the change is adopted as the color of the background image of the next stage. Note that the color of the background image may change from white to red at one time, and then change from red to gold at another time.
In such a "step-up preview performance," the player's expectations are indicated based on the character's stage that has been displayed and the final color of the background image.

Although the embodiment in which the color of the background image is changed has been shown, the color of the frame may be changed instead of the color of the background image. Also, although the embodiment in which different characters are sequentially displayed from the first stage to the fourth stage has been shown, different poses of the same character may be sequentially displayed without changing the character. Also, different images may be displayed for each of the first four stages, not just the characters.
Although the "Step-up preview effect" is shown to be executed up to a maximum of four stages, it is not limited to four stages, and multiple stages (two or more stages) are acceptable, and the maximum number of stages to display the characters can be set as appropriate. Similarly, the colors of the background image and frame are not limited to three colors, and multiple colors (two or more colors) are acceptable, and the maximum number of colors that can be displayed can be set as appropriate.

As shown in the time chart in Figure 381 (a), in the fifth variable display, a "step-up preview" is performed from timing t6 to timing t14.
Fig. 384(e) shows the display state at timing t5 before the execution of the "Step Up Preview Effect" starts, and Fig. 384(f) shows the display state at timing t10 when the display of the samurai character, a third stage character, starts during the execution of the "Step Up Preview Effect".
At timing t11, a "scroll release effect" is performed. In the "scroll release effect," the scroll without a timer that was at the far left moves to near the center of the display area and then opens, making predetermined text, such as ("Rise!"), visible, and the background color changes from white to red (the background color may also be changed after a predetermined time (e.g., 1 second) has elapsed since the predetermined text was displayed). At the same time, the remaining scrolls move to the left (they do not have to move). Figure 384 (g) shows the display state at timing t11.
At timing t12, the wizard character, which is the fourth stage character, is displayed. At this time, the background color remains red. As shown in the figure, the display of the scroll that was opened at timing t12 ends. Figure 384(h) shows the display state at timing t12.
At timing t14, the "step-up preview performance" ends, and the display of the horizontally long rectangular frame and character ends.

Here, we will explain the ``dialogue preview performance'' with reference to Figure 385.
The "line preview effect" is an effect in which one of a plurality of lines is displayed for a predetermined time (here, 4 seconds), and the level of expectation is suggested by the type of line displayed. Specifically, one of the following lines is displayed in a line display frame displayed in the display area: "No, no...", "I don't really understand...", or "Just wait and hope!". The expectation level of these lines increases in the order of "No, no...", "I don't really understand...", and "Just wait and hope!".
Fig. 385(a) shows a display state in which a line with low expectation, "It's no good, it's no good...", is displayed. Fig. 385(b) shows a display state in which a line with medium expectation, "I don't really understand...", is displayed. Fig. 385(c) shows a display state in which a line with high expectation, "Wait with anticipation!", is displayed. Note that a character (here, a master character) who speaks the lines as shown in these figures may also be displayed.

As shown in the time chart in Figure 381 (a), in the fifth variable display, a "dialogue preview" is performed from timing t17 to timing t21.
Fig. 385(d) shows the display state at timing t16 before the execution of the "dialogue preview effect" begins. Fig. 385(e) shows the display state at timing t18 when the "dialogue preview effect" begins and the line "No, no..." is being displayed. Here, the number of seconds indicated by the scroll with timer on the far left is "1:00," indicating that the "scroll release effect" will occur in one second.
At timing t19, a "scroll release effect" is performed. In the "scroll release effect," the scroll with the timer that was at the far left moves to the center of the display area and then opens, making predetermined text (e.g., "Dialogue Change!") visible, and the dialogue changes from "No, no..." to "Wait with anticipation!" (The dialogue may be changed after a predetermined time (e.g., one second) has elapsed since the predetermined text was displayed.) At the same time, the remaining scrolls move to the left (they do not have to move). Figure 385(f) shows the display state at timing t19.
At timing t21, the "dialogue preview" ends, and the display of the dialogue display frame, dialogue, master character, and opened scroll ends.
In this way, when the "scroll release effect" is performed, an example has been given in which other preview effects or reach effects different from the "scroll release effect" are changed to be displayed with a higher expectation, but it is also possible to have the "scroll release effect" be the only effect (without affecting the display of other preview effects or reach effects).
Furthermore, in the "step-up preview effect" and "dialogue preview effect," examples have been shown in which the display changes to one with high expectations when predetermined characters are displayed by the "scroll release effect," but the time from when the predetermined characters are displayed by the "scroll release effect" until the display changes to one with high expectations may be the same for the "step-up preview effect" and the "dialogue preview effect" shown in the examples, or may be different. For example, in the "step-up preview effect," the display changes to one with high expectations one second after the predetermined characters are displayed, while in the "dialogue preview effect," the display changes to one with high expectations two seconds after the predetermined characters are displayed.

At timing t25, the left decorative symbol (the number "2") temporarily stops, and at timing t26, the right decorative symbol (the number "2") of the same number as the left decorative symbol temporarily stops, entering a reach state. Next, at timing t30, the reach effect begins. Specifically, at timing t30, the background image switches to a background image dedicated to reach effect effects (here, reach background image A shown in Figure 347 (c)), and the decorative symbols become reach decorative symbols, temporarily stopped and displayed in the upper left and upper right of the display area.

Here, we will explain the ``Reach Title Preview Performance'' with reference to Figure 386.
There are several types of reach effects, each with different characters and background images that appear. When a reach effect starts, a display showing the name of the reach effect is displayed.
For example, Figure 386 (a) is an example of the display at the start of a "martial artist character reach," showing a martial artist character, a background image A during the reach, and the words "martial artist character reach!".
Figure 386 (b) is an example of the display at the start of a "warrior character reach", showing a warrior character, a reach background image B, and the words "warrior character reach!".
The background color within the frame displaying the reach name is either white, red, or gold. Figure 386(c) shows a display example in which the background color within the reach title display frame displaying the reach name of "Fighter Character Reach" is displayed in red. Also, Figure 386(d) shows a display example in which the background color within the reach title display frame for "Warrior Character Reach" is displayed in red.
The likelihood of winning a jackpot varies depending on the type of reach effect, with a "warrior character reach" having a higher likelihood of winning a jackpot than a "fighter character reach."
The background color within the reach title display frame also indicates the likelihood of a jackpot, with the likelihood increasing in the order of white, red, and gold. In this way, the background color within the reach title display frame indicates the likelihood of a jackpot in the "reach title preview performance."

As shown in the time chart in Figure 381 (a), in the fifth variable display, a "reach title preview performance" is performed from timing t31 to timing t35.
385(e) shows the display state at timing t32, one second after the start of the "reach title preview effect." Here, the color within the reach title display frame is white.
At timing t33, a "scroll release effect" is performed. In the "scroll release effect," the leftmost scroll without a timer moves to near the center of the display area and then opens, making predetermined characters ("Rise!") visible, and the color within the reach title display frame changes from white to red (the color within the reach title display frame may also be changed after a predetermined time (e.g., 1 second) has elapsed since the predetermined characters were displayed). At the same time, the remaining scrolls move to the left (they do not have to move). Figure 386 (f) shows the display state at timing t33.
At timing t35, the "reach title preview performance" ends, and the display of the reach title display frame, reach name, and scroll ends.

Here, with reference to Figure 387, we will explain the "Line preview performance during reach performance."
The "Line Preview During Reach Performance" is a performance in which one of a number of different lines is displayed, and the type of line displayed indicates the degree of expectation. The lines displayed are those of the opponent in battle. Specifically, one of the following lines is displayed in the line display frame displayed in the display area: "I won't lose!", "You look strong!", or "There's no way!". The expectation level of these lines increases in the order of "I won't lose!", "You look strong!", and "There's no way!".
Fig. 387(a) shows a display state in which a line with a low expectation level, "I won't lose!", is displayed. Fig. 387(b) shows a display state in which a line with a medium expectation level, "He looks strong!", is displayed. Fig. 387(c) shows a display state in which a line with a high expectation level, "There's no way!", is displayed. As shown in these figures, the facial expression and weapon holding style of the opponent character (here, a samurai character) may be displayed in a manner that matches the line.

As shown in the time chart in Figure 381 (a), in the fifth variable display, a "reach performance dialogue preview performance" is performed from timing t41 to timing t45.
Fig. 387(d) shows the display state at timing t40 before the execution of the "reach effect line preview effect" starts. Also, Fig. 387(e) shows the display state at timing t42 when the "reach effect line preview effect" starts and the line "We won't lose!" is displayed. Here, the number of seconds indicated by the scroll with timer on the far left is "1:00", indicating that the "scroll release effect" will occur in one second.
At timing t43, a "scroll release effect" is performed. In the "scroll release effect," the scroll with timer moves to the center of the display area and then unfolds, making predetermined text ("Chance!") visible, and the dialogue changes from "We won't lose!" to "You look strong!" (The dialogue may also be changed after a predetermined time (e.g., 1 second) has elapsed since the predetermined text was displayed). At this point, the number of scrolls displayed in the upper left of the display area becomes zero. Figure 387(f) shows the display state at timing t43.
At timing t45, the "reach effect line preview effect" ends, and the display of the line display frame, lines, and scroll ends. Also, at this timing, the "scroll stock effect" ends.

During the period from timing t45 to timing t57, a display is shown of a fighter character and a samurai character fighting, and if the fighter character wins, at timing t57 the decorative symbols during reach are temporarily stopped in a manner indicating a jackpot (for example, "2", "2", "2"), and at timing t59 the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.
On the other hand, if the samurai character wins, the decorative symbols during the reach are temporarily stopped in a manner indicating a miss (for example, "2", "3", "2") at timing t57, and the decorative symbols are displayed stopped in a manner indicating a miss at timing t59.

Next, referring to the time charts of Figures 381(c) and 381(d), an example of a presentation when the "scroll stock presentation" is not executed will be shown.
The time charts shown in Figures 381(c) and 381(d) show examples of effects when the various effects executed in the fifth variable display shown with reference to Figures 381(a) and 381(b) are executed without the ``scroll stock effect.''
In this example, no scrolls are acquired or released, and therefore the preview mode (such as the type of dialogue or the background color within the frame) does not change at timing t4, timing t19, timing t33, or timing t43.

According to this embodiment, it is not possible to know when a scroll without a timer will be released, but it is possible to clearly indicate the release timing of a scroll with a timer.
In the above embodiment, scrolls are released in all of the "Step Up Preview Effect,""Dialogue Preview Effect,""Reach Title Preview Effect," and "Dialogue Preview Effect During Reach Effect," but the number of scrolls acquired ranges from 0 to 4. Therefore, for example, if the number of scrolls acquired is small (for example, 1), the player can enjoy imagining in which preview effect the "scroll release effect" will be executed.
In addition, the "Step-up notice effect" and "Dialogue notice effect" are executed before the reach state is reached, and the "Look-up title notice effect" and "Look-up dialogue notice effect during reach effect" are executed during the reach effect. Therefore, depending on the length of time indicated by the scroll with timer, the player can enjoy imagining whether or not a reach effect will occur and which notice effect the scroll with timer corresponds to.
Although four effects, "Step-up preview effect,""Dialogue preview effect,""Reach title preview effect," and "Dialogue preview effect during reach effect," have been given as examples, the preview effects performed in one change may be more than the maximum number of scrolls that can be obtained (four). In this way, the player can enjoy wondering which preview effect corresponds to which scroll release effect.

In the scroll acquisition pattern PTN04 and scroll acquisition pattern PTN08 shown in the scroll acquisition pattern table (Figure 379), it is possible to acquire a scroll without a timer after acquiring a scroll with a timer (while the countdown display for the scroll with a timer is being displayed).
According to this embodiment, the player can be entertained even during the period until the timer of the scroll with a timer reaches zero.
Alternatively, a scroll with a timer may be acquired, and a scroll without a timer may be acquired before the countdown for that scroll begins (before the scroll with a timer starts moving to the top left of the display area or finishes moving).

In the scroll acquisition pattern PTN05 and scroll acquisition pattern PTN11 shown in the scroll acquisition pattern table (Figure 379), it is possible to acquire a scroll with a timer after acquiring a scroll without a timer.
According to such an embodiment, the player may be able to acquire a new scroll with a timer while waiting in anticipation to see what will be displayed on the scroll without a timer, further increasing the player's sense of excitement.

In the scroll acquisition pattern PTN03 and scroll acquisition pattern PTN08 shown in the scroll acquisition pattern table (Figure 379), it is possible to acquire a scroll without a timer after acquiring a scroll without a timer.
According to such an embodiment, the player may be able to acquire a new scroll without a timer while waiting in anticipation to see what will be displayed on the scroll without a timer, which can further increase the player's sense of excitement.
In the embodiment described below, it is possible to acquire multiple types of scrolls without a timer, each with a different expected value, depending on the display mode. In such an embodiment, it may be possible to acquire the same scroll without a timer after acquiring a scroll without a timer, or to acquire a different scroll without a timer after acquiring a scroll without a timer. For example, it may be possible to acquire a red scroll without a timer, with a relatively high expected value, after acquiring a blue scroll without a timer, with a relatively low expected value.
According to such an embodiment, it may be possible to obtain a scroll without a timer with high expectation in a situation where a scroll without a timer with low expectation has been obtained, thereby preventing a decrease in the player's interest in the "scroll stock effect."

A martial artist character may be provided with multiple display modes. For example, two types of display modes for a martial artist character may be provided: a martial artist character without a halo and a martial artist character with a halo. Compared to a martial artist character without a halo, a martial artist character with a halo has a higher probability of winning a battle, i.e., a higher probability of obtaining a scroll (i.e., a higher chance of winning a jackpot). Figure 388 (a) shows a display state in which a halo is displayed behind the martial artist character. The display mode of a martial artist character is not limited to whether or not a halo is present. Different display modes can be realized by changing the facial expression of the martial artist character, by having the martial artist character hold one of a number of weapons (such as a club, hammer, or nunchucks), or by combining these modes.
According to this embodiment, the probability of obtaining a scroll varies depending on the display mode of the martial artist character, which can increase the sense of expectation for obtaining a scroll.

The demon character may have multiple display modes. For example, two types of demon characters may be provided: one with one horn and one with two horns. The two-horned demon character is weaker than the one with two horns, and therefore the martial artist character has a higher chance of winning the battle, i.e., a higher chance of obtaining the scroll (i.e., a higher chance of winning the jackpot). Figure 388(b) shows a display state in which, from left to right, a one-horned demon character, a two-horned demon character, a two-horned demon character, and a one-horned demon character are displayed. This example is not limiting; either a one-horned demon character or a two-horned demon character can be appropriately placed for each of the first to fourth standby reserves. The most desirable situation for a player is when all demon characters have two horns. Conversely, the least desirable situation for a player is when all demon characters have one horn. The number of types of demon characters may be three or more.
Furthermore, multiple types of display objects, such as other characters and treasure chests, other than the demon character, may be displayed, and scrolls may be acquired depending on the results of battles between the martial artist character and these characters, or whether the martial artist character is able to open the treasure chest. Furthermore, the probability of acquiring a scroll may be varied depending on the type of these characters.
According to such an embodiment, the probability of obtaining a scroll varies depending on the type of character or object displayed, which can increase the sense of expectation for obtaining a scroll.

In addition, it may be possible for a martial artist character without a halo to change into a martial artist character with a halo, or for a martial artist character with a halo to change into a martial artist character without a halo, during the "scroll stock effect" (at the end or start of a change, after fighting a demon character and the result is displayed (after it is displayed whether the martial artist character won or lost the battle) etc.).
Similarly, during the "scroll stock effect," an oni character with one horn may change into an oni character with two horns, or an oni character with two horns may change into an oni character with one horn.
For example, in a "scroll stock effect" that is started when there are four reserved scrolls, the display mode of the martial artist character or the type of demon character may be changed when the "scroll acquisition effect" is executed twice.
According to such an embodiment, the probability of obtaining a scroll increases or decreases during the "scroll stock effect," thereby increasing the interest of players hoping to obtain a scroll.
It is also possible to make it possible to execute only effects that increase the probability of obtaining a scroll, and not execute effects that decrease the probability of obtaining a scroll.

Although the embodiment has been described in which the likelihood of obtaining a scroll differs depending on the display mode of the martial artist character, the display mode of the martial artist character may be of three or more types. In addition, it is also preferable to make the probability of obtaining a scroll differ depending on the type.
Note that any one of a number of types of characters (for example, a martial artist character, a samurai character, a warrior character, or a wizard character) may be displayed, and the probability of obtaining a scroll may differ depending on the displayed character. Also, it may be possible to display a number of display modes for characters other than martial artists, and the probability of obtaining a scroll may differ depending on the type and display mode of the character.
Although two types of demon characters are shown, three or more types may be displayed. The probability of obtaining a scroll may differ depending on the type.

Although an embodiment in which a demon character with one horn and a demon character with two horns appear has been shown, the rate at which a scroll can be acquired when winning a battle may differ depending on the type of demon character. For example, when defeating a demon character with one horn, there is a 1/3 chance of acquiring a scroll without a timer and a 2/3 chance of acquiring a scroll with a timer, and when defeating a demon character with two horns, there is a 2/3 chance of acquiring a scroll without a timer and a 1/3 chance of acquiring a scroll with a timer.
Alternatively, if the player defeats a demon character with one horn, the player may acquire a scroll with a timer, and if the player defeats a demon character with two horns, the player may acquire a scroll without a timer.

In the embodiment shown, the ratio of scrolls with timers and scrolls without timers obtained when a battle is won differs depending on the type of demon character, but the ratio of scrolls with timers and scrolls without timers obtained when a battle is won may also differ depending on the display mode of the martial artist character. For example, the probability of obtaining a scroll with a timer may be higher when a martial artist character with a halo wins a battle compared to when a martial artist character without a halo wins a battle.

As mentioned above, there are scrolls with timers and scrolls without timers that can be obtained, but the display mode (timer time) at the start of the display of a scroll with a timer can be set in multiple ways, and the longer this time, the higher the chance of a jackpot. Furthermore, the time displayed at the start of the countdown is set so that the countdown ends when a specified preview effect is being executed. The time displayed at the start of the countdown is determined based on the time required for the decorative pattern to change multiple times. In other words, the longer the time displayed on the scroll with timer (the remaining time on the countdown) at the start of the changing display corresponding to the starting winning that was the subject of the pre-reading process, the higher the chance of a jackpot.

Similarly, the display mode of the scroll without a timer may be of multiple types (two or more types). In addition, it is preferable that the probability of winning the jackpot differs depending on the type.
Specifically, three types of scrolls without a timer may be displayed: blue, green, and red. In this case, it is preferable that the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of blue scrolls without a timer, green scrolls without a timer, and red scrolls without a timer. Figure 388(c) shows a display state in which four scrolls without a timer have been acquired. The scroll acquisition states show, from the left, a blue scroll without a timer, a blue scroll without a timer, a green scroll without a timer, and a red scroll without a timer.
The thickness of the scroll may vary depending on the color of the scroll without a timer. For example, the length or thickness of the scroll may increase in the order of a blue scroll without a timer, a green scroll without a timer, and a red scroll without a timer.
According to this embodiment, the likelihood of a jackpot can be indicated in advance by the display mode of the scroll without a timer, thereby increasing the sense of anticipation for a jackpot to occur.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which a scroll without a timer may have a plurality of display modes, the display content displayed when the scroll is opened may differ depending on the type of scroll without a timer.
For example, a blue scroll without a timer may display either "Up!" or "Change!", and a green scroll without a timer may display either "Hot!" or "Super Hot!".
According to such an embodiment, different displays are made depending on the type of timer-less scroll being displayed, so the player can know in advance what kind of display will be made depending on the type of timer-less scroll.
In this way, by making the characters displayed on the blue no-timer scroll and the characters displayed on the green no-timer scroll completely different, it becomes clear which display will be made for each color no-timer scroll, and the player can hope that if it is a blue no-timer scroll, the display with the highest expectation of a win that can be made to appear on a blue no-timer scroll will be made, and if it is a green no-timer scroll, the player can hope that the display with the highest expectation of a win that can be made to appear on a green no-timer scroll will be made, so that the player can be excited about any color scroll.
Also, for example, in the case of a blue scroll without a timer, either "Rise!" or "Change!" may be displayed, and in the case of a green scroll without a timer, either "Rise!" or "Super Hot!" may be displayed. In this case, some of the elements displayed in the scroll release effect for the scroll without a timer will appear in common for multiple types of scrolls without a timer, so that even the blue scroll without a timer, which has a lower expectation of winning than the green scroll without a timer, can be expected to win. Also, all of the elements displayed in the scroll release effect may be the same for multiple types of scrolls without a timer.

In the embodiment shown, when the "scroll release effect" is executed, the display mode of the preview effect being executed changes and the expectation level always increases, but it is also possible to provide a case where the expectation level does not change.
For example, when a "scroll release effect" is executed using a scroll with a timer, the display mode of the preview effect being executed will always change, but when a "scroll release effect" is executed using a scroll without a timer, even when the scroll is opened, there may be no text written inside the scroll, or only the letter "X" written inside, and the display mode of the preview effect being executed may not change.
According to this embodiment, it is possible to increase the sense of tension when the scroll unfolds. Also, since the display that increases the expectation of the preview effect being executed is not performed, it is possible to increase the appearance rate of the "scroll stock effect."

Referring to Figures 389(a) to 389(c), an embodiment in which the "scroll release effect" is applied to the hold change effect will be described.
At timing t18 in Figure 381, if a hold change effect is performed instead of a "dialogue preview effect," the display state at timing t18 will be the display state shown in Figure 389 (a). At this timing, the color of the current hold image is white.
Next, at timing t19, the timer scroll opens and the message "Pending change!" is displayed. At this time, the color of the current pending image changes from white to a more promising color. Figure 389(b) shows the display state in which the color of the current pending image has changed from white to green as a result of the pending change effect. Figure 389(c) also shows the display state in which the color of the current pending image has changed from white to red as a result of the pending change effect.
As mentioned above, the relationship between the color of the current pending image and the degree of expectation is as follows: for example, the degree of expectation increases in the order of white, blue, green, red, and gold.
In this way, even if the target whose display mode changes is the current reserved image due to the scroll release effect, it is possible to increase interest. Note that the color of the current reserved image may be changed after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the display of "Reserved change!"

Referring to Figures 389(d) to 389(f), an embodiment in which the "scroll release effect" is applied to the "character display effect" that indicates the degree of expectation will be described.
If a "text display effect" is performed instead of a "dialogue preview effect" at timing t18 in Figure 381, the display state at timing t18 will be the display state shown in Figure 389 (d).
Next, at timing t19, a display is made to open the scroll with a timer. Inside the opened scroll, there is written the words "Maybe it's hot?", which indicates a relatively low level of expectation, the words "Hot!", which indicates a hypothetical medium level of expectation, or the words "Super hot!!", which indicates a relatively high level of expectation. Figure 389(e) shows a display state in which the words "Maybe it's hot?" are displayed. Also, Figure 389(f) shows a display state in which the words "Super hot!!" are displayed.
Although the types of characters displayed in the "character display effect" are three types with relatively different degrees of expectation, any number of types (two or more) may be used.
In this way, the "scroll release effect" may be configured to display text indicating the degree of expectation.

Referring to Figure 390, an embodiment in which the "scroll release effect" is applied to the "cut-in preview effect" that displays a cut-in image will be described.
An example of the display when a "cut-in preview effect" is performed at timing t50 in Figure 381 is shown below. The display state at timing t49, which is the timing immediately before the cut-in preview effect is executed, is as shown in Figure 390(a).
Next, at timing t50, the "cut-in preview effect" begins, and a horizontally long rectangular frame and a wizard character are displayed as a cut-in image. The "cut-in preview effect" is executed for four seconds until timing t54. Figure 390(b) shows the display state at timing t50.
At timing t52, a display is made of the scroll with a timer being opened. The word "Chance!" is written inside the opened scroll, and the background color of the frame of the cut-in image changes from white to red. Figure 390(c) shows the display state at this time.
There are three background colors within the frame of the cut-in image: white, red, and gold. The likelihood of winning increases in the order of white, red, and gold.
In this way, the "scroll release effect" may change the background color of the cut-in image to increase the expectation level.

When displaying the title of a reach effect, a predetermined number of stars (anywhere from 1 to 5) may be displayed in the display area, and the number of stars may indicate the likelihood of the reach effect. Also, if the likelihood of the reach effect increases due to a "scroll release effect," the number of displayed stars may be increased to indicate the increased likelihood of the reach effect.

Referring to Figures 380 to 387, an embodiment has been shown in which, during the execution of a "scroll stock effect," a "scroll release effect" is executed at a predetermined timing after all "scroll acquisition effects" in which a martial artist character and a demon character battle have been completed, but it is also possible to execute the "scroll release effect" at a timing before all "scroll acquisition effects" have been executed.
For example, a "scroll release effect" may be executed during a "scroll acquisition effect," and a display may be displayed showing the martial artist character winning the battle against the demon character. In this case, the scroll that can be acquired may have a higher probability of success than the scroll that is released. For example, a scroll with a timer may be acquired as a result of releasing a scroll without a timer. Or, a green or red scroll without a timer may be acquired as a result of releasing a blue scroll without a timer.

Note that if the "scroll stock effect" is executed but no scroll is acquired, the game becomes significantly less interesting. Therefore, it may be possible to make it so that at least one scroll is acquired.

When a scroll with a timer is acquired, the countdown may begin when the scroll is displayed (as shown in Figure 382(f)). Alternatively, the countdown may begin when the scroll begins to move or while it is in the middle of moving (as shown in Figure 382(g)). Alternatively, the countdown may begin when the scroll finishes moving (as shown in Figure 382(h)).

In the embodiments shown with reference to Figures 380, 381(a), 381(b), etc., the scrolls are released in the order in which they were acquired, but the scrolls may also be released in other ways.
For example, in a situation where both a scroll without a timer and a scroll with a timer have been acquired, the "scroll release effect" corresponding to the scroll without a timer may be executed first, and then the "scroll release effect" corresponding to the scroll with a timer may be executed. According to such an embodiment, the timing of the release of the scroll can be made clear in a relatively later period in the entire variable display.
In addition, in this case, the "scroll release effect" using the scroll with a timer will not begin to be executed until the specified display of the "scroll release effect" using the scroll without a timer has ended (the countdown display will never reach 0), so the time during which the countdown display is performed will be longer than the time during which the scroll without a timer is displayed.
Furthermore, by doing this, the "scroll release effect" by the scroll with a timer can be thought of as a chance-up effect that occurs in the latter half of the variable display of the target that is supposed to perform the "scroll stock effect" (for example, it can be thought of as being performed in response to the title display of a reach effect or a cut-in display during a reach effect), and therefore the "scroll release effect" by the scroll without a timer can be thought of as a chance-up effect that occurs in the first half of the variable display (for example, a "step-up notice effect"). A player who has thought of this in this way can hope that when the "step-up notice effect" that occurs in the first half of the variable display is performed, not only the display with the highest expectation will be displayed, but also a display with an expectation one step lower than the highest expectation will be displayed, which can increase the interest, and a player who thinks that the "scroll release effect" by the scroll without a timer will be performed when the "step-up notice effect" is being performed will be able to easily time when they want the display with the highest expectation to be displayed.

Conversely, in a situation where both a scroll without a timer and a scroll with a timer have been acquired, the "scroll release effect" corresponding to the scroll with a timer may be executed first, and then the "scroll release effect" corresponding to the scroll without a timer may be executed. According to such an embodiment, the timing of the release of the scroll can be made ambiguous in a relatively later period in the entire variable display.
In addition, in this case, the "scroll release effect" using the scroll without a timer will not begin to be executed until the specified display of the "scroll release effect" using the scroll with a timer has ended (while the countdown display is being displayed).The time during which the countdown display is displayed is shorter than the time during which the scroll without a timer is displayed, so although the timing of recall described in the previous paragraph is reversed, the same effect can be achieved.

Although embodiments of "step-up preview performance,""dialogue preview performance,""reach title preview performance,""reach preview performance," and "cut-in preview performance" have been shown, rather than executing these preview performances in separate periods, the execution periods of two or more preview performances may overlap for at least a portion of the period.
For example, the execution of the second preview effect may be started while the first preview effect is being executed. Also, the execution of the first preview effect may be started while the second preview effect is being executed. Also, the execution of the first preview effect and the second preview effect may be started simultaneously.
Furthermore, the execution of the second preview effect may be completed while the first preview effect is being executed. Furthermore, the execution of the first preview effect may be completed while the second preview effect is being executed. Furthermore, the execution of the first preview effect and the second preview effect may be completed simultaneously.
These may also be combined.
For example, the execution of the "dialogue preview effect" may be started while the "step-up preview effect" is being executed.

Specifically, for example, when the third stage of the "Step-Up Preview Effect" of FIG. 384(c) is displayed, the character of FIG. 385(a) may be displayed. By doing so, even if multiple scrolls are acquired, it is possible to execute the "Scroll Release Effect" using the acquired scrolls within a relatively short period of time. In this case, for example, when a "Scroll Release Effect" (such as "Up!") corresponding to a scroll with a timer is displayed, a "Scroll Release Effect" (such as "Up!") corresponding to a scroll without a timer can also be displayed. In this case, the display of the "Scroll Release Effect" corresponding to the scroll with a timer and the display of the "Scroll Release Effect" corresponding to the scroll without a timer may be displayed so that they partially overlap, or so that they do not overlap. Furthermore, the "Scroll Release Effect" displayed first may be hidden first, or the "Scroll Release Effect" displayed later may be hidden first, or both may be hidden simultaneously.
Furthermore, when a "scroll release effect" (display such as "Rise!") corresponding to a scroll without a timer is displayed while a "scroll release effect" (display such as "Rise!") corresponding to a scroll with a timer is displayed, the player's eyes will be drawn to the display corresponding to the "scroll release effect" that was displayed later. Therefore, by making the time for which the display corresponding to the "scroll release effect" that was displayed earlier is displayed longer than the time for which the display corresponding to the "scroll release effect" that was displayed later is displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing (forgetting) the displays corresponding to multiple "scroll release effects."

Also, an example has been given in which a "scroll release effect" (display such as "Rise!") corresponding to a scroll without a timer is displayed when a "scroll release effect" (display such as "Rise!") corresponding to a scroll with a timer is displayed, but the same applies when a "scroll release effect" (display such as "Rise!") corresponding to a scroll with a timer is displayed when a "scroll release effect" (display such as "Rise!") corresponding to a scroll with a timer is displayed, when a "scroll release effect" (display such as "Rise!") corresponding to a scroll without a timer is displayed, a "scroll release effect" (display such as "Rise!") corresponding to a scroll with a timer is displayed, and when a "scroll release effect" (display such as "Rise!") corresponding to a scroll without a timer is displayed, a "scroll release effect" (display such as "Rise!") corresponding to a scroll without a timer is displayed.
Although an example has been shown in which the time for which the display corresponding to the "scroll release effect" displayed earlier is displayed is longer than the time for which the display corresponding to the "scroll release effect" displayed later is displayed, the time for which the display corresponding to the "scroll release effect" displayed earlier may be shorter than the time for which the display corresponding to the "scroll release effect" displayed later is displayed. This is because the display corresponding to the "scroll release effect" displayed earlier is displayed to some extent, and there is a possibility that the player will recognize it.
Furthermore, the display corresponding to the "scroll release effect" may be displayed for the same amount of time regardless of whether the "scroll release effect" was performed earlier or later. By setting the display time to be the same, the time until it is hidden becomes fixed, which can prevent the player from misunderstanding (such as wondering if the display time is long and therefore a chance).

When multiple preview effects are executed simultaneously, the display area may be divided into multiple areas, and preview effects may be executed in each divided area. For example, the display area may be divided into left and right halves, and a display related to a "step-up preview effect" may be executed on the left side of the display area, and a display related to a "dialogue preview effect" may be executed on the right side of the display area.

Furthermore, although an embodiment has been shown in which the display mode of the "step-up preview effect,""dialogue preview effect,""reach title preview effect,""dialogue preview effect during reach effect,""cut-in preview effect," etc. is changed by the "scroll release effect," as mentioned above, for example, the "step-up preview effect" and the "dialogue preview effect" may be executed at approximately the same time, and both the display of the "step-up preview effect" with the expectation level increased by the "scroll release effect" and the display of the "dialogue preview effect" with the expectation level increased by the "scroll release effect" may be displayed. In such cases, the display periods in the display mode after the change in the display mode (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "post-change display mode") will overlap for at least a portion of the period.
In this case, the display of the second post-change display mode may be started while the first post-change display mode is being displayed. Alternatively, the display of the first post-change display mode may be started while the second post-change display mode is being displayed. Alternatively, the display of the first post-change display mode and the second post-change display mode may be started simultaneously.
The display of the second post-change display mode may be terminated while the first post-change display mode is being displayed. The display of the first post-change display mode may be terminated while the second post-change display mode is being displayed. The displays of the first post-change display mode and the second post-change display mode may be terminated simultaneously.
These may also be combined.
For example, the period during which a scroll is released during the execution of a "step-up preview performance" and the background color is displayed in the changed background color and the period during which a scroll is released during the execution of a "dialogue preview performance" and the dialogue is displayed in the changed dialogue may overlap for at least a portion of the period.
In this way, by simultaneously displaying multiple post-change display modes, the sense of excitement felt when a jackpot occurs can be further enhanced.

Between the time a scroll with a timer is acquired and the time the "scroll release effect" performed for that scroll with a timer is performed (or until the display mode changes due to the "scroll release effect" and is displayed after the change), a player-participation effect (a preview effect different from the above-mentioned "step-up preview effect,""dialogue preview effect,""reach title preview effect,""reach dialogue preview effect," and "cut-in preview effect") may be executed, in which operation instructions are displayed on an operation unit that the player can operate (e.g., operation button 401, attack button 3710, etc.), and result effects displayed by operating the operation instructions, player-participation effect, and operation unit (including result effects that are displayed without operating the operation means) may be displayed. In this case, interest can be maintained even before the countdown displayed by the scroll with a timer reaches "0."
The same can be done for scrolls without a timer, but since the player does not know when the "scroll release effect" will be executed for scrolls without a timer, it is preferable not to execute the player participation effect (start of display of operation instructions) described above between the time the scroll without a timer is acquired and the time the "scroll release effect" is executed for the scroll without a timer.
On the other hand, if a player has acquired both scrolls with timers and scrolls without timers, the aforementioned player participation effect (start of operation instruction display) is not performed until the first scroll release effect is executed, but the player participation effect (start of operation instruction display) may be performed thereafter, or the player participation effect (start of operation instruction display) may be performed before the first "scroll release effect" is executed, or the player participation effect (start of operation instruction display) may be performed after a predetermined number of "scroll release effects" that are less than the number of scrolls acquired have been executed, or the player participation effect (start of operation instruction display) may be performed after "scroll release effects" corresponding to all of the scrolls acquired have been executed. Furthermore, the player participation effect may be performed multiple times in a variation that is the target of the "scroll stock effect." In this case, multiple player participation effects (start of operation instruction display) may be performed before the first ``scroll release effect'' is executed, or multiple player participation effects (start of operation instruction display) may be performed after the ``scroll release effect'' is executed and before the next ``scroll release effect'' is executed, or one player participation effect (start of operation instruction display) may be performed after the scroll release effect is executed and before the next ``scroll release effect'' is executed, with the remaining player participation effects (start of operation instruction display) being executed after the next ``scroll release effect'' is executed, or multiple player participation effects (start of operation instruction display) may be performed after ``scroll release effects'' corresponding to all of the scrolls that have been acquired are executed.

In response to the execution of the "scroll release effect," the above-mentioned luminous decorative member may be illuminated.
As the luminous decorative member, for example, one or more of the door frame left side unit 530, door frame right side unit 550, door frame top unit 570, right ear frame movable body 7100, left ear frame movable body 7200 provided on the door frame 3, the panel board rear substrate 2420 provided on the game board 5, the tank role-playing device 3770, etc. can be used.
When performing the "scroll release effect" for a scroll without a timer, it is advisable to make the luminous decorative member emit light in a specific luminous manner.
The timing to start light emission in a specific light emission mode can be either before the start of the "scroll release performance", or simultaneously with the start of the "scroll release performance", or after the start of the "scroll release performance". Furthermore, the timing to end light emission in a specific light emission mode can be either before the start of the "scroll release performance", or simultaneously with the start of the "scroll release performance", or after the start of the "scroll release performance".
The illuminating decorative member having the specific light emitting mode may be one or more of the above-mentioned members. Alternatively, the specific light emitting mode may be such that the illuminating decorative member provided on the door frame 3 and the illuminating decorative member provided on the game board 5 are illuminated in a predetermined mode, and then the illuminating decorative member provided on the door frame 3 is illuminated in a predetermined mode.
With a scroll without a timer, there is a risk that the player will miss the changed display mode because it is not known when the scroll will be released, but this embodiment can prevent the player from missing the changed display mode.
When a "scroll release effect" is performed for a scroll with a timer, the luminous decorative members may not be illuminated in a specific illumination mode. In this case, it is preferable to use an illumination mode that matches the background music being output as the illumination mode of the luminous decorative members. This is because the timer counts down, allowing the player to recognize the timing of the scroll release. According to this embodiment, excessive effects can be prevented.

The above-mentioned movable decorative member may be moved in response to the execution of the "scroll release effect."
As movable decorative members, for example, one or more of the door frame left side unit 530, door frame right side unit 550, door frame top unit 570, right ear frame movable body 7100, left ear frame movable body 7200 provided on the door frame 3, panel board rear base plate 2420 provided on the game board 5, tank role-playing device 3770, etc. can be used.
For scrolls without a timer and scrolls with a timer, a specific movable decorative member (which may be one or more) may be operated at the timing when the "scroll release performance" is executed.
In addition, a specific movable decorative member is operated at the timing when the ``scroll release performance'' is executed for a scroll without a timer, but when the ``scroll release performance'' is executed for a scroll with a timer, the specific movable decorative member may not be operated.
In addition, a specific movable decorative member may not be operated when the "scroll release performance" is executed for a scroll without a timer, but a specific movable decorative member may be operated when the "scroll release performance" is executed for a scroll with a timer.
In addition, for scrolls without a timer and scrolls with a timer, it is possible to prevent a specific movable decorative member (which may be one or more) from operating at the timing when the ``scroll release performance'' is executed.
The operation of the movable decorative element may be, for example, moving from a standby position to a moving position. Furthermore, when the movable decorative element moves to the moving position, the predetermined preview display in the post-change display mode may overlap the movable decorative element in a front view. For example, a part or all of the predetermined preview display in the post-change display mode may overlap the movable decorative element. In this case, the visibility of the preview display in the post-change display mode may be reduced, but the player may feel a sense of excitement as they wonder what will be displayed.
On the other hand, when the movable decorative element moves to the moving position, the predetermined preview display in the post-change display mode may not overlap with the movable decorative element when viewed from the front.
In addition, when multiple movable decorative elements are moved to their moving positions, some of the movable decorative elements may overlap with a predetermined preview display in a post-change display mode when viewed from the front, while other movable decorative elements may not overlap with a predetermined preview display in a post-change display mode when viewed from the front.

In addition, an embodiment has been shown in which the display mode of the "step-up preview performance,""dialogue preview performance,""reach title preview performance,""dialogue preview performance during reach performance," and "cut-in preview performance" changes depending on the "scroll release performance," but the type of display mode after the display mode has changed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "post-change display mode") may be different between scrolls without a timer and scrolls with a timer.
For example, the number of post-change display modes displayed when a scroll with a timer is released may be greater than the number of post-change display modes displayed when a scroll without a timer is released. According to this embodiment, the player can wait with excitement to see which post-change display mode will be displayed during the period until the countdown reaches zero.
The number of post-change display modes displayed when a scroll without a timer is released may be the same as the number of post-change display modes displayed when a scroll with a timer is released. Alternatively, the number of post-change display modes displayed when a scroll with a timer is released may be less than the number of post-change display modes displayed when a scroll without a timer is released.

A predetermined sound effect may be output in response to the execution of the "scroll release effect."
Also, different sound effects may be output when a scroll without a timer is released and when a scroll with a timer is released.
Also, a sound effect may be output when a scroll without a timer is released, and no sound effect may be output when a scroll with a timer is released.
In addition, when a scroll without a timer is released, one of a plurality of sound effects corresponding to a plurality of post-change display modes may be output, and when a scroll with a timer is released, either no sound effect is output or the same sound effect is output regardless of the post-change display mode.
With a scroll without a timer, there is a risk that the player will miss the changed display mode because it is not known when the scroll will be released, but according to this embodiment, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the changed display mode.
For scrolls with a timer, a countdown sound may be output in accordance with a countdown display that starts a predetermined number of seconds before the scroll is released. For example, the sound may be output as "5,""4,""3,""2," and "1" from 5 seconds to 1 second before the scroll is released.

In this way, the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 378 to 390 can provide players with new and exciting experiences.

The light guide plate 1140 that functions as a decorative member will be described below with reference to Figures 391 and 392.
Fig. 391(a) is a front view, and Fig. 391(b) is a plan view (cross-sectional view). Fig. 392 shows the light guide plate 1140 and the display area 1600a of the game board side performance display device 1600 as viewed from the front.
The panel plate 1110 is provided with a panel plate opening 1118. A light guide plate 1140 is attached to the rear of the panel plate 1110 so as to close a part of the panel plate opening 1118. The size of the light guide plate 1140 is slightly larger than the display area 1600a.
The light guide plate 1140 is a flat member made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and has a light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 formed with fine irregularities on its rear surface. The thickness of the light guide plate 1140 is 2 mm. The shape of the portion where the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 is provided is a decorative shape such as a predetermined character, design, pattern, or letter (in the example described below, a monster character and multiple lightning bolts are expressed).
A light guide plate illumination member 1146 is attached along the vertical direction of the right end of the light guide plate 1140. The light guide plate illumination member 1146 is made up of a thin plate-shaped light guide plate substrate 1147 and a plurality of light guide plate light emitting members 1148 mounted on the light guide plate substrate 1147 along the longitudinal direction of the light guide plate substrate 1147. The light guide plate light emitting members 1148 are made up of full-color LEDs. The light emission of the light guide plate illumination member 1146 is controlled by a peripheral control board 1510.

The light emitted from the light guide plate illumination member 1146 is reflected within the light guide plate 1140 and reaches the left end of the light guide plate 1140. Therefore, the light emitted from the light guide plate illumination member 1146 reaches the entire area inside the light guide plate 1140.
Light that enters the light guide plate 1140 is diffusely reflected by the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142. A portion of the diffusely reflected light changes its optical path toward the player, and the portion where the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 is provided is visually recognized by the player as emitting light.
On the other hand, when the light guide plate illumination member 1146 is not emitting light, the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 is visually recognized as being substantially transparent, making it difficult for a player to notice the presence of the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142. Furthermore, the portion of the light guide plate 1140 where the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 is not provided is smooth, making it difficult for a player to notice the presence of the light guide plate 1140, regardless of whether the light guide plate illumination member 1146 is emitting light.
Therefore, when the light guide plate illumination member 1146 is emitting light, the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 is visible in a state of emitting light in a predetermined manner. Furthermore, the player can visually recognize the display content of the display area 1600a located behind the light guide plate 1140 in a state overlapping with the state in which the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 is emitting light.
Furthermore, when the light guide plate illumination member 1146 is not emitting light, the player can see the display content of the entire display area 1600 a located behind the light guide plate 1140 .

Next, with reference to Fig. 392, a description will be given of specific viewing modes of the display region 1600a and the light guide plate 1140. Fig. 392(a) to Fig. 392(c) are front views.
392(a) shows how the light guide plate 1140 (dashed line portion) overlaps with the display area 1600a (solid line portion). It also shows the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 provided on the light guide plate 1140. The light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 is provided near the center of the light guide plate 1140 in the shape of a monster character. Furthermore, light guide plate rough surface portions 1142 in the shape of lightning bolts are provided radially from the monster character as the center.
392(b) shows a state in which the decorative pattern is changing and the light guide plate illumination member 1146 is not emitting light. In this state, no light is introduced onto the light guide plate 1140, so the monster characters and lightning bolts are not visible, but the entire display content of the display area 1600a is visible.
392(c) shows a state in which the decorative pattern is changing and the light guide plate illumination member 1146 is emitting light. In this state, light emitted from the light guide plate illumination member 1146 is introduced into the light guide plate 1140, and the light is scattered by the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142, making the monster character and lightning visible.

In this way, by introducing the light emitted by the light guide plate illumination member 1146 into the light guide plate 1140, the light is diffused by the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 provided on the light guide plate 1140, and an image of a predetermined pattern (such as a monster character or a lightning bolt) formed by the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 can be displayed. Furthermore, when a player is viewing the display area 1600a, a predetermined image (here, an image of a monster character or an image of a lightning bolt) is suddenly displayed on the light guide plate 1140 located in front of the display area 1600a, giving the player a great surprise.

The light guide plate illumination member 1146 may be provided with a plurality of colors of light to be emitted. For example, when light of colors such as blue, green, and red is emitted, the light guide plate rough surface portion 1142 of the same shape can be made to emit light of different colors. While examples of indicating the degree of expectation by various images (such as reserved images and preview images) and the luminous color of the luminous decorative member have been described above, the degree of expectation of a jackpot or the like can be similarly indicated by the color of light introduced into the light guide plate 1140.
For example, three colors of light, blue, green, and red, may be introduced into the light guide plate 1140, with the expectation increasing in the order of blue, green, and red. In this case, the monster character and the lightning bolt will be displayed in one of the colors blue, green, and red.

Below, we will explain the ``weather forecast performance'' with reference to Figure 393.
The "weather forecast effect" displays an image depicting a weather phenomenon (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "weather phenomenon image") in the display area 1600a, and indicates the likelihood of a jackpot depending on the type of weather phenomenon image displayed.
There are three types of weather phenomenon images: a rain image, a lightning image, and a tornado image, and one of these images is displayed in the "weather forecast performance." The probability of winning a jackpot increases in the order of a rain image, a lightning image, and a tornado image. For example, the probability of winning when a rain image is displayed may be 3%, when a lightning image is displayed may be 7%, and when a tornado image is displayed may be 10%.
The "weather forecast" is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), and one of the weather phenomenon images continues to be displayed while the effect is being executed.

393(a) shows an example of the display state when the "weather forecast effect" is not being executed. Here, the normal background image A is displayed as the background image, the decorative pattern is in a state of high-speed fluctuation, and the current reserved image and two standby reserved images are displayed.
An example of the display when the "weather forecast" starts to be executed in this state is shown below.
Fig. 393(b) shows a state in which the "weather forecast effect" is executed and a rain image is displayed. Fig. 393(c) shows a state in which the "weather forecast effect" is executed and a lightning image is displayed. Fig. 393(d) shows a state in which the "weather forecast effect" is executed and a tornado image is displayed.
As shown in each figure, the display priority of the weather phenomenon image is set higher than the display priority of the background image, and lower than the display priority of the fourth pattern, the hold number display image, the current hold image, the waiting hold image, and the decorative pattern.

The "weather forecast effect" may indicate the likelihood that the result of the decorative pattern change during the change will result in a jackpot, or may indicate the likelihood that the result of the change corresponding to one of the standby images will result in a jackpot based on a pre-reading process.
Note that the weather phenomenon image may be displayed dynamically, for example, in the form of rain or lightning falling from above or a tornado moving from side to side.
In the example of the effect shown with reference to Fig. 393, the timing for executing the "weather forecast effect" is when the decorative symbols are fluctuating at high speed, but the "weather forecast effect" may also be executed when one to three of the left, center, and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped. For example, in the "pseudo consecutive effect," the "weather forecast effect" may be executed when the left, center, and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, or when the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped as the same symbol, resulting in a reach state.

The variation pattern table that determines the variation pattern will be explained with reference to Figure 394. Here, there are misses and jackpots as a result of the special lottery, and in the case of a miss, the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern table at the time of a miss shown in Figure 394 (a). In addition, in the case of a jackpot, the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern table at the time of a jackpot shown in Figure 394 (b).
The execution of the special lottery and the determination of the variation pattern are carried out by the main control board 1310, and the result of the special lottery and the determined variation pattern are sent as commands to the peripheral control board 1510. Based on the received result of the special lottery and the variation pattern, the peripheral control board 1510 performs effects such as display using the game board side effect display device 1600, output of sound, operation and illumination of decorative members, etc.

In this embodiment, the probability of a big win is 1/300. Also, for the sake of simplicity, it is assumed that small wins and misses with time reduction do not occur. Furthermore, the illustrated fluctuation pattern table is assumed to be a fluctuation pattern table that is referenced when a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 in a normal state (low probability non-time reduction state) and the number of reserved balls in the first starting port 2002 is 0.
In the loss fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation time becomes longer but the allocation probability becomes lower from fluctuation pattern 01 to fluctuation pattern 07. On the other hand, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation time becomes longer but the allocation probability becomes higher from fluctuation pattern 08 to fluctuation pattern 14. Note that the probability that fluctuation pattern 07 and fluctuation pattern 08 will be selected is set to 0% here.

From Figures 394(a) and 394(b), it can be said that the longer the fluctuation time of the decorative pattern, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. For example, the expectation rate for a fluctuation display with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds (fluctuation pattern 01, fluctuation pattern 08) is 0%, while the expectation rate for a fluctuation display with a fluctuation time of 120 seconds (fluctuation pattern 05, fluctuation pattern 12) is approximately 1.6%, the expectation rate for a fluctuation display with a fluctuation time of 180 seconds (fluctuation pattern 06, fluctuation pattern 13) is approximately 9.1%, and the expectation rate for a fluctuation display with a fluctuation time of 240 seconds (fluctuation pattern 07, fluctuation pattern 14) is 100%.

By adopting such a fluctuation pattern table, it becomes possible to execute pseudo consecutive effects or special reach effects when the fluctuation display is long.
Furthermore, the longer the time for which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the higher the probability of winning a big win, making it possible for the player to enjoy the elaborate presentation for a long period of time while keeping the player in anticipation of a big win.
In addition, in the variation pattern tables with the same number of seconds (for example, variation pattern 06 and variation pattern 13), the same effect display is executed until a predetermined timing of the variation display, and after the predetermined timing, a display is displayed indicating whether the result of the special lottery is a loss or a jackpot (for example, a win/loss display that is performed at the end of a special reach effect). By adopting such an embodiment, the player can guess the probability of a jackpot during the performance display, and can watch the results of the performance display while anticipating what kind of display will be made in the end.

Note that the number of variation patterns, variation times, and allocation probabilities shown in Figure 394 are merely examples, and it is possible to have six or more types of variation patterns, or to use other variation times such as 5 seconds, 90 seconds, or 300 seconds. By using such an embodiment, it is possible to execute a variety of effects while the decorative patterns are being displayed.

The table shown is one that is referenced when the state when the game ball enters the first starting port 2002 is normal (low probability non-time-saving state) and the number of reserved balls in the first starting port 2002 is 0, but different variation pattern tables may be used depending on the type of starting port into which the game ball entered (first starting port 2002, second starting port 2004), the game state (low probability non-time-saving state, high probability non-time-saving state, low probability time-saving state, high probability time-saving state), and the number of reserved balls (0 to 4).
For example, the five types of variable time may remain as shown in the example, but the allocation probability may be different. Alternatively, a variable pattern table with more or fewer types of variable time (number of seconds) may be used.

In particular, in the low-probability time-saving state and high-probability time-saving state, many game balls will enter the second starting port 2004 in a short period of time. Therefore, in the fluctuation pattern table for the second starting port 2004, it is advisable to set the allocation probability so that the fluctuation time is relatively short compared to the fluctuation pattern table used in the low-probability time-saving state and high-probability time-saving state. By adopting such a fluctuation pattern table, the number of times the decorative pattern is displayed per unit time can be increased, making it less likely that an over-entry will occur in the second starting port 2004, and preventing a decline in interest.

The fluctuation pattern table may also be set according to the number of reserved items. In this case, it is advisable to set the allocation probability so that the larger the number of reserved items, the shorter the fluctuation time. Conversely, it is advisable to set the allocation probability so that the smaller the number of reserved items, the longer the fluctuation time. By adopting such a fluctuation pattern table, the display of the decorative patterns is less likely to be interrupted, preventing a decline in interest.

The "hold change color indication effect," a special effect in an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 123 to 390, will be explained below with reference to Figures 395 to 405, etc. Figure 395 shows an example of an image displayed in this embodiment (or a modification), etc. Figures 396 and 397 show an effect pattern table in this embodiment. Figures 398 and 399 show time charts in this embodiment. Figures 400, 401, 403, 404, and 405 show display examples in display area 1600a of this embodiment.

The outline of the "hold change color indication effect" will be explained below. In the "hold change color indication effect", the color of the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed suggests the color to which the hold image will change.
In the "hold change color indication effect", the "first hold change color indication effect" and the "second hold change color indication effect" are executed, but there are cases where only the "first hold change color indication effect" is executed, and cases where the "second hold change color indication effect" is executed after the "first hold change color indication effect" is executed.

Figure 395 (a) shows an example of a decorative pattern displayed in the display area 1600a of the game board side performance display device 1600 in this embodiment.
The numbers in the decorative pattern are available in three colors: blue, green, and red. The numbers "1" through "9" are used in the decorative pattern. As shown in the figure, the numbers "2,""4,""6," and "8" are blue, the numbers "1,""5," and "9" are green, and the numbers "3" and "7" are red. In the figure, blue is represented by a diagonal line sloping downward to the left, green by a diagonal line sloping downward to the right, and red by a grid-like pattern. This point may also be applied to other drawings, and the color of images other than the decorative pattern may be indicated by the type of line. The portions of the decorative pattern other than the numbers (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "background area") may be white, gray, black, or other colors. Alternatively, a color similar to the color of the decorative pattern (navy blue or light blue if the decorative pattern is blue, yellow-green if the decorative pattern is green, or orange or pink if the decorative pattern is red) may be used.
In addition, decorative symbols with blue numbers are normal symbols, and decorative symbols with green or red numbers are probability symbols.
The type of decorative symbol forming the ready-to-win state may also indicate the likelihood of a jackpot. For example, if the numbers attached to the decorative symbol are "1,""2,""4,""5,""8," or "9," the likelihood may be less than 5%, 20% for "6," 50% for "3," and 90% (or even 100%) for "7." This increases the player's interest not only in whether the ready-to-win symbol is a normal symbol or a probability variable symbol (i.e., whether it is an even number or an odd number), but also in whether the number attached to the decorative symbol is a number from "1" to "9."
As shown in FIG. 395(b), the color of the background area of the decorative pattern may be a color (blue, green, red) corresponding to the type of number, not limited to numbers. In this case, the number portion of the decorative pattern may be colored white, gray, black, or the like. Alternatively, a color similar to the color of the background area (navy blue or light blue if the background area is blue, yellow-green if the background area is green, or orange or pink if the background area is red) may be used.
The decorative symbols are classified into normal decorative symbols and reach decorative symbols (sometimes called "special reach decorative symbols"). The normal decorative symbols are vertically long rectangular decorative symbols as shown in Figures 250(e), 274(a), 347(h), 395(a), 395(b), etc., and are decorative symbols that are displayed during periods other than when reach effects are being executed.
On the other hand, the reach decorative pattern is a square decorative pattern smaller than the normal decorative pattern as shown in Figures 250(a) and 274(b), and is a decorative pattern that is displayed in place of the normal decorative pattern during the execution of the reach effect. Specifically, at the start of the reach effect, the reach decorative pattern in the reach state is displayed in place of the normal decorative pattern in the reach state. At this time, the reach decorative pattern with the same number as the number of the normal decorative pattern is displayed. It is also preferable that the colors of the numbers in the reach decorative pattern are the same as the colors of the numbers in the normal decorative pattern, with "2", "4", "6", and "8" being blue, "1", "5", and "9" being green, and "3" and "7" being red.
Furthermore, at the end of the reach performance, instead of the reach decorative pattern in the reach state (or the reach miss or doublet state), a normal decorative pattern in the reach state (or the reach miss or doublet state) is displayed. At this time, a normal decorative pattern with the same number as the number of the reach decorative pattern is displayed.
During the reach effect, only the left and right reach decorative symbols may be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, and the center reach decorative symbol may not be displayed. Alternatively, the left and right reach decorative symbols may be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, and the center reach decorative symbol may be displayed in a state of high-speed or low-speed fluctuation. In either case, at the end of the reach effect, it is preferable to temporarily stop the center reach decorative symbol in a manner that results in a reach miss or a doublet.
In addition, as shown in Figure 274 (d), a right-hit decorative pattern that is displayed only during right-hit may be used. When a reach effect is executed during right-hit, a reach decorative pattern may be displayed instead of the right-hit decorative pattern in the same manner as in the case of normal decorative patterns. Alternatively, a reach decorative pattern exclusive to right-hit may be displayed.

Figure 395 (c) is a background image for the indication effect that is displayed as the background image in the "second hold color change indication effect" of the "hold color change indication effect." The background image for the indication effect is modeled after a slot machine installed in a casino facility. Note that the words "PAYS," "BET," and "SPIN" are also part of the background, but they do not indicate that the player's operation is being accepted; they simply function as decoration.

The colors used for the hold images (current hold image and standby hold image) are white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow. The color of the hold image is determined based on the look-ahead process. White is the color used for normal hold images. The likelihood of seeing these colors increases in the order of white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow. When a gold hold image is displayed, the likelihood is less than 100% (for example, 80%). When a rainbow hold image is displayed, the likelihood is 100%. The probability of seeing these colors decreases in the order of white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 during the display of the changing decorative symbols and a hold occurs, a pre-reading process performs a preliminary determination of the random number obtained at the time of the winning, and a decision is made as to whether or not to execute a "hold color change indication effect" based on the result of the preliminary determination. When it is decided to execute the "hold color change indication effect," the three decorative symbols on the left, center, and right are immediately displayed in a temporary stop state (no matter what the situation of the currently executing changing display (for example, a situation in which all of the decorative symbols are changing at high speed or a situation in which a reach effect is being executed)). Note that, as will be described in detail later, the condition under which it is decided to execute the "hold color change indication effect" is an effect that can be determined when the result of the currently executing changing display is a miss and the remaining time of the currently executing changing display is equal to or greater than a predetermined time.
In addition, all of the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped are the same color. For example, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in combinations such as "2", "4", "8" or "2", "2", "8" using blue decorative symbols, "9", "1", "1" or "1", "5", "9" using green decorative symbols, and "3", "3", "7" or "7", "3", "3" using red decorative symbols. Needless to say, other combinations may also be used as long as the condition that the colors of the decorative symbols on the left, center, and right are the same is met.

In addition, the combinations of decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped in the "First Hold Color Change Prediction Effect" and the "Second Hold Color Change Prediction Effect" described below do not include combinations that indicate a missed reach (the same decorative symbols on the left and right, and a different decorative symbol in the center) or a jackpot (the same decorative symbols on the left, center, and right). For example, decorative symbols will not be displayed temporarily stopped in combinations such as "2", "4", "2" or "2", "2", "2". This prevents players from mistaking that a missed reach has occurred or that a jackpot will occur after the temporary stop display ends.

In addition, the "hold color change indication effect" may be executed when the game ball enters the second starting hole 2004, not just the first starting hole 2002.

A pre-reading process is carried out based on the start winning, and based on the result of the advance determination of the pre-reading process, it is determined whether or not to execute the "hold change color indication effect."
In addition, if there are multiple pending orders (2 to 4 orders), the display mode of the pending order image for one of the pending orders will change according to the "pending order change color indication."
In addition, the result of the variable display being executed will always be "miss." In other words, if the result of the variable display being executed is a jackpot, the "hold color change indication effect" will not be executed.
In addition, the more reserved balls there are, the higher the probability that the "reserved ball color change indication effect" will be executed. In other words, the more reserved balls there are, the higher the probability that the reserved balls will contain a reserve that will result in a jackpot. As a result, the more reserved balls there are, the higher the probability that the "reserved ball color change indication effect" will be executed.
According to such an embodiment, a player who wants to start the "hold color change indication effect" will try to increase the number of reserved items, thereby improving the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, the display mode of the standby image corresponding to the start winning that triggered the execution of the pre-reading process may be changed by the "standby change color indication effect." In this case, the display mode of the standby image displayed most recently will be changed.
In this case too, players who want to start the "hold color change indication effect" will try to increase the number of reserved items, which can improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The presentation pattern table shown in Figure 396 indicates the relationship between the color of the decorative pattern that temporarily stops, the color of the aura image that is displayed, and the change pattern of the standby hold image in the "first hold change color indication presentation."
This effect pattern table shows the relationship between the color of the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped (the color of the aura image that is displayed) and the change in the standby image. For example, when effect pattern PTN-1-02 is executed, a blue decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, a blue aura image is displayed, and then the standby image changes from white to blue. When effect pattern PTN-1-07 is executed, a green decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, a green aura image is displayed, and then the standby image changes from white to red. When effect pattern PTN-1-09 is executed, a red decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, a red aura image is displayed, and then the standby image changes from white to red.
On the other hand, when the effect pattern PTN-1-01, effect pattern PTN-1-05, or effect pattern PTN-1-08 is executed, the color of any of the reserved images will not change, not just the color of the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped (the color of the aura image that is displayed).

In this way, the standby reserved image may change to a reserved image of a color with a higher expectation than the color of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern, but it will not change to a standby reserved image of a color with a lower expectation than the color of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern.
For example, if the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is blue, the white standby image may change to a blue, green, or red standby image. On the other hand, if the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is green, the white standby image may change to a green or red standby image, but it will not change to a blue standby image. Also, if the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is red, the white standby image may change to a red standby image, but it will not change to a blue or green standby image.
Therefore, even if the color of the temporarily stopped decorative symbol is blue, the player can hope for the possibility of it changing to red. Also, if the color of the temporarily stopped decorative symbol is red, it will not change to blue or green, so the player will only have hope for it changing to red.

Below, examples of effects when effect pattern PTN-1-01 or effect pattern PTN-1-02 is selected will be explained with reference to the time charts shown in Figures 398(a) and 398(b) and the display examples shown in Figures 400, 401, and 402. Note that an example is shown here in which a combination of decorative symbols "2," "4," and "8" temporarily stops. Note that Figures 398(a), 400, and 401 show examples in which the color of the standby reserve image does not change. On the other hand, Figures 398(b), 400, and 402 show examples in which the color of the standby reserve image changes. The content of both examples is the same up to a certain point. Therefore, the explanation up to that point covers both examples. Note that the explanation will be given assuming that the decorative symbol variable display is being executed, there are two standby reserves, and a new game ball enters first start slot 2002, resulting in the decision to execute a "reserve color change indication effect."

At timing t0, the display of the decorative symbols begins to change. The color of the current reserved image and the color of the two standby reserved images are white, which has the highest display rate as a reserved display. Figure 400 (a) shows the display state during the decorative symbol rapid change.
At timing t4.5, a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 2002, a white third standby reserve image is displayed, and a pre-reading process is performed. At timing t5, a "reserve color change indication effect" is started based on the result of the pre-reading process. Here, the effect pattern PTN-1-01 is selected, and the decorative symbols are displayed as a combination of "2", "4", and "8" in a temporary stop. The color of these decorative symbols is blue. Figure 400(b) shows the display state when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped. The "reserve color change indication effect" may be started at the timing when the pre-reading process is performed.
Next, at timing t6.0, one second after the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed as a combination of "2", "4", and "8", the current reserved image is hidden. Figure 400 (c) shows the display state in which the current reserved image is hidden.
When the "hold change color indication effect" starts, it is confirmed that the variable display being executed will result in a loss, so it is preferable to hide the current hold image in order to avoid providing unnecessary anticipation, but it is also possible to leave the current hold image displayed.
In this case, just like the standby pending image, the current pending image is also displayed by moving it to the top right of the display area 1600a, and the current pending image is displayed until the changing display ends.

From timing t6.5 to timing t7.5, each standby image moves at a constant speed from the bottom right of display area 1600a toward the bottom center of display area 1600a. Fig. 400(d) shows the state in which the standby image has completed moving to the bottom center of display area 1600a.
Since the "hold change color indication effect" is an effect that may change the standby hold image, it is easier for the player to recognize if it is moved near the center of the display area 1600a. Also, although the standby hold image is described as moving at a uniform speed, it may be moved at different speeds, the timing of the movement may be staggered, or a combination thereof may be performed. When the timing of the movement is staggered, it is preferable to move the standby hold image that is drawn earlier more quickly so that multiple standby hold images are not displayed overlapping each other.
The arrows in the figure indicate the movement of the standby image and are not actually displayed in the display area 1600a. In other figures, arrows may also be included in the figure to indicate the trajectory of the current standby image or the standby image.
At timing t7.5, a blue aura image is displayed near the center of display area 1600a. Diagram 400(e) shows the display state in which the blue aura image is displayed.

From timing t7.5 to timing t10, the aura image moves downward and then gradually becomes smaller so that it overlaps with one of the waiting hold images. Figure 400(f) shows a display state in which the blue aura image moves downward and overlaps with the waiting hold image. Figure 400(g) shows a display state in which the reduced blue aura image overlaps with one waiting hold image (here, the first waiting hold image). As mentioned above, the display mode of the waiting hold image corresponding to the start winning that triggered the execution of the pre-reading process may be changed by a "hold change color indication effect." In this case, the display mode of the waiting hold image most recently displayed (the third waiting hold image shown in Figure 400) will change.

Below, we will explain an example of a presentation in which the color of the standby image does not change (presentation pattern PTN-1-01) with reference to Figure 398 (a).
At timing t10, the aura image is no longer displayed, and the color of the first standby image that overlaps the aura image remains white. Figure 401(a) shows the display state after the aura image has finished displaying.
From timing t11 to timing t12, the standby image moves toward the upper right of the display area 1600a at a constant speed. Fig. 401(b) shows the display state of the standby image while it is moving. Fig. 401(c) shows the state after the movement of the standby image is complete.
At timing t13, the left, center, and right decorative symbols enter a state of high-speed fluctuation. At the same time as the high-speed fluctuation resumes, the color of the decorative symbols returns to its original color. Figure 401(d) shows the state in which the temporary stop display of the left, center, and right decorative symbols ends and the high-speed fluctuation state resumes. When the left, center, and right decorative symbols enter a state of high-speed fluctuation, it is recommended to make the swaying decorative symbols semi-transparent (when semi-transparent, the type of decorative symbol can be recognized) before starting the high-speed fluctuation. This is because smooth movement does not cause a sense of incongruity to the player.
At timing t28.5, the left decorative symbol is temporarily displayed, at timing t29, the right decorative symbol is temporarily displayed, and at timing t29.5, the center decorative symbol is temporarily displayed. Next, at timing t30, the left, center, and right decorative symbols are temporarily displayed. Figure 401 (e) shows a display state in which the variable display has ended and the left, center, and right decorative symbols are temporarily displayed. It is also possible to display the left, center, and right decorative symbols temporarily at timing t30 without temporarily displaying them.
At timing t31, a new variable display begins, and the left, center, and right decorative symbols enter a high-speed variable state. At timing t31, the display of the reserved images displayed in the upper right corner of the display area 1600a as the first to third reserved images ends, and at the same time, the reserved images are displayed in the lower right corner of the display area 1600a as the current to second reserved images, and the "first reserved color change indication effect" ends. Figure 401(f) shows the state in which the left, center, and right decorative symbols enter a high-speed variable state.

Below, we will explain an example of a presentation in which the color of the standby image changes (presentation pattern PTN-1-02) with reference to Figure 398 (b).
At timing t10, the aura image is no longer displayed, and the color of the first standby image overlapping the aura image changes from white to blue, the color of the aura image. Figure 402(a) shows the display state after the aura image has finished displaying.
From timing t11 to timing t12, the standby image moves toward the upper right of the display area 1600a at a constant speed. Fig. 402(b) shows the display state of the standby image while it is moving. Fig. 402(c) shows the state after the movement of the standby image is complete.
At timing t13, the left, center, and right decorative symbols enter a state of high-speed fluctuation. At the same time as the high-speed fluctuation resumes, the color of the decorative symbols returns to its original color. Figure 402(d) shows the state in which the temporary stop display of the left, center, and right decorative symbols ends and the high-speed fluctuation state resumes. When the left, center, and right decorative symbols enter a state of high-speed fluctuation, it is recommended to make the swaying decorative symbols semi-transparent (when semi-transparent, the type of decorative symbol can be recognized) before starting the high-speed fluctuation. This is because smooth movement does not cause a sense of discomfort to the player.
At timing t28.5, the left decorative symbol is temporarily displayed, at timing t29, the right decorative symbol is temporarily displayed, and at timing t29.5, the center decorative symbol is temporarily displayed. Next, at timing t30, the left, center, and right decorative symbols are temporarily displayed. Figure 402 (e) shows a display state in which the variable display has ended and the left, center, and right decorative symbols are temporarily displayed. It is also possible to display the left, center, and right decorative symbols temporarily displayed at timing t30 without temporarily displaying them.
At timing t31, a new variable display begins, and the left, center, and right decorative symbols enter a high-speed variable state. At timing t31, the display of the reserved images displayed in the upper right corner of the display area 1600a as the first to third reserved images ends, and at the same time, the reserved images are displayed in the lower right corner of the display area 1600a as the current to second reserved images, and the "first reserved color change indication effect" ends. Figure 402(f) shows the state in which the left, center, and right decorative symbols enter a high-speed variable state.

In this way, in the "first hold change color indication effect," an aura image of the same color as the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is displayed. In addition, the color of one of the hold images may change to the color of the aura image or a color with a higher expectation value than the color of the aura image. For example, if a blue aura image is displayed as shown in effect patterns PTN-1-02 to PTN-1-04, the color of the hold image may change to blue, green, or red.

An example of the effect when there are three standby images is shown, but the "first standby color change indication effect" can also be executed when there are one, two, or four standby images. Note that regardless of the number of standby images, only one standby image changes.

It is also possible to indicate to the player in advance which standby images may change display mode. For example, from the same timing as the aura image starts to be displayed (timing t7.5), an arrow or marker may be placed around a standby image whose display mode may change, or a standby image whose display mode may change may be periodically enlarged or reduced. This embodiment makes it easier for the player to recognize which standby images may change. Note that this display mode may continue until the "hold change color indication effect" ends. Alternatively, it may end when the standby image changes due to one of the effects.

Furthermore, when the display mode of the standby image changes, an arrow or marker may be added to indicate the change, or the standby image whose display mode has changed may be periodically enlarged or reduced. For example, such a display may be started at timing t10. Note that the standby image may be enlarged and reduced a predetermined number of times before being finally displayed in an enlarged state, or the standby image may be gradually enlarged without being enlarged or reduced until it finally reaches a predetermined size.
This display emphasizing the standby image may be continued until the timing (timing t13) at which the execution of the "first standby color change indication effect" ends, or until the timing (timing t31) at which the standby image returns from the upper right position of the display area 1600a to the lower right position of the display area 1600a.
According to this embodiment, it is possible to make it clear that the standby image has changed. Furthermore, when multiple standby images are displayed, it is possible to make it clear which standby image has changed.

As shown in Figures 401(e), 401(f) and 402(e), 402(f), the standby image displayed in the upper part of the display area 1600a is erased at the same time as the start of the next variable display. At the same time, the current standby image and standby image are displayed in the standby image display area provided in the lower part of the display area 1600a.
In addition, a dynamic display may be performed in which the reserved image displayed at the top is moved to the bottom.

By executing the "first reserve color change indication effect" in this way, the player can be made aware of the color to which the reserve image may change, depending on the color of the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped and displayed. Furthermore, if there are multiple reserve images, the player can be made to feel a sense of anticipation as to which reserve image will change.

In addition, when the "first hold color change indication effect" is executed, the display position of the standby hold image within the display area 1600a is changed from its usual position in the bottom right to finally a position in the top right. This allows the standby hold image to be viewed dynamically. Also, because the standby hold image is moved while the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the player can more clearly recognize that it has moved. Furthermore, because the standby hold image is positioned in a different position than usual, other players can recognize that a highly anticipated effect has been performed.

Next, we will explain the "second hold color change indication effect." The "second hold color change indication effect" is an effect that may be performed after the execution of the "first hold color change indication effect," and in the "second hold color change indication effect," the standby hold image that changed in the "first hold color change indication effect" may further change.
The presentation pattern table shown in Figure 397 indicates the relationship between the color of the standby hold image after the change due to the "first standby hold change color indication presentation," the type and color of the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped in the "second standby hold change color indication presentation," the combination of the decorative patterns that are temporarily stopped, whether the decorative pattern continues to be temporarily stopped and the type and color of the decorative pattern if the temporary stop is continued, and the display mode of the standby hold image.

In the "second pending change color indication effect," the decorative symbols on the left, center, and right are displayed temporarily stopped, as in the "first pending change color indication effect." After that, the temporarily stopped decorative symbols change to a high-speed changing state in order. If all three decorative symbols are in a high-speed changing state, the standby pending image does not change. On the other hand, if two decorative symbols are in a high-speed changing state but one decorative symbol remains in a temporarily stopped state for a predetermined time, the color of the standby pending image is displayed changing to the color of the decorative symbol that remained in the temporarily stopped state.
During the "second reserved color change indication effect," the correspondence between the number and color of the decorative symbols changes. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 397, the decorative symbols temporarily become one of green, red, gold, or rainbow colors.
In addition, in the "second hold change color indication effect", the background image changes to the indication effect background image shown with reference to Figure 395 (c).

Below, we will explain the performance examples from timing t13 onwards when performance pattern PTN-1-02 and performance pattern PTN-2-06 (performance patterns in which the color of the standby hold image does not change from blue in the "second hold change color indication performance") are selected and executed, and when performance pattern PTN-1-02 and performance pattern PTN-2-08 (performance patterns in which the standby hold image changes from blue to red in the "second hold change color indication performance") are selected and executed, with reference to the time charts shown in Figures 399(a) and 399(b) and display examples shown in Figures 403, 404 and 405. Note that the performance content before timing t13 is omitted as it is the same as that shown with reference to Figures 398(a), 398(b) and 400 to 402.
399(a) is a time chart when effect pattern PTN-2-06 is executed, and FIG. 399(b) is a time chart when effect pattern PTN-2-08 is executed.

Figure 403(a) shows the display state from timing t12 to timing t13, in which the first pending waiting state has changed to blue and is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area 1600a.
From timing t13 to timing t13.5, an "advanced effect" is executed in which the characters "from..." are displayed. Figure 403(b) shows the display state at this time.
In other words, if the "development effect" is executed after the "first reserve color change indication effect" has ended, the "second reserve color change indication effect" will then start, but if the "development effect" is not executed after the "first reserve color change indication effect" has ended, the "second reserve color change indication effect" will not start.

It is also possible to have the "Second Pending Color Change Prediction Effect" not be executed even when the "Development Effect" is executed. In this case, at timing t13.5, the display of the words "From..." will end, and the display will change to the state shown in Figure 398.

At timing t13.5, the "second pending color change indication effect" is started. At the timing when the "second pending color change indication effect" is started, the background image is switched from the normal background image A shown with reference to FIG. 347(a) to the indication effect background image shown with reference to FIG. 395(c). As described above, the indication effect background image is modeled after a slot machine installed in a casino facility. The display of the indication effect background image indicates to the player that there is a possibility that the standby pending image will change further.
Additionally, a red "3" as the left decorative pattern, a green "2" as the center decorative pattern, and a red "7" as the right decorative pattern are temporarily displayed as initial patterns.
In addition, the words "Chance to upgrade to reserved position!" are displayed at the bottom of the display area 1600a as a text display indicating the effect.
FIG. 403(c) shows the display state from timing t13.5 to timing t14.5.

At timing t14.5, instead of the text "Chance to upgrade reserved!", the text "The reserved color will be upgraded to the color of the symbol on the reel that does not move until the end!" is displayed.
FIG. 403(d) shows the display state from timing t14.5 to timing t15.5.
At timing t15.5, the text "READY GO!" is displayed instead of the text "The reserved color will be upgraded to the color of the symbol on the reel that does not move until the end!"
FIG. 403(e) shows the display state from timing t15.5 to timing t16.
By displaying the information in this way, the player can fully understand the content of the presentation.

At timing t16, the display of the text "READY GO!" ends, and a horizontally long remaining time gauge image is displayed. The remaining time gauge image is displayed for three seconds, from timing t16 to timing t19.
The remaining time gauge image is entirely black when it first starts to be displayed, but gradually changes to white from the left side as time passes after the display starts, and finally turns entirely white when the display ends.
FIG. 403(f) shows the state immediately after the remaining time gauge image is displayed.
FIG. 403(g) shows the display state two seconds after the remaining time gauge image is displayed (timing t18).

Below, we will explain an example of a presentation in which the color of the standby image does not change (presentation pattern PTN-2-06) with reference to Figure 399 (a).
At timing t19, the display of the remaining time gauge image ends. At the same time, the left, center, and right decorative symbols change to a high-speed changing state. Figure 404(a) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t20.5, the display of the predictive effect background image ends, and the normal background image A is displayed as the background image. Figure 404(b) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t28.5, the left decorative symbol is temporarily displayed, at timing t29, the right decorative symbol is temporarily displayed, and at timing t29.5, the center decorative symbol is temporarily displayed. Next, at timing t30, the left, center, and right decorative symbols are temporarily displayed. Figure 404 (c) shows a display state in which the variable display has ended and the left, center, and right decorative symbols are temporarily displayed. It is also possible to display the left, center, and right decorative symbols temporarily at timing t30 without temporarily displaying them.
At timing t31, a new variable display begins, and the left, center, and right decorative symbols enter a high-speed variable state. Furthermore, the reserved images displayed in the upper right corner of the display area 1600a as the first to third reserved images end their display at timing t24, and are then displayed in the lower right corner of the display area 1600a as the current to second reserved images, ending the "second reserved color change indication effect." Figure 404(d) shows the state in which the left, center, and right decorative symbols enter a high-speed variable state.

Below, we will explain an example of a presentation in which the color of the standby image changes (presentation pattern PTN-2-08) with reference to Figure 399 (b).
At timing t19, the display of the remaining time gauge image ends. At the same time, the center decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol enter a high-speed fluctuating state. The left decorative symbol remains temporarily stopped. Figure 405 (a) shows the display state at this time. At this timing, it is determined that the standby pending image will change to red, the color of the left decorative symbol.
From timing t19 to timing t19.5, a display is performed to highlight the left decorative symbol that has been temporarily stopped. Here, the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 395(a) and the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 395(b) are displayed alternately multiple times. FIG. 405(b) shows a display state in which the decorative symbol "3" shown in FIG. 395(b) is displayed.
From timing t19.5 to timing t20, the left decorative symbol shrinks and moves to a position where it overlaps with the standby image. When the movement ends, the color of the standby image changes to the color of the decorative symbol. Since the color of the left decorative symbol is red, the color of the first standby image changes to red. Figure 405 (c) shows the display state of the left decorative symbol while it is moving. Note that the above-mentioned highlighting may be continued even during the movement.
The left decorative symbol is erased from its position at the timing when it overlaps with the first standby image (timing t20), and immediately begins to fluctuate at high speed on the left side of the display area 1600a. Figure 405(d) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t20.5, the display of the predictive effect background image ends, and the normal background image A is displayed as the background image. Figure 405(e) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t28.5, the left decorative symbol is temporarily displayed, at timing t29, the right decorative symbol is temporarily displayed, and at timing t29.5, the center decorative symbol is temporarily displayed. Next, at timing t30, the left, center, and right decorative symbols are temporarily displayed. Figure 405 (f) shows a display state in which the variable display has ended and the left, center, and right decorative symbols are temporarily displayed. It is also possible to display the left, center, and right decorative symbols temporarily displayed at timing t30 without temporarily displaying them.
At timing t31, a new variable display begins, and the left, center, and right decorative symbols enter a high-speed variable state. Furthermore, the reserved images displayed in the upper right corner of the display area 1600a as the first to third reserved images end their display at timing t24, and are then displayed in the lower right corner of the display area 1600a as the current to second reserved images, ending the "second reserved color change indication effect." Figure 405(g) shows the state in which the left, center, and right decorative symbols enter a high-speed variable state.

In this way, the "second hold change color indication effect" allows the player to know in advance what color the standby hold image may change to, depending on the color of the decorative pattern displayed in a temporary stop state.
In addition, at the same time as the start of the "second hold change color indication effect," a suggestion effect is executed that displays a background image for the indication effect, so that the player can be made aware that the standby hold image may change.
Furthermore, in the "first reserve change color indication effect," even if the reserve image is about to change to a color with low expectation (for example, a blue reserve image) or actually does change, if the "second reserve change color indication effect" is executed, there is a possibility that the reserve image will change to a reserve image with higher expectation, so the player can be reassured.

As such, in the "hold color change indication effect" of this embodiment, there are cases where only the "first hold color change indication effect" is executed and the hold image changes (Fig. 398(b)), and cases where there is no change (Fig. 398(a)). Also, there are cases where the "second hold color change indication effect" is executed after the "first hold color change indication effect" is executed and the hold image changes (Fig. 399(b)), and cases where there is no change (Fig. 399(a)).

In the embodiment shown, the timing at which the "first reserved color change indication effect" and the "second reserved color change indication effect" end (the timing at which the standby reserved image returns to the bottom right of the display area 1600a) is set to timing t31, but the timing at which the "first reserved color change indication effect" and the "second reserved color change indication effect" end may also be the timing just before the high-speed fluctuation ends (timing t28), the timing at which the temporary stop of the left decorative pattern begins (timing t28.5), the timing at which the left, center, and right decorative patterns enter a temporary stop state (timing t29.5), or the timing at which the left, center, and right decorative patterns enter a stopped and displayed state (timing t30). In this case, at these timings, the standby reserved image that was displayed in the upper right of the display area 1600a will be displayed in the bottom right of the display area 1600a.
By returning the position of the standby image to its original position before the timing of the start of the next variable display in this way, the next variable display can be started with the player being fully aware of the number of reserved items and the display mode of the standby image. Also, even if various effects are executed immediately after the start of the next variable display, the display content in the display area 1600a does not become complicated, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming confused.

Other timings may be used to return the standby image to its original position in the bottom right of display area 1600a. For example, the standby image may be returned to its original position at the timing when the background image for the predictive effect begins to be displayed (timing t13.5), at a predetermined timing within the period when the display explaining the effect content is being displayed (timing t13.5 to timing t16), or at a predetermined timing within the period when the remaining time gauge image is being displayed (timing t16 to timing t19). In this case, the display mode of the standby image will change when it is displayed in the bottom right of display area 1600a.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the standby image moved to the upper right of the display area 1600a does not overlap with the decorative pattern during temporary stop or stop display, the standby image may also be displayed in a position that overlaps with the decorative pattern during temporary stop or stop display.
In this case, the display priority of the standby image may be higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern during a temporary stop or a stopped display, or the display priority of the decorative pattern during a temporary stop or a stopped display may be higher than the display priority of the standby image.
Alternatively, the display priority of the standby image may be set higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern during a temporary stop, so that the standby image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern, and during a stopped display, the display priority of the decorative pattern during the stopped display may be set higher than the display priority of the standby image, so that the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the standby image.

The "hold color change indication effect" does not span the changing display, but starts in the middle of a certain changing display and ends simultaneously with the end of the stopped display (timing t31 in Figs. 398 and 399). The time for which the changing display is performed is predetermined by a random number acquired by the main control board 1310 when a start winning occurs. Therefore, the "hold color change indication effect" is executed only when there is sufficient time remaining in the changing display.
Specifically, if the remaining time of the variable display being executed is less than 15 seconds at the time when the start winning occurs, the "hold change color indication effect" will not be executed.
When the timing of the start winning occurs, if the remaining time of the variable display being executed is 15 seconds or more but less than 20 seconds, the "first pending change color indication effect" is executed, but the "second pending change color indication effect" is not executed.
When the start winning occurs, if the remaining time of the variable display being executed is 20 seconds or more but less than 35 seconds, there are cases where only the "first hold change color indication effect" is executed, and cases where the "second hold change color indication effect" is executed after the "first hold change color indication effect" is executed.
If the remaining time of the variable display being executed is 35 seconds or more at the time when the start winning occurs, the "hold color change indication effect" will not be executed. As shown in FIG. 394, the longer the variable display time, the higher the probability that the special lottery will result in a jackpot. In addition, in such a case, the probability of a special reach effect with high expectations being executed for a long time increases. Therefore, if the "hold color change indication effect" were to be started when the remaining time of the variable display is long, it would be confirmed as a miss despite a situation that seemed highly promising, causing great disappointment for the player. However, in this embodiment, by not starting the "hold color change indication effect" when the remaining time of the variable display is long (35 seconds or more), it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player feels disappointed.

When it is decided to execute the "Hold Change Color Prediction Effect," all displays related to the ongoing variable display will generally be canceled. This is because the ongoing variable display will result in a miss. Effects and images that will be canceled include pseudo consecutive effects, reach effects, and current hold images. On the other hand, images that will not be canceled include the fourth symbol and the hold number display image.

An outline of the decorative patterns that are temporarily stopped in the "Second pending color change indication effect" is shown in the "Type and color of decorative patterns that are temporarily stopped" and "Combination of decorative patterns that are temporarily stopped" columns of the effect pattern table in Figure 397, but it is advisable to determine the number combinations randomly so that the numbers are evenly distributed.
As with the "first pending color change indication effect," it is advisable not to display combinations such as "3,""1," and "3" that indicate a missed reach, or combinations such as "3,""3," and "3" that indicate a jackpot.

In the presentation patterns PTN-2-01 to PTN-2-12, the more red decorative symbols there are, the higher the probability that the standby image will change to red (i.e., the likelihood of a big win).
In the PTN-2-16 effect pattern, the combination of the temporarily stopped decorative symbols is two gold decorative symbols and one rainbow decorative symbol, but the two gold decorative symbols always change at high speed, the rainbow decorative symbol always stops temporarily, and the standby image changes to rainbow colors. Note that the expected probability of the rainbow standby image is 100%, so the timing when the rainbow decorative symbol is displayed determines that a jackpot will occur.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which two or three of the decorative patterns that have been temporarily stopped and displayed simultaneously enter a high-speed changing state at the end of the display period (timing t16 to timing t19) of the remaining time gauge image, the decorative patterns may also enter a high-speed changing state in sequence.
For example, one decorative pattern may change from a temporarily stopped state to a rapidly changing state at the timing (timing t17) when one second has elapsed since the display of the remaining time gauge image began, one decorative pattern may change from a temporarily stopped state to a rapidly changing state at the timing (timing t18) when two seconds have elapsed since the display of the remaining time gauge image began, and the remaining decorative pattern may remain in a temporarily stopped state or change to a rapidly changing state at the timing (timing t19) when the display of the remaining time gauge image ends.
According to this embodiment, it is possible to provide the player with the excitement of wondering whether or not the decorative symbol of a color with a high expectation will remain in a temporarily stopped state.

Note that instead of uniformly changing the decorative symbols to the high-speed changing state as the remaining time decreases (1 second, 2 seconds, and 3 seconds after the display of the remaining time gauge image begins), the decorative symbols may be changed to the high-speed changing state at other timings. For example, the decorative symbols may be changed from the temporary stopped state to the high-speed changing state 0.5 seconds, 2 seconds, and 3 seconds after the display of the remaining time gauge image begins. Alternatively, the decorative symbols may be changed from the temporary stopped state to the high-speed changing state 0.5 seconds, 1 second, and 3 seconds after the display of the remaining time gauge image begins.
According to such an embodiment, the candidates for decorative patterns (i.e., the colors to which the standby image can change) are narrowed down early, which can increase interest.

406 is a diagram showing the movement of the standby image in the "first standby color change indication effect." The arrow in the figure shows the movement path of the standby image (the arrow is not actually displayed, but is shown for explanatory purposes).
Fig. 406(a) shows the path (start position, intermediate position, and end position) of the standby image in the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 400 to Fig. 402. Fig. 406(b), Fig. 406(c), Fig. 406(d), and Fig. 406(e) each show examples in which the path of the standby image is modified.
Although an embodiment has been shown in which the standby image is temporarily stopped at an intermediate position, it may also be moved at a constant speed from the movement start position to the movement end position via the intermediate position without being temporarily stopped at the intermediate position.
The standby image may be repeatedly enlarged and reduced during its movement, or may be gradually enlarged to reach a maximum size at an intermediate position, gradually reduced after passing the intermediate position, and displayed at its original size at the end of the movement.
In addition, when the standby image is moved along the path shown in Figure 406(a) to Figure 406(e), the order of the standby image does not change in any case. Therefore, when the color of the standby image changes, the player can easily understand how many changes will be required before the variable display with high expectation is displayed.

In the embodiments shown with reference to Figures 398, 399, and 403 to 405, the decorative pattern was displayed overlapping the reserved image, but instead of the decorative pattern, another image may be displayed overlapping the reserved image.
Below, referring to Figure 407, we will explain an embodiment in which an aura image with the same color as the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the decorative pattern, and the aura image moves toward the reserved image, and the color of the reserved image changes after the movement is complete.
From timing t19 to timing t19.5, a display is performed to highlight the left decorative symbol that has been temporarily stopped. Here, an aura image of the same color as the decorative symbol is displayed in front of the decorative symbol. Figure 407(a) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t19.5, the left decorative pattern enters a high-speed fluctuation state, and from timing t19.5 to timing t20, the aura image gradually shrinks and moves toward a position where it overlaps with the standby image. When the movement ends, the color of the standby image changes to the color of the decorative pattern, and the display of the aura image ends. Figure 407 (b) shows the display state while the aura image is moving. Figure 407 (c) shows the display state when the aura image arrives at a position where it overlaps with the standby image. Figure 407 (d) shows the display state when the standby image changes to the color of the aura image. Figure 407 (e) shows the display state when the display of the aura image ends.
The display content from timing t20 onwards will be the same as that in the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 399(b) and 405.
In this way, a specific image in the color of a decorative pattern may be moved so as to overlap with the standby image, thereby changing the color of the standby image.

When only the "first pending change color indication effect" is executed, the pending image may be hidden at a predetermined timing during the period from a predetermined timing after the completion of the movement of the pending image or a timing thereafter until the start of the next variable display.
Similarly, when the "second hold change color indication effect" is executed following the "first hold change color indication effect," the standby hold image may be hidden at the same time as the display of the indication effect background image ends or at a predetermined timing thereafter.
In either case, the display of the standby image resumes when the next variable display starts.
According to such an embodiment, even if the color of the waiting hold image does not change, or if it does change to a color with a relatively low expectation, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player feels embarrassed in front of other players around him.
Furthermore, when the color changes to one with a relatively high expectation, if the variable display result turns out to be a miss, the standby image with a relatively high expectation color will be displayed for a long period of time, which may cause embarrassment in front of surrounding players, but by hiding the standby image, the display time of the standby image with a relatively high expectation color can be shortened, and the occurrence of a situation in which the player feels embarrassed can be prevented.

An embodiment has been shown in which the standby hold image may be hidden when only the "first hold change color indication effect" is executed, or when the "second hold change color indication effect" is executed following the "first hold change color indication effect," but it may not always be hidden, and may be hidden at a predetermined rate.
In this way, by making the rate at which the standby image is not hidden higher than the rate at which the standby image is hidden, the original purpose of the presentation, which is to make the player aware of the state of the standby image, is not lost.
When only the "first hold change color indication effect" is executed, it is preferable to make the proportion of the standby hold image not displayed higher than the proportion of the standby hold image displayed.
When the "second hold color change indication effect" is executed following the "first hold color change indication effect," the proportion of the hold images not displayed on standby should be higher than the proportion of the hold images displayed on standby.
In this case, even the "second pending color change indication effect" is executed, and in a situation where an effect with high expectations is performed, if it fails, the player may feel embarrassed, but this can be prevented from feeling embarrassed.
Conversely, the proportion of standby pending images that are not displayed may be higher than the proportion of standby pending images that are not displayed.
In this case, the "second hold color change indication effect" is executed, and in a situation where an effect with high expectations has been performed, the player's sense of expectation can be increased by showing the standby hold image.

Between the probability that only the "first reserved color change indication effect" is executed and the probability that the "second reserved color change indication effect" is executed following the "first reserved color change indication effect," it is better to increase the probability of the former. Alternatively, the probability of the latter may be increased. Note that the "probability" referred to here is the probability that the effect is executed when one variable display is executed.
By increasing the probability of the former, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for a big win when the "second reserved color change indication effect" is reached. On the other hand, by increasing the probability of the latter, it is possible to maintain the sense of expectation even if the "first reserved color change indication effect" changes to a standby reserved image with a low expectation.
Similarly, the probability that only the "first reserved color change indication effect" is executed and the standby reserved image is not displayed, and the probability that the "second reserved color change indication effect" is executed following the "first reserved color change indication effect" and the standby reserved image is not displayed, should be higher. Alternatively, the probability of the latter should be higher.
By increasing the probability of the former, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for a big win when the "second reserved color change indication effect" is reached. On the other hand, by increasing the probability of the latter, it is possible to maintain the sense of expectation even if the "first reserved color change indication effect" changes to a standby reserved image with a low expectation.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the display of the standby image is not displayed, in this case, only the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the normal background image while it is changing at high speed. Also, the result of the changing display during execution is assumed to be a loss, so the display content lacks interest.
Therefore, during the period until the variable display in which the "hold change color indication effect" is executed ends, a predetermined reach effect may be executed as a pre-reading effect.
As the predetermined reach performance, two or more types of reach performance can be executed, and it is preferable that the expectation of a big win differs depending on the type of reach performance.
The predetermined reach effect executed as the look-ahead effect corresponds to the standby reserved image that has changed in the "reserve color change indication effect." When the variable display corresponding to the standby reserved image is executed, the same predetermined reach effect is executed.

In this way, the execution time when a predetermined reach effect is executed as a look-ahead effect may not match the execution time of the predetermined reach effect itself (the probability of them not matching is extremely high because the "hold color change indication effect" is an effect that starts when a starting win is triggered). Therefore, if the time of high-speed fluctuation is longer than the execution time of the predetermined reach effect and there is enough time secured to execute the entire predetermined reach effect as a look-ahead effect, it is advisable to execute the entire predetermined reach effect. Alternatively, the predetermined reach effect may be executed until just before the effect that indicates the result at the end of the predetermined reach effect.
On the other hand, if the time during which the high-speed fluctuation is shorter than the execution time of the predetermined reach effect and there is not enough time to execute the entire predetermined reach effect as a look-ahead effect, it is possible to execute only a part of the predetermined reach effect. For example, it is possible to execute the predetermined reach effect from the beginning and end the execution of the predetermined reach effect several seconds before the end of the predetermined fluctuation display time (for example, two seconds before the fluctuation stop period starts).
After the end of these reach effects, the background image and decorative symbols that were displayed before the reach effects began are displayed again.
Furthermore, if the time period during which the high-speed fluctuation occurs is even shorter, the predetermined reach effect may not be executed. Alternatively, only the reach name of the predetermined reach effect may be displayed as a look-ahead effect.

According to this embodiment, the player can be made aware in advance of what kind of reach effect will be executed. In addition, since there are multiple reach effects executed with different expectations, the player can be informed in advance of the expectation of a jackpot.
In addition, the player can be made to visually recognize a predetermined reach effect based on the look-ahead processing in an appropriate manner corresponding to the remaining time of the high-speed variable display.

As a predictive effect, the timing for starting to execute a predetermined reach effect may be set to a predetermined time (for example, one second) after the decorative patterns on the left, center, and right enter a state of rapid fluctuation (timing t13 in Figure 398(a) and Figure 398(b), timing t19 in Figure 399(a), and timing t20 in Figure 399(b)).
In addition, when the execution of a predetermined reach effect is started as a pre-reading effect, the decorative symbols should not be maintained in a state of rapid fluctuation, but should be displayed as a reach state in which the decorative symbols on the left and right are temporarily stopped at the same number as the decorative symbols in the actual predetermined reach effect.

In the "first pending color change indication effect," an effect of operating an operation unit (such as the operation button 410 or the attack button 3710) may be executed. An embodiment in which operation of the attack button 3710 is effective will be described below. Note that FIG. 408 shows an example of a display when an effect of operating an operation unit is executed.
FIG. 408(a) shows the state when the display of the blue aura image has started.
While the aura image is displayed, an operation instruction image with the word "PUSH!" written in a horizontal oval is displayed. FIG. 408(b) shows the state in which the operation instruction image is displayed. Here, when the attack button 3710 is operated or when the operation valid period ends without the attack button 3710 being operated, a small aura image of a color corresponding to the color of the changed hold display is displayed in the center of the display area 1600a in place of the aura image, and either begins moving toward one of the standby hold images (FIG. 408(c) or FIG. 408(d)), or a display indicating that the display of the aura image has ended (FIG. 408(e)) is displayed.

408(c) shows an example of a display in which the display mode of the standby image is changed. In this example, a small aura image starts moving toward the first standby image.
Figure 408(d) shows the state in which the movement of the aura image has been completed and the color of the first standby pending image has changed from white to blue.

Figure 408 (e) shows an example of a display when no display that changes the display mode of the standby image is performed. In this case, a small aura image is not displayed, and the standby image is not changed.

In this way, operation acceptance via the operation unit may become valid while the "first pending color change indication effect" is being executed, and the display mode of the aura image may change depending on whether the operation unit is operated or the valid operation period ends.

Referring to Figure 408, an embodiment has been shown in which, when the operating unit is operated or the valid operation period ends, a small aura image of a color corresponding to the color of the changed hold display is displayed in place of the aura image currently being displayed.However, instead of a small aura image, a hold image of the same shape and size (or a different size) as the standby hold image may be displayed, and this hold image may move toward the standby hold image, overlapping on top of the existing standby hold image and displayed as the changed standby hold image.
FIG. 409(a) shows the state in which the operation instruction image is displayed.

Figure 409(b) shows a state in which, in response to operation of the operating unit or the end of the valid operation period, a reserve image of the same color as the changed reserve image is displayed and is moving toward the standby reserve image.
Figure 409(c) shows the state in which the movement of the reserved image of the same color as the aura image has finished and it is displayed as the first standby reserved image.

Figure 409 (d) shows the display state when the display of the aura image ends in response to operation of the operation unit or the end of the valid operation period.

The operation instruction image includes the text "PUSH!", which indicates the operation method of pressing, but an operation unit mock-up image that mimics the shape of the operation unit to be operated may also be displayed as the operation instruction image. Furthermore, text indicating the operation method (such as "PUSH!") may be added to the operation unit mock-up image.

An operation instruction may be always requested as in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 408 and 409.
On the other hand, there may be a case where an operation instruction is not requested as in the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 400, and a case where an operation instruction is requested as in the embodiments shown with reference to Fig. 408 or 409. In this case, the probability that the color of the reserved image will change (i.e., the expected probability of a jackpot) may be different between when an operation instruction is not requested and when an operation instruction is requested.
For example, the probability of the color of the pending image changing may be higher when an operation instruction is requested than when an operation instruction is not requested. Alternatively, the color of the standby pending image may be more likely to change to a color with a higher expectation when an operation instruction is requested than when an operation instruction is not requested.
For example, when the color of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is blue (presentation pattern PTN-1-01 to presentation pattern PTN-1-04), if no operation instruction is requested, the probability of changing to blue may be 10%, the probability of changing to green may be 7%, and the probability of changing to red may be 3%, and if an operation instruction is requested, the probability of changing to blue may be 20%, the probability of changing to green may be 14%, and the probability of changing to red may be 6%.

White, red, or rainbow colors may be used as the colors for the text and background of the operation instruction image. These colors may also be used to indicate the degree of expectation, with the degree of expectation increasing in the order of white, red, and rainbow colors. Note that the expectation degree for rainbow colors is 100%.

Two types of operation reception effects may be provided as "operation reception effects" that receive player operations on the operation unit. Specifically, a "first operation reception effect" may be provided in which a suggestive image suggesting that the operation will be valid is displayed before the valid operation period becomes valid, and then an operation instruction image is displayed simultaneously with the start of the valid operation period, and a "second operation reception effect" may be provided in which a suggestive image suggesting that the operation will be valid is not displayed before the valid operation period becomes valid, and an operation instruction image is displayed simultaneously with the start of the valid operation period.
Furthermore, as the suggestion image or the operation instruction image, an operation unit simulation image that imitates the operation unit may be used.
It is preferable that the display mode of the suggestion image that suggests that an operation will be valid and the operation instruction image that indicates that operation acceptance is valid be different. For example, the suggestion image may display a semi-transparent operation unit simulated image, and the operation instruction image may display the same operation unit simulated image opaque. In this case, the change of the operation unit simulated image from semi-transparent to opaque allows the player to recognize that the valid operation period has begun.
Alternatively, a predetermined image that does not imitate the operation unit may be used as the suggestion image, and an operation unit simulation image that imitates the operation unit may be used as the operation instruction image.
Furthermore, if an operation is performed on the operation unit during the valid operation period of the "operation reception effect" or if the valid operation period of the "operation reception effect" has ended, a predetermined "post-operation effect" is started. For example, an image of a predetermined color (blue, green, or red) is displayed in the display area 1600a to indicate the likelihood of a jackpot.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 408 and 409, operation acceptance may be performed using a "second operation acceptance presentation" rather than a "first operation acceptance presentation."
According to such an embodiment, the "operation reception effect" can be executed while ensuring the visibility of the color of the decorative pattern (the color to which the standby image may change).

On the other hand, the "second operation acceptance effect" may not be executed during the "first hold change color indication effect," and only the "first operation acceptance effect" may be executed. In this case, during the execution of the "first hold change color indication effect," only a suggestion image suggesting that the operation in the "first operation acceptance effect" will be valid is displayed, and after the "first hold change color indication effect" ends, the operation validity period in the "first operation acceptance effect" begins and an operation instruction image is displayed. Furthermore, the "first operation acceptance effect" may execute a hold change effect in which the standby hold image that has finished moving to the upper right of the display area 1600a changes to a standby hold image with a higher expectation (e.g., changing from white to blue). Alternatively, instead of the hold change effect, a preview such as a comment preview (the "dialogue preview effect" shown with reference to FIG. 385) or a "weather preview effect" shown with reference to FIG. 393 may be displayed.
According to this embodiment, the player can be focused on the "first hold change color indication effect." Furthermore, even if the change in the standby hold image based on the display of the aura image is not executed, the standby hold image can be changed to a standby hold image of a color with higher expectations by operating the operation unit thereafter, so the player's sense of expectation can be maintained for a long period of time, and if the effect is different from the hold change effect such as the above-mentioned comment notice, the sense of expectation can be maintained even if the hold display with high expectations is not executed by the "hold change color indication effect."

Instead of or in addition to executing the "operation reception effect," the operation unit (e.g., attack button 3710) may be vibrated during the execution of the "first pending color change indication effect." In this case, when the operation unit vibrates, there is a higher expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a jackpot compared to when the operation unit does not vibrate.
Alternatively, the operation unit may be made of a transparent material, and a predetermined movable decorative member visible to the player may be provided inside the operation unit, and the movable decorative member may be rotated, vibrated, or moved. In addition, when the movable decorative member performs such an action, the probability of the result of the special lottery being a jackpot is higher than when the movable decorative member does not perform such an action.
During the period when the operation unit is operating in this manner, operation acceptance by the operation unit is not valid, and the operation instruction image as described above is not displayed.
In this way, by executing an action presentation using the operation unit (sometimes called "operation unit action presentation"), the player's expectation is indicated tactilely or visually, which can increase the player's interest. Also, by executing an action presentation using the operation unit while the aura image is displayed, it is executed in parallel in time with the presentation of whether the reserved image will change, so it can provide a sense of expectation that a jackpot will occur in the "interval" between the color change.
The result of the special lottery referred to here refers to the result of the special lottery corresponding to the standby hold image whose display mode has changed due to the "hold change color indication effect." Alternatively, in an embodiment in which the standby hold that changes due to the "hold change color indication effect" is the standby hold image corresponding to the most recently generated standby hold, it refers to the result of the special lottery that determines that the "hold change color indication effect" will be executed. The same applies to the notation of other expectations in the "hold change color indication effect."

The fact that the "operation unit operation effect" is being executed may be displayed in the display area 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600. For example, text such as "Attack button vibrating!" may be displayed. This makes it easier for the player to notice that the "operation unit operation effect" is being executed on the operation unit.
Alternatively, the fact that the operation effect of the operation unit is being executed may not be displayed in the display area 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600. This can give a sense of satisfaction to a player who notices that the "operation unit operation effect" is being executed. Also, since it is difficult for surrounding players to notice that the "operation unit operation effect" is being executed, the player can enjoy the high expectation of winning by himself.

In addition, in the "operation unit operation presentation," multiple patterns of vibration of the operation unit or movement of the movable decorative member may be provided. For example, a presentation pattern in which the vibration or movement continues for one second, a presentation pattern in which the vibration or movement continues for two seconds, or a presentation pattern in which the vibration or movement continues for one second, then pauses for one second, and continues for another second may be adopted. Also, the expectation of a jackpot may increase in this order. Also, the vibration may be of multiple intensities, such as weak and strong vibrations. In this case, it is also preferable to increase the expectation of a jackpot in this order.
In the case of movable decorative elements, presentation patterns with different movement speeds may be provided. For example, a presentation pattern in which the movable decorative elements move at a slow speed and a presentation pattern in which the movable decorative elements move at a fast speed may be provided. The likelihood of a jackpot may also increase in this order. Furthermore, while the movement of the movable decorative elements remains the same, the likelihood may differ depending on the light-emitting state of the luminous decoration of the movable decorative elements during movement. For example, the likelihood may be higher when the movable decorative elements are in a white light-emitting state than when they are in a red light-emitting state.

The vibrations generated by the vibration of the operation unit or the movement of the movable decorative member may be strong and transmitted all the way to the handle 302, or a mechanism for transmitting vibrations to the handle 302 may be activated so that the vibrations are transmitted all the way to the handle 302, unlike the vibrations generated by the vibration of the operation unit or the movement of the movable decorative member. In this case, only the player holding the handle 302 will be able to recognize that the "operation unit operation effect" is being executed, and since it will be difficult for surrounding players to notice that the "operation unit operation effect" is being executed, the player can enjoy the high expectation of hitting the jackpot all by themselves. Furthermore, players who are not focusing on the display area 1600a, for example by operating a smartphone with their left hand, can be made to recognize that the "hold color change indication effect" has begun.

The timing for starting the "operation unit operation effect" should be the same as the timing at which the standby hold image in the "first hold change color indication effect" starts to move (timing t6.5 in the embodiments shown in Figures 398 and 399).
In addition, the timing at which the "operation unit operation presentation" ends should be the same as the timing at which the standby hold image in the "first hold change color indication presentation" ends moving (timing t12 in the embodiments shown in Figures 398 and 399).
According to this embodiment, it is possible to impress upon the player that the standby image has moved.

On the other hand, the timing to end the "operation unit operation presentation" may be earlier than the timing to end the movement of the standby hold image in the "first hold color change indication presentation" (earlier than timing t12 in the embodiments shown in Figures 398 and 399). For example, the timing to end the "operation unit operation presentation" may be timing t9 while the aura image is being displayed or timing t10.5 after the aura image has finished being displayed.
According to this embodiment, it is possible to clearly check whether the standby image has changed or not.

Alternatively, the timing to end the "operation unit operation presentation" may be set to a timing later than the timing at which the standby hold image in the "first hold change color indication presentation" finishes moving (a timing later than timing t12 in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 398 and 399). For example, the timing to end the "operation unit operation presentation" may be set to the timing at which the high-speed fluctuation shown in FIGS. 398(a) and 398(b) resumes (timing t13) or a predetermined timing during the high-speed fluctuation (for example, timing t15). Alternatively, the timing may be set to the timing at which a display explaining the presentation content in FIGS. 399(a) and 399(b) is being displayed (for example, timing t15), the timing at which the remaining time gauge image is being displayed (for example, timing t17), or the timing at which the display of the remaining time gauge image has finished (timing t19).
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to maintain the expectation of a big win even after the standby image has changed. Also, even if the standby image has not changed, the "operation unit operation effect" is being executed, so it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest. Furthermore, although there is a risk that the "operation unit operation effect" may be difficult for a player to notice, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice that the "operation unit operation effect" has started.

In the embodiment shown, the timing at which the "operation unit operation effect" starts and the timing at which the standby image in the "first standby color change indication effect" starts moving are the same, but the "operation unit operation effect" may also be started before the standby image in the "first standby color change indication effect" starts moving. Alternatively, the "operation unit operation effect" may also be started after the standby image in the "first standby color change indication effect" starts moving.

An effect in which the movable decorative member is moved from a standby position to a moving position (hereinafter referred to as the "movable decorative member moving effect") may be executed simultaneously with the "first pending color change indication effect."
Specifically, the timing for starting the "movable decorative member movement performance" (the timing when the movable decorative member starts moving from the standby position) should be the same as the timing when the standby image in the "first standby color change indication performance" starts moving (timing t6.5 in the embodiment shown in Figures 398 and 399). Also, the timing for ending the "movable decorative member movement performance" (the timing when the movable decorative member completes moving to the moving position) should be the same as the timing when the standby image in the "first standby color change indication performance" finishes moving (timing t12 in the embodiment shown in Figures 398 and 399) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "operation pattern A").

As described above, the movable decorative member may be the rear panel board 2420 (see, for example, FIG. 130), the rear panel board decorative member 2410 (see, for example, FIG. 131), the tank accessory 3770 (see, for example, FIG. 241), etc. The movable decorative member may be moved in any of the above-described manners (e.g., vertical, horizontal, diagonal, etc.).
According to this embodiment, it is possible to impress upon the player that the standby image has moved.

On the other hand, the execution period of the "movable decorative member movement performance" and the movement period of the standby pending image in the "first pending color change indication performance" (the period from timing t6.5 to timing t12) may be shifted.
For example, the movable decorative element may start moving from the standby position to the moving position after the standby image starts moving, and the movable decorative element may complete moving to the moving position after the standby image stops moving. For example, the movable decorative element may move from timing t9 to timing t13 (hereinafter referred to as "operation pattern B").
Alternatively, the movable decorative element may start moving from the standby position to the moving position after the standby image starts moving, and the movement of the standby image may end after the movable decorative element has completed moving to the moving position. For example, the movable decorative element may move from timing t8 to timing t10.5 (hereinafter referred to as "operation pattern C").
In addition, it is preferable that the probability of winning a jackpot is higher when the ``movable decorative member moving effect'' is executed than when it is not executed.
The timing for starting the execution of the "movable decorative member moving performance" may be up to the time when the color of the standby image changes (timing t10), or it may be after the time when the color of the standby image changes (timing t10).

According to this embodiment, it is possible to provide a sense of anticipation that a jackpot will occur in the "interval" between the color of the standby image and the color of the standby image.
Alternatively, the player can be given a sense of anticipation for a big win after the color of the standby image changes.

On the other hand, the "movable decorative member movement effect" may be started after the end of the movement period of the standby pending image in the "first pending color change indication effect" (the period from timing t6.5 to timing t12).
For example, the movable decorative element may be moved from the standby position to the moving position after the standby image has started to move and has finished moving. For example, the movable decorative element may be moved from timing t13 to timing t16 (hereinafter referred to as "operation pattern D").
According to such an embodiment, the player can focus on the movement of the standby pending image and the change in color of the standby pending image in the "first standby pending color change indication effect."

A single movable decorative member may be used as the specified movable decorative member to be moved in the "moving decorative member performance." If two or more movable decorative members are used in the "moving decorative member performance," all of the movable decorative members may be operated in "movement pattern A," all of the movable decorative members may be operated in "movement pattern B," all of the movable decorative members may be operated in "movement pattern C," or all of the movable decorative members may be operated in "movement pattern D."
Alternatively, some of the movable decorative members may be operated in "operation pattern A," while other movable decorative members may be operated in "operation pattern B,""operation pattern C," or "operation pattern D."
Similarly, some movable decorative members may be operated in "operation pattern B," while other movable decorative members may be operated in "operation pattern A,""operation pattern C," or "operation pattern D."
Similarly, some movable decorative members may be operated in "operation pattern C," while other movable decorative members may be operated in "operation pattern A,""operation pattern B," or "operation pattern D."
Similarly, some movable decorative members may be operated in "operation pattern D," while other movable decorative members may be operated in "operation pattern A,""operation pattern B," or "operation pattern C."
In this way, by operating multiple movable decorative elements in a variety of ways, the ``first hold change color indication effect'' can be enhanced.

Referring to Figures 406(a), 406(b), and 406(e), the movement path of the standby image is shown, but the length of the movement path of the standby image may be longer than the length of the movement path of the movable decorative member.
On the other hand, the length of the movement path of the movable decorative member may be longer than the length of the movement path of the standby image.
Alternatively, the length of the movement path of the movable decorative member may be the same as the length of the movement path of the standby image.

Alternatively, the linear path shown in Figure 406(c) or 406(d) may be used as the path of movement of the standby image, and the distance traveled by the standby image may be compared with the distance traveled by the movable decorative element. In this case, it is also advisable to use a linear path for the movable decorative element.
For example, the distance traveled by the standby image may be longer than the distance traveled by the movable decorative element.
On the other hand, the movement distance of the movable decorative element may be longer than the movement distance of the standby image.
Alternatively, the movement distance of the movable decorative member may be the same as the movement distance of the standby image.

If the movement path and movement distance of the standby image are made longer than the movement path and movement distance of the movable decorative member, it is possible to emphasize that the standby image has changed.
Furthermore, if the movement path and movement distance of the movable decorative member are made longer than the movement path and movement distance of the reserved image, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the movement of the movable decorative member.
Furthermore, if the movement path and movement distance of the standby image are made the same as the movement path and movement distance of the movable decorative member, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of missing either the movement of the standby image or the movement of the movable decorative member.

The movement speed of the standby image may be slower than the movement speed of the movable decorative member.
Alternatively, the movement speed of the movable decorative member may be slower than the movement speed of the standby image.
Alternatively, the movement speed of the movable decorative member may be set to the same as the movement speed of the standby image.
Although the embodiment in which the standby image is temporarily stopped at the intermediate position has been shown, it is preferable that the speed when moving from the movement start position to the intermediate position is the same as the speed when moving from the intermediate position to the movement end position. Also, if the standby image is not temporarily stopped at the intermediate position, it is preferable that the standby image is moved from the movement start position to the movement end position at a constant speed.

If the speed of the standby image is made slower than the speed of the movable decorative member, the standby image will move for a long period of time, allowing the player to be sure that the standby image is moving.
If the speed of the movable decorative member is made slower than the speed of the standby image, the movement of the movable decorative member will be carried out for a long period of time, allowing the player to be sure that the movable decorative member is moving.
By making the movement speed of the standby image and the movement speed of the movable decorative member the same, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of missing either the movement of the standby image or the movement of the movable decorative member.

When the movable decorative element moves from the standby position to the moving position, the display area 1600a and the movable decorative element may change from not overlapping in a front view to overlapping in a front view. Alternatively, the movable decorative element may be originally overlapping a portion of the display area 1600a in a front view, and the overlapping area may increase as the movable decorative element moves from the standby position to the moving position. This allows a player who is primarily looking at the display area 1600a to recognize that the movable decorative element has moved.
When moving the movable decorative member, it is preferable to move the movable decorative member and the certain standby image so that the movable decorative member and the certain standby image do not overlap in a front view during or after the movement. In other words, during the period from the start to the end of the movement of the certain standby image, the movable decorative member and the certain standby image do not overlap in a front view.
In addition, after a certain standby image moves, the moving movable decorative element and the stopped standby image may overlap when viewed from the front. In this case, if the entire standby image overlaps the movable decorative element, the standby image will be difficult or impossible to see. Therefore, it is preferable that only a portion of the standby image (for example, only the upper or lower half) overlaps the movable decorative element when viewed from the front, or the entire standby image may overlap the movable decorative element when viewed from the front.
In addition, it is possible to make all of the standby images displayed multiple times, not just one standby image, take on the same presentation as a certain standby image, or to make some of the standby images displayed multiple times take on the same presentation as a certain standby image.
In addition, at least for standby pending images whose display mode has changed due to the "hold change color indication effect", it may be possible to have the same effect mode as a certain standby pending image.

In an embodiment where the entire standby image does not overlap with the movable decorative member, the visibility of the standby image while it is moving is not impaired, and it is not impossible to confirm the display mode (color) of the standby image after it has changed. Furthermore, the range of movement of the movable decorative member is not excessively obstructed, making it less likely that the presentation mode using the movable decorative member will be limited.

In the "first pending color change indication effect," the pending image moves to a predetermined position over a predetermined time, but a predetermined advance notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation may be executed between the time the pending image starts to move and the time it finishes moving.
As the predetermined preview effect, the "step-up preview effect" shown with reference to Figure 384 or the "weather preview effect" shown with reference to Figure 393 can be adopted.
For example, a "step-up preview effect" or a "weather preview effect" may be executed during the period from timing t8 to timing t10. Timing t10 is the timing at which the color of the standby image can change. The "step-up preview effect" has different execution times depending on the number of stages, but it is advisable to divide the execution time into four equal parts, with each period representing the execution periods for the first to fourth stages. For example, if the "step-up preview effect" is executed over two seconds, the display times for the first, second, third, and fourth stages may each be set to 0.5 seconds.
The expectation level indicated by the "step-up preview effect" and the "weather preview effect" is not the expectation level that the result of the change in the decorative pattern during the change will be a jackpot, but the expectation level that the result of the change corresponding to the standby image, which may change color at timing t10, will be a jackpot.
The display priority of the horizontal frame and characters in the "step-up preview performance" and the weather phenomenon image in the "weather preview performance" may be lower than the display priority of the standby image and the aura image.

In this embodiment, a sense of anticipation for a jackpot can be provided to the player during the period when it is unclear whether the standby image will change. Furthermore, because the specified preview effect does not require the player to operate the control unit, anticipation can be heightened without making the player feel impatient. Furthermore, because the moving standby image is displayed in front of the image displayed by the specified preview effect, it is possible to prevent the player from losing track of the standby image because the moving standby image is obscured by the image displayed by the specified preview effect.

In the embodiment shown, the timing at which the execution of a predetermined preview performance (such as a "step-up preview performance" or a "weather preview performance") ends is timing t10, which is the timing at which the color of the standby image can change, but it may also be a predetermined timing during the period until the display of the decorative pattern changes ends.
For example, a predetermined preview effect may be executed until the timing immediately after the movement of the standby image has finished (timing t12.5 in Figures 398 and 399).
For example, a predetermined preview effect may be executed until the timing at which the "first pending color change indication effect" in Figures 398(a) and 398(b) ends (timing t13), or until a predetermined timing during the resumed high-speed fluctuation display (from timing t13 to timing t28.5).
Alternatively, a predetermined preview effect may be executed until the timing at which the display of the background image for the premonition effect of the "second pending change color premonition effect" in Figures 399(a) and 399(b) ends (timing t20.5), or until a predetermined timing during the resumed high-speed fluctuation display (timing t20 to timing t28.5).

According to such an embodiment, a predetermined preview effect is executed even after the movement of the standby image has finished, so that even if the standby image does not change or only changes to a color with low expectation in the "first standby color change predictive effect" or the "second standby color change predictive effect," the predetermined preview effect can make the player feel interested.
In particular, the "hold change color indication effect" is determined to be executed when a starting winning occurs (in the example of the effects shown in Figures 398 and 399, the starting winning occurs at timing t4.5 and a series of effects are executed, but the timing of the starting winning does not necessarily coincide with timing t4.5), so the resumed high-speed fluctuation may take a long time. Also, it is determined that the decorative pattern that is currently changing will stop as a loss. Therefore, it can be said that the period during which the player is shown a somewhat boring changing display.
In this embodiment, a predetermined preview effect continues to be executed during the period of the resumed high-speed fluctuation, which makes the player feel excited about the results of the fluctuation display from the next time onwards.

It is also possible to execute a display effect that confirms the occurrence of a jackpot (a display effect with a 100% probability of a jackpot) during the execution of the variable display. Examples of display effects that confirm the occurrence of a jackpot include displaying the words "Jackpot Confirmed!" in the display area 1600a, or executing a premium effect to display an image of a specific character. In this case, the execution of a display effect that confirms the occurrence of a jackpot may not be started during the execution of the "first hold color change indication effect," and a display effect that confirms the occurrence of a jackpot may be executed after the "first hold color change indication effect" has ended. In this case, the jackpot is confirmed by the specific standby hold image whose color has changed (or appeared to be about to change but did not change) due to the "first hold color change indication effect."
As shown in the effect pattern table of Fig. 396, in the "first hold color change indication effect", the standby hold image does not change to a standby hold image with an expectation rate of 100%. In other words, in the "first hold color change indication effect", a display effect that determines the occurrence of a jackpot using the standby hold image is not executed.

In this way, by not executing a display effect with a 100% expectation rate during the execution of the "first hold color change indication effect," the interest in the "first hold color change indication effect" is not diminished, and the player can be made to look forward to the outcome of the "first hold color change indication effect."

It is preferable that a display effect with an expected probability of 100% is not executed during the period from when the standby hold image in the "first hold change color indication effect" starts to when it stops moving (the period from timing t6.5 to timing t12 in Figures 398 and 399).

On the other hand, in order to add an element of surprise, a display effect with an expected probability of 100% may be executed during the period from when the standby hold image in the "first hold change color indication effect" starts to move until it stops moving (the period from timing t6.5 to timing t12 in Figures 398 and 399).

In the "second hold change color indication effect" described with reference to Figures 399 and 403 to 405, there is a period (timing t16 to timing t19) during which the remaining time is indicated by the remaining time gauge image, as shown in Figures 403(f) and 403(g). However, a modified embodiment in which an effect is executed in which the player operates the control unit during this period will be described with reference to Figure 410.

In this embodiment, during the period in which the remaining time gauge image is displayed (from timing t16 to timing t19), an operation acceptance effect is performed in which operation acceptance of the attack button 3710 is enabled.
Specifically, the temporarily stopped left, center, and right decorative symbols sway up and down within the display area 1600a in response to the repeated tapping of the attack button 3710. Also, a predetermined number of small aura images are added around the left, center, and right decorative symbols in response to the repeated tapping.
The aura image comes in three colors: white, blue, and red. Two auras are displayed for the white aura image, four for the blue aura image, and six for the red aura image.
Additionally, the likelihood of winning increases in the order of a white aura image, a blue aura image, and a red aura image.
The type of aura image that is finally displayed is predetermined to be one of white, blue, or red based on the result of a special lottery, and the color of the aura image changes stepwise depending on the number of times the operation unit is operated.

For example, if it has been decided that a red aura image is to be displayed, the aura image is not displayed when no operation is performed, but by operating the operation unit five times, a white aura image is displayed, then by operating the operation unit five times, a blue aura image is displayed, and by operating the operation unit five more times, a red aura image is displayed.
On the other hand, if it has been decided that a white aura image is to be displayed, the aura image is not displayed when no operation is performed, but the white aura image is displayed by operating the operation unit five times. After that, even if the operation unit is operated five times, the white aura image will remain displayed, and even if the operation unit is operated five more times, the white aura image will remain displayed.

Below is an example of the effect that occurs when it is determined that a red aura image will be displayed.
410(a) shows the display state at the start of the remaining time gauge image. Here, an attack button imitation image that resembles the attack button 3710 is displayed to the left of the remaining time gauge image. Note that the attack button imitation image includes the word "rapid hit."
FIG. 410(b) shows the state in which the attack button 3710 has been pressed five times and a white aura image is displayed.
FIG. 410(c) shows the state in which the attack button 3710 is pressed five more times and a blue aura image is displayed.
FIG. 410(d) shows the state in which the attack button 3710 is pressed five more times and a red aura image is displayed.
410(e) shows the display state in which the remaining time gauge image has finished displaying and the aura image has finished displaying. In this state, the left decorative symbol remains temporarily stopped, and the center decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are in a state of high-speed fluctuation.
As shown in Figures 410(a) to 410(e), the display priority of the standby image, remaining time gauge image, and attack button simulation image is higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern and aura image.

This embodiment can excite the player while the remaining time gauge image is displayed.

The operation required of the player is not limited to repeated taps; for example, a long press may be required, or a single press may be sufficient. In the case of a long press, the color of the aura image may be changed in stages depending on the length of time the button is pressed. In the case of a single press, an aura image of one of the following colors may be displayed in response to each operation: white, blue, or red. Furthermore, operation components such as the left lever 3720 and right lever 3730 may be required to be tilted back and forth or left and right multiple times (equivalent to repeated taps of the attack button 3710), tilted for a long period of time (equivalent to a long press of the attack button 3710), or tilted once (equivalent to a single press of the attack button 3710).

The operation reception effect in this embodiment may always be executed. Alternatively, the operation reception effect may sometimes be executed and sometimes not. Furthermore, the expectation level may be higher when the operation reception effect is executed than when it is not executed.

In the "second hold change color indication effect" described with reference to Figures 399 and 403 to 405 (in a situation where an image suggesting that the standby hold image may change (an image imitating a slot machine installed in a casino facility as the background image for the indication effect) is displayed in the "second hold change color indication effect"), if an indication is executed prompting the player to perform a predetermined operation (operation acceptance effect), the image imitating the operation unit should be displayed after the image suggesting that the standby hold image may change is displayed in the "second hold change color indication effect". In this way, the player can be made aware that the standby hold image may change before performing the predetermined operation, and can perform the predetermined operation with a sense of anticipation.

The image simulating the control units may also be displayed before the image suggesting that the standby image may change is displayed in the "second standby image change color indication effect." This allows for a sense of surprise to the player, as the image suggesting that the standby image may change is displayed when the player attempts to operate the control units before realizing that the standby image may change. Therefore, when displaying the image simulating the control units before the image suggesting that the standby image may change in the "second standby image change color indication effect," it is advisable to display the image suggesting that the standby image may change in an extremely short time (for example, about 0.2 seconds) after the image simulating the control units is displayed. In this case, the image simulating the control units is displayed across the time span before and after the image suggesting that the standby image may change is displayed.

When a player performs a specified operation or the valid operation period ends, a decorative pattern (a decorative pattern whose color corresponds to the color of the waiting image that may change) that will eventually temporarily stop is displayed as a post-operation effect, as shown in Figure 410(e). The image simulating the operation controls is hidden simultaneously with the display of this post-operation effect, so the image simulating the operation controls is hidden while an image suggesting that the waiting image may change is displayed. This allows the player to focus on the waiting image that may change. Furthermore, the image simulating the operation controls may be hidden gradually rather than suddenly. "Gradually" refers to a display in which the transparency of the image simulating the operation controls is gradually increased, the image simulating the operation controls is displayed in a popping manner, or a predetermined effect is displayed superimposed on the image simulating the operation controls. In such cases, the image simulating the operation controls may be completely hidden even when the image suggesting that the waiting image may change is hidden. Even in such cases, the image simulating the operation controls remains beautiful and flowing, providing a natural display for the player.

In addition, when an effect (operation acceptance effect) prompting the player to perform a predetermined operation is executed in the "second hold change color indication effect" (when an image suggesting that the standby hold image may change (an image imitating a slot machine installed in a casino facility as the background image for the indication effect) is displayed in the "second hold change color indication effect"), either a "first operation acceptance effect" that displays a suggestive image suggesting that an image imitating the operation components will be displayed before the image imitating the operation components is displayed (suggesting that the operation will be effective) or a "second operation acceptance effect" that does not display a suggestive image suggesting that an image imitating the operation components will be displayed before the image imitating the operation components is displayed (suggesting that the operation will be effective) may be applied. This is because the "first operation acceptance effect" creates a sense of anticipation in advance, while the "second operation acceptance effect" can provide the player with a sense of surprise.

In addition, while it has been explained that when the decorative pattern that will eventually temporarily stop (a decorative pattern of a color corresponding to the color of the variable standby image) is displayed as a post-operation effect, an image suggesting that the standby image may change (an image imitating a slot machine installed in a casino facility as a background image for the predictive effect) is displayed, it is also possible to hide the image suggesting that the standby image may change (an image imitating a slot machine installed in a casino facility as a background image for the predictive effect) when the decorative pattern that will eventually temporarily stop (a decorative pattern of a color corresponding to the color of the variable standby image) is displayed as a post-operation effect. By doing this, only the decorative pattern that will eventually temporarily stop as a post-operation effect will be displayed, making the player clearly aware of the variable color of the standby image. Furthermore, rather than displaying a decorative pattern that will eventually temporarily stop as the post-operation effect (a decorative pattern of a color corresponding to the color of the standby hold image, which may change), it may be used as a preview effect that indicates the likelihood of a jackpot, rather than suggesting the color of the standby hold image, which may change, such as a display of "Chance" or "Hot!", or it may be used as a preview effect that indicates the likelihood of a jackpot, such as a display of a decorative pattern that will eventually temporarily stop as the post-operation effect (a decorative pattern of a color corresponding to the color of the standby hold image, which may change) (for a hold change effect), or it may be used as a preview effect that indicates a jackpot, such as "Chance" or "Hot!".

In addition, when the display of the background image for the predictive effect has ended and the decorative pattern has begun to fluctuate at a high speed, a predetermined "operation acceptance effect" may be executed. Furthermore, the standby reserve image may be upgraded in this operation acceptance effect. This allows the player to maintain their anticipation of a jackpot even if the standby reserve image does not change in the "second standby reserve color change predictive effect." Furthermore, in this operation acceptance effect, instead of upgrading the standby reserve image, a predetermined notice effect as described above may be executed. Furthermore, this operation acceptance effect may be executed multiple times, and all of these multiple times may be configured to upgrade the standby reserve image or execute a predetermined notice effect, or both.
In this case, the "operation acceptance presentation" can be a "first operation acceptance presentation" that displays a suggestive image suggesting that the operation will be effective, or a "second operation acceptance presentation" that does not display a suggestive image suggesting that the operation will be effective.

In this way, by executing the "operation acceptance effect" during or before and after the display of the background image for the predictive effect, it is possible to further enhance the effect of whether or not the display mode of the standby image changes.

The "movable decorative member movement effect" that moves the movable decorative member from the standby position to the moving position may be executed simultaneously with the display of the background image for the predictive effect in the "second pending color change predictive effect."
Specifically, the timing for starting the "movable decorative member movement effect" (the timing when the movable decorative member starts moving from the standby position) should be the same as the timing for starting to display the background image for the "second pending color change indication effect" (timing t13.5 in the embodiment shown in Figure 399). Also, the timing for ending the "movable decorative member movement effect" (the timing when the movable decorative member completes movement to the moving position) should be the same as the timing for ending to display the background image for the "second pending color change indication effect" (timing t20.5 in the embodiment shown in Figure 399).
As mentioned above, if the "movable decorative member moving effect" is executed, the probability of winning the jackpot should be higher if it is executed than if it is not executed.

On the other hand, the execution period of the "movable decorative member movement effect" and the display period of the background image for the predictive effect in the "second pending color change predictive effect" (the period from timing t13.5 to timing t20.5) may be shifted.
For example, after the display of the background image for the predictive effect in the "second pending color change predictive effect" begins, the movable decorative member may start moving from the standby position while the background image for the predictive effect is being displayed, and after the display of the background image for the predictive effect in the "second pending color change predictive effect" ends, the movable decorative member may complete its movement to the moving position. For example, the movable decorative member may be moved from timing t15 to timing t22.

Alternatively, after the display of the background image for the predictive effect in the "second pending color change predictive effect" begins, the movable decorative member may begin moving from the standby position while the background image for the predictive effect is being displayed, and after the movable decorative member has completed moving to the moving position, the display of the background image for the predictive effect in the "second pending color change predictive effect" may end. For example, the movable decorative member may be moved from timing t15 to timing t18.

This type of embodiment can create a sense of anticipation even during waiting times, such as when the effects are explained, and can heighten interest by providing two types of anticipation effects when the remaining time gauge is decreasing.

On the other hand, the "movable decorative member movement effect" may not be executed during the display period of the background image for the "second hold color change effect" (the period from timing t13.5 to timing t20.5). This allows the player to focus on the "second hold color change effect."

On the other hand, the "movable decorative member movement effect" may be started after the end of the display period of the background image for the premonition effect in the "second pending color change premonition effect" (the period from timing t13.5 to timing t20.5).
For example, the movable decorative member may be moved from the standby position to the moving position between timing t21 and timing t22 after the display of the background image for the premonition effect in the "second pending color change premonition effect" has ended.
According to this embodiment, even if the standby reserve image is not upgraded in the "second reserve color change indication effect," the expectation of a big win can be maintained.

In the "second pending color change indication effect," a background image for the indication effect is displayed for a predetermined period (the period from timing t13.5 to timing t20.5), but a predetermined preview effect suggesting the degree of expectation may be executed between the start and end of the display of the background image for the indication effect.
As the predetermined preview effect, the "step-up preview effect" shown with reference to Figure 384 or the "weather preview effect" shown with reference to Figure 393 can be adopted.
For example, a "step-up preview effect" or a "weather preview effect" may be executed during the period from timing t13.5 to timing t20.5. Note that the execution time of the "step-up preview effect" differs depending on the number of stages, but it is advisable to divide the execution time into four equal parts, with each period representing the first to fourth stages. For example, if the "step-up preview effect" is executed over two seconds, the display times for the first, second, third, and fourth stages may each be set to 0.5 seconds.
The expectation level indicated by the "step-up preview effect" and the "weather preview effect" is not the expectation level that the result of the change in the decorative pattern during the change will be a jackpot, but the expectation level that the result of the change corresponding to the standby image, which can change color at timing t20, will be a jackpot.
The display priority of the horizontal frame and characters in the "step-up preview performance" and the weather phenomenon image in the "weather preview performance" may be lower than the display priority of the standby image and the remaining time gauge image.

In this embodiment, a sense of anticipation for a jackpot can be provided to the player during the period when it is unclear whether the standby image will change. Furthermore, because the specified preview effect does not require the player to operate the control unit, anticipation can be heightened without making the player feel impatient. Furthermore, because the moving standby image is displayed in front of the image displayed by the specified preview effect, it is possible to prevent the player from losing track of the standby image because the moving standby image is obscured by the image displayed by the specified preview effect.

Rather than starting a predetermined preview effect (such as a "step-up preview effect" or "weather preview effect") simultaneously with the start of display of the background image for the preview effect, the predetermined preview effect may start a predetermined time after the start of display of the background image for the preview effect. For example, the timing to start the predetermined preview effect may be a predetermined timing within the period from timing t13.5 to timing t16 when a display explaining the effect content is being displayed, or a predetermined timing within the period from timing t16 to timing t19 when a remaining time gauge image is being displayed.

Instead of ending a predetermined preview effect (such as a "step-up preview effect" or a "weather preview effect") simultaneously with the end of the display of the background image for the predictive effect, the predetermined preview effect may end before the end of the display of the background image for the predictive effect. For example, the timing at which the predetermined preview effect ends may be timing t18.
Alternatively, the predetermined preview effect may be ended after the display of the predictive effect background image has ended. For example, the timing at which the predetermined preview effect ends may be set to timing t21.

After the display of the background image for the predictive effect has finished, a predetermined preview effect (such as a "step-up preview effect" or a "weather preview effect") may be started. For example, the predetermined preview effect may be executed during the period from timing t22 to timing t27. Instead of the predetermined preview effect (such as a "step-up preview effect" or a "weather preview effect"), a display effect that confirms the occurrence of a jackpot (a display effect with a 100% expectation of a jackpot) may be executed.
According to this embodiment, the expectation of a big win can be maintained even if the standby image is not upgraded.

The embodiments and variations of the "first hold change color indication effect" and the "second hold change color indication effect" have been described above, but these can be implemented in appropriate combinations.
For example, it can be implemented as a "hold change color indication effect" that adopts a certain embodiment (or modified example) of the "first hold change color indication effect" and a certain embodiment (or modified example) of the "second hold change color indication effect."

In addition, a specified effect (such as the above-mentioned "first operation reception effect,""second operation reception effect,""operation unit operation effect,""movable decorative member movement effect,""step-up preview effect,""weather preview effect," etc.) may be executed across the "first hold change color indication effect" and the "second hold change color indication effect."
Furthermore, after the "first pending color change indication effect", a "development effect" is executed to start the "second pending color change indication effect", and the execution period of the "development effect" may be set to a predetermined number of seconds (approximately 0.5 to 10 seconds) to heighten the player's anticipation. Furthermore, during the execution of the "development effect", a predetermined effect that was executed during the "first pending color change indication effect" may end, or a predetermined effect may be started and executed until a predetermined timing during the "second pending color change indication effect".

After the "first reserved color change indication effect" has ended and the decorative symbols have been changed to a high-speed change, the operation unit may be made available to accept operations. After that, the "second reserved color change indication effect" may be started.
For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 399 etc., decorative symbols may be displayed with high-speed fluctuations from timing t12.5 to timing t13.5, and a "development effect" may be executed from timing t13 to timing t13.5. Also, a "second operation acceptance effect" in which a suggestive image is not displayed beforehand may be started at a predetermined timing after the decorative symbols start to fluctuate at high speed (a predetermined timing within the period from timing t12.5 to timing t13.0) or at a predetermined timing during the execution of the "development effect" (a predetermined timing within the period from timing t13 to timing t13.5).

Based on the operation reception of the "second operation reception effect," the color of the characters "from..." may be changed, and the color may indicate the degree of expectation of a jackpot. For example, the characters "from..." may be displayed in white, and depending on the operation of the operation unit, they may change to red or remain white without changing to red. It is also preferable that the color change to red indicates a higher degree of expectation of a jackpot.
It should be noted that instead of changing the color of the letters "from... to...", either a predetermined white image or a predetermined red image (for example, an aura image) may be displayed based on the operation reception, and the color of the image may indicate the likelihood of a jackpot. In this case, it is also preferable that the predetermined red image indicates a higher likelihood of a jackpot. Instead of executing the "second operation reception effect" in which a suggestive image is not displayed in advance, it is also possible to start executing the "first operation reception effect" in which a suggestive image is displayed in advance.

In this embodiment, after the high-speed fluctuation resumes, the "development effect" is executed, confirming that the "second pending color change indication effect" will be executed, and the "operation acceptance effect" begins while the "development effect" is being executed, creating great anticipation in the player for a jackpot to occur.

If no operation is performed on the operation unit, the execution period of the "second operation reception effect" ends at timing t13.5, which is the timing at which the "development effect" ends.
When an operation is performed on the operation unit, an image corresponding to the operation is displayed, but this display also ends at timing t13.5, which is the timing when the "development effect" ends.

In this way, by making the period during which the operation unit is able to accept operations and the period during which images corresponding to accepted operations are displayed extremely short, it is possible to create a sense of tension in the game.

The image corresponding to the operation reception may continue to be displayed until a predetermined timing within the period during which the "second pending color change indication effect" starts and the indication effect background image is displayed (from timing t13.5 to timing t20.5). Alternatively, the image corresponding to the operation reception may continue to be displayed until a predetermined timing after the display of the indication effect background image has ended.

In this embodiment, although the period for accepting operations is short, the image corresponding to the operation is displayed for a long period of time, giving the player a sense of satisfaction for successfully operating the operation unit.

Although the embodiment in which the "second operation reception effect" ends at timing t13.5, which is the timing when the "development effect" ends, has been shown, the "second operation reception effect" may be continued even during the period when the "second hold color change indication effect" starts and the indication effect background image is displayed. In this case, an image corresponding to the operation reception will be displayed even during the "second hold color change indication effect".
According to this embodiment, the valid operation period can be extended, so that the operation unit can be operated reliably.

The image corresponding to the operation acceptance will be displayed even during the "second pending color change indication effect," but the display of the image corresponding to the operation acceptance may be terminated while the indication effect background image is being displayed, or the display of the image corresponding to the operation acceptance may continue even after the indication effect background image is displayed.

In the example shown, the decorative pattern changes rapidly from the end of the "first pending color change indication effect" to the start of the "second pending color change indication effect." However, during the period when the decorative pattern is changing rapidly, the "movable decorative member movement indication" may be started, and the movable decorative member may start moving from its standby position to its moving position. Also, it may be preferable to complete the movement of the movable decorative member to its moving position while the background image for the indication effect is being displayed.
Alternatively, the "second pending color change indication effect" may be initiated after the movable decorative member has completed moving to its movement position, or the movable decorative member may be completed moving to its movement position after the display of the background image for the indication effect has ended.
In addition, when the movable decorative element moves, the likelihood of a jackpot is higher than when it does not move. Therefore, when the movable decorative element moves, the "second reserved color change indication effect" can be made more exciting.

Although a modified example has been shown in which the decorative pattern changes rapidly during the period from the end of the "first pending color change indication effect" to the start of the "second pending color change indication effect," it is also possible to prevent the "movable decorative member movement effect" from being executed during the period in which the decorative pattern is changing rapidly, depending on the type of background image for the indication effect displayed in the "second pending color change indication effect."
For example, when the background image for the first predictive effect is displayed in the "second pending color change predictive effect," the "movable decorative member movement effect" may or may not be executed, and when the background image for the second predictive effect is displayed in the "second pending color change predictive effect," the "movable decorative member movement effect" may not always be executed.
The degree of expectation of a jackpot may be varied depending on the type of the background image for predictive effect. For example, the degree of expectation of the first background image for predictive effect and the second background image for predictive effect may be higher, or the degree of expectation of the latter may be higher, or the degrees of expectation of both may be the same.
According to this embodiment, depending on whether or not the "movable decorative member moving effect" is executed, the type of background image for the predictive effect to be displayed can be guessed, and the likelihood of a jackpot can also be guessed. Furthermore, by not executing the "movable decorative member moving effect," the player can focus on the "second pending color changing predictive effect."

Although a modified example in which the decorative symbols change at high speed during the period from the end of the "first reserved color change indication effect" to the start of the "second reserved color change indication effect" has been shown, the display of the characters "From..." may also be started during the period in which the decorative symbols are changing at high speed. Furthermore, the color of the characters "From..." may be set to three colors: white (low expectation), red (medium expectation), and rainbow (guaranteed jackpot), and the expectation of a jackpot may be indicated by the color of the characters. Furthermore, it is preferable to end the display of the characters "From..." while the background image for the indication effect is being displayed.
According to this embodiment, the player can be made to look forward to the "second hold change color indication effect."

Also, rather than ending the display of the text "From..." while the background image for the predictive effect is being displayed, the text "From..." may end before the background image for the predictive effect is displayed. In this embodiment, the text "From..." ends in a short period of time, allowing the player to focus on the "second hold color change predictive effect."

Below, we will explain the time relationship between the start timing of the "second operation acceptance effect," "movable decorative member movement effect," and specified preview effects ("step-up preview effect" and "weather preview effect"), the specified timing during the execution of the effect (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "intermediate timing"), and the end timing.

First, for the "second operation reception presentation," there is a timing to start displaying the operation instruction display, a timing to end displaying the operation instruction display (which is the timing at which the operation valid period ends and also the timing to start displaying the post-operation display), and a timing to end displaying the post-operation display. Note that if the operation instruction display starts and an operation is performed on the operation unit, the post-operation display is displayed immediately. Note that the timing to end the post-operation display does not change regardless of whether an operation is performed or not.
In addition, the "movable decorative member movement performance" includes the timing when the movable decorative member starts moving to the moving position, the timing when it completes moving to the moving position, and the timing when it completes moving to the standby position.
In addition, certain preview effects (such as "step-up preview effects" and "weather preview effects") have start and end timings.
The temporal relationship between each of these timings and other timings will be explained.
As shown in Figure 411, the earliest start timing of these effects (at least one of the start timing of the display of operation instructions, the start timing of the movement of the movable decorative member, and the start timing of the preview effect) is the timing when the display of ``From...'' in the ``Development effect'' starts (timing t13).

The relationship between the timing at which the operation instruction display starts and other timings will be described below.
The relationship between the display start timing of the operation instruction display and other start timings will be described.
The movement of the movable decorative member may be started after the display of the operation instructions has begun, the movement of the movable decorative member may be started simultaneously with the start of the display of the operation instructions, or the display of the operation instructions may be started after the movement of the movable decorative member has begun.
The execution of a predetermined preview performance may be started after the display of operation instructions has started, the execution of a predetermined preview performance may be started simultaneously with the start of the display of operation instructions, or the display of operation instructions may be started after the execution of a predetermined preview performance has started.

The relationship between the display start timing of the operation instruction display and other intermediate timings will be described.
The movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position may be completed after the display of the operation instructions has begun, the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position may be completed simultaneously with the start of the display of the operation instructions, or the display of the operation instructions may be started after the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position has been completed.

The relationship between the display start timing of the operation instruction display and the other end timings will be described.
The movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed after the display of the operation instructions has begun, the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed simultaneously with the start of the display of the operation instructions, or the display of the operation instructions may be started after the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position has been completed.
The execution of the predetermined preview performance may be terminated after the display of the operation instructions has started, the execution of the predetermined preview performance may be terminated simultaneously with the start of the display of the operation instructions, or the display of the operation instructions may be started after the execution of the predetermined preview performance has been terminated.

The relationship between the timing at which the display of the operation instruction display ends and other timings will be described below.
The relationship between the timing at which the display of the operation instruction display ends and the timing at which other operations start will be described.
The movement of the movable decorative member may be started after the display of the operation instructions has ended, the movement of the movable decorative member may be started simultaneously with the end of the display of the operation instructions, or the display of the operation instructions may be ended after the movement of the movable decorative member has begun.
The execution of a predetermined preview performance may be started after the display of the operation instructions has ended, the execution of the predetermined preview performance may be started simultaneously with the end of the display of the operation instructions, or the display of the operation instructions may be ended after the execution of the predetermined preview performance has started.

The relationship between the timing at which the display of the operation instruction display ends and other intermediate timings will be described.
The movement of the movable decorative member to its desired position may be completed after the display of the operation instructions has ended, or the movement of the movable decorative member to its desired position may be completed simultaneously with the end of the display of the operation instructions, or the display of the operation instructions may be ended after the movement of the movable decorative member to its desired position has been completed.

The relationship between the timing of ending the display of the operation instruction display and other ending timings will be described.
The movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed after the display of the operation instructions has ended, the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed simultaneously with the end of the display of the operation instructions, or the display of the operation instructions may be ended after the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position has been completed.
The execution of the predetermined preview performance may be terminated after the display of the operation instructions has been terminated, or the execution of the predetermined preview performance may be terminated simultaneously with the termination of the display of the operation instructions, or the display of the operation instructions may be terminated after the execution of the predetermined preview performance has been terminated.

The relationship between the timing at which the post-operation display ends and other timings will be described below.
The relationship between the end timing of the post-operation display and the start timing of other displays will be described.
The movement of the movable decorative member may be started after the post-operation display has ended, the movement of the movable decorative member may be started simultaneously with the end of the post-operation display, or the post-operation display may be ended after the movement of the movable decorative member has begun.
The execution of a predetermined preview performance may be started after the post-operation display has ended, the execution of the predetermined preview performance may be started simultaneously with the end of the post-operation display, or the post-operation display may be ended after the execution of the predetermined preview performance has started.

The relationship between the end timing of the post-operation display and other intermediate timings will be described.
The movement of the movable decorative member to its movement position may be completed after the post-operation display has ended, the movement of the movable decorative member to its movement position may be completed simultaneously with the end of the post-operation display, or the post-operation display may be ended after the movement of the movable decorative member to its movement position has been completed.

The relationship between the end timing of the post-operation display and other end timings will be described.
The movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed after the post-operation display has ended, the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed simultaneously with the end of the post-operation display, or the post-operation display may be ended after the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position has been completed.
The execution of the predetermined preview performance may be terminated after the post-operation display is terminated, the execution of the predetermined preview performance may be terminated simultaneously with the termination of the post-operation display, or the post-operation display may be terminated after the execution of the predetermined preview performance is terminated.

Below, we will explain the relationship between the timing at which the movable decorative member starts moving and other timings.
The relationship between the timing at which the movable decorative member starts moving and other start timings will be explained.
The operation instruction display may be started after the movement of the movable decorative member has begun, or the operation instruction display may be started simultaneously with the start of the movement of the movable decorative member, or the movement of the movable decorative member may be started after the operation instruction display has begun.
The execution of a predetermined preview performance may be started after the movement of the movable decorative member has started, or the execution of a predetermined preview performance may be started simultaneously with the start of the movement of the movable decorative member, or the movement of the movable decorative member may be started after the execution of the predetermined preview performance has started.

The relationship between the timing at which the movable decorative member starts moving and other intermediate timings will be explained.
The operation instruction display may be ended after the movement of the movable decorative member has begun, the operation instruction display may be ended simultaneously with the start of the movement of the movable decorative member, or the movement of the movable decorative member may be started after the operation instruction display has been ended.

The relationship between the timing at which the movable decorative member starts moving and the timing at which it ends moving will be explained.
The post-operation display may be ended after the movement of the movable decorative member has begun, the post-operation display may be ended simultaneously with the start of movement of the movable decorative member, or the movement of the movable decorative member may be started after the post-operation display has ended.
The execution of the predetermined preview performance may be terminated after the movement of the movable decorative member has begun, the execution of the predetermined preview performance may be terminated simultaneously with the start of the movement of the movable decorative member, or the display of operation instructions may be started after the execution of the predetermined preview performance has ended.

Below, we will explain the relationship between the timing at which the movable decorative element completes its movement to its movement position and other timings.
The relationship between the timing at which the movable decorative element completes its movement to the desired position and the timing at which other movements are started will be explained.
The operation instruction display may be started after the movable decorative member has completed moving to its desired position, or may be started simultaneously with the completion of the movement of the movable decorative member to its desired position, or the movement of the movable decorative member to its desired position may be completed after the operation instruction display has started.
The execution of a predetermined preview performance may be started after the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed, or the execution of a predetermined preview performance may be started simultaneously with the completion of the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position, or the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position may be completed after the execution of the predetermined preview performance has started.

The relationship between the timing at which the movable decorative element completes its movement to the desired position and other intermediate timings will be explained.
The operation instruction display may be terminated after the movable decorative member has completed moving to its desired position, or the operation instruction display may be terminated simultaneously with the completion of the movement of the movable decorative member to its desired position, or the movement of the movable decorative member to its desired position may be completed after the operation instruction display is terminated.

The relationship between the timing at which the movable decorative element completes its movement to the desired position and other end timings will be explained.
The post-operation display may be ended after the movable decorative member has completed moving to its movement position, or the post-operation display may be ended simultaneously with the completion of the movement of the movable decorative member to its movement position, or the movement of the movable decorative member to its movement position may be completed after the post-operation display is ended.
The execution of the predetermined preview performance may be terminated after the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed, the execution of the predetermined preview performance may be terminated simultaneously with the completion of the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position, or the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position may be completed after the execution of the predetermined preview performance is completed.

Below, we will explain the relationship between the timing at which the movable decorative element completes its movement to the standby position and other timings.
The relationship between the timing at which the movable decorative element completes its movement to the standby position and the timing at which other movements are started will be explained.
The operation instruction display may be started after the movable decorative member has completed moving to the standby position, or may be started simultaneously with the completion of the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position, or the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed after the operation instruction display has begun.
The execution of a predetermined preview performance may be started after the movable decorative member has completed moving to the standby position, or the execution of a predetermined preview performance may be started simultaneously with the completion of the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position, or the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed after the execution of the predetermined preview performance has begun.

The relationship between the timing at which the movable decorative element completes its movement to the standby position and other intermediate timings will be explained.
The operation instruction display may be terminated after the movable decorative member has completed moving to its standby position, or may be terminated simultaneously with the completion of the movement of the movable decorative member to its standby position, or the movement of the movable decorative member to its standby position may be completed after the operation instruction display has been terminated.

The relationship between the timing at which the movable decorative element completes its movement to the standby position and other end timings will be explained.
The post-operation display may be ended after the movable decorative member has completed moving to the standby position, or the post-operation display may be ended simultaneously with the completion of the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position, or the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed after the post-operation display has ended.
The execution of the predetermined preview performance may be terminated after the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed, the execution of the predetermined preview performance may be terminated simultaneously with the completion of the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position, or the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed after the execution of the predetermined preview performance is completed.

Below, we will explain the relationship between the start timing of the execution of a specified preview performance and other timings.
The relationship between the start timing of a predetermined preview performance and other start timings will be explained.
The display of operation instructions may be started after the execution of a predetermined preview performance has started, or the display of operation instructions may be started simultaneously with the start of the execution of a predetermined preview performance, or the execution of a predetermined preview performance may be started after the display of operation instructions has started.
The movement of the movable decorative member may be started after the execution of a predetermined preview performance has started, the movement of the movable decorative member may be started simultaneously with the start of the execution of the predetermined preview performance, or the execution of the predetermined preview performance may be started after the movement of the movable decorative member has started.

The relationship between the timing at which a predetermined preview performance starts and other intermediate timings will be explained.
The display of operation instructions may be terminated after the execution of a predetermined preview performance has started, the display of operation instructions may be terminated simultaneously with the start of the execution of a predetermined preview performance, or the execution of a predetermined preview performance may be started after the display of operation instructions has been terminated.
The movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position may be completed after the execution of the specified preview performance has begun, the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position may be completed simultaneously with the start of the execution of the specified preview performance, or the execution of the specified preview performance may be started after the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position has been completed.

The relationship between the start timing of a specified preview performance and other end timings will be explained.
The post-operation display may be ended after the execution of a predetermined preview performance has started, the post-operation display may be ended simultaneously with the start of the execution of the predetermined preview performance, or the execution of the predetermined preview performance may be started after the post-operation display has ended.
The movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed after the execution of the specified preview performance has begun, the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed simultaneously with the start of the execution of the specified preview performance, or the execution of the specified preview performance may be started after the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position has been completed.

Below, we will explain the relationship between the timing at which the execution of a specified preview performance ends and other timings.
The relationship between the timing at which a predetermined preview performance ends and the timing at which other preview performances start will be explained.
The operation instruction display may be started after the execution of a predetermined preview performance is completed, or the operation instruction display may be started simultaneously with the completion of the execution of a predetermined preview performance, or the post-operation display may be ended after the execution of a predetermined preview performance is started.
The movement of the movable decorative member may be started after the execution of the predetermined preview performance is completed, the movement of the movable decorative member may be started simultaneously with the completion of the execution of the predetermined preview performance, or the execution of the predetermined preview performance may be completed after the movement of the movable decorative member has started.

The relationship between the timing at which a specified preview performance ends and other intermediate timings will be explained.
The display of operation instructions may be terminated after the execution of a predetermined preview performance is completed, or the display of operation instructions may be terminated simultaneously with the completion of the execution of a predetermined preview performance, or the execution of a predetermined preview performance may be terminated after the display of operation instructions is terminated.
The movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position may be completed after the execution of the specified preview performance is completed, the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position may be completed simultaneously with the completion of the execution of the specified preview performance, or the execution of the specified preview performance may be terminated after the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed.

The relationship between the timing at which a predetermined preview performance ends and other end timings will be explained.
The movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed after the execution of the specified preview performance has been completed, the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed simultaneously with the completion of the execution of the specified preview performance, or the execution of the specified preview performance may be terminated after the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position has been completed.
The post-operation display may be ended after the execution of a predetermined preview performance is completed, the post-operation display may be ended simultaneously with the completion of the execution of the predetermined preview performance, or the execution of the predetermined preview performance may be ended after the post-operation display is completed.

Although the temporal relationship between two timings has been shown, the temporal relationships of the timings described above may be combined. In this case, the temporal relationship between three or more timings will be shown.

Below, an embodiment combining three or more timings is illustrated with reference to the time charts shown in Figures 399 and 411. Note that Figure 411 is a time chart showing the execution modes of the "second operation acceptance effect," "movable decorative member movement effect," and "predetermined preview effect" during the period from timing t11 to timing t20 shown in Figure 399. Note that Figures 411(a) to 411(c) differ in the execution timing and length of time for each effect during the period from timing t11 to timing t20.

The movement of the movable decorative member may be started after the operation instruction display is started, a predetermined preview performance may be started after the movement of the movable decorative member has started, the operation instruction display may be ended after the performance of the predetermined preview performance has started, the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position may be completed after the operation instruction display is ended, the performance of the predetermined preview performance may be completed after the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed, the post-operation display may be ended after the performance of the predetermined preview performance is completed, and the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed after the post-operation display is ended.

For example, in the embodiment shown in Figure 411(a), the operation instruction display begins at timing t13, the movement of the movable decorative member begins at timing t13.5, the execution of a predetermined preview performance begins at timing t14, the post-operation display begins at timing t14.5, the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed at timing t15.5, the execution of the predetermined preview performance ends at timing t16, the post-operation display ends at timing t16.5, and the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed at timing t17.5.

It is also possible to start the execution of a predetermined preview performance after starting the display of operation instructions, start the movement of the movable decorative member after starting the execution of the predetermined preview performance, end the display of operation instructions after starting the movement of the movable decorative member, complete the movement of the movable decorative member to its movement position after ending the display of operation instructions, end the execution of the predetermined preview performance after the movement of the movable decorative member to its movement position is completed, end the post-operation display after the execution of the predetermined preview performance is completed, and complete the movement of the movable decorative member to its standby position after ending the post-operation display.

For example, in the embodiment shown in Figure 411 (b), the display of operation instructions begins at timing t13, the execution of a predetermined preview performance begins at timing t13.5, the movement of the movable decorative member begins at timing t14, the post-operation display begins at timing t14.5, the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed at timing t16, the execution of the predetermined preview performance ends at timing t16.5, the post-operation display ends at timing t17, and the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed at timing t18.

The movement of the movable decorative member may be started after the execution of a predetermined preview performance, the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position may be completed after the movement of the movable decorative member has started, the display of operation instructions may be started after the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed, the execution of the predetermined preview performance may be completed after the display of operation instructions has started, the display of operation instructions may be ended after the execution of the predetermined preview performance is completed, the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position may be completed after the display of operation instructions has ended, and the post-operation display may be ended after the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed.

For example, in the embodiment shown in Figure 411 (c), execution of a predetermined preview performance begins at timing t13, movement of the movable decorative member begins at timing t13.5, movement of the movable decorative member to the desired position is completed at timing t15.5, display of operation instructions begins at timing t16, execution of the predetermined preview performance ends at timing t16.5, post-operation display begins at timing t17.5, movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed at timing t18, and the post-operation display ends at timing t19.5.

It is desirable that the difference between the timing of an event and the timing of another event that occurs after it be at least 0.5 seconds. In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 411, all of these differences are 0.5 seconds or more. This allows the player to recognize whether an event and another event occurred simultaneously or whether the other event occurred with a delay.
It should be noted that the minimum time may be set to 1 second or more, rather than 0.5 seconds or more, in which case it is possible to more clearly recognize that an event has occurred late.

A "second operation reception effect" may be adopted instead of the "first operation reception effect" as the operation reception effect. In this case, a suggestion image suggesting that the operation will be effective is displayed at a predetermined timing before the operation instruction display starts. The timing of the display of this suggestion image can also have a temporal relationship similar to the temporal relationship between the start timing of the operation instruction display and other timings described above.
For example, in relation to the timing at which the movement of the movable decorative member begins, the movement of the movable decorative member may begin after the display of the suggestive image begins, the movement of the movable decorative member may begin at the same time as the display of the suggestive image begins, or the display of the suggestive image may begin after the movement of the movable decorative member begins.
The same applies to the relationship between the timing at which the suggestive image starts to be displayed and various other timings.

The relationship between the timing when three effects, "operation acceptance effect,""movable decorative member movement effect," and "predetermined preview effect," are executed is shown, but it is also possible to define the relationship between the timing when any two of the three effects are executed.
For example, the timing of execution of the "operation reception performance" and "movable decorative member movement performance" may be such that the movement of the movable decorative member begins after the operation instruction display begins, the operation instruction display ends after the movement of the movable decorative member begins, the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed after the operation instruction display ends, the post-operation display ends after the movement of the movable decorative member to the movement position is completed, and the movement of the movable decorative member to the standby position is completed after the post-operation display ends.
It is preferable that the more of the three effects, "operation reception effect,""movable decorative member movement effect," and "predetermined advance notice effect," that are executed, the higher the expectation level becomes. In other words, the expectation level becomes higher when two effects are executed than when only one effect is executed, and the expectation level becomes higher when three effects are executed than when two effects are executed.

As shown in Figure 399, the period (7 seconds) during which the background image for the indicator effect in the "second hold change color indicator effect" is displayed is longer than the period (5.5 seconds) during which the standby hold image moves in the "first hold change color indicator effect" (from timing t6.5 to timing t12).
The length of time for which the prognostic effect background image is displayed may be longer (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, it is advisable to lengthen the display time of the display explaining the effect content and the remaining time gauge image.
Although both the "first hold change color indication effect" and the "second hold change color indication effect" are effects that change the display mode of the standby hold image, by using such an embodiment, it is possible to make the player aware that there is a higher chance of winning if the effect progresses to the "second hold change color indication effect" than if it ends with only the "first hold change color indication effect."

The length of time required for the standby image to move in the "first standby color indication effect" may be the same as the length of time required for the background image for the indication effect to be displayed in the "second standby color indication effect." In this case, it is advisable to shorten the display time of the display explaining the effect content and the remaining time gauge image. Because both the "first standby color indication effect" and the "second standby color indication effect" are effects that change the display mode of the standby image, setting the same time makes it easier for the player to grasp the timing at which the standby image changes, and reduces the frustration felt by the player due to not knowing or understanding the timing at which the standby image changes.
Alternatively, the length of time required for the standby image to move in the "first standby color change indication effect" may be longer than the length of time required for the background image for the indication effect to be displayed in the "second standby color change indication effect." In this case, the display time for the display explaining the effect content and the remaining time gauge image may be shortened (for example, to a total of 3 seconds).
Since there is a higher expectation of a big win if the performance progresses to the "second hold change color indication performance" than if it ends with only the "first hold change color indication performance," if the "second hold change color indication performance" is shown to the player for a long time, the player will have to maintain a sense of tension for a long period of time, which will cause fatigue to build up, but by deliberately making the length of time required for the movement of the standby hold image in the "first hold change color indication performance" longer than the length of time required for the display of the background image for the indication performance in the "second hold change color indication performance," it is possible to eliminate the buildup of fatigue and to increase the sense of expectation all at once in a short period of time.

As shown in Figure 399, the period from when the background image for the indicator effect in the "second hold change color indicator effect" is displayed until the display mode of the hold image changes (timing t13.5 to timing t20) (6.5 seconds) is longer than the period (5.5 seconds) required for the hold image to move in the "first hold change color indicator effect" (timing t6.5 to timing t12).
The time period from when the predictive effect background image is displayed until the display mode of the standby image changes may be set to a longer time (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, it is advisable to lengthen the display time of the display explaining the effect content and the remaining time gauge image.
Although both the "first hold change color indication effect" and the "second hold change color indication effect" are effects that change the display mode of the standby hold image, by using such an embodiment, it is possible to make the player aware that there is a higher chance of winning if the effect progresses to the "second hold change color indication effect" than if it ends with only the "first hold change color indication effect."

The length of time required for the standby image to move in the "first standby color indication effect" may be the same as the length of time from when the indication effect background image is displayed to when the display mode of the standby image changes in the "second standby color indication effect." In this case, it is advisable to shorten the display time of the display explaining the effect content and the remaining time gauge image. Because both the "first standby color indication effect" and the "second standby color indication effect" are effects that change the display mode of the standby image, setting the same time makes it easier for players to grasp the timing at which the standby image changes, and reduces frustration felt by players who are confused about when the standby image changes.
Alternatively, the length of time required for the standby image to move in the "first standby color change indication effect" may be longer than the length of time from when the indication effect background image is displayed to when the standby image changes display mode in the "second standby color change indication effect." In this case, the display time for the display explaining the effect content and the remaining time gauge image may be shortened (for example, to a total of 3 seconds).
Since there is a higher expectation of a big win if the performance progresses to the "second hold change color indication performance" than if it ends with only the "first hold change color indication performance," if the "second hold change color indication performance" is shown to the player for a long time, the player will have to maintain a sense of tension for a long period of time, which will cause fatigue to build up, but by deliberately making the length of time required for the movement of the standby hold image in the "first hold change color indication performance" longer than the length of time required for the display of the background image for the indication performance in the "second hold change color indication performance," it is possible to eliminate the buildup of fatigue and to increase the sense of expectation all at once in a short period of time.

As shown in Fig. 398, the period (5.5 seconds) required for the standby image to move in the "first standby color change indication effect" (from timing t6.5 to timing t12) is longer than the period (1 second) from the end of the standby image movement in the "first standby color change indication effect" to the start of the high-speed change of the decorative pattern (from timing t12 to timing t13). As mentioned above, in the modified example of the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 399, the left, center, and right decorative patterns may be in a high-speed change state at timing t12.5 when the "development indication" is executed.
The reason for this embodiment is that the "first hold change color indication effect" does not necessarily progress to the "second hold change color indication effect," so there is no need to set too long the period from when the movement of the standby hold image in the "first hold change color indication effect" ends until the decorative pattern starts to change at high speed (from timing t12 to timing t13), and it is preferable to make the player clearly aware of the hold change in the "first hold change color indication effect."

The length of the period required for the standby image to move in the "first standby color change indication effect" may be the same as the length of the period from the end of the standby image movement in the "first standby color change indication effect" to the start of the high-speed change of the decorative pattern. In this case, the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern may be extended (for example, temporarily stop for 5.5 seconds from the end of the standby image movement).
Although it is not guaranteed that the "first hold change color indication effect" will progress to the "second hold change color indication effect," by using such an embodiment, the time until the branching of whether or not the "first hold change color indication effect" will progress to the "second hold change color indication effect" is made the same as the length (5.5 seconds) of the period (from timing t6.5 to timing t12) required for the standby hold image to move in the "first hold change color indication effect" that takes place before the branching, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize the timing of the branching of whether or not the first hold change color indication effect will progress to the second hold change color indication effect.
Alternatively, the length of time required for the standby image to move in the "first standby color change indication effect" may be shorter than the length of time from the end of the standby image movement in the "first standby color change indication effect" to the start of the high-speed change of the decorative pattern. In this case, the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern may be further extended (for example, for 10 seconds from the end of the standby image movement).
Although the "first hold change color indication effect" does not necessarily progress to the "second hold change color indication effect," by making the time until the branch of whether or not the "first hold change color indication effect" will progress to the "second hold change color indication effect" longer than the length (5.5 seconds) of the period (from timing t6.5 to timing t12) required for the movement of the standby hold image in the "first hold change color indication effect" that occurs before the branch, even if it progresses to the second hold change color indication effect, it will not progress to the length of the period required for the movement of the standby hold image in the "first hold change color indication effect" that occurs before the branch, thereby reducing excessive tension.

As shown in Figures 398 and 399, the display period (7 seconds) of the background image for the predictive effect in the "second pending color change predictive effect" (from timing t13.5 to timing t20.5) is longer than the period (1 second) from the end of the movement of the standby pending image in the "first pending color change predictive effect" to the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the decorative pattern (from timing t12 to timing t13). As mentioned above, even in the modified embodiment shown with reference to Figure 399, when the "development effect" is executed, the left, center, and right decorative patterns may be in a high-speed fluctuation state at timing t12.5.
By adopting such an embodiment, the player can clearly recognize the change in the standby pending image in the "second standby pending color change indication effect."

In addition, the length of the period from the end of the movement of the standby image in the "first standby color change indication effect" to the start of the high-speed change of the decorative pattern may be the same as the length of the display period of the background image for the indication effect in the "second standby color change indication effect." In this case, it is recommended to lengthen the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern (for example, temporarily stop it for 7 seconds from the end of the movement of the standby image). By using such an embodiment, the player can clearly understand the timing of the standby change in the "second standby color change indication effect."
Alternatively, the length of the period from the end of the movement of the standby image in the "first standby color change indication" to the start of the high-speed change of the decorative pattern may be longer than the length of the display period of the background image for the indication indication in the "second standby color change indication." In this case, it is preferable to further lengthen the temporary pause period of the decorative pattern (for example, temporarily pause for 10 seconds from the end of the movement of the standby image). Since the "second standby color change indication" itself has a high probability of winning, and if it develops into the "second standby color change indication," the probability of winning increases, thereby increasing the player's anticipation. Therefore, the player's anticipation can be improved by making the time it takes for the "second standby color change indication" to develop into the "second standby color change indication" longer than the time it takes for the standby image to change due to the "second standby color change indication."

As shown in Figures 398 and 399, the period from the end of the movement of the standby image in the "first standby color change indication effect" to the start of the high-speed change of the decorative pattern (timing t12 to timing t13) is longer than the period (1 second) from the start of the display of the background image for the indication effect in the "second standby color change indication effect" to the change in the display mode of the standby image (timing t13.5 to timing t20). As mentioned above, even in the modified example of the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 399, when the "development indication" is executed, the left, center, and right decorative patterns may be in a high-speed changing state at timing t12.5.
By adopting such an embodiment, the player can clearly recognize the change in the standby pending image in the "second standby pending color change indication effect."

In addition, the length of the period from the end of the movement of the standby image in the "first standby color change indication effect" to the start of the high-speed change of the decorative pattern may be the same as the length of the period from the start of the display of the indication effect background image in the "second standby color change indication effect" to the change in the display mode of the standby image. In this case, it is recommended to lengthen the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern (for example, temporarily stop it for 6 seconds from the end of the movement of the standby image). By using such an embodiment, the player can clearly understand the timing of the standby change in the "second standby color change indication effect."
Alternatively, the length of the period from the end of the movement of the standby image in the "first standby color change indication" to the start of the high-speed change of the decorative pattern may be longer than the length of the period from the start of the display of the indication indication background image in the "second standby color change indication" to the change in the display mode of the standby image. In this case, the temporary pause period of the decorative pattern may be further extended (for example, temporarily paused for 10 seconds from the end of the movement of the standby image). Since the "second standby color change indication" itself has a high probability of winning, and the development of the "second standby color change indication" increases the probability of winning, thereby increasing the player's anticipation. Therefore, the player's anticipation can be improved by extending the time it takes for the "second standby color change indication" to develop into the "second standby color change indication" longer than the time it takes for the standby image to change due to the "second standby color change indication."

In the embodiment shown, if the remaining time of the variable display is between 15 seconds and 20 seconds at the time when the start winning occurs, the "first pending change color indication effect" is executed, but the "second pending change color indication effect" is not executed, but it is also possible not to execute the "pending change color indication effect" when the remaining time of the variable display is between 15 seconds and 20 seconds.
In this case, the "hold change color indication effect" will be executed only if the remaining time of the variable display is between 20 seconds and less than 35 seconds at the time when the start winning occurs.
The "hold color change indication effect" may be executed when the remaining time of the variable display is 35 seconds or more. In this case, the "hold color change indication effect" will be executed when the remaining time of the variable display is 20 seconds or more at the timing when the start winning occurs.
As mentioned above, when executing the "hold change color indication effect," there are cases where only the "first hold change color indication effect" is executed, and cases where the "second hold change color indication effect" is executed after the "first hold change color indication effect" is executed, and the following percentages can be adopted as the execution percentages.

The rate at which only the "first hold change color indication effect" is executed may be higher than the rate at which the "second hold change color indication effect" is executed after the "first hold change color indication effect" is executed.
For example, the percentage of times that only the "first hold change color indication effect" is executed may be 90%, and the percentage of times that the "second hold change color indication effect" is executed after the "first hold change color indication effect" is executed may be 10%.
According to such an embodiment, the "second hold change color indication effect" is unlikely to be executed, which can increase the sense of anticipation when the "second hold change color indication effect" is executed.

Conversely, the rate at which only the "first hold change color indication effect" is executed may be lower than the rate at which the "second hold change color indication effect" is executed after the "first hold change color indication effect" is executed.
For example, the percentage of times that only the "first hold change color indication effect" is executed may be 10%, and the percentage of times that the "second hold change color indication effect" is executed after the "first hold change color indication effect" is executed may be 90%.
According to such an embodiment, the probability of the "second hold change color indication effect" being executed is increased, thereby providing the player with more opportunities for the waiting hold image to change.

In the variable display, if the "hold change color indication effect" is not executed, if a "hold change color indication effect" in which only the "first hold change color indication effect" is executed is executed, then there may be a "hold change color indication effect" in which the "second hold change color indication effect" is executed after the "first hold change color indication effect" is executed.
As for the execution ratios of these, the rate at which the "reserve color change indication effect" is not executed may be higher than the rate at which the "reserve color change indication effect" in which only the "first reserve color change indication effect" is executed is executed. Also, the rate at which the "reserve color change indication effect" in which only the "first reserve color change indication effect" is executed may be higher or lower than the rate at which the "reserve color change indication effect" in which the "second reserve color change indication effect" is executed after the "first reserve color change indication effect" is executed is executed.
For example, the percentage of times that the "hold change color indication effect" is not executed may be set to 70%, the percentage of times that the "hold change color indication effect" in which only the "first hold change color indication effect" is executed may be set to 20%, and the percentage of times that the "hold change color indication effect" in which the "second hold change color indication effect" is executed after the "first hold change color indication effect" may be set to 10%.
Alternatively, the percentage of times that the "hold change color indication effect" is not executed may be set to 70%, the percentage of times that the "hold change color indication effect" in which only the "first hold change color indication effect" is executed may be set to 10%, and the percentage of times that the "hold change color indication effect" in which the "second hold change color indication effect" is executed after the "first hold change color indication effect" may be set to 20%.
According to such an embodiment, the "hold change color indication effect" is unlikely to be executed, which can increase the sense of anticipation when the "hold change color indication effect" is executed.

Conversely, the rate at which the "hold change color indication effect" is not executed may be lower than the rate at which the "hold change color indication effect" in which only the "first hold change color indication effect" is executed is executed or the rate at which the "hold change color indication effect" in which the "second hold change color indication effect" is executed after the execution of the "first hold change color indication effect" is executed. Also, the rate at which the "hold change color indication effect" in which only the "first hold change color indication effect" is executed may be higher or lower than the rate at which the "hold change color indication effect" in which the "second hold change color indication effect" is executed after the execution of the "first hold change color indication effect" is executed is executed.
For example, the percentage of times that the "hold change color indication effect" is not executed may be set to 10%, the percentage of times that the "hold change color indication effect" in which only the "first hold change color indication effect" is executed may be set to 70%, and the percentage of times that the "hold change color indication effect" in which the "second hold change color indication effect" is executed after the "first hold change color indication effect" may be set to 20%.
Alternatively, the percentage of times that the "hold change color indication effect" is not executed may be set to 10%, the percentage of times that the "hold change color indication effect" in which only the "first hold change color indication effect" is executed may be set to 20%, and the percentage of times that the "hold change color indication effect" in which the "second hold change color indication effect" is executed after the "first hold change color indication effect" may be set to 70%.
According to such an embodiment, the probability of the "hold change color indication effect" being executed is increased, so that the player can be provided with more opportunities for the waiting hold image to change.

In addition, the percentage at which the "hold color change indication effect" is not executed may be set to 0%.
For example, the percentage of times that a "hold change color indication effect" in which only the "first hold change color indication effect" is executed may be set to 70%, and the percentage of times that a "hold change color indication effect" in which the "second hold change color indication effect" is executed after the "first hold change color indication effect" is executed may be set to 30%.
Alternatively, the percentage of times that a "hold change color indication effect" in which only the "first hold change color indication effect" is executed may be set to 30%, and the percentage of times that a "hold change color indication effect" in which the "second hold change color indication effect" is executed after the "first hold change color indication effect" is executed may be set to 70%.

During the execution of the "hold color change indication effect," a specific song (for example, a specific piece of music or specific background music) may be output as a variable effect sound from the speaker (upper speaker 573 or lower speaker 921) for a predetermined period of time. In this case, the output of the variable effect sound that is being output is stopped at the same timing as the start of output of the specific song or at a predetermined timing before the start of output of the specific song.
For example, a specific song may be output from the time (timing t5) when the decorative pattern temporarily stops in the time chart shown with reference to Figures 398 and 399 to the time (timing t31) when a new variable display begins.
Alternatively, the specific music may be output from a timing before the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped. For example, the specific music may be output simultaneously with the start winning, and the decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped two seconds later (the "first pending color change indication effect" is started).
Furthermore, predetermined light-emitting members provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 may be illuminated in a manner that matches the melody of the variable effect sound. This can enhance the effect of the variable effect sound.
According to this embodiment, the "hold change color indication effect" can be made more exciting.

In the "hold change color indication effect," there are cases where only the "first hold change color indication effect" is executed, and cases where the "second hold change color indication effect" is executed after the "first hold change color indication effect" is executed, but in either case, it is advisable to continue outputting a specific song until a predetermined timing (timing t31 when a new variable display starts).
Specifically, in the time chart shown in Fig. 398, it is preferable to continue outputting a specific song even during the period from timing t13 onwards when the "second reserved color change indication effect" has not been performed. Also, in the time chart shown in Fig. 399, it is preferable to continue outputting a specific song even during the period from timing t13 onwards when the "development effect" or the "second reserved color change indication effect" is being performed.
According to this embodiment, the "hold change color indication effect" can be made more exciting. Also, the specific music can ease the disappointment felt by the player when the display mode of the standby hold image does not change. In this embodiment, the period during which the decorative pattern changes at high speed is indefinite (it depends on the change time of the variable display during execution and the timing of the start winning that triggers the start of the "hold change color indication effect"), so this output mode is effective.

The sound effect that begins to be output when the display changes or that has been output before the display changes may be set to a specific song and continue to be output during the "hold color change indication effect." In this case, the volume of the sound effect being output may be increased above normal when the "hold color change indication effect" begins to add excitement to the start of the "hold color change indication effect."

The display mode of the standby hold image may change based on the execution of the "hold change color indication effect," but the output of the specific song may continue until the variable display corresponding to the standby hold image whose display mode has changed stops. Alternatively, the output of the specific song may continue until a predetermined timing after the variable display corresponding to the standby hold image whose display mode has changed starts. In this case, it is preferable to start the execution of a special reach effect at the predetermined timing and output a song corresponding to the special reach effect. It is also preferable to end the playback of the specific song if it takes a long time for the variable display corresponding to the standby hold image whose display mode has changed to end. In this case, it is preferable to start the playback of the specific song again after the playback of the specific song has ended.
In this way, the same music is output continuously across a plurality of variable displays, thereby building up anticipation for a big win during the period until the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the standby image whose display mode has changed starts.

A function for adjusting the volume output from the gaming machine may be provided so that the volume can be changed while the "hold change color indication effect" is being executed.
Specifically, a volume up button and a volume down button that allow the volume to be adjusted are provided at predetermined positions near the upper tray 321, so that the volume increases by one level each time the volume up button is pressed, and decreases by one level each time the volume down button is pressed.
The volume can be set to two or more levels, but it is preferable to set 10 levels, for example. In this case, the lowest level is level 1 and the highest level is level 10. It is also preferable to configure the volume of the sound output when set to the minimum volume to be 70 decibels, and the volume of the sound output when set to the maximum volume to be 90 decibels, so that each operation of the adjustment button increases or decreases the volume by one level.

It is preferable to provide a waiting time during which the volume control button will not be operated repeatedly. Specifically, even if a pressing operation is performed during the period from a certain pressing operation until a predetermined waiting time has elapsed, the pressing operation will not be treated as a valid operation. By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to prevent the volume from suddenly increasing or decreasing even if the volume control button is pressed repeatedly, and to prevent the volume from changing suddenly and being difficult to adjust, or the volume from suddenly increasing and causing a nuisance to other players.
However, if the waiting time is too long, it may take a long time to change the volume, which may cause stress to the player. Therefore, it is recommended to use a predetermined time between 0.1 and 1 second as the waiting time.
The volume may be changed by one step when the volume adjustment button is continuously pressed. In this case, the volume level may not change until the standby time has elapsed, and the volume may be changed by one step each time the standby time has elapsed.
By adopting such an embodiment, the player can operate the volume adjustment button to set the volume to his/her preference.

The length of the waiting time may be a predetermined fixed length, or may be changed depending on the game situation.
For example, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the "first pending color change indication performance", the waiting time may be 1 second, and during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the "second pending color change indication performance", the waiting time may be 0.2 seconds.
According to this embodiment, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the "first pending color change indication effect" (or the period when the indication effect background image is displayed), the volume cannot be changed from the minimum volume level 1 to the maximum volume level 10 by repeatedly pressing or holding down the button. Similarly, the volume cannot be changed from the maximum volume level 10 to the minimum volume level 1.
Even during the movement period of the standby image, which is shorter than the period during which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the volume cannot be changed from the first level, which is the lowest volume, to the tenth level, which is the highest volume, and the volume cannot be changed from the tenth level, which is the highest volume, to the first level, which is the lowest volume.
However, if the volume is set to a predetermined intermediate level (e.g., level 2 or 3), it is possible to minimize the volume. Similarly, if the volume is set to a predetermined intermediate level (e.g., level 8 or 9), it is possible to maximize the volume.

On the other hand, during the period when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the "second pending color change indication effect," the volume can be quickly changed from the minimum volume level 1 to the maximum volume level 10 by repeatedly pressing or holding down the button. Similarly, the volume can be quickly changed from the maximum volume level 10 to the minimum volume level 1.
Even during the period when the background image for the prognostic effect is displayed, the volume can be changed from the first level, which is the lowest volume, to the tenth level, which is the highest volume, and from the tenth level, which is the highest volume, to the first level, which is the lowest volume.
Although the embodiment has been described in which the volume changes one level at a time by pressing or holding down a button, the volume may also change multiple levels (e.g., two or three levels) by pressing or holding down a button. For example, the volume may increase three levels each time the volume-up button is pressed. Such an embodiment allows for quicker volume changes.

The following embodiment may also be adopted.
When the volume level is at the maximum level, a period in which the decorative pattern of the "first pending change color indication effect" is temporarily stopped starts, and even if an attempt is made to adjust the volume to the minimum value at the same time that the period in which the decorative pattern of the "first pending change color indication effect" is temporarily stopped starts, the volume will not reach the minimum value (it may be made to do so) before the period in which the decorative pattern of the "first pending change color indication effect" is temporarily stopped ends.
When the volume stage is at the minimum value, a period in which the decorative pattern of the "first pending change color indication effect" is temporarily stopped starts, and even if an attempt is made to adjust the volume to the maximum value at the same time that the period in which the decorative pattern of the "first pending change color indication effect" is temporarily stopped starts, the volume will not reach the maximum value (it may be made to do so) before the period in which the decorative pattern of the "first pending change color indication effect" is temporarily stopped ends.
When the volume level is at a predetermined level value (for example, level 4) other than the maximum or minimum level, a period in which the decorative pattern of the "first pending change color indication effect" is temporarily stopped begins, and even if an attempt is made to adjust the volume to the maximum level at the same time that the period in which the decorative pattern of the "first pending change color indication effect" is temporarily stopped begins, the volume will not reach the maximum level (it may be made to do so) before the period in which the decorative pattern of the "first pending change color indication effect" is temporarily stopped ends.
When the volume level is at a predetermined level value (for example, level 4) other than the maximum or minimum level, a period in which the decorative pattern of the "first pending change color indication effect" is temporarily stopped begins, and even if an attempt is made to adjust the volume to the minimum value at the same time that the period in which the decorative pattern of the "first pending change color indication effect" is temporarily stopped begins, the volume will not reach the minimum value (it may be made to do so) before the period in which the decorative pattern of the "first pending change color indication effect" is temporarily stopped ends.

When the volume level is at the maximum level, a period in which the decorative pattern of the "second pending change color indication effect" is temporarily stopped starts, and even if an attempt is made to adjust the volume to the minimum value at the same time that the period in which the decorative pattern of the "second pending change color indication effect" is temporarily stopped starts, the volume will not reach the minimum value (it may be made to do so) before the period in which the decorative pattern of the "second pending change color indication effect" is temporarily stopped ends.
When the volume stage is at the minimum value, a period in which the decorative pattern of the "second pending change color indication effect" is temporarily stopped starts, and even if an attempt is made to adjust the volume to the maximum value at the same time that the period in which the decorative pattern of the "second pending change color indication effect" is temporarily stopped starts, the volume will not reach the maximum value (it may be made to do so) before the period in which the decorative pattern of the "second pending change color indication effect" is temporarily stopped ends.
When the volume level is at a predetermined level value (for example, level 4) other than the maximum or minimum level, a period in which the decorative pattern of the "second pending change color indication effect" is temporarily stopped begins, and even if an attempt is made to adjust the volume to the maximum level at the same time that the period in which the decorative pattern of the "second pending change color indication effect" is temporarily stopped begins, the volume will not reach the maximum level (it may be made to do so) before the period in which the decorative pattern of the "second pending change color indication effect" is temporarily stopped ends.
When the volume level is at a predetermined level value (for example, level 4) other than the maximum or minimum level, a period in which the decorative pattern of the "second pending change color indication effect" is temporarily stopped begins, and even if an attempt is made to adjust the volume to the minimum value at the same time that the period in which the decorative pattern of the "second pending change color indication effect" is temporarily stopped begins, the volume will not reach the minimum value (it may be made to do so) before the period in which the decorative pattern of the "second pending change color indication effect" is temporarily stopped ends.
In addition, instead of the period during which the decorative pattern of the "second pending color change indication effect" is temporarily stopped, it may be the period during which the background image for the indication effect of the "second pending color change indication effect" is displayed.

The above-mentioned embodiments and variations regarding volume adjustment during the execution of the "first hold color change indication effect" may be combined as appropriate with the embodiments and variations regarding volume adjustment during the execution of the "second hold color change indication effect."

According to such an embodiment, the volume of the music output during the execution of the "hold change color indication effect" can be adjusted during the execution of the "hold change color indication effect."
Since it is difficult to significantly change the volume in the "first hold change color indication effect," the player can concentrate on the effect itself.
On the other hand, when the "second reserve color change indication effect" is executed, there is a possibility that a standby reserve image with a higher expectation (for example, a golden standby reserve image) will be displayed than when the "first reserve color change indication effect" is executed, but if the result is a loss despite the display of such a standby reserve image with a high expectation, the player may feel embarrassed. Therefore, in the "second reserve color change indication effect," it is made easy to increase the volume, making it difficult for other players to notice that the "second reserve color change indication effect," which may display a standby reserve image with a high expectation, is being executed.
Also, in the "second pending color change indication effect," if a highly anticipated temporary stop pattern occurs (for example, if the "effect pattern PTN-2-16" is executed and the rainbow colored decorative pattern temporarily stops, confirming the occurrence of a jackpot), the volume can be increased to the maximum level even if it is at the minimum level, so that the player can increase the volume to the maximum level and brag to other players.

Instead of or in addition to providing a volume up button and a volume down button at a predetermined position near the upper tray 321 to allow the volume to be adjusted, a light up button and a light down button at a predetermined position near the upper tray 321 to allow the light intensity to be adjusted may be provided.
Furthermore, the above-described embodiment of volume adjustment can be applied not only to volume adjustment but also to light intensity adjustment. For example, the light intensity may be changed from the minimum light intensity level 1 to the maximum light intensity level 10, and the light intensity may be adjusted in the same manner as volume adjustment during the execution of the "hold color change indication effect."
According to this embodiment, it is possible to obtain the same effect as when the volume is adjustable.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 399, the "second hold change color indication effect" was executed once, but it is also possible to execute the "second hold change color indication effect" again after the "second hold change color indication effect" has ended.
For example, in the period from timing t20 to timing t20.5 in Figure 399(a), a "development effect" may be executed to display "From... to...", and at timing t20.5, all of the decorative patterns on the left, center, and right, which are in a state of high-speed fluctuation, may be temporarily stopped, and the "second pending color change indication effect" may be executed again.
Similarly, during the period from timing t21 to timing t21.5 in Figure 399 (b), a "development effect" may be executed to display "From... to...", and at timing t21.5, all of the decorative patterns on the left, center, and right, which are in a state of high-speed fluctuation, may be temporarily stopped, and the "second pending color change indication effect" may be executed again.
Furthermore, the number of times that the "second pending color change indication effect" is executed is not limited to two, but may be three or more.
In addition, when determining whether to execute the "second reserved color change indication effect," the remaining time of the variable display is taken into consideration. Specifically, if the execution of the "second reserved color change indication effect" ends before the left decorative pattern enters a temporary stop state, the "second reserved color change indication effect" is executed, and if the execution of the "second reserved color change indication effect" does not end before the left decorative pattern enters a temporary stop state, the "second reserved color change indication effect" is not executed.

In this embodiment, the "second hold color change indication effect" can be executed multiple times (two or more times), increasing the opportunities for the state of the standby hold image to change. Furthermore, the remaining time of the variable display can be effectively utilized, preventing players from getting bored.

In the embodiment shown, a part of the normal background image A is visible in the "first hold color change indication effect," and a background image for indication effect is displayed instead of the normal background image A in the "second hold color change indication effect," but a common image may be displayed. For example, an image indicating that the "hold color change indication effect" is being executed may be displayed in front of the normal background image A. For example, an image including the words "hold promotion chance!" may be displayed in front of the normal background image A.
The image containing the words "Hold promotion chance!" starts to be displayed from the start timing of the "first hold change color predictive effect" and the start timing of the "second hold change color predictive effect."
The display also ends at the end of the "first pending color change indication effect" and the "second pending color change indication effect." Alternatively, the display may end when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the timing at which the pending image changes.
In addition, the display priority of the image containing the words "Chance to upgrade to reserved position!" is set lower than that of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern and the standby reserved image, and the image is displayed behind the temporarily stopped decorative pattern and the standby reserved image.

Referring to Figure 412, the display mode of an image containing the words "Chance to be promoted to reserved status!" will be described.
Figures 412(a) to 412(c) show the display state in which an image containing the words "Hold promotion chance!" is displayed at the timing when the display of the aura image begins during the "first hold change color indication effect" (timing t7.5 in Figures 398 and 399).
The size of the image containing the words "Chance to be promoted to reserved status!" increases in the order of Figure 412(a), Figure 412(b), and Figure 412(c).

Figures 412(d) to 412(f) show the display state in which an image containing the words "Hold promotion chance!" is displayed at the timing (from timing t15.5 to the latter half of timing t16 in Figure 399) when a display explaining the content of the "second hold change color indication effect" is being displayed (when the words "READY GO!" are being displayed).
The size of the image containing the words "Chance to be promoted to reserved status!" increases in the order of Figure 412(d), Figure 412(e), and Figure 412(f).

Note that the size of the image containing the words "Chance to be promoted to reserved status!" shown in Figure 412(a) is the same as the size of the image containing the words "Chance to be promoted to reserved status!" shown in Figure 412(d).
Furthermore, the size of the image containing the words "Chance to be promoted to reserved status!" shown in Figure 412(b) is the same as the size of the image containing the words "Chance to be promoted to reserved status!" shown in Figure 412(e).
412(c) and 412(f) are the same size. The size of the image including the text "Hold promotion chance!" in Fig. 412(c) and 412(f) is the same as the size of the display area 1600a, and the background image (here, normal background image A) is not visible as shown in the figure.

The display mode of the image including the text "Hold promotion chance!" may be different during the execution of the "first hold color change indication effect" and the execution of the "second hold color change indication effect." For example, during the execution of the "first hold color change indication effect," a large image including the text "Hold promotion chance!" as shown in FIG. 412(c) may be displayed, and during the execution of the "second hold color change indication effect," a small image including the text "Hold promotion chance!" as shown in FIG. 412(d) may be displayed.
Conversely, during the execution of the "first hold change color indication effect", a small image containing the words "Hold promotion chance!" as shown in Figure 412(a) may be displayed, and during the execution of the "second hold change color indication effect", a large image containing the words "Hold promotion chance!" as shown in Figure 412(f) may be displayed.
It is to be noted that, without being limited to this example, during the execution of the "first reserve color change indication effect", any of the images including the words "reserve promotion chance!" shown in Fig. 412(a) to Fig. 412(c) can be displayed. Similarly, during the execution of the "second reserve color change indication effect", any of the images including the words "reserve promotion chance!" shown in Fig. 412(d) to Fig. 412(f) can be displayed.

In this embodiment, the visible area of the background image (here, normal background image A) changes depending on the size of the image containing the words "Hold promotion chance!", clearly indicating that the "Hold change color indication effect" has begun.
Furthermore, if the size of the image containing the words "Hold promotion chance!" is different, the player can tell whether the "first hold color change indication effect" or the "second hold color change indication effect" is being executed.
If the image containing the words "Chance to be promoted to reserved position!" is small, it is unlikely to be noticed by other players. On the other hand, if the image containing the words "Chance to be promoted to reserved position!" is large, it is likely to be noticed by other players.
Although an image including text has been given as an example, the same effect can be obtained when a character image or other image is displayed instead of text.

Referring to Figures 400 to 402, an embodiment has been shown in which the standby image moves in front of the aura image, but the display priority of the aura image may be made higher than the display priority of the standby image, and the standby image may move behind the aura image.
For example, an aura image may be displayed in front of the standby image before the standby image starts to move, making the standby image invisible. Alternatively, the standby image may move to the position of the aura image currently being displayed, and the standby image may be positioned behind the aura image. In this case, the standby image will also be invisible.
Furthermore, when the standby image moves and appears from behind the aura image, the display mode of the standby image may change. Alternatively, when the standby image is positioned behind the aura image, the display of the aura image may be terminated, and the display mode of the standby image that has become visible may change.
The size and display position of the aura image may be such that it overlaps with the display position of the waiting hold image (bottom right of display area 1600a), or such that it does not overlap with the display position of the waiting hold image (bottom right of display area 1600a).
It may also be possible to display aura images of different sizes, so that the larger the aura image, the more likely it is that the display mode of the standby image will change.

In the "hold color change indication effect," an effect may be executed in which the light-emitting decorative members provided in the gaming machine are made to emit light (hereinafter, this may be referred to as a light-emitting effect). As the light-emitting decorative members, one or more of the door frame left side unit 530, door frame right side unit 550, and door frame top unit 570 provided in the door frame 3, or the light guide plate 1140, panel board rear substrate 2420, and tank role object 3770 provided in the gaming board 5 may be used.
Specifically, the light-emitting effect involves changing a predetermined light-emitting decorative member from an off state to a light-emitting state, maintaining the light-emitting state for a predetermined time, and then changing it from the light-emitting state to the off state. In the light-emitting state, the light source may be continuously emitting light, or the light source may be periodically flashed so that the light-emitting decorative member flashes.

As a specific timing for executing the light-emitting effect, for example, it is good to make the light-emitting decorative element light up from the time when the starting winning occurs until the time just before the waiting hold image changes in the "first hold change color indication effect" (timing t9.5 in the examples of Figures 398 and 399).
Alternatively, the luminous decorative member may be illuminated from the time when the starting winning occurs until a predetermined timing (timing t7 in the examples of Figures 398 and 399) during the movement of the standby hold image in the "first hold change color indication performance."
Alternatively, the luminous decorative member may be illuminated from the timing when the movement of the standby image in the "first standby change color indication effect" starts (timing t6.5 in the examples of Figures 398 and 399) until the movement of the standby image in the "first standby change color indication effect" ends (timing t12 in the examples of Figures 398 and 399).
According to this embodiment, it is possible to appeal to the player that the "hold change color indication effect" has started.

During the period when the background image for the predictive effect in the "second pending color change predictive effect" is displayed, the luminous decorative member that was changed to a luminous state in the "first pending color change predictive effect" may not be changed to a luminous state.
According to such an embodiment, the "hold change color indication effect" can be prevented from becoming excessive, and the player can be allowed to concentrate on the display content in the display area 1600a.

The light-emitting effect that started in conjunction with the execution of the "first pending color change indication effect" may be continued throughout the execution period of the "development effect" (the period from timing t13 to timing t13.5 in FIG. 399). For example, the light-emitting effect may be executed during the period from timing t5 to timing t13.5 in FIG.
Alternatively, the light-emitting effect may not be performed during the "first hold change color indication effect" or the "second hold change color indication effect", and the light-emitting effect may be performed only during the execution period of the "development effect" (the period from timing t13 to timing t13.5 in Figure 399).
Alternatively, the light-emitting effect may be executed from the execution period of the "development effect" (the period from timing t13 to timing t13.5 in Figure 399) until a predetermined timing in the execution period of the "second pending color change indication effect."
According to this embodiment, it is possible to appeal to the player that the "second pending color change indication effect" will begin.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the light-emitting effect using the luminous decorative components ends during the execution of the "first pending color change indication effect" or the "development indication effect," it may also end during the "second pending color change indication effect."
For example, the light-emitting effect may be ended at a predetermined timing while the remaining time gauge image is being displayed (the period from timing t16 to timing t19 in Figure 399), or the light-emitting effect may be ended at the timing when the display of the background image for the premonition effect ends (timing t20.5 in Figure 399), or the light-emitting effect may be ended at a predetermined timing after the display of the background image for the premonition effect ends (a predetermined timing within the period from timing t20.5 to timing t28.5 in Figure 399).

As examples of light-emitting effects using luminous decorative members, a light-emitting state in which the light source continuously emits light and a light-emitting state in which the light source blinks have been shown, but the degree of expectation may also be indicated by these light-emitting states. For example, the degree of expectation for a light-emitting state in which the light source blinks may be set higher than the degree of expectation for a light-emitting state in which the light source continuously emits light. Alternatively, the degree of expectation for a light-emitting state in which the light source continuously emits light may be set higher than the degree of expectation for a light-emitting state in which the light source blinks.
The degree of expectation may be indicated by the color of the light emitted by the light source.
For example, the light source may emit three colors of light, white, blue, and red, and the light-emitting decorative member may emit light in one of the three colors, white, blue, or red.Also, the expectation level may increase in the order of white, blue, and red.
According to such an embodiment, the degree of expectation is indicated by the light-emitting state of the luminous decorative member, thereby enhancing the "hold color change indication effect."

The display time for the standby hold image whose display mode has changed due to the "second hold change color indication effect" is indefinite (because the "hold change color indication effect" starts based on the timing of the start winning), and the display time for the standby hold image whose display mode has changed due to the "second hold change color indication effect" may vary.

When a variable display is made corresponding to a reserved image whose display mode has changed due to the "first reserved color change indication effect," the variable display may show that the decorative pattern indicates a reach state and a reach effect is executed, leading to the expectation of a jackpot, or the decorative pattern does not indicate a reach state and no reach effect is executed, leading to the expectation of a jackpot. Also, when a variable display is made corresponding to a reserved image whose display mode has changed due to the "first reserved color change indication effect" and the "second reserved color change indication effect," the variable display may show that the decorative pattern indicates a reach state and a reach effect is executed, leading to the expectation of a jackpot, or the decorative pattern does not indicate a reach state and no reach effect is executed, leading to the expectation of a jackpot. Since the likelihood of a jackpot is higher when the "first reserve color change indication effect" and "second reserve color change indication effect" are performed than when only the "first reserve color change indication effect" is performed, it is preferable to have a higher probability of a reach effect being executed when the "first reserve color change indication effect" and "second reserve color change indication effect" are performed than when only the "first reserve color change indication effect" is performed.

When a decision is made to execute a "Hold Color Change Prediction Effect," all decorative symbols corresponding to the current display are temporarily stopped. For example, if a "Hold Color Change Prediction Effect" is decided to be executed when the current display is executing a predetermined reach effect, the result of the current display is determined to be a miss. Therefore, the predetermined reach effect is stopped, and an effect corresponding to the "Hold Color Change Prediction Effect" is executed (the normal background image is displayed as the background image). We have also shown examples in which a reach effect is executed as a pre-reading effect. However, since the display of a predetermined reach effect that has already been executed is not displayed every time the display is executed, it can also be considered a rare effect. Therefore, even if a decision is made to execute a "Hold Color Change Prediction Effect" when a predetermined reach effect is being displayed, the currently executing predetermined reach effect may be allowed to continue. This is because some players become aroused just by watching the effect itself, even if they know that the result of the display will be a miss. In such cases, while a reach effect is being executed, only the "First Hold Color Change Prediction Effect" or only the "Second Hold Color Change Prediction Effect" may be executed.

In some reach effects, a simulated image simulating an operating means is displayed immediately before the timing suggesting the winning or losing result, and operation of the operating means is enabled to display a display suggesting the winning or losing result based on that operation. In such reach effects, it is preferable that the "first reserve color change indication effect" or "second reserve color change indication effect" is not executed (a decision to execute the reserve color change indication effect as a pre-reading effect) during the period when operation of the operating means is enabled immediately before the timing suggesting the winning or losing result (the period during which the simulated image is displayed). However, if the "first reserve color change indication effect" or "second reserve color change indication effect" is executed during the specified reach effect (a decision to execute the "reserve color change indication effect" as a pre-reading effect may be made), it may be executed at a specified timing after the start of the specified reach effect but before the period (the period during which the simulated image is displayed). There are also reach effects that display a suggestion of the result of the lottery without enabling operation of the operating means (without displaying a simulated image imitating the operating means) immediately before the timing that suggests the result of the lottery, but even in the case of such reach effects, it is preferable not to execute the "first reserve color change indication effect" or "second reserve color change indication effect" immediately before the timing that suggests the result of the lottery (the decision to execute the reserve color change indication effect as a pre-reading effect is not made). If, for example, the "first reserve color change indication effect" or "second reserve color change indication effect" is executed in the case of such reach effects (it may be decided to execute the reserve color change indication effect as a pre-reading effect), it is preferable to avoid executing it immediately before the timing that suggests the result of the lottery, such as before half of the length (time) of the reach effect has elapsed.

The pachinko machine 1 is equipped with sound generating means such as the lower speaker 921 shown with reference to Fig. 9 and a pair of upper speakers 573 shown with reference to Fig. 57. These sound generating means can output various sounds such as music, background music, music pieces, sound effects (SE), and voices in accordance with various game states and game situations, such as the execution of demo effects, the fluctuation of decorative symbols, a jackpot game state, operation of the operation unit by the player, and detection of fraudulent activity. Furthermore, the output of sounds can improve the presentation effects or notify players of predetermined events.
It should be noted that the sound generating means provided in the pachinko machine 1 are not limited to the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. For example, instead of or in addition to the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, speakers may be provided in other parts of the pachinko machine 1.

The pachinko machine 1 may also be equipped with vibration generating means such as the left lever vibration source 3722 and the right lever vibration source 3732 shown in Figures 137 and 138. The vibration generating means generates vibrations in a predetermined portion of the gaming machine (for example, the operating unit), allowing a player who comes into contact with or near the predetermined portion to directly feel the vibrations. Similarly to the sound generating means, the vibration generating means can generate vibrations in response to various gaming states and situations, such as the execution of demo effects, changes in decorative symbols, a jackpot gaming state, operation of the operating unit by a player, and detection of fraudulent activity.
The vibration generating means provided in the pachinko machine 1 are not limited to the left lever vibration source 3722 and the right lever vibration source 3732, and a vibration source may be provided in another part of the pachinko machine 1 instead of or in addition to the left lever vibration source 3722 and the right lever vibration source 3732. For example, a vibration source may be provided in or near other operating means other than the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 (such as the operating button 410 (FIG. 9, etc.), the attack button 3710, the mission button 3700, and the defense button 3740), so that vibrations are transmitted to a player who operates the operating means. The location where the vibration generating means is provided may be any location that the player can contact, and is not limited to being within or near the operating means, but it is preferable that the location and vibration transmission means be such that the vibrations generated by the vibration generating means are not transmitted to the handle unit 300.

The volume and light intensity setting functions that can be applied to the pachinko machine 1 will be described below.
Volume adjustment buttons (volume increase button, volume decrease button) and light intensity adjustment buttons (light increase button, light decrease button) are provided at predetermined positions near the upper tray 321 that can be touched by the player.
During the demo display, you can adjust the volume and light intensity by operating the volume adjustment buttons (volume increase button, volume decrease button) and light intensity adjustment buttons (light increase button, light decrease button).
There are a plurality of volume setting stages (for example, five stages), and each time the volume increase button is pressed, the setting stage increases by one stage, and each time the volume decrease button is pressed, the setting stage decreases by one stage.
Similarly, there are multiple light intensity setting levels (for example, five levels), and pressing the light intensity increase button once increases the setting level by one level, and pressing the light intensity decrease button once decreases the setting level by one level.
The volume and light intensity output from the gaming machine are determined based on these setting levels. Specifically, the higher the setting level, the greater the overall volume and light intensity, and the lower the setting level, the smaller the overall volume and light intensity.

During the demo display, the display area 1600a displays simulated images of volume adjustment buttons (volume increase button, volume decrease button) and light adjustment buttons (light increase button, light decrease button), as well as images showing the volume setting levels and light setting levels (for example, a five-level gauge image).
While the decorative pattern is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, the current volume level or the current light intensity level is not displayed, but the volume adjustment button or the light intensity adjustment button may be operated while the decorative pattern is being displayed in a fluctuating manner to change the set level of the volume or light intensity.

When an image is displayed on the display means (for example, the display area 1600a), the image may be displayed dynamically or statically.
Dynamic display (or dynamic display) means that the position or size of the image changes significantly, or the image itself is displayed like a moving image. Dynamically displayed images are sometimes called moving images.
On the other hand, displaying statically (or performing a static display) means that the position or size of the image does not change, and the image itself is displayed as a still image. Note that the term "static" also includes display modes that the player may perceive as substantially still, such as slight changes in the position or size of the image (for example, movement in a predetermined direction by a few to several tens of pixels, or movement that wobbles), or slight changes in the image itself (for example, a few percent of the pixels that make up the image change to other pixels, or slight changes in the brightness or color of the entire image).

When displaying dynamic images, the dynamic images may be displayed in a loop. Specifically, after a certain dynamic image is displayed, the same dynamic image is displayed again. In this way, a looped display can be realized by repeatedly displaying a certain dynamic image. The number of loops may be any number of times, equal to or greater than two. When ending a certain looped display, the display of the certain dynamic image may be interrupted midway to end the looped display, or the looped display may be ended when the display of the certain dynamic image has been completed. The time required to display a certain dynamic image is the same for each loop (except when the display of the dynamic image is interrupted midway through the loop).
By using a loop display, it is possible to adjust the display time of the dynamic image to any time while reliably conveying to the player the content expressed by the dynamic image. In particular, this effect can be achieved by looping the dynamic image to match the display time of a dynamic or static image that does not use a loop display.

An embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 123 to 412 will be described below. In this embodiment, a "premonition effect" that indicates the possibility of a predetermined effect being executed will be described with reference to Figures 413 to 447. Note that "effect" is synonymous with "display," and it is acceptable to replace "effect" with "display" in the following description.
Fig. 413 shows an example of an image displayed in this embodiment (or a modified example), etc. Figs. 414, 415, 422, 425, 428, 432, 433, and 440 to 442 show time charts in this embodiment. Figs. 416 to 421, 423, 424, 426, 427, 429 to 431, 434 to 439, and 443 to 447 show display examples in the display area 1600a in this embodiment.

First, an overview of "omen effects" will be explained. Omen effects are effects that suggest in advance that a "predetermined effect" may be executed on a gaming machine. Omen effects include omen effects that, when executed, will always result in the execution of the predetermined effect (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "confirmed omen effects"), and omen effects that, when executed, will result in the predetermined effect occurring with a predetermined probability greater than 0% but less than 100% (for example, 20% or 40%) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "non-confirmed omen effects").
When the "determined premonition effect" is executed, the predetermined effect will always occur, so the player can wait for the predetermined effect to occur with peace of mind.
On the other hand, when the "non-determined precursor effect" is executed, a predetermined effect occurs with a predetermined probability greater than 0% but less than 100%, which makes the player feel a sense of excitement as to whether or not the predetermined effect will occur.

The "premonition effect" may be achieved by displaying a predetermined image or video in the display area 1600a. Alternatively, the premonition effect may be achieved by using other means instead of or in addition to displaying an image in the display area 1600a.
For example, the precursor effects may include making an illuminating decorative member emit light in a predetermined light-emitting manner, moving a movable decorative member in a predetermined movable manner, outputting a predetermined sound from a sound generating means, or vibrating a vibration generating means in a predetermined vibration pattern.

The "predetermined effect" may be a display mode such as displaying a predetermined image or video in the display area 1600a. Alternatively, or in addition to displaying an image or video in the display area 1600a, a predetermined effect may be executed using other means.
For example, the specified effects may include making an illuminating decorative member emit light in a specified light-emitting manner, moving a movable decorative member in a specified movable manner, outputting a specified sound from a sound generating means, or vibrating a vibration generating means in a specified vibration pattern.
While it is desirable to use different display modes for the "omen effect" and the "predetermined effect" to clearly distinguish between the "omen effect" and the "predetermined effect," some display modes may be different (e.g., the predetermined images and videos displayed in the display area 1600a may be different between the "omen effect" and the "predetermined effect," but the light-emitting modes of the luminous decorative members may be the same between the "omen effect" and the "predetermined effect"). While the example in which the light-emitting modes of the luminous decorative members are the same between the "omen effect" and the "predetermined effect" has been described, this is not limiting; the light-emitting modes of the luminous decorative members, the movable modes of the movable decorative members, and sound and vibration may be appropriately combined. For example, the light-emitting modes of the luminous decorative members may be the same between the "omen effect" and the "predetermined effect" in the first omen effect, but the light-emitting modes of the luminous decorative members may be different between the "omen effect" and the "predetermined effect" in the second omen effect.
A predetermined effect may be used to notify some event. For example, the effect may indicate the probability that the result of the changing decorative symbols will indicate a jackpot, or may suggest that a specific effect will be executed.

When the "confirmed premonition effect" is executed, the specified effect will always occur, so the player can wait for the specified effect to occur with peace of mind. However, this may result in a lack of tension in the game content, making the game content monotonous and reducing the operation of the gaming machine.
On the other hand, when a "non-determined precursor effect" is executed, a predetermined effect occurs with a predetermined probability of less than 100%, which makes the player feel a sense of excitement as to whether or not the predetermined effect will occur, but it also makes the player feel extremely tense, which may prevent the player from playing for a long period of time, resulting in a decrease in the operation of the gaming machine.
Therefore, by performing a "confirmed premonition effect" and a "non-confirmed premonition effect" in one variable display, it is possible to make the player feel an appropriate sense of tension and to prevent a decrease in the operation of the gaming machine.

Fig. 413 shows a background image displayed in the display area 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600 in this embodiment. While Fig. 347 shows reach background image A and reach background image B, Fig. 413 newly shows reach background image C to reach background image F.
Figure 413(a) shows reach-time background image C, Figure 413(b) shows reach-time background image D, Figure 413(c) shows reach-time background image E, and Figure 413(d) shows reach-time background image F, respectively.
Reach background image C to reach background image F are background images displayed during reach performances, depicting the seaside and mountains, respectively. Of these, reach background image C depicts daytime (clear skies), reach background image D depicts evening, reach background image E depicts night, and reach background image F depicts daytime (rainy).
Although the reach background image A to the reach background image F are static images, the reach background image A to the reach background image F may be dynamic images that loop or do not loop.

Below, we will explain the ``pre-reach battle presentation'' and ``reach battle presentation'' with reference to the time charts shown in Figures 414 and 415 and the display examples shown in Figures 416 to 421.
First, we will explain the "pre-reach battle presentation" with reference to Figures 414 and 416 to 418.
In the "pre-reach battle performance," while the decorative patterns on the left, center, and right are rapidly changing, the fighter character, who is an ally character, attacks the demon character, who is an enemy character, by firing energy bullets. Next, a display is shown of the demon character enduring the attack by the energy bullets, and finally, it is shown whether or not the fighter character is able to stun the demon character. If the demon character is able to stun, a reach performance is executed.
Fig. 414(a) is a time chart for when the martial artist character is unable to stun the demon character, and Fig. 414(b) is a time chart for when the martial artist character is able to stun the demon character. Both time charts have the same content from time t0 to time t20, which is the time at which it is determined whether or not the demon character can be stunned.

At timing t0, the display of the decorative symbols on the left, center, and right begins to change, and a rapid change state is reached. Figure 416(a) shows the display state when the display of the decorative symbols is in a rapid change state (the period from timing t0 to timing t10). The background image displayed is the normal background image A (see Figure 347). Immediately after the change display begins, the number of reserved balls in the first starting slot 2002 is two, and two white standby reserved images (first standby reserved image, second standby reserved image) are displayed in the display area 1600a. A green current reserved image is displayed as the current reserved image. The change display corresponding to the current reserved image is also generated by a winning game ball entering the first starting slot 2002. The game state is a low-probability, non-time-saving state, and the player is required to hit left.

At timing t10, the "pre-reach battle effect" begins. Specifically, at timing t10, an image of the martial artist character, who is an ally character, is displayed in display area 1600a. Figure 416(b) shows the display state in which the martial artist character is displayed. Along with the martial artist character, a comment image in the form of a speech bubble containing the words "Murderous intent!", which indicate the martial artist character's lines, is also displayed.

At timing t11, the text in the comment image of the martial artist character changes from "Murderous intent!" to "Haaah!" Also, the martial artist character is displayed with his left arm raised and preparing an energy bullet in his left hand. Figure 416(c) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t12, the size of the comment image of the martial artist character and the characters included in the comment image increases. The size of the energy bullet held in the martial artist character's left hand also increases. Figure 416(d) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t13, the size of the comment image of the martial artist character, the size of the characters contained in the comment image, and the size of the energy bullet further increase. Figure 416(e) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t14, an image of the demon character, which is the enemy character, is displayed. At the same time, an image of the martial artist character, an image of a comment from the martial artist character, and an image of an energy bullet are displayed, moving parallel to the right. In addition, the line in the comment image is changed to "Here it comes!" Figure 416(f) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t15, a display starts in which the martial artist character throws an energy bullet at the demon character.
From timing t15 to timing t16, the energy bullet is displayed approaching the demon character. Figure 416(g) shows the display state at this time.

From timing t16 to timing t20, the demon character is displayed as if enduring an attack by an energy bullet. Figure 417(a) shows the display state at this time. As shown in the figure, the demon character is displayed tilted slightly to the left as if enduring the incoming energy bullet.
The presentation content of the presentation patterns shown in the time charts of Figures 414(a) and 414(b) is the same up to this point, but from timing t20 onwards, either a "pre-reach ally character defeat presentation" is executed, in which the Oni character bounces back the energy bullet and a miss result is displayed, or a "pre-reach ally character victory presentation" is executed, in which the Oni character faints and the execution of the reach presentation is confirmed.
In this way, by displaying the Oni character enduring an attack by energy bullets as a "non-confirmed precursor effect," the player can feel the excitement of wondering whether or not the Oni character will be defeated and the reach effect will be executed.

First, referring to Figures 414(a) and 417(b) to 417(d), we will explain the ``pre-reach ally character defeat effect'', which is an effect in which the demon character bounces off the energy bullet and a miss result is displayed.
At timing t20, the demon character is displayed deflecting the energy bullet. At the same time, the display of the martial artist character ends. Figure 417(b) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t25, the display of the demon character ends, and the execution of the "pre-reach battle effect" ends. Figure 417(c) shows the display state during the period from timing t25 to timing t28.5.
At timing t28.5, the left decorative symbol temporarily stops, at timing t29, the right decorative symbol temporarily stops, at timing t29.5, the center decorative symbol temporarily stops, and at timing t30, the left, center, and right decorative symbols that were temporarily stopped are displayed as still symbols. The display of the still decorative symbols is carried out for one second from timing t30 to timing t31.
The currently reserved image is gradually erased from the bottom right corner during the period from timing t30 to timing t31. Figure 417(d) shows the display state at timing t30.5 (here, the decorative symbols are displayed as a combination of "5", "3", and "8").
From timing t31, a new variable display of the decorative pattern begins, and the first reserved image that had been displayed in the first reserved image display area moves to the current reserved image display area and is displayed as the current reserved image corresponding to the new variable display.

Next, referring to Figures 414(b), 417(e) to 417(g), and 418, we will explain the ``pre-reach ally character victory effect'' in which the reach effect begins after the demon character is hit by an energy bullet and faints.
First, at timing t20, the demon character is displayed as falling down. Also, the display of the energy bullets ends. At this timing, it is determined that the reach effect will be executed. Figure 417(e) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t21, a horizontally long window is displayed at the top of the display area 1600a, and the words "Enemy Injured!" are displayed multiple times within this window. The words "Enemy Injured!" are also displayed by scrolling leftward within the window. Specifically, the words "Enemy Injured!" appear from the right edge of the window, and disappear from the left edge of the window, continuously displaying this. It is recommended that the words "Enemy Injured!" move approximately 3-10 characters per second. The martial artist character's facial expression changes to one that looks tired, and the martial artist character's comment image displays the line, "I'm so tired." Figure 417(f) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t22, the line "Help me everyone..." is displayed in the comment image of the martial artist character instead of the line "I'm tired...". Figure 417(g) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t23, the comment image of the wizard character is displayed in the upper left of display area 1600a, the comment image of the master character is displayed in the lower left of display area 1600a, and the comment image of the samurai character is displayed in the lower right of display area 1600a. The comment image of the wizard character includes the line "Recover with my magic!" The comment image of the master character includes the line "Remember your training with me!" The comment image of the samurai character includes the line "Good luck, martial artist!" The comment image of the martial artist character is hidden. Figure 418(a) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t24, the display of the comment images of the wizard character, master character, and samurai character ends. Also, the display of the comment image of the martial artist character resumes. The comment image of the martial artist character includes the line, "Thank you everyone!" Figure 418(b) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t25, the display of the comment image of the martial artist character and the horizontal window displaying the words "Enemy injured!" are both terminated. In addition, the demon character, which had been lying down until then, stands up. Figure 418(c) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t28.5, the left decorative symbol temporarily stops at the symbol "4", and at timing t29, the right decorative symbol temporarily stops at the symbol "4", resulting in a ready-to-win state with the symbol "4". Figure 418(d) shows the display state in which the ready-to-win state has been reached.
The "pre-reach battle effect" ends at timing t30, and the reach effect begins from timing t30, but details will be described later.

414 and 416 to 418, after a "non-determined precursor effect" is executed in which the martial artist character fires energy bullets at the demon character and the demon character withstands the attack by the energy bullets (timing t16 to timing t20), a specific image (an image of the demon character falling unconscious) may or may not be displayed. If a specific image is displayed, then a reach effect is executed, and if a specific image is not displayed, then the reach effect is not executed and the decorative symbol is displayed stationary in a losing mode.
According to this embodiment, the player can feel the excitement of wondering whether or not the Oni character will be defeated and the reach effect will be executed. Also, the display of a specific image (an image of the Oni character fainting and falling down) can give the player a sense of satisfaction.
Furthermore, by displaying a related image (the text "Enemy injured!") in conjunction with the display of the specific image, the satisfaction felt by the player can be further enhanced.
In other words, the "pre-reach battle effect" can be said to be an effect that foretells whether or not the "Demon Battle Reach" of the multiple reach effects will be executed. On the other hand, if a specific image (an image of the demon character fainting and falling down) is displayed in the "pre-reach battle effect" but another reach effect (for example, a "training reach effect" or a "help reach effect" described later) starts instead of the "Demon Battle Reach", it may be set to result in a jackpot (or have a very high probability of winning).
It should be noted that with respect to the reach effect predicted by the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" described later or the reach effect selected by the "reach content selection effect" described later, other reach effects different from the predicted reach effect or the selected reach effect may be executed. In this case, as with the "pre-reach battle effect", the result of the other reach effect may always indicate a jackpot (or the likelihood of a jackpot being extremely high).
Furthermore, even if a player misses the display of a specific image, the content of the presentation result is shown by the related image, making it easier for the player to understand the outline of the presentation.

Next, the presentation modes from timing t30 onwards will be explained with reference to the time charts of Figures 415(a) and 415(b), Figures 418(e) to 418(h), Figures 419 and 420. Note that the presentation content of the presentation patterns shown in the time charts of Figures 415(a) and 415(b) is the same up to timing t55 (note that from timing t55 onwards the presentation content will differ depending on the result of the special lottery).
At timing t30, the reach effect begins. Here, the "Oni Battle Reach effect" among the reach effects begins. At the start of the "Oni Battle Reach effect," the background image changes from the normal background image A to the reach background image C. Furthermore, the type of decorative symbol changes from the normal decorative symbol to the reach decorative symbol. The reach decorative symbol has been in a reach state since the change. At this time, the reach state of the number "4" formed by the normal decorative symbol before the reach effect begins is continued, and after the reach effect begins, the reach state of the number "4" is formed by the reach decorative symbol. Furthermore, while the left and right reach decorative symbols are displayed in a temporarily stopped state, the center reach decorative symbol is not displayed. Furthermore, the display of the standby image is interrupted and becomes invisible. A horizontally long window image containing the words "Oni Battle Reach!", indicating the title of the reach effect that has begun execution, is displayed in the center of the display area 1600a. While the title is displayed, the display of the martial artist character and the demon character is temporarily interrupted. These states continue until timing t33. The series of effects that start from timing t30 are called "reach battle effects." Of the reserved images, the current reserved image continues to be displayed, but the display of the standby reserved image is interrupted. Figure 418 (e) shows the display state immediately after the "Demon Battle Reach Effects" start at timing t30.

At timing t33, the display of the horizontally long window image containing the words "Demon Battle Reach!" ends. The display of the martial artist character and the demon character resumes. These display states continue until timing t40. Figure 418 (f) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t40, the martial artist character raises his left arm, and a flame image is displayed at the tip of his left arm. At the same time, a comment image of the martial artist character is displayed. This comment image includes the text "20%." This display state continues until timing t42. Figure 418(g) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t42, the size of the flame image and the comment image of the martial artist character increases. Also, the text in the comment image changes to "40%." Also, the current reserved image (green) is hidden by a roughly concentric reserved concealment image, making it invisible. These display states continue until timing t44. Figure 418(h) shows the display state at this time.

When a hold concealed image is displayed, the current hold image may be promoted when the display of the hold concealed image ends, and a current hold image with a higher expectation may be displayed. For example, instead of a green current hold image, a red, gold, or rainbow current hold image with a higher expectation than the green current hold image may be displayed (in the example shown below, a red current hold image is displayed). In addition, the hold concealed image may not be displayed, and the current hold image may not change. There may also be cases where the hold concealed image is displayed but the current hold image does not change. Although we have explained a hold change effect in which the hold concealed image is displayed to make the current hold image invisible, it is also possible to execute a hold change effect while the current hold image remains recognizable (visible). Whether or not the current hold image is promoted is determined based on the results of a special lottery.

At timing t44, the size of the flame image and the martial artist character's comment image becomes even larger. The text in the comment image also changes to "60%." The display of the reserved hidden image also ends, and the red current reserved image becomes visible. These display states continue until timing t46. Figure 419(a) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t46, the size of the flame image and the martial artist character's comment image increases further. Additionally, the text in the comment image changes to "80%." This display state continues until timing t48. Figure 419(b) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t48, the flame image and the martial artist character's comment image become even larger. Additionally, the text in the comment image changes to "100%." This display state continues until timing t50. Figure 419(c) shows the display state at this time.

In this way, over the eight seconds from timing t40 to timing t48, the size of the flame image and the comment image of the martial artist character gradually increases in stages every two seconds, reaching a maximum size at timing t48. The text in the comment image also changes in stages from 20% to 100% every two seconds.
Instead of gradually changing the size of the flame image or the comment image of the martial artist character, a dynamic display mode may be adopted in which the size gradually increases over 8 seconds. In this case, the text in the comment image may also be gradually increased in 1% increments from 1% to 100%.

At timing t50, a display is made in which the martial artist character shoots flames at the demon character.
At timing t50.5, the flames reach the demon character, causing the demon character to lean to the left, and from timing t50.5 to timing t52, the demon character is displayed as if enduring the flames. Figure 419(d) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t52, the "reach operation acceptance effect" begins. Specifically, operation of the attack button 3710 becomes valid. The valid operation period lasts for three seconds, from timing t52 to timing t55. A horizontally long window is displayed in the display area 1600a. The face of the martial artist character is displayed large in the lower right corner of the window, and an image of the martial artist character's comment is displayed in the upper center of the window. The comment image includes the words "This is it!". A circular operation unit simulating the attack button 3710 and a remaining time gauge image indicating the valid operation period for the attack button 3710 are displayed in the lower left corner of the window. As the valid operation period elapses, the black portion of the remaining time gauge image changes from left to right to white, indicating the remaining time of the valid operation period to the player. Specifically, at timing t52, the remaining time gauge image is entirely black, but at timing t53.5, the black and white portions are half and half, and at timing t55, the black portion disappears and the entire image is white.
Figure 419(e) shows the display state at timing t53.5, which is the middle of the valid operation period, and the remaining time gauge image is half black and half white.
The "operation acceptance effect during reach" ends when an operation on the operation unit is detected or when the valid operation period ends (when no operation is performed).

415(a) and 415(b) show examples of effects when no operation is performed during the valid operation period (the period from timing t52 to timing t55). In these examples, at timing t55, when the valid operation period ends, an effect is performed indicating whether the result of the special lottery is a loss or a jackpot (such as a display of whether the character has won or lost), but if the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid operation period, an effect is performed indicating whether the result of the special lottery is a loss or a jackpot (such as a display of whether the character has won or lost) at the time the attack button 3710 is operated, without waiting for timing t55.
The timing at which the effect indicating whether the result of the special lottery is a loss or a jackpot ends is a predetermined timing (timing t58) regardless of whether or not an operation is performed. In other words, when the player operates the operation unit, the effect indicating whether the result of the special lottery is a loss or a jackpot will be executed for a relatively long period of time.

Below, with reference to Figures 415(a) and 420, we will explain the presentation mode when the special lottery result is a loss.
From timing t55 to timing t57, the demon character reflects the flames back at the martial artist character, causing the martial artist character to fall. Also, a comment image of the demon character is displayed. The comment image includes the words "Too bad for you!" Figure 420(a) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t57, the display of the martial artist character ends, and the demon character and the demon character's comment image are displayed until timing t58. The intermediate decorative symbols are temporarily stopped. The temporarily stopped combination of reach decorative symbols is "4,""5," and "4," and the player is informed that the result of the special lottery is a loss. Figure 420(b) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t58, the "reach battle presentation" ends. Specifically, the display of the demon character and the demon character's comment image ends. In addition, the type of decorative pattern is switched from the reach decorative pattern to the normal decorative pattern. At this time, the combination of decorative patterns ("4", "5", "4") does not change. In addition, the type of background image is switched from the reach background image C to the normal background image A. This display state continues until timing t60. Figure 420(c) shows the display state during the period from timing t58 to timing t60.

At timing t60, the variable display of the decorative symbols ends, and the decorative symbols are displayed stationary. The decorative symbols are displayed stationary for one second until timing t61. The fourth symbol is displayed stationary as a combination of "4", "5", and "4". Note that a display process is performed in which the current reserved image is gradually erased from timing t60 to timing t61. Specifically, the current reserved image is gradually erased from the bottom right. Figure 420(d) shows the display state at timing t60.5.
After timing t61, the variable display of the next decorative symbol begins. At timing t61, the display of the current reserved image and the standby reserved image resumes.
In addition, the standby image may be displayed at the timing when the background image is switched (displayed) to the normal background image A.

Below, with reference to Figures 415(b) and 421, we will explain the presentation style when the special lottery result is a jackpot.
From timing t55 to timing t57, the demon character is displayed as being defeated. Also, a comment image of the martial artist character is displayed. The comment image includes the words "Great victory!" Figure 421(a) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t57, the display of the demon character ends, and the martial artist character and a comment image of the martial artist character are displayed until timing t58. In addition, the middle decorative symbols are temporarily stopped. The combination of the temporarily stopped reach decorative symbols is "4", "4", "4", and the player is informed that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. Figure 421(b) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t58, the "reach battle presentation" ends. Specifically, the display of the martial artist character and the martial artist character's comment image ends. In addition, the type of decorative symbol is switched from the reach decorative symbol to the normal decorative symbol. At this time, the combination of decorative symbols ("4", "4", "4") does not change. The type of background image does not change, and the reach background image C is displayed until the jackpot game state begins. This display state continues until timing t60. Figure 421 (c) shows the display state during the period from timing t58 to timing t60.

At timing t60, the variable display of the decorative symbols ends, and the decorative symbols are displayed stationary. The decorative symbols are displayed stationary for one second until timing t61. The fourth symbol is displayed stationary as a combination of "4", "4", and "4". Note that a display process is performed in which the current reserved image is gradually erased from timing t60 to timing t61. Specifically, the current reserved image is gradually erased from the bottom right. Figure 421 (d) shows the display state at timing t60.5.
After timing t61, the big win game state starts. At timing t61, the left, center, and right decorative symbols are hidden, and the background image is switched from the ready-to-win background image C to the big win background image.

According to the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 414 to 421, etc., a "non-confirmed precursor effect" is executed in the "pre-reach battle effect" to indicate the victory or defeat of the ally character, and in the "reach battle effect" which is executed when the ally character wins, a "confirmed precursor effect" is executed and then a "reach operation acceptance effect" is executed to display a special image (simulated image of the operation section), so that the player is not made to feel excessive tension and a decrease in operation of the gaming machine can be suppressed.
Furthermore, in chronological order, after the "non-determined precursor effect" is executed in the "pre-reach battle effect," the "determined precursor effect" is executed in the "reach battle effect," and then the "reach operation acceptance effect" is executed, which displays a special image (simulated image of the operation unit). Therefore, the "non-determined precursor effect" can be used to make the player feel suitably excited at an early stage while the variable display is being executed, and by preventing the player's level of excitement from changing excessively just before the "reach operation acceptance effect," it is possible to prevent mistakes in operating the operation unit in the "reach operation acceptance effect."
In addition, an effect of upgrading the current pending image may be executed at a predetermined timing before the "operation acceptance effect during reach" is executed, thereby appropriately increasing the player's expectations for a jackpot result.

In the embodiment shown, the victory or defeat of the martial artist character is displayed when the valid operation period (the period from timing t52 to timing t55) ends without any operation on the operation unit, or when an operation is performed on the operation unit during the valid operation period, and the result of the special lottery is displayed as either a miss or a jackpot corresponding to the victory or defeat of the martial artist character. However, even if the martial artist character loses, the result of the special lottery may be a jackpot. In this case, during the period from timing t58 to timing t59, the decorative symbols may move one symbol from a state where they are temporarily stopped in a reach-miss state to a state where they are temporarily stopped in a matching pattern indicating a jackpot, and finally the decorative symbols may be displayed in a matching pattern. Note that the probability of executing such a presentation mode should be sufficiently low (approximately 1 in 50).
In this way, the outcome of the special lottery is suggested to be either a miss or a jackpot depending on whether the martial artist character wins or loses, but even when a display is made suggesting a miss result, by providing a case where the result is a jackpot with a low probability, the expectation of a jackpot occurring can be maintained until the final stage of the variable display.

The presentation mode of the "Demon Battle Reach Presentation" which is a reach presentation in which a martial artist character and a demon character fight has been shown, but below, a brief explanation will be given of presentation modes of other reach presentations which can be executed.
The "training reach effect" is an effect in which a martial artist character trains with a master character. If the training is successful, it results in a big win, and if the training is unsuccessful, it results in a loss.
"Help Reach Effect" is a reach effect in which the martial artist character and the samurai character fight against the demon character. If the martial artist character and the samurai character win, it is a big win, and if the martial artist character and the samurai character lose, it is a loss.
The "monster reach effect" is an approach effect in which a martial artist character and a monster character fight. If the martial artist character wins, it is a big win, and if the martial artist character is defeated, it is a loss.
The appearance rates of these reach effects are set so that the expectations increase in the order of "training reach effect,""demon battle reach effect,""help reach effect," and "monster reach effect." For example, the expectation level of the "training reach effect" may be set to 10%, the expectation level of the "demon battle reach effect" to 20%, the expectation level of the "help reach effect" to 30%, and the expectation level of the "monster reach effect" to 50%.

The name of the reach effect may be displayed at the timing when the predetermined reach effect starts or during the execution of a predetermined effect that may be executed.
In addition to or instead of directly displaying the name of the reach effect, an image (for example, an image of an enemy character or ally character that appears in the reach effect) may be displayed that allows the player to recognize which reach effect will be executed.
Furthermore, instead of or in addition to the name of the reach effect, etc., star marks indicating the degree of expectation of the reach effect may be displayed. Note that the higher the degree of expectation of the reach effect, the more star marks are set. For example, two star marks may be displayed for a "training reach effect," three for a "demon battle reach effect," four for a "help reach effect," and five for a "monster reach effect."
In addition, the number of star marks may be expressed using a combination of black and white star marks, such as "★★☆☆☆" (two star marks), "★★★☆☆" (three star marks), "★★★★☆" (four star marks), and "★★★★★" (five star marks). In this example, the number of star marks is indicated by the black star marks. The total number of white and black star marks is always five, and the white star marks are displayed to make it easier to understand the maximum number of star marks when the number of black star marks displayed is four or less. In other words, the white star marks are not counted as part of the number of star marks that indicate the level of expectation.
For example, during the reach title display period (timing t30 to timing t33) of the Oni Battle Reach presentation in the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 418 (e), instead of or in addition to displaying the words "Oni Battle Reach!", the words "★★★☆☆" may be displayed within a horizontal window image.
In addition, there may be multiple reach effects corresponding to a certain combination of star marks, for example, "★★☆☆☆" (two star marks), and in that case, it is desirable that the expectations (expectations for a jackpot) of the multiple reach effects be the same, but if the expectations are strictly different but roughly the same (for example, the expected hit rate for reach effect A is 30%, and the expected hit rate for reach effect B is 31%), the same "★★☆☆☆" (two star marks) may be displayed.
Although the embodiment has been described in which the degree of expectation is indicated by using star marks, other images (for example, square marks or circle marks) may be used instead of star marks.

417(b) to 417(d) show an embodiment in which, when the Oni character repels the energy bullet in the "pre-reach battle presentation," the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a miss, but even when the Oni character repels the energy bullet, a reach state may be formed after the "pre-reach battle presentation" ends (when the display of the Oni character ends).Furthermore, after the reach state is formed, the decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a reach miss or a jackpot.
By adopting such an embodiment, even if the "pre-reach battle performance" results in an unfavorable outcome for the player (for example, if the demon character deflects the energy bullet), the player is still able to enjoy the jackpot, thereby preventing a decline in interest.
In addition, even if the hold change is not successful in the "hold-based reach notice effect" described below, or if a reward (the right to generate a reach state) is not obtained in the "reach pattern promotion effect," the decorative pattern may form a reach state after the end of these effects, and after the reach state is formed, the decorative pattern may be displayed stopped in a manner indicating a reach miss or a jackpot.
In this case, the same effect can be obtained.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 414(b), the Oni character faints at timing t20, confirming that an "Oni Battle Reach" will be executed. At this time, the decorative symbols are in a state of rapid fluctuation, but at timing t20 when the display of the Oni character fainting begins, or at timing t21 when the display of "Enemy Injured!" begins, the decorative symbols on the left and right may be transformed to temporarily stop in a reach state. The reach state of the decorative symbols may then continue until timing t30, and the transition to an "Oni Battle Reach" may then occur.

With reference to Figures 417(b) to 417(d), an embodiment has been shown in which when the "pre-reach ally character defeat effect" is executed, the Oni Battle Reach effect does not occur and a miss is always the result, but it is also possible to have a case in which a jackpot result occurs, although the expected probability is lower (for example, 1%) than when the Oni Battle Reach effect is executed, rather than always resulting in a miss.
For example, at timing t28.5 in the time chart shown in Figure 414(a), the left decorative pattern of "4" temporarily stops, at timing t29 the right decorative pattern of "4" temporarily stops, at timing t29.5 the center decorative pattern of "4" temporarily stops, and at timing t30 the left, center, and right decorative patterns that were temporarily stopped are displayed as a matching number (here, a combination of "4", "4", "4"), indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot.
Note that a losing result may be displayed after the reaching state is generated. For example, a case may be provided in which the decorative symbols on the left, center, and right are stopped and displayed in a reaching losing combination (here, a combination of "4", "5", and "4").
According to this embodiment, even when the "pre-reach ally character defeat effect" is executed, the player can continue to have a sense of anticipation for a big hit.

Referring to Figure 414 (b) and the like, an embodiment has been shown in which a horizontally long window is displayed at the top of the display area 1600a for a predetermined period (the period from timing t20 to timing t25), and multiple instances of the text "Enemy injured!" are displayed within this window and moved within the window, but the following embodiment may also be adopted.
For example, the display cycle of the characters scrolled within the window may be set to 1.5 seconds, and the display time of the window may be set to a length of one cycle or more (e.g., six seconds). In this case, four cycles of characters are displayed within the window. By setting the display time of the characters within the window to a length of one cycle or more, the player can accurately recognize the entire character string while still providing a dynamic display.
It should be noted that the display is not limited to dynamic display, and static display may also be used. For example, the text "Enemy injured!" may be displayed in a horizontally long window in a static manner for a predetermined period of time.

Referring to Figure 418 (a), an embodiment has been shown in which a plurality of comment images supporting the martial artist character are displayed during the period from timing t23 to timing t24, but the following embodiment may also be adopted.
Although a plurality of comment images are displayed in the above embodiment, only one comment image may be displayed.
Furthermore, a character may be displayed in addition to the comment image, or a character may be displayed instead of the comment image, and the voice of the character (the voice of the lines contained in the comment image) may be output from a speaker.
Although an embodiment in which a comment image of a character is displayed has been described, the color of the comment image (the color of the background area and/or the color of the dialogue in the comment image) may indicate the likelihood of a jackpot. For example, blue, green, red, and rainbow colors may be used as the colors of the comment image, with the likelihood increasing in the order of blue, green, red, and rainbow. It is preferable that the likelihood of a rainbow color be 100%.
The display positions of the martial artist character's comment image and the comment images of other characters are not limited to those shown in the figure. However, it is advisable to give the comment image a lower display priority than the horizontal window displaying the text "Enemy injured!", and to display the comment image behind it if the horizontal window and the comment image overlap.

The "pre-reach battle effect" is an effect that is only performed once and is not performed multiple times during one display of the decorative pattern. Therefore, the number of times that the demon character faints and the words "Enemy injured!" are displayed is also only once.
By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player becomes bored with the presentation or feels fatigued due to a long period of tension. Also, since the execution of the reach presentation is confirmed when the demon character faints and the words "Enemy injured!" are displayed, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player becomes excessively fatigued before the reach presentation starts and is unable to enjoy the essential reach presentation.
Although only one type of text, "Enemy injured!", is displayed in the window, a display mode other than "Enemy injured!" may be used, for example, the text "Enemy heavily damaged!" may be displayed. Furthermore, when the text "Enemy injured!" is displayed and the text "Enemy heavily damaged!" is displayed, the latter may be configured to have a higher probability of winning.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 414 (b), etc., the display of the words "Enemy injured!" was terminated at timing t25 when the decorative pattern was fluctuating rapidly, but the display of the words "Enemy injured!" may be continued until another timing.
For example, the display of the text "Enemy Injured!" may be terminated at the timing (timing t30) when the reach effect (Demon Battle Reach effect) starts. Alternatively, the reach effect (Demon Battle Reach effect) starts, the title name of the reach effect is displayed, and the display of the text "Enemy Injured!" may be continued until the timing (timing t33) when the display of this title name ends. Alternatively, the display of the text "Enemy Injured!" may be continued until the martial artist character raises his left arm and a display of a flame image gathering at the tip of his left arm begins. Alternatively, the display of the text "Enemy Injured!" may be continued until a predetermined timing within the period during which the martial artist character hurls flames at the demon character and the demon character endures (timing t50.5 to timing t52). Alternatively, the display of the text "Enemy Injured!" may be terminated at the timing (timing t52) when the display of the demon character endures and the "Reach Operation Acceptance Effect" starts. Alternatively, the display of the text "Enemy is injured!" may be terminated at a predetermined timing during the valid operation period (from timing t52 to timing t55) (for example, timing t53.5 in the middle of the valid operation period or timing t55 when the valid operation period ends). Note that if an operation is performed by the player, the display of the text "Enemy is injured!" may be terminated at that timing.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to recognize up to a predetermined timing whether or not the "mid-reach battle presentation" is being executed via the "pre-reach battle presentation."

In the embodiment shown, the "during-reach operation reception effect" is executed during the period from timing t52 to timing t55, but multiple types of operation unit simulated images (see FIG. 419(e)) displayed during the "during-reach operation reception effect" may be provided. Also, the type of operation unit simulated image displayed may indicate the likelihood of a jackpot.
For example, the simulated image of the operation unit may be displayed in one of three colors: white, red, or rainbow, with the expectation level increasing in the order of white, red, and rainbow. Note that the expectation level for a rainbow-colored simulated image of the operation unit may be set to 100%.
By adopting such an embodiment, the player can feel a sense of excitement as to which operation unit simulated image will be displayed while the "confirmation premonition effect" is being performed.

Although the attack button 3710 has been described as an example of an operation unit that can accept operations in the "operation acceptance effect during reach," other operation units may also be able to accept operations. For example, instead of the attack button 3710, the mission button 3700 or the defense button 3740 may be able to accept operations.
Also, it may be possible to accept operation of right lever 3730 or left lever 3720. In this case, the operation mode may be an operation mode in which right lever 3730 or left lever 3720 is tilted in a specific direction such as forward/backward or left/right. The shape of the operation unit simulated image to be displayed may be a vertically long bar-shaped image that resembles the shape of left lever 3720. Furthermore, the operation modes may be indicated by displaying characters such as "push,""push,""pull,""pullback,""tilt," or "tilt."
In addition, it is preferable to set the degree of expectation to differ depending on the type of operation unit that can accept operations. For example, it is preferable to set the degree of expectation to increase in the order of attack button 3710, mission button 3700, and left lever 3720.
By adopting such an embodiment, the player can feel a sense of excitement as to which operation unit simulated image will be displayed while the "confirmation premonition effect" is being performed.

Although an embodiment in which a flat simulated image of the operation section is displayed in the "operation reception presentation during reach" (see Figure 419 (e)) has been shown, it is also possible to display a three-dimensional simulated image of the operation section that more realistically represents the shape of the operation section.
The simulated image of the operation section may also be dynamically displayed. Specifically, the simulated image of the attack button 3710 may change from an unpressed state to a pressed state over 0.5 seconds, and then return to the unpressed state over 0.5 seconds. Such dynamic display may also be repeated during the valid operation period. For example, if the valid operation period is three seconds (see FIG. 415), the simulated image of the attack button 3710 will be dynamically displayed three times.
Similarly, the operation unit simulated image of the left lever 3720 may change from an upright state when not in operation to a state tilted in a specific direction over 0.5 seconds, and then return to the upright state over 0.5 seconds. Furthermore, such dynamic display may be repeated during the valid operation period.
By adopting a dynamic display mode in which the simulated image of the operation unit is periodically displayed in a loop during the valid operation period, the operation mode of the operation unit can be clearly presented to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming confused about how to operate the operation unit and losing interest. Note that the number of times the periodic display is performed is not limited to three times, and can be any number of times, such as two or more.
The dynamic display operation in which the black parts of the remaining time gauge image (see FIG. 419(e)) are replaced with white parts is performed only once (i.e., it does not loop).
Note that a dynamic display operation in which the black portion of the remaining time gauge image is replaced with a white portion may be performed multiple times during the valid operation period. In this case, a dynamic display in which the black portion is replaced with a white portion may be performed for one second, and then a dynamic display in which the black portion is replaced with a white portion may be performed again for one second. This display operation may be repeated during the valid operation period. If the valid operation period is set to three seconds, such a display will be performed three times.

In the "operation acceptance presentation during reach", an operation section simulated image is displayed (see Figure 419 (e)), and an image (the word "press") showing the operation mode of the operation section (for example, attack button 3710) is displayed within the operation section simulated image, but it is also possible to display an image showing the operation mode of the operation section outside the operation section simulated image rather than within it.
The image indicating the operating mode of the operating unit is not limited to characters, and may be a mark such as an arrow, and the direction in which the operating unit should be operated may be indicated by the mark.
The image showing the operation mode of the operation unit may be displayed statically or dynamically. When the image is displayed dynamically, a dynamic display mode that loops may be adopted so that the image is displayed in a loop multiple times within the valid operation period. Alternatively, a dynamic display mode that does not loop within the valid operation period may be adopted.
As a mode for dynamically displaying an image showing the operation mode of the operation unit, a mode for changing the fill-in mode of the image or a mode for changing the position or size of the image can be adopted.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the reach-time background image C is displayed as the background image during the valid operation period (from timing t52 to timing t55) when the operation unit simulation image is displayed (see FIG. 415), a special background image may be displayed during the valid operation period instead of the reach-time background image C. The special background image is not displayed in the "reach battle presentation" until the valid operation period starts, but is displayed only during the valid operation period.
The special background image may be a statically displayed background image or a dynamically displayed background image. In the case of a dynamically displayed background image, a dynamic background image that is displayed in a loop or a non-looping dynamic background image may be used.
By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to make the player aware that the valid operation period during which the operation section simulated image is displayed is a special period.

An embodiment has been shown in which a reach background image C is displayed while the ``reach battle effect'' is being executed (see Figure 415), but it is also possible to display multiple reach background images before the ``reach operation acceptance effect'' is started.
In addition, a predetermined reach background image displayed during the execution of the "reach battle effect" may be displayed as the background image during the valid operation period (from timing t52 to timing t55) when the operation unit simulation image is displayed.
For example, it is possible to display a reach background image C from timing t30 to timing t40, a reach background image D from timing t40 to timing t50, and a reach background image E from timing t50 to timing t58 (in the case of a miss) or until timing t61 (in the case of a jackpot).
Furthermore, as the background image during the valid operation period (from timing t52 to timing t55) in which the operation unit simulated image is displayed, the reach-time background image C or reach-time background image D, which is the background image displayed before the valid operation period, may be displayed. As the display mode of the reach-time background image C or reach-time background image D, a static display mode may be adopted, a dynamic display mode that loops, or a dynamic display mode that does not loop.

In addition, in the "pre-reach battle effect," a predetermined operation reception effect may be executed to indicate the expectation of a jackpot. In this case, a flat, static display mode may be adopted as the display mode of the operation unit simulated image that imitates the attack button 3710 or the left lever 3720.
By adopting such an embodiment, the display mode of the operation unit simulated image is not more flashy than the display mode of the operation unit simulated image in the ``reach operation reception presentation'', and as a result, the display mode of the operation unit simulated image in the ``reach operation reception presentation'' can be made to stand out.

An embodiment of the "Reach Battle Effect" has been described with reference to the time charts shown in Figures 414 and 415 and the display examples shown in Figures 416 to 421. The "Reach Battle Effect" is an effect that can be executed during the execution of the "Reach Battle Effect," and this will be explained with reference to the time chart shown in Figure 422 and the display example shown in Figure 423.

Figures 422(a) and 422(b) are time charts modified from Figures 415(a) and 415(b), respectively, with the addition of a "Master character's comment image display mode" and a "Fighter character's comment image display mode." The presentation modes other than the "Master character's comment image display mode" and "Fighter character's comment image display mode" are basically the same as those shown in Figures 414, 415, and 416 to 421, so the following explanation will focus on the "Master character's comment image display mode" and "Fighter character's comment image display mode."

At timing t44, the size of the flame image and the comment image of the martial artist character become even larger. Also, as described above, the text in the comment image of the martial artist character changes to "60%!". Note that the background color of the comment image of the martial artist character at this timing is white. Figure 423(a) shows the display state from timing t44 to timing t44.5.
At timing t44.5, the comment image of the master character is displayed in the center of the display area 1600a. The comment image of the master character includes the words "Remember your training with me!". Furthermore, by displaying the comment image of the master character in front of the comment image of the martial artist character, the comment image of the martial artist character is hidden and becomes invisible. This display state continues from timing t44.5 to timing t46. Figure 423(b) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t46, the display of the comment image of the master character ends. The background color of the comment image of the martial artist character is displayed in red. Note that the text in the comment image of the martial artist character changes to "80%!" as time passes. Figure 423 (c) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t48, the text in the comment image of the martial artist character changes to "100%!" This display continues until timing t50. Figure 423(d) shows the display state at this time.
In this manner, in this embodiment, a "character background color change effect during reach" is executed during the period from timing t44 to timing t50, and a display that increases the likelihood of a jackpot is produced.
Whether or not to execute the "reach character background color change effect" and, if so, what color to change it to is determined by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the results of a special lottery.

When a comment image of the master character is displayed, the background color of the comment image of the martial artist character always changes to a color with a higher expectation. For example, four background colors, white, red, gold, and rainbow, can be displayed as types of background colors for the comment image of the martial artist character, with the expectation of a jackpot increasing in the order of white, red, gold, and rainbow. If white is selected as the background color for the comment image of the martial artist character and the comment image of the master character is displayed, the background color of the comment image of the martial artist character always changes to one of red, gold, or rainbow after the display of the comment image of the master character has ended, and there is no case in which the background color of the comment image of the martial artist character does not change (i.e., remains white).
Instead of or in addition to the background color, the color of the text in the martial artist character's comments (such as "80%!" or "100%!") may be changed from black to red, gold, or rainbow colors.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the size of the comment image of the martial artist character and the size of the text of the comment of the martial artist character gradually increase (see Figures 418 and 419), the size of the comment image of the martial artist character and the size of the text of the comment of the martial artist character (text such as "80%!" or "100%!") may be displayed at the same size at all times, regardless of whether the background color or text color changes. Note that when the content of the text changes, it is preferable not to change the font size.
Furthermore, the size of the comment image of the martial artist character and the size of the text of the comment (such as "80%!" or "100%!") of the martial artist character may be increased in response to changes in the background color or text color. For example, if the color changes to red, it may be increased in size compared to when the color changes to white. Also, if the color changes to rainbow colors, it may be increased in size even more compared to when the color changes to red. By using such an embodiment, it is possible to appeal to the player that the color has changed and to what color it has changed.

In the embodiment shown, the text included in the master character's comment image reads "Remember your training with me!" However, multiple types of text (lines) may be provided for inclusion in the master character's comment image, and there may be a one-to-one correspondence between the type of text displayed and the color to which the background of the martial artist character's comment image changes. For example, three types of text may be provided for inclusion in the master character's comment image, and each text may correspond to a color to which the background of the martial artist character's comment image changes (one of three colors: red, gold, or rainbow). In this case, the color to which the background of the martial artist character's comment image will change will be known when the master character's lines are displayed.

According to the "character background color change effect during reach" of the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 422 and 423, a comment image of the master character is displayed as a "confirmation precursor effect", and after the display of the comment image of the master character has finished, the background color of the comment image of the martial artist character will always change to a background color with a high expectation.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to indicate that the probability of a jackpot occurring during the reach performance has become even higher, and it is possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation for a jackpot occurring without causing excessive tension in the player.
Furthermore, since the comment image of the master character overlaps with the comment image of the martial artist character, the player can clearly recognize that the background color of the comment image of the martial artist character changes.

In an embodiment shown, the background color (text color in a modified example) of the comment image of the martial artist character changes to a high expectation color at timing t46 during the period (10 seconds from timing t40 to timing t50) during which the flame image and the comment image of the martial artist character are displayed, but the color may also change at other times.
For example, the background color or the text color may be changed at a timing (e.g., timing t48) when the period during which the background color or the text color is red or rainbow, which are colors with high expectation, becomes longer than the period during which the background color or the text color is white, which is a color with low expectation. According to this embodiment, the player can enjoy the time until the background color or the text color changes.
Alternatively, the background color or character color may be changed at a timing (e.g., timing t42) when the period during which the background color or character color is red or rainbow, which are colors with high expectation, becomes longer than the period during which the background color or character color is white, which is a color with low expectation. According to such an embodiment, the changed background color or character color can be clearly recognized by the player.
Alternatively, the background color or character color may be changed at the timing (for example, timing t45) when the period in which the background color or character color is white, which is a color with low expectation, and the period in which the background color or character color is red or rainbow, which are colors with high expectation, are the same length. According to this embodiment, the player can enjoy the time until the background color or character color changes, while being able to clearly recognize the background color or character color after the change.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 422 and 423(a) to 423(d), the comment image of the martial artist character is not visible during the entire period in which the comment image of the master character is displayed (timing t44.5 to timing t46), but other display modes may also be adopted.
Other display modes of the comment image of the master character will be described below with reference to Fig. 424. In the embodiment shown with reference to Fig. 424, the comment image of the master character is displayed in the upper center of the display area 1600a, and as it moves downward, it passes in front of the comment image of the martial artist character, and after passing, the display mode of the comment image of the martial artist character changes.

First, a comment image of the master character appears from off-screen at the top center in the horizontal direction of the display area 1600a. The comment image of the master character gradually becomes larger while moving downward. These displays are performed from timing t44.5 to timing t45. Figure 424(a) shows a display state in which the entire comment image of the master character is displayed in the display area 1600a. Figure 424(b) shows a display state in which the comment image of the master character moves downward and the master character's lines are displayed. Here, the comment image of the master character makes part of the comment image of the martial artist character invisible.
Next, the comment image of the master character moves downward and is displayed at its largest size, stationary and in front of the comment image of the martial artist character. The stationary period is from timing t45 to timing t45.5. The comment image of the martial artist character is not visible during this period. Figure 424(c) shows the display state at this time.
Next, the comment image of the master character resumes moving downward, and the size of the comment image of the master character gradually decreases. These displays are performed from timing t45.5 to timing t46. Figure 424(d) shows a display state in which the comment image of the master character has moved downward, and part of the comment image of the martial artist character has become visible. Figure 424(e) shows a state in which the comment image of the master character has moved further downward, just before it moves off the screen from the bottom center in the horizontal direction of the display area 1600a.

In this way, by dynamically displaying the comment image of the master character, the player's attention can be directed to the comment image of the martial artist character. Furthermore, by temporarily stopping the comment image of the master character in the center of the display area, the player's attention can be directed to the center of the display area where the comment image of the martial artist character is displayed. This prevents the player from missing the change in the background color of the comment image of the martial artist character, and prevents a decrease in interest.

In the embodiment shown, the effect is executed for 1.5 seconds from timing t44.5 to timing t46, but the effect execution time can be set as appropriate. For example, this effect may be executed for 3 seconds from timing t44.5 to timing t47.5.

Furthermore, within the period from when the display of the master character's comment image begins until the display of the master character's comment image affects the visibility of all of the martial artist character's comment images, there is a period during which the master character's comment image is displayed but does not affect the visibility of the martial artist character's comment image (hereinafter referred to as Period A), a period during which the display of the master character's comment image affects the visibility of some of the martial artist character's comment images (hereinafter referred to as Period B), and a period during which the display of the master character's comment image affects the visibility of all of the martial artist character's comment images (hereinafter referred to as Period C). The lengths of each period (Periods A to C) may be, for example, lengthened in the order of Period A < Period B < Period C, or Period C < Period B < Period A, or the longest and shortest periods may be appropriately set when comparing the lengths of Periods A to C. Furthermore, the lengths of two or three of Periods A to C may be the same.
Also, there are two periods A shown in FIG. 424(a) and FIG. 424(e), but either one of the periods may be made longer or may be the same.
Also, period B is shown in FIG. 424(b) and FIG. 424(d), but either one of the periods may be made longer or may be the same.

Furthermore, in the example of the presentation shown in Fig. 424, the comment image of the master character may not be displayed moving from the top toward the center of display area 1600a. In this case, the comment image of the master character is suddenly displayed in a manner that hides the comment image of the martial artist character, and then the comment image of the master character moves downward, making the comment image of the martial artist character visible. As a specific display mode, the display modes shown in Fig. 424(a) and Fig. 424(b) are not used, and the comment image of the master character is displayed in the modes shown in Fig. 424(c) to Fig. 424(e).
Note that the comment image of the master character may be displayed in the manner shown in Figures 424(b) to 424(e) instead of the manner shown in Figure 424(a). Alternatively, the comment image of the master character may be displayed in the manner shown in Figures 424(c) and 424(d) instead of the manner shown in Figures 424(a), 424(b), and 424(e).

Alternatively, the comment image of the master character may not be displayed moving downward from near the center of the display area 1600a. In this case, after the comment image of the master character moves downward and the comment image of the martial artist character becomes invisible, the comment image of the master character becomes invisible and the comment image of the martial artist character suddenly becomes visible. Specific display modes include displaying the comment image of the master character in the modes shown in Figures 424(a) to 424(c), but not in the modes shown in Figures 424(d) and 424(e). Note that the comment image of the master character may be displayed in the modes shown in Figures 424(a) to 424(d), but not in the mode shown in Figure 424(e). Alternatively, the comment image of the master character may be displayed in the modes shown in Figures 424(b) and 424(c), without being displayed in the modes shown in Figures 424(a), 424(d), and 424(e).

Furthermore, when the comment image of the master character moves or the display of the comment image of the master character ends, and the comment image of the martial artist character changes to a highly anticipated background color and becomes visible, operation acceptance of the operation unit (attack button 3710, etc.) is not enabled, no simulated image imitating the operation unit is displayed, and the hold change effect of the current hold image is not executed at that time.
By adopting such a configuration, the player can be made to focus more on the "character background color change effect during reach."

In the embodiment shown, when the master character's lines are displayed, the background color of the martial artist character's comment image always changes to a background color with a high expectation, but there may be cases where the background color does not change. In this case, the display of the master character's lines will function as a "non-confirmed precursor effect."

There may be multiple types of lines that the master character will display. There may also be a one-to-one correspondence between the master character's lines and the resulting color. For example, if the line "It might be red!" is displayed, the character may change to red; if the line "It might be gold!" is displayed, the character may change to gold; and if the line "It might be rainbow!" is displayed, the character may change to rainbow colors.

An embodiment of the "mid-reach battle effect" has been described with reference to the time charts shown in Figures 414 and 415 and the display examples shown in Figures 416 to 421. The "mid-reach background change effect," which is an effect that can be executed during the execution of the "mid-reach battle effect," will now be described with reference to the time chart shown in Figure 425 and the display example shown in Figure 426.

Figures 425(a) and 425(b) are time charts modified from Figures 415(a) and 415(b), respectively, with the addition of "type of background image" and "display mode of background change precursor image" to the time charts. Since the presentation modes other than "type of background image" and "display mode of background change precursor image" are basically the same as those shown in Figures 414, 415, and 416 to 421, the following explanation will focus on "type of background image" and "display mode of background change precursor image."

At timing t44, a background change premonition image is displayed in display area 1600a. Figure 426(a) shows the display state immediately before the background change premonition image is displayed. Figure 426(b) shows the display state immediately after the background change premonition image is displayed. As shown in Figure 426(b), the background change premonition image occupies most of display area 1600a (for example, more than half the area of display area 1600a). The background change premonition image also contains the words "Background change!" The background change premonition image has a higher display priority than the background image (here, the currently displayed reach background image C), decorative pattern, current pending image, demon character, martial artist character, and martial artist character comment image, and is displayed in front of these images. The background change premonition image is displayed until timing t46.

At timing t46, the display of the background change precursor image ends. After the display of the background change precursor image ends, the displayed background image is changed from reach-time background image C to reach-time background image D or reach-time background image E.
Figures 426(c) and 426(d) show the display state from timing t46 to timing t48 and from timing t48 to timing t50 when the background image is changed to reach background image D.
On the other hand, Figures 426(e) and 426(f) show the display state from timing t46 to timing t48 and from timing t48 to timing t50 when the background image is changed to reach background image E.
In this manner, in this embodiment, a "background change effect during reach" is executed during the period from timing t44 to timing t50, and a display that increases the likelihood of a jackpot is displayed.
Whether or not to execute the "background change effect during reach" and, if so, which background image to change to is determined by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the results of a special lottery.
When the "reach battle effect" is executed, the probability of executing the "reach background change effect" may be higher or lower than the probability of not executing the "reach background change effect."

When a background change precursor image is displayed, the currently displayed reach background image C is always changed to reach background image D or reach background image E. The reach background image indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a jackpot, with the degree of expectation increasing in the order of reach background image C, reach background image D, and reach background image E. According to this embodiment, when a background change precursor image is displayed, the player recognizes that the degree of expectation is changing (the degree of expectation is always increasing), and while anticipating how much the degree of expectation will increase, the player will also anticipate which reach background image will be displayed, thereby enhancing the player's interest.
The types of reach-time background images after the change are not limited to the reach-time background image D and the reach-time background image E, but any one of three or more reach-time background images each having a different expectation level and higher expectation level than the reach-time background image C can be displayed.

According to the "background change effect during reach" of the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 425 and 426, a background change precursor image is displayed as a "confirmed precursor effect", and after the display of the background change precursor image has finished, the reach background image always changes to a reach background image with a higher expectation.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to indicate that the probability of a jackpot occurring during the reach performance has become even higher, and it is possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation for a jackpot occurring without causing excessive tension.

An embodiment has been shown in which the visibility of the reach background image, reach decorative pattern, and current pending image is simultaneously reduced by the background change premonition image at the same time as the display of the background change premonition image begins (Figure 426 (b)), but an example of another form in which the visibility of the reach background image, reach decorative pattern, and current pending image is simultaneously reduced is shown with reference to Figure 427.
427(a) shows an embodiment in which multiple background change precursor images are displayed simultaneously at timing t44.5. In this case, too, the display of the background change precursor images reduces the visibility of the reach background image, reach decorative pattern, and current reserved image.
427(b) shows an embodiment in which a background change precursor image is displayed at timing t44.5. In this case, the visibility of the reach-time background image is reduced by the display of the background change precursor image.
427(c) shows an embodiment in which a background change precursor image is displayed at timing t44.5. In this case, the visibility of the reach decorative symbols is reduced by the display of the background change precursor image.
Figure 427(d) shows an embodiment in which a background change precursor image is displayed at timing t44.5. In this case, the visibility of the currently reserved image is reduced by the display of the background change precursor image.

The embodiments shown with reference to Figures 427(b) and 427(c) may be combined so that the visibility of the reach background image and the reach decorative pattern are simultaneously reduced by displaying a background change precursor image.
Alternatively, the embodiments shown with reference to Figures 427(b) and 427(d) may be combined so that the visibility of the background image at the time of reach and the current pending image is simultaneously reduced by displaying a background change precursor image.
Alternatively, the embodiments shown with reference to Figures 427(c) and 427(d) may be combined so that the visibility of the decorative pattern at the time of reach and the current pending image is simultaneously reduced by displaying a background change precursor image.

An embodiment has been shown in which the visibility of the reach background image, reach decorative pattern, and current pending image is simultaneously reduced by displaying multiple background change precursor images, but the visibility of these images may also be reduced in a predetermined order.
For example, the background change precursor images may be displayed in the following order: a background change precursor image that hides the background image when a reach is reached, a background change precursor image that hides the decorative pattern when a reach is reached, and a background change precursor image that hides the current pending image.
Alternatively, the background change precursor images may be displayed in the following order: a background change precursor image that hides the background image when a win is reached, a background change precursor image that hides the currently held image, and a background change precursor image that hides the decorative pattern when a win is reached.
Alternatively, the background change precursor images may be displayed in the following order: a background change precursor image that hides the decorative pattern when a win is reached, a background change precursor image that hides the background image when a win is reached, and a background change precursor image that hides the current pending image.
Alternatively, the background change precursor images may be displayed in the following order: a background change precursor image that hides the decorative pattern when a win is reached, a background change precursor image that hides the currently held image, and a background change precursor image that hides the background image when a win is reached.
Alternatively, the background change precursor images may be displayed in the following order: a background change precursor image that hides the current pending image, a background change precursor image that hides the background image when a win is reached, and a background change precursor image that hides the decorative pattern when a win is reached.
Alternatively, the background change precursor images may be displayed in the following order: a background change precursor image that hides the current pending image, a background change precursor image that hides the decorative pattern when a win is reached, and a background change precursor image that hides the background image when a win is reached.
According to such an embodiment, the background change precursor image can reduce the visibility of the reach background image, reach decorative pattern, and current hold image in a specific order.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 427(a) to 427(d), the size of the background change precursor image was not changed, but by changing the size of the background change precursor image, the background image at the time of reach, the decorative pattern at the time of reach, and the current hold image may be hidden by the background change precursor image, thereby reducing the visibility of the background image at the time of reach, the decorative pattern at the time of reach, and the current hold image.
Figure 427(e) shows a display state in which the display of a background change precursor image has begun and the visibility of the current pending image has decreased.
Figure 427(f) shows the display state following Figure 427(e), in which the background change precursor image is enlarged and the visibility of the background image at the time of reach is reduced in addition to the current pending image.
Figure 427(g) shows the display state following Figure 427(f), in which the background change precursor image is further enlarged, and the visibility of the current pending image, the background image at the time of reach, and the decorative pattern at the time of reach are reduced.

Referring to Figures 427(e) to 427(g), an embodiment is shown in which the size of the background change precursor image is dynamically changed to decrease visibility in the order of the current pending image, the background image at the time of reach, and the decorative pattern at the time of reach, but visibility may also be decreased in another order.
For example, by dynamically changing the size of the background change precursor image, the visibility may decrease in the order of the reach background image, the reach decorative pattern, and the current pending image.
Alternatively, the size of the background change precursor image may be dynamically changed so that visibility decreases in the order of the reach background image, the current pending image, and the reach decorative pattern.
Alternatively, the size of the background change precursor image may be dynamically changed so that visibility decreases in the order of the reach decorative pattern, reach background image, and current pending image.
In this way, even in an embodiment in which the size of the background change precursor image is dynamically changed, the background change precursor image can reduce the visibility of the reach background image, reach decorative pattern, and current pending image in a specific order.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 426 and 427(a) to 427(g), the size of the background change precursor image was such that it was displayed in only a portion of the display area 1600a. However, the size of the background change precursor image may be made the same as the size of the display area 1600a, so that the background change precursor image is displayed in the entirety of 1600a during the period from timing t44.5 to timing t46. Figure 427(h) shows a display state in which the background change precursor image is displayed in the entirety of the display area 1600a. Note that the fourth symbol and the pending number display image are set to have a higher display priority than the background change precursor image, and are therefore displayed in front of the background change precursor image.
Furthermore, during the period from timing t44.5 to timing t46, after the display shown in Figures 427(e) to 427(g), the background change precursor image may be further enlarged to the display state shown in Figure 427(h).
In this way, by making the background change precursor image larger, the impact of the "background change effect during reach" on the player can be made stronger.

Although the embodiments have been described in which the size of the background change precursor image does not change and the size of the background change precursor image increases, a display mode in which the size of the background change precursor image decreases may also be employed.
For example, it is preferable that the background change precursor image starts to shrink from the display state shown in Figure 426(b), Figure 427(g), or Figure 427(h), and the size of the background change precursor image reaches a minimum in about 1 to 2 seconds, and the display of the background change precursor image ends. At the same time as the shrinking starts, the reach-time background image is switched.
According to such an embodiment, the visibility of the changed reach background image gradually increases, thereby providing the player with the enjoyment of noticing which reach background image is displayed (i.e., which high or low expectation level is indicated).

The background change precursor image may scroll from the right side of the display area 1600a and appear, filling the entire display area, as shown in Figure 427 (h). The background change precursor image may then scroll towards the left side of the display area 1600a and disappear. According to this embodiment, after the reach-time background image C is hidden by the background change precursor image, the reach-time background image D or reach-time background image E will gradually appear from the right side of the display area 1600a, gradually increasing the sense of anticipation as to which background will be displayed.

With reference to Figures 425 and 426, we have explained the "background change effect during reach" in which reach background image C changes to reach background image D or reach background image E. However, we will now explain a modified embodiment in which reach background image F (see Figure 413 (d)) may be displayed in addition to reach background image D and reach background image E.
The reach background image F (see Figure 413 (d)) is a background image that can be displayed when the player is in a reach state, but it is desirable that the expectation of a jackpot when the reach background image F is displayed be set lower than when the reach background image C is displayed. By doing this, even if the "reach background change effect" is performed when the "reach battle effect" is executed, the expectation of a jackpot will not necessarily increase, and so a moderate sense of tension can be given to the player when the "reach background change effect" is executed.
Furthermore, if the probability that the "reach battle effect" is executed and the reach-time background image F is displayed is set higher than the probability that the "reach battle effect" is executed and the reach-time background image F is not displayed, the sense of tension can be increased, and if the probability that the "reach battle effect" is executed and the reach-time background image F is displayed is set lower than the probability that the "reach battle effect" is executed and the reach-time background image F is not displayed, the player can view the "reach background change effect" in the "reach battle effect" with a sense of security. In this way, by making it possible to display the reach-time background image F, which has a lower expectation of a jackpot than the reach-time background image C, as the "reach background change effect," the appearance rate of the "reach background change effect" itself can be increased compared to when the reach-time background image F is not displayed in the "reach background change effect" (when reach-time background image D and reach-time background image E can be displayed).

When the reach-time background image F is displayed during the "reach background change effect," the variable display result may be set to always be a miss (i.e., the expected probability is 0%). In this case, when the reach-time background image F is displayed, the reach-time decorative pattern may be returned to the normal decorative pattern that was the decorative pattern before the reach effect began and placed in a temporary stopped state. As with when the normal decorative pattern is switched to the reach-time decorative pattern, the number of the decorative pattern forming the reach state ("4" in the example of FIG. 426) may not be changed, and the normal decorative pattern may be temporarily displayed as a combination of, for example, "4,""5," and "4" and then stopped. Furthermore, the display of the martial artist character, the martial artist character's comment image, the flame image, and the demon character may also be terminated (without displaying the character's win or loss, etc.). In addition, during the period from when the background image F is displayed at the time of reaching the goal to when the variable display stops, it is advisable not to execute "operation acceptance display during reaching the goal", hold change display, and other advance notice display, i.e., various displays that indicate the expectation that the decorative pattern being executed will become a jackpot.
In addition, when a game ball newly enters a starting hole (first starting hole 2002 or second starting hole 2004), a waiting hold image may be displayed and a winning sound may be output to indicate that a starting winning has occurred.
However, even in this case, it is preferable not to execute a winning notice that can be executed by a pre-reading process for the hold that occurs when the game ball enters the starting hole (such as a winning flash that indicates that the expected probability of the hold that occurs is higher than usual by illuminating a specified luminous decorative component such as the light guide plate 1140 when a winning is won, or displaying a waiting hold image in a display mode (blue to rainbow colors) that is different from the default display (white waiting hold image) from the time of winning), but it may be executed.

Furthermore, when the reach background image F is displayed and the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, the flame image held by the martial artist character may be limited to a medium size, and a "reach operation reception effect" may be executed. This makes it possible to take advantage of the setting of the reach background image F, which shows that it is raining (a series of related effects can be created), and also gives the player a great sense of satisfaction because, even though the flames are only medium in size, the demon character is ultimately defeated and a jackpot is achieved.
Furthermore, without executing the "reach operation acceptance effect" (without requiring the player to operate any operation unit), a special effect (for example, a rainbow image is displayed in the display area 1600a, a specified light-emitting decorative member is set to a special light-emitting mode, and a specified movable decorative member is operated) may be executed before the Oni character is defeated to notify the player of a jackpot, or only the special effect may be executed without displaying the Oni character being defeated (note that in this case, the decorative pattern fluctuation results in a jackpot as well). If a special effect is executed before the Oni character is defeated to notify the player of a jackpot, the effect will be unexpected and can surprise the player, and if only the special effect is executed without displaying the Oni character being defeated, the probability of the Oni character being defeated itself being displayed decreases, making the display of the Oni character being defeated rare and giving it a premium feel.
On the other hand, if the reach background image F is displayed and the result of the special lottery is a loss, the display of the martial artist character, the martial artist character's comment image, the flame image, and the demon character may be ended (and the character's win or loss, etc., may not be displayed) at the same timing as the start of the reach background image F. In this case, the display of the demon character enduring the flames, the "reach operation acceptance effect," and the "confirmation precursor effect" executed before the "reach operation acceptance effect" are not executed.
According to such an embodiment, after the reach background image F is displayed in the "reach background change effect," a circular operation unit imitation image that resembles a character or the attack button 3710 is not displayed in front of the reach background image F, and the visible area of the reach background image F increases, which can further enhance the satisfaction of being able to see the reach background image F. Note that, in order not to reduce the visible area of the reach background image F, it is preferable not to execute display effects that indicate the hold change or expectation level of the current hold image until the variable display has ended.
Furthermore, if the result of the special lottery is a miss, the decorative symbols are displayed stationary in a reach-miss mode from timing t60 to timing t61, and a new display of the decorative symbols begins to change from timing t61, but the display of the reach-time background image F may be continued at least until this change display (the change display next to the change in which the "reach battle effect" was executed) is being executed. According to such an embodiment, the reach-time background image F can be viewed for a longer period of time, which can further increase the sense of satisfaction that comes from being able to view the reach-time background image F.

Referring to Figures 425 and 426, an example is shown in which a background change precursor image is displayed (see Figure 426(b)) while a reach-time background image C is being displayed (see Figure 426(a)), and then one of reach-time background images D to F is displayed.
When the reach-time background image C is displayed and the background change precursor image is displayed, the time for which the reach-time background image C is displayed may be longer than the time for which the background change precursor image is displayed.
Alternatively, the time for displaying the reach-time background image C may be shorter than the time for displaying the background change precursor image.
Alternatively, the time for displaying the reach-time background image C may be set to be the same as the time for displaying the background change precursor image.
In addition, when the ``reach background change effect'' begins, the background image C during reach will be completely hidden by the background change precursor image and will not be displayed, as shown in Figure 427 (h).

The time for displaying the changed ready-to-win background image (one of ready-to-win background images D to F) may be longer than the time for displaying the background change precursor image.
Furthermore, the time for which the changed ready-to-win background image (any of ready-to-win background images D to F) is displayed may be shorter than the time for which the background change precursor image is displayed.
Furthermore, the time for which the changed reach-time background image (one of reach-time background images D to F) is displayed and the time for which the background change precursor image is displayed may be the same.

An embodiment of the "In-Reach Battle Presentation" has been described with reference to the time charts shown in Figures 414 and 415 and the display examples shown in Figures 416 to 421. The "In-Reach Battle Presentation" which can be executed before the execution of the "In-Reach Battle Presentation" will now be described with reference to the time chart shown in Figure 428 and the display examples shown in Figures 429 and 430.

428(a) and 428(b) are time charts modified from Fig. 414(a) and Fig. 414(b), respectively. These time charts show the presentation mode of the "reach notice presentation due to hold." In the "reach notice presentation due to hold," as in the "pre-reach battle presentation," whether or not a reach presentation will be executed is indicated depending on the presentation content.
The manner in which the displayed background image and decorative patterns change is basically the same as the presentation shown in Figures 414, 415, and 416 to 421, so the following explanation will focus on the display manner of the current reserved image and martial artist character.
In this embodiment, the color of the current pending image is white, but this is only done in order to improve the visibility of the drawing. As with other embodiments, this effect may also be executed when the current pending image is a color such as green, which has a higher expectation than when it is white.

At timing t0, the display of the decorative patterns on the left, center, and right begins to change at high speed. Figure 429(a) shows the display state when the display of the decorative patterns is in a state of high speed change (the period from timing t0 to timing t10). In addition, a white current pending image is displayed as the current pending image.

At timing t10, the "reserve reach notice effect" begins. Specifically, at timing t10, a martial artist character and a comment image of the martial artist character are displayed, and during the period from timing t10 to timing t12, the current reserve image gradually becomes larger and moves toward the upper left. The comment image displays the words "Reserve change chance!" Figure 429(b) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t12, the enlargement and movement of the current reserved image ends. The diameter of the current reserved image is three times its original size. Also, at timing t12, the text in the comment image of the martial artist character changes to "The reserved change will develop into a reach." These displays continue until timing t13. Figure 429(c) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t13, the enlarged current pending image displays the name of the reach, "Demon Battle Reach," and the letters "★★★☆☆," which represent the expected probability of the Oni Battle Reach, in two rows, one above the other. These letters are displayed semi-transparently in front of the white background of the current pending image. In addition, the letters in the comment image of the martial artist character change to "Haaa!", expressing their enthusiasm. These displays continue until timing t18. Figure 429(d) shows the display state at this time.
The presentation content of the presentation patterns shown in the time charts of Figures 428(a) and 428(b) is the same up to this point, but from timing t18 onwards, either a presentation pattern in which the reach name is not displayed, or a presentation pattern in which the reach name changes from a translucent state to an opaque state, confirming the execution of the ``Demon Battle Reach Presentation'' is executed.
In this way, by displaying the name of the reach that may be executed and the expected probability of that reach within the enlarged current hold image as a "non-confirmed precursor effect," the player can feel the excitement of wondering whether a hold change will occur and whether the reach effect indicated by the hold change will be executed.

First, referring to Figures 428(a) and 429(e) to 429(h), we will explain the presentation style when no hold change occurs.
At timing t18, the display of the words "Demon Battle Reach" and the words "★★★☆☆" that represented the probability of the Oni Battle Reach ends. Also, the words in the dialogue image of the martial artist character change to "Regret...". This display continues until timing t20. Figure 429(e) shows the display state from timing t18 to timing t20.
During the period from timing t20 to timing t22, the current reserved image gradually shrinks and moves toward the current reserved image display area in the lower right. Figure 429 (f) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t22, the size of the current reserved image returns to its original size, and the display position of the current reserved image also returns to the current reserved image display area. In addition, the display of the martial artist character and the martial artist character's dialogue image ends, and the execution of the "reach notice effect by reserved" ends. The display state at this time is the same as the display state of FIG. 429(a).
At timing t28.5, the left decorative symbol temporarily stops, at timing t29, the right decorative symbol temporarily stops, at timing t29.5, the center decorative symbol temporarily stops, and at timing t30, the left, center, and right decorative symbols that were temporarily stopped are displayed as still symbols. The display of the still decorative symbols is carried out for one second from timing t30 to timing t31.
The currently reserved image is gradually erased from the bottom right corner during the period from timing t30 to timing t31. Figure 429(h) shows the display state at timing t30.5 (here, the decorative symbols are displayed as a combination of "5", "3", and "8").
From timing t31, a new variable display of the decorative pattern begins, and the first reserved image that had been displayed in the first reserved image display area moves to the current reserved image display area and is displayed as the current reserved image corresponding to the new variable display.

Next, referring to Figures 428(b) and 430, we will explain the presentation style when a hold change occurs.
At timing t18, the words "Demon Battle Reach" and the words "★★★☆☆" that had been displayed semi-transparently in the current pending image until then become opaque, increasing the visibility of these words. Also, the words in the comment image of the martial artist character change to "Reach Confirmed!" At this timing, it is confirmed that the reach effect will be executed. This display continues until timing t20. Figure 430(a) shows the display state at this time.
During the period from timing t20 to timing t22, the current reserved image gradually shrinks and moves toward the current reserved image display area in the lower right. Only the character "oni" (demon) remains in the current reserved image, and the display of other characters ends at timing t20. Also, at timing t20, the characters in the comment image of the martial artist character change to "I'll show you the results of my training!" Figure 430(b) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t22, the size of the current reserved image returns to its original size, and the display position of the current reserved image also returns to the current reserved image display area. The character "oni" continues to be displayed in the current reserved image.
At timing t28.5, the left decorative symbol temporarily stops at the symbol "4", and at timing t29, the right decorative symbol temporarily stops at the symbol "4", resulting in a ready-to-win state with the symbol "4". Figure 430(c) shows the display state in which the ready-to-win state has been reached.
At timing t30, the display of the martial artist character and the comment image of the martial artist character ends, and the "pre-reach battle effect" ends, and from timing t30, the above-mentioned "demon battle reach effect" begins. The display of "demon" in the current reserved image also ends at timing t30. Figure 430(d) shows the state in which the reach title is displayed at timing t30.

428, 429, and 430, after a "non-confirmed precursor effect" is executed in which the current hold image becomes larger and the reach effect name and the expectation level of that reach effect are displayed within the current hold image (timing t13 to timing t18), the current hold image may or may not change to a display mode indicating that a reach effect will be executed. Then, when the display mode changes to a display mode indicating that a reach effect will be executed, the reach effect is then executed.
According to such an embodiment, the name of the reach effect is displayed within the current pending image, allowing the player to feel a sense of excitement as to whether or not the current pending image will change to a display mode indicating that the reach effect will be executed.

Although the "Demon Battle Reach Effect" has been given as an example of a reach effect that is predicted by the "Reach Prediction Effect by Hold," other reach effects such as the "Training Reach Effect,""Help Reach Effect," and "Monster Reach Effect" may be selected as targets for the reach effect predicted by the "Reach Prediction Effect by Hold" based on the results of a special lottery.
When the display mode of the current reserved image changes, for the "Training Reach Performance", the character "Shu" is displayed in the current reserved image. Also, for the "Help Reach Performance", the character "Help" is displayed. Also, for the "Monster Reach Performance", the character "Ka" is displayed.
As described above, the degree of expectation for these reach effects differs. That is, the degree of expectation differs depending on the type of character added to the current reserved image due to the reserved change.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the current hold image changes due to a "hold reach notice effect," the "hold reach notice effect" may also be used as an effect to change the standby hold image (first standby hold image to fourth standby hold image). In this case, the part referred to as the current hold image in the example can be read as the standby hold image to form an embodiment.

After the "hold reach preview" ends, the decorative pattern changes rapidly and the current hold image is visible after the change. It is also possible to view the current hold image after the change when the decorative pattern has formed a reach state. According to this embodiment, the current hold image can be made to seem like it is about to change, increasing interest.

When the display mode of the current reserved image changes due to the "reach notice effect due to reservation," the expectation of a big win is set higher than when the display mode of the current reserved image does not change. In other words, when the display mode of the current reserved image changes, it is determined that a predetermined reach effect will be executed, but when the display mode of the current reserved image does not change, it is not guaranteed that the reach effect will be executed.
In addition, if the current reserved image does not change due to the "reach notice effect due to reservation", it may be set to always result in a miss. Alternatively, it may be set to result in a reach state or a jackpot, but the expectation in that case may be lower than when the current reserved image changes. According to such an embodiment, it is possible to make the player think that the current reserved image should change, which can increase interest.

As shown with reference to Figures 429 and 430, the position where the current hold image is displayed after the "hold reach preview effect" is executed is the same as the position where the current hold image was displayed before the "hold reach preview effect" was executed. By using such an embodiment, the display can be made easy to understand, increasing interest.

As shown with reference to Figures 429 and 430, during the execution of the "reach advance notice performance due to hold", the name of the reach performance that can be executed is displayed as a precursor in the current hold image, but the outer shape of the current hold image does not change while the reach performance name is displayed. According to such an embodiment, since the "reach advance notice performance due to hold" is completed only within the current hold image, it does not affect the display content other than the current hold image.
The outer shape of the current reserved image may be changed while the reach effect name is being displayed. In this case, the "reach advance notice effect due to reserved" can be more emphasized.

The current pending image is enlarged and moved when displayed, but the current pending image may be displayed in a dynamic manner. For example, a gradient may be applied to the text "Demon Battle Reach" or "★★★☆☆" or the background area other than the area where the text is displayed, and a gradient moving effect may be displayed. Alternatively, the color, size, and position of these text may be changed. Alternatively, the size of the current pending image may be periodically enlarged and reduced.
If the image is displayed statically, it may be difficult to distinguish it from the background image, and the effect may not stand out, but by adopting a dynamic display, the currently reserved image can be emphasized.
The dynamic display of the current reserved image (dynamic display) may be a dynamic display with a predetermined time as one cycle. In this case, the image may be displayed at least one cycle or more before starting to move back to its original position, or the image may be displayed at least one cycle or more before starting to move back to its original position.
During movement, a dynamic display with a predetermined time as one cycle may be continuously performed, or a static display may be performed during movement. When a dynamic display with a predetermined time as one cycle is performed during movement, the predetermined time may be shorter than the movement time (the display is not performed more than one cycle during movement) or longer (the display is performed more than one cycle during movement).

In the embodiment shown, the size (diameter) of the currently held image is tripled during the period from timing t10 to timing t12, but a magnification other than 3x may also be used. For example, any magnification between approximately 2x and 10x may be used. Note that if the magnification exceeds a certain value, part of the currently held image will extend outside the display area 1600a.

While the embodiment in which the current reserved image gradually enlarges and moves toward the upper left has been shown, the current reserved image may also be gradually enlarged without moving. In this case, it is preferable to gradually increase the diameter of the circular current reserved image without changing the center. Note that if the size of the current reserved image is increased several times, the bottom of the current reserved image will extend outside the display area 1600a, and an image with the bottom of a circle cut off will be displayed as the current reserved image.
In addition, when the current pending image is enlarged and displayed, it may be displayed overlapping with the standby pending image, in which case the display priority of the current pending image may be set higher than the display priority of the standby pending image so that all or part of the standby pending image is hidden by the current pending image. Alternatively, the display priority of the current pending image may be set lower than the display priority of the standby pending image so that the standby pending image is displayed in front of the current pending image so that part of the current pending image is hidden.
Figure 431 (a) shows the display state (timing t13) in a modified example in which the current reserved image is enlarged to twice its size without changing its position. In this example, the lower half of the current reserved image is cut off.
Figure 431 (b) shows the display state (timing t13) of a modified example in which the current pending image is enlarged to three times its original size without changing its position. In this example, the lower half of the current pending image is cut off. In addition, the display state is such that the first standby pending image is displayed in front of the current pending image.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the comment image of the martial artist character does not overlap with the currently enlarged or currently enlarged current reserved image, it is also possible to have the comment image of the martial artist character overlap with the currently enlarged or currently enlarged current reserved image. In this case, it is preferable to set the display priority of the comment image of the martial artist character higher than the display priority of the currently reserved image, so that the comment image of the martial artist character is displayed in front of the currently reserved image. Alternatively, it is also possible to set the display priority of the comment image of the martial artist character lower than the display priority of the currently reserved image, so that the comment image of the martial artist character is displayed behind the currently reserved image.
431(c) shows a display state (timing t13) in a modified example in which the current reserved image is moved only vertically and enlarged to three times its original size. In this example, a comment image of the martial artist character is displayed in front of the current reserved image.

In an embodiment shown, text is displayed semi-transparently within the current pending image at timing t13, but from timing t12 to timing t13, the current pending image may be enlarged so that the reach name "Oni Battle Reach" and the letters "★★★☆☆" representing the expectation level of the Oni Battle Reach gradually become visible (visibility gradually increases) within the enlarged image.

An embodiment has been shown in which the name of a reach that may be executed and the expected probability of that reach are displayed within the current hold image (see Figure 429 (d)), but it is also possible to have part of the string of characters indicating the name of a reach that may be executed and the expected probability of that reach protrude outside the current hold image. Alternatively, this string may be displayed only within the current hold image at first, and then part of this string may protrude outside the current hold image. Furthermore, the size of this string may be changed so that the string protrudes outside the current hold image, or the position of this string may be moved so that the string protrudes outside the current hold image.

In the embodiment shown, text is displayed in a semi-transparent state within the current pending image during the period from timing t13 to timing t18. However, the transparency may be varied rather than being constant. For example, high and low transparency may alternate. Furthermore, at this time, a predetermined dynamic display may be performed, such as the martial artist character punching or kicking the current pending image, or a specific line may be displayed within the martial artist character's comment image. Furthermore, the type of dynamic display or line may indicate the likelihood of the current pending image changing.
In addition, the characters in the current pending image may be displayed with two or more different degrees of transparency, and the probability of the pending image changing may vary depending on the degree of transparency. For example, the probability of the pending image changing may be higher when the transparency is low than when the transparency is high.

Referring to Figures 428 to 430, an embodiment has been shown in which the name of a reach effect that may be executed is displayed after the current pending image moves, but it is also possible to display the name of a reach effect that may be executed while the current pending image is moving (for example, at timing t10.5). By using such an embodiment, the execution time of the effect can be shortened, thereby improving operation and reducing capacity.

An embodiment of the "Reach Battle Effect" has been described with reference to the time charts shown in Figures 414 and 415 and the display examples shown in Figures 416 to 421. The "Reach Symbol Promotion Effect," which is an effect that can be executed before the "Reach Battle Effect" is executed, will now be described with reference to the time charts shown in Figures 432 and 433 and the display examples shown in Figures 434 to 439.

Figures 432 and 433 are time charts that are modifications of the time chart shown in Figure 414. These time charts show the presentation modes (four presentation patterns) of the "reach symbol promotion presentation". In the "reach symbol promotion presentation", the presentation content indicates to the player whether or not a reach presentation will be executed, and the type of decorative symbol that will form the reach state when the reach presentation is executed. In addition, while the "reach symbol promotion presentation" is being executed, the player is required to repeatedly press the operation unit (attack button 3710). Whether or not to execute the "reach symbol promotion presentation" and the execution mode of the "reach symbol promotion presentation" are determined by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the results of a special lottery.

Below, the "Reach pattern promotion effect" will be explained with reference to the time charts shown in Figures 432 and 433 and the display examples shown in Figures 434 to 439.
Figures 432(a), 432(b), 433(a), and 433(b) are time charts showing presentation patterns 1 to 4.
Presentation pattern 1 shown in Figure 432 (a) is a presentation pattern in which the "Reach symbol promotion presentation" is executed but the player cannot win a reward.
The presentation pattern 2 shown in Figure 432 (b) is a presentation pattern in which a "reach pattern promotion presentation" is executed, and a reward can be obtained by executing a reach presentation with an even numbered pattern (for example, a "4" pattern).
The presentation pattern 3 shown in Figure 433 (a) is a presentation pattern in which a "reach pattern promotion presentation" is executed and a reward of the execution of a reach presentation with a "3" symbol can be obtained.
The presentation pattern 4 shown in Figure 433 (b) is a presentation pattern in which a "reach pattern promotion presentation" is executed and a reward of the execution of a reach presentation with a "7" symbol can be obtained.

Below, specific execution modes of the "reach symbol promotion effect" will be explained using the examples of effect patterns 1 to 4. Note that each effect pattern has common parts in the variable display and various effect modes from the start timing of the variable display to the predetermined timing, and the common parts may be explained in common for multiple effect patterns.
In addition, since the manner in which the displayed background image and decorative patterns change is basically the same as the presentation modes shown in Figures 414, 415, and 416 to 421, the explanation of similar presentation modes will be simplified and the explanation will focus on the display mode of the meter image and the player's operation mode, which are characteristic of this presentation.

After the decorative pattern changes begin to be displayed at timing t0, the "reach pattern promotion effect" begins at timing t5, and a horizontal meter window image and six meter images are displayed. Figure 434(a) shows the display state immediately after the decorative pattern changes begin to be displayed. Figure 434(b) shows the display state immediately after the "reach pattern promotion effect" begins to be displayed, and the meter window image and six meter images are displayed.

Here, we will explain the meter images. There are six meter images, which are displayed horizontally within the meter window image. The names of the individual meter images, from left to right, are the first meter image, second meter image, third meter image, fourth meter image, fifth meter image, and sixth meter image. The first to sixth meter images are all the same height. The first to fifth meter images are vertically long rectangular images. That is, the first to fifth meter images are all the same size and shape. On the other hand, the sixth meter image is a horizontally long rectangular image and has a larger area than the first to fifth meter images. The insides of the first to sixth meter images are basically white, but depending on the repeated tapping of the operating unit, the first and second meter images may change to blue, the third and fourth meter images may change to green, and the fifth and sixth meter images may change to red. The sixth meter image also includes a text window, and the text within the text window indicates the reward to be awarded to the player.
In the example shown in FIG. 434(b), the sixth meter image includes a text window containing the words "Reach acquired?".

At timing t6, the valid operation period begins. At the same time as the start of the valid operation period, an operation content instruction image, an operation unit simulation image, and a remaining time gauge image are displayed. The valid operation period lasts for four seconds from timing t6 to timing t10.
The operation instruction image includes the text "Press the button repeatedly to make the meter reach MAX!" The operation section simulation image is a circular image that mimics the shape of the attack button 3710. The operation section simulation image includes the text "Press repeatedly." The remaining time gauge image is a horizontally long rectangle that is entirely black at the start of the valid operation period, but turns white from the left side as the valid operation period progresses, and turns entirely white at the end of the valid operation period.
FIG. 434(c) shows the display state immediately after these images are displayed at timing t6.

When the player presses the attack button 3710 a predetermined number of times (specifically, twice) during the valid operation period, the first meter image changes from white to blue.
When the player further presses the attack button 3710 a predetermined number of times (specifically, twice), the second meter image changes from white to blue.
When the player further presses the attack button 3710 a predetermined number of times (specifically, twice), the third meter image changes from white to green.
When the player further presses the attack button 3710 a predetermined number of times (specifically, twice), the fourth meter image changes from white to green.
When the player further presses the attack button 3710 a predetermined number of times (specifically, twice), the fifth meter image changes from white to red.
Whether or not to change the color of the sixth meter image is determined in advance based on the results of a special lottery. If it has been determined that the color of the sixth meter image should be changed, the sixth meter image will change from white to red when the player presses the attack button 3710 a predetermined number of times (specifically, twice) (i.e., when the player presses it a total of 12 times). On the other hand, if it has been determined that the color of the sixth meter image should not be changed, the sixth meter image will remain white and will not change color even if the player presses the attack button 3710 a predetermined number of times (specifically, twice).

However, it is preferable that the display (such as an effect display) and sound effects that occur when the attack button 3710 is pressed be executed even when the color of the meter image does not change (for example, when the button is pressed for the first time or when the button is pressed more than 12 times without any change).
The number of operations required to change the color of each meter image may vary depending on the effect pattern described below, or multiple patterns with different numbers of operations may be provided within one effect pattern (for example, the sixth meter image may change after 12 operations, or the sixth meter image may change after 18 operations). The same applies to the second and third meter effects described below.

Furthermore, if it has been decided to change the color of the sixth meter image, even if the attack button 3710 is not operated a total of 12 times during the valid operation period, the color of all meters whose color has not changed will change at the same time as the end of the valid operation period.
In this way, the meter images change color in order from the left as the attack button 3710 is pressed repeatedly, and an effect is executed in which the sixth meter image finally changes color (either turns red or remains white).
When the color of the sixth meter image changes, the player can obtain the reward (here, the right to execute a reach effect) displayed in the character window included in the sixth meter image.

Figure 434(d) shows the display state when the attack button 3710 has been operated four or five times by timing t7. As shown in the figure, the first meter image and the second meter image have both changed from white to blue.
Figure 434(e) shows the display state when the attack button 3710 has been operated at least 10 times by timing t8. As shown in the figure, the first and second meter images have changed from white to blue, the third and fourth meter images have changed from white to green, and the fifth meter image has changed from white to red.
The presentation patterns up to this point are common to presentation patterns 1 to 4.

In effect pattern 1, it is predetermined that the color of the sixth meter image will not change, and the color of the sixth meter image will not change even if the player presses the attack button 3710 a total of 12 times or more. Figure 435 (a) shows the display state immediately before the timing at which the valid operation period ends (timing t10).
At time t10, the operation content instruction image, operation unit simulation image, and remaining time gauge image are erased. Also, from time t10 to time t12, the meter images that have changed color among the first to fifth meter images are changed back to their original color, white, in order from right to left. Figure 435(b) shows the state in which the third and fourth meter images have returned to white.
At timing t12, the display of the meter window image and each meter image ends, and the "reach symbol promotion effect" ends.
At timing t18.5, the left decorative symbol temporarily stops, at timing t19, the right decorative symbol temporarily stops, at timing t19.5, the center decorative symbol temporarily stops, and at timing t20, the left, center, and right decorative symbols that were temporarily stopped are displayed as still symbols. The display of the still decorative symbols is carried out for one second from timing t20 to timing t21.
Fig. 435(c) shows a state in which the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and the central decorative symbol is rapidly fluctuating. Fig. 435(d) shows a state in which the left, center, and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.

Next, the presentation modes when it has been determined that the color of the sixth meter image is to be changed (presentation patterns 2 to 4) will be described.
Here, the explanation will be given assuming that the attack button 3710 is operated for the twelfth time at timing t9.
At timing t9, the attack button 3710 is operated for the 12th time, and the sixth meter image changes from white to red. Furthermore, the text "Reach acquired?" in the text window changes to "Reach acquired!", indicating to the player that a reach effect will be executed. Figure 435(e) shows the display state at this time.
The valid operation period ends at timing t10. At the same time as the valid operation period ends, the operation content instruction image, operation unit simulation image, and remaining time gauge image are erased. The meter window image and meter image continue to be displayed until timing t11. Figure 435 (f) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t11, the display of the meter window image and each meter image ends. The character window included in the sixth meter image (including the characters "Reach Acquired!") is displayed near the center of the display area. In addition, the characters "GET &NEXT!" and a radial polygon are displayed behind the character window. Figure 435(g) shows the display state at this time. This display state continues until timing t15.

At timing t15, the second display of the meter image etc. starts. Figure 436 (a) shows the display state at this time. Compared to the first display of the meter image etc., the difference is that the reward content in the character window included in the sixth meter image is "'3' Reach Acquired?" and that a character window with the text "Reach Acquired!" is displayed in front of the first and second meter images.
At timing t16, the valid operation period begins. At the same time as the start of the valid operation period, an operation content instruction image, an operation section simulation image, and a remaining time gauge image are displayed. The valid operation period lasts for four seconds, from timing t16 to timing t20. Figure 436(b) shows the display state immediately after these images are displayed at timing t16.
During this valid operation period, as in the first valid operation period, the color of the meter image changes in sequence each time the player presses the attack button 3710 a predetermined number of times (specifically, twice). Whether or not to change the color of the sixth meter image is determined in advance based on the results of a special lottery.
Figure 436 (c) shows the display state in which the player operates the attack button 3710 four times at timing t17, one second after the start of the valid operation period, and the color of the first meter image and the second meter image changes from white to blue.
Figure 436 (d) shows the display state in which, at timing t18, two seconds after the start of the valid operation period, the player operates the attack button 3710 ten times, causing the colors of the third and fourth meter images to change from white to green, and the color of the fifth meter image to change from white to red.

At this point, the presentation mode branches into three: presentation pattern 2 (Fig. 436(e) to 436(h)), presentation pattern 3 (Fig. 437(a) to 437(e)), and presentation pattern 4 (Fig. 438(a) to 438(h), Fig. 439(a) to 439(d)). Each will be explained in order below.

First, the effect pattern 2 will be described with reference to the time chart of Figure 432(b). The effect pattern 2 is an effect pattern in which the reward for "3" reach cannot be obtained.
At timing t20, the valid operation period ends, but the color of the sixth meter image does not change regardless of the number of consecutive hits. Figure 436(e) shows the display state at this time.
From timing t20 to timing t22, the color of each meter image is gradually changed back to white, and the display of each meter image ends at timing t22. Figure 436(f) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t22, a text window with the words "Reach acquired!" is enlarged and displayed. This display state continues until timing t24. At timing t24, the "Reach symbol promotion effect" ends. Figure 436 (g) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t28.5, the left decorative symbol temporarily stops, and at timing t29, the right decorative symbol temporarily stops, establishing a ready-to-win state. Here, a ready-to-win state is established with the "4" symbol. Figure 436(h) shows a state in which the left and right decorative symbols temporarily stop at the number "4" symbol, and the central decorative symbol is fluctuating at high speed.

In the situation shown in Figure 436(a) in presentation pattern 2, it is confirmed that a reach state will occur as a reward, so the effective operation period may occur when the decorative symbols on the left and right have temporarily stopped to create a reach state, and the meter rapid-fire presentation may be executed (the same applies to presentation patterns 3 and 4, which will be described later). It will also be explained later that the expected probability of a win differs depending on the type of symbol that creates the reach state.

Next, effect pattern 3 will be described with reference to the time chart in Figure 433(a). Effect pattern 3 is an effect pattern in which the reward for "3" reach can be obtained, but the reward for "7" reach cannot be obtained thereafter.
When the attack button 3710 is operated for the 12th time (in this example, the 12th operation is performed at timing t19), the sixth meter image changes from white to red. Also, the text in the text window changes from "3" reach obtained? to "3" reach obtained!", indicating to the player that a reach effect using the "3" symbol will be executed. Figure 437(a) shows the display state at this time.
The valid operation period ends at timing t20. At the same time as the valid operation period ends, the operation content instruction image, operation unit simulation image, and remaining time gauge image are erased. The meter window image and meter image continue to be displayed until timing t21. Figure 437 (b) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t21, the display of the meter window image, meter image, and text window "Reach acquired!" ends. The text window "Reach acquired for "3"!" is displayed near the center of the display area. Also, the text "GET!" and a radial polygon are displayed behind the text window "Reach acquired for "3"!" Figure 437(c) shows the display state at this time. This display state continues until timing t23.
At timing t23, a text window saying "3 Reach Acquired!" is enlarged and displayed. This display state continues until timing t25. At timing t25, the "reach symbol promotion effect" ends. Figure 437(d) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t28.5, the left decorative symbol temporarily stops, and at timing t29, the right decorative symbol temporarily stops, establishing a reach state. Here, since the "3" reach has been obtained as a reward, a reach state is formed with the "3" symbol. Figure 437(e) shows a state in which the left and right decorative symbols temporarily stop at the number "3" symbol, and the central decorative symbol is fluctuating at high speed.
It should be noted that a reach state may be formed by a "7" symbol, which has a higher expected winning probability than a "3." However, since this is a presentation pattern in which the reward for a "7" reach cannot be obtained, it is advisable to make the probability of forming a reach state with a "3" higher than the probability of forming a reach state with a "7" in this presentation pattern.

Next, the following describes effect pattern 4 with reference to the time chart in Figure 433(b). Effect pattern 4 is an effect pattern in which a reward for "7" reach can be obtained after a reward for "3" reach has been obtained.
When the attack button 3710 is operated for the 12th time (in this example, the 12th operation is performed at timing t19), the sixth meter image changes from white to red. Also, the text in the text window changes from "3" reach obtained? to "3" reach obtained!", indicating to the player that a reach effect using the "3" symbol will be executed. Figure 438(a) shows the display state at this time.
The valid operation period ends at timing t20. At the same time as the expiration of the valid operation period, the operation content instruction image, operation unit simulation image, and remaining time gauge image are erased. The meter window image and meter image continue to be displayed until timing t21. Figure 438 (b) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t21, the display of the meter window image, meter image, and text window "Reach acquired!" ends. The text window "Reach acquired for "3!" is displayed near the center of the display area. In addition, the text "GET &NEXT!" and a radial polygon are displayed behind the text window "Reach acquired for "3!". Figure 438(c) shows the display state at this time. This display state continues until timing t25.

At timing t25, the third display of the meter image, etc., begins. Figure 438 (d) shows the display state at this time. Compared to the second display of the meter image, etc., what is different is that the reward content in the text window of the sixth meter image is "Get a '7'reach?" and that a text window saying "Get a '3'reach!" is displayed in front of the first and second meter images.
At timing t26, the valid operation period begins. At the same time as the start of the valid operation period, an operation content instruction image, an operation unit simulation image, and a remaining time gauge image are displayed. The valid operation period lasts for four seconds, from timing t26 to timing t30. Figure 438(e) shows the display state immediately after these images are displayed at timing t26.
During this valid operation period, as in the first valid operation period, the color of the meter image changes sequentially each time the player presses the attack button 3710 a predetermined number of times (specifically, twice). Also, unlike the other effect patterns, the color of the sixth meter image always changes in response to the player's operation (i.e., the color of the sixth meter image always changes from white to red when the attack button 3710 is pressed a total of 12 times).
Figure 438 (f) shows the display state in which the player operates the attack button 3710 four times at timing t27, one second after the start of the valid operation period, and the color of the first meter image and the second meter image changes from white to blue.
Figure 438 (g) shows the display state in which, at timing t28, two seconds after the start of the valid operation period, the player operates the attack button 3710 ten times, causing the colors of the third and fourth meter images to change from white to green, and the color of the fifth meter image to change from white to red.
Based on the twelfth operation of the attack button 3710 (in this example, the twelfth operation was performed at timing t29), the sixth meter image changes from white to red. Also, the text in the text window changes from "'7' Reach Obtained?" to "'7' Reach Obtained!", indicating to the player that a Reach effect using the "7" symbol will be executed. Figure 438(h) shows the display state at this time.

The valid operation period ends at timing t30. At the same time as the valid operation period ends, the operation content instruction image, operation unit simulation image, and remaining time gauge image are erased. The meter window image and meter image continue to be displayed until timing t21. Figure 439 (a) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t31, the display of the meter window image, meter image, and text window "'3' Reach Acquired!" ends. The text window "'7' Reach Acquired!" is displayed near the center of the display area. In addition, the text "GET!" and a radial polygon are displayed behind the text window "'7' Reach Acquired!" Figure 439(b) shows the display state at this time. This display state continues until timing t33.
At timing t33, the text "'7' Reach Obtained!" is enlarged and displayed. This display state continues until timing t35. At timing t35, the "reach symbol promotion effect" ends. Figure 439 (c) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t38.5, the left decorative symbol temporarily stops, and at timing t39, the right decorative symbol temporarily stops, establishing a ready-to-win state. Here, a ready-to-win state is established with the "7" symbol. Figure 439(d) shows a state in which the left and right decorative symbols temporarily stop at the number "7" symbol, and the central decorative symbol is fluctuating at high speed.

In the embodiment shown, in presentation pattern 2, a reach state occurs with a "4" symbol, in presentation pattern 3, a reach state occurs with a "3" symbol, and in presentation pattern 4, a reach state occurs with a "7" symbol, but it is preferable that the expectation level for the symbols that form the reach state increases in the order of "4,""3," and "7." For example, it is preferable that the expectation level for a reach state with a "4" symbol be 10%, the expectation level for a reach state with a "3" symbol be 30%, and the expectation level for a reach state with a "7" symbol be 60%.
By doing this, the reward level increases (expectations for winning increase), so the player can continue to press the attack button 3710 repeatedly while maintaining a sense of excitement.

In the case of the effect pattern 2, the reach state may be formed not only by the "4" symbol but also by other even number symbols such as "2", "6" and "8". In this case, the expected probability may be set to 10%, the same as the "4" symbol.
Similarly, in the case of the effect pattern 3, the reach state may be formed not only by the "3" symbol but also by other odd number symbols other than "7", such as "1", "5", and "9". In this case, it is preferable to display "'1' reach obtained?" in the text window as a reach candidate. In addition, it is preferable to set the expectation rate in this case to 30%, the same as the "3" symbol.
Therefore, in these cases, the degree of expectation should be such that the degree of expectation increases in the order of reach effects with the symbols "2", "4", "6", and "8", reach effects with the symbols "1", "3", "5", and "9", and reach effects with the symbol "7".
In this case, the display of the reward details may be changed to something like "reach is won with an even number" or "reach is won with an odd number excluding 7." Also, depending on the situation, the expected probability of winning, for example, a "7" symbol reach may be varied. For example, the expected probability of winning for a "7" symbol reach when a reach is formed with a "3" symbol and the symbols "1,""5," and "9" and the expected probability of winning is the same is different from the expected probability of winning for a "7" symbol reach when a reach is formed with a "3" symbol and the symbols "1,""5," and "9" and the expected probability of winning is different.

In effect pattern 2 and effect pattern 3, the reach effect starts from timing t30. In effect pattern 4, the reach effect starts from timing t40.
At this time, the same reach effect may be executed. For example, the "Demon Battle Reach effect" shown in FIG. 415 may be executed.
Alternatively, different reach effects may be executed. For example, other reach effects such as a "demon battle reach effect," a "training reach effect," a "help reach effect," or a "monster reach effect" may be executed.
In either case, the player will watch the progress of the presentation while imagining whether or not the result will be a jackpot based on the expectation indicated by the type of pattern (number) that forms the reach state and the expectation indicated by the type of reach presentation.

If it is decided that the color of the sixth meter image will be changed to red, and if the player operates the attack button 3710 12 times within the valid operation period, the color of the sixth meter image will be changed to red. On the other hand, if the player operates the attack button 3710 less than 12 times within the valid operation period, the color of all meter images whose color has not changed should be changed to the color after the change of each meter at the same time as the end of the valid operation period.
On the other hand, even if it is decided that the color of the sixth meter image will be changed to red, if the player operates the attack button 3710 less than 12 times during the valid operation period, the meter image etc. may be erased at the same time as the end of the valid operation period, making it impossible for the player to obtain the reward displayed in the character window.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the color of each meter image changes by repeatedly pressing the attack button 3710, other modes of operation may also be employed.
For example, when the attack button 3710 is pressed and held (for example, when pressed continuously for 0.2 seconds), the meter images may change one by one. In this case, when the attack button 3710 is pressed and held for one second, the display mode is the same as when the button is pressed five times in one second.
It should be noted that both rapid tapping and long presses may be accepted, or only long presses may be accepted.
Alternatively, a single operation during the valid operation period may be sufficient to change the color of a predetermined meter image. The extent to which the meter image changes may be determined in advance based on the results of a special lottery.
Alternatively, the color may change to a predetermined meter image at a predetermined timing (for example, two seconds after the meter display starts) after the meter display starts without providing a valid operation period (i.e., regardless of the player's operation). The meter image to which the color changes may be determined in advance based on the results of a special lottery.

In addition, if both rapid presses and long presses are accepted, the display area 1600a may display the text "Press the button repeatedly to set the meter to MAX!" within the operation instruction image to inform the player only that rapid presses are permitted, without indicating that long presses are also permitted.

In this way, in the "reach pattern promotion effect" described with reference to Figures 432 to 439, after executing the "non-determined precursor effect" in which a meter image and a text window showing a reward are displayed, there are cases in which the player obtains a reward and a reach state with a specified pattern occurs, and cases in which the player does not obtain a reward and a reach state with a specified pattern does not occur.
If the player wins a reward, a "special display" is displayed in which the color of the sixth meter image changes and the text in the text window changes.
In addition, after the specific display is displayed, a "related display" related to the display of the specific display is displayed for a predetermined period of time (a text window showing the acquired reward is displayed in the upper left corner of the meter window image for a predetermined period of time).
According to this embodiment, even if the player misses the specific display, the player can know the content of the specific display by visually checking the related display.

In the embodiment shown, when effect pattern 4 is executed, the color of the sixth meter image always changes in response to the occurrence of the third valid operation period, but an effect pattern may be provided in which the color of the sixth meter image does not change even though the third valid operation period occurs. In this case, a reach state with the "7" symbol does not occur, but a reach state with the "3" symbol occurs.

The color inside the first to sixth meter images before the change is not limited to white, as long as it is a color that is not used among the colors inside the first to sixth meter images after the change (in this embodiment, blue, green, and red are used as the colors after the change, so it is a color other than blue, green, and red).
In addition, the color of each meter before the change may be displayed in a different color (for example, the inside color of the first to third meter images may be white, and the inside color of the fourth to sixth meter images may be gray, etc.).

Referring to Figures 432 and 433, an embodiment has been shown in which an operation content instruction image, operation section simulation image, and remaining time gauge image are displayed simultaneously with the start of the valid operation period (timing t6 to timing t10, timing t16 to timing t20, timing t26 to timing t30). However, to indicate that the valid operation period is about to begin, the operation content instruction image, operation section simulation image, and remaining time gauge image may be displayed before the start of the valid operation period. In this case, the display mode of the remaining time gauge image should not change until the start of the valid operation period, and the display mode of the remaining time gauge image should begin to change simultaneously with the start of the valid operation period.

In the embodiment shown, after a specific display is displayed, a "related display" related to the specific display is displayed for a predetermined period of time (a text window showing the acquired reward is displayed in the upper left corner of the meter window image for a predetermined period of time), but the display position of the text window is not limited to within the meter window image and may be outside the meter window.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the related display (contents of the acquired reward) is displayed statically, the related display may also be displayed dynamically. A dynamic display with one cycle per predetermined time (for example, one second) should be displayed, and the related display should be displayed for at least one cycle while it is being displayed. Furthermore, the image displayed in the dynamic display should preferably include a predetermined text image that indicates the content of the acquired reward, etc.

While the related display (contents of the acquired reward) is displayed, other preview effects may be executed to indicate the likelihood of a jackpot. For example, a display of a group of characters passing through display area 1600a may be displayed. It is preferable to set the expectation to be higher when other preview effects are displayed than when they are not. It is also preferable to set the display priority of the character groups lower than the display priority of the related display.

When a reward is acquired, the reward details are displayed in the sixth meter image for a predetermined period of time (for example, the period from timing t9 to timing t11 in performance pattern 2), and at this time the decorative symbols are displayed in a high-speed fluctuating state, but instead of a high-speed fluctuating state, they may be in a low-speed fluctuating state. Alternatively, during this period, the left and right decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped in a ready-to-win state. Alternatively, the left, center, and right decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped in a combination that is not a ready-to-win state. Alternatively, the left, center, and right decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped in a state other than a reach-to-win state or a repeat (a state in which all the symbol types are mixed).
Alternatively, during this period, the left and right decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped in a reach state. Alternatively, the left, center, and right decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped in a reach-miss state. Alternatively, the left and right decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped in a combination that is not a reach. Alternatively, the left, center, and right decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped in a state other than a reach-miss or a double.
According to this embodiment, during the execution of the first "reach symbol promotion effect," the player is in a state where the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped due to a reach miss or the like, and the player is asked whether or not the color of the sixth meter image can be changed. If the color of the sixth meter image cannot be changed, the player is made to recognize that the win will be a miss.
Furthermore, during the execution of the second or third "reach symbol promotion effect," if the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a state where the reach misses or all the symbol types are scattered, etc., and it is unclear whether the color of the sixth meter image can be changed, a contradictory effect will occur in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a state where the reach misses or all the symbol types are scattered, etc., even though a reward has already been acquired and it has been determined that the reach effect will be executed. In this case, it means that a contradictory effect, which has a high expectation, is being executed, and it can give the player a sense of excitement.

A contradictory presentation is a presentation in which an event occurs that contradicts what is suggested (or was suggested) in a situation where a certain event is suggested (or was suggested).
For example, if a reserve change effect is executed and the words "Reserve changes to red!" are displayed, and normally the player would be shown that the reserve image will change to red, an effect in which the reserve image changes to green would be considered a contradictory effect.
Furthermore, in a situation where a reach effect to be executed is selected, reach A, reach B, and reach C are displayed as candidates, reach A is selected, and it is indicated to the player that reach A will be executed as the reach effect, but a performance in which reach B is executed falls under this category of contradictory performance.
In a contradictory presentation, an event different from the suggested event occurs, but the probability of the event different from the suggested event occurring is set higher than the probability of the suggested event occurring. The probability of the event different from the suggested event occurring may be set to 100% (i.e., a jackpot is guaranteed). Alternatively, the probability of the event different from the suggested event occurring may be set significantly lower than the probability of the suggested event occurring. For example, the probability of the suggested event occurring may be set to 99.9%, and the probability of the event different from the suggested event occurring may be set to 0.1%.
According to such an embodiment, players who pay close attention to the effects or who have a long history of playing the gaming machine will feel a sense of incongruity when an event different from the suggested event occurs, and when they realize that an event different from the suggested event has occurred, they will feel a great sense of elation when an unusual event occurs and the expectation of a jackpot is high (or a jackpot is guaranteed). Furthermore, since the effects of the gaming machine are less likely to become outdated, the operating rate can be increased over the long term. Furthermore, since there is no need to develop new effects and they can be realized by combining existing effects, it is possible to develop impactful effects at low cost.

It is preferable to set the expectation of a jackpot higher when the "reach symbol promotion effect" is executed than when the "reach symbol promotion effect" is not executed. Also, even when the "reach symbol promotion effect" is executed, it is preferable to set the expectation of a jackpot higher the more times a reward is won (1 to 3 times). In other words, the expectation is higher when a reward is won twice than once, and the expectation is higher when a reward is won three times than twice.
In addition, the expected rate when the "Reach Pattern Promotion Effect" is not executed may be set to 0%, or may be set to a rate greater than 0% but lower than the rate when only one reward is obtained.
Similarly, the expectation level may be set to 0% when the "Reach Pattern Promotion Effect" is executed but no reward is obtained, or may be set to a level greater than 0% but lower than when only one reward is obtained.

When the color of the sixth meter image changes and a predetermined reward is acquired, a related display indicating the details of the reward is displayed. Furthermore, while there is a period during which the details of the old and new rewards are displayed simultaneously when a new reward is acquired (for example, the period from timing t19 to timing t21 in presentation pattern 4 of Figure 433 (b), and the period from timing t29 to timing t31), when the color of the sixth meter image changes and acquisition of a new reward is confirmed, the display of the related display indicating the details of the old reward may be terminated at the timing when acquisition of the new reward is confirmed. For example, the display of a text window reading "Reach acquired!" may be terminated at timing t19 in presentation pattern 4. Furthermore, the display of a text window reading "Reach acquired for "3"!" may be terminated at timing t29 in presentation pattern 4. By using such a display mode, a display mode that makes it easy to understand the reward details can be realized.

In the embodiment shown, the sixth meter image changes color, and the effect of confirming that a predetermined symbol will be reached is performed up to three times. In this embodiment, the display mode for the first to third times is the same except for the content of the reward, but the display mode for the first to third times may be different. For example, the color of the sixth meter image may change to red for the first time, and the color of the sixth meter image may change to gold for the second and third times.
Alternatively, the color of the background or text in the text window showing the reward details may be different for the first, second, and third times.

If a new operation valid period has begun while a text window (related display) showing the reward details is displayed but no new rewards have been acquired, for example, in presentation pattern 2, where the reward "Reach" is acquired but the reward "Reach for '3'" is not acquired, the display of the text window showing the acquired rewards may be terminated at the time when no new rewards are acquired (in this case, timing t20).

416 and 417, an embodiment in which a martial artist character and an oni character battle before the reach effect has been shown, but other effects that may be executed before the reach effect will be described below. The "reach content selection effect" will be described below with reference to the time charts shown in Figures 440 to 442 and the display examples shown in Figures 443 to 447.
In the "reach content selection effect," images representing reach effects that may be executed are displayed in tile form in the display area 1600a, and the player is shown which reach effect will be executed by repeatedly pressing the button.

Figures 440 to 442 are time charts that are modifications of the time chart shown in Figure 414. These time charts show the presentation modes (four presentation patterns) of the "reach content selection presentation." In the "reach content selection presentation," the player is shown which of the four reach presentations will be executed, depending on the presentation mode. Whether or not the "reach content selection presentation" will be executed and the type of reach presentation selected by the "reach content selection presentation" are determined by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the results of a special lottery.

Below, the "reach content selection presentation" will be explained with reference to the time charts shown in Figures 440 to 442 and the display examples shown in Figures 443 to 447.
Figures 440 to 442 are time charts showing presentation patterns 1 to 4.
440(a) is a time chart showing effect pattern 1. Moreover, effect pattern 1 is an effect pattern in which the "training reach effect" is selected as a result of executing the "reach content selection effect."
Figure 440(b) is a time chart common to effect pattern 2 to effect pattern 4. Effect pattern 2 to effect pattern 4 are effect patterns in which the "training reach effect" is not selected.
441(a) is a time chart showing effect pattern 2. The effect pattern 2 is an effect pattern in which the "Demon Battle Reach Effect" is selected as a result of executing the "Reach Content Selection Effect."
Figure 441 (b) is a time chart common to presentation pattern 3 and presentation pattern 4. Presentation pattern 3 and presentation pattern 4 are presentation patterns in which the "Demon Battle Reach Presentation" is not selected.
442(a) is a time chart showing effect pattern 3. The effect pattern 3 is an effect pattern in which the "help reach effect" is selected as a result of executing the "reach content selection effect."
442(b) is a time chart showing effect pattern 4. In effect pattern 4, the "Help Reach Effect" is not selected as a result of the execution of the "Reach Content Selection Effect", and the "Monster Reach Effect" is selected.
In effect patterns 1 to 3, the selected display area may expand and a predetermined reach effect may be confirmed to be executed in response to a predetermined number of operations (a total of eight times) of the attack button 3710. Note that in effect pattern 4, the selected display area expands and a "monster reach effect" is confirmed to be executed without requiring any operation of the attack button 3710.

Below, specific execution modes of the "reach content selection effect" will be explained using effect patterns 1 to 4 as examples. Note that each effect pattern has common parts in the variable display and various effect modes during the period from the start timing of the variable display to the specified timing, and these common parts may be explained in common for multiple effect patterns.
In addition, the manner in which the displayed background image and decorative patterns change is basically the same as the presentation modes shown in Figures 414, 415, and 416 to 421, so the explanation of similar presentation modes will be simplified and the focus will be on the display mode when selecting a reach presentation, which is a characteristic of this presentation.

As shown in Figures 440(a) and 440(b), the display of the decorative symbols starts to change at timing t0. Figure 443(a) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t5, the "reach content selection effect" starts, and a horizontally long window image is displayed. The words "training reach" are displayed within this window image. Figure 443 (b) shows the display state at this time. Note that a display evoking the reach effect may be provided in addition to or in place of the words in the reach title "training reach." Note that the display evoking the reach effect may be the same as the display displayed when the reach effect is being performed, or may be a display that is not displayed when the reach effect is being performed. The window is displayed at a size that is less than the size of the display area 1600a, so that the normal background is visible, but a display evoking the reach effect may be provided at the same size as the display area 1600a, so that the normal background is difficult to see. If the size of the display reminiscent of the reach effect is the same as the size of the display area 1600a, both the current pending image and the waiting pending image may be made invisible, or the waiting pending image may be made invisible but the current pending image may be visible, or both the current pending image and the waiting pending image may be made visible.

Next, at timing t6, a vertical bar is displayed at the right edge of the window image. From timing t6 to timing t7, the vertical bar moves leftward, stopping at timing t7 in the horizontal center of the window image, dividing the window image into two left and right areas. The words "Shugyo Reach" are displayed in the left area of the window image, and the words "Oni Reach" are displayed in the right area of the window image. Figure 443(c) shows the display state while the vertical bar is in the middle of moving. Figure 443(d) shows the display state after the movement of the vertical bar has completed. In other words, the display area for the originally displayed "Shugyo Reach" gradually becomes smaller, and the display area for the newly displayed reach effect "Oni Reach" gradually becomes larger, until the display areas for "Shugyo Reach" and "Oni Reach" become the same or approximately the same. Note that the gradually decreasing size of the display may mean that the originally displayed image is reduced in size, or it may mean that the originally displayed image is slid without changing its size, with the visible portion moving into the invisible portion.

Next, at timing t8, a horizontal bar is displayed at the top of the window image. From timing t8 to timing t9, the horizontal bar moves downward, and stops at the vertical center of the window image at timing t9, dividing the window image into four areas: bottom left, bottom right, top left, and top right. The words "Training Reach" are displayed in the bottom left area of the window image, the words "Demon Reach" are displayed in the bottom right area of the window image, the words "Help Reach" are displayed in the top left area of the window image, and the words "Monster Reach" are displayed in the top right area of the window image. Figure 443(e) shows the display state when the horizontal bar is in the middle of moving. Figure 443(f) shows the display state when the horizontal bar has completed its movement.

In this way, within each area of the window image that has been divided into four equal parts (or it can be divided into four equal parts, including approximately equal parts), the names of the four reach effects that may be performed, or an indication evocative of the reach effects that will be performed in addition to or in place of the reach title text, are displayed. The display within each area of the window image may be a static display, a dynamic display with a predetermined time as one cycle, or a dynamic display with a non-predetermined time as one cycle. Furthermore, while the areas within the window are clearly divided by bar images, the clear dividing line may be obscured by display effects, etc., or the division may be made by an uneven line rather than a straight division.

At timing t10, a change such as a blinking orange display is made in the lower left area of the window image where the words "Training Reach" are displayed. Note that even when such a change is made, the display that evokes the reach effect that is performed in addition to or in place of the reach title "Training Reach" and the letters of the reach title that were originally displayed is still visible. Note that the blinking orange display is a suggestion that this reach effect may be selected as the target of the reach effect that will be executed. Figure 443 (g) shows the display state at this time.
The valid operation period for the attack button 3710 begins at timing t11. The valid operation period lasts for a maximum of four seconds until timing t15. Simultaneously with or before the start of the valid operation period, an operation section simulative image simulating the attack button 3710 and a remaining time gauge image indicating the remaining time of the valid operation period are displayed. The operation section simulative image includes the word "repeatedly press," instructing the player to repeatedly press the attack button 3710. Furthermore, the remaining time gauge image changes from black to white as the valid operation period elapses. Figure 444(a) shows the display state at timing t11.
When the player operates the attack button 3710, the horizontal bar gradually moves up and the vertical bar gradually moves to the right depending on the number of operations, so that the area displaying the words "Training Reach" gradually becomes larger, while the areas not in the lower left area, including "Demon Reach,""HelpReach," and "Monster Reach," gradually become smaller. Furthermore, if a change such as a flashing orange display has occurred at this time, it may be hidden simultaneously with the start of the valid operation period, or it may be hidden after the attack button 3710 has been operated once, or it may not be hidden at this stage. Figure 444(b) shows the display state when the attack button 3710 has been operated a predetermined number of times (less than eight times) at timing t13, two seconds after the start of the valid operation period.

When it has been decided that a "Training Reach Effect" will be executed (when effect pattern 1 is being executed), the words "Training Reach" are displayed across the entire window image when the attack button 3710 is operated a specific number of times (eight times in this case) during the valid operation period. Furthermore, a number of lightning images, modeled after the shape of lightning, are displayed in the foreground of the window image as an effect display indicating that the reach effect to be executed has been decided. The valid operation period ends when the specific number of operations have been performed, and the aforementioned orange flashing display is at least hidden at the end of the valid operation period.
The time chart in Figure 440(a) shows an example of a presentation in which the eighth operation is performed at timing t14. Figure 444(c) shows the display state in this case from timing t14 to timing t17.
At timing t17, the display of the window image and the lightning image ends, and the "reach content selection effect" ends.
At timing t18.5, the left decorative symbol temporarily stops at the symbol "4", and at timing t19, the right decorative symbol temporarily stops at the symbol "4", resulting in a ready-to-win state with the symbol "4". Figure 444(d) shows the display state in which the ready-to-win state has been reached.
The "training reach effect" begins at timing t20.

If it has not been decided that the "Training Reach" effect will be performed (if effect patterns 2 to 4 are being performed), even if the attack button 3710 is operated a certain number of times (eight times) during the valid operation period, the size of the area displaying the words "Training Reach" will not exceed a certain size (the entire window image will not display anything related to "Training Reach," and only some areas within the window image will display anything related to reaches other than "Training Reach"), and will return to its original size over the course of two seconds from the end of the valid operation period (timing t15). Figure 440(b) shows a time chart for this case. Figure 444(e) shows the display state at this time.
In addition, the aforementioned orange flashing display may be ended at the end of the valid operation period (timing t15), or may be ended at the time when the display returns to its original size (timing t17).

At timing t20, the lower right area of the window image displaying the words "Oni Reach" undergoes a change, such as blinking orange, as was done for the "Shugyo Reach" described above. Figure 444(f) shows the display state at this time.
As shown in Figures 441(a) and 441(b), the valid operation period for the attack button 3710 begins at timing t21. The valid operation period lasts for a maximum of four seconds until timing t25. Also, simultaneously with or before the start of the valid operation period, an operation section simulating image resembling the attack button 3710 and a remaining time gauge image indicating the remaining time of the valid operation period are displayed. The operation section simulating image includes the word "repeated hit," instructing the player to repeatedly hit the attack button 3710. Furthermore, the remaining time gauge image changes from black to white as the valid operation period elapses. Figure 445(a) shows the display state at timing t21.
When the player operates the attack button 3710, the horizontal bar gradually moves up and the vertical bar gradually moves left depending on the number of operations, the area displaying the words "Demon Reach" gradually becomes larger, and the areas not in the lower right area, including "Training Reach,""HelpReach," and "Monster Reach," gradually become smaller. Furthermore, if a change such as a flashing orange display has occurred at this time, it may be hidden simultaneously with the start of the valid operation period, or it may be hidden after the attack button 3710 has been operated once, or it may not be hidden at this stage. Figure 445 (b) shows the display state when the attack button 3710 has been operated a predetermined number of times (less than eight times) at timing t23, two seconds after the start of the valid operation period.

When it has been decided that the "Oni Battle Reach Effect" will be executed (when effect pattern 2 is being executed), the words "Oni Reach" are displayed across the entire window image when the attack button 3710 is operated a specific number of times (eight times in this example) during the valid operation period. Furthermore, a plurality of lightning images, each simulating the shape of a lightning bolt, are displayed in the foreground of the window image as an effect display indicating that the reach effect to be executed has been decided. Note that the valid operation period ends when the specific number of operations have been performed, and the aforementioned orange flashing display is at least hidden at the end of the valid operation period.
The time chart in Figure 441(a) shows an example of a presentation in which the eighth operation is performed at timing t24. Figure 445(c) shows the display state in this case from timing t24 to timing t27.
At timing t27, the display of the window image and the lightning image ends, and the "reach content selection effect" ends.
At timing t28.5, the left decorative symbol temporarily stops at the symbol "4", and at timing t29, the right decorative symbol temporarily stops at the symbol "4", resulting in a ready-to-win state with the symbol "4". Figure 445(d) shows the display state in which the ready-to-win state has been reached.
The "Oni Battle Reach Performance" begins at timing t30.

If it has not been decided that the "Oni Battle Reach Effect" will be executed (if effect pattern 3 or effect pattern 4 is being executed), even if the attack button 3710 is operated a specific number of times (eight times) during the valid operation period, the size of the area displaying the words "Oni Reach" will not exceed a certain size, and will return to its original size (no display related to "Oni Reach" is displayed in the entire area of the window image, and displays related to reaches other than "Oni Reach" are displayed in some areas of the window image) over a period of two seconds from the end of the valid operation period (timing t25). Figure 445(e) shows the display state at this time.
In addition, the aforementioned orange flashing display may be ended at the end of the valid operation period (timing t25), or may be ended at the time when the display returns to its original size (timing t27).

At timing t30, the upper left area of the window image displaying the words "Help Reach" undergoes a change, such as blinking orange, as was done for the "Training Reach" described above. Figure 445(f) shows the display state at this time.
As shown in Figures 442(a) and 442(b), the valid operation period for the attack button 3710 begins at timing t31. The valid operation period lasts for a maximum of four seconds until timing t35. Simultaneously with or before the start of the valid operation period, an operation section simulating an attack button 3710 and a remaining time gauge image indicating the remaining time of the valid operation period are displayed. The operation section simulating image includes the word "repeatedly press," instructing the player to repeatedly press the attack button 3710. Furthermore, the remaining time gauge image changes from black to white as the valid operation period elapses. Figure 446(a) shows the display state at timing t31.
When the player operates the attack button 3710, the horizontal bar gradually moves downward and the vertical bar gradually moves right depending on the number of operations, the area displaying the words "Help Reach" gradually becomes larger, and the areas not in the upper left area, including "Training Reach,""DemonReach," and "Monster Reach," gradually become smaller. Furthermore, if a change such as a flashing orange display has occurred at this time, it may be hidden simultaneously with the start of the valid operation period, or it may be hidden after the attack button 3710 has been operated once, or it may not be hidden at this stage. Figure 446 (b) shows the display state when the attack button 3710 has been operated a predetermined number of times (less than eight times) at timing t23, two seconds after the start of the valid operation period.

When it has been decided that a "Help Reach effect" will be executed (when effect pattern 3 is being executed), the words "Help Reach" are displayed across the entire window image when the attack button 3710 is operated a specific number of times (eight times in this example) during the valid operation period. Furthermore, a plurality of lightning images, each simulating the shape of a lightning bolt, are displayed in the foreground of the window image as an effect display indicating that the reach effect to be executed has been decided. Note that the valid operation period ends when the specific number of operations have been performed, and the aforementioned orange flashing display is at least hidden at the end of the valid operation period.
The time chart in Figure 442(a) shows an example of a presentation in which the eighth operation is performed at timing t34. Figure 446(c) shows the display state in this case from timing t34 to timing t37.
At timing t37, the display of the window image and the lightning image ends, and the "reach content selection effect" ends.
At timing t38.5, the left decorative symbol temporarily stops at the symbol "4", and at timing t39, the right decorative symbol temporarily stops at the symbol "4", resulting in a ready-to-win state with the symbol "4". Figure 446(d) shows the display state in which the ready-to-win state has been reached.
The "Help Reach Performance" begins at timing t40.

If it has not been decided that the "Help Reach effect" will be executed (if effect pattern 4 is being executed), even if the attack button 3710 is operated a specific number of times (eight times) during the valid operation period, the size of the area displaying the words "Help Reach" will not exceed a certain size (the entire window image will not display anything related to "Help Reach," and some areas within the window image will display anything related to reaches other than "Help Reach"), and will return to its original size over the course of two seconds from the end of the valid operation period (timing t35). Figure 446(e) shows the display state at this time.
In addition, the aforementioned orange flashing display may be ended at the end of the valid operation period (timing t35), or may be ended at the time when the display returns to its original size (timing t37).

At timing t40, the upper right area of the window image displaying the words "Monster Reach" undergoes a change, such as blinking orange, as was done for the "Training Reach" described above. Figure 446(f) shows the display state at this time.
As shown in Figure 442(b), from timing t41 to timing t45, the horizontal bar in the window image displaying the words "Monster Reach" gradually moves downward and the vertical bar gradually moves left, so that the area displaying the words "Monster Reach" gradually becomes larger. Figure 447(a) shows the display state at timing t43.

At timing t45, only the words "Monster Reach" are displayed in the window image. In addition, a plurality of lightning images imitating the shape of lightning are displayed in the foreground of the window image as an effect display indicating that the reach effect to be executed has been determined. This display continues until timing t47. Figure 447(b) shows the display state during this period.
At timing t47, the display of the window image and the lightning image ends, and the "reach content selection effect" ends.
At timing t48.5, the left decorative symbol temporarily stops at the symbol "4", and at timing t49, the right decorative symbol temporarily stops at the symbol "4", resulting in a ready-to-win state with the symbol "4". Figure 447(c) shows the display state in which the ready-to-win state has been reached.
The "monster reach effect" starts from timing t50. If the help reach effect is not confirmed, it is confirmed that the monster reach effect will be executed, so no button rapid-press effect is performed, but it is also possible to execute a button effect similar to the button effect performed when it is determined whether or not another reach effect will be executed.

In this way, in the "reach content selection effect" described with reference to Figures 440 to 447, the types of reach effects that may be executed are displayed, and then, after executing a "non-confirmed precursor effect" in which the area displaying the name of a specific reach effect gradually becomes larger depending on the operation on the operation unit, a specific image is displayed as an effect that confirms that the specific reach effect will be executed (only the name of the reach effect that has been determined to be executed is enlarged and displayed, or a lightning image is displayed), or the specific image is not displayed and the specific reach effect is not executed.
According to this embodiment, the player can feel a sense of excitement as to how large the area displaying the name of the specific reach effect will become, and as to whether or not it will be indicated that the specific reach effect will be executed. Also, the display of a specific image (the name of the reach effect that has been determined to be executed is displayed in an enlarged form) can give the player a sense of satisfaction.

A display example is shown in which a window image is displayed near the center of the display area 1600a (for example, the display examples shown in Figures 443(g) and 444(a)). According to this display example, before the start of the valid operation period, the window image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern that is rapidly fluctuating, making part of the decorative pattern invisible. In addition, the current pending image and standby pending image are all visible when the gauge image is not displayed, and when the gauge image is displayed, part of the current pending image is hidden by the gauge image. By using such a display mode, the player's ability to check the expectation level indicated by the current pending image and standby pending image is not hindered.
However, the sizes and arrangements of the window image, operation unit simulation image, and gauge image are not limited to this display example.
For example, the size of the window image may be set to the same size as the display area 1600a. In this case, the display priority of the background image, decorative symbol, current hold image, and standby hold image may be set lower than the display priority of the window image, so that the background image, decorative symbol, current hold image, and standby hold image are not visible. Note that the fourth symbol and the hold number display image may be set to a higher display priority than the window image, so that they are displayed in front of the window image. Also, the display priority of the operation unit simulation image and the gauge image may be set higher than the window image, so that they are displayed in front of the window image. According to such an embodiment, the player can be more focused on the "reach content selection effect."
In addition, only the area displaying the name of a specific reach effect may be enlarged and displayed within the window image, while other areas may not be displayed (substantially, the entire area within the window image is the area displaying the name of the specific reach effect). In such an embodiment, the area displaying the name of the specific reach effect is displayed in either a display mode in a state where it is unclear whether the specific reach effect will be executed, or a display mode in a state where it is confirmed that the specific reach effect will be executed. Specifically, in a state where it is unclear whether the specific reach effect will be executed, the display mode may be such that the reach effect name flickers or a predetermined effect is applied, and in a state where it is confirmed that the specific reach effect will be executed, a lightning image such as that shown in FIG. 444(c) may be displayed. According to such an embodiment, the player can be more focused on the "reach content selection effect."

Although a display example has been shown in which the name of the reach effect is displayed in text in each divided area of the window image (for example, the display example shown in FIG. 443(f)), reach effects that may be executed by other display methods may also be displayed. For example, instead of or in addition to displaying text, enemy characters and ally characters that are displayed in the reach effect may also be displayed. For example, in the case of a "training reach," an image of a master character or an image of a martial artist character may be displayed.
Alternatively, a part of the video that is actually displayed in the reach effect may be displayed in place of or in addition to the text display.
Conversely, a video that is not displayed in the reach effect (a video dedicated to the "reach content selection effect") may be displayed in place of or in addition to the text display.
According to such an embodiment, it becomes easier for the player to understand the types of reach effects that may be executed.

The size of the window image may be the same as the size of the display area 1600a. In this case, the fourth symbol and the reserved number display image may be set to a higher display priority than the window image and placed in front of the window image, so that they are visible. Also, the background image and decorative symbol may be set to a lower display priority than the window image and placed behind the window image, so that they are invisible.
In addition, by setting the display priority of the window image lower than the display priority of the current pending image and the standby pending image, the display state may be such that the current pending image and the standby pending image are displayed in front of the window image.
Alternatively, the display priority of the window image may be set higher than the display priority of the current pending image and the standby pending image, so that the current pending image and the standby pending image are hidden by the window image.
Alternatively, the display priority of the window image may be set lower than that of the current pending image and higher than that of the standby pending image, so that the current pending image is displayed in front of the window image and the standby pending image is hidden by the window image.

Although a modified example in which letters or characters may be displayed in an area within the window image has been shown, when the size of the area reaches its maximum and it is confirmed that a candidate reach effect will be executed, an image or video related to that reach effect may be displayed. For example, a star mark indicating the degree of expectation of that reach effect may be newly displayed. Also, the name or profile of a character appearing in the reach effect may be newly displayed. Also, the facial expression or pose of the displayed character may be changed.
According to this embodiment, it is possible to effectively utilize the area in which the names of other reach effects and the like have been displayed up until that point.

A display example has been shown in which the name of the reach effect is displayed in text in each divided area within the window image (for example, the display example shown in Figure 443 (f)), but the text display in this case is displayed in a static manner. On the other hand, the text may also be displayed in a dynamic manner. For example, the text may be repeatedly enlarged and reduced, or the color of the text may change periodically. Note that these display modes are not limited to being applied to text, and may also be adopted in the display of the characters described above.
Furthermore, when the size of each divided area in the window image changes, the size of the characters may be displayed without changing, or the size of the characters displayed in each area may be increased or decreased in accordance with the increase or decrease in the size of each area. Note that these display modes are not limited to characters and may be adopted for the display of the above-mentioned characters.

Although an embodiment in which the color of a specific region is changed from white to orange to highlight the specific region has been shown (see FIG. 443(g) and the like), the specific region may be displayed in a highlighted manner in other ways. Other highlighting methods may be adopted instead of or in addition to changing the color of the specific region.
For example, during part of the period from timing t10 to timing t17 when "Training Reach" is selected (for example, the period from timing t10 to timing t12, which is the period from the start of selection until two seconds have elapsed), or during the entire period, the words "Training Reach" may be displayed swinging up and down or left and right. Alternatively, a predetermined effect image may be displayed in part or all of a specific area, or effect images may be displayed radially from a specific area.

In this embodiment, candidates for reach effects to be executed are selected in the order of "Training Reach,""DemonReach,""HelpReach," and "Monster Reach." In this case, the expectation of the reach effects increases to 10%, 20%, 30%, and 50%. According to this embodiment, if it is not determined that a certain reach effect will be executed, it is determined that a reach effect with a higher expectation will be executed, and the longer the "reach content selection effect" continues, the more thrilling the player can feel.
Conversely, the candidate reach effects to be executed may be selected in the order of "Monster Reach,""HelpReach,""DemonReach," and "Training Reach." In this case, the expectation of the reach effects decreases to 50%, 30%, 20%, and 10%. According to such an embodiment, a player who wishes to confirm the execution of a reach effect with a higher expectation through his or her own actions will seriously tap the operation unit repeatedly during the operation valid period in the "reach content selection effect," thereby increasing the player's interest.

The selection ratios of effect patterns 1 to 4 may be the same regardless of the effect pattern, i.e., 25%:25%:25%:25%. In this case, when the "reach content selection effect" is executed, it is determined with a 25% probability that the effects of "monster reach,""helpreach,""demonreach," and "training reach" will be executed.
On the other hand, the selection ratio of effect pattern 1 to effect pattern 4 may differ depending on the effect pattern. For example, effect pattern 1 to effect pattern 4 may be selected at a ratio of 10%:20%:30%:40%. Conversely, effect pattern 1 to effect pattern 4 may be selected at a ratio of 40%:30%:20%:10%. Alternatively, effect pattern 1 to effect pattern 4 may be selected at a ratio of 10%:40%:40%:10%, or effect pattern 1 to effect pattern 4 may be selected at a ratio of 40%:10%:10%:40%.
According to such an embodiment, for example, there are embodiments in which highly anticipated reach effects are more likely to be selected and embodiments in which they are less likely to be selected, thereby increasing interest.

In the embodiment shown, the window image is a horizontally long rectangle, divided into four regions, and a reach effect is associated with each region (see, for example, Fig. 443(f)), but the number of regions (i.e., the number of reach effects that can be selected) is not limited to four, and any number equal to or greater than 2 can be used. Note that when the number of reach effects is two, the effect modes shown in Fig. 442(a) and Fig. 442(b) will be executed.
In addition, although the embodiment has been shown in which the size of the four regions changes by moving two vertical and horizontal bars within the window image, the number of bars may be three or more, thereby making it possible to generate any number of regions.
Although the shape of the window image is rectangular, other shapes may be used. For example, a circle or ellipse may be used, and a fan-shaped region may be generated by drawing multiple bars from the center of the circle or ellipse. In this case, too, any number of regions can be generated depending on the number of bars.
Furthermore, instead of using straight bars, multiple regions may be generated using arc or polygonal bars.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to diversify the methods of expressing areas in the "reach content selection presentation."

During the period when the type of reach effect to be executed is determined and only the reach name is enlarged and displayed, the decorative symbols are displayed in a state of high-speed fluctuation, but instead of a high-speed fluctuation state, they may be in a state of low-speed fluctuation. Alternatively, during this period, the left and right decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped in a reach state. Alternatively, the left, center, and right decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped in a reach miss state. Alternatively, the left and right decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped in a combination that is not a reach. Alternatively, the left, center, and right decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped in a state other than a reach miss or a double number.
In this case, the contradictory effects described above can give the player a sense of excitement.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the size of the predetermined area changes by repeatedly pressing the attack button 3710, other modes of operation may also be employed.
For example, when the attack button 3710 is pressed and held (for example, when pressed continuously for 0.2 seconds), the size of the predetermined area may be increased by one level. In this case, when the attack button 3710 is pressed and held for one second, the display mode is the same as when the button is pressed five times in one second.
It should be noted that both rapid tapping and long presses may be accepted, or only long presses may be accepted.
Alternatively, the size of a predetermined area may be changed to the maximum size by a single operation during the valid operation period. The size of the area to be changed may be determined in advance based on the results of a special lottery.
Alternatively, the operation valid period may not be set, and after the display of the window image starts, the size of each area may change, and at a predetermined timing, the size of a predetermined area may become the maximum size, and the reach effect corresponding to that area may be executed. Note that it is preferable to determine in advance which area will become the maximum size based on the results of a special lottery.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the number of reach effects displayed as candidates increases from 1 to 2, and from 2 to 4, the number of reach effects may be increased in other ways. For example, it may increase from 1 to 2 to 3 (note that in this case, the final number of reach effect candidates is 3; the same applies below), or it may increase from 2 to 3 to 4, or it may increase from 1 to 2.
Alternatively, the reach effects displayed as candidates may be displayed all at once at the same time, rather than being displayed in order. For example, four types of reach effects may be displayed at once, or two types of reach effects may be displayed at once.

In the embodiment shown, different reach effect candidates are displayed for each area, but the same reach effect may be displayed as a candidate for multiple areas. For example, if there are four areas, one training reach, two demon battle reaches, and one monster reach may be displayed.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 440 to 447, if a reach effect was not selected by the third of the four areas, the reach effect corresponding to the fourth area was automatically selected as the reach effect to be executed. However, in the case of the fourth area, as in the case of the previous areas, an operation valid period may be set, and an effect may be executed in which the fourth reach effect is either selected or not. In this case, it is preferable that the reach effect corresponding to the fourth area is selected as the reach effect to be executed, or that a reach effect other than any of the reach effects displayed as candidates in the four areas is selected as the reach effect to be executed.

The "reach content selection effect" indicates to the player the type of reach effect to be executed, but it is not limited to the type of reach effect. Instead of the type of reach effect, effects similar to the "reach content selection effect" can be executed in effects that determine which of multiple advance notice effects to execute, or which of multiple hold modes to change to.

This example shows an embodiment in which decorative symbols are rapidly changed during the execution of "pre-reach battle effect,""reach notice effect due to hold,""reach symbol promotion effect," and "reach content selection effect." In this case, it is difficult or impossible to identify the individual characters and numbers attached to the decorative symbols.
The display of decorative symbols may be temporarily suspended when the "pre-reach battle effect,""reach notice effect due to hold,""reach symbol promotion effect," or "reach content selection effect" begins to be executed, and the display of decorative symbols may be resumed after these effects have ended. Alternatively, a "specific display" that is an advantageous result for the player may be displayed, and the display of decorative symbols may be resumed when that display has ended.

When a game ball enters the starting hole while a precursory display (a display of a ball enduring a flame) of the "operation reception effect during a reach" is displayed, a new standby reserve image may not be displayed even if the number of reserves is not the maximum of four.
When the precursor display (a display of the ball enduring the flame) of the "operation reception effect during reach" is displayed and the game ball enters the starting hole, a standby image in some display mode (white to rainbow color) may be displayed.
When the precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" (the display of enduring flames) is displayed, if the game ball enters the starting hole, a predetermined light emitting section may be made to emit light in a predetermined light emitting pattern.
When the precursor display (a display of the ball enduring the flame) of the "operation reception effect during reach" is displayed, if the game ball enters the starting hole, a predetermined light emitting part may not be made to emit light.
If the volume adjustment button is operated while the precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" (display of enduring flames) is displayed, the current volume level is displayed in display area 1600a, and the volume may also be adjustable.
If the volume adjustment button is operated while the precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" (the display of enduring flames) is displayed, the current volume level is not displayed in the display area 1600a, but it may be possible to adjust the volume.
If the volume adjustment button is operated while the precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" (the display of enduring flames) is displayed, the current volume level may not be displayed in the display area 1600a, and it may be impossible to adjust the volume.
If the light intensity adjustment button is operated while the precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" (display of enduring flames) is displayed, the current light intensity level is displayed in the display area 1600a, and the light intensity may also be adjustable.
If the light intensity adjustment button is operated while the precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" (display of enduring flames) is displayed, the current light intensity level will not be displayed in the display area 1600a, but it may be possible to adjust the light intensity.
If the light intensity adjustment button is operated while the precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" (display of enduring flames) is displayed, the current light intensity level may not be displayed in the display area 1600a, and it may also be impossible to adjust the light intensity.
When the precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" (display of enduring flames) is displayed, if an operation is performed on the operation unit (e.g., attack button 3710) when there is no display instructing the operation of the operation unit, it may be configured to do nothing.
When the precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" (display of enduring flames) is displayed, if an operation is performed on the operation unit (e.g., attack button 3710) without any display instructing the operation of the operation unit, an effect image of a predetermined type may be added to the predetermined image displayed in display area 1600a and displayed.
When the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (display of enduring flames) is displayed, if an operation is performed on the operation unit (e.g., attack button 3710) without any display instructing the operation of the operation unit, a specified light-emitting unit may be made to emit light in a specified light-emitting pattern.

When a special display (simulated image of the operation section) of "operation reception effect during reach" is displayed, if a game ball enters the starting hole, a new standby reserve image may not be displayed even if the number of reserves is not the maximum of four.
When the special display (simulated image of the operation section) of the "operation reception effect during reach" is displayed, if the game ball enters the starting hole, a standby image of some display mode (white to rainbow color) may be displayed.
When a special display (simulated image of the operation section) for the "operation acceptance during reach" is displayed, if the game ball enters the starting hole, a predetermined light-emitting section may be made to emit light in a predetermined light-emitting pattern.
When the special display (simulated image of the operation part) of the "operation reception effect during reach" is displayed, if the game ball enters the starting hole, a predetermined light emitting part may not be made to emit light.
If the volume adjustment button is operated while the special display (simulated image of the operation section) for "operation acceptance during reach" is displayed, the current volume level is displayed in the display area 1600a, and the volume may also be adjustable.
If the volume adjustment button is operated while the special display (simulated image of the operation unit) for "operation acceptance during reach" is displayed, the current volume level is not displayed in the display area 1600a, but it may be possible to adjust the volume.
If the volume adjustment button is operated while the special display (simulated image of the operation unit) for "operation acceptance during reach" is displayed, the current volume level may not be displayed in the display area 1600a, and it may be impossible to adjust the volume.
If the light intensity adjustment button is operated while the special display (simulated image of the operation section) for "operation acceptance during reach" is displayed, the current light intensity level is displayed in the display area 1600a, and the light intensity may also be adjustable.
If the light intensity adjustment button is operated while the special display (simulated image of the operation section) for "operation acceptance during reach" is displayed, the current light intensity level will not be displayed in the display area 1600a, but it may be possible to adjust the light intensity.
If the light intensity adjustment button is operated while the special display (simulated image of the operation section) for "operation acceptance during reach" is displayed, the current light intensity level may not be displayed in the display area 1600a, and it may also be impossible to adjust the light intensity.
When a special display (simulated image of the operation unit) for "operation acceptance during reach" is displayed, if an operation is performed on the operation unit (e.g., attack button 3710) when there is no display instructing the operation of the operation unit, it may be configured to do nothing.
When a special display (simulated image of the operation unit) for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" is displayed, if an operation is performed on the operation unit (e.g., attack button 3710) without any display instructing the operation of the operation unit, an effect image of a predetermined type may be added to the predetermined image displayed in display area 1600a and displayed.
When a special display (simulated image of the operation unit) for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" is displayed, if an operation is performed on the operation unit (e.g., attack button 3710) when no display instructing the operation of the operation unit is being displayed, a specified light-emitting unit may be made to emit light in a specified light-emitting pattern.

When a game ball enters the starting hole while a premonition display (a display showing that the ball is resistant to an energy bullet) of the "pre-reach battle performance" is displayed, a new standby reserve image may not be displayed even if the number of reserves is not the maximum of four.
When the precursor display (indicating that the ball is withstanding the energy bullet) of the "pre-reach battle effect" is displayed and the game ball enters the starting hole, a standby image in some display mode (white to rainbow color) may be displayed.
When the precursor display of the "pre-reach battle effect" (the display showing that the ball is resistant to the energy bullet) is displayed and the game ball enters the starting hole, a predetermined light emitting section may be made to emit light in a predetermined light emitting pattern.
When the precursor display of the "pre-reach battle effect" (the display showing that the ball is resistant to the energy bullet) is displayed and the game ball enters the starting hole, a predetermined light emitting part may not be made to emit light.
If the volume adjustment button is operated while the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (the display showing that the player is withstanding an energy bullet) is displayed, the current volume level is displayed in the display area 1600a, and the volume may also be adjustable.
If the volume adjustment button is operated while the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (the display showing that the player is withstanding an energy bullet) is displayed, the current volume level will not be displayed in the display area 1600a, but it may be possible to adjust the volume.
If the volume adjustment button is operated while the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (the display showing that the player is withstanding an energy bullet) is displayed, the current volume level may not be displayed in the display area 1600a, and it may be impossible to adjust the volume.
If the light intensity adjustment button is operated while the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (the display showing that the player is withstanding an energy bullet) is displayed, the current light intensity level is displayed in the display area 1600a, and the light intensity may also be adjustable.
If the light intensity adjustment button is operated while the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (a display showing that the player is withstanding an energy bullet) is displayed, the current light intensity level will not be displayed in the display area 1600a, but it may be possible to adjust the light intensity.
If the light intensity adjustment button is operated while the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (the display showing that the player is withstanding an energy bullet) is displayed, the current light intensity level may not be displayed in the display area 1600a, and it may also be impossible to adjust the light intensity.
When a premonition display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (a display showing that the character is withstanding an energy bullet) is displayed, and there is no display instructing the player to operate the operation unit (e.g., attack button 3710), if an operation is performed on the operation unit, it may be configured to do nothing.
When a premonition display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (a display showing that the player is withstanding an energy bullet) is displayed, and no display instructing the player to operate the operation unit (e.g., attack button 3710) is displayed, if an operation is performed on the operation unit, an effect image of a predetermined type may be added to the predetermined image displayed in display area 1600a and displayed.
When a premonition display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (a display showing that the player is withstanding an energy bullet) is displayed, and no display instructing the player to operate the operation unit (e.g., attack button 3710) is displayed, if an operation is performed on the operation unit, a specified light-emitting unit may be made to emit light in a specified light-emitting pattern.

When a specific display (a display of a fainted demon character) of the "pre-reach battle performance" is displayed, if a game ball enters the starting hole, a new standby reserve image may not be displayed even if the number of reserves is not the maximum of four.
When a specific display (a display of a fainted demon character) of the "pre-reach battle effect" is displayed and the game ball enters the starting hole, a standby image in some display mode (white to rainbow color) may be displayed.
When a specific display of the "pre-reach battle effect" (a display of the demon character fainting) is displayed, if the game ball enters the starting hole, a predetermined light-emitting section may be made to emit light in a predetermined light-emitting pattern.
When a specific display (a display of a fainted demon character) of the "pre-reach battle effect" is displayed, if the game ball enters the starting hole, a predetermined light emitting section may not be illuminated.
If the volume adjustment button is operated while a specific display (a display of a fainted demon character) of the "pre-reach battle effect" is displayed, the current volume level is displayed in the display area 1600a, and the volume may also be adjustable.
If the volume adjustment button is operated while a specific display (a display of a fainted demon character) of the "pre-reach battle effect" is displayed, the current volume level is not displayed in the display area 1600a, but it may be possible to adjust the volume.
If the volume adjustment button is operated while a specific display (a display of a fainted demon character) of the "pre-reach battle effect" is displayed, the current volume level may not be displayed in the display area 1600a, and it may be impossible to adjust the volume.
If the light intensity adjustment button is operated while a specific display (a display of a stunned demon character) of the "pre-reach battle effect" is displayed, the current light intensity level is displayed in the display area 1600a, and the light intensity may also be adjustable.
If the light intensity adjustment button is operated while a specific display (a display of a stunned demon character) for the "pre-reach battle effect" is displayed, the current light intensity level is not displayed in the display area 1600a, but it may be possible to adjust the light intensity.
If the light intensity adjustment button is operated while a specific display (a display of a stunned demon character) of the "pre-reach battle effect" is displayed, the current light intensity level may not be displayed in the display area 1600a, and it may also be impossible to adjust the light intensity.
When a specific display (a display of a stunned demon character) for the "pre-reach battle effect" is displayed, if an operation is performed on the operation unit (e.g., attack button 3710) when no display instructing the operation of the operation unit is displayed, nothing may be done.
When a specific display (a display of a stunned demon character) for the "pre-reach battle effect" is displayed, if an operation is performed on the operation unit (e.g., attack button 3710) without any display instructing the operation of the operation unit, an effect image of a predetermined type may be added to the predetermined image displayed in display area 1600a and displayed.
When a specific display (a display of a stunned demon character) for the "pre-reach battle effect" is displayed, if an operation is performed on the operation unit (e.g., attack button 3710) without any display instructing the operation of the operation unit, a predetermined light-emitting unit may be made to emit light in a predetermined light-emitting pattern.

When a display related to the "pre-reach battle performance" (display of a comment "enemy is injured!") is displayed, if a game ball enters the starting hole, a new standby reserve image may not be displayed even if the number of reserves is not the maximum of four.
When a display related to the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of a comment "Enemy is injured!") is displayed and the game ball enters the starting hole, a standby image in some display mode (white to rainbow color) may be displayed.
When a display related to the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of a comment "Enemy is injured!") is displayed and the game ball enters the starting hole, a predetermined light-emitting section may be made to emit light in a predetermined light-emitting pattern.
When a display related to the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of a comment "Enemy is injured!") is displayed and the game ball enters the starting hole, a specified light-emitting section may not be illuminated.
If the volume adjustment button is operated while the related display for the "pre-reach battle performance" (display of the comment "Enemy is injured!") is displayed, the current volume level may be displayed in display area 1600a, and the volume may also be adjustable.
If the volume adjustment button is operated while the related display for the "pre-reach battle performance" (display of the comment "Enemy is injured!") is displayed, the current volume level is not displayed in the display area 1600a, but it may be possible to adjust the volume.
If the volume adjustment button is operated while a related display for the "pre-reach battle performance" (display of the comment "Enemy is injured!") is displayed, the current volume level may not be displayed in the display area 1600a, and it may be impossible to adjust the volume.
If the light intensity adjustment button is operated while a related display for the "pre-reach battle performance" (display of a comment "Enemy is injured!") is displayed, the current light intensity level may be displayed in display area 1600a, and the light intensity may also be adjustable.
If the light intensity adjustment button is operated while a related display for the "pre-reach battle performance" (display of the comment "Enemy is injured!") is displayed, the current light intensity level will not be displayed in the display area 1600a, but it may be possible to adjust the light intensity.
If the light intensity adjustment button is operated while a related display for the "pre-reach battle performance" (display of a comment "Enemy is injured!") is displayed, the current light intensity level may not be displayed in the display area 1600a, and it may be impossible to adjust the light intensity.
When a display related to the "pre-reach battle performance" (a display of the comment "Enemy is injured!") is displayed, and there is no display instructing the operation of the operation unit (e.g., attack button 3710), if an operation is performed on the operation unit, it may be configured to do nothing.
When a display related to the "pre-reach battle performance" (a display of the comment "Enemy is injured!") is displayed, and no display instructing the operation of the operation unit (e.g., attack button 3710) is being displayed, if an operation is performed on the operation unit, an effect image of a predetermined type may be added to a predetermined image displayed in display area 1600a and displayed.
When a display related to the "pre-reach battle performance" (a display of the comment "Enemy is injured!") is displayed, and no display instructing the operation of the operation unit (e.g., attack button 3710) is displayed, if an operation is performed on the operation unit, a specified light-emitting unit may be made to emit light in a specified light-emitting pattern.

When a game ball enters the starting hole while a premonition display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach notice performance by reservation" is displayed, a new standby reservation image may not be displayed even if the reservation number is not the maximum of four.
When the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach notice effect by hold" is displayed, if the game ball enters the starting hole, a standby hold image in some display mode (white to rainbow color) may be displayed.
When the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach notice effect due to hold" is displayed, if the game ball enters the starting hole, a predetermined light emitting part may be made to emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode.
When the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach notice effect by hold" is displayed, if the game ball enters the starting hole, a predetermined light emitting part may not be illuminated.
If the volume adjustment button is operated while the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the "reach preview effect due to hold" is displayed, the current volume level is displayed in the display area 1600a, and the volume may also be adjustable.
If the volume adjustment button is operated while the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the "reach preview effect due to hold" is displayed, the current volume level will not be displayed in the display area 1600a, but it may be possible to adjust the volume.
If the volume adjustment button is operated while the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the "reach preview effect due to hold" is displayed, the current volume level may not be displayed in the display area 1600a, and it may also be impossible to adjust the volume.
If the light intensity adjustment button is operated while the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the "reach preview effect due to hold" is displayed, the current light intensity level is displayed in the display area 1600a, and the light intensity may also be adjustable.
If the light intensity adjustment button is operated while the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the "reach preview effect due to hold" is displayed, the current light intensity level will not be displayed in the display area 1600a, but it may be possible to adjust the light intensity.
If the light intensity adjustment button is operated while the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the "reach preview effect due to hold" is displayed, the current light intensity level may not be displayed in the display area 1600a, and it may also be impossible to adjust the light intensity.
When the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the "reach preview effect due to hold" is displayed, if an operation is performed on the operation unit (e.g., attack button 3710) when there is no display instructing the operation of the operation unit, it may be configured to do nothing.
When a precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the "reach preview effect due to hold" is displayed, if an operation is performed on the operation unit (e.g., attack button 3710) without any display instructing the operation of the operation unit, an effect image of a predetermined type may be added to the predetermined image displayed in display area 1600a and displayed.
When a precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the "reach preview effect due to hold" is displayed, if an operation is performed on the operation unit (e.g., attack button 3710) without any display instructing the operation of the operation unit, a specified light-emitting unit may be made to emit light in a specified light-emitting pattern.

When a precursory display of the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image is not changed) is displayed, if a game ball enters the starting hole, a new standby reserved image may not be displayed even if the number of reserved balls is not the maximum of four.
When the precursory display of the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change) is displayed and the game ball enters the starting hole, a standby image in some display mode (white to rainbow color) may be displayed.
When the precursor display of the "Reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change) is displayed, if the game ball enters the starting hole, a predetermined light-emitting section may be made to emit light in a predetermined light-emitting mode.
When a precursory display of the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change) is displayed, if the game ball enters the starting hole, a predetermined light emitting part may not be made to emit light.
If the volume adjustment button is operated while the precursor display for the "Reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change) is displayed, the current volume level is displayed in the display area 1600a, and the volume may also be adjustable.
If the volume adjustment button is operated while the precursor display for the "Reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change) is displayed, the current volume level is not displayed in the display area 1600a, but it may be possible to adjust the volume.
If the volume adjustment button is operated while the precursor display for the "Reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change) is displayed, the current volume level may not be displayed in the display area 1600a, and it may also be impossible to adjust the volume.
If the light intensity adjustment button is operated while the precursor display for the "Reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change) is displayed, the current light intensity level is displayed in the display area 1600a, and the light intensity may also be adjustable.
If the light intensity adjustment button is operated while the precursor display for the "Reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change) is displayed, the current light intensity level is not displayed in the display area 1600a, but it may be possible to adjust the light intensity.
If the light intensity adjustment button is operated while the precursor display for the "Reach pattern upgrade effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change) is displayed, the current light intensity level may not be displayed in the display area 1600a, and it may also be impossible to adjust the light intensity.
When a precursor display for the "Reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change) is displayed, and there is no display instructing the operation of the operation unit (e.g., attack button 3710), if an operation is performed on the operation unit, nothing may be done.
When a precursor display for the "Reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change) is displayed, if an operation is performed on the operation unit (e.g., attack button 3710) without any display instructing the operation of the operation unit, an effect image of a predetermined type may be added to a predetermined image displayed in display area 1600a and displayed.
When a precursor display for the "Reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, and no display instructing the operation of the operation unit (e.g., attack button 3710) is displayed, if an operation is performed on the operation unit, a predetermined light-emitting unit may be made to emit light in a predetermined light-emitting pattern.

When a specific display of the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which the color of the sixth meter image changes and a reward is won) is displayed, if the game ball enters the starting hole, a new standby reserve image may not be displayed even if the number of reserves is not the maximum of four.
When a specific display of the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (the color of the sixth meter image changes to indicate that a reward has been won) is displayed, if the game ball enters the starting hole, a standby image in some display mode (white to rainbow color) may be displayed.
When a specific display of the "Reach Pattern Promotion Effect" (a display in which the color of the sixth meter image changes to indicate that a reward has been won) is displayed, if the game ball enters the starting hole, a predetermined light-emitting section may be made to emit light in a predetermined light-emitting pattern.
When a specific display of the "Reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the color of the sixth meter image changes to indicate that a reward has been won) is displayed, if the game ball enters the starting hole, a predetermined light-emitting section may not be made to emit light.
If the volume adjustment button is operated while a specific display of the "Reach Pattern Promotion Effect" (the color of the sixth meter image changes to indicate that a reward has been obtained) is displayed, the current volume level is displayed in the display area 1600a, and the volume may also be adjustable.
If the volume adjustment button is operated while the specific display of the "Reach pattern promotion effect" (the color of the sixth meter image changes to indicate that a reward has been won) is displayed, the current volume level is not displayed in the display area 1600a, but it may be possible to adjust the volume.
If the volume adjustment button is operated while the specific display of the "Reach pattern promotion effect" (the color of the sixth meter image changes to indicate that a reward has been won) is displayed, the current volume level may not be displayed in the display area 1600a, and it may also be impossible to adjust the volume.
If the light intensity adjustment button is operated while a specific display of the "Reach pattern promotion effect" (the color of the sixth meter image changes to indicate that a reward has been obtained) is displayed, the current light intensity level is displayed in the display area 1600a, and the light intensity may also be adjustable.
If the light intensity adjustment button is operated while the specific display of the "Reach pattern promotion effect" (the color of the sixth meter image changes to indicate that a reward has been obtained) is displayed, the current light intensity level is not displayed in the display area 1600a, but it may be possible to adjust the light intensity.
If the light intensity adjustment button is operated while a specific display of the "Reach pattern promotion effect" (the color of the sixth meter image changes to indicate that a reward has been obtained) is displayed, the current light intensity level may not be displayed in the display area 1600a, and it may also be impossible to adjust the light intensity.
When a specific display of the "Reach pattern promotion effect" (the color of the sixth meter image changes to indicate that a reward has been won) is displayed, if an operation is performed on the operation unit (e.g., attack button 3710) when no display instructing the operation of the operation unit is displayed, it may be configured to do nothing.
When a specific display of the "Reach pattern promotion effect" (the color of the sixth meter image changes to indicate that a reward has been obtained) is displayed, if an operation is performed on the operation unit (e.g., attack button 3710) without any display instructing the operation of the operation unit, an effect image of a predetermined type may be added to the predetermined image displayed in display area 1600a and displayed.
When a specific display of the "Reach pattern promotion effect" (the color of the sixth meter image changes to indicate that a reward has been won) is displayed, if an operation is performed on the operation unit (e.g., attack button 3710) without any display instructing the operation of the operation unit, a predetermined light-emitting unit may be made to emit light in a predetermined light-emitting pattern.

When a display related to the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (display of the acquired reward at the upper left of the meter image) is displayed, if the game ball enters the starting hole, a new standby reserved image may not be displayed even if the number of reserved numbers is not the maximum of four.
When the display related to the "Reach Pattern Promotion Effect" (display of the acquired reward in the upper left of the meter image) is displayed, if the game ball enters the starting hole, a standby image in some display mode (white to rainbow color) may be displayed.
When the display related to the "Reach pattern promotion effect" (display of the acquired reward in the upper left of the meter image) is displayed, if the game ball enters the starting hole, a predetermined light-emitting section may be made to emit light in a predetermined light-emitting pattern.
When the display related to the "Reach pattern promotion effect" (display of the acquired reward in the upper left of the meter image) is displayed, if the game ball enters the starting hole, a predetermined light-emitting section may not be illuminated.
If the volume adjustment button is operated while the related display for the "Reach pattern promotion effect" (display of the earned reward in the upper left of the meter image) is displayed, the current volume level is displayed in the display area 1600a, and the volume may also be adjustable.
If the volume adjustment button is operated while the related display for the "Reach pattern promotion effect" (display of the earned reward in the upper left of the meter image) is displayed, the current volume level is not displayed in the display area 1600a, but it may be possible to adjust the volume.
If the volume adjustment button is operated while the related display for the "Reach pattern promotion effect" (display of the earned reward in the upper left of the meter image) is displayed, the current volume level may not be displayed in the display area 1600a, and it may be impossible to adjust the volume.
When the light intensity adjustment button is operated while the related display for the "Reach pattern promotion effect" (display of the earned reward in the upper left of the meter image) is displayed, the current light intensity level is displayed in the display area 1600a, and the light intensity may also be adjustable.
If the light intensity adjustment button is operated while the related display for the "Reach pattern promotion effect" (display of the earned reward in the upper left of the meter image) is displayed, the current light intensity level will not be displayed in the display area 1600a, but it may be possible to adjust the light intensity.
If the light intensity adjustment button is operated while the related display for the "Reach pattern promotion effect" (display of the earned reward in the upper left of the meter image) is displayed, the current light intensity level may not be displayed in the display area 1600a, and it may also be impossible to adjust the light intensity.
When a display related to the "Reach pattern promotion effect" (display of the earned reward in the upper left of the meter image) is displayed, and there is no display instructing the operation of the operation unit (e.g., attack button 3710), if an operation is performed on the operation unit, nothing may be done.
When a display related to the "Reach pattern promotion effect" (display of the earned reward in the upper left of the meter image) is displayed, and no display instructing the operation of the operation unit (e.g., attack button 3710) is being displayed, if an operation is performed on the operation unit, an effect image of a predetermined type may be added to the predetermined image displayed in display area 1600a and displayed.
When a display related to the "Reach pattern promotion effect" (display of the acquired reward in the upper left of the meter image) is displayed, and no display instructing the operation of the operation unit (e.g., attack button 3710) is displayed, if an operation is performed on the operation unit, a specified light-emitting unit may be made to emit light in a specified light-emitting pattern.

When a precursory display of the "reach content selection performance" (a display in which a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for the reach performance) is displayed, if a game ball enters the starting hole, a new standby reserve image may not be displayed even if the number of reserves is not the maximum of four.
When a precursory display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed and the game ball enters the starting hole, a standby image in some display mode (white to rainbow color) may be displayed.
When a precursory display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display indicating that a predetermined area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, if the game ball enters the starting hole, a predetermined light-emitting section may be made to emit light in a predetermined light-emitting pattern.
When a precursory display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display indicating that a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, if the game ball enters the starting hole, a predetermined light emitting section may not be made to emit light.
If the volume adjustment button is operated while the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display indicating that a specific area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the current volume level may be displayed in the display area 1600a, and the volume may also be adjustable.
If the volume adjustment button is operated while the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display indicating that a specific area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the current volume level is not displayed in the display area 1600a, but it may be possible to adjust the volume.
If the volume adjustment button is operated while the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display indicating that a specific area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the current volume level may not be displayed in the display area 1600a, and it may also be impossible to adjust the volume.
If the light intensity adjustment button is operated while the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display indicating that a specific area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the current light intensity level may be displayed in the display area 1600a, and the light intensity may also be adjustable.
If the light intensity adjustment button is operated while the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display indicating that a specific area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the current light intensity level is not displayed in the display area 1600a, but it may be possible to adjust the light intensity.
If the light intensity adjustment button is operated while the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display indicating that a specific area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the current light intensity level may not be displayed in the display area 1600a, and it may also be impossible to adjust the light intensity.
When a precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display indicating that a specific area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, if an operation is performed on the operation unit (e.g., attack button 3710) when no display instructing the operation of the operation unit is displayed, nothing may be done.
When a precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display indicating that a specific area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, if an operation is performed on the operation unit (e.g., attack button 3710) without any display instructing the operation of the operation unit, an effect image of a specific type may be added to the specific image displayed in display area 1600a and displayed.
When a precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display indicating that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, and no display instructing the operation of the operation unit (e.g., attack button 3710) is being displayed, if an operation is performed on the operation unit, a specified light-emitting unit may be made to emit light in a specified light-emitting pattern.

When a specific display of the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which only the selected predetermined area is displayed and the candidate for the reach effect is confirmed) is displayed, if the game ball enters the starting hole, a new display of the standby reserve image may not be performed even if the number of reserves is not the maximum of four.
When a specific display of the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which only the selected predetermined area is displayed and the candidate for the reach effect is confirmed) is displayed, if the game ball enters the starting hole, a standby image in some display mode (white to rainbow color) may be displayed.
When a specific display of the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which only the selected predetermined area is displayed and the candidate for the reach effect is confirmed) is displayed, if the game ball enters the starting hole, a predetermined light-emitting section may be made to emit light in a predetermined light-emitting pattern.
When a specific display of the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which only the selected predetermined area is displayed and the candidate for the reach effect is confirmed) is displayed, if the game ball enters the starting hole, the predetermined light emitting part may not be made to emit light.
When the volume adjustment button is operated while a specific display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which only the selected specified area is displayed and the candidate for the reach effect is confirmed) is displayed, the current volume level is displayed in the display area 1600a, and the volume may also be adjustable.
When the volume adjustment button is operated while a specific display of the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which only the selected specified area is displayed and the candidate reach effect is confirmed) is displayed, the current volume level is not displayed in the display area 1600a, but it may be possible to adjust the volume.
If the volume adjustment button is operated while a specific display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which only the selected specified area is displayed and the candidate for the reach effect is confirmed) is displayed, the current volume level may not be displayed in the display area 1600a, and it may also be impossible to adjust the volume.
When the light intensity adjustment button is operated while a specific display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which only the selected specified area is displayed and the candidate for the reach effect is confirmed) is displayed, the current light intensity level is displayed in the display area 1600a, and it may also be possible to adjust the light intensity.
When the light intensity adjustment button is operated while a specific display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which only the selected specified area is displayed and the candidate for the reach effect is confirmed) is displayed, the current light intensity level is not displayed in the display area 1600a, but it may be possible to adjust the light intensity.
If the light intensity adjustment button is operated while a specific display of the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which only the selected specified area is displayed and the candidate for the reach effect is confirmed) is displayed, the current light intensity level may not be displayed in the display area 1600a, and it may also be impossible to adjust the light intensity.
When a specific display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which only the selected specified area is displayed and the candidate reach effect is confirmed) is displayed, if an operation is performed on the operation unit (e.g., attack button 3710) when no display instructing the operation of the operation unit is displayed, nothing may be done.
When a specific display of the "Reach Content Selection Display" (a display in which only the selected specified area is displayed and the candidate reach display is confirmed) is displayed, if an operation is performed on the operation unit (e.g., attack button 3710) without a display instructing the operation of the operation unit, an effect image of a specified type may be added to the specified image displayed in display area 1600a and displayed.
When a specific display of the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which only the selected specified area is displayed and the candidate reach effect is confirmed) is displayed, if an operation is performed on the operation unit (e.g., attack button 3710) without a display instructing the operation of the operation unit, a specified light-emitting unit may be made to emit light in a specified light-emitting pattern.

When a precursor display (a comment image of a master character) of the "character background color change effect during reach" is displayed, if the game ball enters the starting hole, a new standby reserve image may not be displayed even if the number of reserves is not the maximum of four.
When the precursor display (image of a comment from the master character) of the "character background color change during reach" is displayed and the game ball enters the starting hole, a standby image in some display mode (white to rainbow color) may be displayed.
When the precursor display (image of a comment from the master character) for the "character background color change during reach" is displayed, if the game ball enters the starting hole, a predetermined light-emitting section may be made to emit light in a predetermined light-emitting pattern.
When the precursor display (image of a comment from the master character) of the "character background color change effect during reach" is displayed, if the game ball enters the starting hole, a specified light-emitting part may not be illuminated.
If the volume adjustment button is operated while the precursor display (image of a comment from the master character) for the "character background color change during reach" is displayed, the current volume level is displayed in the display area 1600a, and the volume may also be adjustable.
If the volume adjustment button is operated while the precursor display (image of a comment from the master character) for the "character background color change during reach" is displayed, the current volume level will not be displayed in the display area 1600a, but it may be possible to adjust the volume.
If the volume adjustment button is operated while the precursor display (image of a comment from the master character) for the "character background color change during reach" is displayed, the current volume level may not be displayed in the display area 1600a, and it may be impossible to adjust the volume.
If the light intensity adjustment button is operated while the precursor display (a comment image of the master character) for the "character background color change effect during reach" is displayed, the current light intensity level is displayed in the display area 1600a, and the light intensity may also be adjustable.
If the light intensity adjustment button is operated while the precursor display (image of a comment from the master character) for the "character background color change during reach" is displayed, the current light intensity level will not be displayed in the display area 1600a, but it may be possible to adjust the light intensity.
If the light intensity adjustment button is operated while the precursor display (image of a comment from the master character) for the "character background color change during reach" is displayed, the current light intensity level may not be displayed in the display area 1600a, and it may also be impossible to adjust the light intensity.
When a precursor display (a comment image of the master character) for the "character background color change effect during reach" is displayed, if an operation is performed on the operation unit (e.g., attack button 3710) when no display instructing the operation of the operation unit is displayed, it may be configured to do nothing.
When a precursor display (a comment image of the master character) for the "character background color change effect during reach" is displayed, if an operation is performed on the operation unit (e.g., attack button 3710) without any display instructing the operation of the operation unit, an effect image of a predetermined type may be added to the predetermined image displayed in display area 1600a and displayed.
When a precursor display (a comment image of the master character) for the "character background color change effect during reach" is displayed, if an operation is performed on the operation unit (e.g., attack button 3710) without any display instructing the operation of the operation unit, a specified light-emitting unit may be made to emit light in a specified light-emitting pattern.

When a game ball enters the starting hole while a premonition display (background change premonition image) is displayed in the "background change effect during reach", a new standby reserve image may not be displayed even if the number of reserves is not the maximum of four.
When a precursor display (background change precursor image) is displayed in the "reach background change effect," if the game ball enters the starting hole, a standby image in some display mode (white to rainbow color) may be displayed.
When a precursor display (background change precursor image) is displayed in the "reach background change effect," if the game ball enters the starting hole, a predetermined light-emitting section may be made to emit light in a predetermined light-emitting pattern.
When a precursor display (background change precursor image) is displayed in the "reach background change effect," if the game ball enters the starting hole, a predetermined light-emitting section may not be made to emit light.
If the volume adjustment button is operated while a precursor display (background change precursor image) is displayed during the "background change effect during reach," the current volume level is displayed in display area 1600a, and the volume may also be adjustable.
If the volume adjustment button is operated while a precursor display (background change precursor image) is displayed during the "background change effect during reach," the current volume level is not displayed in the display area 1600a, but it may be possible to adjust the volume.
If the volume adjustment button is operated while a precursor display (background change precursor image) is displayed during the "background change effect during reach," the current volume level may not be displayed in the display area 1600a, and it may also be impossible to adjust the volume.
When the light intensity adjustment button is operated while a precursor display (background change precursor image) is displayed during the "background change effect during reach," the current light intensity level is displayed in the display area 1600a, and the light intensity may also be adjustable.
If the light intensity adjustment button is operated while a precursor display (background change precursor image) is displayed during the "background change effect during reach," the current light intensity level is not displayed in the display area 1600a, but it may be possible to adjust the light intensity.
If the light intensity adjustment button is operated while a precursor display (background change precursor image) is displayed during the "background change effect during reach," the current light intensity level may not be displayed in the display area 1600a, and it may also be impossible to adjust the light intensity.
When a premonition display (background change premonition image) is displayed during the "background change effect during reach," if an operation is performed on the operation unit (e.g., attack button 3710) when no display instructing the operation of the operation unit is being displayed, it may be configured to do nothing.
When a premonition display (background change premonition image) is displayed in the "background change effect during reach," if an operation is performed on the operation unit (e.g., attack button 3710) when no display instructing the operation of the operation unit is being displayed, an effect image of a predetermined type may be added to the predetermined image displayed in display area 1600a and displayed.
When a premonition display (background change premonition image) is displayed during the "background change effect during reach," if an operation is performed on the operation unit (e.g., attack button 3710) when no display instructing the operation of the operation unit is being displayed, a specified light-emitting unit may be made to emit light in a specified light-emitting pattern.

As the specified light-emitting part, at least three types can be used: any one or more of the various light-emitting parts and light-emitting decorative members provided on the outer frame 2; any one or more of the various light-emitting parts and light-emitting decorative members (excluding the light guide plate 1140) provided on the game board 5; and the light guide plate 1140.
As for the light emission mode, any one, any two, or all of the three predetermined light emitting portions can be made to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode.
The light may be lit in blue, green, red, or other colors to indicate the degree of expectation. The light may also be lit or flashing, or may be turned on and off in a predetermined pattern.

In the embodiment shown above, when an operation is performed on an operation unit (e.g., the attack button 3710) without a display indicating the operation of the operation unit, a predetermined effect image is added to the predetermined image displayed in the display area 1600a and displayed. However, the effect image may be an effect image whose display mode gradually changes. For example, when an operation is performed on the operation unit, a blue effect image may first be displayed, then the color of the effect image may change from blue to green with a predetermined probability, and then the color of the effect image may change from green to red with a predetermined probability. Ultimately, the effect image may be displayed in one of blue, green, or red, and the expectation of a jackpot may be higher when the effect image is green than when it is blue, and the expectation of a jackpot may be higher when the effect image is red than when it is green.
Similarly, in an embodiment in which a predetermined light-emitting unit emits light in a predetermined light-emitting manner when an operation is performed on the operation unit (e.g., the attack button 3710) without a display instructing the operation of the operation unit, three light-emitting modes (blue, green, and red) can be used to achieve the same effect as the effect image. For example, when an operation is performed on the operation unit, the predetermined light-emitting unit may first light up blue, then change color from blue to green with a predetermined probability, and then change color from green to red with a predetermined probability. Ultimately, the predetermined light-emitting unit may emit light in one of blue, green, or red modes, but it is preferable that the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the light is green than when it is blue, and that the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the light is red than when it is green.

The above shows what type of processing is performed (or not performed) when a specific event (such as a game ball entering a starting hole) occurs in a specific situation (a situation in which a specific image, etc. is displayed) during the execution of a certain performance, but these may also be combined.
For example, in a certain situation A, when a certain event A occurs, a certain process A is executed, but in another situation B, when a certain event A occurs, a process B different from the process A is executed.
In addition, a certain process A may be executed when a certain event A occurs in a certain situation A, and another process B may be executed when another event B occurs in the certain situation A.

For example, if the game ball enters the starting hole when the precursor display (display of something surviving a flame) of the "reach operation acceptance effect" is displayed, a new standby image will not be displayed even if the number of reserved balls is less than the maximum of four, but if the game ball enters the starting hole when the specific display of the "reach pattern promotion effect" (display of the sixth meter image changing color to indicate that a reward has been won) is displayed, a standby image in some display mode (white to rainbow color) may be displayed.
Furthermore, when a special display (simulated image of the operation section) of the "operation reception effect during reach" is displayed, if the game ball enters the starting hole, a standby reserve image is displayed in some display mode (white to rainbow colors), but when a precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach notice effect due to hold" is displayed, if the game ball enters the starting hole, the standby reserve image may not be displayed in some display mode (white to rainbow colors).

Below, we will explain variations of an embodiment in which a "pre-reach battle effect" is executed followed by a "reach operation acceptance effect."

When the precursor display for the "mid-reach operation acceptance effect" (the display of someone enduring flames) is displayed, the display of the background image that was being displayed up until then may be terminated, and instead another background image may be started to be displayed. Similarly, when the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (the display of someone enduring energy bullets) is displayed, the display of the background image that was being displayed up until then may be terminated, and instead another background image may be started to be displayed.
By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the scene has switched to an important scene.

When the precursor display for the "mid-reach operation acceptance effect" (the display of someone enduring flames) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated and another background image may be displayed instead. On the other hand, when the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (the display of someone enduring energy bullets) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be continued.
The precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been reached is more important than the precursor display for the "battle before reach" which indicates whether or not the game will develop into a battle reach, but by switching the background image, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" which is more important is being displayed.

When the precursor display for the "mid-reach operation acceptance effect" (the display of someone enduring flames) is displayed, the previously displayed background image may be continued to be displayed. On the other hand, when the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (the display of someone enduring energy bullets) is displayed, the previously displayed background image may be terminated and another background image may be displayed instead.
The precursor display for the "operation reception during reach" is displayed just before it is shown whether or not a jackpot has been won, which can make the player feel tense, but by continuing to display the same background image without changing it, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When the precursor display for the "mid-reach operation acceptance effect" (the display of someone enduring flames) is displayed, the previously displayed background image may be continued to be displayed. Also, when the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (the display of someone enduring energy bullets) is displayed, the previously displayed background image may be continued to be displayed.
The precursor display for the "operation reception during reach" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and the precursor display for the "battle before reach" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not the game will develop into a battle reach, so that both situations increase the player's sense of tension, but by preventing the background image from changing before and after the precursor display is displayed, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When a precursory display for the "mid-reach operation acceptance effect" (a display of someone enduring flames) is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that had been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be lowered or the output of the sound may be interrupted. Similarly, when a precursory display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (a display of someone enduring energy bullets) is displayed, the volume of the sound that had been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be lowered or the output of the sound may be interrupted.
According to such an embodiment, the output mode of the sound that was previously output from the sound generating means is suppressed, making it sound quieter or completely inaudible, making it easier to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.

When the precursor display for the "mid-reach operation acceptance effect" (the display of enduring flames) is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that had been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be lowered or the output of the sound may be interrupted. On the other hand, when the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (the display of enduring energy bullets) is displayed, the volume of the sound that had been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be left unchanged and the output may continue as is.
According to such an embodiment, the output manner of the sound that was previously output from the sound generating means is suppressed, making it sound quieter or completely inaudible, thereby making it easier to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.
The precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been reached is more important than the precursor display for the "battle before reach" which indicates whether or not the game will develop into a battle reach, but by suppressing the sound output from the sound generating means, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" which is more important is being displayed.

When the precursor display for the "mid-reach operation acceptance effect" (the display of enduring flames) is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that has been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be left unchanged and the output may continue. On the other hand, when the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (the display of enduring energy bullets) is displayed, the volume of the sound that has been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be lowered or the output of the sound may be interrupted.
The precursor display for the "operation reception during reach" is displayed just before it is shown whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which can make the player feel tense, but by continuing to output the sound that has been output from the sound generating means without changing the volume, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When a precursory display for the "mid-reach operation acceptance effect" (a display of withstanding flames) is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that had been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be left unchanged and continue to be output. Also, when a precursory display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (a display of withstanding energy bullets) is displayed, the volume of the sound that had been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be left unchanged and continue to be output.
The precursor display for the "operation reception during reach effect" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and the precursor display for the "battle effect before reach effect" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not the effect will develop into a battle reach, so that each of these situations increases the player's sense of tension, but by preventing the volume of the sound that has been output from the sound generating means from changing when the precursor display is displayed, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

The sound (BGM, etc.) output when the precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" (the display showing that the character is surviving the flames) is displayed may be the same as the sound output when the precursor display for the "battle before reach" (the display showing that the character is surviving the energy bullets) is displayed, or it may be a different sound.
The output duration of the sound output when the precursor display for the "in-reach operation acceptance effect" (the display of enduring flames) is displayed may be the same as or different from the output duration of the sound output when the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (the display of enduring energy bullets) is displayed. If the lengths are different, one may be longer than the other, or one may be shorter than the other.

The length of time that the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of someone enduring the flames) is displayed and the length of the sound (BGM, etc.) that is output when the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of someone enduring the flames) is displayed may be the same or different. If the lengths are different, one may be longer than the other, or one may be shorter than the other.
The length of time that the "pre-reach battle effect" precursor display (the display that shows that the character is withstanding the energy bullets) is displayed and the output time of the sound that is output when the "pre-reach battle effect" precursor display (the display that shows that the character is withstanding the energy bullets) is displayed may be the same or different. If the lengths are different, one may be longer than the other, or one may be shorter than the other.

A plurality of light emission patterns may be provided for the predetermined light emitting section, and a light emission effect may be executed in which the predetermined light emitting section emits light in a light emission manner based on the predetermined light emission pattern depending on the game situation.
The light emission pattern may be, for example, a light emission pattern in which a predetermined color and a predetermined amount of light are illuminated for five seconds.
Alternatively, a light emission pattern in which the light is turned off for 5 seconds may be adopted.
Alternatively, a light emission pattern may be adopted in which the light is turned on for 0.5 seconds and then turned off for 0.5 seconds (total of 1 second) ten times. In this light emission pattern, the light emission pattern is executed over 10 seconds.
Alternatively, a light emission pattern may be adopted in which a high light intensity for 0.5 seconds and a low light intensity for 0.5 seconds (total of 1 second) are repeated 10 times. In this light emission pattern, the light emission pattern is executed over 10 seconds.
Alternatively, a lighting pattern may be adopted in which the lighting is yellow for 0.5 seconds, white for 0.3 seconds, and off for 0.2 seconds (total of 1 second) repeated five times. In this lighting pattern, the lighting pattern is executed over 5 seconds.
Alternatively, a lighting pattern may be adopted in which the light is lit in yellow for 1 second, lit in white for 0.6 seconds, and turned off for 0.4 seconds (total of 2 seconds) five times, followed by the light is lit in yellow for 0.5 seconds, lit in white for 0.3 seconds, and turned off for 0.2 seconds (total of 1 second) five times. In this lighting pattern, the lighting pattern is executed over 15 seconds.
It should be noted that the light emission patterns are not limited to these, and more light emission patterns may be adopted.
These lighting patterns can be used appropriately in, for example, "operation acceptance effect during reach,""text background color change effect during reach,""pre-reach battle effect,""background change effect during reach,""reach notice effect due to hold,""reach pattern promotion effect,""reach content selection effect," etc.
In this way, by adopting multiple lighting patterns that appropriately combine the lighting time, lighting time, light intensity, lighting color, etc. of a specified light-emitting element, it is possible to realize lighting effects with appropriate lighting patterns that correspond to the game situation.

When a precursory display for the "mid-reach operation acceptance effect" (a display of enduring flames) is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting element may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting effect using another light-emitting pattern may be started. Similarly, when a precursory display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (a display of enduring energy bullets) is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting element may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting effect using another light-emitting pattern may be started.
According to this embodiment, it is possible to make it easier for the driver to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.

When the precursor display for the "mid-reach operation acceptance effect" (the display of enduring flames) is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting element may be terminated, and instead, the execution of a light-emitting effect using another light-emitting pattern may be started. On the other hand, when the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (the display of enduring energy bullets) is displayed, the light-emitting effect currently being executed may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting element and the predetermined light-emitting pattern.
The precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" effect, which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been reached, is more important than the precursor display for the "battle before reach" effect, which indicates whether or not the effect will develop into a battle reach. However, by starting a new light-emitting effect executed using a specified light-emitting section, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" effect, which is more important, is being displayed.

When a precursory display for the "mid-reach operation acceptance effect" (a display of enduring flames) is displayed, the light-emitting effect currently being executed may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern executed using a predetermined light-emitting element. On the other hand, when a precursory display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (a display of enduring energy bullets) is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern executed using a predetermined light-emitting element may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting effect with another light-emitting pattern may be started.
The precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" is displayed just before it is shown whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which can cause tension in the player, but by continuing the light-emitting effect currently being executed without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern using a predetermined light-emitting element, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When a precursory display for the "mid-reach operation acceptance effect" (a display of enduring flames) is displayed, the currently executing light-emitting effect may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern with a predetermined light-emitting unit. Also, when a precursory display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (a display of enduring energy bullets) is displayed, the currently executing light-emitting effect may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting unit with a predetermined light-emitting pattern.
The precursor display for the "operation reception during reach" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and the precursor display for the "battle before reach" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not the game will develop into a battle reach, so that each of these situations increases the player's sense of tension, but by preventing the light emission pattern that has been executed up until that point from changing when the precursor display is displayed, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When a premonition display for the "mid-reach operation reception effect" (a display of something enduring flames) is displayed, a predetermined movable decorative member may be made to start moving. Similarly, when a premonition display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (a display of something enduring energy bullets) is displayed, a predetermined movable decorative member may be made to start moving.
According to this embodiment, it is possible to make it easier for the driver to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.

When the precursor display for the "mid-reach operation reception effect" (a display of something enduring a flame) is displayed, the movement of a predetermined movable decorative member may be started. On the other hand, when the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (a display of something enduring an energy bullet) is displayed, the movement of the predetermined movable decorative member may not be started (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained).
The precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been reached is more important than the precursor display for the "battle before reach" which indicates whether or not the game will develop into a battle reach, but by starting the operation of a specified movable decorative member, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" which is more important is being displayed.

When the precursor display for the "mid-reach operation reception effect" (the display showing the character enduring the flames) is displayed, the specified movable decorative member may not start operating (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained). On the other hand, when the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (the display showing the character enduring the energy bullets) is displayed, the specified movable decorative member may start operating.
The precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which can create tension for the player, but by not starting the operation of the specified movable decorative member (maintaining the state before the precursor display is displayed), the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When the precursor display for the "in-reach operation reception effect" (the display showing the character enduring the flames) is displayed, the specified movable decorative member may not start operating (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained). Also, when the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (the display showing the character enduring the energy bullets) is displayed, the specified movable decorative member may not start operating (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained).
The precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and the precursor display for the "battle before reach" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not the game will develop into a battle reach, so each of these situations increases the player's sense of tension, but by not starting the operation of a specified movable decorative member when the precursor display is displayed (maintaining the state before the precursor display was displayed), the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

It is also possible to provide a situation where a precursor display for a "reach operation acceptance effect" or "reach battle effect" begins to be displayed while a movable decorative element is in motion. In this case, it is recommended that the movement of the movable decorative element be set to "maintain the state (movement pattern) that existed before the precursor display was displayed," as described above.

The movable decorative element can move between a standby position and a moving position, rotate, oscillate, or move in any manner. A combination of these movements can also be used. Meanwhile, when the movable decorative element is not moving (when it has not yet started moving), it is stationary.
These operational modes can be adopted appropriately not only in "operation acceptance during reach" and "pre-reach battle" but also in "text background color change during reach", "background change during reach", "reach notice effect due to hold", "reach pattern promotion effect", "reach content selection effect", etc.

The length of time that the precursor display for the "in-reach operation acceptance effect" (the display of withstanding the flames) is displayed may be the same as the length of time that the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (the display of withstanding the energy bullets) is displayed.
Since it is possible to experience in advance the change in the display content, where the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets) switches to the specific display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of the demon character fainting), the tension felt when the precursor display for the "in-reach operation acceptance effect" (display of withstanding flames) is displayed (the tension of wondering when the special display for the "in-reach operation acceptance effect" (simulated image of the operation section) will appear) can be moderately alleviated.

Alternatively, the time for which the precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" (the display of enduring flames) is displayed may be longer than the time for which the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle" (the display of enduring energy bullets) is displayed.
While the "pre-reach battle effect" is an effect that indicates whether or not the game will develop into a reach effect, the "reach operation acceptance effect" is an effect that indicates whether or not the game will be a jackpot, and the latter is more important as an effect. Therefore, by relatively shortening the time that the premonition display of the "pre-reach battle effect" (the display that the game is withstanding the energy bullets) is displayed, it is possible to prevent the player's expectations for a jackpot from being excessively aroused.
Alternatively, the time for which the precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" (the display of withstanding flames) is displayed may be shorter than the time for which the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle" (the display of withstanding energy bullets) is displayed.
The display of the precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" is performed after the display of the precursor display for the "reach pre-battle effect." Also, after the precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (the display of someone enduring a flame) is displayed, the special display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (simulated image of the operation unit) is always displayed. This causes the player to feel a sense of tension for a long period of time, but by relatively shortening the time for which the precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (the display of someone enduring a flame) is displayed, it is possible to make the player aware that the special display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (simulated image of the operation unit) will be displayed, while preventing the player from becoming overly excited about a jackpot.

When the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (a display of enduring flames) is displayed, only the current hold image is displayed without displaying the standby hold image, and when the precursor display for the "battle effect before reach" (a display of enduring energy bullets) is displayed, both the standby hold image and the current hold image may be displayed.
When the precursor display (a display of a player enduring a flame) of the "operation reception effect during a reach" is displayed, a reserve change effect in which the current reserved image may be upgraded with a predetermined probability may be executed with a predetermined probability. By adopting such an embodiment, the player can enjoy the reserve change effect while the precursor display (a display of a player enduring a flame) of the "operation reception effect during a reach" is displayed.

Regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display (display of enduring flames) for the ``reach operation acceptance effect,'' the following relationship pattern may be adopted.
For example, the hold change effect may be executed and the precursor display for the ``reach operation acceptance effect'' (display of something enduring a flame) may be displayed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of the precursor display for the ``reach operation acceptance effect'' (display of something enduring a flame), end of display of the precursor display for the ``reach operation acceptance effect'' (display of something enduring a flame), and end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the hold change effect may be executed and the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (display of something enduring a flame) may be displayed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (display of something enduring a flame), end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (display of something enduring a flame).
Alternatively, the hold change effect may be executed and the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (display of something enduring the flames) may be displayed in the following order: the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (display of something enduring the flames) begins, the hold change effect begins, the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (display of something enduring the flames) ends, and the hold change effect ends.
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring a flame) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring a flame), start of the hold change effect, end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring a flame).

On the other hand, when the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of enduring flames) is displayed, the hold change effect that changes the current hold image may not be executed.
According to such an embodiment, the player can focus on the special display (simulated image of the operation unit) of the "operation acceptance effect during reach" that is displayed after the display of the precursor display of the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (display of enduring flames).

When the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (a display of enduring flames) is displayed, only the current hold image is displayed without displaying the standby hold image, and when the precursor display for the "battle effect before reach" (a display of enduring energy bullets) is displayed, both the standby hold image and the current hold image may be displayed.
When the premonition display of the "before-reach battle effect" (the display of enduring the energy bullet) is displayed, the hold change effect in which the current hold image may be promoted with a predetermined probability may be executed with a predetermined probability. By adopting such an embodiment, the hold change effect can be enjoyed while the premonition display of the "before-reach battle effect" (the display of enduring the energy bullet) is displayed.

Regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display of the ``pre-reach battle effect'' (display of enduring the energy bullet), the following relationship pattern may be adopted.
For example, the hold change effect may be executed and the premonition display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (indication that the player is withstanding the energy bullet) may be displayed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of the premonition display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (indication that the player is withstanding the energy bullet), end of display of the premonition display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (indication that the player is withstanding the energy bullet), and end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets) may be performed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets), end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets).
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets) may be performed in the following order: the start of the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets), the start of the hold change effect, the end of the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets), and the end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets), start of the hold change effect, end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets).

On the other hand, when the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (the display showing that the player is withstanding the energy bullet) is displayed, the hold change effect that changes the current hold image may not be executed.
According to such an embodiment, the player can focus on the specific display of the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of the Oni character fainting) that appears after the display of the precursor display of the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of the Oni character surviving an energy bullet).

When the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (a display of enduring flames) is displayed, only the current hold image is displayed without displaying the standby hold image, and when the precursor display for the "battle effect before reach" (a display of enduring energy bullets) is displayed, both the standby hold image and the current hold image may be displayed.
When the precursor display of the "pre-reach battle effect" (the display of enduring the energy bullet) is displayed, a hold change effect in which the standby hold image may be upgraded with a predetermined probability may be executed with a predetermined probability. By adopting such an embodiment, the hold change effect can be enjoyed while the precursor display of the "pre-reach battle effect" (the display of enduring the energy bullet) is displayed.

Regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the standby hold image and the display period of the precursor display of the ``pre-reach battle effect'' (display of enduring the energy bullet), the following relationship pattern may be adopted.
For example, the hold change effect may be executed and the premonition display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (indication that the player is withstanding the energy bullet) may be displayed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of the premonition display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (indication that the player is withstanding the energy bullet), end of display of the premonition display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (indication that the player is withstanding the energy bullet), and end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets) may be performed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets), end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets).
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets) may be performed in the following order: the start of the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets), the start of the hold change effect, the end of the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets), and the end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets), start of the hold change effect, end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets).

On the other hand, when the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (the display showing that the player is withstanding the energy bullet) is displayed, the hold change effect that changes the standby hold image may not be executed.
According to such an embodiment, the player can focus on the specific display of the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of the Oni character fainting) that appears after the display of the precursor display of the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of the Oni character surviving an energy bullet).

Four patterns are shown regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display (display of enduring flames) for the ``reach operation acceptance effect.''
In addition, four patterns are shown regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display of the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of enduring the energy bullet).
In addition, four patterns are shown regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the standby hold image and the display period of the precursor display of the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of enduring the energy bullet).
Although all of these can be executed independently, an embodiment can be formed by appropriately combining a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display for the ``in-reach operation acceptance effect'' (the display showing the player withstanding the flames), a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display for the ``pre-reach battle effect'' (the display showing the player withstanding the energy bullets), and a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the standby hold image and the display period of the precursor display for the ``pre-reach battle effect'' (the display showing the player withstanding the energy bullets).

There may be multiple types of hold change effects, and different patterns may be used depending on the type of hold change effect. For example, different patterns may be used for hold change effects that hide holds with smoke and hold change effects that hide holds with swords. For example, in the case of hold change effects that hide holds with smoke, the order of execution is start of the hold change effect, start of display of the pre-reach battle effect sign (indicating that the player is withstanding energy bullets), end of display of the pre-reach battle effect sign (indicating that the player is withstanding energy bullets), and end of the hold change effect. In the case of hold change effects that hide holds with swords, the order of execution is start of the hold change effect, start of display of the pre-reach battle effect sign (indicating that the player is withstanding energy bullets), end of the hold change effect, and end of display of the pre-reach battle effect sign (indicating that the player is withstanding energy bullets).

The display priority of the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of withstanding flames) and the precursor display for the "battle effect before reach" (the display of withstanding energy bullets) may be higher or lower than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change effect (for example, an image that approaches the current hold image or standby hold image and displays an impact on the current hold image or standby hold image).
In addition, the display priority of the precursor display (display of enduring flames) for the "operation acceptance during reach" effect may be higher than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change effect, and the display priority of the precursor display (display of enduring energy bullets) for the "pre-reach battle effect" may be lower than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the display priority of the precursor display (display of withstanding the flames) for the "operation acceptance during reach" effect may be lower than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change effect, and the display priority of the precursor display (display of withstanding the energy bullets) for the "battle before reach" effect may be higher than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change effect.

When the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of something enduring the flames) is displayed, a predetermined expectation effect (an expectation effect that raises the expectation of a win, hereafter referred to as the "predetermined expectation effect") different from the hold change effect may be executed with a predetermined probability. The predetermined expectation effect may, for example, be a display mode such as displaying a predetermined character in display area 1600a. By using such an embodiment, the sense of anticipation can be increased while the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of something enduring the flames) is displayed. The display mode of the standby hold image or current hold image will not change due to the predetermined expectation effect.

The following relationship patterns may be adopted for the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (display of enduring flames) for the ``reach operation acceptance effect.''
For example, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring a flame) may be performed in the following order: start of the specified expected effect, start of display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring a flame), end of display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring a flame), and end of the specified expected effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring the flames) may be performed in the following order: start of the specified expected effect, start of display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring the flames), end of the specified expected effect, and end of display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring the flames).
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring the flames) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring the flames), start of the specified expected effect, end of display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring the flames), and end of the specified expected effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring a flame) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring a flame), start of the specified expected effect, end of the specified expected effect, and end of display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring a flame).

When the "Reach Operation Acceptance Display" precursor display (display of someone enduring flames) is displayed, the specified expected display may not be executed.

When the pre-reach battle effect warning display (display of withstanding energy bullets) is displayed, a predetermined expectation display different from the hold change display may be executed with a predetermined probability. The predetermined expectation display may, for example, be a display mode such as displaying a predetermined character in display area 1600a. By using such an embodiment, it is possible to increase the sense of anticipation while the pre-reach battle effect warning display (display of withstanding energy bullets) is displayed. Note that the display mode of the standby hold image or current hold image does not change due to the predetermined expectation display.

Regarding the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display of the "pre-reach battle effect" (the display of enduring the energy bullet), the following relationship pattern may be adopted.
For example, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of the player enduring the energy bullets) may be performed in the following order: start of the specified expected effect, start of display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of the player enduring the energy bullets), end of display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of the player enduring the energy bullets), and end of the specified expected effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of the player enduring the energy bullets) may be performed in the following order: start of the specified expected effect, start of display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of the player enduring the energy bullets), end of the specified expected effect, and end of display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of the player enduring the energy bullets).
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected performance and the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle performance" (display of withstanding energy bullets) may be performed in the following order: the start of the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle performance" (display of withstanding energy bullets), the start of the specified expected performance, the end of the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle performance" (display of withstanding energy bullets), and the end of the specified expected performance.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``pre-reach battle effect'' (display of the player enduring the energy bullets) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the ``pre-reach battle effect'' (display of the player enduring the energy bullets), start of the specified expected effect, end of the specified expected effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the ``pre-reach battle effect'' (display of the player enduring the energy bullets).

When the "pre-reach battle effect" warning display (indicating that the player is surviving an energy bullet) is displayed, it is also possible to prevent the specified expected effect from being executed.

The specified expected effects can be, for example, effects that prompt the player to operate the operating means, or effects that do not prompt the player to operate the operating means (such as comment preview effects, step-up preview effects, and premium effects that confirm a jackpot).

Four patterns are shown for the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (the display enduring the flames) for the "operation acceptance effect during reach."
In addition, four patterns are shown for the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (display of enduring energy bullets) of the "pre-reach battle effect."
Although each of these can be executed independently, an embodiment may be formed by appropriately combining a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of a predetermined expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (the display resistant to flames) for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' and a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of a predetermined expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (the display resistant to energy bullets) for the ``pre-reach battle effect.''

Although multiple types of predetermined expected effects are shown, different patterns may be adopted depending on the type of predetermined expected effect. For example, one of four patterns may be adopted when executing one expected effect, either an effect that prompts the player to operate the operation means or an effect that does not prompt the player to operate the operation means (such as a comment preview effect, a step-up preview effect, or a premium effect that confirms a jackpot), and another of the four patterns may be adopted when executing another expected effect. For example, in the case of a comment preview effect, the specified expected effect is executed and the pre-reach battle effect sign (indication that the player is withstanding energy bullets) is displayed in the following order: start of the comment preview effect, start of display of the pre-reach battle effect sign (indication that the player is withstanding energy bullets), end of display of the pre-reach battle effect sign (indication that the player is withstanding energy bullets), and end of the comment preview effect; in the case of a step-up preview effect, the specified expected effect is executed and the pre-reach battle effect sign (indication that the player is withstanding energy bullets) is displayed in the following order: start of display of the pre-reach battle effect sign (indication that the player is withstanding energy bullets), start of the step-up preview effect, end of display of the pre-reach battle effect sign (indication that the player is withstanding energy bullets), and end of the step-up preview effect.

The display priority of the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display showing that it is withstanding the flames) and the precursor display for the "battle effect before reach" (the display showing that it is withstanding the energy bullets) may be higher or lower than the display priority of the images displayed in the specified expectation effect (for example, simulated image of the operation section, comment image, step-up image, premium image, etc.).
In addition, the display priority of the precursor display (display of withstanding flames) for the "mid-reach operation acceptance display" may be set higher than the display priority of the image displayed in a specified expected display, and the display priority of the precursor display (display of withstanding energy bullets) for the "pre-reach battle display" may be set lower than the display priority of the image displayed in a specified expected display.
Alternatively, the display priority of the precursor display (display of withstanding the flames) for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" may be lower than the display priority of the image displayed in the specified expected effect, and the display priority of the precursor display (display of withstanding the energy bullets) for the "battle effect before reach" may be higher than the display priority of the image displayed in the specified expected effect.

The display of a precursor to the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (a display of someone enduring flames) or a precursor to the "battle effect before reach" (a display of someone enduring energy bullets) may be repeatedly displayed.
For example, the demon character may be caused to repeatedly move backward and forward multiple times by flames or energy bullets while the warning display is being displayed. By adopting such a display mode, it is possible to reduce the capacity and also to alleviate the sense of tension caused by the warning display.
On the other hand, the display of the precursor to the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of enduring flames) and the precursor to the "battle effect before reach" (the display of enduring energy bullets) may not be displayed repeatedly.
For example, while the warning display is being displayed, the demon character may be shown slowly retreating due to flames or energy bullets. By adopting such a display mode, the image quality is improved and the player can be excited.

The precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of someone enduring flames) may be displayed repeatedly, and the precursor display for the "battle effect before reach" (the display of someone enduring energy bullets) may not be displayed repeatedly.
Alternatively, the precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" (the display of enduring flames) may not be displayed repeatedly, and the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle" (the display of enduring energy bullets) may be displayed repeatedly.
Alternatively, it is possible to prevent both the display of the precursor to the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of enduring flames) and the display of the precursor to the "battle effect before reach" (the display of enduring energy bullets) from being repeated.

An embodiment has been shown in which the display of a precursory display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (a display of withstanding flames) or the display of a precursory display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (a display of withstanding energy bullets) may be repeatedly displayed, but in response to the display of the precursory display, light-emitting means such as luminous decorative members may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner, or sound may be output from sound generating means in a predetermined manner.
In this case, the light or sound output mode may be repeated in accordance with the repetition of the display of the predictive display. Alternatively, the light or sound may be output in a predetermined pattern throughout the entire display period of the predictive display without being associated with the repetition of the display of the predictive display (i.e., without repeatedly outputting the light or sound). Furthermore, if the display of the predictive display is not repeated, the light or sound may also be output in a predetermined pattern throughout the entire display period of the predictive display without being repeatedly output.

In the embodiment shown, there is only one type of precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (a display of withstanding flames) and one type of precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (a display of withstanding energy bullets), but either one or both may be of multiple types.
For example, two types of facial expressions of the demon character displayed as a premonition display may be prepared, one in which the demon character is displayed with a relaxed expression and the other in which the demon character is displayed with a stressed expression, so that the latter has a higher probability of winning than the former. Note that the number of types is not limited to two, and three or more types may be used. In this case, it is also preferable to have three or more types (three stages) of expectation.
The type of precursor display (the display of someone enduring the flames) for the "mid-reach operation acceptance effect" may be one type, and the type of precursor display (the display of someone enduring the energy bullets) for the "pre-reach battle effect" may be multiple types (for example, the two types mentioned above). In this case, too, it is advisable to vary the degree of expectation depending on the type of precursor display.
Alternatively, there may be multiple types of precursor displays (displays of withstanding flames) for the "operation acceptance during reach" effect (for example, the two types mentioned above), and only one type of precursor display (displays of withstanding energy bullets) for the "pre-reach battle" effect.
Alternatively, there may be multiple types of precursor displays (displays resistant to flames) for the "operation acceptance during reach" effect (for example, the two types mentioned above), and multiple types of precursor displays (displays resistant to energy bullets) for the "pre-reach battle" effect (for example, the two types mentioned above).
When only one display mode of the precursor display is provided, there is no difference in the degree of expectation while the precursor display is being displayed, so a stable sense of expectation can be provided. On the other hand, when multiple display modes are provided, a display with a high degree of expectation is displayed while the precursor display is being displayed, so the sense of expectation can be increased.

In the above embodiment, the precursor display for the "In-reach operation acceptance effect" (the display of enduring flames) and the precursor display for the "Pre-reach battle effect" (the display of enduring energy bullets) are displayed in the same single variable display, but the "Pre-reach battle effect" may also be executed as a pre-reading effect. In this case, the "Pre-reach battle effect" is executed in a predetermined variable display, and the "In-reach operation acceptance effect" is executed in a subsequent variable display. When the "Pre-reach battle effect" is executed as a pre-reading effect, it is advisable to stop displaying each variable display in a non-reach miss mode until the predicted reach effect is executed. This can create a sense of anticipation even when a non-reach miss variable pattern is executed.

When the "pre-reach battle effect" is executed as a look-ahead effect, only the precursor display (indicating that the energy bullets are withstanding) may be displayed, or in addition to the precursor display (indicating that the energy bullets are withstanding), a specific display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (indicating that the demon character is unconscious) and a related display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (indicating that the comment "Enemy is injured!") may be displayed. Note that one or both of the specific and related displays may be displayed until the display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the hold that was the subject of the look-ahead effect begins to change (or until the reach effect begins).

In the embodiment shown, the precursor display for the "Pre-reach battle effect" (indicating that the character is withstanding an energy bullet) is displayed first, followed by the precursor display for the "In-reach operation acceptance effect" (indicating that the character is withstanding a flame). However, it is also possible to have the precursor display for the "In-reach operation acceptance effect" (indicating that the character is withstanding a flame) be displayed without displaying the precursor display for the "Pre-reach battle effect" (indicating that the character is withstanding an energy bullet). This embodiment can instantly increase the sense of anticipation.

In the embodiment shown, the reach effect (Demon Battle Reach) is executed after the "pre-reach battle effect" is executed, but it is also possible to have the reach effect (Demon Battle Reach) executed without executing the "pre-reach battle effect." According to this embodiment, the sense of anticipation can be increased all at once.

In one variation, the probability that a premonition display for the "Pre-Reach Battle Effect" (indication that the character is withstanding an energy bullet) will be displayed after a premonition display for the "In-Reach Operation Acceptance Effect" (indication that the character is withstanding a flame) may be made higher than the probability that a premonition display for the "In-Reach Operation Acceptance Effect" (indication that the character is withstanding a flame) will be displayed, without displaying a premonition display for the "Pre-Reach Battle Effect" (indication that the character is withstanding an energy bullet). In this embodiment, the premonition display for the "Pre-Reach Battle Effect" (indication that the character is withstanding an energy bullet) is displayed at appropriate intervals, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

In one variation, the probability that a reach effect (Demon Battle Reach) will be executed after a "pre-reach battle effect" is executed may be made higher than the probability that a reach effect (Demon Battle Reach) will be executed without executing a "pre-reach battle effect." In such an embodiment, the "pre-reach battle effect" is executed appropriately, preventing a decline in interest.

In one variation, the probability that a premonition display for the "Pre-Reach Battle Effect" (a display of something withstanding an energy bullet) will be displayed after the premonition display for the "In-Reach Operation Acceptance Effect" (a display of something withstanding a flame) may be lowered below the probability that a premonition display for the "In-Reach Operation Acceptance Effect" (a display of something withstanding a flame) will be displayed, without displaying the premonition display for the "Pre-Reach Battle Effect" (a display of something withstanding an energy bullet). According to this embodiment, the sense of anticipation can be instantly heightened when the premonition display for the "Pre-Reach Battle Effect" (a display of something withstanding an energy bullet) is displayed.

In one variation, the probability that a reach effect (Demon Battle Reach) will be executed after a "pre-reach battle effect" is executed may be lower than the probability that a reach effect (Demon Battle Reach) will be executed without executing a "pre-reach battle effect." According to this embodiment, the sense of anticipation can be instantly heightened when a "pre-reach battle effect" is executed.

The expectation level when a premonition display for the "Pre-Reach Battle Effect" (a display of someone withstanding an energy bullet) is displayed followed by a premonition display for the "In-Reach Operation Acceptance Effect" (a display of someone withstanding a flame) may be higher than the expectation level when a premonition display for the "In-Reach Operation Acceptance Effect" (a display of someone withstanding a flame) is displayed without displaying the premonition display for the "Pre-Reach Battle Effect" (a display of someone withstanding an energy bullet). According to this embodiment, the sense of expectation can be increased all at once when the premonition display for the "Pre-Reach Battle Effect" (a display of someone withstanding an energy bullet) is displayed.

The expectation level when a reach effect (Demon Battle Reach) is executed after a "pre-reach battle effect" is executed may be higher than the expectation level when a reach effect (Demon Battle Reach) is executed without executing a "pre-reach battle effect." According to this embodiment, the sense of expectation can be increased all at once when a "pre-reach battle effect" is executed.

The expectation level when a premonition display for the "Pre-Reach Battle Effect" (a display of the player enduring energy bullets) is displayed followed by a premonition display for the "In-Reach Operation Acceptance Effect" (a display of the player enduring flames) may be lowered than the expectation level when a premonition display for the "In-Reach Operation Acceptance Effect" (a display of the player enduring flames) is displayed, without displaying the premonition display for the "Pre-Reach Battle Effect" (a display of the player enduring energy bullets). In this embodiment, the premonition display for the "Pre-Reach Battle Effect" (a display of the player enduring energy bullets) is displayed at appropriate intervals, thereby preventing a decrease in interest.

The expectation level when a reach effect (Demon Battle Reach) is executed after a "pre-reach battle effect" is executed may be lower than the expectation level when a reach effect (Demon Battle Reach) is executed without executing the "pre-reach battle effect." In this embodiment, the "pre-reach battle effect" is executed appropriately, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

Below, we will explain variations of an embodiment in which a "reach operation acceptance effect" is executed after a "reach notification effect due to hold" is executed.

The "reach notice effect due to hold" is also a hold change effect, but other types of hold change effects may be adopted. The "reach notice effect due to hold" may be the first hold change effect, and the second hold change effect may be executed as another type of hold change effect.
For example, in the second reserve change effect, first, a sword flies from above toward the target reserve image (current reserve image or standby reserve image) and stabs into the top of the reserve image. Next, a premonition display is displayed to raise expectations as to whether the reserve image will break. Specifically, the premonition display is a display in which the circular reserve image with the sword stabbed in it cracks and shakes. After this display, either a display in which the reserve image breaks or a display in which the reserve image does not break is performed. If the reserve image breaks, the changed reserve image is displayed, and if the reserve image does not break, the original reserve image is displayed. As the reserve image after the change, a reserve image of a color with a higher expectation than the reserve image before the change is displayed. For example, if a white reserve image was displayed before the change, a blue or green reserve image is displayed as the reserve image after the change.
In this way, by displaying a precursor display of the second hold change effect (a display in which the hold image shakes), the player can be made to feel a sense of anticipation for the hold image to change.

When the precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (the display of someone enduring a flame) is displayed, the display of the background image that had been displayed up until then may be terminated, and instead another background image may be started to be displayed. Similarly, when the precursor display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (the semi-transparent reach name display) is displayed, the display of the background image that had been displayed up until then may be terminated, and instead another background image may be started to be displayed.
By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the scene has switched to an important scene.
Also, when the premonition display of the second hold change effect (the display of the hold image shaking) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated and instead the display of another background image may be started. Alternatively, even when the premonition display of the second hold change effect (the display of the hold image shaking) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be continued.

When the precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (the display of someone enduring a flame) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated and another background image may be displayed instead. On the other hand, when the precursor display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (the semi-transparent display of the reach name) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be continued.
The precursor display of the "operation acceptance during reach" which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been reached is more important than the precursor display of the "reach notice effect due to hold" which indicates whether or not it will develop into a battle reach, but by switching the background image, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display of the "operation acceptance during reach" which is more important is being displayed.
Also, when the premonition display of the second hold change effect (the display of the hold image shaking) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated and instead the display of another background image may be started. Alternatively, even when the premonition display of the second hold change effect (the display of the hold image shaking) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be continued.

When the precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (the display of someone enduring a flame) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be continued. On the other hand, when the precursor display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (the semi-transparent display of the reach name) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated, and instead another background image may be displayed.
The precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" is displayed just before it is shown whether or not a jackpot has been won, which can make the player feel tense, but by continuing to display the same background image without changing it, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.
Also, when the premonition display of the second hold change effect (the display of the hold image shaking) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated and instead the display of another background image may be started. Alternatively, even when the premonition display of the second hold change effect (the display of the hold image shaking) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be continued.

When the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of someone enduring a flame) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be continued. Also, when the precursor display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (the semi-transparent display of the reach name) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be continued.
The precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been achieved, and the precursor display for the "reach notice effect due to hold" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not it will develop into a battle reach, so each of these situations increases the player's sense of tension, but by preventing the background image from changing before and after the precursor display is displayed, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.
Also, when the premonition display of the second hold change effect (the display of the hold image shaking) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated and instead the display of another background image may be started. Alternatively, even when the premonition display of the second hold change effect (the display of the hold image shaking) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be continued.

When a precursory display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (a display of someone enduring a flame) is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that had been output from the sound generation means up until then may be lowered or the output of the sound may be interrupted. Similarly, when a precursory display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (a semi-transparent reach name display) is displayed, the volume of the sound that had been output from the sound generation means up until then may be lowered or the output of the sound may be interrupted.
According to such an embodiment, the output mode of the sound that was previously output from the sound generating means is suppressed, making it sound quieter or completely inaudible, making it easier to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.
In addition, when the precursor display for the second hold change effect (the display of the hold image shaking) is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that was being output may be lowered or the sound output may be interrupted, or the sound output may be continued as is without changing the volume of the sound that had been output up until then.

When the precursor display of the "reach operation acceptance effect" (the display of someone enduring a flame) is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that has been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be lowered or the output of the sound may be interrupted. On the other hand, when the precursor display of the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (the semi-transparent display of the reach name) is displayed, the volume of the sound that has been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be left unchanged and the output may continue as is.
According to such an embodiment, the output manner of the sound that was previously output from the sound generating means is suppressed, making it sound quieter or completely inaudible, thereby making it easier to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.
The precursor display of the "operation acceptance effect during reach" which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been won is more important than the precursor display of the "reach notice effect due to hold" which indicates whether or not it will develop into a battle reach, but by suppressing the sound output from the sound generating means, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display of the "operation acceptance effect during reach" which is more important is being displayed.
In addition, when the precursor display for the second hold change effect (the display of the hold image shaking) is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that was being output may be lowered or the output of the sound may be interrupted, or the output of the sound may be continued as is without changing the volume of the sound that had been output up until then.

When the precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (the display of someone enduring a flame) is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that has been output from the sound generating means up until then may be made to continue to be output as is without being changed. On the other hand, when the precursor display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (the semi-transparent reach name display) is displayed, the volume of the sound that has been output from the sound generating means up until then may be lowered or the sound output may be interrupted.
The precursor display for the "operation reception during reach" is displayed just before it is shown whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which can make the player feel tense, but by continuing to output the sound that has been output from the sound generating means without changing the volume, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.
In addition, when the precursor display for the second hold change effect (the display of the hold image shaking) is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that was being output may be lowered or the sound output may be interrupted, or the sound output may be continued as is without changing the volume of the sound that had been output up until then.

When a precursory display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (a display of someone enduring a flame) is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that had been output from the sound generating means up until that point may be left unchanged and continue to be output. Also, when a precursory display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (a semi-transparent reach name display) is displayed, the volume of the sound that had been output from the sound generating means up until that point may be left unchanged and continue to be output.
The precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been achieved, and the precursor display for the "reach notice effect due to hold" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not it will develop into a battle reach, so that each of these situations increases the player's sense of tension, but by preventing the volume of the sound that has been output from the sound generating means from changing when the precursor display is displayed, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.
In addition, when the precursor display for the second hold change effect (the display of the hold image shaking) is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that was being output may be lowered or the sound output may be interrupted, or the sound output may be continued as is without changing the volume of the sound that had been output up until then.

The sound (BGM, etc.) output when the precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" (the display of enduring flames) is displayed may be the same as the sound output when the precursor display for the "reach notice display due to hold" (the translucent reach name display) is displayed, or it may be a different sound.
The output duration of the sound output when the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of someone enduring the flames) is displayed may be the same as or different from the output duration of the sound output when the precursor display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (the semi-transparent reach name display) is displayed. If the lengths are different, one may be longer than the other, or one may be shorter than the other.

The length of time that the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of someone enduring the flames) is displayed and the length of the sound (BGM, etc.) that is output when the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of someone enduring the flames) is displayed may be the same or different. If the lengths are different, one may be longer than the other, or one may be shorter than the other.
The length of time that the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the "reach advance notice performance due to hold" is displayed and the output time of the sound that is output when the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the "reach advance notice performance due to hold" is displayed may be the same length or different lengths. If the lengths are different, one may be longer than the other, or one may be shorter than the other.

When a precursory display (a display of something enduring a flame) for the "operation acceptance display during reach" is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting display with a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting element may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting display with another light-emitting pattern may be started. Similarly, when a precursory display (a translucent reach name display) for the "reach notice display due to hold" is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting display with a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting element may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting display with another light-emitting pattern may be started.
According to this embodiment, it is possible to make it easier for the driver to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.
Furthermore, when a precursor display for the second hold change effect (a display in which the hold image shakes) is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting unit may be terminated, and instead the execution of the light-emitting effect using another light-emitting pattern may be started, or the light-emitting effect currently being executed may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting unit using a predetermined light-emitting pattern.

When the precursor display of the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of enduring flames) is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting unit may be terminated, and instead the execution of a light-emitting effect with another light-emitting pattern may be started. On the other hand, when the precursor display of the "reach notice effect due to hold" (the translucent reach name display) is displayed, the light-emitting effect that is being executed may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern that is being executed using a predetermined light-emitting unit.
The precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been reached is more important than the precursor display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" which indicates whether or not the game will develop into a battle reach, but by starting a new light-emitting effect executed using a specified light-emitting section, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" which is more important is being displayed.
Furthermore, when a precursor display for the second hold change effect (a display in which the hold image shakes) is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting unit may be terminated, and instead the execution of the light-emitting effect using another light-emitting pattern may be started, or the light-emitting effect currently being executed may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting unit using a predetermined light-emitting pattern.

When a precursory display (a display of something enduring a flame) for the "operation acceptance display during a reach" is displayed, the light-emitting display currently being executed may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting display with a predetermined light-emitting pattern executed using a predetermined light-emitting element. On the other hand, when a precursory display (a translucent reach name display) for the "reach notice display due to hold" is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting display with a predetermined light-emitting pattern executed using a predetermined light-emitting element may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting display with another light-emitting pattern may be started.
The precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" is displayed just before it is shown whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which can cause tension in the player, but by continuing the light-emitting effect currently being executed without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern using a predetermined light-emitting element, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.
Furthermore, when a precursor display for the second hold change effect (a display in which the hold image shakes) is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting unit may be terminated, and instead the execution of the light-emitting effect using another light-emitting pattern may be started, or the light-emitting effect currently being executed may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting unit using a predetermined light-emitting pattern.

When a precursory display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (a display of something enduring a flame) is displayed, the currently executing light-emitting effect may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern that is being executed using a predetermined light-emitting unit. Also, when a precursory display for the "reach notice effect due to hold" (a semi-transparent reach name display) is displayed, the currently executing light-emitting effect may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern that is being executed using a predetermined light-emitting unit.
The precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been achieved, and the precursor display for the "reach notice effect due to hold" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not it will develop into a battle reach, so each of these situations increases the player's tension, but by preventing the light emission pattern that has been executed up until that point from changing when the precursor display is displayed, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.
Furthermore, when a precursor display for the second hold change effect (a display in which the hold image shakes) is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting unit may be terminated, and instead the execution of the light-emitting effect using another light-emitting pattern may be started, or the light-emitting effect currently being executed may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting unit using a predetermined light-emitting pattern.

When the precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (the display of something enduring a flame) is displayed, the operation of a predetermined movable decorative member may be started. Similarly, when the precursor display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (the semi-transparent display of the reach name) is displayed, the operation of a predetermined movable decorative member may be started.
According to this embodiment, it is possible to make it easier for the driver to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.
In addition, when a precursor display for the second hold change effect (a display in which the hold image fluctuates) is displayed, the operation of a specified movable decorative member may be started, or the operation of the specified movable decorative member may not be started (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained).

When the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of something enduring a flame) is displayed, the operation of a predetermined movable decorative member may be started. On the other hand, when the precursor display for the "reach notice effect due to hold" (the semi-transparent display of the reach name) is displayed, the operation of the predetermined movable decorative member may not be started (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained).
The precursor display of the "operation acceptance during reach" which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been reached is more important than the precursor display of the "reach notice effect due to hold" which indicates whether or not it will develop into a battle reach, but by starting the operation of a specified movable decorative member, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display of the "operation acceptance during reach" which is more important is being displayed.
In addition, when a precursor display for the second hold change effect (a display in which the hold image fluctuates) is displayed, the operation of a specified movable decorative member may be started, or the operation of the specified movable decorative member may not be started (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained).

When the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of something enduring the flames) is displayed, the operation of the predetermined movable decorative member may not be initiated (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained). On the other hand, when the precursor display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (the semi-transparent display of the reach name) is displayed, the operation of the predetermined movable decorative member may be initiated.
The precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which can create tension for the player, but by not starting the operation of the specified movable decorative member (maintaining the state before the precursor display is displayed), the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.
In addition, when a precursor display for the second hold change effect (a display in which the hold image fluctuates) is displayed, the operation of a specified movable decorative member may be started, or the operation of the specified movable decorative member may not be started (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained).

When the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of something enduring a flame) is displayed, the operation of the specified movable decorative member may not be initiated (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained). Also, when the precursor display for the "reach notice effect due to hold" (the semi-transparent display of the reach name) is displayed, the operation of the specified movable decorative member may not be initiated (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained).
The precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and the precursor display for the "reach notice display due to hold" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not it will develop into a battle reach, so each of these situations increases the player's sense of tension, but by not starting the operation of a specified movable decorative member when the precursor display is displayed (maintaining the state before the precursor display was displayed), the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.
In addition, when a precursor display for the second hold change effect (a display in which the hold image fluctuates) is displayed, the operation of a specified movable decorative member may be started, or the operation of the specified movable decorative member may not be started (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained).

It is also possible to provide a situation where, while the movable decorative element is in operation, a premonition display for a "reach operation acceptance effect" or a "reach warning effect due to hold" begins to be displayed. In this case, it is recommended that the operation of the movable decorative element be set to "maintain the state (operation pattern) that existed before the premonition display was displayed," as described above.

The length of time that the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of someone enduring the flames) is displayed may be the same as the length of time that the precursor display for the "reach notice effect due to hold" (the translucent display of the reach name) is displayed.
Because it is possible to experience in advance the change in the display content as the precursor display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display) switches to the result display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold", the tension felt when the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (display of someone enduring flames) is displayed (the tension of wondering when the special display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (simulated image of the operation part) will appear) can be moderately alleviated.
In addition, the length of time for which the premonition display of the second hold change effect (the display of the hold image shaking) is displayed may be the same as the length of time for which the premonition display of the "reach operation reception effect" (the display of enduring the flames) is displayed, or may be different. If they are different, one may be longer than the other, or one may be shorter than the other.

Alternatively, the time for which the precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" (the display of someone enduring flames) is displayed may be longer than the time for which the precursor display for the "reach advance notice due to hold" (the translucent display of the reach name) is displayed.
While the "reach notice effect due to hold" is an effect that indicates whether or not it will develop into a reach effect, the "reach operation acceptance effect" is an effect that indicates whether or not it will be a jackpot, and the latter is more important as an effect. Therefore, by relatively shortening the time that the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the "reach notice effect due to hold" is displayed, it is possible to prevent the player's expectations for a jackpot from being excessively aroused.
Alternatively, the time for which the precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" (the display of someone enduring flames) is displayed may be shorter than the time for which the precursor display for the "reach advance notice due to hold" (the translucent display of the reach name) is displayed.
The display of the precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" is performed after the display of the precursor display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold." In addition, after the precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (the display of someone enduring a flame) is displayed, the special display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (simulated image of the operation unit) is always displayed. This causes the player to feel a sense of tension for a long period of time, but by relatively shortening the time for which the precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (the display of someone enduring a flame) is displayed, it is possible to make the player aware that the special display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (simulated image of the operation unit) will be displayed, while preventing the player from becoming overly excited about a jackpot.
In addition, the length of time for which the premonition display of the second hold change effect (the display of the hold image shaking) is displayed may be the same as the length of time for which the premonition display of the "reach operation reception effect" (the display of enduring the flames) is displayed, or may be different. If they are different, one may be longer than the other, or one may be shorter than the other.
In addition, the length of time for which the precursor display of the second hold change effect (a display in which the hold image fluctuates) is displayed may be the same as the length of time for which the precursor display of the "hold reach notice effect" (a semi-transparent reach name display) is displayed, or may be different. If they are different, one may be longer than the other, or one may be shorter than the other.

When the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of the player enduring the flames) is displayed, a predetermined expected effect different from the hold change effect (including the "reach notice effect due to hold") may be executed with a predetermined probability. As the predetermined expected effect, for example, an effect such as displaying a predetermined character in the display area 1600a can be adopted. By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to increase the sense of anticipation while the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of the player enduring the flames) is displayed. Note that the display mode of the standby hold image or the current hold image does not change due to the predetermined expected effect.
In addition, a precursor display of the second hold change effect (a display in which the hold image shakes) may be displayed during the execution of a specified expected effect, or may not be displayed.

Regarding the relationship between the execution period of a predetermined expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (display of enduring flames) for the "operation acceptance effect during reach," the following relationship pattern may be adopted.
For example, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring a flame) may be performed in the following order: start of the specified expected effect, start of display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring a flame), end of display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring a flame), and end of the specified expected effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring the flames) may be performed in the following order: start of the specified expected effect, start of display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring the flames), end of the specified expected effect, and end of display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring the flames).
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring the flames) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring the flames), start of the specified expected effect, end of display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring the flames), and end of the specified expected effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring a flame) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring a flame), start of the specified expected effect, end of the specified expected effect, and end of display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring a flame).
In addition, the display period of the precursor display for the second hold change effect (display in which the hold image shakes) may be set to start either before the start of the effect or display in these patterns, while the effect or display is being executed, or after the effect or display has ended, and to end at any other time.

When the "Reach Operation Acceptance Display" precursor display (display of someone enduring flames) is displayed, the specified expected display may not be executed.

When the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is displayed, a predetermined expectation effect different from the hold change effect may be executed with a predetermined probability. As the predetermined expectation effect, for example, a presentation mode such as displaying a predetermined character in the display area 1600a can be adopted. By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation while the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is displayed. Note that the display mode of the standby hold image or the current hold image does not change due to the predetermined expectation effect.
In addition, a precursor display of the second hold change effect (a display in which the hold image shakes) may be displayed during the execution of a specified expected effect, or may not be displayed.

Regarding the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach preview effect due to hold," the following relationship patterns may be adopted.
For example, the execution of the specified expected performance and the display of the precursor display for the "reach preview performance due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display) may be performed in the following order: start of the specified expected performance, start of display of the precursor display for the "reach preview performance due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display), end of display of the precursor display for the "reach preview performance due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display), and end of the specified expected performance.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected performance and the display of the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the ``reach preview performance due to hold'' may be performed in the following order: start of the specified expected performance, start of display of the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the ``reach preview performance due to hold,'' end of the specified expected performance, and end of display of the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the ``reach preview performance due to hold.''
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected performance and the display of the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the ``hold reach preview performance'' may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the ``hold reach preview performance,'' start of the specified expected performance, end of display of the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the ``hold reach preview performance,'' and end of the specified expected performance.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected performance and the display of the precursor display for the "reach preview performance due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the "reach preview performance due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display), start of the specified expected performance, end of the specified expected performance, and end of display of the precursor display for the "reach preview performance due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display).
In addition, the display period of the precursor display for the second hold change effect (display in which the hold image shakes) may be set to start either before the start of the effect or display in these patterns, while the effect or display is being executed, or after the effect or display has ended, and to end at any other time.

When the "reach preview effect due to hold" warning display (semi-transparent reach name display) is displayed, the specified expected effect may not be executed.

The specified expected effects can be, for example, effects that prompt the player to operate the operating means, or effects that do not prompt the player to operate the operating means (such as comment preview effects, step-up preview effects, and premium effects that confirm a jackpot).

Four patterns are shown for the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (the display enduring the flames) for the "operation acceptance effect during reach."
In addition, four patterns are shown for the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the ``reach preview effect due to hold.''
Although all of these can be executed independently, an embodiment can also be created by appropriately combining a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (display of enduring flames) for the ``reach operation acceptance effect'' and a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the ``reach preview effect due to hold.''
In addition, the display period of the precursor display for the second hold change effect (display of the hold image shaking) may also be appropriately combined with these patterns to form an embodiment.

Although multiple types of predetermined expected effects are shown, different patterns may be adopted depending on the type of predetermined expected effect. For example, one of four patterns may be adopted when executing one expected effect, either an effect that prompts the player to operate the operation means or an effect that does not prompt the player to operate the operation means (such as a comment preview effect, a step-up preview effect, or a premium effect that confirms a jackpot), and another of the four patterns may be adopted when executing another expected effect. For example, in the case of a comment preview performance, the execution of a predetermined expected performance and the display of a premonition display for the "hold reach preview performance" (semi-transparent reach name display) are displayed in the following order: start of the comment preview performance, start of display of the premonition display for the "hold reach preview performance" (semi-transparent reach name display), end of display of the premonition display for the "hold reach preview performance" (semi-transparent reach name display), end of the comment preview performance; in the case of a step-up preview performance, the execution of a predetermined expected performance and the display of a premonition display for the "hold reach preview performance" (semi-transparent reach name display) are displayed in the following order: start of the comment preview performance, start of the step-up preview performance, end of display of the premonition display for the "hold reach preview performance" (semi-transparent reach name display), end of the step-up preview performance.

The display priority of the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (display of enduring flames) and the precursor display for the "reach notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent display of reach name) may be higher or lower than the display priority of the images displayed in the specified expectation effect (for example, simulated image of operation section, comment image, step-up image, premium image, etc.).
In addition, the display priority of the precursor display (display of enduring flames) for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" may be set higher than the display priority of the image displayed in the specified expected effect, and the display priority of the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the "reach notice effect due to hold" may be set lower than the display priority of the image displayed in the specified expected effect.
Alternatively, the display priority of the precursor display (display of enduring flames) for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" may be lower than the display priority of the image displayed in the specified expected effect, and the display priority of the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the "reach notice effect due to hold" may be higher than the display priority of the image displayed in the specified expected effect.
In addition, the display priority of the precursor display of the second hold change effect (display in which the hold image shakes) may be higher or lower than the display priority of these precursor displays or images displayed in the specified expected effects.

The display of a precursor to the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (a display of someone enduring flames) or a precursor to the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (a semi-transparent display of the reach name) may be repeatedly displayed.
For example, the flames may cause the demon character to repeatedly retreat and advance multiple times while the precursor display (the display of the character enduring the flames) for the "reach operation acceptance effect" is displayed. Alternatively, the transparency of the reach name displayed semi-transparently in the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" may be periodically increased or decreased within a predetermined transparency range (for example, a range of 30% to 70%). By adopting such a display mode, it is possible to reduce capacity and alleviate the sense of tension caused by the precursor display.
On the other hand, the display of the precursor to the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of someone enduring flames) and the precursor to the "reach notice effect due to hold" (the semi-transparent display of the reach name) may not be displayed repeatedly.
For example, while the "reach operation acceptance effect" precursor display (the display of the character enduring the flames) is displayed, the Oni character may be shown slowly retreating due to the flames. Also, the transparency of the reach name displayed semi-transparently may be gradually decreased (for example, gradually changing from 70% to 30%). By adopting such a display mode, the image quality is improved and the player can be excited.
In addition, the display of the precursor to the second hold change effect (the display of the hold image shaking) may be repeated, or may not be repeated.

The precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of someone enduring the flames) may be displayed repeatedly, and the precursor display for the "reach notice effect due to hold" (the semi-transparent display of the reach name) may not be displayed repeatedly.
Alternatively, the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of someone enduring the flames) may not be displayed repeatedly, and the precursor display for the "reach notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent display of the reach name) may be displayed repeatedly.
Alternatively, it is possible to prevent both the display of the precursor to the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of someone enduring the flames) and the display of the precursor to the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (the semi-transparent display of the reach name) from being repeated.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the display of a precursory display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (a display of something enduring flames) and the display of a precursory display for the "reach notice effect due to hold" (a translucent display of the reach name) may be repeatedly displayed, it is also possible to make a light-emitting means such as a light-emitting decorative member emit light in a predetermined manner in response to the display of the precursory display, or to output sound in a predetermined manner from a sound generating means.
In this case, the light or sound output mode may be repeated in accordance with the repetition of the display of the predictive display. Alternatively, the light or sound may be output in a predetermined pattern throughout the entire display period of the predictive display without being associated with the repetition of the display of the predictive display (i.e., without repeatedly outputting the light or sound). Furthermore, if the display of the predictive display is not repeated, the light or sound may also be output in a predetermined pattern throughout the entire display period of the predictive display without being repeatedly output.
In addition, when displaying the precursory display of the second hold change effect (the display in which the hold image shakes), any of these light and sound output modes can be appropriately adopted.

In the embodiment shown, there is one type of precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (display of enduring flames) and one type of precursor display for the "reach notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display), but either one or both may be of multiple types.
For example, two types of facial expressions of the demon character displayed as a precursor to the "reach operation reception effect" (a display of the character enduring the flames) can be prepared, with one type of the demon character displaying a relaxed expression and the other type of the demon character displaying a stressed expression, so that the latter type has a higher probability of winning. Note that the number of types is not limited to two, and three or more types may be used. In this case, it is also preferable to have three or more types (three stages) of expectation.
Furthermore, as a precursor display for the "reach preview effect due to hold," a precursor display with different sizes of characters indicating the reach name may be displayed, with the larger the character size, the higher the expectation. In this case, the character size may be in two stages, or in three or more stages. In this case, it is also preferable to vary the expectation depending on the type of precursor display. Not limited to the character size, a precursor display with a predetermined effect and a precursor display without a predetermined effect may also be used. For the predetermined effect, multiple stages of different sizes may be provided, with the expectation increasing in order of no predetermined effect, a small effect being displayed, and a large effect being displayed.
There may be one type of precursor display (a display of someone enduring the flames) for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" and multiple types of precursor displays (semi-transparent reach name display) for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (for example, the two types mentioned above).
Alternatively, there may be multiple types of precursor displays (displays of the player enduring the flames) for the "operation acceptance during reach" effect (for example, the two types mentioned above), and only one type of precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold."
Alternatively, there may be multiple types of precursor displays (displays of enduring flames) for the "operation acceptance during reach" effect (for example, the two types mentioned above), and multiple types of precursor displays (semi-transparent reach name display) for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (for example, the two types mentioned above).
When only one display mode of the precursor display is provided, there is no difference in the degree of expectation while the precursor display is being displayed, so a stable sense of expectation can be provided. On the other hand, when multiple display modes are provided, a display with a high degree of expectation is displayed while the precursor display is being displayed, so the sense of expectation can be increased.
In addition, the type of precursor display (the display of the reserved image shaking) of the second reserved change effect may be one or multiple (two or more types). In the case of multiple types, the size of the sword or the way the reserved image shakes may be different. In this case, the larger the sword or the more the reserved image shakes, the higher the probability that the reserved image will change, or the higher the probability that the reserved image will change to a reserved image with a high expectation may be.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (a display of something enduring flames) and the precursor display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (a translucent reach name display) are displayed in the same single variable display, the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" may be executed as a look-ahead effect. In this case, the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is executed in a predetermined variable display, and the "reach advance notice effect" is executed in a subsequent variable display. Note that when the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is executed as a look-ahead effect, it is advisable to stop and display each variable display in a non-reach miss mode until the predicted reach effect is executed. This can create a sense of anticipation even when a variable pattern that is not a reach miss is executed.
In addition, the precursor display for the second hold change effect (a display in which the hold image shakes) and the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (a display in which the image is enduring flames) may be displayed in the same single variable display, or the second hold change effect may be executed as a pre-reading effect.

When the "reach preview effect due to hold" is executed as a pre-reading effect, there may be cases where the hold change fails and only the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) is displayed, or there may be cases where the hold change is successful and the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) as well as the waiting hold image after the change are displayed.
In addition, the display of the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) in the "reach preview effect due to hold" may be executed as a pre-reading effect, and after the variable display corresponding to the hold that is the subject of the pre-reading effect has begun, it may be indicated whether or not the reach effect indicated by the precursor display will be executed.

In the embodiment shown, the precursor display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display) is displayed, followed by the precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (display of someone enduring flames), but it is also possible to have the precursor display for the "reach advance notice effect" (semi-transparent reach name display) be displayed without displaying the precursor display for the "reach advance notice effect" (semi-transparent reach name display). According to such an embodiment, the sense of anticipation can be increased all at once.
In addition, it may be possible for a precursor display of the second hold change effect (a display in which the hold image shakes) to be displayed in some cases and not in others.

Although the embodiment in which the reach effect (Demon Battle Reach) is executed after the "reach advance notice effect by hold" is executed has been shown, the reach effect (Demon Battle Reach) may be executed without executing the "reach advance notice effect by hold." According to such an embodiment, the sense of expectation can be increased all at once.
In addition, the second hold change effect may or may not be executed.

In one variation, after the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is displayed, the probability that the precursor display (display of enduring flames) of the "reach operation acceptance effect" is displayed may be made higher than the probability that the precursor display (display of enduring flames) of the "reach advance notice effect" is displayed, without displaying the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach advance notice effect due to hold." According to such an embodiment, the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is displayed appropriately, thereby preventing a decline in interest.
Furthermore, in one fluctuation, the probability that after the precursor display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display), the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (display of someone enduring a flame) and the precursor display for the second hold change effect (display of the hold image shaking) are displayed may be higher than the probability that the precursor display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display) is not displayed and the precursor display for the second hold change effect (display of the hold image shaking) is displayed.

In one variation, the probability that a reach effect (Demon Battle Reach) is executed after the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is executed may be made higher than the probability that a reach effect (Demon Battle Reach) is executed without executing the "reach advance notice effect due to hold". According to such an embodiment, the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is executed appropriately, so that a decline in interest can be suppressed.
Furthermore, in one fluctuation, the probability that a reach effect (Demon Battle Reach) is executed and a second hold change effect is executed after a "reach notice effect due to hold" is executed may be higher than the probability that a reach effect (Demon Battle Reach) is executed and a second hold change effect is executed without executing a "reach notice effect due to hold".

In one variation, after the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is displayed, the probability that the precursor display (display of someone enduring a flame) of the "reach operation acceptance effect" is displayed may be lowered below the probability that the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is displayed, without displaying the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach advance notice effect due to hold." According to such an embodiment, the sense of anticipation can be increased all at once when the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is displayed.
Furthermore, in one fluctuation, the probability that after the precursor display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display), the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (display of someone enduring a flame) and the precursor display for the second hold change effect (display of the hold image shaking) are displayed may be lower than the probability that the precursor display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display) is not displayed and the precursor display for the second hold change effect (display of the hold image shaking) is displayed.

In one variation, the probability that a reach effect (Demon Battle Reach) will be executed after the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is executed may be lower than the probability that a reach effect (Demon Battle Reach) will be executed without executing the "reach advance notice effect due to hold." According to such an embodiment, it is possible to instantly increase the sense of expectation when the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is executed.
Furthermore, in one fluctuation, the probability that a reach effect (Demon Battle Reach) is executed and a second hold change effect is executed after a "reach notice effect due to hold" is executed may be lower than the probability that a reach effect (Demon Battle Reach) is executed and a second hold change effect is executed without executing a "reach notice effect due to hold".

The expectation level when a premonition display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display) is displayed followed by a premonition display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (display of someone enduring flames) may be higher than the expectation level when a premonition display for the "reach advance notice effect" (display of someone enduring flames) is displayed without displaying a premonition display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display). According to such an embodiment, the sense of expectation can be increased all at once when the premonition display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display) is displayed.
Furthermore, in one change, if a precursor display for a "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display) is displayed, followed by a precursor display for an "operation acceptance effect during reach" (display of someone enduring a flame) and a precursor display for a second hold change effect (display of a hold image shaking), the expectation level may be higher than the expectation level when a precursor display for an "operation acceptance effect during reach" (display of someone enduring a flame) and a precursor display for a second hold change effect (display of a hold image shaking) are displayed without displaying a precursor display for a "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display).

The expectation level when a reach effect (Demon Battle Reach) is executed after the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is executed may be set higher than the expectation level when a reach effect (Demon Battle Reach) is executed without executing the "reach advance notice effect due to hold". According to such an embodiment, the expectation level can be increased all at once when the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is executed.
Furthermore, in one fluctuation, the expectation level when a reach effect (Demon Battle Reach) is executed and a second hold change effect is executed after a "reach notice effect due to hold" is executed may be higher than the expectation level when a reach effect (Demon Battle Reach) is executed and a second hold change effect is executed without executing a "reach notice effect due to hold".

The expectation level when a premonition display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display) is displayed followed by a premonition display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (display of someone enduring flames) may be lowered than the expectation level when a premonition display for the "reach advance notice effect" (display of someone enduring flames) is displayed without displaying a premonition display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display). According to such an embodiment, the premonition display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display) is displayed appropriately, thereby preventing a decrease in interest.
Furthermore, in one change, if a precursor display for a "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display) is displayed, followed by a precursor display for an "operation acceptance effect during reach" (display of someone enduring a flame) and a precursor display for a second hold change effect (display of a hold image shaking), the expectation level may be lower than the expectation level when a precursor display for an "operation acceptance effect during reach" (display of someone enduring a flame) and a precursor display for a second hold change effect (display of a hold image shaking) are displayed without displaying a precursor display for a "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display).

The degree of expectation when a reach effect (Demon Battle Reach) is executed after the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is executed may be lower than the degree of expectation when a reach effect (Demon Battle Reach) is executed without executing the "reach advance notice effect due to hold". According to such an embodiment, the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is executed appropriately, thereby preventing a decline in interest.
In addition, in one fluctuation, the expectation level when a reach effect (Oni Battle Reach) is executed and a second hold change effect is executed after a "reach notice effect due to hold" is executed may be lower than the expectation level when a reach effect (Oni Battle Reach) is executed and a second hold change effect is executed without executing a "reach notice effect due to hold".

Below, we will explain variations of an embodiment in which a "reach operation acceptance effect" is executed after a "reach symbol promotion effect" is executed.

When the precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (the display of the character enduring the flames) is displayed, the display of the background image that had been displayed up until then may be terminated, and instead another background image may be started to be displayed. Similarly, when the precursor display for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (the display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, the display of the background image that had been displayed up until then may be terminated, and instead another background image may be started to be displayed.
By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the scene has switched to an important scene.

When the precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (the display of the character enduring the flame) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated and another background image may be displayed instead. On the other hand, when the precursor display for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (the display of the meter image but the color of the sixth meter image not changing) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be continued.
The precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" effect, which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been reached, is more important than the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect," which indicates whether or not the effect will develop into a battle reach, but by switching the background image, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" effect, which is more important, is being displayed.

When the precursory display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (the display of the character enduring the flames) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be continued. On the other hand, when the precursory display for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (the display of the meter image but the color of the sixth meter image not changing) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated, and instead, the display of another background image may be started.
The precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" is displayed just before it is shown whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which can make the player feel tense, but by continuing to display the same background image without changing it, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When the precursory display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (the display of the character enduring the flame) is displayed, the display of the background image that has been displayed up until then may be continued. Also, when the precursory display for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (the display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, the display of the background image that has been displayed up until then may be continued.
The precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and the precursor display for the "reach pattern upgrade effect" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not it will develop into a battle reach, so each of these situations increases the player's sense of tension, but by preventing the background image from changing before and after the precursor display is displayed, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When a precursory display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (a display of a character enduring a flame) is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that has been output from the sound generating means up to that point may be lowered or the output of the sound may be interrupted. Similarly, when a precursory display for the "reach symbol upgrade effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, the volume of the sound that has been output from the sound generating means up to that point may be lowered or the output of the sound may be interrupted.
According to such an embodiment, the output manner of the sound that was previously output from the sound generating means is suppressed, making it sound quieter or completely inaudible, thereby making it easier to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.

When the precursory display of the "reach operation acceptance effect" (the display of enduring flames) is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that has been output from the sound generating means up to that point may be lowered or the output of the sound may be interrupted. On the other hand, when the precursory display of the "reach symbol promotion effect" (the display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, the volume of the sound that has been output from the sound generating means up to that point may be left unchanged and the output may continue as is.
According to such an embodiment, the output mode of the sound that was previously output from the sound generating means is suppressed, making it sound quieter or completely inaudible, making it easier to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.
The precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been reached is more important than the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion" which indicates whether or not the game will develop into a battle reach, but by suppressing the sound output from the sound generating means, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance during reach" which is more important is being displayed.

When the precursory display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (the display of enduring flames) is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that has been output from the sound generating means up to that point may be left unchanged and the output may continue. On the other hand, when the precursory display for the "reach symbol upgrade effect" (the display of a meter image but no change in the color of the sixth meter image) is displayed, the volume of the sound that has been output from the sound generating means up to that point may be lowered or the sound output may be interrupted.
The precursor display for the "operation reception during reach" is displayed just before it is shown whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which can make the player feel tense, but by continuing to output the sound that has been output from the sound generating means without changing the volume, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When a precursory display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (a display of a player enduring a flame) is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that has been output from the sound generating means up to that point may be left unchanged and the output may continue as is. Also, when a precursory display for the "reach symbol upgrade effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, the volume of the sound that has been output from the sound generating means up to that point may be left unchanged and the output may continue as is.
The precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and the precursor display for the "reach pattern upgrade effect" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not it will develop into a battle reach, so that each of these situations increases the player's sense of tension, but by preventing the volume of the sound that has been output from the sound generating means from changing when the precursor display is displayed, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

The sound (BGM, etc.) output when the precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" (the display of enduring flames) is displayed may be the same as the sound output when the precursor display for the "reach pattern upgrade" (the display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, or it may be a different sound.
The output duration of the sound output when the precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (the display of enduring flames) is displayed may be the same as or different from the output duration of the sound output when the precursor display for the "reach symbol upgrade effect" (the display of a meter image but the color of the sixth meter image not changing) is displayed. If the lengths are different, one may be longer than the other, or one may be shorter than the other.

The length of time that the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of someone enduring the flames) is displayed and the length of the sound (BGM, etc.) that is output when the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of someone enduring the flames) is displayed may be the same or different. If the lengths are different, one may be longer than the other, or one may be shorter than the other.
The length of time that the precursor display for the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change) is displayed and the output time of the sound that is output when the precursor display for the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change) is displayed may be the same length or different lengths. If the lengths are different, one may be longer than the other, or one may be shorter than the other.

When a precursory display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (a display of something enduring a flame) is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect using the predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using the predetermined light-emitting element may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting effect using another light-emitting pattern may be started. Similarly, when a precursory display for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect using the predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using the predetermined light-emitting element may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting effect using another light-emitting pattern may be started.
According to this embodiment, it is possible to make it easier for the driver to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.

When the precursor display of the "reach operation acceptance effect" (the display of enduring flames) is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect with the predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using the predetermined light-emitting element may be terminated, and instead the execution of the light-emitting effect with another light-emitting pattern may be started. On the other hand, when the precursor display of the "reach symbol promotion effect" (the display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, the light-emitting effect that is being executed may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect with the predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using the predetermined light-emitting element.
The precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" effect, which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been reached, is more important than the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect," which indicates whether or not the effect will develop into a battle reach. However, by starting a new light-emitting effect executed using a specified light-emitting section, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" effect, which is more important, is being displayed.

When a precursory display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (a display of something enduring a flame) is displayed, the light-emitting effect currently being executed may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern executed using a predetermined light-emitting element. On the other hand, when a precursory display for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern executed using a predetermined light-emitting element may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting effect with another light-emitting pattern may be started.
The precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" is displayed just before it is shown whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which can cause tension in the player, but by continuing the light-emitting effect currently being executed without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern using a predetermined light-emitting element, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When a precursory display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (a display of something enduring a flame) is displayed, the currently executing light-emitting effect may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern executed using a predetermined light-emitting element. Also, when a precursory display for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, the currently executing light-emitting effect may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern executed using a predetermined light-emitting element.
The precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been achieved, and the precursor display for the "reach pattern upgrade effect" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not it will develop into a battle reach, so each of these situations increases the player's sense of tension, but by preventing the light emission pattern that has been executed up until that point from changing when the precursor display is displayed, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

The operation of a predetermined movable decorative member may be started when a precursory display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (a display of something enduring a flame) is displayed. Similarly, the operation of a predetermined movable decorative member may be started when a precursory display for the "reach symbol upgrade effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed.
According to this embodiment, it is possible to make it easier for the driver to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.

When a precursory display for the "reach operation reception effect" (a display of something enduring a flame) is displayed, the operation of a predetermined movable decorative member may be started. On the other hand, when a precursory display for the "reach symbol upgrade effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, the operation of the predetermined movable decorative member may not be started (the state before the precursory display was displayed is maintained).
The precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" effect, which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been reached, is more important than the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect," which indicates whether or not the effect will develop into a battle reach, but by starting the operation of a specified movable decorative member, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect," which is more important, is being displayed.

When the precursor display for the "reach operation reception effect" (the display of something enduring the flames) is displayed, the operation of the predetermined movable decorative member may not be initiated (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained). On the other hand, when the precursor display for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (the display of a meter image but the color of the sixth meter image not changing) is displayed, the operation of the predetermined movable decorative member may be initiated.
The precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which can create tension for the player, but by not starting the operation of the specified movable decorative member (maintaining the state before the precursor display is displayed), the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When the precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (the display of something enduring a flame) is displayed, the operation of the predetermined movable decorative member may not be initiated (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained). Also, when the precursor display for the "reach symbol upgrade effect" (the display of a meter image but the color of the sixth meter image not changing) is displayed, the operation of the predetermined movable decorative member may not be initiated (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained).
The precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and the precursor display for the "reach pattern upgrade" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not it will develop into a battle reach, so each of these situations increases the player's sense of tension, but by not starting the operation of a specified movable decorative member when the precursor display is displayed (maintaining the state it was in before the precursor display was displayed), the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

It is also possible to provide a case where a precursor display for a "reach operation acceptance effect" or "reach pattern upgrade effect" begins to be displayed while the movable decorative element is in operation. In this case, it is recommended that the operation of the movable decorative element be set to "maintain the state (operation pattern) before the precursor display was displayed," as described above.

The length of time that the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of enduring flames) is displayed may be the same as the length of time that the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (the display of a meter image but the color of the sixth meter image not changing) is displayed.
Since it is possible to experience in advance the change in the display content, that is, the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) switches to the specific display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the color of the sixth meter image has changed and a reward has been obtained), the tension felt when the precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (a display of something enduring a flame) is displayed (the tension of wondering when the special display (simulated image of the operation unit) for the "reach operation acceptance effect" will be displayed) can be moderately alleviated.

Alternatively, the time for which the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of enduring flames) is displayed may be longer than the time for which the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (the display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed.
While the "reach symbol promotion effect" is an effect that indicates whether or not the game will develop into a reach effect, the "reach operation acceptance effect" is an effect that indicates whether or not a jackpot will be reached, and the latter is more important as an effect. Therefore, by relatively shortening the time for which the "reach symbol promotion effect" precursor display (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, it is possible to prevent the player's expectations for a jackpot from being excessively aroused.
Alternatively, the time for which the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of enduring flames) is displayed may be shorter than the time for which the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (the display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed.
The display of the precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" is performed after the display of the precursor display for the "reach symbol upgrade effect." In addition, after the precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (the display of someone enduring a flame) is displayed, the special display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (simulated image of the operation unit) is always displayed. This causes the player to feel tense for a long period of time, but by relatively shortening the time for which the precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (the display of someone enduring a flame) is displayed, it is possible to make the player aware that the special display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (simulated image of the operation unit) will be displayed, while preventing the player from becoming overly excited about a jackpot.

When the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (a display of something enduring a flame) is displayed, only the current hold image is displayed without displaying the standby hold image, and when the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, both the standby hold image and the current hold image may be displayed.
When the precursor display (a display of a player enduring a flame) of the "operation reception effect during a reach" is displayed, a reserve change effect in which the current reserved image may be upgraded with a predetermined probability may be executed with a predetermined probability. By adopting such an embodiment, the player can enjoy the reserve change effect while the precursor display (a display of a player enduring a flame) of the "operation reception effect during a reach" is displayed.

Regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display (display of enduring flames) for the ``reach operation acceptance effect,'' the following relationship pattern may be adopted.
For example, the hold change effect may be executed and the precursor display for the ``reach operation acceptance effect'' (display of something enduring a flame) may be displayed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of the precursor display for the ``reach operation acceptance effect'' (display of something enduring a flame), end of display of the precursor display for the ``reach operation acceptance effect'' (display of something enduring a flame), and end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the hold change effect may be executed and the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (display of something enduring a flame) may be displayed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (display of something enduring a flame), end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (display of something enduring a flame).
Alternatively, the hold change effect may be executed and the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (display of something enduring the flames) may be displayed in the following order: the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (display of something enduring the flames) begins, the hold change effect begins, the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (display of something enduring the flames) ends, and the hold change effect ends.
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring a flame) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring a flame), start of the hold change effect, end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring a flame).

On the other hand, when the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of enduring flames) is displayed, the hold change effect that changes the current hold image may not be executed.
According to such an embodiment, the player can focus on the special display (simulated image of the operation unit) of the "operation acceptance effect during reach" that is displayed after the display of the precursor display of the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (display of enduring flames).

When the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (a display of something enduring a flame) is displayed, only the current hold image is displayed without displaying the standby hold image, and when the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, both the standby hold image and the current hold image may be displayed.
When the precursor display of the "reach symbol promotion effect" (the display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, the reserve change effect in which the current reserved image may be promoted with a predetermined probability may be executed with a predetermined probability. By adopting such an embodiment, the reserve change effect can be enjoyed while the precursor display of the "reach symbol promotion effect" (the display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed.

Regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display of the ``reach pattern promotion effect'' (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), the following relationship pattern may be adopted.
For example, the hold change effect may be executed and the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be displayed in the following order: start of the hold change effect; start of the display of the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed); end of the display of the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed); and end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the hold change effect may be executed and the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be displayed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed).
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be performed in the following order: the start of the display of the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), the start of the hold change effect, the end of the display of the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), and the end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be performed in the following order: the start of the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), the start of the hold change effect, the end of the hold change effect, and the end of the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed).

On the other hand, when a precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, the hold change effect that changes the current hold image may not be executed.
According to this embodiment, the player can focus on the specific display of the "Reach pattern promotion effect" (the display in which the color of the sixth meter image changes and a reward is won) that appears after the display of the precursor display of the "Reach pattern promotion effect" (the display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change).

When the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (a display of something enduring a flame) is displayed, only the current hold image is displayed without displaying the standby hold image, and when the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, both the standby hold image and the current hold image may be displayed.
When the precursor display of the "reach symbol promotion effect" (the display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, a hold change effect in which the standby hold image may be promoted with a predetermined probability may be executed with a predetermined probability. By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to enjoy the hold change effect while the precursor display of the "reach symbol promotion effect" (the display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed.

Regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the standby hold image and the display period of the precursor display of the ``reach pattern promotion effect'' (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), the following relationship pattern may be adopted.
For example, the hold change effect may be executed and the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be displayed in the following order: start of the hold change effect; start of the display of the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed); end of the display of the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed); and end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the hold change effect may be executed and the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be displayed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed).
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be performed in the following order: the start of the display of the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), the start of the hold change effect, the end of the display of the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), and the end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be performed in the following order: the start of the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), the start of the hold change effect, the end of the hold change effect, and the end of the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed).

On the other hand, when a precursory display for the "Reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, the hold change effect that changes the standby hold image may not be executed.
According to this embodiment, the player can focus on the specific display of the "Reach pattern promotion effect" (the display in which the color of the sixth meter image changes and a reward is won) that appears after the display of the precursor display of the "Reach pattern promotion effect" (the display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change).

Four patterns are shown regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display (display of enduring flames) for the ``reach operation acceptance effect.''
In addition, four patterns are shown regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display of the ``reach pattern promotion effect'' (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed).
In addition, four patterns are shown regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the standby hold image and the display period of the precursor display of the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed).
Although all of these can be executed independently, an embodiment may be formed by appropriately combining a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display for the ``reach operation acceptance effect'' (the display of resisting the flames), a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display for the ``reach pattern promotion effect'' (the display where the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), and a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the standby hold image and the display period of the precursor display for the ``reach pattern promotion effect'' (the display where the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed).

Multiple types of hold change effects may be provided, and different patterns may be used depending on the type of hold change effect. For example, different patterns may be used for hold change effects that hide holds with smoke and hold change effects that hide holds with swords. For example, in the case of a hold change effect that hides holds with smoke, the effects are executed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of the premonition display for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), end of the premonition display for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), end of the hold change effect. In the case of a hold change effect that hides holds with swords, the effects are executed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of the premonition display for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), end of the hold change effect, end of the hold change effect, end of the premonition display for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed).

The display priority of the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of enduring the flames) and the precursor display for the "reach pattern upgrade effect" (the display of the meter image being displayed but the color of the sixth meter image not changing) may be higher or lower than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change effect (for example, an image that approaches the current hold image or the standby hold image and displays an impact on the current hold image or the standby hold image).
In addition, the display priority of the precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" (the display of enduring the flames) may be higher than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change display, and the display priority of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion display" (the display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be lower than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change display.
Alternatively, the display priority of the precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" (the display of enduring flames) may be lower than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change display, and the display priority of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion" (the display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be higher than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change display.

When the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of something enduring the flames) is displayed, a predetermined expectation effect (an expectation effect that raises the expectation of a win, hereafter referred to as the "predetermined expectation effect") different from the hold change effect may be executed with a predetermined probability. The predetermined expectation effect may, for example, be a display mode such as displaying a predetermined character in display area 1600a. By using such an embodiment, the sense of anticipation can be increased while the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of something enduring the flames) is displayed. The display mode of the standby hold image or current hold image will not change due to the predetermined expectation effect.

The following relationship patterns may be adopted for the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (display of enduring flames) for the ``reach operation acceptance effect.''
For example, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring a flame) may be performed in the following order: start of the specified expected effect, start of display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring a flame), end of display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring a flame), and end of the specified expected effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring the flames) may be performed in the following order: start of the specified expected effect, start of display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring the flames), end of the specified expected effect, and end of display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring the flames).
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring the flames) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring the flames), start of the specified expected effect, end of display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring the flames), and end of the specified expected effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring a flame) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring a flame), start of the specified expected effect, end of the specified expected effect, and end of display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring a flame).

When the "Reach Operation Acceptance Display" precursor display (display of someone enduring flames) is displayed, the specified expected display may not be executed.

When the precursor display for the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, a predetermined expected effect different from the hold change effect may be executed with a predetermined probability. The predetermined expected effect may, for example, be an effect such as displaying a predetermined character in display area 1600a. By using such an embodiment, it is possible to increase the sense of anticipation while the precursor display for the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed. Note that the display mode of the waiting hold image or current hold image does not change due to the predetermined expected effect.

Regarding the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display of the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), the following relationship pattern may be adopted.
For example, the execution of the specified expected performance and the display of the precursor to the "reach pattern promotion performance" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be performed in the following order: the start of the specified expected performance; the start of the display of the precursor to the "reach pattern promotion performance" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed); the end of the display of the precursor to the "reach pattern promotion performance" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed); and the end of the specified expected performance.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be performed in the following order: the start of the specified expected effect, the start of the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), the end of the specified expected effect, and the end of the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed).
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be performed in the following order: the start of the display of the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), the start of the specified expected effect, the end of the display of the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), and the end of the specified expected effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be performed in the following order: the start of the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), the start of the specified expected effect, the end of the specified expected effect, and the end of the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed).

When a precursory display for the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, the specified expected effect may not be executed.

The specified expected effects can be, for example, effects that prompt the player to operate the operating means, or effects that do not prompt the player to operate the operating means (such as comment preview effects, step-up preview effects, and premium effects that confirm a jackpot).

Four patterns are shown for the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (the display enduring the flames) for the "operation acceptance effect during reach."
In addition, four patterns are shown regarding the relationship between the execution period of a predetermined expected effect and the display period of the precursory display of the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change).
Although all of these can be executed independently, an embodiment may be formed by appropriately combining a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of a predetermined expected effect and the display period of the precursor display for the ``reach operation acceptance effect'' (the display of enduring flames), and a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of a predetermined expected effect and the display period of the precursor display for the ``reach pattern promotion effect'' (the display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed).

Although multiple types of predetermined expected effects are shown, different patterns may be adopted depending on the type of predetermined expected effect. For example, one of four patterns may be adopted when executing one expected effect, either an effect that prompts the player to operate the operation means or an effect that does not prompt the player to operate the operation means (such as a comment preview effect, a step-up preview effect, or a premium effect that confirms a jackpot), and another of the four patterns may be adopted when executing another expected effect. For example, in the case of a comment preview effect, the execution of a predetermined expected effect and the display of a premonition for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display where a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) are displayed in the following order: the start of the comment preview effect, the start of the display of a premonition for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display where a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), the end of the display of a premonition for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display where a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), and the end of the comment preview effect.In the case of a step-up preview effect, the execution of a predetermined expected effect and the display of a premonition for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display where a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) are displayed in the following order: the start of the comment preview effect, the start of the display of a premonition for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display where a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), the start of the step-up preview effect, the end of the display of a premonition for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display where a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), and the end of the step-up preview effect.

The display priority of the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of enduring flames) and the precursor display for the "reach pattern upgrade effect" (the display of a meter image being displayed but the color of the sixth meter image not changing) may be higher or lower than the display priority of the images displayed in the specified expectation effect (for example, an operation unit simulation image, a comment image, a step-up image, a premium image, etc.).
In addition, the display priority of the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of the player enduring the flames) may be set higher than the display priority of the image displayed in the specified expected effect, and the display priority of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (the display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be set lower than the display priority of the image displayed in the specified expected effect.
Alternatively, the display priority of the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of the player enduring the flames) may be lower than the display priority of the image displayed in the specified expected effect, and the display priority of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (the display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be higher than the display priority of the image displayed in the specified expected effect.

The display of a precursor to the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (a display of something enduring a flame) or a precursor to the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change) may be repeatedly displayed.
For example, the demon character may be caused to repeatedly move backward and forward by flames multiple times during the display of the precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect." Furthermore, during the precursor display for the "reach symbol upgrade effect," the color of the fifth meter image may change, then return to its original color, and then change again, so that the fifth meter image alternates between being displayed in its original color and being displayed in its changed color multiple times. By adopting such a display mode, it is possible to reduce the capacity and alleviate the sense of tension caused by the precursor display.
On the other hand, the display of the precursor to the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of the flames surviving) and the precursor to the "reach pattern promotion effect" (the display of the meter image but the color of the sixth meter image not changing) may not be displayed repeatedly.
For example, during the display of the precursory display for the "reach operation acceptance effect," a scene of a demon character being slowly retreated by flames may be displayed. Furthermore, during the precursory display for the "reach symbol upgrade effect," a display mode may be adopted in which, after a certain meter image changes color, it does not return to its original color. By adopting such a display mode, the image quality is improved, and the player can be excited.

The precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of something resistant to flames) may be repeatedly displayed, but the precursor display for the "reach pattern upgrade effect" (the display of a meter image but the color of the sixth meter image not changing) may not be repeatedly displayed.
Alternatively, the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of something enduring the flames) may not be displayed repeatedly, and the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (the display of a meter image but the color of the sixth meter image not changing) may be displayed repeatedly.
Alternatively, it is possible to prevent both the display of the precursory display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of the player enduring the flames) and the display of the precursory display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (the display of the meter image but the color of the sixth meter image not changing) from being repeated.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the display of a precursory display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (a display of something enduring the flames) and the display of a precursory display for the "reach pattern upgrade effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change) may be repeatedly displayed, it is also possible to make a light-emitting means such as a light-emitting decorative member emit light in a predetermined manner or to output sound in a predetermined manner from a sound generating means in response to the display of the precursory display.
In this case, the light or sound output mode may be repeated in accordance with the repetition of the display of the predictive display. Alternatively, the light or sound may be output in a predetermined pattern throughout the entire display period of the predictive display without being associated with the repetition of the display of the predictive display (i.e., without repeatedly outputting the light or sound). Furthermore, if the display of the predictive display is not repeated, the light or sound may also be output in a predetermined pattern throughout the entire display period of the predictive display without being repeatedly output.

In the embodiment shown, there is one type of precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (a display of the device enduring the flames) and one type of precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change), but either one or both may be of multiple types.
For example, two types of facial expressions of the demon character displayed as a precursor to the "reach operation reception effect" may be prepared, with one type of the demon character having a relaxed expression and the other type of the demon character having a stressed expression, so that the latter type has a higher probability of winning. Note that the number of types is not limited to two, and three or more types may be used. In this case, it is also preferable to have three or more types (three stages) of expectation.
In addition, two or more types of precursory displays for the "reach symbol upgrade effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change) may be prepared. For example, a pattern in which the color of the meter image changes easily up to the middle of the meter and then changes slowly from the middle, or a pattern in which the color of the meter image changes slowly up to the middle of the meter and then changes easily from the middle, may be adopted. In this case, too, it is preferable to vary the degree of expectation depending on the type of precursory display.
There may be one type of precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (a display of enduring flames), and multiple types of precursor displays for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change) (for example, the two types mentioned above).
Alternatively, there may be multiple types of precursor display (a display of the player enduring the flames) for the "operation acceptance during reach" effect (for example, the two types mentioned above), and only one type of precursor display (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change) for the "reach pattern promotion effect."
Alternatively, there may be multiple types of precursor displays (displays of withstanding flames) for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (for example, the two types mentioned above), and multiple types of precursor displays (displays in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change) for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (for example, the two types mentioned above).
When only one display mode of the precursor display is provided, there is no difference in the degree of expectation while the precursor display is being displayed, so a stable sense of expectation can be provided. On the other hand, when multiple display modes are provided, a display with a high degree of expectation is displayed while the precursor display is being displayed, so the sense of expectation can be increased.

In the above embodiment, the precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (the display of something enduring the flames) and the precursor display for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (the display of a meter image but the color of the sixth meter image not changing) are displayed in the same variable display, but the "reach symbol promotion effect" may also be executed as a pre-reading effect. In this case, the "reach symbol promotion effect" is executed in a predetermined variable display, and the "reach operation acceptance effect" is executed in a subsequent variable display. Note that when the "reach symbol promotion effect" is executed as a pre-reading effect, it is advisable to stop and display each variable display in a non-reach miss mode until the predicted reach effect is executed. This can create a sense of anticipation even when a non-reach miss variable pattern is executed.

In the embodiment shown, the precursor display for the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, followed by the precursor display for the "Reach operation acceptance effect" (a display in which a flame is endured). However, it is also possible to have the precursor display for the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) be displayed without displaying the precursor display for the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed). Such an embodiment can instantly increase the sense of anticipation.

In the embodiment shown, the reach effect (Oni Battle Reach) is executed after the "reach symbol promotion effect" is executed, but it is also possible to have the reach effect (Oni Battle Reach) executed without executing the "reach symbol promotion effect." This embodiment can instantly increase the sense of anticipation.

In one variation, after the display of the precursor for the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), the probability of the precursor for the "Reach operation acceptance effect" (a display in which the player is resistant to the flames) being displayed may be made higher than the probability of the precursor for the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which the player is resistant to the flames) being displayed, without displaying the precursor for the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed). According to this embodiment, the display of the precursor for the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed appropriately, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

In one variation, the probability that a reach effect (Oni Battle Reach) will be executed after a "reach symbol promotion effect" is executed may be made higher than the probability that a reach effect (Oni Battle Reach) will be executed without executing a "reach symbol promotion effect." In such an embodiment, the "reach symbol promotion effect" is executed appropriately, preventing a decline in interest.

In one variation, after the display of the precursor for the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), the probability of the precursor for the "Reach operation acceptance effect" (a display in which the player is resistant to the flames) being displayed may be lowered below the probability of the precursor for the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which the player is resistant to the flames) being displayed, without displaying the precursor for the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed). According to this embodiment, the sense of anticipation can be instantly increased when the precursor for the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed.

In one variation, the probability that a reach effect (Oni Battle Reach) will be executed after a "reach symbol promotion effect" is executed may be lower than the probability that a reach effect (Oni Battle Reach) will be executed without executing a "reach symbol promotion effect." In this embodiment, the sense of anticipation can be increased immediately when a "reach symbol promotion effect" is executed.

The expectation level when a premonition display for the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is followed by a premonition display for the "Reach operation acceptance effect" (a display in which a player is withstanding a flame) may be higher than the expectation level when a premonition display for the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, without displaying a premonition display for the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed). According to this embodiment, the sense of expectation can be increased all at once when a premonition display for the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed.

The expectation level when a reach effect (Oni Battle Reach) is executed after a "reach symbol promotion effect" is executed may be higher than the expectation level when a reach effect (Oni Battle Reach) is executed without executing a "reach symbol promotion effect." According to this embodiment, the sense of expectation can be increased all at once when a "reach symbol promotion effect" is executed.

The expectation level when a premonition display for the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is followed by a premonition display for the "Reach operation acceptance effect" (a display in which the player is resistant to flames) may be lowered than the expectation level when a premonition display for the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which the player is resistant to flames) is displayed, without displaying a premonition display for the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed). According to this embodiment, the premonition display for the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed appropriately, thereby preventing a decrease in interest.

The expectation level when a reach effect (Oni Battle Reach) is executed after a "reach symbol promotion effect" is executed may be lower than the expectation level when a reach effect (Oni Battle Reach) is executed without executing a "reach symbol promotion effect." In this embodiment, the "reach symbol promotion effect" is executed appropriately, thereby preventing a decrease in interest.

Below, we will explain variations of an embodiment in which a "reach operation acceptance effect" is executed after a "reach content selection effect" is executed.

When a precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (a display of something enduring flames) is displayed, the display of the background image that had been displayed up until then may be terminated, and instead another background image may be started to be displayed. Similarly, when a precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display showing that a predetermined area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the display of the background image that had been displayed up until then may be terminated, and instead another background image may be started to be displayed. Furthermore, when a precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" is displayed, the entire background image may be made invisible by a window image.
By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the scene has switched to an important scene.

When a precursory display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (a display of something enduring a flame) is displayed, the display of the background image that had been displayed up until then may be terminated, and instead another background image may be displayed. On the other hand, when a precursory display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display indicating that a predetermined area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the display of the background image that had been displayed up until then may be continued.
The precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been reached is more important than the precursor display for the "reach content selection" which indicates whether or not a battle reach will develop, but by switching the background image, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" which is more important is being displayed.

When a precursory display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (a display of something enduring a flame) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be continued. On the other hand, when a precursory display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display that a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated, and instead another background image may be displayed.
The precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" is displayed just before it is shown whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which can make the player feel tense, but by continuing to display the same background image without changing it, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When a precursory display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (a display of something enduring a flame) is displayed, the display of the background image that had been displayed up until then may be continued. Also, when a precursory display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display that a predetermined area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the display of the background image that had been displayed up until then may be continued.
The precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not it will develop into a battle reach, so each of these situations increases the player's sense of tension, but by preventing the background image from changing before and after the precursor display is displayed, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When a precursory display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (a display of something enduring a flame) is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that had been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be lowered or the output of the sound may be interrupted. Similarly, when a precursory display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display that a predetermined area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the volume of the sound that had been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be lowered or the output of the sound may be interrupted.
According to such an embodiment, the output mode of the sound that was previously output from the sound generating means is suppressed, making it sound quieter or completely inaudible, making it easier to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.

When a precursory display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (a display of something enduring a flame) is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that had been output from the sound generation means up until then may be lowered or the output of the sound may be interrupted. On the other hand, when a precursory display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display that a predetermined area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the volume of the sound that had been output from the sound generation means up until then may be left unchanged and the output may continue as is.
According to such an embodiment, the output mode of the sound that was previously output from the sound generating means is suppressed, making it sound quieter or completely inaudible, making it easier to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.
The precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been reached is more important than the precursor display for the "reach content selection" which indicates whether or not the game will develop into a battle reach, but by suppressing the sound output from the sound generating means, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance during reach" which is more important is being displayed.

When a precursory display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (a display of something enduring a flame) is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that had been output from the sound generation means up until then may be left unchanged and the output may continue. On the other hand, when a precursory display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display that a predetermined area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the volume of the sound that had been output from the sound generation means up until then may be lowered or the output of the sound may be interrupted.
The precursor display for the "operation reception during reach" is displayed just before it is shown whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which can make the player feel tense, but by continuing to output the sound that has been output from the sound generating means without changing the volume, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When a precursory display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (a display of something enduring a flame) is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that had been output from the sound generation means up until that point may be left unchanged and continue to be output. Also, when a precursory display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display that a predetermined area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the volume of the sound that had been output from the sound generation means up until that point may be left unchanged and continue to be output.
The precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not it will develop into a battle reach, so that each of these situations increases the player's sense of tension, but by preventing the volume of the sound that has been output from the sound generation means from changing when the precursor display is displayed, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

The sound (BGM, etc.) output when the precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" (the display of enduring flames) is displayed may be the same as the sound output when the precursor display for the "reach content selection" (the display of a specified area selected as a candidate for the reach display) is displayed, or it may be a different sound.
The output duration of the sound output when the precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (the display of something enduring the flames) is displayed may be the same as or different from the output duration of the sound output when the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (the display of a specified area selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed. If the lengths are different, one may be longer than the other, or one may be shorter than the other.

The length of time that the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of someone enduring the flames) is displayed and the length of the sound (BGM, etc.) that is output when the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of someone enduring the flames) is displayed may be the same or different. If the lengths are different, one may be longer than the other, or one may be shorter than the other.
The length of time that the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed and the output time of the sound that is output when the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed may be the same length or different lengths. If the lengths are different, one may be longer than the other, or one may be shorter than the other.

When a precursory display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (a display of something enduring a flame) is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting unit may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting effect using another light-emitting pattern may be started. Similarly, when a precursory display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display that a predetermined area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting unit may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting effect using another light-emitting pattern may be started.
According to this embodiment, it is possible to make it easier for the driver to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.

When a precursory display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (a display of something enduring a flame) is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting unit may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting effect using another light-emitting pattern may be started. On the other hand, when a precursory display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display that a predetermined area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the light-emitting effect currently being executed may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting unit and a predetermined light-emitting pattern.
The precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" effect, which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been reached, is more important than the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect," which indicates whether or not the effect will develop into a battle reach. However, by starting a new light-emitting effect executed using a specified light-emitting section, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect," which is more important, is being displayed.

When a precursory display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (a display of something enduring a flame) is displayed, the light-emitting effect currently being executed may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern executed using a predetermined light-emitting element. On the other hand, when a precursory display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display indicating that a predetermined area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern executed using a predetermined light-emitting element may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting effect with another light-emitting pattern may be started.
The precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" is displayed just before it is shown whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which can cause tension in the player, but by continuing the light-emitting effect currently being executed without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern using a predetermined light-emitting element, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When a precursory display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (a display of something enduring a flame) is displayed, the currently executing light-emitting effect may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern that is being executed using a predetermined light-emitting unit. Also, when a precursory display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display that a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the currently executing light-emitting effect may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern that is being executed using a predetermined light-emitting unit.
The precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not it will develop into a battle reach, so each of these situations increases the player's sense of tension, but by preventing the light emission pattern that had been executed up until that point from changing when the precursor display is displayed, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When a precursory display for the "reach operation reception effect" (a display of something enduring a flame) is displayed, a predetermined movable decorative member may be set to start operating. Similarly, when a precursory display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display indicating that a predetermined area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, a predetermined movable decorative member may be set to start operating.
According to this embodiment, it is possible to make it easier for the driver to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.

When a precursory display for the "reach operation reception effect" (a display of something enduring a flame) is displayed, the operation of a predetermined movable decorative member may be started. On the other hand, when a precursory display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display indicating that a predetermined area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the operation of the predetermined movable decorative member may not be started (the state before the precursory display was displayed may be maintained).
The precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" effect, which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been reached, is more important than the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect," which indicates whether or not the effect will develop into a battle reach, but by starting the operation of a specified movable decorative member, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect," which is more important, is being displayed.

When the precursor display for the "reach operation reception effect" (the display of something enduring the flames) is displayed, the operation of the predetermined movable decorative member may not be initiated (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained). On the other hand, when the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (the display that a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the operation of the predetermined movable decorative member may be initiated.
The precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which can create tension for the player, but by not starting the operation of the specified movable decorative member (maintaining the state before the precursor display is displayed), the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When the precursor display for the "reach operation reception effect" (the display of something enduring the flames) is displayed, the operation of the specified movable decorative member may not be initiated (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained). Also, when the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (the display that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the operation of the specified movable decorative member may not be initiated (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained).
The precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and the precursor display for the "reach content selection" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not the game will develop into a battle reach. These situations increase the player's sense of tension, but by not starting the operation of a specified movable decorative member when the precursor display is displayed (maintaining the state it was in before the precursor display was displayed), the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

It is also possible to provide a case where a precursor display for a "reach operation acceptance effect" or "reach content selection effect" begins to be displayed while the movable decorative element is in motion. In this case, it is recommended that the movement of the movable decorative element be set to "maintain the state (movement pattern) that existed before the precursor display was displayed," as described above.

The length of time that the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of enduring flames) is displayed may be the same as the length of time that the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (the display of a specified area being selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed.
Since it is possible to experience in advance the change in the display content, where the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) switches to the specific display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which only the selected specified area is displayed and the candidate for the reach effect has been confirmed), the tension felt when the precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (a display of something enduring flames) is displayed (the tension of wondering when the special display (simulated image of the operation section) for the "reach operation acceptance effect" will be displayed) can be moderately alleviated.

Alternatively, the time for which the precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (the display of the player enduring the flames) is displayed may be longer than the time for which the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (the display of the player selecting a specific area as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed.
While the "reach content selection effect" is an effect that indicates whether or not it will develop into a reach effect, the "reach operation acceptance effect" is an effect that indicates whether or not it will be a jackpot, and the latter is more important as an effect. Therefore, by relatively shortening the time that the "reach content selection effect" precursor display (the display that a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, it is possible to prevent the player's expectations for a jackpot from being excessively aroused.
Alternatively, the time for which the precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (the display of the player enduring the flames) is displayed may be shorter than the time for which the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (the display of the player selecting a specific area as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed.
The display of the precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" is performed after the display of the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect." In addition, after the precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (the display of someone enduring a flame) is displayed, the special display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (simulated image of the operation unit) is always displayed. This causes the player to feel a sense of tension for a long period of time, but by relatively shortening the time for which the precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (the display of someone enduring a flame) is displayed, it is possible to make the player aware that the special display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (simulated image of the operation unit) will be displayed, while preventing the player from becoming overly excited about a jackpot.

When the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (a display of something enduring a flame) is displayed, only the current hold image is displayed without displaying the standby hold image, and when the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display showing that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, both the standby hold image and the current hold image may be displayed.
When the precursor display (a display of a player enduring a flame) of the "operation reception effect during a reach" is displayed, a reserve change effect in which the current reserved image may be upgraded with a predetermined probability may be executed with a predetermined probability. By adopting such an embodiment, the player can enjoy the reserve change effect while the precursor display (a display of a player enduring a flame) of the "operation reception effect during a reach" is displayed.

Regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display for the ``reach operation acceptance effect'' (display of enduring flames), the following relationship pattern may be adopted.
For example, the hold change effect may be executed and the precursor display for the ``reach operation acceptance effect'' (display of something enduring a flame) may be displayed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of the precursor display for the ``reach operation acceptance effect'' (display of something enduring a flame), end of display of the precursor display for the ``reach operation acceptance effect'' (display of something enduring a flame), and end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the hold change effect may be executed and the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (display of something enduring a flame) may be displayed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (display of something enduring a flame), end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (display of something enduring a flame).
Alternatively, the hold change effect may be executed and the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (display of something enduring the flames) may be displayed in the following order: the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (display of something enduring the flames) begins, the hold change effect begins, the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (display of something enduring the flames) ends, and the hold change effect ends.
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring a flame) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring a flame), start of the hold change effect, end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring a flame).

On the other hand, when the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of enduring flames) is displayed, the hold change effect that changes the current hold image may not be executed.
According to such an embodiment, the player can focus on the special display (simulated image of the operation unit) of the "operation acceptance effect during reach" that is displayed after the display of the precursor display of the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (display of enduring flames).

When the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (a display of something enduring a flame) is displayed, only the current hold image is displayed without displaying the standby hold image, and when the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display showing that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, both the standby hold image and the current hold image may be displayed.
When the precursor display of the "reach content selection effect" (the display in which a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, a hold change effect in which the current reserved image may be promoted with a predetermined probability may be executed with a predetermined probability. By adopting such an embodiment, the reserve change effect can be enjoyed while the precursor display of the "reach content selection effect" (the display in which a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed.

Regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display of the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), the following relationship pattern may be adopted.
For example, the hold change effect may be executed and the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be displayed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of a precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), end of display of a precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), and end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the hold change effect may be executed and the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be displayed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect).
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be performed in the following order: the start of the display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), the start of the hold change effect, the end of the display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), and the end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (display showing that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (display showing that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), start of the hold change effect, end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (display showing that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect).

On the other hand, when a precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the hold change effect that changes the current hold image may not be executed.
According to such an embodiment, the player can focus on the specific display of the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which only the selected specified area is displayed and the candidate for the reach effect has been confirmed) that is displayed after the display of the precursor display of the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect).

When the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (a display of something enduring a flame) is displayed, only the current hold image is displayed without displaying the standby hold image, and when the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display showing that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, both the standby hold image and the current hold image may be displayed.
When a precursor display of the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, a hold change effect in which the standby hold image may be upgraded with a predetermined probability may be executed with a predetermined probability. By adopting such an embodiment, the hold change effect can be enjoyed while the precursor display of the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed.

Regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the standby hold image and the display period of the precursor display of the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), the following relationship pattern may be adopted.
For example, the hold change effect may be executed and the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be displayed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of a precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), end of display of a precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), and end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the hold change effect may be executed and the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be displayed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect).
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be performed in the following order: the start of the display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), the start of the hold change effect, the end of the display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), and the end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (display showing that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (display showing that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), start of the hold change effect, end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (display showing that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect).

On the other hand, when a precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the hold change effect that changes the standby hold image may not be executed.
According to such an embodiment, the player can focus on the specific display of the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which only the selected specified area is displayed and the candidate for the reach effect has been confirmed) that is displayed after the display of the precursor display of the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect).

Four patterns are shown regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display (display of enduring flames) for the ``reach operation acceptance effect.''
In addition, four patterns are shown regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display of the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect).
In addition, four patterns are shown regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the standby hold image and the display period of the precursor display of the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect).
Although all of these can be executed independently, an embodiment may be formed by appropriately combining a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display for the ``reach operation acceptance effect'' (the display of something resistant to flames), a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (the display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), and a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the standby hold image and the display period of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (the display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect).

There may be multiple types of hold change effects, and different patterns may be used depending on the type of hold change effect. For example, different patterns may be used for hold change effects that hide holds with smoke and hold change effects that hide holds with swords. For example, in the case of a hold change effect that hides holds with smoke, the effects are executed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of the display of the precursor to the "reach content selection effect" (a display that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), end of the display of the precursor to the "reach content selection effect" (a display that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), and end of the hold change effect. In the case of a hold change effect that hides holds with swords, the effects are executed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of the display of the precursor to the "reach content selection effect" (a display that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor to the "reach content selection effect" (a display that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect).

The display priority of the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (display of enduring flames) and the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (display of a specified area being selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be higher or lower than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change effect (for example, an image that approaches the current hold image or the standby hold image and displays an impact on the current hold image or the standby hold image).
In addition, the display priority of the precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" (the display of enduring flames) may be set higher than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change display, and the display priority of the precursor display for the "reach content selection display" (the display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach display) may be set lower than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change display.
Alternatively, the display priority of the precursor display for the "operation acceptance during reach" (display of enduring flames) may be lower than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change display, and the display priority of the precursor display for the "reach content selection display" (display of a specified area selected as a candidate for the reach display) may be higher than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change display.

When the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of something enduring the flames) is displayed, a predetermined expectation effect (an expectation effect that raises the expectation of a win, hereafter referred to as the "predetermined expectation effect") different from the hold change effect may be executed with a predetermined probability. The predetermined expectation effect may, for example, be a display mode such as displaying a predetermined character in display area 1600a. By using such an embodiment, the sense of anticipation can be increased while the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of something enduring the flames) is displayed. The display mode of the standby hold image or current hold image will not change due to the predetermined expectation effect.

The following relationship patterns may be adopted for the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (display of enduring flames) for the ``reach operation acceptance effect.''
For example, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring a flame) may be performed in the following order: start of the specified expected effect, start of display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring a flame), end of display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring a flame), and end of the specified expected effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring the flames) may be performed in the following order: start of the specified expected effect, start of display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring the flames), end of the specified expected effect, and end of display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring the flames).
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring the flames) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring the flames), start of the specified expected effect, end of display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring the flames), and end of the specified expected effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring a flame) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring a flame), start of the specified expected effect, end of the specified expected effect, and end of display of the precursor display for the ``operation acceptance effect during reach'' (display of something enduring a flame).

When the "Reach Operation Acceptance Display" precursor display (display of someone enduring flames) is displayed, the specified expected display may not be executed.

When the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, a specified expected effect different from the hold change effect may be executed with a specified probability. The specified expected effect may, for example, be a display mode such as displaying a specified character in display area 1600a. By using such an embodiment, it is possible to increase the sense of anticipation while the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed. Note that the display mode of the waiting hold image or current hold image does not change due to the specified expected effect.

Regarding the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display of the "reach content selection effect" (the display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), the following relationship pattern may be adopted.
For example, the execution of the specified expected performance and the display of the precursor display for the "reach content selection performance" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach performance) may be performed in the following order: the start of the specified expected performance, the start of the display of the precursor display for the "reach content selection performance" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach performance), the end of the display of the precursor display for the "reach content selection performance" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach performance), and the end of the specified expected performance.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected performance and the display of the precursor display for the "reach content selection performance" (display showing that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach performance) may be performed in the following order: start of the specified expected performance, start of display of the precursor display for the "reach content selection performance" (display showing that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach performance), end of the specified expected performance, and end of display of the precursor display for the "reach content selection performance" (display showing that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach performance).
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected performance and the display of the precursor display for the "reach content selection performance" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach performance) may be performed in the following order: the start of the display of the precursor display for the "reach content selection performance" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach performance), the start of the specified expected performance, the end of the display of the precursor display for the "reach content selection performance" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach performance), and the end of the specified expected performance.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected performance and the display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection performance'' (display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach performance) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection performance'' (display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach performance), start of the specified expected performance, end of the specified expected performance, and end of the display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection performance'' (display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach performance).

When a precursory display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display indicating that a specific area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the specific expected effect may not be executed.

The specified expected effects can be, for example, effects that prompt the player to operate the operating means, or effects that do not prompt the player to operate the operating means (such as comment preview effects, step-up preview effects, and premium effects that confirm a jackpot).

Four patterns are shown for the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (the display enduring the flames) for the "operation acceptance effect during reach."
In addition, four patterns are shown for the relationship between the execution period of a predetermined expected effect and the display period of the precursor display of the "reach content selection effect" (the display in which a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect).
Although all of these can be executed independently, an embodiment may be formed by appropriately combining a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display for the ``reach operation acceptance effect'' (the display of something resistant to flames), and a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (the display that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect).

Although multiple types of predetermined expected effects are shown, different patterns may be adopted depending on the type of predetermined expected effect. For example, one of four patterns may be adopted when executing one expected effect, either an effect that prompts the player to operate the operation means or an effect that does not prompt the player to operate the operation means (such as a comment preview effect, a step-up preview effect, or a premium effect that confirms a jackpot), and another of the four patterns may be adopted when executing another expected effect. For example, in the case of a comment preview performance, the specified expected performance is executed and the premonition display for the "reach content selection performance" (a display showing that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach performance) is displayed in the following order: start of the comment preview performance, start of display of a precursor display for the "reach content selection performance" (a display showing that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach performance), end of display of a precursor display for the "reach content selection performance" (a display showing that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach performance), and end of the comment preview performance; and in the case of a step-up preview performance, the specified expected performance is executed and the premonition display for the "reach content selection performance" (a display showing that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach performance) is displayed in the following order: start of the comment preview performance, start of the "reach content selection performance" (a display showing that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach performance), start of the step-up preview performance, end of display of a precursor display for the "reach content selection performance" (a display showing that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach performance), and end of the step-up preview performance.

The display priority of the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of something resistant to flames) and the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (the display of a specified area selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be higher or lower than the display priority of the images displayed in the specified expectation effect (for example, an operation section simulation image, a comment image, a step-up image, a premium image, etc.).
In addition, the display priority of the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of the object resistant to the flames) may be set higher than the display priority of the image displayed in the specified expected effect, and the display priority of the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (the display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be set lower than the display priority of the image displayed in the specified expected effect.
Alternatively, the display priority of the precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of the player enduring the flames) may be lower than the display priority of the image displayed in the specified expected effect, and the display priority of the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (the display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be higher than the display priority of the image displayed in the specified expected effect.

The display may be a repeated display of a precursor to the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (a display of something enduring flames) or a precursor to the "reach content selection effect" (a display of a specified area being selected as a candidate for the reach effect).
For example, the oni character may be caused to repeatedly move backward and forward by flames while the premonition display is being displayed. Furthermore, in the premonition display for the "reach content selection effect" (the display in which a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for the reach display), the size of the selected predetermined area may be increased or decreased multiple times. Furthermore, the premonition display for the "reach content selection effect" may be repeatedly switched between a state in which it is displayed with extreme shaking or overlaid with effects, and a state in which it is not displayed with extreme shaking or overlaid with effects, multiple times. Furthermore, the effect may be repeatedly enlarged and reduced at high speed. By adopting such a display mode, it is possible to reduce the capacity and alleviate the sense of tension caused by the premonition display.
On the other hand, the display of the precursor to the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of something enduring the flames) and the precursor to the "reach content selection effect" (the display of a specified area being selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may not be displayed repeatedly.
For example, a scene may be displayed in which the demon character is slowly retreating due to flames while the premonition display is being displayed. Furthermore, in the premonition display for the "reach content selection effect" (the display in which a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), a display mode may be adopted in which the size of the selected predetermined area increases but does not decrease. Furthermore, when the premonition display for the "reach content selection effect" is shaken, the display may gradually increase in size but do not decrease, or the displayed effect may gradually increase in size but do not decrease. By adopting such a display mode, the image quality is improved, which can excite the player.

The precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of something resistant to flames) may be repeatedly displayed, and the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (the display of a specified area being selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may not be repeatedly displayed.
Alternatively, the precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (the display of something enduring the flames) may not be displayed repeatedly, and the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (the display of a specified area being selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be displayed repeatedly.
Alternatively, it is possible to prevent both the display of the precursor to the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (the display of something enduring the flames) and the display of the precursor to the "reach content selection effect" (the display of a specified area being selected as a candidate for the reach effect) from being repeated.

An embodiment has been shown in which the display of a precursory display for the "operation acceptance display during reach" (a display of something enduring flames) or the display of a precursory display for the "reach content selection display" (a display in which a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for the reach display) may be repeatedly displayed, but it is also possible to make a light-emitting means such as a light-emitting decorative member emit light in a predetermined manner, or to output sound in a predetermined manner from a sound generating means, in response to the display of the precursory display.
In this case, the light or sound output mode may be repeated in accordance with the repetition of the display of the predictive display. Alternatively, the light or sound may be output in a predetermined pattern throughout the entire display period of the predictive display without being associated with the repetition of the display of the predictive display (i.e., without repeatedly outputting the light or sound). Furthermore, if the display of the predictive display is not repeated, the light or sound may also be output in a predetermined pattern throughout the entire display period of the predictive display without being repeatedly output.

In the embodiment shown, there is one type of precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (a display of something enduring flames) and one type of precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display of a specified area being selected as a candidate for the reach effect), but either one or both may be of multiple types.
For example, two types of facial expressions of the demon character displayed as a precursor to the "reach operation reception effect" (a display of the character enduring the flames) can be prepared, with one type of the demon character displaying a relaxed expression and the other type of the demon character displaying a stressed expression, so that the latter type has a higher probability of winning. Note that the number of types is not limited to two, and three or more types may be used. In this case, it is also preferable to have three or more types (three stages) of expectation.
In addition, two or more types of precursor displays for the "reach content selection effect" (displays in which a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be prepared. For example, a display mode in which the precursor display shakes more vigorously and a display mode in which the precursor display shakes less vigorously may be employed, or a display mode in which the shaking amount (movement width) is the same but the speed of the shaking may be varied to employ a fast shaking mode and a slow shaking mode, or a plurality of display modes in which both the shaking mode and the shaking speed are varied to employ different shaking modes. In this case, too, it is preferable to vary the degree of expectation depending on the type of precursor display.
There may be one type of precursor display for the "operation acceptance effect during reach" (a display of something enduring the flames), and multiple types of precursor displays for the "reach content selection effect" (a display of a specified area being selected as a candidate for the reach effect) (for example, the two types mentioned above).
Alternatively, there may be multiple types of precursor displays (displays of the player enduring the flames) for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (for example, the two types mentioned above), and only one type of precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (displays in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect).
Alternatively, there may be multiple types of precursor displays (displays of the player enduring the flames) for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (for example, the two types mentioned above), and multiple types of precursor displays (displays of a specified area being selected as a candidate for the reach effect) for the "reach content selection effect" (for example, the two types mentioned above).
When only one display mode of the precursor display is provided, there is no difference in the degree of expectation while the precursor display is being displayed, so a stable sense of expectation can be provided. On the other hand, when multiple display modes are provided, a display with a high degree of expectation is displayed while the precursor display is being displayed, so the sense of expectation can be increased.

In the above embodiment, the precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (the display of something enduring the flames) and the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (the display of a specified area selected as a candidate for the reach effect) are displayed in the same single variable display, but the "reach content selection effect" may also be executed as a look-ahead effect. In this case, the "reach content selection effect" is executed in the specified variable display, and the "reach operation acceptance effect" is executed in the variable display thereafter. When the "reach content selection effect" is executed as a look-ahead effect, it is advisable to stop and display each variable display in a non-reach miss mode until the predicted reach effect is executed. This can create a sense of anticipation even when a non-reach miss variable pattern is executed.

In the embodiment shown, the precursor display for the "Reach Content Selection Effect" (a display indicating that a specific area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, followed by the precursor display for the "Reach Operation Acceptance Effect" (a display indicating that something is enduring flames). However, it is also possible to have the precursor display for the "Reach Content Selection Effect" (a display indicating that a specific area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) displayed without first displaying the precursor display for the "Reach Content Selection Effect" (a display indicating that a specific area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect). This type of embodiment can instantly increase the sense of anticipation.

In the embodiment shown, the reach effect (Demon Battle Reach) is executed after the "reach content selection effect" is executed, but it is also possible to have the reach effect (Demon Battle Reach) executed without executing the "reach content selection effect." This embodiment can instantly increase the sense of anticipation.

In one variation, after the display of the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display indicating that a specific area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect), the probability of the precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (a display showing that the character is withstanding the flames) being displayed may be made higher than the probability of the precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (a display showing that the character is withstanding the flames) being displayed, without displaying the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display indicating that a specific area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect). In such an embodiment, the display of the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display indicating that a specific area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed appropriately, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

In one variation, the probability that a reach effect (Demon Battle Reach) will be executed after a reach content selection effect is executed may be made higher than the probability that a reach effect (Demon Battle Reach) will be executed without executing a reach content selection effect. In this embodiment, the reach content selection effect is executed appropriately, preventing a decline in interest.

In one variation, after the display of the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display indicating that a specific area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect), the probability of the precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (a display showing that the character is withstanding the flames) being displayed may be lowered below the probability of the precursor display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (a display showing that the character is withstanding the flames) being displayed, without displaying the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display indicating that a specific area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect). According to this embodiment, the sense of anticipation can be instantly increased when the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display indicating that a specific area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed.

In one variation, the probability that a reach effect (Demon Battle Reach) will be executed after a "reach content selection effect" is executed may be lower than the probability that a reach effect (Demon Battle Reach) will be executed without executing a "reach content selection effect." According to this embodiment, the sense of anticipation can be instantly heightened when a "reach content selection effect" is executed.

The expectation level when a premonition display for a "reach content selection effect" (a display indicating that a specific area has been selected as a candidate for a reach effect) is followed by a premonition display for a "reach operation acceptance effect" (a display indicating that something is enduring flames) may be higher than the expectation level when a premonition display for a "reach operation acceptance effect" (a display indicating that something is enduring flames) is displayed without displaying a premonition display for a "reach content selection effect" (a display indicating that a specific area has been selected as a candidate for a reach effect). According to this embodiment, the sense of expectation can be increased all at once when a premonition display for a "reach content selection effect" (a display indicating that a specific area has been selected as a candidate for a reach effect) is displayed.

The expectation level when a reach effect (Demon Battle Reach) is executed after the "reach content selection effect" is executed may be set higher than the expectation level when a reach effect (Demon Battle Reach) is executed without executing the "reach content selection effect." According to this embodiment, the sense of expectation can be increased all at once when the "reach content selection effect" is executed.

The expectation level when a premonition display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display indicating that a specific area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is followed by a premonition display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (a display of something enduring flames) may be lowered than the expectation level when a premonition display for the "reach operation acceptance effect" (a display of something enduring flames) is displayed, without displaying a premonition display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display indicating that a specific area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect). In this embodiment, the premonition display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display indicating that a specific area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed appropriately, thereby preventing a decrease in interest.

The expectation level when a reach effect (Demon Battle Reach) is executed after the "reach content selection effect" is executed may be lower than the expectation level when a reach effect (Demon Battle Reach) is executed without executing the "reach content selection effect." In this embodiment, the "reach content selection effect" is executed appropriately, thereby preventing a decrease in interest.

Below, we will explain variations of an embodiment in which a "reach character background color change effect" is executed after a "reach battle effect" is executed.

When the precursor display for the "mid-reach character background color change effect" (a comment image from the master character) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated, and instead another background image may be displayed. Similarly, when the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (an indication that the character is surviving an energy bullet) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated, and instead another background image may be displayed.
By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the scene has switched to an important scene.

When the precursor display for the "mid-reach character background color change effect" (a comment image from the master character) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated and another background image may be displayed instead. On the other hand, when the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (an indication that the character is surviving an energy bullet) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be continued.
The precursor display of the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been won is more important than the precursor display of the "Pre-Reach Battle Effect" which indicates whether or not the game will develop into a Battle Reach, but by switching the background image, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display of the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" which is more important is being displayed.

When the precursor display for the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" (the image of the Master character's comment) is displayed, the previously displayed background image may be continued to be displayed. On the other hand, when the precursor display for the "Pre-Reach Battle Effect" (the display of enduring an energy bullet) is displayed, the previously displayed background image may be ended and another background image may be displayed instead.
The precursor display of the "during-reach character background color change effect" is displayed just before it is shown whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which makes the player feel tense, but by continuing to display the same background image without changing it, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When the precursor display for the "In-Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" (the image of the Master character's comment) is displayed, the previously displayed background image may be continued to be displayed. Also, when the precursor display for the "Pre-Reach Battle Effect" (the display of enduring an energy bullet) is displayed, the previously displayed background image may be continued to be displayed.
The precursor display for the "during-reach character background color change effect" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not the game will develop into a battle reach, so each of these situations increases the player's sense of tension, but by preventing the background image from changing before and after the precursor display is displayed, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When a precursory display (an image of a comment from the master character) for the "mid-reach character background color change effect" is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that had been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be lowered or the output of the sound may be interrupted. Similarly, when a precursory display (an image of the master character's comment) for the "pre-reach battle effect" is displayed, the volume of the sound that had been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be lowered or the output of the sound may be interrupted.
According to such an embodiment, the output mode of the sound that was previously output from the sound generating means is suppressed, making it sound quieter or completely inaudible, making it easier to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.

When a precursory display (an image of a comment from the master character) for the "mid-reach character background color change effect" is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that had been output from the sound generation means up until then may be lowered or the output of the sound may be interrupted. On the other hand, when a precursory display (an image of the player enduring an energy bullet) for the "pre-reach battle effect" is displayed, the volume of the sound that had been output from the sound generation means up until then may be left unchanged and the output may continue as is.
According to such an embodiment, the output mode of the sound that was previously output from the sound generating means is suppressed, making it sound quieter or completely inaudible, making it easier to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.
The precursor display of the "during-reach character background color change effect" which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been won is more important than the precursor display of the "pre-reach battle effect" which indicates whether or not the game will develop into a battle reach, but by suppressing the sound output from the sound generating means, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display of the "during-reach character background color change effect" which is more important is being displayed.

When a precursory display (an image of a comment from the master character) for the "mid-reach character background color change effect" is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that had been output from the sound generation means up until then may be left unchanged and continue to be output. On the other hand, when a precursory display (an indication that the character is withstanding an energy bullet) for the "pre-reach battle effect" is displayed, the volume of the sound that had been output from the sound generation means up until then may be lowered or the sound output may be interrupted.
The precursor display of the "during-reach character background color change effect" is displayed just before it is shown whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which makes the player feel tense, but by continuing to output the sound that has been output from the sound generating means without changing the volume, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When a premonition display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (a display showing that the player is withstanding the energy bullets) is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that had been output from the sound generation means up until that point may be left unchanged and the output may continue as is. Also, when a premonition display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (a display showing that the player is withstanding the energy bullets) is displayed, the volume of the sound that had been output from the sound generation means up until that point may be left unchanged and the output may continue as is.
The precursor display for the "during-reach character background color change effect" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not the game will develop into a battle reach, so that each of these situations increases the player's sense of tension, but by preventing the volume of the sound that has been output from the sound generating means from changing when the precursor display is displayed, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

The sound (BGM, etc.) output when the precursor display (image of a comment from the master character) for the "reach-in-character background color change effect" is displayed may be the same as the sound output when the precursor display (display of withstanding an energy bullet) for the "reach-in-battle effect" is displayed, or it may be a different sound.
The output duration of the sound output when the precursor display (image of a comment from the master character) for the "In-Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" is displayed may be the same as or different from the output duration of the sound output when the precursor display (display of withstanding an energy bullet) for the "Pre-Reach Battle Effect" is displayed. If the lengths are different, one may be longer than the other, or one may be shorter than the other.

The length of time that the precursor display (image of a comment from the master character) for the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" is displayed and the length of the sound (BGM, etc.) that is output when the precursor display (image of a comment from the master character) for the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" is displayed may be the same or different. If the lengths are different, one may be longer than the other, or one may be shorter than the other.
The length of time that the "pre-reach battle effect" precursor display (the display that shows that the character is withstanding the energy bullets) is displayed and the output time of the sound that is output when the "pre-reach battle effect" precursor display (the display that shows that the character is withstanding the energy bullets) is displayed may be the same or different. If the lengths are different, one may be longer than the other, or one may be shorter than the other.

When a precursor display (a comment image of the master character) for the "mid-reach character background color change effect" is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting element may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting effect using another light-emitting pattern may be started. Similarly, when a precursor display (an indication that the character is resistant to an energy bullet) for the "pre-reach battle effect" is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting element may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting effect using another light-emitting pattern may be started.
According to this embodiment, it is possible to make it easier for the driver to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.

When a precursory display (a comment image of the master character) for the "mid-reach character background color change effect" is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting element may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting effect using another light-emitting pattern may be started. On the other hand, when a precursory display (an indication that the character is resistant to an energy bullet) for the "pre-reach battle effect" is displayed, the light-emitting effect currently being executed may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting element and a predetermined light-emitting pattern.
The precursor display of the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been won is more important than the precursor display of the "Pre-Reach Battle Effect" which indicates whether or not the game will develop into a Battle Reach, but by starting a new light-emitting effect executed using a specified light-emitting part, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display of the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" which is more important is being displayed.

When a precursory display (a comment image of the master character) for the "during-reach character background color change effect" is displayed, the light-emitting effect currently being executed may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting element and a predetermined light-emitting pattern. On the other hand, when a precursory display (an indication that the character is withstanding an energy bullet) for the "pre-reach battle effect" is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting element and a predetermined light-emitting pattern may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting effect using another light-emitting pattern may be started.
The precursor display of the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" is displayed just before it is shown whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which can make the player feel tense, but by continuing the light-emitting effect currently being executed without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern using a predetermined light-emitting element, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When a precursory display (a comment image of the master character) for the "during-reach character background color change effect" is displayed, the currently executing light-emitting effect may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting element and a predetermined light-emitting pattern. Also, when a precursory display (an indication that the player is withstanding an energy bullet) for the "pre-reach battle effect" is displayed, the currently executing light-emitting effect may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting element and a predetermined light-emitting pattern.
The precursor display for the "during-reach character background color change effect" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not the game will develop into a battle reach, so that both situations increase the player's sense of tension, but by preventing the light emission pattern that has been executed up until that point from changing when the precursor display is displayed, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

A predetermined movable decorative member may be made to start moving when a precursory display (an image of a comment from the master character) for the "in-reach character background color change effect" is displayed. Similarly, a predetermined movable decorative member may be made to start moving when a precursory display (an image of the character enduring an energy bullet) for the "pre-reach battle effect" is displayed.
According to this embodiment, it is possible to make it easier for the driver to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.

When the precursor display for the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" (the image of the Master character's comment) is displayed, the movement of a predetermined movable decorative member may be started. On the other hand, when the precursor display for the "Pre-Reach Battle Effect" (the display showing that the character is withstanding an energy bullet) is displayed, the movement of the predetermined movable decorative member may not be started (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained).
The precursor display of the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been won is more important than the precursor display of the "Pre-Reach Battle Effect" which indicates whether or not the game will develop into a Battle Reach, but by starting the operation of a predetermined movable decorative member, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display of the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" which is more important is being displayed.

When the precursor display (image of a comment from the master character) for the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" is displayed, the specified movable decorative member may not start operating (maintaining the state it was in before the precursor display was displayed). On the other hand, when the precursor display (indication of withstanding an energy bullet) for the "Pre-Reach Battle Effect" is displayed, the specified movable decorative member may start operating.
The precursor display for the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed just before it is revealed whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which can create tension for the player, but by not starting the operation of the specified movable decorative member (maintaining the state before the precursor display was displayed), the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When the precursor display (image of a comment from the master character) for the "In-Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" is displayed, the specified movable decorative member may not start operating (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained). Also, when the precursor display (indication of withstanding an energy bullet) for the "Pre-Reach Battle Effect" is displayed, the specified movable decorative member may not start operating (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained).
The precursor display for the "During Reach Text Background Color Change Effect" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and the precursor display for the "Pre-Reach Battle Effect" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not the game will develop into a Battle Reach, so each of these situations increases the player's sense of tension, but by not starting the operation of a specified movable decorative member when the precursor display is displayed (maintaining the state it was in before the precursor display was displayed), the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

It is also possible to provide cases where, while the movable decorative element is in motion, a precursor display such as a "text background color change during reach" or a "pre-reach battle" begins to be displayed. In this case, it is recommended that the movement of the movable decorative element be set to "maintain the state (movement pattern) that existed before the precursor display was displayed," as described above.

The length of time that the precursor display (image of the master character's comment) for the "During-reach character background color change effect" is displayed may be the same as the length of time that the precursor display (indication of enduring an energy bullet) for the "Pre-reach battle effect" is displayed.
Since it is possible to experience in advance the change in the display content, where the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (a display showing the character enduring an energy bullet) switches to the specific display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (a display showing the demon character fainting), the tension felt when the precursor display for the "reach character background color change effect" (an image of the master character's comment) is displayed (the tension of wondering when the precursor display for the "reach character background color change effect" (an image of the master character's comment) will end) can be moderately alleviated.

Alternatively, the time for which the precursor display for the "text background color change during reach" (image of a comment from the master character) is displayed may be longer than the time for which the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle" (display of withstanding an energy bullet) is displayed.
While the "pre-reach battle effect" is an effect that indicates whether or not the game will develop into a reach effect, the "reach character background color change effect" is an effect that immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been hit, and the latter is therefore more important as an effect. Therefore, by relatively shortening the time that the "pre-reach battle effect" precursor display (the display that the game is withstanding the energy bullets) is displayed, it is possible to prevent the player's expectations for a jackpot from being excessively aroused.
Alternatively, the time for which the precursor display for the "text background color change during reach" (image of a comment from the master character) is displayed may be shorter than the time for which the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle" (display of withstanding an energy bullet) is displayed.
The display of the precursor display for the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" is performed after the display of the precursor display for the "Pre-Reach Battle Effect." Also, after the precursor display for the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" (image of a comment from the master character) is displayed, a display in which the character background color changes is always performed. This causes the player to feel a sense of tension for a long period of time, but by relatively shortening the time for which the precursor display for the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" (image of a comment from the master character) is displayed, it is possible to make the player aware that a display in which the character background color will change will be performed, while preventing the player from becoming overly excited about a jackpot.

When the precursor display for the "text background color change during reach" (a comment image from the master character) is displayed, only the current hold image is displayed without displaying the standby hold image, and when the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle" (an indication that the player is withstanding an energy bullet) is displayed, both the standby hold image and the current hold image may be displayed.
When the precursor display (the master character's comment image) of the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed, the reserve change effect in which the current reserve image may be promoted with a predetermined probability may be executed with a predetermined probability. By adopting such an embodiment, the reserve change effect can be enjoyed while the precursor display (the master character's comment image) of the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed.

Regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display (comment image of the master character) of the ``reach text background color change effect,'' the following relationship pattern may be adopted.
For example, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character) may be performed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character), end of display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character), and end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character) may be performed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character), end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character).
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character), start of the hold change effect, end of display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character), and end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character), start of the hold change effect, end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character).

On the other hand, when a precursor display (a comment image of the master character) for the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed, the hold change effect that changes the current hold image may not be executed.
According to this embodiment, the player can focus on the background color that is displayed after the precursor display (the comment image of the master character) of the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed.

When the precursor display for the "text background color change during reach" (a comment image from the master character) is displayed, only the current hold image is displayed without displaying the standby hold image, and when the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle" (an indication that the player is withstanding an energy bullet) is displayed, both the standby hold image and the current hold image may be displayed.
When the premonition display of the "before-reach battle effect" (the display of enduring the energy bullet) is displayed, the hold change effect in which the current hold image may be promoted with a predetermined probability may be executed with a predetermined probability. By adopting such an embodiment, the hold change effect can be enjoyed while the premonition display of the "before-reach battle effect" (the display of enduring the energy bullet) is displayed.

Regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display of the ``pre-reach battle effect'' (display of enduring the energy bullet), the following relationship pattern may be adopted.
For example, the hold change effect may be executed and the premonition display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (indication that the player is withstanding the energy bullet) may be displayed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of the premonition display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (indication that the player is withstanding the energy bullet), end of display of the premonition display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (indication that the player is withstanding the energy bullet), and end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets) may be performed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets), end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets).
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets) may be performed in the following order: the start of the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets), the start of the hold change effect, the end of the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets), and the end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets), start of the hold change effect, end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets).

On the other hand, when the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (the display showing that the player is withstanding the energy bullet) is displayed, the hold change effect that changes the current hold image may not be executed.
According to such an embodiment, the player can focus on the specific display of the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of the Oni character fainting) that appears after the display of the precursor display of the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of the Oni character surviving an energy bullet).

When the precursor display for the "text background color change during reach" (a comment image from the master character) is displayed, only the current hold image is displayed without displaying the standby hold image, and when the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle" (an indication that the player is withstanding an energy bullet) is displayed, both the standby hold image and the current hold image may be displayed.
When the precursor display of the "pre-reach battle effect" (the display of enduring the energy bullet) is displayed, a hold change effect in which the standby hold image may be upgraded with a predetermined probability may be executed with a predetermined probability. By adopting such an embodiment, the hold change effect can be enjoyed while the precursor display of the "pre-reach battle effect" (the display of enduring the energy bullet) is displayed.

Regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the standby hold image and the display period of the precursor display of the ``pre-reach battle effect'' (display of enduring the energy bullet), the following relationship pattern may be adopted.
For example, the hold change effect may be executed and the premonition display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (indication that the player is withstanding the energy bullet) may be displayed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of the premonition display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (indication that the player is withstanding the energy bullet), end of display of the premonition display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (indication that the player is withstanding the energy bullet), and end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets) may be performed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets), end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets).
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets) may be performed in the following order: the start of the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets), the start of the hold change effect, the end of the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets), and the end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets), start of the hold change effect, end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets).

On the other hand, when the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (the display showing that the player is withstanding the energy bullet) is displayed, the hold change effect that changes the standby hold image may not be executed.
According to such an embodiment, the player can focus on the specific display of the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of the Oni character fainting) that appears after the display of the precursor display of the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of the Oni character surviving an energy bullet).

Four patterns are shown regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display (comment image of the master character) of the ``reach text background color change effect.''
In addition, four patterns are shown regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display of the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of enduring the energy bullet).
In addition, four patterns are shown regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the standby hold image and the display period of the precursor display of the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of enduring the energy bullet).
All of these can be executed independently, but an embodiment can also be formed by appropriately combining a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display for the ``reach text background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character), a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display for the ``reach pre-battle effect'' (display showing that the character is withstanding an energy bullet), and a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the standby hold image and the display period of the precursor display for the ``reach pre-battle effect'' (display showing that the character is withstanding an energy bullet).

There may be multiple types of hold change effects, and different patterns may be used depending on the type of hold change effect. For example, different patterns may be used for hold change effects that hide holds with smoke and hold change effects that hide holds with swords. For example, in the case of hold change effects that hide holds with smoke, the order of execution is start of the hold change effect, start of display of the pre-reach battle effect sign (indicating that the player is withstanding energy bullets), end of display of the pre-reach battle effect sign (indicating that the player is withstanding energy bullets), and end of the hold change effect. In the case of hold change effects that hide holds with swords, the order of execution is start of the hold change effect, start of display of the pre-reach battle effect sign (indicating that the player is withstanding energy bullets), end of the hold change effect, and end of display of the pre-reach battle effect sign (indicating that the player is withstanding energy bullets).

The display priority of the precursor display for the "text background color change during reach" (image of a comment from the master character) and the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle" (display of withstanding the energy bullet) may be higher or lower than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change display (for example, an image that approaches the current hold image or standby hold image and displays an impact on the current hold image or standby hold image).
In addition, the display priority of the precursor display (image of a comment from the master character) for the "reach character background color change effect" may be set higher than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change effect, and the display priority of the precursor display (display of enduring an energy bullet) for the "reach pre-battle effect" may be set lower than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the display priority of the precursor display (image of a comment from the master character) for the "reach character background color change effect" may be lower than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change effect, and the display priority of the precursor display (display of enduring an energy bullet) for the "reach pre-battle effect" may be higher than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change effect.

When the precursor display (a comment image from the master character) for the "Text background color change during reach" effect is displayed, a predetermined expectation effect (an expectation effect that raises the expectation of a win, hereafter referred to as the "predetermined expectation effect") different from the hold change effect may be executed with a predetermined probability. The predetermined expectation effect may, for example, be a display mode such as displaying a predetermined character in display area 1600a. By using such an embodiment, the sense of anticipation can be increased while the precursor display (a comment image from the master character) for the "Text background color change during reach" effect is displayed. The display mode of the standby hold image or current hold image does not change due to the predetermined expectation effect.

The following relationship patterns may be adopted for the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (comment image of the master character) for the ``reach character background color change effect.''
For example, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the "reach character background color change effect" (comment image of the master character) may be performed in the following order: start of the specified expected effect, start of display of the precursor display for the "reach character background color change effect" (comment image of the master character), end of display of the precursor display for the "reach character background color change effect" (comment image of the master character), and end of the specified expected effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``reach-prone character background color change effect'' (a comment image of the master character) may be performed in the following order: the start of the specified expected effect, the start of display of the precursor display for the ``reach-prone character background color change effect'' (a comment image of the master character), the end of the specified expected effect, and the end of display of the precursor display for the ``reach-prone character background color change effect'' (a comment image of the master character).
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character), start of the specified expected effect, end of display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character), and end of the specified expected effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``reach-in-character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the ``reach-in-character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character), start of the specified expected effect, end of the specified expected effect, and end of display of the precursor display for the ``reach-in-character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character).

When the precursor display (image of a comment from the master character) for the "text background color change effect during reach" is displayed, the specified expected effect may not be executed.

When the pre-reach battle effect warning display (display of withstanding energy bullets) is displayed, a predetermined expectation display different from the hold change display may be executed with a predetermined probability. The predetermined expectation display may, for example, be a display mode such as displaying a predetermined character in display area 1600a. By using such an embodiment, it is possible to increase the sense of anticipation while the pre-reach battle effect warning display (display of withstanding energy bullets) is displayed. Note that the display mode of the standby hold image or current hold image does not change due to the predetermined expectation display.

Regarding the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display of the "pre-reach battle effect" (the display of enduring the energy bullet), the following relationship pattern may be adopted.
For example, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of the player enduring the energy bullets) may be performed in the following order: start of the specified expected effect, start of display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of the player enduring the energy bullets), end of display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of the player enduring the energy bullets), and end of the specified expected effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of the player enduring the energy bullets) may be performed in the following order: start of the specified expected effect, start of display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of the player enduring the energy bullets), end of the specified expected effect, and end of display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of the player enduring the energy bullets).
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected performance and the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle performance" (display of withstanding energy bullets) may be performed in the following order: the start of the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle performance" (display of withstanding energy bullets), the start of the specified expected performance, the end of the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle performance" (display of withstanding energy bullets), and the end of the specified expected performance.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``pre-reach battle effect'' (display of the player enduring the energy bullets) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the ``pre-reach battle effect'' (display of the player enduring the energy bullets), start of the specified expected effect, end of the specified expected effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the ``pre-reach battle effect'' (display of the player enduring the energy bullets).

When the "pre-reach battle effect" warning display (indicating that the player is surviving an energy bullet) is displayed, it is also possible to prevent the specified expected effect from being executed.

The specified expected effects can be, for example, effects that prompt the player to operate the operating means, or effects that do not prompt the player to operate the operating means (such as comment preview effects, step-up preview effects, and premium effects that confirm a jackpot).

Four patterns are shown for the relationship between the execution period of a predetermined expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (comment image of the master character) for the "reach character background color change effect."
In addition, four patterns are shown for the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (display of enduring energy bullets) of the "pre-reach battle effect."
Although all of these can be executed independently, an embodiment can also be formed by appropriately combining a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (comment image of the master character) for the ``reach-in-reach character background color change effect'' and a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (display of withstanding energy bullets) for the ``reach-in-battle effect.''

Although multiple types of predetermined expected effects are shown, different patterns may be adopted depending on the type of predetermined expected effect. For example, one of four patterns may be adopted when executing one expected effect, either an effect that prompts the player to operate the operation means or an effect that does not prompt the player to operate the operation means (such as a comment preview effect, a step-up preview effect, or a premium effect that confirms a jackpot), and another of the four patterns may be adopted when executing another expected effect. For example, in the case of a comment preview effect, the specified expected effect is executed and the pre-reach battle effect sign (indication that the player is withstanding energy bullets) is displayed in the following order: start of the comment preview effect, start of display of the pre-reach battle effect sign (indication that the player is withstanding energy bullets), end of display of the pre-reach battle effect sign (indication that the player is withstanding energy bullets), and end of the comment preview effect; in the case of a step-up preview effect, the specified expected effect is executed and the pre-reach battle effect sign (indication that the player is withstanding energy bullets) is displayed in the following order: start of display of the pre-reach battle effect sign (indication that the player is withstanding energy bullets), start of the step-up preview effect, end of display of the pre-reach battle effect sign (indication that the player is withstanding energy bullets), and end of the step-up preview effect.

The display priority of the precursor display for the "text background color change during reach" (image of a comment from the master character) and the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle" (indication of withstanding the energy bullet) may be higher or lower than the display priority of the images displayed in the specified expectation display (for example, simulated image of the operation unit, comment image, step-up image, premium image, etc.).
In addition, the display priority of the precursor display (image of a comment from the master character) for the "text background color change during reach" effect may be set higher than the display priority of the image displayed in a specified expected effect, and the display priority of the precursor display (display of enduring an energy bullet) for the "pre-reach battle effect" may be set lower than the display priority of the image displayed in a specified expected effect.
Alternatively, the display priority of the precursor display (image of a comment from the master character) for the "text background color change during reach" effect may be lower than the display priority of the image displayed in a specified expected effect, and the display priority of the precursor display (display of enduring an energy bullet) for the "pre-reach battle effect" may be higher than the display priority of the image displayed in a specified expected effect.

The display of a precursor to the "text background color change during reach" effect (an image of a comment from the master character) or a precursor to the "pre-reach battle" effect (an indication that the character is resistant to an energy bullet) may be repeated.
For example, the size of the comment image displayed in the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" precursor display (the Master character's comment image) may be increased or decreased multiple times. Also, during the "Before Reach Battle Effect" precursor display (the display showing the demon character enduring an energy bullet), the demon character may be caused to retreat and advance multiple times by the energy bullet. By adopting such a display mode, it is possible to reduce the capacity and alleviate the sense of tension caused by the precursor display.
On the other hand, the display of the precursor to the "text background color change during reach" effect (image of a comment from the master character) and the precursor to the "pre-reach battle effect" (indication of withstanding an energy bullet) may not be repeated.
For example, the size of the comment image displayed in the precursor display (the master character's comment image) for the "reach character background color change effect" may be gradually increased but not decreased. Also, during the precursor display for the "reach pre-battle effect" (the display showing the demon character enduring the energy bullets), the demon character may be shown gradually retreating due to the energy bullets. By adopting such display modes, the image quality is improved, and the player can be excited.

The display of the precursor to the "text background color change during reach" effect (image of a comment from the master character) may be repeatedly displayed, and the display of the precursor to the "pre-reach battle effect" (indication of enduring an energy bullet) may not be repeatedly displayed.
Alternatively, the display of the precursor to the "text background color change during reach" effect (image of a comment from the master character) may not be repeated, and the display of the precursor to the "pre-reach battle effect" (indication of enduring an energy bullet) may be repeated.
Alternatively, it is possible to prevent both the display of the precursor display for the "text background color change during reach" (image of a comment from the master character) and the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle" (indication of withstanding an energy bullet) from being repeated.

An embodiment has been shown in which the display of a precursory display for the "text background color change during reach" (a comment image from the master character) or the display of a precursory display for the "pre-reach battle" (a display of withstanding an energy bullet) may be repeatedly displayed, but in response to the display of the precursory display, light-emitting means such as a light-emitting decorative member may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner, or sound may be output from a sound generating means in a predetermined manner.
In this case, the light or sound output mode may be repeated in accordance with the repetition of the display of the predictive display. Alternatively, the light or sound may be output in a predetermined pattern throughout the entire display period of the predictive display without being associated with the repetition of the display of the predictive display (i.e., without repeatedly outputting the light or sound). Furthermore, if the display of the predictive display is not repeated, the light or sound may also be output in a predetermined pattern throughout the entire display period of the predictive display without being repeatedly output.

In the embodiment shown, there is only one type of precursor display for the "text background color change during reach" (image of a comment from the master character) and one type of precursor display for the "pre-reach battle" (display of enduring an energy bullet), but either one or both may be of multiple types.
For example, two types of precursor displays (comment images of the master character) for the "reach character background color change effect" may be prepared, and the degree of expectation may differ depending on the type. Note that the number is not limited to two types, and may be three or more types. In this case, it is also preferable to have three or more types (three stages) of expectation.
In addition, two types of facial expressions of the demon character that are displayed as a precursor to the "pre-reach battle effect" (a display of the character enduring the energy bullets) can be prepared, with one type of expression showing the demon character having a relaxed look and the other type showing the demon character having a stressed look, so that the latter type has a higher probability of expecting a jackpot than the former. Note that the number of types is not limited to two, and three or more types may be used. In this case, it is also preferable to have three or more types (three stages) of expectation.
There may be one type of precursor display (a comment image from the master character) for the "approaching character background color change effect" and multiple types (for example, the two types mentioned above) for the "approaching battle effect" (an indication that the character is withstanding the energy bullets). In this case, too, it is advisable to vary the degree of expectation depending on the type of precursor display.
Alternatively, there may be multiple types of precursor displays (comment images from the master character) for the "text background color change during reach" effect (for example, the two types mentioned above), and only one type of precursor display (display of withstanding the energy bullet) for the "pre-reach battle effect."
Alternatively, there may be multiple types of precursor displays (comment images from the master character) for the "reach-in-text background color change effect" (for example, the two types mentioned above), and multiple types of precursor displays (indications of withstanding energy bullets) for the "reach-in-battle effect" (for example, the two types mentioned above).
When only one display mode of the precursor display is provided, there is no difference in the degree of expectation while the precursor display is being displayed, so a stable sense of expectation can be provided. On the other hand, when multiple display modes are provided, a display with a high degree of expectation is displayed while the precursor display is being displayed, so the sense of expectation can be increased.

In the above embodiment, the precursor display for the "In-Reach Text Background Color Change Effect" (a comment image from the master character) and the precursor display for the "Pre-Reach Battle Effect" (an indication of withstanding an energy bullet) are displayed in the same variable display, but the "Pre-Reach Battle Effect" may also be executed as a pre-reading effect. In this case, the "Pre-Reach Battle Effect" is executed in a predetermined variable display, and the "In-Reach Text Background Color Change Effect" is executed in the variable display thereafter. When the "Pre-Reach Battle Effect" is executed as a pre-reading effect, it is advisable to stop displaying each variable display in a non-miss-at-all state until the predicted reach effect is executed. This can create a sense of anticipation even when a non-miss-at-all variable pattern is executed.

When the "pre-reach battle effect" is executed as a look-ahead effect, only the precursor display (indicating that the energy bullets are withstanding) may be displayed, or in addition to the precursor display (indicating that the energy bullets are withstanding), a specific display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (indicating that the demon character is unconscious) and a related display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (indicating that the comment "Enemy is injured!") may be displayed. Note that one or both of the specific and related displays may be displayed until the display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the hold that was the subject of the look-ahead effect begins to change (or until the reach effect begins).

In the embodiment shown, the precursor display for the "Pre-Reach Battle Effect" (indicating that the character is withstanding an energy bullet) is displayed followed by the precursor display for the "In-Reach Text Background Color Change Effect" (an image of a comment from the master character). However, it is also possible to have the precursor display for the "In-Reach Text Background Color Change Effect" (an image of a comment from the master character) be displayed without displaying the precursor display for the "Pre-Reach Battle Effect" (indicating that the character is withstanding an energy bullet). This embodiment can instantly increase the sense of anticipation.

In the embodiment shown, the "In-Reach Text Background Color Change Effect" is executed after the "Pre-Reach Battle Effect" is executed, but it is also possible to execute the "In-Reach Text Background Color Change Effect" without executing the "Pre-Reach Battle Effect." This embodiment can instantly increase the sense of anticipation.

In one variation, the probability that a premonition display for the "Pre-Reach Battle Effect" (indication that the character is withstanding an energy bullet) is displayed followed by a premonition display for the "In-Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" (an image of a comment from the master character) may be higher than the probability that a premonition display for the "In-Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" (an image of a comment from the master character) is displayed without displaying a premonition display for the "Pre-Reach Battle Effect" (indication that the character is withstanding an energy bullet). In this embodiment, the display of a premonition display for the "Pre-Reach Battle Effect" (indication that the character is withstanding an energy bullet) is displayed appropriately, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

In one variation, the probability that a "mid-reach character background color change effect" will be executed after a "pre-reach battle effect" has been executed may be made higher than the probability that a "mid-reach character background color change effect" will be executed without executing a "pre-reach battle effect." In this embodiment, the "pre-reach battle effect" will be executed appropriately, preventing a decline in interest.

In one variation, the probability that a premonition display for the "In-Reach Battle Effect" (an image of a comment from the master character) will be displayed after a premonition display for the "In-Reach Battle Effect" (an image of a comment from the master character) is displayed may be lower than the probability that a premonition display for the "In-Reach Battle Effect" (an image of a comment from the master character) will be displayed without displaying a premonition display for the "In-Reach Battle Effect" (an image of a comment from the master character). According to this embodiment, the sense of anticipation can be instantly heightened when a premonition display for the "In-Reach Battle Effect" (an image of a comment from the master character) is displayed.

In one variation, the probability that a "reach character background color change effect" will be executed after a "reach pre-battle effect" has been executed may be lower than the probability that a "reach character background color change effect" will be executed without executing a "reach pre-battle effect." According to this embodiment, the sense of anticipation can be instantly heightened when a "reach pre-battle effect" is executed.

The expectation level when a premonition display for the "Pre-Reach Battle Effect" (indication that the character is withstanding an energy bullet) is displayed followed by a premonition display for the "In-Reach Text Background Color Change Effect" (image of a comment from the master character) may be higher than the expectation level when a premonition display for the "Pre-Reach Battle Effect" (indication that the character is withstanding an energy bullet) is displayed without displaying the premonition display for the "Pre-Reach Battle Effect" (indication that the character is withstanding an energy bullet). According to this embodiment, the sense of expectation can be increased all at once when the premonition display for the "Pre-Reach Battle Effect" (indication that the character is withstanding an energy bullet) is displayed.

The expectation level when a "reach-in-character background color change effect" is executed after a "reach-in-battle effect" is executed may be higher than the expectation level when a "reach-in-character background color change effect" is executed without executing a "reach-in-battle effect." According to this embodiment, the sense of expectation can be increased all at once when a "reach-in-battle effect" is executed.

The expectation level when a premonition display for the "Pre-Reach Battle Effect" (indication that the character is withstanding an energy bullet) is displayed followed by a premonition display for the "In-Reach Text Background Color Change Effect" (image of a comment from the master character) may be lower than the expectation level when a premonition display for the "In-Reach Text Background Color Change Effect" (image of a comment from the master character) is displayed without displaying the premonition display for the "Pre-Reach Battle Effect" (indication that the character is withstanding an energy bullet). In this embodiment, the display of the premonition display for the "Pre-Reach Battle Effect" (indication that the character is withstanding an energy bullet) at appropriate times can prevent a decrease in interest.

The expectation level when a "reach-in character background color change effect" is executed after a "reach-in battle effect" is executed may be lower than the expectation level when a "reach-in character background color change effect" is executed without executing a "reach-in battle effect." In this embodiment, the "reach-in battle effect" is executed appropriately, preventing a decline in interest.

Referring to Figures 422, 423, etc., an embodiment is shown in which the background color (text color in a modified example) of the comment image of the martial artist character changes from a low expectation color to a high expectation color at timing t46.
The length of time that the background color is displayed in a low expectation color here may be longer, shorter, or the same as the length of time that the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (the display of withstanding the energy bullets) is displayed.
In addition, the length of time that the background color is displayed in a low expectation color may be longer, shorter, or the same as the length of time that the precursor display (comment image of the master character) for the ``reach character background color change effect'' is displayed.
In addition, the length of time that the background color is displayed in a high expectation color may be longer, shorter, or the same as the length of time that the precursor display for the ``pre-reach battle effect'' (the display of enduring the energy bullet) is displayed.
In addition, the length of time that the background color is displayed in a high expectation color may be longer, shorter, or the same as the length of time that the precursor display (comment image of the master character) for the ``reach character background color change effect'' is displayed.

Below, we will explain variations of an embodiment in which a "reach warning effect due to hold" is executed followed by a "reach text background color change effect."

When the precursor display (a comment image of the master character) of the "reach-in-progress character background color change effect" is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated, and instead another background image may be started to be displayed. Similarly, when the precursor display (a translucent reach name display) of the "reach-in-progression effect" is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated, and instead another background image may be started to be displayed.
By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the scene has switched to an important scene.
Also, when the premonition display of the second hold change effect (the display of the hold image shaking) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated and instead the display of another background image may be started. Alternatively, even when the premonition display of the second hold change effect (the display of the hold image shaking) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be continued.

When the precursor display for the "reach-in-progress character background color change effect" (the master character's comment image) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated and another background image may be displayed instead. On the other hand, when the precursor display for the "reach-in-progression effect due to hold" (the semi-transparent reach name display) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be continued.
The precursor display of the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been won is more important than the precursor display of the "Hold Reach Notice Effect" which indicates whether or not it will develop into a Battle Reach, but by switching the background image, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display of the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" which is more important is being displayed.
Also, when the premonition display of the second hold change effect (the display of the hold image shaking) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated and instead the display of another background image may be started. Alternatively, even when the premonition display of the second hold change effect (the display of the hold image shaking) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be continued.

When the precursor display (a comment image of the master character) of the "reach-in-progress character background color change effect" is displayed, the previously displayed background image may be continued to be displayed. On the other hand, when the precursor display (a semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach-in-progression effect due to hold" is displayed, the previously displayed background image may be terminated, and instead another background image may be displayed.
The precursor display of the "during-reach character background color change effect" is displayed just before it is shown whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which makes the player feel tense, but by continuing to display the same background image without changing it, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.
Also, when the premonition display of the second hold change effect (the display of the hold image shaking) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated and instead the display of another background image may be started. Alternatively, even when the premonition display of the second hold change effect (the display of the hold image shaking) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be continued.

When the precursor display (image of a comment from the master character) of the "reach-in-progress character background color change effect" is displayed, the previously displayed background image may be continued to be displayed. Also, when the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach-in-progression effect" is displayed, the previously displayed background image may be continued to be displayed.
The precursor display for the "reach text background color change effect" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and the precursor display for the "reach notice effect due to hold" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not it will develop into a battle reach, so each of these situations increases the player's tension, but by preventing the background image from changing before and after the precursor display is displayed, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.
Also, when the premonition display of the second hold change effect (the display of the hold image shaking) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated and instead the display of another background image may be started. Alternatively, even when the premonition display of the second hold change effect (the display of the hold image shaking) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be continued.

When a precursor display (a comment image of the master character) of the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that has been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be lowered or the sound output may be interrupted. Similarly, when a precursor display (a translucent reach name display) of the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is displayed, the volume of the sound that has been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be lowered or the sound output may be interrupted.
According to such an embodiment, the output manner of the sound that was previously output from the sound generating means is suppressed, making it sound quieter or completely inaudible, thereby making it easier to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.
In addition, when the precursor display for the second hold change effect (the display of the hold image shaking) is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that was being output may be lowered or the output of the sound may be interrupted, or the output of the sound may be continued as is without changing the volume of the sound that had been output up until then.

When a precursory display (a comment image of the master character) for the "reach-in-progress character background color change effect" is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that had been output from the sound generation means up until then may be lowered or the sound output may be interrupted. On the other hand, when a precursory display (a translucent reach name display) for the "reach-in-progression effect due to hold" is displayed, the volume of the sound that had been output from the sound generation means up until then may be left unchanged and the output may continue as is.
According to such an embodiment, the output manner of the sound that was previously output from the sound generating means is suppressed, making it sound quieter or completely inaudible, thereby making it easier to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.
The precursor display of the "during reach character background color change effect" which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been won is more important than the precursor display of the "reach advance notice effect by hold" which indicates whether or not it will develop into a battle reach, but by suppressing the sound output from the sound generating means, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display of the "reach character background color change effect" which is more important is being displayed.
In addition, when the precursor display for the second hold change effect (the display of the hold image shaking) is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that was being output may be lowered or the output of the sound may be interrupted, or the output of the sound may be continued as is without changing the volume of the sound that had been output up until then.

When the precursor display (image of a comment from the master character) of the "reach-in-progress character background color change effect" is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that has been output from the sound generating means up to that point may be left unchanged and continue to be output as is. On the other hand, when the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach-in-progression effect due to hold" is displayed, the volume of the sound that has been output from the sound generating means up to that point may be lowered or the sound output may be interrupted.
The precursor display of the "during-reach character background color change effect" is displayed just before it is shown whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which makes the player feel tense, but by continuing to output the sound that has been output from the sound generating means without changing the volume, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.
In addition, when the precursor display for the second hold change effect (the display of the hold image shaking) is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that was being output may be lowered or the output of the sound may be interrupted, or the output of the sound may be continued as is without changing the volume of the sound that was being output up until then.

When a precursory display (a comment image of the master character) for the "reach-in-progress character background color change effect" is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that had been output from the sound generating means up until that point may be left unchanged and continue to be output. Also, when a precursory display (a translucent reach name display) for the "reach-in-progression effect due to hold" is displayed, the volume of the sound that had been output from the sound generating means up until that point may be left unchanged and continue to be output.
The precursor display for the "character background color change effect during reach" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and the precursor display for the "reach notice effect due to hold" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not it will develop into a battle reach, so that each of these situations increases the player's tension, but by preventing the volume of the sound that has been output from the sound generating means from changing when the precursor display is displayed, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.
In addition, when the precursor display for the second hold change effect (the display of the hold image shaking) is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that was being output may be lowered or the output of the sound may be interrupted, or the output of the sound may be continued as is without changing the volume of the sound that was being output up until then.

The sound (BGM, etc.) output when the precursor display (image of a comment from the master character) for the "reach-in-progress character background color change effect" is displayed may be the same as the sound output when the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the "reach-in-progression effect due to hold" is displayed, or it may be a different sound.
The output duration of the sound output when the precursor display (the master character's comment image) of the "reach-in-progress character background color change effect" is displayed may be the same as or different from the output duration of the sound output when the precursor display (the translucent reach name display) of the "reach-in-progression effect due to hold" is displayed. If the lengths are different, one may be longer than the other, or one may be shorter than the other.

The length of time that the precursor display (image of a comment from the master character) for the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" is displayed and the length of the sound (BGM, etc.) that is output when the precursor display (image of a comment from the master character) for the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" is displayed may be the same or different. If the lengths are different, one may be longer than the other, or one may be shorter than the other.
The length of time that the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the "reach advance notice performance due to hold" is displayed and the output time of the sound that is output when the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the "reach advance notice performance due to hold" is displayed may be the same length or different lengths. If the lengths are different, one may be longer than the other, or one may be shorter than the other.

When a precursor display (a comment image of the master character) for the "character background color change effect during reach" is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting element may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting effect using another light-emitting pattern may be started. Similarly, when a precursor display (a translucent reach name display) for the "reach notice effect due to hold" is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting element may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting effect using another light-emitting pattern may be started.
According to this embodiment, it is possible to make it easier for the driver to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.
Furthermore, when a precursor display for the second hold change effect (a display in which the hold image shakes) is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting unit may be terminated, and instead the execution of the light-emitting effect using another light-emitting pattern may be started, or the light-emitting effect currently being executed may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting unit using a predetermined light-emitting pattern.

When the precursor display (a comment image of the master character) of the "character background color change effect during reach" is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting unit may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting effect with another light-emitting pattern may be started. On the other hand, when the precursor display (a translucent reach name display) of the "reach notice effect due to hold" is displayed, the light-emitting effect that is being executed may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting unit.
The precursor display of the "reach character background color change effect" which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been reached is more important than the precursor display of the "reach notice effect due to hold" which indicates whether or not it will develop into a battle reach, but by starting a new light-emitting effect executed using a specified light-emitting part, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display of the highly important "reach character background color change effect" is being displayed.
Furthermore, when a precursor display for the second hold change effect (a display in which the hold image shakes) is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting unit may be terminated, and instead the execution of the light-emitting effect using another light-emitting pattern may be started, or the light-emitting effect currently being executed may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting unit using a predetermined light-emitting pattern.

When a precursor display (a comment image of the master character) for the "character background color change effect during reach" is displayed, the light-emitting effect currently being executed may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern using a predetermined light-emitting element. On the other hand, when a precursor display (a translucent reach name display) for the "reach notice effect due to hold" is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern that was being executed using a predetermined light-emitting element may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting effect with another light-emitting pattern may be started.
The precursor display of the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" is displayed just before it is shown whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which can make the player feel tense, but by continuing the light-emitting effect currently being executed without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern using a predetermined light-emitting element, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.
Furthermore, when a precursor display for the second hold change effect (a display in which the hold image shakes) is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting unit may be terminated, and instead the execution of the light-emitting effect using another light-emitting pattern may be started, or the light-emitting effect currently being executed may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting unit using a predetermined light-emitting pattern.

When a precursory display (a comment image of the master character) for the "character background color change effect during reach" is displayed, the light-emitting effect currently being executed may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern executed using a predetermined light-emitting element. Also, when a precursory display (a translucent reach name display) for the "reach notice effect due to hold" is displayed, the light-emitting effect currently being executed may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern executed using a predetermined light-emitting element.
The precursor display for the "character background color change effect during reach" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and the precursor display for the "reach notice effect due to hold" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not it will develop into a battle reach, so each of these situations increases the player's tension, but by preventing the light emission pattern that has been executed up until that point from changing when the precursor display is displayed, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.
Furthermore, when a precursor display for the second hold change effect (a display in which the hold image shakes) is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting unit may be terminated, and instead the execution of the light-emitting effect using another light-emitting pattern may be started, or the light-emitting effect currently being executed may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting unit using a predetermined light-emitting pattern.

When the precursor display (a comment image of the master character) for the "reach-prone character background color change effect" is displayed, the operation of a predetermined movable decorative member may be started. Similarly, when the precursor display (a translucent reach name display) for the "reach-prone character background color change effect" is displayed, the operation of a predetermined movable decorative member may be started.
According to this embodiment, it is possible to make it easier for the driver to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.
In addition, when a precursor display for the second hold change effect (a display in which the hold image fluctuates) is displayed, the operation of a specified movable decorative member may be started, or the operation of the specified movable decorative member may not be started (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained).

When the precursor display (a comment image of the master character) of the "reach-prone character background color change effect" is displayed, the operation of a predetermined movable decorative member may be started. On the other hand, when the precursor display (a translucent reach name display) of the "reach-prone character background color change effect" is displayed, the operation of the predetermined movable decorative member may not be started (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained).
The precursor display of the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been won is more important than the precursor display of the "Hold Reach Notice Effect" which indicates whether or not the game will develop into a Battle Reach, but by starting the operation of a predetermined movable decorative member, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display of the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" which is more important is being displayed.
In addition, when a precursor display for the second hold change effect (a display in which the hold image fluctuates) is displayed, the operation of a specified movable decorative member may be started, or the operation of the specified movable decorative member may not be started (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained).

When the precursor display (a comment image of the master character) for the "reach-in-progress character background color change effect" is displayed, the operation of the specified movable decorative member may not be initiated (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained). On the other hand, when the precursor display (a translucent reach name display) for the "reach-in-progression effect" is displayed, the operation of the specified movable decorative member may be initiated.
The precursor display for the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed just before it is revealed whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which can create tension for the player, but by not starting the operation of the specified movable decorative member (maintaining the state before the precursor display was displayed), the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.
In addition, when a precursor display for the second hold change effect (a display in which the hold image fluctuates) is displayed, the operation of a specified movable decorative member may be started, or the operation of the specified movable decorative member may not be started (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained).

When the precursor display (a comment image of the master character) for the "reach-in-progress character background color change effect" is displayed, the operation of the specified movable decorative member may not be initiated (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained). Also, when the precursor display (a translucent reach name display) for the "reach-in-progression-by-hold effect" is displayed, the operation of the specified movable decorative member may not be initiated (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained).
The precursor display for the "text background color change during reach" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and the precursor display for the "reach notice due to hold" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not it will develop into a battle reach, so each of these situations increases the player's tension, but by not starting the operation of a specified movable decorative member when the precursor display is displayed (maintaining the state it was in before the precursor display was displayed), the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.
In addition, when a precursor display for the second hold change effect (a display in which the hold image fluctuates) is displayed, the operation of a specified movable decorative member may be started, or the operation of the specified movable decorative member may not be started (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained).

It is also possible to provide cases where, while the movable decorative element is in operation, a premonition display such as a "text background color change during reach" or a "reach warning display due to hold" begins to be displayed. In this case, it is recommended that the operation of the movable decorative element be set to "maintain the state (operation pattern) that existed before the premonition display was displayed," as described above.

The length of time that the precursor display (image of a comment from the master character) for the "reach text background color change effect" is displayed may be the same as the length of time that the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the "reach preview effect due to hold" is displayed.
Since it is possible to experience in advance the change in the display content as the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach preview effect due to hold" switches to the result display of the "reach preview effect due to hold", the tension felt when the precursor display (image of a comment from the master character) of the "reach background color change effect" is displayed (the tension of wondering when the precursor display (image of a comment from the master character) of the "reach background color change effect" will end) can be moderately alleviated.
In addition, the length of time for which the premonition display of the second hold change effect (the display in which the hold image shakes) is displayed may be the same as the length of time for which the premonition display of the "reach character background color change effect" (the comment image of the master character) is displayed, or they may be different. If they are different, one may be longer than the other, or one may be shorter than the other.

Alternatively, the time for which the precursor display for the "text background color change during reach" (a comment image of the master character) is displayed may be longer than the time for which the precursor display for the "reach preview effect due to hold" (a translucent reach name display) is displayed.
While the "reach notice effect due to hold" is an effect that indicates whether or not it will develop into a reach effect, the "reach text background color change effect" is an effect that indicates whether or not a jackpot will be hit immediately afterwards, and the latter is more important as an effect. Therefore, by relatively shortening the time that the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach notice effect due to hold" is displayed, it is possible to prevent the player's expectations for a jackpot from being excessively aroused.
Alternatively, the time for which the precursor display for the "text background color change during reach" (a comment image of the master character) is displayed may be shorter than the time for which the precursor display for the "reach preview effect due to hold" (a translucent reach name display) is displayed.
The display of the precursor display for the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" is performed after the display of the precursor display for the "During Reach Character Pre-Announcement Effect." In addition, after the precursor display for the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" (an image of a comment from the master character) is displayed, a display in which the character background color changes is always performed. This causes the player to feel tense for a long period of time, but by relatively shortening the time for which the precursor display for the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" (an image of a comment from the master character) is displayed, it is possible to make the player aware that a display in which the character background color will change will be performed, while preventing the player from becoming overly excited about a jackpot.
In addition, the length of time for which the premonition display of the second hold change effect (the display in which the hold image shakes) is displayed may be the same as the length of time for which the premonition display of the "reach character background color change effect" (the comment image of the master character) is displayed, or they may be different. If they are different, one may be longer than the other, or one may be shorter than the other.
In addition, the length of time for which the precursor display of the second hold change effect (a display in which the hold image fluctuates) is displayed may be the same as the length of time for which the precursor display of the "hold reach notice effect" (a semi-transparent reach name display) is displayed, or may be different. If they are different, one may be longer than the other, or one may be shorter than the other.

When the precursor display (a comment image of the master character) of the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed, a predetermined expectation effect different from the hold change effect (including the "reach notice effect due to hold") may be executed with a predetermined probability. As the predetermined expectation effect, for example, a presentation mode such as displaying a predetermined character in the display area 1600a can be adopted. By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation while the precursor display (a comment image of the master character) of the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed. Note that the display mode of the standby hold image or the current hold image does not change due to the predetermined expectation effect.
In addition, a precursor display of the second hold change effect (a display in which the hold image shakes) may be displayed during the execution of a specified expected effect, or may not be displayed.

The following relationship patterns may be adopted for the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (comment image of the master character) for the ``reach character background color change effect.''
For example, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the "reach character background color change effect" (comment image of the master character) may be performed in the following order: start of the specified expected effect, start of display of the precursor display for the "reach character background color change effect" (comment image of the master character), end of display of the precursor display for the "reach character background color change effect" (comment image of the master character), and end of the specified expected effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``reach-prone character background color change effect'' (a comment image of the master character) may be performed in the following order: the start of the specified expected effect, the start of display of the precursor display for the ``reach-prone character background color change effect'' (a comment image of the master character), the end of the specified expected effect, and the end of display of the precursor display for the ``reach-prone character background color change effect'' (a comment image of the master character).
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character), start of the specified expected effect, end of display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character), and end of the specified expected effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``reach-in-character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the ``reach-in-character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character), start of the specified expected effect, end of the specified expected effect, and end of display of the precursor display for the ``reach-in-character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character).
In addition, the display period of the precursor display for the second hold change effect (display in which the hold image shakes) may be set to start either before the start of the effect or display in these patterns, while the effect or display is being executed, or after the effect or display has ended, and to end at any other time.

When the precursor display (image of a comment from the master character) for the "text background color change effect during reach" is displayed, the specified expected effect may not be executed.

When the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is displayed, a predetermined expectation effect different from the hold change effect may be executed with a predetermined probability. As the predetermined expectation effect, for example, a presentation mode such as displaying a predetermined character in the display area 1600a can be adopted. By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation while the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is displayed. Note that the display mode of the standby hold image or the current hold image does not change due to the predetermined expectation effect.
In addition, a precursor display of the second hold change effect (a display in which the hold image shakes) may be displayed during the execution of a specified expected effect, or it may not be displayed.

Regarding the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach preview effect due to hold," the following relationship pattern may be adopted.
For example, the execution of the specified expected performance and the display of the precursor display for the "reach preview performance due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display) may be performed in the following order: start of the specified expected performance, start of display of the precursor display for the "reach preview performance due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display), end of display of the precursor display for the "reach preview performance due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display), and end of the specified expected performance.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected performance and the display of the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the ``reach preview performance due to hold'' may be performed in the following order: start of the specified expected performance, start of display of the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the ``reach preview performance due to hold,'' end of the specified expected performance, and end of display of the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the ``reach preview performance due to hold.''
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected performance and the display of the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the ``hold reach preview performance'' may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the ``hold reach preview performance,'' start of the specified expected performance, end of display of the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the ``hold reach preview performance,'' and end of the specified expected performance.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected performance and the display of the precursor display for the "reach preview performance due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the "reach preview performance due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display), start of the specified expected performance, end of the specified expected performance, and end of display of the precursor display for the "reach preview performance due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display).
In addition, the display period of the precursor display for the second hold change effect (display in which the hold image shakes) may be set to start either before the start of the effect or display in these patterns, while the effect or display is being executed, or after the effect or display has ended, and to end at any other time.

When the "hold reach preview effect" warning display (semi-transparent reach name display) is displayed, the specified expected effect may not be executed.

The specified expected effects can be, for example, effects that prompt the player to operate the operating means, or effects that do not prompt the player to operate the operating means (such as comment preview effects, step-up preview effects, and premium effects that confirm a jackpot).

Four patterns are shown for the relationship between the execution period of a predetermined expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (comment image of the master character) for the "reach character background color change effect."
In addition, four patterns are shown for the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the ``reach preview effect due to hold.''
Although all of these can be executed independently, an embodiment can be formed by appropriately combining a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (comment image of the master character) of the ``reach-in-reach character background color change effect'' and a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the ``reach-preview effect due to hold.''
In addition, the display period of the precursor display for the second hold change effect (display of the hold image shaking) may also be appropriately combined with these patterns to form an embodiment.

Although multiple types of predetermined expected effects are shown, different patterns may be adopted depending on the type of predetermined expected effect. For example, one of four patterns may be adopted when executing one expected effect, either an effect that prompts the player to operate the operation means or an effect that does not prompt the player to operate the operation means (such as a comment preview effect, a step-up preview effect, or a premium effect that confirms a jackpot), and another of the four patterns may be adopted when executing another expected effect. For example, in the case of a comment preview performance, the execution of a predetermined expected performance and the display of a premonition display for the "hold reach preview performance" (semi-transparent reach name display) are displayed in the following order: start of the comment preview performance, start of display of the premonition display for the "hold reach preview performance" (semi-transparent reach name display), end of display of the premonition display for the "hold reach preview performance" (semi-transparent reach name display), end of the comment preview performance; in the case of a step-up preview performance, the execution of a predetermined expected performance and the display of a premonition display for the "hold reach preview performance" (semi-transparent reach name display) are displayed in the following order: start of the comment preview performance, start of the step-up preview performance, end of display of the premonition display for the "hold reach preview performance" (semi-transparent reach name display), end of the step-up preview performance.

The display priority of the precursor display for the "text background color change during reach" (image of a comment from the master character) and the precursor display for the "reach notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent display of the reach name) may be higher or lower than the display priority of the images displayed in a specified expectation effect (for example, simulated image of the operation unit, comment image, step-up image, premium image, etc.).
In addition, the display priority of the precursor display (comment image of the master character) for the "reach text background color change effect" may be set higher than the display priority of the image displayed in the specified expectation effect, and the display priority of the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the "reach notice effect due to hold" may be set lower than the display priority of the image displayed in the specified expectation effect.
Alternatively, the display priority of the precursor display (image of a comment from the master character) for the "text background color change during reach" effect may be lower than the display priority of the image displayed in the specified expected effect, and the display priority of the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the "reach notice effect due to hold" may be higher than the display priority of the image displayed in the specified expected effect.
In addition, the display priority of the precursor display of the second hold change effect (display in which the hold image shakes) may be higher or lower than the display priority of these precursor displays or images displayed in the specified expected effects.

The display of a precursor to the "text background color change effect during reach" (a comment image from the master character) or a precursor to the "reach preview effect due to hold" (a semi-transparent display of the reach name) may be repeated.
For example, the size of the comment image displayed in the precursor display (the master character's comment image) of the "reach text background color change effect" may be increased or decreased multiple times. Also, the transparency of the semi-transparent reach name displayed in the precursor display (the semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach preview effect due to hold" may be periodically increased or decreased within a predetermined transparency range (for example, a range of 30% to 70%). By adopting such a display mode, it is possible to reduce capacity and alleviate the sense of tension caused by the precursor display.
On the other hand, the display of the precursor to the "text background color change during reach" (image of a comment from the master character) and the precursor to the "reach preview effect due to hold" (semi-transparent display of the reach name) may not be repeated.
For example, the size of the comment image displayed in the precursor display (the master character's comment image) for the "character background color change effect during reach" may be gradually increased but not decreased. Also, the transparency of the reach name displayed semi-transparently may be gradually decreased (for example, gradually changing from 70% to 30%). By adopting such a display mode, the image quality is improved and the player can be excited.
In addition, the display of the precursor to the second hold change effect (the display of the hold image shaking) may or may not be repeated.

The display of the precursor to the "text background color change during reach" effect (image of a comment from the master character) may be repeatedly displayed, and the display of the precursor to the "reach preview effect due to hold" (semi-transparent display of the reach name) may not be repeatedly displayed.
Alternatively, the display of the precursor to the "text background color change during reach" effect (a comment image from the master character) may not be repeated, and the display of the precursor to the "reach preview effect due to hold" (a semi-transparent display of the reach name) may be repeated.
Alternatively, it is possible to prevent both the display of the precursor to the "text background color change effect during reach" (a comment image from the master character) and the display of the precursor to the "reach preview effect due to hold" (a translucent display of the reach name) from being repeated.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the display of a precursor display for the "text background color change during reach" (a comment image from the master character) and the display of a precursor display for the "reach notice display due to hold" (a translucent display of the reach name) may be repeatedly displayed, it is also possible to make a light-emitting means such as a light-emitting decorative member emit light in a predetermined manner in response to the display of the precursor display, or to output sound in a predetermined manner from a sound generating means.
In this case, the light or sound output mode may be repeated in accordance with the repetition of the display of the predictive display. Alternatively, the light or sound may be output in a predetermined pattern throughout the entire display period of the predictive display without being associated with the repetition of the display of the predictive display (i.e., without repeatedly outputting the light or sound). Furthermore, if the display of the predictive display is not repeated, the light or sound may also be output in a predetermined pattern throughout the entire display period of the predictive display without being repeatedly output.
In addition, when displaying the precursory display of the second hold change effect (the display in which the hold image shakes), any of these light and sound output modes can be appropriately adopted.

In the embodiment shown, there is one type of precursor display for the "text background color change during reach" (a comment image from the master character) and one type of precursor display for the "reach preview" (a translucent reach name display) due to hold, but either one or both may be of multiple types.
For example, two types of precursor displays (comment images of the master character) for the "reach character background color change effect" may be prepared, and the degree of expectation may differ depending on the type. Note that the number is not limited to two types, and may be three or more types. In this case, it is also preferable to have three or more types (three stages) of expectation.
Furthermore, as a precursor display for the "reach preview effect due to hold," a precursor display with different sizes of characters indicating the reach name may be displayed, with the larger the character size, the higher the expectation. In this case, the character size may be in two stages, or in three or more stages. In this case, it is also preferable to vary the expectation depending on the type of precursor display. Not limited to the character size, a precursor display with a predetermined effect and a precursor display without a predetermined effect may also be used. For the predetermined effect, multiple stages of different sizes may be provided, with the expectation increasing in order of no predetermined effect, a small effect being displayed, and a large effect being displayed.
There may be one type of precursor display (a comment image from the master character) for the "reach text background color change effect," and multiple types of precursor displays (semi-transparent reach name display) for the "reach preview effect due to hold" (for example, the two types mentioned above).
Alternatively, there may be multiple types of precursor displays (comment images from the master character) for the "text background color change during reach" effect (for example, the two types mentioned above), and only one type of precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the "reach preview effect due to hold."
Alternatively, there may be multiple types of precursor displays (comment images from the master character) for the "text background color change during reach" effect (for example, the two types mentioned above), and multiple types of precursor displays (semi-transparent reach name display) for the "reach preview effect due to hold" (for example, the two types mentioned above).
When only one display mode of the precursor display is provided, there is no difference in the degree of expectation while the precursor display is being displayed, so a stable sense of expectation can be provided. On the other hand, when multiple display modes are provided, a display with a high degree of expectation is displayed while the precursor display is being displayed, so the sense of expectation can be increased.
In addition, the type of precursor display (the display of the reserved image shaking) of the second reserved change effect may be one or multiple (two or more types). In the case of multiple types, the size of the sword or the way the reserved image shakes may be different. In this case, the larger the sword or the more the reserved image shakes, the higher the probability that the reserved image will change, or the higher the probability that the reserved image will change to a reserved image with a high expectation may be.

Although the embodiment has been described in which the precursor display for the "text background color change during reach" (a comment image of the master character) and the precursor display for the "reach preview effect due to hold" (a translucent reach name display) are displayed in the same single variable display, the "reach preview effect due to hold" may also be executed as a look-ahead effect. In this case, the "reach preview effect due to hold" is executed in a predetermined variable display, and the "reach text background color change effect" is executed in a subsequent variable display. Note that when the "reach preview effect due to hold" is executed as a look-ahead effect, it is advisable to stop and display each variable display in a non-reach miss mode until the predicted reach effect is executed. This can create a sense of anticipation even when a non-reach miss variable pattern is executed.
In addition, the precursor display for the second hold change effect (a display in which the hold image shakes) and the precursor display for the "reach text background color change effect" (a comment image of the master character) may be displayed in the same single variable display, or the second hold change effect may be executed as a pre-reading effect.

When the "reach preview effect due to hold" is executed as a pre-reading effect, there may be cases where the hold change fails and only the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) is displayed, or there may be cases where the hold change is successful and the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) as well as the waiting hold image after the change are displayed.
In addition, the display of the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) in the "reach preview effect due to hold" may be executed as a pre-reading effect, and after the variable display corresponding to the hold that is the subject of the pre-reading effect has begun, it may be indicated whether or not the reach effect indicated by the precursor display will be executed.

In the embodiment shown, the precursor display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display) is displayed, followed by the precursor display for the "reach advance text background color change effect" (comment image of the master character), but it is also possible to have the precursor display for the "reach advance text background color change effect" (comment image of the master character) be displayed without displaying the precursor display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display). According to such an embodiment, the sense of anticipation can be increased all at once.
In addition, it may be possible for a precursor display of the second hold change effect (a display in which the hold image shakes) to be displayed in some cases and not to be displayed in other cases.

Although the embodiment in which the "reach warning effect due to hold" is executed and then the "reach warning effect" is executed has been shown, it is also possible to have the "reach warning effect" be executed without executing the "reach warning effect due to hold." According to such an embodiment, it is possible to instantly increase the sense of expectation.
In addition, the second hold change effect may or may not be executed.

In one variation, after the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is displayed, the probability that the precursor display (comment image of the master character) of the "reach text background color change effect" may be displayed may be made higher than the probability that the precursor display (comment image of the master character) of the "reach advance notice effect" is displayed without displaying the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach advance notice effect due to hold." According to such an embodiment, the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is displayed appropriately, thereby preventing a decline in interest.
Furthermore, in one fluctuation, the probability that after the premonition display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display), the premonition display for the "text background color change effect during reach" (comment image of the master character) and the premonition display for the second hold change effect (display of the hold image shaking) are displayed may be higher than the probability that the premonition display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display) is not displayed and the premonition display for the second hold change effect (display of the hold image shaking) is displayed.

In one variation, the probability that a "reach warning effect due to hold" is executed and then a "reach warning effect due to hold" is executed may be made higher than the probability that a "reach warning effect due to hold" is executed without executing a "reach warning effect due to hold". According to such an embodiment, the "reach warning effect due to hold" is executed appropriately, thereby preventing a decline in interest.
Furthermore, in one fluctuation, the probability that a "reach notification effect due to hold" is executed, followed by a "reach character background color change effect" and a second hold change effect may be higher than the probability that a "reach character background color change effect" is executed and a second hold change effect is executed without executing a "reach notification effect due to hold".

In one variation, after the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is displayed, the probability that the precursor display (comment image of the master character) of the "reach advance text background color change effect" may be displayed may be lower than the probability that the precursor display (comment image of the master character) of the "reach advance text background color change effect" is displayed without displaying the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach advance notice effect due to hold." According to such an embodiment, the sense of anticipation can be instantly increased when the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is displayed.
Furthermore, in one fluctuation, the probability that after the precursor display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display), the precursor display for the "text background color change effect during reach" (comment image of the master character) and the precursor display for the second hold change effect (display of the hold image shaking) are displayed may be lower than the probability that the precursor display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display) is not displayed and the precursor display for the "text background color change effect during reach" (comment image of the master character) and the precursor display for the second hold change effect (display of the hold image shaking) are displayed.

In one variation, the probability of executing the "during-reach character background color change effect" after the "during-reach character advance notice effect due to hold" is executed may be lower than the probability of executing the "during-reach character background color change effect" without executing the "during-reach character advance notice effect due to hold". According to such an embodiment, it is possible to instantly increase the sense of expectation when the "during-reach character advance notice effect due to hold" is executed.
Furthermore, in one fluctuation, the probability that a "reach warning effect due to hold" is executed, followed by a "reach character background color change effect" and a second hold change effect may be lower than the probability that a "reach character background color change effect" is executed and a second hold change effect is executed without executing a "reach warning effect due to hold".

The expectation level when a premonition display for a "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display) is displayed followed by a premonition display for a "reach advance notice effect with text background color change" (a comment image of the master character) may be higher than the expectation level when a premonition display for a "reach advance notice effect" (semi-transparent reach name display) is displayed without displaying a premonition display for a "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display). According to this embodiment, the sense of expectation can be increased all at once when the premonition display for a "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display) is displayed.
Furthermore, in one change, if a precursor display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display) is displayed, followed by a precursor display for the "text background color change effect during reach" (image of a comment from the master character) and a precursor display for the second hold change effect (display of the hold image shaking), the expectation level may be higher than the expectation level when a precursor display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display) is not displayed, but a precursor display for the "text background color change effect during reach" (image of a comment from the master character) and a precursor display for the second hold change effect (display of the hold image shaking) are displayed.

The expectation level when a "reach notification effect due to hold" is executed and then a "reach character background color change effect" is executed may be set higher than the expectation level when a "reach character background color change effect" is executed without executing a "reach notification effect due to hold". According to such an embodiment, the expectation level can be increased all at once when a "reach notification effect due to hold" is executed.
Furthermore, in one fluctuation, the expectation level when a "reach warning effect due to hold" is executed, followed by a "reach character background color change effect" and a second hold change effect may be higher than the expectation level when a "reach character background color change effect" is executed and a second hold change effect is executed without executing a "reach warning effect due to hold".

The expectation level when a premonition display for a "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display) is displayed followed by a premonition display for a "reach advance text background color change effect" (a comment image of the master character) may be lower than the expectation level when a premonition display for a "reach advance text background color change effect" (a comment image of the master character) is displayed without displaying a premonition display for a "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display). According to such an embodiment, a drop in interest can be suppressed by appropriately displaying a premonition display for a "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display).
Furthermore, in one change, if a precursor display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display) is displayed, followed by a precursor display for the "text background color change effect during reach" (image of a comment from the master character) and a precursor display for the second hold change effect (display of the hold image shaking), the expectation level may be lower than the expectation level when a precursor display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display) is not displayed, but a precursor display for the "text background color change effect during reach" (image of a comment from the master character) and a precursor display for the second hold change effect (display of the hold image shaking) are displayed.

The degree of expectation when a "reach notification effect due to hold" is executed and then a "reach character background color change effect" is executed may be lower than the degree of expectation when a "reach character background color change effect" is executed without executing a "reach notification effect due to hold". According to such an embodiment, a drop in interest can be suppressed by appropriately executing a "reach notification effect due to hold".
Furthermore, in one fluctuation, the expectation level when a "reach warning effect due to hold" is executed, followed by a "reach character background color change effect" and a second hold change effect may be lower than the expectation level when a "reach character background color change effect" is executed and a second hold change effect is executed without executing a "reach warning effect due to hold".

Referring to Figures 422, 423, etc., an embodiment is shown in which the background color (text color in a modified example) of the comment image of the martial artist character changes from a low expectation color to a high expectation color at timing t46.
The length of time that the background color is displayed in a low expectation color here may be longer, shorter, or the same as the length of time that the precursor display (comment image of the master character) for the ``reach character background color change effect'' is displayed.
In addition, the length of time that the background color is displayed in a low expectation color may be longer, shorter, or the same as the length of time that the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the ``reach preview effect due to hold'' is displayed.
In addition, the length of time that the background color is displayed in a high expectation color may be longer, shorter, or the same as the length of time that the precursor display (comment image of the master character) for the ``reach character background color change effect'' is displayed.
In addition, the length of time that the background color is displayed in a high expectation color may be longer, shorter, or the same as the length of time that the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the ``reach preview effect due to hold'' is displayed.

Below, we will explain variations of an embodiment in which a "reach character background color change effect" is executed after a "reach symbol promotion effect" is executed.

When the precursor display for the "reach character background color change effect" (a comment image of the master character) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated, and instead another background image may be started to be displayed. Similarly, when the precursor display for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated, and instead another background image may be started to be displayed.
By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the scene has switched to an important scene.

When the precursor display for the "reach character background color change effect" (the master character's comment image) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated and another background image may be displayed instead. On the other hand, when the precursor display for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be continued.
The precursor display of the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been won is more important than the precursor display of the "During Reach Character Pattern Promotion Effect" which indicates whether or not the game will develop into a Battle Reach, but by switching the background image, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display of the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" which is more important is being displayed.

When the precursor display for the "reach character background color change effect" (the master character's comment image) is displayed, the previously displayed background image may be continued to be displayed. On the other hand, when the precursor display for the "reach symbol upgrade effect" (the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, the previously displayed background image may be terminated and another background image may be displayed instead.
The precursor display of the "during-reach character background color change effect" is displayed just before it is shown whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which makes the player feel tense, but by continuing to display the same background image without changing it, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When the precursor display for the "reach character background color change effect" (the master character's comment image) is displayed, the previously displayed background image may be continued to be displayed. Also, when the precursor display for the "reach symbol upgrade effect" (the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, the previously displayed background image may be continued to be displayed.
The precursor display for the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and the precursor display for the "reach pattern upgrade effect" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not it will develop into a battle reach, so each of these situations increases the player's sense of tension, but by preventing the background image from changing before and after the precursor display is displayed, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that has been output from the sound generating means up to that point may be lowered or the output of the sound may be interrupted. Similarly, when a precursory display of the "reach symbol upgrade effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, the volume of the sound that has been output from the sound generating means up to that point may be lowered or the output of the sound may be interrupted.
According to such an embodiment, the output manner of the sound that was previously output from the sound generating means is suppressed, making it sound quieter or completely inaudible, thereby making it easier to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.

When the precursor display (a comment image of the master character) of the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that has been output from the sound generating means up to that point may be lowered or the sound output may be interrupted. On the other hand, when the precursor display (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) of the "reach symbol upgrade effect" is displayed, the volume of the sound that has been output from the sound generating means up to that point may be left unchanged and the output may continue as is.
According to such an embodiment, the output mode of the sound that was previously output from the sound generating means is suppressed, making it sound quieter or completely inaudible, making it easier to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.
The precursor display of the "reach character background color change effect" which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been won is more important than the precursor display of the "reach pattern upgrade effect" which indicates whether or not the game will develop into a battle reach, but by suppressing the sound output from the sound generating means, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display of the "reach character background color change effect" which is more important is being displayed.

When the precursor display (a comment image of the master character) of the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that has been output from the sound generating means up to that point may be left unchanged and the output may continue. On the other hand, when the precursor display (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) of the "reach symbol upgrade effect" is displayed, the volume of the sound that has been output from the sound generating means up to that point may be lowered or the sound output may be interrupted.
The precursor display of the "during-reach character background color change effect" is displayed just before it is shown whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which makes the player feel tense, but by continuing to output the sound that has been output from the sound generating means without changing the volume, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When a precursory display (a comment image of the master character) for the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that has been output from the sound generating means up to that point may be left unchanged and continue to be output. Also, when a precursory display (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) for the "reach symbol upgrade effect" is displayed, the volume of the sound that has been output from the sound generating means up to that point may be left unchanged and continue to be output.
The precursor display for the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and the precursor display for the "reach pattern upgrade effect" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not the effect will develop into a battle reach, so that each of these situations increases the player's sense of tension, but by preventing the volume of the sound that has been output from the sound generating means from changing when the precursor display is displayed, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When a precursory display (a comment image of the master character) for the "character background color change effect during reach" is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting element may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting effect using another light-emitting pattern may be started. Similarly, when a precursory display (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) for the "reach symbol upgrade effect" is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting element may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting effect using another light-emitting pattern may be started.
According to this embodiment, it is possible to make it easier for the driver to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.

When a precursory display (a comment image of the master character) of the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting element may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting effect using another light-emitting pattern may be started. On the other hand, when a precursory display (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) of the "reach symbol promotion effect" is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting element using a predetermined light-emitting pattern may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect.
The precursor display of the "reach character background color change effect," which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been reached, is more important than the precursor display of the "reach pattern upgrade effect," which indicates whether or not the game will develop into a battle reach. However, by starting a new light-emitting effect executed using a specified light-emitting part, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display of the "reach character background color change effect," which is more important, is being displayed.

When a precursory display (a comment image of the master character) for the "character background color change effect during reach" is displayed, the light-emitting effect currently being executed may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern using a predetermined light-emitting element. On the other hand, when a precursory display (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) for the "reach symbol upgrade effect" is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern that was being executed using a predetermined light-emitting element may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting effect with another light-emitting pattern may be started.
The precursor display of the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" is displayed just before it is shown whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which can make the player feel tense, but by continuing the light-emitting effect currently being executed without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern using a predetermined light-emitting element, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When a precursory display (a comment image of the master character) for the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed, the currently executing light-emitting effect may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern using a predetermined light-emitting element. Also, when a precursory display (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) for the "reach symbol promotion effect" is displayed, the currently executing light-emitting effect may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern using a predetermined light-emitting element.
The precursor display for the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and the precursor display for the "reach pattern upgrade effect" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not the effect will develop into a battle reach, so each of these situations increases the player's sense of tension, but by preventing the light emission pattern that had been executed up until that point from changing when the precursor display is displayed, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

The operation of a predetermined movable decorative member may be started when a precursory display (a comment image of the master character) for the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed. Similarly, the operation of a predetermined movable decorative member may be started when a precursory display (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) for the "reach symbol upgrade effect" is displayed.
According to this embodiment, it is possible to make it easier for the driver to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.

When a precursory display (a comment image of the master character) for the "character background color change effect during reach" is displayed, the operation of a predetermined movable decorative member may be started. On the other hand, when a precursory display (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) for the "reach symbol upgrade effect" is displayed, the operation of the predetermined movable decorative member may not be started (the state before the precursory display was displayed is maintained).
The precursor display of the "reach character background color change effect," which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been reached, is more important than the precursor display of the "reach pattern upgrade effect," which indicates whether or not the game will develop into a battle reach, but by starting the operation of a predetermined movable decorative member, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display of the "reach character background color change effect," which is more important, is being displayed.

When the precursor display (a comment image of the master character) of the "character background color change effect during reach" is displayed, the operation of the predetermined movable decorative member may not be initiated (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained). On the other hand, when the precursor display of the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, the operation of the predetermined movable decorative member may be initiated.
The precursor display for the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed just before it is revealed whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which can create tension for the player, but by not starting the operation of the specified movable decorative member (maintaining the state before the precursor display was displayed), the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When the precursor display (a comment image of the master character) for the "character background color change effect during reach" is displayed, the operation of the predetermined movable decorative member may not be initiated (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained). Also, when the precursor display for the "reach pattern upgrade effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, the operation of the predetermined movable decorative member may not be initiated (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained).
The precursor display for the "reach text background color change effect" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and the precursor display for the "reach pattern upgrade effect" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not it will develop into a battle reach, so each of these situations increases the player's sense of tension, but by not starting the operation of a specified movable decorative member when the precursor display is displayed (maintaining the state before the precursor display was displayed), the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

It is also possible to provide a case where a precursor display for a "reach text background color change effect" or a "reach pattern upgrade effect" begins to be displayed while the movable decorative element is in operation. In this case, it is recommended that the operation of the movable decorative element be set to "maintain the state (operation pattern) before the precursor display was displayed," as described above.

The length of time that the precursor display for the "reach character background color change effect" (the master character's comment image) is displayed may be the same as the length of time that the precursor display for the "reach pattern upgrade effect" (the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change) is displayed.
Since the user can experience in advance the change in the display content, that is, the precursor display for the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) switches to the specific display for the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which the color of the sixth meter image has changed and a reward has been obtained), the tension felt when the precursor display for the "Reach character background color change effect" (a comment image from the master character) is displayed (the tension of wondering when the display of the precursor display for the "Reach character background color change effect" (a comment image from the master character) will end) can be moderately alleviated.

Alternatively, the time for which the precursor display for the "reach character background color change effect" (the master character's comment image) is displayed may be longer than the time for which the precursor display for the "reach pattern upgrade effect" (the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change) is displayed.
While the "reach symbol promotion effect" is an effect that indicates whether or not the game will develop into a reach effect, the "reach character background color change effect" is an effect that indicates whether or not a jackpot will be hit immediately afterwards, and the latter is more important as an effect. Therefore, by relatively shortening the time for which the "reach symbol promotion effect" precursor display (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, it is possible to prevent the player's expectations for a jackpot from being excessively aroused.
Alternatively, the time for which the precursor display for the "reach character background color change effect" (the master character's comment image) is displayed may be shorter than the time for which the precursor display for the "reach pattern upgrade effect" (the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change) is displayed.
The display of the precursor display for the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" is performed after the display of the precursor display for the "During Reach Character Pattern Upgrade Effect." Also, after the precursor display for the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" (a comment image from the master character) is displayed, a display in which the character background color changes is always performed. This causes the player to feel a sense of tension for a long period of time, but by relatively shortening the time for which the precursor display for the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" (a comment image from the master character) is displayed, it is possible to make the player aware that a display in which the character background color will change will occur, while preventing the player from becoming overly excited about a jackpot.

When the precursor display for the "character background color change during reach" (a comment image of the master character) is displayed, only the current hold image is displayed without displaying the standby hold image, and when the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, both the standby hold image and the current hold image may be displayed.
When the precursor display (the master character's comment image) of the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed, the reserve change effect in which the current reserve image may be promoted with a predetermined probability may be executed with a predetermined probability. By adopting such an embodiment, the reserve change effect can be enjoyed while the precursor display (the master character's comment image) of the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed.

Regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display (comment image of the master character) of the ``reach text background color change effect,'' the following relationship pattern may be adopted.
For example, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character) may be performed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character), end of display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character), and end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character) may be performed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character), end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character).
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character), start of the hold change effect, end of display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character), and end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character), start of the hold change effect, end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character).

On the other hand, when a precursor display (a comment image of the master character) for the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed, the hold change effect that changes the current hold image may not be executed.
According to this embodiment, the player can focus on the background color that is displayed after the precursor display (the comment image of the master character) of the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed.

When the precursor display for the "character background color change during reach" (a comment image of the master character) is displayed, only the current hold image is displayed without displaying the standby hold image, and when the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, both the standby hold image and the current hold image may be displayed.
When the precursor display of the "reach symbol promotion effect" (the display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, the reserve change effect in which the current reserved image may be promoted with a predetermined probability may be executed with a predetermined probability. By adopting such an embodiment, the reserve change effect can be enjoyed while the precursor display of the "reach symbol promotion effect" (the display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed.

Regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display of the ``reach pattern promotion effect'' (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), the following relationship pattern may be adopted.
For example, the hold change effect may be executed and the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be displayed in the following order: start of the hold change effect; start of the display of the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed); end of the display of the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed); and end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the hold change effect may be executed and the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be displayed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed).
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be performed in the following order: the start of the display of the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), the start of the hold change effect, the end of the display of the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), and the end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be performed in the following order: the start of the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), the start of the hold change effect, the end of the hold change effect, and the end of the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed).

On the other hand, when a precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, the hold change effect that changes the current hold image may not be executed.
According to this embodiment, the player can focus on the specific display of the "Reach pattern promotion effect" (the display in which the color of the sixth meter image changes and a reward is won) that appears after the display of the precursor display of the "Reach pattern promotion effect" (the display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change).

When the precursor display for the "character background color change during reach" (a comment image of the master character) is displayed, only the current hold image is displayed without displaying the standby hold image, and when the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, both the standby hold image and the current hold image may be displayed.
When the precursor display of the "reach symbol promotion effect" (the display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, a hold change effect in which the standby hold image may be promoted with a predetermined probability may be executed with a predetermined probability. By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to enjoy the hold change effect while the precursor display of the "reach symbol promotion effect" (the display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed.

Regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the standby hold image and the display period of the precursor display of the ``reach pattern promotion effect'' (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), the following relationship pattern may be adopted.
For example, the hold change effect may be executed and the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be displayed in the following order: start of the hold change effect; start of the display of the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed); end of the display of the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed); and end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the hold change effect may be executed and the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be displayed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed).
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be performed in the following order: the start of the display of the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), the start of the hold change effect, the end of the display of the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), and the end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be performed in the following order: the start of the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), the start of the hold change effect, the end of the hold change effect, and the end of the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed).

On the other hand, when a precursory display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, the hold change effect that changes the standby hold image may not be executed.
According to this embodiment, the player can focus on the specific display of the "Reach pattern promotion effect" (the display in which the color of the sixth meter image changes and a reward is won) that appears after the display of the precursor display of the "Reach pattern promotion effect" (the display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change).

Four patterns are shown regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display (comment image of the master character) of the ``reach text background color change effect.''
In addition, four patterns are shown regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display of the ``reach pattern promotion effect'' (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed).
In addition, four patterns are shown regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the standby hold image and the display period of the precursor display of the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed).
Although all of these can be executed independently, an embodiment may be formed by appropriately combining a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display for the ``reach text background color change effect'' (a comment image of the master character), a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display for the ``reach pattern promotion effect'' (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), and a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the standby hold image and the display period of the precursor display for the ``reach pattern promotion effect'' (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed).

Multiple types of hold change effects may be provided, and different patterns may be used depending on the type of hold change effect. For example, different patterns may be used for hold change effects that hide holds with smoke and hold change effects that hide holds with swords. For example, in the case of a hold change effect that hides holds with smoke, the effects are executed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of the premonition display for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), end of the premonition display for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), end of the hold change effect. In the case of a hold change effect that hides holds with swords, the effects are executed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of the premonition display for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), end of the hold change effect, end of the hold change effect, end of the premonition display for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed).

The display priority of the precursor display for the "text background color change during reach" (a comment image from the master character) and the precursor display for the "reach pattern upgrade" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change) may be higher or lower than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change display (for example, an image that approaches the current hold image or the standby hold image and displays something that creates an impact on the current hold image or the standby hold image).
In addition, the display priority of the precursor display (a comment image of the master character) for the "reach character background color change effect" may be set higher than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change effect, and the display priority of the precursor display for the "reach pattern upgrade effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be set lower than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the display priority of the precursor display for the "reach character background color change effect" (a comment image of the master character) may be lower than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change effect, and the display priority of the precursor display for the "reach pattern upgrade effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be higher than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change effect.

When the precursor display (a comment image from the master character) for the "Text background color change during reach" effect is displayed, a predetermined expectation effect (an expectation effect that raises the expectation of a win, hereafter referred to as the "predetermined expectation effect") different from the hold change effect may be executed with a predetermined probability. The predetermined expectation effect may, for example, be a display mode such as displaying a predetermined character in display area 1600a. By using such an embodiment, the sense of anticipation can be increased while the precursor display (a comment image from the master character) for the "Text background color change during reach" effect is displayed. The display mode of the standby hold image or current hold image does not change due to the predetermined expectation effect.

Regarding the relationship between the execution period of a predetermined expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (comment image of the master character) of the "reach character background color change effect," the following relationship pattern may be adopted.
For example, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the "reach character background color change effect" (comment image of the master character) may be performed in the following order: start of the specified expected effect, start of display of the precursor display for the "reach character background color change effect" (comment image of the master character), end of display of the precursor display for the "reach character background color change effect" (comment image of the master character), and end of the specified expected effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``reach-prone character background color change effect'' (a comment image of the master character) may be performed in the following order: the start of the specified expected effect, the start of display of the precursor display for the ``reach-prone character background color change effect'' (a comment image of the master character), the end of the specified expected effect, and the end of display of the precursor display for the ``reach-prone character background color change effect'' (a comment image of the master character).
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character), start of the specified expected effect, end of display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character), and end of the specified expected effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``reach-in-character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the ``reach-in-character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character), start of the specified expected effect, end of the specified expected effect, and end of display of the precursor display for the ``reach-in-character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character).

When the precursor display (image of a comment from the master character) for the "text background color change effect during reach" is displayed, the specified expected effect may not be executed.

When the precursor display for the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, a predetermined expected effect different from the hold change effect may be executed with a predetermined probability. The predetermined expected effect may, for example, be an effect such as displaying a predetermined character in display area 1600a. By using such an embodiment, it is possible to increase the sense of anticipation while the precursor display for the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed. Note that the display mode of the waiting hold image or current hold image does not change due to the predetermined expected effect.

Regarding the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display of the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), the following relationship pattern may be adopted.
For example, the execution of the specified expected performance and the display of the precursor to the "reach pattern promotion performance" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be performed in the following order: the start of the specified expected performance; the start of the display of the precursor to the "reach pattern promotion performance" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed); the end of the display of the precursor to the "reach pattern promotion performance" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed); and the end of the specified expected performance.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be performed in the following order: the start of the specified expected effect, the start of the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), the end of the specified expected effect, and the end of the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed).
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be performed in the following order: the start of the display of the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), the start of the specified expected effect, the end of the display of the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), and the end of the specified expected effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be performed in the following order: the start of the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), the start of the specified expected effect, the end of the specified expected effect, and the end of the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed).

When a precursory display for the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, the specified expected effect may not be executed.

The specified expected effects can be, for example, effects that prompt the player to operate the operating means, or effects that do not prompt the player to operate the operating means (such as comment preview effects, step-up preview effects, and premium effects that confirm a jackpot).

Four patterns are shown for the relationship between the execution period of a predetermined expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (comment image of the master character) for the "reach character background color change effect."
In addition, four patterns are shown regarding the relationship between the execution period of a predetermined expected effect and the display period of the precursory display of the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change).
Although all of these can be executed independently, an embodiment may be formed by appropriately combining a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of a predetermined expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (comment image of the master character) of the ``reach character background color change effect'' and a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of a predetermined expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change) of the ``reach pattern promotion effect.''

Although multiple types of predetermined expected effects are shown, different patterns may be adopted depending on the type of predetermined expected effect. For example, one of four patterns may be adopted when executing one expected effect, either an effect that prompts the player to operate the operation means or an effect that does not prompt the player to operate the operation means (such as a comment preview effect, a step-up preview effect, or a premium effect that confirms a jackpot), and another of the four patterns may be adopted when executing another expected effect. For example, in the case of a comment preview effect, the execution of a predetermined expected effect and the display of a premonition for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display where a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) are displayed in the following order: the start of the comment preview effect, the start of the display of a premonition for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display where a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), the end of the display of a premonition for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display where a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), and the end of the comment preview effect.In the case of a step-up preview effect, the execution of a predetermined expected effect and the display of a premonition for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display where a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) are displayed in the following order: the start of the comment preview effect, the start of the display of a premonition for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display where a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), the start of the step-up preview effect, the end of the display of a premonition for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display where a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), and the end of the step-up preview effect.

The display priority of the precursor display for the "character background color change during reach" (a comment image from the master character) and the precursor display for the "reach pattern upgrade" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be higher or lower than the display priority of the images displayed in a specified expected performance (for example, an operation unit simulation image, a comment image, a step-up image, a premium image, etc.).
In addition, the display priority of the precursor display (a comment image of the master character) for the "character background color change effect during reach" may be set higher than the display priority of the image displayed in a specified expected effect, and the display priority of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be set lower than the display priority of the image displayed in a specified expected effect.
Alternatively, the display priority of the precursor display (a comment image of the master character) for the "character background color change during reach" effect may be lower than the display priority of the image displayed in a specified expected effect, and the display priority of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be higher than the display priority of the image displayed in a specified expected effect.

The display of a precursor to the "character background color change during reach" effect (a comment image from the master character) or a precursor to the "reach pattern upgrade effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change) may be repeatedly displayed.
For example, the size of the comment image displayed in the precursor display (the master character's comment image) for the "reach character background color change effect" may be increased or decreased multiple times. Furthermore, in the precursor display for the "reach symbol upgrade effect," the color of the fifth meter image may change, then return to its original color, and then change again, so that the fifth meter image alternates between being displayed in its original color and being displayed in its changed color multiple times. By adopting such a display mode, it is possible to reduce the capacity and alleviate the sense of tension caused by the precursor display.
On the other hand, the display of the precursor to the "character background color change during reach" effect (a comment image from the master character) and the precursor to the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change) may not be displayed repeatedly.
For example, the size of the comment image displayed in the precursor display (the master character's comment image) for the "reach character background color change effect" may be gradually increased but not decreased. Also, in the precursor display for the "reach symbol upgrade effect," a display mode may be adopted in which, after the color of a certain meter image changes, it does not return to its original color. By adopting such a display mode, the image quality is improved, and the player can be excited.

The display of the precursor to the "character background color change during reach" effect (a comment image from the master character) may be repeatedly displayed, and the display of the precursor to the "reach pattern upgrade effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change) may not be repeatedly displayed.
Alternatively, the display of the precursor to the "reach character background color change effect" (the master character's comment image) may not be repeated, and the display of the precursor to the "reach pattern upgrade effect" (the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change) may be repeated.
Alternatively, it is possible to not repeatedly display both the precursor display for the "character background color change during reach" (a comment image from the master character) and the precursor display for the "reach pattern upgrade" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change).

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the display of a precursory display for the "character background color change during reach" (a comment image from the master character) and the display of a precursory display for the "reach pattern upgrade" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change) may be repeatedly displayed, it is also possible to make a light-emitting means such as a light-emitting decorative member emit light in a predetermined manner in response to the display of the precursory display, or to output sound in a predetermined manner from a sound generating means.
In this case, the light or sound output mode may be repeated in accordance with the repetition of the display of the predictive display. Alternatively, the light or sound may be output in a predetermined pattern throughout the entire display period of the predictive display without being associated with the repetition of the display of the predictive display (i.e., without repeatedly outputting the light or sound). Furthermore, if the display of the predictive display is not repeated, the light or sound may also be output in a predetermined pattern throughout the entire display period of the predictive display without being repeatedly output.

In the embodiment shown, there is one type of precursor display for the "reach character background color change effect" (a comment image from the master character) and one type of precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change), but either one or both may be of multiple types.
For example, two types of precursor displays (comment images of the master character) for the "reach character background color change effect" may be prepared, and the degree of expectation may differ depending on the type. Note that the number is not limited to two types, and may be three or more types. In this case, it is also preferable to have three or more types (three stages) of expectation.
In addition, two or more types of precursory displays for the "reach symbol upgrade effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change) may be prepared. For example, a pattern in which the color of the meter image changes easily up to the middle of the meter and then changes slowly from the middle, or a pattern in which the color of the meter image changes slowly up to the middle of the meter and then changes easily from the middle, may be adopted. In this case, too, it is preferable to vary the degree of expectation depending on the type of precursory display.
There may be one type of precursor display (master character comment image) for the "reach character background color change effect" and multiple types (for example, the two types mentioned above) for the "reach pattern upgrade effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change).
Alternatively, there may be multiple types of precursor displays (master character comment images) for the "reach character background color change effect" (for example, the two types mentioned above), and only one type of precursor display for the "reach pattern upgrade effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change).
Alternatively, there may be multiple types of precursor displays (master character comment images) for the "reach character background color change effect" (for example, the two types mentioned above), and multiple types of precursor displays (displays in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change) for the "reach pattern upgrade effect" (for example, the two types mentioned above).
When only one display mode of the precursor display is provided, there is no difference in the degree of expectation while the precursor display is being displayed, so a stable sense of expectation can be provided. On the other hand, when multiple display modes are provided, a display with a high degree of expectation is displayed while the precursor display is being displayed, so the sense of expectation can be increased.

In the above embodiment, the precursor display for the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" (a comment image from the master character) and the precursor display for the "During Reach Character Pattern Promotion Effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) are displayed in the same variable display, but the "During Reach Character Pattern Promotion Effect" may also be executed as a pre-reading effect. In this case, the "During Reach Character Pattern Promotion Effect" is executed in a predetermined variable display, and the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" is executed in a subsequent variable display. When the "During Reach Character Pattern Promotion Effect" is executed as a pre-reading effect, it is advisable to stop and display each variable display in a non-reach miss mode until the predicted reach effect is executed. This can create a sense of anticipation even when a non-reach miss variable pattern is executed.

In the embodiment shown, the precursor display for the "Look symbol upgrade effect" (a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is followed by the precursor display for the "Look symbol background color change effect" (a comment image from the master character). However, it is also possible to have the precursor display for the "Look symbol upgrade effect" (a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) be displayed without displaying the precursor display for the "Look symbol upgrade effect" (a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed). This embodiment can instantly increase the sense of anticipation.

In the embodiment shown, the "Look-up character background color change effect" is executed after the "Look-up character pattern promotion effect" is executed, but it is also possible to execute the "Look-up character background color change effect" without executing the "Look-up character pattern promotion effect." This embodiment can instantly increase the sense of anticipation.

In one variation, the probability that a premonition display for the "Look symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is followed by a premonition display for the "Look symbol promotion effect" (a comment image from the master character) may be higher than the probability that a premonition display for the "Look symbol promotion effect" (a comment image from the master character) is displayed without displaying a premonition display for the "Look symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed). According to this embodiment, the premonition display for the "Look symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed appropriately, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

In one variation, the probability that a "reach symbol promotion effect" will be executed after a "reach symbol promotion effect" has been executed may be higher than the probability that a "reach symbol promotion effect" will be executed without executing a "reach symbol promotion effect." In such an embodiment, the "reach symbol promotion effect" will be executed appropriately, preventing a decline in interest.

In one variation, after the display of the precursor for the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), the probability of the precursor for the "Reach character background color change effect" (a comment image from the master character) being displayed may be lowered to less than the probability of the precursor for the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a comment image from the master character) being displayed, without displaying the precursor for the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed). According to this embodiment, the sense of anticipation can be instantly increased when the precursor for the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed.

In one variation, the probability that a "reach character background color change effect" will be executed after a "reach symbol promotion effect" is executed may be lower than the probability that a "reach character background color change effect" will be executed without executing a "reach symbol promotion effect." In this embodiment, the sense of anticipation can be instantly increased when a "reach symbol promotion effect" is executed.

The expectation level when a premonition display for a "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) and then a premonition display for a "reach character background color change effect" (a comment image from the master character) is displayed may be higher than the expectation level when a premonition display for a "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed without displaying a premonition display for a "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed). According to this embodiment, the sense of expectation can be increased all at once when a premonition display for a "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed.

The expectation level when a "reach character background color change effect" is executed after a "reach symbol promotion effect" is executed may be higher than the expectation level when a "reach character background color change effect" is executed without executing a "reach symbol promotion effect." According to this embodiment, the sense of expectation can be increased all at once when a "reach symbol promotion effect" is executed.

The expectation level when a premonition display for a "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is followed by a premonition display for a "reach character background color change effect" (a comment image from the master character) may be lowered than the expectation level when a premonition display for a "reach character background color change effect" (a comment image from the master character) is displayed without displaying a premonition display for a "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed). According to this embodiment, the premonition display for a "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed appropriately, thereby preventing a decrease in interest.

The expectation level when a "reach character background color change effect" is executed after a "reach symbol promotion effect" is executed may be lower than the expectation level when a "reach character background color change effect" is executed without executing a "reach symbol promotion effect." In this embodiment, the "reach symbol promotion effect" is executed appropriately, thereby preventing a decrease in interest.

Referring to Figures 422, 423, etc., an embodiment is shown in which the background color (text color in a modified example) of the comment image of the martial artist character changes from a low expectation color to a high expectation color at timing t46.
The length of time that the background color is displayed in a low expectation color here may be longer, shorter, or the same as the length of time that the precursor display (comment image of the master character) for the ``reach character background color change effect'' is displayed.
In addition, the length of time that the background color is displayed in a low expectation color may be longer, shorter, or the same as the length of time that the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed.
In addition, the length of time that the background color is displayed in a high expectation color may be longer, shorter, or the same as the length of time that the precursor display (comment image of the master character) for the ``reach character background color change effect'' is displayed.
In addition, the length of time that the background color is displayed in a high expectation color may be longer, shorter, or the same as the length of time that the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed.

Below, we will explain variations of an embodiment in which a "reach content selection effect" is executed followed by a "reach text background color change effect."

When a precursor display for the "reach character background color change effect" (a comment image of the master character) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated, and instead another background image may be displayed. Similarly, when a precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (an indication that a predetermined area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated, and instead another background image may be displayed. Furthermore, when a precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" is displayed, the entire background image may be made invisible by a window image.
By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the scene has switched to an important scene.

When a precursory display for the "reach character background color change effect" (a comment image of the master character) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated, and instead another background image may be displayed. On the other hand, when a precursory display for the "reach content selection effect" (an indication that a predetermined area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be continued.
The precursor display of the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been won is more important than the precursor display of the "During Reach Character Content Selection Effect" which indicates whether or not the game will develop into a Battle Reach, but by switching the background image, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display of the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" which is more important is being displayed.

When a precursory display for the "reach character background color change effect" (a comment image of the master character) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be continued. On the other hand, when a precursory display for the "reach content selection effect" (an indication that a predetermined area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated, and instead another background image may be displayed.
The precursor display of the "during-reach character background color change effect" is displayed just before it is shown whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which makes the player feel tense, but by continuing to display the same background image without changing it, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When a precursory display for the "reach character background color change effect" (a comment image of the master character) is displayed, the previously displayed background image may be continued to be displayed. Also, when a precursory display for the "reach content selection effect" (an indication that a predetermined area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the previously displayed background image may be continued to be displayed.
The precursor display for the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not it will develop into a battle reach, so each of these situations increases the player's tension, but by preventing the background image from changing before and after the precursor display is displayed, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When a precursory display (a comment image of the master character) for the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that had been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be lowered or the output of the sound may be interrupted. Similarly, when a precursory display for the "reach content selection effect" (an indication that a predetermined area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the volume of the sound that had been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be lowered or the output of the sound may be interrupted.
According to such an embodiment, the output mode of the sound that was previously output from the sound generating means is suppressed, making it sound quieter or completely inaudible, making it easier to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.

When a precursor display (a comment image of the master character) for the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that had been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be lowered or the sound output may be interrupted. On the other hand, when a precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (an indication that a predetermined area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the volume of the sound that had been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be left unchanged and the output may continue as is.
According to such an embodiment, the output mode of the sound that was previously output from the sound generating means is suppressed, making it sound quieter or completely inaudible, making it easier to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.
The precursor display of the "during reach character background color change effect" which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been won is more important than the precursor display of the "reach content selection effect" which indicates whether or not it will develop into a battle reach, but by suppressing the sound output from the sound generating means, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display of the "during reach character background color change effect" which is more important is being displayed.

When a precursory display (a comment image of the master character) for the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that had been output from the sound generation means up until then may be left unchanged and continue to be output. On the other hand, when a precursory display for the "reach content selection effect" (an indication that a predetermined area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the volume of the sound that had been output from the sound generation means up until then may be lowered or the sound output may be interrupted.
The precursor display of the "during-reach character background color change effect" is displayed just before it is shown whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which makes the player feel tense, but by continuing to output the sound that has been output from the sound generating means without changing the volume, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When a precursor display (a comment image of the master character) for the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that had been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be left unchanged and continue to be output. Also, when a precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (an indication that a predetermined area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the volume of the sound that had been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be left unchanged and continue to be output.
The precursor display for the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not it will develop into a battle reach, so that each of these situations increases the player's sense of tension, but by preventing the volume of the sound that has been output from the sound generating means from changing when the precursor display is displayed, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

The sound (BGM, etc.) output when the precursor display (image of a comment from the master character) for the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed may be the same as the sound output when the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (display that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, or it may be a different sound.
The output duration of the sound output when the precursor display (image of a comment from the master character) for the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed may be the same as or different from the output duration of the sound output when the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (display showing that a specific area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed. If the lengths are different, one may be longer than the other, or one may be shorter than the other.

The length of time that the precursor display (image of a comment from the master character) for the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" is displayed and the length of the sound (BGM, etc.) that is output when the precursor display (image of a comment from the master character) for the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" is displayed may be the same or different. If the lengths are different, one may be longer than the other, or one may be shorter than the other.
The length of time that the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed and the output time of the sound that is output when the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed may be the same length or different lengths. If the lengths are different, one may be longer than the other, or one may be shorter than the other.

When a precursor display (a comment image of the master character) for the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting unit may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting effect using another light-emitting pattern may be started. Similarly, when a precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (an indication that a predetermined area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting unit may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting effect using another light-emitting pattern may be started.
According to this embodiment, it is possible to make it easier for the driver to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.

When a precursor display (a comment image of the master character) for the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting unit may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting effect using another light-emitting pattern may be started. On the other hand, when a precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (an indication that a predetermined area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the light-emitting effect currently being executed may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting unit and a predetermined light-emitting pattern.
The precursor display of the "reach character background color change effect," which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been reached, is more important than the precursor display of the "reach content selection effect," which indicates whether or not the game will develop into a battle reach. However, by starting a new light-emitting effect executed using a specified light-emitting part, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display of the "reach character background color change effect," which is more important, is being displayed.

When a precursory display (a comment image of the master character) for the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed, the light-emitting effect currently being executed may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern using a predetermined light-emitting element. On the other hand, when a precursory display for the "reach content selection effect" (an indication that a predetermined area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern that was being executed using a predetermined light-emitting element may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting effect with another light-emitting pattern may be started.
The precursor display of the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" is displayed just before it is shown whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which can make the player feel tense, but by continuing the light-emitting effect currently being executed without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern using a predetermined light-emitting element, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When a precursory display (a comment image of the master character) for the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed, the light-emitting effect currently being executed may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting element and a predetermined light-emitting pattern. Also, when a precursory display for the "reach content selection effect" (an indication that a predetermined area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the light-emitting effect currently being executed may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting element and a predetermined light-emitting pattern.
The precursor display for the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not it will develop into a battle reach, so each of these situations increases the player's sense of tension, but by preventing the light emission pattern that had been executed up until that point from changing when the precursor display is displayed, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

The movement of a predetermined movable decorative member may be started when a precursory display (a comment image of the master character) for the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed. Similarly, the movement of a predetermined movable decorative member may be started when a precursory display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display indicating that a predetermined area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed.
According to this embodiment, it is possible to make it easier for the driver to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.

When a precursory display (a comment image of the master character) for the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed, the operation of a predetermined movable decorative member may be started. On the other hand, when a precursory display (a display indicating that a predetermined area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) for the "reach content selection effect" is displayed, the operation of the predetermined movable decorative member may not be started (the state before the precursory display was displayed may be maintained).
The precursor display of the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been won is more important than the precursor display of the "During Reach Character Content Selection Effect" which indicates whether or not the game will develop into a Battle Reach, but by starting the operation of a predetermined movable decorative member, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display of the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" which is more important is being displayed.

When the precursor display (a comment image of the master character) for the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed, the operation of the specified movable decorative member may not be initiated (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained). On the other hand, when the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (an indication that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the operation of the specified movable decorative member may be initiated.
The precursor display for the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed just before it is revealed whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which can create tension for the player, but by not starting the operation of the specified movable decorative member (maintaining the state before the precursor display was displayed), the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When a precursor display (a comment image of the master character) for the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed, the operation of a predetermined movable decorative member may not be initiated (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained). Also, when a precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (an indication that a predetermined area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the operation of a predetermined movable decorative member may not be initiated (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained).
The precursor display for the "reach text background color change effect" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not the game will develop into a battle reach, so each of these situations increases the player's sense of tension, but by not starting the operation of a specified movable decorative member when the precursor display is displayed (maintaining the state it was in before the precursor display was displayed), the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

It is also possible to provide a case where a precursor display for a "reach text background color change effect" or a "reach content selection effect" begins to be displayed while the movable decorative element is in motion. In this case, it is recommended that the movement of the movable decorative element be set to "maintain the state (movement pattern) that existed before the precursor display was displayed," as described above.

The length of time that the precursor display for the "text background color change during reach effect" (the comment image of the master character) is displayed may be the same as the length of time that the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (the display that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed.
Since it is possible to experience in advance the change in the display content, where the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) switches to the specific display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which only the selected specified area is displayed and the candidate for the reach effect has been confirmed), the tension felt when the precursor display for the "reach character background color change effect" (a comment image from the master character) is displayed (the tension of wondering when the display of the precursor display for the "reach character background color change effect" (a comment image from the master character) will end) can be moderately alleviated.

Alternatively, the time for which the precursor display for the "reach character background color change effect" (a comment image of the master character) is displayed may be longer than the time for which the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display showing that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed.
While the "reach content selection effect" is an effect that indicates whether or not the game will develop into a reach effect, the "reach character background color change effect" is an effect that immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been hit, and the latter is therefore more important as an effect. Therefore, by relatively shortening the time that the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (the display that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, it is possible to prevent the player's expectations for a jackpot from being excessively aroused.
Alternatively, the time for which the precursor display for the "reach character background color change effect" (the master character's comment image) is displayed may be shorter than the time for which the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (the display that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed.
The display of the precursor display for the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" is performed after the display of the precursor display for the "During Reach Character Content Selection Effect." Also, after the precursor display for the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" (a comment image from the master character) is displayed, a display in which the character background color changes is always performed. This causes the player to feel a sense of tension for a long period of time, but by relatively shortening the time for which the precursor display for the "During Reach Character Background Color Change Effect" (a comment image from the master character) is displayed, it is possible to make the player aware that a display in which the character background color will change will occur, while preventing the player from becoming overly excited about a jackpot.

When the precursor display for the "text background color change during reach" (a comment image of the master character) is displayed, only the current hold image is displayed without displaying the standby hold image, and when the precursor display for the "reach content selection" (an indication that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, both the standby hold image and the current hold image may be displayed.
When the precursor display (the master character's comment image) of the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed, the reserve change effect in which the current reserve image may be promoted with a predetermined probability may be executed with a predetermined probability. By adopting such an embodiment, the reserve change effect can be enjoyed while the precursor display (the master character's comment image) of the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed.

Regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display (comment image of the master character) of the ``reach text background color change effect,'' the following relationship pattern may be adopted.
For example, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character) may be performed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character), end of display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character), and end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character) may be performed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character), end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character).
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character), start of the hold change effect, end of display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character), and end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character), start of the hold change effect, end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character).

On the other hand, when a precursor display (a comment image of the master character) for the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed, the hold change effect that changes the current hold image may not be executed.
According to this embodiment, the player can focus on the background color that is displayed after the precursor display (the comment image of the master character) of the "reach character background color change effect" is displayed.

When the precursor display for the "text background color change during reach" (a comment image of the master character) is displayed, only the current hold image is displayed without displaying the standby hold image, and when the precursor display for the "reach content selection" (an indication that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, both the standby hold image and the current hold image may be displayed.
When the precursor display of the "reach content selection effect" (the display in which a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, a hold change effect in which the current reserved image may be promoted with a predetermined probability may be executed with a predetermined probability. By adopting such an embodiment, the reserve change effect can be enjoyed while the precursor display of the "reach content selection effect" (the display in which a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed.

Regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display of the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), the following relationship pattern may be adopted.
For example, the hold change effect may be executed and the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be displayed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of a precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), end of display of a precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), and end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the hold change effect may be executed and the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be displayed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect).
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be performed in the following order: the start of the display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), the start of the hold change effect, the end of the display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), and the end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (display showing that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (display showing that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), start of the hold change effect, end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (display showing that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect).

On the other hand, when a precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the hold change effect that changes the current hold image may not be executed.
According to such an embodiment, the player can focus on the specific display of the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which only the selected specified area is displayed and the candidate for the reach effect has been confirmed) that is displayed after the display of the precursor display of the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect).

When the precursor display for the "text background color change during reach" (a comment image of the master character) is displayed, only the current hold image is displayed without displaying the standby hold image, and when the precursor display for the "reach content selection" (an indication that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, both the standby hold image and the current hold image may be displayed.
When a precursor display of the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, a hold change effect in which the standby hold image may be upgraded with a predetermined probability may be executed with a predetermined probability. By adopting such an embodiment, the hold change effect can be enjoyed while the precursor display of the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed.

Regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the standby hold image and the display period of the precursor display of the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), the following relationship pattern may be adopted.
For example, the hold change effect may be executed and the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be displayed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of a precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), end of display of a precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), and end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the hold change effect may be executed and the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be displayed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect).
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be performed in the following order: the start of the display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), the start of the hold change effect, the end of the display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), and the end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (display showing that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (display showing that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), start of the hold change effect, end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (display showing that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect).

On the other hand, when a precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the hold change effect that changes the standby hold image may not be executed.
According to such an embodiment, the player can focus on the specific display of the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which only the selected specified area is displayed and the candidate for the reach effect has been confirmed) that is displayed after the display of the precursor display of the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect).

Four patterns are shown regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display (comment image of the master character) of the ``reach text background color change effect.''
In addition, four patterns are shown regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display of the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect).
In addition, four patterns are shown regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the standby hold image and the display period of the precursor display of the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect).
All of these can be executed independently, but an embodiment can also be formed by appropriately combining a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display for the ``reach text background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character), a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), and a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the standby hold image and the display period of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect).

There may be multiple types of hold change effects, and different patterns may be used depending on the type of hold change effect. For example, different patterns may be used for hold change effects that hide holds with smoke and hold change effects that hide holds with swords. For example, in the case of a hold change effect that hides holds with smoke, the effects are executed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of the display of the precursor to the "reach content selection effect" (a display that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), end of the display of the precursor to the "reach content selection effect" (a display that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), and end of the hold change effect. In the case of a hold change effect that hides holds with swords, the effects are executed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of the display of the precursor to the "reach content selection effect" (a display that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor to the "reach content selection effect" (a display that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect).

The display priority of the precursor display for the "text background color change during reach" (image of a comment from the master character) and the precursor display for the "reach content selection" (display showing that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach display) may be higher or lower than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change display (for example, an image that approaches the current hold image or the standby hold image and displays an impact on the current hold image or the standby hold image).
In addition, the display priority of the precursor display (a comment image of the master character) for the "reach character background color change effect" may be set higher than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change effect, and the display priority of the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be set lower than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the display priority of the precursor display for the "text background color change during reach" (a comment image of the master character) may be lower than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change display, and the display priority of the precursor display for the "reach content selection display" (a display showing that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach display) may be higher than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change display.

When the precursor display (a comment image from the master character) for the "Text background color change during reach" effect is displayed, a predetermined expectation effect (an expectation effect that raises the expectation of a win, hereafter referred to as the "predetermined expectation effect") different from the hold change effect may be executed with a predetermined probability. The predetermined expectation effect may, for example, be a display mode such as displaying a predetermined character in display area 1600a. By using such an embodiment, the sense of anticipation can be increased while the precursor display (a comment image from the master character) for the "Text background color change during reach" effect is displayed. The display mode of the standby hold image or current hold image does not change due to the predetermined expectation effect.

The following relationship patterns may be adopted for the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (comment image of the master character) for the ``reach character background color change effect.''
For example, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the "reach character background color change effect" (comment image of the master character) may be performed in the following order: start of the specified expected effect, start of display of the precursor display for the "reach character background color change effect" (comment image of the master character), end of display of the precursor display for the "reach character background color change effect" (comment image of the master character), and end of the specified expected effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``reach-prone character background color change effect'' (a comment image of the master character) may be performed in the following order: the start of the specified expected effect, the start of display of the precursor display for the ``reach-prone character background color change effect'' (a comment image of the master character), the end of the specified expected effect, and the end of display of the precursor display for the ``reach-prone character background color change effect'' (a comment image of the master character).
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character), start of the specified expected effect, end of display of the precursor display for the ``reach character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character), and end of the specified expected effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``reach-in-character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the ``reach-in-character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character), start of the specified expected effect, end of the specified expected effect, and end of display of the precursor display for the ``reach-in-character background color change effect'' (comment image of the master character).

When the precursor display (image of a comment from the master character) for the "text background color change effect during reach" is displayed, the specified expected effect may not be executed.

When the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, a specified expected effect different from the hold change effect may be executed with a specified probability. The specified expected effect may, for example, be a display mode such as displaying a specified character in display area 1600a. By using such an embodiment, it is possible to increase the sense of anticipation while the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed. Note that the display mode of the waiting hold image or current hold image does not change due to the specified expected effect.

Regarding the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display of the "reach content selection effect" (the display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), the following relationship pattern may be adopted.
For example, the execution of the specified expected performance and the display of the precursor display for the "reach content selection performance" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach performance) may be performed in the following order: the start of the specified expected performance, the start of the display of the precursor display for the "reach content selection performance" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach performance), the end of the display of the precursor display for the "reach content selection performance" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach performance), and the end of the specified expected performance.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected performance and the display of the precursor display for the "reach content selection performance" (display showing that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach performance) may be performed in the following order: start of the specified expected performance, start of display of the precursor display for the "reach content selection performance" (display showing that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach performance), end of the specified expected performance, and end of display of the precursor display for the "reach content selection performance" (display showing that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach performance).
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected performance and the display of the precursor display for the "reach content selection performance" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach performance) may be performed in the following order: the start of the display of the precursor display for the "reach content selection performance" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach performance), the start of the specified expected performance, the end of the display of the precursor display for the "reach content selection performance" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach performance), and the end of the specified expected performance.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected performance and the display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection performance'' (display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach performance) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection performance'' (display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach performance), start of the specified expected performance, end of the specified expected performance, and end of the display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection performance'' (display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach performance).

When a precursory display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display indicating that a specific area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the specific expected effect may not be executed.

The specified expected effects can be, for example, effects that prompt the player to operate the operating means, or effects that do not prompt the player to operate the operating means (such as comment preview effects, step-up preview effects, and premium effects that confirm a jackpot).

Four patterns are shown for the relationship between the execution period of a predetermined expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (comment image of the master character) for the "reach character background color change effect."
In addition, four patterns are shown for the relationship between the execution period of a predetermined expected effect and the display period of the precursor display of the "reach content selection effect" (the display in which a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect).
Although all of these can be executed independently, an embodiment can be formed by appropriately combining a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (comment image of the master character) for the ``reach text background color change effect'' and a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (display that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect).

Although multiple types of predetermined expected effects are shown, different patterns may be adopted depending on the type of predetermined expected effect. For example, one of four patterns may be adopted when executing one expected effect, either an effect that prompts the player to operate the operation means or an effect that does not prompt the player to operate the operation means (such as a comment preview effect, a step-up preview effect, or a premium effect that confirms a jackpot), and another of the four patterns may be adopted when executing another expected effect. For example, in the case of a comment preview performance, the specified expected performance is executed and the premonition display for the "reach content selection performance" (a display showing that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach performance) is displayed in the following order: start of the comment preview performance, start of display of a precursor display for the "reach content selection performance" (a display showing that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach performance), end of display of a precursor display for the "reach content selection performance" (a display showing that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach performance), and end of the comment preview performance; and in the case of a step-up preview performance, the specified expected performance is executed and the premonition display for the "reach content selection performance" (a display showing that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach performance) is displayed in the following order: start of the comment preview performance, start of the "reach content selection performance" (a display showing that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach performance), start of the step-up preview performance, end of display of a precursor display for the "reach content selection performance" (a display showing that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach performance), and end of the step-up preview performance.

The display priority of the precursor display for the "text background color change during reach" (image of a comment from the master character) and the precursor display for the "reach content selection" (display showing that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach display) may be higher or lower than the display priority of the images displayed in the specified expectation display (for example, an operation unit simulation image, a comment image, a step-up image, a premium image, etc.).
In addition, the display priority of the precursor display (image of a comment from the master character) for the "reach character background color change effect" may be set higher than the display priority of the image displayed in a specified expectation effect, and the display priority of the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (display showing that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be set lower than the display priority of the image displayed in a specified expectation effect.
Alternatively, the display priority of the precursor display (image of a comment from the master character) for the "reach character background color change effect" may be lower than the display priority of the image displayed in a specified expectation effect, and the display priority of the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (display showing that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be higher than the display priority of the image displayed in a specified expectation effect.

The display of a precursor to the "text background color change during reach" effect (a comment image from the master character) or a precursor to the "reach content selection effect" (an indication that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be repeatedly displayed.
For example, the size of the comment image displayed in the precursor display (the comment image of the master character) for the "reach character background color change effect" may be increased or decreased multiple times. Furthermore, the size of the selected predetermined area in the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (the display in which a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be increased or decreased multiple times. Furthermore, the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" may be repeatedly switched between a state in which the display is extremely shaken or overlaid with effects and a state in which the display is not extremely shaken or overlaid with effects multiple times. Furthermore, the effect may be repeatedly enlarged and reduced at high speed. By adopting such a display mode, it is possible to reduce the capacity and alleviate the sense of tension caused by the precursor display.
On the other hand, the display of the precursor to the "text background color change during reach" effect (a comment image from the master character) and the precursor to the "reach content selection effect" (an indication that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may not be repeated.
For example, the size of the comment image displayed in the precursor display (the comment image of the master character) for the "reach character background color change effect" may be gradually increased but not decreased. Also, in the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (the display in which a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), a display mode may be adopted in which the size of the selected predetermined area increases but does not decrease. Furthermore, when the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" is shaken, the display may be such that the shaking gradually increases but does not decrease, or the displayed effect may be such that it gradually increases but does not decrease. By adopting such a display mode, the image quality is improved, which can excite the player.

The display of the precursor to the "text background color change during reach" effect (a comment image from the master character) may be repeatedly displayed, and the display of the precursor to the "reach content selection effect" (a display that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may not be repeatedly displayed.
Alternatively, the display of the precursor to the "reach character background color change effect" (the master character's comment image) may not be repeated, and the display of the precursor to the "reach content selection effect" (the display that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be repeated.
Alternatively, it is possible to prevent both the display of the precursor to the "text background color change during reach" effect (a comment image from the master character) and the display of the precursor to the "reach content selection effect" (an indication that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) from being repeated.

An embodiment has been shown in which the display of a precursor display for the "text background color change during reach" (a comment image from the master character) and the display of a precursor display for the "reach content selection" (a display that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach display) may be repeatedly displayed, but it is also possible to make a light-emitting means such as a light-emitting decorative member emit light in a specified manner in response to the display of the precursor display, or to output sound in a specified manner from a sound generating means.
In this case, the light or sound output mode may be repeated in accordance with the repetition of the display of the predictive display. Alternatively, the light or sound may be output in a predetermined pattern throughout the entire display period of the predictive display without being associated with the repetition of the display of the predictive display (i.e., without repeatedly outputting the light or sound). Furthermore, if the display of the predictive display is not repeated, the light or sound may also be output in a predetermined pattern throughout the entire display period of the predictive display without being repeatedly output.

An embodiment has been shown in which there is only one type of precursor display for the "reach character background color change effect" (a comment image from the master character) and one type of precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (an indication that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect), but either one or both may be of multiple types.
For example, two types of precursor displays (comment images of the master character) for the "reach character background color change effect" may be prepared, and the degree of expectation may differ depending on the type. Note that the number is not limited to two, and three or more types may be used. In this case, it is also preferable to make the degree of expectation higher or equal.
In addition, two or more types of precursor displays for the "reach content selection effect" (displays in which a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be prepared. For example, a display mode in which the precursor display shakes more vigorously and a display mode in which the precursor display shakes less vigorously may be employed, or a display mode in which the shaking amount (movement width) is the same but the speed of the shaking may be varied to employ a fast shaking mode and a slow shaking mode, or a plurality of display modes in which both the shaking mode and the shaking speed are varied to employ different shaking modes. In this case, too, it is preferable to vary the degree of expectation depending on the type of precursor display.
There may be one type of precursor display (a comment image from the master character) for the "reach text background color change effect" and multiple types (for example, the two types mentioned above) for the "reach content selection effect" (an indication that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect).
Alternatively, there may be multiple types of precursor displays (comment images of the master character) for the "reach text background color change effect" (for example, the two types mentioned above), and only one type of precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect).
Alternatively, there may be multiple types of precursor displays (comment images of the master character) for the "reach text background color change effect" (for example, the two types mentioned above), and multiple types of precursor displays (displays showing that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) for the "reach content selection effect" (for example, the two types mentioned above).
When only one display mode of the precursor display is provided, there is no difference in the degree of expectation while the precursor display is being displayed, so a stable sense of expectation can be provided. On the other hand, when multiple display modes are provided, a display with a high degree of expectation is displayed while the precursor display is being displayed, so the sense of expectation can be increased.

In the above embodiment, the precursor display for the "During Reach" text background color change effect (a comment image from the master character) and the precursor display for the "During Reach" content selection effect (a display showing that a specific area has been selected as a candidate for the "During Reach" effect) are displayed in the same variable display, but the "During Reach" content selection effect may also be executed as a look-ahead effect. In this case, the "During Reach" content selection effect is executed in a specific variable display, and the "During Reach" text background color change effect is executed in a subsequent variable display. When the "During Reach" content selection effect is executed as a look-ahead effect, it is advisable to stop each variable display in a non-miss-at-all state until the predicted reach effect is executed. This can create a sense of anticipation even when a non-miss-at-all variable pattern is executed.

In the embodiment shown, the precursor display for the "Reach Content Selection Effect" (a display indicating that a specific area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed first, followed by the precursor display for the "Reach Text Background Color Change Effect" (an image of a comment from the master character). However, it is also possible to have the precursor display for the "Reach Content Selection Effect" (a display indicating that a specific area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) displayed without displaying the precursor display for the "Reach Text Background Color Change Effect" (an image of a comment from the master character). This type of embodiment can instantly increase the sense of anticipation.

In the embodiment shown, the "Look-in-Look text background color change effect" is executed after the "Look-in-Look content selection effect" is executed, but it is also possible to have the "Look-in-Look text background color change effect" be executed without executing the "Look-in-Look content selection effect." This type of embodiment can instantly increase the sense of anticipation.

In one variation, after the display of the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display indicating that a specific area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect), the probability of the precursor display for the "reach text background color change effect" (a comment image from the master character) being displayed may be made higher than the probability of the precursor display for the "reach text background color change effect" (a comment image from the master character) being displayed without displaying the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display indicating that a specific area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect). In such an embodiment, the display of the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display indicating that a specific area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed appropriately, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

In one variation, the probability that a "Look-to-Look character background color change effect" will be executed after a "Look-to-Look content selection effect" is executed may be made higher than the probability that a "Look-to-Look character background color change effect" will be executed without executing a "Look-to-Look content selection effect." In this embodiment, the "Look-to-Look content selection effect" will be executed appropriately, preventing a decline in interest.

In one variation, after the display of the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display showing that a specific area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect), the probability of the precursor display for the "reach text background color change effect" (a comment image from the master character) being displayed may be lowered to be lower than the probability of the precursor display for the "reach text background color change effect" (a comment image from the master character) being displayed without displaying the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display showing that a specific area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect). According to this embodiment, the sense of anticipation can be instantly increased when the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display showing that a specific area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed.

In one variation, the probability that a "Look-to-Look character background color change effect" will be executed after a "Look-to-Look content selection effect" has been executed may be lower than the probability that a "Look-to-Look character background color change effect" will be executed without executing a "Look-to-Look content selection effect." According to this embodiment, the sense of anticipation can be instantly heightened when a "Look-to-Look content selection effect" is executed.

The expectation level when a premonition display for a "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for a reach effect) is followed by a premonition display for a "reach text background color change effect" (an image of a comment from the master character) may be higher than the expectation level when a premonition display for a "reach text background color change effect" (an image of a comment from the master character) is displayed without displaying a premonition display for a "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for a reach effect). According to this embodiment, the sense of expectation can be increased all at once when a premonition display for a "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for a reach effect) is displayed.

The expectation level when a "reach character background color change effect" is executed after a "reach content selection effect" is executed may be higher than the expectation level when a "reach character background color change effect" is executed without executing a "reach content selection effect." According to this embodiment, the sense of expectation can be increased all at once when a "reach content selection effect" is executed.

The expectation level when a premonition display for the "Reach Content Selection Effect" (a display indicating that a specific area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed followed by a premonition display for the "Reach Text Background Color Change Effect" (an image of a comment from the master character) may be lowered than the expectation level when a premonition display for the "Reach Text Background Color Change Effect" (an image of a comment from the master character) is displayed without displaying a premonition display for the "Reach Content Selection Effect" (a display indicating that a specific area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect). According to this embodiment, the premonition display for the "Reach Content Selection Effect" (a display indicating that a specific area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed appropriately, thereby preventing a decrease in interest.

The expectation level when a "reach character background color change effect" is executed after a "reach content selection effect" is executed may be lower than the expectation level when a "reach character background color change effect" is executed without executing a "reach content selection effect." In this embodiment, the "reach content selection effect" is executed appropriately, thereby preventing a decrease in interest.

Referring to Figures 422, 423, etc., an embodiment is shown in which the background color (text color in a modified example) of the comment image of the martial artist character changes from a low expectation color to a high expectation color at timing t46.
The length of time that the background color is displayed in a low expectation color here may be longer, shorter, or the same as the length of time that the precursor display (comment image of the master character) for the ``reach character background color change effect'' is displayed.
In addition, the length of time that the background color is displayed in a low expectation color may be longer, shorter, or the same as the length of time that the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (the display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed.
In addition, the length of time that the background color is displayed in a high expectation color may be longer, shorter, or the same as the length of time that the precursor display (comment image of the master character) for the ``reach character background color change effect'' is displayed.
In addition, the length of time that the background color is displayed in a high expectation color may be longer, shorter, or the same as the length of time that the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (the display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed.

Below, we will explain some variations of an embodiment in which a "reach background change effect" is executed after a "pre-reach battle effect" is executed.

When a precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "mid-reach background change effect" is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated, and instead another background image may be started to be displayed. Similarly, when a precursor display (indication that the player is withstanding an energy bullet) for the "pre-reach battle effect" is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated, and instead another background image may be started to be displayed.
By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the scene has switched to an important scene.

When the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "mid-reach background change effect" is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated and another background image may be displayed instead. On the other hand, when the precursor display (indication that the player is withstanding an energy bullet) of the "pre-reach battle effect" is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be continued.
The precursor display of the "background change effect during reach," which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been won, is more important than the precursor display of the "battle effect before reach," which indicates whether or not the game will develop into a battle reach, but by switching the background image, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display of the "background change effect during reach," which is more important, is being displayed.

When the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "mid-reach background change effect" is displayed, the previously displayed background image may be continued to be displayed. On the other hand, when the precursor display (indication of enduring an energy bullet) of the "pre-reach battle effect" is displayed, the previously displayed background image may be terminated and another background image may be displayed instead.
The precursor display for the "background change during reach" is displayed just before it is shown whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which can make the player feel tense, but by continuing to display the same background image without changing it, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When a precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "mid-reach background change effect" is displayed, the previously displayed background image may be continued to be displayed. Also, when a precursor display (indication that the player is withstanding an energy bullet) for the "pre-reach battle effect" is displayed, the previously displayed background image may be continued to be displayed.
The precursor display for the "background change during reach" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and the precursor display for the "battle before reach" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not the game will develop into a battle reach, so that both situations increase the player's sense of tension, but by preventing the background image from changing before and after the precursor display is displayed, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When a precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "mid-reach background change effect" is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that has been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be lowered or the output of the sound may be interrupted. Similarly, when a precursor display (indication that the player is withstanding an energy bullet) for the "pre-reach battle effect" is displayed, the volume of the sound that has been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be lowered or the output of the sound may be interrupted.
According to such an embodiment, the output mode of the sound that was previously output from the sound generating means is suppressed, making it sound quieter or completely inaudible, making it easier to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.

When a precursory display (background change precursory image) for the "mid-reach background change effect" is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that had been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be lowered or the output of the sound may be interrupted. On the other hand, when a precursory display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (indication that the player is withstanding an energy bullet) is displayed, the volume of the sound that had been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be left unchanged and the output may continue as is.
According to such an embodiment, the output manner of the sound that was previously output from the sound generating means is suppressed, making it sound quieter or completely inaudible, thereby making it easier to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.
The precursor display of the "background change effect during reach" which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been won is more important than the precursor display of the "battle effect before reach" which indicates whether or not it will develop into a battle reach, but by suppressing the sound output from the sound generating means, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display of the "background change effect during reach" which is more important is being displayed.

When a precursory display (background change precursory image) for the "mid-reach background change effect" is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that had been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be left unchanged and continue to be output. On the other hand, when a precursory display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (indication that the player is withstanding an energy bullet) is displayed, the volume of the sound that had been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be lowered or the sound output may be interrupted.
The precursor display for the "background change effect during reach" is displayed just before it is shown whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which can make the player feel tense, but by continuing to output the sound that has been output from the sound generating means without changing the volume, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When a precursory display (background change precursory image) for the "mid-reach background change effect" is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that had been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be left unchanged and continue to be output. Also, when a precursory display (indication that the player is withstanding an energy bullet) for the "pre-reach battle effect" is displayed, the volume of the sound that had been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be left unchanged and continue to be output.
The precursor display for the "background change effect during reach" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and the precursor display for the "battle effect before reach" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not the game will develop into a battle reach, so that each of these situations increases the player's sense of tension, but by preventing the volume of the sound that has been output from the sound generating means from changing when the precursor display is displayed, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

The sound (BGM, etc.) output when the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "mid-reach background change effect" is displayed may be the same as the sound output when the precursor display (display of enduring an energy bullet) for the "pre-reach battle effect" is displayed, or it may be a different sound.
The output duration of the sound output when the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "mid-reach background change effect" is displayed may be the same as or different from the output duration of the sound output when the precursor display (display of enduring an energy bullet) for the "pre-reach battle effect" is displayed. If the lengths are different, one may be longer than the other, or one may be shorter than the other.

The length of time that the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed and the length of the sound (BGM, etc.) that is output when the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed may be the same or different. If the lengths are different, one may be longer than the other, or one may be shorter than the other.
The length of time that the "pre-reach battle effect" precursor display (the display that shows that the character is withstanding the energy bullets) is displayed and the output time of the sound that is output when the "pre-reach battle effect" precursor display (the display that shows that the character is withstanding the energy bullets) is displayed may be the same or different. If the lengths are different, one may be longer than the other, or one may be shorter than the other.

When a precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "mid-reach background change effect" is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting element may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting effect using another light-emitting pattern may be started. Similarly, when a precursor display (indication that the player is surviving an energy bullet) for the "pre-reach battle effect" is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting element may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting effect using another light-emitting pattern may be started.
According to this embodiment, it is possible to make it easier for the driver to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.

When a precursory display (background change precursory image) for the "mid-reach background change effect" is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting element may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting effect using another light-emitting pattern may be started. On the other hand, when a precursory display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (an indication that the player is resistant to an energy bullet) is displayed, the light-emitting effect currently being executed may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting element and a predetermined light-emitting pattern.
The precursor display of the "background change effect during reach," which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been reached, is more important than the precursor display of the "battle effect before reach," which indicates whether or not the game will develop into a battle reach. However, by starting a new light-emitting effect executed using a specified light-emitting section, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display of the "background change effect during reach," which is more important, is being displayed.

When a precursory display (background change precursory image) for the "mid-reach background change effect" is displayed, the light-emitting effect currently being executed may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern executed using a predetermined light-emitting element. On the other hand, when a precursory display (indication that the player is withstanding an energy bullet) for the "pre-reach battle effect" is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern executed using a predetermined light-emitting element may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting effect with another light-emitting pattern may be started.
The precursor display for the "background change effect during reach" is displayed just before it is shown whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which can cause tension in the player, but by continuing the light-emitting effect currently being executed without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern using a predetermined light-emitting element, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When a precursory display (background change precursory image) for the "mid-reach background change effect" is displayed, the currently executing light-emitting effect may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting element and a predetermined light-emitting pattern. Also, when a precursory display (indication that the player is resistant to an energy bullet) for the "pre-reach battle effect" is displayed, the currently executing light-emitting effect may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting element and a predetermined light-emitting pattern.
The precursor display for the "background change effect during reach" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and the precursor display for the "battle effect before reach" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not the game will develop into a battle reach, so that both situations increase the player's sense of tension, but by preventing the light emission pattern that has been executed up until that point from changing when the precursor display is displayed, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

A predetermined movable decorative member may be set to start moving when a precursory display (background change precursory image) for the "mid-reach background change effect" is displayed. Similarly, a predetermined movable decorative member may be set to start moving when a precursory display (indication of enduring an energy bullet) for the "pre-reach battle effect" is displayed.
According to this embodiment, it is possible to make it easier for the driver to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.

When a precursory display (background change precursory image) for the "mid-reach background change effect" is displayed, the movement of a predetermined movable decorative member may be started. On the other hand, when a precursory display (a display of the character enduring an energy bullet) for the "pre-reach battle effect" is displayed, the movement of the predetermined movable decorative member may not be started (the state before the precursory display was displayed may be maintained).
The precursor display of the "background change effect during reach," which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been reached, is more important than the precursor display of the "battle effect before reach," which indicates whether or not the game will develop into a battle reach, but by starting the operation of a specified movable decorative member, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display of the "background change effect during reach," which is more important, is being displayed.

When the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "mid-reach background change effect" is displayed, the specified movable decorative member may not start operating (maintaining the state before the precursor display was displayed). On the other hand, when the precursor display (indication of withstanding an energy bullet) for the "pre-reach battle effect" is displayed, the specified movable decorative member may start operating.
The precursor display for the "background change during reach" is displayed just before it is revealed whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which can create tension for the player, but by not starting the operation of the specified movable decorative member (maintaining the state before the precursor display was displayed), the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "mid-reach background change effect" is displayed, the specified movable decorative member may not start operating (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained). Also, when the precursor display (indication of withstanding an energy bullet) for the "pre-reach battle effect" is displayed, the specified movable decorative member may not start operating (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained).
The precursor display for the "background change during reach" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not the game will develop into a battle reach, so each of these situations increases the player's sense of tension, but by not starting the operation of a specified movable decorative member when the precursor display is displayed (maintaining the state it was in before the precursor display was displayed), the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

It is also possible to provide cases where a precursor display for a "background change during reach" or "pre-reach battle" begins to be displayed while a movable decorative element is in motion. In this case, it is recommended that the movement of the movable decorative element be set to "maintain the state (movement pattern) that existed before the precursor display was displayed," as described above.

The length of time that the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "mid-reach background change effect" is displayed may be the same as the length of time that the precursor display (indication of enduring an energy bullet) for the "pre-reach battle effect" is displayed.
Since it is possible to experience in advance the change in the display content, where the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (a display of the character enduring an energy bullet) switches to the specific display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (a display of the demon character fainting), the tension felt when the precursor display for the "mid-reach background change effect" (background change precursor image) is displayed (the tension of wondering when the precursor display for the "mid-reach background change effect" will end) can be moderately alleviated.

Alternatively, the time for which the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "mid-reach background change effect" is displayed may be longer than the time for which the precursor display (display of enduring an energy bullet) for the "pre-reach battle effect" is displayed.
While the "pre-reach battle effect" is an effect that indicates whether or not the game will develop into a reach effect, the "reach background change effect" is an effect that indicates whether or not the game will be a jackpot, and the latter is more important as an effect. Therefore, by relatively shortening the time that the premonition display of the "pre-reach battle effect" (the display that the game is withstanding the energy bullets) is displayed, it is possible to prevent the player's expectations for a jackpot from being excessively aroused.
Alternatively, the time for which the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "mid-reach background change effect" is displayed may be shorter than the time for which the precursor display (display of enduring an energy bullet) for the "pre-reach battle effect" is displayed.
The display of the precursor display for the "mid-reach background change effect" is performed after the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect." In addition, after the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "mid-reach background change effect" is displayed, a display in which the background image changes is always performed. This causes the player to feel a sense of tension for a long period of time, but by relatively shortening the time for which the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "mid-reach background change effect" is displayed, it is possible to make the player aware that a display in which the background image will change will occur, while preventing the player from becoming overly excited about a jackpot.

When the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect" is displayed, only the current reserve image is displayed without displaying the standby reserve image, and when the precursor display (indication of enduring an energy bullet) of the "reach pre-battle effect" is displayed, both the standby reserve image and the current reserve image may be displayed.
When the precursor display (background change precursor image) of "reach background change performance" is displayed, the reserve change performance in which the current reserved image may be promoted with a predetermined probability may be executed with a predetermined probability. By adopting such an embodiment, the reserve change performance can be enjoyed while the precursor display (background change precursor image) of "reach background change performance" is displayed.

Regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the ``reach background change effect,'' the following relationship pattern may be adopted.
For example, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect'' may be performed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' end of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' and end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect'' may be performed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' end of the hold change effect, and end of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect.''
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect'' may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' start of the hold change effect, end of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' and end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect'' may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' start of the hold change effect, end of the hold change effect, and end of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect.''

On the other hand, when the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect" is displayed, the hold change effect that changes the current hold image may not be executed.
According to this embodiment, the player can focus on the background image that is displayed after the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect" is displayed.

When the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect" is displayed, only the current reserve image is displayed without displaying the standby reserve image, and when the precursor display (indication of enduring an energy bullet) of the "reach pre-battle effect" is displayed, both the standby reserve image and the current reserve image may be displayed.
When the premonition display of the "before-reach battle effect" (the display of enduring the energy bullet) is displayed, the hold change effect in which the current hold image may be promoted with a predetermined probability may be executed with a predetermined probability. By adopting such an embodiment, the hold change effect can be enjoyed while the premonition display of the "before-reach battle effect" (the display of enduring the energy bullet) is displayed.

Regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display of the ``pre-reach battle effect'' (display of enduring the energy bullet), the following relationship pattern may be adopted.
For example, the hold change effect may be executed and the premonition display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (indication that the player is withstanding the energy bullet) may be displayed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of the premonition display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (indication that the player is withstanding the energy bullet), end of display of the premonition display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (indication that the player is withstanding the energy bullet), and end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets) may be performed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets), end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets).
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets) may be performed in the following order: the start of the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets), the start of the hold change effect, the end of the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets), and the end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets), start of the hold change effect, end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets).

On the other hand, when the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (the display showing that the player is withstanding the energy bullet) is displayed, the hold change effect that changes the current hold image may not be executed.
According to such an embodiment, the player can focus on the specific display of the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of the Oni character fainting) that appears after the display of the precursor display of the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of the Oni character surviving an energy bullet).

When the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect" is displayed, only the current reserve image is displayed without displaying the standby reserve image, and when the precursor display (indication of enduring an energy bullet) of the "reach pre-battle effect" is displayed, both the standby reserve image and the current reserve image may be displayed.
When the precursor display of the "pre-reach battle effect" (the display of enduring the energy bullet) is displayed, a hold change effect in which the standby hold image may be upgraded with a predetermined probability may be executed with a predetermined probability. By adopting such an embodiment, the hold change effect can be enjoyed while the precursor display of the "pre-reach battle effect" (the display of enduring the energy bullet) is displayed.

Regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the standby hold image and the display period of the precursor display of the ``pre-reach battle effect'' (display of enduring the energy bullet), the following relationship pattern may be adopted.
For example, the hold change effect may be executed and the premonition display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (indication that the player is withstanding the energy bullet) may be displayed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of the premonition display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (indication that the player is withstanding the energy bullet), end of display of the premonition display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (indication that the player is withstanding the energy bullet), and end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets) may be performed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets), end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets).
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets) may be performed in the following order: the start of the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets), the start of the hold change effect, the end of the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets), and the end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets), start of the hold change effect, end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets).

On the other hand, when the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (the display showing that the player is withstanding the energy bullet) is displayed, the hold change effect that changes the standby hold image may not be executed.
According to such an embodiment, the player can focus on the specific display of the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of the Oni character fainting) that appears after the display of the precursor display of the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of the Oni character surviving an energy bullet).

Four patterns are shown regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the ``reach background change effect.''
In addition, four patterns are shown regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display of the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of enduring the energy bullet).
In addition, four patterns are shown regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the standby hold image and the display period of the precursor display of the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of enduring the energy bullet).
Although all of these can be executed independently, an embodiment can be formed by appropriately combining a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display (display showing that the player is resistant to an energy bullet) for the ``reach pre-battle effect,'' and a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the standby hold image and the display period of the precursor display (display showing that the player is resistant to an energy bullet) for the ``reach pre-battle effect.''

There may be multiple types of hold change effects, and different patterns may be used depending on the type of hold change effect. For example, different patterns may be used for hold change effects that hide holds with smoke and hold change effects that hide holds with swords. For example, in the case of hold change effects that hide holds with smoke, the order of execution is start of the hold change effect, start of display of the pre-reach battle effect sign (indicating that the player is withstanding energy bullets), end of display of the pre-reach battle effect sign (indicating that the player is withstanding energy bullets), and end of the hold change effect. In the case of hold change effects that hide holds with swords, the order of execution is start of the hold change effect, start of display of the pre-reach battle effect sign (indicating that the player is withstanding energy bullets), end of the hold change effect, and end of display of the pre-reach battle effect sign (indicating that the player is withstanding energy bullets).

The display priority of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "background change effect during reach" and the precursor display (display of withstanding the energy bullet) for the "battle effect before reach" may be higher or lower than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change effect (for example, an image that approaches the current hold image or standby hold image and displays an impact on the current hold image or standby hold image).
In addition, the display priority of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "background change effect during reach" may be higher than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change effect, and the display priority of the precursor display (display of enduring an energy bullet) for the "battle effect before reach" may be lower than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the display priority of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "background change effect during reach" may be lower than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change effect, and the display priority of the precursor display (display of enduring an energy bullet) for the "pre-reach battle effect" may be higher than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change effect.

When the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed, a predetermined expectation effect (an expectation effect that raises the expectation of a win, hereafter referred to as the "predetermined expectation effect") different from the hold change effect may be executed with a predetermined probability. The predetermined expectation effect may, for example, be a presentation format such as displaying a predetermined character in display area 1600a. By using such an embodiment, the sense of anticipation can be increased while the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed. The display format of the standby hold image or current hold image will not change due to the predetermined expectation effect.

The following relationship patterns may be adopted for the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect."
For example, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect'' may be performed in the following order: start of the specified expected effect, start of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' end of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' and end of the specified expected effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect'' may be performed in the following order: start of the specified expected effect, start of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' end of the specified expected effect, and end of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect.''
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect'' may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' start of the specified expected effect, end of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' and end of the specified expected effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect'' may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' start of the specified expected effect, end of the specified expected effect, and end of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect.''

When the "background change effect during reach" precursor display (background change precursor image) is displayed, the specified expected effect may not be executed.

When the pre-reach battle effect warning display (display of withstanding energy bullets) is displayed, a predetermined expectation display different from the hold change display may be executed with a predetermined probability. The predetermined expectation display may, for example, be a display mode such as displaying a predetermined character in display area 1600a. By using such an embodiment, it is possible to increase the sense of anticipation while the pre-reach battle effect warning display (display of withstanding energy bullets) is displayed. Note that the display mode of the standby hold image or current hold image does not change due to the predetermined expectation display.

Regarding the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display of the "pre-reach battle effect" (the display of enduring the energy bullet), the following relationship pattern may be adopted.
For example, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of the player enduring the energy bullets) may be performed in the following order: start of the specified expected effect, start of display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of the player enduring the energy bullets), end of display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of the player enduring the energy bullets), and end of the specified expected effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of the player enduring the energy bullets) may be performed in the following order: start of the specified expected effect, start of display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of the player enduring the energy bullets), end of the specified expected effect, and end of display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of the player enduring the energy bullets).
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected performance and the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle performance" (display of withstanding energy bullets) may be performed in the following order: the start of the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle performance" (display of withstanding energy bullets), the start of the specified expected performance, the end of the display of the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle performance" (display of withstanding energy bullets), and the end of the specified expected performance.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``pre-reach battle effect'' (display of the player enduring the energy bullets) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the ``pre-reach battle effect'' (display of the player enduring the energy bullets), start of the specified expected effect, end of the specified expected effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the ``pre-reach battle effect'' (display of the player enduring the energy bullets).

When the "pre-reach battle effect" warning display (indicating that the player is surviving an energy bullet) is displayed, it is also possible to prevent the specified expected effect from being executed.

The specified expected effects can be, for example, effects that prompt the player to operate the operating means, or effects that do not prompt the player to operate the operating means (such as comment preview effects, step-up preview effects, and premium effects that confirm a jackpot).

Four patterns are shown for the relationship between the execution period of a predetermined expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect."
In addition, four patterns are shown for the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (display of enduring energy bullets) of the "pre-reach battle effect."
Although each of these can be executed independently, an embodiment may be formed by appropriately combining a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect'' and a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (display of enduring energy bullets) for the ``reach battle effect.''

Although multiple types of predetermined expected effects are shown, different patterns may be adopted depending on the type of predetermined expected effect. For example, one of four patterns may be adopted when executing one expected effect, either an effect that prompts the player to operate the operation means or an effect that does not prompt the player to operate the operation means (such as a comment preview effect, a step-up preview effect, or a premium effect that confirms a jackpot), and another of the four patterns may be adopted when executing another expected effect. For example, in the case of a comment preview effect, the specified expected effect is executed and the pre-reach battle effect sign (indication that the player is withstanding energy bullets) is displayed in the following order: start of the comment preview effect, start of display of the pre-reach battle effect sign (indication that the player is withstanding energy bullets), end of display of the pre-reach battle effect sign (indication that the player is withstanding energy bullets), and end of the comment preview effect; in the case of a step-up preview effect, the specified expected effect is executed and the pre-reach battle effect sign (indication that the player is withstanding energy bullets) is displayed in the following order: start of display of the pre-reach battle effect sign (indication that the player is withstanding energy bullets), start of the step-up preview effect, end of display of the pre-reach battle effect sign (indication that the player is withstanding energy bullets), and end of the step-up preview effect.

The display priority of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "background change effect during reach" and the precursor display (display of withstanding the energy bullet) for the "pre-reach battle effect" may be higher or lower than the display priority of the images displayed in the specified expectation effect (for example, operation unit simulation image, comment image, step-up image, premium image, etc.).
In addition, the display priority of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "background change effect during reach" may be set higher than the display priority of the image displayed in a specified expected effect, and the display priority of the precursor display (display of enduring an energy bullet) for the "pre-reach battle effect" may be set lower than the display priority of the image displayed in a specified expected effect.
Alternatively, the display priority of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "background change effect during reach" may be lower than the display priority of the image displayed in the specified expected effect, and the display priority of the precursor display (display of enduring an energy bullet) for the "battle effect before reach" may be higher than the display priority of the image displayed in the specified expected effect.

The display of a precursory display for the "background change effect during reach" (background change precursory image) or a precursory display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of enduring an energy bullet) may be repeatedly displayed.
For example, the size of the background change precursor image displayed in the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "mid-reach background change effect" may be increased or decreased multiple times. Also, during the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (the display showing the character enduring an energy bullet), the demon character may be caused to retreat and advance multiple times by the energy bullets. By adopting such a display mode, it is possible to reduce the capacity and alleviate the sense of tension caused by the precursor display.
On the other hand, the display of the precursor display for the "background change effect during reach" (background change precursor image) and the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of enduring energy bullets) may not be repeated.
For example, the size of the background change precursor image displayed in the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "mid-reach background change effect" may be gradually increased but not decreased. Also, during the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (a display of the demon character enduring an energy bullet), an image of the demon character being gradually retreated by the energy bullet may be displayed. By adopting such a display mode, the image quality is improved, and the player can be excited.
The display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "background change effect during reach" may be repeated, and the display of the precursor display (display of enduring an energy bullet) for the "pre-reach battle effect" may not be repeated.
Alternatively, the display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "background change effect during reach" may not be repeated, and the display of the precursor display (display of enduring an energy bullet) for the "pre-reach battle effect" may be repeated.
Alternatively, it is possible to prevent both the display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "mid-reach background change effect" and the display of the precursor display (display of enduring energy bullets) for the "pre-reach battle effect" from being repeated.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the display of a precursory display (background change precursory image) for a "reach background change effect" or a precursory display for a "pre-reach battle effect" (indication of enduring an energy bullet) may be repeatedly displayed, it is also possible to make a light-emitting means such as a light-emitting decorative member emit light in a predetermined manner or to output sound in a predetermined manner from a sound generating means in response to the display of the precursory display.
In this case, the light or sound output mode may be repeated in accordance with the repetition of the display of the predictive display. Alternatively, the light or sound may be output in a predetermined pattern throughout the entire display period of the predictive display without being associated with the repetition of the display of the predictive display (i.e., without repeatedly outputting the light or sound). Furthermore, if the display of the predictive display is not repeated, the light or sound may also be output in a predetermined pattern throughout the entire display period of the predictive display without being repeatedly output.

An embodiment has been shown in which there is only one type of precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``background change effect during reach'' and one type of precursor display (display of enduring energy bullets) for the ``pre-reach battle effect,'' but either one or both may be of multiple types.
For example, two types of precursor displays (background change precursor images) for the "reach background change effect" may be prepared, and the degree of expectation may differ depending on the type. Note that the number of types is not limited to two, and may be three or more. In this case, it is also preferable to provide three or more types (three stages) of expectation.
In addition, two types of facial expressions of the demon character that are displayed as a precursor to the "pre-reach battle effect" (a display of the character enduring the energy bullets) can be prepared, with one type of expression showing the demon character having a relaxed look and the other type showing the demon character having a stressed look, so that the latter type has a higher probability of expecting a jackpot than the former. Note that the number of types is not limited to two, and three or more types may be used. In this case, it is also preferable to have three or more types (three stages) of expectation.
There may be one type of precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "mid-reach background change effect," and multiple types (for example, the two types mentioned above) for the "pre-reach battle effect" (the display of enduring energy bullets). In this case, too, it is preferable to vary the degree of expectation depending on the type of precursor display.
Alternatively, there may be multiple types of precursor displays (background change precursor images) for the "background change effect during reach" (for example, the two types mentioned above), and only one type of precursor display (display of withstanding the energy bullet) for the "pre-reach battle effect."
Alternatively, there may be multiple types of precursor displays (background change precursor images) for the "background change effect during reach" (for example, the two types mentioned above), and multiple types of precursor displays (displays of withstanding energy bullets) for the "pre-reach battle effect" (for example, the two types mentioned above).
When only one display mode of the precursor display is provided, there is no difference in the degree of expectation while the precursor display is being displayed, so a stable sense of expectation can be provided. On the other hand, when multiple display modes are provided, a display with a high degree of expectation is displayed while the precursor display is being displayed, so the sense of expectation can be increased.

In the above embodiment, the precursor display for the "mid-reach background change effect" (background change precursor image) and the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (indication of enduring an energy bullet) are displayed in the same variable display, but the "pre-reach battle effect" may also be executed as a pre-read effect. In this case, the "pre-reach battle effect" is executed in a predetermined variable display, and the "mid-reach background change effect" is executed in the variable display thereafter. When the "pre-reach battle effect" is executed as a pre-read effect, it is advisable to stop and display each variable display in a non-reach miss mode until the predicted reach effect is executed. This can create a sense of anticipation even when a non-reach miss variable pattern is executed.

When the "pre-reach battle effect" is executed as a look-ahead effect, only the precursor display (indicating that the energy bullets are withstanding) may be displayed, or in addition to the precursor display (indicating that the energy bullets are withstanding), a specific display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (indicating that the demon character is unconscious) and a related display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (indicating that the comment "Enemy is injured!") may be displayed. Note that one or both of the specific and related displays may be displayed until the display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the hold that was the subject of the look-ahead effect begins to change (or until the reach effect begins).

In the embodiment shown, the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (indication that the player is withstanding an energy bullet) is displayed, followed by the precursor display for the "mid-reach background change effect" (background change precursor image). However, it is also possible to have the precursor display for the "mid-reach background change effect" (background change precursor image) be displayed without displaying the precursor display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (indication that the player is withstanding an energy bullet). This embodiment can instantly increase the sense of anticipation.

In the embodiment shown, the "mid-reach background change effect" is executed after the "pre-reach battle effect" is executed, but it is also possible to have the "mid-reach background change effect" be executed without executing the "pre-reach battle effect." This embodiment can instantly increase the sense of anticipation.

In one variation, after the premonition display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (indication that the player is withstanding an energy bullet), the probability that the premonition display for the "mid-reach background change effect" (background change premonition image) will be displayed may be made higher than the probability that the premonition display for the "mid-reach background change effect" (background change premonition image) will be displayed without displaying the premonition display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (indication that the player is withstanding an energy bullet). In this embodiment, the premonition display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (indication that the player is withstanding an energy bullet) is displayed appropriately, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

In one variation, the probability that a "mid-reach background change effect" will be executed after a "pre-reach battle effect" has been executed may be higher than the probability that a "mid-reach background change effect" will be executed without executing a "pre-reach battle effect." In this embodiment, the "pre-reach battle effect" will be executed appropriately, preventing a decline in interest.

In one variation, after the premonition display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets) is displayed, the probability of the premonition display for the "mid-reach background change effect" (background change premonition image) being displayed may be lower than the probability of the premonition display for the "mid-reach background change effect" (background change premonition image) being displayed, without displaying the premonition display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets). According to this embodiment, the sense of anticipation can be instantly heightened when the premonition display for the "pre-reach battle effect" (display of withstanding energy bullets) is displayed.

In one variation, the probability that a "mid-reach background change effect" will be executed after a "pre-reach battle effect" has been executed may be lower than the probability that a "mid-reach background change effect" will be executed without executing a "pre-reach battle effect." According to this embodiment, the sense of anticipation can be instantly heightened when a "pre-reach battle effect" is executed.

The expectation level when a premonition display for a "pre-reach battle effect" (indication that the player is withstanding an energy bullet) and then a premonition display for a "mid-reach background change effect" (background change premonition image) is displayed may be higher than the expectation level when a premonition display for a "mid-reach background change effect" (background change premonition image) is displayed without displaying the premonition display for a "pre-reach battle effect" (indication that the player is withstanding an energy bullet). According to this embodiment, the sense of expectation can be increased all at once when the premonition display for a "pre-reach battle effect" (indication that the player is withstanding an energy bullet) is displayed.

The expectation level when a "reach background change effect" is executed after a "reach pre-battle effect" is executed may be higher than the expectation level when a "reach background change effect" is executed without executing a "reach pre-battle effect." According to this embodiment, the sense of expectation can be increased all at once when a "reach pre-battle effect" is executed.

The expectation level when a premonition display for a "pre-reach battle effect" (indication that the player is withstanding an energy bullet) and then a premonition display for a "mid-reach background change effect" (background change premonition image) is displayed may be lower than the expectation level when a premonition display for a "mid-reach background change effect" (background change premonition image) is displayed without displaying the premonition display for a "pre-reach battle effect" (indication that the player is withstanding an energy bullet). In this embodiment, the premonition display for a "pre-reach battle effect" (indication that the player is withstanding an energy bullet) is displayed at an appropriate time, thereby preventing a decrease in interest.

The expectation level when a "reach background change effect" is executed after a "reach pre-battle effect" is executed may be lower than the expectation level when a "reach background change effect" is executed without executing a "reach pre-battle effect." In this embodiment, the "reach pre-battle effect" is executed appropriately, thereby preventing a decrease in interest.

Below, we will explain variations of an embodiment in which a "reach background change effect" is executed after a "reach warning effect due to hold" is executed.

When a precursor display (background change precursor image) for a "reach background change effect" is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated, and instead another background image may be started to be displayed. Similarly, when a precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for a "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated, and instead another background image may be started to be displayed.
By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the scene has switched to an important scene.
Also, when the premonition display of the second hold change effect (the display of the hold image shaking) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated and instead the display of another background image may be started. Alternatively, even when the premonition display of the second hold change effect (the display of the hold image shaking) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be continued.

When the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect" is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated and another background image may be displayed instead. On the other hand, when the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be continued.
The precursor display of the "background change effect during reach," which immediately shows whether or not a jackpot has been won, is more important than the precursor display of the "reach notice effect due to hold," which shows whether or not it will develop into a battle reach, but by switching the background image, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display of the "background change effect during reach," which is more important, is being displayed.
Also, when the premonition display of the second hold change effect (the display of the hold image shaking) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated and instead the display of another background image may be started. Alternatively, even when the premonition display of the second hold change effect (the display of the hold image shaking) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be continued.

When the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect" is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be continued. On the other hand, when the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be ended, and instead another background image may be displayed.
The precursor display for the "background change during reach" is displayed just before it is shown whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which can make the player feel tense, but by continuing to display the same background image without changing it, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.
Also, when the premonition display of the second hold change effect (the display of the hold image shaking) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated and instead the display of another background image may be started. Alternatively, even when the premonition display of the second hold change effect (the display of the hold image shaking) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be continued.

When a precursory display (background change precursory image) for a "reach background change effect" is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be continued. Also, when a precursory display (semi-transparent reach name display) for a "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be continued.
The precursor display for the "background change effect during reach" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been achieved, and the precursor display for the "reach notice effect due to hold" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not it will develop into a battle reach, so each of these situations increases the player's sense of tension, but by preventing the background image from changing before and after the precursor display is displayed, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.
Also, when the premonition display of the second hold change effect (the display of the hold image shaking) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated and instead the display of another background image may be started. Alternatively, even when the premonition display of the second hold change effect (the display of the hold image shaking) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be continued.

When a precursor display (background change precursor image) of "reach background change effect" is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that has been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be lowered or the output of the sound may be interrupted. Similarly, when a precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is displayed, the volume of the sound that has been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be lowered or the output of the sound may be interrupted.
According to such an embodiment, the output mode of the sound that was previously output from the sound generating means is suppressed, making it sound quieter or completely inaudible, making it easier to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.
In addition, when the precursor display for the second hold change effect (the display of the hold image shaking) is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that was being output may be lowered or the sound output may be interrupted, or the sound output may be continued as is without changing the volume of the sound that had been output up until then.

When a precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect" is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that has been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be lowered or the sound output may be interrupted. On the other hand, when a precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is displayed, the volume of the sound that has been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be left unchanged and the output may continue as is.
According to such an embodiment, the output manner of the sound that was previously output from the sound generating means is suppressed, making it sound quieter or completely inaudible, thereby making it easier to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.
The precursor display of the "background change effect during reach" which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been won is more important than the precursor display of the "reach notice effect due to hold" which indicates whether or not it will develop into a battle reach, but by suppressing the sound output from the sound generating means, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display of the "background change effect during reach" which is more important is being displayed.
In addition, when the precursor display for the second hold change effect (the display of the hold image shaking) is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that was being output may be lowered or the output of the sound may be interrupted, or the output of the sound may be continued as is without changing the volume of the sound that had been output up until then.

When a precursory display (background change precursory image) of the "reach background change effect" is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that has been output from the sound generating means up to that point may be left unchanged and continue to be output as is. On the other hand, when a precursory display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is displayed, the volume of the sound that has been output from the sound generating means up to that point may be lowered or the sound output may be interrupted.
The precursor display for the "background change effect during reach" is displayed just before it is shown whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which can make the player feel tense, but by continuing to output the sound that has been output from the sound generating means without changing the volume, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.
In addition, when the precursor display for the second hold change effect (the display of the hold image shaking) is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that was being output may be lowered or the sound output may be interrupted, or the sound output may be continued as is without changing the volume of the sound that had been output up until then.

When a precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect" is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that has been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be left unchanged and continue to be output. Also, when a precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is displayed, the volume of the sound that has been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be left unchanged and continue to be output.
The precursor display for the "background change effect during reach" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been achieved, and the precursor display for the "reach notice effect due to hold" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not the game will develop into a battle reach, so that each of these situations increases the player's sense of tension, but by preventing the volume of the sound that has been output from the sound generating means from changing when the precursor display is displayed, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.
In addition, when the precursor display for the second hold change effect (the display of the hold image shaking) is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that was being output may be lowered or the output of the sound may be interrupted, or the output of the sound may be continued as is without changing the volume of the sound that had been output up until then.

The sound (BGM, etc.) output when the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "background change effect during reach" is displayed may be the same as the sound output when the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is displayed, or it may be a different sound.
The output duration of the sound output when the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect" is displayed may be the same as or different from the output duration of the sound output when the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "hold reach notice effect" is displayed. If the lengths are different, one may be longer than the other, or one may be shorter than the other.

The length of time that the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed and the length of the sound (BGM, etc.) that is output when the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed may be the same or different. If the lengths are different, one may be longer than the other, or one may be shorter than the other.
The length of time that the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the "reach advance notice performance due to hold" is displayed and the output time of the sound that is output when the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the "reach advance notice performance due to hold" is displayed may be the same length or different lengths. If the lengths are different, one may be longer than the other, or one may be shorter than the other.

When a precursor display (background change precursor image) of a "reach background change effect" is displayed, the execution of a light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting unit may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting effect with another light-emitting pattern may be started. Similarly, when a precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of a "reach notice effect due to hold" is displayed, the execution of a light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting unit may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting effect with another light-emitting pattern may be started.
According to this embodiment, it is possible to make it easier for the driver to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.
Furthermore, when a precursor display for the second hold change effect (a display in which the hold image shakes) is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting unit may be terminated, and instead the execution of the light-emitting effect using another light-emitting pattern may be started, or the light-emitting effect currently being executed may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting unit using a predetermined light-emitting pattern.

When the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "background change effect during reach" is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting unit may be terminated, and instead the execution of the light-emitting effect with another light-emitting pattern may be started. On the other hand, when the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach notice effect due to hold" is displayed, the light-emitting effect that is being executed may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern that is being executed using a predetermined light-emitting unit.
The precursor display of the "background change effect during reach," which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been reached, is more important than the precursor display of the "reach notice effect due to hold," which indicates whether or not the game will develop into a battle reach, but by starting a new light-emitting effect executed using a specified light-emitting part, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display of the "background change effect during reach," which is more important, is being displayed.
Furthermore, when a precursor display for the second hold change effect (a display in which the hold image shakes) is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting unit may be terminated, and instead the execution of the light-emitting effect using another light-emitting pattern may be started, or the light-emitting effect currently being executed may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting unit using a predetermined light-emitting pattern.

When a precursor display (background change precursor image) of "reach background change effect" is displayed, the light-emitting effect currently being executed may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern executed using a predetermined light-emitting element. On the other hand, when a precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of "reach notice effect due to hold" is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern executed using a predetermined light-emitting element may be terminated, and instead the execution of a light-emitting effect with another light-emitting pattern may be started.
The precursor display for the "background change effect during reach" is displayed just before it is shown whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which can cause tension in the player, but by continuing the light-emitting effect currently being executed without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern using a predetermined light-emitting element, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.
Furthermore, when a precursor display for the second hold change effect (a display in which the hold image shakes) is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting unit may be terminated, and instead the execution of the light-emitting effect using another light-emitting pattern may be started, or the light-emitting effect currently being executed may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting unit using a predetermined light-emitting pattern.

When a precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "background change effect during reach" is displayed, the light-emitting effect currently being executed may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern executed using a predetermined light-emitting unit. Also, when a precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach notice effect due to hold" is displayed, the light-emitting effect currently being executed may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern executed using a predetermined light-emitting unit.
The precursor display for the "background change effect during reach" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been achieved, and the precursor display for the "reach notice effect due to hold" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not the game will develop into a battle reach, so that each of these situations increases the player's sense of tension, but by preventing the light emission pattern that has been executed up until that point from changing when the precursor display is displayed, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.
Furthermore, when a precursor display for the second hold change effect (a display in which the hold image shakes) is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting unit may be terminated, and instead the execution of the light-emitting effect using another light-emitting pattern may be started, or the light-emitting effect currently being executed may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting unit using a predetermined light-emitting pattern.

When the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect" is displayed, the operation of a predetermined movable decorative member may be started. Similarly, when the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is displayed, the operation of a predetermined movable decorative member may be started.
According to this embodiment, it is possible to make it easier for the driver to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.
In addition, when a precursor display for the second hold change effect (a display in which the hold image fluctuates) is displayed, the operation of a specified movable decorative member may be started, or the operation of the specified movable decorative member may not be started (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained).

When the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect" is displayed, the operation of a predetermined movable decorative member may be started. On the other hand, when the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is displayed, the operation of the predetermined movable decorative member may not be started (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained).
The precursor display of the "background change effect during reach" which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been won is more important than the precursor display of the "reach notice effect due to hold" which indicates whether or not it will develop into a battle reach, but by starting the operation of a specified movable decorative member, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display of the "background change effect during reach" which is more important is being displayed.
In addition, when a precursor display for the second hold change effect (a display in which the hold image fluctuates) is displayed, the operation of a specified movable decorative member may be started, or the operation of the specified movable decorative member may not be started (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained).

When the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect" is displayed, the operation of the predetermined movable decorative member may not be initiated (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained). On the other hand, when the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is displayed, the operation of the predetermined movable decorative member may be initiated.
The precursor display for the "background change during reach" is displayed just before it is revealed whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which can create tension for the player, but by not starting the operation of the specified movable decorative member (maintaining the state before the precursor display was displayed), the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.
In addition, when a precursor display for the second hold change effect (a display in which the hold image fluctuates) is displayed, the operation of a specified movable decorative member may be started, or the operation of the specified movable decorative member may not be started (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained).

When the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect" is displayed, the operation of the predetermined movable decorative member may not be initiated (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained). Also, when the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is displayed, the operation of the predetermined movable decorative member may not be initiated (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained).
The precursor display for the "background change during reach" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and the precursor display for the "reach notice due to hold" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not it will develop into a battle reach, so each of these situations increases the player's sense of tension, but by not starting the operation of a specified movable decorative member when the precursor display is displayed (maintaining the state before the precursor display was displayed), the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.
In addition, when a precursor display for the second hold change effect (a display in which the hold image fluctuates) is displayed, the operation of a specified movable decorative member may be started, or the operation of the specified movable decorative member may not be started (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained).

It is also possible to provide cases where, while the movable decorative element is in operation, a premonition display such as a "background change effect during reach" or a "reach warning effect due to hold" begins to be displayed. In this case, it is recommended that the operation of the movable decorative element be set to "maintain the state (operation pattern) that existed before the premonition display was displayed," as described above.

The length of time that the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "background change effect during reach" is displayed may be the same as the length of time that the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the "reach preview effect due to hold" is displayed.
Since it is possible to experience in advance the change in the display content as the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the "reach preview effect due to hold" switches to the result display for the "reach preview effect due to hold", it is possible to moderately reduce the tension felt when the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed (the tension of wondering when the precursor display for the "reach background change effect" will end).
In addition, the length of time for which the premonition display of the second hold change effect (the display in which the hold image shakes) is displayed may be the same as the length of time for which the premonition display of the "reach background change effect" (the background change premonition image) is displayed, or may be different. If they are different, one may be longer than the other, or one may be shorter than the other.

Alternatively, the time for which the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed may be longer than the time for which the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the "reach preview effect due to hold" is displayed.
While the "reach notice effect due to hold" is an effect that indicates whether or not it will develop into a reach effect, the "reach background change effect" is an effect that indicates whether or not it will be a jackpot, and the latter is more important as an effect. Therefore, by relatively shortening the time that the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach notice effect due to hold" is displayed, it is possible to prevent the player's expectations for a jackpot from being excessively aroused.
Alternatively, the time for which the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed may be shorter than the time for which the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the "reach preview effect due to hold" is displayed.
The display of the precursor display for the "reach background change effect" is performed after the display of the precursor display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold." In addition, after the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed, a display in which the background image changes is always performed. This causes the player to feel tense for a long period of time, but by relatively shortening the time for which the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed, it is possible to make the player aware that the background image will change, while preventing the player from becoming overly excited about a jackpot.
In addition, the length of time for which the premonition display of the second hold change effect (the display in which the hold image shakes) is displayed may be the same as the length of time for which the premonition display of the "reach background change effect" (the background change premonition image) is displayed, or may be different. If they are different, one may be longer than the other, or one may be shorter than the other.
In addition, the length of time for which the precursor display of the second hold change effect (a display in which the hold image fluctuates) is displayed may be the same as the length of time for which the precursor display of the "hold reach notice effect" (a semi-transparent reach name display) is displayed, or may be different. If they are different, one may be longer than the other, or one may be shorter than the other.

When the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change presentation" is displayed, a predetermined expected presentation different from the hold change presentation (including the "reach advance notice presentation due to hold") may be executed with a predetermined probability. As the predetermined expected presentation, for example, a presentation mode such as displaying a predetermined character in the display area 1600a can be adopted. By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to increase the sense of anticipation while the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change presentation" is displayed. Note that the display mode of the standby hold image or the current hold image does not change due to the predetermined expected presentation.
In addition, a precursor display of the second hold change effect (a display in which the hold image shakes) may be displayed during the execution of a specified expected effect, or may not be displayed.

The following relationship patterns may be adopted for the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect."
For example, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect'' may be performed in the following order: start of the specified expected effect, start of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' end of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' and end of the specified expected effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect'' may be performed in the following order: start of the specified expected effect, start of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' end of the specified expected effect, and end of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect.''
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect'' may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' start of the specified expected effect, end of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' and end of the specified expected effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect'' may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' start of the specified expected effect, end of the specified expected effect, and end of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect.''
In addition, the display period of the precursor display for the second hold change effect (display in which the hold image shakes) may be set to start either before the start of the effect or display in these patterns, while the effect or display is being executed, or after the effect or display has ended, and to end at any other time.

When the "background change effect during reach" precursor display (background change precursor image) is displayed, the specified expected effect may not be executed.

When the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is displayed, a predetermined expectation effect different from the hold change effect may be executed with a predetermined probability. As the predetermined expectation effect, for example, a presentation mode such as displaying a predetermined character in the display area 1600a can be adopted. By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation while the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is displayed. Note that the display mode of the standby hold image or the current hold image does not change due to the predetermined expectation effect.
In addition, a precursor display of the second hold change effect (a display in which the hold image shakes) may be displayed during the execution of a specified expected effect, or may not be displayed.

Regarding the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach preview effect due to hold," the following relationship pattern may be adopted.
For example, the execution of the specified expected performance and the display of the precursor display for the "reach preview performance due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display) may be performed in the following order: start of the specified expected performance, start of display of the precursor display for the "reach preview performance due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display), end of display of the precursor display for the "reach preview performance due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display), and end of the specified expected performance.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected performance and the display of the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the ``reach preview performance due to hold'' may be performed in the following order: start of the specified expected performance, start of display of the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the ``reach preview performance due to hold,'' end of the specified expected performance, and end of display of the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the ``reach preview performance due to hold.''
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected performance and the display of the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the ``hold reach preview performance'' may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the ``hold reach preview performance,'' start of the specified expected performance, end of display of the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the ``hold reach preview performance,'' and end of the specified expected performance.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected performance and the display of the precursor display for the "reach preview performance due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the "reach preview performance due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display), start of the specified expected performance, end of the specified expected performance, and end of display of the precursor display for the "reach preview performance due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display).
In addition, the display period of the precursor display for the second hold change effect (display in which the hold image shakes) may be set to start either before the start of the effect or display in these patterns, while the effect or display is being executed, or after the effect or display has ended, and to end at any other time.

When the "reach preview effect due to hold" warning display (semi-transparent reach name display) is displayed, the specified expected effect may not be executed.

The specified expected effects can be, for example, effects that prompt the player to operate the operating means, or effects that do not prompt the player to operate the operating means (such as comment preview effects, step-up preview effects, and premium effects that confirm a jackpot).

Four patterns are shown for the relationship between the execution period of a predetermined expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect."
In addition, four patterns are shown for the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the ``reach preview effect due to hold.''
Although all of these can be executed independently, an embodiment may be formed by appropriately combining a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect'' and a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the ``reach preview effect due to hold.''
In addition, the display period of the precursor display for the second hold change effect (display of the hold image shaking) may also be appropriately combined with these patterns to form an embodiment.

Although multiple types of predetermined expected effects are shown, different patterns may be adopted depending on the type of predetermined expected effect. For example, one of four patterns may be adopted when executing one expected effect, either an effect that prompts the player to operate the operation means or an effect that does not prompt the player to operate the operation means (such as a comment preview effect, a step-up preview effect, or a premium effect that confirms a jackpot), and another of the four patterns may be adopted when executing another expected effect. For example, in the case of a comment preview performance, the execution of a predetermined expected performance and the display of a premonition display for the "hold reach preview performance" (semi-transparent reach name display) are displayed in the following order: start of the comment preview performance, start of display of the premonition display for the "hold reach preview performance" (semi-transparent reach name display), end of display of the premonition display for the "hold reach preview performance" (semi-transparent reach name display), end of the comment preview performance; in the case of a step-up preview performance, the execution of a predetermined expected performance and the display of a premonition display for the "hold reach preview performance" (semi-transparent reach name display) are displayed in the following order: start of the comment preview performance, start of the step-up preview performance, end of display of the premonition display for the "hold reach preview performance" (semi-transparent reach name display), end of the step-up preview performance.

The display priority of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "background change during reach" and the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the "reach notice effect due to hold" may be higher or lower than the display priority of the images displayed in the specified expectation effect (for example, operation unit simulation image, comment image, step-up image, premium image, etc.).
In addition, the display priority of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "background change effect during reach" may be set higher than the display priority of the image displayed in the specified expected effect, and the display priority of the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the "reach notice effect due to hold" may be set lower than the display priority of the image displayed in the specified expected effect.
Alternatively, the display priority of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "background change effect during reach" may be lower than the display priority of the image displayed in the specified expected effect, and the display priority of the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the "reach notice effect due to hold" may be higher than the display priority of the image displayed in the specified expected effect.
In addition, the display priority of the precursor display of the second hold change effect (display in which the hold image shakes) may be higher or lower than the display priority of these precursor displays or images displayed in the specified expected effects.

The display of a precursory display for the "background change effect during reach" (background change precursory image) or a precursory display for the "reach preview effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display) may be repeated.
For example, the size of the background change precursor image displayed in the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect" may be increased or decreased multiple times. Alternatively, the transparency of the reach name displayed semi-transparently in the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" may be periodically increased or decreased within a predetermined transparency range (for example, a range of 30% to 70%). By adopting such a display mode, it is possible to reduce capacity and alleviate the sense of tension caused by the precursor display.
On the other hand, the display of the precursor display for the "background change effect during reach" (background change precursor image) and the precursor display for the "reach preview effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display) may not be displayed repeatedly.
For example, the size of the background change precursor image displayed in the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect" may be gradually increased but not decreased. Also, the transparency of the reach name displayed semi-transparently may be gradually decreased (for example, gradually changing from 70% to 30%). By adopting such a display mode, the image quality is improved and the player can be excited.
In addition, the display of the precursor to the second hold change effect (the display of the hold image shaking) may or may not be repeated.

The display of the precursor to the "background change effect during reach" (background change precursor image) may be repeated, and the display of the precursor to the "reach preview effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display) may not be repeated.
Alternatively, the display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "background change effect during reach" may not be repeated, and the display of the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the "reach preview effect due to hold" may be repeated.
Alternatively, it is possible to prevent both the display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "background change effect during reach" and the display of the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the "reach preview effect due to hold" from being repeated.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the display of a precursory display (background change precursory image) for a "reach background change effect" or a precursory display (semi-transparent reach name display) for a "reach advance effect due to hold" may be repeatedly displayed, it is also possible to make a light-emitting means such as a light-emitting decorative member emit light in a predetermined manner, or to output sound in a predetermined manner from a sound generating means in response to the display of the precursory display.
In this case, the light or sound output mode may be repeated in accordance with the repetition of the display of the predictive display. Alternatively, the light or sound may be output in a predetermined pattern throughout the entire display period of the predictive display without being associated with the repetition of the display of the predictive display (i.e., without repeatedly outputting the light or sound). Furthermore, if the display of the predictive display is not repeated, the light or sound may also be output in a predetermined pattern throughout the entire display period of the predictive display without being repeatedly output.
In addition, when displaying the precursory display of the second hold change effect (the display in which the hold image shakes), any of these light and sound output modes can be appropriately adopted.

An embodiment has been shown in which there is only one type of precursor display for the "background change effect during reach" (background change precursor image) and one type of precursor display for the "reach preview effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display), but either one or both may be of multiple types.
For example, two types of precursor displays (background change precursor images) for the "reach background change effect" may be prepared, and the degree of expectation may differ depending on the type. Note that the number of types is not limited to two, and may be three or more. In this case, it is also preferable to provide three or more types (three stages) of expectation.
Furthermore, as a precursor display for the "reach preview effect due to hold," a precursor display with different sizes of characters indicating the reach name may be displayed, with the larger the character size, the higher the expectation. In this case, the character size may be in two stages, or in three or more stages. In this case, it is also preferable to vary the expectation depending on the type of precursor display. Not limited to the character size, a precursor display with a predetermined effect and a precursor display without a predetermined effect may also be used. For the predetermined effect, multiple stages of different sizes may be provided, with the expectation increasing in order of no predetermined effect, a small effect being displayed, and a large effect being displayed.
There may be one type of precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "background change effect during reach," and multiple types of precursor displays (semi-transparent reach name display) for the "reach preview effect due to hold" (for example, the two types mentioned above).
Alternatively, there may be multiple types of precursor displays (background change precursor images) for the "background change effect during reach" (for example, the two types mentioned above), and only one type of precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) for the "reach preview effect due to hold."
Alternatively, there may be multiple types of precursor displays (background change precursor images) for the "background change effect during reach" (for example, the two types mentioned above), and multiple types of precursor displays (semi-transparent reach name display) for the "reach preview effect due to hold" (for example, the two types mentioned above).
When only one display mode of the precursor display is provided, there is no difference in the degree of expectation while the precursor display is being displayed, so a stable sense of expectation can be provided. On the other hand, when multiple display modes are provided, a display with a high degree of expectation is displayed while the precursor display is being displayed, so the sense of expectation can be increased.
In addition, the type of precursor display (the display of the reserved image shaking) of the second reserved change effect may be one or multiple (two or more types). In the case of multiple types, the size of the sword or the way the reserved image shakes may be different. In this case, the larger the sword or the more the reserved image shakes, the higher the probability that the reserved image will change, or the higher the probability that the reserved image will change to a reserved image with a high expectation may be.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the precursor display for the "background change effect during reach" (background change precursor image) and the precursor display for the "reach preview effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display) are displayed in the same single variable display, the "reach preview effect due to hold" may also be executed as a look-ahead effect. In this case, the "reach preview effect due to hold" is executed in a predetermined variable display, and the "reach background change effect" is executed in a subsequent variable display. Note that when the "reach preview effect due to hold" is executed as a look-ahead effect, it is advisable to stop and display each variable display in a non-reach miss mode until the predicted reach effect is executed. This can create a sense of anticipation even when a variable pattern that is not a reach miss is executed.
In addition, the precursor display of the second hold change effect (a display in which the hold image shakes) and the precursor display of the "background change effect during reach" (background change precursor image) may be displayed in the same single variable display, or the second hold change effect may be executed as a pre-reading effect.

When the "reach preview effect due to hold" is executed as a pre-reading effect, there may be cases where the hold change fails and only the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) is displayed, or there may be cases where the hold change is successful and the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) as well as the waiting hold image after the change are displayed.
In addition, the display of the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) in the "reach preview effect due to hold" may be executed as a pre-reading effect, and after the variable display corresponding to the hold that is the subject of the pre-reading effect has begun, it may be indicated whether or not the reach effect indicated by the precursor display will be executed.

In the embodiment shown, the precursor display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display) is displayed, followed by the precursor display for the "background change effect during reach" (background change precursor image), but it is also possible to have the precursor display for the "reach advance notice effect" (background change precursor image) be displayed without displaying the precursor display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display). According to such an embodiment, the sense of anticipation can be increased all at once.
In addition, it may be possible for a precursor display of the second hold change effect (a display in which the hold image shakes) to be displayed in some cases and not in others.

Although the embodiment in which the "reach background change effect" is executed after the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is executed has been shown, it is also possible to have the "reach background change effect" be executed without executing the "reach advance notice effect due to hold". According to such an embodiment, it is possible to instantly increase the sense of expectation.
In addition, the second hold change effect may or may not be executed.

In one variation, after the indication of a "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name indication), the probability that an indication of a "background change effect during reach" (background change indication image) will be displayed may be made higher than the probability that an indication of a "background change effect during reach" (background change indication image) will be displayed without displaying an indication of a "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name indication). According to such an embodiment, the indication of a "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name indication) is displayed appropriately, thereby preventing a decline in interest.
Furthermore, in one fluctuation, the probability that after the premonition display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display), the premonition display for the "background change effect during reach" (background change premonition image) and the premonition display for the second hold change effect (display of the hold image shaking) are displayed may be higher than the probability that the premonition display for the "background change effect during reach" (background change premonition image) and the premonition display for the second hold change effect (display of the hold image shaking) are displayed without displaying the premonition display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display).

In one variation, the probability that a "reach background change effect" is executed after a "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is executed may be set higher than the probability that a "reach background change effect" is executed without executing a "reach advance notice effect due to hold". According to such an embodiment, the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is executed appropriately, thereby preventing a decline in interest.
Furthermore, in one fluctuation, the probability that a "reach background change effect" is executed after a "reach notice effect due to hold" is executed and a second hold change effect is executed may be higher than the probability that a "reach background change effect" is executed and a second hold change effect is executed without executing a "reach notice effect due to hold".

In one variation, after the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is displayed, the probability that the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect" will be displayed may be lower than the probability that the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect" will be displayed, without displaying the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach advance notice effect due to hold." According to such an embodiment, the sense of anticipation can be instantly heightened when the precursor display (semi-transparent reach name display) of the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is displayed.
Furthermore, in one fluctuation, the probability that after the premonition display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display), the premonition display for the "background change effect during reach" (background change premonition image) and the premonition display for the second hold change effect (display of the hold image shaking) are displayed may be lower than the probability that the premonition display for the "background change effect during reach" (background change premonition image) and the premonition display for the second hold change effect (display of the hold image shaking) are displayed without displaying the premonition display for the "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display).

In one variation, the probability that a "reach background change effect" is executed after a "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is executed may be lower than the probability that a "reach background change effect" is executed without executing a "reach advance notice effect due to hold." According to such an embodiment, it is possible to instantly increase the sense of expectation when a "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is executed.
Furthermore, in one fluctuation, the probability that a "reach background change effect" is executed after a "reach notice effect due to hold" is executed and a second hold change effect is executed may be lower than the probability that a "reach background change effect" is executed and a second hold change effect is executed without executing a "reach notice effect due to hold".

The expectation level when a premonition display (semi-transparent reach name display) for a "reach advance notice effect due to hold) is displayed followed by a premonition display (background change premonition image) for a "reach background change effect" may be made higher than the expectation level when a premonition display (background change premonition image) for a "reach background change effect" is displayed without displaying a premonition display (semi-transparent reach name display) for a "reach advance notice effect due to hold." According to this embodiment, the sense of expectation can be increased all at once when the premonition display (semi-transparent reach name display) for a "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is displayed.
Furthermore, in one fluctuation, if a precursor display for a "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display) is displayed, followed by a precursor display for a "background change effect during reach" (background change precursor image) and a precursor display for a second hold change effect (display of a shaking hold image), the expectation level may be higher than the expectation level when a precursor display for a "background change effect during reach" (background change precursor image) and a precursor display for a second hold change effect (display of a shaking hold image) are displayed without displaying a precursor display for a "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display).

The expectation level when a "reach background change effect" is executed after a "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is executed may be set higher than the expectation level when a "reach background change effect" is executed without executing a "reach advance notice effect due to hold". According to such an embodiment, the expectation level can be increased all at once when a "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is executed.
Furthermore, in one fluctuation, the expectation level when a "reach background change effect" is executed after a "reach notification effect due to hold" and a second hold change effect is executed may be higher than the expectation level when a "reach background change effect" is executed and a second hold change effect is executed without executing a "reach notification effect due to hold".

The degree of expectation when a premonition display (semi-transparent reach name display) for a "reach advance notice effect due to hold) is displayed followed by a premonition display (background change premonition image) for a "reach background change effect" may be lowered than the degree of expectation when a premonition display (background change premonition image) for a "reach background change effect" is displayed without displaying a premonition display (semi-transparent reach name display) for a "reach advance notice effect due to hold." According to such an embodiment, a drop in interest can be suppressed by appropriately displaying a premonition display (semi-transparent reach name display) for a "reach advance notice effect due to hold."
Furthermore, in one fluctuation, if a precursor display for a "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display) is displayed, followed by a precursor display for a "background change effect during reach" (background change precursor image) and a precursor display for a second hold change effect (display of a shaking hold image), the expectation level may be lower than the expectation level when a precursor display for a "background change effect during reach" (background change precursor image) is displayed without displaying a precursor display for a "reach advance notice effect due to hold" (semi-transparent reach name display) and a precursor display for a second hold change effect (display of a shaking hold image).

The degree of expectation when a "reach background change effect" is executed after a "reach advance notice effect due to hold" is executed may be lower than the degree of expectation when a "reach background change effect" is executed without executing a "reach advance notice effect due to hold". According to such an embodiment, a decrease in interest can be suppressed by appropriately executing a "reach advance notice effect due to hold".
Furthermore, in one fluctuation, the expectation level when a "reach background change effect" is executed after a "reach notification effect due to hold" and a second hold change effect is executed may be lower than the expectation level when a "reach background change effect" is executed and a second hold change effect is executed without executing a "reach notification effect due to hold".

Below, we will explain variations of an embodiment in which a "reach background change effect" is executed after a "reach symbol promotion effect" is executed.

When a precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated, and instead another background image may be started to be displayed. Similarly, when a precursor display for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated, and instead another background image may be started to be displayed.
By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the scene has switched to an important scene.

When a precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect" is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated and another background image may be displayed instead. On the other hand, when a precursor display of the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be continued.
The precursor display of the "background change effect during reach," which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been won, is more important than the precursor display of the "reach pattern promotion effect," which indicates whether or not it will develop into a battle reach, but by switching the background image, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display of the "background change effect during reach," which is more important, is being displayed.

When a precursory display (background change precursory image) of the "reach background change effect" is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up to that point may be continued. On the other hand, when a precursory display of the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up to that point may be ended, and instead, the display of another background image may be started.
The precursor display for the "background change during reach" is displayed just before it is shown whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which can make the player feel tense, but by continuing to display the same background image without changing it, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When a precursory display (background change precursory image) of the "reach background change effect" is displayed, the display of the background image that has been displayed up until then may be continued. Also, when a precursory display (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) of the "reach symbol upgrade effect" is displayed, the display of the background image that has been displayed up until then may be continued.
The precursor display for the "background change effect during reach" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and the precursor display for the "reach pattern upgrade effect" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not it will develop into a battle reach, so each of these situations increases the player's sense of tension, but by preventing the background image from changing before and after the precursor display is displayed, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When a precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect" is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that has been output from the sound generating means up to that point may be lowered or the output of the sound may be interrupted. Similarly, when a precursor display (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) of the "reach symbol upgrade effect" is displayed, the volume of the sound that has been output from the sound generating means up to that point may be lowered or the output of the sound may be interrupted.
According to such an embodiment, the output manner of the sound that was previously output from the sound generating means is suppressed, making it sound quieter or completely inaudible, thereby making it easier to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.

When a precursory display (background change precursory image) of the "reach background change effect" is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that has been output from the sound generating means up to that point may be lowered or the output of the sound may be interrupted. On the other hand, when a precursory display of the "reach symbol upgrade effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, the volume of the sound that has been output from the sound generating means up to that point may be left unchanged and the output may continue as is.
According to such an embodiment, the output mode of the sound that was previously output from the sound generating means is suppressed, making it sound quieter or completely inaudible, making it easier to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.
The precursor display of the "background change effect during reach" which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been won is more important than the precursor display of the "reach pattern upgrade effect" which indicates whether or not it will develop into a battle reach, but by suppressing the sound output from the sound generating means, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display of the "background change effect during reach" which is more important is being displayed.

When a precursory display (background change precursory image) of the "reach background change effect" is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that has been output from the sound generating means up to that point may be made to continue to be output as is without being changed. On the other hand, when a precursory display of the "reach symbol upgrade effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, the volume of the sound that has been output from the sound generating means up to that point may be made to decrease, or the sound output may be interrupted.
The precursor display for the "background change effect during reach" is displayed just before it is shown whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which can make the player feel tense, but by continuing to output the sound that has been output from the sound generating means without changing the volume, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When a precursory display (background change precursory image) of the "reach background change effect" is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that has been output from the sound generating means up to that point may be left unchanged and continue to be output. Also, when a precursory display of the "reach symbol upgrade effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, the volume of the sound that has been output from the sound generating means up to that point may be left unchanged and continue to be output.
The precursor display for the "background change effect during reach" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and the precursor display for the "reach pattern upgrade effect" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not it will develop into a battle reach, so that each of these situations increases the player's sense of tension, but by preventing the volume of the sound that has been output from the sound generating means from changing when the precursor display is displayed, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

The sound (BGM, etc.) output when the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect" is displayed may be the same as the sound output when the precursor display of the "reach pattern upgrade effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, or it may be a different sound.
The output duration of the sound output when the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect" is displayed may be the same as or different from the output duration of the sound output when the precursor display of the "reach symbol upgrade effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed. If the lengths are different, one may be longer than the other, or one may be shorter than the other.

The length of time that the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed and the length of the sound (BGM, etc.) that is output when the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed may be the same or different. If the lengths are different, one may be longer than the other, or one may be shorter than the other.
The length of time that the precursor display for the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change) is displayed and the output time of the sound that is output when the precursor display for the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change) is displayed may be the same length or different lengths. If the lengths are different, one may be longer than the other, or one may be shorter than the other.

When a precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect" is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting element may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting effect with another light-emitting pattern may be started. Similarly, when a precursor display of the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting element may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting effect with another light-emitting pattern may be started.
According to this embodiment, it is possible to make it easier for the driver to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.

When a precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect" is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting element may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting effect with another light-emitting pattern may be started. On the other hand, when a precursor display of the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, the light-emitting effect that is being executed may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting element.
The precursor display of the "background change effect during reach," which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been reached, is more important than the precursor display of the "reach pattern promotion effect," which indicates whether or not the game will develop into a battle reach. However, by starting a new light-emitting effect executed using a specified light-emitting section, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display of the "background change effect during reach," which is more important, is being displayed.

When a precursory display (background change precursory image) of the "reach background change effect" is displayed, the light-emitting effect currently being executed may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect with the predetermined light-emitting pattern executed using the predetermined light-emitting element. On the other hand, when a precursory display of the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect with the predetermined light-emitting pattern executed using the predetermined light-emitting element may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting effect with another light-emitting pattern may be started.
The precursor display for the "background change effect during reach" is displayed just before it is shown whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which can cause tension in the player, but by continuing the light-emitting effect currently being executed without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern using a predetermined light-emitting element, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When a precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect" is displayed, the currently executing light-emitting effect may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern executed using a predetermined light-emitting element. Also, when a precursor display of the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, the currently executing light-emitting effect may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern executed using a predetermined light-emitting element.
The precursor display for the "background change effect during reach" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and the precursor display for the "reach pattern upgrade effect" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not it will develop into a battle reach, so each of these situations increases the player's sense of tension, but by preventing the light emission pattern that had been executed up until that point from changing when the precursor display is displayed, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

The operation of a predetermined movable decorative member may be started when a precursory display (background change precursory image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed. Similarly, the operation of a predetermined movable decorative member may be started when a precursory display for the "reach symbol upgrade effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed.
According to this embodiment, it is possible to make it easier for the driver to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.

When a precursory display (background change precursory image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed, the operation of a predetermined movable decorative member may be started. On the other hand, when a precursory display for the "reach symbol upgrade effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, the operation of the predetermined movable decorative member may not be started (the state before the precursory display was displayed is maintained).
The precursor display of the "background change effect during reach," which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been reached, is more important than the precursor display of the "reach pattern upgrade effect," which indicates whether or not the effect will develop into a battle reach, but by starting the operation of a specified movable decorative member, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display of the "background change effect during reach," which is more important, is being displayed.

When the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect" is displayed, the operation of the predetermined movable decorative member may not be initiated (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained). On the other hand, when the precursor display of the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, the operation of the predetermined movable decorative member may be initiated.
The precursor display for the "background change during reach" is displayed just before it is revealed whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which can create tension for the player, but by not starting the operation of the specified movable decorative member (maintaining the state before the precursor display was displayed), the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When a precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed, the operation of the predetermined movable decorative member may not be initiated (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained). Also, when a precursor display for the "reach symbol upgrade effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, the operation of the predetermined movable decorative member may not be initiated (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained).
The precursor display for the "background change during reach" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and the precursor display for the "reach pattern upgrade" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not the game will develop into a battle reach, so each of these situations increases the player's sense of tension, but by not starting the operation of a specified movable decorative member when the precursor display is displayed (maintaining the state it was in before the precursor display was displayed), the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

It is also possible to provide a situation where a precursor display for a "background change during reach" or "reach pattern upgrade" begins to be displayed while the movable decorative element is in operation. In this case, it is recommended that the operation of the movable decorative element be set to "maintain the state (operation pattern) before the precursor display was displayed," as described above.

The length of time that the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed may be the same as the length of time that the precursor display for the "reach pattern upgrade effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change) is displayed.
Since it is possible to experience in advance the change in the display content, that is, the precursor display for the "reach pattern upgrade effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) switches to the specific display for the "reach pattern upgrade effect" (a display in which the color of the sixth meter image has changed and a reward has been obtained), the tension felt when the precursor display for the "reach background change effect" (background change precursor image) is displayed (the tension of wondering when the precursor display for the "reach background change effect" will end) can be moderately alleviated.

Alternatively, the time for which the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed may be longer than the time for which the precursor display for the "reach pattern upgrade effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed.
While the "reach symbol promotion effect" is an effect that indicates whether or not the game will develop into a reach effect, the "reach background change effect" is an effect that indicates whether or not a jackpot will be reached, and the latter is more important as an effect. Therefore, by relatively shortening the time for which the "reach symbol promotion effect" precursor display (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, it is possible to prevent the player's expectations for a jackpot from being excessively aroused.
Alternatively, the time for which the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed may be shorter than the time for which the precursor display for the "reach pattern upgrade effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed.
The display of the precursor display for the "reach background change effect" is performed after the display of the precursor display for the "reach symbol upgrade effect." In addition, after the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed, the background image is always displayed. This causes the player to feel tense for a long period of time, but by relatively shortening the time for which the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed, it is possible to make the player aware that the background image will change, while preventing the player from becoming overly excited about a jackpot.

When the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect" is displayed, only the current hold image is displayed without displaying the standby hold image, and when the precursor display (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) of the "reach pattern promotion effect" is displayed, both the standby hold image and the current hold image may be displayed.
When the precursor display (background change precursor image) of "reach background change performance" is displayed, the reserve change performance in which the current reserved image may be promoted with a predetermined probability may be executed with a predetermined probability. By adopting such an embodiment, the reserve change performance can be enjoyed while the precursor display (background change precursor image) of "reach background change performance" is displayed.

Regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the ``reach background change effect,'' the following relationship pattern may be adopted.
For example, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect'' may be performed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' end of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' and end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect'' may be performed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' end of the hold change effect, and end of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect.''
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect'' may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' start of the hold change effect, end of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' and end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect'' may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' start of the hold change effect, end of the hold change effect, and end of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect.''

On the other hand, when a precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed, the hold change effect that changes the current hold image may not be executed.
According to such an embodiment, the player can be made to focus on the background image that is displayed after the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect" is displayed.

When the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect" is displayed, only the current hold image is displayed without displaying the standby hold image, and when the precursor display (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) of the "reach pattern promotion effect" is displayed, both the standby hold image and the current hold image may be displayed.
When the precursor display of the "reach symbol promotion effect" (the display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, the reserve change effect in which the current reserved image may be promoted with a predetermined probability may be executed with a predetermined probability. By adopting such an embodiment, the reserve change effect can be enjoyed while the precursor display of the "reach symbol promotion effect" (the display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed.

Regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display of the ``reach pattern promotion effect'' (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), the following relationship pattern may be adopted.
For example, the hold change effect may be executed and the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be displayed in the following order: start of the hold change effect; start of the display of the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed); end of the display of the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed); and end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the hold change effect may be executed and the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be displayed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed).
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be performed in the following order: the start of the display of the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), the start of the hold change effect, the end of the display of the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), and the end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be performed in the following order: the start of the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), the start of the hold change effect, the end of the hold change effect, and the end of the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed).

On the other hand, when a precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, the hold change effect that changes the current hold image may not be executed.
According to this embodiment, the player can focus on the specific display of the "Reach pattern promotion effect" (the display in which the color of the sixth meter image changes and a reward is won) that appears after the display of the precursor display of the "Reach pattern promotion effect" (the display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change).

When the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect" is displayed, only the current hold image is displayed without displaying the standby hold image, and when the precursor display (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) of the "reach pattern promotion effect" is displayed, both the standby hold image and the current hold image may be displayed.
When the precursor display of the "reach symbol promotion effect" (the display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, a hold change effect in which the standby hold image may be promoted with a predetermined probability may be executed with a predetermined probability. By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to enjoy the hold change effect while the precursor display of the "reach symbol promotion effect" (the display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed.

Regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the standby hold image and the display period of the precursor display of the ``reach pattern promotion effect'' (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), the following relationship pattern may be adopted.
For example, the hold change effect may be executed and the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be displayed in the following order: start of the hold change effect; start of the display of the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed); end of the display of the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed); and end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the hold change effect may be executed and the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be displayed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed).
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be performed in the following order: the start of the display of the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), the start of the hold change effect, the end of the display of the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), and the end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be performed in the following order: the start of the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), the start of the hold change effect, the end of the hold change effect, and the end of the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed).

On the other hand, when a precursory display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, the hold change effect that changes the standby hold image may not be executed.
According to this embodiment, the player can focus on the specific display of the "Reach pattern promotion effect" (the display in which the color of the sixth meter image changes and a reward is won) that appears after the display of the precursor display of the "Reach pattern promotion effect" (the display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change).

Four patterns are shown regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the ``reach background change effect.''
In addition, four patterns are shown regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display of the ``reach pattern promotion effect'' (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed).
In addition, four patterns are shown regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the standby hold image and the display period of the precursor display of the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed).
Although all of these can be executed independently, an embodiment may be formed by appropriately combining a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display for the ``reach pattern promotion effect'' (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), and a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the standby hold image and the display period of the precursor display for the ``reach pattern promotion effect'' (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed).

Multiple types of hold change effects may be provided, and different patterns may be used depending on the type of hold change effect. For example, different patterns may be used for hold change effects that hide holds with smoke and hold change effects that hide holds with swords. For example, in the case of a hold change effect that hides holds with smoke, the effects are executed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of the premonition display for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), end of the premonition display for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), end of the hold change effect. In the case of a hold change effect that hides holds with swords, the effects are executed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of the premonition display for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), end of the hold change effect, end of the hold change effect, end of the premonition display for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed).

The display priority of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "background change during reach" effect and the precursor display for the "reach pattern upgrade" effect (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be higher or lower than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change effect (for example, an image that approaches the current hold image or the standby hold image and displays something that creates an impact on the current hold image or the standby hold image).
In addition, the display priority of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "background change effect during reach" may be set higher than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change effect, and the display priority of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be set lower than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the display priority of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" may be lower than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change effect, and the display priority of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be higher than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change effect.

When the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed, a predetermined expectation effect (an expectation effect that raises the expectation of a win, hereafter referred to as the "predetermined expectation effect") different from the hold change effect may be executed with a predetermined probability. The predetermined expectation effect may, for example, be a presentation format such as displaying a predetermined character in display area 1600a. By using such an embodiment, the sense of anticipation can be increased while the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed. The display format of the standby hold image or current hold image will not change due to the predetermined expectation effect.

The following relationship patterns may be adopted for the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect."
For example, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect'' may be performed in the following order: start of the specified expected effect, start of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' end of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' and end of the specified expected effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect'' may be performed in the following order: start of the specified expected effect, start of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' end of the specified expected effect, and end of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect.''
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect'' may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' start of the specified expected effect, end of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' and end of the specified expected effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect'' may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' start of the specified expected effect, end of the specified expected effect, and end of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect.''

When the "background change effect during reach" precursor display (background change precursor image) is displayed, the specified expected effect may not be executed.

When the precursor display for the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, a predetermined expected effect different from the hold change effect may be executed with a predetermined probability. The predetermined expected effect may, for example, be an effect such as displaying a predetermined character in display area 1600a. By using such an embodiment, it is possible to increase the sense of anticipation while the precursor display for the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed. Note that the display mode of the waiting hold image or current hold image does not change due to the predetermined expected effect.

Regarding the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display of the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), the following relationship pattern may be adopted.
For example, the execution of the specified expected performance and the display of the precursor to the "reach pattern promotion performance" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be performed in the following order: the start of the specified expected performance; the start of the display of the precursor to the "reach pattern promotion performance" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed); the end of the display of the precursor to the "reach pattern promotion performance" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed); and the end of the specified expected performance.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be performed in the following order: the start of the specified expected effect, the start of the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), the end of the specified expected effect, and the end of the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed).
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be performed in the following order: the start of the display of the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), the start of the specified expected effect, the end of the display of the premonition display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), and the end of the specified expected effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be performed in the following order: the start of the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), the start of the specified expected effect, the end of the specified expected effect, and the end of the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed).

When a precursory display for the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, the specified expected effect may not be executed.

The specified expected effects can be, for example, effects that prompt the player to operate the operating means, or effects that do not prompt the player to operate the operating means (such as comment preview effects, step-up preview effects, and premium effects that confirm a jackpot).

Four patterns are shown for the relationship between the execution period of a predetermined expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect."
In addition, four patterns are shown regarding the relationship between the execution period of a predetermined expected effect and the display period of the precursor display of the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change).
Although all of these can be executed independently, an embodiment may be formed by appropriately combining a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of a predetermined expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect'' and a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of a predetermined expected effect and the display period of the precursor display for the ``reach pattern promotion effect'' (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed).

Although multiple types of predetermined expected effects are shown, different patterns may be adopted depending on the type of predetermined expected effect. For example, one of four patterns may be adopted when executing one expected effect, either an effect that prompts the player to operate the operation means or an effect that does not prompt the player to operate the operation means (such as a comment preview effect, a step-up preview effect, or a premium effect that confirms a jackpot), and another of the four patterns may be adopted when executing another expected effect. For example, in the case of a comment preview effect, the execution of a predetermined expected effect and the display of a premonition for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display where a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) are displayed in the following order: the start of the comment preview effect, the start of the display of a premonition for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display where a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), the end of the display of a premonition for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display where a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), and the end of the comment preview effect.In the case of a step-up preview effect, the execution of a predetermined expected effect and the display of a premonition for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display where a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) are displayed in the following order: the start of the comment preview effect, the start of the display of a premonition for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display where a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), the start of the step-up preview effect, the end of the display of a premonition for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display where a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), and the end of the step-up preview effect.

The display priority of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "background change during reach" effect and the precursor display for the "reach pattern upgrade" effect (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be higher or lower than the display priority of the images (e.g., operation unit simulation image, comment image, step-up image, premium image, etc.) displayed in a specified expected effect.
In addition, the display priority of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "background change during reach" effect may be set higher than the display priority of the image displayed in a specified expected effect, and the display priority of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be set lower than the display priority of the image displayed in a specified expected effect.
Alternatively, the display priority of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" may be lower than the display priority of the image displayed in the specified expected effect, and the display priority of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) may be higher than the display priority of the image displayed in the specified expected effect.

The display of a precursory display for the "background change effect during reach" (background change precursory image) or a precursory display for the "reach pattern upgrade effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change) may be repeatedly displayed.
For example, the size of the background change precursor image displayed in the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" may be increased or decreased multiple times. Furthermore, in the precursor display for the "reach symbol upgrade effect," the color of the fifth meter image may change, then return to its original color, and then change again, so that the fifth meter image alternates between being displayed in its original color and being displayed in its changed color multiple times. By adopting such a display mode, it is possible to reduce the capacity and alleviate the sense of tension caused by the precursor display.
On the other hand, the display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "background change effect during reach" and the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change) may not be repeated.
For example, the size of the background change precursor image displayed in the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" may be gradually increased but not decreased. Also, in the precursor display for the "reach symbol upgrade effect," a display mode may be adopted in which, after the color of a certain meter image changes, it does not return to its original color. By adopting such a display mode, the image quality is improved and the player can be excited.

The display of the precursory display (background change precursory image) for the "reach background change effect" may be repeatedly displayed, but the display of the precursory display for the "reach pattern upgrade effect" (display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change) may not be repeatedly displayed.
Alternatively, the display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" may not be repeated, and the display of the precursor display for the "reach pattern upgrade effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change) may be repeated.
Alternatively, it is possible to not repeatedly display either the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" or the precursor display for the "reach pattern upgrade effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change).

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the display of a precursory display (background change precursory image) for the "reach background change effect" and the display of a precursory display for the "reach pattern upgrade effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change) may be repeatedly displayed, it is also possible to make a light-emitting means such as a light-emitting decorative member emit light in a predetermined manner in response to the display of the precursory display, or to output sound in a predetermined manner from a sound generating means.
In this case, the light or sound output mode may be repeated in accordance with the repetition of the display of the predictive display. Alternatively, the light or sound may be output in a predetermined pattern throughout the entire display period of the predictive display without being associated with the repetition of the display of the predictive display (i.e., without repeatedly outputting the light or sound). Furthermore, if the display of the predictive display is not repeated, the light or sound may also be output in a predetermined pattern throughout the entire display period of the predictive display without being repeatedly output.

In the embodiment shown, there is one type of precursor display for the "background change effect during reach" (background change precursor image) and one type of precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change), but either one or both may be of multiple types.
For example, two types of precursor displays (background change precursor images) for the "reach background change effect" may be prepared, and the degree of expectation may differ depending on the type. Note that the number of types is not limited to two, and may be three or more. In this case, it is also preferable to provide three or more types (three stages) of expectation.
In addition, two or more types of precursory displays for the "reach symbol upgrade effect" (a display in which the meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change) may be prepared. For example, a pattern in which the color of the meter image changes easily up to the middle of the meter and then changes slowly from the middle, or a pattern in which the color of the meter image changes slowly up to the middle of the meter and then changes easily from the middle, may be adopted. In this case, too, it is preferable to vary the degree of expectation depending on the type of precursory display.
There may be one type of precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "background change effect during reach," and multiple types (for example, the two types mentioned above) of precursor displays for the "reach pattern upgrade effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change).
Alternatively, there may be multiple types of precursor displays (background change precursor images) for the "background change effect during reach" (for example, the two types mentioned above), and only one type of precursor display for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change).
Alternatively, there may be multiple types of precursor displays (background change precursor images) for the "background change effect during reach" (for example, the two types mentioned above), and multiple types of precursor displays for the "reach pattern promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image does not change) (for example, the two types mentioned above).
When only one display mode of the precursor display is provided, there is no difference in the degree of expectation while the precursor display is being displayed, so a stable sense of expectation can be provided. On the other hand, when multiple display modes are provided, a display with a high degree of expectation is displayed while the precursor display is being displayed, so the sense of expectation can be increased.

In the above embodiment, the precursor display for the "reach background change effect" (background change precursor image) and the precursor display for the "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) are displayed in the same variable display, but the "reach symbol promotion effect" may also be executed as a pre-reading effect. In this case, the "reach symbol promotion effect" is executed in a predetermined variable display, and the "reach background change effect" is executed in a subsequent variable display. When the "reach symbol promotion effect" is executed as a pre-reading effect, it is advisable to stop and display each variable display in a non-reach miss mode until the predicted reach effect is executed. This can create a sense of anticipation even when a non-reach miss variable pattern is executed.

In the embodiment shown, the precursor display for the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is followed by the precursor display for the "Reach background change effect" (background change precursor image). However, it is also possible to have the precursor display for the "Reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) be displayed without displaying the precursor display for the "Reach background change effect" (background change precursor image). Such an embodiment can instantly increase the sense of anticipation.

In the embodiment shown, the "Reach Background Change Effect" is executed after the "Reach Symbol Promotion Effect" is executed, but it is also possible to have the "Reach Background Change Effect" executed without executing the "Reach Symbol Promotion Effect." This embodiment can instantly increase the sense of anticipation.

In one variation, after the display of a precursor for a "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), the probability of a precursor for a "reach background change effect" (background change precursor image) being displayed may be made higher than the probability of a precursor for a "reach background change effect" (background change precursor image) being displayed, without displaying a precursor for a "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed). According to such an embodiment, the display of a precursor for a "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is performed appropriately, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

In one variation, the probability that a "reach background change effect" will be executed after a "reach symbol promotion effect" is executed may be made higher than the probability that a "reach background change effect" will be executed without executing a "reach symbol promotion effect." In such an embodiment, the "reach symbol promotion effect" will be executed appropriately, preventing a decline in interest.

In one variation, after the display of a precursor for a "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed), the probability of a precursor for a "reach background change effect" (background change precursor image) being displayed may be lowered below the probability of a precursor for a "reach background change effect" (background change precursor image) being displayed, without displaying a precursor for a "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed). According to this embodiment, the sense of anticipation can be instantly increased when the precursor for a "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed.

In one variation, the probability that a "reach background change effect" will be executed after a "reach symbol promotion effect" is executed may be lower than the probability that a "reach background change effect" will be executed without executing a "reach symbol promotion effect." In this embodiment, the sense of anticipation can be increased immediately when a "reach symbol promotion effect" is executed.

The expectation level when a premonition display for a "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) and then a premonition display for a "reach background change effect" (a background change premonition image) is displayed may be higher than the expectation level when a premonition display for a "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed, without displaying a premonition display for a "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed). According to this embodiment, the sense of expectation can be increased all at once when a premonition display for a "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed.

The expectation level when a "reach background change effect" is executed after a "reach symbol promotion effect" is executed may be higher than the expectation level when a "reach background change effect" is executed without executing a "reach symbol promotion effect." In this embodiment, the sense of expectation can be increased all at once when a "reach symbol promotion effect" is executed.

The expectation level when a premonition display for a "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) and then a premonition display for a "reach background change effect" (a background change premonition image) is displayed may be lowered than the expectation level when a premonition display for a "reach background change effect" (a background change premonition image) is displayed, without displaying a premonition display for a "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed). According to this embodiment, the premonition display for a "reach symbol promotion effect" (a display in which a meter image is displayed but the color of the sixth meter image has not changed) is displayed appropriately, thereby preventing a decrease in interest.

The expectation level when a "reach background change effect" is executed after a "reach symbol promotion effect" is executed may be lower than the expectation level when a "reach background change effect" is executed without executing a "reach symbol promotion effect." In this embodiment, the "reach symbol promotion effect" is executed appropriately, thereby preventing a decrease in interest.

Below, we will explain variations of an embodiment in which a "reach background change effect" is executed after a "reach content selection effect" is executed.

When a precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated, and instead another background image may be started to be displayed. Similarly, when a precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated, and instead another background image may be started to be displayed. Furthermore, when a precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" is displayed, the entire background image may be made invisible by a window image.
By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the scene has switched to an important scene.

When a precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated and another background image may be displayed instead. On the other hand, when a precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (an indication that a predetermined area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be continued.
The precursor display of the "background change during reach" which immediately shows whether or not a jackpot has been hit is more important than the precursor display of the "reach content selection" which shows whether or not it will develop into a battle reach, but by switching the background image, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display of the "background change during reach" which is more important is being displayed.

When a precursory display (background change precursory image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be continued. On the other hand, when a precursory display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display indicating that a predetermined area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be terminated, and instead another background image may be displayed.
The precursor display for the "background change during reach" is displayed just before it is shown whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which can make the player feel tense, but by continuing to display the same background image without changing it, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When a precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be continued. Also, when a precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display indicating that a predetermined area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the display of the background image that was displayed up until then may be continued.
The precursor display for the "background change during reach" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and the precursor display for the "reach content selection" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not it will develop into a battle reach, so each of these situations increases the player's sense of tension, but by preventing the background image from changing before and after the precursor display is displayed, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When a precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect" is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that has been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be lowered or the output of the sound may be interrupted. Similarly, when a precursor display of the "reach content selection effect" (an indication that a predetermined area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the volume of the sound that has been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be lowered or the output of the sound may be interrupted.
According to such an embodiment, the output mode of the sound that was previously output from the sound generating means is suppressed, making it sound quieter or completely inaudible, making it easier to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.

When a precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect" is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that has been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be lowered or the output of the sound may be interrupted. On the other hand, when a precursor display of the "reach content selection effect" (an indication that a predetermined area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the volume of the sound that has been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be left unchanged and the output may continue as is.
According to such an embodiment, the output mode of the sound that was previously output from the sound generating means is suppressed, making it sound quieter or completely inaudible, making it easier to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.
The precursor display of the "background change effect during reach" which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been won is more important than the precursor display of the "reach content selection effect" which indicates whether or not it will develop into a battle reach, but by suppressing the sound output from the sound generating means, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display of the "background change effect during reach" which is more important is being displayed.

When a precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect" is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that has been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be left unchanged and the output may continue. On the other hand, when a precursor display of the "reach content selection effect" (an indication that a predetermined area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the volume of the sound that has been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be lowered or the output of the sound may be interrupted.
The precursor display for the "background change effect during reach" is displayed just before it is shown whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which can make the player feel tense, but by continuing to output the sound that has been output from the sound generating means without changing the volume, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When a precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect" is displayed, the volume of the sound (BGM, etc.) that has been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be left unchanged and continue to be output. Also, when a precursor display of the "reach content selection effect" (a display indicating that a predetermined area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the volume of the sound that has been output from the sound generation means up to that point may be left unchanged and continue to be output.
The precursor display for the "background change effect during reach" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not it will develop into a battle reach, so that each of these situations increases the player's sense of tension, but by preventing the volume of the sound that has been output from the sound generating means from changing when the precursor display is displayed, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

The sound (BGM, etc.) output when the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed may be the same as the sound output when the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (display showing that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, or it may be a different sound.
The output duration of the sound output when the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed may be the same as or different from the output duration of the sound output when the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed. If the lengths are different, one may be longer than the other, or one may be shorter than the other.

The length of time that the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed and the length of the sound (BGM, etc.) that is output when the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed may be the same or different. If the lengths are different, one may be longer than the other, or one may be shorter than the other.
The length of time that the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed and the output time of the sound that is output when the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed may be the same length or different lengths. If the lengths are different, one may be longer than the other, or one may be shorter than the other.

When a precursor display (background change precursor image) for a "reach background change effect" is displayed, the execution of a light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting unit may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting effect using another light-emitting pattern may be started. Similarly, when a precursor display for a "reach content selection effect" (an indication that a predetermined area has been selected as a candidate for a reach effect) is displayed, the execution of a light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting unit may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting effect using another light-emitting pattern may be started.
According to this embodiment, it is possible to make it easier for the driver to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.

When a precursor display (background change precursor image) of a "reach background change effect" is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern that has been executed using a predetermined light-emitting unit may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting effect with another light-emitting pattern may be started. On the other hand, when a precursor display of a "reach content selection effect" (an indication that a predetermined area has been selected as a candidate for a reach effect) is displayed, the light-emitting effect that is being executed with a predetermined light-emitting pattern that is being executed using a predetermined light-emitting unit may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect that is being executed.
The precursor display of the "background change effect during reach," which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been reached, is more important than the precursor display of the "reach content selection effect," which indicates whether or not the game will develop into a battle reach. However, by starting a new light-emitting effect executed using a specified light-emitting section, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display of the "background change effect during reach," which is more important, is being displayed.

When a precursory display (background change precursory image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed, the light-emitting effect currently being executed may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern using a predetermined light-emitting element. On the other hand, when a precursory display for the "reach content selection effect" (an indication that a predetermined area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern that was being executed using a predetermined light-emitting element may be terminated, and instead a light-emitting effect with another light-emitting pattern may be started.
The precursor display for the "background change effect during reach" is displayed just before it is shown whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which can cause tension in the player, but by continuing the light-emitting effect currently being executed without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect using a predetermined light-emitting pattern using a predetermined light-emitting element, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When a precursor display (background change precursor image) of a "reach background change effect" is displayed, the light-emitting effect currently being executed may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern executed using a predetermined light-emitting unit. Also, when a precursor display of a "reach content selection effect" (an indication that a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for a reach effect) is displayed, the light-emitting effect currently being executed may be continued without terminating the execution of the light-emitting effect with a predetermined light-emitting pattern executed using a predetermined light-emitting unit.
The precursor display for the "background change during reach" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and the precursor display for the "reach content selection" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not it will develop into a battle reach, so each of these situations increases the player's sense of tension, but by preventing the light emission pattern that had been executed up until that point from changing when the precursor display is displayed, the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

The operation of a predetermined movable decorative member may be started when a precursory display (background change precursory image) for a "reach background change effect" is displayed. Similarly, the operation of a predetermined movable decorative member may be started when a precursory display for a "reach content selection effect" (a display indicating that a predetermined area has been selected as a candidate for a reach effect) is displayed.
According to this embodiment, it is possible to make it easier for the driver to recognize that the warning display is being displayed.

When a precursory display (background change precursory image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed, the operation of a predetermined movable decorative member may be started. On the other hand, when a precursory display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display indicating that a predetermined area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the operation of the predetermined movable decorative member may not be started (the state before the precursory display was displayed may be maintained).
The precursor display of the "background change effect during reach," which immediately indicates whether or not a jackpot has been reached, is more important than the precursor display of the "reach content selection effect," which indicates whether or not the game will develop into a battle reach, but by starting the operation of a specified movable decorative member, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the precursor display of the "background change effect during reach," which is more important, is being displayed.

When the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect" is displayed, the operation of the predetermined movable decorative member may not be initiated (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained). On the other hand, when the precursor display of the "reach content selection effect" (the display indicating that a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the operation of the predetermined movable decorative member may be initiated.
The precursor display for the "background change during reach" is displayed just before it is revealed whether or not a jackpot has been reached, which can create tension for the player, but by not starting the operation of the specified movable decorative member (maintaining the state before the precursor display was displayed), the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

When a precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed, the operation of a predetermined movable decorative member may not be initiated (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained). Also, when a precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display indicating that a predetermined area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the operation of a predetermined movable decorative member may not be initiated (the state before the precursor display was displayed may be maintained).
The precursor display for the "background change during reach" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been reached, and the precursor display for the "reach content selection" is displayed just before it is determined whether or not the game will develop into a battle reach, so each of these situations increases the player's sense of tension, but by not starting the operation of a specified movable decorative member when the precursor display is displayed (maintaining the state it was in before the precursor display was displayed), the tension felt by the player can be moderately alleviated.

It is also possible to provide a case where a precursor display for a "background change during reach" or "reach content selection" begins to be displayed while the movable decorative element is in motion. In this case, it is recommended that the movement of the movable decorative element be set to "maintain the state (movement pattern) that existed before the precursor display was displayed," as described above.

The length of time that the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed may be the same as the length of time that the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (display showing that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed.
Since it is possible to experience in advance the change in the display content, where the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) switches to the specific display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which only the selected specified area is displayed and the candidate for the reach effect is confirmed), the tension felt when the precursor display for the "reach background change effect" (background change precursor image) is displayed (the tension of wondering when the precursor display for the "reach background change effect" will end) can be moderately alleviated.

Alternatively, the time for which the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed may be longer than the time for which the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (display showing that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed.
While the "reach content selection effect" is an effect that indicates whether or not the game will develop into a reach effect, the "reach background change effect" is an effect that indicates whether or not a jackpot will be reached, and the latter is more important as an effect. Therefore, by relatively shortening the time that the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (the display that a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, it is possible to prevent the player's expectations for a jackpot from being excessively aroused.
Alternatively, the time for which the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed may be shorter than the time for which the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (display showing that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed.
The display of the precursor display for the "reach background change effect" is performed after the display of the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect." In addition, after the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed, the background image is always displayed. This causes the player to feel tense for a long period of time, but by relatively shortening the time for which the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed, it is possible to make the player aware that the background image will change, while preventing the player from becoming overly excited about a jackpot.

When the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect" is displayed, only the current hold image is displayed without displaying the standby hold image, and when the precursor display (display that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) of the "reach content selection effect" is displayed, both the standby hold image and the current hold image may be displayed.
When the precursor display (background change precursor image) of "reach background change performance" is displayed, the reserve change performance in which the current reserved image may be promoted with a predetermined probability may be executed with a predetermined probability. By adopting such an embodiment, the reserve change performance can be enjoyed while the precursor display (background change precursor image) of "reach background change performance" is displayed.

Regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the ``reach background change effect,'' the following relationship pattern may be adopted.
For example, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect'' may be performed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' end of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' and end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect'' may be performed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' end of the hold change effect, and end of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect.''
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect'' may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' start of the hold change effect, end of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' and end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect'' may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' start of the hold change effect, end of the hold change effect, and end of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect.''

On the other hand, when a precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed, the hold change effect that changes the current hold image may not be executed.
According to such an embodiment, the player can be made to focus on the background image that is displayed after the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect" is displayed.

When the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect" is displayed, only the current hold image is displayed without displaying the standby hold image, and when the precursor display (display that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) of the "reach content selection effect" is displayed, both the standby hold image and the current hold image may be displayed.
When the precursor display of the "reach content selection effect" (the display in which a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, a hold change effect in which the current reserved image may be promoted with a predetermined probability may be executed with a predetermined probability. By adopting such an embodiment, the reserve change effect can be enjoyed while the precursor display of the "reach content selection effect" (the display in which a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed.

Regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display of the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), the following relationship pattern may be adopted.
For example, the hold change effect may be executed and the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be displayed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of a precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), end of display of a precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), and end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the hold change effect may be executed and the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be displayed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect).
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be performed in the following order: the start of the display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), the start of the hold change effect, the end of the display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), and the end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (display showing that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (display showing that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), start of the hold change effect, end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (display showing that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect).

On the other hand, when a precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the hold change effect that changes the current hold image may not be executed.
According to such an embodiment, the player can focus on the specific display of the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which only the selected specified area is displayed and the candidate for the reach effect has been confirmed) that is displayed after the display of the precursor display of the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect).

When the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect" is displayed, only the current hold image is displayed without displaying the standby hold image, and when the precursor display (display that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) of the "reach content selection effect" is displayed, both the standby hold image and the current hold image may be displayed.
When a precursor display of the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, a hold change effect in which the standby hold image may be upgraded with a predetermined probability may be executed with a predetermined probability. By adopting such an embodiment, the hold change effect can be enjoyed while the precursor display of the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed.

Regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the standby hold image and the display period of the precursor display of the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), the following relationship pattern may be adopted.
For example, the hold change effect may be executed and the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be displayed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of a precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), end of display of a precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), and end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the hold change effect may be executed and the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be displayed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect).
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be performed in the following order: the start of the display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), the start of the hold change effect, the end of the display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), and the end of the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the hold change effect and the display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (display showing that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (display showing that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), start of the hold change effect, end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (display showing that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect).

On the other hand, when a precursory display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the hold change effect that changes the standby hold image may not be executed.
According to such an embodiment, the player can focus on the specific display of the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which only the selected specified area is displayed and the candidate for the reach effect has been confirmed) that is displayed after the display of the precursor display of the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect).

Four patterns are shown regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the ``reach background change effect.''
In addition, four patterns are shown regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display of the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect).
In addition, four patterns are shown regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the standby hold image and the display period of the precursor display of the ``reach content selection effect'' (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect).
Although all of these can be executed independently, an embodiment may be formed by appropriately combining a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the current hold image and the display period of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), and a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of the hold change effect that changes the standby hold image and the display period of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect).

There may be multiple types of hold change effects, and different patterns may be used depending on the type of hold change effect. For example, different patterns may be used for hold change effects that hide holds with smoke and hold change effects that hide holds with swords. For example, in the case of a hold change effect that hides holds with smoke, the effects are executed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of the display of the precursor to the "reach content selection effect" (a display that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), end of the display of the precursor to the "reach content selection effect" (a display that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), and end of the hold change effect. In the case of a hold change effect that hides holds with swords, the effects are executed in the following order: start of the hold change effect, start of the display of the precursor to the "reach content selection effect" (a display that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), end of the hold change effect, and end of the display of the precursor to the "reach content selection effect" (a display that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect).

The display priority of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "background change effect during reach" and the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (display showing that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be higher or lower than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change effect (for example, an image that approaches the current hold image or the standby hold image and displays an impact on the current hold image or the standby hold image).
In addition, the display priority of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "background change effect during reach" may be set higher than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change effect, and the display priority of the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be set lower than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change effect.
Alternatively, the display priority of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "background change effect during reach" may be lower than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change effect, and the display priority of the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be higher than the display priority of the image displayed in the hold change effect.

When the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed, a predetermined expectation effect (an expectation effect that raises the expectation of a win, hereafter referred to as the "predetermined expectation effect") different from the hold change effect may be executed with a predetermined probability. The predetermined expectation effect may, for example, be a presentation format such as displaying a predetermined character in display area 1600a. By using such an embodiment, the sense of anticipation can be increased while the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" is displayed. The display format of the standby hold image or current hold image will not change due to the predetermined expectation effect.

The following relationship patterns may be adopted for the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect."
For example, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect'' may be performed in the following order: start of the specified expected effect, start of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' end of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' and end of the specified expected effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect'' may be performed in the following order: start of the specified expected effect, start of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' end of the specified expected effect, and end of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect.''
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect'' may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' start of the specified expected effect, end of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' and end of the specified expected effect.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected effect and the display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect'' may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect,'' start of the specified expected effect, end of the specified expected effect, and end of display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect.''

When the "background change effect during reach" precursor display (background change precursor image) is displayed, the specified expected effect may not be executed.

When the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, a specified expected effect different from the hold change effect may be executed with a specified probability. The specified expected effect may, for example, be a display mode such as displaying a specified character in display area 1600a. By using such an embodiment, it is possible to increase the sense of anticipation while the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed. Note that the display mode of the waiting hold image or current hold image does not change due to the specified expected effect.

Regarding the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display of the "reach content selection effect" (the display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), the following relationship pattern may be adopted.
For example, the execution of the specified expected performance and the display of the precursor display for the "reach content selection performance" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach performance) may be performed in the following order: the start of the specified expected performance, the start of the display of the precursor display for the "reach content selection performance" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach performance), the end of the display of the precursor display for the "reach content selection performance" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach performance), and the end of the specified expected performance.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected performance and the display of the precursor display for the "reach content selection performance" (display showing that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach performance) may be performed in the following order: start of the specified expected performance, start of display of the precursor display for the "reach content selection performance" (display showing that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach performance), end of the specified expected performance, and end of display of the precursor display for the "reach content selection performance" (display showing that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach performance).
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected performance and the display of the precursor display for the "reach content selection performance" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach performance) may be performed in the following order: the start of the display of the precursor display for the "reach content selection performance" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach performance), the start of the specified expected performance, the end of the display of the precursor display for the "reach content selection performance" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach performance), and the end of the specified expected performance.
Alternatively, the execution of the specified expected performance and the display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection performance'' (display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach performance) may be performed in the following order: start of display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection performance'' (display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach performance), start of the specified expected performance, end of the specified expected performance, and end of the display of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection performance'' (display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach performance).

When a precursory display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display indicating that a specific area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, the specific expected effect may not be executed.

The specified expected effects can be, for example, effects that prompt the player to operate the operating means, or effects that do not prompt the player to operate the operating means (such as comment preview effects, step-up preview effects, and premium effects that confirm a jackpot).

Four patterns are shown for the relationship between the execution period of a predetermined expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (background change precursor image) of the "reach background change effect."
In addition, four patterns are shown regarding the relationship between the execution period of a predetermined expected effect and the display period of the precursor display of the "reach content selection effect" (the display in which a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect).
Although all of these can be executed independently, an embodiment may be formed by appropriately combining a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the ``reach background change effect'' and a certain pattern (any of four) regarding the relationship between the execution period of a specified expected effect and the display period of the precursor display for the ``reach content selection effect'' (display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect).

Although multiple types of predetermined expected effects are shown, different patterns may be adopted depending on the type of predetermined expected effect. For example, one of four patterns may be adopted when executing one expected effect, either an effect that prompts the player to operate the operation means or an effect that does not prompt the player to operate the operation means (such as a comment preview effect, a step-up preview effect, or a premium effect that confirms a jackpot), and another of the four patterns may be adopted when executing another expected effect. For example, in the case of a comment preview performance, the specified expected performance is executed and the premonition display for the "reach content selection performance" (a display showing that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach performance) is displayed in the following order: start of the comment preview performance, start of display of a precursor display for the "reach content selection performance" (a display showing that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach performance), end of display of a precursor display for the "reach content selection performance" (a display showing that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach performance), and end of the comment preview performance; and in the case of a step-up preview performance, the specified expected performance is executed and the premonition display for the "reach content selection performance" (a display showing that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach performance) is displayed in the following order: start of the comment preview performance, start of the "reach content selection performance" (a display showing that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach performance), start of the step-up preview performance, end of display of a precursor display for the "reach content selection performance" (a display showing that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach performance), and end of the step-up preview performance.

The display priority of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "background change effect during reach" and the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (display showing that a specified area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be higher or lower than the display priority of the images (e.g., operation unit simulation image, comment image, step-up image, premium image, etc.) displayed in a specified expectation effect.
In addition, the display priority of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" may be set higher than the display priority of the image displayed in a specified expected effect, and the display priority of the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be set lower than the display priority of the image displayed in a specified expected effect.
Alternatively, the display priority of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" may be lower than the display priority of the image displayed in the specified expected effect, and the display priority of the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be higher than the display priority of the image displayed in the specified expected effect.

The display of a precursory display for a "background change effect during reach" (background change precursory image) or a precursory display for a "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for a reach effect) may be repeatedly displayed.
For example, the size of the background change precursor image displayed in the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" may be increased or decreased multiple times. Furthermore, the size of the selected predetermined area in the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (the display in which a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be increased or decreased multiple times. Furthermore, the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" may be alternately displayed with extreme shaking or effects and with no extreme shaking or effects multiple times. Furthermore, the effects may be repeatedly enlarged and reduced at high speed. By adopting such a display mode, it is possible to reduce the capacity and alleviate the sense of tension caused by the precursor display.
On the other hand, the display of the precursor display for the "background change effect during reach" (background change precursor image) and the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (display that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may not be displayed repeatedly.
For example, the size of the background change precursor image displayed in the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" may be gradually increased but not decreased. Also, in the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (the display in which a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), a display mode may be adopted in which the size of the selected predetermined area increases but does not decrease. Furthermore, when the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" is shaken, the display may be such that the shaking gradually increases but does not decrease, or the displayed effect may be such that it gradually increases but does not decrease. By adopting such a display mode, the image quality is improved, which can excite the player.

The display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" may be repeatedly displayed, and the display of the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (display that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may not be repeatedly displayed.
Alternatively, the display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" may not be repeated, and the display of the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be repeated.
Alternatively, it is possible to prevent both the display of the precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "reach background change effect" and the display of the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (display that a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) from being repeated.

An embodiment has been shown in which the display of a precursory display for a "background change during reach" (background change precursory image) or a precursory display for a "reach content selection" (a display in which a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for a reach display) may be repeatedly displayed, but it is also possible to make a light-emitting means such as a light-emitting decorative member emit light in a predetermined manner in response to the display of the precursory display, or to output sound in a predetermined manner from a sound generating means.
In this case, the light or sound output mode may be repeated in accordance with the repetition of the display of the predictive display. Alternatively, the light or sound may be output in a predetermined pattern throughout the entire display period of the predictive display without being associated with the repetition of the display of the predictive display (i.e., without repeatedly outputting the light or sound). Furthermore, if the display of the predictive display is not repeated, the light or sound may also be output in a predetermined pattern throughout the entire display period of the predictive display without being repeatedly output.

An embodiment has been shown in which there is one type of precursor display for the "background change effect during reach" (background change precursor image) and one type of precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect), but either one or both may be of multiple types.
For example, two types of precursor displays (background change precursor images) for the "reach background change effect" may be prepared, and the degree of expectation may differ depending on the type. Note that the number of types is not limited to two, and may be three or more. In this case, it is also preferable to provide three or more types (three stages) of expectation.
In addition, two or more types of precursor displays for the "reach content selection effect" (displays in which a predetermined area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) may be prepared. For example, a display mode in which the precursor display shakes more vigorously and a display mode in which the precursor display shakes less vigorously may be employed, or a display mode in which the shaking amount (movement width) is the same but the speed of the shaking may be varied to employ a fast shaking mode and a slow shaking mode, or a plurality of display modes in which both the shaking mode and the shaking speed are varied to employ different shaking modes. In this case, too, it is preferable to vary the degree of expectation depending on the type of precursor display.
There may be one type of precursor display (background change precursor image) for the "background change effect during reach," and multiple types (for example, the two types mentioned above) for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect).
Alternatively, there may be multiple types of precursor displays (background change precursor images) for the "reach background change effect" (for example, the two types mentioned above), and only one type of precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect).
Alternatively, there may be multiple types of precursor displays (background change precursor images) for the "background change effect during reach" (for example, the two types mentioned above), and multiple types of precursor displays for the "reach content selection effect" (displays in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the reach effect) (for example, the two types mentioned above).
When only one display mode of the precursor display is provided, there is no difference in the degree of expectation while the precursor display is being displayed, so a stable sense of expectation can be provided. On the other hand, when multiple display modes are provided, a display with a high degree of expectation is displayed while the precursor display is being displayed, so the sense of expectation can be increased.

In the above embodiment, the precursor display for the "mid-reach background change effect" (background change precursor image) and the precursor display for the "mid-reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for the mid-reach effect) are displayed in the same variable display, but the "mid-reach content selection effect" may also be executed as a look-ahead effect. In this case, the "mid-reach content selection effect" is executed in the specified variable display, and the "mid-reach background change effect" is executed in the variable display thereafter. When the "mid-reach content selection effect" is executed as a look-ahead effect, it is advisable to stop and display each variable display in a non-mid-reach miss mode until the predicted mid-reach effect is executed. This can create a sense of anticipation even when a non-mid-reach miss variable pattern is executed.

In the embodiment shown, the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display indicating that a specific area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect) is displayed, followed by the precursor display for the "reach background change effect" (background change precursor image). However, it is also possible to have the precursor display for the "reach background change effect" (background change precursor image) be displayed without displaying the precursor display for the "reach content selection effect" (a display indicating that a specific area has been selected as a candidate for the reach effect). Such an embodiment can instantly increase the sense of anticipation.

In the embodiment shown, the "reach background change effect" is executed after the "reach content selection effect" is executed, but it is also possible to have the "reach background change effect" be executed without executing the "reach content selection effect." This embodiment can instantly increase the sense of anticipation.

In one variation, after the display of a precursor display for a "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for a reach effect), the probability of a precursor display for a "reach background change effect" (background change precursor image) being displayed may be made higher than the probability of a precursor display for a "reach background change effect" (background change precursor image) being displayed without displaying the precursor display for a "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for a reach effect). In such an embodiment, the display of the precursor display for a "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for a reach effect) is displayed appropriately, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

In one variation, the probability that a "reach background change effect" will be executed after a "reach content selection effect" is executed may be higher than the probability that a "reach background change effect" will be executed without executing a "reach content selection effect." In such an embodiment, the "reach content selection effect" will be executed appropriately, preventing a decline in interest.

In one variation, after the display of a precursor display for a "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for a reach effect) is displayed, the probability of a precursor display for a "reach background change effect" (background change precursor image) being displayed may be lowered below the probability of a precursor display for a "reach background change effect" (background change precursor image) being displayed, without displaying the precursor display for a "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for a reach effect). According to this embodiment, the sense of anticipation can be instantly increased when the precursor display for a "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for a reach effect) is displayed.

In one variation, the probability that a "reach background change effect" will be executed after a "reach content selection effect" is executed may be lower than the probability that a "reach background change effect" will be executed without executing a "reach content selection effect." According to this embodiment, the sense of anticipation can be instantly heightened when a "reach content selection effect" is executed.

The expectation level when a premonition display for a "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for a reach effect) and then a premonition display for a "reach background change effect" (a background change premonition image) is displayed may be higher than the expectation level when a premonition display for a "reach background change effect" (a background change premonition image) is displayed without displaying a premonition display for a "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for a reach effect). According to this embodiment, the sense of expectation can be increased all at once when the premonition display for a "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specified area is selected as a candidate for a reach effect) is displayed.

The expectation level when a "reach background change effect" is executed after a "reach content selection effect" is executed may be higher than the expectation level when a "reach background change effect" is executed without executing a "reach content selection effect." In this embodiment, the sense of expectation can be increased all at once when a "reach content selection effect" is executed.

The expectation level when a premonition display for a "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specific area is selected as a candidate for a reach effect) and then a premonition display for a "reach background change effect" (a background change premonition image) is displayed may be lower than the expectation level when a premonition display for a "reach background change effect" (a background change premonition image) is displayed without displaying a premonition display for a "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specific area is selected as a candidate for a reach effect). In such an embodiment, the premonition display for a "reach content selection effect" (a display in which a specific area is selected as a candidate for a reach effect) is displayed appropriately, thereby preventing a decrease in interest.

The expectation level when a "reach content selection effect" is executed followed by a "reach background change effect" may be lower than the expectation level when a "reach background change effect" is executed without executing a "reach content selection effect." In this embodiment, the "reach content selection effect" is executed appropriately, thereby preventing a decrease in interest.

As mentioned above, the expectation effect (including the predetermined expectation effect) is an effect that indicates that the result of the current change (or the result of the change corresponding to the hold of the pre-read target) has a certain degree of expectation (i.e., the probability of the result being a jackpot is higher than in normal changes). Note that expressions such as "expecting a hit" and "sense of expectation" are also used in the same sense in this specification.
Furthermore, as the predetermined expected effect, any of the effects described in this specification and drawings may be adopted in place of or in addition to the expected effect exemplified.

Here, we will explain the benefits that will be given to players when they win a jackpot.
The number of rounds may differ depending on the type of jackpot. For example, in a jackpot with five rounds and a jackpot with ten rounds, the number of game balls paid out to the player in the jackpot with ten rounds will be twice as many. In other words, in a jackpot with five rounds and a jackpot with ten rounds, the bonus content given to the player in the jackpot with ten rounds can be said to be more advantageous.
Furthermore, depending on the type of jackpot, there are jackpots that result in a low-probability game state after the jackpot and jackpots that result in a high-probability game state after the jackpot. Between a jackpot that results in a low-probability game state after the jackpot and a jackpot that results in a high-probability game state after the jackpot, the jackpot that results in a high-probability game state after the jackpot is more likely to result in an immediate jackpot. Furthermore, by immediately generating a jackpot, the decrease in the number of game balls owned by the player can be suppressed. In other words, between a jackpot that results in a low-probability game state after the jackpot and a jackpot that results in a high-probability game state after the jackpot, it can be said that the content of the bonus granted to the player is more advantageous.
Also, depending on the type of jackpot, there are jackpots that put the game state after the jackpot into a non-time-saving state, and jackpots that put the game state after the jackpot into a time-saving state. Furthermore, depending on the type of jackpot that puts the game state into a time-saving state, the number of time-saving times granted after the jackpot may differ. The more time-saving times in the game state after the jackpot, the more decorative patterns can be displayed by changing the number of time-saving times without reducing the number of game balls held. In other words, it can be said that a jackpot that puts the game into a time-saving state will have more advantageous benefits granted to the player. Also, even in the case of a jackpot that puts the game into a time-saving state, it can be said that a jackpot that puts the game into a time-saving state and gives more time-saving times will have more advantageous benefits granted to the player.
Furthermore, by combining these elements and other elements (the relative positions of the obstacle pin 1200, first start hole 2002, gate section 2003, second start hole 2004, and large prize hole 2005, the presence or absence of small win rush, time reduction b, and time reduction c), it is possible to calculate the expected number of game balls that will increase from the first jackpot occurring until the game returns to normal mode, depending on the type of jackpot that occurs first in normal mode. Also, this expected value may differ depending on the type of jackpot. In such cases, the higher this expected value, the more advantageous the content of the bonus granted to the player.
In addition, when the content of a benefit is said to be advantageous, this specification may also express that the content of the benefit is disadvantageous compared to the comparison target. Furthermore, in this specification, when the content of a benefit is advantageous, this may also be simply expressed as the benefit being advantageous. For example, if there is a jackpot A with 10 rounds and a jackpot B with 5 rounds, this specification may also express that the benefit of jackpot A is more advantageous than that of jackpot B, or that the benefit of jackpot B is less advantageous than that of jackpot A.

Here, the term "effect" will be explained. An effect is a display process that emphasizes a predetermined event.
Specifically, a specific image displayed in the display area 1600a is emphasized by an effect image. For example, the specific image can be emphasized by displaying a predetermined effect image that surrounds the outside of the specific image. In this case, the specific image appears to be one size larger and is emphasized compared to other images, making it easier for the player to recognize that the specific image has been displayed. Note that displaying an effect image on a specific image in this manner is sometimes referred to as adding an effect or adding an effect.
The specific image may be a character image, a reserved image (a standby reserved image, a current reserved image), or any of the various images described in this specification. It is preferable that these images are made up of multiple colors.
The effect image may be a flame-like shape or color, in which case the periphery of a specific image may be highlighted by the flames.
Instead of or in addition to the periphery of a specific image, when a specific image is displayed, an effect image may be displayed along the four sides of the periphery of the display area 1600a.
The colors of the effect image may be blue, green, red, gold, or rainbow. The expectation level may increase in the order of blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow, with the rainbow effect image having a 100% expectation level. In this way, the expectation level may be indicated by the effect image. In this case, it is preferable not to change the color of the specific image itself. This allows the expectation level to be indicated without changing the display mode of the specific image itself.
Furthermore, the effect image may be white, which prevents the effect image from standing out more than a specific image.
Alternatively, an effect image may be displayed in the same color as the color of the specific image that is the target of the effect.
The effect image may be displayed in a static manner or in a dynamic manner. For example, a dynamic manner may be adopted in which the width of the effect image is repeatedly expanded and contracted. Alternatively, the effect image may be displayed as if it is flashing by repeatedly displaying and hiding the effect image. Alternatively, the outer shape of the effect image may be static, the interior of the effect image may be rainbow-colored, and the rainbow-colored portion may be displayed in a dynamic manner.
The period during which the effect image is displayed may be set to coincide with the period during which the specific image is displayed. That is, the display of the effect image may be started when the specific image starts to be displayed and may be ended when the specific image ends to be displayed. Alternatively, the display of the effect image may be started at a predetermined time after the specific image starts to be displayed and may be ended when the specific image ends to be displayed.
The effect image is not limited to highlighting a specific image displayed in the display area 1600a. For example, instead of a specific image, an effect may be added to a movable decorative member.
Specifically, when the movable decorative element moves (moves or rotates) and overlaps the display area 1600a in front of the display area 1600a, an effect image can be displayed in the display area 1600a that surrounds the movable decorative element in front view, emphasizing the movable decorative element. In this case, too, displaying a predetermined effect image that surrounds the outside of the movable decorative element can make the movable decorative element appear larger. This can also give the movable decorative element a sense of depth.

Here, we will explain the "cut-in effect." The "cut-in effect" is an effect in which a predetermined image (hereinafter referred to as a "cut-in image") is displayed in front of a specific image that is currently being displayed, hiding part or all of the specific image, and announcing a specific event using the displayed cut-in image.
The display priority of the cut-in image is higher than the display priority of images (characters, etc.) such as background images, decorative symbols, current hold images, standby hold images, and reach effects. On the other hand, the display priority of the cut-in image is lower than the display priority of the fourth symbol, hold number display image, and error notification image. In other words, when a cut-in image is displayed, certain images (background images, decorative symbols, etc.) are displayed behind the cut-in image, and in some cases are hidden by the cut-in image, making them difficult or impossible to see. On the other hand, the fourth symbol, hold number display image, etc. will not become invisible even when a cut-in image is displayed.
Even when a cut-in image is displayed, the movement of images with a lower display priority than the cut-in image is not stopped and continues to be displayed. In other words, whether or not a cut-in image is displayed does not result in a difference in the display mode of images with a lower display priority than the cut-in image. For example, if a cut-in image is displayed during the execution of a display effect that displays a specific image, the execution of the display effect that displays the specific image continues even while the cut-in image is displayed, and the display effect that displays the specific image continues to be executed even after the display of the cut-in image has ended.
The size of the cut-in image may be, for example, such that it covers about 50% to 80% of the display area 1600a, or such that it covers 100% of the display area 1600a.
A specific image may be hidden by the cut-in image moving within the display area 1600 a. For example, the cut-in image may appear from the right edge of the display area 1600 a, move to the left, and then move off the screen from the left edge of the display area 1600 a.
The timing for executing the "cut-in effect" may be a predetermined timing during the execution of a predetermined effect (for example, a reach effect). If the "cut-in effect" is executed at that timing, the expectation of a jackpot may be higher than if the "cut-in effect" is not executed. Furthermore, multiple types of "cut-in effect" may be provided, and the expectation may differ depending on the type of "cut-in effect" executed. For example, the colors of the cut-in image may be blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow, with the expectation increasing in the order of blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow.

Here, the terms "double numbers", "variance numbers", and "missed reach" will be explained.
A "double number" is a term that refers to a state in which the decorative symbols on the left, center, and right that have temporarily stopped or stopped are a combination of decorative symbols with the same number. For example, if the decorative symbols temporarily stop or stop with a combination of "4""4""4" or a combination of "5""5""5," the temporary stop mode or stop mode of the decorative symbols is a double number. The decorative symbols stop with a double number when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. Therefore, when the decorative symbols stop with a double number, a jackpot game state occurs immediately thereafter.
On the other hand, a "variable" is a term that refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have temporarily stopped or stopped on the left, center, and right are combinations of decorative symbols with different numbers. For example, if the decorative symbols temporarily stop or stop on a combination of "2,""5," and "3," or a combination of "1,""4," and "2," the temporary stop mode or stop mode of the decorative symbols is a "variable" pattern. The decorative symbols stop in a "variable" pattern when the result of the special lottery is a losing combination.
In addition, after the left and right decorative symbols temporarily stop with the same number, entering a reach state, the center decorative symbol may temporarily stop with a different number than the left and right decorative symbols, and then the left, center, and right decorative symbols may stop as they are. For example, the left, center, and right decorative symbols may temporarily stop with a combination of "4,""5," and "4," and then stop as they are. This type of decorative symbol combination is called a "reach miss" and is not called a barakeme.

Here, the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" will be explained.
The "sudden decorative symbol stop effect" is an effect in which the decorative symbols stop at a double number without going through a reach state. In other words, when the "sudden decorative symbol stop effect" is executed, the left, center, and right decorative symbols change at high speed, and then the left, center, and right decorative symbols temporarily stop at the same time in a manner indicating a jackpot (double number), and then stop as is. After the decorative symbols stop, the game transitions to a jackpot game state.
The "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" is performed only when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. In other words, the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" does not cause the decorative symbols to stop in a reach miss mode or a scatter mode.
According to the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect," when the decorative symbols stop with a double number (i.e., when the game transitions to a jackpot game state), it can give a big surprise to players who think that the game will go through a reach state (a state in which the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol temporarily stop with the same decorative symbol). Also, because all decorative symbols temporarily stop at the same time, the effect time can be shortened compared to when multiple decorative symbols stop in order.
In addition, the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" may be referred to as a "sudden notification effect" or simply as a "sudden notification" in this specification.

In the variable display in which the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" is executed, the effect requiring operation of the operation unit may not be executed. In this case, the simulated image of the operation unit requiring operation during the variable display of the decorative symbol will not be displayed.
According to this embodiment, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the content of the presentation, thereby making the player feel more surprised by the "decorative symbol sudden stop presentation."

In addition, it is preferable that the decorative pattern being displayed in a variable manner is not hidden by a predetermined effect image indicating the degree of expectation.
On the other hand, the decorative symbols being displayed in a variable manner may be hidden by a predetermined effect image indicating the degree of expectation. In this case, the decorative symbols being displayed in a variable manner may be temporarily stopped at the same time as the display of the predetermined effect image indicating the degree of expectation ends. Alternatively, the left, center, and right decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped in a doublet pattern at the timing when the left, center, and right decorative symbols are hidden by the predetermined effect image indicating the degree of expectation, so that the player can visually recognize that the left, center, and right decorative symbols have become a doublet pattern at the timing when the display of the predetermined effect image indicating the degree of expectation ends.

It is advisable to prevent the "re-change display effect" (a display effect in which the temporarily stopped decorative pattern with a double number is scrolled again and then temporarily stopped with another decorative pattern or without being changed, thereby improving or not improving the bonus awarded by a jackpot) from being performed on the decorative pattern that has been temporarily stopped by the "decorative pattern sudden stop effect." In other words, the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is displayed as it is.
If the "re-changing display effect" is executed, the temporarily stopped symbols will scroll again, which may diminish the surprise of the sudden transition to a jackpot game state that is the aim of this embodiment. However, according to this embodiment, it is possible to prevent the reduction in the effect of surprising the player by suddenly transitioning to a jackpot game state through the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect."

It is desirable that the bonus given to the player by the jackpot corresponding to the variable display on which the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" is executed is a favorable bonus (i.e., an unfavorable bonus is not selected). For example, if there are jackpots with a maximum number of rounds at the time of a jackpot of 5 rounds and jackpots with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, and the latter jackpot occurs, or if there are jackpots that do not grant a time-saving state after the jackpot and jackpots that grant a time-saving state after the jackpot, it is desirable that the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" be executed only when the latter jackpot occurs.
Here, an example with two bonus levels is shown, but the bonus levels may be three or more. For example, the maximum number of rounds in a jackpot may be two, five, or ten rounds. In this case, the bonus awarded to the player for a jackpot corresponding to the variable display in which the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" is executed may be only the most advantageous bonus (in this case, a ten-round jackpot). Alternatively, the least advantageous bonus (a two-round jackpot) may not be awarded, and instead, another bonus (a five-round jackpot or a ten-round jackpot) may be awarded.
By adopting such an embodiment, the benefit given to the player by the variable display in which the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" is executed becomes advantageous, so that the player can feel both surprise and joy at the same time when the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" is executed.

The combination of decorative symbols that indicates a jackpot and that is stopped in the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" may be only one type. For example, only the combination of "7""7""7" may be displayed.
On the other hand, among the combinations of decorative symbols that indicate a big win, only specific combinations may be displayed, and other combinations may not be displayed.
According to such an embodiment, the number of types of decorative pattern combinations that are stopped in the "decorative pattern sudden stop effect" is only one type or a limited number of types, so it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the "decorative pattern sudden stop effect" has been executed, allowing the player to perceive the impact of the effect more clearly.

The execution of the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" may be suggested by a pre-reading process. For example, the combination of decorative symbols displayed in a stopped state may suggest a high expectation of the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" being executed. For example, "7,""2," and "5" may be displayed as the results of the decorative symbol change display two times before the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" is executed, "7,""7," and "5" may be displayed as the results of the decorative symbol change display one time before the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" is executed, and "7,""7," and "7" may be displayed as the results of the change display when the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" is executed.
In addition, after the first ("7", "2", "5") and second ("7", "7", "5") stop displays are made, a "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" may be always performed.
Alternatively, the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" may be performed with a predetermined probability. For example, the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" may be performed with a probability of 70%.
According to such an embodiment, the indication of the degree of expectation by the predictive processing is executed by the stopped display mode of the decorative symbols, so that the player can be made to concentrate on the decorative symbols, and in such a concentrated state, the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" is executed, so that the player can be surprised more effectively.
Furthermore, if the player moves his or her gaze to a position other than the decorative pattern, there is a risk that the player will miss the scene where the decorative pattern stops in a manner indicating a jackpot, but this embodiment can prevent such an incident from occurring.
In addition, a predetermined image indicating a high expectation level may be displayed multiple times based on the pre-reading process in a manner that overlaps the front or back of the decorative pattern, rather than the decorative pattern itself. In this case, the same effect can be achieved.

There is an effect in which the color of the standby reserve image is changed based on the look-ahead process to indicate the likelihood of a jackpot for that standby reserve image, but when the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" is executed, the color of the standby reserve image may not be changed. In this case, the most frequently displayed current reserve image (a white reserve image used as the default reserve image (current reserve image or standby reserve image)) is displayed as the reserve image (current reserve image and standby reserve image) corresponding to the variable display in which the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" is executed, and the decorative pattern suddenly stops in that state.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the decorative pattern temporarily stops at a repeating number while the player is distracted by the current pending image or the standby pending image, causing the player to miss the moment of the temporary stop (i.e., the moment when the player is notified that a jackpot game has begun).

In a variable display in which the "decorative pattern sudden stop effect" is executed, the effect of operating the movable decorative member may not be executed from the start of the variable display until the left, center, and right decorative patterns temporarily stop, or until the decorative patterns are displayed as stopped.
Also, if multiple movable decorative elements are provided, it is possible to avoid performing effects using movable decorative elements that move to a position that overlaps with the display area 1600a when activated.
If the movable decorative member were to be operated, it could impair the visibility of the display area 1600a, or the player's eyes could be drawn to the movable decorative member, causing them to miss the moment when the decorative pattern temporarily stops in a manner indicating a jackpot.However, according to this embodiment, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the content of the presentation, making it possible to make the player feel more surprised by the ``decorative pattern sudden stop presentation.''
In addition, when the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" is executed and the variable display is stopped, an effect of moving the movable decorative member may be executed. In this case, by executing an effect of moving the movable decorative member, it is possible to make the occurrence of a jackpot more exciting.

In the variable display in which the "decorative pattern sudden stop effect" is executed, the background image being displayed may not be changed to another background image from the start of the variable display until the left, center, and right decorative patterns temporarily stop, or until the decorative patterns are displayed as stopped.
Furthermore, based on the predictive processing, the background image being displayed may not be changed to another background image from the timing when the starting winning corresponding to the variable display in which the "decorative pattern sudden stop effect" is executed is started until the decorative patterns on the left, center, and right are temporarily stopped or until the decorative patterns are displayed in a stopped state.
By adopting such an embodiment, the background image is changed while the variable display is being executed, and while the player is viewing the background image, the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped or displayed as stopped in a manner indicating a jackpot, preventing the player from missing the moment when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped or displayed as stopped.

A game state in which the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" is executed and a game state in which the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" is not executed may be provided, and these game states may be switched by a predetermined trigger. For example, the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" may be executed in the time-saving state, but the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" may not be executed in the non-time-saving state. Conversely, the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" may not be executed in the time-saving state, but the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" may be executed in the non-time-saving state.
If the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" were to occur constantly during play, there is a risk that the player would be constantly in a state of tension, causing strong stress to the player. However, by providing a situation in which the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" is executed or not executed depending on the game state, and allowing the player to switch between these, the player can be made to feel either a tense state or a relaxed state depending on the type of game state, preventing the player from becoming highly stressed.

From this perspective, it is desirable to display information indicating whether or not the game state is one in which the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" is executed in the display area 1600a. For example, in a game state in which the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" occurs, a display may be made indicating a "decorative symbol sudden stop effect occurrence mode." In a game state in which the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" does not occur, a display may be made indicating a "decorative symbol sudden stop effect non-occurrence mode," or no display may be made indicating that the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" is not executed.
Furthermore, when a game state transitions from one in which the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" is not executed to one in which the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" is executed, a predetermined image or text indicating that the game state has entered a state in which the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" may be executed may be displayed in the display area 1600a. For example, a text message saying "Pay attention to the symbols!" may be displayed.
In addition, when a game state in which the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" is executed is transitioned to a game state in which the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" is not executed, a predetermined image or character string indicating that the game state has become one in which there is no possibility of the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" being executed may be displayed in display area 1600a.
By adopting such an embodiment, the burden felt by the player can be reduced. Also, by displaying these predetermined displays in the display area 1600a where the decorative symbols are displayed, the player can easily confirm whether or not the game state is such that the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" is executed.

Different types of decorative symbols may be used in a game state in which the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" is executed and in a game state in which the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" is not executed.
For example, the size of the decorative pattern used in a game state in which the "decorative pattern sudden stop effect" is executed may be smaller than the size of the decorative pattern used in a game state in which the "decorative pattern sudden stop effect" is not executed.
In addition, the size (area) of the area displaying the decorative pattern in a game state in which the "decorative pattern sudden stop effect" is executed may be smaller than the size of the area displaying the decorative pattern in a game state in which the "decorative pattern sudden stop effect" is not executed.
By adopting such an embodiment, the player can recognize whether or not the game state is such that the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" is executed.
Furthermore, in a game state where the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" is executed, the display mode and display position of the decorative symbol are compact, so the player does not need to move his or her eyes significantly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the moment when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped or displayed as stopped.

In a game state in which the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" is executed, the length of the fluctuation time when the decorative symbol stops in a manner indicating a miss and the length of the fluctuation time when the decorative symbol stops in a manner indicating a jackpot may be set to be the same.
In addition, in a game state in which the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" is executed, the length of time from when the varying display starts to when the decorative symbol stops in a manner indicating a miss until it temporarily stops should be the same as the length of time from when the varying display starts to when the decorative symbol stops in a manner indicating a jackpot until it temporarily stops.
The time for which the special symbols and decorative symbols fluctuate is determined by a fluctuation pattern table (see, for example, Figure 394), but for the fluctuation pattern used in the game state in which the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" is executed, it is preferable to adopt a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time.
For example, in the fluctuation pattern table for a loss, only fluctuation patterns with a fluctuation time of 1 second may be used, and in the fluctuation pattern table for a jackpot, only fluctuation patterns with a fluctuation time of 1 second may be used.
Also, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 1 second may be adopted in the fluctuation pattern table when a win occurs, and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 1 second may be adopted in the fluctuation pattern table when a win occurs. Also, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time longer than 1 second may be adopted in the fluctuation pattern table when a win occurs and the fluctuation pattern table when a win occurs, but it is preferable not to adopt a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of less than 1 second in the fluctuation pattern table when a win occurs and the fluctuation pattern table when a win occurs. Note that, for example, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 120 seconds may be adopted as a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time longer than 1 second, and when this fluctuation pattern is selected, a predetermined reach effect may be executed.
The time for which the decorative pattern is displayed in a static state is the same (for example, 0.5 seconds) whether the result of the variable display is a jackpot or a miss.
In addition, it is advisable to set the allocation probability so that a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation display time (a fluctuation pattern of 1 second) is more likely to be selected than a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation display time (a fluctuation pattern of 120 seconds). For example, it is advisable to set the probability that a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation display time (a fluctuation pattern of 120 seconds) is selected to 1%, and the probability that a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation display time (a fluctuation pattern of 1 second) is selected to 99%.
By adopting such an embodiment, each variable display is completed in approximately one second, so that the variable display of the decorative pattern progresses at a regular interval and at a good tempo.

In game modes where the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" is not being executed, it is advisable to use a variable pattern table that selects a longer variable display time. Furthermore, the decorative symbols may temporarily stop in the following order: left decorative symbol, right decorative symbol, and center decorative symbol. For example, the right decorative symbol may temporarily stop one second after the left decorative symbol temporarily stops, and the center decorative symbol may temporarily stop three seconds after the right decorative symbol temporarily stops. Note that if the temporarily stopped decorative symbols on the left and right are decorative symbols with the same number, this means that a reach state has been reached. In this case, since a reach effect may be executed in some cases, the time between the temporary stop of the right decorative symbol and the temporary stop of the center decorative symbol may be between 3 and 200 seconds, etc.

Although a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 1 second was given as an example, the fluctuation time is not limited to 1 second and may be, for example, less than twice the interval between game ball launches. For example, if 100 game balls are launched in 60 seconds, the interval between game ball launches will be 0.6 seconds. In this case, it is recommended that the fluctuation time be set to 1.2 seconds or less.

In the embodiment shown, in the gaming state in which the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" is executed, the left, center, and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at the same time, but the decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped in the order of the left decorative symbol, the center decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol. For example, the time from the temporary stop of the left decorative symbol to the temporary stop of the center decorative symbol may be the same as the time from the temporary stop of the center decorative symbol to the temporary stop of the right decorative symbol (for example, 0.2 seconds). Note that this is not limited to 0.2 seconds, and may be 0.1 seconds, 0.5 seconds, or the like.
In addition, in a game state in which the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" is not executed, the manner in which the left, center, and right decorative symbols temporarily stop is as described above.
In this way, by varying the order and timing at which the decorative symbols temporarily stop depending on the game state, the player can easily recognize whether or not the game state is one in which the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" is executed.

In a gaming state where the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" is executed, it is preferable to not execute some of the effects that indicate the degree of expectation. For example, it is preferable to not execute pseudo consecutive wins, reach effects, effects based on pre-reading processing (hold change effects, stock, etc.), etc.
If an effect showing the degree of expectation were to be executed, the player would be made aware that there was a high possibility of winning the jackpot, which could reduce the impact of the decorative symbols suddenly stopping at a double number, but by using this embodiment, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

In a gaming state in which the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" is executed, a predetermined sound effect may be output at the timing when the display of the decorative symbol starts to change.
Alternatively or additionally, a predetermined sound effect may be output at the timing when the decorative symbols temporarily stop. When the left, center, and right decorative symbols temporarily stop at the same time, a predetermined sound effect is output once. When the left, center, and right decorative symbols temporarily stop in sequence, a predetermined sound effect may be output once (this may be at the timing of the temporary stop of the left decorative symbol, the timing of the temporary stop of the center decorative symbol, or the timing of the temporary stop of the right decorative symbol), or a predetermined sound effect may be output for each timing of the temporary stop of the left, center, and right decorative symbols.
Alternatively or in addition to these, a predetermined sound effect may be output at the timing when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.
The length of the predetermined sound effect may be, for example, 0.1 seconds. The type of predetermined sound effect to be output when the variable display result is a miss and when the variable display result is a jackpot may be the same or different. In addition, when the pre-reading process suggests the result of the variable display over multiple variations, the type of predetermined sound effect may be changed, and the changed sound effect may indicate that there is a high possibility of a jackpot.
According to this embodiment, the player can be made to recognize by hearing that the varying display is being performed at a good tempo. Also, since the type of sound effect notifies or suggests that a jackpot will occur, the player can be made to recognize that a jackpot will occur even if the player is not looking at the screen.

In this way, by executing the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" and displaying the decorative symbols in a manner that indicates a jackpot, the player is suddenly notified that a jackpot has occurred. This can give the player a big surprise.

The player may be allowed to switch between the "normal button mode" and the "auto button mode" by performing a predetermined operation. Details of this will be explained below.
When the "normal button mode" is set, if the player operates a specified operation unit during the valid operation period, an effect corresponding to the operation will be executed, and if no operation is performed during the valid operation period, an effect corresponding to the operation will not generally be executed.
On the other hand, when "auto button mode" is set, if the player operates a predetermined operation unit during the valid operation period, an effect corresponding to the operation is executed, but even if no operation is performed during the valid operation period, an effect corresponding to the operation is executed at the end of the valid operation period. Alternatively, at a predetermined timing in the latter half of the valid operation period (for example, when two-thirds of the valid operation period has passed), an effect corresponding to the operation may be executed, assuming that an operation has been performed.
By adopting such an embodiment, if the player sets the "auto button mode," even if no operation is performed on a predetermined operation unit, the same effect as if an operation had been performed is executed, thereby preventing the player from being required to perform excessive operations. Also, the player can operate the unit when he or she wants to, and when he or she does not want to operate the unit, the same effect as if an operation had been performed is automatically executed, thereby improving convenience for the player. Also, it becomes possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player is unable to experience the effect corresponding to the operation.
In this specification, unless otherwise specified, various effects will be explained on the assumption that the button mode is set to "normal button mode."

On the other hand, depending on the type of effect that accepts operations, if the player does not perform an operation during the operation valid period, the same effect as if the operation had been performed will be executed at the timing when the operation valid period ends. For such effects, the following processing is performed in each mode.
When the "normal button mode" is set, if the player operates a specified operation unit during the valid operation period, an effect corresponding to the operation is executed, and if no operation is performed during the valid operation period, the same effect as if the operation was performed at the end of the valid operation period is executed.
On the other hand, when "auto button mode" is set, if the player operates a specified operating unit by a specific timing in the latter half of the valid operation period (for example, when two-thirds of the valid operation period has elapsed), an effect corresponding to the operation will be executed, and if no operation is performed by a specific timing in the latter half of the valid operation period, it will be assumed that an operation has been performed at that timing, and an effect corresponding to the operation will be executed.
In this embodiment, the same effects as those described above can be achieved.

The following describes an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 123 to 447. In this embodiment, a predetermined character acquires predetermined ingredients while the decorative patterns are being displayed in a variable manner, cooks the acquired ingredients to make miso soup, and another character judges whether the miso soup is tasty by tasting it or not, and a "miso soup effect" is executed in which the stopping state of the decorative patterns is indicated based on the judgment result.
In the "miso soup presentation," a martial artist character among the characters shown with reference to Figures 337 to 340 is displayed as the character who will cook. Also, a samurai character, a warrior character, and a wizard character are displayed as characters who will help with cooking. Also, a master character shown with reference to Figures 356, 365, etc. is displayed as the character who will taste the miso soup.

Below, the "Miso Soup Presentation" will be explained with reference to Figures 448 to 453, etc.
Fig. 448 is a presentation pattern table showing the presentation pattern for "Miso Soup Presentation." Fig. 449 shows a time chart when a presentation is performed based on presentation pattern PTN35. Figs. 450 to 453 show the display state of display area 1600a at a predetermined timing in the time chart shown in Fig. 449.

First, an overview of the "Miso Soup Presentation" will be explained with reference to the presentation pattern table in FIG.
In the "Miso Soup Presentation," a martial artist character is displayed and acquires ingredients, the martial artist character cooks using the acquired ingredients, the master character tastes the finished miso soup, and based on the results of the tasting, a display is displayed indicating whether the result of the special lottery is a jackpot or a loss.
The effect pattern table shown in Figure 448 sets the probability of winning a jackpot for each effect pattern, and the effect pattern to be executed is determined based on the results of a special lottery. The effect pattern includes the type of ingredients that can be obtained, the number of ingredients that can be obtained (1 to 3), the order in which the ingredients are obtained, whether or not a helper chef will appear, the type of helper chef, and the probability of winning a jackpot.
Whether or not an ingredient can be acquired is basically indicated to the player by the "ingredient acquisition operation presentation." In the "ingredient acquisition operation presentation," operation of the attack button 3710 is first enabled, and an ingredient determined by the presentation pattern is displayed when the attack button 3710 is operated within the operation valid period (3 seconds) or when the operation valid period has elapsed.
The number of times the "ingredient acquisition operation effect" is performed is one to three. The number of ingredients that can be acquired during one operation valid period is one.
If the "ingredient acquisition operation effect" is performed once, only the first ingredient in the effect pattern table can be acquired. If the "ingredient acquisition operation effect" is performed twice, the second ingredient can be acquired after the first ingredient in the effect pattern table is acquired. If the "ingredient acquisition operation effect" is performed three times, the ingredients can be acquired in the order of the first ingredient, the second ingredient, and the third ingredient in the effect pattern table.
In addition, a number of frames (three in this embodiment) corresponding to the maximum number of times the ``ingredient acquisition operation performance'' can be executed (number of ingredients that can be acquired) are displayed on the left side of the display area 1600a, and the acquired ingredients are displayed in the frames from top to bottom in the order in which they were acquired.
The ingredients that can be acquired in the "ingredient acquisition operation performance" are seven types: "starfish,""seacucumber,""sardine,""seaurchin,""pig,""matsutakemushroom," and "spiny lobster." Note that "starfish,""seacucumber,""sardine," and "sea urchin" may be collectively referred to as "starfish-sea urchin." Similarly, "starfish,""seacucumber,""sardine,""seaurchin," and "pig" may be collectively referred to as "starfish-pig."
In the effect pattern table shown in FIG. 448, the portion that reads "starfish - sea urchin" means that one of the ingredients "starfish,""seacucumber,""sardine," or "sea urchin" will be randomly selected and obtained. Similarly, the portion that reads "starfish - pig" means that one of the ingredients "starfish,""seacucumber,""sardine,""seaurchin," or "pig" will be randomly selected and obtained. Note that there are some combinations of ingredients that are excluded when randomly selected, but details will be described later.

As shown in the presentation pattern table of FIG. 448, the expectation level for "starfish to sea urchin" is set so that the more ingredients are displayed, the higher the expectation level, regardless of the type of ingredient.
Furthermore, the expectation level for "pigs" is set so that the more "pigs" acquired, the higher the expectation level, regardless of the number of "starfish" to "sea urchins" acquired.
Furthermore, as shown in presentation patterns PTN40 to PTN42, the probability of winning if a "matsutake" is acquired is set to 100%. In other words, the moment a "matsutake" is acquired, it is determined that a jackpot will occur. The maximum number of "matsutake" that can be acquired is one. Note that, since a jackpot is determined at the moment a "matsutake" is acquired, the "ingredient acquisition operation presentation" will not be performed after the moment a "matsutake" is acquired.

After the "ingredient acquisition operation effect" is executed, a "helper chef appearance effect" in which a helper chef is displayed may be executed. When the "helper chef appearance effect" is executed, the helper chef is displayed as one of a warrior character, a samurai character, or a wizard character. As shown in the effect pattern table of FIG. 448, the expectation of a jackpot is basically set to increase in the following order: when no helper chef is displayed, when a warrior character is displayed, when a samurai character is displayed, and when a wizard character is displayed.
The expectation rate when the wizard character is displayed is set to 100% (effect pattern PTN47). In other words, the moment the wizard character is displayed, it is determined that a big win will occur.

Next, special effect patterns will be described.
When effect pattern PTN44 is executed, all the ingredients acquired will be "sea urchin" and a warrior character will appear as a helping chef. In this case, the probability of success is 100%.
If the effect pattern PTN45 is executed, all the ingredients acquired will be "sea urchin" and a samurai character will appear as a helping chef. In this case, the probability of success is 50%.
Furthermore, when effect pattern PTN46 is executed, all the ingredients acquired will be "starfish" and a samurai character will appear as a helping chef. In this case, the probability of success is 100%.
Furthermore, when performance pattern PTN47 is executed, a wizard character appears as a helper chef. In this case, the probability of success is 100%. The ingredient to be acquired is randomly selected from among "starfish" to "pig," but the ingredients are controlled so that all three ingredients are not the same (for example, a combination of "sea urchin,""seaurchin," and "sea urchin").
Furthermore, when effect pattern PTN48 or effect pattern PTN49 is executed, "pig" and "sardine" can be acquired as the first and second ingredients. In this case, the expected probability is 100%. The "bu" in "pig" and the "i" in "sardine" combine to form "bui," or "V," which hints to the player that the probability of winning the jackpot is 100%. This is a pun, and as the player gains more gaming experience, he or she will come to recognize that the expected probability is 100%.
Furthermore, when the effect pattern PTN50 is executed, all the ingredients acquired will be "pork." In this case, the expectation rate is 100%.
Furthermore, when the effect pattern PTN51 is executed, all of the ingredients acquired will be "Spiny Lobster." In this case, the probability of winning is 100%. Note that, when "Spiny Lobster" is acquired as the first ingredient, the probability of winning a jackpot is confirmed to be 100%, but since "Spiny Lobster" is subsequently acquired as the second and third ingredients, the execution time of the "Miso Soup Effect" becomes longer, and the player can be provided with the enjoyment of winning a jackpot for a long period of time.

In addition, in the low-expectation presentation patterns (presentation pattern PTN01 to presentation pattern PTN39), the ingredient combinations or ingredient and chef combinations shown in presentation pattern PTN43 to presentation pattern PTN46, presentation pattern PTN48, and presentation pattern PTN49 are controlled so that they are not selected.

Below, an example of a presentation when presentation pattern PTN35 is selected and the "Miso Soup Presentation" is executed will be explained with reference to the time chart shown in Figure 449 and the display examples in display area 1600a shown in Figures 450 to 453.
At timing t0, the decorative pattern begins to change and enters a high-speed changing state. As the background image, a normal background image B, which shows the state of a post town, is displayed. In addition, the number of reserved balls at the first starting gate 2002 is two, and the color of the current reserved ball image is green. The colors of the first standby reserved ball image and the second standby reserved ball image are white. Figure 450(a) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t8.5, the left decorative symbol temporarily stops, and at timing t9, the right decorative symbol temporarily stops with the decorative symbol of the same number as the left decorative symbol that has already temporarily stopped (here, the symbol "4"), resulting in a reach state. Figure 450(b) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t10, the "Miso Soup Effect" begins to be executed. Specifically, first, the types of decorative symbols on the left and right are changed from normal decorative symbols to reach decorative symbols. Also, a horizontally long window is displayed near the center of the display area 1600a. Within this window, the words "Miso Soup Chance!" and "Can you satisfy your master?" are displayed. Also, the display of the standby images (here, the first standby image and the second standby image) is interrupted. The display of the current standby image continues. Figure 450(c) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t13, the display of the horizontally long window ends, and the master character and the master character's dialogue window are displayed on the left side of the display area 1600a. The words "Make a delicious miso soup!" are displayed in the master character's dialogue window. In addition, the martial artist character and the martial artist character's dialogue window are displayed on the right side of the display area 1600a. The words "We need to get some ingredients..." are displayed in the martial artist character's dialogue window. Figure 450(d) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t15, the "ingredient acquisition operation presentation" begins. During the "ingredient acquisition operation presentation," operation acceptance of the attack button 3710 is enabled for a predetermined period (3 seconds), and a circular, white simulated operation image resembling the attack button 3710 is displayed near the center of the display area 1600a. The character "press" is included in the center of the simulated operation image, indicating to the player how to operate the attack button 3710. In addition, below the simulated operation image, a remaining time gauge image indicating the valid operation period is displayed, and the passage of the predetermined period during which operations can be accepted is indicated to the player by changes in the gauge. In addition, a vertically long frame is displayed on the left side of the display area 1600a. Figure 450(e) shows the display state at the timing when the valid operation period begins. Furthermore, Figure 450(f) shows the display state at timing t16.5, when half of the valid operation period has elapsed.

At timing t18, the operation valid period ends, and "sardine" is displayed near the center of display area 1600a. In addition, a dialogue window for the martial artist character is displayed. The words "Got sardines!" are displayed in the dialogue window for the martial artist character. Figure 451(a) shows the display state at this time.
Although an example of the effect has been shown in which no operation is performed on the attack button 3710 during the valid operation period, if an operation is performed on the attack button 3710 during the valid operation period, the ingredients will be displayed at the time the operation is performed.

The ingredient displayed upon the end of the valid operation period or by operating the attack button 3710 will shrink and move over the course of one second from timing t18, and will be displayed within the topmost vertical frame. Figure 451 (b) shows the display state at this time. This display state will continue until the timing for the second "ingredient acquisition operation" to be performed arrives.

At timing t20, the second "ingredient acquisition operation presentation" begins. As with the first "ingredient acquisition operation presentation," operation acceptance of the attack button 3710 is enabled for a predetermined period (3 seconds), and a circular, white simulated operation image resembling the attack button 3710 is displayed near the center of the display area 1600a. The word "press" is included in the center of the simulated operation image, indicating to the player how to operate the attack button 3710. In addition, below the simulated operation image, a remaining time gauge image indicating the valid operation period is displayed, and the passage of the predetermined period during which operations can be accepted is indicated to the player by changes in the gauge. Figure 451(c) shows the display state at the timing when the valid operation period begins. Furthermore, Figure 451(d) shows the display state at timing t21.5, when half of the valid operation period has elapsed.

At timing t23, the operation valid period ends, and the "sea cucumber" is displayed near the center of the display area 1600a. In addition, a dialogue window for the martial artist character is displayed. The words "Got a sea cucumber!" are displayed in the dialogue window for the martial artist character. Figure 451 (e) shows the display state at this time.
Although an example of the effect has been shown in which no operation is performed on the attack button 3710 during the valid operation period, if an operation is performed on the attack button 3710 during the valid operation period, the ingredients will be displayed at the time the operation is performed.

The ingredient displayed upon the end of the valid operation period or upon operation of the attack button 3710 will shrink and move over the course of one second from timing t23, and will be displayed within the center frame of the vertically long frame. Figure 451 (f) shows the display state at this time. This display state will continue until the timing for the third "ingredient acquisition operation presentation" arrives.

At timing t25, the third "ingredient acquisition operation presentation" begins. As with the first and second "ingredient acquisition operation presentations," operation acceptance of the attack button 3710 is enabled for a predetermined period (3 seconds), and a circular, white simulated operation image resembling the attack button 3710 is displayed near the center of the display area 1600a. The word "press" is included in the center of the simulated operation image, indicating to the player how to operate the attack button 3710. In addition, below the simulated operation image, a remaining time gauge image indicating the valid operation period is displayed, and the passage of the predetermined period during which operations can be accepted is indicated to the player by changes in the gauge. Figure 451(g) shows the display state at the timing when the valid operation period begins. Figure 451(h) shows the display state at timing t26.5, when half of the valid operation period has elapsed.

At timing t28, the operation valid period ends, and the "pig" is displayed near the center of display area 1600a. In addition, a dialogue window for the martial artist character is displayed. The words "Got a pig!" are displayed in the dialogue window for the martial artist character. Figure 452(a) shows the display state at this time.
Although an example of the effect has been shown in which no operation is performed on the attack button 3710 during the valid operation period, if an operation is performed on the attack button 3710 during the valid operation period, the ingredients will be displayed at the time the operation is performed.

The ingredient displayed upon the expiration of the valid operation period or upon operation of the attack button 3710 moves and shrinks over one second from timing t28, and is displayed within the bottommost vertical frame. Figure 452(b) shows the display state at this time. This display state continues until timing t30.
In this way, the "ingredient acquisition operation effect" is executed a predetermined number of times, and the player can acquire the number of ingredients corresponding to the number of times the "ingredient acquisition operation effect" is executed.
Although the embodiment has been described with respect to a performance pattern in which the "ingredient acquisition operation performance" is executed three times, in the case of a performance pattern in which the "ingredient acquisition operation performance" is executed twice, the execution time of the "miso soup performance" is five seconds shorter. Similarly, in the case of a performance pattern in which the "ingredient acquisition operation performance" is executed once, the execution time of the "miso soup performance" is ten seconds shorter.

The "ingredient cooking presentation" begins at timing t30. During the "ingredient cooking presentation," an image is displayed of the martial artist character cooking the acquired ingredients, and finally an image of miso soup in a pot is displayed. The martial artist character's lines read, "Start cooking!" Figure 452 (c) shows the display state at timing t30, when the "ingredient cooking presentation" begins.

During the period from timing t31 to timing t32 while the "ingredients cooking performance" is being performed, the "assistant chef appears performance" may be performed.
Fig. 452(d) shows a display example in which a samurai character is displayed as a helping chef. The samurai character's line is "I'll help too!" As shown in the effect pattern table of Fig. 448, when the "helper chef appearance effect" is executed, the likelihood of winning a jackpot is higher than when it is not executed.
The lines displayed when the warrior character or samurai character is displayed may be the same as the samurai character's line, "I'll help too!", or different lines may be displayed for each character.

From timing t33 to timing t36, the martial artist character is displayed holding ingredients in his hands. A pot is also displayed to the left of the martial artist character. The martial artist character's lines read "Cooking!" Figure 452(f) shows the display state at this time.
Next, at timing t36, the acquired ingredients are added to the pot and the miso soup is displayed as being ready. The words "Miso soup is ready!" are displayed as the lines of the martial artist character. This display continues until timing t38. Figure 452(g) shows the display state at this time. The "ingredient cooking performance" ends at timing t38.

At timing t38, a "tasting performance" begins, in which the master character tastes the completed miso soup. Between timing t38 and timing t40, the master character is displayed on the left side of display area 1600a. The master character's lines are also displayed, saying "I'm starving!" Figure 452 (h) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t40, the operation of the attack button 3710 becomes valid for a predetermined period (3 seconds), and a circular, white simulated operation image resembling the attack button 3710 is displayed near the center of the display area 1600a. The character "press" is included in the center of the simulated operation image, indicating to the player how to operate the attack button 3710. In addition, a remaining time gauge image indicating the valid operation period is displayed below the simulated operation image, and the passage of the predetermined period during which operations can be accepted is indicated to the player by changes in the gauge. Figure 453(a) shows the display state at the timing when the valid operation period begins.
At timing t43, the valid operation period ends, and one of the following lines from the master character is displayed near the center of display area 1600a: "It's delicious!" or "No, no, no!" When the line "It's delicious!" is displayed, the decorative symbols stop in a repeating combination (in this example, "4", "4", "4"), resulting in a jackpot; when the line "No, no, no!" is displayed, the decorative symbols stop in a losing combination (in this example, "4", "5", "4"), resulting in a miss.
Although an example of the presentation has been shown in which no operation is performed on the attack button 3710 during the valid operation period, if an operation is performed on the attack button 3710 during the valid operation period, the dialogue will be displayed at the time the operation is performed.

With reference to Figures 453(b) to 453(d), a display example when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot will be described. When the operation valid period ends at timing t43, the line "It's delicious!" is displayed as the line from the master character. This display continues until timing t45. Figure 453(b) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t45, the center decorative symbol temporarily stops at the same number (here, "4") as the number on the decorative symbols on the left and right. At the same time, the display of the master character and the master character's lines ends, and the display of the martial artist character and the martial artist character's lines ("Yay!") begins. Figure 453 (c) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t47, the type of decorative symbol is changed from the reach decorative symbol to the normal decorative symbol.
At timing t48, the display of the decorative symbols stops and the display stops. The display of the martial artist character also stops, and the "miso soup effect" ends. Figure 453(d) shows the display state at this time.
The decorative symbols remain stopped until timing t49, after which the big win game begins.

With reference to Figures 453(e) to 453(g), a display example when the result of the special lottery is a loss will be described. When the operation valid period ends at timing t43, the line "No, no!" is displayed as the line from the master character. This display continues until timing t45. Figure 453(e) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t45, the central decorative pattern temporarily stops at a number (here, "5") that is one number away from the numbers of the decorative patterns on the left and right. At the same time, the display of the master character and the master character's lines ends, and the display of the martial artist character and the martial artist character's lines ("No good...") begins. Figure 453 (f) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t47, the type of decorative symbol is changed from the reach decorative symbol to the normal decorative symbol.
At timing t48, the display of the decorative symbols stops and stops. The display of the martial artist character also stops, and the "miso soup effect" ends. Figure 453 (g) shows the display state at this time.
The stopped state of the decorative pattern continues until timing t49, after which the variable display of the next decorative pattern begins.

As shown in the presentation pattern table of FIG. 448, the expected probability is 100% when "matsutake mushroom" or "spiny lobster" is obtained as the ingredients, or when "sardine" and "pork" are obtained as the ingredients.
In addition, the probability of an appearance of a wizard character in the "Assistant Chef Appears" performance, an appearance of a warrior character in the "Assistant Chef Appears" performance when all three acquired ingredients are "sea urchin," or an appearance of a samurai character in the "Assistant Chef Appears" performance when all three acquired ingredients are "starfish" is 100%.
In this way, the probability of winning a jackpot is 100% when a special ingredient is obtained, a specific combination of ingredients occurs, or a special effect in which a character appears is executed, etc. Note that such an effect in which the probability of winning a jackpot is 100% may be referred to as a "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" below.

When the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" is executed, predetermined ingredients or characters are displayed, and when the image that confirms the occurrence of a jackpot is displayed, the images of the ingredients or characters may be displayed in rainbow colors. Alternatively, a rainbow-colored effect image may be displayed surrounding the ingredients or characters.
Alternatively, or in addition to these, the words "Jackpot Confirmed!" may be displayed to indicate that a display has been made that confirms that a jackpot will occur, and these words may be displayed in rainbow colors.
By displaying such a picture, the player can be made aware that a special image display has been displayed indicating that a big win has been confirmed.

In the "miso soup effect" of this embodiment, the likelihood of a jackpot is indicated by the type of ingredients and assistant chef, and ultimately, the "tasting effect" shows the player whether or not they have won the jackpot. Furthermore, by providing multiple opportunities to acquire ingredients, players can enjoy the excitement of wondering how many of each ingredient they can acquire. Furthermore, the execution of the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" can add to the player's excitement.

In the embodiment shown, only martial artist characters are used to make miso soup, but multiple types of characters may be used to make miso soup. Furthermore, the expected level may differ depending on the type of character.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the "ingredient acquisition operation presentation" is executed one to three times and one ingredient can be acquired in one "ingredient acquisition operation presentation," there may be cases in which an ingredient cannot be acquired when the "ingredient acquisition operation presentation" is executed. In this case, the "ingredient acquisition operation presentation" may be executed two or more times so that at least one ingredient can be acquired. In other words, a presentation pattern in which the "ingredient acquisition operation presentation" is executed only once and no ingredient can be acquired in that "ingredient acquisition operation presentation" may not be executed. Conversely, there may be cases in which no ingredient can be acquired when the "ingredient acquisition operation presentation" is executed a predetermined number of times (one to three times). It is preferable that the expectation level for not acquiring an ingredient in this way be lower than the expectation level for acquiring an ingredient.
It is also possible to make it possible to acquire multiple ingredients in one "ingredient acquisition operation effect." Note that the maximum number of ingredients that can be acquired is three, so the number of ingredients that can be acquired at one time is either one, two, or three. Furthermore, once three ingredients have been acquired, it is advisable to stop executing any more "ingredient acquisition operation effects" and start the effects following the "assistant chef appears effect."

An embodiment has been shown in which, when the "ingredient acquisition operation performance" is executed, an operation section simulating image that resembles the attack button 3710 and a remaining time gauge image that indicates the effective period of the operation are displayed, but in addition to these images, multiple ingredients may be displayed so that one of these ingredients can be acquired.
For example, a display method for when an ingredient is acquired may be adopted in which four ingredients are displayed in a circular arrangement, and each of the four ingredients is selected in turn like a roulette, and one of the ingredients is finally selected when an operation is performed on the attack button 3710 or when the valid operation period ends.
In this case, one of the displayed ingredients will be selected, and ingredients that have a high chance of being obtained, such as "pork,""matsutakemushroom," and "spiny lobster," will be displayed, which can increase the player's interest in the presentation.

Although the embodiments shown above allow ingredients to be acquired and the results of tasting are shown by operating the attack button 3710 or the expiration of the valid operation period ("ingredient acquisition operation effect" and "tasting effect"), these effects may also be effects that do not require the operation of any operation unit. In other words, the valid operation period may simply be the effect execution period. Even in this case, the player can be entertained by wondering what ingredients can be acquired and what tasting results will be shown.

Condiments may also be available as ingredients. Examples of condiments that can be acquired include salt, soy sauce, and red miso. The likelihood of winning a jackpot may also vary depending on the type of condiment. For example, the likelihood of winning may increase in the order of salt, soy sauce, and red miso, with the likelihood of winning red miso being 100%.

Although the embodiment has been shown in which the ingredient is displayed near the center of the display area 1600a when the ingredient is acquired, the display method when the ingredient is acquired may differ depending on the type of ingredient.
For example, the display method may be different for ingredients with a relatively low expectation such as "starfish-sea urchin" and ingredients with a relatively high expectation such as "pork,""matsutakemushroom," and "spiny lobster."
For example, "starfish to sea urchin" may be displayed suddenly near the center of the display area 1600a, while "pig,""matsutakemushroom," and "spiny lobster" may appear from the right side of the display area 1600a and stop near the center of the display area 1600a.
By adopting such an embodiment, it becomes easier to recognize that an ingredient with high expectations has appeared.
Furthermore, even for the same ingredient, the degree of expectation may differ depending on the appearance mode. For example, instead of suddenly displaying "starfish-pig" near the center of display area 1600a, a display method may be adopted in which "starfish-pig" is displayed semi-transparently near the center of display area 1600a and gradually becomes opaque. The degree of expectation may be higher when the ingredient is displayed in the latter display method than when the ingredient is displayed in the former display method.

In the embodiment shown, the "Assistant Chef Appearance Presentation" is executed during the "Ingredient Cooking Presentation" and characters (warrior character, samurai character, wizard character) are displayed for a predetermined period of time, but these characters may be displayed in place of the martial artist character. Alternatively, they may be displayed together with the martial artist character in the same way as the martial artist character.
By adopting such an embodiment, it becomes easier to recognize which character has appeared.
Also, a plurality of lines for the character may be prepared, and different expectations may be indicated depending on the type of line displayed.

During the "ingredient cooking effect," a "cut-in effect" may be executed, indicating the likelihood that the decorative pattern being displayed will stop and result in a jackpot. For example, a timing may be set in which text such as "Just the right amount!" is displayed, and there may be cases in which the text is displayed and cases in which it is not. In this case, the likelihood may be higher when the text is displayed than when it is not. Additionally, there may be multiple types of text display, and different expectations may be indicated depending on the type of text display displayed. For example, the text "Just the right amount!" and "Worst amount..." may be displayed. In this case, the likelihood of the former is higher.

In the embodiment shown, a "cut-in effect" is executed during the "ingredient cooking effect" to display predetermined text and indicate the degree of expectation. However, instead of or in addition to the text display, cooking utensils may or may not be displayed during the "ingredient cooking effect." Furthermore, when cooking utensils are displayed, it is preferable to set the degree of expectation higher than when cooking utensils are not displayed. Furthermore, multiple types of cooking utensils may be provided, and different degrees of expectation may be indicated depending on the type of cooking utensil displayed.
In addition, a predetermined expectation level may be indicated based on the combination of the displayed type of cooking utensil and ingredients.

Although the embodiment in which the "Miso Soup Effect" starts after the decorative symbols reach a ready state has been shown, the decorative symbols may start to change and the "Miso Soup Effect" may start before the ready state is formed. In this case, the decorative symbols will form a ready state after the start of the "Miso Soup Effect".
In addition, although an embodiment has been shown in which the "miso soup effect" is executed until the timing when the decorative pattern starts to stop displaying, the "miso soup effect" may also be ended at the timing when the decorative pattern changes from the reach decorative pattern to the normal decorative pattern or when the decorative pattern stops displaying.
Referring to the examples of the presentation shown with reference to Figures 449 to 453, an example is shown in which the type of decorative pattern is changed from a reach decorative pattern to a normal decorative pattern at timing t47, but the ``miso soup presentation'' may also be ended at the timing when the type of decorative pattern is changed from a reach decorative pattern to a normal decorative pattern (in this case, timing t47).

A special background image dedicated to the "Miso Soup Effect" may be displayed during the period from the start to the end of the "Miso Soup Effect" execution.

In the "miso soup effect," an embodiment has been shown in which an effect with a 100% expected probability of a jackpot ("jackpot occurrence confirmation effect") is executed (see, for example, Figure 448), but an embodiment in which the probability of the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" being executed is changed based on a predetermined trigger will be described with reference to Figure 454.
In this embodiment, there are provided a "normal mode with probability of certain effect execution" and a "changed mode with probability of certain effect execution," which have different probabilities of occurrence of the "jackpot occurrence certain effect," and the mode is switched from one mode to the other based on a predetermined trigger.

Figure 454 shows a presentation pattern table in which presentation patterns with a 100% expected jackpot probability have been extracted from the presentation pattern table shown with reference to Figure 448, and the specific execution probability of the ``jackpot occurrence confirmation presentation'' for each presentation pattern has been set.
In the presentation pattern table shown in Figure 454, the probability of executing the "jackpot occurrence confirmation presentation" in the "confirmed presentation execution probability normal mode" and the probability of executing the "jackpot occurrence confirmation presentation" in the "confirmed presentation execution probability change mode" are set.
The execution probability is the probability that a predetermined "jackpot confirmation effect" will be executed when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. The execution probability is set according to the type of effect pattern and the mode set when the effect is executed.
For example, in the effect pattern PTN40, "matsutake mushroom" can be obtained as the first ingredient, and this effect pattern is executed once in 200 times when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot in the "normal fixed effect execution probability mode." On the other hand, this effect pattern is executed twice in 200 times when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot in the "change fixed effect execution probability mode."
In addition, the presentation pattern PTN48 allows the player to obtain "pig" as the first ingredient and "sardine" as the second ingredient, and this presentation pattern is executed once in 200 times when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot in both the "normal mode of confirmed presentation execution probability" and the "change mode of confirmed presentation execution probability."
In this way, depending on the type of presentation pattern, the probability of executing the "big win occurrence confirmation presentation" changes depending on which mode is selected: the "confirmed presentation execution probability normal mode" or the "confirmed presentation execution probability change mode."

If the decorative symbol changes result in a miss 100 times in a row in "Normal Confirmed Effects Execution Probability Mode," the mode will transition to "Changed Confirmed Effects Execution Probability Mode." Also, if the decorative symbol changes result in a miss 10 times in a row in "Changed Confirmed Effects Execution Probability Mode," the mode will transition to "Normal Confirmed Effects Execution Probability Mode." Furthermore, if a jackpot occurs while "Changed Confirmed Effects Execution Probability Mode" is set, the "Changed Confirmed Effects Execution Probability Mode" will end and the mode will transition to "Normal Confirmed Effects Execution Probability Mode."

In the embodiment shown, when the decorative pattern fluctuation results in a miss 100 times in a row in the "normal mode with probability of execution of confirmed effects", the mode transitions to the "changed probability of execution of confirmed effects mode", but the mode transition to the "changed probability of execution of confirmed effects mode" may be made on the condition that a predetermined number of misses occur, not limited to 100 times.
Other conditions may be adopted as conditions for transitioning from the “normal fixed effect execution probability mode” to the “changed fixed effect execution probability mode.” For example, if the decorative pattern variation result is a miss while a gold reserved image is displayed as the current reserved image, or if the decorative pattern variation result is a miss despite a highly anticipated reach effect being executed, the “normal fixed effect execution probability mode” may be transitioned to the “changed fixed effect execution probability mode.”
By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to reduce the stress felt by the player when the decorative pattern variation results in a miss.

In the embodiment shown, the mode transitions to the "normal mode with probability of confirmed effect execution" when the decorative pattern display changes 10 times, but the mode may be transitioned to the "normal mode with probability of confirmed effect execution" when the display changes a predetermined number of times, not limited to 10 times.

Based on the look-ahead process, the ingredients and characters that will be displayed in the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" may be displayed in advance in a predetermined variable display before the "miso soup effect" is executed. Also, the displayed ingredients and characters may be acquired as ingredients or displayed as assistant chefs in the variable display when the "miso soup effect" is executed. For example, ingredients such as "pig" and "matsutake mushroom" or characters such as warrior characters and wizard characters may be displayed in advance.
In this case, it is possible to know that there is a high probability of a jackpot or that a jackpot is certain to occur before the variable display in which the "miso soup effect" is executed begins.
The ingredients and characters displayed by the pre-reading process may be ingredients and characters whose appearance rate changes when the mode switches to the "Definitive Performance Execution Probability Change Mode," and ingredients and characters whose appearance rate does not change may not be displayed based on the pre-reading process, but may be displayed only while the "Miso Soup Performance" is being executed.

In the effect pattern PTN47 in the effect pattern table shown in FIG. 454, the three ingredients may be set to a pattern of "starfish - matsutake mushroom." That is, it may be possible to acquire a "matsutake mushroom" in three "ingredient acquisition operation effects." Also, it may be possible to display a "matsutake mushroom" based on a look-ahead process.
In this case, when effect pattern PTN40 to effect pattern PTN42 are selected, "matsutake" may be displayed by the pre-reading process at a stage before the execution of the "miso soup effect" is started.
On the other hand, when effect pattern PTN47 is selected, the wizard character is displayed only during the execution of the "miso soup effect," and is not displayed at a stage before the execution of the "miso soup effect" starts, because the wizard character is not a character displayed by the pre-reading process.
That is, although the wizard character may start to be displayed after the "matsutake" has started to be displayed, the "matsutake" will never start to be displayed after the wizard character has started to be displayed.
According to this embodiment, the premium display ("matsutake"), which has a higher probability of appearing, can be viewed for a longer period of time, which is suitable for players who want to know quickly whether they have won or not, and players who want to take photos or videos of the premium display. Furthermore, if the premium display ("matsutake") is displayed in the first or second "ingredient acquisition operation presentation," and the "ingredient acquisition operation presentation" is executed thereafter, it is confirmed that the premium display (wizard character) will be displayed, which is suitable for players who want to take photos or videos of the premium display (wizard character). In particular, when taking videos, the premium display (wizard character) can be captured from start to finish.
On the other hand, since the premium display (wizard character) whose appearance probability remains low without any change is visible for a short time, the "wizard character" becomes a premium display that can only be seen by players who have put in more effort, making it suitable for players who want to put in more effort.
In this way, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in games for players with a wide range of playing styles.

Referring to Figure 454, it has been shown that there are "jackpot occurrence confirmation effects" whose execution probability changes and "jackpot occurrence confirmation effects" whose execution probability does not change, and in the case of an effect pattern in which the execution probability changes, the "taste effect" is executed in the manner shown with reference to Figures 452 and 453, but in the case of an effect pattern in which the execution probability does not change, the execution manner of the "taste effect" may be special.
For example, the line "It's delicious!" may be suddenly displayed as the line from the master character without accepting any operation as shown in Fig. 453(a). Alternatively, the display of the martial artist character may continue even after timing t38 when the "ingredient cooking performance" ends, without the master character appearing, and further, the line "My master will be satisfied!" may be displayed as the line from the martial artist character without accepting any operation.
According to such an embodiment, no operation is accepted in the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" which does not have a high probability of being executed, so the player can enjoy the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" which does not have a high probability of being executed.

The "ingredient cooking presentation" may be configured so that no characters other than the "wizard character" appear as assistant chefs. In this case, the presentation will focus on whether or not the "wizard character" appears, so the player will be able to detect the wizard character's appearance without paying attention to the character that has appeared, for example, by a premonition effect display. Therefore, by being able to detect the wizard character's appearance in advance, it is possible to, for example, prepare in advance for taking photographs, and it is possible to prevent the player from missing the character, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

When the "jackpot confirmation effect" is executed, the luminous decorative members provided on the door frame 3 and the luminous decorative members provided on the game board 5 may be illuminated in a predetermined luminous pattern (e.g., rainbow colors). Also, different luminous patterns may be used for the "jackpot confirmation effect" with a high probability of execution and the "jackpot confirmation effect" with a low probability of execution. For example, in the case of the "jackpot confirmation effect" with a high probability of execution, the rainbow luminous pattern may be realized using only the luminous decorative members provided on the game board 5, while in the case of the "jackpot confirmation effect" with a low probability of execution, the rainbow luminous pattern may be realized using the luminous decorative members provided on the door frame 3 as well. In this way, different luminous patterns can be realized by varying the number of luminous decorative members used to realize the rainbow luminous pattern.
Furthermore, in the case of a "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" with a high probability of execution, a rainbow-colored light emission pattern may be realized by some of the light-emitting decorative members provided on the door frame 3 and the gaming board 5, and in the case of a "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" with a low probability of execution, a rainbow-colored light emission pattern may be realized by other light-emitting decorative members provided on the door frame 3 and the gaming board 5 in addition to some of the light-emitting decorative members provided on the door frame 3 and the gaming board 5. In this case, too, the number of light-emitting decorative members used to realize the rainbow-colored light emission pattern may be different.
In addition, a rainbow-colored light-emitting pattern using luminous decorative members is realized in both the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" with a high probability of execution and the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" with a low probability of execution, but the light intensity of the rainbow-colored light-emitting pattern when the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" with a low probability of execution is executed may be made greater than the light intensity of the rainbow-colored light-emitting pattern when the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" with a high probability of execution is executed.
In addition, a rainbow-colored light emission pattern using luminous decorative members is realized in both the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" with a high probability of execution and the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" with a high probability of execution, but the length of time for which the rainbow-colored light emission pattern is displayed when the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" with a low probability of execution is executed may be longer than the length of time for which the rainbow-colored light emission pattern is displayed when the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" with a low probability of execution is executed.
According to this embodiment, the player can distinguish whether a "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" with a high probability of execution has occurred or a "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" with a low probability of execution. Also, the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" with a low probability of execution can be made more exciting.

There are multiple patterns in which the "matsutake" appears, such as when the first ingredient is acquired, when the second ingredient is acquired, and when the third ingredient is acquired. In addition, the "matsutake" can be displayed before the "miso soup effect" begins to be executed, suggesting that the "miso soup effect" will be executed. As a result, there are multiple patterns for the time when the "matsutake" is visibly displayed, and it is possible to give the player a sense of excitement at various times.
Furthermore, the minimum display time of the "matsutake" may be set to be shorter than the display time of the wizard character, and the maximum display time of the "matsutake" may be set to be longer than the display time of the wizard character. By providing patterns for the visible premium effects in this way, it is possible to not only attract players who want to enjoy the premium effects, but also to prevent players from missing them despite the increased probability of the premium effects being achieved. If the only pattern in which the display time of the "matsutake" is longer than the display time of the wizard character (i.e., the "matsutake" begins to be displayed only before the "miso soup" effect begins to be executed) were the "matsutake" not to be displayed at the start of the "miso soup" effect, the player would be able to tell that the "matsutake" would not be displayed as a premium effect, which would result in a decrease in interest in the game. The above configuration can prevent such a situation.

The decorative pattern (or the decorative pattern indicating a reach state) may be made invisible and then displayed again at either or both of the timing when the "Miso Soup Presentation" starts and the timing when each ingredient is acquired in the "Ingredient Acquisition Operation Presentation."
In this way, when an ingredient such as "matsutake mushroom" is displayed as having been acquired before the "miso soup effect" starts, the decorative pattern (or the decorative pattern indicating a reach state) may be visible, or may be made difficult to see (or hidden), for example, by another preview effect, etc., whereas when an ingredient is displayed as having been acquired after the "miso soup effect" starts, the decorative pattern (or the decorative pattern indicating a reach state) is never made visible, and is always made difficult to see (or hidden). Specifically, when the decorative pattern is displayed, the "matsutake mushroom" of the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" may start to be displayed, but the "spiny lobster" will not start to be displayed, and when the decorative pattern is made difficult to see (or hidden), the "matsutake mushroom" and "spiny lobster" may start to be displayed. With the above configuration, until the "miso soup effect" starts, ingredients can be displayed even before the reach is reached, so it is possible to draw attention to the decorative patterns while suggesting that the "miso soup effect" will be executed by displaying the ingredients, and after the "miso soup effect" starts, the player knows that the reach state has been reached, so the player can focus on the type of ingredients that the player is paying attention to rather than the decorative patterns.

When the "Spiny Lobster" begins to be displayed, there are two more times when the "Spiny Lobster" will be displayed, but the decorative symbols may remain hidden from the first time the "Spiny Lobster" is displayed until the third time it is displayed. In this case, the decorative symbols will be hidden for a longer period when the "Spiny Lobster" is displayed than when the "Matsutake" is displayed, making it possible to adjust the decorative symbol hiding period according to the number of ingredients, and allowing the player to play while minimizing anxiety caused by the symbols being difficult to see.

For example, when a "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" (display of "matsutake mushroom" or the like) with a changeable probability is executed, the "taste effect" is configured to announce a jackpot with a decorative pattern of one of multiple patterns, but when a "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect"("kurumi x 3") with an unchangeable probability is executed, the "taste effect" may announce a jackpot with a decorative pattern of a specific pattern of multiple patterns (a pattern that awards a more advantageous benefit than other patterns, or a pattern that suggests that it will not be more disadvantageous than other patterns).
This can give a more premium feel. Also, for players who are more interested in the bonuses than the presentation, the display of "Spiny Lobster x 3" or the like can create a sense of anticipation.

It may be possible to execute a predetermined effect having multiple aspects that can suggest the likelihood of a jackpot regarding the variable display (for example, a predetermined preview effect or a chance-up effect such as red letters displayed during a reach).
In this case, for the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effects" whose execution probability can be changed (such as the display of "matsutake mushroom"), the above-mentioned predetermined effects can be executed in any of a plurality of ways even when the display begins, and for the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effects" whose execution probability cannot be changed (such as "kuruma lobster x 3"), the above-mentioned predetermined effects can be configured not to be executed when the display begins.
By doing so, when the "Spiny Lobster" starts to be displayed, a jackpot will always occur, but the "ingredient acquisition operation effect" will be executed two more times, so other effects that suggest the degree of expectation can be suppressed in order to make the player who understands that a jackpot will occur pay maximum attention to the display of the ingredient acquisition ("Spiny Lobster"), and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the premium effect, which has a low probability of execution and whose probability of execution cannot be changed, is obstructed by the effect display of other effects. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the embodiment shown, the mode is switched between the "normal fixed effect execution probability mode" and the "changed fixed effect execution probability mode" based on the player's operation of the handle 302, which launches the gaming ball and changes the decorative pattern. However, other modes may be used instead of or in addition to these. For example, the gaming machine may be equipped with a clock function that measures the date and time, and automatically switch between the "normal fixed effect execution probability mode" and the "changed fixed effect execution probability mode" at a predetermined timing during business hours. Furthermore, the "normal fixed effect execution probability mode" and the "changed fixed effect execution probability mode" may be manually switched between by a store clerk or player operating the operation unit. Furthermore, the currently set mode, either the "normal fixed effect execution probability mode" or the "changed fixed effect execution probability mode," may be displayed in the display area 1600a. According to this embodiment, it becomes possible to switch between the "normal confirmed effect execution probability mode" and the "changed confirmed effect execution probability mode" at any time, so if one player stops playing in the "changed confirmed effect execution probability mode," when another player starts playing, they can switch to the "normal confirmed effect execution probability mode" and start playing.

When a manual switch is made from the "normal mode with probability of confirmed performance execution" to the "changed mode with probability of confirmed performance execution" while the "miso soup performance" is being executed or during the variable display in which the "miso soup performance" is being executed, the "changed mode with probability of confirmed performance execution" is not reflected in the variable display being executed at the time of the switch, even if the switch is immediately after the start of the variable display, and the performance executed during the variable display may be configured to be executed with the execution probability in the "normal mode with probability of confirmed performance execution."
Furthermore, the execution probability in the "confirmed performance execution probability change mode" may be configured to be reflected when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display currently being executed ended at the time of switching, or when the next variable display starts, and in this case, it is advisable to notify that the "confirmed performance execution probability change mode" has been reflected at the time when the "confirmed performance execution probability change mode" is reflected.
As a result, for example, if the actual machine configuration were to immediately reflect the execution probability in the "Definite Effect Execution Probability Change Mode" at the time of switching and execute an effect, if a mode change were accepted due to an incorrect operation or the like, an effect that does not match the player's intention would be executed, resulting in a decrease in interest in the game.By delaying the reflection of the execution probability in the mode with the above configuration, this situation can be prevented, and the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

The "jackpot occurrence confirmation effects" shown with reference to FIG. 454 each have an execution probability of 1/200 in the "confirmed effect execution probability normal mode." In the "confirmed effect execution probability change mode," the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effects" whose execution probability is changed and the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effects" whose execution probability is not changed may have different execution probabilities in the "confirmed effect execution probability normal mode."
For example, the execution probability of the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" whose execution probability is changed in the "confirmed effect execution probability normal mode" may be 2/200, and the execution probability in the "confirmed effect execution probability change mode" may be 4/200, while the execution probability of the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" whose execution probability is not changed may be 1/200. In this way, by setting the execution probability of the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" whose execution probability is changed higher than the execution probability of the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" whose execution probability is not changed, it is possible to further extend the operation of the gaming machine.
Alternatively, the execution probability of the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" whose execution probability is changed in the "confirmed effect execution probability normal mode" may be 1/200, the execution probability in the "confirmed effect execution probability change mode" may be 4/200, and the execution probability of the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" whose execution probability is not changed may be 2/200. In this way, by changing the execution probability of the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" whose execution probability is changed from a state lower to a state higher than the execution probability of the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" whose execution probability is not changed, it is possible to significantly change the execution probability of the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" and change the impression that the player has of the gaming machine, thereby achieving even longer operation times for the gaming machine.

In the "determined effect execution probability change mode", the rate at which the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" is executed (for example, 150/200) may be configured to be greater than the rate at which the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" is not executed (for example, 50/200) for one variation in which the result of the lottery is a jackpot.
In the "normal mode of probability of execution of confirmed effects," the probability that the "jackpot occurrence confirmed effects" will be executed is 10/200, and the probability that the "jackpot occurrence confirmed effects" will not be executed is 190/200, as shown in FIG. 454.
This can increase the motivation of players who want to see the "big win occurrence confirmation effect" which has a low probability in the "confirmation effect execution probability change mode."

In this embodiment, the probability of some "jackpot occurrence confirmation effects" being executed is increased depending on the game state, thereby satisfying players who want to see those "jackpot occurrence confirmation effects." Incidentally, if a player sees all of the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effects," there is a risk that they will no longer play on that gaming machine, shortening the gaming machine's operating period. However, by not increasing the execution probability for some of the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effects," it is possible to increase the probability that players will continue playing for long periods of time, thereby lengthening the gaming machine's operating period.

With reference to Figures 448 to 453, an embodiment in which ingredients and characters are displayed in the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" has been shown, but further embodiments of the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" will be described below. In this embodiment, a "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" in which ingredients and characters perform special movements when displayed will be described.

As shown in Figures 451 and 452, in the "ingredient acquisition operation presentation," the acquired ingredient is first displayed in the upper center of display area 1600a, and then the ingredient is displayed in a frame on the left side of display area 1600a as it shrinks and moves.
Here, two types of display modes for the ingredients are employed: a static mode in which the ingredients themselves do not move (for example, a still image is displayed) and a dynamic mode in which the ingredients themselves move (for example, a mode in which the ingredients are displayed in a periodically swinging manner), and when the ingredients are displayed in a dynamic mode, a jackpot occurs. In this case, displaying the ingredients in a dynamic mode is referred to as a "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect."
In addition, two types of timing are provided for displaying ingredients in a dynamic manner. Specifically, there are timings when the ingredients are displayed in the upper center of the display area 1600a and timings when the ingredients are displayed in a frame provided on the left side of the display area 1600a. In the former case, the ingredients are displayed in a dynamic manner at the same time as the ingredients start to be displayed. In the latter case, the ingredients are initially displayed in a static manner, and then displayed in a dynamic manner when the ingredients have completed moving into the frame.
The ingredients that may be displayed in a dynamic manner are "starfish,""seacucumber,""sardine,""seaurchin," and "pork.""Matsutakemushroom" and "spiny lobster" are never displayed in a dynamic manner.

At a timing before the execution of the "miso soup effect" starts (for example, timing t5 when the decorative patterns on the left, center, and right are rapidly changing), one of the following may be displayed in advance at a predetermined position in the display area 1600a: "starfish,""seacucumber,""sardine,""seaurchin,""pig,""matsutakemushroom," or "spiny lobster."
In this case, the "Miso Soup Presentation" starts, and the previously displayed ingredients can be acquired in the "Ingredient Acquisition Operation Presentation." The previously displayed ingredients move from their previously displayed positions to the top center of the display area 1600a, and then move into a frame on the left side of the display area 1600a. In other words, the previously displayed ingredients continue to be displayed until the "Ingredient Acquisition Operation Presentation" starts.
Furthermore, when a presentation pattern for acquiring three ingredients is selected, the ingredients that are displayed in advance may be configured so that only one of the three ingredients is displayed in advance, two of the ingredients are displayed in advance, or all three of the ingredients are displayed in advance.

When displaying ingredients in advance, "starfish," "sea cucumber," and "sardine" may be displayed in both a dynamic and static manner. On the other hand, "sea urchin," "pork," "matsutake mushroom," and "spiny lobster" may be displayed in advance only in a static manner.

According to such an embodiment, the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" is executed at different times. Since the player does not know when the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" will occur, the player can concentrate on the game. Furthermore, a player who knows all the possible times when the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" can be executed can play in anticipation until the very end of the variable display. Conversely, a player who does not know all the possible times when the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" can be executed will feel a sense of elation when the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" suddenly appears at an unexpected time.
In order to achieve this effect, it is better to have more opportunities to execute the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect."

For example, in performance pattern PTN03, "starfish to sea urchin" are displayed as the first to third ingredients, but in this case, the first ingredient may be displayed in either a dynamic or static manner, while the second and third ingredients may be displayed only in a static manner. Alternatively, only the second ingredient may be displayed in a dynamic manner, or only the third ingredient may be displayed in a dynamic manner.
In addition, in performance pattern PTN50, three "pigs" are displayed as ingredients, but the first "pig" may be displayed either dynamically or statically, while the second and third "pigs" may be displayed only statically. Alternatively, only the second ingredient may be displayed dynamically, or only the third ingredient may be displayed dynamically.
Although effect pattern PTN03 and effect pattern PTN50 are given as examples, ingredients may be displayed in a similar manner in other effect patterns. In this manner, in an embodiment in which ingredients are displayed multiple times, one of the ingredients may be displayed in a dynamic manner. In this case, the player does not know when the ingredient will be displayed in a dynamic manner, so the player can anticipate up to three times when the ingredient will be displayed in a dynamic manner.
Furthermore, not only in the "ingredient acquisition operation effect," but also in the "helper chef appearance effect," the character displayed as the "helper" may be displayed in a dynamic manner instead of a static manner. The expectation rate when the character is displayed in a dynamic manner is 100%. In other words, the effect in which the character is displayed in a dynamic manner is a "big win occurrence confirmation effect."
According to this embodiment, the timing at which the dynamic display (the display indicating that a jackpot has been confirmed) appears increases, and the player is informed that a jackpot will occur in the same or similar manner (dynamic display) in different presentation types. This makes it easier for the player to grasp the content suggested by the presentation that displays the dynamic display (that a jackpot has been confirmed to occur), and it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

When ingredients are displayed in a dynamic manner, a special sound effect may be output from the sound generating means.

When a specified ingredient is displayed in a dynamic manner before or during the "Miso Soup Presentation," as shown in FIG. 453, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a manner indicating a jackpot after the master character says "It's delicious!" However, after the master character says "No, no!", a martial artist character may be displayed and the decorative symbols may temporarily stop in a manner indicating a missed reach (for example, "4," "5," "4"). After that, the master character may reappear and say "It's delicious, as I thought!", and the decorative symbols may change to a temporary stop manner indicating a jackpot, and finally the decorative symbols may remain stationary in a manner indicating a jackpot, and the jackpot game may begin.

In addition to the "miso soup effect" in which the master character tastes the miso soup, a "miso soup effect" in which the demon character tastes the miso soup and a "miso soup effect" in which the wizard character tastes the miso soup may also be executed.
In the "miso soup effect" in which the demon character tastes the miso soup, of the effect patterns described in the effect pattern table shown in FIG. 448, effect patterns in which three ingredients can be obtained are not executed, and only effect patterns in which one or two ingredients can be obtained are executed. In this case, the maximum number of times the "ingredient acquisition operation effect" is executed is one less than in the "miso soup effect" in which the master character tastes the miso soup, so the number of times the ingredients may be displayed in a dynamic manner is also one less. In the "miso soup effect" in which the demon character tastes the miso soup, there are cases in which the result is a miss and cases in which the result is a jackpot.
In the "miso soup effect" in which the wizard character tastes the soup, the "ingredient acquisition operation effect" is not performed, and no operation is required from the player during the period in which the "ingredient acquisition operation effect" is being performed, and a display is displayed in which "matsutake mushroom" and "spiny lobster" are acquired as ingredients. Furthermore, no operation is required for the "tasting effect," and the wizard character's line, "Of course it's delicious!" is displayed. The "miso soup effect" in which the wizard character tastes the soup always results in a jackpot.

In the embodiment shown, in the performance in which the master character tastes the ball, the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in a manner indicating a miss, but is finally stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot. Similarly, in the "miso soup performance" in which the demon character tastes the ball, the decorative pattern may be temporarily stopped in a manner indicating a miss, but is finally stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.
On the other hand, in the "miso soup effect" in which the wizard character tastes the miso soup, the decorative pattern is not temporarily stopped in a manner indicating a miss, but after the decorative pattern temporarily stops in a manner indicating a jackpot, the decorative pattern is displayed stopped in the manner indicating a jackpot.
This allows the player to play with anticipation until the very end, and when an effect that allows the player to recognize a jackpot (such as a "miso soup effect" in which a wizard character tastes the miso soup) is executed, the annoyance of the game temporarily stopping in a manner that indicates a miss even though it is clear that a jackpot has been won can be reduced, and a decline in interest in the game can be prevented.

In the embodiment shown, a master character, a demon character, and a wizard character appear as characters that perform tasting, but the type of character that performs tasting may indicate the benefit that will be given to the player when a jackpot occurs. Also, the benefit that will be given to the player when a jackpot occurs with the demon character, master character, or wizard character may be different.
For example, the order of the demon character, master character, and wizard character may be such that the bonus given to the player in the event of a jackpot becomes more advantageous. Alternatively, the order of the demon character, master character, and wizard character may be such that the bonus given to the player in the event of a jackpot becomes more advantageous.
With this configuration, when the decorative symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, the player can play the game while paying attention to the effects (the types of characters that appear) in the hope that the bonus will become more advantageous (or the rate will increase). Also, even if a highly anticipated bonus is displayed, the player will then look forward to an even more advantageous bonus rather than simply waiting until the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, which can prevent a decline in interest in the game.

When the character tasting the food displays a line indicating that a jackpot will occur, the ingredients in the pot may be displayed in a dynamic manner. Also, a dynamic display may be displayed that is not limited to ingredients and that occurs only when it is indicated that a jackpot will occur.
According to such an embodiment, the player can be sure to recognize that a big win will occur, and the player can be given a sense of exhilaration by visually observing the dynamic behavior.

When the "tasting performance" is started with ingredients being displayed in a dynamic manner during the execution of the "miso soup performance", a line indicating that a jackpot will occur is always displayed in the "tasting performance", and then the game enters a jackpot game state.
On the other hand, if the "taste-testing effect" is started while the ingredients are displayed in a static manner during the "miso soup effect," a line indicating that a jackpot will occur may be displayed in the "taste-testing effect," and the game may then enter a jackpot gaming state, or a line indicating that a loss will occur may be displayed, and the game may then enter a loss state. Note that even if a line indicating a loss is displayed, the decorative pattern may then be displayed in a static manner indicating that a jackpot will occur, and the game may enter a jackpot gaming state.
Furthermore, even if the ingredients are not displayed in a dynamic manner in the "miso soup presentation" and a line indicating a miss is displayed, the display mode of the decorative pattern may then be changed to a mode indicating that a jackpot has occurred, and the game may enter a jackpot game state.
In this way, even if a message indicating a miss is displayed (even if a miss is displayed as the result of a predetermined reach effect), the player can play without losing hope until the end of the changing display, and a decline in interest can be prevented.

The movable decorative member may be operated in a predetermined manner before or during the execution of the "Miso Soup" effect. In addition, multiple movement modes may be adopted as the movement mode of the movable decorative member, and the movable decorative member may be moved in a predetermined movement mode under different circumstances.
For example, after the movable decorative member is operated in the first movable mode, a "miso soup effect" may be initiated in which the demon character tastes the miso soup.
Furthermore, instead of operating the movable decorative element in a first movable state, the movable decorative element may be operated in a second movable state different from the first movable state, and then a "miso soup performance" in which the master character tastes the miso soup may be initiated.
Furthermore, after the movable decorative member is operated in the first movable mode, a "miso soup performance" in which the demon character tastes the miso soup or a "miso soup performance" in which the wizard character tastes the miso soup may be initiated, and the movable decorative member may not be operated when a "miso soup performance" in which the master character tastes the miso soup is initiated.
According to such an embodiment, in addition to whether or not the movable decorative member moves, the player can be drawn to which character will taste the food after the movement, allowing the player to look forward to the development of the performance until the very end.
Furthermore, after the movable decorative member is operated in the first movable state, a "miso soup performance" in which the demon character tastes the miso soup or a "miso soup performance" in which the wizard character tastes the miso soup can be started, and after the movable decorative member is operated in the second movable state, a "miso soup performance" in which the master character tastes the miso soup can be started.
According to this embodiment, it is possible to draw the player's attention more to the movement of the movable decorative member.

In a predetermined presentation state or a predetermined game state, the decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the occurrence of a jackpot without going through a reach-to-win presentation in which the decorative symbols are in a reach-to-win state, or may be stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the occurrence of a jackpot via a reach-to-win presentation. In this case, in a specific presentation state different from the predetermined presentation state and a specific game state different from the predetermined game state, the decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the occurrence of a jackpot without going through a reach-to-win presentation.
According to such an embodiment, in a specified presentation state or a specified game state, the time from when the variable display begins to when the decorative pattern is displayed stopped in a manner indicating the occurrence of a jackpot is shortened, which prevents the presentation from feeling long and redundant, and also provides a surprising presentation to players who are aware that a reach presentation will always be passed through.

The text display of "What if you can satisfy your master?" displayed at the start of the "Miso Soup Performance," the effect when the ingredients appear displayed in the "Ingredient Acquisition Operation Performance," the cut-in, the simulated image of the operation unit, and the display of the character's lines may all be displayed in a visibly common manner (rainbow colors) that indicates the same level of expectation.
When this type of configuration is adopted, the same expectation level is suggested by a common pattern at the execution timing of each effect, so the player can play while paying attention to whether or not a specific pattern is displayed. Also, if a dedicated pattern were provided for each effect, it would be necessary to memorize the effects, which could lead to a decrease in motivation to play, but this can be prevented.

As such, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a decorative pattern change effect corresponding to the special pattern change display, an "ingredient acquisition operation effect" (or an effect in which ingredients are stocked) in which ingredients are displayed statically regardless of whether a jackpot is achieved, and an "ingredient acquisition operation effect" (or an effect in which ingredients are stocked) in which ingredients are displayed dynamically in the event of a jackpot. While the decorative pattern change effect is being executed, a "miso soup effect" begins to be executed. In the "ingredient acquisition operation effect" executed in the "miso soup effect," ingredients are displayed three times. The timings at which "starfish," "sea cucumber," and "sardine" are displayed dynamically are timing t5, timing t15 to timing t20, timing t20 to timing t25, and timing t25 to timing t30. The timings at which "sea urchin" and "pig" are displayed dynamically are timing t15 to timing t20, timing t20 to timing t25, and timing t25 to timing t30.

According to such an embodiment, a special effect in a special manner that is only executed when a jackpot occurs is executed in multiple types of effect images (ingredients), so the player can easily recognize that a jackpot has occurred, and since even different effect images (ingredients) can be displayed in the same special manner, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the effect that confirms the occurrence of a jackpot.
Furthermore, by varying the timing of the execution of the special effect of the special mode for each effect image (ingredient), the player can be constantly aware that the special effect of the special mode will be executed from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display. Also, since the expectation for the execution of the special effect of the special mode is increased, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to boredom.
According to such an embodiment, the special effects of the special mode that are only executed in the event of a jackpot are executed on multiple types of effect images (ingredients), so that the player can easily recognize that a jackpot has occurred and can prevent the player from missing the effects that confirm the occurrence of a jackpot. Furthermore, by varying the execution timing of the special effects of the special mode for each effect image (ingredients), the player can be constantly aware of when the special effects of the special mode will be executed from the start to the end of the variable display. Furthermore, since the expectation of the special mode effect image (ingredients) being displayed is increased, a decrease in interest in the game due to boredom can be suppressed.

448 to 454, an embodiment has been shown in which the acquired ingredients are displayed in the frame on the left side of the display area 1600a in the "Miso Soup Presentation," but a modified embodiment of this embodiment will now be described.
In this embodiment, the acquired ingredients are not displayed within a frame, but are displayed by rotating around within the display area 1600a.
The display modes of the turning display include a first dynamic mode and a second dynamic mode.
In the first dynamic mode, the ingredients are not reduced in size but are displayed rotating while remaining large.
In the second dynamic mode, the ingredients are displayed in a reduced size and rotated state.
It is preferable that the turning radius of the ingredient be smaller in the second dynamic mode than in the first dynamic mode.
Figures 455(a) to 455(d) show the ingredients rotating in the first dynamic mode, while Figures 455(a) and 455(e) to 455(g) show the ingredients rotating in the second dynamic mode.
Here, by changing the appearance of the movement of the ingredients themselves in the "miso soup effect," it is possible to reliably give the player a sense of incongruity in the movement of the ingredients, which creates a sense of anticipation not only in the type of ingredients but also in the movement element, and also helps to prevent players from missing out.
In the second dynamic mode, the acquired ingredients may be displayed in a reduced size at a predetermined position, oscillating slightly (e.g., with an amplitude that fits within the frame on the left side of the display area 1600a).

A predetermined effect image suggesting that the "Miso Soup Effect" will be executed may be displayed before the "Miso Soup Effect" is initiated. For example, a "10%" display may be displayed, indicating the expected jackpot probability as a percentage in the variable display in which the "Miso Soup Effect" is executed. Furthermore, a number selected from a plurality of numbers, such as 10%, 20%, 50%, 80%, and 100%, may be displayed, or the number may be displayed so that it increases in stages from the selected number. Different display modes, such as colors, may be used for each number. Furthermore, the higher the number selected and displayed, the higher the percentage of acquired ingredients displayed in the first dynamic mode in the "Miso Soup Effect." Furthermore, the "Miso Soup Effect" may always be initiated when a value of 50% or higher is selected and displayed. In this case, the display of the predetermined effect image suggests the execution of the "Miso Soup Effect" and also suggests the expected jackpot probability, so that both the expected jackpot probability and the expected jackpot probability for the "Miso Soup Effect" can be recognized from a single effect display. For example, 10% and 20% can give a sense of expectation for development into the "miso soup effect," 50% and 80% can give a sense of expectation for a jackpot, and 100% can give a sense of expectation for the first dynamic mode. In addition, it can also give a sense of expectation for the numerical value to increase.
In this way, no matter what numerical value is displayed, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for various presentations, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with monotonous presentations.

When the "miso soup effect" in which the acquired ingredients are dynamically displayed in the second dynamic mode is executed, at least an announcement pattern may be provided in which a reach effect result indicating a miss (such as a line such as "No good...") is first displayed and then a reach effect result indicating a jackpot (such as a line such as "Yay!"), and an announcement pattern in which a reach effect result indicating a jackpot is displayed without first displaying a reach effect result indicating a miss.
In addition, when the "miso soup effect" in which the acquired ingredients are dynamically displayed in the first dynamic mode is executed, it is preferable that there is no notification pattern in which a reach effect result indicating a miss is first displayed and then a reach effect result indicating a jackpot is displayed.
This results in multiple jackpot notification patterns depending on the type of dynamic mode, and the player will pay attention to the type of dynamic mode. In other words, by visually checking the second dynamic mode, the player will be able to recognize that even if a loss is initially notified, there is still a possibility of a jackpot being notified, and so the player can play with a sense of anticipation until the very end of the variable display. On the other hand, by visually checking the first dynamic mode, the player is prevented from getting excited, which can reduce the player's frustration caused by needlessly building up anticipation.

When the ingredients are displayed in the first dynamic manner, the ingredients may be displayed semi-transparently, and when the ingredients are displayed in the second dynamic manner, the ingredients may be displayed opaquely.
This makes it possible to prevent the ingredients displayed in the first dynamic mode from being displayed larger than the ingredients displayed in the second dynamic mode, thereby preventing the "miso soup effect" itself from being obstructed (reduced visibility). Therefore, by allowing the player to view both the "miso soup effect" itself and the dynamic display of the ingredients, the player can play comfortably without being disturbed by the dynamic display of the ingredients, which also helps to prevent a decline in interest.

As explained with reference to Figure 448, the likelihood of winning a jackpot varies depending on the type and combination of ingredients acquired.

When ingredients are displayed in the first dynamic mode, the expectation level is 100% regardless of the type of ingredient acquired. On the other hand, when ingredients are displayed in the second dynamic mode, the expectation level is as shown with reference to Figure 448. Therefore, when ingredients are displayed in the first dynamic mode, the expectation level is higher than when ingredients are displayed in the second dynamic mode.

While the embodiment in which the current pending image is displayed during the execution of the "Miso Soup Presentation" has been shown, the current pending image may not be displayed when the ingredients are displayed in the first dynamic mode. Also, the current pending image may be displayed when the ingredients are displayed in the second dynamic mode.
By doing so, it is possible to suppress overlap (superimposition) between the ingredients and the currently reserved image, which occurs because the movement (size) of the first dynamic mode is larger than that of the second dynamic mode.
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to have the player focus on the dynamic behavior of the ingredients rather than the currently pending image, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to the currently pending image coming into view.

When the acquired ingredient is displayed in the first dynamic mode, the color of the dialogue of the martial artist character may be gold only. Also, the color of the dialogue may not change during the execution of the "ingredient acquisition operation presentation."
On the other hand, when the acquired ingredient is displayed in the second dynamic mode, the color of the dialogue of the martial artist character displayed may be white, red, or gold. These dialogue colors have a set expectation level, with the expectation levels increasing in the order white, red, and gold. Furthermore, when the acquired ingredient is displayed in the second dynamic mode, the dialogue color may be upgraded at the time the ingredient is acquired. For example, the dialogue color may change from white to red or gold to increase the expectation level.

Before the "miso soup effect" begins, a display suggesting the ingredients to be acquired may be displayed. Figures 456(a) to 456(d) show an embodiment in which, during the rapid fluctuation of the decorative pattern, ingredients with the word "STOCK!" are displayed in sequence at the top of the display area 1600a. Next, the "miso soup effect" begins (Figure 456(e)), the "ingredient acquisition operation effect" begins (Figure 456(f)), and the displayed ingredients can be acquired (Figure 456(g)). When the ingredients are acquired, the word "STOCK!" is erased.
According to this embodiment, the player can know the types of ingredients that can be acquired in the "Miso Soup Presentation" before the "Miso Soup Presentation" is executed. Note that this display of the ingredients that can be acquired in advance is sometimes referred to as "stock" in this specification.

Although an embodiment in which an ingredient with the word "STOCK!" is displayed has been shown, the types of ingredients stocked may be changed before the "Miso Soup Presentation" starts. In this case, it is preferable that the change in the types of ingredients does not lower the expectation indicated by the combination of ingredients, but always increases the expectation.
According to such an embodiment, the type of ingredients that can actually be obtained when the "miso soup effect" is executed is changed, thereby maintaining the expectation of hitting a jackpot.

The light-emitting decorative member may emit light in different modes when the acquired ingredient is displayed in the first dynamic mode and when the acquired ingredient is displayed in the second dynamic mode.
For example, the luminous decorative member may be made to emit rainbow colors when the acquired ingredient is displayed in the first dynamic mode, and the luminous state may continue until the decorative pattern begins to display statically or the "miso soup effect" ends.
On the other hand, when the acquired ingredient is displayed in the second dynamic mode, the illuminating decorative member may be illuminated in rainbow colors only at a predetermined timing. For example, the illuminating decorative member may be illuminated in rainbow colors when the ingredient "matsutake mushroom" is acquired or when a wizard character is displayed as a helping chef. In this case, the illumination time in rainbow colors may be set to about 1 to 2 seconds.
In this way, when the acquired ingredient is displayed in the first dynamic mode, the luminous decorative member glows in rainbow colors for a longer period of time than when the acquired ingredient is displayed in the second dynamic mode, thereby increasing interest.
In addition, as the luminous decorative member that emits rainbow colors, one or both of the luminous decorative members provided on the door frame 3 and the luminous decorative members provided on the game board 5 can be used.

The content of the "tasting presentation" may be different when the acquired ingredient is displayed in the first dynamic manner and when the acquired ingredient is displayed in the second dynamic manner.
For example, when the acquired ingredient is displayed in the first dynamic mode, the "tasting performance" may be configured to display a message indicating that the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, without requiring any operation on the operating unit.
On the other hand, when the acquired ingredients are displayed in the second dynamic mode, depending on the presentation pattern, the "tasting presentation" may require operation of the operation unit or may not require operation of the operation unit.

Referring to Figure 457, other aspects of the "Miso Soup Presentation" will be explained.
As shown in Figures 457(a) to 457(h), in this mode, the acquired ingredient is displayed in an appearance that protrudes from the frame. Furthermore, the ingredient is displayed in a third dynamic mode, which is a dynamic mode in which the ingredient oscillates left and right.
Figure 457(a) shows an example of the display at the time when "sardines" are acquired through the first "ingredient acquisition operation presentation".
Next, the acquired "sardine" moves into the left frame. Figure 457(b) shows the display state at this time.
Next, the second "ingredient acquisition operation presentation" is started. Fig. 457(c) shows a display example at the timing when the second "ingredient acquisition operation presentation" is started. Fig. 457(d) shows a display example at the timing when half of the operation valid period for the second "ingredient acquisition operation presentation" has elapsed.
Next, as a result of the second "ingredient acquisition operation presentation," the stocked "sea cucumber" is acquired. Figure 457(e) shows an example of the display at this time.
Next, the acquired "sea cucumber" moves into the left frame. Figure 457(f) shows the display state at this time.
Next, the third "ingredient acquisition operation presentation" is started. Fig. 457(g) shows a display example at the timing when the third "ingredient acquisition operation presentation" is started. Fig. 457(h) shows a display example at the timing when half of the operation valid period for the third "ingredient acquisition operation presentation" has elapsed.
In other respects, the "miso soup effect" is executed in the same manner as that shown with reference to Figure 449, etc.
In the third dynamic mode, the captured ingredients are swung left and right while protruding from the frame, whereas in the second dynamic mode, the captured ingredients are swung left and right while not protruding from the frame.
In this case, although the second dynamic mode and the third dynamic mode are similar, the size of the acquired ingredients themselves can give the player a sense of incongruity. As a result, the player can distinguish whether the "miso soup effect" is being executed in the second dynamic mode or the third dynamic mode, making it possible to execute a "miso soup effect" that the player will not tire of.

When the ingredients are displayed in the third dynamic mode, the "miso soup effect" may be executed multiple times. For example, if a result indicating a jackpot is obtained after the execution of the "taste preview effect," the game then transitions to a jackpot game state. However, if a result indicating a loss is obtained after the execution of the "taste preview effect," the decorative symbols may remain frozen in a state indicating a loss (indicating that a jackpot will not be awarded), or the decorative symbols may be temporarily frozen in a state indicating a loss (indicating that a jackpot will not be awarded), with a master character appearing and saying, "I want to taste it one more time!" The decorative symbols on the left, center, and right sides may again enter a high-speed fluctuating state, after which the "miso soup effect" may be executed again. Note that in this case, the ingredients are also displayed in the third dynamic mode. In such an embodiment, the "miso soup effect" may be executed two or more times. According to such an embodiment, when the ingredients are displayed in the third dynamic mode, the player is offered the possibility of the "miso soup effect" being executed multiple times.
On the other hand, when the ingredients are displayed in the first dynamic mode or the second dynamic mode, the "miso soup effect" is executed only once.

When the ingredients are displayed in the third dynamic mode and the execution of the "miso soup effect" is started, a predetermined effect image may be displayed and a special sound effect may be output to indicate that the execution of the "miso soup effect" has started.
Furthermore, when ingredients are stocked to form a predetermined combination, a predetermined effect image may be displayed and a special sound effect may be output to indicate that the predetermined combination has been formed.

After the execution of the "Miso Soup Presentation" in which the ingredients are displayed in the third dynamic mode has finished, the "Miso Soup Presentation" in which the ingredients are displayed in the first dynamic mode may be started. Similarly, after the execution of the "Miso Soup Presentation" in which the ingredients are displayed in the third dynamic mode has finished, the "Miso Soup Presentation" in which the ingredients are displayed in the second dynamic mode may be started.
Furthermore, in the "Miso Soup Presentation" in which the ingredients are displayed in the third dynamic mode, the "Miso Soup Presentation" in which the ingredients are displayed in the first dynamic mode may be started at a predetermined timing before the "Tasting Presentation" is executed. Similarly, in the "Miso Soup Presentation" in which the ingredients are displayed in the third dynamic mode, the "Miso Soup Presentation" in which the ingredients are displayed in the second dynamic mode may be started at a predetermined timing before the "Tasting Presentation" is executed.
In this case, the ingredients are displayed in the first dynamic mode or the second dynamic mode and the "Miso Soup Presentation" is executed before the result of a hit or miss is shown in the "Tasting Presentation" in the "Miso Soup Presentation" in which the ingredients are displayed in the third dynamic mode.
This provides a sense of surprise to the player, and allows the player to play with high expectations not only for the "tasting effect" within the "miso soup effect," but also for the "ingredient acquisition operation effect," for example, thereby preventing the player from becoming bored.

In the "miso soup presentation" in which ingredients are displayed in the first to third dynamic modes, the ingredients are displayed in the pot when the "ingredient cooking presentation" ends, and the ingredients are also displayed in the pot in the subsequent "tasting presentation." The display of the ingredients together with the pot ends when the "tasting presentation" ends, but the ingredients acquired after the "tasting presentation" ends may be displayed. By using such an embodiment, it is possible to know what ingredients were acquired and whether the result was a big hit or a miss.
When displaying the ingredients acquired after the "tasting performance" ends, it is advisable to display each ingredient in the same dynamic manner.

Stocked ingredients may be temporarily hidden when the "Miso Soup" effect begins.

It is preferable that the number of types of ingredients that can be displayed in the "Miso Soup Presentation" in which the acquired ingredients are displayed in the first dynamic mode is greater than the number of types of ingredients that can be displayed in the "Miso Soup Presentation" in which the acquired ingredients are displayed in the second dynamic mode.
Specifically, when the ingredients acquired in the "Miso Soup Presentation" are displayed in the second dynamic manner, the number of ingredients displayed in one presentation pattern is limited to a maximum of three.
On the other hand, in one performance pattern in which the ingredients acquired in the "miso soup performance" are displayed in the first dynamic mode, the ingredients displayed are one each of "starfish,""seacucumber,""sardine,""seaurchin,""pig,""matsutakemushroom," and "spiny lobster." In other words, in this case, all types of ingredients are displayed. When ingredients are displayed in this manner in the first dynamic mode, it is preferable to display the ingredients in the display area 1600a so that, while a specific ingredient is being dynamically displayed, the ingredients fade out one by one and new ingredients fade in one by one. In contrast, when ingredients are displayed in the second dynamic mode, it is preferable to prevent the acquired ingredients from changing into other new ingredients.
According to this embodiment, the player can be made to recognize that the display of ingredients in the first dynamic mode is a special effect. Furthermore, because all types of ingredients are displayed, the player's sense of expectation and excitement caused by the ingredients being displayed in the first dynamic mode can be further enhanced. Therefore, when the "miso soup effect" is executed, the player will play the game while hoping that the ingredients will be displayed in the first dynamic mode.

An effect may be performed in which the movable decorative member is operated before or during the execution of the "miso soup effect."
Specifically, a movable decorative member may be provided at a position that overlaps the display area 1600a in the front-to-back direction as seen by the player.

When the ingredients are displayed in the first dynamic mode, it is preferable not to perform an effect that moves the movable decorative member while the "miso soup effect" is being performed.
On the other hand, when the ingredients are displayed in the second dynamic mode, it is preferable to execute an effect of operating the movable decorative member during the execution of the "miso soup effect." For example, an effect of operating the movable decorative member may be executed just before the timing when the "assistant chef appears effect" is likely to be executed, or an effect of operating the movable decorative member may be executed when a display indicating the occurrence of a jackpot is displayed as a result of the "tasting effect."

In the "Ingredient Acquisition Operation Presentation" and "Taste Presentation" in the "Miso Soup Presentation," presentations are made to accept operations on the operation unit, but in these presentations, presentations to operate the movable decorative members may be executed based on the operations by the player. Alternatively, presentations to operate the movable decorative members may be executed without being based on the operations by the player.
In addition, in the "tasting performance," a performance is executed in which the movable decorative member is operated based on the operation (at the timing when the operation is accepted), but in the "ingredient acquisition operation performance," a performance may be executed in which the movable decorative member is operated without being based on the operation (at a predetermined timing).
The manner of movement of the movable decorative member in the "tasting performance" and the manner of movement of the movable decorative member in the "ingredient acquisition operation performance" may be the same or different.
With this configuration, the "taste presentation" notifies the player whether or not a jackpot will occur, so that the player can feel a sense of elation by being notified of the jackpot in a grand manner. On the other hand, in the "ingredient acquisition operation presentation," the movable decorative member does not move when the operation is received, so the visibility of the ingredients displayed in the display area 1600a is not obstructed, and the player can more reliably see which ingredients he or she has acquired.

In this way, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a "miso soup effect" in which the dynamic display of the multiple ingredients rotates in a small manner, and a "miso soup effect" in which the dynamic display of the multiple ingredients rotates in a large manner. Compared to a "miso soup effect" in which the dynamic display of the multiple ingredients rotates in a small manner, a "miso soup effect" in which the dynamic display of the multiple ingredients rotates in a large manner has a larger range of movement of the ingredients and a higher probability of winning a jackpot.
In addition, in the "miso soup presentation" in which the dynamic display of the multiple ingredients rotates widely, the reach presentation result indicating a miss is not displayed once, and in the "miso soup presentation" in which the dynamic display of the multiple ingredients rotates slightly, the reach presentation result indicating a miss may be displayed once.

In this embodiment, it becomes possible to distinguish between reach effects with different jackpot expectations based on the dynamic behavior and movement range of the multiple effect displays, and the visual movement of the multiple effect displays in the reach effects can be provided to the player as a new element for determining the jackpot expectation.

Hereinafter, an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 123 to 457 will be described with reference to FIGS. 458 to 474, etc.
In the embodiment shown below, an embodiment will be described in which, in a presentation situation in which ingredients that are confirmed to result in a jackpot (for example, "matsutake mushroom" or "spiny lobster") are stocked and the "ingredient acquisition operation presentation" is about to begin, the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state in a manner indicating that a jackpot will occur without the "ingredient acquisition operation presentation" beginning.
We will also explain an embodiment in which, when a predetermined effect with an expected probability of less than 100% is executed multiple times, the decorative symbols always stop in a manner indicating that a jackpot will occur.

In this embodiment, there is a possibility that ingredients can be stocked at three times: timing t2, timing t4, and timing t6. In other words, there is a possibility that a maximum of three ingredients can be stocked.
The seven ingredients that may be stocked are starfish, sea cucumber, sardine, sea urchin, pork, matsutake mushroom, and spiny lobster.
Of these, if one "matsutake mushroom" and one "spiny lobster" are stocked, a jackpot is confirmed to occur. Also, if three "pork" are stocked, a jackpot is confirmed to occur. Also, if one "sardine" and one "pork" are stocked as ingredients, a jackpot is confirmed to occur.
In this way, by making it certain that a jackpot will occur depending on the ingredient alone or a combination of ingredients, it is possible to increase the excitement when ingredients are stocked.
As mentioned above, these effects are "determined jackpot occurrence effects."
In addition, when an ingredient or a combination of ingredients is displayed as a "jackpot confirmation effect," it is preferable to display the ingredient or combination of ingredients together with a rainbow-colored effect image.
In addition, when showing the player the rainbow color pattern (which may be realized, for example, by the color of the effect image or the luminous color of the luminous decorative component), it may be configured so that it is always displayed or lit up when a combination of decorative patterns indicates that a jackpot will occur.

However, if it were decided that a jackpot would occur at the timing when ingredients were stocked (the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" would be executed), there was a risk that some players would find the "ingredient acquisition operation effect" that is executed afterwards redundant. Therefore, in this embodiment, when it is indicated that a jackpot will occur due to stocked ingredients, the decorative symbols may be displayed in a manner that indicates that a jackpot will occur immediately after the timing when it is indicated that a jackpot will occur, without executing the "ingredient acquisition operation effect."
According to such an embodiment, the game state transitions to the jackpot game state in a short period of time from the time when it is indicated that a jackpot will occur, thereby preventing the player from having to wait for a long period of time before transitioning to the jackpot game state and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, if a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss after a high-expectation effect is executed, the player will be disappointed. In particular, if a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss even though multiple high-expectation effects have been executed, the player will be even more disappointed. Therefore, in this embodiment, when both a predetermined high-expectation effect and another predetermined high-expectation effect of a different type are executed, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.
According to such an embodiment, multiple highly anticipated effects are executed, and depending on the combination of the executed effects, decorative symbols are displayed in a manner that indicates that a jackpot will definitely occur, thereby preventing the player from becoming extremely disappointed.
Hereinafter, this type of effect will be referred to as a “specific high expectation effect.” When a “specific high expectation effect” is executed alone, it may result in either a jackpot or a miss, but when executed multiple times, it is an effect that will always result in a jackpot.
On the other hand, an effect that may result in either a jackpot or a miss when executed alone, and may result in either a jackpot or a miss when executed multiple times, is hereinafter referred to as a "general high expectation effect."

The more "specific high expectation effects" that are executed, the higher the probability of winning. For example, if the total number of "specific high expectation effects" is four, the probability of winning when one "specific high expectation effect" is executed is 40%, when two "specific high expectation effects" are executed is 60%, when three "specific high expectation effects" are executed is 80%, and when four "specific high expectation effects" are executed is 100%.
According to such an embodiment, it is possible to gradually increase the player's sense of expectation depending on the number of times that the "specific high expectation effects" are executed.
Furthermore, the more "specific high expectation effects" that are executed, the more advantageous the benefits that are given to the player may be. For example, if the number of "specific high expectation effects" that are executed is two, it is determined that a jackpot will occur, but it is not determined whether or not an advantageous state such as a time-saving state or a probability variable state will be given after the jackpot (i.e., there is a case where neither a time-saving state nor a probability variable state will be given after this jackpot game state), but if the number of "specific high expectation effects" that are executed is three, it is not only determined that a jackpot will occur, but it is also determined that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state such as a time-saving state or a probability variable state.
The maximum number of rounds in a jackpot may be used as the bonus. For example, if the maximum number of rounds in a jackpot is 2, 5, or 10, it may be determined that a 5-round or 10-round jackpot will occur if the number of "specific high expectation effects" executed is 2, and that a 10-round jackpot will occur if the number of "specific high expectation effects" executed is 3. In this case, the more rounds there are, the more gaming media the player can acquire, which is advantageous for the player.
According to such an embodiment, even after the "specific high expectation effect" has been executed multiple times and it has been determined that a jackpot will occur, it is possible to give the player even more joy when another "specific high expectation effect" is executed.

First, we will explain an example of a performance in which neither the "jackpot occurrence confirmation performance" nor the "specific high expectation performance" is executed. We will explain an example of a performance in which performance pattern PTN01 is selected as the performance pattern to be executed, and one ingredient (here, "sardine") can be obtained.
Fig. 458 is a time chart showing this example of effect. Fig. 459 and Fig. 460 show the display state in this example of effect.
At timing t0.5, immediately after the start of the variable display, a horizontally long window is displayed. The window displays the words "Miso Soup Chance!" and the "Miso Soup Presentation" begins. Figure 459(a) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t2, an ingredient (here, "sardines") is displayed near the upper left of display area 1600a. The word "STOCK!" is displayed in front of the ingredient. Figure 459(b) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t8.5, the left decorative symbol temporarily stops, and at timing t9, the right decorative symbol temporarily stops with the decorative symbol of the same number as the left decorative symbol that has already temporarily stopped (here, the "4" symbol), resulting in a reach state. Figure 459(c) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t10, the type of decorative symbol is changed from the normal decorative symbol to the reach decorative symbol. FIG. 459(d) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t13, the master character and the master character's dialogue window are displayed on the left side of the display area 1600a. The words "Make a delicious miso soup!" are displayed in the master character's dialogue window. In addition, the martial artist character and the martial artist character's dialogue window are displayed on the right side of the display area 1600a. The words "We need to get some ingredients..." are displayed in the martial artist character's dialogue window. Figure 459(e) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t15, the "ingredient acquisition operation presentation" begins. During the "ingredient acquisition operation presentation," operation acceptance of the attack button 3710 is enabled for a predetermined period (3 seconds), and a circular, white simulated operation image resembling the attack button 3710 is displayed near the center of the display area 1600a. The word "press" is included in the center of the simulated operation image, indicating to the player how to operate the attack button 3710. Additionally, below the simulated operation image, a remaining time gauge image indicating the valid operation period is displayed, and the passage of the predetermined period during which operations can be accepted is indicated to the player by changes in the gauge. Additionally, a vertically long frame is displayed on the left side of the display area 1600a. Figure 459 (f) shows the display state at the timing when the valid operation period begins.

At timing t18, the valid operation period ends, and the "sardine" that was displayed near the upper left of display area 1600a moves to near the center of display area 1600a. At this time, the size of the "sardine" increases simultaneously with the movement. The display of the text "STOCK!" ends at timing t18. In addition, the dialogue window of the martial artist character is displayed. The text "Sardine, acquired!" is displayed in the dialogue window of the martial artist character. Figure 459 (g) shows the display state at this time.
Note that the above example shows the effect when no operation is performed on the attack button 3710 during the valid operation period, but if an operation is performed on the attack button 3710 during the valid operation period, the ingredients will be moved and enlarged at the time the operation is performed.

When the valid operation period ends or the attack button 3710 is operated, the ingredient displayed will shrink and move over the course of one second from time t18, and will be displayed within the topmost vertical frame. Figure 459 (h) shows the display state at this time. This display state will continue until time t20.

The "ingredient cooking presentation" begins at timing t20. During the "ingredient cooking presentation," an image is displayed of the martial artist character cooking the acquired ingredients, and finally an image of miso soup in a pot is displayed. Figure 460(a) shows the display state at timing t20, when the "ingredient cooking presentation" begins.

From timing t23 to timing t26, the martial artist character is displayed holding ingredients in his hands. A pot is also displayed to the left of the martial artist character. The martial artist character's lines read "Cooking!" Figure 460(b) shows the display state at this time.
Next, at timing t26, the acquired ingredients are added to the pot and the miso soup is displayed as being ready. The warrior character's lines read, "Miso soup is ready!" This display continues until timing t27. Figure 460(c) shows the display state at this time.
Next, at timing t27, a "star display effect" is executed, and the characters "★★★☆☆" are displayed as the lines of the martial artist character. The "star display effect" continues until timing t28. Figure 460(d) shows the display state at this time.
In the "star display effect," one of the following will be displayed: "★★☆☆☆,""★★★☆☆,""★★★★☆," or "★★★★★." The more "★" there are, the higher the chance of winning. The chance of winning a "★★☆☆☆" is 40%, the chance of winning a "★★★☆☆" is 60%, the chance of winning a "★★★★☆" is 80%, and the chance of winning a "★★★★★" is 100%.
In other words, the "star display effect" that displays "★★★★★" can be said to be a "big win confirmation effect."
The "star display effect" that displays "★★★★☆" may be a "specific high expectation effect" or a "general high expectation effect."
The "ingredients cooking performance" ends at timing t28.

At timing t28, a "tasting performance" begins, in which the master character tastes the completed miso soup. Between timing t28 and timing t30, the master character is displayed on the left side of display area 1600a. The master character's lines, "I'm starving!", are also displayed. Figure 460(e) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t30, the attack button 3710 becomes operational for a predetermined period (3 seconds), and a circular, white simulated operation image resembling the attack button 3710 is displayed near the center of the display area 1600a. The character "press" is included in the center of the simulated operation image, indicating to the player how to operate the attack button 3710. In addition, a remaining time gauge image indicating the effective operation period is displayed below the simulated operation image, and the passage of the predetermined period during which operations can be accepted is indicated to the player by changes in the gauge. Figure 460(f) shows the display state at the timing when the effective operation period begins.
At timing t33, the valid operation period ends, and one of the following lines from the master character is displayed near the center of display area 1600a: "It's delicious!" or "No, no, no!" When the line "It's delicious!" is displayed, the decorative symbols stop in a combination of repeated numbers (in this example, "4", "4", "4"), resulting in a jackpot; when the line "No, no, no!" is displayed, the decorative symbols stop in a combination that would result in a miss (in this example, "4", "5", "4"), resulting in a miss.
Although an example of the presentation has been shown in which no operation is performed on the attack button 3710 during the valid operation period, if an operation is performed on the attack button 3710 during the valid operation period, the dialogue will be displayed at the time the operation is performed.

At timing t33, the line "It's delicious!" is displayed. This display state continues until timing t35. Figure 460(g) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t35, the center decorative symbol "4" is temporarily stopped. This display state continues until timing t37. Figure 460(h) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t37, the decorative symbol is changed from the reach decorative symbol to the normal decorative symbol. FIG. 461(a) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t38, the decorative symbols are displayed as a combination of "4,""4," and "4," which indicates a jackpot. The display of the martial artist character also ends, and the "miso soup effect" ends. This display state continues until timing t39. Figure 461(b) shows the display state at this time.
Here, an example of the display when a jackpot result is shown, but when a loss result is shown, the same display as that shown in Figures 449 to 453 etc. will be displayed.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 458, the display of the martial artist character was terminated at the timing when the decorative pattern was displayed in a stopped state (timing t38), but it is also possible to terminate the display of the martial artist character at the timing when the decorative pattern at the time of reach is switched to the normal decorative pattern (timing t37).
In the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 462 and 466, the display of the martial artist character may also be ended at the same timing.

Next, we will explain an example of a performance in which the "jackpot occurrence confirmation performance" is not executed, but the "specific high expectation performance" is executed. We will explain an example of a performance in which performance pattern PTN01 is selected as the performance pattern to be executed, and one ingredient (here, "sardine") can be obtained.
Fig. 462 is a time chart showing this example of effect. Fig. 463 to Fig. 465 show the display state in this example of effect.
At timing t0.5, immediately after the start of the variable display, a horizontally long window is displayed. The window displays the words "Miso Soup Chance!" and the "Miso Soup Presentation" begins. Figure 463(a) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t2, an ingredient (here, "sardines") is displayed near the upper left of display area 1600a. The word "STOCK!" is displayed in front of the ingredient. Figure 463(b) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t8.5, the left decorative symbol temporarily stops, and at timing t9, the right decorative symbol temporarily stops with the decorative symbol of the same number as the left decorative symbol that has already temporarily stopped (here, the "4" symbol), resulting in a reach state. Figure 463(c) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t10, the type of decorative symbol is changed from the normal decorative symbol to the reach decorative symbol. FIG. 463(d) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t13, the master character and the master character's dialogue window are displayed on the left side of the display area 1600a. The words "Make a delicious miso soup!" are displayed in the master character's dialogue window. In addition, the martial artist character and the martial artist character's dialogue window are displayed on the right side of the display area 1600a. The words "We need to get some ingredients..." are displayed in the martial artist character's dialogue window. Figure 463(e) shows the display state at this time.

Between timing t14 and timing t15, the wizard character appears from the upper right side of display area 1600a, moves to the left, and then moves off the screen from the upper left side of display area 1600a.
Figure 463(f) shows the display state of the wizard character while he is moving.

At timing t15, the "ingredient acquisition operation presentation" begins. During the "ingredient acquisition operation presentation," operation acceptance of the attack button 3710 is enabled for a predetermined period (3 seconds), and a circular, white simulated operation image resembling the attack button 3710 is displayed near the center of the display area 1600a. The word "press" is included in the center of the simulated operation image, indicating to the player how to operate the attack button 3710. Additionally, below the simulated operation image, a remaining time gauge image indicating the valid operation period is displayed, and the passage of the predetermined period during which operations can be accepted is indicated to the player by changes in the gauge. Additionally, a vertically long frame is displayed on the left side of the display area 1600a. Figure 463 (g) shows the display state at the timing when the valid operation period begins.

At timing t18, the valid operation period ends, and the "sardine" that was displayed near the upper left of display area 1600a moves to near the center of display area 1600a. At this time, the size of the "sardine" increases simultaneously with the movement. The display of the text "STOCK!" ends at timing t18. In addition, the dialogue window of the martial artist character is displayed. The text "Sardine, acquired!" is displayed in the dialogue window of the martial artist character. Figure 463 (h) shows the display state at this time.
Note that, although an example of the effect has been shown in which no operation is performed on the attack button 3710 during the valid operation period, if an operation is performed on the attack button 3710 during the valid operation period, the ingredients will be moved and enlarged at the time the operation is performed, and the word "STOCK!" will be erased.

When the operation valid period ends or the attack button 3710 is operated, the ingredient displayed will shrink and move over one second from time t18, and will be displayed within the topmost vertical frame. Figure 464(a) shows the display state at this time. This display state will continue until time t20.

The "Ingredient Cooking Presentation" begins at timing t20. During the "Ingredient Cooking Presentation," images are displayed of the martial artist character cooking the acquired ingredients, and finally, an image of miso soup in a pot is displayed. Also, at timing t20, the "Assistant Chef Appears Presentation" is executed. Note that in this embodiment, during the "Assistant Chef Appears Presentation," operation acceptance of the attack button 3710 is enabled for a predetermined period (2 seconds), and a circular, white control unit imitation image resembling the attack button 3710 is displayed near the center of the display area 1600a. The word "press" is included in the center of the control unit imitation image, indicating to the player how to operate the attack button 3710. Additionally, below the control unit imitation image, a remaining time gauge image indicating the effective operation period is displayed, and the passage of the predetermined period during which operations are accepted is indicated to the player by changes in the gauge. Figure 464(b) shows the display state at timing t20, when the "Ingredient Cooking Presentation" begins.

At timing t22, the valid operation period ends. At the same time as the end of the valid operation period, the samurai character and the band-like effect image are displayed. The samurai character is displayed at the lower left of display area 1600a, and the band-like effect image is displayed at the top and bottom of display area 1600a. The samurai character is displayed until timing t23. The band-like effect image is displayed until timing t28. Figure 464 (c) shows the display state from timing t22 to timing t23.
Although an example of the presentation has been shown in which no operation is performed on the attack button 3710 during the valid operation period, if an operation is performed on the attack button 3710 during the valid operation period, the display of the samurai character and band-shaped presentation image will begin at the time the operation is performed.

From timing t23 to timing t26, the martial artist character is displayed holding ingredients in his hands. A pot is also displayed to the left of the martial artist character. The martial artist character's lines read "Cooking!" Figure 464(d) shows the display state at this time.
Next, at timing t26, the acquired ingredients are added to the pot and the miso soup is displayed as being ready. The warrior character's lines read, "Miso soup is ready!" This display continues until timing t27. Figure 464(e) shows the display state at this time.
Next, at timing t27, a "star display effect" is executed, and the characters "★★★☆☆" are displayed as the lines of the martial artist character. The "star display effect" continues until timing t28. Figure 464 (f) shows the display state at this time.
The "ingredients cooking performance" ends at timing t28.

At timing t28, a "tasting performance" begins, in which the master character tastes the completed miso soup. From timing t28 to timing t30, the master character is displayed on the left side of the display area 1600a. The master character's lines, "I'm starving!", are also displayed. Figure 464(g) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t30, the attack button 3710 becomes operational for a predetermined period (3 seconds), and a circular, red simulated operation image resembling the attack button 3710 is displayed near the center of the display area 1600a. The word "press" is included in the center of the simulated operation image, indicating to the player how to operate the attack button 3710. In addition, a remaining time gauge image indicating the effective operation period is displayed below the simulated operation image, and the passage of the predetermined period during which operations can be accepted is indicated to the player by changes in the gauge.
Figure 464(h) shows the display state at the timing when the valid operation period starts.
At timing t33, the valid operation period ends, and the line "It's delicious!" from the master character is displayed near the center of display area 1600a. After the line "It's delicious!" is displayed, the decorative symbols stop in a repeating combination (in this example, "4", "4", "4"), resulting in a jackpot.
Although an example of the presentation has been shown in which no operation is performed on the attack button 3710 during the valid operation period, if an operation is performed on the attack button 3710 during the valid operation period, the dialogue will be displayed at the time the operation is performed.

At timing t33, the line "It's delicious!" is displayed. This display state continues until timing t35. Figure 465(a) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t35, the center decorative symbol "4" is temporarily stopped. This display state continues until timing t37. FIG. 465(b) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t37, the type of decorative symbol is changed from the reach decorative symbol to the normal decorative symbol. FIG. 465(c) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t38, the decorative symbols are displayed as a combination of "4", "4", and "4", which indicates a jackpot. The display of the martial artist character also ends, and the "miso soup effect" ends. This display state continues until timing t39. Figure 465(d) shows the display state at this time.
After timing t39, the game transitions to a jackpot game state.

In the examples of effects shown with reference to Figures 462 to 465, a wizard character is displayed (Figure 463(f)), a strip-shaped effect image is displayed (Figures 464(c) to 464(f)), and a red operation unit simulation image is displayed (Figure 464(h)), and the expectation rate when only one of these images is displayed in one variation is 50% for each. On the other hand, the expectation rate when multiple of these images are displayed in one variation is 100%.
In other words, the effect of displaying these images is a "specific high expectation effect."
On the other hand, while a helper chef is displayed, or two to four stars are displayed in the "star display effect" to indicate a certain degree of expectation, these effects are "general high expectation effects." In other words, in relation to other effects, they do not indicate that the expectation of a jackpot is 100%.

According to this example of the effect, the player will recognize that there is a high probability of winning a jackpot when the first (first type) "specific high expectation effect" is executed. Also, when the second (second type) "specific high expectation effect" is executed, it is confirmed that a jackpot will be won, so the player will be able to concentrate on the content of the effect, which can increase interest.
In addition, it is preferable that the rainbow-colored image is not displayed even when the second (second type) "specific high expectation effect" is executed.
If a rainbow-colored image is displayed when the second (second type) "specific high expectation effect" is executed, the player may mistakenly believe that only the second "specific high expectation effect" is the "big win confirmation effect." The above configuration can prevent this from happening.

Next, other presentation examples will be explained with reference to Figures 466 to 469. In the presentation examples shown with reference to Figures 462 to 465, the stocked ingredient was "sardines," but in the presentation examples shown with reference to Figures 466 to 469, the stocked ingredient is "matsutake mushrooms." Note that the presentation content is different only in the ingredients stocked and the ingredients cooked thereafter, so the presentation flow is basically the same as the presentation examples shown with reference to Figures 462 to 465.

466 to 469, a description will be given of an example of a performance in which the "big win occurrence confirmation performance" and the "specific high expectation performance" are executed. A performance example in which performance pattern PTN40 is selected as the performance pattern to be executed and one ingredient (here, "matsutake mushroom") can be obtained will be described.
Fig. 466 is a time chart showing this example of effect. Fig. 467 to Fig. 469 show the display state in this example of effect.
At timing t0.5, immediately after the start of the variable display, a horizontally long window is displayed. The window displays the words "Miso Soup Chance!" and the "Miso Soup Presentation" begins. Figure 467(a) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t2, an ingredient (here, "matsutake mushroom") is displayed near the upper left of the display area 1600a. The word "STOCK!" is displayed in front of the ingredient. Figure 467(b) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t8.5, the left decorative symbol temporarily stops, and at timing t9, the right decorative symbol temporarily stops with the decorative symbol of the same number as the left decorative symbol that has already temporarily stopped (here, the "4" symbol), resulting in a reach state. Figure 467(c) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t10, the type of decorative symbol is changed from the normal decorative symbol to the reach decorative symbol. FIG. 467(d) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t13, the master character and the master character's dialogue window are displayed on the left side of the display area 1600a. The words "Make a delicious miso soup!" are displayed in the master character's dialogue window. In addition, the martial artist character and the martial artist character's dialogue window are displayed on the right side of the display area 1600a. The words "We need to get some ingredients..." are displayed in the martial artist character's dialogue window. Figure 467(e) shows the display state at this time.

Between timing t14 and timing t15, the wizard character appears from the upper right side of display area 1600a, moves to the left, and then moves off the screen from the upper left side of display area 1600a.
Figure 467(f) shows the display state of the wizard character while he is moving.

At timing t15, the "ingredient acquisition operation presentation" begins. During the "ingredient acquisition operation presentation," operation acceptance of the attack button 3710 is enabled for a predetermined period (3 seconds), and a circular, white simulated operation image resembling the attack button 3710 is displayed near the center of the display area 1600a. The word "press" is included in the center of the simulated operation image, indicating to the player how to operate the attack button 3710. Additionally, below the simulated operation image, a remaining time gauge image indicating the valid operation period is displayed, and the passage of the predetermined period during which operations can be accepted is indicated to the player by changes in the gauge. Additionally, a vertically long frame is displayed on the left side of the display area 1600a. Figure 467(g) shows the display state at the timing when the valid operation period begins.

At timing t18, the valid operation period ends, and the "matsutake" that was displayed near the upper left of the display area 1600a moves to near the center of the display area 1600a. At this time, the size of the "matsutake" increases simultaneously with the movement. The display of the text "STOCK!" ends at timing t18. In addition, the dialogue window of the martial artist character is displayed. The text "Matsutake, acquired!" is displayed in the dialogue window of the martial artist character. Figure 467 (h) shows the display state at this time.
Note that, although an example of the effect has been shown in which no operation is performed on the attack button 3710 during the valid operation period, if an operation is performed on the attack button 3710 during the valid operation period, the ingredients will be moved and enlarged at the time the operation is performed, and the word "STOCK!" will be erased.

When the operation valid period ends or the attack button 3710 is operated, the ingredient displayed will shrink and move over the course of one second from time t18, and will be displayed within the topmost vertical frame. Figure 468(a) shows the display state at this time. This display state will continue until time t20.

The "Ingredient Cooking Presentation" begins at timing t20. During the "Ingredient Cooking Presentation," images are displayed of the martial artist character cooking the acquired ingredients, and finally, an image of miso soup in a pot is displayed. Also, at timing t20, the "Assistant Chef Appears Presentation" is executed. Note that in this embodiment, during the "Assistant Chef Appears Presentation," operation acceptance of the attack button 3710 is enabled for a predetermined period (2 seconds), and a circular, white control unit imitation image resembling the attack button 3710 is displayed near the center of the display area 1600a. The word "press" is included in the center of the control unit imitation image, indicating to the player how to operate the attack button 3710. Additionally, below the control unit imitation image, a remaining time gauge image indicating the effective operation period is displayed, and the passage of the predetermined period during which operations can be accepted is indicated to the player by changes in the gauge. Figure 468(b) shows the display state at timing t20, when the "Ingredient Cooking Presentation" begins.

At timing t22, the valid operation period ends. At the same time as the end of the valid operation period, the samurai character and the band-like effect image are displayed. The samurai character is displayed at the lower left of display area 1600a, and the band-like effect image is displayed at the top and bottom of display area 1600a. The samurai character is displayed until timing t23. The band-like effect image is displayed until timing t28. Figure 468 (c) shows the display state from timing t22 to timing t23.
Although an example of the presentation has been shown in which no operation is performed on the attack button 3710 during the valid operation period, if an operation is performed on the attack button 3710 during the valid operation period, the display of the samurai character and band-shaped presentation image will begin at the time the operation is performed.

From timing t23 to timing t26, the martial artist character is displayed holding ingredients in his hands. A pot is also displayed to the left of the martial artist character. The martial artist character's lines read "Cooking!" Figure 468(d) shows the display state at this time.
Next, at timing t26, the acquired ingredients are added to the pot and the miso soup is displayed as being ready. The warrior character's lines read, "Miso soup is ready!" This display continues until timing t27. Figure 468(e) shows the display state at this time.
Next, at timing t27, a "star display effect" is executed, and the characters "★★★☆☆" are displayed as the lines of the martial artist character. The "star display effect" continues until timing t28. Figure 468 (f) shows the display state at this time.
The "ingredients cooking performance" ends at timing t28.

At timing t28, a "tasting performance" begins, in which the master character tastes the completed miso soup. From timing t28 to timing t30, the master character is displayed on the left side of the display area 1600a. The master character's lines, "I'm starving!", are also displayed. Figure 468(g) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t30, the attack button 3710 becomes operational for a predetermined period (3 seconds), and a circular, red simulated operation image resembling the attack button 3710 is displayed near the center of the display area 1600a. The word "press" is included in the center of the simulated operation image, indicating to the player how to operate the attack button 3710. In addition, a remaining time gauge image indicating the effective operation period is displayed below the simulated operation image, and the passage of the predetermined period during which operations can be accepted is indicated to the player by changes in the gauge.
Figure 468(h) shows the display state at the timing when the valid operation period starts.
At timing t33, the valid operation period ends, and the line "It's delicious!" from the master character is displayed near the center of display area 1600a. After the line "It's delicious!" is displayed, the decorative symbols stop in a repeating combination (in this example, "4", "4", "4"), resulting in a jackpot.
Although an example of the presentation has been shown in which no operation is performed on the attack button 3710 during the valid operation period, if an operation is performed on the attack button 3710 during the valid operation period, the dialogue will be displayed at the time the operation is performed.

At timing t33, the line "It's delicious!" is displayed. This display state continues until timing t35. Figure 469(a) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t35, the center decorative symbol "4" is temporarily stopped. This display state continues until timing t37. FIG. 469(b) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t37, the type of decorative symbol is changed from the reach decorative symbol to the normal decorative symbol. FIG. 469(c) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t38, the decorative symbols are displayed as a combination of "4", "4", and "4", which indicates a jackpot. The display of the martial artist character also ends, and the "miso soup effect" ends. This display state continues until timing t39. Figure 469(d) shows the display state at this time.

In the example of the presentation shown with reference to Figures 466 to 469, "matsutake" is stocked at timing t2. Furthermore, in the presentation thereafter, only one stocked "matsutake" is acquired, and no other ingredients are acquired. In other words, presentation pattern PTN40 is selected as the presentation pattern. The fact that "matsutake" is stocked means that a jackpot has been confirmed. In other words, the display of "matsutake" being stocked is a "jackpot confirmation presentation."
The player can recognize that a jackpot will occur when the "matsutake" mushrooms are stocked, and can enjoy the subsequent "miso soup effect" at ease. In addition, the occurrence of the "specific high expectation effect" multiple times allows the player to recognize with more certainty that a jackpot will occur, giving the player a great sense of satisfaction.

Next, another example of presentation will be explained with reference to Figures 470 and 471. The ingredient stocked in this example of presentation is "matsutake mushroom", as in the examples shown with reference to Figures 466 to 469.
In the example of the effect shown with reference to Figures 470 and 471, the "Miso Soup effect" starts at timing t0.5. First, during the period from timing t0.5 to timing t1.5, a horizontally long window is displayed, similar to the example of the effect shown with reference to Figure 459(a). Figure 471(a) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t2, "matsutake" is stocked. Figure 471 (b) shows the display state at this time. Note that no other ingredients will be acquired in the subsequent effects. In other words, the effect pattern selected is effect pattern PTN40. Furthermore, the fact that "matsutake" is stocked means that it is confirmed that a jackpot will occur. In other words, the display of "matsutake" being stocked is a "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect."

At timing t7, the type of decorative symbol is changed from the normal decorative symbol to the reach decorative symbol. Also, a master character appears, and the stocked "matsutake" moves to the position of the master character's hand. Figure 471 (c) shows the display state at this time.
Next, at timing t9, the left, center, and right reach decorative symbols temporarily stop at the symbol "4." This state continues until timing t10. FIG. 471(d) shows the display state at this time.
Next, at timing t10, the left, center, and right reach decorative symbols are stopped and displayed as a "4". The display of the master character and the "matsutake" mushroom also ends, and the "miso soup effect" ends. This state continues until timing t10. Figure 471(e) shows the display state at this time.
After timing t11, the game transitions to a jackpot game state.

In the example shown with reference to Figures 470 and 471, a "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" is executed, and the decorative symbols on the left, center, and right are displayed stopped. Various modified examples of the "decorative symbol sudden stop effect" may be applied to the example shown with reference to Figures 470 and 471.

In this embodiment, the player can recognize that a jackpot will occur when "matsutake" mushrooms are stocked. Furthermore, because no effects requiring operation of the control unit, such as "ingredient acquisition operation effects" or "taste-testing effects," are executed, the display of the changing decorative symbols ends in a short time, preventing the player from having to wait a long time before the jackpot game state is entered, and preventing a decline in interest.

In the embodiment shown with reference to Figure 470, the reach decorative pattern may be displayed from timing t0. Also, the second background music may be output from timing t0. Also, the "miso soup effect" may be ended at timing t9. In other words, the display of the master character and the "matsutake" may be ended at timing t9.

Next, another example of the effect will be explained with reference to Fig. 472 and Fig. 473. In this example of the effect, the same display as the example of the effect shown with reference to Fig. 462 to Fig. 465 is performed until the end of the "ingredients cooking effect" (timing t28). Then, after the "ingredients cooking effect" ends, a special "tasting effect" is executed. The expected probability of this special "tasting effect" is 100%. In other words, the special "tasting effect" is a "big win occurrence confirmation effect."
In addition, in the special "taste presentation," the rainbow colors are visibly displayed. Specifically, the rainbow colors are visibly displayed by displaying a rainbow-colored effect image in the display area 1600a or by illuminating the luminous decorative members in rainbow colors.
First, the "taste presentation" starts at timing t28. Figure 473(a) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t30, the type of decorative symbol is switched from the reach decorative symbol to the normal decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol changes at high speed. Also, the master character's line "This is from my training days..." is displayed. Figure 473(b) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t32, the line "He ate well..." is displayed as the line from the master character. Figure 473(c) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t34, the line "It's a proper pot!" is displayed as the line from the master character. Figure 473(d) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t36, the words "Never forget your original intention!" are displayed as the lines of the master character. Figure 473(e) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t37, the left, center, and right decorative symbols temporarily stop at the symbol "5." Figure 473(f) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t38, the left, center, and right decorative symbols are each displayed as a "5." The display of the master character and the pot ends, and the "miso soup effect" ends. Figure 473 (g) shows the display state at this time.
After timing t39, the game transitions to a jackpot game state.

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the special "taste-sampling performance" starts from timing t28, the special "taste-sampling performance" may also be started from another timing before the start of the "taste-sampling performance."
In addition, although an embodiment has been shown in which the special "taste preview" starts midway through the performance examples shown with reference to Figures 462 to 464, the special "taste preview" may also be started at any timing in other performance examples. For example, the special "taste preview" may be started midway through the performance examples shown with reference to Figures 466 to 468.
The period for displaying the lines of the master character may also be set to be longer. For example, the lines of the master character may be displayed in sequence for a period of about one to three minutes, or a special video in which the master character appears may be played. By adopting such an embodiment, a sense of closeness to the character may be created, and interest may be enhanced.
Furthermore, since the player is not required to operate the operation units such as the attack button 3710, the player can be more immersed in the presentation.

A "cooking cut-in effect" may be executed during the execution of the "ingredient cooking effect." For example, a predetermined image may be displayed to indicate the likelihood of a jackpot during a predetermined period (e.g., the period from timing t23.5 to timing t25.5) when the phrase "Cooking!" shown with reference to FIG. 460(b) is displayed.
FIG. 474 shows a display example in the "cooking cut-in effect." Specifically, images of three large "sardines" appear from the right edge of the display area 1600a and disappear off the screen from the left edge. "Sardines" come in white, red, and rainbow colors. When a white "sardine" is displayed, the expectation is 20%, when a red "sardine" is displayed, the expectation is 50%, and when a rainbow-colored "sardine" is displayed, the expectation is 100%. FIG. 474(a) shows a display example when a white "sardine" is displayed, FIG. 474(b) shows a display example when a red "sardine" is displayed, and FIG. 474(c) shows a display example when a rainbow-colored "sardine" is displayed.
When the rainbow-colored "sardine" is displayed, the probability of winning is 100%, so the display of the rainbow-colored "sardine" is a "considerable big win."

The execution time of the "Miso soup effect" may vary depending on the type of "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" that is executed.
For example, in the example of the presentation shown with reference to Figures 470 and 471, the time from when the "Miso Soup Presentation" starts at timing t0.5 until the decorative pattern is displayed stationary and the "Miso Soup Presentation" ends is a short 9.5 seconds.
On the other hand, in the example of the effect shown with reference to Figures 472 and 473, the time from when the "Miso Soup effect" starts at timing t0.5 until the decorative symbols are statically displayed and the "Miso Soup effect" ends is 37.5 seconds. This time may also be set to be longer than 37.5 seconds (for example, about 1 to 3 minutes).
In this way, when the result of the variable display indicates a jackpot, the execution time of the "miso soup effect" may be less than the predetermined time or may be greater than the predetermined time.

Furthermore, in the example of the presentation shown with reference to Figure 470, the timing (timing t9) at which the decorative patterns on the left, right, and center temporarily stop may be changed to, for example, timing t5, timing t6, timing t7, timing t8, etc.
In this way, in the examples of presentation shown with reference to Figures 458, 462, 466 and 472, the timing (t9) at which the decorative pattern reaches the reach state is the same, but in the example of presentation shown with reference to Figure 470, the player is notified of a jackpot without reaching the reach state at a timing earlier than the timing (t9) at which the decorative pattern reaches the reach state, which gives the player a sense of surprise and great excitement.

In addition, when a specific "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" (for example, displaying or stocking "matsutake mushroom" or "spiny lobster") is executed, one effect pattern can be executed from a plurality of effect patterns including the effect example shown with reference to Figure 470, and when another "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" (for example, a "cooking cut-in effect" in which a rainbow-colored "sardine" is displayed) is executed, one effect pattern can be executed from a plurality of effect patterns excluding the effect example shown with reference to Figure 470.
In this way, by reducing the frequency of execution of the example effect shown with reference to Fig. 470, it is possible to prevent the example effect shown with reference to Fig. 470 from being the first pattern that a first-time player sees. If this were to be executed first, it would clearly diminish the effects described above (especially the surprise).

Although an embodiment has been shown in which the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" is executed using the display area 1600a, an effect using a component other than the display area 1600a may also be adopted as the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect."
For example, when the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" is executed, the luminous decorative members provided on the door frame 3 and the luminous decorative members provided on the game board 5 may be made to emit light in a predetermined luminous pattern (for example, rainbow colors). Also, the movable decorative members provided on the game board 5 may be operated. Also, the left lever vibration source 3722 and the right lever vibration source 3732 may be vibrated. These may also be combined.

When "matsutake mushrooms" are stocked as an ingredient, the execution time of the "miso soup effect" may be as short as 9.5 seconds, as shown in the example of the effect shown with reference to Figures 470 and 471.
On the other hand, when the "cooking cut-in effect" is executed during the execution of the "miso soup effect" as in the example shown with reference to Figure 474, the execution time of the "miso soup effect" may be as long as 37.5 seconds. Also, during the "cooking cut-in effect", a rainbow-colored "sardine" may be displayed, which is a "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect."
When "matsutake" is stocked, the execution time of the "miso soup effect" can be short (short pattern) or long (long pattern). On the other hand, when a "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" other than the stock of "matsutake" is executed, the execution time of the "miso soup effect" can only be long (long pattern).
The timing to start displaying "matsutake" includes each operation timing in the "ingredient acquisition operation presentation" and timing before timing t0. The timing to stock "matsutake" can be at the time of starting winning (pre-reading process is performed simultaneously with starting winning, and "matsutake" is stocked based on the result of the pre-reading process), at the start of a predetermined variable display (based on the pre-reading process, "matsutake" is stocked at the time when a predetermined variable display (variable display executed before the variable display targeted by the pre-reading process) starts), timing t2 immediately after the variable display starts, or timing t11 immediately after the left and right decorative patterns reach a ready state.
The display of "Matsutake" may continue until the start of the "Tasting Performance" (timing t28) or until the end of the "Tasting Performance" (timing t35).

Referring to Figures 466 to 469, an embodiment has been shown in which a "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" and multiple "specific high expectation effects" are executed in the same variable display, but in a certain variable display, only a "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" may be executed and no "specific high expectation effects" may be executed. Alternatively, a "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" may be executed and only one "specific high expectation effect" may be executed.

In the "miso soup effect," when a stock of "matsutake mushrooms" or "spiny lobster" is displayed, it may be possible to prevent multiple types of "specific high expectation effects" from being executed (i.e., it may be possible to prevent a jackpot from being confirmed by a "specific high expectation effect").
Conversely, when a "cooking cut-in effect" in which a rainbow-colored "sardine" is displayed during the "miso soup effect" (or other "big hit confirmation effect") is executed, it is preferable to configure the device so that multiple "specific high expectation effects" can be executed.
With the above configuration, when a display is made that "matsutake mushrooms" or "spiny lobsters" are stocked, the player already knows that a jackpot will be reached, so there is no need to repeatedly notify the player that a jackpot has been confirmed, thereby reducing the inconvenience to the player.

A "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" may be executed based on the pre-reading process.
For example, ingredients such as "matsutake mushroom" and "spiny lobster," which are determined to result in a jackpot based on the pre-reading process, may be stocked during a predetermined variable display before the variable display that is the subject of the pre-reading process begins.
Furthermore, based on the look-ahead processing, a specific vibration effect may be executed as a "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" by vibrating the left lever vibration source 3722 or the right lever vibration source 3732. Furthermore, after the specific vibration effect is generated, a "miso soup effect" may be always generated.
Furthermore, as a "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect", a silent effect (excluding error sounds) may be executed in which all sound effects output from the speaker are made inaudible (volume is set to 0 or not output). Also, after the silent effect occurs, a "miso soup effect" may always occur.
The timing at which ingredients are stocked, a specific vibration effect is executed, or a silent effect is executed may be the timing at which the starting winning occurs or the timing at which the pending image moves (the timing at which a specified variable display starts before the variable display that is the subject of the pre-reading process begins).
Furthermore, even when a "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" is executed based on the pre-reading process, it is desirable that the effect image be configured to appear visibly in rainbow colors at the timing when a "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" (such as stocking of "matsutake" or "kuroshiki", a specific vibration effect or silent effect) is executed (for example, when the start winning occurs or when the pending image moves).

When a predetermined "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" (for example, a specific vibration effect) is executed based on the look-ahead processing, a "presentation pattern in which a sudden announcement is made" may be executed when a "miso soup effect" is executed in the variable display of the look-ahead target, but when a specific "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" (for example, display of ingredients such as "matsutake mushroom") is executed based on the look-ahead processing, the "presentation pattern in which a sudden announcement is made" may not be executed when a "miso soup effect" is executed in the variable display of the look-ahead target. In this case, the execution time of the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" itself is set to be longer for the specific "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" than for the predetermined "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect."
Therefore, the "presentation pattern in which a sudden announcement is made" is executed according to the execution time of the "big win occurrence confirmation presentation", so it is possible to prevent situations in which the "miso soup presentation" (variable display) is ended while a specific "big win occurrence confirmation presentation" is being executed, and the player will no longer feel uncomfortable.

In this embodiment, as shown with reference to Figures 462 to 465 and Figures 466 to 469, there are cases where, after ingredients are stocked and the decorative pattern reaches a winning state, the decorative pattern stops and displays a double number, and there are cases where, after ingredients are stocked and the decorative pattern does not reach a winning state, the decorative pattern stops and displays a double number, as shown with reference to Figures 470 to 471.
Although an example has been given in which ingredients are stocked after the start of the variable display, ingredients may also be stocked based on a look-ahead process before the start of the variable display.

In the "Miso soup effect," the decorative symbols are configured to have at least normal decorative symbols and reach decorative symbols. Although the embodiment in which the type of decorative symbol immediately after the start of the variable display is the normal decorative symbol has been shown, the decorative symbol may be displayed as the reach decorative symbol immediately after the start of the variable display.
Furthermore, when a predetermined "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" (for example, the display of "matsutake") is executed, the decorative pattern immediately after the start of the variable display that is the subject of the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" may be either a normal decorative pattern (when "matsutake" is displayed as a pre-reading effect) or a reach decorative pattern (when "matsutake" is displayed in the variable display).
In addition, when a specific "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" (for example, a special "tasting effect" or a "cooking cut-in effect" in which rainbow-colored "sardines" are displayed) is executed, it is advisable to ensure that the decorative pattern that appears immediately after the start of the variable display that is the subject of the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" is not a reach decorative pattern.
In this way, when "matsutake" is displayed as a pre-reading effect, the player already knows that a jackpot will occur, so the decorative symbols can be set as reach decorative symbols from the start of the target variation. Also, since the reach decorative symbols are configured to appear when the decorative symbols are in a reach state (a state in which a high-expectation effect is being performed), it is clear that the player will feel a sense of anticipation when they see the reach decorative symbols. In other words, even in the "effect pattern in which a sudden announcement is performed" when "matsutake" is displayed as a pre-reading effect, by ensuring that the reach decorative symbols that give a sense of anticipation are seen, it is possible to prevent players from missing the prize.
On the other hand, when a "matsutake mushroom" is displayed after the start of the variable display, or a special "tasting effect" or a "cooking cut-in effect" in which a rainbow-colored "sardine" is displayed is performed, if the decorative pattern becomes a reach decorative pattern immediately after the start of the variable display, the player will feel uncomfortable. Therefore, since there is no "effect pattern in which a sudden announcement is made," it is desirable that the decorative pattern immediately after the start of the variable display not be a reach decorative pattern.

In the variable display in which the "miso soup effect" is executed, it is preferable to output one of a plurality of BGMs including at least a first BGM and a second BGM. In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 458 to 474, the output of the first BGM begins at timing t0, but this is not limiting, and the output of the second BGM may also begin at timing t0. Furthermore, while the BGM is switched from the first BGM to the second BGM at timing t7 or t10, this is not limiting, and the variable display may not switch the BGM, or the BGM may be switched from the first BGM or the second BGM to a common BGM.
Furthermore, the first BGM may not be output in a variable display in which a specific "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" (for example, a display in which "matsutake mushrooms" are stocked) among the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effects" is executed. In other words, in a variable display in which a specific "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" is executed, any one of a plurality of BGMs excluding the first BGM is output, and in a variable display in which a "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" other than the specific "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" (for example, a "cooking cut-in effect" in which rainbow-colored "sardines" are displayed) is executed, any one of a plurality of BGMs including the first BGM is output.
In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 458 to 474, the first BGM is switched to the second BGM at a timing after timing t9 when the decorative symbol reaches a reach state, so the player can feel more anticipation for a jackpot when the second BGM is output than when the first BGM is output. In other words, the first BGM is BGM that does not increase the player's anticipation for a jackpot. If the first BGM was output when a display showing that "matsutake" is being stocked (even in a pre-reading effect), the player would feel uncomfortable. Therefore, by configuring the variable display showing that "matsutake" is being stocked so that at least the first BGM is not output and the second BGM can be output, the above situation can be prevented.

When the second BGM is output during the variable display in which the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" is executed, the second BGM may be output at the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols or the start of the "miso soup effect," or the output of the second BGM may start at a predetermined timing during the execution of the variable display. The predetermined timing may be when the decorative symbols on the left and right temporarily stop with the same number and enter a reach state, or when the "ingredient acquisition operation effect" begins.
Furthermore, when the first BGM is output during a variable display in which a "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" (such as a "cooking cut-in effect" in which a rainbow colored "sardine" is displayed) other than a specific "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" (such as the display of a "matsutake mushroom") is executed, it is only output at the start of the variable display (i.e., the output of the first BGM does not begin in the middle of the variable display).

In the example of the effect shown with reference to the time charts of H40 and H50 in FIG. 458, it is preferable to end the output of the second BGM before the start of the effective operation period of the "taste-sampling effect." For example, it is preferable to end the output of the second BGM at timing t29.
In the example of the rendering shown with reference to the time chart in Fig. 470, the first BGM may be output until timing t9. Also, the second BGM may not be output after timing t9.
In the example of the performance shown with reference to the time chart in FIG. 472, the second BGM may be turned off at timing t30. Alternatively, the third BGM corresponding to a special "taste performance" may be output from timing t30.

It may be possible to stock or acquire "matsutake mushrooms" or "spiny lobsters" only when a specific background image is displayed.
This allows a player who has taken his eyes off the display area 1600a at the time when a "matsutake mushroom" or a "spiny lobster" appears to quickly notice it when he returns his eyes to the display area 1600a.

In the "Miso Soup Effect," the effect of operating the attack button 3710 is executed multiple times. The number of times the effect of operating the attack button 3710 is executed varies depending on the effect pattern (number of ingredients) of the ingredients acquired.
Also, in the "Miso soup effect" where the "Short Notice" is performed, it is advisable not to execute the button effect. This has the effect of shortening the effect time itself.

Furthermore, in the "miso soup effect" in which no "bump announcement" is made, the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" may be such that the button effect is always executed more frequently when a "cooking cut-in effect" in which a rainbow-colored "sardine" is displayed is performed than when a "matsutake mushroom" or "spiny lobster" is displayed. For example, it may be possible to make it so that "matsutake mushroom" or "spiny lobster" can only be obtained in the first and second "ingredient acquisition operation effect" and the third "ingredient acquisition operation effect" is not executed, while when a "cooking cut-in effect" in which a rainbow-colored "sardine" is performed, the "ingredient acquisition operation effect" is always executed three times.
In this way, if "matsutake mushroom" is displayed in the first "ingredient acquisition operation presentation", the second and third "ingredient acquisition operation presentations" will not be executed thereafter, thereby preventing the player from feeling annoyed by other presentations being executed in the variable display indicating a jackpot.
On the other hand, when the "cooking cut-in effect" in which rainbow-colored "sardines" are displayed is executed, it is not confirmed that a jackpot will occur until the time when the rainbow-colored "sardines" are displayed, so by executing the "ingredient acquisition operation effect" three times, the player's anticipation can be increased that the rainbow-colored "sardines" will be displayed, that is, the effect that confirms that a jackpot will occur will be executed.

It may also be possible to provide movable decorative elements that can move in accordance with the ongoing performance. Furthermore, it is preferable to provide at least a first movement mode or a second movement mode as the movement mode of the movable decorative elements in the movable decorative element movement performance, and to have the movable decorative elements move in accordance with the first movement mode or the second movement mode.

The operation of the movable decorative member in the first operating mode should be performed whenever a "cooking cut-in" is performed, in which a "matsutake mushroom" or "spiny lobster" is displayed, or a rainbow-colored "sardine" is displayed.
The operation of the movable decorative member in the second operation mode is not performed when "matsutake mushroom" or "spiny lobster" is displayed, but is performed when a "cooking cut-in effect" in which a rainbow-colored "sardine" is displayed is performed.
When a "cooking cut-in effect" in which a rainbow-colored "sardine" is displayed is performed, either a movable decorative member operation effect in the first operation mode or a movable decorative member operation effect in the second operation mode is executed.
In addition, when a special "tasting performance" is performed, it is advisable not to perform a performance that operates the movable decorative member, but to have the movable decorative member wait in a standby position.

The performance of the movement of the movable decorative member in the first operating mode may be performed, for example, together with the "display of the tasting results" (for example, the period from timing t33 to timing t35 in FIG. 466).
In addition, in the case of the example of the presentation shown with reference to the time chart in Figure 470, it is preferable to execute the movable decorative element operation presentation in the first operation mode after the decorative pattern temporarily stops in a manner indicating a jackpot at timing t9.
In addition, the operation of the movable decorative member in the second operation mode may be performed at the timing when the reach state is established (for example, timing t9 in Figure 466) or before the start of the ``ingredient acquisition operation performance'' (before timing t15 in Figure 466).

According to such an embodiment, when "matsutake mushroom" or "spiny lobster" is displayed, or when a "cooking cut-in effect" in which a rainbow-colored "sardine" is displayed is performed, the sense of exhilaration already provided by the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" can be further enhanced by the movable decorative member operation effect.
In addition, for players who want to see the special "tasting effect," the movable decorative member operation effect can be executed, preventing the visibility of the "tasting effect" from decreasing.

When the longest of multiple presentation times is selected as the presentation time for executing the "miso soup presentation" (variable display of decorative symbols), it is preferable that the display of "matsutake mushroom" or "spiny lobster" as the "jackpot occurrence confirmation presentation" is not performed. On the other hand, even when the longest presentation time is selected, it is preferable that the "cooking cut-in presentation" in which a rainbow-colored "sardine" is displayed as the "jackpot occurrence confirmation presentation" may be performed.
Comparing the display of "matsutake" or "spiny lobster" in the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" with the "cooking cut-in effect" in which a rainbow-colored "sardine" is displayed, the timing of the "matsutake" or "spiny lobster" appearing after the "miso soup effect" starts is earlier. Therefore, if the longest effect time is selected as the effect time for the "miso soup effect" in the variable display in which the "matsutake" or "spiny lobster" is displayed, the player may perceive the effect after the "matsutake" or "spiny lobster" is displayed as redundant. If the longest effect time among multiple effect times is selected as the effect time for executing the "miso soup effect" (variable display of decorative symbols), the occurrence of such a situation can be prevented by preventing the display of "matsutake" or "spiny lobster" as the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect."

In this way, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a "miso soup effect" that corresponds to the variable display of decorative symbols, and a "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" that is executed only when a jackpot occurs. The "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" includes the display or stock display of "matsutake" or "spiny lobster" which is executed early, and the "cooking cut-in effect" that displays rainbow-colored "sardines" which is executed late, and the "miso soup effect" when the display or stock display of "matsutake" or "spiny lobster" is executed. The presentation time of the "miso soup presentation" may be less than the predetermined time (presentation example shown with reference to FIG. 470) or greater than the predetermined time (presentation examples shown with reference to FIGS. 458, 462, 466, 472), and when a "cooking cut-in presentation" in which rainbow colored "sardines" are displayed is performed, the presentation time of the "miso soup presentation" is always greater than the predetermined time (FIG. 458, 462, 466, 472) (it never falls short of the predetermined time (FIG. 470)).

According to such an embodiment, when a specific "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" (such as stocking "matsutake" or "spiny lobster") is executed among the "jackpot occurrence confirmation effects" that are executed only when a jackpot is reached, a presentation time less than a predetermined time, including the shortest presentation time, may be selected as the presentation time for the "miso soup effect." In contrast, when another "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" (such as a "cooking cut-in effect" in which a rainbow-colored "sardine" is displayed) is executed, a presentation time less than the predetermined time is not selected as the presentation time for the "miso soup effect." For this reason, the average presentation time for the "miso soup effect" is shorter when a specific "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" is executed than when another "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" is executed.
Furthermore, because the execution timing of a specific "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" is earlier than that of other "jackpot occurrence confirmation effects," it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player perceives the presentation time after realizing that a jackpot has been reached as being excessive when a specific "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" is executed. Conversely, if a presentation time shorter than the predetermined time is selected as the presentation time for the "miso soup effect" when another "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" is executed, the "miso soup effect" will end without the other "jackpot occurrence confirmation effect" being executed, which will unintentionally reduce the frequency of appearance of the other "jackpot occurrence confirmation effects." Therefore, adopting the above embodiment has the effect of preventing this situation from occurring.

An embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 123 to 474 will be described below with reference to Figures 475 to 481. This embodiment is particularly a modification of the "taste presentation."
The first half of the effect in this embodiment (the portion from timing t0 to timing t38) is the same as the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 449 to 453, so a description thereof will be omitted. The effect from timing t38 onwards will be described below.

In this embodiment, during the "tasting effect" that begins at timing t38, there are multiple display modes for the control panel simulation image and the display mode when the master character is tasting. Furthermore, these display modes indicate whether the result of the special lottery is a jackpot or not, using a predetermined presentation mode.

First, we will explain performance example 1 by referring to the time chart shown in Figure 475 (a) and the display example shown in Figure 477.
At timing t38, a "tasting performance" begins in which the master character tastes the completed miso soup. From timing t38 to timing t40, the master character is displayed on the left side of the display area 1600a. The master character's lines are also displayed, saying "I'm starving!" Figure 477(a) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t40, the attack button 3710 becomes operational for a predetermined period (3 seconds), and a circular, blue simulated operation image resembling the attack button 3710 is displayed near the center of the display area 1600a. The character "press" is included in the center of the simulated operation image, indicating to the player how to operate the attack button 3710. In addition, a remaining time gauge image indicating the effective operation period is displayed below the simulated operation image, and the passage of the predetermined period during which operations can be accepted is indicated to the player by changes in the gauge. Figure 477(b) shows the display state at the timing when the effective operation period begins.
At timing t43, the operation valid period ends, and the line "Munch, munch!" is displayed as the line spoken by the master character. Figure 477(c) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t45, the line "Munch, munch!" is displayed twice as the line spoken by the master character. Figure 477(d) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t47, the line "No, no!" is displayed as the line from the master character. This display continues until timing t49. Figure 477(e) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t49, the center decorative pattern temporarily stops at a number (here, "5") that is one number away from the number of the decorative patterns on the left and right. At the same time, the display of the master character and the master character's lines ends, and the display of the martial artist character and the martial artist character's lines ("No good...") begins. Figure 477(f) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t51, the type of decorative symbol is changed from the reach decorative symbol to the normal decorative symbol. FIG. 477(g) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t52, the display of the decorative symbols stops and stops. The display of the martial artist character also stops, and the "miso soup effect" ends. Figure 477 (h) shows the display state at this time.
The stopped state of the decorative pattern continues until timing t53, after which the variable display of the next decorative pattern begins.

Next, we will explain performance example 2 with reference to the time chart shown in Figure 475 (b) and the display example shown in Figure 478.
At timing t38, a "tasting performance" begins in which the master character tastes the completed miso soup. From timing t38 to timing t40, the master character is displayed on the left side of the display area 1600a. The master character's lines are also displayed, saying "I'm starving!" Figure 478(a) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t40, the attack button 3710 becomes operational for a predetermined period (3 seconds), and a circular, blue simulated operation image resembling the attack button 3710 is displayed near the center of the display area 1600a. The character "press" is included in the center of the simulated operation image, indicating to the player how to operate the attack button 3710. In addition, a remaining time gauge image indicating the effective operation period is displayed below the simulated operation image, and the passage of the predetermined period during which operations can be accepted is indicated to the player by changes in the gauge. Figure 478(b) shows the display state at the timing when the effective operation period begins.
At timing t43, the operation valid period ends, and the line "Munch, munch!" is displayed as the line spoken by the master character. Figure 478(c) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t45, the line "Munch, munch!" is displayed twice as the line spoken by the master character. Figure 478(d) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t47, the line "It's delicious!" is displayed as the line from the master character. Also, vertical rainbow-colored images are displayed on the left and right of the display area 1600a. This display continues until timing t49. Figure 478(e) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t49, the center decorative symbol temporarily stops at the same number (here, "4") as the number on the decorative symbols on the left and right. At the same time, the display of the master character and the master character's lines ends, and the display of the martial artist character and the martial artist character's lines ("Yay!") begins. Figure 478 (f) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t51, the type of decorative symbol changes from the reach decorative symbol to the normal decorative symbol. Also, the display of the vertical rainbow image ends. Figure 478(g) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t52, the display of the decorative symbols stops and stops. The display of the martial artist character also stops, and the "miso soup effect" ends. Figure 478 (h) shows the display state at this time.
The decorative symbols remain stopped until timing t53, after which the big win game begins.

Next, we will explain performance example 3 with reference to the time chart shown in Figure 476 (a) and the display examples shown in Figures 479 and 481.
At timing t38, a "tasting performance" begins in which the master character tastes the completed miso soup. From timing t38 to timing t40, the master character is displayed on the left side of the display area 1600a. The master character's lines are also displayed, saying "I'm starving!" Figure 479(a) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t40, the attack button 3710 becomes operational for a predetermined period (3 seconds), and a circular, blue simulated operation image resembling the attack button 3710 is displayed near the center of the display area 1600a. The character "press" is included in the center of the simulated operation image, indicating to the player how to operate the attack button 3710. In addition, a remaining time gauge image indicating the effective operation period is displayed below the simulated operation image, and the passage of the predetermined period during which operations can be accepted is indicated to the player by changes in the gauge. Figure 479(b) shows the display state at the timing when the effective operation period begins.
At timing t43, the operation valid period ends, and the line "Munch, munch!" is displayed as the line spoken by the master character. Figure 479(c) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t45, the line "Munch, munch!" is displayed twice as the line spoken by the master character. Figure 479(d) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t47, the line "Munch, munch!" is displayed three times as the line spoken by the master character. Figure 479(e) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t49, the line "Munch, munch!" is displayed four times as the line spoken by the master character. Figure 479(f) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t51, the line "It's so delicious!" is displayed as the line from the master character. Also, horizontal rainbow images are displayed above and below the display area 1600a. This display continues until timing t53. Figure 479(g) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t53, the center decorative symbol temporarily stops at the same number (here, "4") as the number on the decorative symbols on the left and right. At the same time, the display of the master character and the master character's lines ends, and the display of the martial artist character and the martial artist character's lines ("Yay!") begins. Figure 479 (h) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t55, the type of decorative symbol changes from the reach decorative symbol to the normal decorative symbol. Also, the display of the horizontal rainbow image ends. Figure 480(a) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t56, the display of the decorative symbols stops and stops. The display of the martial artist character also stops, and the "miso soup effect" ends. Figure 480(b) shows the display state at this time.
The decorative symbols remain stopped until timing t57, after which the big win game begins.
In the embodiment shown in Figures 475 to 481, the expectation rate when the line "Munch, munch!" is displayed three times is 100%. As a performance effect, the line "Munch, munch!" is then displayed four times.

Next, we will explain performance example 4 with reference to the time chart shown in Figure 476 (b) and the display example shown in Figure 481.
At timing t38, a "tasting performance" begins in which the master character tastes the completed miso soup. From timing t38 to timing t40, the master character is displayed on the left side of display area 1600a. The master character's lines are also displayed, saying "I'm starving!" Figure 481(a) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t40, the attack button 3710 becomes operational for a predetermined period (3 seconds), and a circular, red simulated operation image resembling the attack button 3710 is displayed near the center of the display area 1600a. The character "press" is included in the center of the simulated operation image, indicating to the player how to operate the attack button 3710. Also, below the simulated operation image, a remaining time gauge image indicating the effective operation period is displayed, and the passage of the predetermined period during which operations can be accepted is indicated to the player by changes in the gauge. Figure 481(b) shows the display state at the timing when the effective operation period begins.
At timing t43, the operation valid period ends, and the line "Munch, munch!" is displayed as the line spoken by the master character. Figure 481(c) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t45, the line "Munch, munch!" is displayed twice as the line spoken by the master character. Figure 481(d) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t47, the line "It's delicious!" is displayed as the line from the master character. Also, vertical rainbow-colored images are displayed on the left and right of the display area 1600a. This display continues until timing t49. Figure 481(e) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t49, the center decorative symbol temporarily stops at the same number (here, "4") as the number on the decorative symbols on the left and right. At the same time, the display of the master character and the master character's lines ends, and the display of the martial artist character and the martial artist character's lines ("Yay!") begins. Figure 481 (f) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t51, the type of decorative symbol changes from the reach decorative symbol to the normal decorative symbol. Also, the display of the vertical rainbow image ends. Figure 481(g) shows the display state at this time.
At timing t52, the display of the decorative symbols stops and stops. The display of the martial artist character also stops, and the "miso soup effect" ends. Figure 481 (h) shows the display state at this time.
The stopped state of the decorative symbols continues until timing t53, after which the big win game starts.
In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 475 to 481, the expectation rate when a red operation section simulation image is displayed is 100%.

In presentation examples 1 to 3, a blue operation section simulating image is displayed at timing t40, and at timing t47 the player is informed whether the result of the variable display is a jackpot or not.
In the case of performance example 1, the master character's words ("No, no!") are displayed at timing t47, clearly indicating that the result of the variable display is a miss.
In the case of presentation example 2, at timing t47, the master character's words ("It's delicious!") and a vertical rainbow image are displayed, clearly indicating that the result of the varying display is a jackpot.
In the case of presentation example 3, the line of the master character ("Munch, munch!" x 3) is displayed at timing t47, suggesting that the result of the variable display is a jackpot. At timing t49, the line of the master character ("Munch, munch!" x 4) is displayed, and at timing t51, the line of the master character ("It's so delicious!") and a horizontal rainbow image are displayed, clearly indicating that the result of the variable display is a jackpot.
In the case of performance example 4, a red simulated image of the operation unit is displayed at timing t40, suggesting that the result of the variable display is a jackpot. At timing t47, the master character's line ("It's delicious!") and a vertical rainbow image are displayed, clearly indicating that the result of the variable display is a jackpot. Note that when a red simulated image of the operation unit is displayed, the master character's line at timing t47 is not "Munch munch!" x 3, but "It's delicious!" is displayed.

As shown in performance example 1, if the result of the varying display is a miss, neither the vertical nor horizontal rainbow image will be displayed.
On the other hand, as shown in Presentation Examples 2 to 4, when the result of the variable display is a jackpot, a vertical or horizontal rainbow image is displayed, so that the player can easily recognize that the result of the variable display is a jackpot. Note that, as shown in other embodiments, presentation examples in which a vertical or horizontal rainbow image is not displayed when the result of the variable display is a jackpot can also be executed.
Furthermore, as shown in Presentation Example 3, the player can recognize that the result of the variable display is a jackpot when the display time of the master character's lines displayed during the "tasting presentation" exceeds a certain length (timing t47 when "'Munch, munch!' x 3" is displayed). Furthermore, the rainbow-colored image displayed at this time is horizontal, which is different from the vertical rainbow-colored image displayed in Presentation Example 2 and Presentation Example 4.
Furthermore, as shown in Presentation Example 4, when a red operation section simulating image is displayed, the result of the variable display is always a jackpot. Furthermore, at timing t47, the line from the master character is not "Munch munch!" x 3, but "It's delicious!", and the player is quickly informed that a jackpot has occurred.

Referring to Presentation Examples 1 to 4, we have shown the presentation mode when no operation is performed during the valid operation period, but if an operation is performed on the attack button 3710 during the valid operation period, the valid operation period ends at the time the operation is performed, and the same lines as when no operation is performed during the valid operation period begin to be displayed.

During the execution of the "Miso Soup Presentation", predetermined background music may be output from the sound generating means (lower speaker 921 and a pair of upper speakers 573).
Note that BGM may not be output from the sound generating means during the period from timing t47 to timing t51 in Presentation Example 3. Alternatively, BGM may not be output from the sound generating means during the period from timing t47 to timing t53 or timing t55. At the timings when the state of not outputting BGM ends and output of BGM is resumed (timings t51, t53, and t55), output of BGM different from the predetermined BGM, which notifies the player that a jackpot has been confirmed, may be started.
By adopting such an embodiment, the player can be made aware that a big win has been confirmed, and can be made to pay attention to the display content of the display area 1600a (such as the words of the master character or a horizontal rainbow image).
In addition, it is possible to prevent background music from being output during the period from timing t43 to timing t47 in presentation example 1 and presentation example 2, and during the period from timing t43 to timing t51 in presentation example 3.

Referring to Presentation Examples 2 to 4, we have shown embodiments in which a vertical rainbow image or a horizontal rainbow image is displayed, but in Presentation Example 2, the decorative symbols may be displayed in a stopped state in a manner indicating a jackpot without displaying a vertical rainbow image. Furthermore, instead of displaying a vertical rainbow image, a predetermined image other than a vertical rainbow image or a horizontal rainbow image may be displayed. In this case, it is preferable to use a color other than rainbow (for example, gold) as the color of the predetermined image rather than rainbow colors.

With reference to Presentation Examples 1 to 4, embodiments have been shown in which vertical or horizontal rainbow images may be displayed, but in this case the decorative patterns are always displayed so as to be visible.
In addition, the decorative patterns on the left, center, and right may be temporarily not displayed during the period from timing t47 to timing t51 or the period from timing t47 to timing t53 in performance example 3.
By adopting such an embodiment, the player can be made aware that a big win has been confirmed, and can be made to pay attention to the display content of the display area 1600a (such as the words of the master character or a horizontal rainbow image).
Furthermore, the left, center, and right decorative symbols may be temporarily hidden from display during the period from timing t49 to timing t51 or the period from timing t49 to timing t53 in performance example 3. Furthermore, until they are temporarily hidden (before timing t49), the reach decorative symbols may be displayed as decorative symbols, and from the time they are displayed again (timing t51 or timing t53), the normal decorative symbols may be displayed.
According to this embodiment, the non-output state of the background music occurs first, which creates a sense of discomfort from the auditory information, thereby increasing the number of times when the player's expectations are heightened. In other words, an inexperienced player can gradually build up expectations for a jackpot at timing t47 and timing t49, while an experienced player can build up expectations for the execution of presentation example 3, which is different from presentation examples 1, 2, and 4, during the period from timing t47 to timing t49, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game. Furthermore, since the occurrence of a jackpot is already visually confirmed by hiding the decorative symbols, it is possible to prevent the decorative symbols from feeling redundant when they are displayed again because they have already been changed to a double-digit number.

The movable decorative member may be moved in a predetermined manner when the vertical rainbow image or the horizontal rainbow image is displayed. The manner of movement of the movable decorative member may be different or the same when the vertical rainbow image is displayed and when the horizontal rainbow image is displayed.
The operation period of the movable decorative member may be from the time when the display of the vertical rainbow image or horizontal rainbow image starts to the time when the display of the vertical rainbow image or horizontal rainbow image ends.
During the operation of the movable decorative member, the movable decorative member may emit light in rainbow colors, or may emit light in a single predetermined color (e.g., red or yellow) instead of rainbow colors.
In addition, when a vertical rainbow image or a horizontal rainbow image is displayed, the movable decorative member operates in a predetermined manner, but in performance example 2, when a jackpot is announced without a vertical rainbow image or a horizontal rainbow image being displayed, it is preferable that the movable decorative member does not operate (to coincide with the fact that a vertical rainbow image or a horizontal rainbow image is not displayed).
By moving the movable decorative element in accordance with the vertical or horizontal rainbow image, the player can clearly recognize that a jackpot has occurred, but if only the movable decorative element is moved, a situation may arise in which the player is unable to clearly recognize that a jackpot has occurred, which may confuse the player. The above configuration can prevent such a situation from occurring.

In presentation examples 2 and 4, the background image that was displayed during the valid operation period (timing t40 to timing t43) continues to be displayed even while the vertical rainbow image is being displayed.
On the other hand, in performance example 3, the background image displayed during the valid operation period may be switched to another background image at a predetermined timing between timing t47 and timing t51, and the horizontal rainbow image may be displayed while the other background image is displayed.
In addition, the decorative pattern in performance example 3 may be temporarily hidden for a predetermined period (the period from timing t47 to timing t51, the period from timing t47 to timing t53, the period from timing t49 to timing t51, or the period from timing t49 to timing t53), and in accordance with this period, at the start of these periods (timing t47 or timing t49), the background image that was displayed before the decorative pattern was hidden may be switched to a dedicated background image, and then at the end of these periods (timing t51 or timing t53), the dedicated background image may be switched to a background image that is different from the background image before the start of these periods.
In addition, as a dedicated background image during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily hidden, a background image using characters or patterns may be used, or a background image of a single color (for example, white or black) may be used.

In each of the performance examples 1 to 4, a timing for changing the type of decorative symbol from the reach decorative symbol to the normal decorative symbol is provided, but it is also possible to change the decorative symbol only in the performance examples 1 and 3 without changing this timing of change. In other words, in the performance examples 2 and 4, the decorative symbol is not changed, and the variable display of the decorative symbol ends with the reach decorative symbol remaining.
Furthermore, it is preferable that among presentation examples 2 to 4 that result in a jackpot, presentation example 3 is the one with the lowest rate (probability) of being executed.
In such a case, only in presentation example 3, which has the lowest execution rate (probability) among presentation examples 2 to 4 that result in a jackpot, the decorative symbols at the time of a reach are changed to the normal decorative symbols, so in presentation examples 2 and 4, which are mainly executed, if the decorative symbols are changed to the normal decorative symbols even though a jackpot is announced, the player may have doubts that they may not have won, which will lead to a decrease in interest in the game. With the above configuration, it is possible to prevent this situation.

In this way, in this embodiment, a "taste preview" can be executed during the valid operation period of the attack button 3710; a blue or red simulated operation image can be displayed during the valid operation period; and a vertical or horizontal rainbow image can be displayed after the "taste preview"; if a red simulated operation image is displayed during the valid operation period, the vertical rainbow image will always be displayed before a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the valid operation period; and if a blue simulated operation image is displayed during the valid operation period, the vertical rainbow image may be displayed before the predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the valid operation period, or the horizontal rainbow image may be displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the valid operation period.

According to this embodiment, in the button presentation for announcing a win or loss, the presentation pattern at the time of a jackpot can be changed depending on the state of the operation unit simulated image. That is, when a blue operation unit simulated image is displayed to indicate a jackpot, the rainbow image (vertical) may start to be displayed before the predetermined time has elapsed, or the rainbow image (horizontal) may start to be displayed after the predetermined time has elapsed. Also, when a red operation unit simulated image is displayed to indicate a jackpot, the rainbow image (vertical) always starts to be displayed before the predetermined time has elapsed.
According to such an embodiment, it becomes possible to determine whether a jackpot will occur depending on whether a predetermined time has passed even after the valid operation period for the button effect has ended, and a new jackpot effect can be provided.
In addition, because a jackpot may be notified only when a blue simulated image of the operation unit is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed, it is possible to keep the player feeling hopeful even after a blue simulated image of the operation unit is displayed without a red simulated image of the operation unit. If, for example, a jackpot is notified after a predetermined time has elapsed even when a red simulated image of the operation unit is displayed in the event of a jackpot, there would be merely two ways to notify a jackpot regardless of the appearance of the simulated image of the operation unit, and it is clear that the sense of anticipation (the sense of tension during the period from timing t43 to timing t47) unique to this invention, in which "the pattern in which a jackpot is notified after a predetermined time has elapsed was selected, so the red simulated image of the operation unit was not displayed," would not be imparted to the player.

Next, a modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 475 to 481 will be described with reference to FIGS. 482 to 484.
In the embodiment described below, the luminous decorative members may emit rainbow-colored light at a predetermined timing during the "taste-testing effect." The luminous decorative members emit rainbow-colored light only when the decorative symbols stop in a manner indicating a jackpot. There are also multiple timings when the luminous decorative members emit rainbow-colored light.

482 to 484 each show a time chart from timing t30 onwards.
The first half of the effect in this embodiment (the portion from timing t0 to timing t38) is the same as the embodiment shown with reference to Figures 449 to 453, so a description thereof will be omitted. The effect from timing t38 onwards will be described below.
In this embodiment, vertical and horizontal rainbow images are not displayed. The effects other than the light emission modes of the luminous decorative members are basically the same as those shown in Figures 475 to 481, so further explanation will be omitted.

First, we will explain performance example 1 with reference to the time chart shown in Figure 482 (a). Performance example 1 is a performance example in which the result of the variable display is a miss. In performance example 1, the light-emitting pattern of the luminous decorative components does not become rainbow-colored.

Next, we will explain performance example 2 with reference to the time chart shown in Figure 482 (b). Performance example 2 is a performance example in which the result of the variable display is a jackpot. In performance example 2, the light-emitting decorative member changes to rainbow colors at the same time as the effective operation period ends (timing t43). The rainbow-colored light-emitting decorative member continues to emit light until timing t47.
Furthermore, if the player operates the attack button 3710 during the valid operation period, the light-emitting decorative member will light up in rainbow colors at that timing.

Next, we will explain presentation examples 3A to 3C. Presentation examples 3A to 3C are each presentation examples in which the result of the variable display is a jackpot. In addition, at the same time that the effective operation period of the attack button 3710 begins (timing t40), the illumination pattern of the illuminating decorative member changes to rainbow colors. The rainbow illumination pattern of the illuminating decorative member continues until the end of the effective operation period.
Although the presence or absence of operation of the attack button 3710 and the timing of operation differ in each of the rendering examples 3A to 3C, the effective operation period of the attack button 3710 (i.e., the period during which the rainbow-colored illumination of the illuminating decorative component) continues up to timing t47 at the longest. Also, if the attack button 3710 is operated during the effective operation period of the attack button 3710, the rainbow-colored illumination of the illuminating decorative component will end at that timing.

First, we will explain presentation example 3A with reference to the time chart shown in Figure 483(a). Presentation example 3A is a presentation example in which the player does not operate the attack button 3710. In this presentation example, no operation is performed on the attack button 3710 during the valid operation period, and the valid operation period continues until timing t47.
The display content in display area 1600a is such that at timing t43, the display of the operation unit simulation image and remaining time gauge image ends, and the master character's lines of "Munch munch!" are displayed from timing t43 to timing t45, "Munch munch! Munch munch!" are displayed from timing t45 to timing t47, and "It's delicious!" are displayed from timing t47 to timing t49.
The illuminating decorative member changes to rainbow color illumination at the same time as the effective operation period starts (time t40), and continues to emit rainbow color illumination until time t47.

Next, we will explain presentation example 3B with reference to the time chart shown in Figure 483 (b). Presentation example 3B is a presentation example in which the player operates the attack button 3710 at timing t42. In this presentation example, the operation valid period ends at timing t42 when the attack button 3710 is operated.
The display content in display area 1600a is such that at timing t42, the display of the operation unit simulation image and remaining time gauge image ends, and the master character's lines are "Munch munch!" displayed from timing t42 to timing t44, "Munch munch! Munch munch!" displayed from timing t44 to timing t46, and "It's delicious!" displayed from timing t46 to timing t48.
The illuminating decorative member changes to rainbow colors at the same time as the effective operation period begins (time t40), and continues to emit rainbow colors until the attack button 3710 is operated at time t42.

Next, we will explain performance example 3C with reference to the time chart shown in Figure 484 (a).
Presentation example 3C is a presentation example in which, at timing t45, the player operates the attack button 3710. In this presentation example, the operation valid period ends at timing t45 when the attack button 3710 is operated.
The display content in display area 1600a is such that at timing t43, the display of the operation unit simulation image and remaining time gauge image ends, and the master character's lines of "Munch munch!" are displayed from timing t43 to timing t45, "Munch munch! Munch munch!" are displayed from timing t45 to timing t47, and "It's delicious!" are displayed from timing t47 to timing t49.
The illuminating decorative components change to rainbow colors at the same time as the effective operation period begins (time t40), and the rainbow-colored illumination of the illuminating decorative components continues until the attack button 3710 is operated at time t45.

Next, an embodiment (Rendering Example 4) that is a modification of the embodiment shown with reference to Rendering Examples 3A to 3C will be described with reference to the time chart shown in Figure 484 (b). In this embodiment, the timing at which the illuminating decorative member becomes rainbow-colored is not the same as the start timing of the effective operation period (timing t40), but one second after the start timing of the effective operation period (timing t41). In other respects, the rendering mode is the same as that shown in Rendering Examples 3A to 3C.
Presentation example 4 shown in Figure 484 (b) is an example of presentation when the player does not operate the attack button 3710, similar to presentation example 3A.
Presentation example 4 is a presentation example in which the result of the variable display is a jackpot. In presentation example 4, the light-emitting decorative members change to rainbow colors one second after the start of the valid operation period (timing t41). The rainbow-colored light-emitting decorative members continue to emit light until timing t47. In all other respects, the presentation is the same as that shown in presentation example 3A.
Furthermore, if the attack button 3710 is operated at any of timings t41 to t47, the rainbow-colored illumination of the luminous decorative member will end at that timing.

In this way, by changing the light-emitting decorative member's light-emitting pattern to rainbow colors for a predetermined period of time, in Presentation Examples 2 to 4, it is indicated to the player that a jackpot will occur.
On the other hand, during periods other than the specified period, the luminous decorative members are turned off or illuminated in a specific illumination mode that is synchronized with background music and is not recognized by the player as a rainbow-colored illumination mode.

In presentation example 2, when the valid operation period ends either by the player operating the attack button 3710 or by the passage of a predetermined time from the start of the valid operation period, the luminous decorative member changes to a rainbow-colored luminous state, and during the period in which the luminous decorative member is in a rainbow-colored luminous state (until timing t47), the rainbow-colored luminous state of the luminous decorative member continues until the predetermined timing, even if the attack button 3710 is operated.
On the other hand, in Presentation Examples 3A to 3C, the luminous decorative member emits rainbow-colored light when the effective operation period begins, and the rainbow-colored light emission of the luminous decorative member ends when the attack button 3710 is operated.
In addition, in performance example 4, at a predetermined timing after the start of the effective operation period of the attack button 3710, the luminous decorative member will emit a rainbow-colored light, and if an operation is performed on the attack button 3710 during the period in which the luminous decorative member is in a rainbow-colored light-emitting state, the rainbow-colored light-emitting state of the luminous decorative member will end at the timing when the operation on the attack button 3710 is performed.

In addition, in Presentation Example 3 and Presentation Example 4, whether or not to stop the rainbow-colored light emission mode may be determined depending on the operation mode. For example, the rainbow-colored light emission mode may not be stopped by simply pressing the attack button 3710 once, but may be stopped by pressing the button repeatedly or holding it down.
Also, the player or store clerk may be able to set whether or not the rainbow color light emission mode can be stopped.
Furthermore, a player or a store clerk may be able to set the operation mode that will stop the rainbow-colored light emission. For example, a single tap, a series of taps, or a long press may be set as the operation mode that will stop the rainbow-colored light emission.
Furthermore, the rainbow-colored light emission mode may be terminated upon operation depending on the display mode of the operation unit simulated image. For example, when a blue operation unit simulated image is displayed, the rainbow-colored light emission mode may or may not be terminated upon operation, as in Examples 2 and 3A to 3C, but when a red operation unit simulated image is displayed, the rainbow-colored light emission mode may not be terminated upon operation.
According to this embodiment, it is possible to prevent the rainbow light emission mode from ending due to an unintended operation. In addition, since the player's sense of anticipation is heightened when the red operation section simulated image is displayed, it is possible to further enhance the player's sense of excitement by not ending the rainbow light emission mode.

In this way, in this embodiment, the luminous decorative members can be made to emit light in rainbow colors, and when the attack button 3710 is operated during its valid operation period, the light emission mode of the luminous decorative members changes along with the display of a line such as "Munch, munch!" During the valid operation period of the attack button 3710, operation can cause the light emission mode of the luminous decorative members to change from rainbow colors to a specific light emission color other than rainbow colors (presentation examples 3A to 3C, and 4), or from a specific light emission color other than rainbow colors to rainbow colors (presentation example 2), and the rainbow-colored light emission of the luminous decorative members can continue for a predetermined period of time (for example, timing t40 to timing t47).

In this embodiment, by incorporating Presentation Examples 1 to 4, it is possible to create a variety of presentation patterns not just through simple operation presentations, but also through changes in the light-emitting state of the luminous decorative components that accompany the operation presentations, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game due to boredom. In particular, it is possible to draw attention not only to the content of the post-operation presentation, which was the purpose of the operation presentation, but also to whether the ongoing rainbow-colored light-emitting pattern will be interrupted, thereby broadening the range of presentations.

In presentation examples 3 and 4, a variation was shown in which the rainbow-colored light emission of the luminous decorative components may be terminated when the attack button 3710 is operated. However, it is also possible to terminate the rainbow-colored light emission of some of the luminous decorative components, while continuing the rainbow-colored light emission of other luminous components until a predetermined timing (timing t47).

The illuminating decorative part may be an illuminating decorative part provided on the game board 5, or an illuminating decorative part provided on the door frame 3. Furthermore, a specified illuminating part (multiple LEDs) may be installed within the attack button 3710 so that it can be seen by illuminating it, and the attack button 3710 may be used as an illuminating decorative part.

Furthermore, the illuminating decorative members may be at least an illuminating decorative portion provided on the game board 5 and a predetermined illuminating portion provided within the attack button 3710. In this case, in Presentation Example 1 and Presentation Example 2, when an operation is performed during the valid period, at least both the illuminating decorative portion provided on the game board 5 and the predetermined illuminating portion provided within the attack button 3710 are configured to be turned off (in Presentation Example 1) or illuminated in a rainbow color (in Presentation Example 2), and in Presentation Example 3 and Presentation Example 4, when an operation is performed during the valid period, the illumination decorative portion provided on the game board 5, which was illuminating in a rainbow color before the operation, is changed to a white illumination (at the time the operation is performed), and the predetermined illuminating portion provided within the attack button 3710 is also configured to be illuminated in a white color.
In this way, multiple illuminating decorative parts (or specified illuminating parts) are illuminated in a common manner in various patterns, resulting in a more unified lighting effect that is easier for players to recognize.

In the third and fourth exemplary renderings, background music may be prevented from being output during the period when the luminous decorative members are emitting rainbow-colored light.
On the other hand, in the second example of the presentation, background music may be output during the period when the luminous decorative members are emitting rainbow colors.

In presentation examples 3 and 4, if an operation is performed on the attack button 3710 while the luminous decorative component is emitting rainbow-colored light, a sound may be output to indicate that the operation has been accepted.
On the other hand, in performance example 2, if an operation is performed on the attack button 3710 during the period when the luminous decorative component is emitting rainbow-colored light, an acceptance sound may or may not be output to indicate that the operation has been accepted.

In presentation examples 3 and 4, if no operation is performed, it is preferable to prevent the display performance using display area 1600a (for example, displaying operation-responsive lines such as "Munch munch!", "Munch munch!" x 2, "It's delicious!", etc.) that would be performed if an operation were performed.
In this way, if no operation is performed, the dialogue corresponding to the operation is not displayed, so the player can gaze at the rainbow-colored light emission that occurred before the operation until the end (after a predetermined time has passed), giving the player a sense of exhilaration.
In addition, in presentation example 2, it is advisable to ensure that the rainbow-colored light emission mode begins when the valid operation period ends, even if no operation is performed.
This allows the player to be sure that he or she will win the jackpot regardless of whether or not an operation is performed.

During the period when the luminous decorative member is emitting rainbow colors, a specific image or video corresponding to the luminous decorative member emitting rainbow colors may be displayed in the display area 1600a. Furthermore, some or all of the specific image or video may be rainbow colors.

In the third and fourth exemplary embodiments, when a specific image or video is displayed, the display priority of the specific image or video may be set higher than the display priority of the decorative pattern. Furthermore, the specific image or video may be set to partially or entirely obscure the decorative pattern. According to such an embodiment, the visibility of the decorative pattern is improved when the display of the specific image or video is terminated.
On the other hand, in performance example 2, when displaying a specific image or video, it is preferable to set the display priority of the decorative pattern higher than the display priority of the specific image or video.

In the embodiment shown in performance example 2, when the luminous decorative member changes to a rainbow-colored luminous state, a predetermined performance sound corresponding to the luminous decorative member changing to a rainbow-colored luminous state may be output.
On the other hand, in the embodiments shown in performance examples 3 and 4, even if the luminous decorative member emits a rainbow-colored light, it is possible not to output a predetermined sound effect corresponding to the luminous decorative member emitting a rainbow-colored light.

In the embodiment shown in Example 2, when the illuminating decorative member changes to a rainbow-colored illumination, a predetermined vibration effect corresponding to the change to a rainbow-colored illumination may be executed. For example, the attack button 3710 may be vibrated.
On the other hand, in the embodiments shown in performance examples 3 and 4, even if the luminous decorative member emits rainbow-colored light, the specified vibration performance may not be executed.

The presentation when the "auto button mode" is set will be described.
When "Auto Button Mode" is set, in the embodiment shown in Presentation Example 2, even if no operation is performed, at the time when the valid operation period ends or at a predetermined time in the latter half of the valid operation period (for example, when two-thirds of the valid operation period has passed), it is assumed that an operation has been performed, and the luminous decorative member will emit rainbow-colored light as a presentation corresponding to the operation.
On the other hand, in the embodiments shown in Presentation Examples 3 and 4, the luminous decorative members illuminate in rainbow colors simultaneously with the start of the valid operation period, but are not considered to have been operated based on the "auto button mode" during the valid operation period. In other words, the luminous decorative members cease to illuminate in rainbow colors when the player directly operates the operation unit or at the end of the valid operation period.

An embodiment may be formed by combining and applying the various technical features of the gaming machine structure, the exemplary effects executed by the gaming machine, and the like in the embodiments. Also, an embodiment may be formed by combining and applying some of the technical features of the gaming machine structure, the exemplary effects executed by the gaming machine, and the like. Also, an embodiment may be formed by combining and applying the various technical features of each role configuration. Also, an embodiment may be formed by combining and applying these various technical features. The number of technical features to be combined is not limited to two, and any number of two or more may be used. Furthermore, a modified embodiment of another embodiment (or another embodiment) may be applied to a modified embodiment of another embodiment to form a different embodiment. Furthermore, one embodiment described in the specification may be modified multiple times. For example, two embodiments and two modified embodiments may be applied to one embodiment. Furthermore, multiple embodiments that could be conceived by a person skilled in the art in this way may be adopted in one gaming machine.
It should be noted that the "embodiment" referred to here may include not only those explicitly described as "embodiments" in this specification, but also various modified forms, examples, variations, technical matters, problem-solving means, etc. shown in this specification.

While preferred embodiments of the present invention have been described, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements and design changes are possible, as mentioned above. Furthermore, the above-described embodiments may be arbitrarily combined in whole or in part with the configurations shown in each embodiment, and modifications and additions may be made without departing from the spirit of the invention.

In the above-described embodiments, a pachinko machine was used as an example of a gaming machine. However, the gaming machines to which the above-described embodiments can be applied are not limited to pachinko machines, and gaming machines other than pachinko machines may also be used. For example, the above-described embodiments may be used in pachislot machines (so-called slot machine-type gaming machines), jan-ball gaming machines, gaming machines that combine pachinko and pachislot machines, etc. Furthermore, pachinko machines may be enclosed-type pachinko machines in which gaming balls are enclosed within the machine. In such enclosed-type pachinko machines, data (information) rather than actual balls (gaming balls) are awarded as gaming value to players upon the fulfillment of the conditions for awarding a profit. However, even in such cases, the same effects can be achieved in the embodiments. Furthermore, medal-less pachislot machines may be used, in which data (information) rather than actual medals are awarded to the player as gaming value when the conditions for awarding a profit are met; even in such a configuration, it is possible to achieve the same effects in each embodiment.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5' Game board 5a Game area 6 CR unit 190 Glass unit 530 Door frame left side unit 550 Door frame right side unit 570 Door frame top unit 931 Power supply board 1000 Front component 1001 Outer rail 1002 Inner rail 1100 Game panel 1100a Game panel opening 1110 Panel plate 1110a Obstruction nail through hole 1110b Panel plate back rough surface portion 1118 Panel plate opening 1140 Light guide plate 1142 Light guide plate rough surface portion 1146 Light guide plate illumination member 1147 Light guide plate substrate 1148 Light guide plate luminous member 1201 Obstruction nail 1201a Obstacle nail head 1201b Obstacle nail first body part 1201c Obstacle nail spiral shaped part 1201d Obstacle nail second body part 1201e Obstacle nail tip part 1230 Life nail 1231 Jump nail 1232 Left side guide nail 1310 Main control board 1402 Ordinary pattern display device 1403 First special pattern display device 1404 First special reserved number display device 1405 Second special pattern display device 1406 Second special reserved number display device 1407 Round display device 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 1600 Game board side performance display device 1600a Display area 2000 Front unit 2001 General winning port 2002 First starting port 2003 Gate part 2004 Second starting port 2004a Movable piece 2005: Large prize opening 2100: Starting opening unit 2400: Light-emitting board below panel board 2410: Rear decorative member of panel board 2410a: Rough surface portion of rear decorative member of panel board 2410c: Rotating shaft of rear decorative member of panel board 2420: Rear panel board 2425: Rear panel board light-emitting portion 2522: Warp exit 2530: Stage 3700: Mission button 3710: Attack button 3720: Left lever 3722: Left lever vibration source 3724: Left lever light-emitting source 3730: Right lever 3732: Right lever vibration source 3734: Right lever light-emitting source 3740: Defense button 3770: Tank accessory 7000: Right ear opening on top of door frame top unit 7010: Left ear opening on top of door frame top unit 7100: Right ear frame movable body 7110 Right ear frame movable body first surface 7112 Right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative part 7114 Right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative part 7116 Right ear frame movable body inner light-emitting part 7118 Right ear frame movable body outer light-emitting part 7120 Right ear frame movable body second surface 7200 Left ear frame movable body 7210 Left ear frame movable body first surface 7212 Left ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative part 7214 Left ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative part 7216 Left ear frame movable body inner light-emitting part 7218 Left ear frame movable body outer light-emitting part 7220 Left ear frame movable body second surface HKB Whitened part YGK Game ball

Claims (1)

a determining means for determining whether a player will generate an advantageous winning state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
a performance control means for controlling the performance;
A performance display means capable of displaying the performance,
As the effect, a plurality of reach effects using a plurality of effect displays can be executed,
As dynamic modes of the plurality of effect displays in the reach effect, there are a plurality of dynamic modes including a first dynamic mode and a second dynamic mode,
The plurality of effect displays in the first reach effect in which the plurality of effect displays are dynamically displayed in the first dynamic mode are dynamically displayed in the same dynamic mode,
In the second reach effect in which the dynamic display of the plurality of effect displays is performed in the second dynamic mode, the plurality of effect displays are dynamically displayed in the same dynamic mode,
The plurality of effect displays that are dynamically displayed in the first dynamic manner in the first reach effect have a larger movement range than the plurality of effect displays that are dynamically displayed in the second dynamic manner in the second reach effect,
The first reach performance has a higher probability of generating the winning state than the second reach performance,
The first reach effect has only one effect pattern, and the second reach effect has a plurality of effect patterns,
The plurality of effect patterns includes a specific effect pattern that suggests that a result that does not cause the winning state has been determined,
The specific presentation pattern is not prepared in the first reach presentation, but the specific presentation pattern is prepared in the second reach presentation, and the specific presentation pattern can be executed even when it is determined that the result will cause the winning state to occur,
In the first reach effect in which the plurality of effect displays are dynamically displayed in the first dynamic manner, a change icon corresponding to the ongoing pattern change is not displayed, and in the second reach effect in which the plurality of effect displays are dynamically displayed in the second dynamic manner, a change icon corresponding to the ongoing pattern change is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.